Tendernotice 12

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Oaerr fdlf5teu
,=) INDIA
ENGINEERS
UMITED FOR 6-24-0003 Rev. 5
MeV, eileatre Maoaran (A Gout o India Undertaking)
BASKET FILTER Page 8 of 9
4.4 Radiography/Non-destructive Testing

4.4.1 The extent of radiography shall be as specified in the data sheet. In no case, the
radiographic examination shall be less than that specified in the code. However, spot
radiography is the minimum requirement for all vessels.
4.4.2 When spot radiography is specified, the following requirements shall supplement the
requirements specified in ASME Section VIII Division I:
i) All T joints shall be radiographed.
ii) Minimum 5% of total weld length excluding T joints shall be radiographed.
4.4.3 All nozzles fabricated from plate irrespective of thickness of plate shall be 100%
radiographed.
4.4.4 All nozzle to shell welds (Root and Final run) shall be examined by magnetic particle/Dye
penetrant test. Nozzle to shell welds for thickness greater than 25mm shall be examined by
Ultrasonic Testing.
In case Vendor want to perform UT by TOFD/PAUT technique in lieu of RT, the same is
acceptable subject to the following:
a) Thickness of plate is greater than 38mm.
b) With Code Case 2235, Automated UT incorporating TOFD and pulse echo probes or
TOFD and Phased Array mounted on the same chassis that automatically traverses
along the joints to be inspected and displaying both results simultaneously on a single
screen may be considered in lieu of RT.
c) Calibration block of similar material/thickness shall be used. Calibration block shall

have suitable notches to simulate longitudinal as well as transverse cracks on outside
and inside surface. Setup should be capable of detecting defects on outside as well as
inside while scanning from one surface only.
d) The system that is proposed to be deployed in lieu of radiography shall be submitted

along with the track record prior to use for EIL review. The vendor shall demonstrate
successfully the capability of AUT machine and the defects evaluation in the same
screen during the site visit of EIL inspector/EIL representative. Based on which, the
approval of the parties and their AUT system shall be given.
e) Qualified NDT persons shall be deployed
4.5 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorised
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check-up and in no way
absolve the vendor of his responsibility
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per painting specification attached
elsewhere with the requisition..
5.2 Stainless steel surfaces, both inside and outside, shall be pickled and passivated.
5.3 Machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected with varnish or thick coat of grease.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved
Page 5291 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0003 Rev. 5
IA Govt ol India Undertaking)
6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION
6.1 All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment may
be dismantled into major components, suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed
to provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match
marked for site erection.
6.2 Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small items shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main
equipment, item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
6.3 Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together with
equipment.
6.4 Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make, year
of manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
7.1 Vendor shall submit recommended list of spare parts with recommended quantities and
itemised prices for first two years of operation of the equipment. Proper coding and
referencing of spare parts shall be done so that later identification with appropriate
equipment will be facilitated.
7.2 Recommended spares and their quantities should take into account related factors of
equipment reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of
parts and availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of
equipment.
7.3 Vendor shall also submit a list of commissioning spares with quantities. The
commissioning spares shall be sufficient for trouble free commissioning of the system at
site. Any commissioning spares required during commissioning, over and above, the
commissioning spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and
time implication to purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to
utilise spares from 2 years' operation spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor
within a reasonable time without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused
commissioning spares shall be handed over to owner.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 5292 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
Ogeir 'Meg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
laildneldialeadJdani) IA Goat Al India Undertaking)
CARTRIDGE FILTER Page 1 of 9
WItta- fZbTvE-4-
di 101 ch afe4-4T
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
CARTRIDGE FILTER
5 12.09.16 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC S PB/ RKT RN
4 22.02.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. SC PB AKN DM
3 24.08.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.

VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
2 23.05.95 REVISED & REISSUED AK SSC DKD AS
1 15.03.93 ISSUED AS STD. SPECIFICATION AK SSC DKS AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checked
Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Page 5293 of 8516

ENGINEERS
5igar felajeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
fiRT mgr., Govt of Undoltatvngt
Abbreviations:
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials
EIL Engineers India Ltd.
MSL Master Supplier List
NB Nominal Bore
NDT Non- Destructive Testing
PAUT Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing
QOC Quick Opening Closure
RT Radiographic Technique
TOED Time of Flight Diffraction
UT Ultrasonic Testing
Machinery Equipment Standards Committee:
Convenor : Mr. R.K. Trivedi
Members : Mr. P. Bhattacharjee

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anukul Mandal
Mr. Shishupal Choudhary
Mr. R.R. Srivastava
Mr. J.S. Duggal
Mr. K.C. Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
Page 5294 of 8516

k311-QJ ENGINEERS
51geji fafaeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
,mRNri=3,41rnl (A Govt Of India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 5
4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING 7
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING 8
6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION 8
7.0 SPARE PARTS 8
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 5295 of 8516

d5dt kit4 ENGINEERS
Oge_JI Of5teg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
MR?, eizawax3m.,0 (A Govt of India Undertalong)
1.0 GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the vendor shall design,
manufacture, test and supply the Cartridge Filter for separating solid contaminants from the
liquid stream or gas stream.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1 Latest editions including their addenda (as on date of issue of enquiry) of following codes &
standards shall be followed.
ASME SEC.VIII DIV. 1 : Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
ASME SEC. IX : Welding and Brazing Qualifications
ASME SEC. II & ASTM : Material Specifications
ASME B 16.5 : Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings
ASME B 16.11 : Forged Fittings Socket Welding & Threaded
ASME B 36.10 : Welded & Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
ASME B 16.47 : Large Diameter Steel Flanges
IS 1893 : Criteria for earthquake resistant design for structures
IS 875, part-3 Code of practice for design loads (other than
earthquake ) for building and structures-wind load
EIL SPEC. 6-12-0030 : Standard Spec. of pressure vessels for package items
EIL Std. 7-12-0001 : Vessel Tolerance
EIL Std. 7-12-0002 : Support for horizontal vessels
EIL Std. 7-12-0004 : Skirt Base Details
EIL Std. 7-12-0006 Angle Leg Support
EIL Std. 7-12-0007 Pipe leg support
EIL Std. 7-12-0008 : Bracket support for vertical vessels
EIL Std. 7-12-0010 : Manhole with davit
EIL Std. 7-12-0013 : Nozzle Reinforcement & Projection
EIL Std. 7-12-0015 : Standard Bolt-hole Orientation.
EIL Std. 7-12-0020 : Inlet Deflector Baffle
EIL Std. 7-12-0023 : Pipe Davit
EIL Std. 7-12-0024 : Lifting Lug top head type
EIL Std. 7-12-0025 : Fire-Proofing & Insulation Supports
EIL Std. 7-12-0026 : Earthing Lug
EIL Std. 7-12-0027 : Name plate
EIL Std. 7-12-0028 : Manufacturer name plate
EIL Std. 7-12-0029 : Bracket name plate
EIL Std. 7-12-0030 : Name plate for small equipment
EIL Std. 7-12-0033 : Hot Insulation Support for Horizontal vessel
Page 5296 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS
fat5teg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
2.2 Other International Standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
superior with prior approval of purchaser.
2.3 For provision not covered by the above codes and standards, applicable engineering practices
and norms shall govern.
2.4 National Law and statutory provisions together with any local bylaws for the state wherein
package is required to be installed shall also be complied with.
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The equipment shall be of the type as mentioned in the data sheets and shall meet the duty
requirements and performance parameters as mentioned therein.
3.2 Vendor shall submit back up documents for selection/sizing of cartridge elements duly
signed and stamped by element manufacturer during detail engineering. The type,
model, number of cartridges and filter vessel OD shall be selected based on allowable
pressure drop and cartridge element manufacturer's recommendation and all the above
required information shall be clearly reflected in back up document furnished by bidder.
33 The total internal cross sectional area of mounted cartridges shall not be less than inlet nozzle
area. Cross sectional area of inlet nozzle shall be calculated considering pipe wall thickness of
std. Schedule.
3.4 The filter cartridges shall be of single piece construction, with no joints.
3.5 The cartridges shall be of make as specified in Job Specification.
3.6 Vendor to ensure proper flow distribution to utilise the full cartridge area available for
filtration. Under no circumstances, the inlet fluid shall be allowed to directly impinge on the
cartridge elements.
3.7 Vessel diameter shall be minimum twice the diameter of inlet nozzle.
3.8 All internal nuts and bolts shall be of stainless steel (SS 304) irrespective of material of
construction of filter vessel.
3.9 Corrosion allowance of minimum 3mm shall be considered for all carbon steel parts unless
otherwise specified in job specification/data sheet.
3.10 Nozzles/davit/leg orientation shall be as per orientation drawing to be released to successful
vendor at post order stage.
3.11 Filter vessel support length shall be decided during detailed engineering based on actual layout
requirement.
3.12 Equipment shall be designed and built to ensure that all equipment along with the accessories
are mounted suitably for convenient and safe operation. Adequate access within the equipment
shall be provided for removal and fixing of cartridge element.
3.13 For filter cartridge maintenance & replacement, the inlet and outlet pipe connection shall not
be disturbed. A blind flange at shell top shall facilitate the removal, maintenance and/or
replacement of filter cartridges without disturbing the inlet and outlet pipe connections.
3.14 Vendor to note that there shall be minimum clearance of 8 mm between the cartridges and
10mm of annular space between shell and cartridge element.
3.15 Filter-Vessel
3.15.1 Filter Vessel shall conform to EIL Standard. Specification 6-12-0030.
3.15.2 Vessels of diameters 300 NB and below shall be made from seamless pipe only. For bigger
diameters, the shell shall be fabricated by rolling the plates and welding with specified
radiography and applicable welding procedures shall be followed. The rolling for making
shell shall be lengthwise.
Page 5297 of 8516

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
EtitegW INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
144127T 212¢42 ,01390.1) (A Govt of India Undertakov
3.15.3 In case the vendor's fabrication shop is not EIL approved for the thickness of vessel
involved, the vendor shall either (i) get the vessel fabricated by any other EIL approved
vendor or (ii) get the vessel rolled by one of the EIL approved vendor and get the fabrication
done at his own shop, subject to welding procedure qualification by EIL.
3.15.4 Dished ends shall be preferably of seamless construction, deep tori-spherical or 2:1
ellipsoidal type and shall be heat treated after forming as per Specification 6-12-0030.
3.15.5 Full vessel dia size shell flange shall be provided for removal of cartridges. The matching
cover shall be a forged blind flange. Suitable number of dowel pins shall be provided for
proper location of the cover. The standard stud bolt and nut arrangement shall be provided
for the cover unless specified otherwise. The cover and blind flanges weighing more than 15
kg shall be provided with lifting davit as per EEL Standard 7-12-0010.
3.15.6 Calculations for vessel supports shall be submitted for purchaser's approval. Or else, Vessel
supports shall be as per EIL Standards 7-12-0004, 7-12-0006, 7-12-0007, 7-12-0008
corresponding to the type of supports provided.
3.15.7 Filter vessel shall be provided with suitable lifting lugs (EIL Standard 7-12-0024) and
earthling lugs (EEL Standard 7-12-0026).
3.15.8
3.15.9 Drain and vent connections shall be provided with matching blind cover flanges along with
necessary gaskets, nuts and bolts.
3.15.10 The nozzles shall be provided with reinforcement pads when required by the applicable
code/standard. The calculations for reinforcement pads as per ASME shall be submitted for
purchaser's approval. Alternatively, EIL Standard 7-12-0013 shall be followed.
3.15.11 All nozzles shall be self-reinforced forged nozzle with integral flange in case vessel
thickness is more than 50 mm.
3.15.12 The vessel shall be designed for wind load and seismic load as IS 875 and IS 1893, unless
otherwise specified in job specification.
3.15.13 Nozzles shall be designed as per nozzle load furnished in Job Specification/ Datasheet.
3.15.14 For vessel in stainless steel construction, lower allowable stress values mentioned in ASME
code shall be considered.
3.16 Quick Opening Closure (QOC)
3.16.1 The filter shall be provided with Quick Opening Closure (QOC), if specified in job
specification/data sheet for easy removal & replacement of filter element during
maintenance. The diameter of QOC shall be same as that of filter vessel diameter unless
otherwise specified in job specification/data sheet. The make of QOC shall be as per sub-
vendor list attached elsewhere with the Requisition. QOC shall conform to ASME code
requirements and will carry ASME code stamp.
3.16.2 The Closure shall be equipped with locking device, which can be opened only when the
vessel is completely depressurized. Quick opening closure shall be of double yoke / Band
lock design only. Swing bolt type, threaded type and other designs are not acceptable as a
QOC. A davit/hinge arrangement shall be provided for the closure for convenient handling.
The closure shall have perfect sealing arrangement to prevent leakage.
3.17 Welding
Full penetration weld shall be employed for joining pressure parts. Where both sides are not
accessible for welding, root run by tungsten inert gas process shall be used to ensure full
penetration..
3.18 Post Weld Heat Treatment
Page 5298 of 8516

t_711 Iai11 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
**gem Wag INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
1.112r1 eels, (A Govt of India undertaking(
Vessels shall be post weld heat treated whenever it is required due to service requirement or
due to code requirements. Vessels shall be post weld heat treated as a complete unit and no
welding shall be permitted once the post weld heat treatment is performed.
3.19 Fire Proofing and Insulation
Insulation/fireproofing cleats of specified width shall be provided on the vessels, if indicated
in the job specification/data sheets. The pitch and other details of the cleats shall be as per
EIL standard 7-12-0025/7-12-0033.
4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at

vendor's/subvendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall
submit Quality Assurance (QA) procedures before commencement of fabrication. Approved
QA procedures shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2 Testing at vendor's works shall include but not limited to the following:
- Non destructive tests such as radiography, dye penetration, ultrasonic tests.
Hydrostatic test as per Code.
Any other tests as per data sheets/standards/codes.
4.3 Pressure Testing
All vessels shall be hydrostatically or pneumatically tested as per the code or if specified in
datasheet/ Job specification. Necessary precaution shall be taken to guard against the risk of
brittle fracture during hydrostatic test. Test water temperature shall not be lower than 17° C
plus minimum design metal temperature meeting the requirements of UG-99 of ASME
Sec.VIII Div. 1.
4.4.1 The extent of radiography shall be as specified in the data sheet. In no case, the radiographic
examination shall be less than that specified in the code. However, spot radiography is the
minimum requirement for all vessels.
requirements specified in ASME Section VIII Division I:
i) All T joints shall be radio-graphed.
ii) Minimum 5% of total weld length excluding T joints shall be radio-graphed.
4.4.3 All nozzles fabricated from plate irrespective of thickness of plate shall be 100% radio-
graphed.
Ultrasonic Testing.
a) Thickness of plate is greater than 38mm
Page 5299 of 8516

ie1 ENGINEERS
slaen ialWreg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
(Awn 212MR 41,71174.1) f A Govf of inOia Undertalong)


e) Qualified NDT persons shall be deployed.
absolve the vendor of his responsibility
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per painting specification attached
elsewhere with the requisition.
be dismantled into major components, suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed to
provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match
equipment.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
referencing of spare parts shall be done so that later identification with appropriate
equipment will be facilitated.
equipment reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts
and availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
7.3 Vendor shall also submit a list of commissioning spares with quantities. The commissioning
spares shall be sufficient for trouble free commissioning of the system at site. Any
commissioning spares required during commissioning, over and above, the commissioning
spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and time
implication to purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to utilise
Page 5300 of 8516

fri* ENGINEERS FOR
$‘fgar 2151-eg INDIA LIMITED 6-24-0004 Rev. 5
, ) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
spares from 2 years' operation spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a
reasonable time without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning
spares shall be handed over to owner.
Page 5301 of 8516

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS FILTER
INDIA LIMITED 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
Got of India UndertakoV SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 1 of 9
14)(s.c.tc 4.141ci / chlqA*144t

FAV
71T-4*-
FOR
FILTER SEPARATOR/COALESCER
42f?
5 15.12.16 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD.SPEC. DK PB/ RKT RN
4 09.03.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD.SPEC. SM PB AKN DM
3 24.08.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD.SPEC.

VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
2 10.04.98 REVISED & REISSUED ANS AKM NN AS
1 12.10.92 ISSUED AS STD. SPECIFICATION PKR SSC DKD RNS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5302 of 8516

ISIKRZIEq MENGINEERS
ogeir killgegliir INDIA LIMITED FILTER 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
IA GUN of India undenalung) SEPARATORICOALESCER Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM : American Society for Testing & Materials
EIL : Engineers India Ltd.
ID •. Inside Diameter
IS : Indian Standard
MSL : Master Supplier List
NB : Nominal Bore
OD : Outside Diameter
QA : Quality Assurance
QOC : Quick Opening Closure
Packaged Equipment Standards Committee:
Convenor : Mr. P. Bhattacharjee
Members: Mr. KJ Harinarayanan

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. R. R. Shrivastava
Mr. Kalachand Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. M. Azim (Projects)
Page 5303 of 8516

IsaziettikENGINEERS
FILTER
Otar fenateggr, INDIA UMITED 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
IMOitneerwaugig0 Urtdatalongo
GoN SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 8
Page 5304 of 8516

dSil fa NarsuPs FILTER
' INDIA Limn) 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
men uA
Gat of Was UsdnlIkripl SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the vendor shall design,
manufacture, test and supply Filter Separator (for separating liquid & solid contaminants from
gas stream)/ Coalescer (for separating liquid & solid contaminants from liquid stream).
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS
2.1 The Latest editions including their addenda (as on date of issue of enquiry) of following codes
& standards shall be followed.
ASME SEC.VIII DIV. 1 . Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
ASME SEC. IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
••
ASME SEC. II & ASTM Material Specifications

ASME B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B 16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket -Welding & Threaded
ASME B 36.10 Welded & Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
ASME B 16.47 : Large Diameter Steel Flanges
IS 1893 Criteria for earthquake resistant design for structures
IS 875, part-3 : Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake )
for building and structures-wind load
EIL Spec. 6-12-0030 Standard Spec. of pressure vessels for package items
••
EIL Spec. 6-81-0031 : Inspection & test plan for filter separator/coalescer
EIL Std. 7-12-0001 Vessel Tolerance
EIL Std. 7-12-0002 Support for horizontal vessels
EIL Std. 7-12-0004 : Skirt Base Details
EIL Std. 7-12-0006 : Angle Leg Support
EIL Std. 7-12-0007 Pipe leg support
EIL Std. 7-12-0008 : Bracket support for vertical vessels
EIL Std. 7-12-0010 : Manhole with davit
EIL Std. 7-12-0013 Nozzle Reinforcement & Projection
EIL Std. 7-12-0015 : Standard Bolt-hole Orientation.
EIL Std. 7-12-0020 : Inlet Deflector Baffle
EIL Std. 7-12-0023 : Pipe Davit
EIL Std. 7-12-0024 Lifting Lug top head type
EIL Std. 7-12-0025 Fire-Proofing & Insulation Supports
EIL Std. 7-12-0026 Earthing Lug
EIL Std. 7-12-0027 : Name plate
EIL Std. 7-12-0028 : Manufacturer name plate
EIL Std. 7-12-0029 : Bracket name plate
EIL Std. 7-12-0030 : Name plate for small equipment
Page 5305 of 8516

ofingtadAlkENGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
IgatiaatgliPHDIAGaiUMETED FILTER 6-24-0006 Rev. 5

Ina, axlmtilingi
Men eltworatma) SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 5 of 9
EIL Std. 7-12-0033 Hot Insulation Support for Horizontal vessel
2.2 Other International Standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
2.3 For provisions not covered by the above codes and standards, applicable engineering practices
and norms shall govern.
3.1 The equipment shall be of the type as mentioned in the data sheets and shall meet the duty
requirements and performance parameters as mentioned therein.
3.2 Vendor shall submit authenticated backup document for selection of the type, model, number
and size of filter cartridge/ coalescing elements/coalescing pack from their respective
Element/Coalescing pack manufacturer together with all supporting documents/catalogues/
etc. during detail engineering. Same shall be subject to reviews/ approval by EIL/ Owner.
This is mandatory requirement for drawing submission and drawings shall not be reviewed
without this document.
3.3 The cartridges/coalescing elements/coalescing packs shall be of make as specified in Job
Specification.
3.4 The material of construction of various parts of the equipment shall be as mentioned in the
data sheets. If material of construction of the cartridge elements/packs are not specified in data
sheet, the same shall be chosen by the vendor based on his past experience with similar
service to suit the duty requirements, unless otherwise specified in Datasheet.
3.5 Cartridge shall be of throwaway design unless specified otherwise.
3.6 The filter cartridge/coalescing elements/coalescing packs shall be able to withstand without
damage the differential pressure created by choked conditions. In no case, the bursting
pressure shall be less than as specified in Datasheet subject to minimum of 2.0 kg/cm 2.
3.7 Nozzles/davit/vessel support orientation shall be as per orientation drawing to be released to
successful vendor at post order stage.
3.8 Filter vessel support length shall be decided during detailed engineering based on actual
layout requirement.
3.9 Vessel diameter shall not be less than two times inlet nozzle diameter.
3.10 Corrosion allowance of 3mm shalt be considered for all carbon steel parts, unless otherwise
specified in the job specification/data sheets.
3.11 Filter-Vessel
3.11.1 The vessel shall conform to EIL Standard Specification 6-12-0030.
3.11.2 In case the vendor's fabrication shop is not EIL approved for the thickness of vessel involved,
the vendor shall either (i) get the vessel fabricated by any other vendor who is EH., approved
or (ii) get the vessel rolled by one of the EIL approved vendor and the fabrication done at his
own shop, subject to welding procedure qualification by EIL.
3.11.3 Suitable baffle plates/ riser pipe shall be provided in the vessels for proper fluid flow
distribution.
3.11.4 Dished ends shall preferably be of seamless construction, deep torispherical or 2:1 ellipsoidal
type and shall be heat treated after forming as per requirement of specs. 6-12-0030.
Page 5306 of 8516

offizeigek ENGINEERS
IgallaRe lir - INDIA UMMD FILTER 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
Mer, eviwirel,4010 IA Gat al In& Undedelmo SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 6 of 9
3.11.5 The nozzles shall be provided with reinforcement pads when required by the applicable
code/standard. The calculations for reinforcement pads as per ASME shall be submitted for
purchaser's approval. Alternatively, EIL standard 7-12-0013 shall be followed.
3.11.6 The vessel shall be designed for wind load and seismic load as per IS 875 and IS 1893 unless
and otherwise specified in job specification.
3.11.7 Nozzles shall be designed as per nozzle load furnished in Job Specification/ Datasheet.
3.11.8 For vessel in stainless steel construction, lower allowable stress values mentioned in ASME
code shall be considered.
3.11.9 Calculations for vessel supports shall be submitted for purchaser's approval. Or else, Vessel
supports shall be as per EIL Standards 7-12-0004, 7-12-0006, 7-12-0007, 7-12-0008
corresponding to the type of supports provided.
3.11.10 Filter vessel shall be provided with suitable lifting lugs (EIL Standard 7-12-0024) and
earthling lugs (EIL Standard 7-12-0026)
3.11.11 Wherever Drain and Vent connections are not being connected to plant piping (as per P&ID),
same shall be provided with matching blind cover flanges along with necessary gaskets, nuts
and bolts.
3.12 Quick Opening Closure (QOC)
3.12.1 The filter separator/ coalescer shall be provided with Quick Opening Closure (QOC), if
specified in job specification/data sheet for easy removal & replacement of filtering/
separating/ coalescing element during maintenance. The diameter of QOC shall be as per
annexure-1 to this specification. The make of QOC shall be as per sub-vendor list attached
elsewhere with the requisition. QOC shall conform to ASME code requirements and will
carry ASME code stamp.
3.12.2 The Closure shall be equipped with locking device, which can be opened only when the vessel
is completely depressurized. Quick opening closure shall be of double yoke / Band lock
design only. Swing bolt type, threaded type and other designs are not acceptable as a QOC. A
davit/hinge arrangement shall be provided for the closure for convenient handling. The closure
shall have perfect sealing arrangement to prevent leakage.
3.13 Welding
Full penetration weld shall be employed for joining pressure parts. Where both sides are not
accessible for welding, root run by tungsten inert gas process shall be used to ensure full
penetration..
3.14 Post Weld Heat Treatment
Vessels shall be post weld heat treated whenever it is required due to service requirement or
due to code requirements. Vessels shall be post weld heat treated as a complete unit and no
welding shall be permitted once the post weld heat treatment is performed.
3.15 Fire Proofing and Insulation
Insulation/fireproofing cleats of specified width shall be provided on the vessels, if indicated
in the Job specification/data sheets. The pitch and other details of the cleats shall be as per EIL
standard 7-12-0025/7-12-0033.

vendor's/subvendor's works by Purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall
submit Quality Assurance (QA) Procedures before commencement of fabrication. Approved
4.2 Testing at vendor's works shall include but not limited to the following :
Page 5307 of 8516

OffizegthENaNEERs
Igar fOlttgliFINDIA RANTED FILTER 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
eleallralIMION1 IA GM al Wig Undeolikre) SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 7 of 9
- Non destructive tests such as radiography, dye penetration tests.

Hydrostatic test as per Code.
Any other test as per data sheet/standards/codes.
4.3 Pressure Testing
All vessels shall be hydrostatically or pneumatically tested as per the code. Necessary
precaution shall be taken to guard against the risk of brittle fracture during hydrostatic test.
Test water temperature shall not be lower than 17 ° C plus minimum design metal temperature
meeting the requirements of UG-99 of ASME Sec.VIII Div.l.
4.4.1 The extent of radiography shall be as specified in the data sheet. In no case shall the
radiographic examination be less than that specified in the code. However, spot radiography is
the minimum requirement for all vessels.
requirements specified in ASME Section VIII Division 1:
i) All T joints shall be radiographed.
ii) Minimum 5% of total weld length excluding T joints shall be radiographed.
4.4.3 All nozzles fabricated from plate irrespective of thickness of plate shall be 100%
radiographed.
Ultrasonic Testing.
a) Thickness of plate is greater than 38mm.


e) Qualified NDT persons shall be deployed to perform UT.
4.5 Any or all the tests, at EIL/Purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by Purchaser/its authorised
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check up and in no way
absolve the vendor of his responsibility.
Page 5308 of 8516

lagize igigkENGINEERs
Igar Efittu NIVNJ1AumrrED FILTER 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
MUM VWWW 6,3MWO IAGOVI Ines UndIdllarop SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 8 of 9
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per painting specification attached elsewhere
with the requisition..
6.1 All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment may be
dismantled into major components, suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed to
provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match marked
for site erection.
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main equipment,
item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
equipment.
6.4 Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make, year of
manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
referencing of spare parts shall be done so that later identification with appropriate equipment
will be facilitated.
spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and time implication
to purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to utilise spares from 2
years' operation spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a reasonable time
without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning spares shall be handed
over to owner.
Page 5309 of 8516

larazjelimkENGINEERs
egaitifaftWkNDIA umrrED FILTER 6-24-0006 Rev. 5
Wen figeratNNIM IA Gat of Inds Gallialaw SEPARATOR/COALESCER Page 9 of 9
Annexure-1
Quick Opening Closure (QOC), if required, shall be provided in line with following
criteria:
a) Vessel with diameter up to 900mm:
Diameter of QOC shall be equal to vessel diameter.
b) Vessel with diameter more than 900mm:

Diameter of QOC shall be at least 50% of diameter of vessel subject to a
minimum QOC diameter of 900 mm. QOC diameter in no case shall exceed
1500mm. However; all removable internals shall be sized for easy removal
and installation through the provided QOC opening size
In case the diameter of QOC is less than the diameter of the vessel, following
configuration shall be followed:
X (Min. 500)
D1 (by vendor)
D2 (Min 40")
Ll (by vendor) L2 =f( D1, D2)
X- Minimum additional straight length to facilitate maintenance. To be decided by

vendor (Min. 500mm)
Page 5310 of 8516

STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
16diaaeg ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
16151-eg INDIA LIMITED FOR ELECTRONIC TYPE 6-27-0001 Rev. 4
1711W, IA Govt of witha Undertaiong)
WEIGH-BRIDGE (ROAD) Page 1 of 7
fuR
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR

ELECTRONIC TYPE WEIGH-BRIDGE
(ROAD)
i
4--
,(
)
4 24/03/17 REVISED AND REISSUED RKP PB
3 26/04/11 REVISED AND REISSUED SPC PB MK DM
2 23/08/05 REVISED AND REISSUED AKRC SMA PKR VJN
1 16.04.98 REVISED AND REISSUED AKRC VMS NN AS
0 19.12.88 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION GVC RMR VKS RCPC

Standards Standards
Rev. Committee Bureau
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Page 5311 of 8516

lalfaTlel ENGINEERS
fataleg INDIA LIMITED ELECTRONIC TYPE WEIGH- 6-27-0001 Rev. 4
212,1,1,111J02.1) IA Govt of Inda Undertakonm
BRIDGE (ROAD) Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
DCS : Distributed Control Station

Members
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan
Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. M. Azim
Page 5312 of 8516

15112-ae7 ENGINEERS
iRtalteg INDIA LIMITED ELECTRONIC TYPE WEIGH- 6-27-0001 Rev. 4
(A Gov, of India Undenak.9) BRIDGE (ROAD) Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 7
Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 5313 of 8516

OWE'? ENGINEERS
Ifgar k;151- INDIA LIMITED ELECTRONIC TYPE WEIGH- 6-27-0001 Rev. 4
14.2712320W AA MOM) (A Govt of India Underlakong)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Electronic Weigh-Bridge (Road), complete with all
accessories.
2.1 Latest editions of the following codes and standards shall govern:
IS — 9281 (Part I) : Specification for Electronic Weighing System-Terms and

Definition
IS — 9281 (Part II) : Specification for Electronic Weighing System-Method of

Measurements
IS — 9281 (Part III) : Specification for Electronic Weighing System-Requirements
IS — 9281 (Part 4) : Specification for Electronic Weighing System-Code of

Practice for Use and Installation
EIL Std.- 7-76-0103 : Instructions to Vendor for Site Performance Guarantee

Requirements for Package Units
2.2 Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
superior to the above, with prior approval of purchaser.
2.3 For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable good engineering
practices and norms shall govern.
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
3.1 The weighbridge shall be electronic type using load cells for weight measurement.
3.2 The weighbridge shall be pit type/pitless type as indicated in data sheet.
3.3 The weighbridge shall have overload capacity of atleast 25% of rated capacity.
3.4 The weighing accuracy shall be ± 0.025% of the weight over complete capacity range.
3.5 Load cell shall have IP-68 protection and shall be suitable for maximum ambient
temperature and classified area as specified in data sheet.
3.6 Weigh bridge platform top shall be anti skid type. MOC of top sheet shall be Stainless Steel
(SS). Minimum thickness of the SS sheet shall be 6mm.
3.7 Platform shall be supported on adequate numbers of longitudinal joists/channels to provide
strength to the weighbridge. The platform shall be rigid enough to resist deflection and
deformation in all directions. Rubber strip to be provided for dust sealing at entry and exit
points of Weigh Bridge.
3.8 Constrainers shall be provided in weighbridge for both directions to restrict any movement
due to movement of truck/lorry.
3.9 All material used for fabrication of weigh bridge structure shall be of tested quality IS: 2062
carbon steel.
3.10 Weight measurement shall be independent of the location of weight on the weighbridge
platform.
Page 5314 of 8516

15iffaZRY fdi
t. ) ENGINEERS
Ogar kVieg INDIA LIMITED ELECTRONIC TYPE WEIGH- 6-27-0001 Rev. 4
Govt indo Unciettaiung)
3.11 Design of Weigh Bridge shall incorporate suitable access for maintenance of load cells and
other components.
3.12 Weighing Console
3.12.1 The weighing console shall be microprocessor based suitable to operate under maximum
ambient dry bulb temperature and maximum ambient humidity conditions specified in the
job specification. Alpha-numeric keyboard shall be included for data entry to printout
comprehensive weight ticket.
3.12.2 The weighing console shall have built-in non-volatile memory to store the configurational
and application data.
3.12.3 The weighing console shall be provided with dedicated laser printer to print out weigh-
tickets and any other data required.
3.12.4 The weighing console shall have built-in calendar clock. It shall be possible to change the
time under password protection.
3.12.5 The weighing console electronics shall have suitable memory to retrieve data for the last
500 weighments against customer, product and vehicle information.
3.12.6 The weighing console shall operate at 240V, 50 Hz AC. The system shall operate
satisfactorily in case of voltage variation of ±10% and frequency variation of ±5%.
3.12.7 The weighing console shall be supplied complete with all hardware and software meeting
specified requirements.
3.12.8 Weighing Console Interface
a) Weighing console shall be connected with a personal computer to be supplied by
vendor. The computer shall be used to generate inventory report, loading report etc. in
the user defined formats.
b) Weighing console shall be provided with minimum 2 numbers RS-232C/422/485
synchronous/asynchronous serial communication ports and a published
communication protocol preferably MODBUS.
c) Weighing Controller Console shall be suitable for interface with Purchaser's DCS, if
specified in Job Specification/data sheet. All hardware/software for connecting
weighing controller console to purchaser's DCS through RS 422/485 serial link with
MODBUS RTU protocol along-with details such as address mapping lust etc. Shall be
supplied by vendor. Necessary converters and serial link cable shall also be supplied
by vendor. Distance of Serial cable between weighing console and purchaser's DCS
shall as specified in Job Specification/data sheet.
3.13 When weighbridge is located in classified hazardous area, suitable zenner barrier shall be
provided between control room and weighbridge. All electrical items and instruments in the
field shall be suitable for the specified area classification.
3.14 All installation materials, Electrical and instrumentation junction boxes, cables and cable
glands, fittings, termination of cables at field and control room shall be provided and these
shall be suitable for the electrical area classification of operating zone. The cable with
necessary conduits between load cells and weighing console shall be by vendor. All such
cables shall be shielded and armoured type.
3.15 Weighbridge shall be supplied with the test weights of total weight equivalent to 10% of the
rated capacity of the weighbridge in denominations of 10 nos. of 10 kg, 5 nos. of 20 kg and
balance of 50 kg.

vendor's/sub-vendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall
Page 5315 of 8516

larazkg( ENGINEERS
Ngteg INDIA LIMITED ELECTRONIC TYPE WEIGH- 6-27-0001 Rev. 4
(mte, REIR,IVE'a.3,RMA) IA Govt at Inc Undertakow
submit Quality Assurance (QA) plan before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA

plan shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2 Testing at Works
Vendor shall perform tests and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to the requirement of this specification. As a minimum following
tests shall be conducted.
i) Dimensional check up and visual inspection.
ii) Checking of all material test certificates.
iii) Review of test certificate of all bought out components.
iv) Load cell test for rated and overload weight.
4.3 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by Purchaser/its authorised
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check-up and shall in no
way absolve the vendor of his responsibility.
4.4 Performance Testing and Guarantees
4.4.1 A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the guaranteed
performance after commissioning in accordance with test procedure to be prepared as per
EIL Std. No. 7-76-0103.
The procedure of performance testing shall be submitted for Purchaser's review and shall be
mutually agreed between the purchaser and the vendor.
4.4.2 The following shall be guaranteed and demonstrated during the performance testing:
a) Full load test and over load verification test.
b) Accuracy test.
4.4.3 Necessary instruments for the performance testing shall be arranged by the vendor, and shall
be tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test.
4.5 Statutory Approval
Statutory approvals shall be obtained by vendor at their own cost.
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per painting specification document
attached elsewhere.
equipment.
Page 5316 of 8516

15110ae7 ENGINEERS
ELECTRONIC TYPE WEIGH-
Ogar ia5teg INDIA LIMITED 6-27-0001 Rev. 4
I MET. encore .3.7.3) IA Goo of India undertakno
6.5 Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged storage of supplied equipment/ material at site.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
7.1 Vendor shall submit list of spare parts with recommended quantities and itemised prices for
first two years of operation of the equipment. Proper coding and referencing of spare parts
shall be done so that later identification with appropriate equipment is facilitated.
years' operational spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a reasonable time
without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning spares shall be
handed over to owner.
Page 5317 of 8516

ENGINEERS VAPOUR ABSORPTION
i HIP" eRVIR7 0,93q0.1) IA Govt of hdia Undertaking) REFRIGERATION PACKAGE Page 1 of 9
a-rEcr am4*m Trol-9.4

*fm-q Trr-Aw

VAPOUR ABSORPTION
REFRIGERATION PACKAGE
3 27/12/16 REVISED AND REISSUED PB
2 27/04/11 REVISED AND REISSUED AA APSA MK DM
1 18/03/06 REVISED AND REISSUED AN RKR SMA VJN
0 28/12/94 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RKR MST DKD AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5318 of 8516

ISIffladathErvaNEERs
51gell NW INDIA LIMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
a.. ^/ IA Gov( of India undeniung) REFRIGERATION PACKAGE Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
AHRI Air-conditioning, Heating & Refrigeration Institute

IS .- Indian Standard
VAM -. Vapour Absorption Machine
VAR -. Vapour Absorption Refrigeration
Members: -. Mr. KJ Harinarayanan

.• Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
• Mr. P.P. Pandey
• Mr. Nalin Kumar
-. Mr. Shishupal Choudhary
.• Mr. R. R. Shrivastava
.• Mr. Kalachand Paikar
.• Mr. A. Nataraj an
Page 5319 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
IA Gov* of India Undeftakm)
REFRIGERATION PACKAGE Page 3 of 9
Contents
1.0 GENERAL 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 8
Page 5320 of 8516

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Oge.J1 Ea& INDIA LIMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
041.277 MOW' Oli7R1)
I^^ of Inds UndeflaknO1
1.0 GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements for design, engineering, manufacture,
inspection, testing, painting, supply and performance testing of Vapour Absorption
Refrigeration (VAR) package, complete with all accessories.
2.1 This standard specification is based on the following standard specifications and the
standards referred therein, which shall be deemed to be part of this standard specification:
AHRI-560 : Absorption Water Chilling and Water Heating

Packages.
JIS B 8622 : Absorption Refrigerating Machines.
EIL Std. Specs.-6-44-0002 : Standard Specification for Hot Insulation of Vessels,
Piping and Equipment.
EIL Std. Specs.-6-44-0003 : Standard Specification for Cold Insulation of Vessels,
Piping and Equipment.
Latest revisions of the above mentioned standards as on the date of enquiry shall be
applicable.
superior to those listed above, with prior approval of purchaser.
3.1 The VAR Package shall comprise of condenser, absorber, evaporator & generator/
concentrator sections in a single/ double shell design, hermetically sealed & skid mounted,
leak tested prior to shipment.
3.2 The machine shall be suitable for using steam/ hot water/ fuel gas as energy source for
single/ double effect depending on available heat content of energy source and Lithium
Bromide as absorbant.
3.3 The system is to be designed to operate continuously for 24 hours per day, 365 days per
year.
3.4 Refrigeration Plant shall comprise of Vapour absorption machine (VAM), Electrical &
Instrumentation Panels, Condensate Recovery Tanks & Chilled water Pumps, condensate
return pumps and dosing pumps (If required) etc. and shall be located inside the plant room.
However, steam control valves and pressure reducing & de-superheating station (PRDS) (as
required) may be located outside the building in case of space constraints inside the plant
room. The plant room shall be ventilated through exhaust fans. A suitable drain point shall
be provided in the plant room to drain the condensate in case of emergency.
3.5 VAR machine shall be suitable to run for minimum cooling water temperature of approx 10
deg C. If required, Vendor to include suitable arrangement for automatic controlling of the
cooling water inlet temperature.
3.6 The machine shall be complete with all related piping, solution and refrigerant pumps, heat
exchangers, purging system, pre-wired control panel with all instruments, safety inter locks
& controls, pneumatic tubing, cables, valves, temperature and pressure monitoring
equipment, measuring system for the important performance parameters such as steam
consumption, cooling water flow rate with in/ out temperatures, chilled water flow rate with
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
Page 5321 of 8516

1511=4-aEg ENGINEERS
4gem E1151eu INDIA LIMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
.11%71 12.45r7 4/1300.1) IA Govt ot India Undertakm)
in/ out temperatures, condensate temperature etc. and annunciation panel. The machine
shall be suitable for fully automatic operation down to 20% turndown capacity.
3.7 Tube materials shall be 90/10 Cu/Ni for evaporator /absorber/condenser, and for all other
exchangers it shall be SS grade, except for generator which shall be of Stainless Steel SS-
316L/S S-430Ti.
3.8 Vessels under partial vacuum shall be designed for full vacuum.
3.9 Companion flanges for all inlet & outlet connections shall be provided by vendor.
3.10 Machine shall have control system to prevent Crystallization / over-concentration of
Lithium Bromide solution and cavitation of refrigerant pump.
3.11 Isolating valves shall be provided on both sides of refrigerant and solution pumps so that
these pumps can be taken out for maintenance without loss of vacuum in the machine.
3.12 Hot fluid in-rush on start-up of machine shall be maximum 120% of full load requirement.
Vendor shall indicate the utilities consumption on Full load and at Part load operation.
3.13 The control valve to regulate the amount of heat energy to machine shall be fail close type.
3.14 Steam inlet control valve shall be provided with isolation valves, manual bypass valves, and
steam traps. A pressure reducing station with de-superheater, if required, and a pressure
safety relief valve shall also be provided.
3.15 Insulated steam supply piping to VAM with steam inlet shut -off valve, steam trap, pressure
reducing & de-superheating station (PRDS) (with Y/T-strainer with bypass arrangement,
block & bleed valves), condensate control valve (if required), relief valve, fittings, valves in
steam line, instruments, controls, interlocks, steam inlet control valve interlocked to chilled
water outlet temperature controller and transmitter, pressure & temperature gauges, drain
trap, safety valve etc shall be provided.
3.16 Insulated condensate return piping from VAM to the battery limit via insulated condensate
tank and insulated condensate pump (1 working & 1 standby) shall be provided. Condensate
tank shall be made of 6mm carbon steel plate (A36 or equivalent) with level indicator, low
& high level switch interlocked to the condensate pump motor, temperature and pressure
indicator, inspection cover, overflow & drain. Condensate piping network shall be provided
with pressure gauges, temperature gauges, flow meter (orifice plate & DP Transmitter type),
piping, fittings & valves. Condensate pump shall be designed to provide pressure at
vendor's battery limit. All necessary piping, fitting, control and instruments inside battery
limit shall be provided.
3.17 Supply & return cooling water piping network shall be with T-type suction strainer with
bypass arrangement, pressure gauges & temperature gauges at inlet and outlet, thermal
safety valve, flow indicator in supply line (orifice plate & DP Transmitter type), reducer,
pipes, fittings & valves. Gate/Globe shall be provided in supply and return cooling water
piping respectively.
3.18 Chilled water re-circulating pumps(1W+15) with insulated supply and return chilled water
piping including fittings and valves shall be as per piping material specification attached
elsewhere, Instruments like pressure gauges, temperature gauges, temperature transmitter at
inlet and outlet and flow indicator in supply line (orifice plate & DP Transmitter type) shall
be provided. Gate/Globe valve shall be provided in supply and return chilled water piping
respectively.
3.19 Chilled water Pump and Condensate pumps shall comply with EIL pump specification nos.
6-41-0003.
3.20 De-Mineralized (DM) water/Boiler feed water, as required for de-super heater, for VAM
system shall be met internally through condensate of steam. If required, 2 nos. (1 W + 1S)
Pumps same shall be provided.
Page 5322 of 8516

laffizEi7 ENGINEERS
ui fal5ileg INDIA UMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
4:93,1;1.1 IA Govt. of India Undertaking)
3.21 Insulation
The surfaces to be insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry before applying insulation.
Leak test shall be carried out before insulation. Insulation on machine shall be as per
Vendor's standard. However insulation on hot water/steam piping, condensate piping and
chilled water piping shall as per EIL standard specification nos. 6-44-0002 and 6-44-0003.
Insulation thickness shall be as per project specific insulation table. If there is no specific
insulation requirement, insulation table attached with this document shall be followed.
3.22 Controls & Instrumentation For Vapour Absorption Refrigeration system:
3.22.1 Vendor shall provide and list all Temperature, Pressure, Flow, control & measuring devices
for in/ out of Steam, Condensate, Cooling water and Chilled water, Instrument air during
detailed engineering along with make, model, function.
3.22.2 The Controls & Instrumentation shall be in accordance with instrumentation specifications
enclosed elsewhere.
3.22.3 The Vapour Absorption Refrigeration system shall be complete in all respects, capable of
unattended operation. Control system shall be provided for automatic capacity control,
protection of VAM including anti-crystallisation and antifreeze protection and
smooth/efficient performance of plant.
3.22.4 Vapour Absorption Refrigeration system shall monitor and control the following as a
minimum:
a) Chilled water in & out temperature
b) Chilled water in & out pressure
c) Cooling water in & out temperature
d) Cooling water in & out pressure
e) Steam in temp. and pressure
f) Condensate out temp. & pressure
g) Total hours of operation of machine
h) No. of machine's refrigerant pump shut-offs
i) No. of machine's shut-offs
j) Log of all critical parameters on hourly basis
k) PC connectivity.
I) Percentage of steam control valve opening with position transmitter.
3.22.5 Condensate shall be collected into a condensate receiver. Design capacity, temperature &
pressure of the receiver shall be based on steam demand during operation. Hold-up of the
receiver shall be minimum 15 minutes based on maximum capacity.
3.22.6 Condensate pumps shall be interlocked with the condensate levels (high/ low level
switches) in the tank. The pumps shall operate on AUTO mode i.e. on failure of one pump,
second pump shall start automatically.
3.22.7 Chilled water temperature shall be maintained constant at chiller outlet. The control system
shall be provided accordingly.
3.22.8 A valve with actuator/controls shall be provided in cooling water and chilled water circuit
to close automatically, whenever flow of cooling water and chilled water stops.
3.22.9 For all rotary equipment, noise level of the equipment along with its drive shall be restricted
to max. 85 dB (A) at 1 M distance from the equipment outline.
Page 5323 of 8516

lear fit& INDIA LIMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
lH MeIRE MI3c10.1) (A Govt of mei/. Undertal0.91

submit Quality Assurance (QA) plan before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA
plan shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2.1 Vendor shall perform tests and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to the requirement of this specification.
4.2.2 Vendor shall supply material mill test certificates for all components of condenser, absorber,
evaporator and generator/ concentrator.
4.2.3 Vendor shall supply test certificates for imported solution and refrigerant pumps as per
manufacturer's standards.
4.2.4 The following tests shall be witnessed by EIL/ Purchaser's inspector at works:
i) Ultrasonic test for plates etc

ii) Radiography test for welds. Spot radiography (10%) for longitudinal/ transverse butt
welding joints and 100% radiography for T joints.
iii) Soap bubble test with Nitrogen pressure of 0.8 kg/cm 2 (g).
iv) Pressure holdup test with Nitrogen pressure of 0.8 kg/cm 2 (g) for 24 hours.
v) Helium spray test: machine to be vaccumised upto 0.02 mm Hg by an external
vacuum pump. After vacuumising, machine is connected to a helium leak detector.
Helium is spread on all the joints. Leakages, if any, causes helium entering into the
machine, which will be shown on the screen of helium leak detector. If the cumulative
leak rate is more than 2 x 10 -5 standard CC/Sec. then the joints are to be marked and
repaired.
vi) Helium Shroud test: This is the final test for finding out leakages and is carried out
after the spray test. In the test, machine shall be fully covered by a polythene sheet
and helium is passed under the polythene cover and then the leak rate is observed in
the leak detector machine for 30 minutes. Allowable leak rate is upto 2 x I0 -5 standard
CC/Sec.
vii) After the machine passes the helium test, the machine is to be tested for hydraulic test
on the tube side at 1.3 times the design pressure.
viii) Performance test of machine at shop as per AHRI-560/JIS B 8622. Compensation for
cooling water temperatures/ fouling factor shall be done as per AHRINIS B 8622.
ix) Manufacturer's test certificate shall be furnished for all machine mounted pumps.

E1L Std. No. 7-76-0103.
4.4.2 The following shall be guaranteed and demonstrated during the performance testing:
Page 5324 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51g-ar iagjeg INDIA LIMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
lagreA eiavereonJoern) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
i) Outlet chilled water temperature/ pressure, Inlet chilled water temperature/ pressure
and chilled water flow rate at Vendor's battery limit.
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per Vendor's standard suitable for
corrosive industrial environment.
equipment.
6.5 Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged storage of supplied equipment/ material at
site.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
spares from 2 years' operational spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a
reasonable time without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning
spares shall be handed over to owner.
Page 5325 of 8516

ENGINEERS
tif54ez INDIA LIMITED VAPOUR ABSORPTION 6-36-0007 Rev. 3
Own IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Insulation Table
S.No. Application Insulation Material (Density) Thickness (mm)

1. Refrigeration Piping Polyurethane (35-40 kg/m3) 50
2. Chilled water pumps -Do- 40
3. Chilled water piping, -Do- 40
valves, specialties
4. Hot Water / Steam piping Resin Bonded Mineral Wool (140 kg/m3 75
/128 kg/m3)
Page 5326 of 8516

FOR
6-36-0014 Rev. 5
PROCESS REFRIGERATION
PACKAGE Page 1 of 13
D.)41
01 ch f4ff'T
FOR
PACKAGE
5 22/02/17 REVISED AND REISSUED DK MS PB RN
4 26/04/11 REVISED AND REISSUED SK APSA MK DM
3 23/03/06 REVISED AND REISSUED AN RKR SMA VJN
2 08/04/98 REDRAFTED AND ISSUED AJ MST NN AS
1 20/03/89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION KLS RB VKS RCPC

Standards Standards
Rev. Prepared Checked Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5327 of 8516

k.11 ENGINEERS FOR
ozgar Rareg- INDIA LIMITED 6-36-0014 Rev. 5
I7.11211 ekerare as Jeerer (A Goat of India Undertaking) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
Abbreviations:
ANSI : American National Standards Institute

ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
BS : British Standards
DX : Direct Expansion
EIL : Engineers India Limited
ISO : International Organisation for Standardization
MCC : Motor Control Centre
PDS : Process Data Sheet
P&ID : Piping & Instrumentation Diagram
PPM : Part Per Million
PSV : Pressure Safety Valve
PTR : Proven Track Record
SS : Stainless Steel
TEMA : Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers association
TR : Ton of Refrigeration
2oo3 : Two out of Three
Members: •. Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan

• Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
• Mr. P.P. Pandey
• Mr. Nalin Kumar
• Mr. Shishupal Choudhary
• Mr. R. R. Shrivastava
• Mr. Kalachand Paikar
• Mr. A. Natarajan
• Mr. M. Azim
Page 5328 of 8516

k_11 ENGINEERS FOR
,lecnre (A Gov! 01 India Undertaking) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 13
Page 5329 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
ligar 0151--eg
.39✓ .11
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Indo Unclettalong) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
6-36-0014 Rev. 5
1.0 GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements for design, engineering, manufacture,
inspection, testing, painting, supply and performance testing of Process Refrigeration
Package, complete with all accessories.
2.0 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
IS:2494 (Part-2) : V-belts - Endless V-belts for industrial purposes-Part 2

Fire resistant and antistatic V-belts - Specification
IS:3142 : Pulleys-V-Grooved Pulleys for Endless V-Belts Sections

Z, A, B, C, D and E and Endless Wedge Belts Sections
SPZ, SPA, SPB and SPC - Specification
ASME Section VIII Div.I : Boiler and Pressure vessel code- Pressure Vessels.
TEMA : Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
ANSI/ASME B-31.5 : Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components
BS ISO 1217 : Displacement Compressors-Acceptance Tests
BS ISO 5389 : Turbo compressors —Performance Test Code
EIL Std. Specs.-6-12-0030 : Standard Specification for Pressure Vessels for Package
Items
EIL Std. Specs.-6-44-0002 : Standard Specification for Hot Insulation of Vessels,

Piping and Equipment
EIL Std. Specs.-6-44-0003 : Standard Specification for Cold Insulation of Vessels,

Piping and Equipment
EIL Std. Specs.-6-81-0009 : Inspection and Test Plan for Heat Exchangers
EIL Std. Specs.-6-81-0011 : Inspection and Test Plan for Pressure Vessels/Columns-
Carbon Steel
EIL Std. Specs.-6-81-0145 : Inspection and Test Plan for Refrigeration Package
EIL Std.-7-76-0103 : Instruction to Vendor for Site Performance Guarantee

Requirements for Package Units
applicable.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL— All rights reserved
Page 5330 of 8516

lot ei ENGINEERS FOR
rr feffiftg
f:g-zMen
I efran(ana.mi)
INDIA LIMITED
6-36-0014 Rev. 5
(A Goo of Ind. undertaking)

3.1 Duty
All equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation for 8000 hours per year. System
shall be designed for 20 years life, unless otherwise specified.
3.2 Refrigerant
a) The refrigerant shall be as specified in the Job Specification.
b) Composition and battery limit conditions of refrigerant shall be as specified in Job

specification/ PDS. In case, refrigerant conditions required by vendor are different than
the ones specified in Job specification/ PDS, vendor shall provide necessary
equipments/ arrangement to mitigate the variation.
3.3 The refrigeration package shall comprise of following major items/components, unless
specified otherwise:
i. Refrigerant Compressor with lube oil system

ii. Oil Separator
iii. Refrigerant Condenser
iv. Economizer
v. Receiver
vi. Flash Vessel, if required
vii. Evaporator, if specified in Job specification/PDS/P&ID
viii. Compressor suction knock-out pot. This may not be required in case a surge drum is
provided on chiller itself.
ix. Oil Recovery Vessel
x. Refrigerant piping, cooling water piping, lube oil piping and chilled
water/brine/Process fluid piping (if applicable) etc.
xi. PSVs with valves, fittings and upstream/downstream prefabricated interconnecting
piping leading to common flare header.
xii. Structural steel work necessary for supporting equipment and piping.
xiii. First fill of oil and lubricants and replenishment of any loss of these during
commissioning.
xiv. Electricals, Instrumentation & Controls and safety interlocks.
3.4 Refrigerant Compressor
3.4.1 Refrigerant compressor shall be reciprocating/screw/centrifugal type as specified in the

project specification/datasheet.
Page 5331 of 8516

101falrjt ENGINEERS FOR
5'ezif 0151-eg INDIA LIMITED 6-36-0014 Rev. 5
ia41271 431.3q0.3) (A Gout of India Undertaking) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
3.4.2 Proven Track Record (PTR) of Compressor(s)
3.4.2.1 Compressor should be sourced from suppliers as per EIL approved supplier list only. Offered
compressor model should be of proven design. Prototypes or un-proven design shall not be
accepted.
3.4.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, depending upon the Refrigeration load/ Process requirement,
Vendor may select more than one working compressors to meet the process requirement. In
such cases, Vendor shall furnish the Proven Track Record (PTR) of supplying refrigeration
system having similar configuration (i.e. with more than one working compressors) during
detail engineering.
3.4.3 Reciprocating compressor shall be provided with valve un-loader arrangement for capacity
control and to operate at turndown capacity.
3.4.4 Screw compressor shall be equipped with automatic unloaded starting arrangement. It shall
have automatic sliding valve capacity control arrangement actuated through suction pressure
sensor.
3.4.5 Economiser port may be used to improve the system efficiency & performance in case of
screw compressors.
3.4.6 Centrifugal compressor shall be provided with variable inlet guide vanes at the suction of
compressor. Variable inlet guide vanes shall be operated by hydraulic oil pressure/separate
electric/pneumatic motor, for capacity regulation purposes. Automatic capacity regulation
feature is desired on compressor along with manually operated device.
3.4.7 Lubrication system for centrifugal compressor shall be force feed type by an oil pump
operating prior to start-up, continuously during operation and coast down. A gravity fed oil
reservoir shall be built-in on top of compressor to provide lubrication during coast down in
the event of power break down.
3.4.8 Compressor shall be complete with base frame, gauge panel, suction strainer, suction and
discharge valves with check valves, drive motor, drive arrangement, motor driven oil
pump/rotor shaft driven built-in oil pump.
3.4.9 Electric driver rating shall be minimum 110% of the maximum power required (including
transmission losses) for any of the specified operating conditions or 110% of the power
required at relief valve set pressure, whichever is higher.
3.5 Compressor Lube Oil System

3.5.1 Lubrication and oil cooling system shall include oil separator, oil reservoir/ sump (reservoir
may be within oil separator shell itself), oil heater, oil pumps, pump inlet screen, oil cooler,
duplex type oil filter, pressure regulator and distribution piping and control valves. Lube oil
pump shall have installed standby with automatic changeover in case of failure of operating
lube oil pump.
3.5.2 Oil cooler shall be refrigerant/water cooled unless otherwise specified. Direct refrigeration
injection type oil coolers are not acceptable.
3.5.3 Unless specified otherwise, Oil separator shall be capable of 10 ppm oil separation as
minimum. If required, suitable secondary filter or coalescer may be provided.
Page 5332 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
fge_11 INDIA LIMITED 6-36-0014 Rev. 5
INION riNnot an,nro) (A GoN of India undertaking) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
3.5.4 Duplex type oil filters are to be provided for uninterrupted service in the lube oil circuit. SS
material shall be used for complete oil piping after oil filter. Oil filter housing will also be of
stainless steel.
3.5.5 If required, vendor shall make provisions necessary to ensure the supply of lube oil in the
event either of failure of the lube oil supply or following an emergency trip of the
equipment. These provisions shall generally include overhead rundown tanks and may
include emergency pumps or any other special arrangements to permit deceleration/cooling
of the unit and shall be adequate for the coast down and the cool off time as applicable
3.6 Seal Oil System
3.6.1 Mechanical contact type oil seal shall be supplied. Seal oil system may be combined with
Lube oil system. Vendor to furnish details /P&ID of offered system
3.6.2 The vendor shall recommend whether seal barrier gas / seal buffer gas / separation seal gas is
required or not for the specified operating conditions & provide accordingly
3.7 Condenser
3.7.1 Unless otherwise specified, the tubes shall not be less than 12.5 mm diameter and shall be
adequately supported to prevent tube vibration.
3.7.2 Condensers shall have water boxes and covers so that each tube sheet can be exposed
without disturbing the piping connections.
3.7.3 Air cooled condensers, if specified, shall have seamless tube and shall be complete with all
accessories including fan with drive motor, refrigerant receiver, refrigerant headers, supports
etc. Electric driver rating for fan shall be minimum 110% of the maximum power required
(including transmission losses) at operating conditions.
3.7.4 Tube side of the exchangers shall be designed for highest of the following:
- Design pressure as per tube side fluid requirement

- 10/13th of Shell side fluid design pressure
3.8 Receiver
Receiver shall be sized to store entire refrigerant charge during pump down cycle when 80%
full.
3.9 Evaporator
3.9.1 Unless otherwise specified, tubes shall not be less than 12.5 mm diameter. Tubes shall be
adequately supported to prevent tube vibration.
3.9.2 In case of dry expansion evaporators with refrigerant on tube side, Evaporator shall be
designed to ensure gas superheating before leaving the evaporator. For flooded system this
may not be provided. However, a knock-out pot shall be provided on compressor suction for
compressor safety. Alternatively, a surge drum may be provided on top of the evaporator
itself to arrest liquid carryover to compressor suction.
3.9.3 Tube side of the exchangers shall be designed for highest of the following:
- Design pressure as per tube side requirement

- 10/13th of shell side design pressure
Page 5333 of 8516

araq., ENGINEERS FOR
Ji=g-ar 051-ag INDIA LIMITED 6-36-0014 Rev. 5
1.0121E415re M1,3:10.1) (A Goof of India Undertaking) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
3.10 Refrigeration Package Assembly
3.10.1 Refrigeration package shall preferably be mounted on a single skid comprising of

compressor, drive motor, condenser, liquid cooler, surge drum, receiver, suction knock out
pot (drum), economiser (as required), gauge panel, local control panel. However, a separate
compressor skid may also be acceptable depending on the skid size and vendor's standard
design.
Air-cooled condensers, if provided, shall be remotely mounted on steel frame work

adequately fixed/grouted.
3.10.2 Skid shall be designed so as to provide maintenance accessibility and operation ease of
valves and controls. Instruments shall be easily readable.
3.11 Piping
3.11.1 Refrigerant piping for process refrigeration application shall be of seamless type. Piping
shall be as per project Piping Material Specifications.
3.11.2 All piping network shall be leak tested with nitrogen at 1.1 times of design pressure using
soap water solution. The piping network shall be further pressure tested with nitrogen at 1.1
times of design pressure for minimum 24 hours. After establishing the capability to
withstand test pressure, the piping network shall be dried and vacuumised to 2.5 mm Hg
absolute. Vacuum shall be broken with dry nitrogen and the system shall be re-vacuumised
to 2.5 mm Hg absolute. This vacuum shall be held for 12 hours before charging the
refrigerant. After charging of refrigerant, leak detection shall be done.
3.11.3 All other piping shall be as per project Piping Material Specifications.
3.11.4 All piping inside the skids/ modules shall be prefabricated and preinstalled. Only the skid/
module interconnecting piping shall be supplied as loose item (Prefabricated spools)
3.12 Insulation
3.12.1 The surfaces to be insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned and allowed to dry.
Pressure/hydraulic test, if any, shall be carried out before insulation.
3.12.2 Insulation for personnel protection is applicable where exposed surface temperatures exceed
65° C in normal and short term operating conditions. Insulation is not desired for piping and
equipment for which heat loss is desired. In such case, other mechanical protection such as
expanded wire mesh etc. shall be provided to avoid injury to operating personnel.
3.12.3 Hot and cold insulation shall be provided as per EIL standard specification no. 6-44-0002
and 6-44-0003 respectively. Insulation thickness shall be as Insulation thickness table
attached with the requisition.
3.13 General Requirements
3.13.1 Automatic system for reclaim of carry over oil from evaporator back to oil re-claimer/oil
recovery vessel shall be provided.
3.13.2 Compressor shaft seals shall be dual mechanical type in case of Propylene or Propane being
used as refrigerant:
3.13.3 Vessels and exchangers shall be designed according to ASME section VIII Div.I and EIL
standard specification for Pressure Vessels for Package Items, specs. no. 6-12-0030.
Page 5334 of 8516

oiilok t
ENGINEERS FOR
Ogrx kigleg INDIA LIMITED
mrerT evasrz erg J) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
6-36-0014 Rev. 5
(A Gov( of India Undeftolong)
3.13.4 Refrigeration package shall be suitable for outdoor installation unless otherwise specified.
3.13.5 Refrigeration package shall be able to operate for process load variation of 0% to 100%.
Necessary arrangement (e.g. hot gas bypass etc) shall be provided by vendor for this.
3.13.6 Lifting hook/eye shall be provided for handling of equipment during maintenance.
3.13.7 Steel structural members of the skid shall conform to IS-2062/ASTM A 36.
3.13.8 V-belts, if used, shall be antistatic.
3.13.9 Coupling/belt guards shall be of non-sparking materials.
3.13.10 Initial charging of the refrigerant into the system shall be done through tanker. Make up
propane shall be supplied via refrigerant makeup line from OSBL. Provision to cater both
the above arrangements shall be provided by vendor. In case refrigerant needs to be
removed, it shall be stored in a plant supplied tanker. Nozzles along with valves and blind
flange for unloading the refrigerant from the system shall be provided by vendor.
3.13.11 Any hydrocarbon discharge to flare system should not be colder than -29 deg C at package
B/L. No heat tracing is envisaged for this purpose. B/L temperature shall be met by
providing additional pipe run length
3.13.12 All hydrocarbon flare shall be combined with the rupture disk prior to the PSV
3.13.13 Noise level shall not be more than 85dBA at one meter distance from source. If required,
Acoustic Enclosure complete with explosion proof electric motor driven ventilation fans etc.
shall be provided by the vendor to limit the noise level to 85 dBA at lm
3.13.14 All critical PLC input (for trip & shutdown) should have 2oo3 logic (except for vibration /
temperature monitoring system of machines)
3.14 Controls and Instruments
3.14.1 Vendor shall include all controls & instruments as required for safety & operational
requirements of the plant.
3.14.2 Automatic operation of all controls is required, but provision shall also be made for manual
operation.
3.14.3 Requirements for Refrigeration Package Compressor
3.14.3.1 Control Panel shall provide the following indications as a minimum:
i. Suction & Discharge Pressure indicator.

ii. Lubricating oil pressure indicator.
iii. Oil temperature indicator.
iv. Condenser cooling water in & out temperature (in case of water cooled condenser)
indicator
v. All safety interlocks. Protection against following situation as a minimum shall be
provided:-
a) High condenser pressure.

b) Low lube oil pressure/ Low Oil Gas differential pressure.
c) High bearing temperature for compressor.
d) Low evaporator pressure.
Page 5335 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
,AWN
015:teg INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov) of India Undertaking) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
6-36-0014 Rev. 5
e) Low condenser cooling water flow

f) Overload protection for all motors.
g) High lube oil temperature to cut off heater supply.
h) High Compressor discharge temperature.
i) Low Compressor discharge temperature.
j) Oil Filter differential pressure.
k) To ensure minimum position of slide valve at start-up (applicable for screw
compressors).
1) To ensure opening of inlet guide vanes after compressor motor has stabilized
(applicable for centrifugal compressors).
m) To ensure close guide vanes at start-up (applicable for centrifugal compressors).
n) Sensor Failure/Diagnostics
3.14.3.2 The Control panel shall contain atleast the following control elements for the automatic
operation of refrigeration package.
i. Compressor capacity control device.

ii. Start/stop push button station for the machine.
iii. Automatic temperature controller for chilled water/brine temperature (if applicable).
iv. Operation indicating pilot lamps.
v. Temperature indicator for cooling water inlet & outlet and chilled water/brine inlet &
outlet (if applicable).
vi. Vane opening indicator calibrated in percent (for centrifugal compressor package).
3.14.4 The entire control panel shall be factory wired. The panel will be functionally shop tested.
3.14.5 Vendor shall provide thermowells in refrigerant circuit so as to enable to take readings for
temperature of refrigerant at various places of the circuit during performance testing. Exact
locations shall however, be finalised by EILNendor mutually during drawing approval
stage.
3.14.6 Audio-Visual Annunciation shall be provided for all faults covering atleast the following:-
a) Low oil pressure/ Low Oil Gas differential pressure.

b) Low oil temperature.
c) Low chilled water/brine flow (if applicable).
d) Low condenser cooling water flow/No airflow on condenser.
e) Low evaporator pressure.
f) High condenser pressure.
g) Compressor motor tripped on fault
h) Crankcase heater.
i) Auto change-over of standby pumps, compressors etc
j) Any other as necessary.
3.15 Electricals
Electrical equipment and works shall be in accordance with Electrical Specifications & Data
Sheets.
3.16 Instrumentation
3.16.1 Instrumentation shall be as per Instrumentation Specifications & Data Sheets.
3.16.2 Instrument/plant air piping, as required, shall be included by vendor within his battery limit.
Page 5336 of 8516

■31 ENGINEERS FOR
$1=g-ar fagleg
weer vironvCRIJOLIO31
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Uncleftakingt PROCESS REFRIGERATION
6-36-0014 Rev. 5

4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stage wise expediting, inspection and testing at
submit Quality Assurance (QA) plans before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA
plans shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2.2 Refrigerant compressors shall be subjected to following tests at manufacturer's works:
- Hydrostatic Test/ Pneumatic Test (as applicable)

- Mechanical Run Test
- Noise Level Test
- Performance Test as per applicable codes (BS ISO-1217 for Positive Displacement
Compressors and BS ISO-5389 for Centrifugal Compressors). Performance test may be
done on Air at Manufacturer's works and gas correlation shall be provided
- Any other test as specified in Job Specification
4.2.3 Vessels and exchangers shall be subject to inspection and testing as per the following EIL
Standard Inspection and Test Plans:
Doc. No.-6-81-0145 Inspection and Test Plan for Refrigeration Package

Doc. No.-6-81-0009 Inspection and Test Plan for Heat Exchangers
Doc. No.-6-81-0011 Inspection and Test Plan for Pressure Vessels/Columns-
Carbon Steel
4.3 Inspection and Testing at Site
4.3.1 For Inspection and Testing at Site, vendor shall comply with following procedure:
i. Inspection of welding including welder's qualification as desired by inspection

engineer. Inspection of fabricated items.
ii. Pressure testing of pipe fit ups for refrigerant (Pneumatic test with dry nitrogen) and
water services (Hydro Test).
iii. Pressure testing, leak testing of complete piping network for chilled water/brine (if
applicable), condenser water & refrigerant services.
iv. Vacuumising & gas/oil charging for refrigeration system.
v. Checking of electrical circuits (Power and control) and checking functioning of
control of refrigerant system.
vi. Checking of assemblies for MCC and local control panel.
vii. Checking of calibration of controls and instrumentation.
NOTE:
Inspection & testing procedure mentioned above is for general guidance & information of
vendor and inspection by purchaser/consultant is strictly not limited these. Inspection
engineer of Purchaser/consultant will have full right to have detailed inspection of project as
desired by inspection engineer. Co-ordination of inspection agency of purchaser/consultant
with his factory/erection site will be sole responsibility of successful vendor after placement
of order for Refrigeration package(s) covered under these specifications.
Page 5337 of 8516

101 ei ENGINEERS FOR
Igar 0151eg
IaT~ie12,102 47.3.17,73)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking) PROCESS REFRIGERATION
6-36-0014 Rev. 5
4.5.1 A field performance test of refrigeration package shall be conducted by the vendor to
demonstrate the guaranteed performance after commissioning in accordance with test
procedure to be prepared as per EIL standard no. 7-76-0103 - Instruction to Vendor for Site
Performance Guarantee Requirements for Package Units.
4.5.2 Vendor shall demonstrate the following parameters as a minimum during performance
guarantee test at site:
i. In case, Process chiller is in bidder's scope:
a. Refrigerating capacity of the system measured by measuring flow rate of Process

fluid, Inlet Temperature/Pressure and Outlet Temperature/ Pressure of process
fluid at package battery limit.
b. Battery limit pressure drop for the process stream as per Process Data sheet.
ii. In case, Process chiller is not in bidder's scope:
a. Heat duty of the refrigeration package by measurement of refrigerant flow, Inlet

Temperature/Pressure and Outlet Temperature/ Pressure at package battery limit.
In case it is difficult to measure the refrigerant flow/ pressure/ temperature, as an
alternate In-direct method of calculation of refrigeration capacity may also be
used. This can be done by calculating Heat rejection on the cooling water side
minus electrical power consumed.

5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per painting specification attached with
the Requisition.
Page 5338 of 8516

101 r ENGINEERS FOR
sfgzir iairef rietoretot3tittoRt
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Inflo Untiettakingt PROCESS REFRIGERATION
6-36-0014 Rev. 5
equipment.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
years' operational spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a reasonable time
without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning spares shall be
handed over to owner.
Page 5339 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
$1g-41 kitReg INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
71V MI3R01747
1.2, A Govi at ■nda Undenek.g) (WATER SERVICE) Page 1 of 21
tirof Fml Hfrich fq1

-4
- F
(5-kri ()cm)

CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
(WATER SERVICE)
Qs/
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
4 18/10/13 M TK DB SC
SPECIFICATION
3 20/03/08
SPECIFICATION NK AKN VKM VC
2 04/09/02 NK KDS VJN GRR
SPECIFICATION
1 18/02/98 NK KDS SKG AS
SPECIFICATION
0 26/08/86 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION VK MR SNG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5340 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS
FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
tif54eg e,,ygnoz■
141,
—, :AMR", IA GoN of India Underl4kng, (WATER SERVICE) Page 2 of 21
Abbreviations:
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards
CG Centre of Gravity
EQC Equipment Qualification Criteria
GA General Arrangement
IC Internal Combustion
ISA Instruments Society of America
MAWP Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
MCF Minimum Continuous Flow
MCR Maximum Continuous Rating
MCS Maximum Continuous Speed
NPSH Net Positive Suction Head
NPSHA Net Positive Suction Head Available
NPSHR Net Positive Suction Head Required
OD Outside Diameter
P&ID Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
PTR Proven Track Record
VDR Vendor Data Requirements
Rotating Equipment Standards Committee

Convenor: Mr Dinesh Bhatia
Members: Mr Nalin Kumar

Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr.Rakesh Mishra
Mr JS Duggal
Mr KVK Naidu (Projects)
Page 5341 of 8516

atztelel. ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
iEtWetg INDIA UMITED 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
tA QM of haw UntlertaNog)
(WATER SERVICE) Page 3 of 21
CONTENTS
Page No.
SECTION 1 - GENERAL 4
1.1 SCOPE 4
1.2 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 4
1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 4
1.4 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION CRITERIA 5
SECTION 2 - BASIC DESIGN 6

2.1 GENERAL 6
2.2 PRESSURE CASING DESIGN 7
2.3 IMPELLER, SHAFTS AND SHAFT SLEEVES 8
2.4 WEAR RINGS 8
2.5 DYNAMICS 8
2.6 MECHANICAL SEAL/PACKING 8
2.7 BEARINGS 9
2.8 MATERIALS 9
2.9 PUMPS FOR FIRE WATER APPLICATION 9
SECTION 3 - ACCESSORIES 10
3.1 DRIVERS 10
3.2 GEARS 10
3.3 COUPLING 11
3.4 BASEPLATE 11
3.5 STRAINERS 12
SECTION 4 - INSPECTION, TESTING AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT 12

4.1 GENERAL 12
4.2 TESTS 12
SECTION 5 - VENDOR'S DATA 15

5.1 PROPOSALS 15
5.2 CONTRACT DATA 16
Page 5342 of 8516

01c4zrel ENGINEERS
Sig-ar 201-ez INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
e771156.7 IA Go,1 oi India Undertsionso
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
This specification together with the attendant Data Sheets and other specifications/attachments
to inquiry/order defines the minimum requirements for vertical and horizontal centrifugal
pumps and their accessories/auxiliaries for use in Water service. DM water, Water injection
pump, boiler feed water pumps and pumps for sea water services are not covered by this
specification.
ii. Vendor shall make all possible efforts to comply strictly with the requirements of this
specification and other specifications/attachments to inquiry/order.
In case deviations are considered essential by the vendor (after exhausting all possible efforts)
these shall be separately listed in the vendor's proposal under separate section titled as "List of
deviations/exceptions to the inquiry document". Deviation shall be listed separately for each
document with cross reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para etc. of the respective
document supported with proper reasons for the deviation for purchaser's consideration. Any
deviation not listed under the above section, even if reflected in any other portion of the
proposal shall not be considered applicable.
No deviation or exception shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.
iii Compliance with this specification shall not relieve the vendor of the responsibility of
furnishing equipment and accessories/auxiliaries of proper design, materials and workmanship
to meet the specified start up and operating conditions.
In case the vendor considers requirement of additional instrumentation, controls, safety

devices and any other accessories/auxiliaries essential for safe and satisfactory operation of the
equipment, he shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section along with
his proposal and include the same in his scope of supply.
1.2 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

In case of conflict between this specification and the attendant data sheets, job specifications
(if any) and other attached specification the following order of precedence shall govern:
1. Equipment Technical Data Sheets.
2. Job Specifications (if any)
3. P&ID's (if any)
4. This specification
5. Other specifications
6. Other referred codes and standards
1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.3.1 The Normal operating point is the point at which usual operation is expected.
1.3.2 The Rated operating point is the point at which the vendor certifies that performance is
within the tolerances stated in this specification.
1.3.3 Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) is the maximum continuous pressure for
which the manufacturer has designed the equipment (or any part to which the term is referred)
when the equipment is operating at the maximum allowable temperature.
1.3.4 Maximum allowable temperature is the maximum continuous temperature for which the
Page 5343 of 8516

ifaae? ENGINEERS
42,4jf EtReg INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
1.2e
-r ,vitve 1151.3.704 (Govt ■ntlia Undettatoom (WATER SERVICE) Page 5 of 21
manufacturer has designed the equipment (or any part to which the term is referred) when
handling the specified liquid at the specified pressure.
1.3.5 Minimum continuous stable flow is the lowest flow at which the pump can operate
continuously without exceeding the noise and vibration limits imposed by this specification.
1.3.6 The Pressure casing is the composite of all stationary pressure containing parts of the unit,
including all nozzles, glands and other attached parts.
1.3.7 The Vendor means the manufacturer of the pump.
1.3.8 Net positive suction head (NPSH) is the total absolute suction head, in meters of liquid,
determined at the suction nozzle and referred to the datum elevation minus the vapour pressure
of the liquid in meters absolute. The datum elevation is the shaft centerline for horizontal
pumps, the suction nozzle centerline for vertical in-line pumps and the top of foundation for
other vertical pumps.
1.3.9 Net positive suction head available (NPSHA) is the NPSH in meters of liquid, determined by
purchaser for pumping system with the liquid at the rated flow and normal pumping
temperature.
1 .3 . 1 0 Net positive suction head required (NPSHR) is the NPSH in meters, determined by vendor
testing with water. NPSHR is measured at the suction flange and corrected to the datum
elevation. NPSHR at rated and other capacities is equal to the NPSH that produces a 3 percent
head drop (first stage head in multistage pumps) due to cavitation within the pump.
1 .3 . 1 1 Minimum Submergence required is the liquid level with respect to pump suction flange
face, in millimeters, determined by the vendor when testing with water for vertical pumps.
This is the level required to prevent vortex formation/ingress of air/vapour into the pump
suction resulting in loss of flow/head.
1.4 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
1.4.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the Equipment Qualification Criteria (EQC) specified
vide para 1.4.2 to 1.4.3 of this specification shall be applied for acceptance of the offered
pump model.
1.4.2 a) The vendor shall be an established manufacturer of centrifugal pumps having adequate
design, engineering, manufacturing and testing facility for pumps and shall be the single point
responsibility vendor for the complete centrifugal pump package.
b) The vendor shall have designed, engineered, packaged, tested and supplied in the last TEN
(10) years from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) centrifugal pump package
with same type of driver having similar drive power.
As minimum, this package shall have completed ONE (1) year of satisfactory operation at site
as on bid due date.
1.4.3 a) The centrifugal pump model offered shall be from the existing pump model series and shall
be from the regular manufacturing range of the vendor. The mechanical as well as the
hydraulic performance (including NPSHR) for the complete range of operation of the offered
model shall have been established in the shop test. The offered pump model shall meet the
minimum service and manufacturing experience requirements specified in clause 1.5.3 b)
below.
Page 5344 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
1g-a Wes*v.INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
NOW (A C., of 00.0 Undertak.ng, (WATER SERVICE) Page 6 of 21
b) Pumps shall be identical in terms of Hydraulics and similar in terms of Power rating, Inlet
flow, Differential Head, Operating Pressure & Temperature, Speed, Number & Type of
Impellers, Mechanical Design, Materials, Bearing Span(applicable for between bearing
pumps), Column Length (applicable for vertically suspended pumps) etc. as compared to at
least ONE(l) unit of the proposed model designed, engineered, manufactured, tested and
supplied from the proposed manufacturing plant in the last TEN(10) years and the reference
unit shall have completed ONE(1) year of satisfactory operation at site as on bid due date.
In case all the above parameters are not available from single past reference, more than one
reference can be cited/considered to satisfy the above qualification requirement.
1.4.5 PROVEN TRACK RECORD (PTR)
Pump Vendor shall complete the Experience Record Proforma's enclosed with the inquiry
document to amply prove that the offered equipment meet the EQC for technical acceptance.
Vendor may furnish additional information to justify that the EQC is being met. In addition,
manufacturer's catalogue and general reference list for Centrifugal Pumps shall also be
furnished alongwith the proposal.
SECTION 2 - BASIC DESIGN
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The vendor shall assume the Unit Responsibility for equipment and auxiliary system(s)
included in his scope.
2.1.2 Pumps with constant speed drivers shall be capable of atleast 5 percent head increase at rated
condition and pump rated speed by replacing with a new impeller or impellers. Offered
impeller shall in no case be less than the minimum diameter impeller.
2.1.3 Horizontal pumps of the close-coupled, the two stage overhung, or the single stage double
suction overhung, type shall not be furnished.
2.1.4 Pumps where difference between NPSHA and NPSHR from quoted minimum flow to rated
flow is less than 1 meter (for pumps with driver rating <55KW) & 0.6 meter(for pumps with
driver rating >55KW) are not acceptable. The said NPSHR value shall correspond to the
maximum value of NPSHR from rated flow down to the recommended minimum stable flow
specified by the vendor.
2.1.5 Pumps that have stable head/capacity curves (continuous head rise to shut-off) are preferred
for all applications and are required when parallel operation is specified.
2.1.6 The pumps for parallel operation shall have characteristics suitable for capacity sharing. The
shut off head in such cases shall not be less than 110 percent of the rated head and no more
than 120 percent of the rated head in horizontal pumps and 140 percent in the case of vertical
turbine pumps.
2.1.7 The best efficiency point for the furnished impeller is preferred between the rated point and
the normal point. However in no case the rated point shall be beyond 110 percent of the best
efficiency point of the rated impeller.
2.1.8 The maximum permissible sound pressure level of the pump driver train shall not exceed 88
dBA measured at 1 meter from pump surface for the recommended range of operation.
Page 5345 of 8516

q.JENGINEERS
42e.ff telPeg INDIA UMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
I MN, AVM?? entautnvo
IA Govt of ■nclo UnderUk.9) (WATER SERVICE) Page 7 of 21
2.1.9 For vertical pumps, not provided with non-reverse ratchet, vendor shall describe the
precaution taken, to prevent damage due to reverse rotation.
2.1.10 Pump-Driver train shall be designed to be suitable for outdoor installation without a roof.
2.1.11 Lifting lugs/eye hooks shall be provided for ease of lifting of complete pump as well as the
heavy maintenance components of the pump (e.g. Top half casing cover of axially split pump).
2.1.12 The guaranteed parameters shall be demonstrated during shop test without any coating on
impellers or casings.
2.1.13 Pumps with variable speed drivers shall be capable of operating continuously upto 105 percent
of rated speed as well as operating briefly upto driver trip speed.
2.1.14 Casing vents alongwith vent valves, as per manufacturer standards, for all pumps shall be
provided. For all horizontal pumps, casing drain with isolation valve and flanged piping
terminated at the skid edge shall be provided. Baseplate shall also be provided with flanged
drain connection.
2.1.15 Horizontal between bearing pumps, pumps with rated flow above 500m3/h(horizontal) and
pumps with rated flow above 100m3/h(vertical) shall be considered as Large Capacity in
LCWS.
2.2 PRESSURE CASING DESIGN
2.2.1 Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) for all pressure containing parts e.g. casing,
bowl, discharge head, discharge pipe, column pipe, stuffing box etc. shall in no case be less
than the maximum discharge pressure produced by the pump at shut-off (including tolerances),
at the maximum suction pressure, for the maximum impeller diameter and the maximum
continuous speed.
MAWP shall also not be less than the specified downstream design pressure.
These pressure containing parts shall be suitable for hydrostatic test pressure of 11/2 times the
MAWP.
Note: MAWP shall not be less than 10 kg/cm2G for pumps with 125# flanges (i.e. with Cast Iron
casing) & 16 kg/cm2G for pumps with 150# flanges (i.e. with Carbon Steel or Alloy Steel casing).
2.2.2 Pumps shall have suction and discharge flanges designed for same rating. Unless otherwise
stated, flanges shall be machined and drilled conforming to ANSI B16.5 standard.
2.2.3 Pumps shall be provided with Flanged nozzles.
2.2.4 Unless otherwise specified, all pumps shall be supplied with companion flanges with rating
conforming to applicable specification of ANSI, drilled and faced in accordance with pump
suction and discharge flanges alongwith gaskets and fasteners.
For pumps with casing material as cast iron (CI), the companion flanges shall be of slip-on
(SO) type [for flange sizes 50 mm (2 inches) & above] or socket welded (SW) type [for
flanges of size 15 mm (0.5 inches) to 40 mm (1.5 inches)] with flat face (FF) & of carbon steel
material. The gasket shall be of full face type.
Page 5346 of 8516

l ,2J ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
sigar faOrdu
441-
,a 7,4:1,13
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govf of IntAA Undertaiong,
(WATER SERVICE)
6-41-0003 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 21
For pumps with casing material other than cast iron, the companion flanges shall be of weld
neck (WN) type with raised face (RF) & of the material compatible with piping material.
2.3 IMPELLER, SHAFTS AND SHAFT SLEEVES
2.3.1 Impellers shall be cast as one piece.
2.3.2 Shaft shall be provided with sleeves under the packing/seal and shall be locked to the shaft.
The material of sleeve shall be 12 percent chrome steel (hardened).Where the size of pump
makes the use of shaft sleeve impracticable, the shaft shall be constructed of 12 percent
chrome steel (hardened). For vertical pumps, shaft material shall be 12 percent chrome steel.
2.4 WEAR RINGS
Unless otherwise specified, renewable wear ring shall be furnished at least on the casings.
Mating wear surfaces of hardenable materials shall have a difference in Brinell hardness
number of at least 50. Integral impeller wear surfaces shall have higher hardness than that of
the casing wear rings, when only casing wear rings are provided.
2.5 DYNAMICS
The following vibration limits shall be applied at rated speed and at flow of ±10 percent of
rated flow.
2.5.1 Horizontal pumps
Unfiltered vibration velocity for horizontal pumps upto 3000 rpm with antifriction bearing or
sleeve bearings when measured at the bearing housing in horizontal or vertical direction shall
not exceed 4.0 mm/sec (0.16 inch/sec).
Bearing housings shall be suitable to permit measurement of vibration.
2.5.2 Vertical Pumps
Unfiltered vibration velocity for vertical pumps with antifriction and or sleeve bearings when
measured at the top bearing housing of pump or top bearing housing of motor or mounting
flange for measuring points upto 3 meters above the mounting base shall not exceed the
following limit:
Pumps greater than 1500 rpm = 7.0 mm/sec (0.28 inch/sec)
Pumps upto & including 1500 rpm = 5.1 mm/sec (0.20 inch/sec)
2.5.3 The vibration limits specified vide clause. 2.5.1 and 2.5.2 above shall be applied for pumps
only. The vibration limits for the drivers shall be as per their respective applicable standards.
Where respective applicable standards do not specify such limits for the associated drivers, the
driver manufacturer's recommendation shall be applied for acceptance of the driver. Such
acceptable limits shall be indicated by the vendor in their proposal.
2.6 MECHANICAL SEAL/PACKING
2.6.1 Unless otherwise specified, the pump shall be supplied with packings. Stuffing box shall have
minimum five packing rings plus lantern ring. Packing ring size shall be 3/8" or larger.
Page 5347 of 8516

15if5i-zreq ENGINEERS
$'2e..1TEtWe.0 INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
I NWT fA JRNZO IA Govt o India UM/N.1*mm (WATER SERVICE) Page 9 of 21
2.6.2 The mechanical seal shall be of a make, duly approved by the purchaser.
2.6.3 Seal manufacturers specific recommendation shall be obtained and submitted alongwith the
proposal.
2.6.4 All auxiliaries for flushing of mechanical seal shall be in vendor's scope of supply.
2.7 BEARINGS
2.7.1 Antifriction bearings shall be of standard type and shall meet minimum L-10 rating life of
either 25000 hours with continuous operation at rated conditions or 16000 hours at maximum
axial and radial loads and rated speed.
2.7.2 The rise in bearing grease/oil temperature with continuous running of the pump shall be within
the allowable limits which shall not exceed 30°C for grease and 39°C for oil lubricated
bearings above ambient. Cooling arrangements shall be provided if required. Bearings shall be
equipped with constant level oilers, vent breather & drain point for oil lubricated
arrangements.
2.7.3 Unless otherwise specified, for vertical pumps with open shaft, the intermediate bearings /
bushings shall be suitable for operation without any lubrication during start / shut-down or
during normal operation (i.e. bearing bush material shall be of self lubricating type). Details of
line shaft bearings shall be furnished with the proposal.
2.7.4 Unless otherwise specified, for vertical pumps, thrust from the pump shall not be transferred to
the electric motor.
2.8 MATERIALS
2.8.1 The material of construction of parts shall be as specified. Vendor shall furnish the equivalent
material as per ASTM.
For impellers in cast iron or bronze construction, the tip speed shall be limited to 40
meters/sec. Unless otherwise specified, for tip speeds exceeding 40 meters/sec, the material of
impellers shall be stainless steel.
As an alternate, vendor may suggest suitable material proven for higher impeller tip speeds.
2.8.2 Unless otherwise specified in the data sheet, material test certificates (chemical and
mechanical properties) shall be supplied for impeller, shaft, shaft sleeve, wearing rings and
casings.
2.8.3 The repair of pressure castings by peening, plugging, impregnating or by the use of plastic or
cement compound is prohibited. The Inspector's prior approval shall be obtained for the repair
of castings. When authorised, repair shall be carried out in accordance with applicable ASTM
Specification. Weld repair of pressure containing parts of Cast Iron construction is not
permitted.
2.9 PUMPS FOR FIRE WATER APPLICATION
Pumps for Fire Water Application shall also meet the following additional requirements:
2.9.1 Pumps shall meet the requirements of TAC (Tariff Advisory Committee), NFPA (National
Fire Protection Association) etc. as specified in the data sheet. The vendor shall also be
Page 5348 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$igeAr 0151-dg INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
I 7.111$7 ,7,57517 71,17.17 IA (.,0,4 Enda undertakmg)
responsible for obtaining the necessary approvals as specified in inquiry.
2.9.2 Pumps shall be direct-coupled except in the case of engine-driven vertical turbine pumps
wherein gear drives shall be used. Belt driven pumps are not acceptable.
2.9.3 Parts of pumps like impeller, shaft sleeve, wearing ring etc. shall be of non-corrosive metal
preferably brass or bronze unless the quality of water dictates the use of special metals/alloys
which shall be insisted upon.
2.9.4 Pumps shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated capacity at a head not
less than 65 percent of the rated head.
2.9.5 Difference between NPSHA and NPSHR at 150 percent of the duty point shall not be less than
0.6 meters.
2.9.6 The electrical motor shall be of continuous rating type and the rating shall be 110 percent of
the power at rated point or equal to maximum BKW rated impeller whichever is higher.
2.9.7 For Diesel engine drivers, the net continuous site power available after considering the
deration due to site condition and power losses, due to other parasitic loads and engine driven
auxiliaries shall be higher of the following two values:
(a) 20 percent in excess of the maximum BKW required to drive the pump at rated condition.
(b) Maximum BKW rated impeller as indicated by the manufacturer in the pump data sheets.
SECTION 3 - ACCESSORIES
3.1 DRIVERS
3.1.1 Electric motor drivers shall have a maximum continuous rating (MCR) (i.e. service factor
equal to 1) not lower than the following unless higher rating is dictated by the Note 1.
Motor Name plate Rating Motor MCR (% of Pump Rated BKW)
Less than 22 kW To suit maximum BKW indicated on pump data
sheet or 125% of rated pump BKW, whichever is
higher.
22 kW - 55 kW 115% of rated pump BKW.
Higher than 55 kW 110% of rated pump BKW.
Note :
1. The motor namelpate rating for pumps under parallel operation shall not be less than the
max. BKW indicated on pump data sheet (the power at End of the curve for the rated
impeller) or shall have the specified margin as per this clause whichever is greater. The
pump motors shall also be suitable for start-up under open discharge valve condition.
3.1.2 Steam Turbine rating shall be at-least 110% of rated pump BKW (unless higher rating is
dictated by Note 1 above) at the rated speed with coincident minimum inlet & maximum
exhaust steam conditions. As a minimum, steam turbine rating shall be equal to motor rating
(IS).
3.2 GEARS
The type of gears shall be as specified in the inquiry document.

Unless otherwise specified, gear box shall be selected with a minimum of AGMA service
factor of 1.75 over the driver rating.
Page 5349 of 8516

ENGINEERS
ttMeg INDIA litv1ITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
IOW, FIVAAP +7,1,100.49 rn
Govt. of ,ndo UndertakIng)
Wherever right angle gear box are required the same shall be supplied non-reversible ratchet
and shall allow for vertical adjustment of the impeller. Further the gearbox shall be suitable
for absorbing the maximum thrust under any case of operation.
3.3 COUPLING
3.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, connection between pump and driver shall be made by a flexible
metallic coupling.
A spacer (127 mm minimum normal length), shall be used to permit the removal of coupling,
bearings, seal and/or rotor as applicable without disturbing the driver, the suction and
discharge piping, or the casing top cover, for all horizontal pumps.
It shall be the responsibility of the pump vendor to obtain purchaser's approval for the selected
coupling, its make and rating.
However, unless otherwise specified, the coupling shall be rated using a service factor of not
less than 1.25 for flexible element coupling.
3.3.2 Whether or not pump vendor is required to supply the driver, he shall still deliver the fully
machined coupling assembly alongwith the pump. The driver shaft dimensions and tolerances
shall be furnished by the Purchaser to the pump vendor.
3.3.3 Removable coupling guard shall be provided which shall be fabricated from non-sparking
material, and shall be open at the bottom to permit manual shaft rotation. The guard shall be
sufficiently rigid to withstand deflections as a result of bodily contact of nominally 100 kgs.
3.4 BASEPLATE
3.4.1 Baseplates for Horizontal Pumps
3.4.1.1 Baseplate shall extend under the pump, gear box and motor/turbine driver and shall be fully
machined for mounting the above equipment. Baseplate shall be steel fabricated and shall have
sufficient rigidity to avoid vibration and distortion. Baseplate shall be so designed as to
facilitate proper grouting (Vent holes where required shall be provided). Baseplate shall be
cleaned (sand blasted) inside and outside and coated with suitable anticorrosion paint.
3.4.1.2 The baseplate shall be provided with lifting lugs for at-least a four point lift. Lifting the
baseplate complete with all equipment mounted shall not permanently distort or otherwise
damage the baseplate or machinery mounted on it.
3.4.1.3 For driver trains over 75 kW, alignment positioning screws shall be provided for each drive
element to facilitate longitudinal and transverse horizontal adjustments. The lugs holding these
positioning screws shall be attached to the baseplate so that they do not interfere with the
installation or removal of the drive element.
3.4.1.4 Vertical leveling screws, spaced for stability shall be provided on the outside perimeter of the
baseplate. These shall be numerous enough to carry the weight of the baseplate, pump, gear-
box (if any) and driver without excessive deflection.
Page 5350 of 8516

tn~ ENGINEERS
ligai fag& INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
,0151V c151 P.1,117,
3.4.2 Baseplate / Mounting Plate for Vertical Pumps
3.4.2.1 Vertical pumps shall have the manufacturer's standard mounting arrangement.
3.4.2.2 Alignment positioning screws shall be provided for 18.5 kW and above and as per
manufacturer's standard practice for lower ratings.
3.4.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, mounting plate for vertical pumps shall be made from
IS:2062/IS:2002 plate material with a thickness of 48 mm. Mounting plate shall be supplied
with gaskets & fasteners.
3.4.2.4 Alignment positioning screws shall be provided for all motors.
3.5 STRAINERS
Unless otherwise specified, all vertical pumps shall be provided with suction strainers of SS-
316 material.
SECTION 4 - INSPECTION, TESTING AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, all pumps shall be inspected and all tests shall be witnessed by the
Purchaser or by the Purchaser's authorised representative.
4.1.2 Purchaser's or their authorised representative shall have access to the plant including sub
vendors plants where work on or testing of equipment is being performed.
4.1.3 No surfaces of parts of pumps are to be painted until the inspection is completed.
4.1.4 Vendor shall give to the purchaser atleast 15 days notice prior to commencement of testing.
Vendor shall carry out all running tests and mechanical checks and satisfy himself prior to
purchaser's arrival for inspection and shall maintain desired log of tests.
4.1.5 Acceptance of shop test shall not constitute a waiver of requirement to supply equipment as
per specification and/or to meet field test under operating condition, nor does inspection
relieve the manufacturer of his responsibility in any way whatsoever.
4.2 TESTS
As a minimum following tests shall be performed. The basic reference standard shall be the
latest edition of Hydraulic Institute Standard or IS:5120.
4.2.1 Hydrostatic Test
4.2.1.1 Pressure casings including column pipe and discharge head shall be hydrostatically tested with
water at ambient temperature at 11/2 times the maximum allowable working pressure specified
in the data sheet.
4.2.1.2 Jackets for bearing, stuffing box, coolers, etc, shall be tested at 8 Kg/cm2g or 11/2 times the
maximum allowable jacket working pressure whichever is higher.
4.2.1.3 Hydrostatic test shall be maintained for a minimum period of 30 minutes.

Page 5351 of 8516

k.71 ei ENGINEERS
LJI tIfireg INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
.1101 AFAR> VI% fA Govt of India Unclettatong)
4.2.1.4 Hydrostatic test is under non-witness category & only review of manufacturer's shop test
reports is required.
4.2.2 Performance Test
4.2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, performance test for Horizontal pumps for General Water
Services GWS shall be carried out as per following:-
Pumps with drivers upto 55KW Non witnessed. Only review of
manufacturer's shop test reports are
required
Pumps with drivers from 55KW to One pump per tag/item no. to be witnessed
160KW
Pumps with drivers above 160 KW All pump units in an item to be witnessed
However, in case of vertical pumps & for pumps for Large Capacity Water Services(LCWS) ,
all pumps in a tag needs to undergo witnessed performance test.
4.2.2.2 Unless specifically agreed upon, pump shall be tested at the rated speed specified in the data
sheet with calibrated motors, at least for four hours. During the four hour run test, complete
data including pressure, capacity, power, vibration levels, bearing temperatures and noise
levels shall be recorded and guaranteed parameters verified.
Prior to start of test, manufacturer shall furnish the certificate of latest calibration / re-
calibration of driver and measuring instruments. Unless electrical or mechanical failure occurs,
driver used for shop testing need not be recalibrated and original calibration certificate shall
remain valid. Duration of recalibration for all measuring instruments shall be as per the
recommendations of HI Standards and/or relevant standards of the country of origin of the
pump manufacturer.
4.2.2.3 The pump shall be tested with water at ambient temperature. Suitable rust inhibitor shall be
added in the water used during any internal testing / performance testing of the pumps, to
prevent rusting of pump internals.
4.2.2.4 The performance test for the pumps shall be in accordance with Indian Standard IS:5120
latest edition and the tolerance of the guaranteed parameters shall be as follows:
Rated head Zero negative tolerance.

Shut-off head Positive tolerance permitted so long as it does not exceed
downstream design pressure. Negative tolerance
permitted so long as the curve is
continuously rising to shut off without any drooping &
min 110% head rise to shut off shall be available for
pumps in parallel operation.
NPSH(r)/
Min Submergence Reqd. Zero Positive Tolerance.
Rated BKW Zero positive tolerance (However pumps may be
accepted upto 104 percent of Guaranteed BKW subject to
Penalties as defined elsewhere)
At least four to six values between duty point and shut off and two values on the right of duty
point including one point with discharge valve fully open, shall be measured and recorded
during tests. All the instruments used for conducting the tests shall be calibrated before tests
and calibration certificates furnished from a recognised testing institution to the Inspector.
Page 5352 of 8516

101 el ENGINEERS
$1gar 0154-ft INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
74, e.1,75, 7.51 as Go, of 4-0.3 Undertakog) (WATER SERVICE) Page 14 of 21
4.2.2.5 For fire water application all engine driven horizontal and vertical pumps shall be subjected to
a 4 hour complete unit string test at the pump vendor's works during which mechanical
performance of the train shall be verified, in terms of vibration, bearing/oil temperature,
engine parameters and controls.
In case multiple units are ordered, only one number of diesel engine and gear box unit (if
used) may be brought to the pump vendor shop for complete unit (string) test for the fire water
pump unit. For the remaining pumps, complete unit (string) need not be done. However, any
modification required to be done on the first unit shall be uniformly done on the remaining
units also for proper unitization of the same at site.
4.2.3 NPSH Test / Min. Submergence Test

Unless otherwise specified, NPSH test for Horizontal pumps for General Water
Services(GWS) shall be carried out as per following :
For pumps with driver rating upto 55KW Not Applicable

For pumps with driver rating between 55KW One pump tag/item to be witnessed
to 160KW
For pumps with driver rating above 160KW All pump units to undergo witness test
Additionally, in case of vertical pumps, all pumps in a tag needs to undergo minimum
submergence test in addition to NPSH test.
Also for all pumps in LCWS, all pumps in a tag needs to undergo NPSH test if required as per
specification.
4.2.4 Vibration Measurement

During performance test vibration shall be measured on the bearing housing for the capacity
range of ±10 percent of rated capacity.
4.2.5 Dismantling Inspection

Dismantle Inspection of pump after performance test shall be applicable only in case of
abnormality in mechanical behaviour (such as excessive noise & vibration, bearing
temperature rise etc.) during performance test.
4.2.6 Final Inspection

After the performance/dismantle test the pump and the job driver shall be unitised on the job
base plate, aligned and coupled to make a complete unit. The pump will then be checked for
visual inspection to confirm compliance to the GA drawings, nozzle dimension, elevations,
anchor bold position, direction of rotation etc.
4.3 If it is necessary to dismantle a pump after the performance test for the sole purpose of
machining impellers to meet the tolerances for differential head, no re-test will be required
unless the reduction in diameter exceeds 5 percent of the original diameter. The diameter of
the impeller at the time of shop test, as well as the final diameter of the impeller, shall be
recorded on a certified shop test curve that shows the operating characteristics after the
diameter of the impeller has been reduced.
4.4 If it is necessary to dismantle a pump for some other correction, such as improvement of
power, NPSH, or mechanical operation, the initial test will not be acceptable, and the final
performance test shall be run after the correction is made.
Page 5353 of 8516

larael&ft ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Igelf titReg W.. INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
13,741
1.11P71 AMR +3513, IA Govt of InOla Undettakmg) (WATER SERVICE) Page 15 of 21
4.5 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
4.5.1 After all tests are completed and after inspection is made, all exposed mechanical surfaces and
all internal parts shall be thoroughly coated with a rust preventive. All exterior parts of the unit
except machined surfaces shall receive one prime coat and one coat of vendor's standard
enamel.
4.5.2 All flanges, nozzles shall be blanked off. All untapped openings shall be provided with
substantial wood or metal closure. The ends of small piping may be sealed with tape.
4.5.3 The pump shall be supplied with a nameplate containing the following information:
-Purchaser's Item No.
-Manufacturer's Name
-Type and Serial No
-Speed.
The nameplate shall be of stainless steel and relevant information shall be punched into the
same.
4.5.4 All auxiliary, dismantled and packed separately shall be properly marked with the Item No. for
which it is intended by means of metal tag.
4.5.5 Pump with auxiliary shall be suitably packed, fastened to avoid damage during transit and
crated for shipment and storage for a period of 12 months. Lifting, unpacking and handling
instructions shall be securely attached to the exterior of the largest packing in a well marked
weather proof container. The upright position of lifting points, gross weights and dimensions
be clearly marked on each package. Each package shall clearly identify the equipment
contained therein. If any extra precaution is to be taken by the Purchaser for storage beyond 12
months the same shall be explicitly indicated in the operation and maintenance manuals.
SECTION 5 - VENDOR'S DATA

5.1 PROPOSALS
The vendor's proposals shall as a minimum include the following:

a) All data sheets, drawings and documents listed under "PRINTS WITH QUOTE" in the
enclosed Vendor Data Requirement Form.
b) Vendor's confirmation/comments on post-order Vendor Data Requirements (Type of
Documents, no. of prints and date needed) indicated in Vendor Data Requirement forms
data sheets and specs.
c) List of recommended commissioning spares included in the offer.
d) List of mandatory spares (where specified by the purchaser) included in the offer.
e) List of Vendor's standard Spare Parts for Two Years Normal Operation
This list shall be made separately for each items including auxiliaries and drivers in the
form of a table & shall show :
i) Part name, description and number.
ii) Quantity installed in one unit.
iii) Quantity recommended per unit for 2 years normal operation.
iv) Quantity recommended for number of units of an item as specified in the inquiry.
v) Quantity recommended as insurance for the number of units of an item specified
in the inquiry.
f) An itemised list of special tools included in the offer.
g) Any start-up, shutdown or operating restrictions required to protect the integrity of the
equipment.
h) Any limitations of vendor's test-facility to carryout the specified tests.
Page 5354 of 8516

-

ftfazi-& ENGINEERS
fat5reg
eae,M1, 1,1,30a).1
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout of India Undertaiunq)
(WATER SERVICE)
6-41-0003 Rev. 4
Page 16 of 21
i) A specific statement that the scope of supply, the offered equipment/systems and all its
components are in strict accordance with the data sheets, job specifications, this
specifications and all other attachments, except for specific deviations as listed in the
proposal.
5.2 CONTRACT DATA
5.2.1 General
5.2.1.1 Drawings and data as required after purchase order has been specified in Vendor Data
Requirement. Vendor to note that the drawing/document descriptions/titles as given in the
Vendor Data Requirement are generic in nature. It is possible that against one
drawing/document specified there are several drawings to be furnished by the vendor or vice
versa.
Vendor shall complete & forward a document "DOCUMENT CONTROL INDEX" to the
purchaser (Destination & contact person as per order).
This document shall list out in consolidated form all drawings and documents required by
purchaser (As specified in Data Sheets, Specifications and Vendor Data Requirement forms
enclosed with the order).
Against each drawing/document vendor shall indicate the vendor's drawing numbers, titles,
Rev. No., category (whether for information or approval) and schedule of submission.
This shall be the first document to be submitted by vendor within two weeks of order.
No drawing shall be taken up for review till DCI for the inquiry/order is finalized by
vendor.
5.2.1.2 All transmittal letters (covers), drawings and data shall have a title block (in addition to
vendor's standard title block) which shall as a minimum contain the following contract
information:
i) Purchaser's and Consultant's Corporate Name
ii) Project Name.
iii) Equipment Name and Item No.
iv) Purchase Order No.
v) Purchase Requisition No.
Title Block on drawings shall be placed on the lower right hand corner.
5.2.1.3 All vendor data/drawings/documents shall be in English Language and in Metric Systems.
5.2.1.4 Data specified in the VDR is the minimum requirements of Purchaser. Any additional
document/data required or requested by Purchaser for engineering or construction shall also be
made available by the vendor.
5.2.1.5 Whether or not specified the vendor shall furnish the following, before shipment:
As built running clearances and when applicable; thrust bearing, radial bearing and
seal running clearances.
A supplementary list of spare parts other than those included in his original proposal.
The supplementary list shall include recommended spare parts, cross-sectional or
assembly type drawings, parts numbers, materials, prices and delivery period. The
vendor shall forward this supplementary list to the purchaser promptly after receipt of
the reviewed drawings and in time to permit order and delivery of parts before field
start-up.
- A parts list for all equipment supplied. The list shall include pattern, stock, or
production drawing numbers and materials of construction. The list shall completely
identify each part so that the purchaser may determine the interchangeability of the
Page 5355 of 8516

zac9 ENGINEERS
zir kitfaes. INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
1411p7f AIIPITAF A Govt of ,n0oa Undertalon9) (WATER SERVICE) Page 17 of 21
parts with other equipment furnished by the same manufacturer. Standard purchased
items shall be identified by the original manufacturer's name and part number.
At least 8 weeks before shipment, the vendor shall submit his preservation, packaging
and shipping procedures to the purchaser's for his review.
5.2.3 Co-ordination Meeting

When specified, a co-ordination meeting shall be held at Purchaser's office, preferably within
4 weeks of order.
An agenda shall be prepared for this meeting and would include the following points related to
technical aspects.
a. Any clarifications required by the vendor on purchaser's order.
b. Document Control Index(DCI).
c. Vendor Data Review/approval modalities.
d. Sub-vendor lists proposed by vendor.
e. Utility requirements.
f. Preliminary General Arrangement & layout drawings & purchaser's interface drawings.
5.2.4 Drawings
5.2.4.1 The number of prints and/or reproducible required and the times within which these are to be
submitted by vendor are specified in Purchaser's inquiry/order.
If specified, drawing review may be through EDMSNDOCS in soft as per the details provided
elsewhere in the inquiry document.
5.2.4.2 The purchaser's review of the vendor's drawings shall not constitute permission to deviate
from any requirements in the purchase order/specifications unless specifically agreed upon in
writing. After the drawings have been reviewed, the vendor shall furnish certified copies in
the quantity specified. All drawings must be clearly legible and shall be folded to 216 mm x
279 mm (8'/2" x 11") size. All transparencies shall be rolled.
5.2.4.3 Drawings/documents with following titles shall contain as a minimum the following
information:
a) General Arrangement Drawing
A general arrangement drawing shall indicate:
i) Outline dimensions (minimum three views) (All principal dimensions).
ii) Allowable forces and moments on suction and discharge nozzles.
iii) Location (in all three planes), size, type, rating and identification of all purchaser's
interface connections including those of vents, drains lubricating oil, sealing fluid,
cooling water, steam & Electrical/Instrumentation.
Direction of rotation viewing from the driving end.
Weight of each assembly/component.
The weight & location of center of gravity of the heaviest assembly/components
that must be handled for erection.
Identification and weight, dimensions of the heaviest assembly / subassembly /
component required to be handled for maintenance.
Maintenance clearances and dismantling clearances.
Speeds of Driven Equipment and driver and driver rating. Location of driver
terminal box (in case of Electric Driver)
Layout of auxiliary equipment and operating platform.
Make, Type and Size of couplings and the location of guards and their coverage.
A list of reference drawings if any.
A list of any special weather-protection and climatic features.
Page 5356 of 8516

401 ENGINEERS
Og-ar lal5leg INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
lir, rWriTgr, 1,1,111.1 to Govt of ,r..11.3 Undertaiong} (WATER SERVICE) Page 18 of 21
b) Foundation Drawings
A foundation drawing shall indicate complete information required for foundation design
by purchase including the following:
i) Foundation bolt sizes, pipe sleeve details, pocket sizes and locations and also
distance between the first/ nearest anchor bolt and pump suction and discharge
nozzle centrelines.
ii) Grouting thickness and other necessary technical details.
iii) Static weight of each skid/independently grouted item and location of center of
gravity of each of such skid/items in all three planes.
iv) Weight distribution for each bolt/subsole plate location and total static weight.
v) Dynamic loading caused due to various items grouted independently.
vi) The direction and magnitude of unbalance forces and moments generated by each
such item at the worst operating condition and short circuit moments of motor
drivers at the C.G. of the pump-motor baseplate.
vii) GD2 value of each item resolved to driver speed.
viii) Maximum permissible amplitude of vibration on the foundation at base level.
ix) Total mass of rotating parts.
x) Total mass of reciprocating parts.
xi) Suggested dynamic factor and ratio of foundation weight to weight of
skid/equipment as per vendor experience.
c) Layout Drawing (For multi-skid packages)

This drawing shall include atleast the following:
i) Layout of all skid/equipment and their auxiliaries, vessels, control panels,
exchangers etc. Vendor shall furnish an optimised layout (considering the space
allocated, site wind conditions, area classification, the type of equipment located
in the vicinity etc.) indicating elevation and dimension of skids/equipment.
ii) Minimum spacing required between the various skids/equipment and between the
skids and the walls/columns/roof for an easy accessibility and maintenance.
iii) Layout for water piping, trenches for water piping, cable tray/trenches layout.
iv) Piping arrangement and piping support arrangement/location for piping in
vendor's scope.
v) Layout for auxiliary equipment and operating platform details.
vi) Specification for crane/mono rail (including suggested mono rail layout)
recommended for maintenance and height of the lifting hook from the centerline
of equipment.
d) Field Alignment Diagram

The diagram shall indicate the relative displacement to be kept between the centrelines of
various equipments at the time of installation, so that under normal running conditions the
equipments get fully aligned. This relative displacement should be decided on the basis of
centerline temperature rise data of driver, gear box/transmission system, driven
equipment.
e) Heat Exchanger Drawings

Heat exchanger drawing and data shall include heat and mass balance data, details of
provisions for separating and withdrawing the condensate, construction details, cross
sections & general arrangement drawings of heat exchangers, vendors recommendations
regarding provision for support and piping expansion.
Page 5357 of 8516

101 elczl ENGINEERS
sigz.,r i INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
1.FR qii97.71,1,341,1741 A Govt ol Ingha Undettakm9)
5.2.4.4 P&I Diagrams (with Bill of Materials)

Vendor shall supply P&I Diagrams along with Bill of Materials of each system in the vendor's
scope of supply or specified in the order. P&I Diagram shall indicate the system details,
location of various auxiliaries, instruments, controls and safety devices as required. Line
sizes, piping class, valve sizes and class shall be clearly marked on the P&ID. Vendor's scope
and purchaser's scope shall be clearly demarcated. Each item shall be identified by an item
No./item tag no., which shall correspond to the item no. shown on the bill of materials. The
bill of materials shall include items number, normal value, set value, range, quantity per unit,
make and other specifications as applicable.
Legends adopted shall be indicated either at the bottom of drawing or on a separate drawing.
The legends shall be as per ISA.
5.2.4.5 Cross-sectional Drawing(with Bill of Materials)

The vendor shall supply cross-sectional or assembly type drawings for all equipment furnished
showing all parts, design assembly and running clearances, and balancing data required for
erection and maintenance. Each part shall be numbered which shall correspond to the part
number on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include the part no., name of
component, materials quantity installed per unit & sizes where applicable (say for bolts, nuts,
rings, gaskets etc.). All boughtout items shall also be indicated with make and brief
specifications.
A separate cross-sectional drawing showing installation and setting dimensions for the seals
shall be furnished.
5.2.5 Performance Characteristic Curves
5.2.5.1 The vendor shall provide complete performance curves to encompass the map of operations,
with any limitations indicated thereon.
5.2.5.2 All curves submitted prior to final performance testing shall be marked "PREDICTED". Any
set of curves resulting from a test shall be marked "TESTED".
5.2.5.3 Certified test curves and data shall be submitted within 15 days after testing and shall include
head, power recalculated to the proper specific gravity and efficiency plotted against capacity.
If applicable, viscosity corrections shall be indicated. If NPSHR test is specified, the water
NPSHR curve (drawn upto minimum continuous flow) shall also be included. The curve sheet
shall include the maximum and minimum diameters of the impeller design supplied, the eye
area of the first stage impeller, the identification number of the impeller or impellers and the
pump serial number.
5.2.6 Data Sheet
5.2.6.1 The Vendor shall provide completely filled in data sheets, first for "as purchased" and then for
"as built". This shall be done by the vendor correcting and filling out the data sheets and
submitting copies to the purchaser.
5.2.7 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogues
5.2.7.1 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue is a compilation of "as built" drawings and
data, manufacturing and test records, installation, operating and maintenance instructions.
5.2.7.2 Not later than two weeks after successful completion of all specified tests, the vendor shall
furnish the required number of Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogues for the
equipment, any auxiliaries and instruments that the vendor is providing. The Technical Data
Manual/Mechanical Catalogue shall include the following documents as a minimum:
Page 5358 of 8516

el ENGINEERS
51g-ar tttateg INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
0.51,1,75331 i GOV: Of ■rtl. Undertakig,
i) All drawings and data as listed in the vendor data index & schedule. (For drawings, where
purchaser's approval is required, the final certified drawings shall be attached.)
Sections shall be organised in a manner that data & drawings related to one subject is
grouped together such as Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation etc.
ii) All manufacturing, inspection and test data and records.
iii) Installation and Instruction Manual
The vendor shall provide sufficient written instructions, including a cross-reference list of
all drawings, to enable the purchaser to correctly install the equipment and prepare the
equipment for start-up. It shall include any special information required for proper
installation that is not on the drawings, special alignment or grouting procedures, utility
specifications (including quantity) and all installation data. It shall also contain the
following information:
(a) Instructions for erecting, piping, aligning (including the expected thermally
induced shaft centerline shift between normal site ambient temperature position
and that at normal equipment operating temperature).
(b) A description of rigging procedures, including the lifting of the assembled
equipment, and methods of disassembly, repair, adjustment, inspection and
reassembly of the equipment and auxiliaries.
(c) Pre-commissioning/commissioning/functional test procedures and acceptance
criterion.
iv) Operation and Maintenance Manual
This manual shall provide sufficient written instructions and data to enable purchaser to
correctly operate and maintain the equipment ordered. It shall include a section to cover
special instructions for operation at extreme environmental and/or extreme operating
conditions. The following shall be included in this manual:
(a) Instructions covering start-up, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, operating
limits and routine operational procedures.
(b) A description of equipment construction features and the functioning of
component parts or systems (such as control, lubrication, sealing systems etc.).
(c) Outline and sectional drawings, schematics and illustrative sketches in sufficient
details to identify all parts and clearly show the operation of all equipment and
components and the methods of inspection and repair. Standardised sectional
drawings are acceptable only if they represent the actual construction of the
equipment.
(d) The following maintenance information:
i. Maximum and minimum bearing, labyrinth and seal clearances including
any other clearance between moving and stationary parts of the
equipment affecting proper running and maintenance of the equipment.
ii. Instructions for measuring and adjusting cold clearances, shaft runout,
concentricity etc.
iii. Rotor float allowance.
iv. Interference fits on parts that are required to be removed or replaced for
maintenance of normally consumable spares.
v. Balancing data with permissible tolerances.
vi. Lubricating schedules indicating recommended grades of oil, their
properties, replacement period etc.
vii. Normal maintenance procedure.
viii. Preventive maintenance schedules and criterion for replacement of parts.
ix. Trouble - shooting procedures.
(e) The following reassembly information:
1. Bolting sequence and torque values for all bolts affecting equipment
performance/integrity/safety.
2. Reassembly sequences together with required inspection checks.
Page 5359 of 8516

NGINEERS
$°2111 1Weg ENDIA
N MITED
LI FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0003 Rev. 4
aRrrt7,51 34:11.0 (A Gov( of hata Undettakmq)
3. Adjustment procedures to achieve required positions, clearances, float

and so forth.
4. Detailed procedures for pre-operational checks, including settings and
adjustments.
5. Seals and coupling installation procedures.
6. Parts list indicating cross-sectional drawings of various assemblies and
sub-assemblies, part numbers, materials of construction (ASTM) etc.to
facilitate identification of parts and for procurement of spares.
v) Following information shall also be included in the Technical Data Manual/Mechanical

Catalogue:
1. Storage instructions for storing and preserving the equipment (including driver
and all the auxiliary units) at the plant site before installation of the same.
2. Instructions for preserving the equipment after it has been installed. This is
particularly required in cases where a long time gap is expected between
equipment installation and commissioning.
3. Field performance test procedures and acceptance criterion.
5.2.7.3 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue shall be in Hard board folder(s) of size 265 mm
x 315 mm (10Y2" x 12'/2") and shall not be more than 90 mm thickness; it may be of several
volumes and each volume shall have a volume number, index of volumes & index of contents
of that particular volume.
5.2.7.4 Title sheet (Top sheet) of each volume of Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue shall
contain the contract informations as defined under 5.2.1.2 besides the volume number.
5.2.7.5 In case order contains more than one item, separate dedicated mechanical catalogues shall be
submitted for each item.
5.2.7.6 Two (2) sets of Final / "As Built" drawings & documents shall also be submitted as electronic
files on secondary storage media (i.e. CD-ROM / DVD-ROM disk).
Page 5360 of 8516

laffRzie7 ENGINEERS FOR 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
s24,1 05tes INDIA LIMITED
WWI 2i2Mi' ,1513M1.1) (A Gout of !oda Uncleftakulgj BELT CONVEYORS Page 1 of 9
AVE
* choaqi 1WQ.
TriWW far441M-
BELT CONVEYORS
4 01/04/16 REVISED AND REISSUED
3 28/07/10 REVISED AND REISSUED SPC PB MK/DM ND
2 17/03/06 REVISED AND REISSUED JJRC CL SMA VJN

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5361 of 8516

ENGINEERS
FOR 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
ligar fet151-as
MT?, ertERremjcg57,)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of !Ada UnOettalongj BELT CONVEYORS Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:

CEMA : Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association
DC : Direct Current
DP Dye Penetration
IS • Indian Standard
ISO • International Organisation for Standardisation
QA • Quality Assurance.
Machinery Equipment Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr. R.K Trivedi
Members : Mr P. Bhattacharjee
Mr Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr P.P Pandey
Mr Nalin Kumar
Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr Shishupal Choudhary
Mr R R Srivastava
Mr J S Duggal
Mr KC Paikar
Mr A Natarajan
Mr K V K Naidu (Projects)
Page 5362 of 8516

ENGINEERS
IA Govt of India Undertakm)
BELT CONVEYORS Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 8
Page 5363 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
Ogenta5 eg
- INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
1.127I VE,13517 o) IA Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
1.0 GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirementsfor thedesign, engineer, manufacture,

test and supply of the Belt Conveyors suitable for bulk material handling and its accessories.
2.1 This standard is based on following Indian/International Standards, and the standards
referred therein, which shall be deemed to be part of this standard:
IS 1891 Specification for Rubber Conveyor and Elevator Textile Belting.
IS 4776 Specification for Troughed Conveyors.
IS 7155 Code of Recommended Practice for Conveyor Safety.
IS 8531 Specification for Pulleys for Belt Conveyors.
IS-8597 : Specification for Flat Belt Conveyors.
IS 8598 : Specification for Idlers and Idler Sets.
IS 8730 : Classification and Codification of Bulk Material Handled by

Continuous Material Handling Equipment.
IS-9295 : Steel Tubes for Idlers for Belt Conveyors.
IS-11592 : Selection and Design of Belt Conveyors-Code of Practice.
ISO-15236 (Ptl to 4) : Steel Chord Conveyor Belts.
EIL Std. 7-76-0103 : Instructions to Vendor for Site Performance Guarantee

Requirement for Package Units.
Latest revision of the above-mentioned standards as on the date of enquiry shall be

applicable.
2.4 National Laws and statutory provisions together with any local bylaws for the state wherein
package is required to be installed shall be complied with.
Technical requirements of Belt Conveyor shall be as per Codes andStandards referred in

clause 2.1 above, subject to the following additions, deletions and modifications:
3.1 Addition / Deletion / Modification to IS 11592: 2000(Reaffirmed 2010)

i) Clause no. 8.6.1 (Addition):Textile belting shall be in accordance with IS - 1891 while
steel cord belting shall meet the technical requirements as specified in ISO - 15236.
Nylon/Nylon & polyester belt shall be of cut edge type construction while textile &
steel cord belt shall be of moulded type construction. Cover of belt used for highly
Page 5364 of 8516

traTid ENGINEERS
S1 Weg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
fairer/ ?wow? ax3•10.1) IA Govt of Ind. UnOeitalong)
abrasive material shall be provided with breaker reinforcement. Cotton textile belting
shall not be used.
Belt rating and cover thickness shall be selected such that factor of safety on belt
tension as recommended by belt manufacturer is maintained and cross-checked from
load support and troughability considerations.
All Belting shall have hot vulcanized joints.
ii) Clause no. 8.7 (Addition):For pulley shaft diameter calculation, ANSVCEMA B 105.1
(Specifications for Welded Steel Conveyor Pulleys)shall be followed.
Pulley diameter shall be as per belt manufacturer's recommendations. However,
minimum diameter of various pulleys shall not be lower than as indicated below:
Type of Pulleys Min. diameter, mm

500
Drive Pulley
400
Tail & take up Pulleys
315
Bend and Snub Pulleys
All Pulleysshall be of welded steel construction and stress relieved.
All Pulley bearings shall be of antifriction type with self-aligning double row
spherical roller bearings, enclosed in a dust and moisture-proof housing which shall be
of cast iron or cast steel construction and shall be of split type. Provision for proper
lubrication of the bearings shall be provided on all the plummer blocks. The bearing
seals shall be double labyrinth type. Bearing shall be selected for L10 life of minimum
50000 hrs.
iii) Clause no. 8.7.3 (Modification):Drive pulleys shall be lagged with diamond groove.
Tail and take up pulleys shall be plain lagged.
iv) Clause no. 8.8.4.6 e (Addition): At each loading point, rubber disc impact idlers shall
be provided with minimum five number idlers at a maximum spacing of 500 mm. For
heavy duty applications, impact pad/slider bed shall be provided, if specified in the
Job Specification. For power calculation and belt selection, additional friction due to
impact pad/slider bed shall be considered.
v) Clause no. 8.8.4.7.a (Addition): While selecting idler spacing, resultant load on idlers
(sum of belt load, material load and the radial resultant of the belt tensions) shall also
be checked, so that it doesnot exceed the allowable load capacity of the idlers.
vi) Clause no. 8.10.3.1 (Addition): Motor rating shall be suitable to restart the conveyor
under fully loaded condition. Fluid coupling shall be used for all motor ratings
exceeding 30 kW.
vii) Clause no. 8.11.2.1 (Modification): Hold back shall be provided on all inclined
conveyors whose inclination exceeds 6 degrees and shall be integral with the gear
box.
viii) Clause no. 8.11.2.1 (Addition):Brakes shall be of DC Electromagnetic type. Electro
hydraulic thrustor type shall be used for downhill conveyors.
ix) Clause no. 8.12.2.2.a (Modification): Screw type take up shall be used upto a
conveyor length of 30 m.
x) Clause no.8.12.2.3 (Addition): Gravity take-up type tensioning arrangement, wherever
required,shall be supplied complete with take up pulley, frame, guides, necessary
number of cast iron or concrete counter weights, hangers of supports for
counterweights, inspection platform, sand pit and safety guard. In case of horizontal
Page 5365 of 8516

‘31 ft
-A ENGINEERS FOR
taf5reg41,11W INDIA LIMITED 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
1.11V71 Fie ASIJWI.:11 IA Gout of India Undertaking)
take up, sheaves shall be provided with life lubricated antifriction bearings.
Adjustable carrying/return idler frames shall be provided for horizontal gravity take
up.
xi) Clause no. 8.12.4 (Addition):Adjustable components of take up weights shall be easy
to handle and each piece shall not weigh more than 20 kg.
Monorail for handling of take up counterweights and take up pulley shall be provided.
xii) Clause no. 8.13.2 (Addition): Chute fabricated from carbon steel shall have 10 mm
minimum thickness. Product contact surfaces on loading, transfer and discharge
chutes shall be provided with liner as specified in job specifications. Chutes shall be
provided with sufficient number of inspection doors at locations deemed necessary.
xiii) Clause 8.13.2.2 (Modification): Skirt board shall of adequate length which shall
allow for the material turbulence at the loading zone to settle down, but in no case the
length of skirt board shall be less than 3 meter.
xiv) Clause 8.13.2.2 (Addition): Wear resistance of skirt board rubber shall be less than
belt cover rubber. It shall give tight seals, and have low coefficient of friction. Skirt
rubber shall be suitably clamped to the skirt plates.
xv) Clause no. 8.14.1 (Addition): Belt conveyor support structure shall consist of stringer
channels with short supports (stand/post), tie angles and bracings of rigid construction
with expansion joints to ensure accurate conveyor alignment.
xvi) Clause no. 8.14.8 (Addition): The head and tail frames shall be constructed with
structural rolled sections of adequate strength. Frame shall be of welded construction
and shall have provision for supporting the pulleys, chute and scrappers.
xvii) Clause no. 8.14.1b (Modification): For single conveyor, walkway of 1000 mm on one
side and 750 mm on other side shall be provided. For double conveyors, central
walkway of 1000 mm along with side walkways of 750 mm on both sides shall be
provided. Walkways inclined more than 10 degrees shall be provided with suitable
anti-skid bar for preventing slippage.
Minimum head room clearance shall be 2.20 meter for all walkways, stairs, landings
etc.
xviii) Clause no. 8.14.4 h (Addition): Sufficient number of louvers and windows shall be
provided in the conveyor gallery to give adequate lighting and ventilation. Adequate
numbers of translucent sheets shall also be provided for natural lighting.
xix) Clause no. 9.1 (Addition): Seal plates shall be provided at bottom of the gallery at all
road/rail crossings and movement areas. Seal plates shall be 3.15 thick as a
minimumunless otherwise specified.
xx) Clause no. 9.1 j (Addition): Deck plates shall be provided between conveying and
return side of belt at all feed points and discharge end of minimum 4 meter length at
each point. Deck plates shall be 3.15 mm thick as a minimum.
xxi) Clause 9.3.4 (Modification): Worm gear reducers and open chain/sprocket reducers
shall not be used.
xxii) Clause 9.3.6 (Modification):Service factor of minimum 1.5 shall be considered,
irrespective of duration of service.
xxiii) Clause no. 9.3.6 (Addition):Mechanical rating of gear box shall be minimum 1.25
times of the selected motor power or 1.5 times of BkW drive pulley whichever is
higher. Thermal rating of gear box shall not be less than selected motor power (kW).
xxiv) Clause no. 9.4 (Modification): Couplings shall adequately provide for lateral and
angular misalignment and longitudinal displacement of shafts. For high speed
coupling, pin bush/tyre coupling at motor output shaft shall be used for motor rating
Page 5366 of 8516

ENGINEERS
2.410151-j
eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
INRTI 2:120,124510417FA) In Govt of India Undertalong)
upto 30 kW and fluid coupling above 30 kW motor rating. For low speed coupling,
geared coupling shall always be used.
xxv) Clause no. 9.9.4.2 (Modification): Two stage spring loaded primary and secondary
external scrapers with suitable adjusting mechanism shall be provided.
xxvi) Clause no. 10 (Addition):Emergency pull cord switches shall be provided on both
sides of conveyor along walkways at a maximum spacing of 25 meters. Minimum one
number on each side shall be provided.
Belt sway switches shall be provided on both sides of conveyorat a maximum spacing
of 30 meters.
Zero speed switch shall be provided at either tail or bendpulley.
Protective guards of wire mesh type shall be provided for all exposed rotating
components. Guards shall be readily removable and replaceable.
3.2 Addition / Deletion / Modification to IS 8531: 1986 (Reaffirmed 2008)
i) Clause no. 4.0 (Modification): Cast Iron is not acceptable and thus IS210 -
Specification for gray cast iron castings is not applicable.
ii) Clause no. 4.0 (Addition): Shaft material shall be 4008 (old designation C40) as per
IS 1570 (Part 2/Sect) or superior, unless otherwise specified.
i) Clause no. 4.6 (Modification): Idlers shall be provided with bearings grease packed
for life. The bearing shall be seize resistant type. The L 10 life of idler bearings shall be
minimum 30000 hours.
3.4 Addition / Deletion / Modification to IS 9295: 1983 (along with Amendment no.1,
January 1996 and Amendment no. 2, March 1999)(Reaffirmed 2009)
i) Clause no. 9.1 (Addition): The thickness of steel tube shall be selected based on
design requirement, however in no case the thickness of steel tube shall be less than
4.5 mm.
3.5 Additional Requirements for Conveyor Calculation
i) Conveyor power and tension calculation shall be done as per IS 11592, unless
otherwise specified in job specifications.
ii) Artificial coefficient of friction for horizontal and uphill conveyor = 0.03
Artificial coefficient of friction for downhill conveyor = 0.012
iii) Resistance due to impact pad /slider bed, if applicable, shall be calculated according to
latest edition of "Belt Conveyors for Bulk Materials" published by CEMA.
iv) Pressure between belt cleaner and belt = 65000 N/m 2 (minimum)
4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stage-wise expediting, inspection and testing at

vendor's/sub-vendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Approved
Quality Assurance (QA) plan shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2.2 Inspection and Testing at vendor's/sub vendor's works and site shall include but not be
limited to the following.
i) Dimensional check up.
Page 5367 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogeir 051--eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
1.41271 212n512 9,13.10.4) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
ii) Checking of all material test certificates.

iii) Stress relieving of pulleys
iv) Static balancing of pulleys
v) DP test for long weld of pulley shell, weld of end disc with shell and hub.
vi) Ultrasonic test for forged shaft
Em Std. No. 7-76-0103.
4.4.2 Rated capacity shall be guaranteed and demonstrated during the performance testing.
4.4.3 All parts of the conveyor shall operate satisfactorily without any undue friction, vibration,
noise or display of any other unfavorable characteristics during the performance test.
4.4.4 All equipment and component parts shall be guaranteed by the vendor against defective
material and design for a period as specified in Purchaser's general purchase conditions.
4.4.5 If any defect occurs during the guaranteed period the Vendor shall make all necessary
alterations, repairs and replacement at their own cost.
5.1 Painting shall be followed as specified in job specific painting specification.

6.1 All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment shall
equipment.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
7.1 Vendor shall submit list of spare parts with recommended quantities anditemised prices for
Page 5368 of 8516

ENONEERS
Etfiteg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-47-0001 Rev. 4
Omen egeask, telagtml) (A Govt of India Undertalung)
spares from 2 years' operation spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a
reasonable time without any cost implication to purchaser.
Page 5369 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
gz:Er OW.5 INDIA LIMITED 6 -48 -0002 Rev. 6
,-■ ovl E.O.T. CRANE Page 1 of 14
micico f4f4RM'
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6 25/09/14 REVISED AND REISSUED
5 28/06/13 REVISED AND REISSUED DS SPC PB DM
4 07/07/10 REVISED AND REISSUED SPC PB MIUDM ND
3 31/07/06 REVISED AND REISSUED PPP AK SMA VJN
2 06/05/02 REVISED AND REISSUED AK SMA NN GRR
1 23/02/98 REVISED AND REISSUED PPP AK NN AS

ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
0 04/02/92 SCM AK KNP RNS
(RECOMPOSED IN AUGUST 1995)
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5370 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$'fg- rf 2f51-
dg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-48-0002 Rev. 6
iA Glrol of mdra Uncleital,N)
E.O.T. CRANE Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:
BHN Brinell Hardness Nurnber

CT Cross Travel
E1L Enoineers India Limited
HTB High Tensile Brass
IS Indian Standard
LT Long Travel
MOC Material of Construction
MT Metric Tonnes
QA Quality Assurance
SS Stainless Steel
SWL Safe Working Load
Packaged Equipment Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. P. Bhattacharjee
Members : Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar

Mr. P. P Pandey
Mr. Shishupal Choudhaiy
Mr. R.R Shrivastava
Mr. K.0 Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. K.V.K Naidu (Projects)
Page 5371 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS
fa2e5 INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-48-0002 Rev. 6
of ifitho
Contents
1.0 GENERAL 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 8
ANNEXURE-I .14
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 5372 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS
GoA nt Indo UndeitakiN,
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Electric Overhead Travelling (EOT) Crane, complete
with al I accessories.
2.1 This standard is based on the following Indian Standards, and the standards referred therein,
which shall be deemed to be part of this standard:
IS-3177 Code of practice for Electric Overhead Travelling Cranes and

Gantry Cranes other than Steel Work Cranes.
IS-807 Design, Erection and Testing (Structural Portion) of Cranes and

Hoists — Code of practice
1S- 15560 Point hooks with shank up to 160 Tonne-Specification
IS-5749 Specification for Forged Ramshorn Hooks
IS- 3443 Specification for Crane Rail Sections
IS-2266 Steel Wire Ropes for General Engineering Purposes-

Specification
IS-304 Specification for High Tensile Brass Ingots and Castings
IS-305 : Specification for Aluminium Bronze Ingots and Castings
E1L Std.- 7-76-0103 : Instructions to Vendor for Site Perfonnance guarantee

Requirements for Package units.
Latest revision of the above-inentioned standards as on the date of enquiry shall be applicable.
practices and norms of the industry shall be applicable.
2.4 National laws and statutory provisions, together with any Local by-laws for the state wherein
crane is required to be installed shall be complied with.
Technical requirements of EOT Crane shall be as per Codes and Standards referred in Clause
2.1 above, subject to the following additions, deletions and modifications:
3.1 Addition / Deletion / Modifications to IS-3177: 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010)
i) Clause no. 7.4.8.2 (Addition): For double girder EOT crane, a full-length platform
shall be provided on drive side girder. Two short platforrns shall be provided on non-
drive side girder at both ends.
ii) Clause no. 8.1.1 (Modification): Unless otherwise specified, for crane capacity of less
than 50MT, lifting hooks shall comply with IS 15560 and for crane capacity of 50MT
and above , lifting hook shall be Ramshorn type and shall comply with IS 5749.
Page 5373 of 8516

ENGINEERS
GuN inda E.O.T. CRANE Page 5 of 14
i) Clause no. 8.1.2 (Modification): lIook latch shall be provided on al I hooks.

iv) Clause no. 8.3.1 (Addition): Wire ropes shall be either 6x36 or 6x37 construction,
unless specified otherw ise.
v) Clause no. 8.4.3 (Modification): The drum shall be flanged on both ends.
vi) Clause no. 8.4.7 (Modification): In case drum is fabricated from seamless pipe, then
the diameter of the drums at the bottom of the groove need not be standardized.
vi i) Clause no. 8.4.7 (Modification): Cast iron drum shall not be acceptable.
viii) Clause no. 8.5.4 (Modification): Nylon sheaves shall not be acceptable.
ix) Clause no. 8.6.3 (Modification): Wheel hardness value specified is not applicable for
HTB/ Aluminium bronze tyres.
x) Clause no. 8.6.4 (Modification): The wheel shall be made of forged steel. MOC of
wheel shall be C55Mn75 or superior.
xi) Clause no. 8.6.11 (Addition): The width of wheel tread shall be 35 mm and 15mm
more than the rail bead, for Long travel and Cross travel wheels respectively, unless
specified otherwise.
xii) Clause no. 8.7.1 (Modification): All bearings shall be anti friction type with dust proof
seals. Bearings L io life shall be minimum 10000 hrs for M5 duty class and 25000 hrs
for M6-M7 duty class. All bearings shall be of SKF/ FAG/ NTN make only
xiii) Clause no. 8.7.3 (Deletion): Clause not applicable.
xiv) Clause no. 8.11.2 (Modification): Spring buffer shall be used. Plastic / Rubber /
Polyurethane buffers are not acceptable.
xv) Clause no. 8.12.3 (Addition): In case electro-hydraulic thruster type brake is provided
for hoisting motion, the same shall be provided with anti drop circuitry to arrest
dropping of load while brake is applied.
xvi) Clause no. 8.12.4, 8.12.5 (Addition): Braking torque for LT and CT motion shall not
be less than 125% of maximum torque of selected motor.
xvii) Clause no. 14.5 (Addition): Unless otherwise specified, Radio Remote Control (RRC),
conforming to IS:3177 along with the following additional features shall be provided:
a) There shall be common push button for siren and START and a separate push
button for ander bridge lights. Crane shall start with time delay after the siren is
blown.
b) Operating range shall be 50 meters approx. for radio remote.
c) Two sets of long life Nickel Cadmium batteries for the transmitter along with a
battery charger shall be provided ( i.e 1 set installed battery + 1 set spare battery +
1 charger) for each radio remote.
d) Necessary operating license/ permission for the RRC system on the Crane shall
be arranged by the Vendor from the statutory bodies. License fee, if any should be
borne by the Vendor for the first time on behalf of Owner/EIL.
xviii) Clause 12 to 25 — Section-3 (Modification): In case of any conflict between Electrical
Specifications of Material Requisition/Tender and electrical requirements specified in
the above refeiTed Indian Standard, the former shall prevail.
xix) General (Addition):
a) Crane shall be designed for Mechanism Class "M5" as minimum unless
otherwise specified in datasheet.
Page 5374 of 8516

ENGINEERS
fülfjreg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6 -48 -0002 Rev. 6
■ntiba I lnklettakiir4,
For crane with more than 10 MT capacity, LT motion shall be provided with two
speeds. Second speed shall not exceed 50% of main LT speed.
The end carriage shall be fitted with safety stops to prevent crane from falling
more than one inch in the event of breakage of a track wheel or axle.
End carriage/ crab shall be designed so as to enable the track wheels to be
withdrawn readily. jacking pads shall be provided for jacking up the crane for
changing crane wheels.
xx) Clause no 22.1 (Addition): Repair cages shall be provided below the end carriage for
maintenance of DSL (shrouded conductor system) and current collectors. The
approach to repair cage will be provided from bridge platform by a ladder.
3.2 Special Requirements for Hazardous Area Cranes

i) MOC of wheel shall be solid construction in High Tensile Brass / Aluminium Bronze
or all Wheels shall be provided with High Tensile Brass /Aluminium bronze /SS tyres
on core wheel of forged C55Mn75 or superior MOC. The minimum thickness of tyres
shall be 30mm at the tread.
The minimum core diameter of the wheel on which the HTB/Aluminium bronze tyre is
shrunk, shall be calculated as per the formula given in Clause .no 8.6.6 of IS-3177.
ii) Wheel hardness value as specified in Clause. no. 8.6.3 of 1S-3177 is not applicable for
Cranes having HTB/Aluminium bronze/SS tyres.
iii) Main hoisting hook and Auxiliary hoisting hook material shall be of forged stainless
steel / bronze coated forged steel.
iv) The buffer striking surface shall be lined with HTB/Aluminium

bronze/Rubber/Polyurethane liner.
v) Any mechanism where two non-lubricated parts mate, one of them shall be of non-
ferrous material like HTB or Aluminium Bronze.
vi) Coupling guards shall be non ferrous/non metallic type.
vii) All electrical components/equipments shall meet the requirements of respective area
classification.
3.3 Noise levet shall not exceed 85 dB (A) at one (1) meter distance from the source of noise.
4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stage-wise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/sub-
vendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall submit Quality
Assurance (QA) plan before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA plan shall foffn the
basis for equipment inspection.

4.2.1 Vendor shall perfoun tests and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to the requirement of Clause 26 and 27 of IS-3177. Load and over load
tests shall also be carried out at vendor's works.
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check-up and shall in no way
Page 5375 of 8516

ENGINEERS
of Indu Undeitdk,,,q)

4.3.1 A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the performance of
the equipment after commissioning in accordance with PG test procedure prepared as per EIL
Standard 7-76-0103.
the Crane after commissioning as per clause 28 of IS-3177. Following parameters shall be
guaranteed.
i) SWL of Main and Auxiliary Hoists
i i) LT, CT and Hoisting Speeds.
iii) Deflection of bridge girder
4.3.3 All parts of the crane shall operate satisfactorily with no undue friction, noise or display of any
other unfavourable characteristics during the performance test.
be tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test. Only test load shall be
provided by purchaser near test site.
5.1 Unless otherwise specified in job specification, surface preparation and painting system for
fabricated items shall be as below:
Surface Primer Finish Paint
preparation
SSPC-SP-10 • One (1) coat of F-9 • Two (2) coats of F-6A (High build
(Inorganic zinc silicate) @ epoxy finish coating cured with
(SA-2)
65-75 ilm DFT/coat. polyamine hardener) @ 100 gm
DFT/coat
• One (1) coat of P-6 • One (1) coat of F-2 (Acrylic-
(Epoxy zinc phosphate) @ Polyurethane finish paint) @ 401..tm
40 gin DFT/coat. DFT/coat.
Total DFT of Primer + finish shall

be 345 (minimum).
Refer Table no. 6.1, 6.2 6.3 & 6.4 attached at the end of this specification for the properties of
different paints (primer/finish paint) as mentioned above.
Refer Annexure-I for the List of recommended manufacturers of paints attached at the end of
this specification.
Page 5376 of 8516

ENGINEERS
140,1 1,1 India lInth,r131.,,, E.O.T. CRANE Page 8 of 14
5.2 Surface preparation and paintings for all bought out components shall be as per respective sub-
vendor's standards suitablc for industrial corrosive environment.
5.3 The colour of Crane shall be golden yellow, unless otherwise specified.
5.4 All machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected against rust with a thick coat of grease.
6.1 All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment shall be
for site erection.
6.2 Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small iterns shall be packed separately in
equipment.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
7.2 Recommended spares and their quantities should take into account related factors of equipment
reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts and
availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and time implication to
purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to utilise spares from 2
over to owner.
Page 5377 of 8516

ENGINEERS
iaWs INDIA LIMITED FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 14
TABLE No. 6.1 PRI E
SI. DESCRIPT1 N P-2 P-4 P-4 P-7

No.
Chleriasted Eipy inc 21NG A,
priracrish
wa phosphatc prirrier LOCKITIE
l Trchnical nâme rubbin- Zill
Phosphate primer. prrner ZRC
col4 galvonizing
Sinsit• pack, air Two pack Two component One pook
Iryingcbkirinalett polyvinyl butyral polyamine crred Synthetic Itesin
rublier based resin medium epoxy resin based zinc
maditun curod with mediurn, gairani2ing
Z Typr actd t.-uutpusitivil pla:4.-. 1sed vtith phowituik; auld p[guteuted widi lmilatiitinig arliu
urisapcnilizble solulion zinc phesphate, 92% of electrolync
plagieizen„ pigmented with zinc dust of
pignieeted with zinc tetroxy 99.95%purity.
' c ii i li • hate. chromate.
3 Volume ScIids % 40 ±3 I 0± I 55± I ,
DFT (Dri Film «. '
4 thicknes,$) per c.uut it 40-45 8-10 4 0 40-5Dp
macrons
Theoritical covering
5 8-10 8-10 8-10 Ituzikg
ity in M2/conti litrr
Weight per Inre in 1.44.05 2.67 kg at 15IC
6 13£0d/5 1.219.05
kpilitre ..
Touch dry at 3CPC
30 minurtes 2 hrs. Afler 30 min. 10 ntinutes
minimum)
Hard dry at 30. 0
8 hiS. 24 iirS. 8 hrs 24 hrs.
(maxirnuin.)
9 Overconting interval Min.: 8 hrs Vtin: 4-6 lus, Min.:81urs. Dilin.:4 hrs
Pot life at 3cre for two Not
Unitirnited
10 Not applicable 6 - 8 lu.N..,
corportent painta bl
Applicae
Tarrpozture (Resistuce
a 50°C NA STC 50°C
II
(mnuenum) Dr! service Dry service Dry servicee Dry service
Page 5378 of 8516

ENGINEERS
02-
d5 INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Slil
• ol I Indp(1,3king,
TABLE No, 6.2 FINI
SL
DESCRITTION F-2 F-3 F-dAili F-6C
rio
Acrylic Odorinatexl High build coal
Epoxy-Iltab Build Selvent lens
1 Technical nane Polyureihane rubber based owing tv ePoxY
cpoxy oaattitg
fiaish pairt fiaish pai nt cootiag,
Single pack 1-6A Two-pack Two .,Ick, Two .act
plasticised Aroruatic amine ''' . _ . . ''''
cured with poryamute
Two-pack oblerin.sted eurcd epo>y resin Amiine
cured epoxy
aliplunie rubber based Inediurn suitably Adduct
Type ind resin blended
isacynate rnedium with pigmented-
cotalvzed
itiQl.' eared acrylic cheinical and F-6B: peiyarnidle
epor, r....sin nsedrure,
foish paint. weather eured epoxy resin .
suttably surtably
resistant meclium suitably ,
pittmented pi
•L.- s. .i nt4e4
3 Voluatc Solids % .10 ± 3 382 6{±3 99±1 65±3
DFT (Dry FRIn
4 thiclutess) per ,....oat in 30-£10sr 30-40 100-125a 200-500 100-125p
microns
Thearitical covering
5 en ` in 11-15 11-15 5-6 2-3 ,-,
$-L-6,5
/r,4 /coatilitre
Weigilt Pes iikr ff' 1.150.03 1.15±0.03 1.4210.03 1.40-10.03 1:10:k0li3

kgs4itre
Touch dry at 30ee 30 minutes 30 rninutes. 3 hrs. 3 hrs. 4 hrs.
1-1 d dry at 30°C
16 his
(max) 48 hrs
8 hrs
Full core ar 30*C (for 8 hrs 16 hrs
5 days
inunetsinni high 5 days
temperature service)
Over-coatin,g interval r.11;11.12 hrs. Ivrto.; Min,: Overright i•itia,; 8 hrs, 144in.; 24 hrs
at 30°C everni In Max.: 5 days Max.: 48 113. Max.: 5 days.
Pot lifr..lapprox.) at 6_8 hr5,
Nett 4-6 lis
10 3.0°C for two 4-6 hrs 10 tninntcs
applicable
canyenent paints
Temperature 1120°C(Dry
Resistante 80 'C 60°C servicc.), II25°C
80°C
II (minirnurn) Dry service Ilwmion - 50°C Irnrnersion
Dry service .
rein service (Imucrsion service
service)
Page 5379 of 8516

ENGINEERS
in lluN ld E.O.T. CRANE Page 11 of 14
TAB Na. 5.3 Ft1VISH PAINTS
1 1 N1 F-A F-9 F-11 F-12

hêcr
Self priming type ticsM ttsistant
Iltat rtsistant
urfact telerant tic mrdium
silicone
, , .
high build epoxy Iner;artit zinc twopnck
Teclune 1 nasur . Alurnmann raint
conting (cornpktc silicatc contng Paint sititable upto
rust cultrul seitahle upta 5000c diy tonap_
coating). zerc dry temp.
A tun park air
Two pnek epory driing self euring
rcsin based solvent based
Heat tesistant
sultable Inot-tanic zhe Single pack
s)nthetic medium
pigrnented and SIlicliteceatmg with based stheaue resm
park
2 T position capeble of miThimum 8" zinc . . . based medium
, ,, Alumunum pont with mominium
Klbering to conten1 can ary rarn
sutable upto
ari ua I I y
ITI The Enal cure of ankei.
250PC
prepared surface the dry film diall
and old coutuag. pass the MEK mb
test.
3 Volume Solids "A. 78+1 60+3 3M4O.03 2 ''''
DFT (Dry Film
4 thxlc.ncss) per uunit in 100-125 0.5-75g 15-20g 15-2014
m crans
Theoritied coverinir
5 capazity in heicoati 15.0-7.2 8-9 10-12 8-10
itre 4
Weight per Iner in 1.00+0 03
1A1+0.03 2340.03 0.95+4.03
kgsThare
Touch dry at 30°C 30 minutes.
3 hrs. 30 minmes. 3 hrs.
(rnaxinsum)
1 farti dry at 30°C
(mastinnun) 24 hrs 12 12 hrs 24 hrs
8 Full ;ure 30°C (for
immersion /high Sdays "NA NA NA
temperature service)
Min.: 1,2 hrs.at 20°C
Ovcr-coatingintental f'10 hrs Min. 24 nrs Min.: 24 hrs
•!k. 30%R.11
Pet life ai 30°C for two Nu aapplicxblc Not applk.ahle
10 90 minutcs. 4.6 lu.
component paints
Temperntire 80 °C 400°C 2 0°C 500°C
Rasistance (ux I E:try service Dry scryke Dry service Dry service
Page 5380 of 8516

IA,2A ENGINEERS
Iii laWs INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-48-0002 Rev. 6
I .0,1 ”t lindertakmg,
TABLE No. 6A FINISIR FAINTS
51. I
DESCR1PTION F-14 F-15 F-16 F-17
No
Ambient temperature
unOR Polv Silaxane
Two-corriponent '
cn.„."-. ,,,,,, b id Two contponent
Epoxy phenolie cvs'" —.5''' - 111 . SOI'Vent flree type
cold appbed inorgante
g cured with
coatin high build epoxy
copolymer based
Polyarnine cured Polyarnine adduct . . pheaolicfnovalac
I Technical name aluminturn coating
coal mr epoxy bardner systern . epoxy phenolic
stutable for under
(primer + coatlig cured with
insulation coating
intermediate coat °f Pol ine add utt
CS and SS piping for tur
+ linisb paint) high dner system
temperature
service.
Two pack ambient Two cninpofte
Spec1ally
temperature curing Amerceat 738 front tOlveid frOe type
fortradatcd epoxy phenolic PPG Protective & high build epoxy
polyarnin
e cured .. ,
coatmg system Manne Coattngs or phenolicinovalae
2 ' Type & coposition
m coal Mr eprocy . ..
suitabie for Interthent 7S1 CSA of epenty phenolic
suitable for coating cured with
uppliea(ion under lotemational (Aizzo
application under inwatiott
of Nobc1).NO4C: 6 Polyarniac addot:t
insulation
CS/SS piping hardner system
3 Volurne Solids Vo 7 0±3 70±3 6012 98-100
OFT (Dry Film
4 thickricss)per coat in 100-125 75-100E 75-100 125- 150
uniroos
Theorki cal covering
5 capacity in M2 feoati 5-8 4-5 7,0- 9.0 6.5 - 8
litre
Weight per Itter in
6 1.451-0.03 1,6510,03 1,3 1.7
kgsflite (inix palhlt)
Touch dry at 30°C 1 hr 2 hrs
7 4 hrs 3 hrs
(rnardmurn)
Hard dry ar 301`C
(maximuni) 24 hrs 24 hrs 16 hrs 24 hrs
Fu11 cure 30°C (for
immersion ihigh 168 hrs (7 days) 168 hrs (7 days) .. 168 hrs (7 days)
temp. service)
Over-coating interval Min. 6 hrs Min. 36 hrs Min.16 hrs Min. 16 hrs
9 fvtax.2I d Max, Not appl icable Max.2 1 days
Max.5 days
Pot life at 30°C for
10 two cemponent 4 hrs 4-6 hrs I hr 1 hr
paints
Temperature a) upto 400 °C for C.
Resistaate Steel & S. Steel for
.45°C to 150°C
-45°C to 125°C i inertherrn 751 CSA
under insulation & -45°C to 150°C for
11 under insulation b) upto 480 "'C for C. - .
immersion & upto 600 0(. ., amrnersloiri service
And irrunersion Steel
NOlt: 5)
for S. Steel for
Amercoat 738
Page 5381 of 8516

ENGINEERS
FOR
SIJ1 IMJ e
—g INDIA LIMITED 6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Govt t
NOTES (for tables 6. I to 6.4):
I. Covering capacity and DFT depends on method of application. Covering capacity

specified abovc are thcoretical. Allowing thc losses during application, min specified
DFT should be rnaintained.
2. All primers and finish coats be eold cured and air drying un]ess otherwise
specified.
3. All paints shall be applied In accordance with manufacturer's instructions for surface
preparation, intervals, euring and application. The surface preparation, quality and
workmanship should be ensured. In case of conflict between this specification and
manufacturer's recornrnendation, the same shall be clarificd through EIL SMMS
department,
4. Technical data sheets for all paints shall be supplied at the time of subrnission of
quotations.
5. F-I5: Two-component Epoxy phenolie coating cured with Polyamine adduct hardner
system (primer + interrnediate coat + finish paint) suitable upto 225°C (Intertherm 228
from M/s Alzzo Nobcl Coatings India Pvt Ltd. Bangalore). For all other companies, the
temperature resistanee shall be a maximum of 1 50°C.
6. F-16: Ambient temperature ctxring epoxy poly siloxane Coating or high build cold
applied inorganic co-polymer based aluminiurn coating.
Amereoat 738 from PPG Protective & Marine coatings. Mumbai, is suitable up to
480°C for CS surfaces and 600°C for SS surfaces.
Intertherm 751 from Akzo Nobel Coatings India Pvt Ltd. Bangalore, Inorganic co-
polym er cold applied Aluminium spray coaaing iis suitable upto 400°C of CS & SS
surfaces.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — Ali rights reserved
Page 5382 of 8516

ENGINEERS
ul INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-48-0002 Rev. 6
iAi,rM of Indo Undett.31,,n,4i
ANNEXURE-I
LIST OF RECOMIE-NDED 3LkNITACTURERS
Indian Vendors
Asian Paints (I) Ltd., Mtunbai

Berger Paints Ltd_, .Kolkata
3 Good1ass Neroiac Paints Ltd., Mumbai
4. Cheinguard Coatings, Muinbai(For Ameron. USA Products orly)
5. Chokugu Manne paints Pte. Ltd., Mumbai/Singapore
6. Shalimar Paints Ltd., Kolkata
7. Sigina Coatings„. Minnbai.
8. CDC Carboline Ltd.: Chennai
9. Prcriner products Ltd., M.umbai
1 0. Coromandel Paints & Chemicals Ltd., Visakhapatnam
11_ Anupani Enterprise-, 'Kolicata
12_ Grand Polycoats, Vadodata
13_ Bombay Paints Ltd., Munibai
14. Akzo Nobel Coatings and Sealants Pv. Ltd.. Bangalore
15_ Cipy Polyurethanes Pvt. Ltd, Pune
16. Gunjan Paints Ltd , Ahmedabad
1'7. Advance Paints Ltd., Munibai
1. 8_ VCM Polyurethane Paints (for polyurethane paints .only)
19. Jomn Paints, Chennai(Singapore)
20_ Chembond Chemicals Ltd, Navi Mumbai
Vendors
1. Sigma Coatings, S'-ngapore

2. Ameroa, USA
3, Kiinsai Paints., Japan
4_ Hempel Paints, USA
5. Valspar Corporation., USA
6. Akzo NobelInternational Coafings, UK
7. Jotun Painft, Singapore
Frir ni.-lunnidifientinn equipment (nn Rent21 Rasis)
l. Techniral Drying Equipment (Asia) Pvt_ Limited Gurgaon. Haryana
- g chenuc
The fo1iomg are approved vendors for speciality items (phosphatin .
1. Mark-chem Incorporated, Mumbai

2_Cbemtreat India Ltd., Nav: Mumbai
Page 5383 of 8516

lalfMa-e? =1.) ENGINEERS FOR 6-48-0003 Rev. 4
$fa 051-eg INDIA LIMITED
H.O.T. CRANE
10 s IA Goo of Indo Underlakong)
Page 1 of 9
vwatit. tR. *FA-Q- aTrww fe4-41TR-

H.O.T. CRANE
4 01.04.16 REVISED AND REISSUED
1 05/08/99 REVISED AND REISSUED AK SMA NN AS
0 28/12/94 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION AK SSC DKD AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5384 of 8516

■_7itti ENGINEERS FOR 6-48-0003 Rev. 4
$ig-ar acs INDIA LIMITED H.O.T. CRANE
aitE, el0000 +151,plira11 (A Govt of India Gneleitalong) Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
CI Cast Iron
CS Cast Steel
CT •. Cross Travel
HTB •. High Tensile Brass
IS •. Indian Standard
LT Long Travel
QA •. Quality Assurance
SWL •. Safe Working Load
Members Mr P.Bhattacharjee
Mr Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr P.P Pandey
Mr Nalin Kumar
Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr R R Srivastava
Mr J S Duggal
Mr KC Paikar
Mr A Natarajan
Page 5385 of 8516

ENGINEF_RS
NE FOR 6-48-0003 Rev. 4
ogeir vtordg
eletfAZ f013,10.0
INDIA LI
(A Govt Of India undertaiong) H.O.T. CRANE Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 9
Copyright EIL — AU rights reserved

Page 5386 of 8516

a
. loi ei ENGINEERS FOR
err 0151-eg
1.2712:1271517M,7717.11
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) H.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0003 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Hand Operated Overhead Travelling (H.O.T.)
Crane, complete with all accessories.
2.1 This standard is based on the following Indian Standard, and the standards referred therein,
which shall be deemed to be part of this standard:
IS 28 : Phosphor Bronze Ingots and Castings
IS 304 : High Tensile Ingots and Castings
IS 305 : Aluminium Bronze Ingots and Castings
IS:807 : Code of Practice for Design, manufacture, erection and testing

(structural portion) of cranes and hoists.
IS:3177 : Code of Practice for Electric Overhead Travelling Cranes and

Gantry Cranes other than Steel Work Cranes. (As applicable)
IS:3443 : Crane Rail Sections.
IS:3832 : Hand-operated Chain Pulley Block-Specification.
IS: 15560 : Specification for Point hooks with shank up to 160 Tonne.
EIL Std.-7-76-0103 : Instructions to vendor for site performance guarantee

requirements for packaged units.
Latest revision of the above-mentioned standards as on the date of enquiry shall be

applicable. For hazardous area application, following additional standards shall also govern.
practices and norms of the industry shall be applicable.
Technical requirements of H.O.T Crane shall be as per Indian Standards referred in clause2.1
above, subject to the following additions, deletions and modifications:
3.1 Addition / Deletion / Modifications to IS-3177: 1999 (Reaffirmed 2006)
i) Clause no..4.2.b (Deletion): Clause deleted.
ii) Clause no..4.2.f (Deletion): The part "such as motors" from sentence deleted.
iii) Clause no. 7.4.8 (Deletion): Clause deleted.
iv) Clause no. 8.1.2 (Modification): Hook latch shall be provided on all hooks.
v) Clause no. 8.3 (Deletion): Clause deleted.
Page 5387 of 8516

ENGINEERS
ei FOR
igejr 051as'' INDIA LIMITED 6-48-0003 Rev. 4
OtriO1 2 2 I 2'MI J‘105.1 (A Govt of India UnOntalong) H.O.T. CRANE Page 5 of 9
vi) Clause no. 8.4 (Deletion): Clause deleted.

vii) Clause no. 8.5 (Deletion): Clause deleted.
viii) Clause no. 8.6.1 (Addition): Wheels for Bridge shall be double flanged with tread and
flange machined accurately to size and flanges tapered and radiused. The wheels shall
be of single piece type. However for cranes working in hazardous area, wheels with
tyre of non ferrous metallurgy as specified in cl. no. 3.6 below shall be provided.
ix) Clause no. 8.6.3 (Modification): Wheel hardness shall not be applicable for hazardous
area Cranes having HTB/Aluminium bronze tyred wheels.
x) Clause no. 8.6.4 (Modification): For Cranes working in hazardous areas, wheels shall
be provided with HTB/Aluminium bronze tyres. The minimum thickness of tyres shall
be 30 mm at the tread.
xi) Clause no. 8.6.6 (Addition): For wheels with HTB/Aluminium bronze tyres, the
minimum tread diameter of the wheel on which the HTB/Aluminium bronze tyre is
shrunk, shall be calculated as per the formula given in IS-3177.
xii) Clause no. 8.6.11 (Addition): The width of wheel tread shall be 40mm and 20mm
greater than the rail head, for Long travel and Cross travel wheels respectively, unless
xiii) Clause no. 8.7.1 (Modification): Only anti-friction bearings shall be used. Bearing
enclosure shall be dust tight. All bearing make shall be of SKF/FAG/NTN make only.
Bearing caps/nipples shall be provided with fittings for lubrication.
xiv) Clause 8.7.3 (Deletion): Clause deleted.
xv) Clause 8.8.3 (Deletion): Clause deleted.
xvi) Clause 8.11.2 (Modification): Buffers shall be made from resilient plastic , rubber or
polyurethane.
xvii) Clause 8.12 (Deletion): Clause deleted.
xviii) Clause 9.1 (Deletion): From second paragraph the sentence "suitable guards shall be
provided on the down shop lead side to prevent accidental contact between wire ropes
or hook block or lifting attachments and live conductors" shall be deleted.
xix) Clause 9.2 (Deletion): The term "electrical" deleted.
xx) Clause 9.3 (Deletion): The term "electrical" deleted.
xxi) Clause 11.2.b (Deletion): Clause deleted.
xxii) Clause 11.4.f (Deletion): Clause deleted.
xxiii) Clausel2 to 25 (Section 3) (Deletion): Clause deleted.
xxiv) Clause 26.2 (Deletion): The term "electrical" deleted.
xxv) Clause 26.3.10 to 26.3.17 (Deletion): Clause deleted.
xxvi) Clause 28.1 & 2(Deletion): Clause deleted.
xxvii) Clause 28.3 (Modification): Load test shall be carried out to the extent applicable for
H.O.T crane.
3.2 Addition / Deletion / Modification to IS 807: 2006
i) Clause no. 24.1 (Addition): End carriage shall be made from rolled steel sections
welded together to form a box. The design shall be such that the load is uniformly
distributed. For the attachment of end carriages to the main girders, gusset plates or
diagonal bracings shall be employed to provide lateral strength.
Page 5388 of 8516

a

ENGINEERS FOR
ligarfa41--eg . .-1 1NDIA LIMITED 6-48-0003 Rev. 4
I .1R7f,E2bri• MIORI,31) IA Govt ot India Undertaiong) H.O.T. CRANE Page 6 of 9
End carriages shall be designed so as to enable the track wheels to be withdrawn

readily. Jacking pads shall be provided for jacking up the crane for changing crane
wheels.
ii) Clause no. 24.2 (Addition): Square bar type rail may be provided for LT motion, if
specified in data sheet.
3.3 Addition / Deletion / Modification to IS 3832: 2005 (along with Amendment no. 1,
December 2005)
i) Clause no. 4.2.1 (Modification): Mechanism class 2 shall be considered for design of
chain pulley Block unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
ii) Clause no. 11.2 (Modification): The chain pulley block shall carry ISI (BIS) stamp.
iii) Clause no.5.1 (Addition): The frame shall be built from steel plates with
bolted/welded construction.
iv) Clause no. 5.2 (Addition): All gears shall be machine cut.
v) Clause no. 5.5 (Addition): Only anti friction bearing shall be used.
vi) Clause no. 5.6 (Modification): The block shall be provided with adequate facilities for
lubrication and same shall be clearly indicated in the maintenance manual.
vii) Clause no. 5.7.1 (Addition): Hooks (both top and bottom) shall be provided with
safety latches to prevent accidental unhooking unless otherwise stated.
viii) Clause no. 5.7.1.2 (Modification): First line to be modified as "Bottom hook shall be
provided with thrust bearing to enable it to rotate freely under load so as to prevent
twisting of the load chain.
ix) Clause no. 5.10.3 (Modification): The length of hand chain shall be such that the
lowest point of the suspended loop shall be 400 mm above operating level.
x) Clause no. 5.11 (Addition): The trolley for the chain pulley block shall be geared type,
fabricated construction, 4 wheeled, driven by hand chain and shall have provision for
mounting the chain pulley block. Trolley shall be designed to suit the suitable joist
size and the hoisting capacity.
3.4 Addition requirements
i) The Crane may be under slung type if specifically asked in data sheet. For under slung
cranes, geared type four wheeled trolley shall be provided. The wheels/runner shall be
suitable for the flange of the I sections used for the girders.
ii) The bridge drive assembly shall consist of reduction gear assemblies with shaft
extensions and couplings to connect the bridge cross shaft extensions to truck wheels.
The travelling motion shall be communicated by endless hand chain wheel to a steel
cross shaft, positively driving one travelling wheel in each end carriage. The cross
shaft shall be suitably supported. The wheels and cross shaft shall have roller/ball
bearings.
iii) Cross traversing motion shall be transmitted through suitable gearing by an endless
hand chain and chain wheel.
3.5 The following material shall be used for construction of various parts of the crane.
SL
Name of Part Material
No.
1. Girder CS weldable quality as per IS 2062 (100% Radiography to
be taken on all Butt welded joints)
2. End carriage CS weldable quality as per IS 2062
Page 5389 of 8516

15digtTre? ENGINEERS FOR 6-48-0003 Rev. 4
laWeg
Mn5retalaclirail
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undenalongl H.O.T. CRANE Page 7 of 9
SL
Name of Part Material
No.
3. Hand chain wheel for CI grade 25 of IS 210, or fabricated steel or pressed steel
trolley metal.
4. Hand chain for LT Grade L3 as per IS 2429
and Trolley
5. CT trolley CS weldable quality as per IS:2062
6. Rails for LT Crane rails as per IS: 3443 or Square Bar as per IS: 2062,
as applicable.
7. Wheels for LT 55C8 (Old designation:C55Mn75) as per IS:1570 (part
2/sec 1)
8. Gears 45C8 (Old designation :C45) as per IS:1570 (part 2/sec 1)
9. Pinions 50C4 (Old designation:C50 ) as per IS:1570 (part 2/sec 1)
10. Shafts 3008 (Old designation :C30) as per IS:1570 (part 2/sec 1)
11. Axles 45C8 (Old designation :C45) as per IS:1570 (part 2/sec 1)
12. Couplings Forged steel as per IS:1570
13. Suspension pin in the 50C4 (Old designation:C50 ) as per IS:1570 (part 2/sec 1)
trolley
All materials shall be of tested quality and shall conform to the standards as mentioned
above.
3.6 Special Requirements for Hazardous Area Cranes
3.6.1 For H.O.T. Crane to be located in hazardous area, non sparking type design features shall be
incorporated. Basic approach for such application calls for use of non-ferrous material for
one out of two mating parts for a non lubricated mating/striking pair.
3.6.2 The suggested materials for such components are as follows
Part/Component Material of Construction
A Lifting Mechanism
Ratchet wheel, chain guides Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze/ High
Tensile Brass
Hand chain wheel Solid construction of Aluminium Bronze/
Phosphor Bronze/ High Tensile Brass
Load chain wheel Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze/ High
Tensile Brass
Hook (Top & bottom) Bronze coated forged alloy steel/Forged
Stainless Steel
B Trolley Mechanism
Hand chain wheel guides Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze/
Hand chain wheel Solid construction of Aluminium Bronze/
Ungeared and geared wheels Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze/ High
or tyres, as appilcable Tensile Brass
Page 5390 of 8516

ENGINEERS /—•
fge.J1 fdf5teg 0 INDIA LIMITED T-7 FOR 6-48-0003 Rev. 4

1.1t-r ■ kolstE• 3otot.0 (A Govt India UnOettaking) H.O.T. CRANE Page 8 of 9
C LT Mechanism
Tyres of LT wheels Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze/ High
Tensile Brass
3.6.3 Phosphor Bronze, High Tensile Brass and Aluminium Bronze shall conform to IS 28, IS 304
and IS 305 respectively.
4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/sub-
vendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Approved Quality Assurance
(QA) plan shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
workmanship confirm to the requirement of this specification.
4.2.2 Testing at vendors works shall be carried out in accordance with IS:3177 and 3832 and shall
include following tests as minimum:
Full load and 125% overload test for hoist & cross travel motions at works (chain
pulley block shall be separately tested for operational proof as per cl. No. 9.2 of IS
3832).
Deflection Test at Works.
4.2.3 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorised
4.3.1 A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the performance
of the equipment after commissioning in accordance with test procedure prepared as per EIL
Standard 7-76-0103.
4.3.2 Testing at site shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 3177. Following parameters shall
be guaranteed and demonstrated during the performance testing.
i) SWL of Hoist
ii) Deflection of bridge girder
4.3.3 All parts of the crane shall operate satisfactorily with no undue friction, noise or display of
any other unfavourable characteristics during the performance test.
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as defined in Job Specification.
Page 5391 of 8516

t311 ENGINEERS FOR 6-48-0003 Rev. 4
51gat tateg INDIA LIMITED
omn maw 7:1513WITA) IA Govt of India Undertaking) H.O.T. CRANE Page 9 of 9
for site erection.
equipment.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
over to owner.
Page 5392 of 8516

101 ENGINEERS
til5eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0014 Rev. 4
OWN .1eC617 IA Govt of Inde Undenii.g) ELECTRIC WIRE ROPE HOIST Page 1 of 8
f417. ccil FA. TriFW fe4-bm-

ELECTRIC WIRE ROPE HOIST
4 01.04.16 REVISED AND REISSUED
3 29.06.10 REVISED AND REISSUED SPC PB MK/DM ND
2 31.07.06 REVISED AND REISSUED PPP AK SMA VJN
1 23.04.98 REVISED AND REISSUED PPP AK NN AS
0 22.06.90 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION GVGC NN KNP AKV

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5393 of 8516

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
$1gar Ofireg
ervage ,151.340,141
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undenawg)
FOR 6-61-0014 Rev. 4
ELECTRIC WIRE ROPE HOIST Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
BLIN Brinell Hardness Number

HTB High Tensile Brass
IS Indian Standard
QA Quality Assurance.
Members Mr P.Bhattacharjee
Mr Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr P.P Pandey
Mr Nalin Kumar
Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr R R Srivastava
Mr J S Duggal
Mr KC Paikar
Mr A Natarajan
Page 5394 of 8516

eg fd5leg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0014 Rev. 4
10,271 (A Govt of India Undenakmg)
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 7
Page 5395 of 8516

,31rae, ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
eiroweg =i INDIA LIMITED ■ No.
FOR 6-61-0014 Rev. 4
I MUT 212ZIRE,01,111.9) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 4 of 8
1.0 GENERAL
design, manufacture, test and supply the Electric Wire Rope Hoist with electric drives,
complete with all accessories.
2.1 This standard is based on following Indian Standards, and the standards referred therein,
which shall be deemed to be part of this standard.
IS 305 : Aluminium Bronze Ingots and Castings
IS - 2365 : Specification for steel wire suspension ropes for lifts, elevators
and hoists
IS - 3938 : Specification for Electric wire rope hoists
IS - 3973 : Code of Practice for selection, installation and maintenance of

wire ropes
IS - 15560 : Specification for Point hooks with shank up to 160 Tonne
EIL Std.- 7-76-0103 : Instructions to Vendor for Site Performance guarantee

Requirements for Package units.
Latest revision of the above-mentioned standards as on the date of enquiry shall be applicable.
2.3 For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable engineering practices
& norms shall govern.
Technical requirements of Electric Wire Rope Hoist shall be as per Codes and Standards
referred in clause 2.1 above, subject to the following additions, deletions and modifications:
3. 1 Addition / Deletion / Modification to IS- 3938: 1983 (Reaffirmed 2008)
i) Clause no. 1 (Addition): The type of electric wire rope hoist shall be trolley suspended,
unless otherwise specified in data sheet.
ii) Clause no. 4 (Addition): The duty class of electric wire rope hoist shall be as specified
in data sheet.
iii) Clause no. 5.7 (Addition): Creep speed, if specified in data sheets shall be provided
with one of the following means:
a) Pole changing motors
Page 5396 of 8516

15ilfgtzte ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogzirtlfgeg
elereve ana-a)
INDIA LIMITED FOR
6-61-0014 Rev. 4
IA Govt al India Undertalong)
Page 5 of 8
b) Epicyclic gear train

c) Additional gear box and clutch system.
iv) Clause no. 6.1.3 (Modification): Cast iron drums shall not be used. Drums shall be
fabricated type and stress relieved.
v) Clause no. 6.1.7 (Addition): Extra flexible plough steel wire rope as per IS:2365 with
180 kg/mm2 (minimum) strength shall be used. Rope guides shall be made of
Aluminium base alloy.
vi) Clause no. 6.1.7.1 (Modification): The minimum factor of safety of wire rope shall not
be less than 6. For hoists handling hot metal, factor of safety of wire rope shall not be
less than 8.
vii) Clause no. 6.2.1.7 (Modification): Rope sheaves and equaliser sheaves shall be either
cast steel or fabricated. Cast iron is not acceptable. Sheaves (except for equalizer) shall
be mounted on antifriction bearings.
viii) Clause no. 6.3.1 (Modification): Lifting hooks shall be as per IS: 15560. Hooks shall
be proof load tested, marked and duly certified by competent authority.
ix) Clause no. 6.3.3 (Modification): Hook shall be provided with safety latch to prevent
accidental removal of slings from the hook.
x) Clause no. 6.3.1(Addition): Suspension fittings if any other than hooks shall be of
sufficient strength to afford a static factor of safety of not less than '4'.
xi) Clause no. 7.1 (Addition): Make of bearings shall be SKF/FAG/ NTN only. All
bearing housings shall be centre split and of cast steel.
xii) Clause no. 7.3.2 (Modification): Gears shall be made of alloy steel. Cast iron is not
acceptable. Gears shall be machined in metric module. Suitable heat treatment shall
be done to achieve hardness. However, case carburising of gear teeth is not
permissible.
The gear box covers shall be made of cast steel or fabricated from plate. Stress
relieving shall be done in case of fabricated gear boxes. Covers will be split at a line
which is centre line of all gear shafts.
xiii) Clause no. 7.3.5 (Modification): All gears shall be totally enclosed in oil bath type gear
boxes.
xiv) New Clause no. 7.4.1 (Addition): Couplings shall be geared type on all power output
shafts. On power input shafts, flexible couplings (pin bush or any other suitable
couplings) shall be provided.
xv) Clause no. 7.5.1.1 (Modification): Brake shall be fail safe type. DC Electromagnetic or
AC Electro-hydraulic thrustor type brake (with anti drop circuitry for hoist motion)
shall be provided for each drive power shaft.
xvi) Clause no. 8 (Addition ): The trolley shall be of fabricated construction with carbon
steel plates.
xvii) Clause no. 8.1 (Modification): The trolley shall be motor-driven type unless otherwise
specified in data sheet. For travel, at least half of the total wheels shall be power
Page 5397 of 8516

oa r.tf tlf5ift ,65.3 INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0014 Rev. 4
1.11.2,1 7.1035,2 MIJVC1.11 IA Govt India Undertalang)
ELECTRIC WIRE ROPE HOIST Page 6 of 8
driven. The travel shall be motorised as per the requirements of data sheets. Refer
electrical specifications for motor and other electricals.
xviii) Clause no. 8.4.2 (Modification): Cast iron track wheels shall not be used. The trolley
wheels shall be of forged steel, mounted on antifriction bearings and shall be single
piece type (without tyre).The contact surface of wheels shall be heat treated to a
hardness of 250 BHN upto 10 mm depth minimum.
xix) Clause no. 9 (Addition): In case of any conflict between Electrical specifications of
Material Requisition/Tender and electrical requirements specified in the above
referred Indian Standard, the former shall prevail.
xx) Clause no. 10 (Addition): The motor shall be reversible crane duty type. Unless
specified otherwise in electrical data sheet, the cycle duration factor for the motors
shall be 40% and motors shall be suitable for 300 start-stop operations per hour. The
motors shall have class F insulation.
xxi) Clause no. 11.1 (Modification): Hoist shall be provided with push button pendant
switch. Hand rope and chain as a remote control is not acceptable. Pendant height shall
be 1200 mm maximum from the operating floor level.
xxii) Clause no. 15.2 (Addition): A back up gravity type limit switch for over hoisting shall
be provided for class-4 duty hoist.
xxiii) New Clause no. 15.5 (Addition): Limit switches shall also be provided for over
traversing (both sides).
3. 2 Special Requirements for Hazardous Area Hoists
i) All Wheels shall be provided with High Tensile Brass (IS-304)/Aluminium Bronze
(IS- 305) tyres.
ii) Any mechanism where two non-lubricated parts mate, one of them shall be of non-
ferrous material like HTB as per IS 304 or Aluminium Bronze as per IS 305.
iii) All electrical components/equipments shall meet the requirements of respective area
classification.
4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/sub-
vendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall submit Quality
Assurance (QA) plan before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA plan shall form the
basis for equipment inspection.
workmanship conform to the requirement of Clause 20 of IS-3938.
4.2.2 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorised
Page 5398 of 8516

1511RTA ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
s24,1 tli5teg
lawn rrzox¢CA)
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 7 of 8
43.1 A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the performance of
the equipment after commissioning in accordance with test procedure prepared as per EIL
Standard 7-76-0103.
the Hoists after commissioning as per clause 21 of IS-3938 . Following parameters shall be
guaranteed.
i) SWL of Hoist
ii) Hoisting/Lowering Speed.
433 All parts of the hoist shall operate satisfactorily with no undue friction, noise or display of any
other unfavourable characteristics during the performance test.
43.4 All equipment and component parts shall be guaranteed by the vendor against defective
43.5 If any defect occurs during the guaranteed period the Vendor shall make all necessary
43.6 Necessary instruments for the performance testing shall be arranged by the vendor, and shall
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as defined in Job Specification.
6.1 All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment may be
for site erection.
equipment.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
Page 5399 of 8516

il~el
OgelltatWes U INDIA LIMITED
1.11VPI2.12Z6R ,710.1) (A Goyt of IndA UnOeftalong)
FOR 6-61-0014 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 8
over to owner.
Page 5400 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS FOR
Ogeir EVreg INDIA LIMITED
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK
6-61-0015 Rev. 5
RAM 217.17 MI JVMSI (A Govt of India Undenak.n9) Page 1 of 6
. r.
■11•711011-q -q71§11' KIM IzR

1-111ch i ci

CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK
CliktiolA0- J
Ml e-4. 1\frjr
5 14/12/16 REVISED AND REISSUED AK PB
' KC PLC/ RN
4 01/08/12 REVISED AND REISSUED SPC PB AKN DM
1 10/04/99 REVISED AND REISSUED YKS MST NN AS

ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RCPC
0 22/06/90 GVGC NN KNP
(RECOMPOSED IN AUGUST 1995)
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5401 of 8516

ENGINEERS
(A Goof of India Undertaking)
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
Members: Mr. P. Bhattacharjee

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anukul Mandal
Mr. J.S. Duggal
Mr. K.C. Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
Page 5402 of 8516

$50-zeMENGINEIRS
- INDIA UNITED
g.artaiileg w FOR 6-61-0015 Rev. 5
1.41414 PRO4 ....10wiso IA Go. of InOn Undettaiung)
Contents
1.0 GENERAL 4
7.0 SPARE PARTS 6
Page 5403 of 8516

00z:1E4M, ENGINEERS
ligar tagteg W.INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0015 Rev. 5
warn *wow,.
„memo 0, Goo 01 ,o0o UNIerta.g)
1.0 GENERAL
design, manufacture, test and supply the Chain Pulley Block with or without trolley.
2.1 This standard is based on following Indian Standard, and the standards referred therein,
which shall be deemed to be part of this standard.
IS - 3832 Hand operated Chain Pulley Blocks- Specification.
Latest revision of the above-mentioned standard as on the date of enquiry shall be applicable.
2.3 For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable engineering practices
& norms shall govern.
Technical requirements of Chain Pulley Block shall be as per Indian standards referred in
clause 2.1 above, subject to the following additions, deletions and modifications:
i) Clause no. 4.2.1 (Modification): Mechanism class 2 shall be considered for design of
chain pulley Block unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
ii) Clause no. 5.0 (Addition): Chain Pulley Block shall be detachable type suitable for
mounting on geared trolleys of the same ratings/capacities, unless otherwise specified
in job specification/data sheet.
iii) Clause no. 5.1 (Addition): The frame shall be built from steel plates with
bolted/welded construction.
iv) Clause no. 5.2 (Addition): All gears shall be machine cut.
v) Clause no. 5.5 (Modification): Only anti friction bearing shall be used. Bearing shall
have L 10 life of minimum 25000 hrs. Bearings shall be of SKF/FAG/ NTN make only.
vi) Clause no. 5.6 (Modification): The block shall be provided with adequate facilities for
lubrication and same shall be clearly indicated in the maintenance manual.
vii) Clause no. 5.7.1(Addition): Hook(s) (top -if applicable and bottom) shall be provided
with safety latches to prevent accidental unhooking unless otherwise stated.
viii) Clause no. 5.7.1.2 (Modification): First line to be modified as "Bottom hook shall be
provided with thrust bearing to enable it to rotate freely under load so as to prevent
twisting of the load chain.
Page 5404 of 8516

051Weift
. ENGINEERS
4fgeg WegViifII IA ED FOR 6-61-0015 Rev. 5
MR, PRIEDers.,1121., IA Go. d loft Undertalung
ix) Clause no. 5.10.3 (Modification): The length of hand chain shall be such that the
lowest point of the suspended loop shall be 400 mm (maximum) above operating
level.
x) Clause no. 5.11 (Addition): The trolley for the chain pulley block shall be geared type,
fabricated construction, 4 wheeled, driven by hand chain and shall have provision for
mounting the chain pulley block. Trolley shall be designed to suit the suitable
monorail beam size and the hoisting capacity.
xi) Clause no. 11.1 (Addition): Following shall also be marked on Chain Pulley block:
a) Tag number.
b) "Non Sparking Type" on chain pulley block suitable for hazardous area
classification.
3.2 For offshore applications, load, hand and trolley chains shall be galvanized.
3.3 Special Requirements for Hazardous Area Chain Pulley Block
The materials for non-lubricated rubbing parts shall be of non-sparking type (non- ferrous).
The suggested materials for such components are as follows:
Part/Component Material of Construction
A Lifting Mechanism
Ratchet wheel, chain guides Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS -

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS - 304)
Hand chain wheel Solid construction of Aluminium Bronze/ High

Tensile Brass (IS- 304)/ Phosphor Bronze (IS-
28)
Load chain wheel Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS -

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS - 304)
Hook (Top & bottom) Bronze coated Forged Steel / bronze coated
Forged alloy Steel/Forged Stainless Steel.
B Trolley Mechanism
Hand chain wheel guides Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS-

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS-304)/ Phosphor
Bronze (IS-28)
Hand chain wheel Solid construction of Aluminium Bronze (IS-

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS-304)/ Phosphor
Bronze (IS-28)
Ungeared and geared wheels Solid construction in Aluminium Bronze (IS -

305)/ High Tensile Brass (IS - 304) or tyre of
Aluminium Bronze (IS-305)/ High Tensile
Brass (IS-304) shrunk fitted on core wheel of
C55Mn75.

vendor's/subvendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall
Page 5405 of 8516

5ittaziel-IkENONEERS
Og taiReg W INDIA LIMITED
A2W701AAP.) (A Go. d MO. Undettaidow
FOR
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK
6-61-0015 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 6
submit Quality Assurance (QA) procedures before commencement of fabrication. Approved

4.2.1 Vendor shall perform operational Proof Test, as a minimum, necessary to ensure that the
material and workmanship conform to the requirement of Clause 9.2 of IS- 3832.
4.2.2 The trolley (if applicable) shall be tested for smooth operation under loaded condition.
4.2.3 Certificate of test and examination shall be issued with all the chain pulley blocks as
specified in clause 10.2 of IS — 3832.
4.2.4 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorized
5.1 Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per vendor's standard painting suitable for
corrosive industrial environment, unless otherwise specified in the Job Specification.
be properly packed to provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be
properly match marked for site erection.
equipment, item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing
equipment.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
7.2 Recommended spares and their quantities shall take into account related factors of equipment
reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts and
availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
Page 5406 of 8516

kSiliaeiti-ia
= -m
6,ENGINEERS FOR
Oge.11 WI INDIA LIMITED 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
Govt of India Undertaking) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Page 1 of 31.
cm-Hot:hem
f=471 Trr-4-w irdi4-br
FOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Note: This Standard Specification supersedes Standard Specification No: 6-37-0013 (Rev.4)
C
Awn-CA 1'4iC:!
1
" A
0 25/09/2013 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SD/4?-44'3 PPP PB DM
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5407 of 8516

t31 ENGINEERS
Ogal fetiateg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
lAkekt ,rvitnerl
erienve IA Govt 01 Incite Undertaking)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Page 2 of 31
Abbreviations:
AHU Air Handling Unit

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
AHRI Air-conditioning & Heating Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
BS British Standards
CRCA Cold Rolled Closed Annealed
DX Direct Expansion
GI Galvanised Iron
GSS Galvanised Steel Sheet
HVAC Heating, Ventilation & Air-conditioning
IS Indian Standard
ISHRAE Indian Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
MCC Motor Control Centre
NC Noise Criterian
OISD Oil Industry Safety Directorate
SS Stainless Steel
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association
TR Ton of Refrigeration
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories

Mr. PP Pandey
Mr. Shishupal Choudhury
Mr. K. C. Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu, (Projects)
Page 5408 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ige.,afEilMeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
INKT1 ereTRZOI391:1.1) IA Govt of India UnOettalong)
Abbreviations:
AHU Air Handling Unit

AHRI Air-conditioning & Heating Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
CRCA Cold Rolled Closed Annealed
DX Direct Expansion
GI Galvanised Iron
GSS Galvanised Steel Sheet
HVAC Heating, Ventilation & Air-conditioning
IS Indian Standard
MCC Motor Control Centre
NC Noise Criterion
SS Stainless Steel
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association
TR Ton of Refrigeration
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
TPI Third party Inspection
VOC Volatile Organic Compound

Mr. PP Pandey
Mr. Shishupal Choudhury
Mr. K. C. Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu, (Projects)
Page 5409 of 8516

4?—.1 ENGINEERS
(.11R'n arms all ) IA GoA of India Undertaking) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Page 3 of 32
CONTENTS Page No.
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS 4
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS .5
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING .27
6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION .28
7.0 SPARE PARTS ..28
8.0 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES .28
APPENDIX 1 INSULATION MATERIAL AND THICKNESS
APPENDIX 2 COLD INSULATION OF PIPING
APPENDIX 3 DUCT INSULATION

Page 5410 of 8516

t_Silfaeitil"i ENGINEERS
r INDIA LIMITED
Jr fa fileg iq•uv FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
(000RelETRIZMI3M7.1) Govt of Infha Gnfte0ak.ft91
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification outlines the minimum requirements for design, engineering,
manufacture, inspection, testing, painting, supply, erection, commissioning and
performance testing of air-conditioning system, complete with all accessories.
1.2 The Heat Load Calculation shall be carried out individually for all the Building as listed in
Job Specification as per ASHRAE / Carrier Standards.
2.0 CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
IS:659 Safety code for Air conditioning.
IS:660 Safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
IS:655 Specification for Air ducts
IS:2494 (Part-1) V-Belts - Endless V-Belts for Industrial Purposes - Part 1 : General
Purpose - Specification
IS:2494 (Part-2) V-belts - Endless V-belts for industrial purposes-Part 2 Fire resistant
and antistatic V-belts - Specification
IS:3142 Pulleys-V-Grooved Pulleys for Endless V-Belts Sections Z, A, B, C,
D and E and Endless Wedge Belts Sections SPZ, SPA, SPB and SPC -
Specification
IS:1239 (Part 1) Steel Tubes, Tubular and Other Wrought Steel Fittings - Specification
- Part 1 : Steel Tubes
IS:3589 Steel Pipes for Water and Sewage (168.3 to 2 540 mm Outside
Diameter)
IS:277 Galvanized Steel Sheets (Plain and Corrugated)
IS:2062 Hot Rolled medium and high tensile structural steel
IS:4894 Centrifugal fans
IS:8148 Packaged Air Conditioners
ISO 15138 HVAC for Offshore Production and Installation
OISD STD 163 Safety of Control Room for Hydrocarbon Industry
ANSUISA-S71.04 Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control
Systems: Airborne Contaminants
AHRI-450 Performance Rating of water cooled refrigerant condensers, Remote
Type
AHRI-460 Performance Rating of remote mechanical draft air cooled refrigerant
condensers.
AHRI-480 Performance Rating of Remote Type Refrigerant-Cooled Liquid
Coolers
AHRI-520 Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units
AHRI-550/590 Performance Rating of Water Chilling Packages using Vapour
Compression Cycle.
AHRI-560 Absorption Water Chilling and Water Heating Packages.
Page 5411 of 8516

ENGINEERS
faftg w INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
IA Govt Al Ina. Undertaking) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Page 5 of 32
ATC-105 Acceptance test code for water-cooling tower

ASME Section Boiler and Pressure vessel code- Pressure Vessels.
VIII Div.I
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.
ASTM B-111 Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloys Seamless
Condenser Tubes and Ferrule Stock.
ASTM B-359 Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloys Seamless
Condenser and Heat Exchanger Tubes with Integral Fins.
ASTM B-280 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tubes for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
ASTM A516 Specification for pressure vessel plates, carbon steels, for moderate
and low temperature service.SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association-HVAC Duct
Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.
AMCA-210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic
Performance Rating.
ASHRAE Handbooks of:
- Fundamentals.
- HVAC Systems and Equipments.
- HVAC Applications.
- Refrigeration.

BS EN 779 Particulate air filters for general ventilation — Determination of the
filtration performance.
UL-555 Specification for safety for fire dampers
UL-555S Specification for safety for smoke dampers
NFPA-90A Standard for Installation of Air-conditioning and Ventilation Systems
6-41-0003 Standard Specification for Centrifugal Pumps (Water Service)
applicable.
superior to those listed above, with prior approval of Purchaser.
2.4 National laws and statutory provisions, together with any local by-laws for the state
wherein the Air-conditioning system is required to be installed shall be complied with.
3.1 Duty
All equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation of 8000 hrs. per year. System shall
be designed for minimum 20 years life unless otherwise specified in bidding documents.

Page 5412 of 8516

In~tllc9 ENGINEERS
51g-ar 2154 INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
1.11V1 2.1ETUFZ ,013,1trA) IA Govt of InOta Undertaking)
3.2 Refrigerant
Refrigerant shall be as specified in the Job Specification / Datasheet.
3.3 Refrigerant Compressor for Vapour Compression System
3.3.1 Based on the capacity & selection criteria as specified in job specification for Air-
conditioning machine, the following types for compressor shall be selected :
• Reciprocating or Scroll Compressor

• Screw Compressor
• Centrifugal Compressor
3.3.2 Compressor (for the offered model) shall have proven track record of satisfactory operation
for a minimum period of 8000 hours for similar application.
3.3.3 Special Requirement for Screw Compressor :
3.3.3.1 The compressor shall be equipped with automatic unloaded starting arrangement. It shall
have automatic sliding valve capacity control arrangement actuated through suction
pressure sensor.
3.3.3.2 Economiser port may be used to improve the system efficiency & performance.
3.3.4 Special Requirement for Centrifugal Compressor :
3.3.4.1 Casing hydrostatic test pressure shall be at least 130% respectively of design pressures.
3.3.4.2 Lubrication system shall be provided as per proven vendor standard.
3.3.4.3 Variable inlet guide vanes shall be provided in the suction of compressor. Variable inlet
guide vanes shall be operated by hydraulic oil pressure/separate electric/pneumatic
motor/solenoid valve, for capacity regulation purposes. Automatic capacity regulation
feature is required on compressor along-with manually operated device.
3.3.4.4 Purge recovery unit, if required, shall be provided to efficiently separate out non-
condensable gases and moisture from refrigerant as per Manufacturer's Standard.
3.4 Electric Drive
3.4.1 All Electric drivers rating for mechanical equipment shall be rated minimum 110% of the
maximum power required at motor shaft (including transmission losses) at operating
conditions.
3.4.2 All electric drives shall be followed as per Electrical Specifications.
3.5 Condenser
3.5.1 The tubes shall not be less than 12.5 mm diameter and shall be adequately supported to
prevent tube vibration.
3.5.2 Condensers for 160 TR & above rated AC machines shall have water boxes & covers so
that each tube sheet can be exposed without disturbing the piping connections.
3.5.3 Air cooled condensers if specified, shall have seamless tubes and shall be complete with all
accessories including fan with drive motor, refrigerant receiver, refrigerant headers,
supports etc.
Page 5413 of 8516

. q-1 ENGINEERS
$2--ar 2154eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
1411VR el,crge a51,9.1 (A Govt of Intha UndeflakvogI
3.6 Evaporator
3.6.1 Tubes shall not be less than 12.5 mm diameter. Tubes shall be adequately supported to
prevent tube vibration.
3.6.2 Gas superheating in DX-evaporator it-self shall be ensured. Liquid entrainment to

compressor shall be restricted by suitably designed arrangement for flooded chiller.
3.6.3 Evaporators for 160 TR & above rated water chillers shall have water boxes & covers so
that each tube sheet can be exposed without disturbing the piping connections.
3.6.4 In case of chilled water system, chiller/evaporator shall be of shell and tube type (as per
TEMA standard) with shell and tube sheet material as carbon steel and tubes in copper
construction.
3.7 Refrigeration Package Assembly
3.7.1 Refrigeration package using reciprocating/scroll/centrifugal compressor shall be mounted

on a single skid comprising of compressor, drive motor, gear box, condenser, and
evaporator (applicable for chilled water system), local control panel with
gauges/indications. However, refrigeration package using screw compressor may be
furnished in two skids - One compressor skid and other comprising condenser, evaporator
(applicable for chilled water system), local control panel with gauges/indications.
3.7.2 Skid shall be designed so as to provide maintenance accessibility and operation ease of
valves and controls. Instruments shall be easily readable.
3.7.3 Lifting hook/eye shall be provided for handling of equipment during maintenance.
3.7.4 Steel structural members of the skid shall conform to IS-2062/ASTM A 36.
3.8 Special requirement for Vapour Absorption Refrigeration (VAR) System
3.8.1 Vapour Absorption Refrigeration (VAR) system shall be provided if asked for in Job
Specification.
3.8.2 The VAR Package shall comprise of condenser, absorber, evaporator &
generator/concentrator sections with pumps and other accessories in a single/ double shell
design, hermetically sealed & skid mounted, leak tested prior to shipment.
3.8.3 The machine shall be suitable for using steam/ hot water/ fuel gas as energy source for
single/ double effect depending on available heat content of energy source and Lithium
Bromide as absorbant as specified in job specification.
3.8.4 The machine shall be complete with all related piping, solution and refrigerant pumps, heat
exchangers, purging system, pre-wired control panel with all instruments, safety inter locks
& controls, pneumatic tubing, cables, valves, temperature and pressure monitoring
equipment, measuring system for the important performance parameters such as steam
consumption, cooling water flow rate in/ out temperatures, chilled water flow rate in / out
temperatures, condensate temperature etc. and annunciation panel. The machine shall be
suitable for fully automatic operation down to 20% turndown capacity.
3.8.5 Condensate from all the VAR units shall be collected into a condensate receiver. Design
capacity, temperature & pressure of the receiver shall be based on steam demand during
operation. Hold-up of the receiver shall be minimum 15 minutes based on maximum
capacity.
Page 5414 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogem id5teg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
WWI 2i2GIA2,7513,7.7.1) IA Govt of India Undertakm)
3.8.6 The control valve to regulate the amount of heat energy to machine shall be fail close type.
3.8.7 Tube materials shall be 90/10 Cu/Ni for all exchangers, except for generator which shall be
of Stainless Steel SS-316L/SS-430Ti.
3.8.8 Vessels under partial vacuum shall be designed for full vacuum.
3.8.9 Machine shall have control system to prevent Crystallization / over-concentration of

Lithium Bromide solution and cavitation of refrigerant pump.
3.8.10 Isolating valves shall be provided on both sides of refrigerant and solution pumps so that
these pumps can be taken out for maintenance without loss of vacuum in the machine.
3.8.11 Hot fluid in-rush on start-up of machine shall be maximum 120% of full load requirement.
Vendor shall indicate the utilities consumption on full load and at part load operation.
3.9 Air Handling Unit
3.9.1 The air-handling unit shall be of double skin construction with sandwiched insulation
between the two sheets/skins. The air handling unit shall comprise of filter section, damper
section, heating section (if required), humidifier section (if required), cooling coil section,
fan section and drain pan.
3.9.2 Cooling coil shall be minimum 4 rows deep and shall be selected for a maximum face
velocity of 2.5 m/s. Coils tube shall be of copper with aluminium fins (12-13 fins/inch). In
case of chilled water system, water velocity in cooling coil shall not exceed 1.80 m/s.
3.9.3 For direct expansion units, damper section shall have face & bypass dampers. Bypass area
shall not be less than 1/4th of the face area. Face and bypass damper shall be operated by
modulating motor and proportionate thermostat. Chilled water cooling coil shall be
equipped with flow control valve with modulating temperature controller and globe valve
in bypass.
3.9.4 Fan section will have centrifugal type backward curved bladed fan with electric motor. Fan
rotating assembly shall be dynamically balanced.
3.9.5 Fan outlet velocity shall be restricted within 9.2 m/s.
3.9.6 Fire resistant canvas connection with metallic flanges shall be provided between fan outlet
& duct.
3.9.7 Taper lock pulleys shall be provided with antistatic V-belts for drive.
3.9.8 Drain pans for condensate shall be of stainless steel construction and thermally insulated.
Water seal shall be provided in the drain outlet.
3.9.9 All damper linkage arrangement (automatic/manual) shall be of SS 304 material.
3.10 Air Filters
3.10.1 Pre-filter at AHU / Package AC Unit Inlet :
3.10.1.1 Filter section shall be provided with cleanable synthetic media filters
3.10.1.2 Filters shall be selected for a pressure drop of 4 mm WG maximum in clean condition.
3.10.1.3 Filters shall have filtering capacity of 90% efficiency upto 10 microns for AHU and 80%
efficiency upto 20 microns for Package Units.
Page 5415 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS
te-itit'eg
14-112,, ,oroweaswoovA/
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Into Undettaking)
FOR
6-61-0017 Rev. 0
Page 9 of 32
3.10.1.4 Inclined tube manometer with tubing shall be provided for indication of pressure drop
across the filter.
3.10.2 Fine Filter :
3.10.2.1 Fine filters if specified in Data Sheet/Job Specification shall be provided downstream of
AHU/Package Unit. Filters shall be capable of filtering dust up to 5 microns particle with
an efficiency of 95%.
3.10.2.2 Fine filters shall be selected for a pressure drop of 6.5 mm WG maximum in clean
conditions.
3.10.2.3 Inclined tube manometer with tubing shall be provided for indication of pressure drop
across fine filters.
3.10.3 Chemical Filter :
3.10.3.1 Chemical Filter shall be provided in fresh air circuit of AC system wherever specified in
Job Specification. Filtered fresh air shall be mixed with room-recirculated air before
passing through air handling unit (AI-TU) /Package AC unit.
3.10.3.2 Chemical filter unit shall be skid mounted accommodating pre filter, after filter, fresh air
fans with motors (1 working & 1 standby) and accessories including suitable canopy hood
over motor and belt drive if installed outside.
3.10.3.3 Unless otherwise specified in Job specification, Chemical filters shall be selected to capture
Group-A gases as per ISA-71.04 standard (From GX environment at outlet to GI
environment at inlet).
3.10.3.4 Chemical filter shall be designed for the chemical media life of minimum one (1) year.
Chemical filter supplier shall furnish required chemical media quantity calculations which
shall be duly vetted (signed, stamped with relevant date of submission) by media
manufacturer at post order stage.
3.10.3.5 Chemical Media shall be non flammable, suitable to work under extreme humidity and
temperature conditions as per applicable site conditions & Environmental
norms/regulations.
3.10.3.6 For Refinery and Petrochemical environment: - Two stage deep bed chemical filters shall
be provided - first bed shall contain required quantity of chemical media of activated
carbon and activated alumina as a base material, together made into number of single
pellets (i.e. each pellet made up of a mixture of activated alumina + activated carbon) with
alkali impregnation as per media manufacturer standard. Second bed shall contain required
quantity of chemical media of activated alumina pellets impregnated with oxidizing agent
such as Potassium Permanganate or Sodium Permanganate etc. as per media manufacturer
standard. Activated Carbon shall not be used in isolation in any bed and it is not permitted
either as impregnated form or as separate pellet in blend media. Chemical media in both
beds must have min. 15% moisture for effective neutralization & oxidation reactions to
take place.
3.10.3.7 The pre-filters at inlet shall be capable of removing dust particles of size above 10 microns
with minimum 90% efficiency and fine filters at outlet shall be capable of removing
particles of size above 5 microns with minimum 95% efficiency.
3.10.3.8 Chemical filter unit shall be designed/sized considering the velocity across filter media as
—0.51 m/sec (100 FPM). Quantity of chemical media shall be calculated considering above
Page 5416 of 8516

ehMi•„ )ENGINEERS FOR
51ga tiOtag INDIA LIMITED 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
own ewasreasuffirm IA Govt of Ineha UnOettaiong)
velocity with residence time furnished and guaranteed by chemical media manufacturer for
the proposed media.
3.10.3.9 Unit shall be suitable for outdoor/indoor installation (as applicable) & for continuous
operation. It shall be painted as per painting specifications.
3.10.3.10 For outdoor located chemical filter units, fan shall be in blow through mode (Forced Draft)
with respect to chemical filter media. For indoor installations fan shall be in Induced Draft
mode with respect to chemical filter media. Intake of Fresh Air only through main HVAC
blower is not acceptable.
3.10.3.11 Chemical filter unit should have adequate provision for easy removal & servicing of filter
packs. Necessary handholes / Media filling nozzles with blind flange, gaskets and fasteners
along with 1 set of spare gaskets & fasteners for each size and type shall be provided.
3.10.3.12 Chemical Filter Unit shall be provided with inclined tube manometer or Differential
pressure gauge for measurement of differential pressure across filters.
3.10.3.13 Fan shall be selected corresponding to air density at lowest ambient temperature as per site
conditions. Fan curves and Motor power selection calculations shall be furnished
accordingly.
3.10.3.14 Chemical media shall be supplied in separate air tight, water proof packed containers for
filling at site. Vendor shall furnish the procedure for media filling for Purchaser's
reference. Chemical media shall be indentified with authentic documents which shall be
furnished from media manufacturer indicating type of media, year of manufacture, batch
number of media and test certificates.
3.10.3.15 Vendor shall have proven track record (PTR) for supplying at least one (1) number similar
chemical filter unit (however with same chemical media type as specified in cl. 3.10.3.5 of
this specification) in last ten (10) years. Necessary Client's certificate for satisfactory
operation of filter unit & media for at least 8000 hours of operation/ PO copy / approved
vendor drawings / data sheets mentioning media specifications, etc. shall be furnished in
support of PTR documents.
3.10.3.16 Test certificates (ASTM etc.) vetted by a reputed TPI agency shall be provided by the
chemical filter vendor which shall establish the guaranteed chemical removal efficiency of
the proposed media.
3.10.3.17 A Certificate/undertaking from Media manufacturer shall be furnished indicating the

suitability of the proposed media for the specified application along with guaranteed gas
removal efficiency values with guaranteed life against applicable corrosive gas (H2S, SOX,
NOx, C12 etc.).
3.11 Heating Unit
3.11.1 Heater shall be re-heating type as per psychometric process requirement.
3.11.2 Heating shall be electric/hot water as specified in Job Specification/Data Sheet.
3.11.3 Heater rated capacity shall have a 10% margin over required capacity.
3.11.4 Electric strip heaters, if provided, shall be complete with heating thermostats, safety
thermostats. Hot water coils shall be complete with control valve and proportionating
thermostat etc.
Page 5417 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
$fgar faii-e-g
ME, eleane
aA 3400) 10 Govt Al AdoUndertak.g) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Page 11 of 32
3.12 Humidifier Unit
3.12.1 Humidifier shall be steam pan type or water spray type as per Job Specification/Data Sheet.
3.12.2 Pan humidifier shall be complete with immersion type electric heaters actuated by
humidistat, water float valve, stop valve in water make up line, level switch interlocked
with heaters. Pan shall be in stainless steel construction. The outer surface shall be
thermally insulated.
3.12.3 Water spray type humidifier shall comprise of spray header, nozzles, arms, etc; fractional
H.P pumpset, humistat, solenoid valve, etc. Make-up tank, water collecting trough
complete with drain, quickfill, overflow, strainer, make-up connection with ball and float
valve shall be provided.
3.12.4 Drain pan / water collecting trough of water spray humidifier shall be of 16G GSS / CRCA
and thermally insulated.
3.12.5 The humidifier shall have 10% margin over rated capacity.
3.13 Cooling Tower
3.13.1 Cooling tower, if required in Job Specification, shall be provided. It shall be of induced
draft type in FRP construction. The air inlet design W.B. temperature will be as specified in
the Job Specification/data sheet.
3.13.2 Cooling tower fan shall be of cast aluminum alloy with aerofoil section blades directly
mounted on the shaft of totally enclosed weather-proof (IP-55) motor with suitable weather
proof canopy hood. The fan shall be protected by guard. The fan impeller shall be
dynamically balanced.
3.13.3 Service ladder shall be provided for the cooling tower.
3.13.4 Cooling tower shall be provided with suction strainer.
3.13.5 Cooling tower shall be provided with drift eliminator.
3.13.6 Supporting framework for the cooling tower shall be made of galvanised steel.
3.13.7 Cooling tower structure shall be designed to withstand wind load as specified, per IS-875.
3.13.8 Local push button station in weatherproof enclosure with a canopy cover shall be provided.
3.14 Water Pumps
3.14.1 The pumps shall conform to standard specification no 6-41-0003.
3.14.2 Pumps shall be provided with mechanical seal.
3.14.3 The pumps shall be complete with drive motor, coupling with non-sparking guard,
common base plate, fixing and hold down bolts.
3.14.4 Pump assembly shall be dynamically balanced.
3.15 Refrigerant Piping for Vapour Compression System
3.15.1 Refrigerant piping shall be of copper as per manufacturer's standards.
Page 5418 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51gar Ng&
1441e71 twcnre 051390R9
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
6-61-0017 Rev. 0
Page 12 of 32
3.15.2 All piping network shall be leak tested with nitrogen at 1.1 times of design pressure using
soap water solution for minimum 24 hours. After establishing the capability to withstand
test pressure, the piping network shall be dried and vacuumised to 2.5 mm Hg absolute.
Vacuum shall be broken with dry nitrogen and the system shall be re-vacuumised to 2.5
mm Hg absolute. This vacuum shall be held for 12 hours before charging the refrigerant.
After charging of refrigerant, leak detection shall be done using electronic or halide torch
leak detector.
3.16 Water Piping
3.16.1 All water piping shall be of Carbon steel as per project Piping Material Specification.
3.16.2 Isolation valve with reducer / expander (as required) along with companion flanges shall be
provided by vendor for all battery limit connections with purchaser utility lines.
3.17 Combination Fire & Smoke Dampers
3.17.1 Combination fire & smoke dampers shall be installed in supply air and return air path.
These shall be tested, certified and supplied as per UL-555 and UL-555S for 1.5 hour fire
rating and smoke leakage class —I with temperature category 176 °C. Type test certificates
for the same shall also be provided.
3.17.2 Dampers shall be spring return, motorized (pneumatically operated in control room
buildings as per OISD requirement) & fail safe type with indication for open / close
position.
3.17.3 Damper operation shall be interlocked (through HVAC Panel) with the signal from
purchaser's fire and gas panel.
3.18 Expansion Tank (for Chilled Water System only)
3.18.1 Expansion tank shall be provided by vendor and installed at-least 1 m above the highest
point of the system.
3.18.2 Tank shall be of minimum 500 liter capacity (unless otherwise required because of system
design requirement) of minimum 10G thickness of SS-304 material.
3.18.3 The tank shall be complete with float valve assembly backed up with Gate valve for make
up, quick fill gate valve, drain with valve and overflow.
3.18.4 Tank shall have rigid supporting arrangement of structural steel per IS-2062/ASTM A 36.
3.19 Plant Room Ventilation
3.19.1 A.C. Plant room shall be ventilated by wall mounted exhaust fan(s) complete with electric
motor, louver shutter and galvanised expanded wire-mesh protection guard on intake side
of exhaust fans.
3.19.2 The capacity shall be decided based on 15 air changes per hour.
3.19.3 In case of air intake through wall, weather protection louvers along-with bird protection
screen shall be provided with suitable structural steel frame in wall.
3.20 Air Distribution, Ducting, Diffusers / Grilles
3.20.1 Ducts shall be designed, fabricated and flanged as per IS-655 for static pressure up to 65
mm WG. In case, static pressure is more than 65 mm WG, SMACNA code shall be
followed frtr design and fabrication of duct
Page 5419 of 8516

azie5. t ENGINEERS
51g-ar We INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
elecn1,151,3 A Govt of India Undettaking)
3.20.2 Ducts shall be fabricated using GI sheets having minimum 120 g/m2 of zinc coating.
3.20.3 Duct hangers shall be supported with anchor fasteners in the roof. Anchor fasteners shall be
provided by vendor.
3.20.4 All flange joints shall have 6 mm thick Neoprene packing as gasket stuck to the flanges
with adhesive (viz., resins like araldite or equivalent).
3.20.5 All the duct shall be made air tight with the help of sealant. Leak test shall be conducted on
the duct before insulation.
3.20.6 Ductwork shall be provided with following accessories.
- Turning Guide Vanes.

- Extractor with operating lever.
- Splitter Damper with control rod & locking device.
- Volume control Damper (opposed bladed type with 16 gauge 150 mm wide blades and
14 gauge casing of GSS).
- Fire resistant flexible connection between duct chute and diffuser (if required).
- Access doors for heaters, fire dampers and filters.
3.20.7 Supply air diffusers shall be provided and shall be fitted with sponge foam tape.
Grilles/linear grilles may be used for supply if considered essential during detailed
engineering subject to approval of owner/consultant. Volume control damper shall be
provided with each supply air diffuser/grille. Volume control damper shall be key operated
from the front of diffuser/grille. Supply air grilles shall be provided with vertical &
horizontal adjustable louvers.
3.20.8 All return air diffusers/grilles, if required, shall be without volume control damper.
3.20.9 Diffusers/grilles shall be of powder coated steel/ anodised aluminium construction with
anodized aluminium angle frame.
3.20.10 Diffusers/grilles shall not be supported from False Ceiling.
3.20.11 Both horizontal branch and low-pressure ducts shall be designed by the "Equal Friction"
method with a pressure drop less than 2.5 mm WG/30 m. Duct velocity shall not exceed 9.2
or/sec for main supply air duct and 66% of supply duct air velocity for return air duct. For
branch ducts leading to diffusers, velocity shall be restricted to 5.1 m/sec. Booster fan shall
be provided if static pressure conditions by AHU/Package Unit blower are not met.
3.20.12 All outlets / diffusers shall be designed with a terminal velocity not exceeding 3.0 m/sec.
Manufacturers' published data shall be taken into account for proper air throw/distribution,
noise, and pressure drop. Selection must be made to ensure sound levels below NC 35.
Sound attenuators shall be installed in ducts, as required.
3.20.13 Where a branch duct takes off from a main supply air duct, a splitter damper shall be
installed. Each splitter damper shall be adjustable to a fixed position to divert the required
volume of air to each branch duct.
3.20.14 Transition sections should be constructed such that the included angle for a converging
section is less than 15 degrees and for diverging section, less than 10 degrees. When space
limitations require transitions using larger angles, guide vanes shall be installed in the
transition (except for fan discharge). Duct transition through fire rated wall should not
impair the rating of wall.

Page 5420 of 8516

71 ENGINEERS
titateg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
weer eigarreanakradal IA Govt o11ndia Undertaking)
3.20.15 Duct work shall be suitably supported with a maximum spacing of 2.0 meter. Hangers shall
be provided for all fittings.
3.20.16 All damper linkage arrangement (automatic/manual) shall be of SS-304 material.
3.21 Insulation
3.21.1 The surfaces to be insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned and allowed to dry. Leak test shall
be carried out before insulation.
3.21.2 Hot Insulation
3.21.2.1 Insulation for personnel protection is applicable where exposed surface temperatures
exceed 65°C in normal and short term operating conditions. Insulation is not desired for
piping and equipment for which heat loss is desired except for personnel protection and to
avoid thermal stress problem. Bare surfaces of pipe/equipment shall be provided with one
coat of 20 micron min. (dry film thickness) heat resistant primer up to 120°C operating
temperature.
3.21.2.2 Resin bonded mineral wool conforming to IS-8183 shall be used for hot insulation with
thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.43 mW/cm °C at 50 °C mean temperature. Preformed
pipe sections/mattresses of min. density 140 kg/m' /128 kg/m3 respectively shall be used.
The minimum thickness of insulation shall be as per Appendix-1.
3.21.2.3 Moisture barrier shall be provided for application up to 125 °C. A 3 mm wet thick coating
of mastic/ShaliKote shall be applied to the surface of the insulation as soon as possible
after erection, to reduce the time the insulation is exposed to the weather to a minimum.
Whilst this coat is still wet, glass cloth shall be laid over the surface and embedded in the
mastic/ShaliKote. Care shall be taken to ensure that the glass cloth is laid smooth and free
from wrinkles and that no pockets of air are trapped beneath the surface. At junctions in the
glass cloth, the overlap shall not be less than 75 mm. A second 3 mm thick coat of
mastic/ShaliKote shall be applied after approx. 12 hours. When dry, this coating shall be a
minimum of 1.5 mm thick. Care must be taken, however, to ensure that the individual coats
are not greater than 3 mm (especially in corners), otherwise some cracking of dried coat
may result. The total dry film thickness of moisture seal shall not be less than 2.5 mm with
a tolerance of -0% to +50%. The mastic/ShaliKote shall not be applied over wet insulation
or until the adhesive is dry. During this drying time, the insulation shall be protected from
the weather by tarpaulin or similar materials.
3.21.2.4 Hot insulation shall be cladded with 26 SWG aluminium sheeting.
3.21.3 Cold Insulation
3.21.3.1 The pipes shall be insulated and finished as per Appendix-2 and the minimum thickness of
insulation shall be as per Appendix I.
3.21.3.2 The ducts shall be insulated and finished as per Appendix-3.
3.21.3.3 Exterior insulation of duct shall consist of fibre-glass duct wrap with thermal conductivity
not to exceed 0.3 cal. cm/hr. cm2 °C (0.24 Btu in/ft2 hr. °F or 0.035 W/m-K) at 23.8°C
mean temperature differential. Duct wrap to have, factory applied, fire rated aluminium foil
and vapour barrier. Insulation shall be wrapped tightly on the duct work with all
circumferential joints butted with longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 50mm.
3.21.3.4 Pipe insulation material shall be polyurethane foam with thermal conductivity not to
exceed 0.019 KCaI/hr. m °C (0.16 Btu in/ft2 hr. °F) at 10°C mean temperature after ageing.
Page 5421 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
ligar 2156 INDIA LIMITED 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
1.1vn evasf,111Jrwm, IA Govt of India Undertaking)
3.21.3.5 Vapour barrier shall be provided for application up to 125° C. A 3 mm wet thick coating of
vapour seal mastic/ShaliKote shall be applied to the surface of the insulation as soon as
possible after erection, to reduce the time the insulation is exposed to the weather to a
minimum. Whilst this coat is still wet, glass cloth shall be laid over the surface and
embedded in the mastic/ShaliKote. Care shall be taken to ensure that the glass cloth is laid
smooth and free from wrinkles and that no pockets of air are trapped beneath the surface.
At junctions in the glass cloth, the overlap shall not be less than 75 mm. A second 3 mm
thick coat of mastic/ShaliKote shall be applied after approx. 12 hours. When dry, this
coating shall be a minimum of 1.5 mm thick. Care must be taken, however, to ensure that
the individual coats are not greater than 3 mm (especially in corners), otherwise some
cracking of dried coat may result. The total dry film thickness of moisture seal shall not be
less than 2.5 mm with a tolerance of -0% to +50%. The mastic/ShaliKote shall not be
applied over wet insulation or until the adhesive is dry. During this drying time, the
insulation shall be protected from the weather by tarpaulin or similar materials.
3.21.3.6 The application, insulation material and recommended thickness are given in Appendix-1.
3.21.4 Acoustic Insulation
3.21.4.1 Duct acoustic insulation shall be provided on the inner surface of ducting for a minimum
distance of 6 m from AHU / Package Air-conditioning Unit outlet.
3.21.4.2 Duct liner material shall have a flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and a smoke
developed rating not higher than 50 (NFPA 255 or ASTM E 84). Duct lining should not
flame, glow, smolder, or smoke when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411 at a
temperature of 121°C.
3.21.4.3 Insulation shall not absorb more than 1.13% moisture by weight at the end of 72 hours
exposure to air at 49°C and 96% relative humidity. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed
0.3 cal cm/hr cm2 °C (0.24 Btu in/ft2 hr. °F or 0.035 W/m-K) at 23.8°C mean temperature
differential. Material shall not have a surface coating and shall not erode at velocities of 20
metres/sec. (4000 fpm).
3.21.4.4 The liner shall be adhered to the duct sheets before assembly using a rubber based adhesive
spread over the entire surface. Ducts over 600mm shall have liner additionally secured with
welded nails and speed clips on 300mm centers in both directions. It shall be covered by
0.5 mm perforated aluminium sheets having 3 mm perforation at 6 mm centres.
3.21.4.5 For all inspection covers and hatches on equipment, pump casing, valve bodies & flanges
more than 100 mm dia, the insulation shall be applied so as to facilitate easy removal and
replacement maintaining continuity of vapour seal.
3.22 Controls And Instruments
3.22.1 Vendor shall include all controls & instruments as required for safety & operational
requirements of the plant.
3.22.2 Main HVAC Control Panel
3.22.2.1 Automatic operation of all controls, wherever feasible, is required, with manual overdrive
for maintenance etc. The "Manual/Off/Auto" select switch shall be located on the front of
HVAC Control Panel. The "Auto" mode means that HVAC equipment are controlled by a
stand alone PLC/Microprocessor based HVAC control panel/DDC (Direct Digital
Controller). The "Manual" mode shall be used only for testing purpose & manual operation
& control of HVAC system.
Page 5422 of 8516

latae, ,A
„- ENGINEERS
FOR
tegteg Amu INDIA LIMITED 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
,,,,,,-,-451.3.1pm) I, Go, 01 no, un000monco
3.22.2.2 Electric duct heaters shall be controlled in one or more steps by the return air temperature
and interlocked with the flow switch installed on each electric duct heater so that electric
duct heater can not be operated without the supply air flow. An automatic reset thermal cut-
off shall stop the electric duct heater when the high limit temperature is reached. Electric
duct heater shall restart automatically when the related return air temperature drops below
the setting point.
3.22.2.3 Humidistat shall also be provided for monsoon reheat control. One humidistat shall
activate the electric heaters (reheat) in case the space humidity rises beyond the preset
limit. Another humidistat shall energize the humidifier when the humidity falls below the
preset limit. These humidistats shall also de-energize these devices when the desired
humidity is reached. Humidifier heaters shall be actuated by humidistat located in return air
duct.
3.22.2.4 Monsoon re-heaters /winter heaters shall operate only on running of Package AC / AHU
blower.
3.22.2.5 Potential free contact shall be provided by vendor for closing of fire & smoke dampers and
simultaneously tripping the AHU/Package AC blower motor on receiving the fire/smoke
alarm signal from relevant Fire & Gas Panel.
3.22.2.6 On expiry of fire signal, fire & smoke dampers shall be opened manually through reset
button.
3.22.2.7 Upon receiving of a gas high alarm signal from the relevant fire and gas panel, outdoor air
intake into the building shall be shut off automatically. Also upon receiving of a gas high
high alarm signal from the relevant fire and gas panel, all HVAC system shall be
automatically shut down.
3.22.2.8 Potential free contact shall be provided in control panel for duplication of alarm in
Purchaser's main panel. The necessary wiring beyond this contact shall be done by
Purchaser.
3.22.2.8.1 Supply air fan of AHU/Package AC & chemical filter unit (if required) shall be started
from the HVAC control Panel. If standby fan is provided, standby fan shall be change over
automatically by the failure signal of the running fan.
3.22.2.9 Special requirement for Central Air-conditioning System :
3.22.2.9.1 All controls shall be suitably interlocked for safe & sequential operation of plant generally
in the following order:
a) Start AHU blower.

b) Start cooling tower fan.
c) Start Condenser water flow /condenser fan.
d) Start Chilled water pump.
e) Start Refrigeration unit/chiller
While shutting down the plant, equipment will stop in the reverse order as listed above.
3.22.2.9.2 Chilled water circulation pumps shall be started manually or automatically at HVAC
control panel in the sequence as stated above. The standby chilled water circulation
pump(s) shall be changed over automatically by the failure signal of the running chilled
water pump(s).
3.22.2.9.3 Condensate pumps for Vapour Absorption Refrigeration system shall operate on high/low
level switches, installed on the condensate tank.
Page 5423 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$.1gzu felf5it5 INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
14117e1 riaawa57,3•70.1) IA Govt of halo Undenakng)
3.22.2.9.4 Flow control valve at chilled water coil with modulating temperature controller shall be
controlled by return air temperature.
3.22.2.9.5 Flow meters in chilled water and condenser water lines with signal to control panel shall be
provided. Temperature and Pressure Gauges in inlet and outlet of cooling water and chilled
water shall also be provided locally. Chilled water temperature shall be maintained
constant at chiller outlet, the control for the same shall be provided accordingly.
3.22.2.10 Special requirement for Packaged Air-conditioning System :
3.22.2.10.1 The standby Packaged Unit shall be changed over automatically by the failure signal of the
running Packaged Unit.
3.22.2.10.2 Flow meters in condenser water lines (for water cooled systems) with signal to control
panel, temperature and Pressure Gauges in inlet and outlet of cooling water shall be
provided locally.
3.22.2.10.3 All electric motor driven equipments shall be provided with local Start/Stop Push button
stations for operational requirements.
3.22.2.10.4 Calibration of all instruments shall be done by Vendor.
3.22.2.10.5 Pressure gauges shall be provided with bleed and block valves.
3.22.3 Machine Control Panel
3.22.3.1 Control panel shall consist of indications, controls and annunciation.
3.22.3.2 The control panel shall be fully wired and factory tested before dispatch. The Control panel
shall contain at-least the following control for the automatic operation of chilling unit.
i. Compressor capacity control device.

ii. Start/stop push button station for the machine.
iii. Automatic temperature controller for oil temperature and chiller water temperature.
3.22.3.3 Requirements for Reciprocating or Scroll Chiller / Condensing Units
3.22.3.3.1 Control Panel shall be either machine mounted or floor mounted as per manufacturer's
standard and shall provide the following indications as a minimum:

iv. Chilled water in & out temperature indicator
v. Condenser cooling water in & out temperature (in case of water cooled condenser)
indicator
vi. All safety interlocks
3.22.3.3.2 Control panel shall have protection against following situation as a minimum:-
i. Low chilled water temperature

ii. High Condenser Pressure
iii. Low lube oil pressure
iv. Low Evaporator Pressure
v. Low/No chilled water flow
vi. Low condenser cooling water flow
vii. Overload protection for all motors.
Page 5424 of 8516

5Ì-10ENGINEERS FOR
Ogeil 22—ag NI)
/ INDIA LIMITED 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
undertak,ng)
292,1,100,13PMFD IA Dm .
of rnd
viii. Sensor Failure/Diagnostics
3.22.3.3.3 Requirements for Centrifugal Chiller Package

indicator
vi. Vane opening indicator calibrated in percent
vii. All safety interlocks
i. High condenser pressure.

ii. Low lube oil pressure.
iii. High bearing temperature for compressor.
iv. Low evaporator pressure.
v. Low/No chilled water flow.
vi. Low condenser cooling water flow
viii. Low chilled water temperature.
ix. High lube oil temperature to cut off heater supply.
x. High Compressor discharge temperature.
xi. Low Compressor discharge temperature.
xii. Oil Filter differential pressure.
xiii. To ensure opening of inlet guide vanes after compressor motor has stabilized.
xiv. To ensure close guide vanes at start-up.
xv. Sensor Failure/Diagnostics
3.22.3.4 Requirements for Screw Chiller Package

indicator
i. High condenser pressure

ii. Low lube oil pressure.
iii. High bearing temperature for compressor motor.
iv. Low/No chilled water flow.
v. Low evaporator pressure
vi. Low condenser cooling water flow.
Page 5425 of 8516

l_7
-3faeitii ENGINEERS
t15leg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
7.117n elrant ,INJWISSI) IA Govt of 'mo Undertaking)
ix. High lube oil temperature to cut off heater supply.

x. High Compressor discharge temperature.
xi. Low Compressor discharge temperature.
xii. Oil Filter differential pressure.
xiii. To ensure minimum position of slide valve at start-up.
xiv. Sensor failure/Diagnostics
3.22.3.5 Requirements for Packaged Air-conditioning Units
3.22.3.5.1 Control Panel shall be either machine mounted as per manufacturer's standard and shall
provide the following indications as a minimum:

ii. Condenser cooling water in & out temperature (in case of water cooled condenser)
indicator
iii. All safety interlocks
i. High Condenser Pressure

ii. Low Evaporator Pressure
iii. Low condenser cooling water flow (in water cooled system)
iv. Overload protection for all motors.
v. Sensor Failure/Diagnostics
3.22.3.5.3 Requirements for Vapour Absorption Chiller Package
i. Steam/Hot water inlet & exit Temperature & Pressure indicator.

ii. Generator Temperature & Pressure indicator.
iii. Absorber Temperature & Pressure indicator.
v. Condenser cooling water in & out temperature indicator
i. High Generator steam pressure

ii. Low Absorber pressure.
iii. Low evaporator pressure.
iv. Low/No steam/hot water flow.
v. Low/No chilled water flow.
vi. Low cooling water flow
ix. Sensor Failure/Diagnostics
3.22.4 Audio-visual Annunciation Panel
3.22.4.1 It shall consist of facia type Annunciators having translucent plastic window of 35 mm x
50 mm (min.) size engraved with appropriate function in block letters for each alarm trip
point. Annunciators shall be suitable for operation on 24V D.C. and shall have a single
alarm buzzer common to all points. Three push buttons for audible alarm acknowledge,
reset and test with appropriate name plates shall be provided common to all alarm points.
Annunciators shall be solid state type of reputed make. Annunciators shall operate
Page 5426 of 8516

ENGINEERS
eiliEtireg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
21i451E,15101insli A Govt of Incha Undertaktng)
satisfactorily between 80 and 110% of rated supply voltage. Annunciators may be a part of
HVAC control panel itself.
3.22.4.2 Annunciators shall be provided for all faults (as applicable for the system) covering atleast
the following:-
i. Low oil pressure.

ii. Low chilled water flow.
iii. Low condenser cooling water flow.
iv. Low chilled water temperature
v. Low evaporator pressure.
vi. High condenser pressure.
vii. Compressor motor overload.
viii. Low water level in humidifier tank.
ix. Chilled water pump motor over load.
x. Condenser cooling water pump motor over load.
xi. Air handling unit motors overload.
xii. Cooling tower fan motors overload.
xiii. Treated water pump motors overload (in case water softening plant is furnished).
xiv. Crankcase heater.
xv. Open/close position of fire/smoke dampers.
xvi. Water Chiller/Air-conditioning unit status-Run/Stop.
xvii. Fresh Air fan(Chemical Filter Unit) status-Run/Stop.
xviii. AHU fan status-Run/Stop.
xix. Chilled water pumps(s)-Run/Stop
xx. Auto change-over of standby pump, fan & air-conditioning unit
xxi. Any other as necessary.
In the event of a fault, the particular window shall glow and the window will remain
lighted till the fault is rectified.
Minimum 20% spare windows shall be provided on annunciator.
3.23 Specific Requirements for Offshore Applications
3.23.1 The system shall be centralized chilled water type with the chilled water circulating in a
closed-loop through the Air handling units. The required pressure in the air conditioned
areas shall be maintained by pneumatically controlled purge/exhaust dampers through
pressure switches.
3.23.2 Standard Operating Cycle: - As a standard operating cycle, the system is to maintain a
space pressurisation of minimum 5.0 mm WG by modulation of the outside air and relief
dampers unless specified otherwise. In air-conditioned areas, pressurization takes a
foremost role. If one fan of AHU fails, the standby fan should be energized automatically,
and the outlet damper of the failing fan shall automatically close.
3.23.3 Purge Cycle: - A purge cycle of the air-conditioned space shall occur upon start up and
upon a loss of pressurization (less than 3.0 mm WG). To purge the pressurized space of
undesirable air, the fresh air damper should be full open. During the purge cycle return air
damper of air conditioning system shall be in closed position. The remote purge dampers
will fully open to exhaust the purge air. This cycle should operate a minimum of 5 air
changes per hour to assure a complete purge. In such a situation air conditioning becomes
non critical. Humidity and temperature control are not necessarily maintained during the
purge cycle. Purge cycle switching shall be automatic.
3.23.4 Non explosion proof electrical equipment shall be energized only after the purge cycle is
complete.
Page 5427 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Og-a,,,,tat
r Mteg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
oTara, (A Govt of Irxha Undertaking)
3.23.5 All air conditioned areas (other than spot-cooled) shall have minimum three (3) fresh air
changes/hour besides the air lost through exhausted areas. In addition to AHU blowers,
fresh air fans shall be installed to meet the fresh air requirements. Necessary filtration
arrangement with coalescer filters shall be provided at fresh air intake. All intakes and
exhausts shall be protected with weather covers and removable 12.5 mm mesh screen and
adjustable louvers etc. of corrosion resistant material. Suitable provision shall be made for
installation of gas detectors at the outside air intake ducts.
3.23.6 The fresh air consideration for heavy occupancy areas shall also be cross-checked from
human-occupancy considerations as per ASHRAE norms.
3.23.7 Fresh air requirements shall be based on the worst of above considerations.
3.23.8 The fresh air intake (through necessary filtration arrangement) shall be taken from safe
areas. Air intake in all cases shall be away from exhausts. Safe areas for this purpose
would be considered as minimum 3.0 m away from the edge of platform or 7.6 m away
from the nearest source of hazard, whichever is more.
3.23.9 For dining room, Kitchen, laundry, TV room, Recreation room and Tea room, ASHRAE
norms and heat dissipation details to be considered, keeping in view the
equipment/appliances located in these areas.
3.23.10 Toilet room / washroom (laundry) areas shall be spot cooled and inside condition shall be
exempted from guarantee. Return air shall not be taken from kitchen, dinning hall, toilets,
washrooms, laboratories and battery charger room etc.
3.23.11 Besides air conditioning, toilets & wash rooms shall be provided with exhaust fans
designed for 12 air changes per hour and the area shall be maintained on a slightly negative
pressure so that any obnoxious / foul smell does not get transmitted to the adjoining air
conditioned spaces, but instead it is vented off. Air from Corridor/ Room shall be sucked in
and vented through toilets.
3.23.12 All skid mounted equipment located outside pressurised areas shall be suitable for
operation in a hazardous area as defined by Class 1, Zone 2, Gas Group II A, II B,
Temperature Class T3 as per IEC and Category B of the Air Moving and Conditioning
Association. Building interiors shall be considered unclassified or safe after purging and
pressurisation. All rotating equipment shall be of spark-proof construction.
3.23.13 All equipment of Air Conditioning, Ventilation and pressurisation plant, installed outdoor,
shall be capable of withstanding the corrosion and other deleterious effects of a saliferous,
humid environment.
3.23.14 There shall be 100% standby for chilled water package(s). Each package shall comprise
compressor, driver, chiller, air cooled condenser and associated hook-up piping, fittings
and valves etc. Condenser fans shall have their independent motors. Condenser shall be
mounted to discharge hot air horizontally, away from the platform. The number of working
units shall be decided such that the compressor motor rating does not exceed the
purchaser's acceptable KW limit for LT motor.
3.23.15 Condenser shall be air cooled by electric motor driven fans having direct drive. If located
in hazardous area, fans shall be of spark-proof construction as per AMCA category B.
Condenser coils shall be constructed of Copper Tubes Electrotinned and Copper Fins
Electrotinned. Heresite coated coils will also be acceptable, if this is vendor's standard
proven design. Impeller shall be of cast aluminium bronze/high tensile brass. To minimize
the noise, only low rpm (preferable750 rpm) fan shall be used. Condenser fan wire guard
shall be of SS-304 material.
Page 5428 of 8516

1.31 ENGINEERS
FOR
Oaell 2Wes. INDIA LIMITED 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
(A Govt of intim Undertakong)
3.23.16 Heat transfer areas for Condenser Coils and evaporator tubes shall have minimum 10%
margin over and above the calculated surface areas required (This shall be over and above
the safety margin taken for sensible and latent heat in heat load calculations).
3.23.17 AHU shall be equipped with two nos. (1 working + 1 standby) centrifugal, double inlet
double width (DIDW) type blowers each of 100% capacity, mounted within the fan section
of the AHU. The working and the standby fans within the AHU shall be isolated by
providing separate chambers with pneumatic dampers on the chamber suction and back
draft damper at blower outlet to prevent short circuit of air flow, as well as to facilitate the
maintenance of one blower while the other is working. Air flow switch shall be provided at
outlet of the blower to sense the pressure and the blower shall be interlocked such that in
the event of one blower failing the respective pneumatic damper at the suction shall close
and the other blower shall start with pneumatic damper open automatically so as to
maintain the desired pressure in the system. In the event of failure of the air conditioning
system, the operating blower would continue to run to maintain the specified positive
pressure. AHU casing shall be minimum 50 mm thick double skin construction with 1.5
mm thick SS-316L outer sheet and 1.0 mm thick SS-316L inner sheet with thermal
insulation sandwiched in between to prevent casing deformation, and coil face velocity
shall not be more than 2.5 m/s. Cooling coils are to be chilled water type constructed of
Copper Tubes Electrotinned with externally bonded Copper Electrotinned Fins.
3.23.18 All automatic modulating dampers and fire dampers shall be pneumatically operated.
3.23.19 Fire dampers shall be automatic, fail safe type (i.e. damper shall automatically close by
spring action in case of failure of pneumatic air supply) and shall operate pneumatically.
3.23.20 All sheet metal duct work shall be constructed of tested quality Stainless Steel (SS-304)
sheets. All ductwork and thickness shall be as per SMACNA.
3.23.21 Insulation of chilled water piping, ducts and equipment for offshore applications shall be
covered with SS-304 0.25 mm thick cladding. This shall supersede insulation cladding
material specified in Annexure-2 & Annexture-3.
3.23.22 Material of construction of major HVAC equipment shall be as follows. All other items
shall be as per manufacturer's standard design suitable for outdoor saliferous and humid
environment of an offshore platform.
M.O.C.
Equipment
Condenser Tubes Copper with electro tinning/Copper with Herisite coating
if vendor's proven standard design
Condenser Tubes fins Copper with electro tinning/Copper with Herisite coating
if vendor's proven standard design
Condenser Casing SS-316L
Condenser fan casing SS-316L
Condenser fan Impeller Cast Aluminium Bronze/High tensile brass
Chiller Tubes Copper ASTM-B-111
AHU Cooling Coil Copper with electro tinning
Tubes/Fins
Al-IU Casing SS-316L
AHU and ventilation fan Steel epoxy coated with brass ring/lining for spark proof
Impellers design/Aluminium Bronze Blades
FanShafts SS-304
AHU Filters SS Mesh
Filter Casing SS-304
Chilled Water Pump
Page 5429 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Itgar fdfii4&g
WW1 eteoreast,141.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt at Incha Undertaking)
FOR
6-61-0017 Rev. 0
Page 23 of 32
M.O.C.
Equipment
- Shaft SS-304
- Shaft Sleeve Al. Bronze ASTM # B111
- Casing Cast Iron ASTM#A159
- Impeller Cast Bronze ASTM # B 584
- Impeller Key SS304
- Wearing Ring Bronze
Refrigerant Piping Cu / Cu-Ni
Grilles/Diffusers Zn Electroplated or Heavy gauge anodised aluminium
Duct material SS-304
Insulation on ducts Fiber Glass
Insulation Cladding SS 304 0.25mm thk
Chilled water pipe, fittings & As per project Piping Material Specification
valves
Instrument Air Tube SS-316
Structural Steel ASTM-A-36 or IS-2062 Grade-A
Expansion Tank SS-304
Damper Casing SS-304
Damper Bush Bronze
Damper shaft and other SS-304
operating linkages
3.23.23 Instrumentation, Controls and Electrical Work
3.23.23.1 Control System for HVAC shall be PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) based. Vendor
shall supply PLC based control system, software and hardware for meeting the requisite
functional requirements. PLC based HVAC control panel shall be interfaced to platform
safety shut down system encompassing (fire & gas) detection system. HVAC control panel
shall also provide repeat indication for critical parameters for further wiring by contractor
to the platform control room for remote monitoring.
3.23.23.2 Electric Heaters shall be U.L. listed.
3.23.23.3 The Vendor shall also provide all necessary pressurization control equipment. This shall
consist of room mounted, low differential pressure sensors, with panel mounted controllers
for 0-100% modulation of respective pneumatic dampers. The Vendor shall also provide
the pneumatic actuators with complete mounting kit. Dial type gauges shall be provided to
show over pressure (5 mm WG) inside air-conditioned space.
3.23.23.4 The chilled water system shall be provided with panel mounted on/ off/ auto and duty/
standby selector switches. The pump packages shall be provided with a differential
pressure switch to automatically changeover to the standby pump on duty pump failure.
3.23.23.5 On pump start the chiller may enter its start time sequence from its own integrated control
system which shall include flow switches and low water temperature cut out switches
mounted in the chilled water line on the skid. These shall be interlocked to the
compressors to prevent start up or cause shutdown due to no flow or low temperature.
3.23.23.6 Control Panel
Control panels shall be suitable for the area classification in which they are located as
specified elsewhere.
Page 5430 of 8516

ENGINEERS
faiReg W' INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
INN" .”3WIMI IA Govt of India Undeftakortg)
Equipment shall be subjected to expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/sub-vendor's

Works by Purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall perform tests and
inspection necessary to ensure that the material and workmanship conform to the
requirement of this specification. Vendor shall submit Quality Assurance (QA) plan before
commencement of fabrication. Approved QA plan shall form the basis for equipment
inspection. Following equipment/items shall be subject to inspection/test at works as a
minimum:
i. Package AC units shall be subjected to Type Test as per applicable Indian Standard,
Production Routine Test as per approved QAP.
ii. Condensing units shall be subjected to Type Test as per applicable Indian Standard,
Production Routine Test as per approved QAP.
iii. Vapour compression chiller units shall be subjected to Acceptance Test as per ARI-
550/590, Production Routine Test as per approved QAP.
iv. Vapour absorption chiller units shall be subjected to Acceptance Test as per ARI-
560, Production Routine Test as per approved QAP.
v. Mechanical Run test of AHU at shop for 30 minutes — one of each type and size.
vi. Other items, equipment shall be inspected/ tested at shop as per approved QAP.
4.1 For Inspection and Testing at Site, vendor must perform all inspection and tests of the
system as a whole and of components individually as required, in accordance with the
provisions of the applicable ASHRAE standards. Vendor shall comply with the following
procedures:
i. Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly and inspection of
manufacturer's test certificates.
ii. Inspection of welding including welder's qualification as desired by inspection
engineer. Inspection of fabricated items.
iii. Pressure testing of pipe fit ups for refrigerant (Pneumatic test with dry nitrogen) and
water services (hydro test).
iv. Pressure testing, leak testing of complete piping network for chilled water/brine,
condenser water & refrigerant services (helium leak test, for details refer clause-
3.15.2).
v. Inspection of air distribution system for proper location and installation against
design drawings. Inspection of ducting supports, its location. Leak testing of ducting
system before application of insulation.
vi. Inspection of duct insulation for its material, thickness, vapour barrier treatment and
finish.
vii. Balancing of air distribution system to obtain the air quantities across various air
terminals as called for in the engineering drgs.
viii. Noise level test for various rotating/reciprocating equipment.
ix. Checking of electrical circuits (Power and control) and checking functioning of
controls of refrigerant system and other circuits of air conditioning plant.
x. Checking of assemblies for MCC, control panel, local panel, annunciation panel etc.
xi. Checking of calibration of controls and instrumentation.
xii. Inspection of complete electrical installation at site and clearance from local
authorities.
xi ii . Installation of main equipments like compressor, condenser, chiller, evaporator,
AHU etc.
NOTE:
Inspection & testing procedure mentioned above is for general guidance & information of
vendor and inspection by purchaser/consultant is strictly not limited to these. Inspection
engineer of Purchaser/consultant will have full right to have detailed inspection of project
Page 5431 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$'1g-ar Mitg) INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
eieM? ,T JOMA (A Govt of Indra Undertaking)
as desired by inspection engineer. Co-ordination of inspection agency of

purchaser/consultant with his factory/erection site will be sole responsibility of successful
vendor after placement of order for complete air conditioning plant covered under these
specifications.
4.2 Special Testing at Works requirement for VAR Chillers
4.2.1 Vendor shall supply material mill test certificates for all components of condenser,
absorber, evaporator and generator/concentrator.
4.2.2 Vendor shall supply test certificates for imported solution and refrigerant pumps as per
manufacturer's standards.
4.2.3 The following tests shall be witnessed by EIL/ Purchaser's inspector at works:
i. Ultrasonic test for plates etc

ii. Radiography test for welds. Spot radiography (10%) for longitudinal /
transverse butt welding joints and 100% radiography for T joints.
iii. Soap bubble test with Nitrogen pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2 (g).
iv. Pressure holdup test with Nitrogen pressure of 0.8 kg/cm2 (g) for 24 hours.
v. Helium spray test: machine is vaccumised upto 0.02 mm Hg by an external
vacuum pump. After vacuumising, machine is connected to a helium leak
detector. Helium is spread on all the joints. Leakages, if any, causes helium
entering into the machine, which will be shown on the screen of helium leak
detector. If the cumulative leak rate is more than 2 x 10-5 standard CC/Sec.
then the joints are to be marked and repaired.
vi. Helium Shroud test: This is the final test for finding out leakages and is carried
out after the spray test. In the test, machine shall be fully covered by a
polythene sheet and helium is passed under the polythene cover and then the
leak rate is observed in the leak detector machine for 30 minutes. Allowable
leak rate is upto 2 x 10-5 standard CC/Sec.
vii. After the machine passes the helium test, the machine is to be tested for
hydraulic test on the tube side at 1.3 times the design pressure.
viii. Performance test of machine at shop as per ARI-560. Compensation for
cooling water temperatures/fouling factor shall be done as per ARI.
ix. Manufacturer's test certificate shall be furnished for all machine mounted
pumps.
4.3 Any or all the tests, at Purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by Purchaser/its authorised
4.4.1 Performance Testing
4.4.1.1 Vendor shall give three seasonal tests for (i) summer, (ii) monsoon & (iii) winter to
determine the equipment capacity and performance of the system in accordance with
applicable Standards. Period of each test shall be at least 72 hours and time for each test
will be fixed up mutually with the Purchaser.
4.4.1.2 The vendor shall operate, test and adjust all equipment and balance the system.
Following test readings shall be recorded during the performance testing:
Page 5432 of 8516

ENGINEERS
fifireglW INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
IA Govt of tntla Undertalong)
Test Readings
1. Compressor (for VCR Chiller / Condensing Units)

Refrigerant gas suction pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Refrigerant gas suction Temperature (°C)
Refrigerant gas discharge Pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Refrigerant gas discharge Temperature (°C)
Operating speed (RPM)
Power consumption at 100% load and at each step of capacity regulation.
2. Generator (for VAM Chillers)

Refrigerant + Absorber temperature at inlet (°C)
Refrigerant Gas temperature at exit (°C)
Generator Pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Steam flow rate (m3/hr.)
Steam temperature - entering (°C)
Steam/condensate temperature - leaving (°C)
Steam pressure - entering (kg/cm2 g)
Steam/condensate pressure - leaving (Kg/cm2g)
3. Evaporator (for chilled water system only)

Refrigerant liquid temperature at inlet (°C)
Refrigerant Gas suction pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Refrigerant Gas suction Temperature (°C)
Water flow rate (m3/hr.)
Water temperature - entering (°C)
Water temperature - leaving (°C)
Water pressure - entering (kg/cm2 g)
Water pressure -leaving (Kg/cm2g)
4. Condenser
Refrigerant gas temperature at inlet (°C)
Refrigerant condensing pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Refrigerant liquid temperature at outlet (°C)
Air/Cooling Water flow rate (m3/hr.)
Air/Cooling Water temperature - entering (°C)
Air/Cooling Water temperature - leaving (°C)
Cooling Water pressure — entering (kg/cm2 g)
Cooling Water pressure - leaving (kg/cm2 g)
5. Absorber (for VAM Chillers)

Absorber temperature (°C)
Absorber Pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Cooling water flow rate (m3/hr.)
Cooling water temperature - entering (°C)
Cooling water temperature - leaving (°C)
Cooling water pressure - entering (kg/cm2 g)
Cooling water pressure - leaving (Kg/cm2g)
6. Water Pump
Flow rate (m3/hr.)
Discharge pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Suction pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Operating speed (rpm)
7. Condensate Pump (for VAR System)

Flow rate (m3/hr.)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell — All rights reserved
Page 5433 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogar 006 (.+R,c-Iraweam.iwno,
(A Govt 01 lode Undertakong)
Operating Temperature (°C)

Discharge pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Suction pressure (kg/cm2 g)
Operating speed (rpm)
8. Air handling unit

Refrigerant liquid temperature at inlet to coil (°C)
Air temperature — entering (D.B) (°C)
Air temperature — entering (W.B) (°C.)
Air temperature — leaving (D.B) (°C.)
Air temperature — leaving (W.B) (°C)
In case of chilled water coils:
Water pressure - entering coil (kg/cm2 g)
Water pressure - leaving coil (kg/cm2 g)
Water Temperature - entering cool (°C)
Water Temperature - leaving coil (°C)
Blower air flow (m3 /hr.)
Blower Speed (RPM)
Blower Static/Total Pressure (mm WC)
Blower outlet velocity (m/s)
Direction of rotation CW/CCW
Velocity of air across various components of air handling unit.
9. Electric motor
Starting current/No load current (A)
Motor terminal current (A)
Power factor
Supply voltage (volts)
kwh for compressor motor
10. Supply Air Grilles/ Diffusers

Air flow rate (m3 /hr.)
Air temperature (D.B) (°C)
Air temperature (W.B) (°C)
11. Room conditions

D.B.T (°C)
W.B.T (°C)
Differential Pressure with respect (mm of WC)
to atmosphere/adjacent area (for pressurized area)
4.4.1.3 Vendor shall bring all required testing instruments at site duly calibrated. Plant shall be
formally taken over by purchaser after witnessing the seasonal performance tests
successfully.
4.4.2 Guarantees
The vendor guarantees that all equipment and accessories shall meet the design and
operating conditions throughout the year, as specified in this specification and Job
Specification/Data Sheet.
5.1 All exposed carbon steel parts to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned from inside and
outside to remove scale rust, dirt and other foreign materials by wire brushing and shot/grit
blasting as applicable.
Page 5434 of 8516

ENGINEERS
oazil INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
2170R7 MKS) IA Govt of !mita Undertaking) AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Page 28 of 32
5.2 Non-ferrous materials, austenitic stainless steels, plastic or plastic coated materials,
insulated surfaces of equipment and pre-painted items need no painting.
5.5 Painting Specification shall be as per the Job Specification.
5.6 The colour of finish coat shall be intimated to vendor, after placement of order.
equipment.
6.5 Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged site storage of supplied equipment/material.
7.0 SPARE PARTS
equipment reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of
parts and availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of
equipment.
7.3 Vendor shall also submit a list of commissioning spares with quantities. The
commissioning spares shall be sufficient for trouble free commissioning of the system at
site. Any commissioning spares required during commissioning, over and above, the
commissioning spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and
time implication to purchaser. If for any reason during commissioning vendor needs to
utilise spares from 2 years' operation spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor
within a reasonable time without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused
commissioning spares shall be handed over to owner.
7.4 Vendor shall supply the Mandatory spares as listed in Job Specification.
8.0 SPECIAL TOOLS & TACKLES
Vendor shall provide one set of following special tools & tackles as a minimum for
operation & maintenance along-with each Air-conditioning plant.
Page 5435 of 8516

k-7I__
•-1 ENGINEERS
ar ttf1-
dg
' INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
1
,1,2"
.. eit'ore AN ,m;r5M IA Govt of India Undertaking)
DESCRIPTION QTY.
S.NO.
1. Flaring Tools up to 3/4" (19 mm) Size One Set
2. Gas Charging manifold with Cylinder Adopter One Set
3. Halide Leak Detector One
4. Digital Psychrometer One

Pressure Gauge 0-300 PSI and Compound Gauge 30" Vacuum-
5. One Set
150 PSI for Refrigerant Line
6. Digital Anemometer One
Page 5436 of 8516

"
i ENGINEERS
Oge.fi OfitagW' INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
INRlf elvmtent)3gam) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
APPENDIX 1
INSULATION MATERIAL AND THICKNESS
Insulation Material Thickness

S.No. Application Form
(Density) (mm)
1. Supply / Return air duct Resin bonded Fiber-glass Slab/Roll Supply Duct -
(24 kg/m3) 50mm
/Return Duct -
25 mm
2. Outdoor Exposed -Do- -Do- 50
supply/return duct
3. Refrigeration Piping Polyurethane (35-40 kg/m3) Pipe Section 50
4. Chiller -Do- Slab 60
5. Chilled water pumps -Do- Slab 40
6. Expansion tank & -Do- Slab 30

associated piping
7. Chilled water piping, -Do- Pipe section 40
valves, specialties
8. AHU Drain pipe -Do- Pipe Section 15
9. AHU Drain pan, coil & -Do- Slab 15

blower section.
10. Acoustic treatment Resin bonded fiber glass Slab/Roll 40
(48 kg/m3)
11. Pan Humidifier Resin Bonded Mineral Wool Slab 75
(128 kg/m3)
12. Hot Water / Steam piping Resin Bonded Mineral Wool Pipe Section 75
(140 kg/m3 /128 kg/m3) / Roll
Page 5437 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS
1.11R riecnre .51 ozam) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
APPENDIX 2
COLD INSULATION OF PIPING
1) Main pipe
2) Anticorrosive zinc silicate primer for carbon/alloy steel pipes, 0.1 mm aluminium foil
wrapping for stainless steel pipes/non ferrous alloy pipes.
3) Adhesive foster 81:33 on pipe surface.
4) Insulation blocks preformed with aluminium foil facing as vapour barrier (on outer layer of
insulation blocks) with joints staggered & tightly pressed together with adhesive.
5) Sealer to be used for sealing insulation joints and at flashing of insulation shall be foster
foam seal sealer 30-45.
6) Insulation joint
7) Vapour barrier treatment for internal piping as per C1.-3.21.3.5.
8) Vapour barrier treatment for external piping as per C1.-3.21.3.5.
9) Mechanical protection for insulation of external pipe - 26 swg aluminium sheeting upto 20"
dia and 24 swg aluminium sheeting above 20" dia.
10) 20 mm wide 24 swg metallic bands/clips at 425 mm distance.
Note:- All adhesives and sealants shall be asbestos - free and non-inflammable.
Page 5438 of 8516

k.11 ei ENGINEERS
Ogeji OWlez INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0017 Rev. 0
eir‘oft oB .3,70..0 IA Govt India Undertaking, AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Page 32 of 32
APPENDIX 3
DUCT INSULATION
1) Self adhesive fixing pins with self-locking washer

2) GSS duct
3) Duct sealent on duct joints, foster 32:17 or miracle D617 or equivalent
4) Adhesive, foster 81:10 or equivalent on entire duct surface
5) Factory laminated aluminium foil faced fibre glass insulation material with joints staggered
and tightly pressed together with adhesive
6) Self adhesive aluminium tape (75 mm wide) for sealing of insulation joints
7) Insulation joint
8) Vapour barrier treatment for internal ducting as per cl.-3.21.3.5.
9) Vapour barrier treatment for external ducting as per cl.-3.21.3.5.
10) Mechanical protection for insulation of external ducting and internal ducting exposed to
view - 24 SWG aluminium cladding.
Note:- All adhesives and sealants shall be asbestos - free and non-inflammable.
Page 5439 of 8516

lafazie fr1-71) ENGINEERS FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
Ogeff INDIA LIMITED
earnl 2120XE ONJMISA) (A Goat of India Undedaking) ELECTRIC TRACTION LIFT Page 1 of 14
fatzp tre
Riww fafttera-
ELECTRIC TRACTION LIFT
A3F OrNfr
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
2 22/02/18 PZ KCP PB/ /T
K RN
SPECIFICATION
1 26/03/15 MS SPC PB SC
SPECIFICATION
0 05/09/11 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SPC PB. AKN DM
Standards Standards
Date Prepared Checked
Purpose Convenor Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Page 5440 of 8516

511fR.1t1-1 11 ENGINEERS
,
t=gzir Oigieg \ww - INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2

larrier cleave =Werke (A Govt of India Undertaking)
ELECTRIC TRACTION LIFT Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:
AMC Annual Maintenance Contract

ARD Automatic Rescue Device
BASEEFA British Approval Service for Electrical Equipment for Flammable Atmospheres
CCOE Chief Controller Of Explosives
CEA Central Electricity Authority
CMRI Central Mining Research Institute
CS Carbon Steel
CT Current Transformer
DC Direct Current
DGMS Director General of Mines Safety
EIL Engineers India Ltd.
FM Factory Mutual
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IS Indian Standard
LCIE Leboratoire Central Des Industries Electrique
LED Light Emitting Diode
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PDB Power Distribution Board
PESO Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation
PGTR Performance Guarantee Test Run
PTB Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt
PVC Poly-Vinyl Chloride
SPN Single Phase Neutral
TEFC Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled
TPN Three Phase Neutral
VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik
VVVFD Variable Voltage Variable Frequency Drive
Convenor Mr. P. Bhattacharjee
Members: Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar

Mr. KJ Harinarayan
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. M. Azim (Proj.)
Electrical Representative: Mr. V. K. Jain
Page 5441 of 8516

INDIA IJMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2

(A Gout of India Undertaking)
ELECTRIC TRACTION LIFT , Page 3 of 14
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
5.0 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE CONTRACT (AMC) 13
8.0 SPARE PARTS 14
Page 5442 of 8516

orazie ENGINEERS
ial5leU INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
mew =mow)
17112M IA Goo. of India Undertalung)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification outlines the minimum requirements for design, engineering,
manufacture, testing, painting and supply of Electric Traction lift and its accessories,
control and instruments, electrical and associated items.
2.1 Latest edition of the following codes and standards including amendments as on the date
of enquiry shall govern:
IS 14665 Part 1 : Guidelines for Outline Dimensions of Passenger,

Goods, Service and Hospital Lifts.
IS 14665 Part 2 /Sec 1&2 : Code of Practice for Installation, Operation and
Maintenance: Passenger and Goods Lifts & Service
Lifts
IS 14665 Part 3 /Sec 1&2 : Safety Rules: Passenger and Goods Lifts & Service
Lifts
IS 14665 Part 4 /Sec 1 to 9 : Electric Traction Lifts: Components
IS 14665 Part 5 : Inspection Manual
BS EN 81-1 : Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts
ASME A17.1 : Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
EIL Std.- 7-76-0103 : Instructions to Vendor for Site Performance guarantee
Requirements for Package units
practices and norms shall govern subject to prior approval of Purchaser.
lift is required to be installed shall be complied with.
3.1 General
3.1.1 Lift shall be designed for minimum 20 years of service life under normal operating
conditions.
3.1.2 Lift shall be suitable for machine rooms located above the highest landing level. The
machine room shall not be pressurized. All the VFD/Controller shall be kept in the
machine room. All electrical components for hazardous area lift shall be suitable for non
pressurized machine room, unless otherwise specified in job specification/data sheet.
3.1.3 Machine room shall be provided with 1 No. Ventilation fan of required cfm with bird
screen and louvers.
3.1.4 All mechanical and electrical components and accessories shall be suitable for the area
classification mentioned in job specifications/data sheets.
3.1.5 If the distance between consecutive landing doorsills exceeds 11m, intermediate
emergency doors shall be provided, such that the distance between the sills is not more than
11 m. Emergency door type shall be same as lift car door type.
Page 5443 of 8516

ENGINEERS
5 *Peg INDIA UMTED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
WPM POW .0,1060) (A Gott. 01 India Unclertiong)
3.1.6 No. of starts/stops per hour for motor shall be selected based on peak traffic requirement,
lift speed and length of travel and no. of landings. However in no case no. of starts/stop per
hour shall be less than 120.
3.1.7 Sill gap between car sill and landing sill at each landing shall not exceed 30 mm.
3.1.8 Pit ladder shall be provided irrespective of pit depth.
3.1.9 Following details shall be displayed inside car:
a) Name plate indicating capacity of lift.
b) Operating instructions in English, Hindi and Local language.
3.1.10 Emergency rescue procedure shall be displayed in machine room.
3.1.11 Manual override switch/key shall also be provided in the automatic door elevators so that
operator can keep the door open for any period according to his need.
3.1.12 Provision shall be made to extend the alarm to nearby control room (for industrial
applications) or security/guard room (for non industrial applications).
3.1.13 Provision shall be made to connect Lift telephone to the existing telephone system. All
Cabling beyond Telephone junction box up to Telephone socket shall be in Vendor scope.
3.1.14 Vendor shall arrange inspection and initial certification of Lift installation at site by
concerned statutory authorities.
3.2 Mechanical
3.2.1 Drive Unit
3.2.1.1 The Drive Unit shall be of traction type, and shall include a electric motor, electro-
mechanical brake, gear box (if required), rope sheave/pulley and safety guards. Geared
motor in place of electric motor and gear box is also acceptable. Permanent magnet type
Gearless drive shall also be acceptable for safe area elevator only.
3.2.1.2 Controller shall be microprocessor based VVVF drive type.
3.2.1.3 Adequate means of lubrication shall be provided for all bearings and gearbox as applicable.
3.2.1.4 Drive unit shall be placed in machine room directly above the hoist way.
3.2.1.5 Drive base plate shall be supported on suitable steel structure with anti-vibration pads in
between.
3.2.1.6 All couplings, gears, pulleys, lift wire rope / belt entry and exit point and other exposed
rotating parts shall be provided with adequate protection guards.
3.3 Brake
3.3.1 The brake shall be of fail -safe type and shall be designed to provide smooth stops under
variable loads.
3.3.2 Brake shall be selected for 125% of the braking torque at rated load.
3.3.3 Provision shall be made for releasing the brake manually in case of emergency. As soon as
hand pressure is released, brake shall be applied automatically.
3.4 Rope
3.4.1 Lift shall be provided with steel ropes of suitable construction and tensile designation.
Coated steel belt in place of steel rope may also be acceptable subject to submission of
sufficient PTR for similar application.
Page 5444 of 8516

larazie ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED
FOR
641-0202 Rev. 2
Elfatg
WPM 212,01Z6.1.3.10.0 IA GM ol Inde Undertalango
3.4.2 Factor of safety of suspension ropes / belt shall be selected as per applicable code.
3.5 Guide Rails
3.5.1 Steel Guide rails (T- Section) of adequate strength with necessary brackets for both car and
counterweight shall be supplied by Vendor.
3.5.2 Car and counter weight shall be guided by roller guides for lifts in industrial applications,
irrespective of lift speed.
3.5.3 It shall be capable of taking care of forces imposed due the operation of safety gears and
deflections due to uneven loading of the car.
3.6 Car
Unless otherwise specified in Job Specification/Data Sheet, car construction shall be as

specified below:
Type of Lift Components Purchaser's requirement

Car enclosure *Stainless Steel with hair line/chequered finish
Passenger Lift Car Floor CS/MS with polished granite floor
Car & Landing Doors *Stainless Steel with hair line/chequered fmish
Car ceiling *Stainless steel with hair line finish
Car enclosure Painted/Powder coated CS/MS sheet
Goods Lift Car Floor Galvanized CS/MS Chequered Plate
Car & Landing Doors Painted CS/MS sheet
Car ceiling Painted CS/MS sheet
3.7 Car Operating Panel (COP)
3.7.1 Car Operating Panel shall be made from Stainless Steel plate. For hazardous area
classification elevator, Vendor may also provide their standard material of construction for
Car operating panel.
3.7.2 Following Push Button (Luminous type, both digit & its border) shall be provided as a
minimum. For passenger elevator, the height from lift floor level to the centre line of any
button shall be between 900 mm to 1100 mm.
a) Car Movement
b) Button for all floors
c) Door open/close override push button
d) Fan on-off
e) Emergency stop
f) Emergency alarm
g) Emergency light
h) Push to talk button
3.8 Landing Door and Car Door
3.8.1 The type of door for car as well as landing shall be as specified below:
Type of Lift Type of door (Car and Landing)

Passenger Lift Automatic central opening sliding type door.
Goods Lift Automatic central opening sliding type door.
Page 5445 of 8516

OPIZA ElsIGINEERS
ea felMeg WA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
IMMFE131J9tIFR) Govt of India UnOtertalanw
3.8.2 Door shall be provided with an interlock, which shall prevent movement of car away from
the landing unless all the doors are closed and locked. The interlocks shall also prevent
opening of the doors except at the landing level.
3.8.3 Infrared full curtain electronic door detection system shall be provided for the automatic
power operated door. For hazardous area elevator, electronic door detection system shall be
provided for the automatic power operated door. The detection shall be done using Photo
cell at different elevation.
3.8.4 A timer relay shall be provided to render the car in-operative from the landing buttons for a
few seconds after a stop is made.
3.8.5 For hazardous area elevator, landing and car door shall be provided with a "Sealed
Toughened Glass Window" suitable for classified hydrocarbon hazardous area to facilitate
the passenger of the Elevator to ascertain whether the car has landed at the desired floor
properly or not. The minimum size of Glass window on each door shall be: 2 ft (long) X 1
ft (wide). The "Glass window on car door" shall coincide with the "Glass window on
landing door" at each floor.
3.9 Counter Weight
Adequate counter weight moving in guided structural steel frame shall be provided.
3.10 Over Speed Safety
3.10.1 An over speed safety device to stop the car whenever the car achieves runaway speed limit
resulting from high speed of the car, shall be provided. The device shall be operated by a
centrifugal governor, which continuously and automatically senses the car speed. The
actuation of the safety device shall cut off the power supply to the motor and apply the
brake immediately.
3.10.2 Lift shall be provided with Safety gear. It should be capable of stopping the car carrying
the rated load, at the tripping speed of the overspeed governor, even if the suspension
devices break, by gripping the guides, and holding the car there.
3.10.3 For car having rated speed less than or equal to 0.75 m/s, instantaneous type safety gear
shall be used. For car having rated speed greater than 0.75 m/s progressive type safety gear
shall be used.
3.11 Pit Buffers
3.11.1 Buffers in the pit shall be mounted on steel sections placed beneath both the car and
counterweight guide rails. Steel sections to support the buffers shall be provided by
Vendor.
3.11.2 Energy accumulation type buffers (spring buffer) shall be used for speed up to 1.5 m/s.
Energy dissipation type (Oil buffers) may be used for all speeds.
3.12 Accessories
Following accessories shall be provided as a minimum:

a) Fan/Blower inside the car.
b) Car call push buttons at landing floors.
c) Voice Communication system inside the car.
Page 5446 of 8516

ISINzieT ENGINEERS
Oges Rift INDIA UMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
own MONT 0,1.3.81.1) (A Govt d India Undertaking)
d) Car door & Landing door open indicator (AudioNisual) i.e. floor landing
announcement system.
e) Fireman switch with hammer at main lobby ground floor.
f) LED Car Lighting and LED Emergency light with battery and battery charger.
g) Automatic Rescue device (ARD).
h) Alarm bell at ground floor.
i) Suitable class Fire Extinguisher (Dry Chemical powder type) in Machine Room.
j) Trolley Mounted Chain Pulley Block of Adequate Capacity in Machine room (loose
supply). Monorail beam inside machine room shall be provided by Contractor/others.
3.13 Indications
Minimum following indications (digital type) required at landing and inside the car:
a) Car position indicator.
b) Car travel direction indicator.
c) Car overload indicator with audio/visual alarm.
3.14 Terminal and Final Limits
Terminal limit switches shall be provided to slow down and stop the car automatically at
the terminal landing. To arrest movement of car beyond the terminal landings, final limit
switches shall be provided which on operation shall cut off the power and apply the brake
immediately. Accuracy level of positioning of car with the landings shall be within ± 5mm.
3.15 Speed
Speed of the lift shall be selected based on the guidelines given below, unless otherwise
specified in data sheet:
Type of Lift Recommended Speed (Approx.)

Upto 2 floors - 0.75 m/s
From 3 to 5 floors 1.0 m/s
Passenger Lift
From 6 to 12 floors - 2.0 m/s
More than 12 floors - 2.5 m/s
For Travel length < 30 m - 0.5 m/s
30 m < Travel Length < 40 m - 0.6 m/s
Goods Lift
Travel Length ? 40 m - 0.7 m/s
For DCU Lift of any travel length - 0.5 m/s
3.16 Electrical
3.16.1 Site Conditions
The equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation under the site conditions specified
elsewhere. If not specifically mentioned, a design ambient temperature of 40 degree Celsius
and an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters above mean sea level shall be considered.
Page 5447 of 8516

ISOZEIT F-rf, ENGINEERS
ela eal Weg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
laglEM MOW =30009 (A Goa. o India Undertaking)
3.16.2 Codes and Regulations
3.16.2.1 The electrical equipment shall meet the requirement of this specification, in addition to the
relevant Indian Standards / code of practices, statutory regulations and sound engineering
practices. Complete system shall also conform to the latest revisions of following, as
applicable:
a) Indian Electricity Act and rules.
b) Fire insurance Regulations.
c) Indian Petroleum rules and any other regulations laid down by chief Controller of
Explosives.
d) The factory Act and any other regulations laid down by Factory Inspectorate.
e) Regulations laid down by local statutory authorities and CEA/ Electrical Inspectorate.
0 Oil Mines regulations (For Projects under DGMS jurisdiction).
g) OISD guidelines.
3.16.2.2 Where Indian Standards do not exist, the relevant IEC, British or German (VDE)/
IEEE/NEMA standards shall apply.
3.16.2.3 In case of imported equipment, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable, if
these standards are equivalent or more stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
3.16.3 Power Supply system from Purchaser
a) Power supply & Frequency : 415V±6%„ 50Hz±3%, TPN (at one point in
machine room)
b) Power supply & Frequency : 240V±10%„ 50Hz±3%, SPN (at one point in
for Lighting machine room)
3.16.4 Utilization Voltage
a) Motors rated upto 160 kW •. 415V, 3 ph

b) Anti-condensation heaters .• 240V, 1 ph
c) Lighting •. 240V, 1 ph
3.16.5 Design requirements for Power distribution board
a) Ammeter & Voltmeters in : Required

Incomer
b) Control supply for motor : 240V, A.C.
starter feeders
c) Contactor & switch fuse / : Upto 55 kW
MCCB with overload relay
d) Field ammeters Regd. for motors > 5.5KW
e) Clear working space for : Front 1000mm, Rear Flush Mounted
PDB
3.16.6 Minimum degree of protection for electrical equipments shall be as under:
a) Power distribution Board : IP-41

b) Motors : IP-55
c) Controller with Variable : IP-31
frequency drive
Page 5448 of 8516

/5dgtae? ENGNEERS
*Igen Etiteg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
eloroverermoran (A Govt ce India Undertaking)
3.16.7 Area Classifications and Equipment Selection.
In case of hazardous area Lift, same shall meet the following requirements:
a) Electrical equipments for hazardous areas shall be certified by CMRI or equivalent
recognised independent test house such as BASEEFA / LCIE / PTB / UL / FM. All
equipment (Imported) shall also have valid statutory approvals from CCOE/PESO for
use in the specified hazardous area. The indigenous equipment shall conform to Indian
standards and shall be approved by CCOE/PESO/DGMS as applicable. All
indigenous flameproof equipments shall have valid BIS license and marking as
required by statutory authorities.
b) All electrical equipment including Telephone for hazardous area lifts shall be
Flameproof type (Ex d), suitable for specified gas group and temperature Class T3 as
minimum.
3.16.8 Power distribution board (PDB)
a) Vendor shall provide PDB for lift with one incomer and outgoing feeders for feeding
all electrical loads of the package. Purchaser shall only provide Power Supply at the
incomer of Vendor's PDB, including supply and laying of power cables upto
Vendor's PDB. The PDB shall be located in machine room.
b) PDB shall house switch, fuse/MCCB, voltmeter, and CT ammeter etc. Power supply
ON indicating lamps (3 Nos.) shall also be provided on the PDB. This PDB shall
distribute power to micro—processor controller with VVVFD, ARD panel etc.
c) All Outgoing power & control cables from PDB to individual load shall be supplied,
laid & terminated by Vendor. The interlocking between the PDB and the package
equipments shall be provided by Vendor.
3.16.9 Motors
a) The rating of all motors shall be selected to take care of loading conditions, cyclic
duration factor, service factor and de-rating factor for ambient temperature as per
applicable code.
b) Motors shall be suitable for S4 duty and Cyclic Duration Factor (CDF). No. of starts /
stops per hour shall be as specified elsewhere in the bid document. Wherever, lift has
to operate in higher ambient temperatures, suitable de-rating factor shall be
considered.
c) All motors shall have class F insulation and temperature rise limited to Class B limits.
Squirrel cage induction motors shall have TEFC enclosure with IP-55 degree of
ingress protection. The slip ring motors shall also have dust proof enclosure preferably
of IP-5X class. All motors to be installed in hazardous areas shall be flameproof type
irrespective of the area classification where the lift is to be installed.
d) The standard motor kW rating and frame sizes shall be selected as per Indian
Standards, to facilitate future replacement.
e) VFD Controlled motor shall be provided with thermister.
3.16.10 Microprocessor Controller with Variable Voltage Variable Frequency Drive
Microprocessor Controller with Variable Voltage Variable Frequency drive (VVVFD)

shall be provided by Vendor for smooth control of lift motor and energy saving. Make of
variable frequency drive unit shall be subject to Purchaser's approval based on
satisfactory past track record of the manufacturer. VVVFD shall be as per Vendor's
Page 5449 of 8516

ENGINEERS
fr-11)
*.gen fai5leg INDIA UMTED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
IHRIT 2101W 411J,R6A)
Goat or India Undertaking)
(A
standard to suit the application. In case Air Conditioning is required for VVVFD panel,
same shall be provided by Vendor. Air Conditioning shall be suitable for specified area
classification.
3.16.11 Automatic Rescue Device (ARD)
ARD shall be provided by Vendor for safe exit from car in case of power outage. This
ARD shall consist of maintenance free DC Battery, battery charger & inverter which shall
feed power to lift motor on power outage for inching operation in order to align the car
with the nearest landing. On being aligned, the doors shall automatically open enabling
safe exit of occupants from car. Make of ARD and DC batteries shall be subject to
Purchaser's approval based on satisfactory past track record of the manufacturer. ARD
shall be as per Vendor's standard to suit the application.
3.16.12 Cabling
All cabling from machine room PDB//Lighting Panel to all the loads shall be done with
PVC insulated; FRLS, armoured cables where as cabling between hoist way Junction box
to the lift car shall be done with copper conductor, braided trailing cables. Separate and
distinct trailing cable shall be provided for power, control, signalling, and lighting circuit.
Minimum conductor size for power cable shall be 4 sq. mm and 2.5 sq. mm copper for
control cable. Power cables up to 16 sq. mm conductor size shall be of copper conductor.
All cables shall be flame retardant type
3.16.13 Lighting
Lighting within Lift Car, Hoistway & Pit is to be provided by Vendor and shall be LED
type. Hoist way lighting shall be provided at regular interval in the hoist way for carrying
out maintenance. Minimum one number lighting fixtures shall be provided by the Vendor
at each landing in the hoist way.
3.16.14 Earthing
a) One no. earth plate shall be provided by Purchaser near PDB in machine room.
Further distribution & connection of individual items with earthing system is under
Vendor's scope.
b) The metal enclosure of all the electrical equipment shall have an effective earthing
connection by means of two numbers earthing terminals.
3.16.15 Vendor shall supply suitable Cable glands and tinned copper lugs for equipments supplied
by them. Cable details of purchaser's cable shall be provided during detail engineering.
3.16.16 Cable glands forming a part of relevant FLP enclosure shall be FLP type, testing by
CIMFR or any other recognized independent testing laboratory and approved by
CCOE/DGMS or any other statutory authority as applicable. Indigenous FLP glands shall
have valid BIS license as per the requirements of statutory authorities.
3.16.17 All indicating lamps shall be LED type.
3.16.18 The lift package shall be complete with all the safety interlocks and devices for safe and
reliable operation of the lift, all of which are included in Vendor's scope.
Equipment shall be subjected to stage wise expediting, inspection and testing at

Vendor's/Sub-vendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall
Page 5450 of 8516

18igaZie ENGINEERS
51 1.JI 05teg INDIA IJMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
VI2®IC,01J9trA) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
submit Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) before commencement of fabrication. Approved ITP
shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
workmanship confirm to the requirement of this specification.
4.1.2 Testing at Vendor's works shall be carried out in accordance with applicable codes and
shall include following tests as minimum.
a) Visual Check
b) Dimensional check
c) Assembly of major subassembly components such as drive unit, car body, doors.
d) Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its
authorized inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check-up
and in no way absolve the Vendor of his responsibility.
4.2 Performance Testing and Guarantees at Site
4.2.1 A field performance test shall be conducted by the Vendor to demonstrate the performance
of the equipment after commissioning in accordance with Performance test procedure
prepared as per EIL Standard 7-76-0103. The procedure of performance testing shall be
submitted for Purchaser's review and shall be mutually agreed between the purchaser and
the Vendor.
4.2.2 Vendor shall carry out the tests as required by the code and as per normal practice of the
Lift industry. However following tests shall be carried out as a minimum:
a) Test to determine the motor, brake, control equipment, door locking devices and limit
switches function correctly.
b) Brake shall be tested to check whether it can sustain a car at rest with 125 % of rated
load.
c) Over speed test to determine that the safety gear stops the lift car with rated load. Over
speed test shall be made with ropes attached all electrical apparatus operative except
the over speed switch on the governor. The stopping distance of the lift car is the actual
slide as observed from the marking on guides.
d) Test to determine the lift car raises and lowers rated load.
e) Test to determine that the lift car achieves the rated speed.
t) Accurate positioning of the lift at all landings.
g) Test to determine ARD's (Automatic Rescue Device) performance during power
failure situation and check whether it reaches the nearest landing platform safely,
without any problem.
Parameters mentioned at d), e) and f) above are part of performance guarantees.
4.2.3 During PGTR, performance parameters mentioned against cl. No. 4.2.2 (d, e, f) above shall
be demonstrated by the vendor as per Owner's instruction for ten (10) times within One (1)
hour duration with rated load for system acceptance by the owner.
4.2.4 In case vendor is not able to demonstrate/meet PGTR checkpoints as mentioned above
three (3) times out of Ten (10) attempts, then vendor shall take corrective action and
rectify the troubleshoot cause without any cost and time implication to owner till required
performance is achieved.
Page 5451 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Oelf tital eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-61-0202 Rev. 2
MOM OMR MaMISSI) IA Goo. of India Undertaking)
4.2.5 All parts of the lift shall operate satisfactorily with no vibration, noise, shock or display of
any other unfavourable characteristics during the performance test.
4.2.6 Necessary instruments for the performance testing shall be arranged by the Vendor, and
shall be tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test. Only test load shall
be provided by purchaser near test site.
4.2.7 If any additional loose instruments apart from installed ones are required to demonstrate
performance guarantee test of the system, the same shall be arranged by the vendor which
shall be duly tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test. Vendor shall
take back all such loose instruments after successful commissioning and system acceptance
by purchaser.
5.0 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE CONTRACT (AMC)
After the warranty/guarantee period, comprehensive AMC services shall be available on

chargeable basis from Lift vendor for regular maintenance (i.e. attending breakdown of lift
within short notices, checking of clearances, necessary adjustment, lubrication etc.)
including supply and replacement of damaged/failure/defective parts (Mechanical,
Electrical, Instrumentation, software etc. with consumables) for which lift vendor shall
quote AMC charges for 1', 2 nd, an a• .3•-•rd year after completion of warranty/guarantee period.
Vendor shall be obliged to provide AMC (renewable every year) for lifetime of the
equipment. Comprehensive AMC charges shall be considered for price evaluation.
Notes:
A) Maintenance (Free as well as comprehensive AMC) shall consist of monthly

examinations and any necessary adjustment and lubrication of the equipment by
vendor's maintenance staff. The required supplies and spare parts shall be furnished by
the vendor without any charges.
B) Attending breakdown of lifts shall be a part of maintenance work.
C) Any Operational failure shall be promptly attended to avoid any inconvenience to the
residents of the residential complex. However, preventive maintenance shall be carried
out by the vendor. Emergency and Man Trap rescue services shall be provided 24 hrs
and 7 days by the vendor.
D) The software provided by the vendor for system operation shall be updated and
upgraded on regular intervals with the latest patches or latest version as soon as it is
available with them during the guarantee/warranty as well as comprehensive AMC
period.
E) For software, vendor shall grant a non-exclusive license to the purchaser/end user to
use the control software to operate the equipment for their own purpose.
Special Instructions for Foreign Vendor of Elevator: In case of foreign vendor,

vendor is required to have Indian franchise having experience of providing similar
services who shall undertake comprehensive AMCs as per Cl. No. 5.0 above and also
attend elevator problems with-in warranty/guarantee/AMC period. Vendor shall furnish
MOU with Indian franchise for the above arrangement along with offer.
Page 5452 of 8516

ENGINEERS
*Igen iii2eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 641-0202 Rev. 2
Oilen (92,1,1 ,01.71111.1) (A Govt a/ India Untlestaktno
Surface preparation and painting shall be as per manufacturer's standard and shall be
suitable for corrosive industrial environment unless otherwise specified in job
specification/data sheet.
equipment.
7.5 Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged storage of supplied equipment/ material at
site.
8.0 SPARE PARTS
8.1 Vendor shall submit list of two (2) years recommended spares with quantities and itemized
price for the normal operation and maintenance of the lift along with the offer. Two (2)
years recommended spares shall be ordered only in case Purchaser decides not to go for
AMC services. Proper coding and referencing of spare parts shall be done so that later
identification with appropriate equipment is facilitated.
8.2 Vendor shall ensure that adequate quantity of commissioning spares have been included in
the offer so as to ensure that commissioning of the lift is not hampered for shortage of
commissioning spares. Any additional spares required during commissioning shall be
provided by Vendor without any cost and time implication to Purchaser.
Page 5453 of 8516

SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1
lakgINDIA LIMITED REQUIREMENTS FROM
mren ewaire mjvam) (A Gavt at India Undertaking)
BIDDERS Page 1 of 7
64)(11 Chrlf qui ciall -51-04ff

u tea aliikrrat t ?drift'
SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS
QMS QMS
1 12.03.15 General Revision Standards Standards MPJ SC
Committee Committee

QMS QMS
0 04.06.09 Issued as Standard Specification Standards Standards SCT ND
Committee Committee
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Checked
Date Purpose Prepared by Convener Chairman
No by
Approved by

Page 5454 of 8516

ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
INDIA LIMITED SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1

lft2 (AG'"ind'Undelt6ung) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
CV Curriculum Vitae
ISO International Organization for Standardization
MR Material Requisition
PO Purchase Order
PR Purchase Requisition
QMS Quality Management System
QMS Standards Committee
Convener: Mr. M.P. Jain
Members: Mr. A.K. Chaudhary (Insp.)

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)
Mr. R.K. Trivedi (Engg.)
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Const.)
Mr. Tilak Raj (Projects)
Mr. Vinod Kumar (CQA)

Page 5455 of 8516

Igar llks INDIA LIMITED SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev.
Oiren
'A
Govt
At ' nth' Und"k"V) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
Clause Title Page

No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS 4
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 4
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — GENERAL 4
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 4
6.0 AUDITS 7
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS 7
Page 5456 of 8516

el ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

$1g-zg faReg INDIA LIMITED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1
own 120.2 .I J40.9) IA GOVt of India Undertaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be

met by BIDDER for following purpose:
• QMS requirements to be met by suppliers/contractors after award of work/

during contract execution.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word "BIDDER" means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is considered
synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
2.2 Project Quality Plan
Document tailored from Standard Quality Management System Manual of BIDDER,

specifying how the quality requirements of the project will be met.
2.3 Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being
purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

6-78-0002 Specification for Documentation Requirements from
Contractors
6-78-0003 Specification for Documentation Requirements from Suppliers
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — GENERAL
Unless otherwise agreed with EIL / Owner, the BIDDER proposed quality system
shall fully satisfy all relevant requirements of ISO 9001 "Quality Management
Systems — Requirements." Evidence of compliance shall be current certificate of
quality system registration to ISO 9001 or a recent compliance audit recommending
registration from a certification agency. The quality system shall provide the
planned and systematic control of all quality related activities for execution of
contract. Implementation of the system shall be in accordance with BIDDER'S
Quality Manual and PROJECT specific Quality Plan.
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

5.1 BIDDER shall prepare and submit for review / record, Project Quality Plan / Quality
Assurance Plan for contracted scope / job. The BIDDER'S Quality Plan shall
address all of the applicable elements of ISO 9001, identify responsible parties
within BIDDER'S organization, for the implementation / control of each area,
reference the applicable procedures used to control / assure each area, and verify
the documents produced for each area. The Project Quality Plan shall necessarily
define control or make reference to the relevant procedures, for design and
engineering, purchase, documentation, record control, bid evaluation, inspection,
production/manufacturing, preservation, packaging and storage, quality control at

Page 5457 of 8516

INDIA LIMITED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1

(A Gavt of India undertaking' REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 5 of 7
construction site, pre-commissioning, commissioning and handing over (as

applicable) in line with contract requirement and scope of work.
5.2 BIDDER shall identify all specified or implied statutory and regulatory requirements
and communicate the same to all concerned in his organization and his sub
contractor's organization for compliance.
5.3 BIDDER shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for
fulfillment of PO / contract. BIDDER shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work
environment to ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are
maintained.
5.4 BIDDER shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order.
The quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:
Resources
Product / deliverable characteristics to be controlled.
Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are
realized
Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria
Records to be generated
Need for any documented procedure
The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test
plans (ITPs) and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of bidder.
These documents shall be submitted to EIL/Owner for review/approval, before
commencement of work.
5.5 Requirements for sub-contracting / purchasing of services specified in contract /

tender shall be adhered to. In general all outsourced items will be from approved
vendors of EIL. Wherever requirements are not specified, or approved sub vendors
do not exist, the sub-contractor shall establish and maintain a system for purchasing
/ sub-contracting to ensure that purchased product / service conforms to specified
requirements. Criteria for selection of sub-contractor, evaluation, re-evaluation,
maintenance of purchasing data and verification of purchased product (sub-
contractor services), constitute important components of this requirement.
5.6 BIDDER shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled
conditions. Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable
the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product

the availability of work instructions
the use of suitable equipment
the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices
the implementation of monitoring and measurement
the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities
5.7 BIDDER shall validate any processes for production and service provision where
resulting output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement.
This includes any process where deficiencies become apparent only after the
product is in use or service has been delivered.
5.8 BIDDER shall establish a system for identification and traceability of product /
deliverable throughout product realization. Product status with respect to inspection
and testing requirements shall be identified.

Page 5458 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
lge.ji id5fez INDIA LIMITED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1

Oren erRRIZ .71.1.113,70 IA Govt of India undettaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 6 of 7
5.9 BIDDER shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard EIL / Owner property (material /
document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any Owner / EIL
property is lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be
reported to the EIL / Owner.
5.10 BIDDER shall ensure the conformity of product / deliverable during internal
processing and delivery to the intended destination. Requirements mentioned in the
tender shall be adhered to.
5.11 BIDDER shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are
carried out in line with requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipments
shall be calibrated at specified frequency, against national or international
measurement standards; where no such standard exists, the basis used for
calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipments shall be protected from
damage during handling, maintenance and storage.
5.12 BIDDER shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes
involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of
contract.
5.13 BIDDER shall monitor and measure the characteristics of the product/deliverable to
verify that product requirement has been met. The inspection (stage as well as
final) by BIDDER and EIL / Owner personnel shall be carried out strictly as per the
ITPs forming part of the contract. Product release or service delivery shall not
proceed until the planned arrangements have been satisfactorily completed, unless
otherwise approved by relevant authority and where applicable by Owner / EIL.
5.14 BIDDER shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the
product which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to
prevent its unintended use or delivery
5.15 All non-conformities (NCs) / deficiencies found by the BIDDER'S inspection /

surveillance staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action shall be
recorded and resolved suitably. Effective corrective and preventive action shall be
implemented by the BIDDER so that similar NCs including deficiencies do not recur.
5.16 All deficiencies noticed and reported by EIL / Owner shall be analyzed by the
BIDDER and appropriate corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented.
BIDDER shall intimate EIL / Owner of all such corrective and preventive action
implemented by him.
5.17 BIDDER should follow the standards, specifications and approved drawings.
Concessions/Deviations shall be allowed only in case of unavoidable circumstances.
In such situations Concession/deviation request must be made by the BIDDER
through online system of EIL eDMS. URL of EIL eDMS is
http://edocx.eil . co . in/vportal.
5.18 BIDDER shall have documented procedure for control of documents.
5.19 All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage
or loss until the project completion, then handed over to EIL / Owner as per contract
requirement (Refer Specification Nos. 6-78-0002 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Contractors and 6-78-0003 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Suppliers), or disposed as per relevant project procedure.
Page 5459 of 8516


ei MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
IftJr
kif51ft. INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0001 Rev. 1
wirer riraxem3Tmil (A Goof of India UndertakIngi
REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 7 of 7
6.0 AUDITS
BIDDER shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit programme
shall cover design, procurement, construction management and commissioning as
applicable including activities carried out by sub-vendors and sub-contractors. This
shall be additional to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under
BIDDER'S own ISO 9001 certification scheme.
The audit programmes and audit reports shall be available with bidder for scrutiny
by EIL / Owner. EIL or Owner's representative reserves the right to attend, as a
witness, any audit conducted during the execution of the WORKS.
In addition to above EIL, Owner and third party appointed by EIL/Owner may also
perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. BIDDER shall provide assistance
and access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this
purpose. Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by BIDDER.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
BIDDER shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work
(Within one week) for record / review by EIL / Owner.
Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project)
Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan
Job specific Inspection Test Plans, if not attached with PR
Job Procedures
Inspection/Test Formats
In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained

by the BIDDER for submission to EIL / Owner on demand at any point of time during
execution of the project.
Quality Manual
Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard
Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product
Procedure for Control of Documents
Sample audit report of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during
last one year
Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers, during the last one
year
Project QMS audit report
Technical audit reports for the project
Corrective action report on the audits
Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. BIDDER shall submit

any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.
Page 5460 of 8516

SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

101 ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION
g
** el!2RAfi'aA
IAIRON
g
Meavow INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN. Of India Undeftakingi
REQUIREMENTS FROM
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
CONTRACTORS Page 1 of 8
-4-4-<R1 51(t)01
tr-g 1-4-4vr
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
FROM CONTRACTORS
QMS QMS
Committee Committee
QMS QMS
Committee Committee
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked Committee Bureau
Rev.
Date Purpose by by Convener Chairman
No
Approved by
Page 5461 of 8516

SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION
k311 ei ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
51g-a 015teg INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0002 Rev. 1
1.1FA 2IETIN

IA Govt of India undertaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM
Abbreviations:
DCI - Document Control Index

eDMS - Electronic Document Management System
FOA - Fax of Acceptance
HOD - Head of Division / Department
IC - Inspection Certificate
IRN - Inspection Release Note
ITP - Inspection and Test Plan
LOA - Letter of Acceptance
MOU - Memorandum of Understanding
QMS - Quality Management System
URL - Universal Resource Locator

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)

Page 5462 of 8516


adaelei m,4 ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
$1fgar 051ft INDIA UMITED
Merl evensmaR3sTWIl (A Govt of India UndertakIng) REQUIREMENTS FROM 6-78-0002 Rev. 1
CONTENTS
Clause Title Page

No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS 4
Attachments
Format for completeness of Final Documentation Format No. 3-78-0004
Page 5463 of 8516

k391-4elei TEED ENGINERS DOCUMENTATION No.
INDIA EL IMITED 6-78-0002 Rev. 1
lit15reg, IA Govt al India Undertaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Contractors
All documents/data against the Tender / Contract shall be developed and submitted
to ElUOwner by the contractor for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Contractor
For the purpose of this specification, the word "CONTRACTOR" means the
person(s), firm, company or organization who is under the process of being
contracted by EIL / Owner for delivery of some products and services. The word is
considered synonymous to bidder, supplier or vendor.
2.2 Owner
6-78-0001 Specification for Quality Management System Requirements

from Bidders
4.1 Documents/Data to be submitted by the Contractor
4.1.1 The contractor shall submit the documents and data against the Tender/Contract as
per the list specified in respective Tender/Contract.
4.1.2 Review of the contractor drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility
with basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the contractor of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with Tender/Contract requirements,
applicable codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency
noticed during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly
corrected by the contractor without any extra cost or time, whether or not comments
on the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage.
4.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, submission of documents for Review/Records shall

commence as follows from the date of Fax of Intent / Letter of Intent/ Fax of
Acceptance (FOA)/ Letter of Acceptance (LOA):
QMS - 1week
Drawing/Document Control Index - 2weeks
Other Documents/Drawings - As per approved Drawing/Document Control
Index/Schedule
4.1.4 Documents as specified in Tender/Contract are minimum requirements. Contractor

shall submit any other document/data required for completion of the job as per
EIL/Owner instructions.

Page 5464 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS No.
acs INDIA LIMITED
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM 6-78-0002 Rev. 1
4.2 Style and Formatting
4.2.1 All Documents shall be in ENGLISH language and in M.K.S System of units.
4.2.2 Before submitting the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly entered in each drawing:
Tender Number
Name of Equipment / Package
Equipment / Package Tag No.
Name of Project
Owner
Main Contractor (if work is sub-contracted)
Drawing / Document Title
Drawing / Document No.
Drawing / Document Revision No. and Date
4.3 Review and Approval of Documents by Contractor
4.3.1 The Drawing/Documents shall be reviewed, checked, approved and duly

signed/stamped by contractor before submission. Revision number shall be changed
during submission of the revised contractor documents and all revisions shall be
highlighted by clouds. Whenever the contractor require any sub- contractor drawings
to be reviewed by EIL, the same shall be submitted by the contractor after duly
reviewed, approved and stamped by the contractor. Direct submission of sub-
contractor's drawings without contractor's approval shall not be entertained.
4.4 Document Category
4.4.1 Review Category
Following review codes shall be used for review of contractor Drawings/Documents:
Review Code 1 No comments. Proceed with manufacture/

fabrication/ Construction as per the document.
Review Code 2 Proceed with manufacture/ fabrication/
Construction as per commented document.
Revised document required
Review Code 3 Document does not conform to basic
requirements as marked. Resubmit for review
R Document is retained for Records. Proceed with
manufacture/ fabrication
V Void
4.5 Methodology for Submission of Documents to EIL/Owner
4.5.1 Document Control Index (DCI)

Contractor shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on
PO/PR/MR along with schedule date of submission of each drawing/document on EIL
eDMS. The DCI shall be specific with regard to drawing/document no. and the exact
title. Proper sequencing of the drawings/documents should be ensured in schedule
date of submission.

Page 5465 of 8516


ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
tra /A Govt of India Undertaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM
4.5.2 Submission of Drawings/Documents

Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal. The detail
guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on following
URL
http://edocx.ei Lco. i n/vporta I
4.5.3 Statutory Approvals

Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Contractor, the
Contractor shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4 Details of Contact Persons of Contractor
After placement of order contractor shall assign a Project Manager for that order. The
details are to be filled online through the portal. The details include e-mail address,
mailing address, telephone nos., fax nos. and name of Project Manager. All the system
generated emails pertaining to that order shall be sent to the assigned Project
Manager.
4.5.5 Schedule and Progress Reporting
Contractor shall submit monthly progress report and updated procurement,
engineering and manufacturing status (schedule vs. actual) every month. First report
shall be submitted within 2 weeks from FOA/LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL/Owner
can ask for report submission as required on weekly/fortnightly/adhoc basis depending
upon supply status and contractor shall furnish such reports promptly without any price
implication. Format for progress report shall be submitted by the contractor during
kick off meeting or within one week of receiving FOA/LOA, whichever is earlier.
4.5.6 Quality Assurance Plan/Inspection and Test Plan

Inspection and test plans attached if any, to the tender are generic and indicative only.
Immediately after receipt of the order, contractor shall submit within one week of
receiving FOA/LOA, job specific ITPs based on the indicative ITPs. Further, contractor
shall also submit Quality Assurance Plan for project activities in the scope of contract,
starting from manufacturing to handing over/ commissioning, these plans shall
cover/identify the activities, relevant procedure, if any, code of conformance,
resources for performance and checking/monitoring, approval requirements and
authority, records to be generated and audit scope by EIL/Owner.
For EPCC/LSTK/Package contracts, the contractor shall prepare a list of items/
equipments and their inspection categorization plans for all items included in the scope
of supply immediately after receipt of order and obtain approval for the same from EIL.
The items shall be categorized into different categories depending upon their criticality
for the scope of inspection of TPIA and/or EIL.
4.5.7 Inspection Release Note (IRN)/ Inspection Certificate (IC)

Contractor shall ensure that all documents viz. documents reviewed, manufacture's
test certificate etc., mentioned in Inspection Release Note(IRN), issued by EIL/third
party against the materials supplied by contractor., are sent to EIL along with the IRN.
IRN/ IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector/ third party inspection agency only after all
the drawings/documents as per DCI are submitted and are accepted under review
code-1 & code R. Material/Equipments dispatch from contractor's/sub vender's works
shall not commence till above condition is met.
Page 5466 of 8516

Ogof IOM 0,1.I
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt W Indio Undertalung) REQUIREMENTS FROM 6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Note: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or with-
holding of payment as per conditions of Tender/Contract.
4.6 Final Documentation

4.6.1 As built Drawings
Shop/Site changes made by contractor after approval of drawings under 'Code 1' by
EIL and deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard
copies of drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the contractor. These
'As-built' drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/Site
engineer/TPIA also. Format for completeness of final documents (Format No. 3-78-
0004) is attached with this specification. Contractor shall prepare scanned images
files of all marked — up 'As — built' drawings. Simultaneously contractor shall
incorporate the shop/site changes in the native soft files of the drawings also.
4.6.2 As built Final Documents
As built final documents shall be submitted as listed in Tender/Contract.
4.6.3 Packing/Presentation of Final Documents
Final Documents shall be legible photocopies in A4, A3 size only. Drawings will be
inserted in plastic pockets (both sides transparent, sheet thickness minimum 0.1 mm)
with an extra strip of 12 mm wide for punching so that drawings are well placed.
Final Documentation shall be bound in hard board plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x
315 mm (10 1 /2 inch x 12 1 /2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of
several volumes and each volume shall have a volume number, index of volumes and
index of contents of that particular volume. Where numbers of volumes are more,
90mm thickness can be used. Each volume shall have top PVC sheet of minimum
0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder cover and will have 2 lever clips. In
case of imported items documents, 4 lever clip shall also be accepted. All four corners
of folders shall be properly metal clamped. Indexing of contents with page numbering
must be incorporated by contractor. Spiral/Spico bound documents shall not be
acceptable. As mentioned above, books should be in hard board plastic folders with
sheets punched and having 2/4 lever clips arrangement.
Each volume shall contain on cover a title block indicating Tender No., name of project,
name of customer, package equipment tag no. & name (if applicable). Each volume
will have hard front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book. These spines
will also have the title printed on them. Title shall include also volume number (say 11
of 15) etc.
4.6.4 Submission of Soft copies

Contractor shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of
drawings/documents, along with proper index.
In addition to hard copies, contractor shall submit electronic file (CD-ROM) covering
soft copies of all the final drawings and documents, all text documents prepared on
computer, scanned images of all important documents (not available as soft files), all
relevant catalogues, manuals available as soft files (editable copies of drawings/text
documents, while for catalogues/manuals/proprietary information and data PDF files
can be furnished).
All the above documents shall also be uploaded on the EIL eDMS portal.

Page 5467 of 8516

laraeles ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
Ogell 22-eg W INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0002 Rev. 1
(A Govt of India Undertaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM
4.6.5 Completeness of Final Documentation

Contractor shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIL/TPIA and
attach the Format for Completeness of Final Documentation (Format No. 3-78-0004)
duly signed by EIL or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.
Page 5468 of 8516

COMPLETENESS OF FINAL
fEr) ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION
$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali• 4,30.0
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gort of hula Undertakog)
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./

Tender No. Rev. No. :
Name of the Work/

Equipment
Tag. No.
Supplier's/ Contractor's
Works Order No.
Certified that the Engineering Documents/ Manufacturing & Test Certificates submitted by the
supplier are complete in accordance with the Vendor Data Requirements of Purchase
Requisition.
Signature Signature
Date Date
Name Name
Designation Designation
Department Department
Supplier/Contractor EIL/TPIA
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi . ...........
.....
4/ Name: ......... .. . ......
..................
f4-41--/ Date: ..... ••••••• .... ......
Format No. 3-78-0004, Rev. 1/ 12.03.2015 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 5469 of 8516


∎31 ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION
ligar lafgesW INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
(411W1 292,51V MIJ‘10571) Govt o India Undertalongj
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS Page 1 of 8
affr irewufat 74ER

*mat t feitu
SPECIFICATION FOR
FROM SUPPLIERS
C)(415----2
QMS QMS
1 12.03.15 General Revision Standards Standards SC
Committee Committee
QMS QMS
Committee Committee
Standards Standards
Comm ifte Bureau
Date Purpose Convener Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Page 5470 of 8516

(t,ft. ENGINEERS
1i laWGNIIY INDIA LIMITED
ogire, efiTIWAnowAl (A Govt of Into Undertaking(
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Abbreviations:

FOA Fax of Acceptance
HOD Head of Division / Department
IC Inspection Certificate
IRN Inspection Release Note
ITP Inspection and Test Plan
LOA Letter of Acceptance
MOU Memorandum of Understanding
PO Purchase Order
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
TPIA Third Party Inspection Agency
URL Universal Resource Locator

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)
Page 5471 of 8516


ei ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
Oaez idiWIeg INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
011E71 ewaxedaagem)

CONTENTS

Clause Title Page
No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS 4
Attachments

Page 5472 of 8516

dol ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
5'gzir tlf5ltu INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
I.VOM (A Govt of Intha Undertakongt REQUIREMENTS FROM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Suppliers.
All documents/data against the PO / PR / MR shall be developed and submitted to
EIL/Owner by the suppliers for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Supplier
For the purpose of this specification, the word "SUPPLIER" means the person(s),
firm, company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
synonymous to bidder, contractor or vendor.
2.2 Owner

from Bidders
4.1 Documents/Data to be Submitted by the Supplier
4.1.1 The Supplier shall submit the documents and data against the PO/PR/MR as per the
list given in respective PO/PR/MR.
4.1.2 Review of the supplier drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility with
basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the supplier of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with PR requirements, applicable
codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency noticed
during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly corrected
by the supplier without any time and cost implications, irrespective of comments on
the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage or not.

QMS - 1 week
Drawing/Document Control Index - 2 weeks
Index/Schedule
4.1.4 Documents as specified in PO/PR/MR are minimum requirements. Supplier shall

submit any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.

Page 5473 of 8516

'7f 11 INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
I OfiTt cYeawlnn (A Govt of India UndenakIngi REQUIREMENTS FROM
4.2.2 Before forwarding the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly mentioned in each drawing:
Purchase Requisition Number
Name of Project
Client
43 Review and Approval of Documents by Supplier

signed/stamped by supplier before submission. Revision number shall be changed
during submission of the revised supplier documents and all revisions shall be
highlighted by clouds. Whenever the supplier require any sub-supplier drawings to be
reviewed by EIL, the same shall be submitted by the supplier after duly reviewed,
approved and stamped by the supplier. Direct submission of sub-supplier's drawings
without contractor's approval shall not be entertained.
Following review codes shall be used for review of supplier Drawings/Documents:

fabrication as per the document.
Review Code 2 Proceed with manufacture/fabrication as per
commented document. Revised document
required.
R Document is retained for Records. Proceed
with manufacture/fabrication.
V Void
Supplier shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on
date of submission.

Page 5474 of 8516


r1.7
-14 ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
51g-a feff5leg INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
1.17,124ifflsrefloJOORI1 IA GUN. of India Undertaking, REQUIREMENTS FROM

Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal as per DCI.
The detail guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on
following URL
http://edocx.eil.co.in/vportal
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Supplier, the

Supplier shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4 Details of Contact Persons of Supplier
After placement of order supplier shall assign a Project Manager for that order. The
Manager.
Supplier shall submit monthly progress report and updated procurement, engineering
and manufacturing status (schedule vs. actual) every month, beginning within 2 weeks
from FOA/LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL/Owner can ask for report submission as
required on weekly/fortnightly/adhoc basis depending upon supply status and supplier
shall furnish such reports promptly without any price implication. Format for progress
report shall be submitted by the Supplier during kick off meeting or within one week of
receiving FOA/LOA, whichever is earlier.

Inspection and test plans (ITP) attached if any, to the MR/PR are to be followed.
However for cases wherein ITPs have not been attached with MR/PR, Supplier shall
submit within one week of receiving FOA/LOA, the Quality Assurance Plan for
manufacturing, covering quality control of critical bought out items/materials,
inspection & testing at various stages of production, quality control records and site
assembly & testing as may be applicable to the specific order and obtain approval
from concerned Regional procurement Office of EIL/third party inspection agency, as
applicable.
For Package equipment contracts, the supplier shall prepare a list of items/
equipments and their inspection categorization plan for all items included in the scope
of supply immediately after receipt of order and obtains approval for the same from
EIL. The items shall be categorized into different categories depending upon their
criticality for the scope of inspection of TPIA and/or EIL.
IRN/ IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector/ third party inspection agency on the basis of
successful inspection, review of certificates as per specifications & agreed quality plan
(as applicable) and only after all the drawings/documents as per DCI are submitted
and are accepted under review code-1 or code R. Supplier shall ensure that necessary
documents/manufacturing and test certificates are made available to EIL/TPIA as and
when desired.

Page 5475 of 8516

Ogell 0151jeg INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
1.127, owtore o43frosso IA Govt of India Unclettalong) REQUIREMENTS FROM
holding of payment as per conditions of PO/PR/MR.
4.5.8 Transportation Plan

Transportation Plan for Over Dimensional Consignments (ODC), if any, shall be
submitted within 2 weeks of receiving FOA/LOA, for approval. Consignment with
parameters greater than following shall be considered as over dimensional.
Dimensions: 4 meters width x 4 meters height x 20 meters length
Weight : 32 MT

4.6.1 As Built Drawings
Shop changes made by Supplier after approval of drawings under `Code 1' by EIL and
deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard copies of
drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the supplier. These 'As-built'
drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/ TPIA also. Supplier shall
prepare scanned images files of all marked — up 'As — built' drawings. Simultaneously
Supplier shall incorporate the shop changes in the native soft files of the drawings
also.
4.6.2 As Built Final Documents
As built final documents shall be submitted as listed in PO/PR/MR.
Final Documentation shall be bound in Hard board Plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x
315 mm (101 /2 inch x 12 1 /2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of
index of contents of that particular volume. Where number of volumes are more,
0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder cover and will have 2 lever clip. In
must be incorporated by supplier. Spiral/Spico bound documents shall not be
Each volume shall contain on cover a Title Block indicating package Equipment Tag
No. & Name, PO/Purchase Requisition No., Name of Project and Name of Customer.
Each volume will have hard front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book.
These spines will also have the title printed on them. Title shall include also volume
number (say 11 of 15) etc.
4.6.4 Submission of Soft Copies
Supplier shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—AIL rights reserved
Page 5476 of 8516

(L:ED'D ENGINEERS No.
lig ar idf5les
I MT
C,'
INDIA UMITED
riernfO7IJOCFAI IA Govt of India Undertaking)
DOCUMENTATION
In addition to hard copies, Supplier shall submit electronic file (CD-ROM) covering soft
copies of all the final drawings and documents, all text documents prepared on
documents, while for catalogues/manuals/proprietary information and data, PDF files
can be furnished).
Supplier shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIUTPIA and
duly signed by EIL Inspector or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.

Page 5477 of 8516

$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali• 4,30.0
INDIA LIMITED
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.

Name of the Work/

Equipment
Tag. No.
Works Order No.
Requisition.
Signature Signature
Date Date
Name Name
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi . ...........
.....
4/ Name: ......... .. . ......
..................
f4-41--/ Date: ..... ••••••• .... ......
Page 5478 of 8516

INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0029 Rev.3
IA Govt of lode UndertakIng)
ATTEfrd
fkftur a trtuur znv9-r
INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN

FOR
BASKET FILTER
3 09.09.13 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK RKS DM
2 15.07.11 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED HP SCG AKC DM
1 21.01.08 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED CS SS MVKK VC
0 23.07.02 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION SKT NKN AKB GRR
Convener Chairman
Rev. Prepared Checked Standards Committee Standards Bureau
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 5479 of 8516

IIIT
ei ENGINEERS
Itgar Of54-eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0029 Rev.3
14112n esrezn-re mucram, (A Govt o7 india Undertaking)
Abbreviations:
CEIL Certification Engineers International Limited MRT Mechanical Run Test

CIMFR Central Institute of Mining & Fuel Research NDT Non Destructive Testing
CE Carbon Equivalent NPSH Net Positive Suction Head
DFT Dry Film Thickness PO Purchase Order
DPT Dye Penetrant Testing PESO Petroleum Explosive Safety Organization
DHT De-hydrogen Heat Treatment PQR Procedure Qualification Record
ERTL Electronics Regional Test Laboratory PR Purchase Requisition
FCRI Fluid Control Research Institute PMI Positive Material Identification
HT Heat Treatment RT Radiography Testing
HIC Hydrogen Induced Cracking SSCC Sulphide Stress Corrosion Cracking
ITP Inspection and Test Plan TC Test Certificate
IP Ingress Protection TPI or TPIA Third Party Inspection Agency
IHT Intermediate Heat Treatment UT Ultrasonic Testing
IC Inspection Certificate VDR Vendor Data Requirement
IGC Inter Granular Corrosion WPS Welding Procedure Specification
MPT/MT Magnetic Particle Testing WPQ Welders Performance Qualification
MTC Material Test Certificate
Inspection Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr. S C Gupta
Members:
Mr. R.K. Singh Mr. Rajeev Kumar Mr. Himangshu Pal

Mr.Neeraj Mathur Mr. T Kamalakannan Mr. Deepak Gupta (Project)
Mr. Mayank Jain

Page 5480 of 8516

ENGINEERS
tagteg INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt 01 India Undertaking)
FOR 6-81-0029 Rev.3
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Basket filter
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS:
PO/PR/ Standards referred there in/ Job specifications /Approved documents.
3.0 INSPECTION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS:
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS RECORD SUB
NO. OF CHECK SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
Hydro test ,heat treatment, NDT, Procedure

1.1 hot forming, and other Documented procedures. 100% Document - H R
Procedures s
Procedure R-Existing
1.2 WPS/ PQR /WPQ Documented procedures. 100% - H
documents W-New
2.0 Materials inspection
Mill test
Chemical analysis &
Plates, pipes, forging, certificate
2.1 mechanical properties as per 100% H H R
fittings ,etc s and TPI
PR/data sheet.
reports
3.0 In process inspection

Page 5481 of 8516

g1 .3 ENGINEERS
14-17- ■
17,er,fre 451,5n+11 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Review of test certificates,
markings
Material
Materials identification for visual & dimensional
3.1 100% clearance - H H
plates, pipes (pressure parts) inspection, identity
record
correlation & transfer of
identity
Material identification for Review of test certificates, Material
3.2 forgings, fittings, fasteners, markings identity correlation 100% clearance - H R
gaskets (pressure parts) . record
Material
Non pressure parts (including
3.3 Review of test certificates
rt 100 % test - R R
internals, supports etc.)
certificate
NDT
NDT of weld seam as
100% Reports / H H R
applicable
RT Films
DPT on knuckle portion 100% Inspection
H H R
(both inside and out side) report
Inspection of formed HT chart review as
3.4 100% HT Chart H W R
components applicable
Inspection
Test coupon as applicable 100% H W W
report
Visual & dimensional (min.
100% Inspection
thickness, profile, ovality H H W
report
etc ) inspection
Visual & dimensional
3.5 Weld edge preparation & set up inspection, weld edge, root Inspection
100% - W R
of pressure parts gap, offset, alignment, check list
cleanliness etc

Page 5482 of 8516

ENGINEERS
0511-
eg w INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0029 Rev.3
2-1-,vre S.D. (A Govt .1 Ind. Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Chemical , mechanical Batch test
100%
3.6 Welding consumable properties & IGC as certificate H H R
applicable s
4.0 Final inspection
Visual/ dimensions,
Visual and dimensional completeness of assembly
Inspection
4.1 inspection (internals & externals) and weld visual for 100% - H H
report
including welds reinforcement, undercuts,
Surface defects, etc.
Test
4.2 Air test of pads Leak check 100% - W R
report
PWHT as applicable 100% HT chart H R
NDT
NDT as applicable 100% report / - H R
RT films
as per
Production test coupon Inspection
4.3 Inspection of completed welds specification / - H H
testing as applicable report
drawing
Each component
Weld chemical for undiluted Inspection
for each welding - H R
chemistry as applicable report
process.
Hardness for weld /HAZ as Inspection
As per spec. H R
applicable report
Each component Inspection
Insp
4.4 PMI as applicable Chemical check - H R
and weld report

Page 5483 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS
5fgar faiWtg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0029 Rev.3
5W 10 JVCD-41)
I +0071000 (A Go0 01 Ind. Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Test
4.5 Hydrostatic test Leak check 100% - H H
report
Test
4.6 Mesh/Basket Installation Fitment 100% - H
Report
5.0 Painting
Visual inspection (after
surface preparation and final Inspection
5.1 Final painting (As applicable) 100% - H -
painting for workmanship, report
uniformity) DFT check
6.0 Documentation and IC
Final stamping, review of Verifying stamping details IC /
6.1 inspection documents and issue and review of inspection 100% Inspection - H H
of IC documents reports
Verification & compilation
Final
6.2 Final documents as per PR of inspection & test records 100% - H H
dossier
for submission to customer
Legend: H- Hold (Do not proceed without approval), P-Perform, RW - Random Witness (As specified or 10% ( min.1 no. of each size and type of Bulk
item)), R-Review, W-Witness (Give due notice, work may proceed after scheduled date).
NOTES (as applicable):

1. This document describes the generic test requirements. Any additional test or Inspection scope if specified in contract documents shall also be
applicable.( unless otherwise agreed upon)
2. Acceptance Norms for all the activities shall be as per PO/PR/STANDARDS referred there in /Job Specification /Approved Documents.

Page 5484 of 8516

ENGINEERS
ffg-a1fal5rdgw INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0030 Rev.3
eie,Ple41,,g1574) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
ftfluur a trteTur

FOR
CARTRIDGE FILTER
k,C:---gr
i ._.z•
7 sC=31,-
3 09.09.13 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK RKS SCG DM
Convener Chairman
Date Purpose Standards Committee Standards Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Page 5485 of 8516

ENGINEERS
f - N17r laiWteg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0030 Rev.3
FREW ASI,g1,11 (A Govt of India Undettaking)
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 5486 of 8516

ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
fail&
1 a4r, enl ,pasn .1 1
INDIA LIMITED
FOR 6-81-0030 Rev.3
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Cartridge Filter
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
Hydro test ,heat treatment, NDT,

Procedure
1.1 hot forming, and other Documented procedures. 100% - H R
Documents
Procedures
documents W-New

Mill test
Chemical analysis &
Plates, pipes, forging, certificates
fittings ,etc and TPI
PR/data sheet.
reports
Page 5487 of 8516

ENGINEERS
i=g-111Gliai5VeS INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0030 Rev.3
e1 ore mt .mm. ) IA Govt or India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Test
2.2 Cartridge Cartridge properties 100% H R -
Certificate

markings, visual & Material
Materials identification for
3.1 dimensional inspection, 100% clearance - H H
plates, pipes (pressure parts)
identity correlation & record
transfer of identity
3.2 forgings, fittings, fasteners, markings identity 100% clearance - H R
gaskets (pressure parts) correlation . record
Material
3.3 Review of test certificates 100 % test - R R
certificate
NDT
NDT of weld seam as
applicable
RT Films
Inspection of formed H H R
3.4 (both inside and out side) report
components
HT chart review as
100% HT Chart H W R
applicable
Inspection
report
Page 5488 of 8516

ENGINEERS
itififi
eg INDIA LIMITED
L FOR 6-81-0030 Rev.3
vo FreL517 en, .N4..11
iArr- (A Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
100% Inspection
(min.thickness, profile, H H W
report
ovality etc ) inspection
100% - W R
cleanliness etc
Chemical , mechanical
100% Batch test
3.6 Welding consumable properties & IGC as H H R
certificates
applicable
Visual/ dimensions,
Inspection
report
4.2 Air test of pads Leak check 100% Test report - W R
NDT rep
report
NDT as applicable 100% - H R
/ RT films
4.3 Inspection of completed welds as per
specification / - H H
rt
drawing
As per spec. H R
applicable report
Page 5489 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogzu idigt- g INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0030 Rev.3
1.7,1 rircro 451.3IICF711 (A Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
and weld report
4.5 Hydrostatic test Leak check 100% Test report - H H
Inspection
4.6 Installation Cartridges Visual check 100% - H
report
Drying and Nitrogen Filling (as Inspection
4.7 Nitrogen Pressure 100% - W -
applicable) report
5.0 Painting
Final
dossier
Page 5490 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51g-aj 25reg w INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0030 Rev.3
ei2Zr2 t75I (A Govt Al Indio Undertaking)
Page 5491 of 8516

ENGINEERS
0=6'7 c-iraprean,15PH, IA Govt of India Undertaking)
FILTER SEPARATOR/ COALESCER Page 1 of 6
fm-R.
fktuur a -crtaTur
FOR
FILTER SEPARATOR/COALESCER
itz, 10-- -
3 09.09.13 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKI
7--- Ks SCG DM
Convener Chairman
No. by by
Approved by
Page 5492 of 8516

1 ,e--1 ENGINEERS
FOR
Ifgar idOlt-eg
'
we?,koedeeekJetrki)
INDIA LIMITED
6-81-0031 Rev.3
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 5493 of 8516

Jt F ENGINEERS
• , elemre
MT I (A Govt of India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Filter separator/coalescer
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures

Procedure
Documents
Procedures
documents W-New

Mill test
Chemical analysis &
Plates, pipes, forging, certificates
fittings ,etc and TPI
PR/data sheet.
reports
Test
2.2 Separator/Coalescer Properties as per Data Sheet 100% H R -
Certificate
Page 5494 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51g-ar 0156 INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0031 Rev.3
lairVAi cnroveMIJWA) (A Govt of India Undettaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
markings,visual & Material
Materials identification for
3.1 dimensional inspection, 100% clearance - H H
plates, pipes (pressure parts)
identity correlation & record
3.2 forgings, fittings, fasteners, markings identity 100% clearance - H R
gaskets (pressure parts) correlation . record
Material
3.3 Review of test certificates
rt 100 % test - R R
certificate
NDT
NDT of weld seam as
applicable
RT Films
H H R
(both inside and out side) report
Inspection of formed HT chart review as
3.4 100% HT Chart H W R
components applicable
Inspection
report
100% Inspection
(min.thickness, profile, H H W
report
Page 5495 of 8516

ENGINEERS
5tig-ar feifreg
ceecnreant,dndr
INDIA LIMITED
FOR 6-81-0031 Rev.3
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
100% - W R
cleanliness etc
Chemical , mechanical
100% Batch test
3.6 Welding consumable properties & IGC as H H R
certificates
applicable
Visual/ dimensions,
Inspection
report

NDT report
NDT as applicable 100% - H R
/ RT films
4.3 Inspection of completed welds as per
drawing
As per spec. H R
applicable report
and weld report
Page 5496 of 8516

-
.5-11
fgzIrt151-e-6
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR 6-81-0031 Rev.3
+121oorroan 3,:rcrr, (A Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Installation of Coalescer / Inspection
4.6 Visual Inspection 100% - H -
Separator report
5.0 Painting - H -
Final
dossier

Page 5497 of 8516

■
-71 ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
coil
f6Vreg
eivanre ne awes°
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undertaking)
FOR 6-81-0032 Rev. 3
EOT CRANE Page 1 of 6
t Di) fifterr trtaTur .711q-ffr

FOR
EOT CRANE
;Lq_.-T-Comj
/
3 09.09.13 Revised and Re-issued TKK RKS A i LSCG DM
2 10.04.12 Revised and Re-issued SK SCG AKC DM
1 31.01.08 Revised and Re-issued CS SS MVKK VC
0 23.7.02 Issued for Implementation SKT NKN AKB GRR
Rev. Convenor Chairman

Date Purpose Prepared Checked Standards Committee
No. Standards Bureau
by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001 - F7 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 5498 of 8516

001 ENGINEERS
$igiM54-
e-G INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0032 Rev. 3
Itiren eleven' ma'am-et IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 5499 of 8516

eits-7 ENGINEERS
etecoreara,otiodr IA Govt of India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of EOT Crane.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL. QUANTUM
STAGE / ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS RECORD SUB
NO OF CHECK SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
SUPPLIER
1 Procedure
R-Existing
1.2 WPS/ PQR /WPQ Documented procedures. 100% Procedure documents - H
W-New
2. Material Inspection
Steel for load carrying

Test Certificate/Lab test
2.1. members, plates, Channel for Chemical & Physical 100% H R -
report
box girders, end carriage &
crab frame & rope drum.
Forgings for wheels, gears, Chemical & Mill test One sample
2.2. MTC & Inspection Report H R -
pinion etc. certificate per heat
Page 5500 of 8516

ENGINEERS
eleavelk 1 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Phosphorous, bronze One sample Test Certificate (Chemical

2.3. Chemical H R R
Castings(As applicable) per heat Analysis)
Motor / VFD (As applicable)
Type test/Routine W
2.4 (supplier/sub supplier to 100% MTC & Inspection Report H H
test of Motor (Note-3)
arrange TPIA certification)
2.5. Brake Operation on no-load & on- 100% MTC & Inspection Report H R R
load (during load test)
Control Panel (As Inspection Report

2.6. 100% H H R
applicable) Functional test
Per drum / Manufacturer's Test

2.7 Wire rope Strand configuration, size H R R
length Certificate
& tensile strength
Load & Proof load test,
Manufacturer's Test
2.8. Hook Chemical, Physical, HT 100% H W R
Certificate
& NDT
3 In Process Inspection
Shop Inspection Report &

3.1. Gears, Pinion Hardness testing 100% - H -
TC
3.2 Wheel Dimensions 100% Shop inspection report - H -
Page 5501 of 8516

6 3 ei ENGINEERS
0154-ds INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undertaking)
FOR 6-81-0032 Rev. 3
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Dimension, Camber,
Welding preparation &
3.3 Fabrication of box girder 100% Inspection Report - H -
Welding (as per appvd.
Welding procedure)
3.4 Girder (Before Closing) Visual Dimensions 100% Inspection Report - H -
3.5 NDT (as applicable) Weld defects 100% RT Film / NDT reports - H R
Crab Assembly
3.6 Dimension Alignement 100% Inspection Report - H -
(Hoisting & cross travel)
Long travel assembly with

3.7 Dimension Alignment 100% Inspection Report - H -
shafting, etc.
3.8 Complete crane assembly Span, diagonal wheel, base 100% Inspection Report - H -
4.0 Final Inspection
4.1 H H
Final inspection Visual & Dimensional 100% Inspection Report -
Page 5502 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ifgar 2154-eg
I eiean 751 ,ISP +I
,
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undertaking)
FOR 6-81-0032 Rev. 3
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
• Load & Overload test
• Speed & Current
4.2 Load / Functional testing Mearurement 100% Inspection Report - H H
• Over all operation
checkup
5 Painting
5.1 Painting (As applicable) Visual & Dry Film 100% Inspection Report - W -
Thickness
Final stamping, review of Verifying stamping details
6.1 inspection documents and and review of inspection 100% IC / Inspection reports - H H
issue of IC documents
Final
dossier
Legend: H- Hold (Do not proceed without approval), P-Perform, RW - Random Witness (As specified or 10% ( min.1 no. of each size and type of Bulk item)), R-
Review, W-Witness (Give due notice, work may proceed after scheduled date).

1.This document describes the generic test requirements. Any additional test or Inspection scope if specified in contract documents shall also be applicable.( unless
otherwise agreed upon)
2.Acceptance Norms for all the activities shall be as per PO/PR/STANDARDS referred there in /Job Specification /Approved Documents.
3.Inspection Test Requirements of Motors shall be as per EIL ITP 6-81-1031 (HV Motors), 6-81-1032 (MV Motors), 6-81-1038 (VFDs)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright DL — All rights reserved
Page 5503 of 8516

ENGINEERS
faireg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0035 Rev.3
(A Govt of India Undenaking)
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK / WINCH Page 1 of 5
49' geil Goico/f -ci
Muur a -crtuur gl v1111

FOR
CHAIN PULLEY BLOCK / WINCH
%AV.
2 10.04.12 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED SK SCG AKC DM
1 31.01.08 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED CS RB MVKK VC
Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 5504 of 8516

,5--tifaelei ENGINEERS
FOR
Ogar 1W1-d' INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0035 Rev. 3
1411,1 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain

Page 5505 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
$1=g-ar 2151reg INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0035 Rev. 3
14-112 tyro, ,1513W415A1 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 5
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Chain Pulley Block / Winch
S. SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
N STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS SUB
OF CHECK REPORT SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
0 SUPPLIER
1 Material Inspection
Chemical & One Sample Per

1.1 Trolley & Chain Pulley Block Plates Test Certificates H R R
Physical Lot/Heat
Strand configuration, Per drum / Manufacturer's

1.2 Wire rope H R R
size & tensile strength length Test Certificate
Load & Proof load
test, Manufacturer's
1.3 Hook 100% H R R
Chemical, Physical, Test Certificate
HT &NDT
Chemical One Sample Per Manufacturer's
1.4 Gears/Ratchet Pawl/ Wheel H R R
Composition Lot/Heat Test Certificates

Page 5506 of 8516

gel& ENGINEERS
FOR
Iii
f=g-zir fdf54ft INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0035 Rev. 3
iAtre erefiereMakroski) (A Goof of India Undertaking)
Page 4 of 5
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
0 SUPPLIER
2 IN PROCESS INSPECTION
Manufacturer's
2.1 Hooks Proof load 100% - H -
Test Certificates
Manufacturer's
2.2 Load Chain / Wire Rope Proof load 100% - H -
Test Certificates
Inspection
2.3 Ratchet Pawl Hardness 100% - H -
Report
3 FINAL INSPECTION
Load & Proof Load test Inspection
100% - H RW
Report
Operational Inspection
3.1 Complete Assembly 100% - H RW
Effort Report
Inspection
Lift 100% - H RW
Report
4 Painting
Visual & Dry Film Inspection

Panting (As applicable) 100% - W -
4.1 Thickness Report

Page 5507 of 8516

k71 lk1 jt ENGINEERS FOR
$1gaf 0154ft INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0035 Rev. 3
OAT, A2d+T2 151,740511, (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 5 of 5
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
0 SUPPLIER
Verifying stamping
Final stamping, review of inspection IC / Inspection
5.1 details and review of 100% - H H
documents and issue of IC reports
inspection documents
Verification &
compilation of
Final
5.2 Final documents as per PR inspection & test records 100% - H H
dossier
for submission to
customer


Page 5508 of 8516

Copyright EI L — All rightsreserved
Page 5509 of 8516

0•A92i L3- 6000-00-9'0N lelwod
-o
o
Cr
CL
<D
0
3
3
0
cn
CL
c)
0. <D
CL
âo
eu 0
cn
Ci
uol;e3uaweidwi penssi
O
G)
o
C131-1SSI-32i CINV a3SIA32:1
0
ro
AaH9£10-19-9 111
4-1 rl
g ■HHH
H
:suonulnaaqqv
• . •
111
g
r
r>,.> <1>
,.< -t .r ,
0•AG2:1 L3- 1000-00-9 "oN TeWJOJ

•
77.
uldno s
tH sw 1:1,z
92 . .-.
c `-i ril 1Z::i IZ: !nnc.-.)
-t vt `-< C
4455 ''-' '-5"CfQ5" < ,-•< -I
::',• c> o -
ef' Clq ?D: 64 - ,„ -t -ES CD. !t-
•CD
-t _,, C> cn C> CD
e) (1) " " r
'ED . =t'- 5.,) -. co e) .-+ Cfq n 0 C. cD • C $:') o
'<j. rw CD r:)-• '-d 0 (1)
■
-3 ___, C C ;:-;• -01 u, CrQ c •_.] -C> v> - 0•
Co Fi') p
ci> u, EF• () .--
v> ,,, Co p,)
,... c-
c:)._ — ,.='•
4 -t cD Co Z ' r•>" ril
].U0WW 0.1i 1041

. . c) CrQ H Cx'C-1 S' o c
ci> •--- n -. CD
v> CD -, • (1)
tw <1) Crc>
C> `-+ •- cD ,t C/D co C 0
p> ..5 ~i: v> CL. CD _ pn ,t •—b5.
t—. CD •L
2'' c, co
" -t -I'
A> (I) o v, v> co cD '-C/"mte C> o CM ,-. -
(D A> •-. ,7•- 1=D H C ,4
,..,.., co 'sS->. .5) cD
;:7 , , CM ff FtD-
5 2 CrQ C-•
C -1 ‹.-c crc,
co -I
.1Cg.0-
i>0 co
c5; C
v> r'
CD C
$:0
-t C.
(-) •-f-
CD
C.,
.5: :51 cl Qn
r-cj Zi
c) (-9 C4
0 CI)
H
■
-c
'-d '-d '-i:1 '-d '-C) Z Z 4

Co Co -t -t• C o
{='F 'f=- 8- c, cn rn (1) c
cc) Cr4 tw cD cD S:» ■_,. CD co co ,C• v>
,--t- E).
.-1 ■-o C5 .F.,-
(1) •-t 0 •
.-t CD o
'C
" l ::''
.r, _o a7 —3 „ ":"'' (-)'. .`-,4 3-
co c A) co -C C ><
, 9,co,. ,,-,' ,c, rri a-
ci cA
0 ' <••--•
n C. cp r.--!-• •-os -t Co co C
;=> C -C C co
2,) ....t n ,(1) ;_-,- .—•
'!+' PD 7,' -,—,
1-2 - r./7cj• ,r
c, 5. . -,. e, -. • ,..,
-- H H
C Co ..„-; 5,-.
C •Clq C>
< ,..., CD
C>
o CI) co
o •-•-
rw ot C v> (1) v>
e-t- ,-t-
v> PZ1-
)
tO CD (P > -• •-• C » cL) f:tc7
«) crQ 0 O:h h
C C> CD t:>«,
Co i>0 CD k'--
-• C> C n ,, c>
C> <-4. ,•< Co (-->
S>,> -t ‘-,
A> o C> C CL 0.2,
-• C -• lw
0 C C
C Circ? 'N-
A>
O
C
Aan9£10-18-9
pamesai sp.16!J IIV— 113411 60do3
Page 5510 of 8516

111 IAall9£10-18-9
0
This Inspectionand Test Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof H O T Crane.

fIDOUaDmallaJaH O'I
SINThI
PO/PR/ Standardsreferred there in/ Job specifications /Approved documents.
INSPECTION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS
■
0
E OF INSPECTION
-d
QUANTUM
,, •— •=:, o (,)r
0
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS OF SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
CHECK SUPPLIER
• •••
).■■
Procedure
Load Testand NDT Procedure(as Procedure
1—■
Documented Procedures
.-0 c.'c>
.0. . 0_
applicable) Documents
Documented procedures.
, _,
WPS/ PQR /WPQ
i
documents W-New
i
t...›
Material Inspection
f•-)
Material Certification
_
Visual Inspection
Wheels, Shafts, Gear & Pinions Mechanical Properties
c) 4
PD
cn
r n) ,,,,
Girder, Trolley & End Carriage Chemical Properties
C) )-3 CD
''''
0
__.
c>
••
...
Page 5511 of 8516

0•Aed L 3- 1000-00-8'0N leLwod pamasai sq 6P IIV—713 4 1.1 60doo
?:j
C7N
00
z
•o
'
o
(,)
et
E OF INSPECTION
or
QUANTUM
z cA

SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
CHECK SUPPLIER
BoughtOut Components Chemical / Physical & Load test
Sub Supplier
Chain Pulley Block
0
0
Test
Long Travel Chain Certificates
In Process Inspection
Machiningof Components Visual & Dimensional

Suppliers
0
0
x
Hardnesscheck for Gears, Test Records
Pinions & Wheels
Inspectionof Weld Visual NDT R
x
Applicable NDT Asperspec. report & RT (Reviewof
.
•• •• •••••••• ••• Film Film)
Final Inspection
Acceptance Testsof H. O. T Crane Visual Inspection

Dimensional Inspection
Full Load Test
-r-
■
0 CD r)
=
.- • '-z:3
Overload Test
x
x
0
0
Deflection Test
C)
CD
Heightof Lift
Spares Verification
Stamping
....
....
0
ClO
t.„
.._.
Final Painting(asapplicable) Painting Scheme

Supplier Test
x
•• Visual Check Random
i
Records
Final DFT Check
Page 5512 of 8516

0'AGd L3- 1000-00-9'0N l ewioj IIV— 11341-1 60cloo pamasai
co,
00
▪
QUANTUM SCOPE OF INSPECTION

r
o
g
OF SUB
0
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA

CHECK SUPPLIER
cr,
O
Documentation& IC
,
Stampingandreviewof Inspection Reviewof documents for

,'—,
z
cp
c>
_
documents, issueofIC complianceasperPR
Dossier/
i.)
cr,
Reviewof final documentationof Completionof documentsasper
z
c,
Completion
_
supplier VDRattachedwithPR
certificate
0.
rz,
Co
0
c)
1=2.
zr
o :":""'
C â
CD
co
o
°
°
°
CD
CDCD
co
N
cD
cc)
CD
CD o
CD
CD
c>
`‘)
o
'L)
CD ft)
CD
co Ict
;
0.
•
C")
G
C-1—
cp
(1)
cn
CD
.1)t
CD
CD
•
•
•
• •
:(eigeoHdde sv ) S310N
referred there in /JobSpecification /Approved Documents.
Page 5513 of 8516

0•A9d Ld - 1000-00-8 'oN leW.10d pamasai s411 6!-I IIV— 1131116u Adoo
paniasai spl 6P 11V— 1134q 6pAcloo 0•Aod Ld- 1.000-00-9oN 4eLwod
Page 5514 of 8516

Aci panwddv
fD
c
uo!;ewawaidwi panssi
0
o
cn
G)
O
0
43f1SS1-32i CINV 43S1A32:1
■
-■
00
• ••
• •
•
'-11 rT1 el (-•)c)(-.)

4 c) H -.) ,,,
'-' Cri
r'
H
4 -ci n(-) .xe .0 ,.-c1
nH H H H H 'rl —
r
: JouaAuo3
4
H
:suogmAaJciqy
0ykod L3-4000-00-9'oN 4eulio3

uTdno
5" -Irri:;11t:,nnc.. )

A) (ig V) <-, cfp cn ',.< 'a- ,7,-, CD ‘-< ,1 ;_ ,.p. CD,..
A)t CD
,-r A) CD '01 (D ■-s `0 0.. r) 6- c° -'.
(1) " cr cp CD '''I ,.., ..,
,=7 '-< '■4'?
=,) e-t- r-l• et, cn .... crc)
-. C.2 ,-, cL. co -: ,s?_, (..,
<:D -t rri ,-, s:0
,-4-
-- -t • 0 CD
,-, ■
-■- (1C4 ,-,- H .0 ,,, 3 «
co ''"c( 9), eto,
(-) co , '5' o 6'D ' - : ... -•
-,- s:6, 9=t) (1 ) co ,..r., -t- Ci E rri
1U01.1.420.11W01-1
e, -- CD ':
,"5 • c) cz
cra ■-1.-■, ,_A' = ro.
ro o ,Th P, co cn -•o tzz
<1: cr eD C 0 .-,CRA•
zz
e) ,- A) Au
.-t ~-, , .-- • cn
C) ,...1 ..e-ij C 4 {1,}
s:o .-p-
,-t- ' v)
CD
CD
co - • - . n
CfQ 'E 4
CD ,`-'4 cp ■-•
CPA CD
,r CfQ
zo co 0
5
c-up
D r--'
eD --
(-) -
(1)
o..
< (/) '"C1

„ o -0
rril
(") o
H
. ,H)H CI)Z1 I-C1'-l:1',:1 1-l:/ s-ri ZZ4

C A,) 0 ,., 61 CD ,_, 51 ....,r,,,s ,...." eD
co CD CD ::_-.., C'''. CD c)
c4 c'2.. c) c)
(-D .-■ • o cn 5 .=.'. CD '-C:J --1 C"
C ,-.1 0 ,1:1 (-) e, cl., cipt Cl.. if' $:. o ■./ :zz
c/D
cf) CfQ p.) -, cr -t u'
ro ('-'-''• c9 -
)
IZI ... (1)
CD ■-1 AD k. - ..4%
.-"“
,--' CA
• ,i - 'C'' ,
'-"t 0 :y '—i ,_, 0 ,-t ,.. ‘,7., CD ,C, 111 CD n
cz s=0 cz CD .0 C >< 0-•
o '•o' ,zJ Y.2. 4 '-t 6A
rocnCD "' (cn
__, :-.
r.) 04, '15. — -4. 6 > - (-) CD
i=.t"' CD ..-, • '"CS “
';:r. ..■ cip
- . ,-4-
C CD C Crz c) -t- 0 - • .... CD
-1 - 1=1 ci" ,c;), < C CD CD cn
<T
c), C/D CD 0 •-,-. CD -,- . ,-..
Zi ,--,= C 0
cn - (5
'-Ò cip
/C.) cz cp > 8" .4., p, CfQ
• ("). cra = c) ,,-, (I) C:i.
AL ■ ~1.
CD (-) 94 (1)
- • c) c) ` .
o 0
.-4.
-• - ' -.' zo
o
CfQ
N
QD
,-r.
,—.
0
AT:1 ZI710-18-9
pamasai sA BP IIV—113 300doo
Page 5515 of 8516

adODS
This Inspectionand Test Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof Electric Hoist.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
ci)
— .© c .r■
.ci m
›.- —
o
g
r)
SUB
,r.rm-.1)
-,ci)
r)
4
›.-
STAGE/ACTIVITY OF CHECK SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
—,
Procedure
■
• • ••• •••••
Procedure
.,—,
Load Testand NDT Procedure Documented Procedure
z
.:'
©
c>—
,
Documents
Procedure
.—,
ti.)
WPS/PQR/WPQ Documented Procedure
x
z
ò
—
.cz:=)
.
Documents
— c:.
t...)
Material Inspection
Gears, Pinions, Wheels, Bearings, Plates Material
p Test
ts..)
Visual Inspection
for Drums & Trolleyetc. Mechanical Properties Certificates /
z
z
,z>c>
c'='
—
Chemical Properties Lab Test
Re orts
t.)
iN.)
Bought Out Components Visual & Dimensional

WireRope Mechanical Properties
Sub Supplier
z
z
Hook Chemical Properties
Proof Load Test
,,z,—=> Test Certificates
••
Sub Su• lier Certification
Page 5516 of 8516

0•Aad LA - 1000-00-8 'oN wwiod pamesaJ sitAP IIV— 113P4 60doo
AallZ1710-18-9
g-
il ,0
y
•i
--+
SCOPE OF INSPEC'
■
QUANTUM
>-
.° ci)
O
—+ tz
(n
- •
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS SUPPLIER

OF CHECK
c
›:i
cA
■
Manufacturer
n.)
Routine & Type Test

...)
Motor
,-
70
o
X
Test Certificates
Control PanelandPendant Wiring,Input
IJ
Visual & Dimensional

:4=.
/ Outputsequenceoperations ComponentLayoutarrangement
HighVoltage & Insulation
Resistance Test
cL "c5'
x '-'c,
-: —t-
Wiring Colourcode,size,
o ö
,D -,==
c) ('D
x
o
o
.--
■
insulation, ferruling &continuity
check
Functional check forall shut down
& interlock system bysimulation
• ••• • • • arrangement
• Earthing • check
Manufacturer
b,
Other ElectricalComponents
n.)
Visual&Dimensional
(Braker,Limit Switches,PushButton Performance Test Test Certificate,
Z
o
7:1
--
co
Pendant Switchesetc.) Inspection
Record
L.-) Cr.)
— O
5-'
:-)•
Setup,Welding,NDT, Assembly
o r)
Fabrication
`')
<.Di .-0
'-o (1)
o
o
o
.--
4:,
O
Final Inspection
Page 5517 of 8516

0•A92:1 Ld- l.000-00-9 'oN leauod pamasei sA 6P IIV— 113411 60doo
1-■
0
SCOPE OF INSPEC'
-■
QUANTUM
0 td
-.3 ■
rl
0
g
1-1
t•ii
›- ----
.-4
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS SUB
OF CHECK SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
Final Inspection Visual Inspection
Alignment &completeness
o ,-*.
Load/Overload Test
c)
(1) 'CS
o CD
0
o
...-.
,.:'
.
.-1
Hoisting
Travel Speed & Current
measurement
Stamping
Painting
Final Painting(asapplicable) Painting Scheme

•••••• • Visual
••• Check • • •• Random PaintingReport
.
Final DFT Check
Documentation & IC
SubmissionofCertificates(as Certificateof Statutorytesting

applicable) agency forsuitabilityof area
classification Certificates
o.
tri
7:J
4
from Statutory
7:
Certificateof Statutoryapproval
r)
P
0
CD
authority like PESO Bodies
Valid BISLicense
Degreeofprotectioncertificate
Documentation &Inspection Compilationof Inspectionand test Inspection
Z
o
,--
.
Certificate(IC) records &Issueof IC Certificate
Final documentation Compilationof Inspection &test Final dossier /
Z
o
o
,---
recordsDataRequirements Completeness
.
certificate
Page 5518 of 8516

Ld - 1000-00-9 'oN 481.11.10d 0A pomasoi slii 61.1 11V— 1134q 60doo
0'Aed L3- 1000-00-8 'oN wwiod
trz
CD
'-r•-••)•
CD
■
-t
CD
CD
cc)
â.
Ct.
o
CD
o
■
-s
cc)
-+)
-cs
c-)
CD
c-D
referred there in /JobSpecification /Approved Documents.
V)
cr
00
'(:)- •
Ar
cr
CD
?1!.
CD
V)
petuasoi s;1161.1 11V— 113}q6pAcloo
Page 5519 of 8516

Copyright EI L — All rightsreserved
Page 5520 of 8516

0A9 L3- 1000-00-8 "oN 4eiwod
cr
cr
ro
ro
ti
(:)
uouriumaidwi ioj panssi
C
Cl3fISSI-321(INV CI3SIA321
• • 0
• r •
4 g
CD
0 .,C^:eDi 4 4 '.--.) (--.)-' '-' r--6 ,4-A x '-ii rri t-_, t; t:, ) (-.)
cr elD e, ■H -ci (..,) .3 ■-c■ F) -»:, -ri 1•1 5 rri
fD = •-•
-. (-.) ,___,
•H — r.H H 'H -o 'H ,—
.1 o 0
CA .1 "`
0 4
pz
:suolmnaiqqv
. . . ,
Z.
SD■D CD • • (--) r)
07\92:1 Ld- 1000-00-9 oN ;eLLIJOJ

,-$. -,
$. •r, c4
pT, 4 5 . -9,-
22
.-r 5 '' 'E '-1-1 rri tl n (") n
ro
CD
„,_ „, 2,) -cp0 cp •-cot ''0 C:.. ,
.:
-t cr ■-r- .4.
co ~s
c)—• g co - ,.....11Q 0
n=0 01.
■-s
CD • „..., P-D- (-)
:7,- •-4-F'D • ,-,
s),) 0 0- '-d 0 r° AD
)-3 ;;. at "•
. ,=,F cn "<:, ,-3 ,-. r.4 (--5 '
c (") co ct,
•-"- $v
°
,_._, ('D ,..,„ •-r '(') ', 5- rri
,•-, H n"' ~
-", ,,,
cp CrQ. (1) (17. 5-
CD •••••■
CD ■-•
0 "- C)
-, H cp 0 Cfg
H • ..1 r) ,-I- ,, irD
v) ,..., ),) ,,,
•••• (-0
s),) ::: V1 co ;•2, c/) •-•+ •-n
t.-. .H " P,, ,7 1 9, 9.1 H ,,- .
',■■ , „. (-)
4 (1)
__ , cD
—
4 5 5
AD •• co cn CfCi
.-r-
,-- • r' e, „_ CD
AD 5
ro
0 py
7:i
cn
C1)
AD
--s C.
44 c)
• cp
• • Q.
C x
CD •-' •
CD
Ò 1:0
AD
""' crq
V+. , 1:l
AD pp >cl Z Z
-,:jdzi ■-3:0_,n ci),-3 xi
0 O
CD oo C4
H
< •-- H '-'

,-, ..... •-t -I
1:1., Ci., S=1.. Cil.
CD
.
'-' - Cp Cn
.-1 0 ,i:J
cf, Cfc:i AD
)
CD - _ ,
-t o p,, r•-i ,__,
,,r, ,.., CD '-'
0 `CD' 4) ri)
0]:001j11.10D 2SOI
Japio asugoind
unx reo!lregooK
0... CD ■-■ • •rzl

„0
9 " ._t CQ
e C4 CD 0•
'10
,..,
CD g
"
p,D ,._.
:' ,--,.. CrCi
co
Ei-i 2
o
AD 3
6-
itaVf St10-18-9
CopyrightEI L— All rightsreserved

Page 5521 of 8516

Aall Sf10-I8-9
This Inspectionand Test Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof Refrigeration Package
PO/PR/ Standardsreferred there in/ Jobspecifications /Approved documents.
QUANTUM SC01'E OF INSPECTION

c4n
o
g
cn
OF SUB
,-- Z:D .c) •

CHECK SUPPLIER
•■
Procedure
Hydrostatic Test, Heat Treatment, Documented Procedure
—■
■
Procedure
c: ›
0
0
,--
NDT, Functional Testand other
.
Documents
procedures
x
0
0
c:›
.--
Documentedprocedures.
i--,
N.)
WPS/ PQR /WPQ
,
documents W-New
Documented Inspection Category
L.,
.--,
Categorization Plan for Bought Out Categorization
0
(0
.--,
Items
.
Plan
C
t,à
Material Inspection
Testrequirementasperpurchase Manufacturer Asper Asper
t•-)
Refrigerant Compressor & Motor(as

—■
categorization
c'
c> categorization
,---
applicable) specification. Test
Certificate
Page 5522 of 8516

0'Aad L3- 1000-00-2 'oN }ew.iod patuasai s44 6!-I IIV— 113445p Acloo
fn
CZ)
Uri
QO 1
;°.
0
CD
QUANTUM SCO I'E OF INSPECTION
t-I
zCt
g
on
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
c)
CHECK SUPPLIER
Testrequirementasperpurchase
i.)
t...)
Heat Exchangers like Refrigerant

Condenser, Shell&Tube specification. Manufacturer Asper Asper
o
-
x
categorization categorization
o
Economizer,Evaporator, Oil Cooler, Test
HighPressure AbsorberChiller(as Certificate
applicable)
i..)
Vessels likeRefrigerantReceiver,
lN.)
Compressor Knock-OutDrum, Oil specification. Asper Asper

Manufacturer
Separator,FlashVessel, Oil Recovery
-,o
x
o
Test
Vessel, Oil Reservoir / Sump, Oil Certificate
Filters(asapplicable)

t,..)
-P
Valves,Pressure Safety Valves&
x
categorization
o
-,o,
Strainers(asapplicable) specification. Test categorization
Certificate
t•-)
Refrigerant PipingItems likePipes,

i.il
Manufacturer Asper Asper

Flanges,Fittings, Fasteners& specification.
-
x
Test
oo
Gaskets(asapplicable) Certificate
t,
CoolingWaterPiping Items like

..)
CN
Pipes, Flanges, Fittings,Fasteners & specification.

Manufacturer Asper Asper
Gaskets(asapplicable)
x
Test categorization categorization
oo
Certificate
l',.)
LubeOilPipingItems like Pipes, Asper Asper

Manufacturer
-
Flanges, Fittings,Fasteners & specification categorization categorization

oò
Test
Gaskets(asapplicable) Certificate
Page 5523 of 8516

0•Aad Ld- 1000-00-8'0N ;91L110j
CopyrightEIL—Allrightsreserved
141 nall

C) r.
CD
OF SUB
. •
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS EIL/ TPIA

SUPPLIER
Z
CHECK SUPPLIER
l•-)
Oil Pump Set Assembly(as

be
C)
C)
Test
,—,
.:•'
applicable) specification
:■
Certificate
N
Compressor Couplings, Base Frame Visual, Dimension, Dynamic
H ,-1,
Asper Asper
2
•-t
(")
CD
for Skid, Balancingof Coupling categorization categorization
C)
C)
'c;:'')
—■
,„
■
'0h ;','
Insulation Materials(Cold & Hot)
—•
9'2,
ro
CD
(asapplicable)
C)
Visual, Dimensions, Trial/ Mock-up

.—..
l',...)
Structural Materials,Gratings &

Other Miscellaneous Items(as assembly Inspection
C)
C)
-•-•
C.:`
::›-
■
1
applicable) Report
Instrumentation Items like Local Testrequirementasperpurchase

,—.•
Control Panel, Programmable Logic specification

Controller Panel,
Transmitters(Pressure, Diff. Pressure,
Temperature, Level), Pressure
cra>
CM • >
H ,...•.,
"
-t cn
E
Gauges, TemperatureGauges, Level
''' — •-c:
—t- ,--t
N (-D
..c$
N eD
...,co
~S
3.
3.
C)
C:)
■
c',""•
94
--t-
••-•
...
S)e-t•
Gauges, Thermo Wells,Temperature
■
,)
CD
R
CD
■
0
,tn cn
cp
N
•••• •
94-
Elements, Control Wiring& Junction
■
CD
cD
Boxes,Control Valves, Solenoid
Valves, Orifice Plates, Cable Trays,
Instrument Tubing/ Fittings/Valves
(asapplicable)
Spares(Mandatory, Commissioning, Visual, Dimensions

Operational), Inspection
C::'"-'
Z
C)
C)
•-•-■
1
Special Tools & Tackles(as Reports
applicable)
Page 5524 of 8516

0'AedLd- 1.000-00-9'0N ieW.I0j patuasei sw 6P IIV — 113411 60doo
111 IAMSI7I0-18-9
ch
ro
. aò
z
o
,-1
QUANTUM SCOPE OF INSPEC'
cs,)
o
g
m
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
z
o
CHECK SUPPLIER
©
trà
Inspectionof welds(asapplicable) Weld

w
Visual
Applicable NDT Inspection
x
Asperspec.
i
Record,
RT Films
O
1:h.
Final Inspection
Pre-Fabricated Interconnecting Piping Visual, Dimensions, Completeness

,'--
-1=..
Inspection
x
0
.-
x
o
atshop asper P & ID, RT & Hydrostatic Report
Test, MTC Review
Shop Fabricated Refrigerant Piping Visual, Dimensions, Completeness
iv
-P
asper Piping & Instrument Inspection
x
0
''
o
.--
••
!,
Drawings, NDT,Leak Test, Report
Vacuum Test
Shop Fabricated Cooling Water& Visual, Dimensions, Completeness
.4.
i...)
Lube Oil Piping asper Piping & Instrumentation Inspection
x
0
x
o
.--
Drgs, NDT Report
Hydrostatictest(asapplicable)
Visual, Dimensions, Completeness
-1=,
Compressor Package Skid

:1=.
asper Piping & Instrument Drgs, Inspection
x
x
0
x
o
>
.--,
NDT, Hydrostatic/ Pneumatictest Report
(asapplicable)
Calibration Validity & Accuracy Calibration
b,
-I=•
Calibrationof all applicable

'
0
x
z
›zJ
o
,--,
1 Measuring Instruments Report
C) 4
Chemical Check / Alloying asper EIL Inspection

..-,
-' «
CD
cr
cf,
4
(-)
-1=.
-,:i
')
A)
A)
Cf)
CD
x
elements S ecification Report
Page 5525 of 8516

0.1\ ed L3- 1000-00-8oN 4 eLthod pamasaJ sw 6P IIV—713 i4 6Ocloo
IAaRS1710-I8-9
00
00
tro
QUANTUM S C 01'E OF INSPECTION
r,
OF SUB
• •

0
CHECK SUPPLIER
co H
-,1
PerformanceTestat Mfr'sworks
--
AllInstruments
.-cs CD
o
■--.
,,,:'
CD
Visual,Dimensions, Completeness
4=.
00
CompleteRefrigerationPackage
assembly asperPiping & Instrument
,-3
et,
Z
o
■--
c:'
c>
Drawing & Performancetest(as
1i
-cp,:i
applicable)
,
f."
<:::>
Painting
--
Visual Inspection for Workmanship

(..,
Surface Preparation &Paintingofall Inspection
Z
o
,-,
C)
c>
Carbon SteelParts / Paint Shade /
i
I
Report
Painting DFT Check
Inspection
tr,
Visual Inspection for Workmanship

-)
Pickling &Passivation for Stainless

i,
Z
ò
.--.
C)
• • • •
I
1
o
Steel Parts Report
CI •N
Documentation & IC
..- C=>
Submissionof Certificates(as Certificateof Statutorytesting

C'■

classification
0 c.,-—(4>ri,•
6-' n
0 CD
c4
authority like PESO (as
Cl.
tri
r)
o
cp
AD
c,_
applicable)
w
Valid BISLicense(as
applicable)
Degreeof protectioncertificate
(asapplicable)
Inspection
i\J
Ch
Documentation&Inspection Issueof IC
ò
CD
Certificate(IC) I Certificate
Page 5526 of 8516

0•Aed L3- 1.000-00-8'0N l ewiod patuese., sp.16!., Ild —11 33.160doo
IAaTI SP10-18-9
00
1:1
00
0
Cfq
ro
c CAr
g
0
SUB
cn
OF
>
n
:=1
CA
n
t-i
cn
STAGE/ACTIVITY
-•
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
CHECK SUPPLIER
Verification&compilationof
i...›
C7 \
Manufacturer
x
x
o
'(-3'
Final documentsasperPR inspection &testrecords for data book
submissiontocustomer
:01clumddu sV)SaION
theactivitiesshall beasperPO/PR/STANDA referred there in /Job Specification /Approved Documents.
Page 5527 of 8516

0•Aed L3-1000-00-9•ON jeWJOd pamasai s4i.18P IIV — 113111 60doo
patuesa, — -113 41.1 60doo
0lked Ld- 1000-00-9*oN 4ew.iod
Page 5528 of 8516

P
cn
su
cD
-0
Qm
m
av
zJ
cn
0
0
uo!muewaidwi JOJ ponssi
co
O
O
o
cn
o
C)
43fISSI-32:1 CINV 43SIA32!
N
IAall
z z (.1 t-2 (-) (-)
E-)
" — `-r1 tTi tri
H 7:J H
(-) H
: aouanuop
:suop.mitaaqqy
Ld- 1000-00-9 '0N eWJCId

0°A
-mdno S •JIAT
(-)
(t)

r2,)
o•
rri
jWWWali WOH
CIA
CD
ct)
(1)
5*
CD
0.
H ■-ic/DX 'cJ''%:J '0 ~0 2 Z4

cl) 1H o
,c) o H
.< ■—i s-3CAZi '"Zi'"0'..C1'- '-GIZZ
CD '-' • C) C,1) 0
t/D CM ,--, . Q.) .-.
, 4..
‹D $,D ("D CD
cl:-gt - ' (.4 ...1= CDcipA) ~„
- cn ;CDr4
L) ('-'') .4 -.
„., o (1) ""'•
'-c ...«
-.., ..., -.. Q CD cp •.m >< CL- c4 Zt•
o " ■-,-1 co --. -1
unx feoturgooK
1:0
,-,,) .9 .2 ci9 rc e9 (-)
0 ...., ,—
54 • .5.., ,-' c.)
.- ° c),--t- o
CD .-+ -t o •;:,)
(-) <.... H
0-." (-D
c)
eD C4 ‹D 0 " CfQ co = ,-1-. CD = v,
-1 = o
v) c5 cA
/0 o ~' 5 ::_,
-, Po
-4-, rD CFQ
,:.
>
cx c) o tm.,
CD AD CD ,.-
•-■ • C) Q (-) , c)
0
-t
1=0 <', . c) -t
cl..CfQ
.(--.'
5 -. :zt)
CfQ E-.1"
t=3
advaNvis
S1)
to
0
I AallIS10-18-9
'oNNOIIV01d103dS
patuasai sA BP IIV— 113}4 60do0
Page 5529 of 8516

.oN NO111/31d103dSadvaNvis
z ?
r- 0
tj
0 c, >
-< m
(-)
cn
cn
-cr
XI —1
c") -n
0
m
m
03
adODS
ThisInspectionand TestPlancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsofBeltConveyor.
PO/PR/ Standardsreferredthere in/ Job specifications /Approved documents.

O
QUANTUM SCOPEOF INSPECTION

cn
r)
0
g
m
,>—. -----
0
SUPPLIER
CHECK
•• • • SUPPLIER
■
--, ?::>
Procedure
WaterTest,Dust Test, FrictionTest
C)
z z
—, ,__,
—
.--,
Documented procedures. Procedure documents
.
and othertestprocedure(asapplicable)
0
WPS/ PQR /WPQ
is ..)
C)
,--.
Procedure Documents
.
IN)
Material Inspection
CD
.(`)
—`
StructuralItems-SteelPlates,Rolled
■
Visual Inspection
0
0
z
Sections,RoundBars
,--,
Chemical/PhysicalProperties Report/Manufacturer' s
,
TC
(N.)
iN)
Pulleys,Idlers,SteelPlates, Pipes, Chemical and PhysicalProperties Inspection

All Heats
Shaft,End Plates,Belts
z
Visual Report/Manufacturer' s
100%
TC
O
w
InProcess Inspection
Page 5530 of 8516

0'rad L3-1000-00-9 '0N 4eituoj
Copyright EIL— Allrightsreserved
'0 14NOIIVOld103dS021V4NVIS
-4 -
z Z
0
0 z
13:1 c)
0o>
-< m
D
D
"±"
cn
1-
0
m
m
3u
Cy
CA
‘'d •
o
r-)
g
,-o t-,,
m
›,- ---
.-
/11
SUPPLIER
,--.
CHECK SUPPLIER
''')
Technological Structures-Frames/
-•-■
Visual
■
Galleries/Deck Platesand Skirt Board/
z
r--•
C>
CD
Dimension Inspection Report
.
Stringer
iNJ
l.,/
Pulleys-From Plates/Pipes Visual
'
0
.--,
CD
Dimension Inspection Report
.
l
HT & NDT(asapplicable)
(...)
W
CA
Visual
AD
0
:'
.--,
Inspection Report
C/
Dimensional
l
NDT (asapplicable)
:1=,
1,-)
Idlers/Rollers-Fabricationand Dimensional Check
:›
C>
CD
,--,
Inspection Report
.
Assembly Visual
C:1
4:1.
Final Inspection • ••• ••• •••

• ••••••••
-1=,
—•
Routine Test Water Test

■
-
0
z
'
Dust Test Inspection Record
,
Friction Test
-A
i•J
Rubber Limitof ImpactIdler Visual
z
.--,
ct:'
<:=:,
Dimensional Inspection Record
Shear Hardness
UN
7:::,
Painting
.--,
(J)
Painting(asapplicable) Painting Scheme
z
Visual Check 100% Painting Report
,
Final DFT Check
G=>
Cr■
Documentation & IC
Page 5531 of 8516

0iked Ld- 1000-00-9 'oN pamasai sp.i6P IIV— 11341460do0
• =
»
z
or
• 9.,.
o o-•
c)
co ci) '7
:') c7] c)
o
CD f ,,
,__.,
0'Ao2:1 Ld - 1000-00-9oN i euuod

ID
O ;.(I) '.
.-t f=1. (9-■
cn = Cn
:(orpondde sV )S310N
-n ".= ,
o 0
-t c'
,......,
O cp
rn
5-
CD
Documentation & Inspection
CD
• Cr0
AIIALL3V/39VIS
c) O
co
.1
.,' .
,'"- ' " .i'
FD
cn
c_.), ■cn#
W
rw
■-1
CD
~-, ,.=
cr' O
,--, .
co .-t
,.) cp
cn
'C7 co
,co
-s _
cn
1-1:1
CD >
,..:::,
,..<
S:0
C4 S:1.,
S::L.,
,--3 cn
> .-+'
Z
C1 C1:1 o
> M
SMISD1313VIIVID
CD r-
Cn
,...t- 0
0 o .71
Z
(f ...t
.-t O 0>
ro O Z Z
■-n
co <
-t _(D
,-1 co M
co c) M
O -.
st co 0 cn
ro o • --1
-t cn
co c)
o
=. 'CS
--...., CD
, .-
,—r,.
O
Cr cn
li
'0 c) .
co
.. co
Ch o.,
2,)
,--. O
o o O
O o
... ;._. . . Er
,-t
oTeogipaD uogoadsui
-s o.,
o o
<
co c)
o.,
co
o
o ,-,‘,
c.)
O
<-r- —
c7
0
Cr
CD
AD
'1=
('7") . (.0
UarlddllS
SW 01
cr
ii)-• 0
01 et,
MOIIDadSMIIO3dODS
yr
c.]
cn
.oN NOIIVOld103dSadVONVIS
pamasai si,y 6u IIV— 11344 6pAdoo
Page 5532 of 8516

Page 5533 of 8516
STANDAR D SPECIFICATION No.
'2. a
co <
<
w
F- z
Z
< o
z 0E
I—
w
a.
6-81-0154Rev 0
re
<
0
O
O
N
O
N
N
Issued for Imp lementation

az
0
V
0
.0
0.
0
Format No. 8- 00-000 1- F7Rev. 0 Copy rig ht EIL — All rig hts rese rved
• • ••
Copyrig ht EIL — All rig hts rese rved
STAN DARDSPECIFICATION No.
6-81-0154 Rev 0
0
Cs1 0
a) 0
-
C) 4,
CO
CL
0 0
ad 0•-
LI) "0 ,444 0 -cz;
0 c-ci >-,
0
4,8
0 0'
.ii
(4...
=
0
a)
0 •-
a) p4 o
4.: 0 on - 7:{
*4 -1= 0
4-.
CI • •-■ •0
,•-■ ''
C.1) = =g 8 CY
• ,-,
,..
Mechan ical Run Test
a, t = <I) bA 0
..... o
..?. -4—. 0
v.•I c.,
, ._ -,:)
.. •... 0 C.) to 0 s4 ct
..., •_, .• CA cd t). U
....
0 = Cr
k.., u c„ ,--., a) -0. ,_5
Purchase Order
c/1 w
0 4.4_2
0 0
L14.) a 0 VI "' Q H
E
a.)
E
. -' u t4
0 0 cn a) LS .a) o t ct 2 ::1 t'D u)
04 — r ■ 1:1-1 0 " .5, " cl)7:3et>
-,..,
0' Q 0 .4
0 •— 2 0.,
.;,' ;.c) = +,;,,
` -css. ,..,
-*- C) O.) O.)
4:), 4 4" I. ., p'' ' ' c 2 g •g- t ). 3 3
z
< <
a.._
F 0 a.
H
u)
w H =
H c4 0
c,) p4
r=1- 0 W CD' a4
U .
H v) U a H
r:4 c4 CY
P'-' r=,'-'
,,
C..
ci z
DMZ 4 4 a a a. a a a4 v) H H > P-
0 E
< LL o
z
O
v Z
w 0
0.
u)
bt,
O
-5
a)
U z-4,., ,1 == a)
0 — .1-.
A-. 0
;-, ,--, a) 1.) ,4 Cfl o
c..) tA E: '—' 0 H°.E.,__,
et }...
"*
„,
"7j
0H i ) g rtl Vg
° 8 a ) F,
Heat Treatment
= 70 -4-, *rq t • ,...,
"0 = 0 '-'-' a) tc
0 8 at0. 7,3
.5. 0 E 0-. H
•.... s-
-46
0 L,ct .()
.- --
0 c.1
S-, 0., CI)
"C3 cu I- a 2el
rz) t:J) 4, Cl) .4_, 0
Mr. R.K. Medhavi

x 4 4 4 -E 4
Fo rmatNo. 8-00-000 1-F7Rev. 0

Abbreviations:
H
E-24 r [14 U
W a.g4c)E—, H
Page 5534 of 8516
Page 5535 of 8516
U)
z
w
0
0
‹
• ce Z
i--
cn
w
I-
EL
<I
Z
0
LL 0
6-81-0154 Rev 0
cc
0
0
z
8
z
c..)
•— 0
•—
Le,
C-)
•
0 U
9
cr.
U
C.)
E
cr
a)
0
on
0
bn
a)
0
E
Ct.
on
0
IDA
bA
O
$.
ci)
a)
to
j
6T0
W
U
E-0
PO/ PR/ Standards referred therein/ Job spec ifications/Approved documents.
IS —
SCOPEOF INSPECTION
STAGE /ACTIVITY QUANTUM
'ON CHARACTERISTICS RECORD SUB
OF CHECK SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
SUPPLIER
O' I
Procedure
Functional/ Performance test,
Hydrostatic/ Leak Test, Heat %00 I
DocumentedProcedures Procedure Documents
pe
Treatment, NDT and other
.
applicable procedures
Z'I WPS/ PQR/ WPQ for Equipments, %00I R-Existing
Documented Procedures Procedure Documents
X
Piping & Ducting
.
W-New
Categorization Plan for Bought Out
£. I Documented Inspection %00I
Items Categorization Plan
z
.
Category
IYZ
Inspection at Works - Chilling Unit
Ft
Refrigeration System Vapour Compression System (as applicable) Material/ Bought Outs
- -
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7Rev. 0 Copyrig ht EIL — All rig hts reserved

Page 5536 of 8516
a. 0
w
I=
O
< u-p
z
I—
w
•:C
z W
STANDARDSPECIFICATIONNo.
0
o
6-81-0154Rev 0
7:c
ce
2
o
E
z
<
41
"IS )PE O FINSPECTION
QUANTUM CHIOD311
'ON STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS SUB
OF CHEC K SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Compressor: Model/ Type,
Physical & Chemical properties
for parts, Dynamic Balanc ing,
Manufacturer Test
.`,''
-`) 1
CL a j
cl) s
u., -
fa.„
CU
;.• ,--.
Refrigerant Compressor & Motor Leak Test, Performance
CNi
,--,
0
0
0
Certificate/
i
(as applicable) characteristics (as applicable),
'
Inspection Reports
Mechanical Run Test
Motor: T i e & Routine testin!

Heat Exchangers like Refrigerant Physical & Chemical properties
Condenser, Shell & Tube for pressure parts, Tube to Manufacturer Test As per As per
%00 I
C \i
el
Economizer, Evaporator, Oil Cooler, Tubesheet Mock up & Certificate/
Z
Note - 1 Note - 1
High Pressure Absorber Chiller (as Expansion check, Visual, Inspection Reports
a. • licable) Dimensions, Hydrostatic test
Vessels like Refrigerant Receiver,
Compressor Knock-Out Drum, Oil Physical & Chemical properties Manufacturer Test As per As per
%00I
Cì
,--.
Cl
Separator, Flash Vessel, Oil for parts, Visual, Dimensions, Certificate/
x
Note - 1 Note - 1
Recovery Vesse l, Oil Reservoir/ Hydrostatic test Inspection Reports
Sum., Oil Filters (as a. . licable)
Fan/ B lower: Model, Physical &
Chemical properties for parts,
Fan/ B lower & drive motor for Manufacturer Test As per As per
Dynamic Balanc ing, Leak Test, % 00 I
(Ni
71:
Condenser/ Evaporator (as Certificate/
Z
Performance, Mechanical Run Note - 1 Note - 1
applicable) Inspection Reports
Test,
Motor: Ty . e & Routine testin •
FormatNo. 8-00-000 1-F7Rev. 0 Copy rig htEIL — All rig hts reserved
Page 5537 of 8516
z
U)
a
0
0
< o
I- 0
LLJ
C/)
-J <
<
Z
0 2.
6-81-0154Rev 0
0
c
U-I
0
)DS
APE OF INSPECTION
STAGE / ACTIVITY QUANTUM
'ON CHARACTERISTICS RECORD SUB VIdliiia
OF CHECK SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
Pump : Model, Physical&
Chemical properties for parts,
Dynamic balanc ing (as
Manufacturer Test
.rct
.tci
fa• 0
a)
I.
CY cu
<1.)
:
Oil Pump Set Assembly (as
...
applicable), Leak Test,
—
N
.--,
in
0
,--,
c'''
Certificate/ Inspection
,--
-8
-45
i
applicable)
1
Performance characteristic,
0
Reports
MechanicalRun Test
Motor: T e/Routine testinl

Piping items viz. Valves, Pressure
Safety Valves, Strainers, Pipes,
Physical&Chemical properties As per As per
Flanges, Fittings, Fasteners & %00I Manufacturer Test
c,i
'4::)
for parts, Hydrostatic test, Note - 1 Note - 1

Gaskets (as applicable) Certificate
Functional Test (as applicable)
Miscellaneous items viz.

Compre ssor Couplings, Base Frame
for Skid, V Belt, Pulleys Visual, Dimension, Dynamic As per As per
%00 I Manufacturer Test
c•I
--,
r"--.
Z
Insulation (Cold& Hot) & Balancing ofCoupling Note - 1 Note - 1
Certificate
StructuralMaterials
(as app licable)
Z*Z
Refrigeration System - Vapour Absorption System (as applicable) - Materials/BoughtOuts
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7Rev. 0 Copy rig ht EL — All rig hts rese rved
Page 5538 of 8516
STANDARD SPE CIFICATIONNo.
6-81-0154 Rev 0
"IS SCOPEOF INSPECTION

QUANTUM
'ON STAGE/ACTWITY CHARACTERISTICS RECORD SUB
OFCHECK SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
SUPPLIER
.. 4
<
CA 0
CL u
a)
;...
cn
CL (i)
a)
u-
1 V .4 V 1. 111F
N
N
,--.
Mechan ical Run Test
,--■
0
cs '
Certificate/Inspection
,--,
4°
+'
I
(Hydraulic/ Vacuum),
I
C)
Reports
Other items: Physical &
Chem ical properties,
Hydrostatic test (for ■ i • es)
Tank: Physical & Chemical
properties for parts, Visual,
Dimensions, Hydrostatic test
LI—I
< 4
i..■ C9
CCI
=
mt 4-4 a)
a> 4
I..
=
=
,.., Q.
a>
VI • ••'.
GII
rz. a>
CD
1-■
cn -18
ca. cu
a) I
I.
Expansion Tank, Cooling Tower (as Cooling Tower: Performance
tg
N
N
N
0
4:.'
• ,--.
-6 sa,
s—,
L..)
,_.,
.t
tu
C.)
CZ I:4
cn -t
s
applicable) characteristics for Fan, Type/
0
(r)
Routine testing of Motor,
Functional cum MechanicalRun
Test, Physical & Chemical
ro• erties for ' arts
FormatNo. 8-00-000 1-F7Rev. 0 Copy rig ht EIL — All rig hts rese rved
Page 5539 of 8516
e) 6-81-0154Rev 0
"IS
QUANTUM 0110331I SCOPE OF INSPECTION
'ON STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERI STICS SUB
OFCHECK SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Instrumentation Items like Local
Control Panel, PLC,
Transmitters (Pressure, Diff.
Pane l: HV/ IR, Logic Check,
Pressure, Temperature, Level),
BOM verification
Pressure Gauges, Temperature
Gauges, Level Gauges, Thermo
4-4
ie C) CI.
..:.:/) -48
1—,
¢z
== tr,c.)
C..)
I. 0
a) CI) .e
1_, 0.
LA • ,-4
04 a)
1.)I
01. a)
(14) I
Other Instruments/items:
ci
rn
Wells, Temperature Elements,
.
c)
c,
gO
----
,__,
-4—,
0:3
0
0
Calibration & applicable
Control Wiring & Junction Boxes,
p4
C
statutory certificates, Leak
Control Valves, Solenoid Valves,
testing, Functional test (as
Orifice Plates, Cable Trays,
applicable)
Instrument Tubing/ F ittings/ Valves
(as app licable)
NDT (RT for Butt welded joint

& MPT/ DPT for Socket we ld
Pre-Fabricated Interconnecting Inspection
cj
71-
joint), Heat Treatment & As per Spec.
Z
Piping at shop Report
Helium/Pneumatic/ Hydrostatic
Test
Visual, Dimensions,
Completeness as per Piping &
Instrument Drawing &
Performance test (Type tests as
Complete Refrigeration Package Test
c.i
irl
per app licable standards, as

—
c>
c)
"ii-?,
Z
assembly Report
applicable), Helium Spray/
Shroud Test (For Vapor
Absorption Chillers)
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7Rev. 0 Copy rig ht EIL — All rig hts reserved
Page 5540 of 8516
STANDARD S PECIFI CATIONNo.
6-81-0154Rev 0
"IS SCOPEOF INSPECTION

QUANTUM a1103311
'ON STAGE / ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS SUB
SUPPLIER
Inspection atWorks - Air Handling Unit
Manufacturer 's Test As per As per
1.£ Plates, Filters (Fine/Chemical), Physical & Chemical properties, %00I
Certificate/ Inspection Note - 1 Note - 1
Dampers etc S ize, Quantity
Report
Model/Type, Visual,
Manufacturer's Test As per As per
Dimensions, Electrical %00I
cn
cl
Heating Unit (Electric Heater) Certificate/ Inspection Note - 1
Z
Note - 1
Characteristics, Statutory
Report
approvals
£. £ Physical & Chem ical properties %00I Manufacturer's Test As per As per
Humidifier/ De-humidifier Unit for parts, LeakTesting, Spay
X
Certificate/Inspection Note - 1 Note - 1
pattern(for nozzles) Report
Fan/ B lower: Model/Type,
Physical & Chem ical properties
for parts, Dynamic Balanc ing, Manufacturer's Test
-,̀)
.`,') c5
cl. a,
(1.)
s. ,--,
sm. 0
CI)
;... ,--,
cc-,
7r
Fan/ B lower & Drive motor LeakTest, Performance,
c=
c)
c:'''
Certificate/Inspection
' 5
1
Mechanical Run Test Report
Motor: Type & Routine testing

Visual, Dimensions,
Completeness as per Piping &
(-9.;
Complete Air Handling Unit

kr,
As per Spec Inspection Report
Z
.
Instrument Drawing,
Mechanical Run Test
017
Inspection at works - Air Distribution Ducting/Diffuse r/Grills
Physical & Chemical properties, Manufacturer's Test
Sheets/Dampers/Louvers/ %00 I
Visual, Dimens ions, Size, Certificate/ Inspection
a4
P4
Insulation/ C ladding
Quantity Report
Format No. 8-00-000 1-F7Rev. 0 Copyrig ht EIL — All rig hts reserved
Page 5541 of 8516
V
i
6-81-0154Rev 0
cl)
"5
rn
a)
"IS
QUANTUM )PEOFINSPECTION
'ON STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS
0110331I
SUB Vial./Ma
OFCHECK SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
Fan/ B lower: Model/ Type,
Physical & Chemical properties
for parts, Dynamic Balancing,
Leak Test, Performance, Manufacturer 's Test
(-1
Blower & Drive motor
o
o
0
Certificate/ Inspection
p4
Mechanical Run Test
Report
Motor: Type & Routine testing
O'S
FinalInspection ofPackage (AtSite)
I' S Inspection of welds & Pressure

Fit up/ NDT/ Heat Treatments As per spec. Inspection Report
x
Testing Note - 4
Z' S
Installation of items/ un its Installation of units as per %00 I
Inspection Report
Z
layout/location/ Insu lation Note - 4
E' S Balancing of Air Distribution Verification of air quantities %00I
Inspection Report
x
system across various air terminals Note - 4
17' S Inspection of Electrical circuits/ Verification of circuits & %00 I
Inspection Report
x
installation installations Note - 4
S' S Performance guarantee run test %00 I
Performance Run test Inspection Report
x
for 72hours Note - 4
Spares (Mandatory, Commissioning,
Operational),
Special Tools & Tackles (as Verification for quantity
%00I Inspection
z
Reports Note - 4
applicable)
FormatNo. 8-00-0001-F7Rev. 0 Copy rig htEIL — All rig hts rese rved
Page 5542 of 8516
0. 0
0
z
< u-
co a
I— 0
w
0.
J <
z
STAN DARDSPECIFICATIONNo.
0
—
6-81-0154Rev 0
ci
z
z
0
0-
0
03
0
w0
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
STAGE / ACTIVITY QUANTUM
'01.1 CHARACTERI STICS RECORD SUB
SUPPLIER
0'9
Painting
Surface Preparation & Painting of VisualInspection for

all Carbon Stee l Parts and Pickling Workmanship/ Paint Shade/
Painting
%00 I Inspection
qs
—
)1/A1
Z
& Passivation for Stainless Steel Report
Parts DFT/ Adhesion/ Ho liday Check
(as app licable)
O'L
Documentation & IC • • • •
Certificate of Statutory
testing agency for suitability
of area classification
Certificate of Statutory
Submission of Certificates (as approval authority like PESO
...'0 .fs4_
U c4
'-, o
,,4. .)
av“c)
,..o "z:
E •—
r--:
=,..)
w
t:4
c4
cs
O
1.)
applicable) (as applicable)
6
Valid BIS License (as
applicable)
Degree of protection
certificate (as app licable)
Z.L Documentation & Inspection DIJoanssi %00 I
Inspection Certificate
x
Certificate (IC)
Verification & compilation of
L
Finaldocuments as per PR inspection & test records for
%00I Manufacturer data
x
submission to customer book
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7Rev. 0 Copy rig ht EIL — All rig hts rese rved
Page 5543 of 8516
Ci)
z
W Lir
ynz
Lu
,z<:
u-i g
I I
6-81-0154 Rev 0
0
NOTES (As applicable):
For Non NACE & Non Hydrogen service, following items shallbe procure d with EN 10204 type 3. 1 certification.
•—■
ics
"a)
"0
-o
<
CCI
-xi
CA •
trQ
71-
cN1
O
:•••
E
(NS
CCS
4.•
•
te
0
,a)
•
•
•
a)
td)
r..,"
a)
CC3
CA
3.
o (
a) O.
a.)
C.)
a)
o
_o-4
O
CA
,c)
. c)
41
•
.4-
•,-• • - 4
t;)
-4-,
o
tl)
ci.)
U
a) cl)
cn 0
$.4
a)
cr
E
a4 C.)
(i)•
cf)
0
a.)
ti
"--1
a)
cz
ci)
a71
I)
O
a.)
,)
T
$•-•
Ca.
.;
Acceptance Norms for all the activities shallbe as per PO/ PR/ STANDARDS referred therein/ Job Specification /Approved Documents.
c•-;
Site activities covered under 5.0 shallbe witnessedby EIL Construction Inspection or TPIA, as the case may be.
FormatNo. 8-00-0001-F7Rev. 0 Copyrig htEIL — All rig hts rese rved

Page 5544 of 8516
Page 5545 of 8516
Page 5546 of 8516
Page 5547 of 8516
Page 5548 of 8516
Page 5549 of 8516
Page 5550 of 8516
$ollflr.tef ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
42a iMireg INDIA LIMITED
sw ol Inda underlain') (SPECIAL PURPOSE
6-41-0006 Rev. 2
PROCESS SERVICE) Page 1 of 27
atitZeurlei wcri* fav Trrgw fanavi

sita.71-1 Wawa' wr

CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
(SPECIAL PURPOSE PROCESS SERVICE)
Vv%-,1
lACt‘bait:%7
2 13.022013 Revised & Issued as Standard Specification JSD TK DB DM
1 21.012011 Re-affirmed and Reissued SPS DB AKN DM
0 1110.2005 Issued as Standard Specification DB KDS RK VJN

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5551 of 8516

aa•-1 ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
_ _ INDIA LIMITED
$"g-ar elareg 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
IA Gov! of India Undenaknqi (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 2 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
Abbreviations:
API American Petroleum Institute

ASME The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
EDMS Electronic Document Management System
ISA Instrumentation Society of America
MKS Meter, Kilogram, Seconds
MOP Main Oil Pump
PTC Power Test Codes
Convenor: Mr. Dinesh Bhatia
Members: Mr. Nalin Kumar

Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anukul Mandel
Mr. Rakesh Mishra
Mr. JS Duggal
Mr. M.P Jain

Page 5552 of 8516

LII INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
iMeg
e IA Goof of India Undertaking) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
CONTENTS
Page No.
1 SCOPE 4
1A CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 4
1B EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION CRITERIA 5
C AMENDMENTS/SUPPLEMENTS TO API STANDARD 610 7
1 SCOPE 8
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES 8
3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 8

3.20 Maximum Discharge Pressure 8
4 CLASSIFICATION AND DESIGNATION 8

4.3 Units and Governing Requirements 8
5 BASIC DESIGN 8
5.1 General 8
5.2 Pump Types 9
5.3 Pressure Casings 9
5.5 External Nozzle Forces and Moments 9
5.7 Wear Rings and Running Clearances 10
5.8 Mechanical Shaft Seals 10
5.9 Dynamics 10
5.10 Bearings and Bearing Housings 10
5.11 Lubrication 10
5.12 Materials 11
6 ACCESSORIES 11
6.1 Drivers 11
6.2 Couplings & Guards 12
6.3 Base Plates 12
6.4 Instrumentation 13
6.5 Piping & Appurtenances 13
7 INSPECTION TESTING AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT 14

7.1 General 14
7.2 Inspection 15
7.3 Testing 16
7.4 Preparation for Shipment 18
8 SPECIFIC PUMP TYPES 18

8.1 Single Stage Overhung Pump 18
8.2 Between Bearing Pumps 18
8.3 Vertically Suspended Pumps (types VS1 through VS7) 19
9 VENDOR'S DATA 21
9.1 General 21
9.2 Proposals 21
9.3 Contract Data 22
Page 5553 of 8516

€1 ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
1/I Gov/ al Mao Undertalarag) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
1 SCOPE
This specification together with the attendant Data Sheets and other
specifications/attachments to inquiry / order defines the minimum requirements for vertical
and horizontal centrifugal pumps including pumps running in reverse direction as hydraulic
power recovery turbines and their accessories / auxiliaries for use in the petroleum,
petrochemical and natural gas industries.
ii. Vendor shall make all possible efforts to comply strictly with the requirements of this
In case deviations are considered essential by the vendor (after exhausting all possible
efforts) these shall be separately listed in the vendor's proposal under separate section titled
as "List of deviations/exceptions to the inquiry document". Deviation shall be listed
separately for each document with cross-reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para
etc. of the respective document supported with proper reasons for the deviation for
purchaser's consideration. Any deviation not listed under the above section, even if
reflected in any other portion of the proposal shall not be considered applicable.
No deviation or exception shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser
iii Compliance with this specification shall not relieve the vendor of the responsibility of
furnishing equipment and accessories/auxiliaries of proper design, materials and
workmanship to meet the specified start up and operating conditions.

devices and any other accessories/auxiliaries essential for safe and satisfactory operation of
the equipment, he shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section along
with his proposal and include the same in his scope of supply.
IA CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
In case of conflict between this specification and the attendant data sheets, job
specifications (if any) and other attached specification the following order of precedence
shall govern:
I. Equipment Data Sheets.
3. P&ID's (if any)
Page 5554 of 8516

(A Govl m coma Undenaking} (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 5 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
1B EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
I B.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the Equipment Qualification Criteria (EQC)
specified vide para IB.2 thru 1B.6 of this specification shall be applied for acceptance of
the offered pump model and its manufacturer.
IB.2 a)The vendor shall be an established manufacturer of API-610 centrifugal pumps having
adequate design, engineering, manufacturing, packaging and testing facilities for pumps
and shall be the single point responsibility vendor for the complete centrifugal pump
package.
b) The vendor shall have designed, engineered, packaged, tested and supplied, in the last
TEN (10) years, from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) centrifugal pump
package with same type of driver having similar driver power.
As a minimum, this package shall have completed ONE Year of satisfactory operation at
site, as on the bid due date.
1 B.3 a) The pump model offered shall be from the existing pump model series arid shall be from the
regular manufacturing range of the vendor. The mechanical as well as the hydraulic
performance (including NPSHR) for the complete range of operation of the offered model
shall have been established in the shop test.
The offered pump model shall meet the minimum service and manufacturing experience
requirements specified in clause# I B.3 b) below.
b) Pumps shall be identical in terms of Hydraulics and similar in terms of Power Rating,
Inlet flow, Differential Head, Operating Pressure & Temperature, Pumping Liquid, Speed,
Number & Type of Impellers, Mechanical Design, Materials, Bearing span (applicable for
between bearing pumps), Column Length (applicable for vertically suspended pumps) etc.
as compared to at least ONE (1) unit of the proposed model designed, manufactured, tested
and supplied from the proposed manufacturing plant in the last TEN (10) years and the
reference unit shall have completed ONE year of satisfactory operation at site, as on the bid
due date.
1B.4 In case the vendor is a licensee / member of a group company (As defined in 113.6 below)
and does not meet on his own, the experience criteria of clause# 1B.3 b), the vendor can
substitute the references of his Collaborator (licensor) / another member of the group
company, who shall also be a regular manufacturer of the proposed pump model, provided
the following conditions are met by the vendor:
I B.4.1 The vendor shall be a regular & established manufacturer of API 610 centrifugal pumps
and shall have supplied smaller & larger sizes of pump models of the same series, from the
proposed manufacturing plant and proves to the satisfaction of the purchaser that the
vendor does possess the manufacturing & testing facilities for the offered pump model.
I B.4.2 The vendor's collaborator (licensor) / the member of group company whose references are
being used to establish proven track record of the proposed pump model, meets the criteria
as per 1B.3 above.
1B.4.3 The vendor's license agreement is valid and continues to remain valid till, at least TWO
years after the delivery of the pumps.

Page 5555 of 8516

ENGINEERS
g909wreg, IP Govt W India uneenakng) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 6 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
1B.4.4 The vendor imports as a minimum the following critical components (including
components required for spare parts) from his Collaborator (licensor)/Group Company or
their sub-vendors:
- Impellers/Diffusers (fully machined)

- Complete Rotor Assembly (dynamically balanced) for multi-stage pumps
- Casing (proof machined, hydrostatically tested)
- Bearing Bracket.
The vendor need not import the components defined above, if the same have been
designed, manufactured, assembled, tested & supplied by the vendor, in the past from the
vendor's proposed manufacturing plant and such references have completed ONE year of
satisfactory operation at site as on the bid due date.
1 B.4.5 The vendor shall have adequate testing facilities and shall carry out all the inspection and
tests as specified in the inquiry/order at the proposed manufacturing plant (except for tests
specified in 1B.4.4 above, i.e. dynamic balancing & hydrostatic test) from where the
vendor intends to supply the proposed pump model.
1B.4.6 The vendor shall indicate the details of such arrangement in the proposal.
1B.5 In case the vendor is a licensee / member of a group company (As defined in 1B.6 below)
and does not possess the manufacturing experience of the proposed pump models at his
own manufacturing plant as per Clause 1B.3 and 1B.4 above, the vendor may propose to
supply the complete package with duly performance tested bareshaft pump sourced from
the vendor's licensor / another member of the group company, who shall be a regular
manufacturer of the proposed pump model, provided the following requirements are met:
1B.5.1 The vendor shall be a regular & established manufacturer of API 610 centrifugal pumps
and shall be a licensee / member of group company (As defined in 1B.6 below) from where
the bareshaft pump is proposed to be sourced.
1B.5.2 a) The vendor's license agreement is valid and continues to remain valid till, at least TWO
years after the delivery of the pumps. Necessary documents to establish that vendor has
requisite facilities and has been authorised to package the proposed pump model shall be
furnished in the proposal.
b) In case of member of group company also, vendor to furnish requisite documents from
group company to establish that vendor has requisite facilities and has been authorised to
package the proposed pump model.
1B.5.3 The vendor's collaborator (licensor) / the member of group company whose references are
being used to establish proven track record of the proposed pump model, meets the criteria
as per I B.3 above.
1 B.5.4 The vendor shall have adequate equipment handling and testing facilities and shall carry
out the Unitization/Complete Unit Test (As applicable) of the complete pump package at
his shop.
Hydrostatic test, Performance Test, Mechanical Run Test, Sound & Vibration Level Test,
NPSH Test, Dismantle inspection and reassembly after the running test of the bareshaft
pump shall be carried out at the pump manufacturer's shop i.e. the shop from where the
pump is proposed to be sourced. All the above tests at pump manufacturer's shop shall be
duly witnessed as specified/required in Inquiry document. The vendor shall furnish the test
certificates for tests carried out at pump manufacturer's shop at the time of final inspection.

Page 5556 of 8516

IA Goat of India Undertaking; (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 7 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
1B.5.5 The vendor shall indicate details of such arrangement in the proposal.
1 B.6 For the purpose of Cl. I B, Group Company shall mean one of the following:
a) Wholly owned subsidiary of the bidder.
b) Principal of whom the bidder is a wholly owned subsidiary.
c) Another wholly owned subsidiary of the Principal of whom the bidder is a
wholly owned subsidiary.
Necessary documents to justify above shall be furnished in the proposal.
I B.7 PROVEN TRACK RECORD (PTR)

The vendor shall complete the Experience Record Proforma's enclosed with the inquiry
document to amply prove that the offered pumps meet the EQC for technical acceptance.
Special attention is drawn to applications involving high suction pressure, high/low
operating temperature and low NPSHR. The vendor shall also identify the imported
components against each specific reference in the PTR. The vendor may furnish additional
information to justify that the EQC is being met. In addition, manufacturer's catalogue and
general reference list for Centrifugal Pumps shall also be furnished along with the proposal.
1C AMENDMENTS/SUPPLEMENTS TO API STANDARD 610
IC.1 Except as modified herein, the centrifugal pumps shall be designed, manufactured, tested
and supplied strictly in accordance with the API Standard 610 - Centrifugal Pumps for
Petroleum, Petrochemical and Natural gas industries, Tenth Edition, October 2004.
I C.2 Except for new paragraphs, the number and title of the paragraphs in this specification
correspond to the respective sections and paragraphs of the above standard. Paragraphs not
addressed in this specification shall be strictly in accordance to API Standard 610, Tenth
Edition, October 2004 requirements,
The word in parenthesis following the number or title of a paragraph indicates the
following:
(Addition) An addition to a part, section or paragraph referred to.
(Modification) An amplification or rewording has been made to a part of the
corresponding section or paragraph but not a substitution replacing
the entire section or paragraph.
(Substitution) A substitution has been made for the corresponding section or
paragraph of the standard in its totality.
(New) A new section or paragraph having no corresponding section or
paragraph in the Standard.
(Delete) The paragraph is deleted.

Page 5557 of 8516

kkit r
,,)ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
lig2AT safajeg INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
Goof of India UndertolofOf (SPECIAL PURPOSE
1 SCOPE
Paragraph 1 of API Standard 610 - Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum, Petrochemical

and Natural Gas industries, Tenth Edition, October 2004 stands modified as per para 1,
para 1A, para 1B and para IC above.
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES (Addition)
Add the following after NACE MR0175:

NACE MR0103, Materials resistant to sulfide stress cracking in corrosive petroleum
refining environments (item no. 21305)
3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

3.20 Maximum Discharge Pressure (Modification)
Replace 'normal relative density' by 'maximum specified relative density at any specified
operating condition'.
4 CLASSIFICATION AND DESIGNATION

4.3 Units and Governing Requirements
4.3.1 (Modification)
Unless otherwise specified, MKS system of units shall be used.
5 BASIC DESIGN
5.1 General
5.1.10 (Addition)
Pumps where difference between NPSHA and NPSHR from quoted minimum flow to rated
flow is less than 0.6 meter are not acceptable. The said NPSHR value shall correspond to
the maximum value of NPSHR from rated flow down to the recommended minimum
continuous stable flow specified by the vendor. However, in case of parallel operation
and/or autostart against open discharge valve condition, NPSHR at end of curve shall not
exceed specified NPSHA in addition to above margin requirement.
Pumps fitted with inducers for reducing NPSHR are not acceptable.
5.1.13 (Substitution)
Pumps shall have stable head/flowrate curves (continuous head rise to shutoff) for all
applications. If parallel operation is specified, the head rise from rated point to shutoff shall
be at least 10%. Unless otherwise specified, discharge orifice shall not be used to achieve
required head rise to shut off in case of parallel operation.
Pumps shall have preferred operating region of 70% to 120% of best efficiency flowrate of
the pump as furnished. Rated flow shall be within 110% of best efficiency flowrate of the
pump as furnished. Vendor shall indicate "Preferred Operating Range" and "Allowable
Operating Range" on the characteristic curve.
The last sentence of this para reading " the equipment...for guidance" stands substituted
with the following:
Unless otherwise specified, the maximum permissible sound level shall not exceed 88 dBA
measured at one (1) meter in any direction from pump train for the recommended range of
operation.

Page 5558 of 8516

rada ENGINEERS
091a9res, Grm oi hula UnaenaioN) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Unless otherwise specified, water cooling systems (jackets, heat exchangers and so forth)
shall be designed for the following conditions on the water side:
Velocity over heat exchanger surface 1.5 - 2.5 m/sec.

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) 3 8.0 kg/milt
Test Pressure (1.5 X MAWP) 3 12.0 kg/cm2g
Maximum Pressure Drop 1.0 kg/cm2
Maximum Inlet Temperature 33EC
Maximum Outlet Temperature 45EC
Maximum Temperature Rise 12EC
Minimum Temperature Rise 6EC
Fouling Factor on Water Side 0.0004 m2 hrEC/kcal
Shell Side Corrosion allowance (not for tubes) 3.2 mm
5.1.30 (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall be designed to be suitable for outdoor
installation without a roof
5.1.32 (New)
For balancing axial thrust in multi-stage pumps, only the following arrangements shall be
used:
- Opposed arrangements of impellers.
A balancing piston
5.1.33 (New)
For rated flows exceeding 1000 m3 /Hr, only "Between Bearing Type" pump shall be
supplied.
5.2 Pump Types (Modification)

Unless otherwise specified, pump types as listed in Table 2 shall not be offered.
5.3 Pressure Casings
The maximum discharge pressure shall be the maximum suction pressure plus the
maximum differential pressure (including the allowable positive performance tolerance)
the pump is able to develop when operating with the furnished impeller at the rated speed
and specified maximum relative density (specific gravity).
The 'NOTE' stands modified as under:
Vendor to note that the criteria specified in a) above shall also be used for design of
purchaser's associated piping system.
Regions of vertically suspended, double-casing and horizontal multistage pumps (pumps
with three or more stages) that are subject only to suction pressure shall be designed for the
same MAWP as the discharge section.
The words "except as allowed in 8.2.1.2" stand deleted.
5.5 External Nozzle Forces and Moments
Page 5559 of 8516

el ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
tgz:IT EMeg, INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
IF Gthl of India Undetta41.91 (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 10 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
The pump's pressure casing shall be suitable to withstand twice the forces and moments in
Table 2-1A (2-1B) applied simultaneously to the pump through each nozzle, plus internal
pressure, without distortion that would impair operation of the pump or seal.
Note: Vendor to note that the above criteria shall be used for design of purchaser's associated piping
system.
5.7 Wear Rings and Running Clearances
Tack welding shall not be employed for fitting of the wear rings.
5.7.4c) (Modification)
Non-metallic wear rings, if offered, shall be subject to purchaser's specific approval.
5.7.4d) (New)
The maximum permissible running clearances shall not be less than twice the new running
clearances.
5.8 Mechanical Shaft Seals
5.8.1 (Addition)
For the applicable flushing plans, the vendor shall also include in his scope of supply, all
items shown as optional items in Annexure D of API standard 682 (Standard Flush Plan
and auxiliary Hardware) along with other additional specified/ required items, if any.
5.9 Dynamics
5.9.2.6 (Modification)
Replace the words 'If specified' by Ìf torsional analysis is performed'.
5.9.3 VIBRATION
The words ìf specified' in the last sentence stand deleted.
5.10 Bearings and Bearing Housings
5.10.2 BEARING HOUSINGS
Bearing housings shall be equipped with suitable replaceable noncontact type bearing
isolators where shaft passes through the housing.
5.10.2.12 (Substitution)
A flat surface at least 25 mm in diameter shall be supplied for the location of magnetic
based vibration measuring equipment, whether or not vibration measuring equipment is
included in the vendor's scope of supply.
5.10.2.13 (New)
Bearing housing shall be equipped with magnetic drain plug except for multistage pumps
where vendor's standard design may not permit this.
5.11 Lubrication
Provision shall be made for pure/purge oil mist lubrication as specified.

Page 5560 of 8516

ealle? ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
la9eg, A Gorl of coma Unclenaking) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
5.12 Materials
5.12.1.6c) (Substitution)
Unless otherwise specified, casing in cast iron construction shall not be offered.
The words 'if specified' stand deleted.
Where even trace quantities of wet H2S are indicated to be present, reduced hardness
materials in accordance with NACE MR0175/MR0103 shall be provided by the vendor.
The second sentence also stands deleted.
e) Requirements of additional examination shall be as specified vide clause 7.2.1.3 of
this specification.
ASME Sec VIII, Div 1 shall apply with regard to impact testing requirements.
6 ACCESSORIES
6.1 Drivers
Electric motor drivers shall have a maximum continuous rating (MCR) (i.e. service factor
equal to 1) not lower than the following unless higher rating is dictated by the Note 1 and /
or Note 2:
Pump Rated BKW Motor MCR (% of Pump Rated BKW)
Up-to 22 kW To suit maximum BKW indicated on pump data sheet

or 125% of rated pump BKW, whichever is higher.
22 kW to 55 kW 115%
Higher than 55 kW 110%
The electric motor shall be suitable for the electrical area classification specified on the
data sheet.
Note:
1. The motor nameplate rating for pumps under parallel operation or for pumps with
auto-start operation shall not be less than the max. BKW indicated on pump data sheet
(maximum power at any point on the pump performance curve from shutoff to end of
the curve for the rated impeller) or shall have the specified margin as per this clause
whichever is greater. The pump motors shall also be suitable for start-up under open
discharge valve condition.
2. The motor nameplate rating for applications where the specific gravity of pumped fluid
is less than 1.0 shall either be 100% of the BKW of pump at minimum continuous
stable flow with clean cold water of sp. gravity 1.0 or shall have the specified margin
as per this clause, whichever is greater.
Page 5561 of 8516

mac? ENGINEERS
sfd7 09tg, INDIA LIMITED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
Govl of Inds UndertakIng) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Unless otherwise specified, steam turbine drivers shall be sized to deliver continuously
110% of pump rated power at minimum inlet and maximum exhaust steam conditions.
The steam turbine rating (with minimum inlet and maximum exhaust steam conditions) for
pumps under parallel operation or for pumps with auto-start operation shall not be less than
the max. BKW indicated on pump data sheet (maximum power at any point on the pump
performance curve from shutoff to end of the curve for the rated impeller). The turbine
shall also be suitable for start-up under open discharge valve condition.
In any case, Turbine Rating shall be at least equal to the Motor Rating of the standby
pump.
6.2 Couplings and Guards
The words 'if specified' stand deleted
Unless otherwise specified, all couplings required for multistage pump package(s) (greater
than two stages) shall conform to API standard 671 where either the driver rating is greater
than 160 kW or the maximum continuous speed is greater than 3000 rpm.
However in case of gear box driven multistage pump units, both low speed and high speed
couplings shall conform to API standard 671 if any of the above criteria of speed or power
is satisfied.
6.2.7 (Addition)
The coupling service factor shall not be less than 1.5 over the driver rating.
6.2.14 a) (Addition)
Coupling guard shall be open at the bottom to permit manual shaft rotation.
6.2.14 c) (Modification)
Coupling guard shall be fabricated from non-sparking material.
6.3 Base Plates
6.3.1 (Addition)
Pumps in corrosive service shall have provision to collect and drain the leakage from
mechanical seal or packing, through a drip pan of metallurgy equivalent or superior to
pump casing. Leakages from drip pan shall be piped to base-plate with a flanged
connection for onward disposal by purchaser. Where the design of bearing prohibits
provision of drip pan, the material of bearing bracket shall be suitable for the corrosive
service.
Replace "if specified" by "For all multistage pumps".
The vendor shall furnish the results of the pipe load test data for the proposed pump
model(s) along with their proposal indicating the shaft deflections at coupling end.
In case pipe load test has not been conducted in the past, the vendor shall demonstrate the
pipe load test (Either Physical Testing or Computer Simulation Study) for the proposed
pump model(s) at their manufacturing shops within four months of placement of order.
The pump manufacturer shall furnish the anchor bolts.
Page 5562 of 8516

aaa-eq ENGINEERS
FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
INDIA LIMITED
$'11tzir 09eg) IA Goff of Iona Undenakuvp (SPECIAL PURPOSE
6.3.21 (New)
Skid layout of pump trains along-with their auxiliary systems (i.e. seal flushing plans) shall
be designed in a manner so as to ensure that there is enough space within the skid for
maintenance and operation. Special care shall be taken for pumps provided with seal
flushing plans 23 and 52 so that couplings and seals can be attended for maintenance
without disturbing any seal piping/cables/other items located on the skid. As far as
possible, area on motor terminal box side shall be left clear of all piping and accessories for
ease of maintenance.
6.4 Instrumentation
The words 'if specified' stand deleted. The vendor shall supply the detectors.
6.4.2.5 (New)
Horizontal multistage pumps intended for pumping temperature above 120°C shall be
provided with pump casing skin temperature monitoring system consisting of the
following:
- Four thermocouples along-with yoke mounted temperature transmitters with integral
indicator for each thermocouple.
- One Junction Box (JB) to be mounted on the pump base-plate.
- Cables between the thermocouples and transmitters.
- Cables between transmitters and junction box.
6.5 Piping and Appurtenances
6.5.1 GENERAL
Flange fasteners on stainless steel piping systems shall be of stainless steel.
6.5.2 AUXILIARY PROCESS FLUID PIPING
Auxiliary process fluid piping material shall be SS-316 as a minimum.
Casing shall be provided with drain connection with nipple, threaded and seal welded and
provided with a socket welded gate valve terminated at edge of the base plate. Gate valve
shall be of 800# rating with material of construction (MOC) equal or superior to the pump
casing. For multistage pumps with more than one drain point, block valves at each drain
point shall be provided and the piping shall be terminated at edge of the base plate with a
flange. Unless made self venting design, vent connections shall also be provided with a
nipple, threaded and seal welded and terminated with a gate valve. Pressure gauge
connection shall not be provided unless specifically required in the inquiry. Nipples shall
meet the requirements of 5.4.3.5 & 5.4.3.6.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright E IL — All rights reserved
Page 5563 of 8516

doiliaLlei ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
ins
lFeg
_ INDIA LIMITED
Goui of India UndertakPNI (SPECIAL PURPOSE
6-41-0006 Rev. 2
Page 14 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
Flanges are required instead of socket welded unions for all auxiliary process fluid piping.
6.5.2.9 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, material for seal flushing liquid cooler shall be as under:
Tube or Coil Type 316 stainless steel or Monel.
Casing (or Shell) Carbon Steel.
Cooling water shall be on the casing (Shell) side.
6.5.3 COOLING WATER PIPING
6.5.3.3 (Addition)
Sight flow indicator shall have ball or flag for easy verification of water flowing through
pipes.
6.5.3.5 (New)
Thermal relief valve (in each isolatable cooling water circuit) shall be provided upstream of
globe valve on the cooling water outlet line.
7 INSPECTION, TESTING AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT

7.1 General
7.1.8 (New)
Prior to start of test, manufacturer shall furnish the certificate of latest calibration / re-
calibration of driver and measuring instruments for review by purchaser's inspection
agency..
Unless electrical or mechanical failure occurs, driver used for shop testing need not be
recalibrated and original calibration certificate shall remain valid.
Duration of recalibration for all measuring instruments shall be as per the recommendations
of HI Standards.
Page 5564 of 8516

z7f efare INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
CA GOA of intim undeitaiong) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 15 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
7.2 Inspection
7.2.1 GENERAL
The minimum inspection requirement for pressure containing casings shall be as per the
following:
Inspection Inspection req uirement Remarks

category
CATEGORY A Visual inspection and Magnetic Cl. Liquid penetrant inspection
Particle or Liquid Penetrant shall be performed only
inspection of following when specified magnetic
components as a minimum: particle inspection is not
Nozzle weld feasible.
Butt welds on pressure
containing components C2. Magnetic particle or liquid
Fillet welds on pressure Penetrant inspection shall be
containing components. carried out in accordance with
Shaft table 13.
Radiographic or ultrasonic
inspection of the following as a C3. Ultrasonic inspection shall
minimum: be carried out when
Nozzle weld radiography is not feasible.
Butt welds on pressure Radiography or ultrasonic
containing components. inspection shall be carried out
in accordance with table 13.
CATEGORY B Visual inspection and Magnetic B1. Liquid penetrant inspection
Particle or Liquid Penetrant shall be performed only
inspection of following when specified magnetic
components as a minimum: particle inspection is not
- Nozzle weld feasible.
- Butt welds on pressure
containing components B2. Magnetic particle or liquid
- Fillet welds on pressure penetrant inspection shall be
containing components. carried out in accordance with
Shaft table 13.
CATEGORY C As per vendor's standard Quality
Assurance Plan
Note:
Category A:
This category is applicable for services with process design pressure above 70 kg/cnit or process design
temperature below -29°C or above 300°C.
Category B:
This category is applicable for services within the design pressure and temperature range other than
covered under category A above and category C below.
Category C:
This category is applicable for carbon steel and cast iron for services with process design pressure up to 40
kg/cint and design temperature from 0 to 150°C.
7.2.1.5 (New)
Inspection shall also include dimensional check of pump, driver and auxiliaries (if any)
duly mounted on the base plate, in accordance with certified general assembly drawing.
This will include all main pump dimensions, base plate dimensions, location of foundation
bolt holes, size/position/rating of flanges, coupling guard arrangement, verification of the

Page 5565 of 8516

laelei ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Sig7 laWg
. A Go. of India Under tolong (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 16 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
required material certificates and their trace-ability to the respective components. In

addition, following checks shall also be carried out:
- A measurement of the actual running clearances throughout the pump.
- A check for the hardness of wear rings.
A check for good workmanship and finish throughout.
7.2.2 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS
The words "if specified" stand deleted.
Testing
GENERAL
(Modification)
Table 14 stands modified as under:
Rated Head Zero negative tolerance @ rated flow rate & rated speed
Shut-off Head • Following criteria shall apply:
a) Positive tolerance permitted as long as maximum
shutoff pressure corresponding to shut-off head (as
observed during the shop performance test) and the
maximum suction pressure (as specified on pump data
sheet), does not exceed the downstream design pressure
(as specified on pump data sheet).
b) Negative tolerance (as per Table 4-2 of API Std. 610,
8th edition) may be permitted only if test curve still
shows rising characteristics.
c) Negative tolerance is not permitted for pumps required
for pumps under parallel operation.
[Note: Generally shutoff head should be limited within
120% of rated head.]"
NPSHR Zero positive tolerance.
Rated BKW Zero positive tolerance. (However, pumps may be accepted
up-to 104% of guaranteed BKW subject to Penalties as
defined elsewhere.
The words 'if specified' stand substituted with 'Unless otherwise specified'.
7.3.1.4 (New)
Unless otherwise specified the following tests shall be witnessed by the Purchaser or by
their authorised representative or by both together.
1. Hydrostatic test as per 4.3.2 for Multistage Pumps.
2. Performance test as per 4.3.3.
3. NPSHR test as per 4.3.4.1 when specified in the material requisition or when the
difference between NPSHA and NPSHR is less or equal to one (I) meter.
4. Unitization of Pump with Job Driver at shop.
5. Dismantling inspection and reassembly, after the running test
6. Dynamic balancing of Complete Rotor in case of Multistage Pumps
7. Sound level test.

Page 5566 of 8516

OrlfazieT ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
fr4-f-ff 05cidg, IA GoN of Irkikk Undertaking) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 17 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
Test Certificates for Hydrostatic Test & Dynamic Balancing of Impeller(s) will suffice for
single & two stage pumps. These test certificates shall be furnished to purchaser's inspector
for review prior to performance testing.
7.3.3 PERFORMANCE TEST
7.3.3.2 (New)
i) Shop driver shall be used for testing and the rating of the driver shall not exceed 150%
of power that may be consumed while running at duty point with water; or power at
full valve open condition, whichever is higher. The limitation of 150% is applicable
only for medium voltage motors.
b) During the performance test, rise in temperature of bearing oil shall be measured and
results recorded on the test log. If specified, pumps provided with oil mist lubrication
(Purge/Pure) shall be tested with shop oil mist system & suitable performance at vendor's
shop shall be demonstrated.
7.3.3.5b) (Modification)
7.3.4 OPTIONAL TESTS
7.3.4.2 NPSHR Test
7.3.4.2.1 (Substitution)
If NPSHR test is specified or if it is required to be done as per para 7.3.1.4(3), NPSHR
shall be determined at each test point (7.3.3.3a) except shut-off.
7.3.4.4 Sound Level Test (Modification)
During the performance test, the equipment shall be checked for its sound level at
minimum flow, at rated flow, at flow at best efficiency point and at 120% BEP flow.
The maximum allowable value shall not exceed the value specified under clause 5.1.16 or
as specified in the datasheet, whichever is lower, when measured at one (1) meter from
pump surface.
Where complete unit test is specified, vendor is required to demonstrate the noise levels
within the maximum permissible sound level for the complete unit.
Recorded sound levels during shop test shall be taken for reference only & not for final
acceptance or rejection. However sound level as specified in the inquiry document shall be
guaranteed at site.
7.3.4.5 Auxiliary Equipment Test (Modification)

7.3.4.7 Mechanical run test
7.3.4.7.1 (Delete)
7.3.4.7,2 (Modification)
7.3.4.7.3 (Modification)

Page 5567 of 8516

0 etas ENGINEERS
sigaregYitg IA God od Ado uneertaiong) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
7.4 Preparation for Shipment

Unless otherwise specified, the equipment shall be protected for an outdoor storage of 12
months at site. If any extra precaution is to be taken by the Purchaser for storage beyond 12
months the same shall be explicitly indicated in the operation and maintenance manuals.
Two copies of the manufacturer's job specific installation manual shall be packed and
shipped with the equipment.
8 SPECIFIC PUMP TYPES
8.1 Single Stage Overhung Pump
8.1.1 (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, overhung pumps for rated flow exceeding I000 m3/hr are not
acceptable.
8.1.3 INTEGRAL GEAR DRIVEN (TYPE OH6) PUMPS

Diameter of gauges shall be 100mm (4 in.) as a minimum.
8.2 Between Bearing Pumps
Pumps for all services shall be centreline mounted irrespective of pumping temperature.
8.2.2.5 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, Maximum number of stages shall not exceed 10 for horizontal
pumps.
8.2.4 DYNAMICS
8.2.4.1.2 Table 16-Decision logic for rotor lateral analysis (Modification)

The words 'similar or' stand deleted from step-2.
8.2.4126) Deleted.
8.2.6 LUBRICATION
The words 'ISO 10438-3' shall be replaced with' ISO 10438-3/API standard 614, Chapter
3'
2'
8.2.6.6 (New)
The pump manufacturer shall supply all the specified/required instrumentation. However,
purchaser shall approve the make, type and the specification.
Page 5568 of 8516

Pird ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
5Agrjr
i 9-eg, GoN al India undettapongi (SPECIAL PURPOSE
8.2.6.7 (New)
In case a pressure lubrication system is required and is supplied with shaft-driven main oil
pumps (MOP), the MOP shall be suitable for safe coast down of the complete equipment
train without necessitating the requirement of overhead rundown tank.
In case MOP is not suitable for safe shutdown of the complete equipment train, the vendor
in his offer may propose for purchaser's consideration any special arrangement/provision
provided for equipment safety and protection when the equipment decelerates. Provision
shall be adequate for coast down time and cool-off time as applicable.
8.2.6.8 (New)
External pressure-lubrication systems shall comply with the following additional
requirements:
Pumps, filters, strainers, coolers, traps, valves and all other components that retain oil
under pressure and are external to the reservoir shall be made of steel.
Except in case of shaft driven pumps, if a positive displacement type of oil pump is
supplied, a separate relief valve (not integral with the pump) shall be provided. The
relief valve shall not be used for pressure regulation. Horizontal oil pumps shall not
be installed on top of the oil reservoir.
A removable tube bundle design is required for shell and tube coolers with more than
0.5 m2.
The oil side operating pressure of the oil cooler shall be higher than the water-side
operating pressure to prevent contamination of oil in case of cooler failure.
Filters shall be equipped with a continuous flow transfer valves and an equalising line.
Oil system shall have drain rim or pan to catch oil spills.
Unless otherwise specified, heating element shall not be provided. However, if in the
opinion of vendor such an arrangement is required (especially in view of the lowest
ambient temperature prevailing at job site), the same shall be supplied by the pump
manufacturer with specific approval of the purchaser.
8.2.7 TESTING
3'
The words ìf specified' stand deleted.
8.2.8 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
8.3 Vertically Suspended Pumps (types VS1 through VS7)
8.3.1 GENERAL
Hydraulic performance shall also be corrected for friction head losses in the inlet strainer.
Page 5569 of 8516

ENGINEERS
IA Cori of Intha UndeplakiN) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 20 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
8.3.1.3 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, in case of tank-mounted pumps, the setting depth shall be so
arrived that the pump minimum submergence is ensured within the boot of the vessel, i.e.
minimum liquid level shall be considered to correspond to bottom of the tank level for
ensuring complete evacuation of the tank.
8.3.2 PRESSURE CASINGS
8.3.2.3 (New)
Bowls and columns shall be flanged and bolted.
8.3.3 ROTORS
8.3.3.3 (Addition)
Multi-piece vertical pump line shaft shall not be joined by threaded couplings.
8.3.6 BUSHINGS AND BEARINGS
Pump thrust shall not be transferred to driver motor. Vertical pumps shall be provided with
their own thrust bearing to carry rotor weight and pump generated axial threes.
Thrust bearing shall be positively locked on the pump shaft (shouldered shaft) and the
bearing housing.
8.3.7 LUBRICATION (Addition)

For self-lubrication pumps, guide bushing shall be suitable for dry running during start-up.
8.3.8 ACCESSORIES
8.3.8.1 Drivers (Modification)

For vertical pumps, not provided with non-reverse ratchet, vendor shall describe the
precaution taken, to prevent damage due to reverse rotation.
8.3.8.3 Mounting Plates
The words 'if specified' stand substituted with 'unless otherwise specified'.
8.3.10 SINGLE CASE DIFFUSER (VS1) AND VOLUTE (VS2) PUMPS
8.3.13 DOUBLE CASING DIFFUSER (VS6) AND VOLUTE (VS7) PUMPS

Page 5570 of 8516

lortlfael ENGINEERS
FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
§t-ia larg, INDIA LIMITED
in Gorl of mma Underlaking) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Page 21 of 27
PROCESS SERVICE)
9 VENDOR'S DATA
9.1 General
9.1.2a) (Substitution)
The purchaser's/owner's/consultant's corporate name.
9.1.3 CO-ORDINATION MEETING (Substitution)

When specified, a co-ordination meeting shall be held at Purchaser's office, preferably
within 4 weeks of order.
An agenda shall be prepared for this meeting and would include the following points
related to technical aspects:
Any clarifications required by the vendor on purchaser's order.
Document Control Index (DCI).
Vendor Data Review/approval modalities.
Sub-vendor lists proposed by vendor.
Utility requirements.
Preliminary General Arrangement & layout drawings & purchaser's interface
drawings.
9.2 Proposals (Substitution)

All data sheets, drawings and documents listed under "PRINTS WITH QUOTE" in the
Vendor's confirmation/comments on post-order Vendor Data Requirements (Type of
Documents, no. of prints and date needed) indicated in Vendor Data Requirement
forms data sheets and specs.
List of recommended commissioning spares included in the offer.
List of insurance/mandatory spares (where specified by the purchaser) included in the
offer.
List of Spare Parts For Two Years Normal Operation
This list shall be made separately for each items including auxiliaries and drivers in
the form of a table & shall show:
v) Quantity recommended as insurance for the number of units of an item specified
in the inquiry.
An itemised list of special tools included in the offer.
Any start-up, shutdown or operating restrictions required to protect the integrity of the
equipment.
Any limitations of vendor's test-facility to carryout the specified tests.
A specific statement that the scope of supply, the offered equipment/systems and all
its components are in compliance with the requirement specified in data sheets, job
Page 5571 of 8516

dafatiei ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
c fgreg W INDIA LIMITED
Ig-U
z 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
IA G,M of India Undedalfing I (SPECIAL PURPOSE
specifications, this specifications and all other attachments forming part of the enquiry
documents except for specific deviations as listed in the proposal.
Note: Clearance less than those required by Table 5 shall be stated as an exception to
API 610.
9.3 Contract Data (Substitution)
9.3.1 GENERAL
Vendor Data Requirement are generic in nature. It is possible that against one drawing /
document specified there are several drawings to be furnished by the vendor or vice versa.
9.3.1.2 Vendor shall complete & forward a document "Document Control Index (DCI)" to the
purchaser (Destination & contact person as per order). This shall be the first document to
be submitted by vendor within two weeks of order.
vendor.
information:
Purchaser's and Consultant's Corporate Name
Project Name.
Equipment Name and Item No.
- Purchase Order No.
- Purchase Requisition No.
document/data required or requested by Purchaser for engineering or construction shall
also be made available by the vendor.
As built running clearances and when applicable; thrust bearing, radial bearing and
start-up.

Page 5572 of 8516

dEldazIel ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Ofarg
_ INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0006 Rev. 2
IA Goul of India Undertaking) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
PROCESS SERVICE) page 23 of 27
A parts list for all equipment supplied. The list shall include pattern, stock, or
At least 8 weeks before shipment, the vendor shall submit his preservation, packaging
and shipping procedures to the purchaser's for his review.
9.3.2 DRAWINGS
9.3.2.1 The number of prints and/or reproducible required and the times within which these are to
be submitted by vendor are specified in Purchaser's inquiry/order.
If specified, drawing review may be through EDMS/VDOCS in soft as per the details
provided elsewhere in inquiry document.
from any requirements in the purchase order/specifications unless specifically agreed upon
in writing. After the drawings have been reviewed, the vendor shall furnish certified copies
in the quantity specified. All drawings must be clearly legible and shall be either in A3 or
A4 size.
9.3.3 TECHNICAL DATA
9.3.3.1 General Arrangement Drawing

A general arrangement drawing shall contain as a minimum, the following information:
Outline dimensions (minimum three views) (All principal dimensions).
Allowable forces and moments on suction and discharge nozzles.
Location (in all three planes), size, type, rating and identification of all purchaser's
interface connections including those of vents, drains, lubricating oil, sealing fluid,
Direction of rotation viewing from the driving end.
The weight & location of center of gravity of the heaviest assembly/ components that
must be handled for erection.
Identification and weight, dimensions of the heaviest assembly / subassembly /
Maintenance clearances and dismantling clearances.
Speeds of Driven Equipment and Driver with Driver rating. Location of driver
terminal box (in case of Electric Motor Driver).
Layout of auxiliary equipment and operating platform, as applicable.
Make, Type and Size of couplings and the location of guards and their coverage.
A list of reference drawings if any.
A list of any special weather-protection and climatic features.
9.3.3.2 Foundation Drawings

A foundation drawing shall indicate complete information required for foundation design
by purchaser including the following:
- Foundation bolt sizes, pipe sleeve details, pocket sizes and locations.
Page 5573 of 8516

a= 4Zle ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
$1a-41T faWd°, M Gaol of hha undenaulg) (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Grouting thickness and other necessary technical details.

Static weight of each skid/independently grouted item and location of center of gravity
of each of such skid/items in all three planes.
Weight distribution for each bolt/subsole plate location and total static weight.
Dynamic loading caused due to various items grouted independently.
The direction and magnitude of unbalance forces and moments generated by each such
item at the worst operating condition and short circuit moments of motor drivers.
GD2 value of each item resolved to driver speed.
Maximum permissible amplitude of vibration on the foundation at base level.
Total mass of rotating parts.
Suggested dynamic factor and ratio of foundation weight to weight of skid/equipment
as per vendor experience.
NOTE : Vendor shall necessarily indicate the recommended type, make & quantity of
recommended grouting material (i.e. cementitious or epoxy grout).
9.3.3.3 Layout Drawing (For multi-skid packages)
This drawing shall include at-least the following information:
Layout of all skid/equipment and their auxiliaries, vessels, control panels, exchangers
etc. Vendor shall furnish an optimised layout (considering the space allocated, site
wind conditions, area classification, the type of equipment located in the vicinity etc.)
indicating elevation and dimension of skids/equipment.
Minimum spacing required between the various skids / equipment and between the
skids and the walls / columns / roof for an easy accessibility and maintenance.
Layout for water piping, trenches for water piping, cable tray/trenches layout.
Piping arrangement and piping support arrangement/location for piping in vendor's
scope.
Layout for auxiliary equipment and operating platform details.
Specification for crane/mono rail (including suggested mono rail layout)
recommended for maintenance and height of the lifting hook from the centerline of
equipment.
93.3.4 Field Alignment Diagram

The diagram shall indicate the relative displacement to be kept between the centerlines of
various equipments at the time of installation, so that under normal running conditions the
equipments get fully aligned. This relative displacement should be decided on the basis of
centerline temperature rise data of driver, gear box/transmission system, driven equipment.
9.3.3.5 Heat Exchanger Drawings

sections & general arrangement drawings of heat exchangers, vendors recommendations
regarding provision for support and piping expansion.

Vendor shall supply P&I Diagrams along with Bill of Materials of each system in the
vendor's scope of supply or specified in the order. P&I Diagram shall indicate the system
details, location of various auxiliaries, instruments, controls and safety devices as required.
Line sizes, piping class, valve sizes and class shall be clearly marked on the P&ID.
Page 5574 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51111 9,eg IA GovI of India UndedaYingi (SPECIAL PURPOSE
Vendor's scope and purchaser's scope shall be clearly demarcated. Each item shall be
identified by an item no./ item tag no., which shall correspond to the item no. shown on the
bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include items number, normal value, set value,
range, quantity per unit, make and other specifications as applicable.
Legends adopted shall be indicated either at the bottom of drawing or on a separate
drawing. The legends shall be as per ISA.
9.3.3.7 Cross-sectional Drawing with Bill of Materials

The vendor shall supply cross-sectional or assembly type drawings for all equipment
furnished showing all parts, design assembly and running clearances( minimum and
maximum permissible), and balancing data required for erection and maintenance. Each
part shall be numbered which shall correspond to the part number on the bill of materials.
The bill of materials shall include the part no., name of component, materials quantity
installed per unit & sizes where applicable (say for bolts, nuts, rings. gaskets etc.). All
boughtout items shall also be indicated with make and brief specifications.
A separate cross-sectional drawing showing installation and setting dimensions for the
seals shall be furnished.
9.3.3.8 Performance Characteristic Curves
9.3.3.8.1 The vendor shall provide complete performance curves to encompass the map of
operations, with any limitations indicated thereon.
9.3.3.8.2 All curves submitted prior to final performance testing shall be marked "PREDICTED".
Any set of curves resulting from a test shall be marked "TESTED".
9.3.3.8.3 Certified test curves and data shall be submitted within 15 days after testing and shall
include head, power recalculated to the proper specific gravity and efficiency plotted
against capacity. If applicable, viscosity corrections shall be indicated. If NPSHR test is
specified, the water NPSHR curve (drawn upto minimum continuous flow) shall also be
included. The curve sheet shall include the maximum and minimum diameters of the
impeller design supplied, the eye area of the first stage impeller, the identification number
of the impeller or impellers and the pump serial number.
9.3.3.9 Data Sheet

The Vendor shall provide completely filled in data sheets, first for "As Purchased" and
then for "As Built". The vendor by shall do this by correcting and filling out the data
sheets and submitting copies to the purchaser.
9.3.3.10 Installation Manual

The vendor shall provide sufficient written instructions, including a cross-reference list of
all drawings, to enable the purchaser to correctly install, operate and maintain all the
equipment. It shall include any special information required for proper installation that is
not on the drawings, special alignment or grouting procedures, utility specifications
(including quantity) and all installation data. It shall also contain the following
information:
9.3.3.10.1 Instructions for erecting, aligning (including the expected thermally induced shaft center-
line shift between normal site ambient temperature position and that at normal equipment
operating temperature) and piping.
9.3.3.10.2 A description of rigging procedures, including the lifting of the assembled equipment, and
methods of disassembly, repair, adjustment, inspection and reassembly of the equipment
and auxiliaries.
Page 5575 of 8516

telia_lei ENGINEERS
sitgi7sktyydg
_ INDIA LIMITED
Go1 al India Undeilakng)
(SPECIAL PURPOSE
6-41-0006 Rev. 2
9.3.3.10.3 Pre-commissioning/commissioning/functional test procedures and acceptance criterion.
9.3.3.11 Operation and Maintenance Manual

This shall provide sufficient written instructions and data to enable purchaser to correctly
operate and maintain the equipment ordered. It shall include a section to cover special
instructions for operation at extreme environmental and/or extreme operating conditions.
The following shall be included in this manual:
9.3.3.11.1 Instructions covering start-up, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, operating limits
and routine operational procedures.
(a) A description of equipment construction features and the functioning of component
parts or systems (such as control, lubrication, sealing systems etc.).
(b) Outline and sectional drawings, schematics and illustrative skel:ches in sufficient
equipment.
9.3.3.11.2 The following maintenance information:
(a) Maximum and minimum bearing, labyrinth and seal clearances including any other
clearance between moving and stationary parts of the equipment affecting proper
running and maintenance of the equipment.
(b) Instructions for measuring and adjusting cold clearances, shaft runout, concentricity
etc.
(c) Rotor float allowance.
(d) Interference fits on parts that are required to be removed or replaced for maintenance
of normally consumable spares.
(e) Balancing tolerances.
(f) Lubricating schedules indicating recommended grades of oil, their properties,
replacement period etc.
(g) Normal maintenance procedure.
(h) Preventive maintenance schedules and criterion for replacement of parts.
(i) Trouble - shooting procedures.
9.3.3.11 3 The following reassembly information:
(a) Bolting sequence and torque values for all bolts affecting equipment
(b) Reassembly sequences together with required inspection checks.
(c) Adjustment procedures to achieve required positions, clearances, float and so forth.
(d) Detailed procedures for pre-operational checks, including settings and adjustments.
(e) Seals and coupling installation procedures.
(f) Parts list indicating cross-sectional drawings of various assemblies and sub-
assemblies, part numbers, materials of construction (ASTM) etc.to facilitate
identification of parts and for procurement of spares.
9.3.4 FINAL DOCUMENTATION
9.3.4.1 Technical Data Manual / Mechanical Catalogue
Page 5576 of 8516

larta ENGINEERS FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
Myeg
n, INDIA LIMITED 641-0006 Rev. 2
Onri of intha Undeptakav (SPECIAL PURPOSE
9.3.4.1.1 Technical data manual / mechanical catalogue is a compilation of "as built" drawings and
9.3.4.1.2 Not later than two weeks after successful completion of all specified tests, the vendor shall
furnish the required number of technical data manual / mechanical catalogues for the
equipment, any auxiliaries and instruments that the vendor is providing. The technical data
manual / mechanical catalogue shall include the following documents as a minimum:
a) All drawings and data as listed in the vendor data index & schedule. (For drawings,
where purchaser's approval is required, the final certified drawings shall be attached.)
Sections of technical data manual / mechanical catalogue shall be organised in a
manner that data and drawings related to one subject are grouped together such as
Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation etc.
b) All manufacturing, inspection and test data and records.
9.3.4.1.3 Following information shall also be included in the Technical data manual / mechanical
catalogue:
(a) Storage instructions for storing and preserving the equipment (including driver and all
the auxiliary units) at the plant site before installation of the same.
(b) Instructions for preserving the equipment after it has been installed. This is
particularly required in cases where a long time gap is expected between equipment
installation and commissioning.
(c) Field performance test procedures and acceptance criterion.
9.3.4.1.4 Technical data manual / mechanical catalogue shall be in Hard board folder(s) of size 265
mm x 315 mm (101/4" x 121/2") and shall not be more than 90 mm thickness; it may be of
several volumes and each volume shall have a volume number, index of volumes & index
of contents of that particular volume.
9.3.4.1.5 Title sheet (Top sheet) of each volume of technical data manual / mechanical catalogue
shall contain the contract information as defined under 5.2.1.2 besides the volume number.
9.3.4.1.6 In case order contains more than one item, separate dedicated mechanical catalogues shall
be submitted for each item.
9.3.4.1.7 Two (2) sets of Final / "As Built" drawings & documents shall also be submitted as
electronic files on secondary storage media (i.e. CD-ROM / DVD-ROM disk).
Page 5577 of 8516

k9P..it4,„"ENGINEERS POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
OfflegIWY IND1A LIMITED
uirm Pwasrv a31322117I, IA Go. ol Indla undertak.9) RECIPROCATING Page 1 of 11
riwcid fq-ftTP1-9. 11-131 — 1111 lir)

Rei I ich -~kiT

POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS -
RECIPROCATING

3 30/07/14 KK AM DB/AKN SC
SPECIFCATIION
REAFFIREMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
2 15/06/07 SPS VKM RK ND
SPECIFICATION
1 04/09/02 SM KDS VJN GRR
SPECIFICATION
0 30/12/97 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SM KDS SKG AS
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5578 of 8516

ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
Govt of India Undertakng)
REC1PROCATING Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
ANSI • American National Standards Institute
API • American Petroleum Institute
ASTM • American Society for Testing and Materials
eDMS Electronic Document Management System
VDM Vendor Document Management

Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anukul Mandal
Mr. Rakesh Misra
Mr. JS Duggal
Mr. KVK Naidu (Projects)
Page 5579 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Qzlff&fJ1 -g INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
rirrnftanaacr.,
1.177, A Govt of India Undertakirkg)
RECIPROCATING Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
Page No.
1 Scope 4
1.1 General 4
1.2 Confiicting Requirements 4
1.3 Equipment Qualification Criteria 5
2 Normative References 5
3 Terms and Definations 5
6 Basic Design 6
6.1 General 6
6.3 Ratings 6
6.5 Cylinder Connections 7
6.7 Liquid End Features 7
6.8 Power End Running Gear 7
6.10 Lubrication 7
6.12 Nameplates and Rotation Arrows 8
7 Accessories 8
7.1 Drivers 8
7.2 Couplings and Guards 8
7.4 Mounting Plates 8
7.5 Controls and Instrumentation 9
7.7 Pulsation and Vibration Control Requirements 9
8 Inspection, Testing and Preparament for Shipment 9

8.1 General 9
8.2 Inspection 9
8.3 Testing 9
9 Vendor's Data 10
9.1 General 10
9.2 Proposals 10
Page 5580 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$'Rar INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
.T771 717.17 IA GoN Of ■T1Cha Unden...9)
RECI PROCATING Page 4 of 11
1 Scope (Substitution)
The entire paragraph is substituted by the following clauses.
1.1 General (New)
(i) This specification together with the attendant Data Sheets and other
specifications/attachments to inquiry/ order defines the minimum requirements for Positive
Displacement - Reciprocating pumps, direct acting and power frame types for use in process
and pipeline application.
(ii) Vendor shall make all possible efforts to comply strictly with the requirements of this
efforts) these shall be separately listed in the vendor's proposal under separate section titled
as "List of deviations/exceptions to the inquiry document". Deviation shall be listed
separately for each document with cross reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para etc.
of the respective document supported with proper reasons for the deviation for purchaser's
consideration. Any deviation not listed under the above section, even if reflected in any
other portion of the proposal shall not be considered applicable. No deviation or exception
shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.
(iii) Compliance with this specification shall not relieve the vendor of the responsibility of
the equipment, he shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section along
(iv) Except as modified herein, the reciprocating pumps shall be designed, manufactured, tested
and supplied strictly in accordance with the API Standard 674 - Positive Displacement
pumps - Reciprocating, Third Edition, December 2010.
(v) Except for new paragraphs, the number and title of the paragraphs in this specification
correspond to the respective sections and paragraphs of the above standard. Paragraphs not
addressed in this specification shall be strictly in accordance to API Standard 674, Third
Edition, December 2010.
The word in parenthesis following the number or title of a paragraph indicates the following:
(Modification) • An amplification or rewording has been made to a part of the
corresponding section or paragraph but not a substitution
replacing the entire section or paragraph.
(New) A new section or paragraph having no corresponding section
or paragraph in the Standard.
(Delete) This paragraph is deleted.
1.2 Conflicting Requirements (New)
shall govern:
Page 5581 of 8516

k)1 ENGINEERS
iffen (A Go. of Incha Undertaking) RECIPROCATING Page 5 of 11
3. P&ID's (if any)

1.3 Equipment Qualification Criteria (New)
1.3.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the Equipment Qualification Criteria (EQC)
specified vide para 1.3.2 thru 1.3.3 of this specification shall be applied for acceptance of
the offered pump model and its manufacturer.
1.3.2 a) The vendor shall be an established manufacturer of positive displacement

(reciprocating) pump as per API 674, having adequate design, engineering, manufacturing
and testing facilities for reciprocating pumps and shall be the single point responsibility
vendor for the complete reciprocating pump package.
b) The vendor shall have designed, engineered, packaged, tested and supplied, in the last
TEN (10) years, from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) reciprocating
pump package from same model series with same type of driver having similar driver
power. As a minimum, this package shall have completed ONE year of satisfactory
operation at site, as on bid due date.
1.3.3 a) The pump model offered shall be from the existing pump model series and shall be from
the regular manufacturing range of the pump manufacturer. The mechanical as well as the
hydraulic performance (including NPSHR) of the offered model shall have been
established in the shop test.
b) Pumps shall be identical in terms of model, frame rating and similar in terms of Power
Rating, Hydraulic Performance, Inlet flow, Operating Pressures & Temperatures, Pumping
Liquid, Speed, Number & Type of Pump Heads (i.e. Simplex, Duplex, Triplex, Quintuplex
etc.), Mechanical Design, Materials etc. as compared to at least ONE(1) unit which have
been designed, engineered, manufactured, tested and supplied from the proposed
manufacturing plant in the last TEN(10) years and the reference unit shall have completed
at least ONE(1) year of satisfactory operation at site, as on bid due date.
1.3.4 Proven Track Record (PTR)
The vendor shall complete the Experience Record Proformas enclosed with the inquiry
document to amply prove that the offered equipment meet the EQC for technical
acceptance. Special attention is drawn to applications involving high discharge pressure,
high suction pressure, high/low operating temperature, viscosity. Vendor may furnish
additional information to justify that the EQC is being met. In addition, manufacturer's
catalogue and general reference list for Positive Displacement Pumps - Reciprocating shall
also be furnished along-with the proposal
2 Normative References
2.1 (Modification)
For undated references (including any amendments) the latest edition as on date of issue of
inquiry or at a date specified in the inquiry document shall be applicable.
2.4 (Modification)
The last paragraph stands deleted.
3 Terms and Definitions
3.42 (Modification)
Page 5582 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS
Og-ar fafjrdg INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
A Govt of lndta undenabong)
The words "or manufacturer's agent" stands deleted.
6 Basic Design
6.1 General
The maximum permissible sound pressure level of the pump driver train shall not exceed
88 dBA measured at 1 meter from pump surface for the recommended range of operation.
Unless otherwise specified, cooling water system shall be designed for the following
conditions:
Velocity over heat exchanger surface • 1.5 - 2.5 m/sec.
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) : 8.0 kg/cm2g
Test Pressure 1.5 x MAWP.
Maximum Inlet Temperature 33°C
Maximum Outlet Temperature 45°C
Maximum Temperature Rise 12°C
Fouling Factor on Water Side 0.0004 m2 hr°C/kcal
Shell Side Corrosion allowance 3.2 mm
Note: To avoid condensation, the minimum inlet water temperature to water-cooled

bearing housing should preferably be above the ambient air temperature.
The "Note" stands deleted.
All electrical components and installations shall be suitable for the area classification and
grouping specified in the data sheet/ inquiry document.
Unless otherwise specified, equipment will be made suitable for outdoor installation
without a roof.
6.1.21 (New)
Where multi cylinder arrangement with a common drive is offered, suitable common
suction manifolds and common discharge manifolds shall be provided by the vendor to
connect suction and discharge nozzles of each pumping head respectively. The suction and
discharge manifolds shall be terminated with flanged connections of suitable rating for
purchaser's interface.
6.3 Ratings
The Maximum Allowable Speed Ratings for Reciprocating Pumps shall not exceed Eighty
percent (80%) of the values, indicated in Table 3 & Table 4.
Note 2 Pumps where difference between NPSHA (including estimated system

acceleration head) and NPSHR is 0.6 meter or less are not acceptable.
For installations where NPSHR is within one meter of the NPSHA (including estimated
system acceleration head), consideration shall be given to speeds lower than Eighty
percent (80%) of those indicated in Table 3 & Table 4.
Page 5583 of 8516

0 ENGINEERS
5gar 22- %110F
11 INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
IA Govt ol Incha Unden.kn3) RECIPROCATING Page 7 of 11
For temperature above 150°C and/or viscosities above 200 cst, speeds shall not exceed
Sixty percent (60%) of the speeds indicated in Table 3 & Table 4.
6.5 Cylinder Connections
Openings of the sizes 32mm (11/4 inch), 65mm (2'/2 inch), 90mm (31/2 inch), 125mm (5
inch), 175mm (7 inch) and 225mm (9 inch) shall not be used.
6.5.14 Flanges:
In all cases, mating parts shall be furnished by the vendor.
6.7 Liquid End Features
6.7.2 Pistons, Plungers, and Piston Rods
6.7.2.6 (New)
In single acting pumps, high suction pressure actually increases the bearing loads and for
this reason corrections shall be made to plunger size selection, if the suction pressure is
more than five percent (5%) of the discharge pressure.
For Triplex pumps, the plunger size shall be determined on the basis of a notional
discharge pressure (Px) equal to the actual discharge pressure (Pd) plus one-half the actual
suction pressure (Ps).
i.e. Px = Pd %Ps (for single acting, triplex pumps)
For Quintplex pumps, the plunger size shall be determined on the basis of a notional
discharge pressure (Px) equal to the actual discharge pressure (Pd) plus two-thirds the
actual suction pressure (Ps).
i.e. Px = Pd 2/3Ps (for single acting, quintplex pumps)
6.7.5 Stuffing Boxes, Packing and Glands
Unless otherwise specified cooling jacket shall be designed for 8 kg/cm2 g working
pressure and 12 kg/cm2 test pressure.
If recommended by the vendor, glands shall be of the quenched type.
6.8 Power End Running Gear
The words "when specified" stand deleted.
The distance piece shall be equipped with gasketed solid covers.
6.10 Lubrication
6.10.1 Lubrication for Power Pumps
Page 5584 of 8516

ENGINEERS
geji18t2- g 41 1 INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
■toWt ,,ost000Jtrtottt IA Govt ot ■nOta Unotettotoo9) RECI PROCATING Page 8 of 11
The words "when required by the vendor or when specified" stand deleted and is
substituted by "in case of pressure lubrication system".
6.10.2 Lubrication for Liquid End and Power End
Requirement of Mechanical Lubricator shall be determined by the vendor.
6.12 Nameplates and Rotation Arrows
6.12.4 (Addition)
MKS / SI units shall be followed and shown on the name plate.
7 Accessories
7.1 Drivers
7.1.2 Motors
Electric motor drivers shall have a rating not lower than 110% of the maximum power
required for any of the specified operating conditions or 105% of power required at relief
valve set pressure, whichever is higher.
Notwithstanding the above, the motor rating shall be adequate to start the pump at the
specified maximum suction pressure.
7.1.4 Gear Units
Unless otherwise specified, gear shall conform to API Standard 677.
7.2 Couplings and Guards
7.2.1 (Addition)
Couplings, coupling-to-shaft juncture, and guards shall conform to API 671. The make,
type, and mounting arrangement of couplings shall be agreed upon by the purchaser and
the vendors of the driver and driven equipment.
7.2.8 a) (Modification)
Removable, coupling guard, non sparking type shall be supplied and mounted so that they
cover rotating parts within 15 mm (V2") of stationary housing.
7.2.8 b) (Modification)
The guard shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand deflections as a result of 100 kgs of load.
7.4 Mounting Plates
7.4.1 General
Anchor bolts will be furnished by the vendor.
7.4.2 Baseplate and Skid
Page 5585 of 8516

fr= ENGINEERS
O POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS -
Ogzu IMeg I NDIA LIMITED 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
NIPT1 2,-
,1517 051.3KRITGI, In GoN of India Undertalom
The vendor shall supply the common baseplate of fabricated steel, drain rim type, suitable
for mounting of pump, driver and all associated auxiliaries.
7.5 Controls and Instrumentation
7.5.4 Instrumentation
7.5.4.4 Pressure-limiting Valves
The relief valve shall be as per purchaser's specification and of the make approved by the
purchaser and supplied by vendor as loose item to be installed on purchaser's piping.
7.7 Pulsation and Vibration Control Requirements
7.7.1 General
7.7.1.4 (New)
When bladder type suppression device is specified, gas charging assembly (kit) shall be
supplied by the vendor along-with necessary instruction for use.
8 Inspection, Testing and Preparation for Shipment
8.1 General
For all witnessed tests specified in equipment technical data sheet and specifications
attached with the inquiry, vendor shall give at least 30 days prior notice to the purchaser
and shall reconfirm the date of testing atleast one week before the date of test.
8.1.10 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, the inspection and tests shall be witnessed by the Purchaser or
by his authorised representative or by both together.
8.2 Inspection
8.2.1 General
8.2.1.1(f) The words "if specified" stand deleted.
8.3 Testing
8.3.2 Hydrostatic Testing
Unless otherwise specified all water side cooling passages shall be tested at a minimum
pressure of 12 kg/cm2g.
8.3.4 Mechanical Run Test
Page 5586 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51g-ar IêtWg INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0020 Rev. 3
1.1271. twenll an.yaen-m, IA Goot of InOta Undertalong) RECI PROCATING Page 10 of 11
8.3.4.1 The words "if specified" stand deleted.
8.3.4.2 The words "if specified" stand deleted.
8.3.4.3 The clause stands deleted.
8.3.4.7 The clause stands deleted.
8.3.5 Performance Test, Direct-Acting Pump
8.3.5.6 (New)
During shop performance test, the pumps along-with other job accessories shall be run for
a minimum period of four hours to verify mechanical performance of the pump unit.
8.3 .6 Performance Test, Power Pump
8.3.6.4 This clause stands deleted.
8.3.7 Test Tolerances (Modification)

Test tolerance on rated power (at rated pressure and capacity) shall be +zero percent (0%).
8.3.8 NPIP / NPSH Test (Modification)

A witness NPSH test shall be carried out when the margin between NPSHA (including
allowances for acceleration head) and NPSHR of the pump is less than 2 m.
8.3.9 Optional Tests
During shop performance test, the pumps along-with other job accessories shall be run for
a minimum period of four hours to verify mechanical performance of the pump unit.
The equipment shall be protected for an outdoor storage of 12 months at site, if any extra
precaution is to be taken by the Purchaser for storage beyond 12 months the same shall be
explicitly indicated in the operation and maintenance manuals.
9 Vendor's Data
9.1 General
9.1.2a) (Substitution)
The purchaser's/owner's/consultant's corporate name.
9.2 Proposals
9.2.1 General
9.2.1.2 (New)
All vendor data/drawings/documents shall be in English Language and in Metric Systems.
9.3 Contract Data

9.3.1 General (Substitution)
Page 5587 of 8516

ENGINEERS
gZir 02dg
e.,,,nr1o51,121.11 IA GoN of India undertakow RECIPROCATING Page 11 of 11
9.3.1.1 Drawings and data as required after purchase order have been specified in Vendor Data
Vendor Data Requirement are generic in nature. It is possible that against one drawing /
document specified there are several drawings to be furnished by the vendor or vice versa.
9.3.1.2 Vendor shall complete & forward a document "Document Control Index (DCI)" to the
purchaser (Destination & contact person as per order). This shall be the first document to
be submitted by vendor within two weeks of order.
vendor.
information:
Purchaser's and Consultants e Name
Project Name.
- Equipment Name and Item No.
Purchase Order No.
- Purchase Requisition No.
document/data required or requested by Purchaser for engineering or construction shall also
be made available by the vendor.
9.3.1.5 All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
9.3.1.6 Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy and soft (CDs/ DVDs) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS portal. The number of prints and/or reproducible required
to be submitted by vendor are specified in Purchaser's inquiry/order.
Page 5588 of 8516

ENGINEERS POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0021 Rev. 4
INDIA LIMITED CONTROLLED VOLUME
Govt of Irtcha Unclettalung) Page 1 of 8
- t,ETTER trixi — 14;1,tir

f4- ,,m 31FM
fffR 4iiich 14W

CONTROLLED VOLUME

4 18/10/13 HM TK DB SC
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIREMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
3 15/096/07 NK VKM RK VJN
SPECIFICATION
2 04/09/92 KNJ KDS VJN GRR
SPECIFICATION
1 15/12/97 KNJ KDS SKG AS
SPECIFICATION
0 07/04/86 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION VKM MR SNG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5589 of 8516

ENGINEERS
.417771,1,0,,111,1%1,711 1 01 Ir1.04 undertak■ng, CONTROLLED VOLUME Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:


Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr Rakesh Mishra
Mr JS Duggal
Page 5590 of 8516

15ifftzte ENGINEERS
to laf5rdg INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0021 Rev. 4
MOM IA GotA ot I0.40 Undenalung)
CONTROLLED VOLUME Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
1.1 SCOPE 5
1.2 ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS 5

2.1 GENERAL 6
3.1 DRIVERS 7
3.2 COUPLINGS AND GUARDS Error! Bookmark not defined.
3.3 BASEPLATES 7
3.6 PULSATION SUPPRESSION DEVICES 7

4.2 INSPECTION 8
4.3 TESTING 8
4.4 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT 8

5.1 GENERAL 8
5.2 PROPOSAL 8
5.3 CONTRACT DATA 8
Page 5591 of 8516

ENGINEERS
POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0021 Rev. 4
g-ar 0151e
-g611,30,01
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go AI Undrlalorg1 CONTROLLED VOLUME Page 4 of 8
1.0 SCOPE
(i) This specification together with the attendant Data Sheets and other
specifications/attachments to inquiry/order defines the minimum requirements for
Controlled Volume-Positive Displacement type, direct plunger or hydraulically operated
diaphragm type and their accessories/auxiliaries for use in the process and pipeline
applications.
(ii) Vendor shall make all possible efforts to comply strictly to the requirements of this
efforts) these shall be separately listed in the vendor's proposal under separate section
titled as "List of deviations/exceptions to the inquiry document". Deviation shall be listed
separately for each document with cross reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para
No deviation or exception shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.
(iii) Compliance with this specification shall not relieve the vendor of the responsibility of

the equipment, he shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section
along with his proposal and include the same in his scope of supply.
(iv) Except as modified herein, the controlled volume pumps shall be designed, manufactured,
tested and supplied strictly in accordance with the API Standard 675 - Positive
Displacement pumps - Controlled volume, Second edition, October 1994.
(v) Except for new paragraphs, the number and title of the paragraphs in this specification
correspond to the respective sections and paragraphs of the above standard. Paragraphs
not addressed in this specification shall be strictly in accordance with API Standard 675,
Second edition, October 1994.
following:
(Delete) The paragraph is deleted.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — An rights reserved
Page 5592 of 8516

lafael ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$12 ia5eUla.INDIA UMITED 6-41-0021 Rev. 4
IiIK7TeVIINVOAJArrai, IA Goo d InOm Undqtalung)
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE (Substitution)

The entire paragraph is substituted by Paragraph 1.0 above.
1.2 ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS (Deleted)
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS (Substitution)

shall govern:
3. P&ID's (if any)
The editions of referenced publication that are in effect at the time of inquiry or at a date
specified in the inquiry documents shall be applicable.
1.7 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION CRITERIA (New)
specified vide para 1.7.2 to 1.7.4 of this specification shall be applied for acceptance of the
offered pump model.
1.7.2 The vendor shall be an established positive displacement (Controlled Volume) pump
manufacturer and also be the manufacturer of the proposed positive displacement
(Controlled Volume) pump having adequate engineering, design, manufacturing and
testing facilities for API 675 pumps.
1.7.3 The pump model offered shall be from the existing pump model series and shall be from
the regular manufacturing range of the vendor/principal. The mechanical as well as the
hydraulic performance for the complete range of operation of the offered model shall have
been established in the shop test. The offered pump model shall meet the minimum service
and manufacturing experience requirements as specified in clause 1.7.4 below.
1.7.4 Pumps shall be similar in terms of Power rating, Hydraulic Performance, Inlet flow,
Differential Pressure, Operating Pressure & Temperature, Pumping Liquid, Speed,
Number & Type of Pump Heads (i.e. Simplex/Duplex/Triplex etc.),
Plunger/Diaphragm(Single/Double/Sandwitch), Mechanical Design, Materials etc. as
compared to at least ONE(1) unit of the proposed model shall have been designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied from the proposed manufacturing plant in the last
TEN(10) years and the reference unit shall have completed ONE(1) year of satisfactory
operation at site, as on the bid due date.
1.7.5 PROVEN TRACK RECORD (PTR)

The vendor shall complete the Experience Record Proformas enclosed with the inquiry
document to amply prove that the offered equipment meet the EQC for technical
acceptance. Special attention is drawn to applications involving high flow, high discharge
pressure, high suction pressure, high/low operating temperature, high viscosity. In
addition, manufacturer's catalogue and general reference list for Positive Displacement
Pumps (Controlled Volume) shall also be furnished along with the proposal.
Page 5593 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$1g-zir 0141e
-s INDIA LIMITED POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0021 Rev. 4
.11,-01114,151. MI,. urdenakmq,

2.1 GENERAL
The maximum permissible sound pressure level of the pump driver train shall not exceed
88 dBA measured at 1 meter from pump surface for the recommended range of operation.
Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall be designed to be suitable for outdoor
installation without a roof.
Unless otherwise specified, the pump flow rate shall be adjustable over the range of 10%
to 100% of rated capacity (i.e. turn down ratio of 10:1) while the pump is running.
Pump rated capacity shall be at least equal to the maximum capacity specified by the
Purchaser.
2.1.16 (Addition)
The pump speed shall not exceed 100 strokes per minute. Due consideration shall be
given for the viscosity of pumping liquid, while selecting the pump speed.
When requirement of jacketed housing is specified/required, jackets shall be suitable for
design pressure of heating medium specified.
2.1.21 (New)
For multi-head pumps, suction and discharge nozzles of individual heads shall be
manifolded together to result in one common inlet and one common outlet flanged
connection for customer's connection. Material of the manifold shall be equivalent to
cylinder head material.
2.1.22 (New)
Pumps where difference between NPSHA and NPSHR is less than one metre are not
acceptable.
2.1.23 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, controlled volume pumps shall be hydraulically operated
sandwich/ double diaphragm type with rupture detection system through pressure switch
for any of the following applications:
(i) Where liquids to be handled are flammable/ hazardous/ toxic/ radioactive.
(ii) Where liquids to be handled are expensive/ poisonous.
(iii) Where liquids contain solids such as slurries.
(iv) Any other application where no product leakage is acceptable.
NACE MR-01-90 stands substituted with NACE MR-01-75.
Unless otherwise specified, SI units shall be shown on nameplate.
Page 5594 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$'1gar 256
1.17/1 t710,1517 ,131,171,31■
INDIA LIMITED
I A Govi d Ind4 Undonalungi
CONTROLLED VOLUME
6-41-0021 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 8
3.1 DRIVERS
3.1.8 (New)
For multihead pumps, ganging effect shall not be considered while sizing the driver.
3.3 BASEPLATES
Anchor bolts shall be furnished by the vendor.
3.3.11 (New)
The pump driver unit with all accessories and auxiliaries shall be supplied as a skid
mounted package with all piping and auxiliaries within the confines of the skid. All
accessories such as pulsation dampeners, relief valves, calibration pots etc. shall be
mounted with isolation valves and shall be properly supported within the skid. Any
instrument requiring connection to purchaser's control system, shall be wired upto a
junction box (suitable foe the specified area classification) at the edge of the skid.
3.4.4.5 Relief Valve
Unless otherwise specified, relief valves shall be of external type. These shall be supplied
loose by the vendor to be installed by purchaser in the purchaser's piping.
For pumps having capacities upto 1 m3/hr, vendor shall furnish his standard proven relief
valve. The material of construction of relief valve shall be equivalent or superior as
compared to the material of wetted parts of the pump. However as a minimum the material
of relief valve body shall be CS (ASTM A216 Gr. WCB) and internals shall be of SS 316.
The inlet and outlet connections shall be flanged as per ANSI standards with raised faces.
For pumps greater than 1 m3/hr, the relief valve shall be as per purchaser's specification
and of the make approved by the purchaser.
3.4.4.5.3 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, the relief valve set pressure shall be 10% over the rated
discharge pressure or 1 kg/cm2 over the rated discharge pressure whichever is higher.
When a back pressure valve is required, it shall be supplied by the vendor, irrespective of
whether it is internal or external.
3.6 PULSATION SUPPRESSION DEVICES
3.6.3 (New)
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, pulsation suppression device, shall be designed to
limit amplitude of pulsation within ±3% of mean line pressure.
3.6.4 (New)
Selection of material of complete pulsation dampener (i.e. both wetted and non wetted
parts) and the bladder/ diaphragm shall be suitable for the liquid being handled & shall be
at least equal or superior to wetted component's MOC.
3.6.5 (New)
When bladder/diaphragm type suppression device is specified, gas charging assembly (kit)
shall be supplied by the vendor alongwith necessary instruction for use.
Page 5595 of 8516

ENGINEERS
cg SINDIA LIMITED
$1g-zirilf41- POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS - 6-41-0021 Rev. 4
.415,1 01,7,71,11,7[11. A Go, A m dc. UndP11.1.11, CONTROLLED VOLUME Page 8 of 8
4.2 INSPECTION
4.2.1.1(a) Words "when specified" stand deleted.
4.2.1.1(d) Words "when specified" stand deleted.
4.2.3.5 (New)
Inspection shall also include dimensional check of pump and motor duly mounted on the
base plate, in accordance with certified general assembly drawing.
4.3 TESTING
4.3.1.4 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, the test shall be witnessed by the Purchaser or by their
authorised representative or by both together.
Flow repeatability and linearity tests shall be run in all the cases as described.
4.3.3.6 DISMANTLING INSPECTION (New)

Dismantle Inspection of pump after performance test shall be applicable only in case of
abnormality in mechanical behaviour (such as excessive noise & vibration, bearing
temperature rise etc.) during performance test.
The equipment shall be protected for a storage of 12 months at site. If any extra precaution
is to be taken by the Purchaser for storage beyond 12 months the same shall be explicitly
indicated in the operation and maintenance manuals.
5.1 GENERAL
The information to be furnished by the vendor is specified in 5.2 & 5.3 and purchaser's
Vendor Data Requirements as included in the inquiry document.
Vendor shall complete & forward a document "DOCUMENT CONTROL INDEX" to the
purchaser (Destination & contact person as per order).
No drawing shall be taken up for review till the DCI for inquiry/order is finalized by
vendor.
If specified, drawing review may be through EDMS/VDOCS in soft as per the details
provided elsewhere in the inquiry document.
5.2 PROPOSAL
5.2.1 (Addition)
All documents shall be furnished in metric units and shall be in English language.
5.3 CONTRACT DATA
5.3.7 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue (Modification)

Words "when specified" stand deleted.
Page 5596 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
f&.110154eg INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
IetO ev,cmc,nt,~11 IA Govt ol Indo Undenaiong) RECIPROCATING COMPRESORS Page 1 of 26
•
Wc111111-1 <-1 11 54)
R1 11 I lch fqr-4kRT
FOR
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS
"'"-Z
6 28.11.13 Revised & Issued as Standard Specification JSD NK DB SC
5 22.04.08 Reaffirmed & Issued as Standard Specification JSD NK VKM VC
4 09.04.03 Revised & Issued as Standard Specification AKN KDS RK SKG
3 15.12.97 Revised & Issued as Standard Specification VKM KDS SKG AS
2 11.06.90 Revised & Issued as Standard Specification KDS SKG SNG AS

, Standards St - «*- ‘ ..
Comrnittee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5597 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 2 of 26
Abbreviations:
DA Design Approach
OD Outside Diameter
PEEK Poly Ether Ether Ketone
P&ID Piping & Instrumentation Diagram
PSV Pressure Safety Valve
SWG Standard Wire Gauge
TFE Tetrafluoroethylene
VDR Vendor Data Requirement


Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr J S Duggal
Mr Rakesh Misra
Page 5598 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
1.1 General 4
1.2 Equipment Qualification Criteria 5
3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 7
5 REQUIREMENTS 7
5.1 Dimensions 7
5.3 Conflicting Requirements 7
6 BASIC DESIGN 7
6.1 General 7
6.4 Allowable Speeds 8
6.5 Allowable Discharge Temperature 9
6.6 Rod and Gas Loads 9
6.7 Critical Speeds 9
6.8 Compressor Cylinders 10
6.9 Valves And Unloaders 10
6.10 Pistons, Piston Rods and Piston Rings 11
6.11 Crankcases, Crankshafts, Connecting Rods, Bearings and Crossheads 11
6.12 Distance Pieces 11
6.13 Packing Cases and Pressure Packing 12
6.14 Lubrication 12
7 ACCESSORIES 12
7.1 Drivers 12
7.3 Reduction Gears 12
7.5 Mounting Plates 12
7.6 Controls and Instrumentation 13
7.7 Piping and Appurtenances 14
7.8 Intercoolers, Aftercoolers And Separators 15
7.9 Pulsation And Vibration Control 16
7.11 Special Tools 17
8 INSPECTION AND TESTING 17

8.1 General 17
8.2 Inspection 17
8.3 Testing 18
9 VENDOR'S DATA 20
9.1 General 20
9.2 Proposals 20
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL -All rights reserved
Page 5599 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
•.(1,1 (7./ 314,31,
SCOPE (Substitution)
General
This specification together with attendant data sheets and other specifications/attachments
to the inquiry/order covers the minimum requirements for reciprocating compressors and
their drivers for use in petroleum, chemical, and gas industry services for handling process
air or gas with either lubricated or non-lubricated cylinders. Compressors covered by this
specification are of moderate to low speed and in critical services. Also covered are related
lubricating systems, controls, instrumentation, intercoolers, after-coolers, pulsation
suppression devices and other auxiliary equipment.
Compressors not covered are:

a) Integral Gas-engine Driven Compressors,
b) Packaged High Speed Separable Engine-driven Reciprocating Gas Compressors,
c) Compressors with Single Acting Trunk-type (automotive-type) pistons that also serve
as crossheads
d) Utility or Instrument Air Compressors that discharge at 10.0 kg/cm2 g or below.
Gas engine and steam engine drivers are excluded from the scope of this specification.
(ii) Vendor shall make all possible efforts to comply strictly with the requirements of this
separately for each document with cross reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para
No deviations or exceptions shall be permitted without the written approval of the

Purchaser.
(iii) Compliance with this Specification shall not relieve the vendor of the responsibility of
furnishing equipment and accessories /auxiliaries of proper design, materials and

the equipment, he shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section
(iv) Except as modified herein, the reciprocating compressors and their auxiliaries shall be
designed, fabricated, tested and supplied strictly in accordance with the API Standard —
618; Fifth Edition, December 2007; "Reciprocating Compressors for Petroleum,
Chemical and Gas Industry Services". All requirements specified in the following
paragraphs are additions, modifications or substitution (as noted in parenthesis) to above
standard and appear in the alphabetical or numerical order as followed in the above
Standard.
(v) Except for new paragraph, the number and title of the paragraphs in this Specification
not addressed in this specification shall be strictly in accordance to API Standard 618,
Fifth Edition, December 2007.
Page 5600 of 8516

ENGINEERS
IT INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
rn,
'""' RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 5 of 26
following:
(Addition) An addition to a part, section or paragraph referred to

(Delete) This paragraph is deleted.
1.2 Equipment Qualification Criteria (New)
offered compressor model and its manufacturer.
1.2.2 The vendor for the complete unit shall be an established manufacturer of the Reciprocating
Compressors (As per API Std. 618) and shall also be the manufacturer of the proposed
compressors having adequate engineering, manufacturing & testing facilities for the same.
1.2.3 The vendor shall have engineered, designed, packaged, tested and supplied, in the last
TEN (10) years, from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) reciprocating gas
compressor package (as per API Std. 618), which is from the same model series and
having same type of driver having similar driver power, as offered. As a minimum, this
package shall have completed ONE (1) year of satisfactory operation at site, as on bid due
date.
In case offered compressors are equipped with step-less capacity control system, vendor
shall have past packaging experience of having supplied, in the last TEN (10) years, at
least ONE (1) reciprocating gas compressor package (as per API Std. 618), having similar
driver power, number of cylinder valves, cylinder sizes & pressures, with similar step-less
capacity control system.
1.2.4 The vendor besides satisfying the requirements of clause 1.2.2 & 1.2.3 above shall also be
the packager of the complete system proposed and shall have the single point
responsibility for the entire package.
1.2.5 The compressor model frame offered shall be from regular manufacturing range of the
vendor and shall meet the following qualification requirements:
Compressors shall be identical in model / frame size, frame rating & maximum allowable
continuous rod loadings and similar in terms of Driver rating, Rod loadings, Stroke length,
Rotational speed, Piston Linear speed, Inlet & Discharge pressures and temperatures,
Service (i.e. type of gas handled such as N2, H2, bone dry, saturated etc.), Cylinder
assemblies, Number of throws / cylinders, Mechanical design, Materials etc. as compared
to at least ONE (1) UNIT designed, manufactured, tested and supplied from the proposed
manufacturing plant in the last TEN (10) years and the same unit shall have completed
ONE (1) year of satisfactory operation at site, as on bid due date.
reference may be cited to satisfy the above qualification requirement.
Page 5601 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
As an alternative, vendor may show to the satisfaction of purchaser, that the equipment
offered is comprised of modules such as frame (crankcase), cylinder assemblies etc. each
of which individually satisfies the requirements specified above.
1.2.6 In case the vendor is a licensee / member of a group company (As defined in 1.2.6.6 below)
and does not possess the manufacturing experience of the proposed Compressor Frame at
his own manufacturing plant, the vendor may propose to supply the complete package with
duly mechanical run tested bare compressor (together with cylinder assemblies etc.)
sourced from the vendor's licensor / another member of the group company, who shall also
be a regular manufacturer of the proposed Compressor Frame, provided the vendor meets
the following criteria:
1.2.6.1 The vendor shall be a regular & established manufacturer of reciprocating gas compressors
(as per API Std. 618) and shall be a licensee / member of group company (As defined in
1.2.6.6 below) and shall meet the requirements of Cl. 1.2.3 above on his own.
1.2.6.2 Vendor's licensor / member of Group Company meets the equipment qualification criteria
as per 1.2.5 above with respect to the proposed compressors.
1.2.6.3 a) The vendor's license agreement is valid and continues to remain valid till, at least TWO
years after the delivery of the compressors. Necessary documents to establish that vendor
has requisite facilities and has been authorized to package the proposed compressor
model/frame shall be furnished in the proposal.
b) In case of member of Group Company, vendor to furnish requisite documents from

Group Company to establish that vendor has requisite facilities and has been authorised to
package the proposed compressor model.
1.2.6.4 The vendor shall source the duly mechanical run tested bare compressor (together with
cylinder assemblies etc.) from the licensor / another member of the group company.
1.2.6.5 The Licensor / member of Group Company, furnishes a back-up guarantee regarding
design, mechanical integrity and performance of the machine equivalent to as if the
machines were manufactured & supplied by them.
1.2.6.6 Group Company shall mean one of the following:

a) Wholly owned subsidiary of the bidder.
b) Principal of whom the bidder is a wholly owned subsidiary.
c) Another wholly owned subsidiary of the Principal of whom the bidder is a wholly
owned subsidiary.
1.2.6.7 The vendor shall indicate details of such arrangement in the proposal.
1.2.7 Documentation for Proven Track Record

The vendor shall complete the Experience Record Proforma as enclosed in the inquiry
specification to amply prove that the equipment offered meet the EQC for technical
acceptance.
Vendor may furnish additional information to justify that the EQC is being met. In
addition, manufacturer's catalogue and general reference list for all the above equipments
shall also be furnished along-with the proposal.

Page 5602 of 8516

x31 2-1g ENGINEERS FOR
5f=11 t~,
3 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
3.63 (New)
Shaft speed irregularity: Shaft Speed Irregularity is a dimension-less number and is equal
to the difference between the maximum and minimum instantaneous shaft speeds during
cycle divided by the arithmetic mean of these two speeds.
3 .64 (New)
Bone dry gas: If the gas dew point (either at atmospheric conditions or at the inlet
conditions) is below -40°C, the gas is supposed to be considered as "bone dry".
Compressor vendor is expected to calculate & fumish the value of gas dew point based on
the specified gas composition & the specified operating conditions.
5 REQUIREMENTS
5.1 Dimensions (Modification)

Delete èither' and òr US customary'
5.3 Conflicting Requirements (Substitution)

shall govern:
1. Equipment Data Sheets.
3. P&IDs (if any)
4. This Specification
5. Other Specifications
6 BASIC DESIGN
6.1 General
6.1.3 Delete Ùnless otherwise specified' and read `rated' in place of `normal'.
6.1.5 The pressure design code as a minimum shall be ASME Sec VIII Div 1 or equivalent.
Unless otherwise specified, the maximum sound pressure level of the compressor driver
train shall not exceed 88 dBA measured at 1 meter from equipment surface for the
recommended range of operation.
(a) For once through cooling system fed from purchaser's cooling water network, unless
otherwise specified, the cooling water system shall be designed for the following
condition:
For Heat Exchangers:
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) > 8.0 kg/cm2g
Test Pressure = 1.5 x MAWP
Maximum Pressure Drop 1.0 kg/cm2g
Page 5603 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
° °' ° ° e, aRECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 8 of 26
For Cylinder Jackets and Packing Cases:

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) : > 8.0 kg/cm2g
Test Pressure = 1.5 x MAWP
Provision shall be made for complete venting and draining of the system.
(b) lf a closed circuit cooling water system is being utilized, MAWP & Test pressure of
cooling water circuit shall be based on vendor standard design practises. However, MAWP
shall not be less than the shut-off pressure of closed circuit cooling water pump.
A11 electrical components and installations shall be suitable for the hazardous area
classification and gas group specified in the inquiry / order documents.
6.1.17 Delete 'When specified'.
6.1.18 Substitute `rated' in place of 'normal'.
6.1.25 (Addition)
Compressors and drivers (including gear units and couplings, if any) shall be designed to
perform satisfactorily under the specified start up conditions, part load/full load operation,
maximum differential pressure operation and cylinder relief valve setting pressure and
upto trip speed.
Unless otherwise specified, the compressor vendor shall assume full responsibility to
undertake:
i) Torsional analysis of the complete compressor train including the driver and gear unit
(except V-Belt driven units).
ii) Selection, sizing and rating of the power transmission components as also the base
plates, sole plates and slide rails.
iii) Checking the conformity of the motor coupling flange with compressor coupling
flange and supplying to the motor manufacturer in due course of time, the drilling jig
for the motor coupling flange, in case of rigid coupling drive.
iv) Stress analysis of the piping and appurtenances from the intake filter / suction strainer
upto the outlet flange of the final compression stage pulsation suppression devices /
separators / aftercoolers / air receivers as the case may be.
v) Furnishing equipment layout.
vi) Furnishing the design, type and location of the supports for the piping and
appurtenances as defined above under (iv).
vii) Acoustical evaluation and Mechanical evaluation of the Compressor cylinders,
Pulsation suppression devices, piping and equipment system between the first major
vessel upstream of the compressor and first major vessel downstream of the
Compressor (if specified), as per the specified design approach of API 618.
6.4 Allowable Speeds (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, except for vertical and/or labyrinth type reciprocating
compressors, the average piston speed shall not exceed 4 m/sec for lubricated cylinders
and shall not exceed 3.5 m/sec for non-lubricated cylinders, except for the following
specific cases:
i) For `Boll-off gas' service (i.e. Ethylene, Propylene) with non-lubricated cylinders, the
piston speed shall be limited to 3.0 m/sec.
ii) For `Bone Dry Nitrogen' gas service or any other service having gas dew point value
less than (-)40°C, the piston speed shall be limited to 2.5 m/sec.

Page 5604 of 8516

.51
1 ENGINEERS
FOR
°""'""""-' RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 9 of 26
In addition to the above, the rotational speed shall be limited as under:

i) Compressors handling gas containing H2S in any concentration, together with water
in any form, shall be limited to a maximum of 500 rpm.
ii) Compressors handling hydrogen, speed of the compressor shall be limited to 350 rpm.
iii) Compressors of labyrinth type (vertical construction), speed shall be limited to 420
rpm.
iv) Unless otherwise specified, the maximum speed for reciprocating compressors (for all
other gases, not mentioned above) shall not exceed 600 rpm.
6.5 Allowable Discharge Temperature
6.5.1 (Addition)
For high pressure air compressors (meant for air injection services for oilfields), requiring
lubricated or mini-lubricated cylinders, to prevent auto-ignition, predicted maximum actual
discharge temperature limit shall be 130°C and the same shall be subject to purchaser's
approval.
The vendor shall ensure that the recommended cylinder lubricating oil is suitable from the
point of view of auto-ignition that can occur with applications handling air at high
pressures such as above.
Synthetic oil, if offered to be used, shall require purchaser's specific approval.
6.6 Rod and Gas Loads
6.6.1 (Addition)
The actual combined (gas + inertia) rod loading, calculated considering the cylinder gas
relieving pressures, maximum differential pressure possible during operation under all
specified operating conditions, and inertial forces of reciprocating masses, shall not exceed
90% of the maximum allowable rod load.
Also the actual rod loading due to inertial forces of reciprocating masses alone, shall not
exceed the maximum allowable continuous rod load.
6.7 Critical Speeds
6.7.5 Shaft Speed Irregularity (New)

The compressor speed irregularity shall not exceed the values specified below under any
required operating conditions including part load operation:
V-Belt Drive 1/80
Direct drive by electric motor 1/100
Drive through gear unit 1/100
For compressors direct driven by reciprocating engine, the shaft speed irregularity of the
complete compressor-driver train shall be agreed between the vendor and the engine
manufacturer. The inertia of the motor rotor shall not be considered for computing the
shaft speed irregularity, except in case where torsionally rigid couplings are used.
6.7.6 Vibrations (New)

In the proposal, the compressor vendor shall indicate the permissible values of vibration
[either in displacement (microns) or in velocity (mm/sec)] at foundation, frame &
cylinders, which are to be measured during shop testing and under installed condition in
field. Compressor vendor shall provide all the requisite data to enable the foundation
designer to meet their recommended requirements.
Note: The determination of the compressor vibration levels shall be based on the maximum
vibration levels occurring over the entire speed range (if applicable), for all operating conditions
Page 5605 of 8516

■_71 ENGINEERS
SZ~r, INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
(e.g. different pressures), specified alternative gases (e.g. N2 for start-up), unloading conditions,
single and multiple compressors in service, etc.
6.8 Compressor Cylinders
6.8.1 General
The maximum allowable working pressure of the cylinder shall be at least equal to the
specified relief valve set pressure plus the required over-pressure (i.e. accumulation
pressure which is normally 10% above the specified relief valve set pressure).
6.8.1.2 (Addition)
Delete Ùnless otherwise specified'.
(Addition) Horizontal balanced opposed machines shall have even number of throws &
with even number of cylinder on each side.
The arrangement of valves and ports in horizontal cylinders shall be such which ensures
complete drainage of cylinders.
When vertical cylinders are specifically allowed (e.g. only for dry gases) or specified,
these shall be designed so that complete drainage of the cylinder is possible.
Tandem cylinder arrangements, if offered, shall require purchaser's specific approval.
In case of tandem cylinder arrangements, the compressor vendor shall furnish alongwith
the bid, a line schematic of the cylinder assemblies indicating location of cylinder
packings, piston/piston rod diameters and operating pressures.
6.8.2 Cylinder Appurtenances
The words Ìf specified. stand deleted.
Valve chambers and clearance pockets shall be designed to prevent trapping of liquid.
6.8.2.10 (New)
Plugs for core holes and/or repairs shall not be used on the gas pressure side containing
wall sections of cylinder heads or cylinders including the bore under the liner.
6.8.3 Cooling
6.8.3.5.6 (New)
Pressure & flow measurement devices (i.e. pressure & flow transmitter) shall be provided
in the common outlet header of closed circuit cooling water pumps.
6.8.4 Cylinder Connections
6.8.4.1.2 (Addition)
For flammable and toxic services, screwed or screwed and seal welded fittings are not
permitted. For corrosive and sour services socket welded fittings are not permitted.
6.9 Valves and Unloaders
6.9.1 Valves
Page 5606 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
$1gzr e,faygINDIA LIMITED 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
"' RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 11 of 26
6.9.1.2 (Addition)
Any limitation on operation of valve with different gases shall be clearly brought out in the
proposal.
In case of any sort of limitations in operation of valve with different gases, separate set of
valves & valve unloaders for each gas service must be provided by the vendor.
Unless otherwise specified, plug type unloaders shall not be used. Unloaders shall be
pneumatically operated unless otherwise specified on the data/requisition sheet. Vendor
shall provide the capacity control system with properly sequenced unloader operation.
6.10 Pistons, Piston Rods and Piston Rings
6.10.3.2 (Addition)
In case of single piece wear bands on non-segmented pistons, vendor shall also provide
suitable wear band installation mandrel(s) as standard tools.
6.1 0.3.3 (New)

For bone dry gas applications, the material of construction of piston rings, seal rings &
rider rings shall be selected by the vendor based on established proven track record of the
same, under the intended duty conditions.
Vendor (or the ring supplier) shall indicate the predicted guaranteed life of such piston
rings, seal rings & rider rings, when operated upon under the intended duty conditions.
As a minimum, purchaser desires 8000 hours of predicted guaranteed life.
Note: The selection of materials for piston and rider rings in non-lubricated service, particularly
where gases do not contain water vapour or are termed as bone dry, shall be based upon references
in identical or more severe services.
6.11 Crankcases, Crankshafts, Connecting Rods, Bearings and Crossheads
6.11.5 Delete Ìf specified'
6.12 Distance Pieces
6.12.1 Distance Piece Types

Unless otherwise specified, long/long, two compartment distance pieces (Type C) shall be
provided for compressors on flammable or toxic service.
For applications where space constraints exist (e.g. sometimes offshore), use of a
long/short, double compartment distance piece (Type D) may be considered.
Single compartment type (Type A or B) distance pieces shall not be used for any of the
process gas applications.
In cases of air or pure nitrogen, long single compartment (Type B) type distance piece
shall only be used.
6.12.2 Distance Piece Requirements
For flammable or toxic services, distance pieces (or compartments) shall be equipped with
gasketed solid metal covers.
Page 5607 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
lafAds INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
'^'" °""'"""""' RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 12 of 26
6.12.2.4 (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, Figure 1-2 of Annex-I shall be used to minimize the leakage of
process gas.
6.13 Packing Cases and Pressure Packing
6.13.1 General
When specified or for applications where process gas is hydrogen rich (molar mass less
than or equal to 12) or process gas contains H2 S in concentration Level of 0.5 mole % or
greater or when process gas is toxic and in lethal service, cylinder pressure-packing case
shall be purged with nitrogen.
6.14 Lubrication
6.14.2.2 Auxiliary Pump (Addition)

For compressors having a nominal frame rating below 150 kW equipped with a
pressurized lubrication system, a hand driven lube oil pump shall be provided for start-up
lubrication.
7 ACCESSORIES
7.1 Drivers
7.1.2 Motor Drivers
For motor-driven units, the motor rating (with unity service factor), shall be at-least 110%
of the guaranteed power (with 0% positive tolerance, including power transmission losses)
or 105% of the power required (including power transmission losses) for the PSV set
pressure conditions, whichever is higher.
7.1.2.13 (Addition)
Whenever single bearing motors are used, the motor shaft shall be rigidly connected to the
compressor crank shaft and Compressor Crank Shaft bearing system shall be suitable to
take into account additional loads imposed due to motor rotor.
7.3 Reduction Gears
Gear units for the compressors having rated BKW upto 1500 kW shall comply with API
Standard 677 and for rated BKW above 1500 kW, gear units shall comply with API
Standard 613.
7.5 Mounting Plates
7.5.3 Levelling, Alignment and Lifting
The words Ìf specified' stand deleted.
Copyright EIL —All rights reserved

Page 5608 of 8516

0ENGINEERS FOR 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
The vendor shall indicate the type of grout (i.e. cementatious or epoxy) and its estimated
quantity (in m3) & its details (i.e. recommended make, recommended grade, desired
strength etc.), which is to be used for the equipment along with the proposal.
In case, vendor recommends use of epoxy grout, vendor shall comply with the
requirements of this clause regarding surface preparation.
7.5.4 Baseplate and Skids
7.5.4.1 (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, skid mounted reciprocating compressor packages are
permitted only up-to the driver rating of 160 kW.
Non-skid decking covering all walk and work areas shall be provided on the top of the
baseplate.
7.5.5 Soleplates and Rails
Sub-soleplates shall be provided with the soleplates by the vendor.
Soleplates, rails, baseplates, or compressor parts to be grouted (such as crankcase or a
crosshead frame) shall be drilled and tapped for levelling screws. Screws for levelling,
bolts for attaching the frame to the soleplates, or rails, chock blocks, and 300 series
stainless steel shims shall be provided by the vendor.
7.6 Controls and Instrumentation
7.6.1 General
All instrumentation, controls, control panels etc. shall conform to the requirements
specified in the data sheets and specifications for instrumentation attached and/or referred
to in the inquiry document.
7.6.2 Control Systems
7.6.2.4 (Addition)
The solenoid valves in the unloading scheme / capacity control scheme shall be of "Auto"
reset type without requiring any sort of field intervention.
7.6.5 Relief Valves

(Modification)
Relief valves shall be set to operate at the specified relief valve set pressure, which shall be
within the maximum allowable cylinder working pressure. If the relief valve set pressure is
not specified, the recommended values of Table-4 of API Std. 618 shall govern.
(Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, all relief valves required either on equipment or in the piping
within the vendor's battery limits, shall be supplied by the vendor.
7.6.6 Alarm and Shutdowns
A11 protective devices as well as an alarm and shutdown system shall be provided by the
compressor vendor. When both alarm and shutdown is specified for the same function, the
Page 5609 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
'"°""'"""-""' RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 14 of 26
alarm actuation shall precede the shutdown actuation, and the shutdowns shall be with
simultaneous alarms.
The words "If specified" shall be replaced with "If specified or as recommended by
vendor".
7.6.6.8 (New)
Where automatic start feature of auxiliary oil pump is provided in case of failure of main
oil pump, an audio visual alarm shall be actuated simultaneously.
7.6.7 Vibration and Position Detectors
Unless otherwise specified, for horizontal cylinders, non-contact type piston rod drop
detectors (i.e. Mechanical roller or fuse - metal plug (eutectic) type) shall be provided for
all machines having non metallic wear bands & piston rings, when the compressor rated
BKW > 750 kW or when Differential pressure (between 1st stage suction and final stage
discharge) > 70 kg/cm2.
7.7 Piping and Appurtenances
7.7.1 General
All piping for utilities (cooling water, steam, exhaust gas, purge gas, buffer gas etc.) shall
be furnished by the vendor and terminated at the vendor's battery limit (unless otherwise
specified, the vendor's battery limit shall be treated as the compressor house battery limit)
with single inlet and single outlet flanged connections per service for purchaser's
interface.
Interconnecting piping between equipment groupings and off-base facilities shall also be
supplied by the vendor. These pre-fabricated interconnecting piping shall be provided with
spool pieces to accommodate actual locational requirements of the Site. Complete
connection of this piping shall be done at site by the field contractor. The piping, flanges,
bolts, gaskets etc. required for this purpose by the Equipment Erection Contractor at site
shall be supplied by the vendor. The vendor shall be responsible for any modification
required at site, during assembly of pre-fabricated interconnecting piping by other agency.
A11 vent pipes shall be supplied by the vendor and terminated outside the compressor
shelter above the shelter roof level.
To the extent possible all drains shall be manifolded and terminated at the grade level for
purchaser's interface. Where manifolding is not feasible/advisable, the individual drains
shall be terminated at the grade level. All drains shall be terminated with a flanged valve.
A11 flare lines required for the package shall be piped by the vendor upto the purchaser's
flare header and shall be free draining towards the flare header.
For all the process and utility piping included in the vendor's scope of supply (as defined
by the vendor's battery limits), vendor shall be responsible for furnishing the following:
- Compressor House layout drawing / Equipment Layout drawing
Piping general arrangement drawings with complete Bill of material &
Part number.
- Piping isometrics along with correspondence to piping G.A. drawings.

Page 5610 of 8516

ENGINEERS
nsr
Location and type of Supports including supply of piping support and

fabricated support structures along with support design data.
The compressor vendor shall be responsible for reviewing the Purchasers design and
layout of the piping and appurtenances from the intake filter/suction knock-out drum upto
the outlet flange of the final compression stage pulsation suppression
devices/separators/aftercoolers/air receivers/discharge knock-out drums, as the case may
be, for smooth and trouble free operation of compressor and aux. equipment, based on his
experience and good engineering practice. The compressor vendor shall advice the
purchaser of any modifications necessary for trouble free operation.
7.7.4 Coolant Piping
Coolant piping system for the compressor and its auxiliaries shall be provided by the
compressor vendor. Thermal relief valves shall be provided with each independent cooling
water loop.
7.7.6 Process Piping
Suction Strainers alongwith piping spool pieces will be installed in compressor suction
lines of each stage and shall be supplied by the vendor. These strainers will be positioned
as close as possible to the cylinder inlets but in no event shall they be located downstream
of the inlet pulsation suppression equipment. The vendor furnished piping systems which
will incorporate such strainers, shall include flanged spool pieces, or approved substitute
to afford easy removal and reinsertion of the strainers without the necessity of pipe
springing or equipment removal.
The type of suction strainers (i.e. permanent / temporary / permanent & temporary) shall
be as specified in the inquiry / contract.
7.7.6.5 (New)
In case of non-lubricated air compressors or if specified for other services all piping and
appurtenances on the gas side shall be hot dip galvanized upto suction flange of the final
stage cylinders.
7.8 Intercoolers, Aftercoolers and Separators
7.8.1 Intercoolers and Aftercoolers
7.8.1.3 (Addition)
Tubes shall not be smaller than 16 mm (5/8 inch) outside diameter (OD). The minimum
allowable tube wall thickness is 18 SWG in case of copper/copper alloys tubes and 16
SWG in case of carbon steel tubes.
7.8.2 Separators
The type of liquid separation device shall be as recommended by the vendor.
Page 5611 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
5g-2111af-A5 INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
—""""'"' RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 16 of 26
The sump or boot of an integral separator, or lower part of the separate separation vessel
shall be sized to provide minimum holding capacity for two hours.
7.8.2.9 (New)
For Hydrogen gas service, no threaded connections shall be used on Inter & After Coolers.
7.9 Pulsation and Vibration Control
7.9.4 Design and Documentation
Compressor vendor shall get the evaluation carried out by an agency which has sufficient
experience in carrying out similar studies. The vendor shall furnish sufficient
data/reference in his bid to prove the capability of the proposed agency. The compressor
vendor shall be responsible for all coordination with the agency carrying out the study. In
case of any malfunctioning in the compressor installation, if the same is caused by any
errors in the acoustical and mechanical evaluation, the compressor vendor shall carry out a
field survey to identify the cause of the problem and rectify the same. If any modifications
are required to be made in the compressor installation, the same shall be made by the
compressor vendor at his own cost.
7.9.5 Pulsation Suppression Devices
7.9.5.1 General
Pulsation suppressor connections other than those covered by 7.9.5.1.13 and 7.9.5.1.14
shall be flanged unless threaded connections are specified.
For Hydrogen service service, no threaded connections shall be used on Pulsation
suppression devices
Unless specified otherwise, provision shall be made for attaching insulations for all
cryogenic service applications viz. refrigeration compressors etc. and also for personnel
proteetion where operating temperature exceeds 60 °C.
7.9.5.1.24 (New)
A vent connection with blind flange of minimum 1 inch size shall be provided for each
pulsation suppressor.
7.9.6 Supports for Pulsation Suppression Devices (Modification)

Adequate supports for the pulsation suppression devices and piping shall be furnished by
the compressor vendor. Consideration shall also be given to thermal expansion of the
components while designing the supports.
Page 5612 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS
7.11 Special Tools
7.11.2(e) (Modification)
The words Ìf specified' to be substituted with `where required'.
7.11.2 (Addition)
(f) Bearing Extractor*
(g) Piston Extractor*
(h) Valve Extractor*
(i) Sleeve to fit piston assembly into cylinder bore (if necessary based on shape of the
liner)*
(j) Piston rod thread cover*
(k) Hydraulic pump & hose for hydraulic tightening of piston rod to crosshead, piston rod
to piston, connecting rod head bolts, frame spacer bars bolting, foundation bolts etc.*
Note: * Items are not mandatory but are "as applicable to vendor specific compressor design".
8 INSPECTION AND TESTING
8.1 General
The extent of shop inspection and test and purchaser's participation in the same shall be as
specified in the equipment data sheets , specifications and Inspection test plan (if any)
enclosed with the inquiry / order.
Whenever the data sheets or specifications call for certain shop inspections and tests to be
witnessed, observed, or performed in presence of purchaser's representative, the vendor
shall provide a written notice of at least 30 days in advance to the Purchaser prior to each
inspection or test. The vendor shall reconfirm the date seven days prior to the test date.
8.1.11 (New)
The material certification and shop test data shall be furnished to the purchaser's inspector
in requisite number of sets for his review and comments prior to the commencement of the
tests to be witnessed by Inspector.
8.2 Inspection
8.2.2 Material Inspection
8.2.2.6 Material Certificates (New)

i) The vendor shall furnish material test certificates showing the chemical composition
and the mechanical properties of the materials of construction employed. The vendor
shall also carry out and furnish the results of any material test specified in the
applicable codes.
ii) When so required, material, tests shall be carried out in presence of the purchaser's
inspector.
iii) Material test certificates shall be furnished to the Purchaser's inspector for his review
and approval prior to his witnessing any specified non-destructive testing.
8.2.2.7 Component Inspection (New)

1) A11 pressure containing castings (such as cylinders, liners, cylinder heads, headers
etc.) shall be tested by the vendor in accordance with the following table. The
requirements of vendor's certificates and of witnessing by the purchasers inspector
shall be as stated in this table.
Page 5613 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
°"°° "a"'°91 RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 18 of 26
S. Test Certificate Test Witnessed by

No. required from purchaser's Inspector
Vendor
i) Chemical Analysis Yes No
ii) Physical test for tensile Yes No
strength, elongation and
hardness.
iii) Visual Inspection Yes Yes
iv) Hydrostatic test Yes Yes
2) Critical components (such as fabricated steel pistons, crank-shafts, crossheads,

connecting rods, piston rods, big-end bolts, main-bearing studs etc.) shall be tested by
the vendor in accordance with the following table. The requirements of vendor's
certificates and witnessinc bv the urchaser's ins ector shall be as stated in this table.
S. Test Certificate Test Witnessed by
No. required from purchaser's Inspector
Vendor
i) Chemical Analysis Yes No
ii) Physical test for tensile Yes No
strength, elongation and
hardness.
iii) Microstructure report (for Yes No
Nodular/Spheroidal cast
iron only. Certificate
shall be accompanied by
photograph).
iv) Visual Inspection No Yes
v) Ultrasonic testing of Yes Yes
crank shaft, piston rods,
connecting rods & big
end bolts (as applicable).
vi) Magnaflux testing / Yes Yes
Magnetic particle test of
crankshaft, connecting
rods, piston rods & big
OR
Dye-penetration testing Yes Yes
for crankshaft, connecting
rods, piston rods & big
8.3 Testing
During detail engineering vendor shall furnish detailed shop inspection and test procedures
for all standards and specified inspection and testing requirements for purchaser's review,
but not later than twelve weeks prior to the test. The test shall also include complete
description of the test set up, instrumentation, test procedure, test conditions, an outline of
proposed report, report forms, acceptance criteria, method of calculation, sample
calculations etc.
Page 5614 of 8516

ENGINEERS
0"zir INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
1.177R 24,,TY2 M,TRITSI
8.3.2 Hydrostatic and Gas Leakage Tests
8.3.2.8 (New)
The frame and the distance piece shall be tested for leaks using kerosene or a suitable test
fluid for a minimum period of 24 hours. Water shall not be used for testing.
8.3.3 Mechanical Running Tests
Unless otherwise specified, all compressors, drivers and gear units shall be shop tested in
their respective manufacturing works as per manufacturer's standard test procedure(s),
duly approved by the purchaser.
8.3.3.2 (Addition)
Mechanical Running Test at rated speed shall be conducted for a minimum period of 4
hours. The Mechanical Running Test shall be started only after all the parameters to be
measured have stabilised. Shop test readings shall be recorded at an interval of 30 minutes
during the duration of test.
The words "If specified, packaged units" shall be replaced with the words "Skid mounted
packaged reciprocating gas compressor units".
A11 auxiliary equipment not integral with the unit such as auxiliary lube oil consoles,
cooling fluid consoles, lube oil pumps etc. shall be subjected to 4 hours running tests at
their respective sub-vendor's works.
After the Mechanical Running Test, the compressor shall be dismantled and visual
inspection for the following shall be done:
(a) Main bearing - drive end side (Not applicable for non-split type journal bearings).
(b) Connecting rod big end bearing (at least one number)
(c) Piston assembly including piston, piston rings, piston rod and packings (at least one
number)
(d) Cylinder bore effective surface - all cylinders.
8.3.4 Other Tests
Machine mounted equipment such as valves, unloaders, lubricators etc. and pulsation
suppression devices (where these are common to more than one cylinder), shall be fitted
and assembled in the vendor's shop. The vendor shall demonstrate proper fitting and
ensure that assembled equipment is free from any sort of harmful stress / strain.
Note: In case, all the above mentioned items are not available at the time of testing, only the
components available shall be used for the test. However, vendor, at his own cost, shall carry out
the test with all the components, at site.
The preparation shall make the equipment suitable for 12 months of outdoor storage from
the time of shipment. If any extra precaution is to be taken by the Purchaser for storage
beyond 12 months the same shall be explicitly indicated in the operation and maintenance
manuals.
Page 5615 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
5 , MW5 RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 20 of 26
In case the country of origin for the equipment being supplied is different than the country
where the project site is located, the equipment shall be packed for export shipment.
9 VENDOR'S DATA
9.1 General (Substitution)

The information to be furnished by the vendor is specified in 9.2, 9.3 and purchaser's
Vendor Data Requirements as included in the inquiry document.
Vendor shall complete and forward the document `Vendor Data Index & Schedule /
Document Control Index (DCI)' to the purchaser. (Destination & Contact persons as per
order).
9.2 Proposals (Substitution)

a) All data sheets drawings and documents listed under `PRINTS WITH QUOTE' in the
b) List of recommended commissioning spares included in the offer.
c) List of mandatory spares (where specified by the purchaser) included in the offer.
d) List of Vendor's Standard Spare Parts for Two Years Normal Operation
This list shall be made separately for each item including auxiliaries and drivers in the
form of a table & shall show
v) Quantity recommended as insurance for the units of an item as specified in the
inquiry.
e) An itemised list of special tools included in the offer.
f) Any start-up, shutdown or operating restrictions required to protect the integrity of the
equipment.
g) Any limitations of vendor's test-facility to carryout the specified tests.
h) A specific compliance statement that the scope of supply, the offered
equipment/systems and all its components are in strict accordance with the data sheets,
job specifications, this specifications and all other attachments, except for specific
deviations as listed in the proposal.
9.3 Contract Data (Substitution)
9.3.1 General
9.3.1.1 Drawings and data as required after purchase order has been specified in the Vendor Data
Requirement. Vendor to note that the drawing/document description/titles as given in the
drawing/document specified there are several drawings to be furnished by the vendor or
vice versa. Vendor shall complete & forward a document `Vendor Data Index & Schedule
/ Document Control Index (DCI)' to the purchaser (Destination & contract person as per
order). This document shall list out in consolidated form all drawings and documents
required by purchaser (as specified in the Data Sheets, Specifications and Vendor Data
Requirement forms enclosed with the order). Against each drawing/document vendor shall
indicate the Vendor's drawing numbers, titles, rev. no., category (whether for information
or approval) and schedule of submission. This shall be the first document to be submitted
by vendor within two weeks of order.

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0
Page 5616 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
z:ff fna3pg INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
RECIPROCATING COM PRESSORS Page 21 of 26
vendor.
9.3.1.2 A11 transmittal Letters (cover), drawings and data shall have a title block (in addition to
vendors standard title block) which shall as a minimum contain the following contract
information.
(i) Purchaser's/ Consultant' s corporate name.
(ii) Project Name
(iii) Equipment Name and Item Number.
(iv) Purchase Order No.
(v) Purchase requisition no.
Title block on drawings shall be placed on the lower right hand corner.
9.3.1.3 A11 Vendor data/ Drawings/ Documents shall be in English Language and in Metric
System.
9.3.1.4 Data specified in the VDR is the minimum requirement of the purchaser. Any additional
document / data required or requested by purchaser for engineering or construction shall
9.3.2 Co-ordination Meeting

When specified, a co-ordination meeting shall be held at Purchaser's office, preferably
within 4 weeks of order.
An agenda shall be prepared for this meeting and would include the following points
related to technical aspects.
b. Vendor Data Index & Schedule.
f. Preliminary General Arrangement & layout drawings & purchaser's interface
drawings.
9.3.3 Drawings
The number of prints required and the times within which these are to be submitted by
vendor are specified in Purchaser's inquiry/order.
Drawing review shall be through EDMSNDOCS in soft, as per the details provided
elsewhere in inquiry document.
in writing. After the drawings have been reviewed, the vendor shall furnish certified
copies in the quantity specified. All the drawings / documents shall be provided either in
A4 or A3 paper size. All drawings must be clearly legible and shall be folded to 216 mm x
279 mm size.
information:

iii) Location (in all three planes), size, type, rating and identification of all
purchaser's interface connections including those of vents, drains lubricating
oil, sealing fluid, cooling water, steam & Electrical/Instrumentation.
Page 5617 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
'''"°""'""""""' RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 22 of 26
iv) Direction of rotation viewing from the driving end.

v) Weight of each assembly/component.
vi) The weight & location of center of gravity of the heaviest
assembly/components that must be handled for erection.
vii) Identification and weight, dimensions of the heaviest assembly / subassembly
/ component required to be handled for maintenance.
viii) Maintenance clearances and dismantling clearances.
ix) Speeds of Driven Equipment and driver and driver rating. Location of driver
x) Layout of auxiliary equipment and operating platform.
xi) Make, Type and Size of couplings and the location of guards and their
coverage.
xii) A list of reference drawings if any.
xiii) A list of any special weather-protection and climatic features.
b) Foundation Drawing
A foundation drawing shall indicate complete information required for foundation
design by purchaser including the following:
a) Foundation bolt sizes & pipe sleeve details and pocket sizes & locations.
b) Recommended grouting material (i.e. cementatious or epoxy), make of grout,
specifications, quantity, grouting thickness and other necessary technical details.
c) Static weight of each independently grouted item (such as compressor, gear box,
driver, control panel etc.) and location of center of gravity of each of such items in
all three planes.
d) Weight distribution for each bolt/subsole-plate location and total static weight.
e) Dynamic loads, if any, caused due to various items grouted independently. (The
cause of generation of such loads shall also be indicated).
f) The direction and magnitude of unbalance forces and moments (with their phase
angles) generated by the out of balance of the rotating / moving parts of the
machine at the relevant operating conditions. [These loads and their locations are
to be given in all three planes. These shall be utilised for computing the
amplitudes of vibration of the foundation].
g) GD2 value of each item resolved to motor speed.
h) Maximum permissible amplitude of vibration on the foundation at the base level.
(The location of the points on the foundation base where such amplitudes are not
to be exceeded shall be given in all three planes). The reference of relevant code,
if any, shall also be indicated.
i) Total mass of rotating parts.
j) Total mass of reciprocating parts.
k) Suggested dynamic factor and ratio of weight of foundation to weight of machine.
I) Short circuit loads caused in motor drivers.
m) Operating speed of the machine and the driving motor.
n) Scope of Supply of the Foundation Bolts (unless otherwise specified, by vendor).
o) Maximum permissible magnitude of the unbalance forces and moments generated
by the out of balance of the rotating / moving parts of the machine as allowed by
the relevant codes, if any. (The reference of such code, if any, shall also be
indicated).
p) Recommended separation margin (if any), between the machine operating speeds
and the natural frequencies of the machine foundation system along with the basis
of such recommended separation margins.
[Note: Unless otherwise indicated by vendor, the dynamic forces as given in e) & l) above are
considered as additional static loads for designing the foundations statically. Such dynamic
forces are not unbalance forces and therefore, these shall not be utilised for computing the
amplitudes of vibration.]

Page 5618 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
,e", ,31
°""'" RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS Page 23 of 26

ii) Minimum spacing required between the various skids/equipment and between the
vendor's scope.
recommended for maintenance and height of the lifting hook from the centreline
of equipment.
d) Field Alignment Diagram.

The diagram shall indicate the relative displacements to be kept between the
centrelines of various equipments at the time of installation so that under normal
running conditions the equipment gets fully aligned. This relative displacement should
be decided on the basic of driver, gearbox, crankshaft & piston centreline temp. rise
data.

sections & general arrangement drawings of heat exchangers, vendors
recommendations regarding provision for support and piping expansion.
9.3.3.3 P & I Drawing (with Bill of Material)

P & I Drawing shall indicate the system details, location of various auxiliaries,
instruments, controls and safety devices, as required, vendor's scope shall be clearly
demarcated, line sizes piping class, valve sizes and class shall be clearly marked on the
P&ID. Each item shall have an item number which shall correspond to the item number
shown on the bill of materials. The bill of material, shall include item number, name of the
item, function, normal value set value, range, quantity per unit, make and other
specifications as applicable. Legends adopted shall be furnished at the bottom of each
9.3.3.4 Cross Sectional Drawing (With Bill of Material)

furnished showing all parts, design assembly and running clearances, and balancing data
required for erection and maintenance. Each part shall be numbered which shall
correspond to the part number on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include
the part no., name of component, materials quantity installed per unit & sizes where
applicable (say for bolts, nuts, rings, gaskets etc.). All boughtout items shall also be
indicated with make and brief specifications. A separate cross-sectional drawing showing
installation and setting dimensions for the seals shall be furnished.
9.3.4 Performance Data
9.3.4.1 Data Sheet

The Vendor shall provide completely filled in data sheets, first for "As Purchased" and
then for "As Built". This shall be done by the vendor correcting and filling out the data
sheets and submitting copies to the purchaser.
Page 5619 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
9.3.4.2 The vendor shall submit performance curves or tables of power and capacity versus
suction pressure with parameters of discharge pressure, showing the effects of unloading
devices and showing any operating limitation and with calculation input and output data
identified, all as mutually agreed between the vendor and the purchaser.
9.3.4.3 Rod load and gas load charts for each load step, complete in accordance with 6.6,
including inertial forces and rod reversal magnitude and duration shall be furnished.
9.3.4.4 The vendor shall furnish the data required for independent rod load, gas load, and reversal
calculations.
9.3.4.5 The effect of valve failure on rod loads and reversal shall be calculated and furnished. The
required specifics of this study shall be mutually agreed upon by the purchaser and
vendor.
9.3.4.6 Curves of starting torque vs. speed shall be furnished for the compressor, for the motor at
rated voltage and for the motor at the specified voltage reduction. The curve sheet shall
also state separately the (moment of inertia of the motor alone and the resultant moment of
inertia of the driven equipment referred to the motor shaft speed plus the calculated time
for acceleration to full speed at the specified voltages (as per Clause 7.1.2 of API 618) and
specified operating conditions (refer clause 7.1.1.6 and 7.1.2.1 of API 618). All curves
shall be scaled in finite values. Values expressed in percentage terms alone shall not be
provided.
9.3.5 Contents of Pulsation and Vibration Control Study

Compressor vendor shall submit a Pulsation and vibration control evaluation report to
purchaser. The report shall contain as a minimum the following data:
i) Methodology of conducting the study.
ii) Hardware/Software used to conduct the study.
iii) Basis used for conducting the study, i.e. information provided by purchaser and that
provided by compressor vendor. Compressor vendor shall also indicate the allowable
vibration limits for the compressor at cylinder head and at suction and discharge
flange of cylinders.
iv) Amplitude vs. frequency plot of pressure waves for compressor valves and various
points in piping.
v) Actual PV card of compressor cylinders superimposed graphically on ideal card
indicating percentage under-load or overload in both capacity and horsepower.
vi) Values of pressure drop through pulsation suppression devices and significant piping
element.
vii) Mechanical natural frequencies, mode shapes amplitudes of vibration & stresses in
compressor manifold system.
viii) Mechanical natural frequencies of piping system.
ix) In case of insufficient margin of separation mode shapes, amplitudes of vibration and
stress levels in piping both steady state as well as cyclic.
x) A confirmation from the agency conducting the study that the defined system is safe
under all the specified operating conditions, considering all aspects as indicated in
this specification.
9.3.6 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue
9.3.6.1 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue is a compilation of Às built' drawings and
9.3.6.2 Not later than 2 weeks after successful completion of all specified tests, the vendor shall
furnish the required no. of Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogues for equipment.
The catalogue shall include the following documents as a minimum:
Page 5620 of 8516

,311 ENGINEERS FOR
5g- rr 122s INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0011 Rev. 6
i) A11 drawings and data as listed in the vendor data requirement form. (For drawings
where purchaser's approval is required, the final certified drawings should be
attached). Sections shall be organised in a manner that data & drawings related to
one subject is grouped together such as Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation etc.
ii) All manufacturing, inspection and test data records.
iii) Installation Manual
The vendor shall provide sufficient written instructions, including a cross-reference
list of all drawings, to enable the purchaser to correctly install the equipment and
prepare the equipment for start-up. It shall include any special information required
for proper installation that is not on the drawings, special alignment or grouting
procedures, utility specifications (including quantity) and all installation data. It
shall also contain the following information:
criterion.
iv) Operation and Maintenance Manual
This manual shall provide sufficient written instructions and data to enable purchaser
to correctly operate and maintain the equipment ordered. It shall include a section to
cover special instructions for operation at extreme environmental and/or extreme
operating conditions. The following shall be included in this manual:
(a) Instructions covering start-up, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, operating
(c) Outline and sectional drawings, schematics and illustrative sketches in sufficient
equipment.
i. Maximum and minimum bearing, labyrinth and seal clearances including
any other clearance between moving and stationary parts of the equipment
affecting proper running and maintenance of the equipment.
ü. Instructions for measuring and adjusting cold clearances, shaft runout,
concentricity etc.
iii. Rotor/Crankshaft float allowance.
v. Balancing tolerances.
viii. Preventive maintenance schedules and criterion for replacement of parts.
i. Bolting sequence and torque values for all bolts affecting equipment
ii. Reassembly sequences together with required inspection checks.
iii. Adjustment procedures to achieve required positions, clearances, float and
so forth.
iv. Detailed procedures for pre-operational checks, including settings and
actjustments.
Page 5621 of 8516

ENGINEERS
v. Seals and coupling installation procedures.

vi. Parts list indicating cross-sectional drawings of various assemblies and sub-
assemblies, part numbers, materials of construction etc. to facilitate
v) Following information shall also be included in the Technical Data

Manual/Mechanical Catalogue:
1. Storage instructions for storing and preserving the equipment (including driver
9.3.6.3 Technical Data Manual shall be in Hard board folder(s) of size 265 mm x 315 mm and
shall not be more than 90 mm thick; it may be of several volumes and each volume shall
have a volume number, index of volumes & index of contents of that particular volume.
9.3.6.4 Title sheet (Top sheet) of each volume of Technical Data Manual shall contain the contract
information as defined under clause 9.3.1.2 besides the volume number.
9.3.6.5 In case order contains more than one item, separate dedicated Technical Data Manuals
shall be submitted for each item.
9.3.4.6 Two (2) sets of Final / "As-Built" drawings / documents shall also be submitted as
electronic files on secondary storage media (CD-ROM / DVD-ROM disks).
Page 5622 of 8516

t31 ENGINEERS FOR AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
L~g INDIA LJMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
IA Govf ofIncha Undedak.o9)
COMPRESSORS AND
EXPANDER-COMPRESSORS Page 1 of 36
ch BIT
-ftw

AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
COMPRESSORS AND
EXPANDER-COMPRESSORS
2 21.01.2014 Revised and Issued as Standard Specification JSD TK DB/AKN SC
1 21.03.2011 Re-affirmed and Reissued SPS SM AKN DM
0 07/06/2005 Issued as Standard Specification DB KDS RK VJN

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5623 of 8516

k31 ENGINEEFZS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
..11 2[51e9 INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
I.E71,1,M1,
1111~1, IA Govt ot Enda Uncleilaking) COMPRESSORS AND
Page 2 of 36
Abbreviations:
ASME The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
PDF Portable Document Format
DCIM Document Control Index Module

Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr Rakesh Misra
Mr J S Duggal

Page 5624 of 8516

01 ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
COMPRESSORS AND
CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 CHAPTER 1— GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4
2.0 CHAPTER 2— CENTRIFUGAL AND AXIAL COMPRESSORS 20
3.0 CHAPTER 3— INTEGRALLY GEARED COMPRESSORS 26
4.0 CHAPTER 4— EXPANDER-COMPRESSORS 31
Page 5625 of 8516

_71 Ll ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
$'e-arlate, COMPRESSORS AND
, 1,7,1(1,
3•17
Page 4 of 36
EXPANDER-COM PRESSORS
Chapter 1
General Requirements

Page 5626 of 8516

z.ie1,, ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
Ogjr ftfl-P INDIA LIMITED COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 SCOPE 6
1.1 SCOPE 7
1.2 ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS 7
1.5 DEFINITION OF TERMS 7
1.6 NORMATIVE REFERENCES 7
1.8 UNIT RESPONSIBILITY 7

2.1 GENERAL 8
2.2 MATERIALS 8
2.3 CASINGS 9
2.6 DYNAMICS 9
2.8 SHAFT END SEALS 10
3.1 DRIVERS 11
3.2 COUPLING AND GUARDS 11
3.3 MOUNTING PLATES 11
3.4 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION 11
3.5 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES 12

4.1 GENERAL 12
4.2 INSPECTION 12
4.3 TESTING 12

5.1 GENERAL 13
5.2 PROPOSALS 13
Page 5627 of 8516

~ffl ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
gar faA5 INDIA LIMITED COMPRESSORS AND Page 6 of 36
■filJU Ar lA Govt ol incla Undeflaklow
.4
1.0 SCOPE
This specification together with the attendant data sheets and other specifications/
(i) attachments to inquiry/ order defines the minimum requirements for axial compressors,
single-shaft and integrally-geared process centrifugal compressors, and expander-
compressors for all types of services [except for packaged, integrally-geared centrifugal
2 (34
plant & instrument air compressors, fans or blowers that develop less than 0.35 kgf/cm
kPa) pressure rine above atmospheric pressure and hot gas expanders over 300°C],
including their drivers and drive mechanisms, reducing gears, if any, lubricating/sealing
systems, controls, safety devices and instrumentation, and other auxiliary equipment.
ments of this
Vendor shall make all possible efforts to comly strictly with the require
(ii) ps to inquiry/order. In case deviations are
specification and other specifications/attachment
considered essential by the vendor (after exhausting all possible efforts) these shall be
separately listed in the vendor's proposal under separate section titled as "List of
deviations/exceptions to the inquiry document". Deviation shall be listed separately for
each document with cross reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para etc. of the
respective document supported with proper reasons for the deviation for purchaser's
other portion of the proposal shall not be considered applicable. No deviation or exception
shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.
Compliance with this specification sha ll not relieve the vendor of the responsibility of
(iii) of proper design, materials and
furnishing equipment and accessories /auxiliaries
workmanship to meet the specified start up and operating conditions. ln case the vendor
considers requirement of additional instrumentation, controls, safety devices and any other
accessories/auxiliaries essential for safe and satisfactory operation of the equipment, he
shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section along with his proposal
and include the same in his scope of supply.
Except as modified herein, the main equipment and their auxiliaries shall be designed,
(iv) API Standard 617,
manufactured, tested and supplied strictly in accordance with the
Seventh Edition, July 2002, "Axial and Centrifugal Compressors and Expander-
compressors for Petroleum, Chemical and Gas Industry Services."
Except for new paragraphs, the number and title of the paragraphs in the following
(v) correspond to the respective sections and paragraphs
Modifications to API Standard - 617
of the above standard. Paragraphs not addressed in this specification shall be strictly in
API Standard 617, Seventh Edition July 2002 requirements.
accordance to
following: An addition to a part, section or paragraph referred to.
(Addition) An amplification or rewording has been made to a part of
(Modification) the corresponding section or paragraph but not a substitution
A substitution has been made for the corresponding section
(Substitution)
or paragraph of the standard in its totality.
A new section or paragraph having no corresponding section
(New)
This paragraph is deleted.
(Delete)
Page 5628 of 8516

(frz
n ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
$`tg-ar Otalj-C
NIF71 212LIAC J~i1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol India Undertaking) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
SECTION 1 - GENERAL

The entire paragraph excepting Paragraph 1.1.1 and `NOTE' is substituted by paragraph
1.0 above
1.2 ALTERNATIVE DESIGNS (Delete)

specifications (if any) and other attached specifications the following order of precedence
shall govern:
3. P&ID's (if any)
1.5 DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.5.45 Standard Volume Flow (Modification)
Nm3/hr is an abbreviation for capacity in normal cubic meters per hour referred to 1.033
kg/cm2a pressure, 0°C temperature with a compressibility factor of 1.0 and 0% relative
humidity.
Sm3/hr is an abbreviation for capacity in standard cubic meters per hour referred to 1.033
kg/cm2a pressure, 15°C temperature with a compressibility factor of 1.0 and 0% relative
humidity.
1.6 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
The editions of referenced publications that are in effect at the time of inquiry or at a date
specified in the inquiry document shall be applicable.
Equipment supplied shall comply with applicable US Standards. However ISO Standards
ISO-1940 & ISO-8821 will also be applicable.
1.8 UNIT RESPONSIBILITY (Addition)

Unless otherwise specified, vendor having unit responsibility shall be as defined in Clause#
1.3 of Chapter-2 (Centrifugal & Axial Compressor), Clause# 1.3 of Chapter-3 (Integrally
Geared Compressors) & Clause# 1.3 of Chapter-4 (Expander-Compressors).
Page 5629 of 8516

ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
22-eg
4,1 JP0-4,1
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Enda Undertakm COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2

2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Performance
Unless otherwise specified the compressor shall be designed to deliver the rated head and
rated capacity without negative tolerance.
The BKW at the above condition shall be guaranteed with zero positive tolerance.
Unless otherwise specified, cooling water system (jackets, diaphragms, internal coolers,
and so forth) shall be designed for the following condition:
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 8.0 kg/cm2g
Test Pressure (1.5 X MAWP) 12.0 kg/cm2g
Minimum Temperature Rise 6°C
Fouling Factor on Water Side 0.0004 m2 hr °C/kcal
Unless otherwise specified, the maximum permissible sound pressure level of the
compressor-driver train shall not exceed 88 dBA measured at 1 meter from the equipment
surface for the recommended range of operation.
All electrical components and installations shall be suitable for the hazardous area
classification and gas group specified in the inquiry/order documents.
2.2 MATERIALS
Add to this clause: Equivalent materials in accordance with other internationally
recognised standards are acceptable.
Unless otherwise specified, minimum design metal temperature shall be the minimum
surrounding ambient temperature or minimum temperature of compressed gas, whichever
is lower.
Add to this clause: Welders qualified with other internationally recognised standards
are acceptable.
Page 5630 of 8516

2.1rt;t22,5 INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
IMPErn el~LTAJ~I) IA Govl of UndertakIng) COMPRESSORS AND
2.3 CASINGS
2.3.1 Pressure containing Casings
2.3.1.11.6 (New)
Unless specified otherwise, 100% radiography inspection shall be done in the case of
connections welded to pressure castings. In addition cast compressor casings shall be
radiographed in critical areas (critical areas are generally defined as those areas where there
is a major change in section thickness or direction).
2.3.2 Pressure Casing Connections
2.3.2.1 General
All casing drain connections shall be valved and brought to a common header terminating
with a valve so that the Purchaser has to make a single connection. This common header
valve shall be brought to the skid edge and supported.
2.3.2.2 Main Process Connections

2.3.2.2.7 The words `when specified' stand deleted.
2.6 DYNAMICS
2.6.7 Torsional Analysis
Unless specified otherwise, the compressor vendor shall perform a composite torsional
vibration analysis of the complete coupled train and shall be responsible for the satisfactory
mechanical performance of the train. Other manufacturers providing components for the
system shall provide the necessary data to the compressor manufacturer, who shall submit
to the Purchaser a complete torsional analysis report.
2.6.8 Vibration and Balancing
2.6.8.2 (Addition)
The final balancing of the rotor assembly shall be carried out along with the coupling half.
2.6.8.2.1.1 (Modification)
The words `when specified' stand deleted.
When the vendor's standard balance method is by operating speed balancing in lieu of
sequential low speed balancing, the same is also acceptable.
The words: "when specified" stands deleted.
For rotors that are high speed balanced, a low speed residual unbalance check shall be
performed in a low speed balance machine. This is done to provide a reference of residual
unbalance and phase for future use in a low speed balance machine.
Page 5631 of 8516

k.11 ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
Offl—
eg INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
1.1 IA Govt of Inda Undertaking) COMPRESSORS AND
SHAFT END SEALS
General
(Modification)
Where settling out pressure is not specified by the purchaser, settling out pressure shall be
taken as equal to the rated discharge pressure of the compressor.
2.8.3 Oil Seals
Mechanical contact type seals shall incorporate a suitable design feature to prevent process
gas leakage when the compressor is pressurized and not running and the seal oil system is
shut down.
2.8.4 Self Acting Dry Gas Seal
2.8.4.1 (Modification): Unless otherwise specified, Tandem DGS with intermediate labyrinths
(Fig. 1.C-9) shall be used for toxic or flammable gases.
2.8.4.5 (New): The lift off speed of seal faces shall always be below the compressor train
minimum operating speed including the shop speed for performance test.
Page 5632 of 8516

Og-ar Rfaieg
1.1127f 242fforOOffJoao4)
KJ INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of lndko undertakm) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
3.1 DRIVERS
Steam turbine driver shall be capable of continuously developing 110% of the maximum
power required for the specified conditions while operating at the corresponding speed
under specified steam conditions (minimum inlet steam condition and maximum steam
outlet condition, unless specified otherwise).
The base continuous rating of the gas turbine driver at rated site conditions of temperature,
altitude, humidity, intake/exhaust pressure losses, shall be as a minimum 110% of the
greatest power required by the compressor under any of the specified operating conditions
including gearbox and all transmission losses.
3.2 COUPLINGS AND GUARDS
Unless otherwise specified, coupling shall be of non-lubricated diaphragm/stainless steel
flexible membrane type, as per API Standard 671.
3.3 MOUNTING PLATES
3.3.1 General
Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts will be furnished by the vendor.
3.3.2 Baseplates
3 .3 .2. 1 (Modification)
Unless otherwise specified, the complete compressor unit, including gear and driver, shall
be mounted on a single lift base plate of structural steel. There shall be no limits to the size
of the base plate other than those derived from transportation, installation (lifting
constraints), and/or plant lay-out considerations.
The words "when specified" shall be read as "Unless otherwise specified".
3.4 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION
3.4.1 General
Minimum instrumentation and process controls as desired by the Purchaser, shall be as
specified in the data sheets/job specifications/drawings/general specifications and other
documents referenced in the inquiry or order and shall be supplied by the vendor. The
vendor shall specify and provide any additional instrumentation and controls as deemed
necessary for the smooth and safe operation of the unit under all specified operating
conditions. The vendor shall review Purchaser's overall compressor control system for
compatibility with the vendor furnished controls/instrumentation.
Page 5633 of 8516

Ogzx 22-"dg
24705r2 .51 ,705.1
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go. of incha Undenaking) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
Unless specified otherwise, anti-surge system for compressor shall be furnished by the
vendor. The anti-surge system furnished shall enable stable compressor operation at any
point on the right side (high flow side) of surge control line.
3.5 PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
3.5.1 General
3.5.1.5 (New)
The vendor shall also supply interconnecting piping between equipment groupings and off-
base facilities.
All piping for utilities (cooling water, steam, exhaust gas, purge gas, buffer gas etc.) shall
be furnished by the vendor and terminated at the vendor's battery limit (unless otherwise
specified, the vendor's battery limit shall be treated as the compressor house battery limit)
with single inlet and single outlet flanged connections per service for purchaser's interface.
A11 vent pipes shall be supplied by the vendor and terminated outside the compressor
shelter above the shelter roof level.
To the extent possible all drains shall be manifolded and terminated at the grade level for
purchaser's interface. Where manifolding is not feasible/advisable, the individual drains
shall be terminated at the grade level. All drains shall be terminated with a flanged valve.
A11 flare lines required for the package shall be piped by the vendor upto the purchaser's
flare header and shall be free draining towards the flare header.
4.1 GENERAL
4.1.8 (New)
Rejections made by Purchaser's inspector, based on inspection or tests shall be final.
Acceptance by the inspector shall in no way release the vendor from guarantees as to
materials, workman-ship, and performance of the equipment inspected.
4.2 INSPECTION
4.2.1 General
4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 General
At least 12 weeks before the first scheduled test vendor shall submit to the purchaser
detailed test procedures for all running tests for his approval.
The test procedure shall as a minimum include the following:
• Test Objectives and Acceptance criteria
Page 5634 of 8516

,,ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
fffit-eg INDIA LIMITED
Govt ot trxto Unclertak.N) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
• Test Set up (layout) showing the arrangement of equipment & piping system along
with location and number of measuring instruments.
• Operating conditions during the test.
• Sequence of various activities during the test starting from preparation for start of test
till the final termination of test.
• Sample test log sheets and calculations.
The vendor shall notify the purchaser not less than 4 weeks before the date of scheduled
testing and reconfirm the same at least one week before the firm test date.
4.3.6 Mechanical Running Test
4.3.8 Optional Tests
4.3.8.1 Performance Test (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, all equipment shall be subjected to performance testing in

manufacturer's facility.
4.3.8.2 Helium Test (Addition)

Casings for compressors handling gas containing 30 mole percent or higher of hydrogen
shall be subject to a helium leak test, as defined above.
The words "6 months" shall be replaced with the words "8 months".
5.1 GENERAL
Refer Clause# 5.3.1.2.
5.2 PROPOSALS

In addition to data specified in clauses 5.2.2 to 5.2.4, the vendor's proposals shall, as a
minimum, include the following:
a. All data sheets, drawings and documents listed under "WITH BID" in the Vendor Data
Requirement Form enclosed with the inquiry.
b. List of recommended commissioning spares included in the offer.
c. List of insurance spares (where specified by the purchaser) included in the offer.
d. List of Spare Parts for Two Years Normal Operation
This list shall be made separately for each item including auxiliaries and drivers in the
Page 5635 of 8516

0111 it ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
I NIZ7, IA Govl of Indo Undertaking) COMPRESSORS AND
form of a table & shall show

iv) Quantity recommended for number of units of an item as specified in the
inquiry.
v) Quantity recommended as insurance for the number of units of an item
specified in the inquiry.
e. An itemised list of special tools included in the offer.
f. Any start-up, shutdown or operating restrictions required to protect the integrity of the
equipment.
g. Any limitations of vendor's test-facility to carryout the specified tests.
h. A specific compliance statement that the scope of supply, the offered
equipment/systems and all its components are in strict accordance with the data sheets,
job specifications, this specifications and all other attachments, except for specific
deviations as listed in the proposal.
Unless a specific deviation/exception is taken by the vendor at the time of submitting the
proposal, it will be understood that final equipment/system shall be designed, fabricated
tested and supplied strictly in accordance with Purchaser's specified requirements as
covered in the inquiry or order.
5.2.2 Drawings
5.2.2.1 (Addition)
The drawings indicated in the Vendor Data Requirement under "WITH BID" shall also be
included in the proposal.
5.2.3 Technical Data
5.2.3 (i) (Addition)

Vendor shall also furnish a consolidated list of all consumables which need to be
replaced/replenished periodically (like lube oil, seal gas , greases, any cleaning agent etc.),
indicating the total quantity required for the period of commissioning/start-up and one year
continuous operation of the unit.
5.2.3 (1) (Substitution)

A list of installations, prepared in a manner so as to give explicit evidence that the offered
equipment amply meets the specified design, manufacturing and experience requirements.
5.2.3 (n) (Delete)
5.2.5 Quality Assurance Procedures (Substitution)

Vendor shall furnish his standard QA procedures, duly modified as per requirements of
inquiry for the offered equipment.
5.3 CONTRACT DATA
drawing/document specified, there are several drawings to be furnished by the vendor or
vice versa. Vendor shall complete & forward a document titled as "Vendor Drawing
Schedule", Document Control Index (DCI) to the purchaser (Destination & contact person
as per order). This document shall list out in consolidated form all drawings and documents
Page 5636 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$'~f5leg, INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of India Undertakmg)
COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
Page 15 of 36
required by purchaser (As specified in Data Sheets, Specifications and Vendor Data
Requirement forms enclosed with the order). Against each drawing/document vendor shall
indicate the vendor's drawing number, title, Rev. No., category (whether for information or
approval) and schedule of submission.
This shall be the first document to be submitted by vendor within two weeks of order. No
drawing shall be taken up for review till DCI for the inquiry/order is finalized by
vendor.
information:
i) Purchaser's and Consultants Corporate Name
ii) Project Name.
- As built running clearances and when applicable; thrust bearing, radial bearing and seal
running clearances.
- A supplementary list of spare parts other than those included in his original proposal.
start-up.
- A parts list for all equipment supplied. This list shall include pattern, stock, or
At least 8 weeks before shipment, the vendor shall submit equipment preservation,
packaging and shipping procedures to the purchaser for review.
5.3.2 Drawings and Technical Data (Addition)
The number of prints required and the times within which these are to be submitted by
vendor are specified in Purchaser's inquiry/order.
The purchaser's review of the vendor's drawings shall not constitute permission to deviate
in writing. After the drawings have been reviewed, the vendor shall furnish certified copies
in the quantity specified. All drawings must be clearly legible and shall be folded to 216
mm x 279 mm size.
Drawings/documents with following titles shall contain as a minimum the following

information:
Page 5637 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
Of5iCg
1.1R71 J,r{:.
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol India Undertalong) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2

- Outline dimensions (minimum three views) (All principal dimensions).
- Allowable forces and moments on suction and discharge nozzles.
- Location (in all three planes), size, type, rating and identification of all purchaser's
- Direction of rotation, viewing from the driving end.
- The weight & location of center of gravity of the heaviest assembly/components
- Identification, weight and dimensions of the heaviest equipment assembly /
subassembly / component required to be handled for maintenance.
- Maintenance clearances and dismantling clearances.
- Speeds of Driven Equipment and Driver with Driver rating. Location of driver
terminal box (in case of Electric motor Driver).
- Layout of auxiliary equipment and operating platform.
- Make, Type and Size of couplings and the location of guards and their coverage.
- A list of reference drawings if any.
- A list of any special weather-protection and climatic features.
- Equipment furnished (loose) by the vendor for mounting by the purchaser.
- Grouting thickness and other necessary technical details.
- Static weight of each skid/independently grouted item and location of center of
- Weight distribution for each bolt/subsole plate location and total static weight.
- Dynamic loading caused due to various items grouted independently.
- The direction and magnitude of unbalance forces and moments generated by each
drivers
- GD2 value of each item resolved to driver speed.
- Maximum permissible amplitude of vibration on the foundation at base Level.
- Total mass of rotating parts.
- Suggested dynamic factor and ratio of foundation weight to weight of
- Layout of all skid/equipment and their auxiliaries, vessels, control panels,
allocated, site wind conditions, area classification, the type of equipment located in
the vicinity etc.) indicating elevation and dimension of skids/equipment.
Minimum spacing required between the various skids/equipment and between the
- Layout for water piping, trenches for water piping, cable tray/trenches layout.
- Piping arrangement and piping support arrangement/location for piping in vendor's
scope.
- Layout for auxiliary equipment and operating platform details.
Specification for crane/mono rail (including suggested crane/mono rail layout)
equipment.
Page 5638 of 8516

IA GoN of Irgia UnclertakIng) COMPRESSORS AND

The diagram shall indicate the relative displacement to be kept between the
centerlines of various equipments at the time of installation, so that under normal
running conditions the equipments get fully aligned. This relative displacement
should be decided on the basis of centerline temperature rine data of driver, gear
bmdtransmission system, driven equipment.
f) P&I Diagrams (with Bill of Materials)
vendor's scope of supply or specified in the order. P&I Diagram shall indicate the
system details, location of various auxiliaries, instruments, controls and safety devices
as required. Line sizes, piping class, valve sizes and class shall be clearly marked on
the P&ID. Vendor's scope and purchaser's scope shall be clearly demarcated. Each
item shall be identified by an item No./item tag no., which shall correspond to the
item no. shown on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include items
number, normal value, set value, range, quantity per unit, make and other
specifications as applicable. Legends adopted shall be indicated either at the bottom of
drawing or on a separate drawing. The legends shall be as per ISA.
g) Cross-sectional Drawing with Bill of Materials
furnished showing all parts, design assembly and running clearances, and balancing
data required for erection and maintenance. Each part shall be numbered which shall
correspond to the part number on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall
include the part no., name of component, materials quantity installed per unit & sizes
where applicable (say for bolts, nuts, rings, gaskets etc.). All bought-out items shall
also be indicated with make and brief specifications.
5.3.5 Installation, Operation, Maintenance and Technical Data Manuals.
Refer Clause# 5.3.5.4
5.3.5.4 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue (Substitution)
5.3.5.4.1 Technical Data Manual is a compilation of "As Built" drawings and data, manufacturing
and test records, installation, operating and maintenance instructions.
5.3.5.4.2 Not Tater than two weeks after successful completion of all specified tests, the vendor shall
furnish the required number of Technical Data Manuals for the equipment, any auxiliaries
and instruments that the vendor is providing. The Technical Data Manual shall include the
following documents as a minimum:
(i) All drawings and data as listed in the vendor data index & schedule. (For drawings,
(ii) All manufacturing, inspection and test data and records.
(iii) Installation Manual
Page 5639 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
22-eg JoosN,
INDIA LIMITED
in Goot ol Inda undellaking) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
a) Instructions for erecting, piping, aligning (including the expected thermally
b) A description of rigging procedures, including the lifting of the assembled
c) Pre-commissioning / commissioning / functional test procedures and acceptance
criterion.
d) Lube and Seal oil, Seal Gas/Purge Gas recommendations.
(iv) Operation and Maintenance Manual
a) Instructions covering start-up, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown, operating
b) A description of equipment construction features and the functioning of
c) Outline and sectional drawings, schematics and illustrative sketches in sufficient
equipment.
d) The following maintenance information:
- Maximum and minimum bearing, labyrinth and seal clearances including any
other clearance between moving and stationary parts of the equipment
Instructions for measuring and adjusting cold clearances, shaft runout,
concentricity etc.
- Rotor float allowance.
Interference fits on parts that are required to be removed or replaced for
- Balancing tolerances.
Lubricating schedules indicating recommended grades of oil, their properties,
replacement period etc.
- Normal maintenance procedure including disassembly procedures.
- Preventive maintenance schedules and criterion for replacement of parts.
- Trouble - shooting procedures.
e) The following reassembly information:
- Bolting sequence and torque values for all bolts affecting equipment
- Reassembly sequences together with required inspection checks.
- Adjustment procedures to achieve required positions, clearances, float and so
forth.
Detailed procedures for pre-operational checks, including settings and
adjustments.
Seals and coupling installation procedures.
- Parts list indicating cross-sectional drawings of various assemblies and sub-
assemblies, part numbers, materials of construction (ASTM grades) etc.to
facilitate identification of parts and for procurement of spares.
(v) Following information shall also be included in the Technical Data Manual:
a) Storage instructions for storing and preserving the equipment (including driver
Page 5640 of 8516

IM2-
eg INDIA IJMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
lA Govt ot Ineia Undertalongt COMPRESSORS AND
b) Instructions for preserving the equipment after it has been installed. This is
c) Field performance test procedures and acceptance criterion.
5.3.5.4.3 Technical Data Manual shall be in Hard board folder(s) of size 265 mm x 315 mm and
5.3.5.4.4 Title sheet (Top sheet) of each volume of Technical Data Manual shall contain the contract
5.3.5.4.5 In case order contains more than one item, separate dedicated Technical Data Manuals
5.3.5.4.6 Final drawings & documents shall also be submitted as Electronic Files (preferably in
portable document format i.e. PDF) on CD/DVD's.
Page 5641 of 8516

$'gar 22-eg INDIA LIMITED
,A Govt ot Indo UndettOk«)) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
Chapter 2
Centrifugal and Axial Compressors
Page 5642 of 8516

t31 ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
e5 INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
I ,,cnr1 1,
1 / COMPRESSORS AND
CONTENTS
Page No.

2.5 ROTATING ELEMENTS 23
2.7 BEARINGS AND BEARING HOUSING 23
2.11 NAMEPLATES AND ROTATION ARROWS 23

4.3 TESTING 24
Page 5643 of 8516

rI laWs INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
COMPRESSORS AND
SECTION 1- GENERAL
1.3.2 The vendor for the complete unit shall be an established manufacturer of the type of
Compressors required and he shall also be the manufacturer of the proposed compressors
having adequate design, engineering, manufacturing & testing facilities for the same.
1.3.3 The vendor shall have designed, engineered, packaged, tested and supplied in the last TEN
(10) years, from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) same type of
Compressors which is from the same model series with same type of driver having similar
driver power as offered.
As a minimum, this package shall have completed ONE year of satisfactory operation at
the packager of the complete system proposed and shall have the SINGLE POINT
RESPONSIBILITY for the entire package.
1.3.5 The compressor model offered shall be from the existing compressor model series and shall
be from the regular manufacturing range of the vendor.
The offered compressor model shall meet the following minimum service and
manufacturing experience requirements as specified below:
Compressors shall be identical in Model No./frame size and similar in terms of Power
rating, Inlet and discharge pressures, Inlet temperatures, Actual Inlet flow, Process Gas,
Induction/Extraction Side streams, Speed, Number & Type of Impellers/blades(for axial
compressors), Type of Sealing System, Rotor dynamics, Mechanical Design, Materials,
Bearing span etc. as compared to at least ONE (1) unit designed, manufactured, tested and
supplied from the proposed manufacturing plant in the last TEN (10) years and the
reference unit shall have completed ONE year of satisfactory operation at site, as on the bid
due date.
reference can be cited / considered to satisfy the above qualification requirement.
As an alternative vendor may show to the satisfaction to the purchaser, that the equipment
offered comprises of components each of which individually satisfies the requirements
specified above.
1.3.6 In case the vendor is a licensee and does not meet on his own the above criteria as per
1.3.5, he can substitute the references of his Collaborator (licensor) provided the following
conditions are met by him:
1.3.6.1 The vendor shall be a regular & established manufacturer of specified type of compressor
and shall have supplied smaller & larger frame sizes of compressors from the proposed
manufacturing plant and proves to the satisfaction of the purchaser that he does possess the
manufacturing & testing facilities for the offered compressor.
1.3.6.2 His Collaborator (licensor) meets the criteria as per 1.3.5.
1.3.6.3 I lis license agreement is valid & continues to be valid till atleast TWO years after the
delivery of the compressors. Necessary documents to establish the same shall be furnished
Page 5644 of 8516

zita? ,("ENGINEERS
k31 ,
..1122-egiv.ijw
yP'INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
IA Govt of lndo Undeftaking) COMPRESSORS AND
in proposal.
1.3.6.4 The vendor imports the following critical components from his Collaborator
(licensor)/Collaborator's sub-vendors.
- Impellers and Diffusers, as applicable.
- Complete rotor
Stationary blades in case of axial compressors
- Casing, rough machined. Casing includes all pressure containing parts.
- Bearings
1.3.6.5 His Collaborator (licensor) furnishes the detailed design & drawings for critical sections
such as
- Housings, supply & return arrangements & partitioning arrangements between lube &
seal chamber along with buffer gas induction system.
- Mixing chambers for side stream induction/extraction
- Thrust balance system
1.3.6.6 His Collaborator (licensor) furnishes a written back up guarantee regarding design,
mechanical integrity and performance of the machine equivalent to as if the machines were
manufactured & supplied by the Collaborator (licensor).
1 .3 .7 Proven Track Record (PTR)

The vendor shall complete the Experience Record Proformas as enclosed in the inquiry
specification to amply prove that the Equipments offered meet the EQC for technical
acceptance. Vendor may furnish additional information to justify that the EQC is being
met. In addition, manufacturer's catalogue and general reference list for all the above
equipments shall also be furnished alongwith the proposal.
2.5 ROTATING ELEMENTS
Modular rotors shall not be provided for centrifugal compressors.
2.7 BEARINGS AND BEARING HOUSING
Directed lubricated bearings can also be offered based on compressor manufacturer's
proven experience on similar type and size of bearing that have been used on similar
sizes of machines, bearing spans, and operating speeds.
2.11 NAMEPLATES AND ROTATION ARROWS
Replace the last sentence by "MKS Units shall be used".
Page 5645 of 8516

k.11 ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
Ogz-ir 22-eg
all7n rwenr,
INDIA LIMITED
I A Govt ot Inda UndertaknW COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
Unless otherwise specified, control valve shall be in vendor's scope of supply.
3.4.7 Vibration, Position, and Bearing Temperature Detectors
4.3 TESTING
4.3.1 Mechanical Running Test
In case mechanical run test is performed with shop motor. The compressor is to be operated
at speeds from 30% to MCS in 10% increments and run at the MCS until bearing lube oil
temperature & shaft vibrations have stabilized.
Replace the words "spare rotor" with "spare rotor/cartridge"
4.3.3 Optional Tests (Modification)

Performance test shall be performed on each compressor.
4.3.3.1 Performance Test
(a) The compressor shall be performance tested in accordance with ASME PTC-10, Type
1, wherever feasible. The test procedure containing following information shall be
made available at least 12 weeks prior to test for Purchaser's approval.
1. Interpretation of performance specifications and a detailed statement of the test
objectives.
2. Identification of the type of test (type-1 or type-2) required to meet objectives
and selection of operating conditions to satisfy the limitations outlined in ASME
PTC- I 0.
3. The nature of the test gas, if the design or specified gas cannot be used, and the
means for establishing its physical and thermodynamic properties.
4. Piping arrangement and location of instrumentation.
5. Deviations from Code rules to be applied.
6. Procedure to be used for adjusting test results to specified operating conditions
with respect to test type-1 or type-2.
7. Estimates of possible error in the measurements and methods selected.
8. Test acceptance criteria.
(b) Within two weeks after successful completion of the test, a test report shall be
submitted by the vendor in accordance with section 6 of ASME PTC-10.
Performance data for 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100% and 105% of the speed, as
Page 5646 of 8516

Govt ol InO. Undenalong) COMPRESSORS AND
established on the basis of test results shall form part of the test report.
The test report shall end with a discussion about the test results and final conclusion.
Unless otherwise specified, the rated point shall be the guarantee point. Head and capacity
shall have zero negative tolerance at the guaranteed point and the horsepower at this point
shall be guaranteed with zero positive tolerance including instrument and measuring
tolerances. Surge shall comply with provisions of clause 2.1.1.1.
For variable-speed compressors, a speed other than the vendor' s originally estimated speed
may be used to achieve the guaranteed performance and performance tolerance provided
that:
I. This adjusted speed meets the criteria specified in Chapter 1, 2.6.
2. The adjusted speed does not exceed the 100% speed of the compressor i.e. the
adjusted speed does not encroach on the margin of 5% between 100% speed and
maximum continuous speed, and therefore does not affect in any way the
requirements of impeller overspeed as per clause 4.3.3 of Chapter 1.
For constant speed compressors, the guaranteed capacity shall have zero negative
tolerance. The head shall be within the range of 100% to 102% of the guaranteed head.
Beyond 102% head and up-to 105% head, at purchaser's option, the impellers shall be
trimmed, but the test need not be repeated. Beyond 105% head, the impellers shall be
trimmed and the complete test shall be repeated. The horsepower based on measured head
at guaranteed capacity shall not exceed the value as given by
BKW Test < BKWGuaranteed x [Measured Head / Guaranteed Head]
For multi compressor trains and for compressors with intermediate process stream
pressures, the additional tolerance on individual sectional pressures shall be specified in the
data sheets. But not withstanding the individual sectional tolerance, the overall tolerances
as in clauses 4.3.3.1.2 to 4.3.3.1.4 shall govern.
Page 5647 of 8516

~i7111 ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
Oz-z INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
>117R rwcnr, am,~1, I A Govi ot Incha Undellaking) COMPRESSORS AND
Chapter 3
Integrally Geared Compressors
Page 5648 of 8516

k3dl ENGINEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
evecrwas, IA Govt ol Incha Undertaking) COMPRESSORS AND
CONTENTS
Page No.

2.3 CASINGS 29
2.11 NAMEPLATE AND ROTATION ARROWS 29

4.3 TESTING 29
Page 5649 of 8516

$'gu faWs rril,f,r0”,
INDIA LIMITED
COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
EXPANDER-COM PRESSORS Page 28 of 36
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
1.3.2 The vendor for the complete unit shall be an established manufacturer of Integrally Geared
Centrifugal Compressors (Process Air/Gas) and he shall also be the manufacturer of the
proposed compressors having adequate design, engineering, manufacturing & testing
facilities for the same.
(10) years, from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) Integrally Geared
Centrifugal Compressor which is from the same model series with same type of driver
having similar driver power as offered.
1.3.5 The compressor model offered shall be from the existing compressor model series and shall
be from the regular manufacturing range of the vendor.
The offered compressor model shall meet the following minimum service and
Compressors shall be identical in Model No./frame size and similar in terms of Power
rating, Inlet and discharge pressures, Inlet temperatures, Actual Inlet flow, Process Gas,
Bull Gear / Pinion Speeds, Number of stages, Type of Impellers, Type of Sealing System,
Rotor dynamics, Mechanical Design, Materials etc. as compared to at least ONE (1) unit
designed, manufactured, tested and supplied from the proposed manufacturing plant in the
last TEN (10) years and the reference unit shall have completed ONE year of satisfactory
operation at site, as on the bid due date.
specified above.

Page 5650 of 8516

0.1( 02-dg
' INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertaking) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
(~,r
2.3 CASINGS
2.3.1 Pressure Casings
Unless otherwise specified, vendor will furnish system protection.
2.11 NAMEPLATE AND ROTATION ARROWS
Replace the last sentence by "MKS Units shall be used".
Unless otherwise specified, control valve shall be in vendor's scope of supply.
3.4.7 Vibration, Position, and Bearing Temperature
base facilities.
4.3 TESTING

Performance test shall be carried out on each compressor.
(a) The compressor shall be performance tested in accordance with ASME PTC-10, Type
1, wherever feasible. The test procedure containing following information shall be
made available at least 12 weeks prior to test for Purchaser's approval.
Page 5651 of 8516

g-ar Ofai
dg INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
17110R 24e0,72 ■15 ,105-4,1 in Tool ol Ind. Unctertalong) COMPRESSORS AND
objectives.
Identification of the Type of test (type-1 or type-2) required to meet objectives
2.
and selection of operating conditions to satisfy the limitations outlined in ASME
PTC-10.
3. The nature of the test gas, if the design or specified gas cannot be used, and the
means for establishing its physical and thermodynamic properties.
6. Procedure to be used for adjusting test results to specified operating conditions
with respect to test type-1 or type-2.
(b) Within two weeks after successful completion of the test, a test report shall be
submitted by the vendor in accordance with section 6 of ASME PTC-10.
Performance data for 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100% and 105% of the speed for
variable speed and at 100% speed for constant speed, as established on the basis of
test results shall form part of the test report.
Unless otherwise specified, the rated point shall be the guarantee point. Head and capacity
shall have zero negative tolerance at the guaranteed point and the horsepower at this point
shall be guaranteed with zero positive tolerance including instrument and measuring
tolerances. Surge shall comply with provisions of clause 2.1.1.1.
For variable-speed compressors, a speed other than the vendor's originally estimated speed
may be used to achieve the guaranteed performance and performance tolerance provided
that:
1. This adjusted speed meets the criteria specified in clause 2.6, chapter 1.
2. The adjusted speed does not exceed the 100% speed of the compressor i.e. the
adjusted speed does not encroach on the margin of 5% between 100% speed and
maximum continuous speed, and therefore does not affect in any way the
requirements of impeller overspeed as per clause 4.3.3, chapter 1.
For constant speed compressors, the guaranteed capacity shall have zero negative
tolerance. The head shall be within the range of 100% to 102% of the guaranteed head.
Beyond 102% head and upto 105% head, at purchaser's option, the impellers shall be
trimmed, but the test need not be repeated. Beyond 105')/0 head, the impellers shall be
trimmed and the complete test shall be repeated. The horsepower based on measured head
at guaranteed capacity shall not exceed the value as given by
BKW Test < BKWGuaranteed x [Measured Head / Guaranteed Head]
For compressors with intermediate process stream pressures, the additional tolerance on
individual sectional pressures shall be specified in the data sheets. But not withstanding
the individual sectional tolerance, the overall tolerances as in clauses 4.3.3.1.2 and
4.3.3.1.3 shall govern.
Page 5652 of 8516

02— g INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
INRA ,,Mrcr ,
T1 IA Gns4 of Undeltakng) COMPRESSORS AND
Chapter 4
Expander-Compressors
Page 5653 of 8516

r 1225 INDIA LIMITED
COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
EXPANDER-COM PRESSORS Page 32 of 36
CONTENTS
Page No.

2.1 GENERAL 34
2.3 CASINGS 34

4.3 TESTING 35
Page 5654 of 8516

ENQNEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
IA Govl o11n0a Undertakng) COMPRESSORS AND
SECTION 1 - GENERAL
offered expander-compressor model and its manufacturer.
1.3.2 The vendor for the complete unit shall be an established manufacturer of Expander-
Compressors and he shall also be the manufacturer of the proposed expander- compressors
having adequate design, engineering, manufacturing & testing facilities for the same.
(10) years, from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) Expander -
Compressor which is from the same model series having similar driver power as offered.
1.3.5 The expander-compressor model offered shall be from the existing expander-compressor
model series and shall be from the regular manufacturing range of the vendor.
The offered expander-compressor model shall meet the following minimum service and
Expander Compressors shall be identical in Model no./frame size and similar in terms of
Power rating, Inlet and discharge pressures, Inlet temperatures, Expander outlet
temperature, Actual Inlet flow, Process Gas, Rotor Speeds(Tip speeds), Number of stages,
Type of Impellers, Type of Sealing System, Rotor dynamics, Mechanical Design, Materials
etc. as compared to at least ONE (1) unit designed, manufactured, tested and supplied from
the proposed manufacturing plant in the Last TEN (10) years and the reference unit shall
have completed ONE year of satisfactory operation at site, as on the bid due date.
specified above.

Page 5655 of 8516

Og`w ,12,T77 (111,CD.
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN ot Indo Unclerlalong) COMPRESSORS AND
6-42-0005 Rev. 2
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 Performance
The compressor shall be guaranteed for head and capacity at normal operating point & at
other operating points, if specifically asked for in the inquiry. The expander-compressor
shall give satisfactory performance at all the specified operating points. In addition, the
BKW at normal operating point shall be guaranteed for both the expander (-0% tolerance)
and the compressor (+0% tolerance).
2.1.2 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, vendor shall supply with each expander-compressor stage a
spare centre-section assembly consisting of the assembled rotor with its bearings, seals and
their housing along with metal container for vertical storage. Where two or more
assemblies are identical, only one common spare assembly shall be supplied.
2.3 CASINGS
2.3.1 Pressure Casings
Unless otherwise specified, vendor will furnish system protection.
2.11 NAMEPLATE AND ROTATION ARROWS
2.11.2 (Addition)
MKS Units shall be used.
3.4.2 Vibration, Position, and Bearing Temperature Detectors
3.4.3 Overspeed Shutdown System
Page 5656 of 8516

■
311 ENG1NEERS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
IA Govt of Inda Undertaking) COMPRESSORS AND
3.4.3.4 Permanent Strainer
3.5.1 General
base facilities.
4.3 TESTING

The words "when specified" and "/or" stand deleted.
Performance test shall be carried out on each expander.
Vendor shall furnish his standard test procedure for purchaser's approval at least 12 weeks
prior to test:
Expander efficiency at the normal point shall be guaranteed with zero negative tolerance
including instrument, measuring & test tolerances.
(a) Performance test shall be carried out on each compressor.
(b) Unless otherwise specified, the compressor shall be performance tested in accordance
with ASME PTC-10, Type 1, wherever feasible.
(c) Head and capacity shall have zero percent negative tolerance at normal operating
point and the compressor BKW shall be guaranteed at the normal operating point with
zero percent positive tolerance including instrument, measuring & test tolerances.
Surge shall comply with provisions of clause 2.1.1.2.
4.3.5.1.3 (Delete)
4.3.5.1.5 (New)
The test procedure containing following information shall be made available at least 12
weeks prior to test for Purchaser's approval.
objectives.
2. Identification of the type of test (Type-1 or Type-2) required to meet objectives and
selection of operating conditions to satisfy the limitations outlined in ASME PTC-10.
3. The nature of the test gas, if the design or specified gas cannot be used, and the means
for establishing its physical and thermodynamic properties.
6. Procedure to be used for adjusting test results to specified operating conditions with
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL All rights reserved
Page 5657 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS AXIAL AND CENTRIFUGAL
fgZ:1[ Wi
dg INDIA LIMITED 6-42-0005 Rev. 2
, COMPRESSORS AND
respect to test type-1 or type-2.

Within two weeks after successful completion of the test, a test report shall be submitted by
the vendor in accordance with section 6 of ASME PTC-10. Performance data for 75%,
80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 100% and 105% of the speed, as established on the basis of test
results shall form part of the test report.
Page 5658 of 8516

FOR GENERAL PURPOSE
"Eerr oaageFNDIAst_IMITED
1411771MIE17 JEW. Goo ol inda Uncle/11.91 STEAM TURBINES
6-43-0042 Rev. 2
Page 1 of 14
el I1-11°V1 14 ellsrl afirr eelkell

* fav Trr-gw F4R4vi

GENERAL PURPOSE
STEAM TURBINES

WW4144
2 13.02.13 JSD K DB DM
(Superseding EIL Spec. 6-43-0042 Rev.1)
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
1 13.05.08 JSD NK VKM VC
SPECIFICATION
0 24.07.03 NK KDS RK SKG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5659 of 8516

da
riilaq.JelENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
IA Govt of inea underm n91 STEAM TURBINES Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:

ISA Instrument Society of America

Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anukul Mandal
Mr. Rakesh Mishra
Mr. JS Duggal
Mr. M.P Jain
Page 5660 of 8516

15iliaTle?a ENGINEERS
@a 0151-eg W INDIA LIMITED FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
FA GOA 0 nice Und011akng}
STEAM TURBINES Page 3 of 14
CONTENTS
Page No.
1 SCOPE 4
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES 5
5 REQUIREMENTS
6 BASIC DESIGN 6
6.1 GENERAL 6
6.3 PRESSURE CASINGS 7
6.5 CASING CONNECTIONS 7
6.9 DYNAMICS 7
6.10 BEARING AND HOUSING 7
6.11 LUBRICATION 7
6.12 MATERIALS 7
6.13 NAME PLATES AND ROTATION ARROWS 7
7 ACCESSORIES 7
7.2 COUPLING AND GUARDS 8
7.4 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION 7
8 INSPECTION AND TESTING 8

8.1 GENERAL 8
8.2 INSPECTION 8
8.3 TESTING 8
9 VENDOR'S DATA 8
9.1 GENERAL 8
9.2 PROPOSALS 9
9.3 CONTRACT DATA 9
Page 5661 of 8516

aer ENGINEERS
se-211 INDIA LIMITED FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
wow cow, IA So, of India Undenolonof
1 SCOPE
(i) This specification together with attendant data sheets and other specifications/attachments
to the inquiry/order covers the minimum requirements for General-Purpose Steam
Turbines. These requirements include basic design, materials, related lubrication systems,
controls, auxiliary equipment and accessories.
specification and other specifications/attachments to inquiry/order. In case deviations are
separately listed in the vendor's proposal under separate section titled as "L ist of
deviations/exceptions to the inquiry document". Deviation shall be listed separately for
each document with cross-reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para etc. of the
respective document supported with proper reasons for the deviation for purchaser' s
other portion of the proposal shall not be considered applicable. No deviations or
exceptions shall be permitted without the written approval of the Purchaser.
workmanship to meet the specified start up and operating conditions. In case the vendor
considers requirement of additional instrumentation, controls, safety devices and any other
accessories/auxiliaries essential for safe and satisfactory operation of the equipment, he
shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section along with his proposal
and include the same in his scope of supply.
(iv) Except as modified herein, the general purpose steam turbines and their auxiliaries shall
be designed, fabricated, tested and supplied strictly in accordance with. the API Standard
- 611, Fifth Edition, March 2008, "General Purpose Steam Turbines for Petroleum,
Chemical and Gas Industry Services". All requirements specified in the following
paragraphs are additions, modifications or substitution (as noted in parenthesis) to above
standard and appear in the alphabetical or numerical order as followed in the above
Standard.
Fifth Edition, March 2008. The word in parenthesis following the number or title of a
paragraph indicates the following:
(Deleted) This paragraph is deleted.
Format No. 8-00.0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 5662 of 8516

eleieLNICJNEERS
$1t9. 05regWv INDIA LIMITED FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
,G. a Indm uncietlak.9/ STEAM TURBINES Page 5 of 14
In addition to criteria specified in API, General Purpose Steam turbines may also be used,
subject to market availability & manufacturer's past experience for cases all the
following conditions exists.
1. Inlet Pressure < 60 bar(g)
2. Inlet Temperature < 475 deg C
3. Speed 6000 rpm
4. Turbine Rating < 1500 kW and
5. Driven equipment is usually spared or is in noncritical service.
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCE
2.1 (Addition)
Vendor shall take all the measure to comply with any state or local codes, statutory
regulation, ordinances or rules that are applicable to equipments.
5 REQUIREMENTS
5.1 (Modification)
All data, drawing, hardware and equipment supplied to this standard shall be in SI system
of measurement.

shall govern:
3. P&ID' s (if any)
specified vide para 5.4.2 to 5.4.5 of this specification shall be applied for acceptance of
the offered steam turbine model and its manufacturer.
5.4.2 The vendor shall be an established manufacturer of API 611 General-Purpose Steam
Turbines having adequate design, engineering, manufacturing and testing facilities for the
same.
5.4.3 The Steam Turbine model offered shall be from the existing steam turbine model series
and shall be from the regular manufacturing range of the vendor. The offered steam
turbine model shall meet the minimum service & manufacturers experience requirements
specified in Clause 5.4.4 below.
5.4.4 Steam turbines shall be identical in frame size (Model Number) and similar in terms of
Power rating, Rated Speed, Steam Flow, Steam Inlet Conditions, Steam Exhaust
Conditions, Roto-dynamics, Bearing Span, Mechanical Design and Materials as compared
to at least ONE (I) unit designed, engineered, manufactured, tested and supplied from the
proposed manufacturing plant in the last TEN (10) years and the reference unit shall have
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright DL - All rights reserved
Page 5663 of 8516

iII aENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE
a 0151-egW2) INDIA LIMITED 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
completed ONE (1) year of satisfactory operation at site, as on the bid clue date.
As an alternative, vendor may show to the satisfaction of the purchaser that the equipment
offered is comprised of modules such as Inlet Module, Middle Module & Exhaust
Modules each of which individually satisfies the requirement specified above.
5.4.5 Proven Track Record(PTR)

6 BASIC DESIGN
6.1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified, Table-1 Design criteria & specification for cooling water
system shall be designed for the following condition:
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure 8.0 kg/cm2g
Test Pressure 12.0 kg/cm2g
Unless otherwise specified, the maximum sound pressure level of the turbine shall not
exceed 88 dBA measured at 1 meter from the equipment surface for the recommended
range of operation.Vendor shall supply his recommended type of sound attenuation
device(i.e insulated metal cover or blanket type insulator) to achieve the same.
Motors, electrical/instrument components and electrical/instrument installations shall be
suitable for the area classification specified by the purchaser, and shall meet the
requirements as defined in the electrical/instrument specification attached with the inquiry
/order.
Unless otherwise specified, the vendor shall develop the arrangement of the equipment
including piping & auxiliaries. The arrangement shall provide adequate areas and safe
access for operation and maintenance.
6.1.17 (Addition)
Unless specified otherwise, all back pressure steam turbines shall be provided with
desuperheater if the exhaust temperature of turbine at any operating condition, including
no load exhaust temperature exceeds the exhaust steam header design temperature.
Page 5664 of 8516

zzer ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
Sig e Govt 0 Intha L06010001
6.3 PRESSURE CASINGS
On all turbines, the vendor shall provide automatic draining system using thermodynamic
type steam traps.
6.5 CASING CONNECTIONS
6.5.10(g) (Modification)
6.9 DYNAMICS
The word ìf specified' st ands deleted.
6.10 BEARINGS AND HOUSINGS
The word ìf specified' st ands deleted.
6.11 LUBRICATION
6.1 1.3 (Modification)

The word Ùnless specified otherwise' stands deleted.
6.12 MATERIALS
6.12.2.3(c) The word 'if specified' stands deleted.
MKS and/or SI units are to be shown.
7 ACCESSORIES
7.2 COUPLING AND GUARDS
The word 'if specified' st ands deleted.
7.3 MOUNTING PLATES
7.3.1 General
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment shall be furnished with base plate.
Anchor bolts shall be furnished by the vendor having unit responsibility.
Page 5665 of 8516

laraLoa ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE
sZll Wegill
— tr INDIA LIMITED 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
7.4 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
8 INSPECTION AND TESTING
8.1 GENERAL
The vendor shall notify the purchaser not less than 4 weeks before the date of schedule
testing and reconfirm the same at least one week before the firm test date.
8.2 INSPECTION
The vendor shall list in the proposal, the parts (and the type of examination) that shall be
subjected for surface and sub-surface examination as per vendor's standard practice for
the subject equipment.
8.3 TESTING
Notice period shall be as per paragraph 8.1.6 above.
8.3.3.1(b) (Modification)
The words 'If specified' stand deleted.
The preparation shall be suitable for at least 12 months of outdoor storage from the time
of shipment unless specified otherwise in the inquiry or order. If any extra precaution is to
be taken by the Purchaser for storage beyond 12 months the same shall be explicitly
indicated in the operation and maintenance manuals.
9 VENDOR'S DATA
9.1 GENERAL
The information to be furnished by the vendor is specified in 9.2, 9.3 and purchaser's
Vendor Data Requirements as included in the inquiry document. Vendor shall complete
and forward the document "Do cument control Index (DCI)" to the purchaser.
(Destination and Contact person as per order). No drawing shall be taken up for review
till DCI for the inquiry/order is finalised by vendor.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell_ - All rights reserved
Page 5666 of 8516

1512-a-e? ENGINEERS
sZlf INDIA LIMITED FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
Co. of Lod. unaena,
N) STEAM TURBINES Page 9 of 14
9.2 PROPOSALS (Substitution)
9.2.1 General
The vendor's proposals shall, as a minimum, include the following:
a. All data sheets, drawings and documents listed under "PRINTS WITH QUOTE" in
the Vendor Data Requirement Form enclosed with the inquiry.
b. Vendor's confirmation/comments on post-order Vendor Data Requirements (Type of
Documents, no. of prints and date needed) indicated in Vendor Data Requirement
forms, data sheets and specs.
c. List of recommended commissioning spares included in the offer.
d. List of mandatory spares (where specified by the purchaser) included in the offer.
e. List of Spare Parts for Two Years Normal Operation
the form of a table & shall show
inquiry.
specified in the inquiry
f. An itemised list of special tools included in the offer.
g. Any start-up, shutdown or operating restrictions required to protect the integrity of
the equipment.
h. Any limitations of vendor's test-facility to carryout the specified tests.
i. A specific statement that the scope of supply, the offered equipment/systems and all
its components are in strict accordance with the data sheets, job specifications, this
specifications and all other attachments, except for specific deviations as listed in the
proposal.
Unless a specific deviation/exception is taken by the vendor at the time of submitting
the proposal, it will be understood that fmal equipment/system shall be designed,
fabricated tested and supplied strictly in accordance with Purchaser's specified
requirements as covered in the inquiry or order.
9.3 CONTRACT DETAILS (Substitution)
9.3.1 General
vice versa. Vendor shall complete & forward a document titled as "Vendor Drawing
Schedule" to the purchaser (Destination & contact person as per order). This document
shall list out in consolidated form all drawings and documents required by purchaser (As
specified in Data Sheets, Specifications and Vendor Data Requirement forms enclosed
with the order). Against each drawing/document vendor shall indicate the vendor's
drawing number, title, Rev. No., category (whether for information or approval) and
schedule of submission. This shall be the first document to be submitted by vendor within
two weeks of order.
information:
Page 5667 of 8516

fire ENGINEERS
aarjaWegW: INDIA LIMITED FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2

ii) Project Name.
- As built running clearances and when applicable; thrust bearing, radial bearing and
start-up.
A parts list for all equipment supplied. This list shall include pattern, stock, or
identify each part so that the purchaser may determine the interchange ability of the
At least 8 weeks before shipment, the vendor shall submit equipment preservation,
9.3.2 Drawings
9.3.2.1 The number of prints and/or reproducible required and the times within which these are to
be submitted by vendor are specified in Purchaser's inquiry/order. If specified, drawing
review may be through EDMS/VDOCS in soft as per the details provided elsewhere in the
inquiry document.
in writing. After the drawings have been reviewed, the vendor shall furnish certified
copies in the quantity specified. All drawings must be clearly legible and shall be folded
to 216 mm x 279 mm size. All transparencies shall be rolled.
information:

- Outline dimensions (minimum three views) (All principal dimensions).
- Location (in all three planes), size, type, rating and identification of all purchaser's
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright [IL — All rights reserved
Page 5668 of 8516

&ilfaelesitENCJNEERS
c STANDARD SPECIFICATION
1g-izz fa0egW o‘c...
INDIA LIMITED
inch, unaeu.,s1
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
Direction of rotation, viewing from the driving end.

- Weight of each assembly/component.

Grouting thickness and other necessary technical details.
Static weight of each skid/independently grouted item and location of center of
Weight distribution for each bolt/subsole plate location and total static weight.
The direction and magnitude of unbalance forces and moments generated by each
drivers/generators.
GD2 value of each item resolved to driver speed.
- Maximum permissible amplitude of vibration on the foundation at base level.
This drawing shall include at least the following:

Layout of all skid/equipment and their auxiliaries, vessels, control panels,
allocated, site wind conditions, area classification, the type of equipment located in
the vicinity etc.) indicating elevation and dimension of skids/equipment.
Minimum spacing required between the various skids/equipment and between the
Layout for water piping, trenches for water piping, cable tray/trenches layout.
Piping arrangement and piping support arrangement/location for piping in vendor's
scope.
Layout for auxiliary equipment and operating platform details.
Specification for crane/mono rail (including suggested mono rail layout)
equipment.
Page 5669 of 8516

ENGINEERS
zlr tageg INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, 0 in. undeptaion9)
FOR GENERAL PURPOSE
STEAM TURBINES
6-43-0042 Rev. 2
Page 12 of 14
The diagram shall indicate the relative displacement to be kept between the centerlines
of various equipments at the time of installation, so that under normal running
conditions the equipments get fully aligned. This relative displacement should be
decided on the basis of centerline temperature rise data of driver, gear
box/transmission system, driven equipment.

vendor's scope of supply or specified in the order. P&I Diagram shall indicate the system
details, location of various auxiliaries, instruments, controls and safety devices as
required. Line sizes, piping class, valve sizes and class shall be clearly marked on the
P&ID. Vendor's scope and purchaser's scope shall be clearly demarcated. Each item
shall be identified by an item No./item tag no., which shall correspond to the item no.
shown on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include items number, normal
value, set value, range, quantity per unit, make and other specifications as applicable.
correspond to the part number on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include
the part no., name of component, materials quantity installed per unit & sizes where
applicable (say for bolts, nuts, rings, gaskets etc.). All boughtout items shall also be
indicated with make and brief specifications.
9.3.3 Curves
The vendor shall provide the following performance curves:

a. Steam Flow versus Power for various settings of the hand-valve or valves when the
turbines are operating at normal speed.
b. For multi-stage turbines, first stage pressure versus steam flow, when the turbines are
operating at normal speed and normal steam conditions.
9.3.4 Installation, Operation, Maintenance and Technical Data Manuals (Modification)
9.3.4.1 Technical Data Manual is a compilation of "As Built" drawings and data, manufacturing
9.3.4.2 Not later than two weeks after successful completion of all specified tests, the vendor shall
furnish the required number of Technical Data Manuals for the equipment, any auxiliaries
and instruments that the vendor is providing. The Technical Data Manual shall include
Page 5670 of 8516

lara_ielaa ENGINEERS FOR GENERAL PURPOSE
$ig- It @Oleg W;. INDIA LIMITED 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
IA GAN of Ado UneenaAngl
the following documents as a minimum:

(i) All drawings and data as listed in the vendor data index & schedule. (For drawings,
(ii) All manufacturing, inspection and test data and records.

procedures, utility specifications (including quantity) and all installation data. It shall
also contain the following information:
induced shaft centerline shift between normal site ambient temperature
position and that at normal equipment operating temperature).
c) Pre-commissioning / commissioning / functional test procedures and
acceptance criterion.
a) Instructions covering start-up, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown,
operating limits and routine operational procedures.
component parts or systems (such as control, lubrication, sealing systems
etc.).
c) Outline and sectional drawings, schematics and illustrative sketches in
sufficient details to identify all parts and clearly show the operation of all
equipment and components and the methods of inspection and repair.
Standardised sectional drawings are acceptable only if they represent the
actual construction of the equipment.
- Maximum and minimum bearing, labyrinth and seal clearances including
any other clearance between moving and stationary parts of the equipment
- Instructions for measuring and adjusting cold clearances, shaft runout,
concentricity etc.
- Interference fits on parts that are required to be removed or replaced for
Balancing tolerances.
- Lubricating schedules indicating recommended grades of oil, their
Trouble-shooting procedures.
Page 5671 of 8516

02-Z•? ENGINEERS FOR GENERAL PURPOSE
51g7 tat5reg INDIA LIMITED 6-43-0042 Rev. 2
IA Govt on oda Uneensongi

- Adjustment procedures to achieve required positions, clearances, float
and so forth.
- Detailed procedures for pre-operational checks, including settings and
adjustments.
Seals and coupling installation procedures.
- Parts list indicating cross-sectional drawings of various assemblies and
sub-assemblies, part numbers, materials of construction (ASTM grades)
etc. to facilitate identification of parts and for procurement of spares.
(v) Following information shall also be included in the Technical Data Manual :
a) Storage instructions for storing and preserving the equipment (including
driver and all the auxiliary units) at the plant site before installation of the
same
9.3.4.3 Technical Data Manual shall be in Hard board folder(s) of size 265 mm x 315 mm and
9.3.4.4 Title sheet (Top sheet) of each volume of Technical Data Manual shall contain the contract
9.3.4.6 Two sets of final drawing and documents shall also be submitted as Electronic
Files (preferably in portable document format i.e. PDF) on CD-ROMs.
Page 5672 of 8516

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
Of =t— dg
t-froactottJtattsv3, IA Govt of Incha Unctertaloog)
I 1=039. Z-
4k4f

SPECIAL PURPOSE
STEAM TURBINES

2 16.06.14 RM NK DB/ AKN SC
SPECIFICATION
1 18.03.09 DB VKM ND
SPECIFICATION
0 24.07.03 NK KDS RK SKG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5673 of 8516

mei- INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
4-11i71 F12",517 ,fit J,
72.4) IA Govt of Ind,a Undettaking)
Abbreviations:

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISO International Organisation for Standardisation
MKS Meter-Kilogram-Seconds unit
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
S1 International System of units

Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr. Rakesh Misra
Mr. J.S. Duggal
Mr K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
Page 5674 of 8516

k-11 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
f&.ji Offieg INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
IfAIZ'n cf-frout on 3fAA-A) IA GoA of Intha Undertak.ng)
CONTENTS
Page No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
1.1 GENERAL 4
4.0 DIMENSIONS 5
5.0 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS 5
6.0 BASIC DESIGN 6

6.1 GENERAL 6
9.0 ROTOR DYNAMICS 7
10.0 BEARINGS, BEARING HOUSINGS AND SEALS 7

10.5 SHAFT SEALS 7
15.0 ACCE SSORIE S 7

15.4 RELIEF VALVES 7
15.5 LUBRICATION AND CONTROL-OIL SYSTEM 8
15.7 INSULATION AND JACKETING 8
15.8 TURNING GEAR 8
16.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT 8

16.1 GENERAL 8
16.2 INSPECTION 8
17.0 VENDOR'S INFORMATION 8

17.1 GENERAL 9
17.2 PROPOSALS 9
Page 5675 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
sI ei I cic INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
1.11771 00201, A11 .3,:1~) IA Govt of Indla Uncleflakngt
1.1 GENERAL
(i) This specification together with attendant data sheets and other
specifications/attachments to the inquiry/order covers the minimum requirements for
Special-Purpose Steam Turbines. These requirements include basic design, materials and
related lubrication systems, controls, auxiliary equipment and accessories.
specification and other specifications/attachments to inquiry/order. In case deviations are
separately listed in the vendor's proposal under separate section titled as "List of
deviations/exceptions to the inquiry document." Deviation shall be listed separately for
each document with cross-reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para etc. of the
respective document supported with proper reasons for the deviation for purchaser's
other portion of the proposal shall not be considered applicable. No deviations or
exceptions shall be permitted without the written approval of the Purchaser.
workmanship to meet the specified start up and operating conditions. In case the vendor
considers requirement of additional instrumentation, controls, safety devices and any
other accessories/auxiliaries essential for safe and satisfactory operation of the
equipment, he shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section along
(iv) Except as modified herein, the special purpose steam turbine and their auxiliaries shall
be designed, fabricated, tested and supplied strictly in accordance with the API
Standard - 612, Sixth Edition, November 2005, "Petroleum, Petrochemical and
Natural Gas Industries- Steam Turbines — Special-Purpose Applications". All
requirements specified in the following paragraphs are additions, modifications or
substitution (as noted in parenthesis) to above standard and appear in the alphabetical or
numerical order as followed in the above Standard.
Sixth Edition, November 2005. The word in parenthesis following the number or title
of a paragraph indicates the following:
(Modification) An amplification or rewording has been made to a part of
the corresponding section or paragraph but not a substitution
(Substitution) A substitution has been made for the corresponding section
or paragraph of the standard in its totality.
(New) A new section or paragraph having no corresponding
section or paragraph in the Standard.
(Deleted) This paragraph is deleted.
Page 5676 of 8516

5gi-ar Of5leg INDIA LIMITED
1~, A IA Govl of Indla UndenakIng)
FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
1.2 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
shall govern:
3. P&ID's (if any)
1.3.1 The vendor shall be an established manufacturer of Special-Purpose Steam Turbine(As

per API Standard 612) and shall also be the manufacturer of the proposed steam turbine,
having adequate engineering, manufacturing and testing facilities for the same.
1.3.3 The Steam Turbine model offered shall be from existing regular manufacturing range of
the vendor and shall meet the following experience requirements:
1.3.4 The offered Steam Turbine shall be identical in terms of frame size (Model Number),
number of controlled extractions/Inductions and similar in terms of Power rating(kW),
Maximum Torque, Rated Speed, Speed range, Inlet Steam Flow, Steam Inlet
Conditions, Bearing Span, Steam Extraction Conditions, Steam Exhaust Conditions,
Roto-dynamics, Mechanical Design and Materials as compared to at least ONE (1) unit
Last TEN (10) years which has completed ONE (1) year of satisfactory operation at site as
on bid due date.
As an alternative, vendor may show to the satisfaction of the purchaser that the
equipment offered is comprised of modules such as Inlet Module, Middle Module(s) &
Exhaust Modules, each of which individually satisfies the requirement specified above.
1.3.5 Proven Track Record
acceptance.
Vendor may furnish additional information to justify that the EQC is being met. In
addition, manufacturer's catalogue and general reference list for all the above
4.0 DIMENSIONS (Substitution)
Drawings and maintenance dimensions shall be in MKS and / or SI units. Use of an EIL
datasheet indicates that MKS units shall be used.
5.0 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS (Substitution)
Vendor shall take all the measures to comply with any state or local codes, statutory
Page 5677 of 8516

kil -it ENGNEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
g _..11 22—
eg INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
1.1E-01,,,q”,4,1~) lA Govt al India Undertalong)
regulations, ordinances or rules that are applicable to the equipment.
6.0 BASIC DESIGN
6.1 GENERAL
Turbine shall be capable of the following:
(a) Delivering the turbine rated power at its corresponding speed with coincident
minimum specified steam inlet conditions, maximum specified steam exhaust
conditions and specified normal steam extraction/induction flows.
(b) Delivering the specified power (if any) at its corresponding speed with coincident
minimum specified steam inlet conditions, maximum specified steam exhaust
condition and zero steam extraction/ induction flows.
(c) Continuous operation at maximum continuous speed and at any other speed within
the range specified with a maximum continuous speed of atleast 105 % of rated
speed.
(d) Continuous operation at turbine rated power and speed with maximum specified
steam inlet conditions and minimum or maximum specified steam exhaust condition,
and normal to maximum specified steam extraction/induction flows.
(e) Continuous operation at the lowest speed at which maximum torque is required with
minimum specified steam inlet conditions and maximum specified exhaust
conditions with normal to maximum steam extraction/induction flows.
(f) Operation with variations from rated steam conditions and steam purity limits as per
NEMA SM 23 or IEC 60045-1
(g) Operation uncoupled/no load operation for alternator sets with maximum specified
steam inlet conditions.
The line Ìf specified, the vendor's representative shall witness one or more of the
following:' shall be read as "The vendor's representative shall witness all of the
following:'
Unless otherwise specified, cooling water system shall be designed for the following
condition:
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure > 8.0 kg/cm2g
Test Pressure >12.0 kg/cm2g
Maximum Inlet Temperature 33 °C
Maximum Outlet Temperature 45 °C
Fouling Factor on Water Side 0.0004 m2 hr °C/kcal
Unless otherwise specified, the maximum sound pressure level of the turbine shall not
exceed 88 dBA measured at 1 meter from the equipment surface for the recommended
range of operation.
Motors, electrical/instrument components and electrical/instrument installations shall be
Page 5678 of 8516

?If s INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
,,cnr,M13,~1 IA Govt ot Incha UnOettakingt
suitable for the area classification specified by the purchaser, and shall meet the
requirements as defined in the electrical/instrument specification attached with the
inquiry /order.
MKS and/or SI Units shall be shown on the nameplate.
9.0 ROTOR DYNAMICS
This clause shall be substituted with the following:
Ùnless otherwise specified, for machinery trains with rigid coupling a train lateral
analysis shall be performed.
10.0 BEARINGS, BEARING HOUSINGS AND SEALS
10.3.6 The words 'when specified' stand deleted.
10.5 SHAFT SEALS
The words ùnless otherwise specified' stand deleted.
12.3.1.3 The words Ìf specified' stand deleted
15.0 ACCESSORIES
15.3 MOUNTING PLATES
15.3.1 General
15.3.1. 1 (Modification)
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment shall be furnished with base plate.
When levelling plates are required, as recommended by the vendor, they shall be steel
plates at least 19 millimeter (3/4 inch) thick. They shall be circular in shape in the plan
view. These levelling plates shall be supplied by the vendor.
15.3.2 Baseplates
Where recommended by the vendor, subplates shall be provided by the vendor.
15.3.3 Soleplates and Sub-plates
15 .3 .3c) (Modification)
Where recommended by the vendor, subplates shall be furnished by the vendor.
15.4 RELIEF VALVES
Page 5679 of 8516

INIZR
OffiCg
031.3,701.0
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol Incita Underlaking)
15.5 LUBRICATION AND CONTROL-OIL SYSTEM
15.7 INSULATION AND JACKETING
Unless otherwise specified, turbines shall be insulated and jacketed and the same shall be
supplied by the vendor.
15.8 TURNING GEAR
Unless otherwise specified, turning device shall be driven by an electrical motor.
The turning gear rotational speed shall be as recommended by the vendor.
A turning gear operating stations with associated control features shall be provided and
detailed out by the vendor.
When spreader beams or other special lifting devices are required for installation or
maintenance, they shall be provided by the vendor for permanent retention by the owner.
15.10 (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, vent silencers shall be supplied by vendor at steam turbine
inlet, extraction and discharge (for back pressure turbine). These silencers shall be loose
supplied by the vendor.
16.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
16.1 GENERAL
The vendor shall notify the purchaser not less than 4 weeks before the date of schedule
testing and reconfirm the same at least one week before the farm test date.
16.2 INSPECTION
16.2.3 Mechanical Inspection
The preparation shall make the equipment suitable for 12 months of outdoor storage
from the time of shipment unless otherwise specified in the inquiry or order. If any
Page 5680 of 8516

■
.31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
2f5le'gW INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
Govt of lndia Undertaking)
extra precaution is to be taken by the purchaser for storage beyond 12 months, the same
shall be explicitly indicated in the operations and maintenance manual.
17.0 VENDOR'S INFORMATION
17.1 GENERAL
The information to be furnished by the vendor is specified in 17.2, 17.3 and in the
Vendor Data Requirement forms.
17.2 PROPOSALS

The vendor' s proposals shall, as a minimum, include the following:
a. All data sheets, drawings and documents listed under "PRINTS WITH QUOTE" in
the Vendor Data Requirement Form enclosed with the inquiry.
b. Vendor's confirmation/comments on post-order Vendor Data Requirements (Type
of Documents, no. of prints and date needed) indicated in Vendor Data Requirement
forms, data sheets and specs.
c. List of recommended commissioning spares included in the offer.
d. List of mandatory spares (where specified by the purchaser) included in the offer.
e. List of Spare Parts for Two Years Normal Operation
the form of a table & shall show
inquiry.
f. An itemised list of special tools included in the offer.
g. Any start-up, shutdown or operating restrictions required to protect the integrity of
the equipment.
h. Any limitations of vendor's test-facility to carryout the specified tests.
i. A specific statement that the scope of supply, the offered equipment/systems and all
its components are in strict accordance with the data sheets, job specifications, this
specifications and all other attachments, except for specific deviations as listed in
the proposal.
Unless a specific deviation/exception is taken by the vendor at the time of submitting the
proposal, it will be understood that final equipment/system shall be designed, fabricated
tested and supplied strictly in accordance with Purchaser's specified requirements as
covered in the inquiry or order.
17.2.2 Drawings
The drawings indicated in the Vendor Data Requirement (forming part of inquiry
document) under PRINTS WITH QUOTE shall be included in the proposal.
17.2.3 Technical Data
17.2.3(g) (Substitution)
Vendor shall also furnish a consolidated list of all consumables which need to be
Page 5681 of 8516

■
31 ENGNEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
1&.1121551-
1 ~,1 e1,44c,171 ~1 1/4 Govt of Inda Undertalong)
replaced/replenished periodically (like lube oil, seal oil, greases, any cleaning agent
etc.), indicating the total quantity required for the period of commissioning/start-up and
one year continuous operation of the unit.
17 .2.3(j) (Substitution)
A list of installations, prepared in a manner so as to give explicit evidence that the
offered equipment amply meets the specified design, manufacturing and experience
requirements.
17.2.5 Quality Assurance Procedures (New)

Vendor shall furnish his standard QA procedure, duly modified as per the requirements
of inquiry for the offered equipment.
17.3 CONTRACT DATA
Requirement. Vendor to note that the drawing/document descriptions/titles as given in
the Vendor Data Requirement are generic in nature. It is possible that against one
vice versa. Vendor to note that, the submission of all post order drawing & documents
shall be done through EIL Electronic Document Management System (eDMS) portal.
Vendor shall complete & forward the Document Control Index (DCI) to the purchaser
(Destination & contact person as per order) through above eDMS portal.
purchaser vide VDR as included in the purchase requisition. Any other data, drawing/
document as specified in Data Sheets and Specifications shall also be included by the
vendor in the DCI. Against each drawing/document, vendor shall populate their list of
document indicating the vendor's drawing numbers, titles, Rev. No. and schedule of
submission.
vendor.
information:
ii) Project Name.
17.3.1.4 All vendor data/drawings/documents shall be in English Language and in Metric

Systems.
Page 5682 of 8516

.-12.-it4 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
I&JI Iffi4--e-g INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
(~trieco,A11~31) IA Govt ol lndo undeltak»g)
- A supplementary list of spare parts other than those included in his original
proposal. The supplementary list shall include recommended spare parts, cross-
sectional or assembly type drawings, parts numbers, materials, prices and delivery
period. The vendor shall forward this supplementary list to the purchaser promptly
after receipt of the reviewed drawings and in time to permit order and delivery of
parts before field start-up.
- A parts list for all equipment supplied. This list shall include pattern, stock, or
production drawing numbers and materials of construction. The list shall
completely identify each part so that the purchaser may determine the
interchangeability of the parts with other equipment furnished by the same
manufacturer. Standard purchased items shall be identified by the original
manufacturer's name and part number.
- At least 8 weeks before shipment, the vendor shall submit equipment preservation,
17.3.2 Drawings and technical data (Substitution)
17.3.2.1 The timeframe within which the drawings are to be submitted by vendor are specified in
Purchaser's inquiry/order.
in writing. After the drawings have been reviewed, certified copies shall be submitted by
vendor as a part of final documents (Technical Data Manual/Mechanical catalogues) in the
specified quantity. A11 drawings must be clearly legible and shall be submitted A4 or A3
paper sizes (except overall layout/ Foundation/ GA drawings which shall be submitted in
A2 paper sizes). Documents in higher paper size shall be submitted in exceptional
circumstances or as indicated in the enquiry/ contract document(s).
17. 3 .2 .3 Drawings/documents with following titles shall contain as a minimum the following
information:

- Outline dimensions (minimum three views) (A11 principal dimensions).
- Location (in all three planes), size, type, rating and identification of all
purchaser's interface connections including those of vents, drains lubricating oil,
sealing fluid, cooling water, steam & Electrical/Instrumentation.
- Direction of rotation, viewing from the driving end.
- Weight of each assembly/component.
Page 5683 of 8516

-̀-ilf- _.it4 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
gr_il 22eg
I.R"N swcort, O51JfIfif.0
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of indo Undenak.ng)

- Grouting thickness type of grout material, its recommended make & grade.
- Static weight of each skid/independently grouted item and location of centre of
- Weight distribution for each bolt/subsole plate location and total static weight.
- The direction and magnitude of unbalance forces and moments generated by each
drivers/generators.
- GD2 value of each item resolved to driver speed.
- Maximum permissible amplitude of vibration on the foundation at base level.

- Layout of all skid/equipment and their auxiliaries, vessels, control panels,

- Minimum spacing required between the various skids/equipment and between the
- Layout for water piping, trenches for water piping, cable tray/trenches layout.
- Piping arrangement and piping support arrangement/location for piping in
vendor's scope.
- Layout for auxiliary equipment and operating platform details.
- Specification for crane/mono rail (including suggested mono rail layout)
recommended for maintenance and height of the lifting hook from the centerline
of equipment.

centerlines of various equipments at the time of installation, so that under normal
should be decided on the basis of centerline temperature rise data of driver, gear

Heat exchanger drawing and data shall include heat and mass balance data, details
of provisions for separating and withdrawing the condensate, construction details,
Page 5684 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
gz.11 22-
(.11,en an~) IA Govt of Inda Undenak.9)
cross sections & general arrangement drawings of heat exchangers, vendors


system details, location of various auxiliaries, instruments, controls and safety devices as
required. Line sizes, piping class, valve sizes and class shall be clearly marked on the
P&ID. Vendor's scope and purchaser's scope shall be clearly demarcated. Each item
shall be identified by an item No./item tag no., which shall correspond to the item no.
shown on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include items number, normal
value, set value, range, quantity per unit, make and other specifications as applicable.

where applicable (say for bolts, nuts, rings, gaskets etc.). All boughtout items shall also
be indicated with make and brief specifications.
17.3.4 Installation, Operation, Maintenance and Technical Data Manuals/ Mechanical

Catalogue (Substitution)
17.3.4.1 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue (Substitution)

Technical Data Manual is a compilation of "As Built" drawings and data, manufacturing
17.3.4.2 Not Tater than two weeks after successful completion of all specified tests, the vendor
shall furnish the required number of Technical Data Manuals for the equipment, any
auxiliaries and instruments that the vendor is providing. The Technical Data Manual
shall include the following documents as a minimum:
(i) A11 drawings and data as listed in the vendor data index & schedule. (For drawings,
where purchaser's approval is required, the final certified drawings shall be
attached.)
Sections shall be organised in a manner that data & drawings related to one subject
is grouped together such as Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation etc.
(ii) A11 manufacturing, inspection and test data and records.

induced shaft centerline shift between normal site ambient temperature
Page 5685 of 8516

11 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
fd2e-g1W' INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
sfivn ewergz nn 3,
■ 10.1) IA Govt of India Undertak.ng)

c) Pre-commissioning / commissioning / functional test procedures and
acceptance criterion.
This manual shall provide sufficient written instructions and data to enable
purchaser to correctly operate and maintain the equipment ordered. It shall include
a section to cover special instructions for operation at extreme environmental and/or
extreme operating conditions. The following shall be included in this manual:
a) Instructions covering start-up, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown,
component parts or systems (such as control, lubrication, sealing systems
etc.).
c) Outline and sectional drawings, schematics and illustrative sketches in
Standardised sectional drawings are acceptable only if they represent the
actual construction of the equipment.
- Maximum and minimum bearing, labyrinth and seal clearances including
any other clearance between moving and stationary parts of the
equipment affecting proper running and maintenance of the equipment.
- Instructions for measuring and adjusting cold clearances, shaft runout,
concentricity etc.
- Interference fits on parts that are required to be removed or replaced for
- Balancing tolerances.
- Lubricating schedules indicating recommended grades of oil, their
- Trouble - shooting procedures.
- Adjustment procedures to achieve required positions, clearances, float
and so forth.
- Detailed procedures for pre-operational checks, including settings and
adjustments.
- Seals and coupling installation procedures.
- Parts list indicating cross-sectional drawings of various assemblies and
sub-assemblies, part numbers, materials of construction (ASTM grades)
etc. to facilitate identification of parts and for procurement of spares.
Page 5686 of 8516

01 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
INDIA LIMITED FOR SPECIAL PURPOSE 6-43-0043 Rev. 2
1~1,1,9,11,6,7,10.1, IA Govl of lndw Undertak.9)
(v) Following information shall also be included in the Technical Data Manual :
a) Storage instructions for storing and preserving the equipment (including
same.
17.3.4.3 Technical Data Manual shall be in hard board folder(s) of size 265 mm x 315 mm and
17.3.4.4 Title sheet (Top sheet) of each volume of Technical Data Manual shall contain the
contract information as defined under clause 17.3.1.2 besides the volume number.
17.3.4.6 Two (2) sets of Final / "As-Built" drawings / documents shall also be submitted as
electronic files on secondary storage media (CD-ROM / DVD-ROM disks).
Page 5687 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
1.17,1
eg w INDIA LIMITED
QUI taffl- FORCED DRAFT FANS
IA Govl of Intha Undertakm9)
Page 1 of 23
rsv-s (91 1.

INDUCED DRAFT/FORCED DRAFT
FANS
3 28.11.13 Revised & Issued as Standard Specification MG "' NK DB SC
2 13.05.08 Reaffirmed & Issued as Standard Specification JSD NK VKM VC
1 01.09.03 Revised & Issued as Standard Specification NK KDS RK SKG
0 17.03.98 Issued as Standard Specification PS KDS SKG AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5688 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
■
.12'n In Go. of Ind. Underlakingf FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 2 of 23
Abbreviations:
AMCA Air Movement & Control Association
DCI Document Control Index
DCS Distributed Control System
FD Forced Draft
ID Induced Draft
LCP Local Control Panel
LGB Local Gauge Board
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
VDOCS Vendor Data Requirements
VFD Variable Frequency Drive


Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anukul Mandal
Mr Rakesh Misra
Mr JS Duggal

Page 5689 of 8516

ENGINEERS
fs~rr farZ5 INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
1~1 F22,12,
1,1,1,1.«) IA Govt of Intlla UndertaMing)
FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 3 of 23
Contents
Page No.
General 4
1.1 Scope 4
1.2 Alternative designs 5
1.3 Conflicting requirements 5
1.4 Referenced publications 5
1.5 Equipment qualification criteria .5
Amendments to ANNEX E of API standard 560

E. 1 Definition of terms 7
E.2 General 7
E.2.2 Fan housing 9
E. 2.3 Fan housing connection 9
E.2.5 Rotating elements 9
E.2.6 Shaft sealing of fans 10
E.2.7 Critical speeds/resonance 10
E.2.8 Vibration and balancing 10
E.2.9 Bearings and bearing housings 10
E.2.1 0 Lubrication 10
E.2.11 Materials 10
E.3.2 Accessories 11
E.3.2 Drivers I1
E.3.3 Couplings and guards 11
E.3.4 Controls and instrumentation 12
E.3.4.3 Dampers or variable inlet vanes 12
E.3.5 Piping and appurtenances 12
E.3.6 Coatings, insulation and jacketting 12
E.4 Inspection and testing 13
E.4.3 Preparation for shipment 14
E.5 Vendor data 14
Appendix A - Fluid coupling 21
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL All rights reserved
Page 5690 of 8516

ENGINEERS
2,2,7 151,05717 fF Govt of india Undertaking) FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 4 of 23
General
1.1 Scope
This specification together with the attendant data sheets and other specifications /
attachments to the inquiry document defines the minimum requirements for the design,
manufacture, inspection, testing and supply of Induced Draft (ID) and Forced Draft (FD)
Fans and their auxiliaries, for use in refinery based furnace/heater installations and other
process applications.
1.1.2 Vendor shall make all possible efforts to comply strictly to the requirements of this
1n case deviations are considered essential by the vendor (after exhausting all possible
separately for each document with cross-reference to Page No./Section/Clause No./Para
No deviation or exception shall be pennitted without the written approval of the purchaser.
1.1.3 Compliance with this specification shall not relieve the vendor of the responsibility of
devices and any other accessories/auxiliaries essential for safe and satisfactory operation
of the equipment, he shall recommend the same along with reasons in a separate section
1.1.4 Except as modified herein, the ID/FD Fans and their auxiliaries shall be designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied strictly in accordance with the Annex E of API
Standard 560, Fourth Edition, Aug 2007 "Fired Heaters for General Refinery
Service."
1.1.5 Except for new paragraphs, the number and title of the paragraphs in the following
Modifications to Annex E of API Standard 560correspond to the respective clauses and
sub-clauses of the above standard. Clauses not addressed in this specification shall be
strictly in accordance to Annex E of API Standard 560, Fourth Edition, Aug 2007
requirements.
The word in parenthesis following the number or title of a clause indicates the following:
(Addition) • An addition to a clause or sub-clause referred to.
(Modification) • An amplification or rewording has been made to a part of the
corresponding clause / sub-clause but not a substitution replacing
the entire clause/ sub-clause.
(substitution) • A substitution has been made for the corresponding clause / sub-
clause.
(New) • A new clause / sub-clause having no corresponding clause / sub-
clause in the Standard.
(Delete) This clause / sub-clause is deleted.
1.2 Alternative designs

The vendor shall not offer any alternative designs for proposal requirements.

Page 5691 of 8516

-

ENGINEER.S
5gi LIC INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
■
•ww-r, t-f,aadadvd,a) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
1.3 Conflicting requirements

specifications (if any) and other attached specifications the following order of precedence
shall govern:
3. P&ID's (if any)
1.4 Referenced publications

Unless otherwise specified, the editions of the following standards, codes and
specifications that are in effect at the time of issue of this specification shall, to the extent
specified herein form a part of this specification.

Std. 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
Std. 801 - Industrial Process / Power Generation Fans — Specification
Guidelines
Std. 802 - Industrial Process / Power Generation Fans — Establishing
Performance using Laboratory Models
Std. 803 Industrial Process / Power Generation Fans — Site Performance Test
Standard

Std. 677 - General Purpose Gear Units for Petroleum, Chemical, and Gas
Industry Services
ASME The American Society of Mechanical Engineering

PTC-11 Large Industrial fans.
BSI British Standards Institution

BS:848 Fans for general purpose
Part-1 Methods for testing performance

IS:4894 Specification for Centrifugal Fans
ISO International Organisation for Standardisation

ISO:1940 - Balancing qualities of Rotating rigid bodies.
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers

Std. MR0103 Materials Resistant to Sulfide Stress Cracking in Corrosive Petroleum
Refining Environments
offered Fan model and its manufacturer.
1.5.2 (a) The vendor shall be an established ID/FD Fan manufacturer having adequate design,
engineering, manufacturing and testing facilities for fans and shall be the single point
responsibility vendor for the complete fan package.
Page 5692 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS
122es INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
,F,21,17 R.31 ,N,I,
T1 IA Go, of India Unde,taking)
(b) The vendor shall have designed, engineered, packaged, tested and supplied, in the last
TEN (10) years, from the proposed manufacturing plant, at least ONE (1) ID/FD fan
package which is from the same model series with similar type of drive arrangement* &
type of driver having similar driver power. As a minimum, this package shall have
completed ONE Year of satisfactory operation at site, as on the bid due date.
(*.. dual drive, variable Irequeney drive, variable speed through fluid coupling etc.)
1.5.3 The ID/FD Fan model offered shall be from the existing regular manufacturing range of
the vendor. The offered ID/FD Fan model shall meet the following minimum service and
manufacturing experience requirements:
ID/FD Fan proposed shall be identical in terms of model and similar in terms of power
rating, flow rates, differential pressure, operating pressure & temperature, gas handled,
speed range, type of drive, impeller diameter, type of impeller blades, mechanical design,
materials, etc. as compared to at least ONE UNIT designed, manufactured, tested and
supplied from the proposed manufacturing plant in the last TEN years and as a minimum
this unit shall have completed ONE year of satisfactory operation at site, as on bid due
date.
More than one past supply reference can be cited to meet the qualification requirement.
1.5.4 In case, the vendor is a licensee and does not meet on his own the above criteria as per
1.5.3, he can substitute the references of his Collaborator (licensor) provided the following
conditions are met.
1.5.4.1 The vendor shall be regular & established manufacturer of ID/FD fans and shall have
supplied smaller & larger sizes of ID/FD fans from the proposed manufacturing plant and
proves to the satisfaction of the purchaser that he does possess the manufacturing & testing
facilities for the offered ID/FD fan(s).
1.5.4.2 His Collaborator (licensor) meets the criteria as per 1.5.3.
1.5.4.3 His license agreement is valid and continues to remain valid till, at-least TWO years after
the delivery of the ID/FD fans.
1.5.4.4 His Collaborator (licensor) furnishes a written back up guarantee regarding design,
mechanical integrity and performance of the equipment equivalent to as if the equipment
were manufactured & supplied by the Collaborator (licensor).
1.5.5 Proven Track Record
Vendor shall complete the Experience Record Proforma's enclosed with the inquiry
document to amply prove that the offered ID/FD Fans meet the EQC for technical
met. In addition, manufacturer's catalogue and general reference list for ID/FD Fans shall
also be furnished along with the proposal.
Page 5693 of 8516

ENGINEERS
tatt-
,v-tv,
nrem.ittrsiml IA Govt of Indta Undettakingt FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 7 of 23
Amendments to Annex E of API standard 560
E.1 Definition of terms
E.1.4 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, fan vendor shall certify & guarantee the performance of the
fan at the rated point.
E.1.3 (Modification)
Note-1 of this clause stands deleted.
E.1.15 (New)
Witness Inspection and testing means that a hold shall be applied to the production
schedule and the test carried out with the purchaser/purchaser's representative in
attendance.
E.1.16 (New)
Observed Inspection and testing means that the purchaser requires notification of the test
timing. However, the test is performed as scheduled, and if the purchaser/purchaser's
representative is not present the vendor can conduct the test without waiting for the
purchaser/purchaser's representative.
E.2.1 General
E.2.1.1 (Addition)
The vendor shall develop arrangement of the fan & driver equipment including ducting
and auxiliaries in accordance with the purchaser's requirement particularly with regard to
the orientation of inlet & outlet connections of the fan. The arrangement shall provide
adequate clearance areas and safe access for operation, maintenance, and removal. The
vendor shall also indicate recommended location of operating/maintenance platforms,
around the fan-driver unit, if required.
E.2.1.4 (Substitution)
Motors & instruments shall be as per the electrical & instrumentation specifications
enclosed with inquiry / order.
E.2.1.5 (Modification)
The last sentence of the paragraph shall be modified to read as under:
If recommended by the vendor, the requirement of field dowelling (if required after final
alignment) shall be indicated on the General Arrangement Drawing.
The words "unless otherwise specified" stands deleted.
Fan design considerations
The rated speed of the Forced Draft/Induced Draft fan shall not exceed 1000 rpm unless
otherwise approved by purchaser.
For fan selection, it should also be considered that

- Reduced speed is desirable for erosive service and for units subject to fouling deposit
on the rotor;
E.2.1 .1 0 (Substitution)
Unless otherwise specified in the data sheets, ID Fans arrangement and bearing support
shall be as per AMCA 801:2001, Arrangement 3, i.e. Double Inlet Double Width(DIDW)
Page 5694 of 8516

k_11 ENGINEERS
$ ig-ar faw5 INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
■+172,2t,742 ,7511,7 IA Gnvt of India Undertaktng)
with fan impeller located between bearings.
Unless otherwise specified in the data sheets, FD Fans arrangement and bearing support
shall be as per AMCA 801:2001, Arrangement 7 design i.e. Single Inlet Single Width
(SISW) with fan impeller located between bearings.
For the above required arrangements, the indicated alternate arrangement as per AMCA
801:2001 i.e. separate sole plate mounted motor and bearings can only be accepted after
specific purchaser's approval.
The bearings shall be mounted independently of the fan housing on rigid pedestals and
sole plates, and the bearings shall be protected from air or gas streams.
E.2.1 .1 0(b) (Modification)

The words '1800 rpm' shall be replaced with the words '1000 rpm'.
The word Turchaser' shall be replaced with the words 'Fan vendor' in the second
sentence of the paragraph.
E.2.1 .12 (Substitution)

The head-capacity characteristic of the Fan shall rise continuously from the maximum
capacity to surge. The Fan shall, without the use of a bypass, be suitable for stable
operation at all capacities higher than the surge capacity shown in the proposal. Unless
other wise specified, fans shall have a continuously rising pressure characteristic (pressure
versus flow rate plot) from the rated capacity to 60% or less of rated flow. Performance
curves, corrected for the specified gas at the specified conditions, shall be based on
performance tests in accordance with AMCA 210, including, where applicable, evase and
inlet box(es). Application that include a variable-frequency drive (VFD) and/or a non-
parabolic system resistance curve shall be reviewed in details to ensure stable operation of
the fan over the intended operating range.
E.2.1 .1 5(b) (Modification)

The height of inlet stack for the FD fan shall be as a minimum 6 meter above grade. In
case a flow element (i.e. annubar, venturi etc.) is required, the inlet stack height shall be
increased to accommodate the straight length required upstream & downstream of the
proposed flow element to maintain the flow accuracies.
E.2.1.1 5(c) (Substitution)

The FD fan-inlet equipment shall include intake cap or rain-hood, trash-screen(s), inlet
filters (when specified), inlet stack / duct along with supports, inlet damper or guide vanes,
inlet boxes, silencer, flexible connection(s) etc. as required.
The vendor shall also provide necessary brackets welded to the inlet stack, for mounting a
platform(s) & access ladder(s) (both by purchaser) around the stack for maintenance of
flow element.
The 1D fan-inlet equipment shall include inlet duct along with supports (when specified),
inlet damper or guide vanes, inlet boxes, flexible connection(s), companion tlange(s) etc.
as required.
All components that are shipped separately shall be flanged for assembly. The inlet
equipment assembly shall be designed for the load(s) (i.e. wind, seismic, shear, over-
turning moments etc.) indicated in the inquiry.
Page 5695 of 8516

ENGINEERS
5g-21
- [22- FOR INDUCED DRAFT/
II eg451 Jt0T-.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Incha Undellakingt FORCED DRAFT FANS
6-42-0003 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 23
E.2.1.16 (New)
The fan outlet equipment shall include flexible connection(s), companion flange(s), outlet
damper etc., as required. The type of outlet damper (i.e. slide gate type, multi-louver type,
slide plate type etc.) shall be as specified in the inquiry.
E.2.1 .17 (New)

When the gas handled contains matter that lends itself to accumulation on the internal
parts of Fan or may cause wear, a provision shall be made for injecting one or more
atomised sprays into the fan to prevent such effects. Unless otherwise specified, the
cleaning system shall be designed for cleaning in stand-still condition. The medium for
cleaning for FD fans shall be Water and for ID fans it shall be LP Steam. Elements of
blade cleaning system inside the fan housing shall be made of corrosion resistant material
and shall be adequately supported to resist damage due to vibration. The vendor shall
include in his proposal the complete details of such arrangements, when offered.
E.2.1 .18 (New)

Unless otherwise specified, the maximum permissible sound pressure Level of the train
shall not exceed 88 dBA measured at 1 meter from equipment surface for the
recommended range of operation.
E.2.2 Fan housing
E.2.2.1 (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, Corrosion Allowance (CA) shall be as under:
(a) FD Fan: 3 mm
(b) ID Fan: 3 mm
E.2.2.2 (Addition)
If the fan housing/inlet box(es) size and construction does not permit such a size of access
door, the casing shall be equipped with removable panels to allow for inspection and
cleaning of impeller and casing internale.
E.2.3 Fan housing connection
Inlet and outlet nozzles shall terminate in duct-type flanges suitable for interconnection
with the purchaser's system. The nozzle orientation shall be in accordance with the
information on the data sheets / arrangement drawings. Facings of all connections shall be
adequate to prevent leakage with proper gaskets and bolting.
Accessible drain connection of minimum 50 mm (2 inch) size with block valve and blind
flange shall be provided at the lowest point of the casing and inlet box(es).
E.2.5 Rotating elements
E.2.5.1 (a) (Modification)

Hollow airfoil construction shall be used only for FD fans.
E.2.5.1 (b) (Delete)
E.2.5.1 (c) (Modification)

Single thickness having a non-airfoil shape, shall be us used only for ID Fans.
The words `Blade design shall be specified by the Purchaser' stand deleted.
Page 5696 of 8516

(51-1 ENGINEERS
$'2-al2W5 INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
2f1C+12 iA Goof of inclA Unclerta■ong,
Un-keyed fits are not acceptable however flanged mounted impellers can be offered. Cast
iron or Ductile iron hubs are not acceptable.
The words Ìf specified by the purchaser. stand deleted.
E.2.5.9 (New)
Fan manufacturer shall examine the need of providing a barring over mechanism. Where
required, the same shall be included in vendor's scope of supply.
E.2.6 Shaft sealing of fans
E.2.6.3 (New)
Unless otherwise specified, shaft seals shall be of asbestos free gland packing or labyrinth
type.
E.2.6.4 (New)
Shaft sleeve shall be of SS 316 in case of ID Fans.
E.2.7 Critical speeds/resonance
The words "If specified" stand deleted from the first line.
E.2.7.7 (New)
In case of fan trains incorporating gearbox and/or dual drive, vendor shall perform and
fumish torsional vibration analysis for the complete train. No torsional natural frequency
shall be within ±10 percent of any of the operating speed, including trip speed.
E.2.8 Vibration and balancing
The words specified by Purchaser" stand deleted.
E.2.9 Bearings and Bearing housings
E.2.9.6 (Addition)
Unless otherwise specified, bearing housings for ID fans shall be provided with water
cooling as a standard feature.
E.2.9.8 (New)
Bearing housings shall be provided with labyrinth type shaft seals to prevent oil leakage or
contamination.
E.2.10 Lubrication
E.2.1 0.5 (New)

The bearing housing shall be equipped with a reservoir of ample capacity, fitted with a
sight glass and a constant oil level device.
E.2.11 Materials
E.2.1 1.1.2 (Substitution)

The materials employed shall be selected with due regard to the gas handled, operating
and design conditions and the site conditions. Materials exposed to 1-12S service shall
comply with NACE MR 0175/NACE MR 0103 (as applicable).
Page 5697 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$
4g23 f12— g INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
IA Govt of Undenalortg)
E.2.11.1.6 (New)
Damper or variable guide vane operating mechanisms, linkages, and other external parts
subject to rotary or sliding motions shall be corrosion resistant materials suitable for the
site environment. Internal operating parts subject to rotary or sliding motions shall be
stainless steel or other equally corrosion resistant material. Minor parts associated with
such mechanisms (bolts, nuts, springs, washers, gaskets and keys) shall have equal
corrosion resistance.
E.3.2 Accessories
E.3.2 Drivers
For FD fans, the motor rating shall also be adequate for operation of FD fans at the
specified minimum ambient conditions at the rated speed in un-throttled conditions or the
start-up conditions specified on data sheets.
For ID fans, the motor rating shall also be adequate for operation of ID fans at the
specified minimum flue gas temperature at the rated speed in un-throttled conditions or the
start-up conditions specified on data sheets.
Electric motor drivers shall have a maximum continuous rating (MCR) (i.e. service factor
equal to 1) not lower than the following:
Fan Rated Power in KW Motor MCR (% of Fan Rated BKW)

(Including gear & coupling losses)
< 18.5 125%
> 18.5 to<55 115%
> 55 110%
Steam turbine driver rating shall be at-least 110% of the rated power required (including
gear & coupling losses) for any of the specified operating conditions.
As a minimum, steam turbine rating shall be equal to the selected motor rating.
E.3.2.10 (Delete)
E.3.2.1 1 Gear Box (New)

Speed Increasers and Reducers shall be in accordance with API Std. 677 (up to 1500 kW).
Beyond 1500 kW, Gear box shall be as per API 613.
E.3.2.12 Belt Drives (New)

Belt drives shall not be used for ID Fans & FD Fans.
E.3.2.13 Variable Frequency Drives (New)

Variable frequency drives (VFD) system shall be as per electrical specifications enclosed
with the inquiry/order.
E.3.2.14 Hydraulic/Fluid Coupling (New)

Refer Annexure A for complete details.
E.3.2.15 Tools (New)

When tools and fixtures not commercially available are required to disassemble, assemble,
or maintain the units, they shall be included in vendor's scope of supply and furnished as
part of the initial supply of the fans.
Page 5698 of 8516

01 ENGINEERS
laW5 INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
.11, c`■ ■rT,P7,1,
71.1 in Govi of indo Underlaking)
E.3.3 Couplings and guards
E.3.3.1 (Addition)
Vendor shall provide alI metallic, dry, flexible type couplings with spacer. The coupling
shall have a minimum service factor of 1.5 over driver rating.
E.3.3.4 (New)
Couplings and shaft ends shall be straight bored and not tapered fit up to a driver rating of
1500 KW. Above 1500 KW, Coupling & shaft ends can be tapered fit in accordance with
API Std. 671.
E.3.3.5 (New)
All exposed rotating parts shall be enclosed in removable, weather proof, metallic guards
of robust construction. The guards shall be made from non-sparking materials. Coupling
guard shall be supported from the baseplate. The Coupling Guard shall be sufficiently
rigid to withstand deflections as a result of bodily contact of nominally 100 kg.
E.3.4 Controls and instrumentation
E.3.4.1.3 General (New)

Instrumentation and their installation shall conform to the purchaser's instrumentation
specification referred in the inquiry document.
E.3.4.2.1 (Addition)
The fan flow shall be controlled through variable IGV's, Inlet Dampers, speed variation
through variable speed fluid coupling or variable speed driver as specified. In case
variable speed coupling is specified as a means to vary operating speed of the fan, the
vendor shall provide a fluid coupling and associated instrumentation and controls, which
shall conform to the requirements as specified in the Appendix-A of this specification and
shall be included in fan vendor's scope of supply.
E.3.4.3 Dampers
E.3.4.3.1 (Modification)
Unless otherwise specified in damper specification enclosed with inquiry document. The
damper shall have opposed blade construction in case of control dampers.
The words specified" stand deleted.
E.3.4.3.6 (New)
Outlet dampers and Flow control dampers, when provided, shall be capable of manual
operation with a force not exceeding 10 kgf. When specified on the data sheets, dampers
shall be equipped with actuators for remote operation. Damper panels shall be free from
flutter and shall be mounted in a manner that they can under no circumstances enter the
body of fan in the event of breakage.
E.3.4.3.7 (New)
If the ID fan is equipped with an inlet box damper, it shall be ensured by the fan vendor
that the inlet duct does not foul with each other and with either of the inlet box dampers &
their actuators. The inlet box dampers shall be easily approachable by ensuring that their
actuators are on the outer side of Y type transition piece.
E.3.5 Piping and appurtenances (New)
E.3.5.3 (New)
The supporting structure for the suction stack and rain-hood of the FD Fan shall be
Page 5699 of 8516

ENGINEEFZ.S
faaes
ii127f 0104, nSnQ0)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot InOia Undertaking)
FOR INDUCED DRAFT/
FORCED DRAFT FANS
6-42-0003 Rev. 3
Page 13 of 23
engineered by the fan vendor and supplied by purchaser / heater contractor (as applicable).
E.3.5.4 Base Plate (New)
E.3.5.4.1 Vendor shall furnish a common baseplate for the motor, gear reducers, variable speed fluid
coupling if any and the inboard bearing pedestals. Outboard Bearings shall be supported
on rigid independent pedestal and soleplate, outside the fan housing. Also the fan and
supporting structure for ducts shall be foundation mounted so as to be unaffected by
vibration or by other forces from the fan.
E.3.5.4.2 Baseplates shall be of fabricated construction and provided with grouting holes. Anchor
bolts shall be furnished along with the baseplate and outboard bearing pedestal. Baseplates
shall be provided with levelling pads, levelling and alignment screws and lifting lugs.
E.3.5.5 Blanking Plates (New)

In case, blanking plates at discharge of FD fans are required to be provided by the fan
vendor, then fan vendor to note that installation/removability of the same shall be carried
without disturbing the fan components. In addition the storage location on the fan body for
blanking plates shall be shown in the FD fan general arrangement drawing.
E.3.5.6 Vibration Isolators (New)

In case the ID/FD fans are mounted on furnace top as in case of cracker furnaces, vibration
isolators along with any positive holding arrangement like bolts shall be provided for the
mounting of the same.
E.3.6 Coatings, insulation and jacketting
Substitute "70°C" in place of "83°C".
(Addition)
The clips or studs shall be placed on 300 mm centers and drilled for holding wires for
installation of insulation having a thickness of minimum 50 mm.
E3.6.2.2 (Modification)
Substitute "70°C" in place of "83°C" and "Maximum ambient temperature" in place of
"27 °C".
E.4 Inspection & testing
E.4.1.6 Mechanical Inspection
(a) (Modification)
The words "If specified by the purchaser" stand deleted.
(c) (Modification)
The words "If specified by the purchaser" stands deleted in case the process gas contains
H2S.
Delete the words "Many fan such a requirement" from the paragraph.
(Modification)
The words 'five working days' shall be replaced by `thirty days (4 weeks)'.
E.4.2.2 (a) (Modification)

The words `two hours' shall be replaced with `four hours'.
Page 5700 of 8516

ENGINEERS
52Z1102e5 INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
IA Govt of indfa Undeftalong,
(d) (Addition)
Refer E.2.8.3 for allowable vibration limits. The rise in bearing oil temperature with
continuous running of the fan shall be within the allowable limits, but shall not exceed
39°C above ambient.
E.4.2.4 Performance Test (New)
E.4.2.4.1 The vendor shall carry out performance test in his shop either as per AMCA Standard 210
or ASME PTC-11 or BS:848:Part-1 or IS:4894.
E.4.2.4.2 The measured performance of the fan shall fall within permissible tolerances of the quoted
performance for guaranteed case. Permissible tolerances are:
i) Capacity: No negative tolerance
ii) Static Differential Pressure: No negative tolerance
iii) Power absorbed: +0%
E.4.2.5 General (New)
E.4.2.5.1 The purchaser's inspector shall have access to the manufacturer's shop at all times during
which work on the equipment is in progress. The vendor shall have the responsibility of
providing the purchaser's inspector with all requisite facilities/equipment for carrying out
satisfactory inspection.
E.4.2.5.2 The purchaser shall receive a written notice at least 30 days before the date of the
equipment becoming ready for inspection and testing.
E.4.2.5.3 Witness Testing by purchaser's/purchaser's representative's participation in the testing

shall be as specified on the data sheet.
E.4.2.5.4 The purchaser/purchaser's representative shall have access to the vendor's Quality Control
Program for review.
E.4.2.5.5 Vendor shall furnish the following data for examination by the purchaser/purchaser's
representative during Shop Inspection and Testing.
i) All necessary material test certificates.
ii) Running Test Data to verify that the requirements of the specification are being met.
iii) Quality Assurance Records.
E.4.2.5.6 All coating/painting of surfaces shall be deferred until the specified inspection of that part
is completed.
E.4.2.5.7 All dimensions shall fall within the tolerances shown on the approved drawings. In the
absence of approved tolerances, the manufacturer's standard shall apply.
E.4.2.5.8 Acceptance of shop test does not constitute a waiver of requirements to supply equipment
as per order and to meet field performance ander specified operating conditions nor does
purchaser's shop inspection relieve the vendor from his responsibilities.
E.4.2.5.9 Steam turbine driven fans can be tested using the manufacturer's shop driver. Relevant
data of the shop driver, including efficiency and power factor for various loads, shall be
made available.
E.4.3 Preparation for shipment
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment shall be protected for a storage period of 12
months at site. If any extra precaution is to be taken by the Purchaser for storage beyond
Page 5701 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS
$'fgu fai&li
dg INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
2:2,r17 ,Yst,3,
7-415,71 IA Gool m maga Undertaking)
12 months the same shall be explicitly indicated in the operation and maintenance
manuals.
E.4.3.3 (New)
The vendor shall, upon completion of inspection and tests, apply at least one coat of a
primer on all un-machined surfaces. Exposed machined surfaces and the interior of the fan
shall be sprayed with a suitable rust inhibitor.
E.4.3.4 (New)
All untapped openings shall be provided with 4 mm thick metal closures with full rubber
gaskets and bolted with not less than 4 bolts. Tapped openings, not otherwise closed, shall
be plugged.
E.4.3.5 (New)
The equipment shall be suitably packed, fastened to avoid damage during transit and
crated for shipment. Lifting, unpacking and handling instructions shall be securely
attached to the exterior of the largest packing in a well marked weather proof container.
The upright position, lifting points, gross weight and dimensions shall be clearly marked
on each package. Each package shall properly identify the equipment contained therein.
E.5 Vendor's data

(Substitution)
The entire clause is substituted by the following text.
E.5.1 Proposals
a) All data sheets, drawings and documents listed under "PRINTS WITH QUOTE" in
the enclosed Vendor Data Requirement Form.
b) List of recommended commissioning spares included in the offer.
c) List of mandatory spares (where specified by the purchaser) included in the offer.
d) List of Vendor's Standard Spare Parts For Two Years Normal Operation
the form of a table & shall show :
inquiry.
e) An itemised list of special tools included in the offer.
f) Any start-up, shutdown or operating restrictions required to protect the integrity of the
equipment.
g) Any limitations of vendor's test-facility to carryout the specified tests.
h) A specific compliance statement that the scope of supply, the offered
equipment/systems and all its components are in strict accordance with the data
sheets, job specifications, this specifications and all other attachments, except for
specific deviations as listed in the proposal.
E.5.2 Contract Data
E.5.2.1 General
E.5.2.1.1 Drawings and data as required after purchase order has been specified in Vendor Data
Requirement. Vendor to note that the drawing/document descriptions/titles as given in
the Vendor Data Requirement are generic in nature. It is possible that against one
drawing/document specified there are several drawings to be furnished by the vendor or
Page 5702 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS
I225 INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
,,, a.l ,RRT1-,11 IA Govt ot india Undertak.ngt
vice versa. Vendor shall complete & forward a document "Vendor Data Index &
Schedule", Document Control Index (DCI) to the purchaser (Destination & contact
person as per order). This document shall list out in consolidated form all drawings and
documents required by purchaser (As specified in Data Sheets, Specifications and Vendor
Data Requirement forms enclosed with the order). Against each drawing/document
vendor shall indicate the vendor's drawing numbers, titles, Rev. No., category (whether
for information or approval) and schedule of submission.
vendor.
E.5.2.1.2 A11 transmittal letters (covers), drawings and data shall have a title block (in addition to
information:
ii) Project Name.
E.5.2.1.3 A1l vendor data/drawings/documents shall be in English Language and in Metric

Systems.
E.5.2.1.4 Data specified in the VDR is the minimum requirements of Purchaser. Any additional
E.5.2.1.5 Whether or not specified the vendor shall furnish the following, before shipment:
- A supplementary list of spare parts other than those included in his original
proposal. The supplementary list shall include recommended spare parts, cross-
sectional or assembly type drawings, parts numbers, materials, prices and delivery
period. The vendor shall forward this supplementary list to the purchaser promptly
after receipt of the reviewed drawings and in time to permit order and delivery of
parts before field start-up.
- A parts list for all equipment supplied. The list shall include pattem, stock, or
production drawing numbers and materials of construction. The list shall
completely identify each part so that the purchaser may determine the
interchangability of the parts with other equipment furnished by the same
manufacturer. Standard purchased items shall be identified by the original
manufacturer's name and part number.
- At least 8 weeks before shipment, the vendor shall submit his preservation,
packaging and shipping procedures to the purchaser's for his review.
E.5.2.3 Co-ordination Meeting

When specified, a co-ordination meeting shall be field at Purchaser's office, preferably
within 4 weeks of order. An agenda shall be prepared for this meeting and would include
the following points related to technical aspects.

b. Vendor Data Index & Schedule.
Page 5703 of 8516

5-12.1t4
1 ENGINEERS
g-a,v+r,r■r Ofard-g INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
IA Govt ol India Underfalong) FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 17 of 23
f. Preliminary General Arrangement & layout drawings & purchaser's interface

drawings.
E.5.2.4 Drawings
E.5.2.4.1 The number of prints and/or reproducible required and the times within which these are to
be submitted by vendor are specified in Purchaser's inquiry/order.
Drawing review shall be through EDMSNDOCS in soft, as per the details provided
elsewhere in inquiry document.
E.5.2.4.2 The purchaser's review of the vendor's drawings shall not constitute permission to deviate
from any requirements in the purchase order/specifications unless specifically agreed
upon in writing. After the drawings have been reviewed, the vendor shall furnish
certified copies in the quantity specified. All drawings shall preferably be in A4 or A3
size. All drawings must be clearly legible and shall be folded to 216 mm x 279 mm size.
E.5.2.4.3 General Arrangement Drawing

A general arrangement drawing shall contain as a minimum the following information:
iii) Location (in all three planes), size, type, rating and identification of all
purchaser's interface connections including those of vents, drains lubricating oil,
sealing fluid, cooling water, steam & Electrical/Instrumentation.
iv) Direction of rotation viewing from the driving end.
v) Weight of each assembly/component.
vi) Weight & location of centre of gravity of the heaviest assembly/components
vii) Identification and weight, dimensions of the heaviest assembly / subassembly /
viii) Maintenance clearances and dismantling clearances including clearances
required for removal/installation of rotor.
ix) Speeds of Driven Equipment and driver and driver rating. Location of driver
x) Layout of auxiliary equipment and operating platform.
xi) Make, Type and Size of couplings and the location of guards and their
coverage.
xii) A list of reference drawings if any.
xiii) A list of any special weather-protection and climatic features.
E.5.2.4.4 Foundation Drawings

i) Foundation bolt sizes & pipe sleeve details and pocket sizes & locations.
ii) Grouting thickness and other necessary technical details.
iii) Static weight of each independently grouted item (such as fan, fluid coupling,
gear-box, driver, change-over clutches, control panel etc.) and location of centre
of gravity of each of such items in all three planes.
iv) Weight distribution for each bolt/subsole-plate location and total static weight.
v) Dynamic loads, if any, caused due to various items grouted independently. (The
cause of generation of such loads shall also be indicated).
vi) The direction and magnitude of unbalance forces and moments (with their phase
angles) generated by the out of balance of the rotating / moving parts of the
machine at the relevant operating conditions. [These loads and their locations
are to be given in all three planes. These shall be utilised for computing the
amplitudes of vibration of the foundation].
vii) GD2 value of each item resolved to driver speed.
Page 5704 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51gw fa2s INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
Govt of inda undertaking)
viii) Maximum permissible amplitude of vibration on the foundation at the base

level. (The location of the points on the foundation base where such amplitudes
are not to be exceeded shall be given in all three planes). The reference of
relevant code, if any, shall also be indicated.
ix) Total mass of rotating parts.
x) Suggested dynamic factor and ratio of weight of foundation to weight of
machine.
xi) Short circuit loads caused in motor drivers.
xii) Operating speed of the machine and the driver.
xiii) Scope of Supply of the Foundation Bolts (unless otherwise specified, by
vendor).
xiv) Maximum permissible magnitude of the unbalance forces and moments
generated by the out of balance of the rotating / moving parts of the machine as
allowed by the relevant codes, if any. (The reference of such code, if any, shall
also be indicated).
xv) Recommended separation margin (if any), between the machine operating
speeds and the natural frequencies of the machine foundation system along with
the basis of such recommended separation margins.
[Note: Unless otherwise indicated by vendor, the dynamic forces as given in v) & xi)
above are considered as additional static loads for designing the foundations statically.
Such dynamic forces are not unbalance forces and therefore, these shall not be utilised
for computing the amplitudes of vibration.]
E.5.2.4.5 Layout Drawing (For multi-skid packages)

This drawing shall contain as a minimum the following information:
allocated, site wind conditions, area classification, the type of equipment
located in the vicinity etc.) indicating elevation and dimension of
skids/equipment.
ii) Minimum spacing required between the various skids/equipment and between
the skids and the walls/columns/roof for an easy accessibility and maintenance.
vendor's scope.
recommended for maintenance and height of the lifting hook from the centreline
of equipment.
E.5.2.4.6 Field Alignment Diagram

centrelines of various equipments at the time of installation, so that ander normal
should be decided on the basis of centreline temperature rise data of driver, gear
E,.5.2.4.7 P&I Diagrams (with Bill of Materials)

system details, location of various auxiliaries, instruments, controls and safety devices
as required. Line sizes, piping class, valve sizes and class shall be clearly marked on
the P&ID. Vendor's scope and purchaser's scope shall be clearly demarcated. Each
item shall be identified by an item No./item tag no., which shall correspond to the
item no. shown on the bill of materials. The bill of materials shall include items
number, normal value, set value, range, quantity per unit, make and other
specifications as applicable. Legends adopted shall be indicated either at the bottom of
Page 5705 of 8516

k_71 ENGINEERS
r 02- g
5fg-agxwmoleforton,3~ INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
IN GoN of Ind. Undertaking) FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 19 of 23
drawing or on a separate drawing. The legends shall be as per ISA.
E.5.2.4.8 Cross-sectional Drawing(with Bill of Materials)

furnished showing all parts, design assembly and running clearances, and balancing
data required for erection and maintenance. Each part shall be numbered which shall
where applicable (say for bolts, nuts, rings, gaskets etc.). A11 bought-out items shall
also be indicated with make and brief specifications. A separate cross-sectional
drawing showing installation and setting dimensions for the seals shall be furnished.
E.5.2.4.9 Installation Manual

procedures, utility specifications (including quantity) and all installation data. It shall
also contain the following information:
induced shaft centreline shift between normal site ambient temperature
criterion.
E.5.2.4.10 Operation and Maintenance Manual
(a) Instructions covering start-up, normal shutdown, emergency shutdown,
(c) Outline and sectional drawings, schematics and illustrative sketches in
Standardised sectional drawings are acceptable only if they represent the actual
construction of the equipment.
i. Maximum and minimum bearing, labyrinth and seal clearances
including any other clearance between moving and stationary parts of
the equipment affecting proper running and maintenance of the
equipment.
ü. Instructions for measuring and adjusting cold clearances, shaft run-out,
concentricity etc.
Rotor float allowance.
v. Balancing tolerances.
Page 5706 of 8516

t31 ENGINEERS
$'gzir fa2s INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
GoN ol Ineha Undeitaking}
viii. Preventive maintenance schedules and criterion for replacement of

parts.
i. Bolting sequence and torque values for all bolts affecting equipment
ii. Reassembly sequences together with required inspection checks.
iii. Adjustment procedures to achieve required positions, clearances, float
and so forth.
iv. Detailed procedures for pre-operational checks, including settings and
adjustments.
v. Seals and coupling installation procedures.
vi. Parts list indicating cross-sectional drawings of various assemblies and
sub-assemblies, part numbers, materials of construction etc. to facilitate
E.5.2.4.11 Performance Characteristic Curves
E.5.2.4.11.1 The vendor shall provide complete performance curves to encompass the map of
operations, with any limitations indicated thereon.
E.5.2.4.1 1.2 All curves submitted prior to final performance testing shall be marked
"PREDICTED". Any set of curves resulting from a test shall be marked "TESTED".
E.5.2.4.1 1.3 Certified test curves and data shall be submitted within 15 days after testing and shall
include STATIC PRESSURE, power recalculated to the proper operating speed and
efficiency plotted against capacity.
E.5.2.4.12 Data Sheet
E.5.2.4.12.1 The Vendor shall provide completely filled in data sheets, first for "AS
PURCHASED" and then for "AS BUILT". This shall be done by the vendor
correcting and filling out the data sheets and submitting copies to the purchaser.
E.5.2.4.1 3 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue
E.5.2.4.13.1 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical catalogue is a compilation of "AS BU1LT"

drawings and data, manufacturing and test records, installation, operating and
maintenance instructions.
E.5.2.4.1 3.2 Not tater than two weeks after successful completion of all specified tests, the vendor
shall furnish the required number of technical data manual/mechanical catalogues for
the equipment, any auxiliaries and instruments that the vendor is providing. The
technical data manual/mechanical catalogue shall include the following documents as
a minimum:
i) All drawings and data as listed in the vendor data index & schedule. (For
drawings, where purchaser's approval is required, the final certified drawings shall
be attached.) Sections shall be organised in a manner that data & drawings related
to one subject is grouped together such as Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation
etc.
ii) All manufacturing, inspection and test data and records.
iii) Following information shall also be included in the Technical Data
Manual/Mechanical Catalogue:
1. Storage instructions for storing and preserving the equipment (including
same.
Page 5707 of 8516

t31 ENGINEERS
$g-ar S w INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
1.7171,-(,nre,
1,1,3,7;A"Al) t ol Ind.. Unde(lAk,09(
(A G0, FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 21 of 23

E.5.2.4.13.3 Technical Data Manual/Mechanical Catalogue shall be in Hard board folder(s) of size
265 mm x 315 mm and shall not be more than 90 mm thickness; it may be of several
volumes and each volume shall have a volume number, index of volumes & index of
contents of that particular volume.
E.5.2.4.13.4 Title sheet (Top sheet) of each volume of Technical Data Manual/Mechanical
catalogue shall contain the contract information as defined under E.5.2.4.13.2 besides
the volume number.
E.5.2.4.13.5 In case order contains more than one item, separate dedicated Technical Data
Manual/Mechanical catalogues shall be submitted for each item.
E.2.2.4.14 Two (2) Sets of Final/As-Built drawings, documents shall also be submitted as
electronic files on secondary storage media (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM disks)
Page 5708 of 8516

ENGINEERS
[[ 92e5 INDIA LIMITED FOR INDUCED DRAFT/ 6-42-0003 Rev. 3
171R, iYrm,l tbi,f4,1.V1 A Govt of inctio Undertakingf
APPENDIX A - Fluid Coupling
A.1 General
A.1.1 Scope
This appendix describes the minimum requirements for the design, manufacture,
inspection, testing and supply of Fluid couplings and its auxiliaries, used for Fans.
A.1.2 Equipment Qualification Criteria
A.1.2.1 The fluid-coupling model offered shall be from the existing regular manufacturing range
of the fluid-coupling manufacturer. The offered fluid-coupling model shall meet the
following minimum service and manufacturing experience requirements.
Fluid coupling proposed shall be identical in terms of model series and similar in terms of
power rating, speed, mechanical design, materials etc. as compared to at least ONE UNIT
last TEN years and as a minimum, this unit shall have completed ONE year of satisfactory
operation at site, as on bid due date.
A.2 Basic design
A.2.1 Fluid coupling shall be self-supporting on either side by bearing housing and shall be of
box type construction.
A.2.2 All metallic, dry, flexible type couplings with spacer shall be provided between the fluid
coupling and the driver/fan.
A.2.3 The fluid coupling and the driver shall be mounted on a common base plate.
A.2.4 The oil cooler shall have at least 20% on over design margin on heat duty.
A.3 Controls & instrumentation
A.3.1 Capacity of fan shall be regulated with a stepless variable speed-scoop tube controlled
fluid coupling.
A.3.2 For the control of scoop tube, the same shall be provided with pneumatic actuators,
positioners, all connecting linkages, air kit, dust cover, manual operator, air lock relay,
position transmitter for indicating the position of scoop tube etc. Provision shall also be
made available for manual operation. Speed indication of the coupling shall be provided.
In the event of instrument air, plant air or electric power failure, pneumatic actuator of the
scoop tube shall decouple the fluid coupling (i.e. zero speed).
A.3.3 The instrumentation & controls shall be suitable for the specified area classification.
A.3.4 Unless otherwise specified, as a minimum, for each fluid coupling, following indicating
instrument and instruments for alarm annunciation and shutdown annunciation/actuation
shall be provided by the vendor:
A.3.4.1 Temperature Indications:

• Circulation Oil to Fluid Coupling - Locally mounted Temperature Gauge
• Cooling Water Return from Oil Cooler - Locally mounted Temperature Gauge
A.3.4.2 Speed Indications :

• Fan Speed Indication on LGB/LCP.
• Potential free Repeat Contact for Fan Speed Indication on Remote panel/DCS.
Page 5709 of 8516

ENGINEERS
fg-ar elemr, =rn
aiRry "KA, IA Govt ol Incha Undertaking) FORCED DRAFT FANS Page 23 of 23
A.3.4.3 Push Button Stations:

• Main Equipment Start on LGB/LCP
• Main Equipment Stop on LGB/LCP
• Potential free Repeat Contact for Main Equipment Stop from Remote
panel/DCS.
A.3.4.4 Alarm and Shutdown Annunciation:

• Low Cooling Water Flow from Oil Cooler - Alarm Annunciation on Remote
Panel/DCS.
• High Oil Temperature supply and/or return from Fluid Coupling - Alarm
Annunciation on Remote Panel/DCS.
• High-High Oil Temperature supply and/or return from Fluid Coupling -
Shutdown Annunciation on Remote Panel/DCS and Interlock to trip the fan.
A.3.4.5 Fan vendor shall wire and provide indicating lamps on the LGB/LCP for visual indication
of common alarms and common shutdown alarms. Potential Free Contacts for the same
shall be provided by the purchaser at the LGB/LCP. The LGB/LCP shall be suitable for
the specified area classification.
A 3.4.6 Other instrumentation & controls, as deemed necessary by the vendor, for safe operation
of the fluid coupling, shall be also provided by the vendor.
A.3.5 Fan vendor shall provide sight flow glasses on all oil lines and breather valve on oil
reservoir of fluid coupling.
A.4 Inspection & testing
A.4.1 The following Tests shall be conducted at the Fluid Coupling Manufacturer's shop. These
tests shall be witnessed by Purchaser/Purchaser's representative.
1. Heat Test / Temperature Rise Test.
2. Free Running Test.
3. Performance Test for all the operating conditions i.e. at different speeds of the
Fan.
4. Vibration Test.
5. Overspeed Test.
A.4.2 Vendor shall submit a detailed test procedure under all the above-mentioned headings, for
purchaser's review & approval during detailed engineering stage.

Page 5710 of 8516

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No
ria
itge.n 99:5,s,
Oziei ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT
& MACHINERY
6-76-0001 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 22
6*k-cm vd zit *r TWIT

tq &Hot Far4t2T
FOR
ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT &
MACHINERY
2 03.09.2008 Revised & Reissued DM PKR AA VC
1 30.05.2008 Revised & Reissued DM PKR AA VC
0 25.04.2001 Issued as Standard Specification DM AM MR MI

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5711 of 8516

zier ENGINEERS
SiglIT °far IA Gobi of India Undetakingi MACHINERY Page 2 of 22
Abbreviations:

EC Erection Contractor
EIC Engineer-in-charge
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
GAD General Arrangement Drawing
IS Indian Standard
NDT Non Destructive Testing
SS Stainless Steel
General Engg. Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr. Vinay Kumar

Members : Mr. S. Chanda
Mr. J.M. Singh
Mr. D. Khare
Ms.Vartika Shukla
Mr. M.P. Jain
Ms. N.P. Guha
Mr. Rakesh Nanda
Page 5712 of 8516

fazieT to ENGINEERS
Ogelf laliteS INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
MACHINERY Page 3 of 22
CONTENTS
1.0 SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY 4
2.0 ERECTION OF COLUMNS, TANKS, VESSELS AND DRUMS ETC 5
3.0 ERECTION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 8
4.0 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER EQUIPMENT 10
5.0 ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT 16
6.0 EQUIPMENT GROUTING 19
7.0 REFERENCE EIL STANDARDS/ SPECIFICATIONS 22
Page 5713 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
A O,l of India underlakPrigi MACHINERY Page 4 of 22
1.0 SPECIFICATION FOR ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY
1.1 Scope
This specification covers technical requirements for erection of all static and rotating
equipment by erection contractor at site. This specification is applicable for all the erection
tenders operated by EIL.
1.2 General
1.2.1 All necessary handling equipments, tools, tackles and precision instruments for carrying out
the works as specified shall be provided by the Erection Contractor (EC) at his cost. EC must
provide all tools and gauges for erection and alignment. Special tools, if any, received as part
of machinery, will be given to EC for erection purposes, which shall be returned in good
condition after use. Suitable deductions will be made by the Engineer-in-Charge (EIC) in
case of loss or damage of the special tools. The value of such loss or damage will be decided
by the EIC and EC shall be bound by such a decision.
1.2.2 Equipment Manufacturer's recommendations regarding preservation during storage at site and
detailed specifications for the installation alongwith layout drawings, general
arrangement/equipment outline drawings and sub-assembly drawings of the various equipment
and machinery will be provided to EC during the performance of work. The requirements
stipulated in these shall be fulfilled by EC in addition to what is stated in this specification.
Erection shall be carried out as per the instructions and supervision of Machinery
manufacturer's representative, wherever such supervisory services are applicable.
1.2.3 All the items of work covered in the tender shall be carried out as per this Specification and
other details to be furnished to EC. However, EIC reserves the right to give
additional/alternative specifications and instructions, at any time, for execution of any
particular work and EC shall execute such works in accordance with such
additional/alternative specifications and instructions of the EIC. Such a step taken by the EIC
shall not constitute a breach of the contract.
1.3 Preparation for Erection
1.3.1 EC shall be responsible for organising the lifting of the equipment in the proper sequence, so
that orderly progress of the work is ensured and access routes for erecting the other equipment
are kept open.
Rigging procedure for all the major lifts (above 10 MT) and at maximum crane capacity shall
be submitted by EC for the approval of EIC. However, approval to rigging procedure
proposed by EC shall not relieve EC from his responsibility in following the proper
lifting/erection methods on ensuring orderly .
1.3.2 Orientation of all foundations, elevations, length and disposition of anchor bolts and diameter
of holes in the supports saddles shall be checked by EC, well in advance. Minor rectifications
including chipping of foundations as the case may be, shall be carried out by EC after
obtaining prior approval of EIC. EC shall also be provided with the necessary structural
drawings and piping layouts etc. wherever required for reference. EC shall crosscheck such
piping and structural drawings with actual construction at site and in case of any mismatch
inform the EIC before taking up the erection.
Page 5714 of 8516

ENGINEERS
5fgar fakres IA Govl 01 haw undeptakingl MACHINERY Page 5 of 22
1.3.3 During the performance of the work, EC shall keep structures, materials or equipments
adequately braced by guys, struts or otherwise approved means which shall be supplied and
installed by EC as required till the installation work is satisfactorily completed. Such guys,
shoring , bracing, strutting, planking supports etc. shall not interfere with the work of other
agencies and shall not damage or cause distortion to other works executed by him or other
agencies.
2.0 ERECTION OF COLUMNS, TANKS, VESSELS AND DRUMS ETC.
2.1 Scope of work of Erection Contractor
(a) Preparation of erection scheme and rigging procedure and obtaining its approval from
EIC wherever necessary.
(b) Withdrawal of equipments from Owner's storage point, checking and reporting its
conditions, transporting the same to EC's stores of work site including unloading etc.
(c) Erection on foundations furnished by Owner including aligning, levelling and grouting.
(d) Assembly and fixing of demisters, grids, internal distributors and other internal fittings in
Columns, Vessels etc.
(e) Filling of Columns, Reactors, Vessels/Drums etc. with Raschig rings, supporting
elements, sand, concrete etc. as required.
(0 Welding of washers for equipments, erection of pipe davit & minor welding of their parts
as per specifications and instruction of EIC.
(g) Assembly & erection of Agitator (Mixer) along with drive unit (Motor) including all
accessories for vessels/drums/reactors (wherever indicated) as per specification drawings
& instructions of EIC.
(h) Flushing, cleaning and drying of Columns, Vessels/Drums etc.
(i) Completing the equipments in all respects for commissioning the plant as per drawings,
specifications & instructions of EIC.
0) Any modification in the erected Columns, Reactors, Vessels/Drums to the complete

satisfaction of EIC.
2.2 General Conditions of Erection
2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified Columns, Vessels, Drums etc. will be generally supplied to the
Erection Contractor in single piece and EC will not be required to carry out any assembly or
welding. In case column is supplied in multiple pieces and erection of the equipment is not
possible in single piece, EC shall be responsible for lifting the pieces, for aligning, welding
and hydrotest etc. in vertical position under the supervision of column Supplier (Fabricator).
However, EIC shall be responsible for coordination between Erection Contractor &
Fabricator. The schedule of quantities (SO()) for equipment erection enclosed with the tender
document outlines details of each equipment such as diameter, overall height, type of support
(saddle/skirt/leg/bracket), position (horizontal or vertical) and approximate erection weight
etc. However the erection elevation and location of equipment shall be as per the piping
layout drawing enclosed with the tender.
Page 5715 of 8516

INIFEzie? ENGINEERS
SIgt-IT "keg 0 Gov' of Indra Undettakingl MACHINERY Page 6 of 22
2.2.2 Rigging procedures and erection schemes for all the heavy lifts weighing 10 MT & above
shall be prepared by EC and got approved by EIC. Approval by EIC shall not relieve EC of
his responsibilities. The details to be submitted will include the location of equipment from
where it will be lifted, location of crane(s), details of crane(s) (like configuration, boom
length, operating radius, boom point elevation, clearance underside the boom and the
equipment, lifting capacity, counter weights to be deployed, holds on any neighbouring
foundations, structures, equipments etc.), the load chart of the crane(s), design of the lifting
tackles like spreader beam, D-shackles, wire rope slings etc. Unless the erection scheme and
rigging procedures are approved by EIC, erection of such equipments shall not be undertaken
in any case by EC.
2.2.3 Before starting the erection of Columns, Vessels etc., top surface of the foundations is to be
cleared/chipped, roughened to obtain proper bond, while grouting. Also the sleeves are to be
cleaned before erecting the equipments. Line (orientation) and levels are to be marked on all
the foundations to facilitate checking of alignment.
EC shall also check the correct elevation and orientation of civil, structural foundations, before
proceeding with the erection work. Discrepancy, if any, shall be brought to the notice of EIC.
However, minor rectifications and chipping of foundations upto a thickness of 15 mm in
foundation height shall be carried out at no extra cost, by the EC. EC shall be responsible for
supply of levelling plates, (if required) and shall carry out levelling of equipment under the
directions of EIC.
2.2.4 While handling, transporting or erecting the equipments, care shall be taken not to damage the
nozzles, instrument connections, structural clips etc. EC shall also take care of the orientation
of the nozzles and other connections of the equipments while erecting the same and ensure
compliance with the drawings and specifications supplied. Discrepancy, if any, in the
number/orientation of the nozzles, cleats etc. should be brought to the notice of the EIC before
actual erection is started.
2.2.5 Verticality of the Columns, ReactorsNessels shall be checked with theodolites. After erection
the equipment shall be levelled and properly aligned with necessary shims and wedges
supplied by EC, at his cost. After the level, alignment and verticality etc. are checked and
approved by EIC, EC shall carry out grouting.
2.2.6 EC shall produce recent test certificates of the slings which they will be using for erection
work. However, retesting of the slings shall be done at site by EC at his cost, as and when
required by EIC. The weights of test loads shall be as per IS-807. The test loads shall be
supplied by EC at his cost. Tested slings will be punched for test loads and date of testing as
directed by EIC.
2.2.7 EC shall also carry out the assembly, erection, levelling and alignment of all types of weir
plates, baffles, distributors, collectors, spray nozzles, demisters, grids and other internal
fittings etc. Work shall be carried out as per manufacturer's standards/specifications which
shall be made available to EC at the time of erection. Raschig rings, molecular sieves, intalax
saddles packing and other types of tower packings such as sand, catalyst etc. and SS wire
mesh shall be loaded into sections of Vessels, Columns as per specifications and drawings.
Details for internals to be installed by EC shall be as per separate schedule of quantities
enclosed with the tender document. All packings except clay and lime stone shall be washed
with water before filling. Bottom layers, if required, shall be arranged as directed and random
filling shall be done afterwards with equipment filled with water. Installation of packings,
shall be done only after flushing and cleaning of Columns/Vessels and completed to the
satisfaction of EIC.
Page 5716 of 8516

laratlei ENGINEERS
* la g, MACHINERY Page 7 of 22
2.2.8 EC shall carry out minor welding for attachment of prefabricated pipe davit parts such as rain
covers, handles etc. with pipe davit, during or after erection of the same as per the
manufacturer's specifications, at no extra cost to the Owner.
2.2.9 EC shall execute erection of wooden pillow for saddle support for cold horizontal vessels
wherever necessary as indicated on the drawings/ EIL STD 7-12-0003 and as per the
instructions of EIC.
2.2.10 EC shall execute assembly & erection of agitator/mixer along with drive unit including all
accessories as per supplier's instructions, specification drawings & instructions of EIC.
2.3 Flushing & Cleaning of Columns, Vessels, Drums etc.
2.3.1 After the erection, alignment and grouting of these equipments are complete, flushing and
cleaning shall be carried out by EC as per specifications and instructions of EIC.
2.3.2 After flushing, cleaning and draining, equipments shall be dried by compressed air at the
pressure and for duration decided by the EIC. The Vessel interior shall be thoroughly
inspected to the complete satisfaction of EIC before it is finally boxed up. Boxing up of
manholes and handholes shall be leak proof. All joints which need remaking, shall be remade.
Compressed air for drying shall be arranged by EC.
2.4 Inspection and Acceptance Limits for Level and Alignment
2.4.1 Co-ordinates of foundations/supporting structures/mounting holes etc. shall be checked with

respect to the plot plans by EC.
2.4.2 Before equipments are placed on foundations, orientations shall be checked with respect to
piping drawings.
2.4.3 When equipments are firmly bolted down but prior to grouting, verticality of all the Columns,
vertical vessels etc. shall be checked by using theodolite. Tolerances for equipment after
erection shall be as per EIL Standard 7-12-0001. The allowable deviation from plumb line
shall be 1 mm per metre height, subject to maximum of 15 mm unless otherwise stated on the
drawings.
2.4.4 Horizontal Vessels shall be checked for level across machined face of nozzle flanges with
precision level.
2.5 Additional requirements for Underground buried vessels
2.5.1 Underground vessels for operating temp upto 60°C
The vessels shall be supplied at site with one coat of inorganic zinc silicate primer duly
applied on its external surfaces as per Spec. 6-79-0020. All other works such as application of
coaltar enamel, as per 6-79-0020 & wrapping and coating as per EIL Spec. 6-79-0011 shall be
carried out by EC. This shall include necessary materials, tools and tackles to complete the Job
in all respect as per the instructions of EIC.
2.5.2 Underground Vessels for operating temp. Above 60°C and upto 300°C
The vessels shall be supplied at site with one coat of inorganic zinc silicate primer as per Spec.
6-79-0020 duly applied on its external surfaces. EC shall be required to carryout touch-up and
repair of outside primer before erection of equipment.
Page 5717 of 8516

afarm a ENGINEERS ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT &
slig2li EVIeg UINDIA LIMITED 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
IA Gori al India undenakrnyi MACHINERY Page 8 of 22
2.5.3 EC shall do the necessary excavation, backfilling and removal of surplus earth at the site as
per the directions of the EIC. EC's rate shall include the excavation, blast cleaning, painting,
wrapping by kraft paper, placing and fixing of Vessels, backfilling and removal of excess
earth.
3.0 ERECTION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
3.1 Scope of Work of Erection Contractor
The scope of EC shall consist of withdrawal and transportation of equipments and accessories
from Owner's stores to site, assembly of loose supplied components/parts erection of
equipment on foundations, levelling, aligning and grouting, preparation of equipments for trial
runs and hand over in fit condition for the start up of the plant as per instructions of EIC.
3.2 Details of Owner Supplied Equipments
Equipments to be erected shall be supplied by the owner. Equipments may be supplied in any
of the following conditions.
Single equipment such as filter, static mixer, silencer etc.

Skid mounted equipment, fully assembled.
Skid mounted equipment with some items supplied loose or as subassemblies involving
interconnections also.
System comprising of many equipments, skids with interconnected piping & hook up.
3.3 Technical Requirements
3.3.1 All equipment/machinery erection shall be done by experienced fitters. For this purpose EC
shall employ an experienced erection supervisor and crew who have done similar jobs.
3.3.2 EC shall study the layout drawings, for the machineries and equipments with their auxiliaries,
controls defining scope of supply.
3.3.3 Equipments shall be checked for any damages as a result of transport, handling and defects, if
any, shall be reported to the EIC. Rectification of defects shall be carried out in accordance
with approved procedure.
3.3.4 Correct procedures for handling of equipment & installation on the foundation shall be
followed as given in the manufacturer's manual. In case of non-availability of such
procedures, EC shall develop & submit handling procedures for all equipment weighing more
than 10 metric tonnes. The handling procedure shall be approved by the EIC.
3.3.5 EC shall check the correctness of equipment foundations or supporting structures as per the
drawings. Equipment/Skid foot print dimensions shall be verified to match with the
foundation. Minor chipping of foundation, pockets if required shall be carried out by EC.
3.3.6 All accessories like pressure gauges, seal oil, cooling water & Lube oil headers etc., shall be
tagged and separately kept in Contractor's stores till erection. All flanged connections and
openings shall be kept blanked with dummies, plugs to prevent entry of foreign particles.
3.3.7 Equipments shall be installed on the foundations in proper sequence. Incase the equipments
are delivered in subassemblies, EC shall do the assembly work as per manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3.8 Equipments shall be installed in the correct orientation and alignment.
Page 5718 of 8516

filPA; ENGINEERS
5ittif EffileS ‘71? INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
GoN at India Undenakg,91 MACHINERY Page 9 of 22
3.3.9 After installation and levelling the equipment shall be grouted with the specified grouting
applied to the baseplate and support.
3.3.10 EC shall remove all the packing and protective devices used during transport and handling
from the equipment such as shock absorbent materials from machined faces, blocking of shafts
or rolling bearings & restraining devices from instruments, safety devices and protective
equipments.
3.3.11 After the grouting is set & cured, the foundation bolts shall be checked to make sure that they
are in straight and vertical position and properly tightened. Shims, if used, shall be on either
side of the foundation bolts.
3.3.12 Desiccant, catalyst where supplied loose shall be loaded on to the respective vessels in
specified quantities as per the suppliers instructions.
3.3.13 Internals, where supplied loose shall be assembled as per the drawings and manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3.14 Unless otherwise specified, all the instruments such as pressure gauges, sight glasses
temperature recorders etc. including instrument panels, if any, supplied along with the
equipment with necessary connections, shall be installed by EC as part of Equipment erection.
3.3.15 Equipments shall be checked for final cleanliness before boxing up.
3.3.16 Any interconnected piping & ducting shall be properly installed and supported. EC shall
connect the gas, steam, air, utility piping, instruments, oil piping etc. as per manufacturer's
drawings, specifications and instructions of the EIC.
3.3.17 Safety devices shall be correctly installed.
3.3.18 Ladders, platforms, walkways shall be correctly installed with handrails, and flooring shall be
properly secured.
3.3.19 Field welding, where specified shall be in accordance with the specified procedures and NDT
tests where specified shall be carried out. Results of NDT tests shall be recorded.
3.3.20 Equipment alignment & couplings shall comply with tolerances specified in manufacturer's
drawings and manuals. Provisions of dowel pins or similar arrangements for retaining the
alignment shall be carried out.
3.3.21 After the piping has been connected, the alignment shall be checked by EC again, to ensure
that piping connections do not induce any undue stresses on the Equipments. After making
necessary corrections on the piping, if any, realignment shall be done by EC to ensure that no
undue stresses are induced on the equipment.
3.3.22 Painting, insulation & fireproofing where specified shall be carried out in accordance with the
applicable specifications attached in the tender document.
3.3.23 Any alterations, deviations made during equipment erection with respect to manufacturer's
drawings or instructions shall be duly recorded and approval shall be taken from the EIC.
3.3.24 Any special tools, tackles supplied along with the equipment and used during installation shall
be returned to the stores through the EIC.
3.3.25 Any protection of the equipment after installation, if required shall be carried out in
accordance of the instructions of the EIC.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EL—All rights reserved
Page 5719 of 8516

apA ENGINEERS ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT &
Sigar talegWINIDIA LIMITED 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
.Rn el7mTV aezmil IA Govt of India uncienakiv MACHINERY Page 10 of 22
3.4 Trial Runs
3.4.1 Wherever specified, Machinery & Equipment erected & installed by EC under the supervision
of Machinery/Equipment supplier shall be subjected to trial runs in accordance with clause 5.4
of this specification. Job specific trial run procedure, if specified, supersedes the trial run
procedure as described in clause 5.4.
3.5 System Start-up
During this phase of work, EC shall provide as part of his work necessary skilled personnel as
per requirement of EIC. Any defects noticed in the Equipment shall be made good by EC at
his cost if such defects are attributable to him.
4.0 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER EQUIPMENT
This section covers the minimum requirements for erection of the following equipment by the
EC.
Deaerator
Trays/tower Internals And Tower Packings
Separators And Internals
Shell And Tube Heat Exchangers
Double Pipe Exchangers
Electric Heaters
Plate Exchangers
Plate Fin Exchangers
Sulphur Recovery Unit Equipment like Combustion Chambers, Waste Heat Boilers,
Sulphur Condensers, Incinerators, Burners, Etc.
Waste Heat Recovery Units
- Desalters
Vacuum Ejectors
Ejector Condensers
4.1.1 Preparation of erection scheme and rigging procedure and obtaining its approval from EIC
wherever necessary.
4.1.2 Withdrawal of equipment from Owner's storage point, checking and reporting its conditions,
transporting the same to EC's stores and work site including unloading etc.
4.1.3 Preparation of foundation by chipping & installation of base plates for foundations. Minor
rectifications & chipping of foundations up to a thickness of 15 mm due to error in foundation
height, shall be carried out by the EC at no extra cost
4.1.4 Before starting the erection, top surface of the foundations are to be
cleaned/chipped/roughened to obtain proper bond while grouting. Line (Orientation) & Levels
are also to be marked on the respective foundations prior to erection to facilitate checking of
alignment.
4.1.5 Supply of necessary shims, levelling plates, wedges, sliding base plate.
4.1.6 Erection on foundations furnished by Owner including aligning, levelling and grouting.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell - All rights reserved
Page 5720 of 8516

lociMewl ENGINEERS
5gTzIT felf5lt°
, A GOY, 0( India Undett.,ng) MACHINERY Page 11 of 22
4.1.7 Assembly and fixing of trays, tower internals (distributor, bed limiter, support plate, chimney
trays, vapour distributor etc.), demisters, grids, internal distributors and other internal fittings
in columns, vessels etc.
4.1.8 Installation of transformers on desalters and their electrical connection to electrode grid etc.
4.1.9 Welding of chimney trays, lattice girders, beams etc. wherever required.
4.1.10 Carrying out minor adjustments, modifications, seal welding of seal plates etc. wherever
necessary during installation.
4.1.11 Checking of installed trays & tower internals and filling of installation formats as referred in
6-14-0016.
4.1.12 Filling of columns, vessels/drums etc. with Raschig rings/Pall rings/ Structured packing, as
required.
4.1.13 Welding of washers for equipment, erection of pipe davit & minor welding of their parts as
per specifications and instruction of EIC.
4.1.14 Hydrotesting of shell and tube heat exchangers if the time gap between last hydrotest is more
than six months or in case it is found to be necessary by EIC. Procedure is given in para 4.3 &
4.4 below. EC to note that any equipment which are refractory lined at shop shall not be
hydrotested.
4.1.15 Flushing, cleaning and drying of equipment using compressed air and blinding to prevent
ingress of rain, dust etc.
4.1.16 Installation of refractory lining, brick lining, ceramic boards etc., as per specifications,
recommendations of manufacturer and instructions of EIC.
4.1.17 Mounting of instruments like safety valves, rupture disks, sight glasses etc as required.
4.1.18 Completing the equipment in all respects for the commissioning of the plant as per drawings,
specifications & instructions of EIC.
4.1.19 Any modification in the equipment to the complete satisfaction of EIC.
4.1.20 In addition to the above EC may be called upon to do other jobs like rectification of defects
etc. as per instructions of EIC.
4.2.1 All carbon steel components of trays/tower internals shall be cleaned to remove rust
preventive coating.
4.2.2 All welding shall be done by qualified welders only. The electrodes/filler material to be used
shall be compatible with the metallurgy of component and shall be used only after prior
approval of EIC.
4.2.3 A proposed Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) shall be submitted to EIL/ Owner's
Inspector for his approval. On approval, a Procedure Qualification Test (PQT) shall be
conducted which shall be witnessed by EIL/Owner's Inspector. On acceptance of all tests as
per ASME Section IX, a final WPS along with Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) shall be
submitted. Production welding shall start only after approval of final WPS/PQR and
Page 5721 of 8516

lardaeg (Lt
Sit ENGINEERS
SIgof latiregW INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
.2/7 erenw7 nnn IA Gcnn ol India Undenavingi MACHINERY Page 12 of 22
qualification of welders as per ASME Section IX. EIL/Owner's Inspector may accept
previously qualified WPS/PQR at his sole discretion.
4.2.4 Lattice girders wherever provided for supporting tray & tower internals have been designed in
such a way that various components pass through column manway. Components/parts of
lattice girders are to be welded inside the column as per respective drawings. EC shall also
ensure that all parts of lattice girder are properly welded & levelness of the lattice girder shall
be checked before & after the welding. The limits of levelness as mentioned in GA drawings
shall be adhered to.
4.2.5 The rigging procedure shall include the following as a minimum:
Location of equipment from where it will be lifted, location of crane(s), details of crane(s)
(like configuration, boom length, operating radius, boom point elevation, clearance underside
the boom and the equipment, lifting capacity, counter weights to be deployed, holds on any
neighbouring foundations, structures, equipment etc.), the load chart of the crane(s), design of
the lifting tackles like spreader beam, D-shackles, wire rope slings etc. Unless the erection
scheme and rigging procedures are approved by the EIC, erection of equipment shall not be
undertaken in any case by the EC.
4.2.6 While handling, transporting or erecting the equipment, care shall be taken not to damage the
nozzles, instrument connections, structural clips, refractory lining etc. EC shall also take care
of the orientation of the nozzles and other connections of the equipment while erecting the
same and ensure compliance with the drawings and specifications supplied. Discrepancy, if
any, in the number/orientation of the nozzles, cleats etc. should be brought to the notice of the
EIC before actual erection is started.
4.2.7 After erection, the equipment shall be levelled and properly aligned with necessary shims and
wedges supplied by EC, at his cost. After the level, alignment and verticality etc. are checked
and approved by EIC, EC shall carry out grouting.
4.2.8 EC shall produce recent test certificates of the slings which they will be using for erection
work. However, retesting of the slings shall be done at site by the EC at his cost, as and when
required by the EIC. The weights of test loads shall be as per IS-807. The test loads shall be
supplied by EC at his cost. Tested slings will be punched for test loads and date of testing as
directed by ETC.
4.2.9 EC shall also carry out the assembly, erection, levelling and alignment of all types of weir
plates, baffles, distributors, collectors, spray nozzles, demisters, grids and other internal
fittings etc. Work shall be carried out as per manufacturer's standards/specifications which
shall be made available to EC at the time of erection. Raschig rings/Pall rings/Structured
packing, molecular sieves, intalox saddles packing and other types of tower packing such as
sand, catalyst etc. and SS wire mesh shall be loaded into sections of vessels, columns as per
specifications and drawings. Details for internals to be installed by EC shall be as per separate
schedule of quantities enclosed with the tender document. All packing except clay and lime
stone shall be washed with water before filling. Bottom layers, if required, shall be arranged as
directed and random filling shall be done afterwards with equipment filled with water.
Installation of packing, shall be done only after flushing and cleaning of columns/vessels and
completed to the satisfaction of EIC.
4.2.10 EC shall carry out minor welding for attachment of prefabricated pipe davit parts such as rain
covers, handles etc. with pipe davit, during or after erection of the same as per the
manufacturer's specifications, at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.2.11 EC shall install base plate over the sliding end foundation before erection of shell and tube
exchangers.
Page 5722 of 8516

latfaelegftENGINEERS
sitZ r laigleg NIP INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
IA Gent 01 Inda Undenaing) MACHINERY Page 13 of 22
4.2.12 Levelling and plumbness shall be approved by EIC and shall be checked using theodolite
before grouting and final finishing of the foundations. The record of the same shall be
maintained.
4.2.13 EC to ensure that shell and tube exchangers shall be firmly bolted down to foundations at the
fixed end. Further EC to ensure that foundation bolts at the sliding saddle end are at the centre
of slotted holes & nuts at sliding end are only hand tightened. Projected bolt threads shall be
properly protected by application of grease etc. to avoid rusting and for facilitating free
movement of nuts.
4.2.14 EC shall ensure that no equipment is subjected to any corrosion during any stage during his
period of work till handling over to EIC/Client.
4.2.15 Instruments, as required, shall be mounted by EC. On instructions of EIC, EC shall also
remove and hand over the instruments to EIC for calibrations. During this period, EC shall
cover all openings to protect the equipment.
4.2.16 Before transportation to site, EC shall check and report to EIC on the condition of equipment,
specifically highlighting the nitrogen pressure indicated in the nitrogen gauges and the absence
of blinds on any of the nozzles.
4.2.17 In case the shell and tube exchangers are to be stacked, but have been stored as single shells at
the store, then EC shall erect the bottom most shell, then erect other shell(s) sequentially using
the nozzle gaskets/bolting and saddle bolting supplied by owner. Additional shims, if
necessary, shall be supplied by EC. If the exchangers do not have interconnecting nozzles,
then nozzle elevations shall be maintained as per piping GAD.
4.2.18 All equipment, consumable and other accessories required for completion of the job shall be
arranged by the EC. This would include but not limited to cranes, tools and tackles,
manpower etc; machinery for cutting, grinding , drilling etc. of base plates; instruments like
dumpy level, plumb lines, Engineer's levels, precision levels, theodolite, straight edges etc. for
checking the alignment/erection accuracy, hydrostatic testing pumps, potable water for
hydrotesting, necessary materials including making the arrangements for hydro-testing, hoses,
compressed air supply, pressure gauge, sealing taps, blinds, shims and wedges for alignment
etc.
4.2.19 EC shall execute the erection of wooden pillows for saddle supports for cold equipment as
indicated in schedule of quantities, EIL standard 7-12-002 and instructions of EIC.
4.2.20 For bought out items like plate exchangers, plate fin exchangers, electric heater, etc. vendor's
instructions shall be followed.
4.2.21 For erection of piping of ejector system, EC shall follow relevant erection specification of
piping for the project.
4.2.22 EC shall check the health of the equipment refractory lined at shop on receipt and shall report
any defect or damage in the same to EIC. During installation all precautions shall be taken to
avoid any damage to refractory lining. Any damage to refractory during erection shall be
repaired by EC at his own cost without loss of time.
4.2.23 Wherever equipment with refractory are bolted or welded at the girth joints, the gaps between
the refractory shall be suitably filled with ceramic fiber of suitable grade as given in the
drawings or other relevant documents of the equipment.
4.2.24 Refer section 1.0 (General) for additional requirements.
Page 5723 of 8516

kr, ENGINEERS
it rth INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol India Underlaying)
MACHINERY
6-76-0001 Rev. 3
Page 14 of 22
4.3 Hydrotesting of Shell and Tube Exchangers including Condensers
4.3.1 These shall hydrotested at site using potable water. Hydrotesting of both shell and tube sides
shall be carried out as per procedure given below or as per instructions of EIC. For
exchangers fitted with SS bellow or SS part, potable water with max. 25 ppm chlorides shall
be used for hydrotesting.
4.3.2 Suitable pump set, piping, test pressure gauges and other instruments, water-hoses, temporary
gaskets, metallic blinds, bolts, nuts, consumable and other temporary arrangements and
equipment for testing shall be provided by the EC at his cost. Test pressure gauges shall be
calibrated by the EC and got approved from EIC.
4.3.3 Stacked exchangers shall be hydrotested in stacked conditions.
4.3.4 Test pressure shall be as indicated in the name plates mounted on each exchangers. Duration
of hydrotest shall be at least one hour. Test pressures and duration of hydrotest may be
reduced by EIC. Minimum test water temperature shall be 20°C.
4.3.5 Any defects noticed during hydrotesting shall be repaired by EC as per the procedure
approved by EIC. Cost for rectifying defects, not attributable to the EC shall be paid
separately.
4.3.6 No equipment shall in general form part of the piping loop during hydrotesting and shall be
blinded off, except when instructed otherwise by EIC.
4.3.7 EC to take adequate care during pressurising & depressurising the equipment. EC shall also
take care of any instruction given regarding hydrotest in the exchanger drawing.
4.4 Hydrotesting Procedure
4.4.1 Shell side & tube side shall be hydrotested separately, unless specified otherwise. If both sides
are to be tested together, a warning plate would be fixed to the exchanger, and the instructions
given therein are to be followed.
4.4.2 The side, shell or tube which ever to be tested at higher pressure shall be taken first.
4.4.3 During hydrotest all gasket joints should be checked for any leakage. In case of leakage from
any gasket joint, bolting at that joint shall be further tightened following proper tightening
sequence (bolts should not be overtightened or tightened by hammering). In case it is not
possible to stop leakage by bolt tightening, drain the water in exchanger & replace gasket at
that joint by new gasket (gasket will be supplied by owner). After replacing gasket exchanger
must be again hydrotested with same procedure to ensure leak tightness.
4.4.4 In case of floating head heat exchangers, if it is found during hydrotest that the pressure is
dropping, while the external gasketed joints are not leaking, this could be due to floating head
gasket joint leakage. This shall be further investigated, by removing shell cover &
pressurising tube side to check the floating head gasket joint leakage. In case of leakage
observed at floating head flange joint, replace floating head gasket by new gasket. After
replacing gasket exchanger must be again hydrotested first on tube side & then on shell side
with same procedure to ensure leak tightness of gasket joints.
In case of heat exchangers with shell side hydrotest pressure higher than tube side, it is
possible that above procedure (with tube side hydrotest to detect floating head gasket leakage)
may not help. Absence of leakage during this test is not conclusive in such a case, as the shell
side pressure was dropping during hydrotest. In such a case, floating head gasket shall in any
case be replaced and then equipment retested to ensure leak tightness.
Page 5724 of 8516

$afae'eget ENGINEERS
Ogal" laMeg W INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
+nen eixanvmoan) T. Gort ol Intha Undertaing) MACHINERY Page 15 of 22
4.4.5 When hydrotested as per above procedure after floating head gasket replacement, if it is
observed that test pressure is still dropping, this could mean leakage from tube to tubesheet
joint. For such cases matter shall be reported to EIC for further investigations/instructions.
4.5 Flushing & Cleaning
4.5.1 After the erection, alignment and grouting of these equipment are complete, and after
hydrotest if any, flushing and cleaning shall be carried out by EC as per specifications and
instructions of the EIC.
4.5.2 After flushing, cleaning and draining, equipment shall be dried by compressed air at the
pressure and for duration decided by EIC. The equipment interior shall be thoroughly
inspected to the complete satisfaction of EIC before it is finally boxed up. Boxing up of
manholes and handholes shall be leak proof. All joints which need remaking, shall be remade.
Compressed air for drying shall be arranged by EC at his cost.
4.6 Inspection and Acceptance Limits for Level & Alignment
4.6.1 Co-ordinates of foundations/supporting structures/mounting holes etc. shall be checked with

respect to the plot plans by EC.
4.6.2 Before equipment are placed on foundations, orientations shall be checked with respect to
piping drawings.
4.6.3 When equipment are firmly bolted down but prior to grouting, verticality of all equipment
shall be checked by using theodolite. Tolerances for equipment after erection shall be as per
EIL Standard 7-12-0001. The allowable deviation from plumb line shall be 1 mm per metre
height, subject to maximum of 6 mm.
4.6.4 Horizontal equipment shall be checked for level across machined face of nozzle flanges with
precision level.
4.6.5 Difference in elevation of centerline from one end to the other end shall not be more than 1
mm per meter and limited to ± 3 mm maximum. Further elevation difference shall be such as
to ensure complete draining of equipment.
4.6.6 Survey of column inside and checking the levelness of support rings, location of bolting bars
to ensure that the same are as per column drawings and within tolerances specified in standard
7-14-0001. In case these are not within permissible tolerances, the same shall be reported to
EIC for necessary rectification/modification.
4.7 Safety, Health & Environment
EC shall install an exhaust fan for exhaling welding/ cutting fumes etc. and to maintain
adequate oxygen level, before any work is started inside confined spaces (i.e. columns).
Adequate ventilation shall be maintained at all times. Gas/LPG cylinders shall not be taken
inside confined space. When a worker/supervisor enters a confined space, it shall be
mandatory to have a second man as standby. Safety belts shall be worn while entering
columns, if there is a danger of falling. All ladders/stair cases shall be in place before any item
is offered to owner's inspectors. Rope ladders/scaffolding shall be provided inside the column
in case tower internals are not easily approachable from column manhole. Low voltage (24 V)
lamps equipped with guards shall be used to prevent accidental contact with bulb. All
electrical connections shall be through ELCB's and proper earthing shall be ensured. Acids
and other materials used for pickling shall be disposed off to a designated place as directed by
owner/EIL. All statutory Regulations and owner's safety, health and environment requirements
Page 5725 of 8516

ENGINEERS
G.v, 1^dia Undertak.11 MACHINERY Page 16 of 22
shall be complied with. Inspection aids for carrying out the inspection of internals shall also be
provided.
5.0 ERECTION OF ROTATING EQUIPMENT
The scope of work shall consist of transportation of Rotating Equipments and accessories from
Owner's stores to site, assembly of sub-assemblies/parts, erection of Rotating Equipments on
foundations, levelling, aligning and grouting, preparation of Rotating Equipments for trial
runs, carrying out no load/trial runs, return of any unused material to the owners stores and
hand over in fit condition for the start- up of the Plant, as per instructions of EIC.
Defects due to EC's fault noticed during trial runs shall be rectified by him. Schedule of
Quantities, indicate estimated numbers, dimensions and weights of the Rotating Equipments.
The actual data on dimensions and weights will be in the vendor data manuals.
The term 'Rotating Equipment' includes all pumps, compressors, steam & gas turbines, fans
and blowers, diesel engine/steam turbine/gas turbine generator sets along with drivers
accessories & auxiliary systems.
5.2.1 All Rotating Equipment erection shall be done by experienced fitters. For this purpose EC
shall employ experienced and suitably qualified erection supervisor and crew who have done
similar jobs.
5.2.2 The Rotating Equipment manufacturer's instructions as available regarding installation and
trial runs will be passed on to EC during the course of work. The requirements prescribed
therein shall be met in addition to what is stated in this specification. Erection shall be carried
out as per instructions of the Rotating Equipment manufacturer's representative and under
their supervision whenever the manufacturer is present at site. In all other cases instructions
of the EIC, regarding procedure/sequence of erection shall be binding on EC.
5.2.3 For all Rotating Equipment, EC shall follow the proper sequence for assembly and erection.
For Rotating Equipment received along with driver in coupled condition, the coupling bolts
shall be dismantled by EC, and alignment shall be rechecked. Realignment, if required, shall
be done before recoupling.
Where drivers and couplings are provided separately, drilling and tapping of holes in the base
plates for fixing drivers, fixing of couplings on shafts, after enlarging the pilot bores to the
correct size with key way etc. and dowelling including provision of dowel pins, alignment
screws, jack-up screws or similar arrangements for retaining the alignment shall be carried out
by EC as part of erection work. Shims & wedges as required for alignment shall be supplied
by EC.
5.2.4 Process and utility (such as cooling water, steam flushing, quenching, lubricating oil, sealing
etc.) connections connected with rotating equipment and its auxiliaries shall be fabricated
and/or installed by EC from materials supplied by the Owner as per drawings, specifications
and instructions of the EIC.
5.2.5 Piping and accessories supplied with the rotating equipment such as seal oil/Gas system,
cooling water system & Lube oil system etc. shall be tagged separately and kept in EC's stores
till erection. All flanged connections and openings shall be kept blanked with dummies/plugs
to prevent entry of foreign matter.
Page 5726 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$`S
LI
T aarG, IA Gan of India UndettaMingl MACHINERY Page 17 of 22
5.2.6 The local mounted instruments such as pressure gauges, sight glasses, temperature gauges etc.
and Local instrument panels, if any, with necessary connections, shall be installed by EC as
part of rotating equipment erection.
5.2.7 After initial alignment, the Rotating Equipments shall be properly grouted. Grouting shall be
carried out as per this specification. Wherever grout holes are provides in the base plates,
grout shall be filled through them also.
Epoxy grout where recommended by the rotating equipment manufacturer, shall be provided
by EC and shall be as specified in this standard.
5.2.8 Alignment between the Driver and driven equipment shall be done without connecting the
equipment nozzles to respective piping. After completion of alignment, the equipment shall
be connected to Piping. After the piping has been connected, the alignment shall be re-
checked by EC, to ensure that piping connections do not induce any undue stresses on the
Rotating Equipments. After making necessary corrections on the piping, if any, re-alignment
shall be done by EC and he will ensure that no undue stresses are induced on the Rotating
Equipment.
5.3 Special Instructions
EC in addition to general instructions for erection as out lined in para 5.2 above, shall also
follow the following special instructions.
5.3.1 Pumps
Depending upon the size of equipment, Pump train will be supplied for erection in any of the
following modes :
(a) Pumps with drivers and accessories fully assembled on a common skid (Base plate).
(b) Pumps mounted on base plate and couplings and driver supplied loose in separate packs.
(c) Various major components such as pump, drivers, couplings, gear boxes & base plates
auxiliary systems like lube, seal flush equipment in separate packs.
5.3.2 Reciprocating Type Compressors
5.3.2.1 Reciprocating compressors may be supplied for erection in knocked down condition in
multiple packaged subassemblies such as frame assembly, distance pieces, fly wheels, cylinder
block assemblies, valve assemblies etc. and other accessories such as, drivers, couplings, gear
boxes (if any), control panels, gauge boards, coolers, lube oil systems, cooling water systems,
etc. would be in separate packages.
Besides the above there would be other packages for loose supplied items such as instruments,
pre-fabricated piping, and piping/tubing in commercial lengths.
Lifting devices for erection shall be arranged by EC depending on the weight of packages and
elevation of installation.
5.3.2.2 In case of Rotating Equipments received in knocked down condition, the various parts shall be
assembled as per instructions of the EIC and as per manufacturer's instructions. All parts of
the Compressor shall be thoroughly cleaned with solvents to remove protective compounds if
any, before assembly.
Page 5727 of 8516

S5-111@.Jel ENGINEERS
taT
r fd9:
idg IA GUN Q1 India UndelaKingi MACHINERY Page 18 of 22
5.3.2.3 The compressor, driver and other accessories shall be erected on their respective foundations
and the compressor, couplings, gear box and driver shall be aligned and grouted as per the
manufacturer's instructions and instructions of EIC and the manufacturers supervisor (when
present). There-after all process and utility, drain & vent connections shall be completed as
per the relevant drawings/instructions of equipment manufacturer and advice of EIC.
5.3.2.4 Final alignment shall be done after all the piping connections such as water, steam, drains and
connection to coolers etc. are made. Tolerances for alignment shall be maintained as
specified in the Manufacturer's Instruction Manual. To ensure that piping connections do not
induce any undue stresses on the Rotating Equipment, the alignment shall be checked once
again by EC after the piping has been connected. Any correction necessary for proper
alignment shall be done by EC.
5.3.2.5 EC shall carefully study the vendor drawings, manuals and other data before start of the job to
ensure correct erection, alignment and commissioning.
5.3.3 Centrifugal Compressors & Expanders
5.3.3.1 Centrifugal Compressors are supplied for erection in multiple packages such as,
Compressor casings
Drivers (Electrical motors, Steam/Gas turbines -.)
{. : Steam/Gas turbines would be further supplied in multiple packages}
Base plates (or skids)
Lube oil/control oil systems
Sealing systems
Air filters (for gas turbines & compressors for air service)
Temporary strainers
Couplings
Gear boxes
Coolers
Gauge boards
Control panels
Lube & Seal Oil tanks
Fire systems (for gas turbines)
Condensers (for steam turbines)
Condensate systems (for steam turbines)
Loose supply items
Pre-fabricated & Commercial lengths piping, tubing.
Other miscellaneous packages
5.3.3.2 Other requirements shall be same as defined in para's 5.3.2.2 to 5.3.2.5 above.
5.4 Trial Runs of Machinery
5.4.1 Any construction defects shall be intimated to EIC before start-up. All protective and safety
guards shall be installed and rotating equipment shall be checked for free movement by
manual barring over. All foundation bolts and alignment shall be checked before starting the
trial runs, if damaged, rotating equipment may have to be opened and repaired as directed by
EIC. Prior to carrying out the trial runs, the rotating equipment will be subjected to necessary
checks by the EIC and the trial runs shall be commenced only after the approval of the EIC.
Page 5728 of 8516

ENGINEERS
IA Gov/ 0/ India llndenalong/ MACHINERY Page 19 of 22
5.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, all the rotating equipment will be subjected to trial runs for a
continuous operation of 72 hours. In case of motor driven rotating equipments, motors shall
be decoupled and turned over to other agencies doing electrical work for testing and no load
running of motors. After the no load runs of motors are satisfactorily completed, EC shall
recouple the motors to the rotating equipment and recheck the alignment. The trial run of the
rotating equipment shall be started only after the above is completed. EC shall provide, as part
of his work, necessary skilled personnel (excluding the operating personnel) for conducting
the trial runs round the clock during the trial runs period. The duration of trial run may be
extended if it is considered necessary in the opinion of EIC and EC shall provide personnel for
such extended period also. Final inspection of bearing etc. shall be carried out by EC after the
Machinery had gone through the trial run and defects, if any, shall be made good for rendering
the rotating equipment ready for start up.
5.4.3 During the trial runs, readings of bearing temperature, cooling water inlet and outlet
temperatures, lube oil inlet/outlet temperature and pressure, rotating equipment discharge
pressure and temperature, starting in current, no load/full load current etc. shall be recorded,
wherever necessary, by EC. Trial reports shall be prepared in the approved proforma by EC
containing all the above details and submitted to the EIC as part of completion documents.
5.4.4 EC shall also provide necessary improvised fencing and watch & ward personnel as safety
measures during trial runs.
5.5 System Start up
During start-up, EC shall provide necessary skilled personnel as per requirement of EIC, to
rectify defects noticed in the rotating equipment, if such defects are attributed to him.
6.0 EQUIPMENT GROUTING
All anchor bolt sleeves/pockets and space under Base plates/machine base frames/shoe plates,
etc. shall be grouted with either free flow non shrink cementitious or epoxy grout as per the
following categorisation:
Sr.
Type of Grout Application
No.
1 Non shrink All static and rotating equipments, unless covered in 2)
cementitious grout below, viz Static equipments like tall columns, vertical silo,
blender etc. and horizontal vessel, drum, sphere, bullets,
filter, heat exchangers, coolers etc. and other similar
equipments, steel stack/chimney, furnace etc.
Low frequency, medium frequency, high frequency rotating

machines like compressors (centrifugal, reciprocating,
diaphram, screw, gear type etc.). Induced draft fan, forced
draft fan, air blowers, pumps (centrifugal, reciprocating,
diaphram, gear type etc.), expanders, turbine, generator,
diesel generator, air coolers (fin fan cooler) and other
similar equipment.
Machine like screen vibrator, extractor, centrifuge

pulverizer, dryer, drop hammer, ball mill, crushers, bagging
machine and general workshop equipment.
2 Epoxy grout Specifically if requested by the Machine Vendor.
Page 5729 of 8516

-

laraae?1,0 ENGINEERS ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT &
Se7 ?Mtg
. Grm of India uncienalong) MACHINERY Page 20 of 22
6.1 Grout (Material)
All material used for grout shall be in EC's scope. Only approved grout material shall be
used. EC shall submit details of grout materials for prior approval of EIC.
6.1.1 Non-Shrink Grout
Non-shrink grout shall be premix type of cementitious (cement pregraded fibre and additive)
non-shrink, ready to use grout in dry powder form. It shall have free flow property when
mixed with required quantity of water. It shall have initial setting time of 30 minutes.
It shall have the following features:
- Non corrosive to anchor bolts, base plate/saddle/frame, sliding plate.

Not harmful to concrete and reinforcing steel.
Non toxic
Frost, oil and fire resistant
Require normal curing
Suitable to use under restraints and grout thickness required
Expansive to counteract initial shrinkage
Ensure high early strength without surface crack.
Suitable for temperature of above 0 deg.0 to 200 deg.C.
Maximum flow distance is compatible to the dimensions of base plate/ saddle/frame.
It should be resisted to the chemicals, gases etc. being handled in equipment/machines.
It should have the following physical properties:
Min. Compressive strength at 3 days 25 N/mm2

2
7 days 30 N/mm
28 days 40 N/mm2
Min. Tensile strength at 28 days 3.5 N/mm2
Min. Bond strength at 7 days 12 N/mm2
Max. Onstrained Expansion in 2 hours 4%
Min. Density 2000 kg/m3
6.1.2 Epoxy Grout
Epoxy grout shall consist of epoxy resin base, hardener and filler component like graded and
blended aggregate. Components of epoxy grout shall be of desired grade and mixed in
proportion recommended by manufacturer such that it is injectable under base
plate/frame/saddle etc., has low viscosity to meet the flow distances according to dimensions
of base plate saddle/frame, it is suitable for the desired thickness, it is homogenous, free from
segregation, attains high early and high final strength. It shall have minimum Pot life of 30
minutes. It shall have all the features as specified in clause 6.1.1 except for expansive
properties.
It should have the following physical properties :
Min. compressive strength at 1 day 75 N/mm2

7 days 85 N/mm2
Min. Flexural strength 7 days 25 N/mm2
Page 5730 of 8516

lori triES ENGINEERS
~5271 INDIA LIMITED ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT & 6-76-0001 Rev. 3
IA Govt ol Inda Undertaxing)
6.2 Grouting (Placement)
6.2.1 Surface Preparation
Prior to positioning of equipment/machine etc. over concrete pedestal, foundation, slab, beam,
etc. all laitance & loose material shall be removed by wire brushing & chipping. The bearing
concrete surface shall be sufficiently levelled, hacked with flat chisels to make it rough, clean
(using compressed air). Additional chipping, if required, to suit level of base plate and/or
minimum thickness of grout shall also be done. In case of use of cementitious grout surface
shall be thoroughly wet. All pockets for anchor bolts shall also be similarly cleaned. Any
excess water shall be removed. In case of use of epoxy grout, it shall be ensured that
surface/pocket to receive grout is totally dry. After erection, alignment/plumbing of
equipment/machine in required level, orientation and plumb and installation of sliding plate.
Forms shall be constructed around and joints made tight to prevent leakage of the grout.
6.2.2 Preparation of Grout
6.2.2.1 In case of premix type of grout water shall be added in required quantity as specified by
supplier and/or EIC. Any specific instruction of manufacturer will be strictly followed.
6.2.2.2 In case of epoxy grout required quantity of all constituents shall be mixed in proportion
recommended by manufacturer/supplier and/or EIC. All specific requirements of
manufacturer/ supplier shall be strictly followed.
6.2.2.3 Required quantity of grout shall be made considering initial setting/pot life of grout. Any
grout not used within initial setting time/pot life shall be rejected and in no case used for
grouting.
6.2.3 Placement of Grout
6.2.3.1 Placing of grout shall be taken up only after level, orientation, alignment of
equipment/machine has been approved by EIC and anchor bolts are placed in pocket.
6.2.3.2 In case of epoxy grout EC shall give details of grouting scheme and get approval of EIC.
6.2.3.3 The grout mixture shall be poured/injected continuously (without interruption till completion)
by grouting pump/injecting gun from one side of base plate and spread uniformly with flexible
steel strip and rammed with rods till the space is filled solidly and grout mixture carried to the
other side of base plate and fill all pockets. Any specific requirement of manufacturer/
supplier shall be strictly followed. Epoxy grout shall be done by or under supervision of
manufacturer/supplier and/or agency having adequate experience in this field as per direction
of EIC.
Total work shall be done under supervision and direction of EIC and care shall be taken that
alignment of equipment/machine is not disturbed.
6.2.3.4 Grout mixture shall be allowed to harden for a period of minimum 7 days or as required by
manufacturer/supplier of grout and/or as decided by EIC. At the end of this period, the
shims/edges/pack plate may be removed and anchor bolts tightened uniformly. Alignment of
equipment/machine shall be rechecked and if found correct, the voids left by the removal of
shims/wedges/pack plate (if removed) must be filled up with a similar mixture of grout. In
case after checking, serious misalignment is indicated, the grout shall be removed completely
and fresh grouting is done after making appropriate correction of alignment.
6.2.3.5 Minimum thickness of grout shall be 25mm for all types of grout and maximum thickness
shall be 40mm for non-shrink grout. For epoxy grout the maximum thickness shall be as per
manufacturer's recommendation and/or as specified in drawing.
Page 5731 of 8516

ladaa4 ENGINEERS
5•T oA Gov' of India Undo( taningf
7.0 REFERENCE EIL STANDARDS/ SPECIFICATIONS
6-14-0003 Installation Procedure for Trays & Tower Internals

6-14-0011 Specification for Packing the Column
6-14-0016 Standard Specification for Review of Site Installation of Column
Internals.
6-79-0011 Standard Specification for Corrosion Protection Tape Coating for
Underground Steel Piping.
6-79-0020 Standard Specification for Surface Preparation and Protective Coating
(New Construction)
7-12-0001 Vessel Tolerances.
7-12-0002 Support for Horizontal Vessel
7-12-0003 Wooden Pillow for Saddle Support
7-12-0004 Skirt Base Details
7-12-0024 Lifting Lug Top Head Type
7-14-0001 Construction Tolerance for Welded Supports for Tray / Tower
Internals
Page 5732 of 8516

STANDARD No.
STANDARD FOR ORIENTATION OF SEAL
egglaiDIA LIMITS)
IA Gore of India Undertaking)
POT & AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS OF
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
7- 44 - 0321 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 1
* 1/2 Base frame width

c.)-1
EDGE OF BASE FRAME
SEAL POT
2" CBD FOR CASING DRAIN

(CLOSED SYSTEM)
OF PUMP DISCHARGE
ml 0 1
31 31
CWR
4" OWS (WITH 6" FUNNEL)
(FOR BASE FRAME, CASING DRAIN & LOW
POINT DRAIN OF PUMP SUCTION PIPING)
CASING DRAIN
BASE FRAME DRAIN
APPLICABLE FOR PUMPS WITH

END SUCTION/TOP DISCHARGE
TOP SUCTION/TOP DISCHARGE
3. SIDE SUCTION/SIDE DISCHARGE
NOTES
Pump supplier to ensure that the locations / orientation of seal pot , Drain connections
CWS & CWR shall be as indicated in this drawing.
All dimensions are in mm, unless other wise specified.
3. Seal pot, CW supply/return, U/G points shall be mirror image for the pump tag nos identified
during detail engineering, considering access/client requirements. Input shall be provided in MR.
LEGEND
• CBD : CLOSED BLOW DOWN
C) OWS : OILY WATER SEWER
CWS : COOLING WATER SUPPLY
0 CWR : COOLING WATER RETURN
1 30.03.15 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD t3ifri< N 4ER
QATD
0 29.06.12 ISSUED AS STANDARD TR HC ATD DM
Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 5733 of 8516
pamasai s;1161-1 IIV-11341.160do0 0*AedLd- 1.000-00-8"oN
Page 5734 of 8516

Aq panorddv
lD
c
co
O
O
o
NOLLVIN9IN31dINI dOda3nsst
co
O
G)
Cl3r1SSI-3d CINVCI3SIA32i
O
rn
cn
C131-1SSI-321CINVCI3SIA3d
(SS33021dasodurm rwoaas)
IVIMOZMOHrIVD9II2IIM33 diAlfld210i
MVIcl ISaiL MOI,L33•ISMI
-12
PUMPS CENTRIFUGAL HORIZONTAL (SPECIAL PURPOSE PROCESS)
C'Aed 17Z00- L8-9
'oN NOILVOld103dSadvaNvis NVIcI1S31 (INV MOIIDadSNII
H
:suop.mitaiqqy
• • •
4Z
,.< q
0.Aed LJ-1000-00-8'oN w W.I0d

-, - G/Ci
f:■) . P 4 4 5' 5" W 55Z '-ri rri t::()(-)(-)
-c n
e-ls C9 " eD co cp -1 f-2+' (1)
-d 'rl. 0 "
C) C) cil n 0
-, co v) ,- . GM o
n 81—,`-•C
AD ('5. Cl. '"L7 c-5 (1) 'oD- (I)' ' rii 5-fz,) '6'
eD -cl -• -,
a
n cE
Dno ,.§- „ , _ . c) 7:i Clg ZH eD
44 CD CD .-• • CD n
cn ■-r- ■-h
S:ND H cp
c) ,,, w) -1-
CD CD (•-.) .-I ..-t'
fW t-1- ." •
TJ .-s c) ,--, .-t
ric?
AD
`2rD-
r-v- .-. • 0
(b
CD cn CfQ ,-
CM ■-+
,-P- »=. AD ,Z g
cr
,-.t ,--, •
1:\ AD CD 0
Ccn r
g•
A>
'"A .=(1)
0..
.
Z
CD 5 •
CD
"0 1W
S:0
x cm
C) `-t' < H tH v) 'ci '-t:J ■-0 r-ct s-ci Z Z 4
c4
,...„ , , ,H
1=, ,,c) , , -- x (4
1.' .-0
,„ ,g) c) o z '-'
0 .-1
0.
CD
r)
< H H C1) '-ci I-ri '-ci '-o I-ci —

.=,,,
co. at (::) -t co CD o (1)
,_, __, -1
ic ) g' c)
481 .. ''' • 'c- l
0 Z-1-• CD °
,,,
":1-. cz,"' P2
9"‘ L (") $1,
■
-t ".: crA .< t:t) t=L, CD fW 0
.-I 0 1-ci (-D .,=1
CD ." • CA
■J >---
,,, ci) -CS cp 5 4,
CO''Cl.-t , r.
+" g r--.'•
-, 0 $D) H : _,
- C--) . '-is
.1 ,--' 94. C7 ,C) ril Pt CD <. 3
CD $21) CD CD •ZD D< Cl.
0 ','.15 ~ .-t-
CD .-t <
CL■ CD ~ • 'C:5 p_D_, cn e) CD
..0 eD
"
CD ..... (:/': 0 -,3 sH
et
no 4—• ..c:1-,.7.,.'5"• ::■--2■h•.-v,-cj.- Ot c'cn
eD
c) CA 71) C5« CIC? CD = ,--I- CD -,
,s—,. cn
0 .-(5 . cn
,•r-
,0 (2D.r•D' > '''. —:i $:,., crQ
pL ..t7r1 e-i, CfQ r) n o.
—• c)
c) . ‘.< r2 C) o 0
7,1 ,..,
fw c) r) "' CfQ
,-,• .-- • 1:).)
0 =
CfQ N
$:0
-.. 11)
0
0
O
co
VAad 17Z00- L 8-9
pamasei s4116!-I IIV— 1131-16pAclo0

.0NNOIIV3ld103dSaavaNvis
Page 5735 of 8516

N NOLLYOld103dSadVCINVIS '0
,:::, VAG2117Z00- 1. 8-9

1■
This Inspectionand TestPlancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof PumpCentrifugal Horizontal (Special Purpose Process)

.7::›
IN.)
simaivaum~ is I L amv momadsm

O
Cèà
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
rl
RECORD
,-7
>
ril
STAGE/ACTIVITY
n
x
x
X
›.-
1-3
SUB
z
OF CHECK
o
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
....
O
Procedures
Hydrotest,MRT/Performance,
NPSHTest,NDTand Other
-
.-
.-
o
o
Documented Procedures Procedures
Procedure
(Asapplicable)
WPS, PQR,WPQ-
Qualification for Overlay Weldingprocedure WPS/PQR/ W- New,
-
C>
iNJ
Repairweldingprocedures qualification 1. 2. 3. WPQRecords R- Existing

Wearring hardness
O
Material Inspection
r.>
Page 5736 of 8516

7kedL3- 1.000-00-9'0N 18111.10j
pamasai s1.16!J IIV— 113ILINAdoo
'oN NOI1V91d103dSadVCINVIS
Nz
tT1
> z
>
• (/)
b y
xn
oz
$-3
.̀J
c"nal 17Z 00- 1. 8-9
•
o
c.)
c.)
,•=1
o
O
ro
n
ci)
1-3
•
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
r)
RECORD
rii
e)
x
STAGE/ACTIVITY
C/)
CA
OF CHECK SUB
z
o
gl
rki
.0
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
IncomingMaterial Visual & Dimensions,

MTC, HT Chart,
Casing,StuffingBox,Impeller, Chemical Properties/
Z
cz'
(..)
Inspection
—
BearingHousing,ShaftMaterial Physical Properties, Heat

Report
(Asapplicable) Treatmentasper Specs
Piping & Hardware Items-

MTC &
Valves,Flanges,Pipes,Fittings,
ò
<
0
0
t\.)
i.)
.....
Inspection
cÊAD
Gaskets, Fasteners,Gland
Report
Packing,etc(Asapplicable)
Hydro/Pneumatic Test&
Accessories-
Seal Qualificationtest(As
BufferLiquid Reservoir
applicable) forMechanical MTC/ Inspection
0
t..)
L.)
ci
Barrier/Buffer Liquid Cooler
seal, Reservoir,coolers, & Test Record
Mechanical Seal,
Dynamic balancingof seal
Coupling(Asapplicable)
and coupling.
Motor / VFD(Asapplicable) MTC&

Typetest/Routine
cN)
*(supplier/sub suppliertoarrange TPIA 100% Inspection

testof Motor (Note-3)
certification) Report
Page 5737 of 8516

0"Aed LA- 1• 000-00-9 'oN 4eWJOd
pG/UGSG.1 S1116P11V-11311160clo0
NOIIVOld103dSCP:MaNVIS '0 N
£'AoH17Z00- 68-9
x SCOPE OFINSPECTION
7c
:
QUANTUM
ril
STAGE/ACTIVITY RECORD
1-3
cr
(n
SUB
0
OF CHECK
r21
5:
g'
SUPPLIER
.0
SUPPLIER
Engine/Turbine(Asapplicable) Load test /MRTof MTC &
Z
c::'
IN)
Z.),
CD
Engine Inspection
.-■
*(supplier/sub suppliertoarrangeTPIA
certification) MRTof Turbine Report
Gear box(Asapplicable) AD
MTC &
c°
H
0
0
Z
I.)
.--,
.-b
*(supplier/sub suppliertoarrange TPIA Inspection
0
crq
ro
.c:
• •
LubeOil system(Asapplicable) Inspection
0
.--1
x
cv
,=:›
C>
Functional
.--
Report
e:::,
(...)
NDT(Asapplicable) for
.--,
CD
Casing,Impeller,StuffingBox, Surfaceand Internal

c:
"--
(...)
TestReports
i
Shaft & Casingto Nozzlebuttweld imperfections
Page 5738 of 8516

0'Aed Ld-1000-00-8 'oN 48W.10j
CopyrightEI L —All rightsreserved

'0N NOLLV0l3133dScpdvaNvis
C'AedtZ00- 18-9
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
:
QUANTUM
0
e-)
7
til
*-3
>
r)
r5>
cA
STAGE/ACTIVITY
e-
rilX
'-
OF CHECK SUB
.
0
sg
SUPPLIER
';1>
ril
SUPPLIER
Hydrotestof casing &stuffing box Inspectionand
beforeAssemblyof LeakTightness Each Set
i\
TestRecords
Pump
Inspectionand
DynamicBalancing EachRotor
t,•>
Impeller / Rotorassembly TestRecords

0
FINAL INSPECTION
Performance
NPSH(R)- If
applicable
1. 2. 1. ( 2.
3. Mech.Running 3. 4. Inspectionand
'-iz1
til
.--,
Testingof Pumps
c.)
Z
TestRecords
Vibration,Noise
Measurement,
Bearing TempRise)
Visualinsp. of
casing inside
surface
Wearringarea
Dismantle inspectionof pumpafter
5-'
cn c,_
visual Check
-s p,
c4
'TZ
CD
»....
Z
'-ci
rri
i•-)
performancetest
9
<-
cL
-3
Clearance
,-P-
o
co
cp
CA
■
measurement
Examinationof
Mechanical seal
Alignmentof pumpwith
Inspectionand
x
tri
cA
U.)
Unitizationof Pumpwith job driver driverand Check Direction

c9
ro
Test Records
of Rotation
Page 5739 of 8516

0'ned L3- 1000-00-8'oN }ewio3
pamasaJ sp4 6!J IIV — 11344 60do0
'0N NOIIVOld103dSadVCI NVIS
VAed17Z00- 1. 8-9
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
o ci)
r)
CZ
ril
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS OF CHECK SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Testingof auxiliarypiping if Inspectionand
X
cn
ril
Leak Tightness
-P
-1=,
CD,.-
applicable TestRecords
MTC&
CompliancetoPR
-4,
,.'
Z
c>
—
Job Instruments if applicable Statutory
bl
requirements
certification
Validityofcalibration & Calibration

-1=,
Zi
c>
,::'
—
ch
Testingand Measuring Instruments

accuracy Report
Visual, dimensionand skid Inspection
ò
c>
—
-.1
-P
FinalPumpSkid Assembly
.
completeness check Report
th
::::>
Painting
.83.
CD 11:
5'
0 e
Paintingof pumpskid &associated Paint Scheme, Visual &
n)
c4
c)
<,'
—
:---`
(A
.
parts(asapplicable) Paintthicknesscheck
-0
CD
0'■
Documentation
Stampingand reviewof inspection Reviewof documents for
01
c>
‹.''
—
..—•
,
documents, issueof IC complianceasper PR.
Dossier /
Compilationof documents
Z
.."
c>
—
Completion
i•-)
Final documentsubmission
0\
asperVDR/PR.
certificate
Page 5740 of 8516

0"nal{ Ld- 1000-00-9'0N l ewiod
pamasai sA 6P IIV— 1134 01JAcloo
• •
•
••
••z
CD cD
Cf Q
=
CD
o • ul = 0 0
7 • ii) ,--r- CD ■-t ,.C, {-.), -0 —•
ep p, s:)› "--, .-c) >-C co n .'-.
o -0 <-) Q..,
R° = (1) -g
,-.. ,n0
•
'e•-: . 'CS ,
:(appygddu sy) SaION
0'Aad Ld- 1.000-00-9 'oN }eWJOd

>•=
'Ei 7?) d'' s' - . Z c) 4 zt e() CD
PD‘
o
,- • ...., ,,-,
u) '.. ,,, - cA CD
;■ >< .. '(":"p ,-t- '-- ,
-t c) j- --, • , -. 6- - <
-• ,.., cD E. CD ("D CD
= C:).■ s"Cj '') • "'••■
c) . CD 5 L'. o
= =- 5 " (1) ,-, •-• • 5 •
CD °
5 ..,i cfc? O+' ,-, p-D C
1
:3 = 0 `" , = cm
F cto (1) 0
co ..c3 CFQ . PD ■-n , 1 ( pp
.-t
,,
(1) „, E <9 4 ••• '• CD .-t CD c.)
' • - co o =,: 10-• n • ".
;2D, 1. ) 9. •• FD ‘ 0 D' ,g F,; $DD
a EP v, ., __
gD) (I) = ,-3 `'
,-,
n) 6' ,-,~.2.• c) '--- cr E. ,)
ci)
=-
_, •,-_„
-,- {2 • ,_,.. 12 v)
c
... s- 0 tri 0 (/)
4 Ò. '-o ro
CD
- cn C: r erc?
Cl•Cl k.. ...
CD • cn
.-1 ■••cj •
•"1= t`'
,_•L rri
rr
CD •--, CD = = ril
~ ---- CD
,,
'"4") Cr Fi L9-• H ":i ‘•
»..., 0 -----. .-■ • o = o
H < C/1 i"--'
..0 ■-:j ro ,r-t- .-3 v) {±
• ,i •-■ = „, '-O H -• • o
= — ›.--0 CL. °
eJ -. - 1-0 0
n) s v)oZ =
oNz
CD •--, I:, 61)
CA
,-,
CD
go 2 ao
<-4 o • =r-
••
yd
• 0 . SD)
,--,
• .-cl .-+ — 1100 L CD
o
,.< ,5 "":;'
: , ---, cn
5. ,,, -,
•-, E7)
..o :,, (1) 5
c) .--h cn
'«Cl CD "0 t=1
AD cr "Fi. V)
cn 4 CD •"=
cl) .') ?-). o, 2, g. CD • >
O
,-1,
CD 0- ...., •-t- 0 >
• U'
,....,..-, s,;-' (2, CP
0 (.', cn o, CD c)
o =.- i -• o
-., = oo = co
`- CC; ■
-o
,....-.
- -t ro c>
~- cr ° .u, o O
■
-1-) t.....)
-. r)
ci)
= .,.7.4-.. .----,'cio E t=1
•-• •
9 ,)
,... ":
(D"
CD c) (/) n C...
r) CD (1) c)
=-• ,-- 4-P4 5.
= or 5. (-)
'<--;* ,..-,.
v) ,-< c o ~4,
1:0 rri -t ----
. z._2., ›,. ,--,
c o - o
D• C = C 7 c
C="' =)-• H,
v,
= . -C 0
<=
•--r < F7
,1«
CD
9
,-,
1=0
(-'. ;.- O - 2- E
L.,.., o
,' >c 0... oo o
(-) = v) ,---. c)
• = =- ..< c
= H P-D- '1
1
CD
CD
v) -- cp = 0
CD (1)
ro 0: cn
'-'s CD ,....., <-'•
><
0 = -•
co or
ri
v) cl.
v)
Z<- ;;. o-
ro '-c, ol. co
v) ,
0
vited t7Z00-1. 8-9
pamasai SA 61.1 IIV-11344 6pAcio0

oN NOI1V313133dSaavaNvis
-
Page 5741 of 8516

pamesaJ sv.16P IIV— 1134q 6pAdo0 0'Aed L3-1000-00-9'0N Teu.uod
Page 5742 of 8516

Aq pancuddv
c
G)
NOIIVIN31A131dIAlldOdconssi
cn
G)
-•
Cl3f1SSI-32:1 CINV 43SIA32i
C)
cn
G)
CJ
7J
7J
C)
C)
43rISSI-32iCINV 43SIA32i
cn
cn
G)
0
u
4311SSI-321CINV 43S1A32i
43(ISS1-32i C1NV 43S1A32i
Ac
2
ritaH L,I700-18-9
:suopmnamiciy
. . .
o .
A) CD
3
,-. ..1
0.rad L3- L 000-00-9 'oN et.u.Jod

4 •••
9. 5. ri c r)() -)
5 < z 1- r rT ? " CC
-i- 5 --
=C'4"D'. CI4 r-5 ,5 z o..
-t 'H
CD coD .0
,,,
=-'• ¢, 9, '" ■ -r
<1) ‘-< C-3"
-, r)
;
<-
's=,-;" ,(-1■- C.)
-1
ucpa., ■-cionno-t
(',') til 'ff' $''
■
H E- -t s> '- r)
"""cirqO,..4.
(1) ,H ,..c (,) - •
cp ,-, = .., ,-*•
l. J CD <`-.1-*•
, p) .-,
cn fD) ■-• 0 C • .-■
.-t C)
".
--. < -,-- rri
(-) .-,'•
CD .-- (-)
(ix 9.. E. 2- 9 ziCfCiro ,..,.,
s-k (D
H .r (i)
co o 17-h szN .6. cn 0 CD •-■•
0 OEC
»
.... .—$ (") cp cl- CD ur e' ,--t-
cn cn + .-1-,
.-H ■
-s :0 cn
■-t- (-) fà) ),)
C.—■ . :---1
() cA
CD 0 »-t — .t (D
CD 1W ■-+ ~ "
co "td -t o crq
=■) ...—' ".. H (I) '5
" • ''')
(1) cp 5 B = t-t
AD ,..,. CPQ 5 -. 5"
o = (.4' CD gc:7
AT. P" CfQ uJam
w
ol
= o
ru
cp i
(/)
cp
r.) wn
-,
o all
44 p
H rri o
< .3 tH CI) !-L7 s-C1 '"1:1 ~d ''l:1 Z Z

(1) .-.7_,
cD ,. CD C $2ri0
, C ."1 0 e•r-
CD ...t n) o
oaN
EL-, CD
■•-• ,'« '4 .,..
'er ,...
°-.
• 0.. go
" ¢.,
r-, ,,, _ o "d ,—,
(7. Q) neti
(--)4:_CI.9o1 -,• R- ro•£-.
-t = ;---; o ■•• n) - co cn cn cn
0 co
OQ co rz co •-t cn
''t c)
--«, ,4 ,_,•,
•— &.) 'd ,, (D ° a• '''' e3i
--... ... .
o
'"Gl .--
„. < 2
-, o ,,,, -1 <-› ,-, ,.< - CD ,C L,>,..,,, .-t0CD n t
CD 5 n
" o. w a c.) -Ds < nx
Z•C 4 e H -g: . .6. o a
c) cn ..... ,H u
= CD .- . CfQ .-r- O 5- E,..., -c s• 5,› ...• 0 co sai
e) .-,- (1) =
eD CID FD (3 ,-9 Cr: (.1) ,_ ,-,- 1.
-cs - 5. c/D 4., 5.
■
0 a CD > .5. ..". H Q..,
(1) ro..
-• (-) = (") o
= o -t
tw aS. o
c) ,-. ,-< C)
P,) .5
,•#. Z- CIQ
CS
'" .... QD
(IfQ N
A)
0
C
pamasei s14 6u IIH —11314Mcloo
Page 5743 of 8516

r nall 2700-18-9
PO/PR/ Standardsreferredthere in/ Job specifications /Approved documents.

(IMVNoupadsmi
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
2
0

SUPPLIER
■
-•
O
Procedures
Hydrotest,
MRT/Performance, NPSH
.-
o
o
," -
7zi
,-.
7:
Test, NDT and Other Documented Procedures Procedures
Procedure
(Asapplicable)
WPS, PQR,WPQ-
Qualification for
Overlay
-"" eDZ
Weldingprocedures, WPS/PQR/
ril '
,-
.-
o
o
7:J
iN.)
Repairwelding
Qualification WPQ Records
crc?
><
procedures
Wearring 1. 2. 3.
hardness
O
it..)
Material Inspection
Page 5744 of 8516

0•Aed Ld-1.000-00-8'oN
pamesaJ s}14 6!-I IIV — 113414 60doo
00
CN
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM FORMATOF
2 cA

0

SUPPLIER
Incoming Material
Visual & Dimensions, MTC, HT
Casing,Stuffing Box,
Chemical Properties/Physical Chart,
o
.--
tv
Impeller, Bearing Housing

.—
Properties, HeatTreatmentas Inspection

& Shaft Material
per Specs Report
(Asapplicable)
Piping&HardwareItems-
Valves,Flanges, Pipes, Visual &Dimensions,
MTC &
Fittings, Gaskets, Chemical Properties/Physical
.-
7:1
c:'
o
o
tv
iv
Inspection
Fasteners, Gland Packing Properties,HeatTreatmentas
Report
etc. per Specs
(Asa pplicable)
Accessories- Hydro/PneumaticTest&
Buffer Liquid Reservoir SealQualificationtest(As
MTC/
Barrier/BufferLiquid applicable) for Mechanical
.-
o
o
tv
Z.,)
Inspection &
,:
Cooler seal,Reservoir,coolers,
TestRecord
Mechanical Seal /Seal Plan Dynamic balancingofseal
Cou .lin : (Asa pplicable) and cou lin :.
Motor / VFD
.6. R.,
(4 ö
.-.
ED 'ti H
(Asapplicable)
Typetest/Routinetestof
X*
o
o
--
tv
*(supplier/sub supplierto
:1=.
7Zi ,4
CD
Motor c: (Note-3)
arrangeTPIA
0
'"0
certification)
Turbine(Asapplicable)
MTC &
o
o
iv
,--.
_,,
MRTofTurbine Inspection
c:
arrangeTPIA
Report
certification)
Page 5745 of 8516

0 n aN Ld- t000-00-8'oN T eW.10d
CopyrightEI L All rightsreserved
00
0
(to
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
:
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
CA
t..1
e)
c.)
14
n
n
cA
STAGE/ACTIVITY SUB
OF CHECK REPORT
0
>4
t'il
Cl
1-..-
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
Gear box(Asapplicable) MTC
7zi
o
,--.
co
Inspection
N
MRTof gear box

«CT
arrange TPIA Report

certification)
LubeOil system(As Inspection
7:J
o
o
,--,
.1
Functional
N
applicable) Report
f.A>
NDT(Asapplicable) for
o
--,
co
Casing,Impeller, Stuffing Surfaceand Internal RT films &
-
7::i
Z
l.k.)
,
Box,Shaft &Casingto imperfections NDTreport
Nozzle buttweld
Hydrotest before
assemblyof pumpouter Inspectionand
Z
Each Set
l..)
N
Leak Tightness
,
casing,stagecasing & TestRecords
stuffing box
f.rn Inspectionand
,-,-)
-,,)
Impeller / Rotorassembly Dynamic Balancing
-Ei
o
o
i
Test Records
Final Inspection
./›.
Page 5746 of 8516

0°AOL3- 1000-00-8'oN l euuoj
pa/UGS9.1 S4q 6P IIV— 113400doo
4à,
00
00
C,
O
roro
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
OF CHECK REPORT
';51,
il
SUPPLIER
51
SUPPLIER
Performance
NPSH(R)-If applicable
Mech. Running Inspectionand
x
Z
—•
Testingof Pumps Each Pump

■
(Vibration, Noise Test Records

Measurement, Bearing
Tem•Rise)
Visual insp.of casing
insidesurface
Dismantle inspectionof Wearringareavisual
Z
pumpafterperformance Check Inspectionand
1
tJ
..L.
Each Pump
-.2,R,
test Clearancemeasurement TestRecords
Examinationof
Mechanicalseal
1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Alignmentof pumpwith
UnitizationofPumpwith Inspectionand
Z
i...)
driverand Check Directionof Each Set
s
job driver Test Records
Rotation
Testingof auxiliarypiping Inspectionand

:4,
Leak Tightness Each Set
1
(Asapplicable) Test Records
MTC &
Complianceto PR
0
0
c''
.--,
Ul
Job Instruments Statutory

requirements
certification
Validityofcalibration & Calibration
0
0
c''
c,
.--,
Testing Instruments
accuracy Report
Page 5747 of 8516

0n9d Ld-1000-00-8 'oN }eauod
Copyright EIL — Al l rightsreserved
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
0t"'
c, i)

SUPPLIER
o
c' '
©:,
-•,1
Final Pumpskid Assembly

- 1= .
i
completenesscheck Report
O
Painting
U
Paintingofpumpskid &
PaintScheme,Visual & Paint Inspection
o
,,'
co
associated parts
( ., )
.—
i
thicknesscheck Report
(Asapplicable)
C"
Documentation
.*:: >
Stampingand reviewof
Reviewof documents for
x
o
o
C
,--
O\
inspection documents,
.
complianceasperPR.
issueof IC
Dossier /
Reviewof final Compilationof documentsas
Z
c' ''
co
Completion
i, .)
O\
documentationof supplier perVDRattached with PR.

certificate
:(eigeoudde sV )S310N
c- co
Page 5748 of 8516

0•AedL3- 6000-00-9'oN TELUJ Od
pamasai sTy6u IIV— 113411 60doo
o
cn
CD
.
o-
0*noi:1 L3-1000-00-9'0N 4 eWJOJ

cr
cp
-t.
CfQ
CD
cD
F-t
--t
co
o.
-t
—•
CtQ
CD
efs'
00
1..11
Cfc7
00
0
00
patuasai sly 6P IIV— 11344 60do9
Page 5749 of 8516

SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1
lakgINDIA LIMITED REQUIREMENTS FROM
mren ewaire mjvam) (A Gavt at India Undertaking)
BIDDERS Page 1 of 7
64)(11 Chrlf qui ciall -51-04ff

u tea aliikrrat t ?drift'
SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS
QMS QMS
Committee Committee

QMS QMS
Committee Committee
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Checked
Date Purpose Prepared by Convener Chairman
No by
Approved by

Page 5750 of 8516

INDIA LIMITED SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1

lft2 (AG'"ind'Undelt6ung) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
CV Curriculum Vitae
PO Purchase Order

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)

Page 5751 of 8516

Igar llks INDIA LIMITED SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev.
Oiren
'A
Govt
At ' nth' Und"k"V) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
Clause Title Page

No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS 4
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — GENERAL 4
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 4
6.0 AUDITS 7
Page 5752 of 8516

el ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

$1g-zg faReg INDIA LIMITED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1
own 120.2 .I J40.9) IA GOVt of India Undertaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be

met by BIDDER for following purpose:
• QMS requirements to be met by suppliers/contractors after award of work/

during contract execution.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word "BIDDER" means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
2.2 Project Quality Plan
Document tailored from Standard Quality Management System Manual of BIDDER,

specifying how the quality requirements of the project will be met.
2.3 Owner

6-78-0002 Specification for Documentation Requirements from
Contractors
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — GENERAL
Unless otherwise agreed with EIL / Owner, the BIDDER proposed quality system
shall fully satisfy all relevant requirements of ISO 9001 "Quality Management
Systems — Requirements." Evidence of compliance shall be current certificate of
quality system registration to ISO 9001 or a recent compliance audit recommending
registration from a certification agency. The quality system shall provide the
planned and systematic control of all quality related activities for execution of
contract. Implementation of the system shall be in accordance with BIDDER'S
Quality Manual and PROJECT specific Quality Plan.
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

5.1 BIDDER shall prepare and submit for review / record, Project Quality Plan / Quality
Assurance Plan for contracted scope / job. The BIDDER'S Quality Plan shall
address all of the applicable elements of ISO 9001, identify responsible parties
within BIDDER'S organization, for the implementation / control of each area,
reference the applicable procedures used to control / assure each area, and verify
the documents produced for each area. The Project Quality Plan shall necessarily
define control or make reference to the relevant procedures, for design and
engineering, purchase, documentation, record control, bid evaluation, inspection,
production/manufacturing, preservation, packaging and storage, quality control at

Page 5753 of 8516

INDIA LIMITED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1

(A Gavt of India undertaking' REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 5 of 7
construction site, pre-commissioning, commissioning and handing over (as

applicable) in line with contract requirement and scope of work.
5.2 BIDDER shall identify all specified or implied statutory and regulatory requirements
and communicate the same to all concerned in his organization and his sub
contractor's organization for compliance.
5.3 BIDDER shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for
fulfillment of PO / contract. BIDDER shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work
environment to ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are
maintained.
5.4 BIDDER shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order.
The quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:
Resources
Product / deliverable characteristics to be controlled.
Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are
realized
Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria
Records to be generated
Need for any documented procedure
The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test
plans (ITPs) and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of bidder.
These documents shall be submitted to EIL/Owner for review/approval, before
commencement of work.
5.5 Requirements for sub-contracting / purchasing of services specified in contract /

tender shall be adhered to. In general all outsourced items will be from approved
vendors of EIL. Wherever requirements are not specified, or approved sub vendors
do not exist, the sub-contractor shall establish and maintain a system for purchasing
/ sub-contracting to ensure that purchased product / service conforms to specified
requirements. Criteria for selection of sub-contractor, evaluation, re-evaluation,
maintenance of purchasing data and verification of purchased product (sub-
contractor services), constitute important components of this requirement.
5.6 BIDDER shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled
conditions. Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable
the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product

the availability of work instructions
the use of suitable equipment
the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices
the implementation of monitoring and measurement
the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities
5.7 BIDDER shall validate any processes for production and service provision where
resulting output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement.
This includes any process where deficiencies become apparent only after the
product is in use or service has been delivered.
5.8 BIDDER shall establish a system for identification and traceability of product /
deliverable throughout product realization. Product status with respect to inspection
and testing requirements shall be identified.

Page 5754 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
lge.ji id5fez INDIA LIMITED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 1

Oren erRRIZ .71.1.113,70 IA Govt of India undettaking) REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 6 of 7
5.9 BIDDER shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard EIL / Owner property (material /
document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any Owner / EIL
property is lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be
reported to the EIL / Owner.
5.10 BIDDER shall ensure the conformity of product / deliverable during internal
processing and delivery to the intended destination. Requirements mentioned in the
tender shall be adhered to.
5.11 BIDDER shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are
carried out in line with requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipments
shall be calibrated at specified frequency, against national or international
measurement standards; where no such standard exists, the basis used for
calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipments shall be protected from
damage during handling, maintenance and storage.
5.12 BIDDER shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes
involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of
contract.
5.13 BIDDER shall monitor and measure the characteristics of the product/deliverable to
verify that product requirement has been met. The inspection (stage as well as
final) by BIDDER and EIL / Owner personnel shall be carried out strictly as per the
ITPs forming part of the contract. Product release or service delivery shall not
proceed until the planned arrangements have been satisfactorily completed, unless
otherwise approved by relevant authority and where applicable by Owner / EIL.
5.14 BIDDER shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the
product which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to
prevent its unintended use or delivery
5.15 All non-conformities (NCs) / deficiencies found by the BIDDER'S inspection /

surveillance staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action shall be
recorded and resolved suitably. Effective corrective and preventive action shall be
implemented by the BIDDER so that similar NCs including deficiencies do not recur.
5.16 All deficiencies noticed and reported by EIL / Owner shall be analyzed by the
BIDDER and appropriate corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented.
BIDDER shall intimate EIL / Owner of all such corrective and preventive action
implemented by him.
5.17 BIDDER should follow the standards, specifications and approved drawings.
Concessions/Deviations shall be allowed only in case of unavoidable circumstances.
In such situations Concession/deviation request must be made by the BIDDER
through online system of EIL eDMS. URL of EIL eDMS is
http://edocx.eil . co . in/vportal.
5.18 BIDDER shall have documented procedure for control of documents.
5.19 All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage
or loss until the project completion, then handed over to EIL / Owner as per contract
requirement (Refer Specification Nos. 6-78-0002 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Contractors and 6-78-0003 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Suppliers), or disposed as per relevant project procedure.
Page 5755 of 8516


ei MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
IftJr
kif51ft. INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0001 Rev. 1
wirer riraxem3Tmil (A Goof of India UndertakIngi
REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 7 of 7
6.0 AUDITS
BIDDER shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit programme
shall cover design, procurement, construction management and commissioning as
applicable including activities carried out by sub-vendors and sub-contractors. This
shall be additional to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under
BIDDER'S own ISO 9001 certification scheme.
The audit programmes and audit reports shall be available with bidder for scrutiny
by EIL / Owner. EIL or Owner's representative reserves the right to attend, as a
witness, any audit conducted during the execution of the WORKS.
In addition to above EIL, Owner and third party appointed by EIL/Owner may also
perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. BIDDER shall provide assistance
and access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this
purpose. Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by BIDDER.
BIDDER shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work
(Within one week) for record / review by EIL / Owner.
Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project)
Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan
Job specific Inspection Test Plans, if not attached with PR
Job Procedures
Inspection/Test Formats
In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained

by the BIDDER for submission to EIL / Owner on demand at any point of time during
execution of the project.
Quality Manual
Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard
Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product
Procedure for Control of Documents
Sample audit report of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during
last one year
Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers, during the last one
year
Project QMS audit report
Technical audit reports for the project
Corrective action report on the audits
Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. BIDDER shall submit

any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.
Page 5756 of 8516

∎31
ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION
ligar lafgesW INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
(411W1 292,51V MIJ‘10571) Govt o India Undertalongj
REQUIREMENTS FROM
affr irewufat 74ER

*mat t feitu
SPECIFICATION FOR
FROM SUPPLIERS
C)(415----2
QMS QMS
1 12.03.15 General Revision Standards Standards SC
Committee Committee
QMS QMS
Committee Committee
Standards Standards
Comm ifte Bureau
Date Purpose Convener Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Page 5757 of 8516

(t,ft. ENGINEERS
1i laWGNIIY INDIA LIMITED
ogire, efiTIWAnowAl (A Govt of Into Undertaking(
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Abbreviations:

FOA Fax of Acceptance
HOD Head of Division / Department
IC Inspection Certificate
IRN Inspection Release Note
ITP Inspection and Test Plan
LOA Letter of Acceptance
MOU Memorandum of Understanding
PO Purchase Order
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
TPIA Third Party Inspection Agency
URL Universal Resource Locator

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)
Page 5758 of 8516


ei ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
Oaez idiWIeg INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
011E71 ewaxedaagem)

CONTENTS

Clause Title Page
No.
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS 4
Attachments

Page 5759 of 8516

dol ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
5'gzir tlf5ltu INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
I.VOM (A Govt of Intha Undertakongt REQUIREMENTS FROM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Suppliers.
All documents/data against the PO / PR / MR shall be developed and submitted to
EIL/Owner by the suppliers for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Supplier
For the purpose of this specification, the word "SUPPLIER" means the person(s),
firm, company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
synonymous to bidder, contractor or vendor.
2.2 Owner

from Bidders
4.1 Documents/Data to be Submitted by the Supplier
4.1.1 The Supplier shall submit the documents and data against the PO/PR/MR as per the
list given in respective PO/PR/MR.
4.1.2 Review of the supplier drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility with
basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the supplier of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with PR requirements, applicable
codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency noticed
during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly corrected
by the supplier without any time and cost implications, irrespective of comments on
the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage or not.

QMS - 1 week
Drawing/Document Control Index - 2 weeks
Index/Schedule
4.1.4 Documents as specified in PO/PR/MR are minimum requirements. Supplier shall

submit any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.

Page 5760 of 8516

'7f 11 INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
I OfiTt cYeawlnn (A Govt of India UndenakIngi REQUIREMENTS FROM
4.2.2 Before forwarding the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly mentioned in each drawing:
Purchase Requisition Number
Name of Project
Client
43 Review and Approval of Documents by Supplier

signed/stamped by supplier before submission. Revision number shall be changed
during submission of the revised supplier documents and all revisions shall be
highlighted by clouds. Whenever the supplier require any sub-supplier drawings to be
reviewed by EIL, the same shall be submitted by the supplier after duly reviewed,
approved and stamped by the supplier. Direct submission of sub-supplier's drawings
without contractor's approval shall not be entertained.
Following review codes shall be used for review of supplier Drawings/Documents:

fabrication as per the document.
Review Code 2 Proceed with manufacture/fabrication as per
commented document. Revised document
required.
R Document is retained for Records. Proceed
with manufacture/fabrication.
V Void
Supplier shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on
date of submission.

Page 5761 of 8516


r1.7
-14 ENGINEERS DOCUMENTATION No.
51g-a feff5leg INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
1.17,124ifflsrefloJOORI1 IA GUN. of India Undertaking, REQUIREMENTS FROM

Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal as per DCI.
The detail guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on
following URL
http://edocx.eil.co.in/vportal
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Supplier, the

Supplier shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4 Details of Contact Persons of Supplier
After placement of order supplier shall assign a Project Manager for that order. The
Manager.
Supplier shall submit monthly progress report and updated procurement, engineering
and manufacturing status (schedule vs. actual) every month, beginning within 2 weeks
from FOA/LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL/Owner can ask for report submission as
required on weekly/fortnightly/adhoc basis depending upon supply status and supplier
shall furnish such reports promptly without any price implication. Format for progress
report shall be submitted by the Supplier during kick off meeting or within one week of
receiving FOA/LOA, whichever is earlier.

Inspection and test plans (ITP) attached if any, to the MR/PR are to be followed.
However for cases wherein ITPs have not been attached with MR/PR, Supplier shall
submit within one week of receiving FOA/LOA, the Quality Assurance Plan for
manufacturing, covering quality control of critical bought out items/materials,
inspection & testing at various stages of production, quality control records and site
assembly & testing as may be applicable to the specific order and obtain approval
from concerned Regional procurement Office of EIL/third party inspection agency, as
applicable.
For Package equipment contracts, the supplier shall prepare a list of items/
equipments and their inspection categorization plan for all items included in the scope
of supply immediately after receipt of order and obtains approval for the same from
EIL. The items shall be categorized into different categories depending upon their
criticality for the scope of inspection of TPIA and/or EIL.
IRN/ IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector/ third party inspection agency on the basis of
successful inspection, review of certificates as per specifications & agreed quality plan
(as applicable) and only after all the drawings/documents as per DCI are submitted
and are accepted under review code-1 or code R. Supplier shall ensure that necessary
documents/manufacturing and test certificates are made available to EIL/TPIA as and
when desired.

Page 5762 of 8516

Ogell 0151jeg INDIA LIMITED 6-78-0003 Rev. 1
1.127, owtore o43frosso IA Govt of India Unclettalong) REQUIREMENTS FROM
holding of payment as per conditions of PO/PR/MR.
4.5.8 Transportation Plan

Transportation Plan for Over Dimensional Consignments (ODC), if any, shall be
submitted within 2 weeks of receiving FOA/LOA, for approval. Consignment with
parameters greater than following shall be considered as over dimensional.
Dimensions: 4 meters width x 4 meters height x 20 meters length
Weight : 32 MT

4.6.1 As Built Drawings
Shop changes made by Supplier after approval of drawings under `Code 1' by EIL and
deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard copies of
drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the supplier. These 'As-built'
drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/ TPIA also. Supplier shall
prepare scanned images files of all marked — up 'As — built' drawings. Simultaneously
Supplier shall incorporate the shop changes in the native soft files of the drawings
also.
4.6.2 As Built Final Documents
As built final documents shall be submitted as listed in PO/PR/MR.
Final Documentation shall be bound in Hard board Plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x
315 mm (101 /2 inch x 12 1 /2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of
index of contents of that particular volume. Where number of volumes are more,
0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder cover and will have 2 lever clip. In
must be incorporated by supplier. Spiral/Spico bound documents shall not be
Each volume shall contain on cover a Title Block indicating package Equipment Tag
No. & Name, PO/Purchase Requisition No., Name of Project and Name of Customer.
Each volume will have hard front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book.
These spines will also have the title printed on them. Title shall include also volume
number (say 11 of 15) etc.
4.6.4 Submission of Soft Copies
Supplier shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—AIL rights reserved
Page 5763 of 8516

(L:ED'D ENGINEERS No.
lig ar idf5les
I MT
C,'
INDIA UMITED
riernfO7IJOCFAI IA Govt of India Undertaking)
DOCUMENTATION
In addition to hard copies, Supplier shall submit electronic file (CD-ROM) covering soft
copies of all the final drawings and documents, all text documents prepared on
documents, while for catalogues/manuals/proprietary information and data, PDF files
can be furnished).
Supplier shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIUTPIA and
duly signed by EIL Inspector or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.

Page 5764 of 8516

$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali• 4,30.0
INDIA LIMITED
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.

Name of the Work/

Equipment
Tag. No.
Works Order No.
Requisition.
Signature Signature
Date Date
Name Name
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi . ...........
.....
4/ Name: ......... .. . ......
..................
f4-41--/ Date: ..... ••••••• .... ......
Page 5765 of 8516

pamasai spl 6IJ IIV — 113 4 14 60ch A Gd Ld- 1000-00-9 'oN 4ewmd
Page 5766 of 8516

-a
o
c
D
u>
c
su
o
3
o
c
0.1
A3
.C4
Q.
cn
c> o
9,
o
Wâ
o
O
O
O
cn
7J
NOIIVIN3IN31dINIdOda3nssi
o
cn
cn
c>
o
co
O
O
Cl3nSSI-32iCINVC3SIA3d
co
03nSSI-3dCINVCI3SIA3d
cn
7J
cn
Cl3nSSI-32iCINV03SIA32i
G)
t •Aall8K10-I8-9
0n
et,2 z z
»0 r) (-)
Cr
c
eD
et,
r)
4 'b- '(--)--- ,--EL.0
H 'd n
x '-ii rrl ,, .11 (rri-) ,1
F.3, .-3 (") rl
= ..-,- ,H r.-4,
.1 (") 5 ,H.
t H ..--i --3 . 1,
,^ .1o o
=
cn ,i
:suopmitaiqqy
15;
=
. . . ...,
cA
SD3 CD n
vned L3- 1000-00-9 'oN eli1J03

‘- •-, C ' o
$. ,_,
1 . •cA
--' 4 -- 2
9
92. .-. ,..
"5 4 4 = 5: 5:
(D
' cg eD CD
cn CD ~t
c., o .--t- ,-c '-ri '''l o -, ;,H -2•-
::«i . n) C") ,C..4 o
n at r)
1:0 •-•■- •-t .-, • CD (4 ,-. crtz
(»,)" 1),) o In- '-z, o (1) ,..),• o co -. rrl s5 ,-,-
■
—.3 ,.., $7,- 6,
CD :o ,-,-, . •-r-. ="
-. , , , CD tz). -X ".
44 cn);. - '..,)') :g̀
1) . 2, '., ' ; co •-,-, •<7; • •-• 5 rri
CD ...■(-) -. cm ,-i-, H = ci) L,,,_ F.-,
cp 0 ,..«:. '-' • eD (IC7
H cn 0 A) ,("D,,,rD,_,• c) „, '-' •
2.
- •(1,
,-.- '-- "o1:D , )-A
,,, ,̀4 (-) (1)
~t
A) .-• - ._'.'• ,,'
3:9 ).~I,
(1) ,..,, cn
--.CD co '"C -t c) cD
.--. • .-t
,-1. -. o Po cD
H P)) Crq (c)
!=,...). >,.., CD -. =
CfQ 5' V2 ()
~- 5-' 4) §' G10 •-,-
P" ) ci)
TDO •?4. cra
s:)) co
5
,.- '"
CD
r.
D
(01.
~~ C~ '~~~~ b "dbbb zz
r)
n
0
H
< )-1 ■--1 C4 l-d '"C:i '"C7 I-C1

CD CD .., ..-.; - tn ‹, .0•-` cy: 4. e i o 0 ,0 e-_t f
E: to ::L %c ¢.. .'='• CD
,-1
n ,
-5
■-t 0 ,-J (I) ?"1. CirQi 1 Pv) cl. (-7
c4 CrCi r"'' r) AD ■-•{
CD
',:i s-CI ••C-)•• t. - r:I.; C4 •1:
CD
■ ■
••1 c)- t ,-. •-t- ty (1)
s-r, ,, 15,7 H c) -t .,. ,..,, co C trl
o " co 5" s%) co to •.o ><
... '-cs
Japio asup.ind
(1) t-D '4 Cn Fi)t- Cc2 ■--3 -t

CD fD ;.). c7) —. B
, ». 9 ..c (") 4) — .;--,. ..• ',:-
(-)
..1' ,-.•
CD 0.C7 c)
■- /- —
ec, CI) (I) o 0
TJ 0 er (5 C.4
> :-=t;
c) ec,
.a''- crQ
co AD co .',
- • o '''' (-) -. c) -`-
c) ,-,-. s),) o o r-.
-t .....‘)
r,) 5 c) c.. cic)
•
-*-
,-•
o =
N
1z0
.....
IIV— 113414 60doo
0
pamasai
ynall8P00-18-9
Page 5767 of 8516

r nall81,00-18-9
0
m
This Inspectionand TestPlancoverstheminimumtestingrequirements for Pump Centrifugal (High Speed Internally Geared)
PO/PR/ Standardsreferred therein/ Job specifications /Approved documents.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
OF CHECK REPORT
0
Z
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
■
O
Procedures
-■
Hydrotest, MRT, Performance, NPSH

-
7:J
■
-
o
o
Procedures
-■
tests, NDTand otherprocedureas Documented Procedures
■
applicable
WPS, PQR,WPQ- W-New,
Qualification for Overlay Weldingprocedures, WPS/PQR/
-
o
o
R-
iv
■
Repairweldingprocedures Qualification WPQ Records
Existing
Wearring hardness
O
t.à
Material Inspection
Incoming Material MTC,HT
Visual & Dimensions, Chemical
Casing, StuffingBox,Impeller,
-
x
o
Chart, Inspection
7:1
Properties/ Physical Properties, -■
tv
Bearing Housing, ShaftMaterial (As Report

HeatTreatmentasper Specs
applicable)
1. 2. 3.
Page 5768 of 8516

1. •n ad L3-1000-00-9 '0N W W.10j pamasei s1y 6u IIV — 113 411 60cloo
81700-18-9
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
:
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
2 (/1
r)
r)
e.w)
ril
cn
STAGE/ACTIVITY REPORT SUB
OF CHECK
C
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Piping&Hardware Items- MTC &
Visual & Dimensions, Chemical
Valves, Flanges,Pipes,Fittings,
,zJ
c›
c>
—
Properties/ Physical Properties, Inspection
i■.)
tN.)
Gaskets, Fasteners,Gland Packingetc. Report

Heat Treatmentasper Specs
(Asapplicable)
Hydro/Pneumatic Test & Seal
Accessories-
Qualificationtest(Asapplicable)
BufferLiquid Reservoir MTC/ Inspection
for Mechanical seal, Reservoir,
7:J
--
c:,
c>
I.)
Barrier/BufferLiquid Cooler
t•.)
coolers, & Test Record

Mechanical Seal,
Dynamic balancingof seal and
Coupling(Asapplicable)
cou lin:.
H
k -,
4
o .,..' .--,
Motor / VFD(Asapplicable)
'5
x
c)
--
<=>
*(supplier/sub suppliertoarrange Typetest/Routinetestof Motor
1,-)
:4=.
rD
.
(Note-3)
TPIAcertification)
Turbine(Asapplicable) MTC &
x
x
c>
c>
—
*(supplier/sub suppliertoarrange MRTof Turbine Inspection
tv
.11
TPIAcertification) Report
Gear box(Asapplicable) MTC &
Z*
c,
x
c)
--
*(supplier/sub suppliertoarrange MRT of gear box Inspection
tv
C11
TPIAcertification) Report
Lube Oil system(Asapplicable) Inspection
--
7:J
x
o
c>
c>
Functional
CV
"---)
Report
f.4
.:::P
NDT(Asapplicable) for c>

c>
—
Casing, Impeller, StuffingBox, SurfaceandInternal RT films &NDT
t...>
;--,
Shaft & CasingtoNozzle buttweld imperfections report
Page 5769 of 8516

V Aajj L3- 1000-00-9 '0N leauoA patuasai sw 61-I IIV — 11311.161.1Ad00
1
2g
-7
rAallSt00-18-9
rn
Jl
0
coco
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
0 t•
cA

SUPPLIER
Hydrotest beforeassemblyof pump Inspectionand
c/)
tri
iv
outercasing,stagecasing &stuffing Leak Tightness

(...)
c)
--c)
Test Records
box
Inspectionand
x
•-•
trl
(-...1
6'
Impeller /Rotorassembly Dynamic Balancing
...)
o
:,)
1
Test Records
Final Inspection
•I=.
Cz
Performance
NPSH(R)- If applicable H
1.Mech. 1. (Vibration,
2. 3. Running 2. 3. 4. Inspectionand
Testingof Pumps Each Pump
—
.1=.
1
Test Records (Note-4)
Noise Measurement,
Bearing TempRise)
Visual insp.ofcasing inside
surface
Dismantle inspectionof pumpafter Wearringareavisual Check
Inspectionand
....,
Clearancemeasurement Each Pump
iv
-1=.
performancetest Test Records

Examinationof Mechanical
seal
Alignmentof pumpwith driver c).-. Inspectionand
x
ci)
trl
L)
-1=.
Unitizationof Pumpwith job driver
I
and Check Directionof Rotation Test Records
Testingofauxiliarypiping Inspectionand
cip
CTI
.4.
Leak Tightness
,-,-
:1=.
c)
CD
I
ge
:-•0.n 5-.-— ,(-)--3
c,
c)
x
c''
(1 c4
..,
Job Instruments(Asapplicable) Complianceto PRrequirements

-1=.
0 ‘.<
c)
t.
=
A.)
c)
Page 5770 of 8516

1, .ned Ld- 1000-00-2 "oN wW.I0d pamesai s414 61.1 IIV— 11311460cloo
'0 NI NOI
1V311133dS(111WINIVIS
VA321[ 8b00-18-9
C7,
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM FORMAT OF
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS REPORT SUB
SUPPLIER
Validityof calibration &
o r»
O
0
—■
■
Testing Instruments accuracy
O
0
.--•
■
Final Pumpskid Assembly Report
completenesscheck
..•
E.
Po
Ei.
Cf:
Paintingof pumpskid &associated Paint Scheme, Visual &Paint Inspection
O
,--,
C>
.
,
parts(Asapplicable) thicknesscheck Report
Documentation
Stampingand reviewof inspection Reviewof documents for
o
C>
.
Dossier /
Reviewof final documentationof Compilationof documentsasper
Z
0
» ',c9
Completion
' .-
.--,
CD
0,
i,.>
0
supplier VDRattached with PR. certificate
:(alciumdtin sV) S aLONT
.-'n•
,-.
.., •
-•
scs.
,-I-
t-e-
CA CD
.-"
o
o
c)
cp
c>
cs
0
.zs
V)
n>
■••••4
tft
»-t
cit
sso
1:0
cl,
CD Ct
......,.
,;„, 5-
>
31-t
ch > z
H
Hcip.
e c....
O .-4-
lr■-)
—• 0
C)
• -0
o o
0
ch co
-t
......, CD
ex:,
'—'
.—•
(-..)
i.r.)
C>
.---,
"
,-,-
(.,,
■
,
••
Page 5771 of 8516

[..nad L3-1.000-00-8 'oN 4e Ltuod pamasai siy 6P IIV — 11341-1 60doo
Cti
cr c.n o i-ri
o - . O''' >< c)
Pz cn P3 rD -1
:.1-
cr o..
31
CfC? = (D
-,- r._. CfcD
CD cc,
5. '2,
.0
.--■ « .."
5
•
g
i, •ned L3- 1000-00-9 'oN 4BW.103

CD -,-
,CDfwioDe v,
u, -• o
CD ' .. Lri
51 3. cos- -t.O.
-t. ,..< -
v,
CD
r11
E
(r)
- ,, ,.,:, , .e.ic)
cp •'C
,-t, C .-t
§ o-h
2 •H
C.,
A) .
~t . • t11
CP:i
g t (")
,-. CD
n=f ,-r-
'0 CD CD CD
CD rs cn
.-t ,—b Cl.. ,,,*
-on ,o1 ,-C.2,
s:o CD (D
4
SWC r)
o CD
CD ,-,
,-r- CD »
<:.*
CD rn '0 /z0
cn ■—f-
="' n•-■
s-C1
= =
cr H
CD -o rD
rw s=0 (4
cr
'-o o -7
< --,
ro
$..\ c." c4
(17' Frj
0
,..., - 4
-. '-c:1 $2
= co
-t 1:,4,,
o -4'
O
CA
0 S2
■
-t, :•'
cr
D ›a-'
Cr ,-1, s---'
CD (A
C.> C•r) =.
,..«..
4
er, '-cr
r) (I)
-. W ....
,-...
o
o- x
$2 = Cr
rri
0-• Cri4
CD
H
1p, 0., •,:i
,..., . Z
.1 '-C,
,,--, C4
o ,-t- v]
o-' (1)
,,,
CD (1
9 Sr
><
rdn n:5
ri)
FD'
0L.
CD C:7
7*
cp O'' (1)
-,
0 r2 CD
cr o.- ,..0
pamaseJ siy 6P IIV — 713111 60cloo
tw lo
t•AaH 81700-18-9
tt'"
-to s
Page 5772 of 8516

CopyrightEIL— All rightsreserved
0Ae23 LJ- 1000-00-9ON leauod
Page 5773 of 8516

Aq penoicidv
`.<
P
z
m
1:0
3
3
C
cn
a.
0.
CD
CD
(1)
13
••C C)
"
0.
0.
03 su
iD,
0 CD
(/) 3
O 3
0
g
0. 0
0) 7'
0
w
co
O
O
O
NOLLVIN3IN31d1N1 2JOdconssi
0
cr)
0
C1311SSI-32! CINV CI3SIA31
0
C)
C1311SSI-31CNVCl3SIA32l
•
CP:7
rn
£S00-18-9
•
•
4 4 E rl r)
.
c1 H r) x '
0 rn rn
7z) 0 tt
n 71 0,1
: iouanuoD
H :suoquitalgqv
434
4 0 .P:'
AD CD
0'Aal L3- 1000-00-9'0N I eW.10

AD P •
= t- • C/D
--, 4 - 6•
uldno 3 S
'-rirri
CD CD
l c") n r)
= , ,,, lig cn `-.<
F; ,,,,,, —, E- -
rr 0
as ■-t 1:$ CL
-, CD " CD qco co -1
c.c) o 0
.' 71. 0 c)
AD ,-r •-t ,.... CD V) ,-. cirg C
c? 0 ' (-)
= "a. 6 D . - - • : = L
cj. AD 0 ra. '7:1 5 (1) H.
H Z ijD ' "I = • F).. cr9 r° -8' '-'-
CD '7:i = 0-t 0 -
ciDADHC)CDF/jpD5
,-
,a't) CD H CD = CL
TUOUITUNI 1R3H
44 n ". ,
o ,-, ia (1 " g• c'" c9
CD ■
-' • CD cD = CD cpz
cn
H c/a CD C r+ DID H 5. 'A
•- cDH 0 .--1-
,-
AD . -s— ..
0
o vn c/D CD " CD *CI ,...
1 4 a)
ADCD ° ■
AD ,_,
-t 5• po - , ,,..,. ,_,0w cm
CD = = AD 0 = (7
< = X"
AD 0.... aCi 4 5 .. —•
CD Z
-. -E 0
= t
AD E
a ,,
=
= AD
= '-t
CD 0
5
P
`..
(64
PDCi _P.
r.
AD E
CD Fp,-
C."
Ca.
(-) 1C)
0 0 (52
< ■•••-i H (/) PC1 'V '0 '"0 '17) '1:1 Z

cDt-,, = CD = II) 0 = = CD 8 (1) 0
D..i• (..)
0-. 0-, = ■
-t- 'CI . z
0 Q.. 0.. Ao 5 7
a. (..., „: 1
,,-. ;1
9-, cD 0 =. 1-0
CD '-' • 0 cn
cl,
' co
'1::1 ,••ci t:
CD o-t .4',. _, ■
-, • .-f- C"
p'D CD r0 tri 0-t CD
CD = AD CD FIP aZD C X CL,
O (-)
CD 4. v, cD
CD ir lD
unx po► treqoaw
0-, co - • ^to
,,,,,) H -,. 7.• :1, •-zi -s =
CD 0 0 CD
$1 0
g, ,.9 012 crc9 fl ."., , '7h v) ....
0 . • 1■
1( ,...... 0 •-. • 0
= CD . ,-,,. CD
C) :74 0 Po
CD CA CD 0 9
c CrQ CD ■-i- CD rf
'71 = Z v, F-, 5. cA
C B• z pu 0
= °. 61 p) , vo
p Eb ,4. c CD
0 Q., P;i
CD AD CD t, '
0-. • 0 = 0
AD ,-t
0z . ,-< AD
=
■-t
5' 00
1:0 (-) rz.
▪ 5
✓ crc,
AD
Z
= CM?
N.
A)
0
C
c.nall£S00-18-9
pe/U9SalSlq 6PiIV-113 I ii6oAdoo

Page 5774 of 8516

rg
m
— rTi
ill
C
T>
C
£S00-18-9
c r—
o
rn
tra
■
This Inspectionand Test Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof Reciprocating Pump.
:SINIIAlf1304:113N11113A11
INSPECTION AND TESTREQUIREMENTS:
FORMAT SCOPE OF INSPECTION

z CA
QUANTUM
0
OF CHECK
1id
SUPPLIER
- -4
1-1
-1
REPORT SUPPLIER
1--,
O
Procedures
Hydrotest,MRT/Performance, NDT
,'
—
;--
o
o
and Other Procedure Documented procedures Procedures
P:i
,--.
I
(Asapplicable)
WPS, PQR,WPQ-
WPS/PQR/
Qualification forOverlay Weldingprocedures W-New,
0'
--
i N)
o
co
Z
WPQ
,--.
I
Repairweldingprocedures qualification R- Existing
Records
Wearring hardness
O
t. )
Material Inspection
Incoming Material- it
Liquid Head, Plunger,Valvecage, Chemical Properties
1. 2. 3. MTCor Lab
--
IN . )
Throat Bush, Lantern Ring,Gland Physical Properties All Heats

Report
Retainer, Valve housing, Nipple,
Diaphragmsupportplates
Page 5775 of 8516

0'Ae?:ILA- 1.000-00-9 'oN lettlioA
CopyrightEI L—All rightsreserved

c.nam ES0018-9

z CA
QUANTUM
0
OF CHECK SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA

REPORT SUPPLIER
Hardware items- MTC &
0
i.)
t\ .)
Gaskets, Fasteners, Bearings, Gland
co
co
.--,
Visual
7:J
Inspection
packing Report
Motor / VFD(Asapplicable)
-6— Ro
co 1r4=1 H
Typetest/Routine w
0
i...)
tN.)
--
*(supplier/sub suppliertoarrange
co
co
=
testof Motor (Note-3)
TPIAcertification)
co 't:$ H co 't:up1 H 7:J

o f:4no g.no .-to
3" Ro
Turbine(Asapplicable)
*
IN.)
co
co
,--,
MRTof Turbine
0
=
-
TPIAcertification)
-o
Gear box(Asapplicable)
O'• Ro
1. 2.
0
• ii
tN.)
-,-,
.'.'
--,
cr
co
co
"
7zi
xl
0
=
O
x
O
ID0
CM
CD
7i up
L
TPIAcertification)
'-to
■
Accessories- Inspection
Visual & Dimension
Volume Bottles, Calibration Pot, and Test
0
t,.)
Cr∎
co,
.--
c:
check.
Pz1
Strainer & Piping items likepipes,pipe Records &
Hydrotest.
fittings, forgings(Asapplicable) MTC
Inspection
.
Accessories- Dimensions & Dynamic
-.)
7:1
C..)
+1'
co
co
and Test
Coupling Balancing
Records
0
(...>
Inspection
0
La
.—,
7:1
All pumpcomponents
,--.
Z
co
co
Visual & Dimensioncheck
+='
and Test
' Records
Inspection
1,-)
W
Hydrostatictestof pumpcasing Leak Tightness Each Casing

Re port
0
A
Final Inspection
Page 5776 of 8516

'ON W UJJ03 l L3- 1000-00-8
0•fal
pamasai s44 6P 11V— 1131460c100
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONNo.
c•nall£S00-18-9
0
CD
CD
CA
QUANTUM
0

REPORT SUPPLIER
Performance
NPSH(R)- If
applicable
= =
0 tc,..F,
0,o 7D
=
Mech.Running(
="
,--,
c4-1 n
.4=,
;c1z, ,-.
Testingof Pumps
rri
0
rit,
P
*CS
-'
Vibration, Noise
0
Measurement,
Bearing Temp
■
Rise)
1. 2. 3.
Visual check of Valve
Inspection w
iN.)
z
-1=,
Dismantling Inspection Each Pump and Test (Oneper
.
Assembly& Exposed
■
Records PR Sr.No.)
Portionof Plunger
b■
MTC &
Complianceto PR
o
0
W
-1=,
x
Job Instruments, if applicable
z
k
Statutory
.
requirements
certification
Validityof calibration & Calibration
0
-1=,
Testing&Measuring Instruments
:I=,
=
—k
pzi
accuracy Resort
Inspection
Testingof auxiliarypiping
4=•
z
x
i_n
Leak Tightness Each Set and Test
.
(Asapplicable)
Records
Alignmentof pumpwith Inspection
4=,
x
Unitizationof Pumpwith job driver driverand Check Direction Each Set
pzi
and Test
.
of Rotation Records
-P
---.1
=
Final PumpSkid Assembly
x
..--,
C:::'
.
completenesscheck Report
Page 5777 of 8516

0'nabL3- 1000-00-9 ON l eL1110
pamasai s14 6P IIV — 113114 60d00
•1
0) 0\ 0.1 (-A VII CA

t1:
1
• CD N ..' 7= :-` G=D, o r
CD
tr,) CD
v) > ea ,_,.., =
5' 0
to 0 `-' 7;
CD CD Fr —• o
c-, -o (., 0 0.,
■ r+ up P 0 CD
cr =
= 0 z CD
cD
H (I' Fi • "
0Aei:1 LA- 1.000-00-9ON iewiod

lone3Hdde sV )MON
•-. 0
'70
•
CD ci, CD
supplier
v)
Painting
..0 Po ;
8)
= .'""h CM .--t
.-. •=t-
0 .--t 0 CD
cr
CD " 0
w CD CD
v)
0 Q. Documentation
STAGE/ACTIVITY
CL 5.. -
O ■ -r =
0 ="' "CI CD C)
v) CD 0
CM
CD co a
.-) ...
0 ,
O
—t
r4:
,,
0
0
-,
•_..•
CD
H.
CD
•O , O
Reviewof final documentationof
Stampingand reviewof inspection
Paintingof pumpskid &associated
(/) v, cn
,—,• F)'• Fa,
P'D '—• ..C)
'-- cr = *0
.
cr 0 r-1' CD
CD t;1) CD
1:1; Ln co CD
ciD 'CS
co g
A -'s Li,
,C-Ds 1-1c)
CD > 0
Ei
rn ;;;,-:--- = 0
i CD
CD I
parts(Asapplicable) Paintthicknesscheck

PaintScheme, Visual &
CHARACTERISTICS
asper VDRattached with
Po pp
Compilationof documents
PR.
'77 H =,
cr■ >
z CD
0-1 0.
0
CD
CD 1--, .-■■
--■
•
0 0 0
0 0 0
Fr 0 0 C?) 0
,"'
'
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
CD cn
•
• cn
CD
CD
=i•
CD
E-7'
)
OF
0
Dossier /
•. <—■
REPORT
Inspection
FORMAT
.-- 0
Completion
Report
c) cr w
(.....) .0
certificate
coo CD oNc■
N "0
.... 0 ■-• •
0 0t1
CD •
-.
0H 0.
,,, o .....
= I I
114
SUB
O. 0 0
= 0
SUPPLIER
,..,„ 5„-- .-S

'0 SW CD
0
.. t 0... 0
00 0 0
1 g 0 ■
-• •
= N
O CD I
co.) IC:j 0
00
•-•-■ 0 •r-
cn fa.
<
SUPPLIER
= ".7
1U ,...,
(1) P CD
cA.- .--
... - , v , 0
A)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
7
0
CS Z Z
CD
c.nall£S00-18-9
EIL/TPIA
pamesei s4L15P IIV—113146p Ado°

Page 5778 of 8516

PaNeSei s146uIIV -113146PAdo0 0•Aa?:1 L - 1.000-00-9 ON w wiod
Page 5779 of 8516

Aq peAwddv
w
O
N
3
O
C
W
al
cs)
0-
A)
4.1)
cr m
to 2,
0m
3 0
o. o
a —.
•S: C)
0
oo
6
O
NOLLVIN3lA131dINI 2iod censsi

(1
0
.
7
co
O
C1311SSI-31CINV 43S1A32i
Cr,
0
a311SSI-al(INVCl3SIAal
0
C1311SSI-32ICINVCI3S1A31:1
NVId ISUI
o
o
ICI
0
o
'nal; ZS00-18-9
•
: =1
C.4
1— i
zd
ti
;1. c.)
zo
▪ ▪
• Z
4 g
:17':1 <-)nn
rritzit:) '71 rrl
l ewiod
4 25 (—.)" hz) t71
cr
<1, *C1 C:
), HHHH
(—)
7:1 :suopuptaiciqy
444 4
Ld - 1000-00-9oN
.
1
4Z cA
0
Z. (-)
AD CD
0.A9 :
= CA =
4 .•• 74
t•-■ AD CM P
,r±'' • =" 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 = '71
F •tll sID(*)r)(")
(.7; co c.< -t 71 CD CD
,, :
1 (, cra ,-1 '1(D ..,
C1.
co \ P-■ .- CD .-t
.-t CD a ,c2t.
0 = c/3 0 0 (") 8 'a, CD 2 8 P (-)
■
-1- C.) '-
E • (1) ,.. CD vp ,7. Cm -t =
z--). • po Q.(=) - •-d 0 = ,,.-..•
, ,0, CD ,—•
v34:0 1-, r)Fiia' 4)= *-.
0 .mi = 1D'D =' ..... '-'•
c., -• -, = ,c) 0., _ a- -,-
• 4 ev CM
• • Fr, c..) 1._;i rilit, —1 CD cp • 0 H = c7
cnOADno=0Cfc? —
= CD 0.- ■-+ C4 v, .- .
0
4 1,4
9 H c.) a
Po PO ,:t
.
'-- - (•-.) .-1 "6 • (/'
la 0• CDu) cn CD (7) '171 0 .--• vi 5
4. CDc9
AD ■ -■ - ,72, • pp ■
-, pp" (1
'73 2 a
R CCD
P .CD CD "6 '-' Po CD .- .
P CK? 5 0 ... 5 a g
CD = a ' 0 CM
- •5 F,,,
1:7
1:0
P7 g 0 cs-
O.
Po 0
?5'
P;I
CD II'
cn
CD
1(-0' —,
CD
44 C.,
< pc1
T:1
• ,
c4 H 4 Pv rt 0
(-)
,
o
C4 pC1 '171 "17 *C1 `17

=p)0 ''t 0 nd zz CD 0
"6 Gl" 4. '8 R '`;' oi
° '0
0
0-cm6'<0t•Po0-Q. 0= co
a: . CD
2 0 c4
cl),i: asug (.4■
-+
cp 3" 4 (; :j PD
io CD
. = Po '0 np
unN ieat.roqoaw
• co Po ri,' -• a- •
O0
n a — ,
r.,.
- ..
'"•11 C/3
o =.• '—' ^-'• CD .-.• 5• (Hp
1.1 •-- 0L. 0 po
•"Cr0 CD 0 ,-,. n
(4 e#
5 cA
3. ,B. pp CD cm
0 CD a.
AD CD
C.?..... 0
p,, 0 2
,-, 0 a." CfQ
CfQ N.
Ily— 11311.160d00
Po
o'
0
£ .nallZS00-18-9
pamasaJ
Page 5780 of 8516

rkl
,7J
111
o
c .nallZSOO-I8-9
o
4
z
o
o
z
4
Pzi
r
0
'IV
co
C4
co
CD
-t
0
crc
CD
CD
CD
CD
co
c rc?
CD
r±1
O
r)
c.)
•

O
INSPECTION ANDTEST REQUIREMENTS:

1■
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
7 c")
STAGE/ACTIVITY QUANTUM FORMATOF

CHARACTERISTICS SUB
0
OFCHECK REPORT
ti.1
1-1
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
,
7=
Procedures
Hydrotest,
MRT/Performance, NDTand
o
o
—
—
X
Procedures
.
Other Procedure
(Asa . 1icable)
WPS, PQR,WPQ-
Qualification for
Overlay
z
Weldingprocedures, WPS/PQR/ WPQ
,
i,.)
o
—
=.
.
Repairwelding Qualification Records
X
rri
Gra
.
procedures
1. 2.
N
O
Material Inspection
Page 5781 of 8516

0ALd - 1000-00-2 ON teauod
Copyright EI L—All rightsreserved

. -■
✓ .0
• z
Z"ci)
:=1
oDZ
£ .naH Z50018-9
O
o
•
z
4
4-)
:0"
CrJ
•
i■
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
z cA
QUANTUM FORMATOF
C

SUPPLIER
Incoming Material
Visual & Dimensions,
Frame, Cross Head, Fluid End
Chemical
Stuffing Box,Crank shaft, MTC , HT Chart,
, —'.
0
0
P :I
N
Z
Properties/Physical
''c:
Connecting Rod, Extension Inspection Report
■
Properties, Heat
Rod, Plungerand Gear
TreatmentasperSpecs
Packing(Asapplicable)
Hard Ware items-
Asper Sampling MTC &
, - -■
t.)
Gaskets, Fasteners, Bearings

.)
Visual
P;/
Plan Inspection Report
Gland-Packing
0
'
Motor / VFD(Asapplicable) Type
MTC & W
—■
*
0
0
tv
i....)
*(supplier/sub supplierto test/Routinetest
■ .-,
1. 2. Inspection Report (Note-3)
arrange TPIAcertification) of Motor
Gear box(Asapplicable)
MTC &
0
0
-1=,
t‘.)
0
—•
*(supplier/subsupplierto MRT of gear box
Inspection Report
arrangeTPIA certification)
Accessories-
Volume Bottles, Calibration Visual & Dimension Inspectionand
0
0
tN.)
Pot,Strainer & Piping items

i_A
P7J
check. Test Records &
, ::: '
likepipes,pipe fittings, Hydrotest. MTC
forgings,etc(Asapplicable)
Accessories- Dimensions & Dynamic Inspectionand
N
0
0
ch
0
::'
X1
Coupling Balancing Test Records
Page 5782 of 8516

0.A3 :
1 Ld- 1000-00-9 ON i euuoj
pen eS9J S1.116p Iiv — 113 I4 6pAdo°
m
Z
'A'
r- m
£ .AaN ZS00-18-9
0
m
s73
-—
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
cA
QUANTUM FORMATOF
0
z

SUPPLIER
O
t.,..
InProcess Inspection
Visual & Dimension Inspectionand

t.. .)
o
o
—
=
—.
c''
All pumpcomponents
7z1
.
check Test Records
In Process Internal Defects
Crank Shaft, Connecting & Ultrasonic Test(Pre Inspectionand
o
i.)
x
(..,)
c::)
Pz
.
Extension. Rods,Gear Blanks Machining Stage) Test Records
Plun ter, Fluid end &St. Box (Asapplicable)
Inspectionand
w
i_.,
x
In Process Frame Leak Test 100%Oil Sump
.
Test Records
Test beforeassemblyof Fluid
End, St. Box
Inside Leak tightness / Inspectionand
..,
(.. .1
7c)
Each set
.
JacketSide Hydrotest Test Records
Volume Bottle
Pi sin !
4:..
O
Final Inspection
1. 2. 3. 4.
Page 5783 of 8516

0 •Ael LA- 1000-00-8 ON leLUJO
Ily—113Iii 6pAc100 pe/U9S9J
STANDARD SPECIFICATION N o.
£ .nallZS00-18-9
■
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
0 t.
CA
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
SUPPLIER
Performance
Vibration
Noise Measurement
Bearing Temp. Rise
—.
CI.
co 0
0
,,„ -0
P:i ,-
=.
—.
X
Testingof pump
rrl
Mech Run
*d
'0
0 ,c2),
C/) =
0
Z
a
11)
I
CI..
0--i
o
CA
,D
Relief ValveSet
Pressure Function
Test
Strip Examination
Dismantling inspectionof Visual check of Valve Inspectionand
iN.)
X
Each Pump (Oneper
I
Pump Assembly & Exposed Test Records
PR Sr.No.)
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Portionof Plunger
0
Complianceto PR MTC & Statutory
,-,
0
i...)
X
Job Instruments, if applicable
requirements certification
Testingof auxiliarypiping Inspectionand
41.
X
Leak Tightness Each Set
I
Visual, dimensionand 0
X
i.fi
Final Pumpskid Assembly

•-.4
Inspection Report
I
skid completenesscheck
0
Painting
Paintingof pumpskid &
Paint Scheme, Visual &
•—.
0
0
X
associated parts Inspection Report
.-.4
I
Paintthicknesscheck
(Asapplicable)
0
Documentation
Page 5784 of 8516

TeLUJOj 0A9 =1Ld- 1000-00-2 oN
pamesei s}.16!.1 lib'— 113I4 6pAdoo
1 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONNo.
D ZZ
>7
gn
c .nallZS00-18-9
•—■
■
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
z cA
FORMAT OF
0
CH REPORT SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA

SUPPLIER
Stampingand reviewof
c:,
::"
X
F')
—
co
inspection documents, issueof
—
,:"'
complianceasper PR.
IC
Compilationof Dossier /
Reviewof final documentation
O.
x
iN)
X
co
co
documentsasper VDR Completion
of supplier
attached with PR. certificate
t -
CDCr
•c)Q.
1Z1
CI'
• 't
0
0
0
CD
0
o
0 11)
O
O
ci) CD0
ca. 0
C
0
Fo o
N
CDci)0
2g
CD
fD
Lc)
CD
• cc)cc)
• 0
–t
to
CD <
ro
soo
• co
CD
CD
*ZS
,.CD 'LS
O
O
CD
?:1
.
▪
0t.
cc.
n
(.4
(-D
CD
CD
:(alqua► dde sy) MOM
tr.) N)
Page 5785 of 8516

ON IeWJOd 0.A9 :1 L3 1000-00-9
pamesai siy 6P IIV— 113 11-16pAcloo
0•A92:1 L3- 1-000-00-8 'oN }eutiod
Page 5786 of 8516

pamasai sp161-i 11V— 113ly 6pAdo0
0
ro
CD
uopuluawaiduii Joj panssi

O
C13(1881-32iONV(33S1A32:1
HOSSalldIATO
;°.
rn
7> Z
QC
CiN
41.
>
= rrn
4c")(-)> ,H" tri,z 1c.-)(-)n ,-, .-ri cri 5 rri
H -cl (-) H -0 ,-,,, c'=' H c) ■-i H H ,--3 '-'
.
(-) '-3 r ,-r1 r-
4
-3
:suogmnaaqqv
0•A9d Ld- 1.000-00-8'0N 4eW.103

rldno 3S
4 4 5" 5 p: 5" 4,5
94 cfc), nt-t .-c: ri> -: 1) '''o.,
c:) CD
CD co -1
-• cD t/t c) 0
CfQ
.
e ). Q- '"Cl 3"• (D
■--3
ci) s2 .--,-
iSS' '<,"_:1
v)
,-r-
CD rD AD =
,..
H-,r.. c" 2., (n-•
11.191.140ali tr011
(-) --. )- co
co (.17. r=0c5 ■ co c)
='-.ec,
-1 =..
v)
■- + /-N
.,:n
'-". . H
(D ,>:•t ■i
=,,
t •cn
-,.. O ,.., s=,cp)
CD 1:›
CfQ 5co
o cra
■
-3 '"d rn o
c4 o
H
< ■-3 H CD
et
, CD -, ,--' = CD = 0 -
2 CD
z z0 co4
co
„_, ,— • u.,
o.. o., f=L, 2,t f:L. ) el: 6.. {.?, 0
CD '-' • 0 Cn (-) =" 0 ,.-..-. -o ,
.... -, o .0 ›" .. (9, CD
(1) ri 7; C/9 PA CD-d 6)
='' 6'
-: V9 C
e) CirC7 ,..-, Sk) cp AD CD .1 ■-r ,..,,. '-',•
~•
'..C/ '-1 ,._)t, C).," ,.9- ..y., u] 'Mly (I) ,...,,., C .-'
" 0 QD '"-1 ,__, C1 .:4": '" n
'-t ,..«. :=,. r - r'k.0 L.,i .-t co C.,
CD cn co - • „.. „..., C:1' Ci) -'
_ CD
=1.• co E 7 cn - a..
, • c) c-, CD =
(...) (4. sw o: -;■ cn ,-,-
o Crq c)
5t 'cl -• ■-■ -• ,-• -.
v)
cr, C4 CD 0 0 CQ C
(/) ,-t
cn E- "
) > 6" , crq
I c5 7i =.
.....• o O (-
:-=,D,
,:_ti c) -t '83
A> c) c> "
CL, crz
-• o
o o o
CfQ N.
AD
:".
=
pamaseJ sly 61J IIV— 113}q6pAdoo
Page 5787 of 8516

z
n z
• c
z">
IAallL140-I8-9
o
o
o
n
IdO3SO'T
This Inspectionand Test Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirements for Reciprocating Compressor.
INSPECTIONAND TEST REQUIREMENTS
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
C r.
QUANTUM
7rc/)
o
g
n
SUPPLIER
'.04.
Procedure
—'
Documented Procedure
,--,
Hydrotest, MRT, Performancetest, NDT

:--'
0
c>
Procedure Record
.--
and Otherprocedure(asapplicable)
1
0
0
x
o
.—
i„,
—
WPS/ PQR /WPQ
.
documents W-New
O
Material Inspection
..)
Cylinder, Cylinder Head, Cylinder

Liners, Suction /Dischargevalves, Chemical, Mechanical, HT, NDT
Piston, Pistonrod, Crank shaft, Cross and otherproperties(asapplicable)
iN.)
—
0 MTC's /
0
x
--,
head, Connectingrod, Frame, Distance Inspectionrecords
pieces, Main Bearing,piping
components, Instruments,etc. (as
a pplicable)
Page 5788 of 8516

0'Aed LA- 1000-00-9 'oN Tel1110d pamasei s1y 6u IIV — 113411 60doo
IAaR L1710-I8-9
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
c) t•
z w)
CHARACTERISTICS SUB
. •
STAGE/ACTIVITY OF CHECK SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA

SUPPLIER
Volume bottles,Airreceiver,Control
f.)
iN)
Panel, Coolers(asapplicable) Asperapproved documents Inspection / Test
0
'—'>
(Supplier / Sub-suppliertoarrange TPIA reports
certification)
Motor MTC &Inspection
*
0
.--
C>
*(Supplier/subsuppliertoarrange TPIA Typetest/RoutinetestofMotor
t•-)
U.)
Report (Note-3)
certification)
0
C.■.)
Reviewof testcertificates,markings
Materials identificationof Compressor visual & dimensional inspection, Material clearance
0
C:)
....
:--,
t.,J
Components identitycorrelation &transferof record

identity
Hydrostatictestof Cylinder,Cylinder Check for leakage
(...)
N
head, Cylinder& head waterjackets,
0
O
TestReport
CD
,--,
stuffingboxcoolingjacket,skid piping
Check for leakage
L.)
HeliumLeak test /Pneumatictestof

l....)
0
O
C>
._ .
cylinder(asapplicable) Test Report
Check for leakage

w
KeroseneLeak testof Frame/Crank Case

0
c:''
c>
,-- .
Test Report
Check for leakage

(,)
Pneumatictestof Distancepiece/slide
VI
Z
c
-_,
c>
bodycompartment(if applicable) Test Report
Page 5789 of 8516

0•Aad Ld- L 000-00-9oN leamj patueseis41-161-1 11V— 113 A 60doo
IAallL.I710-18-9
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
CA
g
o
0
SUPPLIER
NDT(asapplicable) Check for defect
t-')
.0■
z
C)
cs‘'
.--,
Test Report
,
H
.---.1
w
Cold Run Out(vertical & horizontal)of
,-r
(/D
CD
z
,--.
TestReport
c )
CD
PistonRod
.
4i.
Final Inspection
i;::>
-1=,
MechanicalRunTest Mechanical integrity, Noise,

«.--
z
c ■:'
z
•--,
(=>
Vibration,Temperaturerise,strip Test Report
testetc.
(asapplicable)
-1=,
i\.)
PerformanceTest(asapplicable) Thermodynamic Performance
cQ''
z
TestReport
CD
.—■
-1=,
Finalskidcompletenesscheck Visual&DimensionalCheck
i.,)
z
.--,
TestReport
<::'
C>
0
tii
Painting
PaintScheme,Visual &Paint
z
C›
Q'''
c.n
Final painting(asapplicable) Inspection Report

:—.
.—■
.
thicknesscheck
Documentation
,::::,
C■
Stampingand reviewof inspection Reviewof documents forcompliance

e''
z
,--,
C)
C
,--
documents, issueofIC asperPR.
Page 5790 of 8516

0'Aed Ld- 1000-00-9 oN leWJOd paniesei sp.i6p iiv —113 N 6Odoo
CD fD i.) or
< Crei
t■-)
11
CD •-• CD
cr2
/ C:)
0•Aed Ld- 1.000-00-9'oN ie wioj

:(elqeon dde sv) S31ON
rD C)
e•-•
r' C.)
0- '., '-'• Cl.,
CD CDcD
cn C4 v)
..n '-h AD (-)
• o CfC7 .- • c
• co
cr,
CD cr' CD
fr) • CD
5 f=1.,
c> ,-, , 5.
Reviewof final documentation
• ='-' —
ii (1)
STAGE/ACTIVITY
CD
cn 0 CrCi
0 c.) ,....,
....., °
co
-,
4 -,- .(,).-
(D, <,,. ,--,-
cp
O cn
-t c.)
.-1 o o
cn 9_ cp
.-. __ ...o
o
,''' cr c>
'—' CD ■:.-1. • `-c)
0''' CD CD
CD Cn
• '.0
CD
cn ep p
.„.
'"Z:S " cn CD
CD ~c1
■-s (2) >
ril ;:i.-
:1 `-•
.
51
a.
',=' CA
C:1••
Q.
,--• •
VDRattached withPR.
'».C.J > 1.•

,-. •
C:71
go 6-4
CD o
I > ■-r-
CHARACTERISTICS
CD •
0 cn
e-1-
Compilationof documentsasper
,:::)
...1
Z CD cn ct)
cn
'
C-TP c.)
CD
<-)
,-1-
■•-• •
O C'''''
O 5 . 46>
,-t
c.)
s--,
1CD
-t
r,
C/D CD
-6'
c> o
Ro 5. -cs
CD
QUANTUM
0, ---
OF CHECK
1 c—,
00 0 (lD
'!=t
.—Cl] <D c>
o
o .-0 C>
c....) CD ...
ts..) C) :::h
.... <D
4ö ... cn
c F4. o
Dossier /
o
Completion
O
g
<-o:-) > .„
p,
,-o , O
v),...0
certificate
„ o.. CD
< o
(.,
CD
0.
z.)
CD N
0 eD
,-1-
SUB
C> cn
U)
Q.
SUPPLIER
CD AD
,t- ....-
cn AD CD
57'
o O
c_
CD x
'CS
'10
IIV— 113111 60doo
!
1)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
IAn1
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA

patuasei
Page 5791 of 8516

CopyrightEI L— Allrightsreserved
Page 5792 of 8516

0AaLI LJ- 1000-00-8 'oN 3eWJe3
D
-o
0
o.
D.
P
(
z
D
ct)
o
0
cn
CD
a
1..)
o.
0.
• 7
CO '155
C> o
=
a)
Ei 0
3o
3 -1
o. o
uogepiaweidwi J0j. penssi
G)
cn
7
43OSSI-3d CINV a3SIA32:1
inall9P10-18-9
z ~ri rri 1:5
IBLUJOd
■
-3 (-)
(-) _
:suo!mitaiqqv
• • •
ri) .
AD CD
`- " ' '
0'rad L3- 1000-00-8'oN

AD a ° •
--- C/D
4 E.
uldno S
E 5 D
-, crq (--r ? ,) -1
rD =
CD .-C, CD •-t "0 Cl. AD G. g
'-1 2 CD CD •-1 `-.- C r ■.-4
Cr
›.,-2. ec, C) ,-4-CD cn c) O .4 -I -1
c -F .-t -. co
'a- C 0 c- '-c1 c4 " C9 à" ( 8. ) R. _.3 - L' a
gj - - . t-ri ;t-r.
,-r- " .T1
.4- v) ug -I H ,-r: C4 (7)
C =,) ■-+
2' ' C.) ,-. •
.- CD .-. C- r° -P- ) < E
(--) .,,--).- (....) crc
,,, im, ,._, __. i-
ri gl
CD
4.‹ "--• Q. CD •"-
CD (1) n' CD erc,
o '.7_ f),) -OH cp vt
^0-' •1),)
ro 0
H ■-s CD eD Cl.. cn cn ■ • •-i.) ....
c Lz.,.: ,__, ,..., cn CD ■-t-
,-- ct, '- C) ,-r L' ,_,
H ■-r ADI 1:DD H 5- L,
c (1) c> u, CI) CD CD '-C1 " CD •-t -t
,-1, ,--, • ..«..
0 AD C) r) O CrQ = v)
...,"
$:0 „, cp O o (D
up '''' -.
CrCi 5 o .--
o•
$:0 r '' co cn CPC?
‹...r r-, ,,,_ co
?■ .■- CM -. C
AD co
O c C 0-
O >-1 '-r1 94
co (:' ■
=.
:w ro o•
0
/''
`.-
vt
ci) ,-
C
CD
po
crq
."0
1:U pD
":
6 (-) cl) ■0 til 0 ,-c)
o (1)
CD
.< sH ■H C/) s-ci '-c1 '-cl '-C '-ci Z Z 4

--"' CD •--'
,./, cD CD AD 0 " < eD o CD
..1
'- .--
1' •c4 'ff °": (1). g
) "=t -t -,..
<9 o
C.
0 O-
n'-c)o
CD •-• • ..8., ,n c)
2. .‹.-r o
Crcr
., 8
„„„ B" CD cn,'
- -- Cr,- cn cn <1)
o AD ro 7-- •
''Ci ,i,:J ›-C-D' • n- ■
Th
-- • Cn »0 4 ,, (D 0 `"' -r ,C,
co -1
••-s c)
■
-■.) ._
v]
CD : .)r CD
cn k - .c
f)4 ' ., . •
Cl. <D .--• • 'l:t ,..., • .-` • 87 o CD
..CD (i)
o CrQ PJ . 7
'/$''. - - ,C' . . ''' .-(1-). . r:'•
■-3 1-1
O o •=1" ,-+
.... ■-t o C. C. 0 :o C 0 CD CD
C) " CICi CD ,-•-. CD C/) C11
.-C:$ C
o
e) 0 C/D
,r-
tO o (1 1 ›,, ',5" • E-
:,,.; A2s, CD crQ
C c.). C
CrCi c) o C.
H
-- CD
- • c, o
c) E. `-< C -t
;)) r) O C. Cl•Q
,-r-
-. -. C
0 O
C (74 'R..
P.)
,-+
O
pameseJ s;q 6!-I IIV— 113}L1 6pAcloo
Page 5793 of 8516

zrg
i >Z
r=g;
oc
rn
adODS CYI z
ThisInspectionandTestPlancoverstheminimumtestingrequirements for Centrifugal Compressor.
PO/PR/ Standardsreferred there in/Jobspecifications /Approved documents.

V)
g
o
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
CD
CHECK SUPPLIER
1."
<=
Procedure
Documented Procedure
—""
Hydrostatic Test,HeatTreatment,
.---.
Procedure
x
0
0
..—•
NDT,Functional Testand other
,
Documents
procedures
>-`.
,54
Procedure
(1C7
x
■
c:::.
0
0
—•
■
Documentedprocedures.
i .,
WPS/PQR /WPQ
--,
documents
co
CategorizationPlan forBoughtOut Documented Inspection Category
i....)
.—.
Categorization
x
x
Items 100%
Plan
--, :=
li..) lt,›
Material Inspection
Casing,shaft, impellers, diaphragm, Testrequirementasperpurchase Asper Asper
Manufacturer
x
0
0
BaseFrame, instrumentsetc. specification. ..-.. Test Certificate
Driver(Motor/Turbine), Control Testrequirementasperpurchase Asper Asper
1■.)
i■.)
Manufacturer
x
Panel,Coolers, Vesselsandother specification. 100% categorization categorization
Test Certificate
boughtout items(asapplicable)
Page 5794 of 8516

0'Aed L3- 1000-00-8'oN T ewiod pamasai s414 61.1 IIV — 113414 60cloo
IAall91710-18-9

ci5
g
o
cn
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
o
CHECK SUPPLIER
O
tià
:-
Mechanical integrity
loJ
Impeller OverspeedTest(OST)
z
0
0
—'
Test Report
Run-outcheck (Electrical & Run-out
(....)
i•J
z
5
-,
C>
:: )
Mechanical)ofassembled Rotor TestReport
Unbalancecheck
L.)
(....)
DynamicBalancing & Residual
z
-,
5
:)
C>
Test Report
Unbalance Check ofassembled Rotor
Check for leakage
(....)
-P
Hydrostatictestof Compressor
c■:
z
=:'
C>
Test Report
C
Casing
Helium leak testof Compressor Check for leakage
(....)
Ul
z
z
-,
5
C>
:: )
Test Report
Casing(If applicable)
b1
Clearancecheck & Assembly Axial,Radial Clearances, Visual,

1.4.)
z
-,
5
C>
Test Report
,
inspection Dimensional check
One/Rotor
.--,1
Rotor InsensitivityTest(as RotorInsensitivity

tr..)
z
Test Report
applicable) e
Check for leakage
.00
GasLeak Testof assembled

(....)
z
0
'-'
TestReport
C>
Compressor Casing(asapplicable)
4,
7::D
Final Inspection
Mechanical integrity
4
Mechanical Run Test(MRT)

—•
■
z
C,
‹0 Test Report
PostTest InspectionafterMRT Visual Inspection

iJ
-1=••
z
,-
0
C>
Test Report
cf
'
paniesei sli1 61-1 11V— 11341-1 60doo
Page 5795 of 8516

L3- 1.000-00-9oN 0 •Aod
QUANTUM S C 0PE OF INSPECTION

C/)
§
r)
C.)
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
CD
CHECK SUPPLIER
-r'
Performance Test(asapplicable) Thermodynamic Performance

-,,.>
Z
0
O
0
Test Report
■
-1 '
Visual,NDT,Leak check(as Inspection

-P
Oil & Gas Piping
x
0
0
c r'
Report / RT
7:1
applicable)
I
Films
'-oo ,
5'
B"
Visual, dimensionand skid
r)
rD 'li
(1)
x
x
c''
0
0
M
Final Skid Assembly

4:,
i
completenesscheck
0
(II
Painting
.
VisualInspection for Workmanship

(J)
.---,
SurfacePreparation&Paintingof all
CarbonSteel Parts / Paint Shade / Inspection
c '
Z
0
CD
.
■
PaintingDFT Check Report
Pickling &Passivation forStainless •

Visual Inspection forWorkmanship • • •
i■.)
LA
Inspection
x
0
0
SteelParts(asapplicable)
i
■
Report
01
O
cD
Documentation & IC
.--,
Submissionof Certificates(as
CT
Certificateof Statutorytesting
«

classification
,—.
o (-)
5- .:n
'''
'-c+) ri)
c)
-
authority likePESO(as
7:1
7
CS .
c:,. c4
t1-1
-t-
CD
CD
applicable) co
o
v)
Valid BISLicense(as
applicable)
Degreeof protectioncertificate
(asa• licable)
Page 5796 of 8516

0'Aed Ld-1000-00-9'0N 4 eLtuo3 pamasei spl 6p iiv —113 3.i6pAdoo
IAaR 9140-18-9

cr
,-■
r)
g
o
r)
w
SUB
r)
OF
• •
rm
••-,
STAGE/ACTIVITY
,-
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
i..) c
CHECK SUPPLIER
01
()
Inspection
,,'-'
—
Documentation & Inspection
o
CD
z
z
c>
—
Certificate(IC) Certificate
Verification &compilationof
L>
Final documentsasperPR
0`■
Manufacturer
z
z
oD
—
inspection &testrecords for
data book
:(appmddu sy) saiom
a
CL,
•;:i •
•
cr
v)
(1)
!-D
4)o
fZ))
(-)
V)
CD
CD
fl
cn
CD
CD
CD
co
c>
~t
cn
=
co
CD
co
c>
CrCi
crc? c>
,
> °
r»
n>
((7>-D
<'f) •
>
~b
C/)
Cr
C./)
Cr
—•
-+
1) •
'-cfP
."0
CD
7.
(1)
P,)
-s
CD
CD
CD
co
■
1D0
o
CD
CD
SD)
co
cn
■
■
Page 5797 of 8516

07\92:1L3- 1000-00-9 '0N 4ewio3 p9MaSalS}1.1611 11V -113 p.160doo
eitq ENGINEERS
faigitg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0054
1.4rerfetteotellIJOgmt (A Govt of India Undettalong)
INDUCED DRAFT FAN & FORCED DRAFT FAN Rev. 3
Page 1 of 5
Tcku 49- ycku49-

f4-tuur 3 Trteur 479T
FOR
INDUCED DRAFT FAN & FORCED DRAFT FAN
(1
1
- 11
-----
3 18.06.13 REVISED AND REISSUED TKK RKS ..-----19/
CG
G4---- DM
2 10.04.12 REVISED AND REISSUED TKK SCG AKC DM
1 21.01.08 REVISED AND REISSUED SMG RB MVKK VC
0 06.08.2002 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION VKJ TVD AKB GRR

Date Purpose
No. by by Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 5798 of 8516

,fg431
1 ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0054
1711V71 vlecnre ,Kn.) IA Govt of India Undettakingi
INDUCED DRAFT FAN & FORCED DRAFT FAN Rev.3
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Neeraj Mathur Mr. T Kamalakannan Mr. Deepak Gupta (Project)
Mr. Mayank Jain
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright EIS — All rights reserved
Page 5799 of 8516

0IIc7el±l ENGINEERS FOR
OW--g INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0054
1.11-erl rizave 0,121,41) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 5
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Induced Draft Fan & Forced Draft Fan
1) PO/PR/ Standards referred there in/ Job specifications /Approved documents.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL. QUANTUM
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS RECORD SUB
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
H- For New
/
WPS/PQR/WPQ , MRT / Performance H R- For
1.1 Documented Procedures 100% Procedure Record -
test ,NDT and other procedures Already
approved
2.0 Material Inspection
Motor / VFD (As applicable) MTC &

Type test/Routine W
2.1 *(supplier/sub supplier to arrange TPIA 100% Inspection H H*
test of Motor (Note-3)
Turbine (As applicable) MTC &
2.2 *(supplier/sub supplier to arrange TPIA MRT of Turbine 100% Inspection H H* W
Page 5800 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
77.51,01.1 IA Govt of India Undettakingt
Page 4 of 5
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Fluid Coupling (As applicable) MTC &
2.3 *(supplier/sub supplier to arrange TPIA Functional Test 100% Inspection H H* R
Local Control Panel (As applicable) MTC &
2.4 *(supplier/sub supplier to arrange TPIA Functional Test 100% Inspection H H* R
Material Identification
Plate, Coil, Round Bar Forgings , Casing, 1) Chemical Properties Mill /Mfg TC,
3.1 Impeller, Coupling, Pulley,Gear & Physical Properties 100% OR Check Test - H -
Box.,shaft, damper„ etc (As applicable) 2) Surface Quality Reports
1) Welding parameters
2) Dimension / Inspection
Fabrication (Casing, Impeller etc.) - H -
3.2 workmanship 100% Records
3) RT / DPT as
applicable
Ultrasonic test
3.3 Shaft Soundness( Ultrasonic Test) 100% report - W R
Inspection and
3.4 Rotor Assembly Dynamic Balancing 100% Test Report - W R
Page 5801 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
lafgrg INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0054
W0fl 2.12L172 JPSIrA Govt of Indio Undertaking)
Page 5 of 5
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1) No load Mech. Run
test
2) Bearing Temperature
Mechanical run test(MRT) & 100% Test Records - H H
4.1 Rise
Performance test
3) Vibration
4) Noise Measurement
5) Performance
Final assembly Inspection (Unitised Fan Conformity of
4.2 with Driver, Coupling OR Pulley Belt Dimensions and 100% Test Records - H W
Base Frame) Accessories
5.0 Painting
workmanship, uniformity & Inspection
5.1 Final painting as applicable 100% - H R
DFT check report
Final stamping, review of inspection Verification & compilation Inspection H
6.1 100% - H
documents and issue of IC of inspection & test records record / IC
Final H
6.2 Final documents as per PR of inspection & test records 100% - H
dossier
Legend: H- Hold (Do not proceed without approval), P-Perform, RW - Random Witness (As specified or 10% ( min.1 no. of each size and type of
Bulk item)), R-Review, W-Witness (Give due notice, work may proceed after scheduled date).

1. This document describes the generic test requirements. Any additional test or Inspection scope if specified in contract documents shall also be applicable.
(Unless otherwise agreed upon)
3. Inspection Test Requirements of Motors shall be as per EIL ITP 6-81-1031 (HV Motors), 6-81-1032 (MV Motors), 6-81-1038 (VFDs)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL— All rights reserved
Page 5802 of 8516

ENGINEERS

v.-1,okt= ,147.i1 IA Govt of India Undettakingt
FOR STEAM TURBINE (GENERAL PURPOSE) Page 1 of 5
11114-111-ei t)cil tg
f4-414:rur trtrucrr

FOR STEAM TURBINE (GENERAL PURPOSE)
\._:
:q
c,___
3 09.09.13 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK SCG DM
0 06.08.02 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION VKJ TVD AKB SB
Convenor Chairman
No. by by
Approved by
Page 5803 of 8516

R jt11 ENGINEERS
$4fgar safgrdg INDIA LIMITED FOR STEAM TURBINE (GENERAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0057 Rev 3
1.17E'R eiZUSTU
JW.11 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain

Page 5804 of 8516

k.-11kkit ENGINEERS
Of5Vds INDIA LIMITED
1411Tel ave.,' MI ORIF,
11
FOR STEAM TURBINE (GENERAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0057 Rev 3
IA Go,4 'ocho Undeff9k,o91
Page 3 of 5
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Steam Turbine.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
S. CHARACTERISTI QUANTUM FORMAT OF
STAGE/ACTIVITY SUB
NO CS OF CHECK REPORT SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
MRT, NDT and other Procedures Documented Procedure
1.1 100% - H R
(As applicable) procedures. documents
Incoming Material Chemical Properties
2.1 All Heats MTC H R R
Casing, Bearing Housing Physical Properties
Incoming Material Manufacturer's
Chemical Properties
2.2 Rotor Shaft, Gear Blanks and Disc All Heats TC or Lab H R R
Physical Properties
Material Report
Hardware Items Chemical & Physical Inspection -
2.3 100% W R
Gaskets, Fasteners, Gland-Packing properties Report
3.0 In Process Inspection
Page 5805 of 8516

k..711 ei ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR STEAM TURBINE (GENERAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0057 Rev 3
. I cleave,tr,fmosvo IA Govt of lode Undertalongf
Page 4 of 5
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
STAGE/ACTIVITY SUB
SUPPLIER
NDT of Casing , Rotor shaft, Gear

3.1 Blank Disc & Bearing Housing Defects 100% Test Records - H R
(As applicable)
Manufacturer's
Soundness of Weld
3.2 NDT of Weld Joint 100% Inspection and - H R
Joint
Test Records
Manufacturer's
3.3 Turbine casing Leak tightness Each Turbine Inspection and - H R
Test Records
Balancing of 1) Unbalance Manufacturer's

3.4 Each - H R
Rotor Assembly 2) Run Out Inspection and
Test Records
•MRT
'Vibration
Manufacturer's
Testing 'Bearing
4.1 Each Turbine Inspection and - H H
Assembled Turbine Temperature Rise
Test Records
•Governing
•Over Speed Trip
Testing Inspection and
4.2 Strip Examination Each Turbine - H R
Dismantled Bearings Test Records
Page 5806 of 8516

LILA' r ENGINEERS
254-eg INDIA LIMITED FOR STEAM TURBINE (GENERAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0057 Rev 3
(A God of India Undertaking)
Page 5 of 5
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
STAGE/ACTIVITY SUB
SUPPLIER
Manufacturer's
Testing
4.3 Leak Tightness Each Set Inspection and - H W
Auxiliary Piping
Test Records
Document
4.4 Instruments Each Test Report MTC W H R
Review
5.0 Documentation & IC

Verifying stamping
5.1 details and review of 100 % - H H
Verification &
compilation of
inspection & test Final
5.2 Final documents as per PR 100% - H H
records for dossier
submission to
customer
Legend: H- Hold (Do not proceed without approval), P-Perform, RW - Random Witness (As specified or 10% ( min.1 no. of each size and type of Bulk item)),
R-Review, W-Witness (Give due notice, work may proceed after scheduled date).
1. This document describes the generic test requirements. Any additional test or Inspection scope if specified in contract documents shall also be applicable
(unless otherwise agreed upon).
Page 5807 of 8516

ENGINEERS
FOR STEAM TURBINE (SPECIAL PURPOSE) Page 1 of 5
fUti tg
fktaToT trtaTur th %TN I

FOR STEAM TURBINE (SPECIAL PURPOSE)
t\, ( •
3 09.09.13 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK RKS CG DM
0 06.08.2002 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION VKJ TVD AKB SB
Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 5808 of 8516

zic INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
t31Iloi ENGINEERS
2154eg
r-1temJEXIVA1
INDIA LIMITED
FOR STEAM TURBINE (SPECIAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0058 Rev 3
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain

Page 5809 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR STEAM TURBINE (SPECIAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0058 Rev 3
• I r tAVOtte MI I IA Govt of India Undettaloog)
Page 3 of 5
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Steam Turbine.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
S. QUANTUM FORMAT OF
NO OF CHECK REPORT SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
MRT, NDT and other Procedures Documented Procedure
1.1 100% - H R
(As applicable) procedures. documents
Incoming Material Chemical Properties
2.1 All Heats MTC H R R
Casing, bearing Housing Physical Properties
Incoming Material Manufacturer's
Chemical Properties
2.2 Rotor Shaft, Gear Blanks and Disc All Heats TC or Lab H R R
Physical Properties
Material Report
Hardware Items Chemical & Physical Inspection
2.3 100% W R
Gaskets, Fasteners, Gland-Packing properties Report
3.0 In Process Inspection
Page 5810 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR STEAM TURBINE (SPECIAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0058 Rev 3
Ifia 09,eg
In. 7r IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 4 of 5
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
NDT of Casing , Rotor shaft, Gear
3.1 Blank Disc & Bearing Housing Defects 100% Test Records - H R
(As applicable)
Manufacturer's
Soundness of Weld H R
3.2 NDT of Weld Joint 100% Inspection and -
Joint
Test Records
Manufacturer's
3.3 Turbine casing Leak tightness Each Turbine Inspection and - H R
Test Records
Balancing of 1) Unbalance Manufacturer's

3.4 Each - H R
Rotor Assembly 2) Run Out Inspection and
Test Records

•MRT
•Vibration
Manufacturer's
Testing •Bearing Inspection and - H H
4.1 Each Turbine
Assembled Turbine Temperature Rise Test Records
•Governing
•Over Speed Trip
Testing Inspection and
4.2 Strip Examination Each Turbine - H R
Dismantled Bearings Test Records
Manufacturer's
Testing Inspection and - H W
4.3 Leak Tightness Each Set
Auxiliary Piping Test Records
Page 5811 of 8516

e..1 ENGINEERS
25tes INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Of Indio Undertaking)
FOR STEAM TURBINE (SPECIAL PURPOSE) 6-81-0058 Rev 3
Page 5 of 5
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
STAGE/ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS REPORT SUB
NO OF CHECK SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Document W H R
4.4 Instruments Each Test Report MTC
Review

Verifying stamping
5.1 details and review of 100% - H H
Verification &
compilation of
inspection & test Final
5.2 Final documents as per PR 100% - H H
records for dossier
submission to
customer

applicable (unless otherwise agreed upon).
Page 5812 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
rzs INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
(ffun ,rzasI2M1.1~, IA Go. of Inrtla Undertalong)
(SKID MOUNTED) Page 1 of 25
glrfk4 04)01 R!Eh-gi dii.;P•s)

f4f24-4RT
FOR
DOSING PACKAGES
(SKID MOUNTED)
0 03.07.2014 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION

SKK AM DB / AKN SC
Standards Standards
Date Purpose by Convenor Chairman
No by
Approved by
Page 5813 of 8516

lf~ e.g
fmf51-J
,f,A01 ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
uèir,71, erre512 (171 27,15-71) I A Govt of intlia Undertalong)
Abbreviations:
ANSI : American National Standard Institute
AP1 American Petroleum Institute
ASME : American Society for Mechanical Engineers
EQC : Equipment Qualification Criteria
NPSHA: Net Positive Suction Head Available
NPSHR: Net Positive Suction Head Required
PWHT : Post Weld Heat Treatment
Page 5814 of 8516

51f=
~ ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED
14-ft7R covotrffit
DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
IA Govt of India Undertatfing)
Convener: Mr. Dinesh Bhatia

Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anukul Mandal
Mr. Rakesh Mishra
Mr. JS Duggal
Mr. KVK Naidu (Projects)
Page 5815 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS FOR
Offi&g INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
DOSING PACKAGES
(A Govl of Indla Underlak(ngf
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 5
3.0 SITE & UTILITY DATA 7
4.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR PACKAGER AND EQUIPMENT 7
5.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY/WORK 8
6.0 BASIC DESIGN 8
8.0 COMMISSIONING SPARE PARTS 24
9.0 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR TWO YEARS NORMAL OPERATION 24
10.0 SPECIAL TOOLS/TACKLES 24
11.0 MANDATORY SPARE PARTS 24
12.0 SUPERVISION DURING ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING 25
13.0 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT 25
14.0 VENDOR DATA AND DRAWINGS 25

Page 5816 of 8516

ot ENGINEERS FOR
5e-ar Wes
1.1?R 3,70.,1
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goyt of (nd■A Unden.kA9)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification describes the minimum requirements for engineering, manufacture,

packaging, shop inspection & testing and supply of Skid Mounted Dosing Packages.
The Dosing package(s) shall be used to dose metered quantity of chemicals as per the
requirements specified in the process data sheets, process P&IDs and other specifications
forming part of inquiry document.
1.2 Conflicting Requirements
In case of conflict between this specification and the attendant datasheets and other
attached specifications, the following order of precedence shall govern:
a) Process Data Sheets

b) P&IDs
c) Equipment Data Sheets
d) This Specification
e) EIL Standard Specifications
f) Codes and Standards
a) Codes, Standards and Regulations
The following codes and standards-latest edition (as applicable) shall apply. In case
any additional codes and standards are mentioned in the list of attachments, the
same shall also be applicable.
Code Title
API 675 Positive Displacement Pumps-Controlled Volume
ASME Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

Div.1
ASME Sec. II A Ferrous Material Specification
ASME Sec. II C Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler
Metals
ASME Sec. II D Material Properties
ASME Sec. V Non Destructive Examination
ASME Sec. IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications
ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges
ASME B16.20 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B 16.21 Non -Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
IS 4049 (Part-II) Specification for Formed Ends for Vessels
API 650 Welded Tanks for Oil Storage
IS : 803 Code of Practice for Design, Fabrication, Erection of
Vertical Mild Steel Cylindrical Welded Oil Storage Tanks
IS 4682 Code of Practice for Lining Vessels & Equipments for
Chemical Process
Page 5817 of 8516

k«3'
-11 ENGINEERS FOR
$'g-ar £;Mes INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
Govt ot InOla Undertatong)
Other international standards may be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or

superior backed by proven track record for the application and prior approval of the
Company.
b) Standard Specifications
Standards Title
6-41-0021 Standard Specifications for Positive Displacement Pumps
Controlled Volume
6-78-0001 Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from
Bidders
6-51-0032 Specification for MV Motors
6-51-0006 Specification for Flameproof Control Stations
6-81-1032 Inspection & Test Plan for MV Induction Motors
6-81-1006 Inspection & Test Plan for Flame Proof Control Stations
7-12-0001 Vessel Tolerances
7-12-0002 Support for Horizontal Vessel
7-12-0004 Skirt Base Details
7-12-0006 Angle Leg Support
7-12-0007 Pipe Leg Support
7-12-0008 Bracket Support for Vertical Vessels
7-12-0009 Manhole with Hinged Cover
7-12-0010 Manhole with Davit
7-12-0013 Nozzle Reinforcement and Projection
7-12-0015 Standard Bolt Hole Orientation
7-12-0018 Internal Flanges
7-12-0024 Lifting Lug Top Head Type
7-12-0026 Earthing Lug
7-13-0001 Earth Connections
7-13-0002 Anchor Chair
7-13-0006 Level Indicator Supports
7-13-0007 Gauge Hatch with Cover
7-13-0010 Cage Ladder for Fixed Roof Tank
7-68-0509 Steel Ladder Joint Details

Page 5818 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS FOR
$`ga £;125 INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
1.41,71 IA Govt of Incha Undertalung)
Standards Title
7-68-0663 Structural Arrangement of Cone Roof — (2.5 M < Dia < 6.0 M)
7-68-0680 Roof Structure for Cone Roof Tank, Joint Details ( Dia <=40 M)
7-68-0681 Roof Structure for Cone Roof Tanks Central Drum (Detail B).
7-68-0682 Cone Roof Structure Schematic Joint Details & Central Drum.
6-26-0001 Standard Specification for Mechanical Agitators
Following project specifications attached elsewhere in the bid package are

referenced to and made a part of this specification. In case any additional standard
specifications are mentioned in the list of attachments , the same shall also be
applicable
3.0 SITE & UTILITY DATA
Site and utility data shall be as be as specified in the document entitled as `Site and Utility
Data' forming part of the inquiry document.
4.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR PACKAGER AND EQUIPMENT
4.1 Dosing Skid-Packager
The Supplier of the dosing skid shall be a regular packager having adequate experience of
packaging and supplying of similar chemical dosing packages. Vendor shall furnish
reference list of previous installations of similar chemical dosing Packages (with broad
specs.)
4.2 Positive Displacement Pumps (Controlled Volume)
The Equipment Qualification Criteria (EQC) as specified in the Standard Specification

for Positive Displacement Pumps (Controlled Volume) [Spec.# 6-41-0021], shall be met
for the offered model of pump.
The dosing package vendor shall furnish duly filled in experience record proforma
enclosed with the inquiry document to amply prove that the offered pump model meet the
specified equipment qualification criteria for technical acceptance.
In addition, manufacturer's catalogue and general reference list for positive displacement
pumps (Controlled Volume) shall also be furnished.
4.3 Static Equipments
Vessels shall be procured from CONSULTANT /OWNER approved vendor list. In case,
Package vendor fabricates the vessels on its own, the reference list for the similar
supplied vessels (with broad parameters & Dimensions) for the last 7 years shall be
provided.
4.4 Vendor may procure material/equipment from any of CONSULTANT /OWNER

approved vendors. However current validity of vendor approval & their approved
product range and the conditions imposed while according vendor approval as per the
approved letter shall be verified by the vendor before the placement of order.

Page 5819 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS FOR
gzIr 92es
1.~ 2,.2
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov ot India Unclettaking)
5.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY/WORK
Package vendor scope has been defined broadly in document "Checklist —Scope of
Supply". However, vendor shall refer the entire enquiry specification for complete
vendor's scope of supply/work.
6.0 BASIC DESIGN
6.1 General
6.1.1 The Process datasheets and P&IDs shall be referred to, for operating conditions.
6.1.2 The equipment shall be suitable for outdoor (without-roof) installation.
6.1.3 All controls shall operate in a fail-safe mode.
6.1.4 All Electrical Devices and instruments shall meet the requirements for the specified area
classification in which they are installed.
6.2 Positive Displacement Pumps (Controlled Volume)
6.2.1 Pumps shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with API Std. 675 and
as modified as per the attached EIL Standard specification no. 6-41-0021.
6.2.2 Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) & temperature of the equipment shall
not be less than the design pressure & temperature specified in the data sheet nor less
than those specified in specifications, codes & standards.
6.2.3 The dosing package vendor shall calculate the acceleration head for each pump item,
based on the system configuration. Calculations for Acceleration head & NPSHR shall be
furnished. The dosing package vendor shall ensure that NPSHA is greater than
"Acceleration Head + NPSHR" by a margin of at least 1.0 meter, either by proper
selection of pump speed or by proper valve design or else by providing a suction side
Pulsation dampener.
6.2.4 Pulsation dampeners shall be provided as per pump data sheets and P&ID.
a) The suction side pulsation dampener (if provided) shall be as per the following
details:
Design Code: ASME Sec. VIII Div.I
Allowable pulsation level: ± 3%
Material of construction: As per applicable Piping Material
Specification (PMS) indicated in P&IDs
Type of pulsation dampener: Inverted Bottle, Direct Contact type.
b) The discharge side pulsation dampener (if provided) shall be as per the following
details:
Design Code: ASME Sec. VIII Div.I
Allowable pulsation level: ± 3%
Material of construction: As per applicable Piping Material
Specification (PMS) indicated in P&IDs
Type of pulsation dampener: Inverted Bottle, Direct Contact type.
Page 5820 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
g-ar c-tratrtt s w INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
451,0171, IA Govt ot ■not,a Untio■ takotg)
6.2.5 A11 coupling and exposed rotating parts shall be provided with suitable guards of non-
sparking type.
6.3 Drum Unloading Pump and Connecting Hoses
6.3.1 Drum unloading pumps shall be of "Air Operated Double Diaphragm (AODD)" type and
shall be as per manufacturer's standard.
6.3.2 Typical data sheet(s) for AODD pumps is enclosed with the inquiry document. The
dosing package vendor is advised to refer the inquiry specifications and completely fill-
up the same with operating data and data related to construction, performance of pump &
submit the same during detailed engineering stage. Technical literature, manufacturer's
standard performance curve, Plant air consumption data etc. for the AODD pumps shall
also be submitted for purchaser's review during detailed engineering stage.
6.3.3 The drum unloading pumps wherever specified shall be of portable type, driven
pneumatically i.e. by plant air.
6.3.4 These pumps shall be used for transfer of chemicals to the dosing vessel/tank from the
chemical drum / barrel (By Purchaser) (standard capacity of 200 litres).Pumps shall be
selected for a transfer rate of 1000 litres per hour.
6.3.5 For connecting the plant air supply to the air inlet side of each drum unloading pumps, air
inlet shall be provided with an air dryer requiring no electric power, air filter cum
regulator with pressure gauge, bleed type master air valve, pressure relief valve &
flexible hoses. The air outlet shall be equipped with air discharge muffler.
6.3.6 For transferring the chemical from the drum/barrel to the dosing tank/vessel through
drum unloading pump, flexible metallic hose with quick coupling connection (suitable
for handling the particular chemical) with liquid filter, shall be provided in the inlet line.
The outlet line should also be provided with a flexible metallic hose with quick coupling
connection,(suitable for handling the particular chemical)check valve, isolation valve and
a flanged connection which can be connected to the nozzle on the dosing vessel / tank.
6.3.7 The pump shall be provided with a suitable adapter such that it can fit on the top of
chemical drum. Liquid inlet, outlet and air inlet connections of the pump shall be suitable
for fitting the respective flexible metallic hoses.
6.3.8 The drum unloading pump shall be procured from a reputed AODD pump manufacturer
having proven experience for similar services .The dosing package vendor shall furnish,
AODD pump manufacturer's general reference list for the proposed pump model during
detailed engineering.
6.4 Calibration Pot / Graduated Cylinder
6.4.1 Calibration pot / graduated cylinders shall be provided for calibration of each controlled
volume pump as specified in the Checklist: Scope of supply. For multi head pumps,
separate calibration cylinders or necessary piping arrangement with isolation valves shall
be provided so that flow through each head can be calibrated. This requirement shall
govern over and above the P&ID.
6.5 Skid
6.5.1 The skid shall be designed and built to ensure that all the equipment along with
accessories, local control station(s) and piping are located and mounted suitably for ease
of operation and maintenance.
Page 5821 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
02&g INDIA LIMITED 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
DOSING PACKAGES
2,2ERIC +1, 7051:11
1 3, IA Govt of India UndoffokIna)
6.5.2 All the components of a particular chemical dosing package shall be assembled &
mounted on the skid, and shall be duly interconnected with piping & power/control
cabling. The inlet and outlet connections for purchaser's interface shall be terminated at
the skid edge with flanges of the specified sizes & ratings. The local control station(s) &
the junction box(es) for instrumentation shall be located at the edge of skid.
6.5.3 The skid shall be suitable for four point lift & shall be provided with lifting lugs.
6.5.4 The skid shall be provided with cable trays for routing of purchaser's power / control
cables.
6.6 Static Equipment
6.6.1 Mixers/ Agitators
6.6.1.1 All Mixers/Agitators shall be procured from EIL approved Vendors/Suppliers. The
Vendor/Supplier shall furnish the Filled in Mixer Data Sheet in the format provided after
award of contract.
6.6.2 Design
6.6.2.1 Pressure Vessels
6.6.2.1.1 Minimum Wall Thickness
Vessel shell and heads shall have minimum wall thicknesses calculated with Design
pressure and temperature, in accordance with the codes, but in no case, shall the thickness
be less than the criteria indicated below:
a) For Carbon steel vessels: 6mm (including corrosion allowance not exceeding 3.0
mm), but not less than that calculated as per below formula :
For Vessels with Diameter less than 2400 mm,
Wall Thickness = {(Dia./1000) + 1.5+ C.A.}
For Vessels with Diameter 2400 mm & above,
Wall thickness = {(Dia/1000) + 2.5+ C.A.}
b) For Stainless Steel vessels: 3 mm, but not less than that calculated as per following
for Vessels with Diameter more than 1500 mm
Wall thickness= {(Dia/1000) + 2.5}
6.6.2.1.2 Design Pressure
Design pressure shall be calculated as per the following, unless otherwise specified
elsewhere in the package:
a) Design pressure shall be the highest of the following:
• Maximum operating pressure (kg/cm2g) x 1.1

• Maximum operating pressure + 2.0 kg/cm2
• 3.5 kg/cm2g
b) Design pressure at any lower point is to be determined by adding the maximum

operating liquid head and any gradient within the vessel.

Page 5822 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
OgzIT faffieg INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
INT-
NN 2.17NWENfINCFN) IP GoN of Indo UNNeff.forf9)
c) Vessel operating under vacuum (or partial vacuum) shall be designed for
differential external pressure of 1.055 Kg/cm2.
6.6.2.1.3 Design Temperature
Design temperature shall be calculated as per the following, unless otherwise specified
elsewhere in the package:
a) For Vessels operating at 0° C and over, the design temperature shall be operating
temperature plus 15° C. However, design temperature shall not be less than 65°C.
b) For Vessels operating below 0° C, design temperature shall be lowest operating
temperature.
c) Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT) shall be lower of minimum
atmospheric temperature and minimum temperature envisaged during operation.
6.6.2.1.4 Corrosion Allowance
Minimum Corrosion allowance for Carbon steel vessels shall be 3.0 mm, unless
otherwise specified elsewhere in the package.
All internals shall be designed for full load condition. For Welded internals, twice the
corrosion allowance shall be considered. For Removable internal parts, single corrosion
allowance shall be considered. All bolted internals shall be provided with SS bolts and
two nuts.
6.6.2.1.5 Vessels shall be designed as per ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 (latest edition including latest
addenda in accordance with design data enclosed with the package). All Design
calculations shall be carried out considering all loads for erection, operation and hydro
test condition.
6.6.2.2 Storage Tanks
6.6.2.2.1 Any pressurized tank (irrespective of diameter) and atmospheric storage tanks (diameter
more than 2.0 m) shall be designed and fabricated as per API 650 code. However, small
atmospheric tanks can be designed & fabricated as per manufacturer's standard & good
engineering practice.
6.6.2.2.2 All internals shall be designed for full load condition. For Welded internals, twice the
corrosion allowance shall be considered. For Removable internal parts, single corrosion
allowance shall be considered. All bolted internals shall be provided with SS bolts and
two nuts.
6.6.2.2.3 The Corrosion allowance for Tanks shall be as given in respective Tank data sheets
attached with the bid package. Otherwise, it shall be determined by its intended service
conditions and service life.
6.6.3 Fabrication
6.6.3.1 Materials
Materials of various pressure parts of equipment shall be selected as follows for general
industrial condition/services, unless otherwise specified in respective Process data sheets.
Minimum grade for Stainless Steel shall be SS 304.
Plates SA 516 Gr. 60/70 (for CS vessels)/ IS 2062 Gr. B(for CS

tanks)/SS 304 (for SS Vessels/Tanks)

Page 5823 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
5gzx 92es INDIA LIMITED
IA Gcnd nt India Undertaking)
DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
# SA 516 Gr.60 for Caustic/Sour/Amine service tanks & vessels
Forgings SA 105/SA 182 F 304
Pipes SA 106 Gr. B/SA 312 TP 304
External bolting : SA 193 Gr. B7/ SA 194 Gr. 2H
Gasket As per PMS
MOC of internals shall be as per respective Process Data Sheets attached with the bid
package.
6.6.3.2 CS Plates used shall conform to the latest issue of specification SA-20 with additional
requirements mentioned herein.
a) Only normalized plates free from injurious defects with workmanlike finish shall
be used. Reconditioning/repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted.
b) One product analysis of each heat shall be carried out and reported. Chemical
analysis shall be as per applicable specifications with carbon content not exceeding
0.23%.
Additionally, one of following requirements for carbon equivalents (Ceq) based on heat
analysis shall be satisfied.
Ceq = C + Mn/6 < 0.42 •••(1)

Ceq = C + Mn/6+(Cr + Mo + V)/5+(Cu+Ni)/15 < 0.43 ...(2)
Equation -(1) shall be used when applicable material specify C and Mn only.
Equation -(2) is applicable for restricted chemistry requirements or for supplementary
requirements of S19 & S21 of specification SA-20.
SS plates shall conform to Specification SA 480 with additional requirements mentioned

herein:
a) All plates shall be hot rolled, pickled & shall have No. 1 finish on both sides with
reference to Specification SA-480. In addition, all stabilized grades of SS ( SS 347,
SS 321 etc.) shall be given stabilization heat treatment.
b) Unless otherwise specified; plates, pipes, forgings & fittings representative of each
heat shall be subjected to Inter granular corrosion tests as per ASTM A262 practice
E for all 300 series material. The bend test specimen shall be examined at a
magnification of 200X.
6.6.3.3 Heads
a) All Carbon steel cold formed dished heads or knuckles shall be stress relieved. Hot
formed dished ends or knuckles which have not been uniformly heated in the
normalizing range in the final stages of manufacturing shall be normalized. When
completed vessel involves PWHT, heat treatment intended above for cold formed
dished heads or knuckles is not applicable.
b) Cold formed dished ends of SS vessels shall not be solution annealed unless any of
the following condition exists:
Page 5824 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
$1gal faf-Aes INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
(.WA (A Govt of (ndo Undettatng)
• Specifically called for any Equipment/service.

• Hardness value after forming exceeds 235 BHN.
• Nominal thickness of plate is 16 mm or above.
c) Hot formed dished ends of SS vessels shall be solution annealed.
d) Whenever Heat treatment on Stainless Steel is carried out, it shall be followed by

micro etching test & IGC test as per ASTM A 262 practice E unless otherwise
specified to ascertain suitability & effectiveness of Solution annealing. The bend
test specimen shall be examined at a magnification of 200X.
6.6.3.4 Material Certificates shall conform to EN 10204 Type 3.1 and shall be submitted to
EIL/Owner/Third party.
6.6.3.5 Material of construction (MOC) of the Mixers shall be compatible with the process
service applicable.
6.6.3.6 Pipes for nozzles shall conform to API 5L, IS: 1978, A-53 or A-106. For Caustic, Sour
and Amine services, all nozzle pipes shall be A-106. Pipes for nozzle & heating coil shall
be of seamless quality. SS tanks shall have SS nozzles of compatible grade.
6.6.3.7 All Vessels/ Tanks shall be provided with lifting lugs.
6.6.3.8 Unless otherwise specified, Bottom plate slope shall be 1:50 from the centre of the tank
towards the shell.
6.6.3.9 For vessels, all Nozzle Flanges shall be of Weld Neck type. For Caustic, Sour and Amine
services all nozzle flanges shall be WN type in Vessels as well as Tanks.
6.6.3.10 Nozzles upto 50 mm NB size shall be stiffened with 2 numbers of 40 mm wide x 6 mm

thick stiffeners welded at 90 apart.
6.6.3.11 Rolling direction of plate for shell shall be lengthwise.
6.6.3.12 All Tanks shall be provided with Vent connection, levet indicators & earthing
connections. A gauge hatch with cover for gauging & sampling purpose is to be
provided on the tank, if specified on the Tank datasheet
6.6.3.13 All vessels shall be transported to site in single piece.
6.6.3.14 Roof Supporting Structure for Storage Tanks, if provided internally, shall be protected
with proper primer and painting as per the provisions of painting specification, as these
structures are designed without corrosion allowance.
6.6.4 Tolerances
6.6.4.1 Equipments tolerances shall be as per attached Standards/applicable code.
6.6.5 Cleaning and Painting
6.6.5.1 Vessels shall be cleaned internally to remove scale, rust, dirt, foreign material by wire
brushing.
6.6.5.2 All external surfaces shall be cleaned, primed and painted in accordance with painting
specification for specified environment.

Page 5825 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
r02- g INDIA LIMITED
1.117R Govt of lndia Undeltalfingl
6.6.5.3 SS surfaces both inside & outside shall be pickled & passivated in accordance with
Specification ASTM 380 after hydro test.
6.7 Piping
6.7.1 PipingDesign Codes
The design and engineering shall conform to the following standards as applicable:
➢ ASME B 31.3 "Process Piping"

➢ IBR " Indian Boiler Regulations"
6.7.2 Piping Design Basis
6.7.2.1 Preferred level of bottom of piping from skid top shall be 500 mm.
6.7.2.2 Minimum level of overhead piping shall be such that clear 2.2 M headroom is available
below pipe/insulation/supports.
6.7.2.3 All open vents to atmosphere shall be vented to safe location at least 3 M above nearest
operating floor or platform located within a radius of 6 M for steam and 8 M for
hydrocarbon/toxic discharge.
6.7.2.4 All PSVs and Control valves discharging to flare header shall be located close to and
above flare header for maintaining free draining requirement. PSVs and control valve
assembly along with prefabricated spools, valves, flanges, gaskets and bolts shall be
supplied loose by vendor for installation by owner. Size of PSV inlet line shall be
decided considering far away location of the PSV.
6.7.2.5 Hydrostatic test, Leak test, Non destructive Examination shall be carried out as per
applicable piping design codes.
6.7.2.6 Hydrostatic Vents and Drains shall be provided at High Point and Low points
respectively as per PMS and or good engineering practice.
6.7.2.7 Piping systems shall be adequately flexible to cater for thermal expansion/contraction
under start-up, operating and shut down conditions to ensure that the stresses and loads
do not exceed the values permitted in the applicable code.
6.7.2.8 All instruments and valves requiring attention during normal operation shall be
conveniently operable.
6.7.2.9 Adequate space shall be provided for removal of equipment components for routine
maintenance.
6.7.3 Pipe Support Design Basis
All piping shall be adequately supported, guided or anchored so as to prevent undue

vibration, deflection/expansion or loads on connected equipment and leakage at flanged
joints. Piping at valves and equipments such as pumps, requiring periodic maintenance,
shall be supported in such a way so that the valves and Equipments can be removed with
a minimum necessity of installing temporary pipe supports.
6.7.4 Piping Material Specification/ Valve Material Specification

Page 5826 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS FOR
g-ar 1E12-dg
' INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
IA Govt of Irlaia Undertaking)
The job piping material specification as applicable to incoming and outgoing lines is
provided. Vendor shall follow these piping classes if shown in P&Ids. Basic details for
valves are provided in the Piping Material Specification. Detail Valve material
specification shall be provided to the successful bidder. In case of variation in
material/components from this specification it shall be the responsibility of the vendor to
ensure suitability and establish equivalence of proposed material.
6.7.5 Battery Limit
All incoming and outgoing Piping shall be terminated by the vendor at one location with
isolation valves/flanges as per the approved P &Ids. B/L interface orientation shall be
finalized during detail engineering. Battery Limit Drawing shall indicate exact location,
levels and scope of package piping for all incoming and outgoing lines. All piping at
Battery Limit shall be anchored.
6.7.6 Painting
The protective paint system shall be provided to protect external surface of uninsulated
low alloy steel and carbon steel piping and equipments and insulated surface of low alloy
steel, carbon steel and stainless steel piping and equipments. The painting system shall be
suitable for the type of environment where package unit is to be installed.
6.7.7 Welding
Welding procedure qualification, welder's qualification, all welding work, equipment for
welding, heat treatment, other auxiliary functions and the welding personnel shall meet
the requirements of the accepted national/international standards and practices.
6.8 Electrical
6.8.1 Following minimum electrical facilities shall be provided by Vendor on local control
station:
a) Start
b) Stop
c) Field ammeter, as required.
Selector switch shall be provided, as required, as per P&ID & operational requirements.
The interlocking between the MCC feeder and field equipment shall be arranged in Local
Control Station by the Vendor.
6.8.2 All the 415 Volts supply feeders, to feed Dosing Pumps & Agitator Motors shall be
arranged by Purchaser. kW rating of motors for Dosing System shall be decided by
Bidder for the starting and running conditions specified in pump/ agitator datasheet.
Vendor to furnish Motor List, indicating kW rating, enabling Purchaser to provide MCC
with required number & rating of feeders as per the format mentioned in the Job
Specification-Electrical for Dosing Package.
All motors shall be flameproof Ex (d) type.

6.8.3 The power & control cables from Purchaser's MCC to individual motor & local control
stations, shall be supplied, laid & terminated by the Purchaser. However, Vendor shall
supply all cable glands and lugs, as required. All cable glands shall be flameproof Ex (d)
double-compression type of Ni-plated Brass. The cable-lugs shall be of tinned Copper
and crimping type. Exact size of Purchaser-supplied power and control cables shall be
finalised during detail engineering. Provisions, as required, in Vendor's equipment for
termination of the same, shall be made accordingly without any cost & time implications
to Owner.
Page 5827 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
IgZiff-aW5 INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
1.117 i 217.17 C151~1 IA GoN of Indo Undedaking)
6.8.4 Purchaser's cables will be 1100V, Copper or Aluminum conductor, PVC insulated, PVC
extruded inner sheath, armoured with overall FRLS PVC sheath.
6.8.5 Cable size for motor space heater shall be 3 x 2.5 mm2 with Cu Conductor, 3/4-inch
entry.
6.8.6 The cable trenches/ trays from sub-station to battery limit of individual package shall be
in the scope of Purchaser. Cable trays on Dosing Skids shall be provided by Vendor, as
required, for routing of Purchaser-supplied power & control cables within skid.
6.8.7 Earthing of all package equipments within the skid shall be done by the bidder. Earth
terminals shall be provided on skid for connection by Purchaser to main plant earth grid.
6.8.8 Earthing shall be carried-out as per standard IS: 3043. All hardware for earthing shall be
hot dip galvanized @ 610 gm/m2. GI Earth Plate shall be provided and all non-current
carrying parts of electrical apparatus, vessels and skid structure shall be bonded with this
GI earth plate. Purchaser shall connect earth plate with main plant earth network. Sizes of
earth conductors to be used shall be as per Job Specification-Electrical for Dosing
Package.
6.8.9 All the equipment, indigenous and imported, shall have a valid statutory approval of
PESO/CCOE towards explosion protection and copies of the same (PESO/CCOE
approvals) shall be furnished during detailed engineering stage.
6.8.10 All local control stations shall be flameproof Ex (d) type.
6.8.11 For project specific requirement, Bidder shall refer Job Specification-Electrical for
Dosing Package
6.8.12 In case of any conflict between various requirements/ parameters, the most stringent one
shall be applicable.
6.9 Instrumentation and Controls
6.9.1 General
6.9.1.1 All electronic field instruments shall be certified for installation in hazardous area
classification of Location as per Job specification sheet. Instrument shall also be
weatherproof to IP-55 as a minimum. For environmental conditions, refer elsewhere in
the package.
6.9.1.2 SS Tag plate shall be provided for all instruments.
6.9.1.3 The instrumentation selected for the package shall be rugged in design and must be well
proven for use in similar applications. Prototype design or equipment of experimental
nature or design undergoing testing etc. shall not be selected and supplied by bidder. The
instruments as being offered / supplied should have been operating satisfactorily in
hydrocarbon industry like Refinery, Petrochemical and Gas Processing Plant under
similar process conditions for at least 4000 hrs.
6.9.1.4 Bidder shall supply 10% subject to minimum 1 no. of each type of instrument installation
materials such as fittings, valves, tubes, etc. as loose supply. Prices for these spares shall
be included in the base price.

Page 5828 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
fg/•2:g Of56 INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
I .1WPI 21~2 a11,1,74.1( IA Govt of InOta Undertakingt
6.9.1.5 Bidder shall supply instruments from EIL approved vendors. For items not appearing in
approved vendor list, bidder shall furnish proposed sub-vendor list for purchaser's
approval.
6.9.1.6 For Caustic and NACE services, minimum wetted parts/ Sensor material shall be SS316L
against SS316 material indicated in respective instrument specifications.
6.9.2 Instrument Specifications
6.9.2.1 Transmitters
a) The transmitter shall be microprocessor based and it shall incorporate a non-

volatile memory which shall store complete configuration data of transmitter and
sensor characterization. All necessary signal conversions, including conversion to
produce output with the required protocol shall be carried out in the transmitter
electronics. The configuration data of the instruments shall be stored in a non-
volatile memory such that this remains unchanged because of power fluctuations or
power off condition. In case vendor standard instrument has battery backed RAM,
contractor to ensure that battery drain alarm is provided as diagnostic maintenance
message. Transmitter body material shall be metallic.
b) SMART Transmitters shall be able to communicate to Universal Hand Held

communicator (HHC Model no.:HART 475, not in Vendor's scope). In case any of
transmitter is not able to accept commands from HHC, vendor shall supply suitable
configurator (one no. HART) along with rechargeable battery charger and other
accessories suitable for the specified area classification along with suitable carry
bag for easy mobility.
c) When HART protocol is specified, the following features must be ensured;
i) It shall allow multi masters (two for example, primary and secondary) for
configuration, calibration, diagnostics and maintenance. The primary could
be the control system or host computer and the secondary could be the hand-
held communicator.
ii) It shall be capable of implementing universal commands from either of these

locations.
d) The Overall rangeability shall be 1:100 for Normal transmitters with calibrated
accuracy of ± 0.075% of span. The Overall rangeability shall be 1:100 for
Diaphragm seal transmitters with calibrated accuracy off 0.2% of span.
e) Transmitter shall also run complete diagnostic subroutines and shall provide
diagnostic alarm messages for sensor as well as transmitter healthiness. In the
event of detection of failure, the output shall be driven to a predefined value, which
shall be field configurable.
f) The over-range/static pressure protection of the transmitter shall be 130% of
maximum operating range.
6.9.2.2 Level instruments standpipe philosophy
6.9.2.2.1 Standpipe shall be used for clean, non-viscous and non-crystallizing services for
installation of level instruments on vessels/ equipments if more than 4 nozzles are
required for level instruments on a vessel. Standpipe shall also be used wherever shown
in Licensor's drawings. Size of standpipe shall be 2" minimum.
6.9.2.2.2 Maximum number of nozzles allowable on standpipe is as follows:

Page 5829 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
ggz:Ir 02&-g INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
.1r2,1 2,705■2 di1.19~1 IA Govt of India UndenakIng)
a) 8 with no displacer / guided wave radar type level instrument on standpipe.

b) 6 with displacer/ guided wave radar type level instrument on standpipe
6.9.2.3 Level Gauge
a) Level gauges shall be steel armored reflex or transparent type with body and cover
material of forged carbon steel as a minimum and shall have tempered borosilicate
glass with asbestos free gasket. Transparent type of gauges shall be provided with
integral illuminators operating at 230V, 50 Hz supply and suitable for electrical
area classification. All gauge glasses must have a rating equal to or more than the
vessel design pressure and temperature. Calibrated scale shall be provided.
b) Reflex type will be used for clean and colorless liquids, except liquids level
interface. Transparent type will be used on acid, caustic, dirty or viscous,
coloured liquids and liquid interface. Transparent type with Mica or Kel-F shields
shall be used for treated water, boiler and condensate services, and for corrosive
liquids, which will attack glass.
c) The visible range of level gauge shall be selected to cover the complete operating
level as well as measuring range of the other level instruments provided for the
same purpose.
In general, the visible length of the level gauges shall be 220, 470, 720, 980, 1230
mm. In any case, the maximum visibility length shall not exceed 1500 mm for a
single gauge.
d) For level gauging in very viscous liquids, liquids with crystals and high pressure
rating (600# and above), float operated magnetic gauges with 2" (50 mm) flanged
end connections, shall be used.
6.9.2.4 Level Transmitter
a) Guided Wave Radar type instruments with side-side connections shall used for
level measurement upto 1219 mm. In general, Guided Wave Radar instruments
shall be used with C-C lengths of 356 mm, 813 mm & 1219 mm.
b) Guided Wave Radar instrument shall have + 3mm accuracy.
c) Differential pressure transmitter shall be used for level instruments above 1219
mm, for services requiring purge or where liquid might boil in external portion.
d) Differential Pressure transmitters for use on corrosive or fouling service shall
generally be diaphragm with extended filled capillary type. Flush or extended
diaphragm type differential pressure transmitter shall be considered for special
applications only. Diaphragm material shall normally be stainless steel or any other
special alloy.
e) Transmitters shall also meet the requirements specified in clause no. 6.9.2.1 as
applicable.
6.9.2.5 Pressure Gauges
a) Pressure gauges shall be weatherproof with dial size of 150 mm and shall have
features like screwed bezels, externally adjustable zero, over range protection (at
least 130% of max. operating pressure), blowout discs and Shatter proof glass
window. Pressure gauge sensing element shall be of SS 316 and movement & Case
of SS 304, as a minimum.

Page 5830 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
OgLaT0151e'gw INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
lal ,i,r4,1
,13,,R7.1) IA Govt of Indo Undenakingt
b) Pressure gauge dial shall be white, non-rusting plastic with black figures. The dial
face shall be marked with pressure element material. Pointers shall have
micrometer adjustment.
c) Pressure gauge shall have 1/2" NPT (M) bottom connection.
d) Pressure gauge shall have an accuracy off 1% of URV (Upper Range Value).
e) Ranges shall be so specified that the gauge normally operates in the middle third of
the scale and shall conform to IS-3624 standard dials, wherever possible. Pressure
gauge with design pressure more than 130% of range shall be provided with Gauge
saver.
0 Diaphragm seals, filled type or mechanical type shall be provided where plugging
of the element may occur or where suitable material is not available in highly
corrosive services. When chemical seals are required, they shall be of the clean out
type with flushing connection.
g) Pressure gauges shall be weather proof to IP-55 as per IEC-60529/IS-2147 as a

minimum.
6.9.2.6 Pressure Transmitter
a) Pressure transmitter shall have electronic state-of-art capacitance or any other type
of sensor meeting all functional specifications. Body & Element material for
transmitters shall be SS316, as a minimum, and shall be able to withstand over
pressure of at least 30% of range or maximum working pressure which ever is
higher.
b) All transmitters shall have an integral output meter. Remote mounted meters may
be provided if required in addition.
c) Threaded end connections shall be NPT as per ANSI B 1.20.1. Flanged end
connections shall be as per ANSI B 16.5.
d) Diaphragm seal element with capillary shall be used for congealing, corrosive and
highly viscous services.
e) Transmitters shall also meet the requirements specified in clause no. 6.9.2.1 as
applicable.
6.9.2.7 Pressure Relief Valve & Rupture Disc
a) All pressure relieving devices shall be designed in accordance with ASME code for
'Boilers and Pressure Vessels', API-521. Pressure Relief Valve shall meet relief
valve requirements as defined in API RP-520 (Part-I & II) and in API-526.
b) Pressure relief valves shall be full nozzle full lift type except for thermal relief
valves which shall be modified nozzle type. Type of Pressure relief valve such as
Conventional, bellows & pilot shall be decided by vendor based on process
parameters such as set pressure, back pressure, etc.
c) Percentage Accumulation shall be 10% for Pressure Relief Valve and 25% for
Thermal relief Valve.
d) Body materials shall be as per piping material specification. Nozzle and disc
material shall be SS 316 as a minimum with machined SS guide and spindle.
e) Spring material shall be selected as per operating conditions. Normally it shall be
Cadmium / Nickel / Zinc / Aluminium plated Carbon Steel.

Page 5831 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS FOR
1812-eg INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
,e,741,1M Jg1,11 IA Govt ol Indo Undettakingt
f) Pressure Relief Valve shall have flanged connections for sizes 1" and above and
shall have screwed connection for sizes 3/4" and below. Thermal Relief Valve shall
have screwed connection with 0.38 cm2 orifice size and inlet outlet shall be of 3/4"
NPT(M) X 1" NPT(F) sizes.
g) Rupture discs shall be reverse buckling type, in general and shall be supplied in
pre-torqued holder assembly, mounted between standard ANSI flanges. Disc
material shall be compatible with the vessel contents and shall be consistent with
the bursting requirements. Disc shall be supplied with tell-tale assembly.
h) The bursting tolerance of the rupture disc shall be 5% of the specified bursting
pressure or less.
i) Vendor shall supply three nos. spare discs along with each Rupture disc assembly
ordered.
6.9.2.8 Variable Area Flowmeter (Rotameter) and Transmitter
a) Variable area flow meters or rotameters shall be as pr ISA-RP 16.1, 16.2, 16.3,
16.4, 16.5 and 16.6.
b) Rotameter shall be of metal tube type with Local indication.
c) The material for tube & float shall be SS 316 as a minimum (or better material as
per piping material specification).
d) The packing material shall be PTFE if the liquid temperature is below 230 C. For
temperatures above 230 C, packing shall be of GRAFOIL.
e) Rotameter shall have an accuracy of minimum ± 2% FSD.
f) Rotameter transmitter shall be SMART type with HART protocol with integral
output meter.
6.9.2.9 Orifice Plates and Flanges
a) The primary element shall generally be thin plate, square-edge concentric orifices
plate mounted between a pair of weld-neck type orifice flanges with flange taps.
The minimum pressure rating of flanges shall be 300 lb ANSI. Where D, D/2 taps
are required, the ratings of the orifice flanges shall be same as that of the pipe class.
b) Eccentric type of orifice plates shall be used for specific applications, like dual
phase.
c) Segmental type shall be used for specific applications.
d) Quadrant edge or conical entrance orifice plates shall be used for services with low
Reynolds number.
e) Orifice Plate material shall be SS 316 as a minimum or better
f) Each Orifice Plate shall have an integral handle, which shall, upon assembly with
flanges, extend to a distance of 50 mm. with following information punched on it:
• Tag Number.
• Nominal pipe size in inches and rating in psi.
• Material of plate.
6.9.2.10 Restriction Orifice Plates
a) The material of the orifice plates shall be normally SS 316, as a minimum. Flange
material & rating shall be as per piping specification.

Page 5832 of 8516

31 ENGINEERS FOR
fg`-ar 02-eg INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
olvenroaft~ IA Govt of Innia Underlatongf
b) Sizing of orifice plate shall be carried out in accordance with ISO-5167 (Latest
Edition).
c) Each Orifice Plate shall have an integral handle, which shall, upon assembly with
flanges, extend to a distance of 50 mm. with Tag no., nominal pipe size in inches,
rating in psi and material of plate punched on it.
d) Thickness of the orifice plate shall be calculated to meet the service condition
requirement. Minimum thickness shall be 3.18mm.
6.9.2.11 Self Actuated Pressure Control Valve
a) Body material shall be as per piping material specification. Trim material shall be
Stainless Steel SS 316 as a minimum. Actuator shall be diaphragm type and
diaphragm material shall be Stainless Steel as a minimum.
b) All pressure parts shall be designed to withstand maximum shut off pressure.
c) Valve shall have flanged connections for sizes 1" and above and shall have
screwed connection for sizes 3/4" and below.
6.9.2.12 Temperature Gauge
a) Local temperature gauges shall be in general bimetallic type. The temperature bulb
shall be of stainless steel construction. The gauge connection shall be all angles
adjustable.
b) Temperature gauges shall have accuracy of ± 1 % of URV (Upper Range Value).
All local temperature gauges shall have 150 mm dial size. The bulb size shall be
selected to suit the Thermowell.
c) A11 gauges shall be of weatherproof construction to IP 55 as a minimum.
d) Thermometer stem adjustable gland with union connection and bushing shall be
suitable for 1/2" NPTF connection.
e) The temperature gauges shall be provided with l'/2" flanged thermowell with 1/2"
NPT (F) connection for temperature gauges. Thermowell shall be fabricated out of
bar stock.
6.9.2.13 Thermowell
a) Thermowells and flanges shall be minimum of 316 SS or better material to suit

the service conditions. Pressure rating of flanges shall be as per respective piping
specification. Thermowell shall be fabricated from bar-stock.
b) Immersion length of thermowells for different line sizes shall be as follows:-
Line Size Immersion length (U)

4" to 6" 280 mm
8" and above 320 mm
Vessels 400 mm
c) Immersion length is based on 200 mm length between flange face and inner well of
pipe. In vessels, where fouling with vessel internals is expected, the immersion
length shall be suitably modified. The minimum line size shall be of 4" for
installation of Temperature element.
Page 5833 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
Ogar faf-Z5 ,1,7g, ,I51 ~I)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undenakmg)
6.9.2.14 Control Valves
a) Control valves shall normally be Globe type single seated or double seated. For
clean services, guiding shall be top and bottom/ cage type. For highly viscous
services, cage guiding shall be avoided.
b) Flanged control valves shall be used. Body material, body rating and flange rating,
shall be as per piping specifications as a minimum. Minimum control valve body
size shall be 1" in general. Reduced trims can also be considered.
c) Trim characteristics shall be equal percentage type unless required otherwise. Anti-
cavitation trim shall be selected wherever cavitation is expected in the valve.
d) Noise from control valve during operation shall be limited to OSHA specified level
or better. The maximum allowable noise is 85 dBA SPL (Sound Pressure Level).
Low noise trim shall be considered where noise level exceeds maximum limit.
e) Valve seat leakage shall be as per ANSI/FCI 70.2 and shall be selected with due
consideration to meet the requirement. Minimum class IV leakage shall be
provided.
fl Flanged bolted type gland packing boxes shall be used. Packing shall normally be
PTFE on liquid and gas service up to 200°C. for high temperature application,
grafoil or equivalent gasket suitable for the specified service shall be provided.
Asbestos based packing material shall not be used.
g) Material used for trim shall be minimum 316 SS, with guide bushing of hardened
stainless steel like 440 C, 17-4 PH, etc. upto a pressure drop of 10 kg/cm2. Stellited
trims shall be provided for higher pressure drops and wherever required to meet
service conditions.
h) Valve actuator shall be pneumatic spring opposed diaphragm type, in general.
Piston type actuators may be used for very high shut off pressure requirements.
Additional equipment necessary to meet fail safe condition shall also be included in
case double acting piston type actuator is selected. In either case, actuator shall be
able to withstand maximum shut-off pressure with the minimum instrument air
pressure specified.
i) Control valve positioner shall be Smart type with HART protocol (latest version).
The positioner shall be provided with necessary hardware/ software for
maintenance, diagnostics, programming. etc.
j) Positioner output shall include but not limited to actual valve stem travel, input
current, actuator pressure, travel direction, accumulated travel, cycle counter etc.
k) Positioner shall provide diagnostic information such as Valve signature data with
seat load, bench set and valve friction, dynamic error and dynamic linearity of
control valve, diagnostic graphics with adequate resolution. When mounted on
control valve, the factory valve signature test report shall be provided.
6.9.3 Installation Requirement
6.9.3.1 All instruments shall be provided with isolation, vent / drain and equalizing arrangement.
6.9.3.2 Instrument connection sizes shall be as follows:
a) On Vessel/ Equipment- 2"

b) On Pipe - 3/4" NPT for direct type. 1.5" flanged for Diaphragm seal type and
thermowells.
Page 5834 of 8516

-

5f&E%2,2 ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES 6-41-0301 Rev. 0
1711 T elerCP7, 4,1 JP0,-.1) (A Govt of Incha Undenakmg)
7.1 All Equipments shall be subjected to inspection by EIL/Owner /Third party. The
Inspector shall have free access to the ContractorNendor's shop/work site. The
ContractorNendor shall provide all facilities like tools and tackles, instruments and
personnel to inspector. All the Inspection shall be carried out in accordance with the
relevant Codes & requirements of Drawings & Specifications. Approval of Inspector
shall in no way relieve the ContractorNendor of his responsibility for proper execution
of work. Manufacturer's Quality Assurance (QA) plans shall be submitted for Owner /
Consultant or his authorized inspection agency's approval before taking up
manufacturing.
7.2 The Inspection shall include but not be limited to:
a) Examination of materials of construction.

b) Welding procedure and Welder's qualification tests.
c) Various non-destructive tests like radiography etc. as per code.
d) Checking of dimensions
e) Pressure testing and certification etc.
f) Hardness testing
7.3 Wherever specified in code, dye penetrant/ magnetic particle examination shall be carried
out on the welds. Spot radiography shall be minimum requirement for all Equipments.
Extent of radiography and acceptance criteria shall be as per the relevant provisions of
the code.
7.4 All nozzles fabricated from plate, irrespective of thickness, shall be 100% radiographed.
7.5 The inner fillet of bottom or annular plate to shell weld shall be leak tested with
penetrating oil after removal of slag prior to welding of outside fillet weld.
7.6 After completion, tank shall be hydrostatically tested by filling water and all weld joints
shall be hammered and inspected for any leakage. In case of any defect it shall be
repaired and retested as per the instructions of Inspector.
7.7 Equipments under Caustic, Amine & Sour (H2 S) service shall essentially be PWHT. The
Hardness of the PM, Weld & HAZ shall be limited to 200 BHN in such cases.
7.8 It shall be the responsibility of ContractorNendor to prepare a Detailed Inspection and

Test plan as per applicable Code and Specifications and get the same reviewed by EIL/
Owner/ Third party prior to execution of work.
7.9 Fittings, valves, instruments, other accessories like electric motor etc. shall be duly tested
and manufacturer's test certificates shall be furnished.
7.10 Any other tests as per the Process Data Sheet / EIL standard / applicable codes shall
also be performed.
Following "Witness" inspection & tests shall be carried out for the completely assembled
chemical dosing package:
Cleanliness
Page 5835 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
$>fg-a- Oa&g INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
1.1WR 24-1,572,151 3,211711 IA Govt of India Undeltaking)
Hydro test / Pneumatic Leak test of assembled piping / joints
The dosing package vendor shall further note that "Witness" inspection is also specified
for certain equipment i.e. controlled volume pumps, Mechanical Agitators etc. in the
respective equipment data sheets which shall also be carried out.
Vendor shall provide test/ calibration/ inspection certificates of all the instrument items
under dosing package scope for purchaser's review/ record
8.0 COMMISSIONING SPARE PARTS
The vendor shall include in his scope of supply, spares required for erection and
commissioning of the dosing package (inclusive of mechanical, electrical and
instrumentation spares). List for the same shall be furnished by the dosing package
vendor along with the bid.
lf however, any additional spare is consumed during erection and commissioning, over
and above the quoted erection and commissioning spares, the same shall be provided free
of cost by the dosing package vendor.
9.0 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR TWO YEARS NORMAL OPERATION
9.1 The vendor shall furnish a quotation for spare parts required for two years normal
operation as per the equipment manufacturer's recommendation along with unit rates for
the package (inclusive of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation spares).
9.2 The recommended spares for two years operation for each rating and type of motor shall
include the following as a minimum:
a. Bearings for DE & NDE

b. Cooling fan
c. Terminal block
d. Terminal box cover with screws.
10.0 SPECIAL TOOLS/ TACKLES
Any special tools and tackles required for erection, site assembly and maintenance of
dosing package (inclusive of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation spares) shall be
included in the dosing package vendor' s scope of supply.
An itemized list of special tools/tackles included in the scope of supply, shall be furnished
along with the bid.
11.0 MANDATORY SPARE PARTS
Mandatory Spare Parts (as applicable) mentioned below is in vendor's scope .The below
mentioned (as applicable) mandatory spare parts shall be included by the vendor in the
base price.
S. QTY / PER TAG No.

PART DESCRIPTION
No.
Pressure Vessels/ Tanks
1 Bolting for each nozzle with blind/ 10 % (Min. 2 nos.) for each nozzle
companion flange, Shell Girth flanges, and
Page 5836 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED DOSING PACKAGES
6-41-0301 Rev. 0
iarten ,120,11, g51.3~, IA Govt of Inclo Undeltakingt
S. QTY / PER TAG No.

PART DESCRIPTION
No.
for each pad nozzle
2 Gaskets for each nozzle with blind/ 200 %

companion flange, Shell Girth flanges and
for each pad nozzle
3 Bolting for internal flanges 10 % (Min. 2 nos.)
4 Gasket for internal flanges 200 %
5 Bolts, nuts, clamps, spares for demister 10 % (Min. 4 nos.) for each size / type
Agitators/Mixers
1 Bearings for agitator One set per Tag No.
2 Gasket for agitator mounting nozzle 200% for each joint
3 Bolting for agitator mounting nozzle 10% (min. 2 sets for each size)
4 Oil seal for Gear box 2 sets
S. PART DESCRIPTION QUANTITY REQUIRED

No.
1 Pressure Gauges, Temperature Gauges,
Differential Pressure Gauges, Draft
Gauge, Field Indicators, RTD/ 10% subject to minimum 1 No. of each type
Thermocouple (with Thermowell),
Thermowells
2 Pressure Transmitters, Differential Type
Pressure, Flow & Level Transmitters 10% subject to minimum 1 No. of each type
(Complete Transmitter)
3 Mandatory spares for MV induction

motors 37kW & above (one set of spares
for each rating & type)
3.1 Bearing set (DE & NDE) one no of each type
3.2 Terminal/ bushing one set each
NOTE: The word `TYPE' means the Make, Model no., Type, Range, Size/ Length, Rating, Material
as applicable
12.0 SUPERVISION DURING ERECTION AND COMMISSIONING
The vendor shall provide his services for supervision of erection and commissioning of
Dosing package(s) and shall indicate in his proposal cost of providing the above services
per diem basis.
13.0 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT
Vendor shall furnish the tentative equipment layout for dosing package(s) along with the
bid. If any tentative skid size/layout is enclosed with the inquiry document vendor shall
ensure that the proposed dosing package skid is accommodated within the space allocated
for the specified dosing package
14.0 VENDOR DATA AND DRAWINGS
The dosing package vendor shall furnish all equipment data / documents as per the
attached `Vendor Data Requirements'.

Page 5837 of 8516

Page 5838 of 8516
Page 5839 of 8516
Page 5840 of 8516
Page 5841 of 8516
Page 5842 of 8516
Page 5843 of 8516
Page 5844 of 8516
Page 5845 of 8516
Page 5846 of 8516
Page 5847 of 8516
Page 5848 of 8516
Page 5849 of 8516
Page 5850 of 8516
Page 5851 of 8516
Page 5852 of 8516
Page 5853 of 8516
Page 5854 of 8516
Page 5855 of 8516
Page 5856 of 8516
Page 5857 of 8516
Page 5858 of 8516
Page 5859 of 8516
Page 5860 of 8516
Page 5861 of 8516
Page 5862 of 8516
Page 5863 of 8516
Page 5864 of 8516
Page 5865 of 8516
Page 5866 of 8516
Page 5867 of 8516
Page 5868 of 8516
Page 5869 of 8516
Page 5870 of 8516
Page 5871 of 8516
Page 5872 of 8516
Page 5873 of 8516
Page 5874 of 8516
Page 5875 of 8516
Page 5876 of 8516
Page 5877 of 8516
Page 5878 of 8516
Page 5879 of 8516
Page 5880 of 8516
Page 5881 of 8516
Page 5882 of 8516
Page 5883 of 8516
Page 5884 of 8516
Page 5885 of 8516
Page 5886 of 8516
Page 5887 of 8516
Page 5888 of 8516
‘31 el ENGINEERS BOILER QUALITY CARBON
$tazir 251e-6 INDIA LIMITED 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
AMIAPOP3,19.1 , IA Govt of locha Undsrtal.og)
STEEL PLATES Page 1 of 7
GIN(YR craiiciz1 74e1

I vi fq-W

BOILER QUALITY CARBON
STEEL PLATES
7
19.01.2017
30.06.2010
REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC.

RK
KA
SK/KJH
RKT
1W1A,
AKM/DM
RN
N.DUARI
6 10.09.09 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
5 16.04.04 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM SSA SKG
4 26.11.99 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RKT AKM CRMN A SONI
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 00 0001 F1 Rev. 0

- - - Copyright Ell — All rights reserved
Page 5889 of 8516

711 elei
- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
51g- 1 faf5leu INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
I wen cArame an X21(.4) (A Govt of India Undertaking) STEEL PLATES
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:

EN European Norm
HIC Hydrogen Induced Cracking
IBR Indian Boiler Regulations
SSC Sulphide Stress Cracking
Static Equipment Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. K.J. Hari Narayanan

Members: Mr. P.Bhattacharjee
Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. PP.Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Mr. M.Azim (Projects)
Mr. S. Ghosal (Process)
Mr. T. Kamalakannan (Inspection)
Page 5890 of 8516

ENGINEERS
511gar m Eiardu INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
Mln ciltaxed31J031.1/ G01.4 01 India Uncle'taking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
3.0 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 CERTIFIED DOCUMENTS 6
5.0 PAINTING AND COATING 7
6.0 INSPECTION AUTHORITY 7
Page 5891 of 8516

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
51gzir agjeg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
10117710,0me 0113900:0 (A Goof. 01 India UndeItaking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers requirements for carbon steel plates intended primarily for pressure
vessels/heat exchangers. The steel plates shall meet the requirements of ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code Section II (latest). This is intended to supplement the minimum
applicable requirements of the material specification indicated in the material requisition.
1.2 Following codes, standards etc shall be followed in their latest edition and addenda, errata,
amendments unless specified otherwise:
1.2.1 ASME Sec VIII Div 1
1.2.2 ASME Sec II part A
1.2.3 EN 10163: Delivery Requirements for Surface Conditions.
1.2.4 EN 10204: metallic products — Types of Inspection Documents.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Plates supplied to this specification shall conform to specification SA-20 of ASME sec II part
A with additional requirements mentioned herein.
2.2 The tolerance on thickness of steel plates shall be positive only.
2.3 Final Rolling shall be lengthwise.
2.4 The plates shall be free from injurious defects and shall have workmanlike finish.
Reconditioning/repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted. Surface conditions shall
meet requirements of EN 10163 Class A Subclass 3.
3.0 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 All plates shall be supplied in normalised condition except when the applicable material
specifications require supply of plates in quenched and tempered condition.
3.2 a. One product analysis of each heat shall be carried out and reported. Chemical
analysis shall be as per applicable specification.
b. The carbon content for plates shall not exceed 0.23%.
Additionally, one of the following requirements for carbon equivalent based on heat
analysis, shall be also satisfied:
Ceq = C + Mn < 0.42 (Eqn. - 1)

6
Ceq = C + Mn + Cr+Mo+V + Cu+Ni < 0.43 (Eqn. - 2)

6 5 15
Equation-1 shall be used when applicable material specification specifies C and Mn

only.
Equation-2 shall be used when applicable material specifies the above elements or
restricted chemical requirements are specified or supplementary requirements S 19 and
S21 of SA-20 are specified in material requisition.
Page 5892 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS
Igar Elf5ieg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
lairen rIrAme an JqiNA) (A Govt al India Undeltaking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 5 of 7
For HIC services, these requirements shall be as listed separately.
3.3 Ultrasonic Examination of Plates
a. Plates having thickness 16 mm to 50 mm (both inclusive) shall be examined

ultrasonically as per SA-435.
b. For thicknesses above 50mm ultrasonic examination shall be carried out as per SA-
578 and shall have acceptance standard of level-B.
c. For quenched and tempered steel plates, ultrasonic examination shall be done after the
heat treatment of plates.
3.4 Simulated Heat Treatment of Test Coupons
The following heat treatment shall be conducted on the test coupons representative of heat
treated plates before the specified mechanical testing like tensile, bend, impact tests, etc. to
meet minimum ASME Sec. II Part - A requirements and these details shall also be recorded on
the test certificates.
a. All plates supplied in Normalised condition and intended for hot rolling / hot
forming:
Heat Treatment Cycle
One normalising* + One stress relieving as per UCS-56 of ASME Sec. VIII Div.1
complying with UCS-85 of ASME Section VIII Div. 1.
Note: Any other special requirement shall be specified in MR.
b. All plates supplied in Quenched & Tempered condition and intended for hot rolling/
hot forming:
One normalising* + quenched & tempering + One stress relieving as per UCS-56
ASME Section VIII Div.1 complying with UCS-85 of ASME Section VIII Div.1 .
Note : Tempering temperature shall be at least 20° C above highest stress relieving
temperature.
* Recommended normalising cycle :

i) Soaking temperature: 900°C to 1000°C
ii) Holding time one hour per 25 mm thickness but not less than half an hour
iii) Cooling in still air
c. All plates supplied in Quenched & Tempered condition and intended for cold
forming:
One stress relieving as per UCS-56 ASME Section VIII Div.1 complying with UCS-
85 of ASME Section VIII Div.1 .
Page 5893 of 8516

tri-draelei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$fgar faoleg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
laarn riecnir ansgar,a) (A Govt Ind.. Undertaking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 6 of 7
3.5 Impact test requirements shall be ascertained as per ASME Sec VIII Div.1 or Div.2 as
applicable. When required, Impact testing shall be performed as per supplementary
requirement of S5 of specification SA-20 and acceptance criteria for energy absorption shall
be as per table A2.15 of SA-20.
3.6 If specified in the material requisition, plates shall meet the requirements of Indian Boiler
Regulations (IBR).
3.7 Additional Requirements for High Thickness Plates
Plates above 50mm thickness shall meet following additional requirements:
a. Vacuum Degassing treatment as per the supplementary requirement Si of

specification SA-20. If vacuum degassing is not reported in the test certificates, then
through thickness tests as per SA 770 shall be conducted and minimum reduction in
area of 35% shall be ensured.
b. Charpy V-notch impact test as per the supplementary requirement S5 of specification

SA-20.
Material meant to be used for design temperature warmer than 0°C, impact test shall
be carried out at 0°C or MDMT whichever is lower and acceptance criteria for energy
absorption shall be as per Table A2.15 of SA-20. Incase the acceptance criteria is not
available in SA-20, then applicable design code shall be referred unless otherwise
specified in material requisition.
c) Simulated heat treatment of test coupons for all plates as per Clause 3.4 mentioned
above.
4.0 CERTIFIED DOCUMENTS
The supplier shall furnish certificates/documents (number of copies as specified in requisition)

inclusive of all the following tests required as per specification duly certified by the Inspecting
Authority before shipment of plates. The actual values obtained shall be recorded in the test
certificates/documents. Material certificates shall conform to EN 10204 Type 3.1/3.2 as
required.
a. Chemical Analysis
b. Mechanical Tests
c. Data of heat treatment i.e. initial temperature, heating rate, soaking temperature,
cooling rate, etc.
d. Simulated Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test coupons (S3 of SA-20) at indicated

Heat Treatment Cycle (if specified in the requisition or whenever applicable)
e. Ultrasonic Examination (S8 or S12 of SA-20)
f. Charpy V-notch impact tests (S5 of SA-20 if specified in the requisition or whenever
applicable)
g. Certification as per IBR (if specified in the requisition)
h. SSC and/or HIC tests (if specified in material requisition)
Page 5894 of 8516

•
5fgar &Reg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
NEW efeont onoTiM A Govt of India Uncle, talong) STEEL PLATES Page 7 of 7
Additional tests (if specified in requisition).
5.0 PAINTING AND COATING
No painting/coating of any kind is permitted on the steel plates, except stencil marking.
However steel plates shall be carefully protected and packed against any damage during transit
and shall be of sea worthy condition.
6.0 INSPECTION AUTHORITY
Material test certificates, duly certified by Mill's Quality Assurance Department are acceptable
i.e. 3.1 certification as per EN 10204. However, if third party inspection is required
specifically for plates in material requisition, all test certificates and documents shall be duly
certified by the third party. i.e. 3.2 certification as per EN 10204.
Page 5895 of 8516

lf~zl ENGINEERS FOR 6-12-0012 Rev. 5
Itgar tlf5ft INDIA LIMITED C-Mn-Si STEEL PLATES FOR
1.1re l elERffe 451.1445431 (A Govt of India Un0eftolonq)
STORAGE TANKS Page 1 of 6
c4-isRui chi ReR

ATT917 T#R1
feiku

C-Mn-Si STEEL PLATES
FOR STORAGE TANKS
5 31.12.15 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC.

/i7Tr
li
KJH RKT S CHANDA
4 15.09.09 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VB RKG AKM N DUARI
3 12.04.04 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM SSA SKG
2 19.09.00 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RKT AK MALIK CRMN MI
1 27.06.95 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. KPS AKM VC AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5896 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
ogzir 1al5eg INDIA LIMITED
(*OM eiMre ermagtml) (A Gov( of India Undeftalongf C-Mn-Si-STEEL PLATES FOR
6-12-0012 Rev. 5
Abbreviations:

EN European Standards
Members : Mr. KJ Hari Narayanan

Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Mr. Deepak Gupta (Projects)
Mr. D. Jana (Construction)
Page 5897 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS FOR
sig,,,tmegITT abate OX,ARFA,
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt M In00 unaettatong) C-Mn-Si-STEEL PLATES FOR
6-12-0012 Rev. 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
Page 5898 of 8516

t_11 el ENGINEERS FOR
Ogell Ell5reg INDIA LIMITED 6-12-0012 Rev. 5
ROTA eieOwz asf,Aoso, CA GoN of Intha UndettakIng) C-Mn-Si-STEEL PLATES FOR
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers requirements for Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel plates to ASTM

A 537M / A 537 specification and intended primarily for storage tanks. The steel plates shall
meet the requirements of latest material specifications and API Standard 650 (latest). This is
intended to supplement the minimum applicable requirements of the material specification
indicated in the material requisition.
1.2 Following codes, standards etc. shall be followed in their latest edition and addenda, errata,
1.2.1 API 650: Welded Tanks for Oil Storage
1.2.3 EN 10163: Delivery Requirements for Surface Conditions.
1.2.4 EN 10204: Metallic products — Types of Inspection Documents.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Plates supplied to this specification shall conform to specification ASTM A 20M / A 20 with
additional requirements mentioned herein.
Reconditioning / repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted. Surface conditions shall
meet requirements of EN 10163 Class A Subclass-3.
3.1 One heat analysis shall be carried out from a test sample preferably taken during the pouring
of each heat. One product analysis of each heat shall also be carried out from a plate
representing the heat.
3.2 Maximum permissible alloy contents shall be as per API 650 (Section 4 - Materials).
However, carbon content shall not exceed 0.24%. Moreover carbon equivalent shall not
exceed 0.47% based on the equation
Ceq = C + Mn + (Cr + Mo + V) + (Ni + Cu)

6 5 15
3.3 Ultrasonic Examination of plates
a. Plates having thickness 16 mm to 50 mm (both inclusive) shall be examined

ultrasonically as per ASTM A 435M / A 435.
Page 5899 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS FOR
Ofiteg
Carton etramectswrgitatit
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt d India Undettalongt C-Mn-Si-STEEL PLATES FOR
6-12-0012 Rev. 5
b. Plate having thickness above 50 mm shall be examined ultrasonically as per ASTM A

578M / A 578 and shall have acceptance standard of Level-B.
c. For quenched and tempered steel plates, ultrasonic examination shall be done after the
heat treatment of plates.
3.4 Impact Testing of Test Coupons
Charpy V-notch impact test of plate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 20M / A
20. Impact test shall be carried out for all plates above 38 mm thickness and the test
temperature shall be 0°C unless otherwise stated. The impact test is not required for plates of
thickness 38 mm and below unless otherwise called for. The minimum impact test
requirement for plates shall be as follows:
PLATE MATERIAL AND AVERAGE IMPACT VALUE OF

THICKNESS (t) in mm THREE SPECIMEN (JOULES)
LONGITUDINAL TRANSVERSE
ASTM A 537M I / A 537 I
Plate thickness t 40 41 27
40 < t 45 48 34
45 < t 5 50 54 41
50 < t 100 68 54
ASTM A 537M II / A 537 II

Plate thickness t 40 48 34
40 < t 45 54 41
45 < t 50 61 48
50 < t 100 68 54
3.5 Simulation Heat Treatment of Test Coupons
The following heat treatment shall be conducted on test coupons representative of heat treated
plate before mechanical testing. The test coupons shall be drawn from one plate (in each
thickness) per heat. These details shall also be recorded on test certificates.
Heat Treatment Cycle One
Thickness Range As per material requisition
Holding Temperature 600° C to 650° C
Holding Time Minimum one hour per 25

mm of thickness but in no
case less than one hour
Page 5900 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR
kifitjeu
1•11i, riecnir ‘151.391.1
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking) C-Mn-Si-STEEL PLATES FOR
6-12-0012 Rev. 5
Temperature of Furnace Not to exceed 400° C

at the time of loading
Rate of Heating 200° C max./hr.
Rate of Cooling 250° C max./hr.
The supplier shall furnish the following certificates / documents (number of copies as
specified in the requisition) inclusive of all test results required as per specification duly
certified by the Inspecting Authority before shipment of plates. The actual values obtained
shall be recorded in the test certificates / documents. Material certificates shall conform to EN
10204 Type 3.1/3.2 as required.
a. Chemical Analysis including micro alloying elements as per API-650 (Latest)
b. Mechanical Tests
c. Details of simulation heat treatment
d. Data of heat treatment
e. Ultrasonic Examination
f. Charpy V-notch impact tests
No painting / coating of any kind is permitted on the steel plates except stencil marking.
i.e. 3.1 certification as per EN 10204. However, if third party inspection is specified in
material requisition, all test certificates and documents shall be duly certified by the third
party i.e. 3.2 certifications as per EN 10204.
Page 5901 of 8516

t31 ei (ft ENGINEERS WELDABLE STRL. QUALITY STEEL
ogej, EII51-es.W INDIA LIMITED PLATES FOR STORAGE TANKS 6-12-0014 Rev. 6
1 V.A.7A(AA) (A Govt of India Undeftak.9)
AND VESSELS Page 1 of 5
1:MR UI Ch *(:1 4R-Ytrr

4 '&(%1 Ct CI I Fri a ci -61.
4-1 lot) f-4-9fti

WELDABLE STRUCTURAL QUALITY
STEEL PLATES FOR STORAGE
TANKS AND VESSELS
6 22.09.2017 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. SK KJH RKT RN
5 30.06.2010 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. KA RKT AKM/DM N.DUARI
4 15.09.09 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VB RKG AKM, N.DUARI
3 08.04.04 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM SSA SKG
2 19.09.00 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. KPS AKM CRMN MI

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5902 of 8516

ENGINEERS WELDABLE STRL. QUALITY STEEL
Offleg
lawn riemll M13.70.0
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UndertakIng)
PLATES FOR STORAGE TANKS AND 6-12-0014 Rev. 6
VESSELS Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
EN European Norm
IS Indian Standard
Convenor: Mr. R.K. Trivedi
Members: Mr. K.J Hari Narayanan

Mr. P. Bhattacharjee
Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Mr. Srikanth Karanam
Page 5903 of 8516

alReA ft, ENGINEERS: - WELDABLE STRL. QUALITY STEEL
o1 at ofwegv_v INDIA LIMITED
aaJoirtal) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
PLATES FOR STORAGE TANKS AND 6-12-0014 Rev. 6
VESSELS Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4

Page 5904 of 8516

45-tifR_Ie-i ft ENGINEERS WELDABLE STRL. QUALITY STEEL
Ogell lEffiregW INDIA LIMITED PLATES FOR STORAGE TANKS AND 6-12-0014 Rev. 6
(A Govt of moo uneertakm91
VESSELS Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers additional and supplementary requirements for weldable structural
quality Steel Plates to IS: 2062 (latest), intended primarily for storage tanks and vessels.
1.2 Following Codes, standards etc. shall be followed in their latest edition and addenda, errata,
1.3 IS:2062, IS:1852, IS:10842
1.4 EN 10163: Delivery for Surface Condition.
1.5 EN 10204: Metallic products — Types of Inspection Documents.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 The maximum under tolerance permissible on the thickness of plate shall be 0.25 mm.
Tolerances on other dimensions of plates shall be as per IS: 1852.
2.2 Direction of final rolling shall be lengthwise.
2.3 Reconditioning/Repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted. Surface finish shall be
ground/flush smooth and shall be free from any surface imperfection.
3.1 Heat analysis and product analysis shall be carried out for each heat and chemical composition
shall meet the limits as specified in IS: 2062.
3.2 Y-groove weld crackability test as per IS: 10842 shall be carried out for plates conforming to
Gr. E250 C having thickness 12mm and above.
3.3 Charpy impact test shall be carried out on the plates having thickness greater than 12 mm
conforming to Grade E250 BR, E250 BO & E250 C. Test temperature and acceptance criteria
for energy absorption shall be as mentioned in Table-2 of the specification IS: 2062.

inclusive of all the following tests required as per specification, duly certified by the
Inspecting Authority before shipment of plates. The actual values obtained during tests shall
be recorded in the test certificates/documents. Material certificates shall conform to EN 10204
Type 3.1/3.2 as required.
b. Mechanical Tests
c. Data of heat treatment
d. Charpy V-notch impact tests
e. Y- groove crackability test
Page 5905 of 8516

4arael ENGINEERS WELDABLE STRL. QUALITY STEEL
51gem faitegW INDIA LIMITED PLATES FOR STORAGE TANKS AND 6-12-0014 Rev. 6
21EvoR tolJoilta) (A Govt of Inds Undeftakmg)
VESSELS Page 5 of 5
No painting/coating of any kind is permitted on the steel plates except stencil marking.
However steel plates shall be carefully protected and packed against any damage during transit
and shall be of sea worthy conditions.
i.e. 3.1 certification as per EN 10204. However, if third party inspection is required specially
for plates in material requisition, all test certificates and documents shall be duly certified by
the third party. i.e. 3.2 certification as per EN 10204.
Page 5906 of 8516

Page 5907 of 8516
Page 5908 of 8516
Page 5909 of 8516
Page 5910 of 8516
Page 5911 of 8516
lk Jt Irk ENGINEERS FOR 3 1/2% Ni STEEL PLATES
OgaffaI4reg- INDIA LIMITED 6-12-0016 Rev. 4
(P. Govt of India Undeftalong) FOR PRESSURE VESSELS Page 1 of 6
*TR -Wr
3 1/2 % - Oral
1-1114) X 01 -I gl

31/ % Ni STEEL PLATES FOR
PRESSURE VESSELS
4 17.12.15 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPEC -)41 - KJH 41-1.- 1=Zi siv
0
Sc
(
3 15.09.09 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
2 16.04.04 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM SSA SKG
1 16.06.00 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. USG AKM CRMN MI
0 07.04.94 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION DD KPS VC A SONI

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5912 of 8516

t31 ENGINEERS
511g a 25eg INDIA LIMITED 3 h1'2% Ni STEEL PLATES FOR 6-12-0016 Rev. 4
(AIWA ef TaRZ an ,340,3) (A Gov( of India Undettaking)
PRESSURE VESSELS Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:

EN European Standards
Convenor : Mr R. K. Trivedi
Members : Mr K. J. Hari Narayanan
Mr K. Anjaneyulu
Mr Arun Kumar
Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anish Trehan
Mr Deepak Gupta (Projects)
Mr S. Ghosal (Process)
Mr D. Jana (Construction)
Mr T. Kamalakannan (Inspection)
Page 5913 of 8516

ENGINEERS
tif5leg INDIA LIMITED 31/2% Ni STEEL PLATES FOR 6-12-0016 Rev. 4
onJocn-aa, IA GoN of Ina. Undeftaiong)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
3.0 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT 4
Page 5914 of 8516

k.71
—Ilaeitli ENGINEERS
$fgar 02-es- INDIA LIMITED 31/2% Ni STEEL PLATES FOR 6-12-0016 Rev. 4
mkm riernle =slam) (A Go! of India Undeitakmg)
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers additional technical requirements for 3 1/2% Ni Steel Plates to
specification SA-203 Gr.E, intended primarily for pressure vessels. The plates shall meet the
requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code Sec. II. This specification is
intended to supplement minimum applicable requirements of the material specification.
1.2.2 EN 10163 : Delivery Requirements for Surface Conditions.
1.2.3 EN 10204 : Metallic products — Types of Inspection Documents.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Plates supplied to this specification shall conform to the latest issue of the specification SA 20
of ASME Sec II Part A with additional requirements mentioned herein.
2.3 Final rolling shall be length-wise.
Reconditioning/repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted. Surface conditions shall
meet requirements of EN 10163 Class A Sub Class 3.
2.5 SI units shall be considered as reference.
3.0 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
3.1 All plates shall be supplied in normalized condition.
3.2 One product analysis of each heat shall be carried out and reported. Chemical analysis shall
be as per applicable specification.
All plates shall be ultrasonically examined after specified heat treatment as follows:
a) Plates having thickness 16mm to 50mm (both inclusive) shall be examined

ultrasonically as per SA-435.
b) For plate thicknesses above 50mm, ultrasonic examination shall be carried out as per
SA-578 and shall have acceptance standard of level-B.
3.4 Simulation Heat Treatment of Test Coupons
3.4.1 Simulation heat treatment of test coupons shall be carried out and test coupons shall be taken
from the normalized plates.
Page 5915 of 8516

_ ENGINEERS
eft
OgziriatiregW:INDIA LIMITED 31/2% Ni STEEL PLATES FOR 6-12-0016 Rev. 4
(A Govt of India Undertak..9)
3.4.2 Following heat treatment shall be conducted on the test coupons before the specified
mechanical tests like tensile, bend, impact tests etc. Details of heat treatment shall also be
recorded on the test certificates.
One normalising* cycle + two stress relieving cycles as per UCS-56 of ASME Sec.
VIII Div.1.
Normalizing cycle to be considered only when items/ parts demands Normalizing

during or after fabrication viz. formed heads etc.
Recommended guideline for normalising cycle is as follows, however the practices as

established by the mill may adopted subject to meeting the requirements of Code :
i) Soaking temperature 925°C to 975°C
ii) Holding time one hour per 25mm thickness but not less than half an hour.
iii) Cooling in still air.
3.5 Charpy V-notch Impact Test
3.5.1 Impact test as per SA-20 at temperature indicated therein shall be conducted.
3.5.2 Orientation of test bar shall be transverse to the direction of rolling, if specified in the Material
Requisition. In such cases, test temperature and acceptance criteria shall also be specified in
the Material Requisition.
3.6 Additional Requirement for High-Thickness Plates.
Plates of thickness 50mm and above shall meet following additional requirements.
a) Vacuum treatment as per supplementary requirement 51 of specification SA-20.
The supplier shall furnish the following certificates/documents (number of copies as specified
in the requisition) inclusive of all tests required as per specification duly certified by the
Inspecting Authority before shipment of plates. The actual values obtained shall be recorded
in the test certificates/documents. Material certificates shall conform to EN 10204 Type
3.1/3.2 as required.
b. Mechanical Tests
c. Data of heat treatment i.e. temperature including heating rates/cooling rate, etc.
d. Simulation Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test coupons (S3 of SA-20) as per

indicated Heat Treatment Cycle.
e. Ultrasonic Examination (S8 or S12 of SA-20)
f. Charpy V-notch impact tests (S5 of SA-20)
Page 5916 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51gar &Reg INDIA LIMITED 3 1/2 0/3 Ni STEEL PLATES FOR 6-12-0016 Rev. 4
laikrn evemre fA Govl of India Undettalong)
No painting/coating of any kind is permitted on the steel plates.
Page 5917 of 8516

Page 5918 of 8516
Page 5919 of 8516
Page 5920 of 8516
Page 5921 of 8516
Page 5922 of 8516
INDIA LIMITED 2.25% Cr - 1% Mo STEEL PLATES 6-12-0018 Rev. 4
0151eg
1.11VR MI J,/{1,34 (A Goat of India Undertaking) Page 1 of 7
2.25 %*ffgrzigi- 1% 11101Q1 4i *iazi ore

-N-r9ft

2.25% Cr —1% Mo STEEL PLATES
4 22.12.15 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD SPEC. TK KJH RKT
3 15.09.09 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD.SPEC. VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
2 12.04.04 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM SSA SKG
1 05.01.01 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM CRMN MI
0 01.03.96 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION DNN CRMN VC AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5923 of 8516

k.71 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$‘gar 015reg INDIA LIMITED 2.25% Cr - 1% Mo STEEL PLATES 6-12-0018 Rev. 4
(Wen eleAACtInJW1,11, (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:

ACC : Accelerated Cooling Cycle
BHN : Brinell Hardness Number
EN : European Standard
IBR : Indian Boiler Regulations
ISR : Intermediate Stress Relieving
N : Normalised
T• Tempered
Convenor : Mr. R. K. Trivedi
Members : Mr. K. J. Hari Narayanan

Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Mr. Deepak Gupta (Projects)
Mr. D. Jana (Construction)
Page 5924 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
sigu Eif5ieu
MET, eteave JrIPM)
INDIA LIMITED
2.25% Cr - 1% Mo STEEL PLATES 6-12-0018 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
5.0 PAINTING 6
Page 5925 of 8516

$1g-ar INDIA LIMITED 2.25% Cr - 1% Mo STEEL PLATES 6-12-0018 Rev. 4
(OWN cwaNe .3,70,71) (A Govt of India Undeffalfing)
Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers additional and supplementary requirements of SA-387 / SA-387M
Gr.22 CI.2 (ASME Sec. II Part A) plates intended primarily for pressure vessels/heat
exchangers with design temperature exceeding 375 °C in hydrogen service.
1.2.2 EN 10163 : Delivery Requirements for Surface Conditions.
1.2.3 EN 10204 : Metallic products — Types of Inspection Documents
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Plates supplied to this specification shall conform to specification SA-20 with additional
2.4 Final rolling shall be lengthwise.
2.5 The plates shall be free from injurious defects and shall have workmanlike finish
Reconditioning, repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted. Surface conditions shall
meet requirements of EN 10163 (Part: 2) Class A Subclass 3.
3.1 The steel shall be made by electric furnace or basic oxygen process and shall be vacuum
degassed.
3.2 Plates shall be supplied in Normalised and Tempered condition (N+T). Alternatively
accelerated cooling from an austenitizing temperature by liquid quenching followed by
tempering is also acceptable ( N + ACC. + T).
3.3 The tensile strength at room temperature shall not exceed 690 N/mm 2 and the yield strength
should not exceed 620 N/mm 2
3.4 Certified chemical analysis shall be carried out on heat as well as on product. In addition to
chemical analysis required by applicable material specification, analysis of Ni, Cu, As, Sn,
and Sb shall be reported. However, Copper and Nickel content shall be limited to 0.20%
(max.) and 0.30% (max.) respectively. Material shall have a T factor, as defined as (Si + Mn)
x (P + Sn ) x 104 less than or equal to 100, where the concentration of elements are in percent.
3.5 The material shall have an austenitic grain size 5 (Five) or finer as determined by the method
of ASTM E 112.
Plates shall be ultrasonically examined after specified heat treatment as per following:
a. Plates having thickness 16 mm to 50 mm (both inclusive) shall be examined ultrasonically

as per SA-435.
Page 5926 of 8516

Ills el l ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$igar faatcg
(airerr rironfe ar1,3rgre)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov! of India Undertakong)
2.25% Cr - 1% Mo STEEL PLATES 6-12-0018 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 7
b. For thicknesses above 50mm ultrasonic examination shall be carried out as per SA-578
and shall have acceptance standard of level-B.
3.7 Simulated Heat Treatment on Test Coupons
All test specimens representative of heat treated (N+T) / (N+ACC+T) plates shall be subjected
to simulated heat treatments. Simulated heat treatments shall include all heat treatments
involved during fabrication of the equipment. This shall include PWHT of the equipment plus
two additional PWHT cycle (one for shop repair and one for future) including all intermediate
heat treatments (ISR). Simulated heat treatment shall be conducted on the test coupons before
the specified mechanical tests like tensile, bend, impact tests etc. All tests shall be carried out
with minimum PWHT condition and maximum PWHT condition including all ISR. These
details shall be recorded on test certificates clearly indicating all heat cycle conditions.
Simulated heat treatments shall be decided by fabricator based on fabrication technique
employed.
3.7.1 Impact tests (Charpy V-Notch) shall be carried out at minus 29 °C with 55J average value for
three specimens and with no single specimen below 48J. The orientation of test specimen
shall be transverse to the direction of final rolling.
3.8 a) Impact energy versus temperature (transition) curves shall be developed for each heat of
plate.
i) A minimum of eight sets of three impact tests of completely heat treated material with
minimum PWHT condition and maximum PWHT condition including all ISR shall be
performed for each curve. Sample location shall be as specified in ASME code.
ii) The eight sets of impact test shall be performed at different temperature but shall
include minus 29 °C. The generated transition curve shall clearly define the transition
zone and the upper shelf. The maximum test temperature shall correspond to the upper
shelf energy level.
b) Step cool tests shall be performed on completely heat treated material with minimum
PWHT condition and maximum PWHT condition including all ISR from each heat of
plate.
i) Samples shall be heated from 316°C to 593°C with maximum rate of 56°C.
ii) Step cooling shall be in accordance with the following temperatures, holding times
and cooling rates to the next lower temperature:
Temperature Holding time Cooling rate to the next temperature

°C Hrs. °C/hr
593 1 5.6
538 15 5.6
524 24 5.6
496 60 2.8
468 100 27.8
315 - air cooling
iii) Impact test of each step cooled sample shall be performed and transition curve shall
be developed following the procedure outlined in clause 3.8(a) above.
c) Acceptance criteria for materials shall be in accordance with the following:
vTr 55 + 3.0 xA vTr < 10 °C

Page 5927 of 8516

0151tg INDIA LIMITED 2.25% Cr 1% Mo STEEL PLATES
—
6-12-0018 Rev. 4
(Wert elecole JOirw0 (A Govt Of India Undedalong)
Page 6 of 7
Where vTr 55 Charpy V-notch 55J impact energy transition temperature of

completely heat treated specimens before step cooling.
AvTr 555c The shift in Charpy V-notch 55J impact energy transition
temperature after step cooling tests.
3.9 Hardness of plates shall not exceed 225
3.10 Additional Tests
Following additional tests shall be applicable, if specified in Purchase/tender documents:
a. High temperature tension test for each heat as per S7 of SA-20 / SA- 20M at temperature
specified in Material Requisition with maximum PWHT condition including all ISR. Test
results shall also be furnished in the test certificates. The acceptance criteria shall be 90 %
of the value specified in AME Sec II Part D Table U for the test temperature.
b. Through-thickness tension test for plates 25 mm and above in thickness shall be

conducted with frequency and test procedure as per SA-770 / SA-770M with maximum
PWHT condition including all ISR and determination of reduction of area as per SA-370.
Minimum reduction area shall not be less than 35%. Test results shall also be furnished in
the test certificates.
The supplier shall furnish certificates/documents (number of copies as specified in the

requisition) inclusive of all the following tests required as per specification, duly certified by
the Inspecting Authority before shipment of plates. The actual values obtained shall be
recorded in the test certificates/documents. Material certificates shall conform to EN 10204
Type 3.1/3.2 as required.
b. Mechanical Tests
c. Additional Tests (if specified in the requisition)
d. Data of heat treatment i.e. initial temperature including heat rate soaking temperature
soaking time /cooling rate, etc.
e. Simulated Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test Coupons (S3 of SA-20 / SA-20M)
f. Ultrasonic Examination (S 12 of SA-20 / SA-20M)
g. Certification as per IBR (if specified in the requisition).
h. Charpy V-notch impact tests (S5 of SA-20 / SA-20M)
i. Impact - temperature transition curves and acceptance criteria.
5.0 PAINTING
No painting of any kind is permitted on the steel plates except stencil marking. However,
steel plates shall be carefully protected and packed against any damage during transit and shall
be of sea-worthy condition.
Page 5928 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
fgzir iameg
mrtR eleaxt mUram ,
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UncleftalON)
2.25% Cr 1% Mo STEEL PLATES
—
6-12-0018 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 7
Page 5929 of 8516

/t3I ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
INDIA LIMITED STAINLESS STEEL PLATES 6-12-0020 Rev. 8
*Igen 'Meg
meet, eventra ort•avkrna) (A Govt a India Undertaking) Page 1 of 5
-47-14U tera
I 1-1 feffbi
FOR
STAINLESS STEEL PLATES
s&k
8 22.09.2017 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RNK SK/KJH RKT r RN
7 30.06.2010 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. KA RKT AKM/DM N.DUARI
6 25.09.09 REVISED AND REISSED AS STD. SPEC VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
5 16.04.04 REVISED AND REISSED AS STD. SPEC DNN AKM SSA SKG
4 26.11.99 REVISED AND REISSED AS STD. SPEC RKT AKM CRMN A. SONI
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5930 of 8516

$1g-ar Rift
(.7A rircAte om.3,70(.3)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Of Incto UndettakIng)
STAINLESS STEEL PLATES 6-12-0020 Rev. 8
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
EN European Standard
RB Rockwell Hardness Scale B
SS Stainless Steel

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Page 5931 of 8516

18diazie aft ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
slgeir fairegW INDIA LIMITED STAINLESS STEEL PLATES 6-12-0020 Rev. 8
own eRtnre MIJ.91.1) (A Govt 04 inch Undeltak ,n9)
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
Page 5932 of 8516

t.191aeitlift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
Oaez lell5ftW INDIA LIMITED STAINLESS STEEL PLATES 6-12-0020 Rev. 8
1.1R,f 2,244'
i W3.2.1) to °m<. of India UncIntalong)
Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers requirements for chromium, chromium-nickel and chromium-
manganese-nickel stainless and heat resisting steel plates intended primarily for pressure
vessels/heat exchangers. The steel plates shall meet the requirements of ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code Section II (latest). This is intended to supplement the minimum
applicable requirements of the material specification indicated in the material requisition.
1.2 Following codes, standards etc shall be followed in their latest edition and addenda, errata,
1.2.1 ASME Sec II Part A.
1.2.2 EN10163: Delivery Requirements for Surface Conditions.
1.2.3 EN 10204: Metallic products- Types of Inspection Documents.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Plates supplied to this specification shall conform to specification SA-480 with additional
2.2 Plate length and width provide tolerance for shear and plasma cutting only. The tolerance on
thickness of plates shall be positive only.
2.4 Plates shall have no. 1 finish on both sides with reference to SA-480.
3.1 All plates shall be supplied in hot-rolled, fully annealed and pickled condition. All stabilized
grades of Stainless Steel (SS 321, SS 347etc.) shall be given stabilization heat treatment in
addition to solution annealing. The soaking temperatures for stabilization heat treatment shall
be 915°C ± 10° C and soaking period shall be minimum of 4 hours (2 hours for thickness <
3.5mm).
3.2 Unless specified otherwise in material requisition, plate representative of each heat shall be
subjected to intergranular corrosion tests as per ASTM A-262 Practice E for all the 300 series
materials. The bend test specimen shall be examined at a magnification of 200 x; and bent
specimen shall be free of any cracks or grain dropping.
3.3 For straight chrome (13% Cr) material, maximum carbon content shall not exceed 0.06%.
Hardness of UNS No. S41000, S41008 and S40500 shall not exceed 88 RB.
3.4 a. Plate having thickness 16 mm to 50 mm (both inclusive) shall be examined ultrasonically

as per SA-435.
b. For thickness above 50mm ultrasonic examination shall be carried out as per SA-578 and
shall have acceptance standard of level-B.
3.5 All mandatory tests as per material specification shall be carried out. However tension test
specimen shall be from finished material and shall be selected in transverse direction.
Page 5933 of 8516

‘39f-Qt4ift,
- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
OfftliPT
: INDIA S TA INLESS STEEL PLATES 6-12-0020 Rev. 8
Page 5 of 5

inclusive of all the following tests required as per specification duly certified by the Inspecting
Authority before shipment of plates. The actual values obtained shall be recorded in the test
certificates/documents. Material certificates shall conform to EN 10204 Type3.1/3.2 as
required.
b. Mechanical Tests
c. Data of heat treatment i.e. initial temperature, heating rate, soaking temperature, cooling
rate, etc.
d. Ultrasonic Examination
e. Intergranular corrosion test for 300 series
f. Intergranular corrosion test for series other than 300 (whenever specified in the
requisition)
g. Type of finish for plate surfaces
Plates are not to be painted/coated but shall be covered with plastic foils or paper or by other
means for careful protection and shall be packed against any damage during transit and sea-
weather conditions.
i.e. 3.1 certification as per EN 10204. However, if third party inspection is required
specifically for plates in material requisition, all test certificates and documents shall be duly
certified by the third party. i.e. 3.2 certification as per EN 10204.
Page 5934 of 8516

Page 5935 of 8516
Page 5936 of 8516
Page 5937 of 8516
Page 5938 of 8516
Page 5939 of 8516
Page 5940 of 8516
Page 5941 of 8516
Page 5942 of 8516
Page 5943 of 8516
Page 5944 of 8516
Page 5945 of 8516
Page 5946 of 8516
Page 5947 of 8516
Page 5948 of 8516
Page 5949 of 8516
Page 5950 of 8516
Page 5951 of 8516
Page 5952 of 8516
Page 5953 of 8516
Page 5954 of 8516
Page 5955 of 8516
Page 5956 of 8516
Page 5957 of 8516
Page 5958 of 8516
Page 5959 of 8516
Page 5960 of 8516
Page 5961 of 8516
Page 5962 of 8516
Page 5963 of 8516
Page 5964 of 8516
Page 5965 of 8516
Page 5966 of 8516
Page 5967 of 8516
Page 5968 of 8516
Page 5969 of 8516
Page 5970 of 8516
Page 5971 of 8516
Page 5972 of 8516
Page 5973 of 8516
Page 5974 of 8516
Page 5975 of 8516
Page 5976 of 8516
Page 5977 of 8516
Page 5978 of 8516
Page 5979 of 8516
Page 5980 of 8516
Page 5981 of 8516
Page 5982 of 8516
Page 5983 of 8516
Page 5984 of 8516
Page 5985 of 8516
STANDARD SPECFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS FOR WELDED
) IA Govt of India UndenakIng) TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 1 of 9
(Q ,1
611 ZaTeZ •71)
{CPR TrriW 'WU
WELDED
TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS

4 07.06.13 RKT/SC DM
3 28.01.08 KA PK AKM VC
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD
2 01.09.99 HN PK RKA AS
SPECIFICATION
1 04.05.89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RKA BSG VKM RNS
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No. by by
Approved by
Page 5986 of 8516

0ll6iel ENGINEERS
FOR WELDED
Ogee INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
IA GOVT. of
in"
Undertaking)
TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:

AWS American Welding Society
OD Outside diameter
TEMA Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers' Association
TIG Tungsten inert gas shielded arc
Convenor : Mr. R K Trivedi
Members: Mr. K Anjaneyulu

Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Tarun Goyal
Ms. R K Singh
Mr. G K Iyer
Mr. Ratan Lal
Mr. S Ghosal
Page 5987 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Igar 22egWv INDIA LIMITED FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
IA Govt of InOta Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3.0 WELDING PROCESS AND JOINT DETAIL 4
4.0 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION 4
5.0 WELDERS QUALIFICATION 6
6.0 PREPARATION OF TUBES AND TUBESHEET 6
7.0 WELDING 6
8.0 EXAMINATION OF JOINTS 7
9.0 TUBE EXPANDING 7
10.0 REPAIRS 7
11.0 TEST AND REPAIR REPORTS 7
APPENDIX-1 - JOINT DETAILS
APPENDIX-2 - DETAILS OF TEST SPECIMENS
Page 5988 of 8516

ENGINEERS
fameg INDIA LIMITED FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
IA Govt of Ind a Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers minimum requirements for the welding and testing of tube to
tubesheet joints of shell and tube heat exchangers and air coolers. It is the Fabricator's
responsibility to furnish sound, leak free joints. For the purpose of this specification, the
terms "joints" shall be construed to mean "tube-to-tube sheet joints".
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The latest edition of the following codes and standards shall be complied with:
a) ASME Section VIII Division I

b) ASME Section V
c) ASME Section IX
d) TEMA for tubular exchangers
e) API 661 for aircoolers
f) AWS
3.0 WELDING PROCESS AND JOINT DETAIL
3.1 Manual or automatic Tungsten Inert Gas shielded Arc (TIG) welding shall be used. All joints
shall be made by using minimum two weld passes. The first pass should be preferably made
without filler wire to ensure root fusion. The second or final pass shall be with filler wire.
Any other welding process can be used only after obtaining written approval from the
Authorised Inspector.
3.2 Joint detail shall be as indicated on the Purchaser drawings by giving reference to figure
numbers in Appendix-1 of this specification. In absence of any Purchaser drawings or
indication regarding type of joint, Figure 2 or Figure 3 shall be used depending upon whether
tube thickness is > 2 mm or < 2 mm respectively.
4.0 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
4.1 Welding Procedure Specification shall be compiled by the Fabricator and submitted to the
Authorised Inspector for approval before the qualification tests are performed. Mock up test
shall commence only after approval is obtained from the Authorised Inspector.
4.2 Welding procedure qualification test is required to be carried out if :-
a) Authorised Inspector requires the test to be carried out.
b) There exists no previous qualification tests within last three years for the proposed
combination of tube and tubesheet P number and group number (as per ASME
Section IX), tube outside diameter (OD), tube thickness, tubesheet thickness, tube
pitch, tube pitch pattern, welding procedure and joint detail. All other factors
remaining same, the procedure test need not be repeated if the job tubesheet thickness
exceeds 40 mm and qualification exists for 40 mm or higher tubesheet thickness.
For plug type air coolers additional procedure qualification test is required to be
performed for any of the following conditions:
i) The job has lower clearances between tube and any of the header plates like
top/bottom/end/stiffener/pass partition plate compared to earlier tests.
ii) The job has lower plug size for the same tube size compared to earlier tests.
Page 5989 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
ligar Offleu INDIA LIMITED FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
IHIen rircoft Cavan) IA Govt of Indo Undertaking) TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 5 of 9
iii) The job has higher plugsheet thickness compared to earlier tests.
c) Code or requisition or bid document requires the test to be carried out.
4.3 If required as per 4.2 above, the Fabricator shall perform a procedure qualification test, at
least two weeks before the scheduled beginning of production. Procedure shall be qualified
for the same hand position as is being proposed for production. Procedure test shall consist of
the welding of nine tubes for square pitch and eight tubes, (three, two and three tubes per row
arrangement) if on a triangular pitch. This shall be done for each set of combination of tube
and tubesheet P number and group number, welding procedure, joint detail, tube OD, tube
thickness, tube pitch, tube pitch pattern, tubesheet thickness. Additionally for air cooler, tests
shall be done for each tube size with lowest plug size, lowest clearence between tube and
any of the header plates, and the lowest plugsheet thickness to be used on the job. Thickness
of the tubesheet used for procedure testing shall be same as used for job, except that for
carbon steel and austenitic stainless steel materials, it need not exceed 40 mm, unless
otherwise indicated. Refer Appendix-2 of this specification for test specimen details.
4.4 The following data report (six copies) shall be furnished for review to Authorised Inspector
with the weld samples as outlined below.
a) Complete details of welding procedure employed indicating various machine settings,

welding rods, inert gas composition & purities, flow rate, weld sequence etc.
b) Mechanical properties and chemical composition of tubesheet, tubes and filler metal.
c) The hardness of the weld, the tube, the tubesheet heat affected zone and the tubesheet
base metal after each pass.
d) The complete test sample shall be cut (by sawing) as per Appendix 2 of this
specification. These shall then be subjected to various tests etc. as outlined below:
i) Section 1 shall be polished, etched and microphotographed for examination of

depth of weld, penetration and definition of boundaries. The minimum leak path
of each weld shall be not less than the nominal thickness of the tube. The weld
leg shall also be measured and shall be minimum 1.4 times the nominal thickness
of the tube.
ii) Section 2 (two specimens) shall be subjected to tear test. These specimens shall
be tongue bent to show the extent of weld penetration. The underside of the weld
shall show evidence of adequate & uniform weld penetration.
iii) A section 10 mm thick containing the tube end welds shall be sawed from section
3 and radiographed for weld quality. The radiograph shall be submitted to
Authorised Inspector. No cracks or crack like or visual defects are acceptable.
Acceptance shall be as per Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII Division 1. In case
the radiograph is not acceptable, welding procedures shall be suitably modified so
that proper weld and acceptable radiographs are obtained. These shall be proved
by retests.
iv) Section 4 shall be etched and polished and given to Authorised Inspector.
e) A tension strength test shall be carried out as per ASME Section VIII Division I
Appendix A. This strength test shall be performed at room temperature for each
combination set of tube and tubesheet P number and group number, tube OD, tube
thickness and joint detail. The breaking loads shall be at least equal to the load
required for breaking the tube using the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength
Page 5990 of 8516

" ENGINEERS FOR WELDED
kiVeGVIW' INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
(#11"9122mweinJW,R) (A Govt of India Undertaking) TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 6 of 9
of tube as indicated in certificates issued by the tube supplier. When tube material is
to a specification which does not call for mechanical tests to be performed, ultimate
tensile strength of the tube material shall be considered as four times the allowable
stress at room temperature as indicated by the ASME Section II Part D, or other
relevant code. Failure of the test piece at the weld shall not be a cause for rejection in
case the minimum strength is attained, but the fracture should be examined for any
evidence of faulty workmanship.
4.5 Fabricator is advised to satisfy himself that the procedures employed are the best for the job
and would enable him to give workmanship guarantee for the equipment. Authorised
Inspector's approval shall in no way relieve the Fabricator of his responsibility and guarantee
to supply the equipment as per the conditions of the purchase order.
5.0 WELDERS QUALIFICATION
The purpose of this operator qualification test is to demonstrate that both the welding
operator and the welding machines are capable of producing satisfactory joints. Once welding
procedures have been qualified as above, welding operators employed on welding shall be
required to prove their ability by making test samples similar to that prescribed above for
welding procedure qualification. Welding operators may be qualified based on para 4.4 d (i),
4.4 d (ii), and 4.4 d (iii) above only, provided same welding machines & welding procedures
are used. This welding operator qualification test should also be carried out if the welding
operator has not executed similar welding six months prior to production. Repeat tests may be
called for in the course of manufacture to determine the consistency of operator or machine to
produce sound welds.
6.0 PREPARATION OF TUBES AND TUBESHEET
6.1 Tubeholes shall be to special close fit tolerance as per TEMA for shell and tube exchangers
and as per API 661 for air coolers. Tube holes shall be free from any burns and the bundle
side edge of tube holes shall be chamfered or radiused. Tube holes shall have smooth finish to
63 AARH.
6.2 Prior to assembly, the tubesheet and tube ends (inside and outside for a distance equal to the
tubesheet thickness + 30 mm) shall be cleaned and degreased to free from dirt, grease etc. It is
essential that the solvent used for degreasing be chloride free and sulfide free and non residue
forming. The solvent should not lead to any possible fire hazard.
6.3 The tubes shall be positioned in the tubesheets by 30° tapered drift pin.
6.4 Before welding tube to tubesheet, the tubesheets shall be heated to a temperature as required
to remove any last traces of moisture or solvent which may remain after the cleaning
operation. Any specific requirement for application of preheat shall be established as a part of
the welding procedure qualification test and should account for increased restraint offered by
the larger assembly during production.
7.0 WELDING
Tubes shall be individually welded, using the procedure approved by the Authorised
Inspector. Systematic welding procedure shall be adopted so as to result in minimum
tubesheet distortion. All tubes are to have initial pass completely cleaned as necessary,
visually examined and tested as per para 8.1 below, if required, before subsequent layers are
applied. Welds shall be suitably finished and any spillage or spatter on tubesheet removed.
Spillage of weld metal into the bores of tube is not permitted.
Page 5991 of 8516

ENGINEERS
og-ar 02ft 1W INDIA LIMITED FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
Govt of Indo Undertaking)
8.0 EXAMINATION OF JOINTS
8.1 Joints shall be subjected to air-soap solution test after first weld pass with air at 1.25 kg/cm2
(g). Procedures outlined in ASME Section V, Article 10 shall be followed.
8.2 After completion of welding, the tubesheet face, the welds and internal tube surfaces to a
distance of 25 mm beyond the fusion line must be cleaned thoroughly by wire brushing and
examined carefully for surface defects. Defects such as cracks, surface breaking porosity, slag
inclusions and lack of fusion are not acceptable.
8.3 After the visual inspection, a liquid penetrant examination in accordance with ASME Section
VIII Division I, Appendix-8 & Section V, Article 6 shall be done. Before conducting this test,
the faces of the carbon steel tubesheets shall be cleaned thoroughly by wire brush and
solvents to remove all weld slag, rust and scale.
8.4 When specified on the drawings or requisition, a halide test shall be performed after the tests
as per para 8.1, 8.2, and 8.3 above have been successfully completed. Procedures for halide
test shall be as per ASME Section V, Article 10, Appendix - III Halogen diode detector probe
test.
8.5 After the final tube expanding (refer para 9.0) has been completed, the liquid penetrant
examination as outlined in para 8.3 above shall be repeated.
8.6 Whenever a halide test has been specified, an envelope test shall also be done as a further test
for leaks after final tube expanding. For this test, tubesheets shall be securely wrapped in
plastic sheets and the shell allowed to remain under test pressure with halogen tracer, for a
period of 10 to 12 hours. Then with the detection set at a maximum sensitivity, the probe shall
be inserted through the plastic cover at the bottom of the tubesheets and readings taken to
observe if any leakage has occurred.
8.7 Final acceptance hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted after tube expansion at hydrotest
pressure for at least one hour.
9.0 TUBE EXPANDING
After the tests outlined in 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, and 8.4 have been successfully completed and all
leaking welds repaired, the tubes shall be "contact expanded" with a PARALLEL type
expander. Contact expanding is intended to bring the tube OD into contact with the tube hole.
Contact expanding shall begin 12 mm from the tubesheet face and extend to 3 mm from the
back face. The contact expansion shall have thinning of 3-5% which shall be ensured by
measuring the inside diameter of tubes.
10.0 REPAIRS
If leaks are found during any of the above testing procedures these shall be reported to the
Authorised Inspector and after obtaining his approval, repairs shall be made by removing the
defects down to sound parent metal and repeating the qualified weld procedures. All weld
repairs shall be retested in accordance with procedures outlined in para 8.0 above.
11.0 TEST AND REPAIR REPORTS
Test and repair reports shall be included in the Data Folder. These reports shall also indicate
the number of leaks discovered on each test and the extent of the repair done.
Page 5992 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
Ig'-ar „PG,
151 (A Govt of India Undettaking)
APPENDIX 1 - JOINT DETAILS

wit
W= t
FIG-2 R=t
FIG-1
D = t FOR t<3
AND
= 0.6t FOR t >3
W t
FIG-3 FIG-4
FIG-5
D = 1.6t TO 2t
FIG-6
t or 3
WHICHEVER IS MORE
FIG-7
Page 5993 of 8516

el ENGINEERS
5igat Rift INDIA LIMITED FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 4
1***clecrnetv3*,,,*) (A Govt of Indla Undellakeng) TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 9 of 9
APPENDIX 2 - DETAILS OF TEST SPECIMENS
- 1 - * * 30
I
* *
I
30
EDOG
++
O W*
It
Act It
FIG-11 FIG-12
NOTE:-
THE MOCKUP ASSEMBLY SHOULD HAVE THE
DIMENSIONS/THICKNESS MARKED AS PER JOB
BUNDLE SIDE
FIG-13 FOR PLUG TYPE AIRCOOLERS
I I I
FIG-14 FIG-15
LEGEND
1. FOR MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
2. FOR TEAR TEST
3. FOR RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
Page 5994 of 8516

ENGINEERS EXPANDED TUBE TO 6-15-0004 Rev. 4
ligar fagi-au INDIA LIMITED TUBESHEET JOINTS
1.+IeR elecnreastagarst) (A Govt of India Underlakingj Page 1 of 7
w:t"ti 4,161 zzoiez

toffftir

EXPANDED
TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS
440N r
4 07-06-13 RKT/SC DM
3 24-01-08 KA PK AKM VC
REVISED AND REISSUED AS
2 16-07-99 HN PK RKA AS
1 04-05-89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RKA BSG VKM RNS
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 5995 of 8516

ENGINEERS
sfgar Mies INDIA LIMITED EXPANDED TUBE TO 6-15-0004 Rev. 4
viroxeLIOJOOO.0 IA Govt W IrtOiO UnclertakIngt
TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:

ID Inside diameter
OD Outside diameter
SS Stainless steel
TEMA Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers Association
Convenor: Mr. R K Trivedi
Members: Mr. K Anjaneyulu

Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Tarun Goyal
Ms. R K Singh
Mr. G K Iyer
Mr. Ratan Lal
Mr. S Ghosal
Page 5996 of 8516

el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
tif54eg INDIA LIMITED EXPANDED TUBE TO 6-15-0004 Rev. 4

(.1v,ri,ore a,rpro) (A Govt of India Undertakm) TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES 4
3.0 JOINT CONFIGURATION 4
4.0 PROCEDURE TESTING 4
5.0 CARE OF TUBE 5
6.0 TUBE HOLES IN TUBESHEET 6
7.0 ASSEMBLY AND EXPANSION 6
8.0 TESTING 6
9.0 INSPECTION 7
Page 5997 of 8516

Ct, ENGINEERS EXPANDED TUBE TO
JI 2154-eg
WWI k' gnW erlaPS1.1)
INDIA LIMITED
fA Govt of India Undertaking)
TUBESHEET JOINTS
6-15-0004 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of expanded tube-to-tubesheet joints for
shell & tube heat exchangers and air coolers. It is the fabricator's responsibility to furnish
sound, leak free joints. For the purpose of this specification, the term "joints" shall be
construed to mean "tube-to-tube sheet joints".
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES
The latest edition of the following Codes and Standards shall be complied with:-
a) ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 (Code)

b) TEMA for tubular exchangers
c) API 661 for aircoolers.
3.0 JOINT CONFIGURATION
Joint with two grooves as per 7-15-0006 shall be used unless specified otherwise.
4.0 PROCEDURE TESTING
4.1 Procedure testing is required to be carried out in any of the following cases:-
a) Authorised Inspector of Purchaser or Ell, requires it to be carried out.
b) There are no previously established procedures for Fr values (Factor of Reliability) in the
last five years with the same combination of tube and tubesheet material, outside diameter
(OD) and thickness of tubes, tube hole groove detail and length of expansion (excluding
contact expansion).
c) Code or specification or the equipment drawing requires it to be carried out.
d) The length of expansion in the job is less than existing qualification length of expansion of
same materials, tube size, tube hole groove detail. However, if qualification exists for
length of expansion of 51 mm or more for the same combination of materials, size of
tubes, tube hole grooving details, and the length of expansion for the job is 51 mm or
more, the procedure testing need not be repeated. The length of expansion to be
considered excludes any contact expansion.
e) If previously established procedure of the fabricator is to be used, Authorised Inspector

has the option of asking for a demonstration of the procedure to satisfy himself of its
accuracy or to confirm the suitability of the expanding equipment or control unit. With
time, the equipment used for expansion may change its characteristics and Authorised
Inspector may like to check this by actual procedure tests.
4.2 Procedure test shall demonstrate % thinning vs machine setting and shear load test as per the
requirements given below.
4.2.1 A sample tubesheet of same material and thickness as required for the job shall be drilled
and/or reamed to achieve the required surface finish as per clause 6.0 and grooved as per 7-15-
0006. Tube hole dimensions shall be as specified in clause 6.0 and as far as possible tube holes
shall be prepared to cover the complete range of tolerance allowed. Tubesheet thickness used
for procedural testing shall be as per item drawing or specification except that it need not
exceed 55 mm. Diameter of tube holes drilled in the sample tubesheet shall be measured
accurately. Hardness of tubesheet shall be measured and reported.
Page 5998 of 8516

eitzi ENGINEERS
ar 2fgreg
c
292ORZ4NOWISTI)
INDIA LIMITED
EXPANDED TUBE TO
TUBESHEET JOINTS
6-15-0004 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 7
4.2.2 At least eight tubes from the same heat shall be selected with extreme tolerances as far as
obtainable from the given lot of tubes to the satisfaction of the Authorised Inspector. The OD,
inside diameter (ID) & hardness of these selected tubes shall be measured and reported.
4.2.3 One of these tubes shall be selected and positioned in the tube hole and assembly held in the
same position as shall be adopted for production. Tube expander to be used for production
shall be set at an estimated low value and tube shall be expanded inside the tube hole.
Expander setting shall be increased until the thinning is in the range of 8-10% for all materials,
except for non-ferrous and stainless steel, in which case it shall be 6-8%. In no case shall the
% thinning exceed the values given in clause 8.1. The thinning figures are to finally such that
these can result in achieving the required Fr value. It shall be the fabricator's responsibility to
ensure the same.
Percentage thinning is defined as follows:

% thinning = [ 1-(Dh -IDf )/(0D-ID, )] * 100
Where
Dh = Tube hole diameter in tubesheet
IDf = ID of tube after complete expansion
OD = OD of tube before expansion
ID, = ID of tube before expansion.
4.2.4 Expander setting thus found shall be tested on the remaining tubes and thinning shall be
checked to be within the range specified above. Results of these tests (reporting combination
number and % thinning achieved and various diameters used for calculation of thinning) shall
be reported to the Authorised Inspector.
4.2.5 Samples prepared above, shall be cut in two halves along the axis of the tubes to show the
flow of metal into the grooves. These cut-sections shall be presented to the Authorised
Inspector who shall check the samples for flow of metal into the grooves and also check the
expansion length. Authorised Inspector's approval shall be obtained on the same.
4.2.6 Fabricator is advised to satisfy himself that settings reported and to be used in the production
shall be the best for the job, will enable him to achieve the required Fr value and give
workmanship guarantee for the equipment. Authorised Inspector's approval shall in no way
relieve the fabricator of his responsibility and guarantee to supply the equipment as per the
conditions of the purchase order.
4.2.7 Shear load tests shall be carried out as per Appendix-A of Code. Fr value of the joint shall be
established and shall be demonstrated to be greater than or equal to Fr (test) required as per
Appendix-A Table A-2 of Code. For nonferrous and stainless steel combination of tubes &
tubesheet a minimum Fr value of 0.7 shall be achieved. Actual value shall be reported in the
test reports.
5.0 CARE OF TUBES
5.1 Ends of the tubes (tubesheet thickness + 100 mm) shall be subjected to careful visual
inspection. These shall be cleaned to remove scales, rust, grease and dirt and should
subsequently be cleaned by using a suitable sulfide free and chloride free solvent to get rid of
oil and grease. The solvent should be non-residue forming and should not lead to any possible
fire hazard. The area should be defect free and should have no scoring marks, rough surface
etc. No repair is permitted on defective tubes unless approved by Authorised Inspector. In case
a repair is done using an approved procedure, the tube dimensions after repair shall be within
limits laid down by the tube material specification, otherwise the tube shall be discarded.
5.2 At least 10% tubes (subject to a minimum of 20 tubes per shell) shall be tested for hardness at
the tube manufacturer's shop (This shall be taken care during sub-ordering). The hardness
Page 5999 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51gar 2151& INDIA LIMITED
INK,friemrenn.710.1)
EXPANDED TUBE TO 6-15-0004 Rev. 4
(A Govt of India undertak.9)
measured should not be greater than the maximum hardness reported in the mockup. Tubes
with greater hardness shall be rejected. Further hardness testing shall be done, if required by
Authorised Inspector.
6.0 TUBE HOLES IN TUBESHEETS
Tube holes in tubesheets shall be drilled as per TEMA special close fit for shell and tube
exchangers and as per API 661 special close fit for air coolers. For example, metric tube of
size 20 mm OD, the nominal size of tube holes shall be 20.20 mm with tolerances as + 0.05
mm, for 25 mm OD tubes, nominal size of holes shall be 25.25 mm with tolerances as + 0.05
mm and so on.
Tube holes in tubesheets shall be drilled or drilled and reamed to final size and surface finish.
Grooves shall be machined in the tube holes as per 7-15-0006. Tube holes shall have no burrs
or scoring marks and shall be circular with parallel sides and normal to the tubesheet surface.
Longitudinal and spiral scratches are not permitted, Edges of the tube holes shall be deburred
and chamfered as per the figure in 7-15-0006. Tube holes shall have surface finish to 63
AARH or better & shall be cleaned prior to assembly.
7.0 ASSEMBLY AND EXPANSION
7.1 Care shall be taken during assembly to avoid scoring of tube holes in tubesheet or outer
surface of the tubes. The tubes shall be positioned so that their projection from the tubesheet is
as per 7-15-0006. For vertical shell & tube exchangers, the tubes are required to be flush with
top tubesheet unless specified otherwise.
7.2 Tube expanders used by the fabricator shall be electronically or pneumatically or hydraulically
controlled type and shall be in good condition and shall have the Authorised Inspector's
approval. The tube expanders shall have 'stops' to prevent the rollers approaching nearer than
3 mm to the back of the tube sheet.
7.3 Expansion of tube into tubesheet shall be done as per the established procedure.
7.4 Tubes shall be expanded for the full thickness of the tubesheet leaving 3 mm (minimum) at the
backside face of the tubesheet. However, for tubesheet thickness more than 55 mm, the
expansion may be limited to 51 mm from the tube side face and remaining portion to be
contact expanded leaving 3 mm (minimum) to 6 mm (maximum) at the back of tubesheet.
Contact expansion shall have thinning of 3 - 5% which shall be ensured by measuring the ID
of tubes.
7.5 Care shall be taken to avoid any distortion of the tubesheet or gross deformation of the
ligaments. It is suggested that tubes be expanded systematically in small, diametrically
opposite groups. The tube expansion shall be uniform on the whole expanded length. There
shall be no abrupt transition at junction with unexpanded zone.
7.6 A check shall be made of the percentage thinning on tubes selected by Authorised Inspector
and the results recorded and compared against percentage thinning figures of the procedure
test.
8.0 TESTING
8.1 After expansion of all joints is completed on the job tubesheet, tubesheet face and the internal
surfaces of the tubes to a length of about 15 mm shall be thoroughly cleaned. Any grease or oil
shall be suitably removed using proper solvent or steam jets. These joints shall then be
subjected to pneumatic air-soap solution test of 1.25 kg/cm2 (g). Leaking tubes shall be further
expanded, in the presence of Authorised Inspector after the reasons for the leakage are
Page 6000 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS
EXPANDED TUBE TO
51g-af INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0004 Rev. 4
(.rew rirox(emaverm (A Govt of In Undertaking)
ascertained and accepted by the Authorised Inspector. If the % thinning is greater than 15%
for carbon steel and low alloy steel combinations and 12% for non ferrous and stainless steel
combinations, then the defective tube shall be replaced and re-expanded.
8.2 Joints shall also be subjected to hydrostatic leakage test at a test pressure indicated in the
drawings or requisition for at least one hour. Leaking tube, if any, may be further expanded
keeping the guide lines given above in view.
9.0 INSPECTION
Inspection of the equipment shall be carried out as per the purchase order by the Authorised
Inspector. For expanded tube to tubesheet joints, following stages of inspection shall be
observed and reported:
a) Agreement regarding expansion procedure. If procedure testing is to be carried out, then

all preparations, cut samples, test results etc. shall be inspected by the Authorised
Inspector.
b) Inspection of tube ends. Special attention shall be paid to tube dimensions & hardness.
These shall be within the specified tolerances.
c) Approve any repair procedure to rectify defective tube end.
d) After tube holes in the tubesheet have been drilled, and / or reamed and grooved, all tube
holes shall be given a careful check for:
i) Tube layout pattern and locations.
ii) Tube holes meeting requirements of clause 6.0 above. Also it is to be checked that
grooves in tube holes are located properly and of required dimensions.
iii) Minimum ligament width as per TEMA or API as applicable.
e) Check the tube projection before expansion is to be started.
f) Agree to the sequence of expanding tubes into the tubesheet holes.
g) Check for distortion of tubesheet and thinning of tubes after expansion is complete.
h) Witness pneumatic & hydrostatic testing.
Page 6001 of 8516

STANDARD SPECFICATION
aft,
- ENGINEERS
-
No.
Ogez ElPeg.W INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0006 Rev. 5
(A Govt of India Undertaking) U-TUBES
Page 1 of 6
71—za-41. 4-111ch fqr9ftr
FOR
U-TUBES
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STD. r)

,/
vN
5 22.09.17 SK JH RKT RN
SPECN.
4. 15.11.11 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPECN. KA RKT AKM/SC DM
3 17.02.06 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPECN. AKM PK AKM VJN
2 01.09.99 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPECN. AKM PK RKA AS
1 04.05.89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RKA BSG VKM AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6002 of 8516

rZ
fi ENGINEERS
STANDARD SPECFICATION No.
1a5leg‘ww INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0006 Rev. 5
maw
011W, 92..7.70.1) fA Govt of Inda Undeflalf.09)
U-TUBES Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
AI : Authorized Inspector
IBR • Indian Boiler Regulations
IGC • Inter Granular Corrosion
MD • Maximum or minimum outside dimension at bent portion
OD : Outside Diameter
TEMA : Tubular Exchangers' Manufacturers Association

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Page 6003 of 8516

5i11 it4 /ft,- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECFICATION No.
ii it kittiregW INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0006 Rev. 5
04%w eROsfOO:OJOO.0 (A GOA of ha. Undeffak,o9)
U-TUBES Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 CODES •.4
3.0 MATERIAL 4
4.0 MANUFACTURE 4
5.0 HEAT TREATMENT 5
6.0 INSPECTION & TESTING 6
Page 6004 of 8516

laaeielift ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECFICATION No.
Ogea 215I-egW INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0006 Rev. 5
(A Goal of India Undertaking)
U-TUBES Page 4 of 6
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for materials, manufacture, inspection
and testing of U-tubes required for installation in shell and tube heat exchangers.
2.0 CODES AND SPECIFICATION
The following standards/specifications with latest edition shall be used :
ASME Section II Part A & B

ASME Section VIII Division 1
TEMA
IBR, if applicable
EIL Specification No. 6-15-0001
3.0 MATERIAL
3.1 Tubes required for the manufacture of the U-bends shall meet all the requirements of EIL
Specification No. 6-15-0001 and the Codes mentioned above.
3.2 Tube thickness specified in the datasheets and/or drawings are minimum before forming.
3.3 Low carbon austenitic stainless steel type 304L, 316L in solution annealed condition or
stabilized austenitic stainless steel grades 321, 347, 316 Ti in solution annealed followed by
thermal stabilization heat treatment condition shall be used. The use of other austenitic
stainless steels type 304, 316, 304H, 316H is not permitted.
4.0 MANUFACTURE
4.1 All U-tubes shall be formed from a continuous length of tubing, free of girth welds.
4.2 The minimum mean radius of U-bends of tubes shall be 2 times the OD of the tube, unless
4.3 U-tubes shall be manufactured only from seamless tubes. Welded tubes shall not be used.
4.4 All U-bends shall be cold formed.
4.5 Thinning
Thinning of tubes after bending shall be as per TEMA. One tube for each material and size
shall be bent to the specified minimum radius and cross sectional thickness measured at 4
points i.e. 0°, 30°, 60° & 90° from tangent line of U-bend.
4.6 Flattening
4.6.1 Flattening after bending shall be within the range given below unless approved otherwise:
Minimum radius of bend Flattening

Up to 2 x OD ±10%
Greater than 2 x OD ± 5%
Page 6005 of 8516

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECFICATION No.
*igen iaikg
OWN MORE 4113V11.1)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gout o Indio Undertaking)
FOR 6-15-0006 Rev. 5
U-TUBES Page 5 of 6
4.6.2 Flattening shall be calculated as below:
% Flattening = MD - OD x 100
OD
4.7 Centre to Centre Distance
Centre to centre distance shall be measured at the tangent line of the U bend and shall have the
following tolerances:
Bend Radius Tolerance (mm)

R<5 x0D 1.0
R 5 x0D ± 1.5
4.8 The bent portion shall be substantially uniform in curvature and shall not exceed f 1.5 mm of
nominal centre line radius.
4.9 Permissible deviation from the plane of bend shall not exceed 1.5 mm as measured from the
point of tangency.
5.0 HEAT TREATMENT
5.1 Killed Carbon Steel, Low Temperature Carbon Steel, 3Y2% Ni, Low Alloy Steel U-tubes up
to 5 times tube OD bend radius shall be stress relieved after bending over U-tube plus 300
mm (min) beyond the point of tangency.
5.2 U tubes up to 5 times tube OD bend radius shall be subjected to solution annealing heat
treatment after bending over U- tube plus 300 mm (min.) beyond the point of tangency for low
carbon austenitic stainless steel types 304L, 316L or stabilized grades austenitic stainless steel
type 321, 347, 316Ti..
5.3 For copper and copper alloys, U-tubes shall be stress-relief annealed after bending over U
bend plus 300 mm on each straight length beyond the point of tangency, irrespective of bend
radii.
5.4 For nickel and nickel alloys and titanium and titanium alloys, U- tubes shall be heat treated if
it is specified in the datasheets/ drawings. The heat treatment procedure for U-tubes shall be
agreed with the consultant/owner.
5.5 For duplex stainless steel and super duplex stainless steel tubes heat treatment shall be done
only if specified in the data sheets/drawings.
5.6 For ferritic stainless steel and martensitic stainless steel, U-tubes shall be stress relieved only
if specified in datasheet/drawings. Stress relieving, if applicable shall be carried out, on the U-
bend plus 300 mm (minimum) beyond the point of tangency.
5.7 Tube bending lubricants, oil, grease, etc., shall be removed from U-bends before stress
relieving. Internal surfaces of austenitic stainless steel tubes above mentioned shall be checked
for cleanliness by blowing close fitting acetone soaked felt plugs. Dry, oil free air or nitrogen
shall be used for blowing the plugs. If plugs show more than a light gray discoloration, the
tubes shall be recleaned and retested.
5.8 Temperature during heat treatment shall be controlled through the use of optical pyrometers
or emission pyrometers or both. Temperature indicating crayons, lacquers or pellets shall
not be used.
Page 6006 of 8516

- - ENGINEERS
4_71 ei aft STANDARD SPECFICATION No.
Oge.j, NiregW INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0006 Rev. 5
?rew Govt of Inda Unclettalongt
U-TUBES Page 6 of 6
5.9 Methods for Heat Treatment
5.9.1 Electric Resistance Heat Treatment
5.9.1.1 Heat treatment by electric resistance heat treatment is acceptable for most materials except
ferritic and martensitic SS and chrome-moly steels, and is always recommended for
austenitic stainless steel.
5.9.1.2 The close control of tube temperature during heat treatment shall be monitored with the
use of thermocouples or calibrated optical pyrometer on the straight tangent near a U- bend.
The heat treatment temperatures among the readings shall not be deviated by
±15°C as specified in the Code.
5.9.2 Furnace Heat Treatment
5.9.2.1 U-Tubes shall be properly supported above the furnace floor.
5.9.2.2 Establish a procedure on lines similar to Cl. 5.9.1.2. Proposed procedure shall be submitted
to the AI and approval obtained prior to actual heat treatment.
5.10 Heat treatment temperatures by furnace and/or electric resistance methods shall be as given
in the respective product specification or in the Code, subject to a maximum variation of
±15°C. The stress relief heat treatment temperature shall be at least 25°C below the
minimum tempering temperature used for the original material.
In the case of duplex stainless steel, cooling after the solution annealing shall be carried out
by using forced air, inert gas blast or water quenching.
5.11 The applicable stainless steels U-tubes as mentioned above in this specification shall be
pickled and passivated as per ASTM A380 after heat treatment, employing a previously
qualified procedure acceptable to Purchaser/ EIL.
6.0 INSPECTION & TESTING
6.1 All U-bends shall be visually inspected to detect any harmful effect.
6.2 All U-bends with bend radii less than 5 times the tube OD shall be inspected for thinning,
flattening, centre to centre distance, bend curvature and for the deviation from the plane of
bend, to ensure conformance to the limits specified. U-bends with bend radii greater than 5
times the tube OD shall be inspected randomly at the discretion of the AI, subject to a
minimum 1 tube per one bend radius batch.
6.3 For austenitic stainless steels above mentioned, IGC corrosion test shall be carried out as per
ASTM A262 practice-E after final heat treatment unless stated otherwise. Specimen after
exposure to the IGC environment shall be bent as per A262 practice-E and shall be
examined with minimum magnification of 200x. The acceptance criterion is that the bent
specimen shall be free of any cracks or grain dropping. The microstructure shall be
submitted to Purchaser/EIL or AI for approval.
6.4 After heat treatment and final cleaning of U-bend tubes, the same shall be subjected to
hydro-testing at a pressure of 70 kg/cm 2g or tube side test pressure(whichever is greater)
prior to assembling the tube bundle. Minimum holding time shall be 2 minutes. Hydrotest
reports shall be submitted to Purchaser/EIL or AI for approval.
Page 6007 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR BRAZED ALUMINIUM
self faaj eg INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
rwone
IMi'n .FRIM Govt of inda Undedak.9) PLATE FIN HEAT EXCHANGERS Page 1 of 10
r4,1 kbict-i-d1-‘1R1
icrR 1-414Ti

BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN
HEAT EXCHANGERS
•
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD
4 14.12.15 KJH R SC
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD
3. 20.11.09 KA PK AKM N.DUARI
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STD
2 26.03.04 JV PK SSA SKG
SPECIFICATION
1 08-05-89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RKA BSG VKM RCPC
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6008 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogar faf5les INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
(OWN 0,0000 tot JEN, 0 IA Govt of India Undettak,o0)
HEAT EXCHANGERS Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
ALPEMA : Aluminium Plate-Fin Heat Exchangers Manufacturer's Association
IG : Inert Gas
IS : Indian Standards
LP Liquid Penetrant
MIG Metal Inert Gas
NB : Nominal Bore
ODC : Over Dimension Constraints
PPM : Parts Per Million
TIG : Tungsten Inert Gas
WRC : Welding Research Council
Convenor : Mr. R K Trivedi
Members : Mr K J Hari Narayanan

Mr K. Anjaneyulu
Mr Arun Kumar
Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anish Trehan
Page 6009 of 8516

01
*fgLii acs 9 INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
I NIVR elec+t5TJViRA) (A Govt of India undettakng)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 CODES 4
3.0 DESIGN FEATURES 4
4.0 FABRICATION 7
5.0 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 8
6.0 INSPECTION 9
7.0 PROTECTION AND DESPATCH 9
8.0 GUARANTEE 10
9.0 SUPPLIER DATA REQUIREMENT 10
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — AU rights reserved
Page 6010 of 8516

AE Or= INDIA LIMITED
ENGINEERS
BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
e:Rzne (A GOA of India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for the complete design, engineering
material selection and procurement, fabrication, workmanship, inspection, testing for brazed
aluminium plate fin heat exchangers, and is intended only to supplement the minimum
requirements of the applicable codes and the shop practices followed for such equipment.
2.0 CODES
Equipment shall comply with the requirements of the following codes in their latest edition.
a) ALPEMA standards
b) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Div. I
c) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section-II
d) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section-V
e) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section-IX.
f) Indian Standard IS-875 for wind loading.
g) Indian Standard IS-1893 for earthquake resistant design of structures.
3.0 DESIGN FEATURES
3.1 General
3.1.1 The complete process, thermal, mechanical design and associated piping / instruments within
the Supplier's battery limits shall be the responsibility of Supplier.
3.1.2 Equipment shall be code stamped.
3.2 Design Conditions and Criteria
3.2.1 Parts subject to pressures from more than one stream shall be designed for the most severe
condition of co-incidental pressures unless otherwise specified. It shall be assumed that each
stream will be pressurized individually.
The basic allowable stressed for non pressure parts shall be 33-1/3% of the ultimate tensile
strength or 66-2/3% of the yield strength, whichever is less, and for welds attaching non
pressure parts to pressure parts shall be the same as for pressure parts.
3.2.2 The exchanger and its supports shall be designed for the following conditions of loading.
a) Erection dead weight

b) Test weight and test pressure
c) Operating weight, design pressure, and allowable piping loading on nozzles.
d) Weight and loading anticipated during handling and shipping.
3.2.3 Provisions shall be made for thermal expansion and contraction at exchanger supports and
between core streams, headers, and piping for all anticipated operating conditions including
startup, shutdown, and deriming when such operating conditions are specified.
3.2.4 Supporting members that are subject to torsion shall be fabricated to form closed (boxed)
cross sections.
3.3 Thermal Design
3.3.1 Physical properties of various streams shall be evaluated from indicated compositions.
Page 6011 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Og-ar INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
e1ravec751,1fltr1O (A Govt of inaia undertaking)
3.3.2 The mesh size of the strainer used is 40 and is in Purchaser's scope. Supplier to confirm
suitability of the same.
3.3.3 Supplier to indicate maximum permissible water PPM level that must be maintained to
minimise fouling/corrosion.
3.3.4 The number of cores for each exchanger unit, if indicted, is only tentative. The Supplier to
decide number of cores and to minimise the number of cores to be used for each exchanger
unit. The process details are for each unit with number of units required indicated in data
sheet as well as the requisition.
3.3.5 For each core, Supplier to provide plating diagram for record.
3.3.6 Equipment shall be designed for extra on heat loads and flow rated, and turndown as per
process data sheets. All accessories required shall be in Supplier's scope. Supplier to submit
details in the bid. Supplier to note that pressure drops indicated are pressure drops allowed for
extra flow rates specified.
3.3.7 Supplier to indicate outlet temperatures and heat balance for following conditions:
a) Normal operation.
b) Alternate operations
c) Extra flow and duty for Normal and alternate operation as per process data sheet.
d) Turndown for normal and alternate operation as per process data sheet.
3.4 Material, Design and Details
3.4.1 Material of construction shall be aluminium/aluminium alloy suitable for design conditions.
Supplier to specify the ASTM/ASME Specifications in the bid for cores, headers etc.
3.4.2 Castings are not permitted.
3.4.3 Cores in the cold box shall be of brazed welded construction. Bolted headers are not
acceptable.
3.4.4 A vent and a drain shall be provided at high and low point of each stream or suitable
arrangement shall be made for effective draining and venting. Details to be furnished with the
bid. Vent and drain lines should terminate outside the cold box and shall be 1" NB flanged
with blind flange.
3.4.5 Supplier shall be responsible for stress calculations of interconnected piping within the cold
box and shall design the equipment suitably. Supplier shall submit stress analysis calculations
for Purchaser's reference and records.
3.4.6 Unless specified otherwise, the external loading to be considered in design shall be a force of
100 kg per inch diameter off nozzle and moment of 100 kgm per inch diameter of nozzle in
each of three directions from piping at terminal points. Local load analysis of process nozzles
and nozzle junction shall be carried out as per WRC 107/WRC 297 for nozzles on heads &
shell respectively. Wherever nozzle/Header diameter ratio exceeds the limits specified by
WRC 107/WRC297, Same shall be performed by alternate means such as ASME B 31.3.
3.4.7 Supplier shall specify the thermal movements of all the terminal nozzles in all the three
directions for Design, operating, and any upset conditions.
3.4.8 For each stream, only one flanged connection shall be outside the cold box. All headers shall
be within the cold box.
Page 6012 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Oge_11 idifeg INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
limn <wage el .NRa l (A Govt of lode Undertakm)
3.4.9 Distance between adjacent nozzle flanges shall be 200 mm minimum.
3.4.10 Supplier shall select the gasket and bolting material to ensure compatibility with piping flange
and suitability of service. The materials proposed to be used shall be indicated in the bid.
3.4.11 Flanges shall be to ASME B16.5.
3.4.12 All parameters required for design of foundation such as wind shear and moment at base,
seismic shear and moment at base, anchor bolt size and numbers, location, erection weight,
operating weight, hydro test weight etc. shall be furnished by Supplier.
3.4.13 Supplier shall advise the Purchaser of the approved method of lifting and moving the
equipment. Design of the equipment shall be suitable for any overturning/transportation in
lying down conditions to overcome ODC constraints, if any, specified in the requisition/
bidding document. Extra supports if required for the same shall be designed and supplied by
Supplier. The Supplier shall adequately design and provide suitable lifting arrangements for
safe handling and tilting during transportation and erection.
3.4.14 SS nameplates and earthing lugs shall be provided
3.5 Cold Box/Assembly
Cold box shall be a complete box with perlite, nitrogen purge system, relief hatch, emergency
vents, dry out connections etc. which shall house exchangers, drums, piping, instrumentation
etc.
3.5.1 Cold box shall be designed as per good engineering practices and the Supplier standards.
Design of cold box shall consider nozzle loads, wind load and seismic factor specified.
Minimum thickness of the cold box shall be 6mm. Cold box shall be stiffened to avoid any
distortion.
3.5.2 Material of the cold box shall be carbon steel as a minimum. However selection of the
material of the cold box shall be the responsibility of the Supplier. Suitable material shall be
selected for the bellow that can withstand sea weather corrosion and low temperatures.
3.5.3 Cold box shall be provided with minimum two man holes of diameter 600mm.
3.5.4 Suitable material shall be selected for the bellow that can withstand sea weather corrosion and
low temperatures.
3.5.5 Roof of the cold box should be self-draining with minimum slope of 1: 100. Provisions of
monkey ladder approach to the roof should be provided.
3.5.6 Ladders, cleats as per Purchaser's standard (to be given with Purchase Orders) shall be
included in the bid. Handrails and platforms shall be provided.
3.5.7 Wind load for plant location shall be as per wind load data attached with specification
otherwise design shall be as per IS 875 and seismic design shall be as per site spectra attached
with requisition otherwise it shall be as per IS 1893.
3.5.8 Cold box shall be directly put on foundation without insulation. Supplier to design the
equipment accordingly.
3.5.9 Cold box plates to be stiffened to avoid damage during transit. Protect nozzles and bellows by
suitable guards. Nozzles should not project outside the packing.
3.5.10 The insulation shall be expanded perlite or equivalent. The cold box shall include doors for
insulation filling and emptying. Further, a slide valve shall be fitted at the bottom to control
out flow of insulation granules in event of a need to gain access, having spigot attached on the
Page 6013 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$1gar 0154t-g. INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
MEW cieonc' ATJVCI ,79, (A Go1 of Ind o Undertaking)
outside of slide valve to attach sacks or chutes to recover the material for reuse. Indicate
quantity of insulation including 25% extra. Perlite to be packed separately. Spare perlite will
have separate packing.
3.5.11 Cold box shall be sand blasted. Outside and inside surface of the cold box shall be given a
coat of inorganic zinc chromate primer (minimum thickness 751.tm). Cold Box shall be finish
painted as per Supplier's standard. Supplier shall also furnish the details/spec. of primer as
well as finish painting.
3.5.12 Cold box shall be purged with IG or Nitrogen (Dew Point less than minus 100°C). Supplier
shall also indicate the requirement of make up IG to keep the cold box constantly under IG
pressure at site. Supplier to conduct leakage test in shop to ensure leak tightness. Supplier to
indicate IG pressure to be maintained in cold box and to provide provision of safety valve and
bursting disc to avoid over pressurizing. Supplier to provide pressure-reducing assembly for
keeping IG pressure to desired level.
3.5.13 In case the brazed aluminium exchanger is to be individually insulated without cold box then
Supplier shall take care of the following:
a) Quote for equipment excluding insulation. Details and cost of insulation to be indicated
separately.
b) The scope shall be same as explained for Brazed Aluminium exchangers in cold box (as
stated above) including scope for single flanged inlet & single flanged outlet for each
stream.
c) For handling, tilting etc. for transportation and site erection, Supplier shall provide the
equipment on a suitable frame. The frame should be rigid and suitable to avoid any
damage during transportation and site erection. The nozzles in particular should be
suitably protected to avoid damage during transportation/ site erection.
3.6 Spares
3.6.1 Unless otherwise specified, following mandatory spares shall be provided by Supplier for
nozzles with gasket and bolting in Supplier's scope and cost included in base price:
Gaskets — 400%
Bolting — 10%
3.6.2 Unless otherwise specified following commissioning Spares shall be provided by Supplier
where gaskets are in Supplier's scope and cost included in base price:
Gaskets — 100%
3.6.3 Supplier to provide in the bid a list of 2 year operational spares along with item wise prices.
4.0 FABRICATION
4.1. Forming of Fins
Forming of fins shall be subjected to strict quality controls. Fin heights, geometry, planarity
should be controlled to ensure perfect contact when core is stacked and avoid poor adherence
between fins and side bars/plates.
4.2. Assembly of Core
Formed fins, sidebars, brazing sheets etc. shall be cleaned of all external matter e.g. oil. The
fins are stacked one above other. Core is assembled in jigs. Assembled core should be
preheated to remove all moisture and prevent distortion during brazing.
Page 6014 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
5fgar idOleg INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
1411271 010701 MI .3921 ,7,1, (A Goof of Intim Undeltakmg)
4.3. Brazing
The assembled core shall be brazed by vacuum brazing technique only. Salt bath brazing
technique is just not acceptable.
4.4. Post Braze cleaning
The brazed core must be thoroughly cleaned.
4.5. Welding
4.5.1. All welding shall be fusion welded, carried out by inert gas process.
4.5.2. Filler rods for TIG shall be cleaned prior to use.
4.5.3. Electrode wires for MIG welding shall be protected from contamination during use.
4.5.4. All surfaces that are to be welded shall be smooth and shall be cleaned prior to welding. Inter-
pass scratch brushing is essential.
4.5.5. Aluminium materials shall not be cut by oxygen or electric arc processes without Purchaser's
prior approval.
4.5.6. All welds shall be full penetration. Backing strips are not recommended. However, if these
are unavoidable, the same shall be referred to EIL for approval.
4.5.7. All welding/brazing shall be strictly in accordance with ASME Sec. IX.
5.0 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
5.1. Material Test
Materials for pressure parts shall meet all requirements of relevant ASTM/ASME
specifications. To verify this, material shall be certified by a reputed inspection agency.
5.2. Welding/brazing procedure qualification and qualification of welders shall be as per ASME.
5.3. Butt welded joints of all equipments shall be 100% radio graphed. Joint efficiency for design
shall be 1.0 with full radiography. Acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME Sec. VIII Div. I
&.
5.4. LP testing shall be as per ASME Sec V & acceptance criteria as per ASME Sec VIII Div. I.
5.5. All welds (filler, structural attachments, lugs etc.) on pressure parts shall be examined and
evaluated by the liquid penetrant method. Any surface irregularities, which interfere with the
examination, shall be removed by grinding or machining.
5.6. Bursting Test
Sample core of cold box shall be subjected to bursting pressure test. The core shall have at
least the bursting pressure of 5 times the design pressure corrected for actual strength of the
material. This test is made each time any change is made on materials, conditions of brazing &
new types of fins & procedures are used (only after their strength has been ascertained).
Alternatively Supplier may determine the maximum allowable design pressure for their fins
according to the ASME code by means of a mechanical formula approved by third party
inspection agency. Documents shall be submitted for review.
Page 6015 of 8516

■31 ENGINEERS
0? II 05:leg INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
twm e,000e as, dgawi, (A Govt of India Undertaking)
5.7. Pneumatic Test for each core
Pneumatic test as per UG-100 of ASME Sec. VIII Div. I shall be done for inter stream leak
detection with manometer. The test gas and core temperature must be stabilized within 5 °C of
each other before starting the leak checking. The pneumatic test shall be done, only after the
equipment has been thoroughly dried, by 'dry and oil-free' air passed through activated carbon
filters. The sequence of testing streams shall be:
a) The stream with the highest design pressure shall be pneumatically tested with all other
streams open to the atmosphere. The test pressure shall be maintained for 10 minutes min.
or as long as necessary to assess leak tightness.
b) The stream with the second highest design pressure shall be pneumatically tested while
maintaining the pressure on the previously tested stream and with all untested streams
open to the atmosphere. The test pressure shall be maintained for 10 minutes min. or as
long as necessary to assess leak tightness.
c) The above procedure shall be repeated until each stream with a lower pressure has been
tested while maintaining the pressure on the previously tested streams.
d) The pneumatic test pressure shall be as per Code.
5.8. Pneumatic Test for Multicore Assemblies
After the manifold has been welded into assembly and the cores have been installed in cold
box, all streams shall be individually tested to UG- I 00 of ASME Sec VIII Div I for a min.
holding time of 1 hour.
5.9 Helium Leak Test
Helium Leak Test shall be carried out as per the requirements of ALPEMA.
6.0 INSPECTION
6.1. The equipment shall be inspected by EIL and/or Purchaser's authorized inspection agency.
6.2. Equipment shall be stage wise inspected. Inspection stages shall be discussed and agreed.
6.3. Proposals on exchangers conforming to the ASME code or other codes or government rules or
regulations shall include the cost of all required inspection. Equipment conforming to the
ASME code shall be inspected by an inspector holding a National Board commission. The
manufacturer shall assign and stamp National Board Standard numbers on equipment
conforming to the ASME Code.
6.4. The Supplier, as a fabricator, shall be responsible for the procurement of all materials, code
inspection and shall also determine and comply with the requirements of city, state, country,
national etc., codes, ordinances, or mandatory rules which apply where the exchanger is to be
installed.
7.0 PROTECTION AND DESPATCH
7.1. Dryness Check
The equipment shall be dried out by hot air until the dew point of the air at exit does not
exceed -5°C.
Page 6016 of 8516

■31 ENGINEERS
Oga faf51-e-g INDIA LIMITED BRAZED ALUMINIUM PLATE FIN 6-15-0007 Rev. 4
Mee, erelAVITJW.1) (A Gov) of India Undertaking)
7.2. Nitrogen Blanketing
All exchangers, drums, piping etc shall be filled with dry, oxygen free N2 to a pressure of 0.25
kg/cm2g. The cold box shall also be shipped under dry N2 pressure (0.25 Kg/Cm 2). Prior to
filling, the unit will be purged with at least three times its volume with oxygen free N2. The
N2 dew point shall be lower than —40°C.
Supplier will ensure that the sealing is such that the equipment will remain under N2 pressure
during shipment and storage at site. Supplier will provide suitable arrangement for checking
and depressurizing with N2 Supplier to provide portable cylinders fitted with regulators to
maintain required N2 pressure in cores and cold box during transportation and storage at site
7.3. Packing
The equipment should be suitably packed & crated to protect it from any damage during
shipment, transit and storage at site. The packing shall be sea worthy. For transport purposes
the cold box shall be provided with adequate temporary removable supports for the safety of
exchangers, drums and piping inside the cold box. These will be painted YELLOW.
8.0 GUARANTEE
Supplier shall guarantee the complete system including all components, sub assemblies,
bought outs etc. for design, material selection, workmanship, material quality and
performance. Defects/short falls, if any, shall be made good by the Supplier as per General
Purchase Condition (GPC) of the requisition/order to which this specification has been
attached.
Supplier shall guarantee that all materials used in the equipment are new and have been
submitted to regular acceptance procedure & are free from any defect regarding quality, form
and appearance and compliance to various technical requirements of this requisition for a
period as per GPC.
Supplier shall also guarantee the system performance to ensure that specification is fulfilled. If
any defects or mal performance occurs during the guarantee period, the Supplier shall make all
necessary alterations, repairs, and replacements free of charge at plant site.
The guarantee shall also include the sub ordered/bought out items forming part of Supplier's
supply. Supplier shall repair/replace any part of equipment/component free of cost without
loss of time in case it is found that guaranteed parameters are not meet during any stage of
execution of project. Supplier shall carry out necessary repair, modification, replacement
within 3 months.
Review of design, drawings and other documents by the Purchaser/ EIL or release of
equipment for shipping by Inspector shall in no way release or relieve the Supplier of his
responsibility for making the supplies in accordance with all provisions of the requisition to
which this specification is annexed.
9.0 SUPPLIER DATA REQUIREMENT
9.1 Supplier data requirement shall be in accordance with the requisition/ bid document.
9.2 Supplier shall proceed with manufacture only after review of drawings and other documents.
Page 6017 of 8516

$ird fdi5eg JI
0
(\
7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR PLATE TYPE HEAT 6-15-0008 Rev. 4
PIRA riecnle 45139irm (A GON of India Undeltalang) EXCHANGERS Page 1 of 9
- Otz
ReR I l et) 14947T
FOR
PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD RK*1 SC

4 26.11.15 KJH 2
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD AKM N.DUARI
3 20.11.09 KA PK
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STD SKG
2 26.03.04 JV PK SSA
SPECIFICATION
1 8.05.89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RKA BSG VKM RCPC
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6018 of 8516

(ae, ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
5'g-ar feffi4eg INDIA LIMITED PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS 6-15-0008 Rev. 4
Rife, C1033,107139;11.1) P. Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
API : American Petroleum Institute
ASTM : American Society for Testing & Materials
BQ : Boiler Quality
CS : Carbon Steel
IS : Indian Standards
ISO : International Orgnaisation for Standardisation
PMI : Positive Material Identification
PPM : Parts Per Million
UST Ultrasonic Examination
WRC : Welding Research Council
Convenor : Mr. R. K. Trivedi
Members : Mr K. J. Hari Narayanan

Mr K. Anjaneyulu
Mr Arun Kumar
Mr Tarun Kumar
Mr Anish Trehan
Page 6019 of 8516

ige_11 Rift INDIA LIMITED PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS 6 15 0008 Rev. 4
- -
(awn rirmre trn.svoni, IA Gov( of India Undertaking)

Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
3.0 CODES 4
4.0 DESIGN 4
5.0 MATERIALS 6
6.0 SPARES 8
7.0 TESTING 8
8.0 INSPECTION 8
9.0 PROTECTION AND DESPATCH 9
10.0 GUARANTEE 9
11.0 SUPPLIER DATA REQUIREMENT 9
Page 6020 of 8516

ziel" t ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
Ogem Rift 14.1I-e-et erase 4513.721571,
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India undeltakm
PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS 6-15-0008 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 9
1.0 SCOPE
This Specification defines minimum general requirements governing design, materials,

fabrication, inspection, testing, drawing & documentation and packing of Plate heat
exchangers.
2.0 GENERAL
In order to receive due consideration, Supplier shall quote in strict accordance with this and
other applicable codes/specifications. Alternatives may be submitted at the option of the
Supplier, provided such alternatives are clearly indicated and quoted as additions or
deductions to the basic bid.
3.0 CODES
The latest editions of below mentioned standards / codes shall be complied:
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Sec. VIII Div. 1.

Equipment outside the formal scope of the ASME Code because of size or pressure
rating shall conform to Code requirements and this specification. However, Code
stamp is not required
API 662 / ISO 15547
ASME Section II Part A, C, D Materials
ASME Section V Non Destructive examination
ASME Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualification
ASME B1.1 Screw threads
ASME B16.5 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings.
ASME B16.11 Forged Steel fittings, Socket Welding 7 Threaded.
WRC 107 and WRC 297
4.0 DESIGN
4.1 General
4.1.1 The heat exchanger unit shall consist of gasketted plates supported in frame capable of being
opened and closed. The frame provides structural support and the pressure containment for the
gasketted plates and consist of fixed cover, movable cover, upper and lower carrying bars,
closing studs/nuts and carrying bars support columns.
4.1.2 The design shall be such as to enable cleaning by mechanical, chemical means or back
flushing, if possible.
4.1.3 The frame shall be designed to permit future installation of 20% additional plates.
4.1.4 The unit shall be designed for full pressure in each stream with no pressure on other stream.
4.1.5 Lifting lugs to handle the exchanger shall be provided. These shall be designed for twice the
maximum exchanger dry weight.
4.1.6 All SS or other corrosion resistant, weld deposits/cladding shall be minimum 3 mm and all SS
corrosion resistant cladding/deposit/ material welded shall be stabilized/low carbon grades.
4.1.7 All gasket-seating faces shall have weld deposits. Liners are also acceptable.
4.1.8 Design shall be such that separation of plates do not occur due to deposition of hard scales at
inlet ports.
Page 6021 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$1gar
ivireR
Ed&
010000 for annvi)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undeftaking)
Page 5 of 9
4.1.9 Wind and seismic loads shall be considered in accordance with relevant standards, unless
otherwise specified.
4.2 Process Design
4.2.1 The cleanliness factor for fouling is to be specified by Supplier.
4.2.2 CS components in contact with fluid shall have a corrosion allowance of 3 mm minimum.
4.2.3 Flow induced vibration at all specified operating conditions shall be prevented by properly
considering the effects of the fluid velocity , pressure drop, viscosity and plate support
techniques.
4.3 Heat Transfer Plates
4.3.1 The minimum thickness of plate shall be 0.6 mm.
4.3.2 Plates shall be fully supported from the top carrying bar and guided only by the bottom bar
with reinforced slots integral with the plate.
4.3.3 The plate pattern shall be such as to ensure adequate metal-to-metal plate contact points to
provide rigidity. The exchanger shall be designed with one type pattern. Care should be taken
to have good flow distribution to eliminate dead zone.
4.4 Covers
Fixed cover is the primary stationary end of the plate heat exchanger. All nozzles shall
preferably be located on fixed cover.
4.5 Carrying Bars
4.5.1 The upper carrying bar shall be welded or bolted to fixed cover and carrying bar support
column. A SS 'T' section is welded to the upper carrying bar to provide mounting member
for the plates of the plate pack. A smooth surface shall be provided for the roller bearing
carrying groove for the whole length of the carrying bar. Carrying bar shall be designed, to
support 1.5 times the weight of flooded exchanger, movable cover, tie rods, nuts and nozzles.
4.5.2 The lower carrying bar shall be either welded or bolted to fixed cover and carrying bar support
column. It shall be sheathed in stainless steel on those three surfaces in contact with the plates
and is a guide bar only, for the plates.
4.6 Tie Bar, Studs & Nuts
4.6.1 The closing studs and nuts bearing against fixed and movable cover close the gasketted plate
pack. The end support plate and movable head shall be designed to allow packing of plate
assembly by means of the torque wrench.
4.6.2 Slotted holes for the tie bars shall be uniformly distributed around the periphery of the covers.
The slot shoulders shall be spot faced.
4.6.3 Min. diameter of rod bars shall be 19mm. Nuts with washers shall be provided at both ends.
4.7 Gasket
4.7.1 Gaskets shall be provided to contain the liquids between plates and to separate the liquids
where they flow through the headers formed by the holes or ports in the plates when plates are
assembled in a plate pack. Gaskets shall be single piece and shall be compressed to achieve
Page 6022 of 8516

101 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
agfeg INDIA LIMITED PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS 6-15-0008 Rev. 4
WWI tnernieiniJairso (A Govt of India Undenaking)
Page 6 of 9
metal-to-metal contact between plates. Gasket and gasket grooves shall be designed to
facilitate positioning of plates.
4.7.2 An adhesive compound compatible with the gasket material and having a thickness to ensure
bond strength between plates and gaskets shall be applied to the plate gasket groove surface.
Gasket plate surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by means of solvent cleaning or
electropolishing or any other suitable means (sand blasting shall not be used) sand blasting
and dried before application of adhesive. Emery cloth or abrasive powder shall not be used to
clean out gasket groove.
4.7.3 All gaskets shall be identical except, end plates and head.
4.7.4 Relieving grooves shall be provided in the outside gasket in those locations where internal
gasket also is used to avoid cross contamination of liquid without external evidence.
4.7.5 Portholes not feeding passes between plates shall be fully gasketted and vented to the
atmosphere.
4.8 Nozzles
4.8.1 The nozzles shall be flanged and projected type with a provision of a flanged 1'/2" connection
on each nozzle blinded with studs and nuts and gaskets. Integral flanges are also acceptable.
4.8.2 Design should be such as to provide venting & draining of each stream through main nozzles.
4.8.3 Nozzles on movable cover shall be provided with 90° long radius elbow to facilitate opening
of plate pack without disturbing piping.
4.8.4 The nozzle size shall be equal to the size given in Process datasheet/P&ID. Where different
size is required by Supplier, then Supplier shall provide reducer / expander as applicable.
4.8.5 All process nozzles connected to piping shall be designed for nozzle loads given in the
requisition. If not provided in the requisition, nozzle loads as given in API 662 shall be
applied. Local load analysis of process nozzles and nozzle junction shall be carried out as per
WRC 107 and WRC 297.
4.9 Foundation Loads
4.9.1 All parameters required for design of support such as wind shear and moment at base, size,
number and locations of anchor bolt, erection weight, operating weight, hydrotest weight etc
shall be furnished by bidder.
4.10 Torquing of Bolts
4.10.1 If torquing of bolts is required, Supplier shall provide torquing procedure.
5.0 MATERIALS
5.1 Plates
5.1.1 CS BQ plates shall be SA 516 or better.
5.1.2 The carbon content of CS BQ plates shall not exceed 0.23%.
5.1.3 CS BQ plates to specification SA 516 shall be in the normalized condition.
5.1.4 Plates having thickness 16 mm to 50mm (both inclusive) shall be UST as per SA 435.
Page 6023 of 8516

o'ilfReiel ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
tal5leg
1.11on c-fraw 4171
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Unde ,takmg)
Page 7 of 9
5.1.5 For thickness above 50mm, UST shall be carried out as per SA 578 with acceptance standard
of level-B. UST shall be done after the specified heat treatment of plates.
5.1.6 CS plates above 50mm in thickness shall also meet the following additional requirements:
i. Vacuum treatment as per the supplementary requirement S1 of SA-20.
ii. Charpy V-notch test as per the supplementary requirement S5 specification SA-20.
Test temperature and
Acceptance Criteria: As per table A2.15 of SA20.
Orientation of test bar: Transverse to the direction of rolling.
5.1.7 SS plates shall be to SA 480 specification. All SS plates shall be either hot rolled annealed and
pickled and shall have No.1 finish on both sides or cold rolled with 2B finish.
5.1.8 Plates representative of each heat shall be intergranular corrosion tested as per ASTM A-262
practice E or EN ISO 3651-2A for all 300 series SS materials.
5.2 Forgings
5.2.1 Flanges shall be forged weld neck type.
5.2.2 CS forgings shall be SA-105 or better for nozzle flanges and SA-266 Cl. II or IV or better for
other pressure forgings.
5.2.3 The carbon content of CS forgings shall not exceed 0.23%.
5.3 Pipes
5.3.1 The pipes shall be seamless.
5.3.2 The CS pipes shall be SA-106 or better.
5.3.3 The carbon content of CS pipes shall not exceed 0.23%.
5.4 Gaskets
5.4.1 Suitable material for the gasket shall be used and the same shall be specified in the bid.
Supplier shall indicate in his bid his experience with the proposed gasket material in similar
service conditions.
5.4.2 Supplier shall indicate the anticipated life of the proposed gasket in the specified service and
in storage. Special requirements for gasket storage to maintain gasket shelf life shall be
specified.
5.5 Bolting
Bolting shall consist of continuously threaded bolts conforming to ASTM A 193-B7 with nuts
in accordance with ASTM A 194-2H, unless otherwise specified.
5.6 Materials for Non-Pressure Parts
a. CS materials for non-pressure parts welded to pressure parts shall be BQ CS.

b. CS materials for non-pressure parts not welded to pressure parts shall be SA-
283/tested quality or equivalent.
Page 6024 of 8516

Egfeu
larteA eiverre as Jam-A)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov( 01 India Undedakingi
Page 8 of 9
5.7 Name plate

Each equipment shall be provided with a SS name plate which shall be attached by SS rivets
to CS (5 thick) bracket welded to cover. Letters shall be stamped & shall include project,
Purchaser, equipment number, fluids circulated, design pressure, design temperature,
hydraulic test pressure, corrosion allowance, equipment weight empty and full of liquid and
other relevant data. Size and font of letters shall be 60 points on Verdana Bold.
6.0 SPARES
6.1 Following shall be supplied as mandatory spares, unless otherwise specified. Supplier shall
include the cost of mandatory spares in the base price:
400% nozzle gaskets

20% studs/nuts with minimum 4 studs/8 nuts for nozzles.
6.2 Unless otherwise specified following commissioning Spares shall be provided by Supplier
where gaskets are in Supplier's scope and cost to be included in base price:
Gaskets — 100%
6.3 Two sets of any special tools required for maintenance and operation of this equipment e.g.
torque wrench shall be supplied by Supplier. The list of such special tools will be furnished
along-with bid. Cost of same shall be included in base price.
6.4 Supplier shall advise on the desirability of the optional extra spares in addition to quantities
indicated above for two years of operation and maintenance.
7.0 TESTING
7.1 After completion of assembly, equipment shall be given hydro test at test pressure limits
(differential pressure) for 30 minutes minimum. Also the mechanical strength of the frame
shall be tested by raising the pressure on both sides equivalent to test pressure (1.3 times the
design pressure). No leakage or distortion shall be permitted.
7.2 Minimum water temperature for hydro testing shall not be lower than 15°C (60°F).
7.3 The chloride content in water for hydro testing shall not exceed 25 PPM when the exchanger
contains solid or lined SS.
8.0 INSPECTION
8.1 Exchanger shall be inspected during fabrication and upon final completion to ensure the
compliance of codes, specifications and attachments.
8.2 All materials and accessories required for the fabrication of the Plate Heat Exchanger shall be
supplied by the Supplier unless otherwise stated.
8.3 All materials procured from outside India shall be inspected by reputed Third Party Inspection
agency and the cost of the Inspection Agency shall be borne by Supplier. Mill test certificates
alone shall not be sufficient.
8.4 PMI shall be preformed for alloy materials as per EIL standard specification 6-81-0001.
8.5 The complete exchanger shall be trial assembled at shop. Dimensions and alignment check
shall be conducted and results recorded.
Page 6025 of 8516

or-iiia..ielENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$1aell acsINDIA LIMITED PLATE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGERS 6-15-0008 Rev. 4
I .tool ,ircofr =Joao,/ (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 9 of 9
9.0 PROTECTION AND DESPATCH
9.1 After final hydro test the equipment shall be drained, dried and cleaned thoroughly of all
grease, loose scale, rust, flux and weld spatter both internally and externally.
9.2 All flange opening shall be provided with steel covers 3mm thick with minimum 8-5/16"
bolting to protect during shipment.
9.3 Each tapped boss shall be provided with forged steel plug at least 76 mm (3 inch) long. Plug
shall be of same material as boss. Each reinforcing pad test hole shall be fitted with plug.
9.4 Each exchanger shall be individually crated in entirety to prevent damage during shipment,
transit and storage at site.
10.0 GUARANTEE
Unless otherwise specified in General Purchase Conditions (GPC) regarding guarantee, the
following shall govern:
The Supplier shall guarantee the equipment for design, materials, workmanship and specified
performance for a period as specified in GPC. Defects/short falls, if any, shall be made good
by the Supplier at his cost by repair and/or replacement without any delay.
11.0 SUPPLIER DATA REQUIREMENT
The fabrication drawings and other documents shall be submitted in accordance with the
requisition/bid document. EIL's review of documents shall not relieve Supplier of his
responsibility in any manner.
Page 6026 of 8516

Page 6027 of 8516
Page 6028 of 8516
Page 6029 of 8516
Page 6030 of 8516
Page 6031 of 8516
Page 6032 of 8516
Page 6033 of 8516
Page 6034 of 8516
Page 6035 of 8516
Page 6036 of 8516
Page 6037 of 8516
Page 6038 of 8516
Page 6039 of 8516
Page 6040 of 8516
Page 6041 of 8516
Page 6042 of 8516
Page 6043 of 8516
Page 6044 of 8516
Page 6045 of 8516
Page 6046 of 8516
Page 6047 of 8516
Page 6048 of 8516
Page 6049 of 8516
Page 6050 of 8516
Page 6051 of 8516
Page 6052 of 8516
Page 6053 of 8516
Page 6054 of 8516
Page 6055 of 8516
Page 6056 of 8516
Page 6057 of 8516
Page 6058 of 8516
Page 6059 of 8516
Page 6060 of 8516
Page 6061 of 8516
Page 6062 of 8516
d01
1faeit4 ENGINEERS FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC
*`'ae.e Rift W INDIA LIMITED FANS USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6-15-0072 Rev. 3
(A Gout of India Undertakvt9)
EXCHANGERS Page 1 of 8
cbc,cr.s
1*-4T Ry-r4;k.s mir*.dcb ttzt

ReR Hilcr) fq-f4k7r

FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT
EXCHANGERS
_
;It/
3 23.09.2017 SK WJH RKT RN
SPECIFICATION
2. 03.05.2011 KA RKT AKM/SC DM
1 20.07.2006 DB PK AKM VJN
0 25.01.2001 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION HN PK RKA MI
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6063 of 8516

1 ENGINEERS FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
tifjleg
Og2:1 INDIA LIMITED USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6-15-0072 Rev. 3
MR', cleave MT 3,1271.1) fa Govt of India Undettalongt
Abbreviations:

BS : British Standard
ISO : International Organisation for Standardisation

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Page 6064 of 8516

t±1 aftENGNEERS FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
ligem*Peg \ NV
- INDIA LIMITED
1.IE7Y 212M17 +ELAM., )
USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6 15 0072 Rev. 3
- -
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 CODES 4
3.0 DESIGN 4
4.0 MATERIALS 5
5.0 MANUFACTURING 5
6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM ... 5
7.0 TESTING 6
8.0 INSPECTION 7
9.0 DATA INTERFACING 8
10.0 SPARES 8
Page 6065 of 8516

Ogar 0151-eg
ImRA 41TA2 anJoirA)
S ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Unde(taking)
FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6-15-0072 Rev. 3
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of fibre reinforced plastic fans to be
used for forced draft air-cooled heat exchangers supplied as per API 661.
This specification shall not be considered as limiting and it shall be Vendor's responsibility
to comply with all requirements of Requisition or Bid documents to which it is annexed.
In case Licensor's specification is also attached with Requisition or Bid documents, it shall
normally govern. However in event of conflict between this specification and Licensor's
specification, normally stringent of the two shall govern. It shall be the duty of the Vendor to
resolve this conflict prior to taking up the manufacture.
2.0 CODES
2.1 API 661, Seventh Edition, July 2013 - Air-cooled Heat Exchangers for Refinery Service.
3.0 DESIGN
3.1 The fans shall be high efficiency fans based on the Best Available Technology (BAT).
3.2 Design and selection shall be done using established computerised design and selection tools
and shall be based on data determined using wind tunnel testing or actual test rigs.
3.3 Design output shall indicate the allowable deflection of the blade established on model
testing. These shall be given at each point to be loaded as per the LOAD SIMULATION
TEST (Refer para 7.2.3 below).
3.4 The natural frequency of the fan and fan components shall meet requirements of API 661
para 7.2.3.14. Vendor shall guarantee that there shall be no vibration in the fan components.
3.5 The calculated stress of blades and hub shall be less than the fatigue stress determined as per
para 7.1.1 below.
3.6 The fan tip speed shall not exceed 60 meters per second. Noise limitations (refer para 3.7
below) may require lower speeds.
3.7 Noise level -The fans shall be designed for 85 dB (A) maximum sound pressure level at 1 m
below the fan, also keeping in mind the overall limits specified for the air cooler. The design
and fan selection software should be able to calculate sound pressure level in dB (A) at any
distance from the fan and also be capable of calculating sound level with many fans of same
supplier under simultaneous operation in the vicinity. Vendor shall guarantee these sound
levels.
3.8 The fan assembly shall be designed to prevent reverse flow at the hub.
3.9 Flanged bushing of minimum 9 mm thickness shall be provided for attachment to fan shaft.
3.10 The fan selection at design conditions shall meet requirements of API 661 para 7.2.1.7.
3.11 Auto variable pitch fans shall comply with the following:
a) Pneumatic actuator shall be equipped with a positioner. Each actuator shall have an
integral positioner mechanism and mechanical maximum and minimum stops,
adjustable over the full range. Exposed actuator shafts shall be chrome protected.
Each actuator shall be provided with flexible hose (s), terminating in a 1/4" NPT
Page 6066 of 8516

401 4_1 aft ENGINEERS FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
Ogeir tatireg VW INDIA LIMITED USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6-15-0072 Rev. 3
Imre, eigeng anailaral) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
screwed female connection. The actuators shall be suitable for an air supply pressure
of 9.5 kg/cm2(g) design, 7 kg/cm 2(g) normal and 2.5 kg/cm 2 (g) minimum. Purchaser
will specify the exact air supply pressure. Any pressure reduction system on the
supply air, if required, shall be in Vendor's scope.
b) In case of loss of supply air pressure or control signal, the blades shall lock at
maximum airflow position unless specified otherwise. In the event that the fan fails
to respond in this manner, means shall be included by the Vendor to physically lock
the blades in high pitch position. Auto variable pitch fans to be shop adjusted for
variation between zero performance and design pitch required. Positioner to be
supplied and set for full signal pressure range. Signal pressure for auto variable fan
shall be 0.2 to 1.0 kg/cm 2 (g) for design flow to zero flow unless specified otherwise.
Motor rating (in kW) to be selected based on the airflow at design pitch. Provide one
TIP converter per item, unless specified otherwise. One volume booster shall be
provided for each auto-variable fan.
c) Hub and fan assemblies employing lubricated joints shall be designed to minimise
lubrication maintenance through use of bearings not requiring periodic
re-lubrication.
4.0 MATERIALS
4.1 All materials shall be new. Recycled or reprocessed materials shall not be used.
4.2 The glass fibre fabric shall meet the requirements of IS 11273, IS 11320, IS 11551 or BS
3496, BS 3691, BS 3749 or equivalent.
4.3 The selected resin shall be based on proven track record and meet the performance and
properties requirements for the service intended.
4.4 The material of hub parts shall be Aluminum, Stainless Steel or Carbon Steel. Carbon Steel
materials shall be hot dip galvanised as per ASTM Al23, A143, A153, A384, A385 or zinc
plated as per ASTM B633 requirement for type LS coating.
5.0 MANUFACTURING
5.1 The blades shall be made by a mechanised process in order to ensure a quality product. Hand
lay-up or spray up moulding processes are not acceptable.
5.2 The leading edge of the blades shall be provided with additional protection to prevent
leading edge erosion.
5.3 Anti static coating - The blades shall be provided with an established, well proven antistatic
coating of conductive paint of thickness 25 microns (minimum) so as to make the blade
conductive and meet the requirements of para 7.2.1 (h) below.
6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM
6.1 Fan manufacturer shall have a written down quality system and this shall also specify the
sampling frequency and the acceptable limits for the following:
a) Ends and picks per unit length of the glass fibre fabric.
b) Resin content.
c) Resin viscosity and density
Page 6067 of 8516

(./1 jei ENGINEERS FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
Ogee MiegNOVINDIA LIMITED USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6-15-0072 Rev. 3
laar,, ?wove =mom) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
d) Mixing ratio of resin components.
e) Glass content in laminate.
fl Lay-up pattern of fiberglass weaves.
g) Hardness check on blades to ensure proper curing.
7.0 TESTING
The tests and inspections outlined in this specification are minimum and shall be carried out
for quality assurance and for job records. However the specified tests shall not prohibit the
Vendor from making additional tests or inspections to establish or improve quality. Results
of the additional tests or inspections shall be reported for records.
7.1 Model Testing
7.1.1 Fatigue stress limits shall be established by any of the following:
a) Fatigue testing shall be done on sample blades by applying a sinusoidal load

superimposed on a static load. The stress levels at the most critical sections of the
blade and hub are to be monitored. The stress vs cycle plot shall be generated by
testing several blades at different load levels and fatigue limit shall be determined.
b) Sample blades shall be tested to destruction under static load and the breaking stress
calculated. A minimum safety factor of 10 shall be applied to this stress to arrive at
the fatigue limit.
7.1.2 Natural frequency of blades shall be experimentally determined for the entire range of blades
using an accelerometer and a vibration analyzer. The computer program output for natural
frequency shall be authenticated based on these data.
7.1.3 As a minimum, scaled model testing shall be done in wind tunnel to generate non-
dimensional characteristics of the fan performance curves. Derating shall be done to account
for the influence of tip clearance, aerodynamic disturbances, inlet shape etc. The curves
generated by computer software shall be updated based on these experimental curves and
derating factors. Sound level measurements shall also be conducted during model testing and
the software for sound level calculation shall be updated based on these results.
7.2 Production Testing
7.2.1 Test coupons of the laminates shall be prepared by the same process as used for the
production. One testing shall be done for every blade model per order. The tests shall meet
the following requirements:
a) Tensile strength shall be determined as per BS 2782, Method 1003 or equivalent.

Minimum acceptable value is 2000 kg/cmz.
b) Flexural strength shall be determined as per BS 2782, Method 1005 or equivalent.

Minimum acceptable value is 2000 kg/cm2 .
c) Inter laminate shear strength shall be determined as per ASTM D952 or

equivalent. Minimum acceptable value is 100 kg/cm 2.
Page 6068 of 8516

‘311aeiel (ft ENGINEERS FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
*1 it INDIA LIMITED USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6-15-0072 Rev. 3
tamer, eyeare +rung.° (A Govt 01 We Undertaking)
d) Modulus of elasticity shall be determined as per BS 2782, Method 320A or

equivalent. Minimum acceptable value is 80,000 kg/cm2 .
e) Elongation as per BS 2782, Method 320A or equivalent. Minimum acceptable value

is 4%.
0 Water absorption shall be tested as per ASTM D570 or equivalent. Maximum

acceptable value shall be 2%.
g) Minimum heat distortion temperature shall be 60°C for forced draft fans.
h) Surface resistivity shall be determined in accordance with BS 2782: Part 2 method

203A or IS 3396. Two specimens shall be used and the surface resistivity of both
specimens shall be reported. Both specimens shall have surface resistivity less than
1x108 ohms; otherwise the material shall be rejected.
7.2.2 Light impact test shall be done on each blade using a load of minimum 15 grams to check
for homogeneity of the composite structure. No variation in the sound shall be noticed while
tapping the complete blade surface.
7.2.3 Load Simulation Test: Three times the maximum anticipated loads (i.e. centrifugal forces,
aerodynamic loads, self weight etc.) shall be simulated on each blade by loading the blade at
discrete locations along the full length. The blade shall be observed for crack, fracture and
permanent deformation. Deflection at the load points and tip shall be measured and shall be
within acceptable limits as defined in the quality assurance system.
7.2.4 Fan blades and assembly shall be balanced as per requirements of API 661 para 7.2.3.7 and
7.2.3.8. Balancing shall be according to ISO 1940 with balance quality grade G6.3 or better.
8.0 INSPECTION
8.1 The authorised inspector shall review the following:
a) Test reports on raw materials like fibre, resin.
b) Test certificates of all metallic parts including hub parts.
c) Quality Assurance manual. The inspector shall also verify whether the internal
inspection has been carried out as laid out in the Quality Assurance manual.
8.2 The authorised inspector shall witness the following:
a) Tests for mechanical properties as per para 7.2.1 (a) to (g) above.
b) Surface resistivity test as per para 7.2.1. (h) above. If a reputed third party laboratory
performs the test, then the inspector may waive off the witnessing of this test.
c) Load simulation test on each blade as per para 7.2.3 above.
d) Balancing of blade and hub as per API 661.
8.3 Final dimensional check shall be witnessed by the authorised inspector.
Page 6069 of 8516

101 eit4 FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC FANS
(ge_ji 04ft vv. INDIA LIMITED
OWN eiWnfeo.J,TO.1) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
USED IN AIR COOLED HEAT 6-15-0072 Rev. 3
9.0 DATA INTERFACING
9.1 Air cooler vendor shall furnish the following to the fan manufacturer:
a) Fan diameter, airflow required at design ambient temperature, static pressure,

minimum motor rating (kW), limitation of fan speed.
b) Site conditions giving fan elevation above sea level, design ambient temperature,
minimum ambient temperature.
c) Limitation of size of the inlet cone and fan ring, inlet obstruction details, type of
plenum (box or conical).
d) Limitation of sound level from fan and the arrangement of fans in the bay.
e) Minimum shaft size in the bushing.
0 Type of fans required (Manually adjustable or Auto variable pitch).
g) For auto variable pitch fans, the control air supply pressure (design, normal and
minimum).
9.2 Fan manufacturer shall furnish the following:
a) The characteristic fan performance curves along with shaft power at design ambient
and minimum ambient temperatures.
b) Confirmation of fan diameter for airflow, static pressure, motor rating etc.
c) Fan noise datasheet as per API 661. For many fans located in one bank of air
coolers, the noise level shall consider all fans in operation.
d) Fan assembly drawing indicating all materials of construction, bush details, etc.
e) The inlet cone details and inlet obstruction details considered for design of the fan.
t) For auto variable pitch fans, detailed drawing along with all the features and
materials of construction.
g) Instructions for installation, operation and maintenance.
h) The results of production tests done as per para 7.2.1 and 7.2.3 above.
10.0 SPARES
10.1 Fan manufacturer shall supply the following spares unless specified otherwise:
a) One blade per type and size.
b) One set of clamping bolts per fan.
c) For auto variable pitch fans, spares recommended for the auto variable pitch
arrangement.
d) Spares for two years operation and maintenance
Page 6070 of 8516

01'4216a ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
Sig2:11€01-du Ni101 INDIA LIMITED SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
eo,gezill,A1911 IA Gov't of India uneenatng)
STEEL Page 1 of 12
1 4 €€ 141 1 4 I I KOR
-1 -
TAM€ ch I 1 tzi 4(11d

Th g reibi m
SPECIFICATION
FOR
DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
414 44 #6daAr_
07.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD
1 SPECIFICATION SKM SG PPL DM
0 28.12.04 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SG VRK KKM SKG
Standards Standards
Rev. Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Page 6071 of 8516

ILi1Prire? ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
5g-elkreg) INDIA LIMITED
IP Govt of India Underlakingi SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
ABS : American Bureau of Shipping

BV : Bureau Veritas
CEIL : Certification Engineers International Limited
CPI : Chemical Process Industry
CSC : Chloride Stress Cracking
DNV : Det Norske Veritas
DSS : Duplex Stainless Steel
HAZ : Heat Affected Zone
ISO : International Organization for Standardization
MSS : Manufacturers Standardization Society
NACE : National Association of Corrosion Engineers
PREN : Pitting Resistance Equivalent Number
SDSS : Super Duplex Stainless Steel
SSC : Sulphide Stress Cracking
SMMS Standards Committee:
Convener: Mr. PP Lahiri
Members: Mr. A Amin

Mr. GS Hegde
Mr. R Chaudhury
Mr. S Ghosal
Mr. P Saha
Mr. R Nanda (Piping)
Mr. AK Gupta (HMTD)
Mr. S Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. R Muthulingam (Inspection)
Mr. Raj Kishore (Pipeline)
Mr. AR Purushottam (POSD)
Mr. MP Jain (Projects)
Page 6072 of 8516

lalfaeldia ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
bfba-fir OIRes NW INDIA LIMITED
Govl of India lffideftlion9) SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
6-79-0015 Rev. 1
STEEL Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 STEEL MANUFACTURE 5
4.0 HEAT TREATMENT 5
5.0 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR DSS AND SDSS 5
6.0 PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR MILL / MANUFACTURER 8
7.0 CORROSION TESTS FOR PRE-QUALIFICATION 9
8.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTION TESTING 11
9.0 QUALITY SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION 12
10.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED 12
Page 6073 of 8516

ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
s'g7galeg W INDIA UMITED 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
(A Gave DI i,tea UndellakON SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 4 of 12
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the specific requirements for manufacture, inspection, testing and
supply of duplex stainless steels conforming to UNS No.(s) S 31803, S 32205 or equivalent
and super duplex stainless steel conforming to UNS No.(s) S 32760, S 32750, S 39274, S
32550, J 93380 or equivalent. DSS and SDSS material shall be considered acceptable when
they meet the pre-qualification criteria mentioned in this specification.
1.2 This specification shall be read together with the corresponding product specifications
mentioned in the relevant piping material specifications or the equipment data sheets/design
drawings intended to be used in sour and/or chloride containing environments, as applicable.
1.3 In case of conflict between this specification and the referred material codes/standard
specifications, the requirement of this specification shall govern.
The manufacture, inspection, testing, marking and supply of the item covered by this
specification shall follow the latest editions of the following codes and standard specifications:
ASTM A 182 Forged or rolled alloy steel pipe, flanges, forged fittings and valves and
parts for high temperature service
ASTM A 240 Heat resisting chromium and chromium - nickel stainless steel plate, sheet
and strip for pressure vessels
ASTM A 276 Stainless steel bars and shapes
ASTM A 351 Casting - austenitic, austenitic-ferritic (duplex) for pressure containing
parts
ASTM A 370 Standard methods and definitions for mechanical testing of steel
ASTM A 743 Castings - iron-chromium-nickel-base corrosion resistant, for general
application
ASTM A 744 Casting - iron-chromium-nickel-base corrosion resistant, for severe
application
ASTM A 789 Seamless and welded ferritic/austenitic stainless steel tubing for general
service
ASTM A 790 Seamless and welded ferritic- austenitic stainless steel pipe
ASTM A 799 Steel castings-stainless instrument calibration for estimating ferrite
content
ASTM A 815 Wrought ferritic, ferritic-austenitic and martensitic stainless steel pipe
fittings
ASTM A 923 Standard test methods for detecting detrimental intermetallic phase in
wrought duplex austenitic/ferritic stainless steels
ASTM A 928 Specification for ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steel pipe electric
fusion welded with addition of filler metal
ASTM E 18 Rockwell hardness testing of metallic materials
ASTM E 562 Determining volume fraction by systematic manual point count
ASTM G 36 Performing stress corrosion cracking tests in a boiling magnesium
chloride
ASTM G 48 Standard test methods for pitting and crevice corrosion resistance of
stainless steels and related alloys by use of ferric chloride solution
ASME B 16.34 Valves- flanged, threaded, and welding end
ASME Sec.V Non-destructive examination
MSS-SP-55 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
Standard — Quality Standard for Steel Castings for valves, flanges, and
fittings and other components (visual method)
Page 6074 of 8516

51. Et2eGlit
1510 zi ah ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
(A Govt ol moa unaeoakingi SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 5 of 12
NACE MR0175/ Petroleum and natural gas industries-Materials for use in H2S-containing
ISO 15156 environments in oil and gas production:
Part 1: General principles for selection of cracking-resistant materials
Part 3: Cracking-resistant CRAs (corrosion-resistant alloys) and other alloys
NACE MR0103 Material resistant to Sulfide Stress Cracking in corrosive petroleum
refining environments
NACE TM0177 Laboratory testing of metals for resistance to sulfide stress cracking and
stress corrosion cracking in H2 S environments
SNT-TC-1A Personnel qualification and certification of nondestructive testing
personnel, American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
3.0 STEEL MANUFACTURE
3.1 The steel shall be manufactured / produced by the following or as specified in the applicable
material specification:
3.1.1 The steel shall be made by one of the following primary steel making processes:
- electric arc furnace,

- electric induction furnace.
3.1.2 The steel shall be subjected to tertiary steel refining treatments such as vacuum oxygen
decarburization (VOD)/ argon oxygen decarburization (ACID), and vacuum arc degassing
(VAD) to minimize dissolved gas contents, inclusions content and to meet the chemical
composition with close tolerances.
4.0 HEAT TREATMENT
4.1 Duplex Stainless Steel (DSS)
All the finished product forms shall be solution annealed by holding it at 1020-1100°C
followed by a fast cooling procedure. The duration of homogenizing treatment is dependent on
the product forms and thickness, but shall be not less than 20 minutes per 25 mm of thickness.
For product thickness is less than or equal to 10 mm, forced air cooling shall be carried out
while for thickness greater than 10 mm, water quenching shall be carried out. All hot
working/forging operations shall be carried out within a temperature range of 1020-1100°C.
No hot working/forging operations shall take place at temperature less than 1020°C.
4.2 Super Duplex Stainless Steel (SDSS)
All the finished product forms shall be supplied in solution annealed condition. The product
shall be homogenized at 1050-1120°C followed by a fast cooling procedure. The duration of
homogenizing treatment is dependent on the product forms and thickness, but shall be not less
than 20 minutes per 25 mm of thickness. For product thickness is less than or equal to 10 mm,
forced air cooling shall be carried out while for thickness greater than 10 mm, water
quenching shall be carried out. All hot working/forging operations shall be carried out within
a temperature range of 1050-1120°C. No hot working/forging operations shall take place at
temperature less than 1050°C.
5.0 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR DSS AND SDSS
5.1 Chemical Composition
Chemical composition of DSS and SDSS shall be as per Clause Nos. 5.1.1 and 5.1.2
respectively.
Page 6075 of 8516

ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
5g:zrr W.aG
, IA Govt of India Undettaongl SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 6 of 12
5.1.1 DSS
Element Wt%
Carbon (C) 0.03 (max.)

Manganese (Mn) 2.0 (max.)
Silicon (Si) 1.0 (max.)
Sulphur (S) 0.02 (max.)
Phosphorus (P) 0.03 (max.)
Chromium (Cr) 21.00 - 23.00
Nickel (Ni) 4.50 - 6.50
Molybdenum (Mo) 2.5 - 3.50
Nitrogen (N) 0.15 - 0.20
Copper (Cu) 0.50 (max.)
Tungsten (W) 0.50 (max.)
5.1.2 SDSS
Element Wt%
Carbon (C) 0.03 (max.)

Manganese (Mn) 1.0 (max.)
Silicon (Si) 1.0 (max.)
Sulphur (S) 0.2 (max.)
Phosphorus (P) 0.3 (max.)
Chromium (Cr) 24.0 - 27.0
Nickel (Ni) 6.0 - 8.0
Molybdenum (Mo) 3.5 - 4.5
Nitrogen (N) 0.20 - 0.35
Copper (Cu) 0.75 (max.)
Tungsten (W) 1.00 (max.)
5.1.3 If any other elements are proposed to be added, such proposals shall be submitted to Company
for specific written approval. Copper (Cu) and Tungsten (W) additions exceeding the limits as
specified above shall be acceptable, provided the weldability and freedom from undesirable
metallurgical constituents are ensured.
5.2 Pitting Resistance Equivalent Number (PREN)
5.2.1 PREN shall be calculated by the following formula:
PREN = % Cr + 3.3 x (%Mo) + 16x (% N)
5.2.2 PREN for DSS
The pitting resistance equivalent number of the duplex stainless steel materials shall be greater
than 35, when calculated as mentioned in Clause No.5.2.1.
5.2.3 PREN for SDSS
The pitting resistance equivalent number of the super duplex stainless steel materials shall be
greater than 40, when calculated as mentioned in Clause No. 5.2.1.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL -All rights reserved
Page 6076 of 8516

15irdzIellft ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
Sg-Lit la2egiiiVINDIA LIMITED 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
EA Got of India Undertaking) SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 7 of 12
5.3 Microstructure
5.3.1 DSS
The duplex stainless steel shall have approximately equal proportions of austenite and ferrite
phases and the ferrite content shall be in the range of 40-55% in the austenite-ferrite matrix.
5.3.2 SDSS
For super duplex stainless steel, the ferrite content shall be in the range of 35-55% in the
austenite-ferrite matrix.
5.3.3 Ferrite content measurement for DSS and SDSS material shall be carried out for each heat by
metallography method in accordance with ASTM E 562.
In case ferrite-scope is expected to be used during fabrication/erection for the ferrite

measurement, then the testing at shop shall be carried out by the ferrite-scope also, and the
correlation between the results from the two methods shall be established for future use.
5.3.4 For DSS and SDSS products, either in the as-supplied condition, solution annealed condition,
or in the as welded condition, the microstructure shall not reveal the presence of any carbide
or any intermetallic phases to the extent that are detrimental to the toughness and corrosion
resistance of the material. The detection of the detrimental intermetallic phases in the wrought
products shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM A 923. The intermetallic phases shall
not be more than 1%.
S4 Mechanical Properties
5.4.1 DSS and SDSS
The material in the solution-annealed condition shall conform to the mechanical properties
such as ultimate tensile strength, 0.2% & 1% offset yield strength, % elongation, hardness
applicable for the respective UNS No. of the material. The tensile test shall be carried out as
per ASTM A 370.
The hardness test method shall be in accordance with ASTM E 18. If any other methods
including portable hardness tester are to be deployed for checking production welds, then the
correlation between the qualification method and the production method shall be established
and the calibration graph shall be generated for use at the field/shop.
5.4.2 Impact energy (Charpy V-notch) for DSS and SDSS
The impact test shall be carried out as per ASTM A 370.
Wrought materials
at 20°C 120 J (Average)/ 90 J (Minimum)
at -30°C 100 J (Average)/ 75 J (Minimum)
Cast materials
at 20°C 75 J (Average)/ 55 J (Minimum)
at -30°C 60 J (Average)/ 40 J (Minimum)
Page 6077 of 8516

SPECIFICATION FOR
ti at ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
azzlErAeglIVINDIA UMFIED 6-79-0015 Rev. 1

SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 8 of 12
6.0 PRE-QUALIFICATION CRITERIA FOR MILL / MANUFACTURER
6.1 The DSS and SDSS material components shall be procured from a pre-qualified supplier. The
supplier shall be qualified for specific TINS No. for which the mill was pre-qualified. Any
change in UNS No. shall require a fresh pre-qualification.
6.1.1 Pre-Qualification Criteria for Vendors with Prior Experience Track Record
Vendors/manufacturers who have proven track record of supplying DSS and SDSS materials
for sour service and chloride containing environments in chemical process industries (CPI) to
any of the reputed operating companies/Engineering Consultants or Process Licensors such as
UOP, IFP, EXXON, BP, CHEVRON, IOCL, HPCL, BPCL, and EIL shall be considered as
`pre-qualified vendors/manufacturers', on production of the relevant Purchase Orders and test
certificates, certified by a witnessing third party inspection agency such as DNV, Lloyds, BV,
ABS, TUV, SGS, CEIL, and EIL for the conformance of the materials to the respective
materials specification of the mentioned operators / engineering consultants. For pre-qualified
vendors, Clause No.6.1.2 is not applicable.
6.1.2 Pre-Qualification Criteria for New Vendors without Track Record
A vendor who has no track record of supplying DSS and SDSS materials for sour service and
chloride containing environments in chemical process industries (CPI) to any of the reputed
engineering consultants/operators, as mentioned above in Clause No.6.1.1, shall be considered
as a new vendor. The chemical, the mechanical and all the corrosion tests shall be carried out
as mentioned in Clause Nos. 5.0, 7.0 for pre-qualification by any one of the reputed third party
inspection agencies like Lloyds, BV, CEIL, DNV, TUV, and EIL.
6.2 The corrosion tests for DSS and SDSS in accordance with the Clause No. 7.0 shall be
conducted for the pre-qualification of the manufacturers/mills.
6.3 All the tests reports including the corrosion tests shall be based upon the tests conducted on
the product specimen drawn from a single heat, and shall bear the same heat number.
6.4 In case the manufacture(s) had already conducted all the corrosion above tests on a product of
the same material in the past, and has an approved quality assurance system in place, and the
test results are certified by a witnessing a third party inspection agency approved by the
Company, the test results shall be furnished by the bidder, along with his bid, for Company's
review.
The manufacturer(s) shall be qualified based on the satisfactory review of the submitted test
results. The Company's decision in this regard shall be final and binding on the bidder.
While selecting and procuring the duplex stainless steel and super duplex stainless steel
materials for a specific project, care shall be taken to use the same UNS No. for the entire
system. Bidder shall note that, subsequent to qualification, a change in combination of
mill/manufacturer and UNS No. shall call for a fresh qualification exercise to be conducted.
6.5 Examination for DSS and SDSS Castings
6.5.1 Visual
All castings for valves, flanges, fittings and other components of DSS and SDSS shall be
visually examined in accordance with the quality levels mentioned in MSS-SP-55. The
procedure for visual examination and the acceptance criteria shall be as per MSS-SP-55.
Format No. 8-00-0001-Fl Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 6078 of 8516

151fraegifa ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
@.ti Ciir INDIA LIMITED 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
IA Gov't of India uneenatmg) SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 9 of 12
6.5.2 Radiography
Radiography examination shall be performed on all DSS and SDSS valve castings (in
accordance with ASME B16.34 with the acceptance criteria mentioned therein) and flanges,
fittings and other components of DSS and SDSS in accordance with Article 2 of ASME
Section V. The operator's certification to SNT-TC-1A or equivalent is required.
6.5.3 Penetrant Test
Wet fluorescent penetrant examination shall be performed on the exterior and accessible
interior surfaces of all DSS and SDSS valve castings (in accordance with ASME B16.34 with
the acceptance criteria mentioned therein) and flanges, fittings and other components of DSS
and SDSS in accordance with Article 6 of ASME Section V. The operator's certification to
SNT-TC-1A or equivalent is required.
7.0 CORROSION TESTS FOR PRE-QUALIFICATION
7.1 Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) test as per Clause No. 7.2, Chloride Stress Cracking (CSC)
test as per Clause No. 7.3, Pitting Corrosion test as per Clause No. 7.4, Crevice Corrosion test
as per Clause No.7.5, are mandatory when DSS and SDSS steel materials are intended to be
used for sour service and chloride containing environments.
If DSS and SDSS materials are intended to be used for chloride containing environments only,
the SSC test as per Clause No.7.2 shall be waived off. The remaining corrosion tests specified
in this section shall be carried out for DSS and SDSS materials meant for use in the chloride
containing environments.
The corrosion tests applicable for DSS and SDSS materials shall be as furnished in the
following paragraphs:
7.2 Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) Test

7.2.1 DSS
SSC test on duplex stainless steel shall be carried out by using the following test solutions and
test conditions:
i) a) Test solution NACE TM0177

Test temperature 24° C
Stress value 350 N/mm 2
d) Acceptance criteria test sample failure at or after 720 hours.
ii) a) Test solution NACE TM0177

Test temperature 90° C
Stress value 325 N/mm2
Partial pressure of H2S 16 bars
Acceptance criteria test sample failure at or after 720 hours.
7.2.2 SDSS
The Sulphide Stress Corrosion Cracking tests on super duplex stainless steel shall be carried
out by using the following solutions and test conditions:
i) a) Test solution : NACE TM0177

Test temperature : 24° C
Stress value : 425 N/mm2
d) Acceptance criteria : test sample failure at or after 720 hours.
Page 6079 of 8516

el ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
S INDIA LIMITED
s'Ig7 Wes We' 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
(A Gait of India Untie/10mM SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 10 of 12
Test solution : NACE TM0177

Partial pressure of II2S : 16 bars
e) Acceptance criteria : test sample failure at or after 720 hours.
7.3 Chloride Stress Cracking (CSC) Test
7.3.1 DSS and SDSS
The CSC tests shall be conducted on representative specimens of DSS and SDSS, in
accordance with the testing procedure mentioned in ASTM G-36, in aerated, boiling
40% calcium chloride (CaCl 2) solution at 100°C with the pH of the solution
maintained around 6.5.
Acceptance criteria: stress to cause rupture in 500 hours shall exceed 0.85 times the
actual ultimate tensile strength values of duplex stainless steel and super duplex
stainless steel material individually.
7.4 Pitting Corrosion Test
7.4.1 DSS
The pitting corrosion test shall be conducted on the representative DSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method A, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI 3 .6 H 2 0) solution
by weight at 30°C, as well as at 50°C, for duration of 24 hours.
Acceptance criteria: no pitting shall occur on the surface of the test sample at 30°C. For
the testing at 50°C, the weight loss shall be reported to company for review.
7.4.2 SDSS
The pitting corrosion test shall be conducted on the representative SDSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method A, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI 3 .6 1420) solution
Acceptance criteria: no pitting shall occur on the surface of the test sample at 40°C. For
7.5 Crevice Corrosion Test
7.5.1 DSS
The crevice corrosion test shall be performed on the representative DSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method B, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI3 .6 H 2 0) solution
by weight, at 25°C for duration of 24 hours.
Acceptance criteria: no crevice shall form on the surface of the test sample at 25°C.
7.5.2 SDSS
a) The crevice corrosion test shall be performed on the representative SDSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method B, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI3.6 F120) solution
Page 6080 of 8516

0223E4a ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
a-9( laras W INDIA LIMITED 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
(A Govt of India Undetlaxingl SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 11 of 12
b) Acceptance criteria: no crevice shall form on the surface of the test sample at 30°C.
8.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTION TESTING
8.1 Test Samples
Separate test blanks shall be required for each process of manufacture of the finished products.
Each test sample shall receive the same working / heat treatment as the finished products it
represents.
If the test specimen cannot be taken from a finished product, then a representative test
specimen shall be taken from the same heat, heat treated in the same batch, and be subjected to
the same extent of working as the most worked section of the finished product. In case the
finished product is of welded type, then the test piece shall be so chosen as to include the
parent metal, the weld metal and the heat affected zone.
8.2 Testing Frequency
The product analysis and the mechanical properties evaluation shall be conducted strictly as
per requirements of the relevant material product specifications. Micro-structural examination,
ferrite measurement and hardness testing on the finished product, shall be carried out for one
sample per heat per method of manufacturer.
The test results shall be submitted to the Company as a part of the product documentation.
8.3 Mandatory Production Tests (First Heat)
On placement of order, a vendor who has met the pre-qualification criteria, shall carry out the
following production tests, to meet the acceptance criteria mentioned in the respective clauses.
All the following tests shall be witnessed and certified by a reputed the third party Inspection
Agency duly approved by the Company, on the first heat:
Chemical composition analysis as per Clause No.5.1

Pitting Resistance Equivalent Number as per Clause No.5.2
Microstructure examination and ferrite measurement as per Clause No.5.3
Mechanical properties evaluation as per Clause No.5.4
Visual examination on casting as per Clause No. 6.5.1
Radiography examination for casting as per Clause No.6.5.2
Wet fluorescent penetrant examination for casting as per Clause No.6.5.3.
8.4 Routine Tests
The routine testing of product of each heat shall be carried out on a regular basis, in house.
The chemical composition, the pitting resistance equivalent number, the mechanical
properties, the micro-structural examination and for casting, the visual examination, the
radiography and the wet fluorescent penetrant examinations shall conform to the requirements
specified in the respective Clauses of this specification.
Page 6081 of 8516

StilizaZleTa ENGINEERS DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL AND
strantEgItaiev INDIA LIMITED 6-79-0015 Rev. 1
A GA1 of incha Aviel410.01 SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 12 of 12
9.0 QUALITY SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION
The supplier shall perform all the tests and inspection procedures mentioned above to ensure
that the materials conform to the requirements of this specification. Company, or the
representative duly approved by the Company, shall have unhindered access to the material
being manufactured for inspection and/or witnessing the selection of test samples, the
preparation of test specimens, and the performance of tests. The company or its representative
shall have the right to indicate the pieces from which the specimens are to be drawn for
various tests. In case of any reasonable doubts regarding the quality of the product, Company
shall have the option to ask for the re-qualification of the mill at the vendor's/contractor's cost.
Inspection by the Company or its authorized representative shall not relieve the supplier of his
responsibility for ensuring the compliance of the materials supplied to this specification.
10.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
The vendors/suppliers shall submit the following records of the tests and inspection conducted
on the materials, as per the applicable Clauses mentioned in this specification, to the company
in quadruplicate:
Chemical composition analysis report

Heat treatment records and charts
Micro-structure examination and ferrite measurement reports
Mechanical properties evaluation reports
Corrosion testing results (Pre-qualification records)
Visual examination report for castings
Radiography examination report for castings
Penetrant test report for castings.
Page 6082 of 8516

SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
4.5iIlatie4ifft ENGINEERS
- 7
a' itirds W INDIA UMITED
OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
6-79-0016 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 11
STEEL
TATE chi ck tfil t'1Ic1

.n1W-fi 43141 tril Will V.
feTbr
SPECIFICATION FOR
WELDING OF
DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
AND
SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
3 14.-3G41
07.10.11 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD
1 SPECIFICATION PC SG PPL DM
0 28.12.04 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SG VRK KKM SKG
Standards Standards
No by by
Approved by
Page 6083 of 8516

aleat ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
5,gar fa5legilitiO INDIA LIMITED 6 - 79 - 0016 Rev. 1
,..,,wri,..mny ,A Gort of India Undetta NI AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
ABS : American Bureau of Shipping

BV : Bureau Veritas
CEIL : Certification Engineers International Limited
CPI : Chemical Process Industry
CSC : Chloride Stress Cracking
DNV : Det Norske Veritas
DSS : Duplex Stainless Steel
HAZ : Heat Affected Zone
PQT : Procedure Qualification Tests
PREN : Pitting Resistance Equivalent Number
SDSS : Super Duplex Stainless Steel
SSC : Sulphide Stress Cracking
Members: Mr. A Amin

Mr. GS Hegde
Mr. R Chaudhury
Mr. S Ghosal
Mr. P Saha
Mr. AK Gupta (HMTD)
Page 6084 of 8516

oaraelei oft ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
slg-ar fameg w INDIA LIMITED
,A GOA undertaking)
of (nth AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
6-79-0016 Rev. 1
(Inne'airs'-"""
STEEL Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 WELDING PROCESSES 4
4.0 WELDING CONSUMABLES 5
5.0 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR DSS AND SDSS WELDING CONSUMABLES 5
6.0 CLEANING 6
7.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA 6
8.0 CORROSION TESTS FOR QUALIFICATION 9
9.0 FABRICATION 11
10.0 QUALITY SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION 11
11.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED 11
Page 6085 of 8516

Sti12-a-e7 ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
5ta■LT IA Go./ Inda Undertaking' AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 4 of 11
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the requirements for the welding processes, the quality of the
welding consumables, the welding consumable qualification, the welding procedure
qualification, the welder qualification and the quality assurance testing during fabrication of
DSS and SDSS components. DSS and SDSS welding consumables shall be considered
acceptable when they meet the qualification criteria mentioned in this specification. This
specification shall be applicable for both shop fabricated and field/site fabricated components.
1.2 This specification shall be read together with the corresponding product specifications,
mentioned in the relevant piping material specifications, and/or the equipment data
sheets/design drawings, intended to be used in sour and/or chloride containing environments,
as applicable.
1.3 In case of conflict between this specification and the referred material codes/standard
specifications, the requirement of this specification shall govern.
The manufacture, inspection, testing, marking and supply of the item covered by this
specification shall follow the latest editions of the following codes and standard specifications:
ASTM A 370 Standard methods and definitions for mechanical testing of steel
ASTM A 923 Standard test methods for detecting detrimental intermetallic phase in
wrought duplex austenitic/ferritic stainless steels
ASTM E 18 Rockwell hardness testing of metallic materials
ASTM E 562 Determining volume fraction by systematic manual point count
ASTM G 36 Performing stress corrosion cracking tests in a boiling magnesium
chloride
ASTM G 48 Standard test methods for pitting and crevice corrosion resistance of
stainless steels and related alloys by use of ferric chloride solution
ASME Section II- Material specifications — Welding rods, Electrodes and Filler metals
Part C
ASME Section V Non-destructive examination
ASME Sec.VIII- Rules for construction of pressure vessels
Division 1
ASME Section IX Welding and Brazing qualifications
NACE MR0175/ Petroleum and natural gas industries-Materials for use in
ISO 15156- H2S-containing environments in oil and gas production:
Part 1: General principles for selection of cracking-resistant materials
Part 3: Cracking-resistant CRAs (corrosion-resistant alloys) and other alloys
NACE MR0103 Material resistant to Sulfide Stress Cracking in corrosive petroleum
refining environments
NACE TM0177 Laboratory testing of metals for resistance to sulfide stress cracking and
stress corrosion cracking in H2S environments
SNT-TC-1A Personnel qualification and certification of nondestructive testing
personnel, American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)
3.0 WELDING PROCESSES
Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), Gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), Gas metal arc
welding (GMAW), Submerged arc welding (SAW) and Plasma arc welding (PAW) processes
are suitable for duplex and super duplex stainless steel. All necessary operational precautions
such as cleanliness, protective inert gas shielding applicable for DSS and SDSS shall be
adopted while employing these welding processes.
Page 6086 of 8516

PRzIe?ifit ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
5.1g:a telfalesS' INDIA LIMITED
(A Gort cola unactakingi AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
6-79-0016 Rev. 1
STEEL Page 5 of 11
4.0 WELDING CONSUMABLES
The welding consumables for welding duplex stainless steels of UNS No.(s) S 31803, S 32205
or equivalent and for welding super duplex stainless steel of UNS No.(s) S 32760,S 32750,S
39274, S 32550, J 93380 or equivalent shall conform to the recommendations made by the
DSS and SDSS base metal manufacturers. The welding consumables shall be used only after
conducting the requisite consumable qualifications tests as given in Clause No. 7.0.
5.0 APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR DSS AND SDSS WELDING CONSUMABLES
5.1 Chemical Composition
The chemical composition of the DSS and SDSS welding consumables shall be adjusted with
respect to austenite formers such as nickel and ferrite formers such as molybdenum, in order
to obtain the requisite ferrite-austenite balance and the corrosion resistance properties in the
as-welded condition of the weldment. The specific chemical composition of as-welded deposit
shall be as recommended by the DSS and SDSS base metal manufacturers.
5.2 Pitting Resistance Equivalent Number (PREN)
5.2.1 PREN shall be calculated by the following formula:
PREN = % Cr + 3.3 x (%Mo) + 16x (% N)
5.2.2 PREN for DSS
The pitting resistance equivalent number of the DSS welding consumables shall be greater
than 35, when calculated as mentioned in Clause No.5.2.1.
5.2.3 PREN for SDSS
The pitting resistance equivalent number of the SDSS welding consumables shall be greater
than 40, when calculated as mentioned in Clause No. 5.2.1.
5.3 Microstructure
The ferrite content of the weld metal estimated through metallography examination should be
between 30 to 55% to obtain weld joints with the best ductility and corrosion resistance
properties. The welding consumables composition and the welding heat input should be so
selected as to give the ferrite content of the weld metal between 30 and 55%. Ferrite content
measurement shall be carried out by the metallography method in accordance with ASTM E
562.
5.4 Mechanical Properties
5.4.1 DSS
Tensile Strength 680-880 N/mm2
Yield Strength (0.2% Offset) 450 N/mm2 (Min.)
Elongation 25% (Min)
Impact Energy (Charpy V-notch)
at 20° C 100 J Average/ 75 J Minimum

at -30° C 60 J Average/ 40 J Minimum
Page 6087 of 8516

15raireg e ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
511g-ien titgleg IS INDIA UMITED 6-79-0016 Rev. 1
Goa of Irdia Underlalong) AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 6 of 11
5.4.2 SDSS
Tensile Strength 800-1050 N/mm2
Yield Strength (0.2% Offset) 550 N/mm2
Yield Strength (1% Offset) 650 N/mm2
Elongation 25% minimum
Impact Energy (Charpy V-notch)
at 20° C 100 J Average/ 75 J Minimum

at -30° C 60 J Average/ 40 J Minimum
6.0 CLEANING
6.1 Cleaning of weld joints before and after the welding shall follow the good engineering
practices applicable for stainless steels. All accessible weld surfaces shall be cleaned after
welding by using pickling paste or pickling agent recommended by the welding consumable
suppliers, for a minimum period of 20 minutes, followed by water washing. This process shall
remove all oxide, tarnish, heat tint and surface contamination.
In the case of tube-to-tube sheet joints of the exchanger, extra care shall be taken to
completely remove the traces of the pickling paste or agent to maintain weld quality.
Wherever completely removal of pickling paste or agent cannot be ensured, such as air cooler
with plug type headers, pickling shall not be carried out.
Where access for cleanings not practicable, such as pipe butt welds, reliance must be placed
on good purging practice to minimize contamination of the backing gas by air. The purge gas
must contain below 10-ppm oxygen or moisture to achieve maximum corrosion resistance of
welds.
6.2 The area where DSS and SDSS fabrications are carried out shall be separated from carbon and
low-alloy steel fabrication area.
7.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
7.1 Welding Consumable Qualification (One-Time Qualification)
Each classification of the DSS and SDSS welding consumables, used for welding procedure
qualification, welder qualification as well as for production welds, shall be procured from
qualified welding consumable manufacturers.
7.1.1 Qualification Criteria for Vendors/Manufacturers with Prior Experience Track Record
Vendors/manufacturers who have proven track record of supplying DSS and SDSS welding
consumables for sour service and chloride containing environments in chemical process
industries (CPI) to any of the reputed operating companies/Engineering Consultants or
Process Licensors such as UOP, IFP, EXXON, BP, CHEVRON, IOCL, HPCL, BPCL, and
EIL shall be considered as qualified vendors/manufacturers', on production of the relevant
purchase orders and test certificates, certified by a witnessing third party inspection agency
such as DNV, Lloyds, BV, ABS, TUV, SGS, CELL, and EIL for the conformance of the
materials to the respective materials specification of the mentioned operators/engineering
consultants. For qualified vendors / manufacturers, Clause No.7.1.2 is not applicable.
Page 6088 of 8516

a
l t ENGINEF_RS
ISIIRZRY:
f OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
2-ar EVe
g W INDIA UMITED 6-79-0016 Rev. 1
Gorl of India undensiong) AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 7 of 11
7.1.2 Qualification Criteria for New Vendors/Manufacturers without Track Record
A vendor/manufacturer who has no track record of supplying DSS and SDSS welding
consumables for sour service and chloride containing environments in chemical process
industries (CPI) to any of the reputed engineering consultants/operators, as mentioned above
in Clause No.7.1.1, shall be considered as a new vendor/manufacturer. The chemical, the
mechanical and all the corrosion tests shall be carried out as mentioned in Clause Nos. 5.0, 8.0
for qualification by any one of the reputed third party inspection agencies like Lloyds, BV,
CEIL, DNV, TUV, and EIL.
Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) test as per Clause No. 8.1, Chloride Stress Cracking (CSC)
test as per Clause No. 8.2, Pitting Corrosion test as per Clause No. 8.3 and Crevice Corrosion
test as per Clause No.8.4, are mandatory for DSS and SDSS welding consumables.
In case the vendors/manufacture(s) had already conducted all the corrosion tests in the past,
and has an approved quality assurance system in place, and the test results are certified by a
witnessing a third party inspection agency such as DNV, Lloyds, BV, ABS, TUV, SGS, CEIL,
and EIL, the test results shall be furnished by the bidder, along with his bid, for Company's
review.
The vendors/manufacturers shall be qualified based on the satisfactory review of the submitted
test results. The Company's decision in this regard shall be final and binding on the bidder.
7.2 Welding Procedure Qualification
7.2.1 General
7.2.1.1 Each particular welding procedure shall be specially qualified. Previous test reports shall not
be recognized as a qualification record for the work to be performed on a new job.
7.2.1.2 Welding consumable qualification tests and welding procedure qualification tests shall be
conducted before the start of fabrication, by employing an approved welding procedure in
presence of the Company third party inspection agency such as DNV, Lloyds, BV, ABS,
TUV, SGS, CEIL, and EIL.
7.2.1.3 All the mills supplying the raw material/pipes etc. shall be required to pass the tests required
for the procedure qualification testing. Approved procedure shall be common to all the mills.
7.2.1.4 In case a combination of different UNS No. has to be used, due to unavoidable reasons, each
combination shall be specifically subjected to welding procedure qualification testing
including all the corrosion tests.
7.2.1.5 Laboratory tests shall be performed at an acceptable reputed laboratory.
7.2.2 Test Samples
Procedure qualification tests shall be performed on welded test pieces that include the parent
metal, heat affected zone and the weld metal.
7.2.3 Procedure Qualification Tests (PQT)
PQT shall be carried out as given below:
Page 6089 of 8516

46111Retit et ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
51g9- Raleg r e INDIA UMITED 6-79-0016 Rev. 1
eli-i-n-11 a coN al Oda unaciaingl AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 8 of 11
7.2.3.1 Chemical Composition and Microstructure Examination
The chemical composition analyzed shall conform to the claimed composition mentioned in
the technical brochures of the welding consumable manufacturers approved by the Company
prior to qualification.
The ferrite content measurement of test pieces shall be carried out by both of the following
method:
Metallography examination
Magna-gage method/Ferrite Scope
The procedure of ferrite measurement and the calibration of measuring instruments shall bear
the approval of the Company before being employed. Ferrite content measurement shall be
carried out by the metallography method in accordance with ASTM E 562. Acceptance level
shall be as per Clause No.5.3.
The weld metal of DSS and SDSS shall be checked by the method in accordance with ASTM
A 923, for the presence of intermetallic phases that are detrimental to the weld metal. The
intermetallic phases shall not be more than 1%.
7.2.3.2 Mechanical Properties
These tests shall include tensile testing, impact testing and bend testing, in accordance with
ASTM A 370. Bend tests shall be performed with a plunger diameter equal to 4 times the
thickness. The acceptance values for tensile and impact testing shall be as per Clause Nos.
5.4.1 and 5.4.2. In case of bend testing, the specimen shall not reveal any crack or fissure.
7.2.3.3 Hardness Tests
Each qualification test shall include a cross-sectional hardness survey. The test method shall
be in accordance with ASTM E 18. The distance between indentations shall be a maximum of
1.0 mm. The hardness values shall not exceed RC 28 for DSS and RC 32 for SDSS.
If any other methods including portable hardness tester are to be deployed for checking
production welds, then the correlation between the qualification method and the production
method shall be established and the calibration graph shall be generated for use at the
field/shop. The acceptance criteria shall be as per Rockwell 'C' scale.
7.2.3.4 Corrosion Tests for weldments
Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) test as per Clause No. 8.1, Chloride Stress Cracking (CSC)
test as per Clause No. 8.2, Pitting Corrosion test as per Clause No. 8.3, Crevice Corrosion test
as per Clause No.8.4, are mandatory when DSS and SDSS weldments are intended to be used
for sour service and chloride containing environments.
If DSS and SDSS weldments are intended to be used only for chloride containing
environments, the SSC test as per Clause No.8.1 shall be waived off. The remaining corrosion
tests specified in this section shall be carried out for DSS and SDSS weldments meant for use
in the chloride containing environments.
7.2.3.5 Radiography
All welds shall be 100% radiographed. The radiography procedure shall be followed as per
ASME Section V. Acceptance standard shall be as per ASME. Section-VIII, Division-1, UW-
51. The operator's certification to SNT-TC-1A or equivalent is required.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell — All rights reserved
Page 6090 of 8516

IsirEzrda ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL 6-79-0016 Rev. 1
5@zir lalaregWINDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 9 of 11
7.2.3.6 Penetrant Test (PT) And Magnetic Particle Test (MPT)
All fillet and groove welds other than those to be examined by radiography shall be tested by
fluorescent penetrant test or by fluorescent magnetic particle test. No defect indication shall
be accepted. The procedures for penetrant tests and magnetic particle tests shall be followed as
per ASME Section V. The operator's certification to SNT-TC-IA or equivalent shall be
ensured.
7.2.3.7 Post Weld Heat Treatment (If Required)
For DSS and SDSS, no post weld heat treatment is envisaged or recommended. In case,
autogenous welding is adopted or if the process licensor or the client recommends a PWHT,
then the only PWHT shall be solution annealing. The solution annealing heat treatment
procedures shall be established for ensuring retention of the properties of the welded joints for
DSS and SDSS materials. The heat treatment procedures shall be approved by the Company's
representative before their implementation.
7.3 Welder Qualification
Welders shall be qualified at the fabrication yard/barge employing the qualified welding
procedure. The qualification test pieces of each welder shall be subjected to microstructure
examination, mechanical tests, cross sectional hardness survey, radiography examination,
fluorescent penetrant and fluorescent magnetic particle tests, and with the same test procedure
and acceptance criteria as mentioned above in Clause Nos. 7.2.3.1, 7.2.3.2, 7.2.3.3, 7.2.3.5,
7.2.3.6 respectively.
8.0 CORROSION TESTS FOR QUALIFICATION
8.1 Sulphide Stress Cracking (SSC) Test
DSS
SSC test on duplex stainless steel shall be carried out by using the following test solutions and
test conditions:

Test temperature : 24°C
ii) a) Test solution : NACE TM0177

Partial pressure of H2S : 16 bars
Acceptance criteria : test sample failure at or after 720 hours.
SDSS
The Sulphide Stress Corrosion Cracking tests on super duplex stainless steel shall be carried
out by using the following solutions and test conditions:

Page 6091 of 8516

ISIMZIel ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
5fg:ar INDIA LIMITED 6-79-0016 Rev. 1
Go. aI kid. Und.na.nal AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 10 of 11
ii) a) Test solution : NACE TM0177

Partial pressure of H 2S : 16 bars
Acceptance criteria : test sample failure at or after 720 hours.
8.2 Chloride Stress Cracking (CSC) Test
DSS and SDSS
The CSC tests shall be conducted on representative specimens of DSS and SDSS, in
accordance with the testing procedure mentioned in ASTM G-36, in aerated, boiling 40%
calcium chloride (CaCl 2 ) solution at 100° C with the pH of the solution maintained
around 6.5.
Acceptance criteria: Stress to cause rupture in 500 hours shall exceed 0.85 times the
actual ultimate tensile strength values of duplex stainless steel and super duplex stainless
steel material individually.
8.3 Pitting Corrosion Test
DSS
The pitting corrosion test shall be conducted on the representative DSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method A, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI 3 .6 H20) solution
Acceptance criteria: No pitting shall occur on the surface of the test sample at 30°C. For
SDSS
The pitting corrosion test shall be conducted on the representative SDSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method A, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI 3 .6 I-1 2 0) solution
Acceptance criteria: No pitting shall occur on the surface of the test sample at 40°C. For
8.4 Crevice Corrosion Test
DSS
The crevice corrosion test shall be performed on the representative DSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method B, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI 3 .6 H 2 0) solution
Acceptance criteria: No crevice shall form on the surface of the test sample at 25°C.
SDSS
The crevice corrosion test shall be performed on the representative SDSS specimen, in
accordance with ASTM G-48 method B, using 6% ferric chloride (FeCI 3 .6 H 2 0) solution
Acceptance criteria: No crevice shall form on the surface of the test sample at 30°C.
Page 6092 of 8516

ENGINEERS OF DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL
151:e7
5'1411E1. IA Gov? of Inch, Undertaking) AND SUPER DUPLEX STAINLESS
STEEL Page 11 of 11
9.0 FABRICATION
9.1 No fabrication shall start until the Company approves the results of the welding consumable
qualification, the welding procedure qualification tests and the welder qualification tests as per
the approved procedure.
9.2 Quality Assurance Tests on Production Welds
As a part of quality assurance, field/shop fabricated weldments shall be subjected to the

following tests, as per the applicable Clauses mentioned in this specification:
Hardness test as per Clause No. 7.2.3.3

Radiography as per Clause No. 7.2.3.5
PT /MPT tests as per Clause no. 7.2.3.6
Ferrite Measurement as per Clause No. 7.2.3.1.
9.3 The weld joints not conforming to the specification requirements with respect to the results of
above tests, shall be cut out to make fresh joints. The reasons for such a breakdown in quality
assurance system shall be investigated and the report shall be submitted to the Company for
review.
10.0 QUALITY SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION
The vendors/suppliers shall perform all the tests and inspection procedures mentioned above
to ensure that the welding consumables, the procedure and the fabrication conform to the
requirements of this specification. Company, or the representative duly approved by the
Company, shall have unhindered access for inspection and/or witnessing the selection of test
samples, the preparation of test specimens, and the performance of tests. The company or its
representative shall have the right to indicate the pieces from which the specimens are to be
drawn for various tests. In case of any reasonable doubts regarding the quality of the product,
Company shall have the option to ask for a re-qualification, at the vendor's/contractor's cost.
Inspection by the Company or its authorized representative shall not relieve the supplier of his
responsibility for ensuring the compliance of the materials supplied to this specification.
11.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
The vendors/suppliers shall submit the following records of the tests and inspection conducted
on the materials, as per the applicable Clauses mentioned in this specification, to the company
in quadruplicate:
Chemical composition analysis report

- Heat treatment records and charts
Micro-structure examination and ferrite measurement reports
Mechanical properties evaluation reports
Corrosion testing results (qualification records)
Radiography examination report
Penetrant test report
Magnetic Particle test report.
Page 6093 of 8516

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS FOR TRAYS AND TOWER
INA?f toron ) IA GoN of InOla uneertaiong) INTERNALS Page 1 of 16
(r4. C.1 cl *C<G1 ei

. 1;frfif-2TTI:RT
cr) I
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR

TRAYS AND TOWER INTERNALS
f
REVISED AND RE-ISSUED AS STANDARD
5 29.10.2014 VDY IK/ SKM
SPECIFICATION
4 11.03.2010 AK SKM/HCN AKG ND
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED AND RE-ISSUED AS
3 22.07.2004 AK KKG RKA SKG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6094 of 8516

ENGINEERS
22-dg
14.11771 c./~ M1 vcmi
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt of InOta Undertakingt
FOR TRAYS AND TOWER
INTERNALS
6-14-0003 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 16
Abbreviations:
BB Bolting Bar
D/C Downcomer
M/W Manway
TSR Tray Support Ring
SOME IMPORTANT GUIDELINES
SLOTS Slots are provided for adjustments of the tray segments. Vessels are made
to manufacturing tolerances which are fully accounted for in Distillation
Tray design.
CLEARANCES Clearances between Deck Beams/Downcomers from Support Rings are

provided to ensure that the trays fit the vessels without modification to
parts. POSITION tray deck beams and downcomers with equal clearances
at each end.
SPACINGS Spacings of loose beams or deck plates shown on drawings are TYPICAL
for perfectly round and sized vessels. The vessels may not be perfect, so
spacings will need to be ADJUSTED.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ON THE FOLLOWING PAGES SHOULD BE READ

CAREFULLY.
Heat and Mass Transfer Standards Committee
Convenor: Sh. Amit Prakash
Members: Sh. Mandip Kapoor

Sh. Inder Kumar
Sh. Ratan Lal (Projects)
Sh. G. K. Iyer (Const.)
Page 6095 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA L1MITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
IA Govt ol India UndertakIngt
INTERNALS Page 3 of 16
CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION 4
2.0 ORDER OF INSTALLATION 4
3.0 FITTING MAJOR BEAMS 6
4.0 FITTING DOWNCOMERS & EXIT WEIRS 7
5.0 FITTING DECK PLATES: INTEGRAL BEAM DESIGN 9
6.0 SUPPORT PLATES 11
7.0 BED LIMITERS 12
8.0 DISTRIBUTORS/REDISTRIBUTORS 12
9.0 FLASHING FEED GALLERY 14
10.0 LIQUID COLLECTOR/CHIMNEY/ACCUMULATOR TRAY 15
11.0 LATTICE GIRDERS 15
12.0 TIGHTENING OF BOLTS AND CLAMPS 15
13 .0 LEAK TESTING 16
14.0 REMOVAL OF LINSEED OIL COATING FROM CARBON STEEL TRAYS AND
INTERNALS 16
15.0 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST & REPORTING FORMATS 16
Page 6096 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS
Og.,102e- g INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
nreasaTassr) IA Govf Of Ind. Undertakog) INTERNALS Page 4 of 16
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this specification is to help in effecting satisfactory installation of EIL-

designed trays and tower internals in the minimum time.
Whether installation involves a small number of trays, tower internals or is a large complex
involving thousands of components, it is vital that care is taken to ensure efficient handling
and assembly of tray components.
This specification should be used only as a "General Guide". The work in each tower and for
each tray/tower internal should be carried out in accordance with General Arrangement
Drawings prepared for specific tray/tower internal.
An adequate number of components with installation spares, where applicable, are supplied
for every assembly. Significant time and Cost can be saved by efficient storage and usage of
such components.
2.0 ORDER OF INSTALLATION
These instructions are based upon the following order of installation:
2.1 Review the drawings provided for respective tray/tower internals. It is an important aid for
installation. The drawings show the relative position of each component and corresponding
item number. After all trays/tower internals are uncrated, identify each piece of the tray/tower
internal with the item number w.r.t. its location on the General Arrangement Drawing.
2.2 Ensure that protective oil coating is removed from carbon steel tray/tower internal parts prior
to initiating installation of trays and tower internals in the tower. (For suggested procedure
for removal of linseed oil coating, refer clause 14.0 of this specification).
2.3 Check levelness of tray support rings & various dimensions of bolting bar welded to the
tower to ensure that these are as per relevant drawings and within specified tolerances. In
case of any deviation observed, refer this to EIL-HMTD. Levelness of support ring and other
dimensions of bolting bar shall be recorded in Format attached in EIL Specification No. 6-
14-0016.
2.4 Trays
2.4.1 Work upwards from lowest tray in tower.
2.4.2 Fit/complete installation (including welding) of lattice girder, if any.
2.4.3 Fit and leak test seal pan below bottom tray, if provided.
2.4.4 Fit major beam, if any.
2.4.5. Fit downcomer for bottom tray.
2.4.6 Fit support beam (if any) for bottom tray.
2.4.7 Fit deck plates for bottom tray except man way deck plate. (However proper fitment of man
way decks plate shall be ensured).
2.4.8 Leak test recessed seal pans, wherever provided.
2.4.9 Fit/install lattice girder/major beam, if required, for tray above bottom tray.
Page 6097 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$1
1g-
ar IMeg INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
1.11771 excm, .3721,
71, IA Govt of Inda Undertaking)
2.4.10 Fit downcomers for tray above bottom tray.
2.4.11 Fit beams and decks for tray above bottom tray except man way deck plate. (However proper
fitment of man way decks plate shall be ensured).
2.4.12 Fit each successive tray as above.
2.4.13 Remove all the foreign material and ensure that trays are clean and unobstructed for proper
performance.
2.5 Tower Internals
2.5.1 Work upward from bottom most bed in the tower.
2.5.2 Fit/install lattice girder/major beam, if any.
2.5.3 Install (including welding and leak testing) vapour distributor/chimney tray/accumulator tray,
if any.
2.5.4 Install support plate/support grid.
2.5.5 Pack the tower with random packings in accordance with EIL spec. 6-14-0011 titled
"Specification for Packing the Tower".
In case bed is provided with proprietary packings/grid/structured packings, follow the

instructions provided by the supplier. Successive layers of grid/structured packings may
require to be rotated by specific angle as mentioned in supplier's drawings/procedure for
installation.
2.5.6 Install the bed limiter/hold down grid wherever specified in drawings, in case of random
packings
Install bed retainer/distributor support grid, in case of structured packings.
2.5.7 Install distributor/redistributor, Leak test pan/trough type distributor/redistributor and hydro
test spray header, if specified, on the drawings.
2.5.8 Fit the pre-distributor/feed pipe.
2.5.9 Repeat from paragraph 2.5.2 to 2.5.8 above, for the next bed.
2.5.10 Remove all the foreign material from respective tower internal. Ensure that the same are
clean and un-obstructed for proper performance.
Page 6098 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
mlaRr.1) IA Govt of Incla Undertakog) INTERNALS Page 6 of 16
3.0 FITTING MAJOR BEAMS
3.1 Carefully place shims, as necessary, under major beams to bring top of beam exactly in level
with tray support ring (Refer sketch 3.1.1). Tack weld/bolt shims in position.
NOTE: Depth of stool is always designed to allow for minimum shim thickness of 3 mm
(although this may be taken up in vessel or tray manufacturing tolerances).
TOP OF SUPPORT RING &

THICKNESS TRAY DECK
PLATE MAJOR BEAM SHALL BE
IN SAME LEVEL
THICKNESS
et... OF CLAMP
BEAM
THICKNESS
y s
PROVIDE SHIMS
AS NECESSARY
SKETCH No. 3.1.1

(C BEAM SHOWN, MAJOR BEAM MAY BE OF OTHER SHAPES ALSO)
3.2 Line-up down comer bolting bars, if fitted, on beam with downcomer bolting bars attached to
vessel wall. See sketch No. 3.2.1.
UNE—UP BOLTING VESSEL WALL

BAR THIS SIDE BOLTING BAR
VESSEL WALL
BOLTING BAR
MAJOR BEAM
MAJOR BEAM UNE—UP BOLTING

MAJOR BEAM
BOLTING BAR BAR THIS SIDE
BOLTING BAR
SKETCH No. 3.2.1
Page 6099 of 8516

■31 ENGINEERS
A GoN of InON Undeftaking)
4.0 FITTING DOWNCOMERS & EXIT WEIRS
4.1 Where no down comer support stools are provided
(a) Top section of downcomers for one tray fitted by:
i) Level exit weir base (top) with top of support ring and/or support beam top
surface.
ii) Bolting securely in position.
(b) Fit bottom downcomer sliding plate into position, position bottom of plate in
downcomer support bracket while fitting on tray below. Check clearance under
downcomer bottom edge. See Sketch No. 4.1.1.
HORIZONTAL SLOTS
IN BOLTING BAR D/C THICKNESS
EQUAL TO BEAM
TRAY DECK
END CLEARNCE TO BE IN
THICKNESS
SAME LEVEL
EXIT WEIR
25 x 11 VERTICAL EXIT WEIR

SLOT IN D/COMER I
TOP D/C SECTION
— —F
25x11 HORZ. SLOT BOTTOM D/C

IN TOP D C APRON SECTION
25x11VE . SLOT IN D/C RETAINING
BOTTOM D/C APRON
BRACKET
TRAY DECK
FIT STANDARD TRAY
THICKNESS
EDGE CLAMP WHEN UNDER D/C CLEARANCE
BOLTING IS OMITTED
IN BOTTOM PIECE OF TOLERANCE ± 3
DOWNCOMER.
SKETCH No. 4.1.1
4.2 Where downcomer support stool is provided
(a) Place shims, as necessary, under top downcomer section to bring exit weir base (top)
exactly in level with support ring and/or lattice girder/major beam (if provided) and
then bolt downcomer sections including exit weir securely. Tack weld/bolt shims in
position.
(b) Fit bottom-sliding plate of downcomer in position in downcomer support bracket, set
clearance under downcomer plate within plus or minus 1/8" (3mm). The clearance
obtained should be maintained as near constant across the width as possible (See
Sketch No. 4.2.1).
Page 6100 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$'gLIE IC1Ws INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
IA Govt ol Incha Undertak■ng) INTERNALS Page 8 of 16
HORIZONTAL SLOTS
IN BOLTING BAR D/C THICKNESS
EQUAL TO BEAM
TRAY DECK
END CLEARNCE TO BE IN
THICKNESS
SAME LEVEL
EXIT WEIR
25 x 11 VERTICAL EXIT WEIR

SLOT IN D/COMER I HEIGHT
TOP D/C SECTION I
BEAM END L
CLEARANCE j_
25x11 HORZ. SLOT PLACE SHIMS BOTTOM D/C

IN TOP D/C APRON AS REQUIRED
SECTION
25x11VERT. SLOT IN D/C RETAINING
BOTTOM D/C APRON
BRACKET
TRAY DECK
Fff STANDARD TRAY
THICKNESS
EDGE CLAMP WHEN UNDER D/C CLEARANCE
BOLTING IS OMI1TED
IN BOTTOM PIECE OF TOLERANCE ± 3
DOWNCOMER.
SKETCH No. 4.2.1
4.3 Use of Washer & Location of Nut
Unless otherwise specified on drawing, two washers (one on bolt head side & one on nut
side) shall be used for every bolt. The nut shall be provided towards the side accessible from
Tray man way. Lock nuts shall not be provided on clamp/bolting for Man way deck plate.
Nuts for supporting pipes (i.e. U clamps) shall be kept loose so as to have free
movement/expansion of the pipe.
4.4 Downcomer Vent Tubes
Vent Tubes are standard feature in Three (3) / Four (4) pass trays.
(a) Fit one top section of center/off-center downcomer as in paragraph 4.1/4.2 and then
position tube as shown in Sketch 4.4.1.
(b) Fit top section of opposite downcomer.
(c) Place shims, as necessary, between vent tube flanges and tighten the bolts.
Page 6101 of 8516

01nz ENGINEERS
v.1 20. lA Govt o11n0ia Undertakogt
D/C BOLTING BAR

ON VESSEL WALL
TOP D/C
VENT TUBE
SHIMS AS
NECESSARY
SKETCH No. 4.4.1
4.5 Downcomer Bracer Panels
After downcomer sections have been fitted, position bracer panels and bolt securely.
4.6 Adjustable Exit Weirs
Bolt loosely into position after down comer has been leveled and tightly secure. Weir top
edge then to be leveled upto desired height and bolts tightened securely. Unless otherwise
specified on the drawings, adjustable weirs to be set at mid point.
5.0 FITTING DECK PLATES: INTEGRAL BEAM DESIGN
5.1 Measure distance across area of deck to be installed at 90° to run of minor beams. See Sketch
No. 5.1.1
SKETCH No. 5.1.1
Page 6102 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$.
1g faWg INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
171QT r1rane d513:12ffil) I A Govt of Incha Undertaking)
5.2 Compare measurement taken in paragraph 5.1 with dimensions stated on tray General
Arrangement Drawings.
5.3 If comparison shows measured distance GREATER than shown on drawings, INCREASE 25
mm typical spacing difference - see Sketch No. 5.3.1.
25 mm NOMINAL GAP
TO BE OPENED OR CLOSED
(MAX 27mm, MIN 23mm)
20/23/25mm NOMINAL OVERLAP

INTEGRAL BEAM
SKETCH No. 53.1
5.4 If distance measured is SMALLER than shown on drawings, DECREASE 25mm typical
spacing between the deck plates to absorb the difference - EXCEPT at each side of man way
section, which must remain at 25 mm to allow man way clamps to operate properly. See
Sketch No. 5.3.1.
5.5 Position deck plates as required from paragraph 5.3 to 5.4 on support ring and/or down comer
top flange.
5.6 Position deck plates centrally along their length i.e. leave EQUAL clearance at each end.
NOTE: Edge clamps must be orientated correctly (see Sketch No. 5.6.1). Stud/pin of all tray
edge clamps are provided with screwdriver slot and center punch mark as aid in
installation and fitting of edge clamps properly. Slot shall be in radial direction,
while punch mark be towards center of the tower.
II II
II I
I
II II
CLAMPS STUDS TO BE PUSHED

CLAMP ORIENTED 90*
AGAINST SUPPORT RING
TO VESSEL WALL
SKETCH No. 5.6.1

Page 6103 of 8516

ENQNEERS
gigz-Jr0fmg INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
1.177, ,fe,cnf, C51~) IA Govt of Inda Undertalongt
5.7 Position man way plate in place to check that this can be put in position from top as well as
bottom of tray without fouling or interfering with man way beam clamp or adj acent tray deck
plate.
5.8 Remove man way plate and keep it on the tray or in downcomer area so that tray man ways
are accessible for inspection of trays.
5.9 Bubble cap trays, seal pans, draw off etc. shall be leak tested to ensure that drop in water
level does not exceed the specified limit mentioned in the drawing. In case the leakage
exceeds the allowable limit, consult EIL-HMTD.
5.10 Proceed with installation of next tray.
5.11 Tray man way plate shall be clamped in position only after all the trays installed in the tower
have been inspected, tested and approved by competent authority.
6.0 SUPPORT PLATES
6.1 Gas Distribution Support Plate
6.1.1 Start installation with the short piece of decicing and work across the tower. When gasketing
is specified, place the gasket on the support ring. If a mid span is required, place gasket on
the mid span also. Install the support ring clamps in the deck sections; leave the clamps loose.
Place the deck section on the support ring. Place the minor beam against the edge of the deck.
Minor beams are not always required (see drawing). Install the adjacent deck section. Install
the bolting through the deck section and through the minor beams when provided. When
gasketing is required between the deck sections, the bolts should also go through the gasket.
Tighten the bolting. Continue this procedure until all deck sections are installed.
For some applications, liquid downcomer tubes are provided which hang below the deck
sections. The downcomer tubes may or may not be removable (check drawing provided).
6.1.2 When the tubes are removable they should be installed before the deck sections are installed
on the support ring.
6.1.3 For various applications, riser tubes with covers are provided (which may or may not be
removable). When the tubes or covers are removable, install the tubes with the gaskets and
bolting provided as the deck sections are being installed. When the gas riser tube covers are
removable, ensure that they are fastened firmly in place.
6.1.4 After all deck plates are installed; rotate clamps under support ring and tighten clamps.
Ensure that all gasketing is in proper position.
6.1.5 Remove all foreign material so that the support plate is clean and unobstructed for proper
performance.
6.2 Gas Injection Support Plate
6.2.1 Place the sections in position on top of the support ring starting with the shorter sections at
one side of the tower. Proceed across the tower. Make sure all sections are making proper
contact with the support ring. The sections shall be equally spaced so that the gap between
sections is uniform.
Ensure that at any location on the support plate, gap is not large enough for the random
packings to pass through.
Forrnat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL All rights reserved
Page 6104 of 8516

+31 ENGINEERS
OgZIT 02-dg ' INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
I.27f twzn, erfi Jcrasaal I A Go. of Inoia Undertaking)
6.2.2 When clamps are required, the clamps are to be assembled in position as the sections are set
in place. Tighten clamps after sections are properly positioned.
6.2.3 Remove all foreign material so that the support plate is clean and unobstructed for proper
performance.
7.0 BED LIMITERS
7.1 After the Bed Limiter is uncrated, identify each section of the Bed Limiter with the tag
number. The tag numbers locate the relative position of the sections.
7.2 Install the packing in the tower upto the depth of the minor beams from the support ring, as
shown on the drawing provided.
7.3 Install the minor beams to the support ring as shown on the drawing in their correct
positions. Finish installing the tower packing such that packings level is same as the top of
the minor beams and support ring/support cleats.
7.4 Install the screened Bed Limiters sections. Some of the sections may require tray clamps (see
drawings). If tray clamps are required, install them in the sections before installing the
sections on the support ring/support cleats.
7.5 Bolt all the sections with the hardware provided, as shown on the drawings.
7.6 Ensure removal of all foreign materials so that the bed Limiter is clean and unobstructed for
proper performance.
7.7 Ensure that the packings do not fly from the gaps. If so, adjust/reduce the gap.
8.0 DISTRIBUTOR/REDISTRIBUTOR
8.1 Orifice/Deek Type
8.1.1 Start installation with the short piece of deck and working across the tower. Place the gasket
on the support ring. Install the support ring clamps in the deck sections; leave the clamps
loose. Place the deck sections on the support ring. Place the minor beam, if provided, against
the edge of the deck. Gasketing is to be installed on both sides of the minor beam. Install the
bolting through the deck sections, gasketing and minor beams. Tighten the bolting. Continue
this procedure until all deck sections are installed.
8.1.2 Some applications require covers or hats over the gas riser area. Install the same.
8.1.3 When specified, the distributor shall be leak tested after installation.
8.1.4 Ensure that all foreign materials are removed so that the distributor/redistributor is clean and
unobstructed for proper performance
8.2 Trough Type Liquid Distributor/Redistributor
8.2.1 Review the drawing provided with the distributor/redistributor plate.
8.2.2 Install the tray clamps (wherever provided) loosely in the deck sections and the end closing
plates. If the plate is equipped with a center sump (see drawing), install the center sump first.
8.2.3 For some low-flow applications, gasketing is provided with the plate. If gasketing is required
(see drawing), place the gasket along with the support ring and sump top edges.
Page 6105 of 8516

ENQNEERS
02-dg
' ) INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
17.M7T 0traol0n. (A Govt of ioo.a Undertalongt
8.2.4 To install the main deck of the distributor/redistributor, begin by placing the short deck
section in its proper position on the support ring. Using the tag numbers as a guide, place the
adjacent deck section on the support ring. Bolt the deck sections together with the proper end
closing plates. If gasketing is provided with the plate, ensure providing gaskets in the joints
between the deck sections and the end closing plates. Tighten the bolting at these joints to
minimize leakage.
Some applications require covers or hats over the gas riser area. If covers are required, install
the same. Continue this, until the entire distributor/redistributor is installed.
8.2.5 After the plate is assembled on the support ring, rotate the tray clamps under the support ring
and tighten the clamps. Ensure gasketing (if required) is in proper position.
8.2.6 If parting box(es) are provided with the distributor, install the parting box brackets to the
parting box(es), then bolt this assembly in proper position on the distributor/redistributor.
8.2.7 Remove all foreign materials so that distributor/redistributor is clean and unobstructed to
ensure proper performance.
8.2.8 For some applications, distributors are provided with leveling screws. Level the troughs
wherever leveling screws are provided to bring within level as specified in the respective
drawings.
8.2.9 Leak test the distributor, wherever specified on the drawing.
8.3 Lateral Type Dishibutor/Redishibutors
8.3.1 If mounting clips have not been previously welded to the tower wall this is to be done before
installing distributor. The drawing provided for the job will show the proper position of the
mounting clips. Layout and weld the clips in position.
8.3.2 Place the laterals in position resting on top of the bed limiter.
8.3.3 If the tower is larger than 1250 mm I D , support members are provided. When support
members are provided, they are to be installed next. Loosely bolt the support members to the
mounting clips. Lift laterals and loosely bolt laterals to support members.
8.3.4 Place the gasketing provided on top of the lateral flanges in the proper position.
8.3.5 Place header in position and loosely bolt header to clips. Then assemble bolting through
header, gasket and lateral flange. Be sure to keep gasket in proper position. Tighten lateral
flange bolting. Leave other bolting loose.
8.3.6 Install connecting pipe and flange gaskets to header and inlet nozzle. Tighten pipe flange
bolting.
8.3.7 Tighten all bolting on support members.
8.3.8 Ensure to remove all foreign materials so that the distributor is clean and unobstructed for
proper performance.
8.4 Spray Nozzle Distributor
8.4.1 Review the drawing provided with the distributor.
Page 6106 of 8516

ENGINEERS
02-'eg INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
•>■wn ,wowerA,rom) IA Govt of India Unclertak.g) INTERNALS Page 14 of 16
8.4.2 If mounting clips have not been previously welded to the tower wall, this is to be done before
installing the distributor. The drawing provided for the job will show the proper position of
the mounting clips layout. Weld the clips in position.
8.4.3 Check to see that all the piping is clean and unobstructed inside.
8.4.4 Place the laterals in position resting on top of the bed limiter.
8.4.5 Place header in position and loosely bolt to wall clip. Assemble the bolting and gasket at the
inlet flange. Tighten inlet flange bolting.
8.4.6 Place the lateral pipes in position and loosely bolts to wall clips. Assemble the bolting and
gasket at the flange end. Tighten the flange bolting.
8.4.7 Secure the wall clip bolting as shown on the drawing provided.
8.4.8 Hydro tests the spray header, without spray nozzles, if specified on the drawings.
8.4.9 Assemble the spray nozzles to the header and lateral assembly as shown on the drawing
provided.
If the spray nozzles are threaded, it is recommended that an anti seize pipe thread compound
be used for installation.
If the spray nozzles are flanges, use gaskets and tighten the bolting securely.
8.4.10 The bolting provided at end of pipe (i.e. for U clamps) shall be kept loose so as to have free
movement/expansion of the pipe.
8.4.11 Check the spray pattern visually by running the pump with water. If spray pattern is
defective, replace the spray nozzle with spare spray nozzles supplied.
9.0 FLASH1NG FEED GALLERY
9.1 Review the drawing provided with the Flashing Feed Gallery plate.
9.2 Install the tray clamps loosely in the sections that go on the support ring.
9.3 For most applications, gasketing is required and is provided with the plate. When gasketing is
required, place the gasket along with the support ring.
9.4 Place the first section on the support ring and snug up the tray clamps enough to hold it in
place. Place the adjacent section on the support ring with a gasket between the two sections.
Bolt the two sections together. Install all the sections on the support ring in a similar manner.
Tighten the tray clamps and the bolting to ensure leak free operation.
In some instances, where a high gallery wall is required, more sections are provided which
need to be bolted on top of the first row of sections. If angle braces are provided, they are to
be bolted to the first row of sections. It is advisable to bolt them in place before the upper
sections are installed.
After all the sections are bolted tightly together and all the joints are gasketed, install all
bracing when required, as shown on the drawing provided. Attach wall clips as shown on the
drawing, when required.
Remove all foreign materials so that the Flashing Feed Gallery is clean and unobstructed to
ensure proper performance.
Page 6107 of 8516

31 ENQNEERS
FOR TRAYS AND TOWER
Iu faWglafWf rarcnIcf tuf.34m-41)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Incha Undertakog)
INTERNALS
6-14-0003 Rev. 5
Page 15 of 16
10.0 LIQUID COLLECTOR/CHIMNEY/ACCUMULATOR TRAYS
10.1 Review the drawing provided with the collector plate.
10.2 Start installation with the short piece of decking and work across the tower.
10.3 Collector/Chimney/Accumulator trays may be provided with gaskets or may be of seal welded
construction to achieve leak tight joints.
10.4 In case trays are provided with gaskets, place the gasketing on the support Ring. Install the
support ring clamps in the deck sections and end closing plates. Leave the clamps loose.
Attach the proper end closing plate with gasket to each end of the deck sections by bolting
through the deck section, gaskets and end closing plate. Tighten the bolting. Continue this
procedure until all sections are installed.
10.5 After deck plates are installed, rotate clamps under support ring and tighten clamps. Ensure all
gasketing, when required, is in proper position.
10.6 In case of seal welding, welding to be completed after assembly of deck plates and before
building the riser height. After completion of floor level assembly and seal welding, leak test
the tray to locate deficiency of seal welding and ensure leak tightness.
Install next level of risers to build-up riser height, seal weld and leak test. Continue till tray
assembly, seal welding and leak testing is complete.
10.7 Place gas riser covers in position and bolt covers to gas riser using the bolting provided.
Tighten the bolts.
10.8 Install a vortex breaker in the draw off nozzle, if required.
10.9 Remove all foreign materials so that collector is clean and unobstructed to ensure proper
performance.
11.0 LATTICE GIRDERS
Lattice girders, where utilized, will be of a special design to suit the job. Lattice girders are
normally provided to support Two trays/internale (i.e. top lip/flange of each primary member
supporting one tray/internal). Lattice girders are supplied in segments so as to enable
individual segment pass through the tower manhole, for final installation and welding inside
the tower.
It is to be ensured that out of levelness of primary members is within 2 mm and is in level

with respective support rings.
Do not install tray, unless installation (including welding) of Lattice Girder is complete.
12.0 TIGHTENING OF BOLTS & CLAMPS
While tightening bolts & clamps, care should be exercised to apply proper force to avoid
deformation in clamps. A spanner with a lever arm of 200 mm (8 inch) maximum should be
employed so as to apply a torque of approximately 15 ft. Lbs. for tightening of bolts, studs &
clamps of M10 size; torque of 18-22 ft. Lbs. for tightening of bolting/clamps of M12 size and
torque of 24-36 ft. Lbs. for tightening of bolting/clamps of M16 size.
Page 6108 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS
$1g-ar OfMg INDIA LIM1TED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0003 Rev. 5
1«1771 kwo,41ovaotr.0 IA Govt of Inda Undertak.g) INTERNALS Page 16 of 16
13.0 LEAK TESTING
(a) Preferred Method
Bubble caps, Collector/Accumulator trays, Distributors/Redistributors and other liquid

holding portion of other trays such as seal pans, draw off pans, recessed seal pans etc.
shall be leak tested with water. Drain holes/orifices shall be temporarily plugged
during testing. These holes are to be kept open during operation (unless otherwise
stated on the drawing). Leakage rate (i.e. fall in liquid level) shall not be more than the
value specified on the drawing. If leakage rate is excessive or a small area has a leak
rate which is appreciable, deck section shall be loosened and gasketing to be
repositioned to stop leakage.
(b) Alternate Method
If filling the plate with water is not practical, spot leak testing should be done. Using a
small stream of water from a hose, pour water on the joints and see if leakage occurs.
The main joints to check are the joints at support ring. A small liquid pool will occur.
If leakage occurs loosen the bolting and reposition the gasketing to stop the leakage.
If leak testing cannot be done, all gaskets should be closely inspected to assure proper
gasket sealing. This can be done with a small diameter wire by probing the joint or by
light testing the joint. If holes/gaps are found, loosen joints and reposition gasket to
obtain proper sealing.
14.0 REMOVAL OF LINSEED OIL COATING FROM CARBON STEEL TRAYS AND
TOWER INTERNALS
14.1 Prepare 10% caustic soda solution at about 80°C in a trough.
14.2 Immerse Tray or Tower Internal component coated with linseed oil for about 10 minutes.
14.3 Remove the component, scrub with wire brush using sand followed with rinse in clean
potable water for 15 minutes.
14.4 Repeat rinse in potable water two more times.
15.0 INSTALLATION CHECK LIST & REPORT1NG
After completion of Installation of each tray/tower internal, review the installation and report
the same in accordance with EIL specification for Review of Site Installation of Tower
internale (Specification No. 6-14-001 6).
Page 6109 of 8516

SPECIFICATION FOR SPECIFICATION No.
ei ENGINEERS FABRICATION OF SUPPORT
*grif acs INDIA UMITED 6-14-0007 Rev. 4
(A Govt o India Undertaking)
RINGS AND B/BARS FOR
TRAYS/TOWER INTERNALS Page 1 of 6
t, "T4 dIcR
*V-IV Thi qir— Tr W-{
-ftrffkr
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FABRICATION OF
SUPPORT RINGS AND BOLTING BARS
FOR
b,1••■/‘
,(
}
REAFFIRMED & REISSUED AS STANDARD

4 25-09-17 SK/ IK KJ 1A- RKT
SPECIFICATION
3 16-11-10 REVISED AND REISSUED IK KKG AKG ND
2 18-01-06 REVISED AND REISSUED SKM HCN AKM VJN

1 24-08-99 PG YVR/HCN RKA AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6110 of 8516

LSPeltLi ENGINEERS FABRICATION OF SUPPORT
Ifgar INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0007 Rev. 4
rvrame ostaair.) (A Govt of India Undeitaking) RINGS AND B/BARS FOR
Abbreviations:
B/Bars - Bolting Bars

CA - Corrosion Allowance
TSR - Tray Support Ring

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Page 6111 of 8516

ENGINEERS FABRICATION OF SUPPORT
Ogeil Eiwg INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0007 Rev. 4
(Own RIERVIV 4510 (A Gout Of India undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCES 4
3.0 MATERIALS 4
4.0 DIMENSIONS 4
5.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION FEATURES 4
6.0 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE 6
Page 6112 of 8516

!it ENGINEERS FABRICATION OF SUPPORT
Ogeli 20leg INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0007 Rev. 4
IMIETTeRlAteeCTIMI9) IA Govt of Wide Undertaking) RINGS AND B/BARS FOR
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the fabrication and inspection requirements emphasizing the
important parameters, which shall be taken into consideration while welding tray supports and
bolting bars to the column. The requirements as specified in tray support drawings take
precedence over those specified in this specification.
2.0 REFERENCES
Following shall form the reference documents for carrying out the work:
i) Tray Support Ring (TSR) and Bolting Bar (B/Bar) drawings.
ii) Construction Tolerances for Welded Standard No. 7-14-0001

Supports for Trays/Tower Internals
3.0 MATERIALS
Unless otherwise specified the materials of TSR and B/Bars, Support Cleats etc. shall be same
as that of the column shell (cladding if any). All the materials shall be new, of first quality and
of the type & grade as specified on the column drawing and shall meet all the requirements
such as NACE, HIC etc. if specified on the column drawings.
4.0 DIMENSIONS
The dimensions as shown on the engineering drawings are final and shall be maintained (in as
welded condition) within the tolerances furnished either on the TSR & B/Bar drawings itself
or as covered in this specification and General Construction Tolerances Standard No. 7-14-
0001. For any deviation, written acceptance shall be obtained from EIL.
5.0 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
5.1 All support rings, bolting bars, beam support brackets and other components which are welded
to the column shell inside, will be supplied and installed by column fabricator in accordance
with details supplied by EIL.
In case of revamp jobs, the supply and installation shall be as covered in the relevant Project
Specification.
5.2 All parts shall be fabricated smooth, true, clean & free from burrs, creases and dents.
53 Welding shall be done by qualified and approved welders using suitable fillers and fluxes.
5.4 Welding of Support Ring
5.4.1 Carbon Steel Material
Support Rings shall be continuously welded with column shell on top as well as bottom side
or as specified in Job Specifications.
5.4.2 Other Nobler Material
In case of SS columns or in case of shell cladding with nobler metallurgy with no CA on

column internals (i.e. Incoloy, Monel etc.) support rings shall be provided with continuous
welding on top side and stitch weld (25mm @50mm pitch) or continuous welded on bottom
side.
Page 6113 of 8516

/SafTid ENGINEERS FABRICATION OF SUPPORT
ell Meg
1.27, evenrz M13,10.1)
S INDIA LIMITED
(A Gout of India Undertaking)
6-14-0007 Rev. 4
5.4.3 No gap shall be left at the joint of bolting bar and the support ring. Refer Figure 5.4.3.1 and
Figure 5.4.3.2 below:
t_
FIGURE 5.4.3.1
NO GAP HERE
PROVIDED HERE
FIGURE 5.4.3.2
5.4.4 No welding to be done at the top and edge of support ring at support ring and bolting bar joint.
Refer Figure 5.4.4.1 and Figure 5.4.4.2 below:
FIGURE 5.4.4.1 FIGURE 5.4.4.2
5.4.5 Provide seal run weld on top and bottom of support ring at locations wherever support ring is
crossing longitudinal weld on the vessel. No gaps shall be allowed between vessel wall and
support ring.
5.4.6 In case the support ring is fabricated out of various pieces, butt weld provided on support ring
shall be ground flushed on top and bottom faces of the ring.
5.4.7 Support Ring Width (W) and minimum Thicknesses (T) shall be as per respective TSR &
B/Bar Drawings furnished by EIL or the Tray Vendors duly approved by EIL.
5.5 Welding of Bolting Bar
5.5.1 Size of the B/Bars shall be as specified in the drawings. These can, however, be
varied/adjusted to achieve the dimensions of various parts within the tolerances as specified in
the drawings.
Page 6114 of 8516

451P-ae?
2151-eu
=o) INDIA
( ENGINEERS
LIMITED
SPECIFICATION FOR
FABRICATION OF SUPPORT
6-14-0007 Rev. 4
1.0, 212,1,970,3,111.1) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
5.5.2 B/Bars wherever crossing circumferential seam of the vessel, shall be provided with seal run
weld. No gap is permitted between vessel wall and bolting bar edge.
5.5.3 The weld joint between straight and sloping downcomer shall be ground flushed. Alternately,
bolting bar may be bent by making a groove on one side and tack welding on the groove
thereafter. Refer Figure 5.5.3.1 below:
TACK WELD
BEND BB AFTER
MAKING GROOVE
FIGURE 5.5.3.1
5.5.4 Bolting Bar Width (W) and Thicknesses (T) shall be as per respective TSR & B/Bar Drawings
furnished by EIL or the Tray Vendors duly approved by EIL.
6.0 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
6.1 Correct location and fixing of tray support rings/bolting bars and the support cleats are
extremely important for smooth installation of the trays and internals at the site. It is
absolutely necessary that careful inspection of the supports welded to the shell is done in the
shop floor in order to avoid unnecessary delays and inconvenience during the installation of
trays and internals inside the column at site.
It is the responsibility of the vessel fabricator to ensure that all the supports are welded as per
drawing/standards/specification and 100 percent checked by the fabricator's inspection
department before offering the same for inspection by Owner's representative/nominated
inspection authority. Records of fabrication and quality check shall be maintained by the
vessel fabricator duly counter checked by Owner's representative/authorized inspection
authority.
Page 6115 of 8516

PACKING, MARKING AND STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS SHIPPING SPECIFICATIONS
FOR TRAYS AND TOWER
t., zrq-z ragdi, atw,'
.risfur -ftw
PACKING, MARKING
AND
SHIPPING SPECIFICATIONS
FOR

4 12.09.14
SPECIFICATION
3 16.11.09 PG SKM/HCN AKG ND
2 21.07.04 PB SKM/HCN RKA SKG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6116 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogzu 22-eg ~w INDIA LIMITED SHIPPING SPECIFICATIONS FOR 6-14-0009 Rev. 4
1~1 elecnr1 ffil 3~ ) I A GOvt ot indla Undertak I TRAYS AND TOWER INTERNALE Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
Convenor : Sh. Amit Prakash

Members : Sh. Mandip Kapoor
Sh. Inder Kumar
Sh. G. K. Iyer (Const.)
Page 6117 of 8516

ENGINEERS
mar i~f~lz5 INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Intha Unellaking)
SHIPPING SPECIFICATIONS FOR
6-14-0009 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 INTENT 4
2.0 PACKING 4
3.0 MARKING 5
4.0 SHIPMENT 5
SKETCHES 6
Page 6118 of 8516

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED SHIPPING SPECIFICATIONS FOR 6-14-0009 Rev. 4
cw+7»,1513~) I A GO vt of incha Undettak.9 TRAYS AND TOWER INTERNALS Page 4 of 6
1.0 INTENT
This specification defines the minimum requirements for packing, marking and shipping of
Trays, Tower Internals, Tower Packing and other associated components so as to ensure the
damage free transportation. This specification shall not be construed as final and shall not
relieve the vendor of their responsibility of adequate packing of the same for damage free
transportation depending upon the mode of transportation to be adopted finally.
2.0 PACKING
2.1 Trays, Tower Internals and Tower Packing for different columns shall not be mixed in one
box and shall be packed (item wise) separately for each column.
2.2 Unless otherwise in the Engineering drawings, the internals and its associated components
shall not be painted.
2.3 All carbon steel components are to be protected against rusting with two coats of double
boiled linseed oil and all the stainless steel components are to be cleaned free from foreign
materials and shall be supplied duly pickled and passivated.
2.4 All components shall be provided with match and identification marks and also bear the
column number. All identical components shall have the same markings which shall strictly
correspond with numbers given on fabrication drawings. Markings shall be done with
indelible paint or ink which does not contain any metallic pigments.
2.5 A11 Internal components shall be properly packed, crated and boxed in a manner such as to
protect all parts from damage or loss during transit. It will be Internals Supplier's
responsibility to pack and ensure damage free transit for the mode of transportation finally
adopted and adequate for storage at site for a minimum period of 6 months. All packings shall
be done in polythene lined wooden cases, as per either EIL Standard specification or Vendor's
proven Standard (In case, Installation of internals is in Vendor's Scope otherwise follow EIL
standard specification). Vendor may use Euro Bags or equivalent for Random Packings (if
installation by same agency otherwise follow EIL standard specification). Maximum weight of
each case shall preferably be limited to 250 kgs.
2.6 Nuts, Bolts, Studs, Clips, Washers, Clamps, Gaskets, Pipes etc.
A11 supplementary materials like nuts, bolts, clips, washers, clamps, gaskets, pipes and other
components required for internals assembly shall be placed in separate boxes item wise. Nuts,
bolts, clamps, washers etc. for individual item shall be packed in separate containers and due
care shall be taken to ensure that different types as well as sizes of bolting, clamps etc. are not
allowed to get intermixed. Separate packages with polyethylene linings for different types of
bolts, nuts, clamps, washers etc. for identical components for each column should be made out
and then encased in a bigger container which shall be properly marked with the description of
materials packed and the column number etc. as directed in 3.1 below. The quantity and
description of materials packed shall also be displayed on the smaller packages enclosed in
these boxes. A11 Constructional spares shall be packed in separate containers. The packing for
individual components would be done in the same manner as required for supplementary
materials and the box shall be marked with "MAINTENANCE SPARES"/"OPERATIONAL
SPARES" in addition to other particulars as per 3.1 below.
Page 6119 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogw 02- g 1.1271 cw.r,15,3~/
INDIA LIMITED SHIPPING SPECIFICATIONS FOR 6-14-0009 Rev. 4
(A Govt ol Intha undertakm)
TRAYS AND TOWER INTERNALS Page 5 of 6
2.7 Packing Cases
Generally constructed as per drawing attached and the following :
(a) Crates and boxes over 500 mm long shall be reinforced with a minimum of two steel
straps or hoop spaced in 500 mm centers maximum. When the container weight
exceeds 250 kg, skids shall be bolted to the container frame.
(b) Sheathed crates and boxes containing a net weight over 200 kg and all open sided
crates shall have diagonal bracing in all faces.
(c) Flat boxes (containers with two dimension that are four times the third) shall have
diagonal bracing on the two large faces and shall have the four steel straps secured
with nails or screws when the contained weight is over 200 kg.
3.0 MARKING
3.1 Cases and crates containing tray materials shall be marked at least on 3 sides; for the project,
consignees, consignors, Job No., Order No., Gross & Net Weights, dimensions, description
and quantity of materials etc. Column No. must appear on all the packing cases/boxes in bold
Letters.
3.2 Additional markings such as "handle with care", "this side up" etc to be indicated by arrow.
"Fragile" or any other additional indications for protection and safe handling shall be added in
accordance with the type of materials.
3.3 For bulk uniform materials, when packed in several cases, progressive serial numbers shall be
indicated on each cases.
3.4 A packing list shall accompany the material and shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope
fastened to the package to enable verification on arrival of the consignment or when taking up
of the delivery. It is necessary that additional copy of packing list with one copy of drawings
along with one copy of installation instructions enclosed in a waterproof envelope is also to be
placed under the upper lid in each package.
4.0 SHIPMENT
All dispatches of material shall be done in accordance with the relevant terms of the purchase
order. Any other means of transport shall be resorted to only after prior approval in writing.
Page 6120 of 8516

. k31 ENGINEEFZS
$ga f&EM- g INDIA LIMITED SHIPPING SPECIFICATIONS FOR 6-14-0009 Rev. 4
• 1~1 ri2u, 1A Govl of lndw Undettakng)
TRAYS AND TOWER INTERNALS Page 6 of 6
MUSTBESWABLYSECUREDTOAVOIDMOVEMENT
5. ONECOPYOFPACKINGUSTENCLOSED IN WATERPROOFENVELOPETOBEFASTENED
8. UENG111, WIDTHANDHEIGHTOFBOXESTOBE DECIDEDBYTHE FABRICATOR.

•z
z,x o
zoès
o
E z
O mWa
zz d f2
L7J z ffl <
g
u
o
Page 6121 of 8516

f6 I 15 3,e S INDIALIMITED
IA Govt. of India Undertaking)
FOR PACKING THE COLUMN 6-14-0011 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 7
wrga. Rut
ray. Trw-w likWer
FOR
PACKING THE COLUMN
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS ‘-'1Guor'l

5 25-09-17 KJH RKT RN
STANDARD. SPECIFICATION SK / IK
REVISED AND ISSUED AS
4 06-09-10 AKG ND
STANDARD. SPECIFICATION HD SKM
3 24-09-09 AKG ND
STANDARD SPECIFICATION SB SKM/HCN
2 23-07-04 RKA SKG
STANDARD SPECIFICATION IK SKM
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD.
1 07-10-98 RKA AS
SPECIFICATION SKM HCN
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6122 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
/gar fal5 leg
I WA anr.ren,lninAr
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go. of Ind. Undertaking)
FOR PACKING THE COLUMN 6-14-0011 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
CMR : Cascade Mini-Ring

EIC : Engineer In Charge
IMTP : Intalox Metal Tower Packing

Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. P.P. Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Page 6123 of 8516

lalfazieY FAZ) ENONEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
$1gar fd51-ez NDIA LIMITED FOR PACKING THE COLUMN 6-14-0011 Rev. 5
(MEW elin■V I (A Govt. India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 DUMPED TOWER PACKING 4
3.0 STACKED TOWER PACKING 5
4.0 GENERAL NOTES 5
SKETCH 2.1 6
SKETCH 2.2 7
SKETCH 3.1 7
Page 6124 of 8516

-11 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Ogeir tPles INDIA LIMITED FOR PACKING THE COLUMN 6-14-0011 Rev. 5
2.1E413.2 0,13,10.1) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 4 of 7
1.0 GENERAL
The purpose of this specification is to provide guidelines for filling tower packing in the
column in a satisfactory manner. The tower packing in a column are either 'stacked' or
`dumped' depending on the size and Material of Construction of tower packing and the
requirements specified in the applicable drawing. Metal Packing such as IMTP (in all sizes),
Hypak Rings, Pall Rings, Raschig Rings, CMR, Nutter Rings, Berl Saddles and other type
of random packing upto and including 75 mm sizes, shall be normally 'dumped' in the
column. When specified in the drawing, Metal tower packing above 75 mm sizes are
`stacked' in the column. Ceramic or Carbon tower packing shall be 'Stacked'. Wherever
stacking is not feasible, same shall be "Dumped Wet" only in consultation with EIC.
2.0 DUMPED TOWER PACKING
2.1 Ensure that the support plate for the tower packing is properly installed prior to dumping the
tower packing in the column.
2.2 Tower packing can be dumped in column in wet or dry condition. It is normally adequate to
pack the column in "Dry" condition. However, if specified to pack the column in wet
condition, ensure that at least 1.0 meter of water level is maintained above the surface of the
packed bed at all times and preferably, the water level should be upto the loading manhole.
The first lot of tower packing should be carefully and slowly dumped on support plate and
leveled by hand while standing on the support plate. The support plate is to be covered to a
depth of 200-300 mm by this method. This assures that tower packing will not get damaged
by dropping directly onto the support plate. Ensure that the assembly of support plate is
satisfactory and no tower packing are falling from the support plate.
2.4 Build a trap bucket-chute construction as per Sketch 2.1 for dumping the packing in the
column. While packing the columns having diameter larger than 1400 mm, chute and sock
must be moved periodically to various areas of the column to prevent the tower packing
from piling up in a particular area. The sock should be repositioned after 0.5 m 3 of tower
packing is dumped at a position. The distance between the lower end of the sock and top of
tower packing should be at least 600 mm but not more than 2000 mm for metal & plastic
tower packing.
However, while packing the columns having diameter upto 1400 mm, it is not necessary to
move the chute and sock periodically to various positions in the horizontal area of the
column. But ensure that the sock is located along the vertical centerline of the column. If
loading manway is 3.0 meter or less above the support plate, tower packing can be dumped
without sock as shown in the sketch.
After the top of tower packing is within 2.4 meter or less of column manhole, metal tower
packing may be dumped after removing the sock from chute.
NOTE:
On large diameters, it may require more than one chute with different lengths to reach across
the column.
2.5 As tower packing height reaches the final elevation, tower packing shall be leveled
carefully. Level off the top of packed bed by lightly tramping on the wooden plank of size
1.2 meter x 0.4 meter (Ensure that wooden plank is removed from column immediately after
the use). In case a bed limiter exists, the top of tower packing shall be in level with the
bottom of bed limiter. Add tower packing until this is accomplished.
It shall be ensured that tower packing are touching bed limiter and there shall not be any
void between the tower packing and bed limiter.
Page 6125 of 8516

-1(aeiel
.31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Oge.11 Meg INDIA LIMITED FOR PACKING THE COLUMN 6-14-0011 Rev. 5
(A Govt of India Undeftak69)
Page 5 of 7
3.0 STACKED TOWER PACKING
3.1 For Ceramic, Carbon Tower packing and Metal Tower Packing requiring stacking, same
shall be stacked vertically as shown in Sketch 3.1 with each layer of rings staggered to each
other. As an alternate, Ceramic and Carbon Tower Packing, if feasible, can also be
"Dumped Wet" as per procedure given in Para 2.2 above, after obtaining concurrence from
EIC.
4.0 GENERAL NOTES
4.1 It shall be ensured that the top of the tower packing is reasonably horizontal (level) as the
bed is being packed, so that the bed inclination is within 30° from horizontal. This normally,
requires, positioning the chute within no more than 1.5 meter from previous positions.
4.2 Make sure that foreign materials such as grease and lubricants are removed from the tower
packing prior to their installation in the column. Also ensure that boards, boxes, ladders etc.
are not buried and left in the column. Such objects will cause excessive pressure drop and
maldistribution of gas and liquid resulting in malfunctioning of the column.
43 As far as possible, walking on or excessive handling of tower packing should be avoided. It

is best to place sections of the bed limiter (when used) into the column and stand on these
sections while the bed limiter is assembled. If it becomes necessary to step directly on
packed bed, it must be done only on a wooden plank of minimum size 0.8 meter x 0.4 meter
to ensure that there is no damage to tower packing. Do not jump over the bed. Wooden
plank, polythene, jute/woven socks etc. should not be left in the packed bed.
4.4 Caution
If tower packing are dropped from an excessive distance and/or are directly walked on, the
amount of tower packing required to fill the bed will increase. This may result in poor
performance of the column and shortage of tower packing. Maintain record of quantity of
tower packing dumped in individual beds of column.
Page 6126 of 8516

INDIA LIMITED FOR PACKING THE COLUMN 6-14-0011 Rev. 5
1.R77 2924,17 MERFA) (A Govt o India Undettalung)
Page 6 of 7
eoo
INSIDE SURFACE MUST BE

.61100111
SECTION—AA
Page 6127 of 8516

Ogeztlajeg INDIA UMITED FOR PACKING THE COLUMN 6-14-0011 Rev. 5
INR71 29WIRE• EIAJWIRD IA G0A of lode undertaking)
Page 7 of 7
MANHOLE
COLUMNS UPTO 1400 DIA.

■• •
TOP OF PACKINGS
onnnnnnnr\
SKETCH 2.2
SKETCH 3.1
COLUMNS ABOVE 1400 DIA.
PLAN VIEW OF SKETCH 3.1
Page 6128 of 8516

FABRICATION, INSPECTION AND STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENG1NEERS PACKAGING PROCEDURE FOR
fajteg 1NDIA LIMITED 6-14-0012 Rev. 6
.~71■WiS44,14,3.1,1,31, RANDOM TOWER PACKINGS Page 1 of 5
cic« 141 -x-fr

ffittg-Tur
FABRICATION, INSPECTION AND

PACKAGING PROCEDURE FOR
RANDOM TOWER PACKINGS
6 12.09.14
JA AK/SKM
9 SC
SPECIFICATION
5 13.07.09 HD SKM/HCN AKG ND
3 16.10.97 SKN HCN/SKK RKA AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6129 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$•C-ar f81ffift INDIA LIMITED PACKAGING PROCEDURE FOR 6-14-0012 Rev. 6
Gurt Unek.fti.gi RANDOM TOWER PACKINGS Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
CMR Casecade Mini-Ring

ID Inner Diameter
IMTP Intalox Metal Tower Packings
OD Outer Diameter
Convenor : Mr. Amit Prakash
Members : Mr. Mandip Kapoor

Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Ratan Lal (Projects)
Mr. G. K. Iyer (Construction)
Page 6130 of 8516

SitWg ENGINEERS FABRICATION, INSPECTION AND
PACKAGING PROCEDURE FOR
$'2 2tateg INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0012 Rev. 6
Wrf ,470.,11,34,15. ti,y4 tft,deo"ncp RANDOM TOWER PACKINGS Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 MATERIAL 4
3.0 FABRICATION 4
4.0 STAGE INSPECTION DURING FABRICATION ..4
5.0 ESTABLISHMENT OF PIECE DENSITY ...4
6.0 PACKAGING 4
Page 6131 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS
ta J INDIA LIMITED PACKAGING PROCEDURE FOR 6-14-0012 Rev. 6
C■ovl ItION Ibldeft"ng,
RANDOM TOWER PACKINGS Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
This procedure covers fabrication, inspection and packaging of Metallic Random Tower
Packings e.g. Pall Rings, Hypak Rings, IMTP, CMR, Nutter Rings etc.
2.0 MATERIAL
2.1 Material used shall be fresh sheets free of corrosion, pitting and mill scale.
2.2 The inspector shall check the material test certificates and identify the material for packings. In
case test certificates are not available, check test shall be done and inspection engineer's
approval shall be obtained prior to initiating fabrication. Any material damaged during storage
or handling before start of fabrication shall be replaced by vendor without delay.
3.0 FABRICATION
3.1 Packings shall be fabricated using regular production toolings and shall have good and uniform
workmanship without any crack/tearing at bend/lancing location.
3.2 A11 burrs and sharp edges shall be removed and finished packings shall be free from cracks,
distortion and kinks.
4.0 STAGE INSPECTION DURING FABRICATION
4.1 The Inspector shall check the thickness and dimensions like O.D., I.D., height, number and
angle of the fingers of Metal Pall Ring, Hypak Ring, IMTP, CMR and other type of Metallic
Random Packing as per applicable approved drawings/standards. In case of proprietary packings
being supplied by Indian Licensee, inspection shall be carried out based on Licensor's approved
sample/drawings and EIL/Licensor approved quality plan.
4.2 IMTP series of packings must be checked against nesting (i.e. one ring should not go inside the
other under any orientation). If they do so, the rings shall be rejected.
4.3 Inspector shall check that all burrs from punched holes are removed.
4.4 Inspector shall check that packings are free from cracks/tearing at bend/lancing location.
4.5 Stagewise inspection during fabrication will be carried out and because of large number of
similar items, inspector shall give the clearance for the fabrication of the lot only after checking
and approving the first sample piece. Further, random checking shall also be carried out by the
inspector during fabrication/after fabrication.
5.0 ESTABLISHMENT OF PIECE DENSITY
Wherever specified in the requisition, vendor shall establish and demonstrate piece density
(Number of pieces/m3) by filling Random packings in a cylindrical container of volume not less
than 0.5m3 and diameter not less than 500 mm. Piece density shall be witnessed and certified by
Inspection authority.
6.0 PACKAGING
The inspector shall check that the packaging is done as per packaging instructions given along
with the purchase order and the packaging is done properly to avoid damage during transport.
A11 packaging shall be done in polythene lined wooden cases, as per either EIL Standard
Specification or vendor's proven standard, e.g. vendor may use Euro Bags or equivalent (if
installation is in vendor's scope) otherwise vendor shall follow EIL Standard Specification.
Page 6132 of 8516

k31
ENGNEERs FABRICATION, INSPECTION AND STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
0"ZIT 18~ 161.39~

INDIA LIMITED
■A (..vt
PACKAGING PROCEDURE FOR 6-14-0012 Rev. 6
indiA U.Jml"ng
RANDOM TOWER PACKINGS Page 5 of 5
Maximum weight of each wooden case shall preferably be limited to 250 kgs. A11 carbon steel
packings shall be protected from rusting and stainless steel packings shall be clean and free from
all foreign materials such as grease, oil etc. by vapour degreasing procedure. All spares for
random packings shall be packaged and supplied separately so as to preserve them in new
condition, tagged properly so as to identify them as and when needed and shall be clearly
marked "Spares".
Page 6133 of 8516

INSPECTION AND STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS PERFORMANCE TEST
$'1g-ar kit5ieg INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0013 Rev. 5
ail7n elrow (TA ,R,73 I IA Govt of India Undeltaking)
PROCEDURE FOR SPRAY
NOZZLES Page 1 of 7
TO" G-1).71 t P11497

Krd
Me•Lii4G-1 4N- coielf
INSPECTION AND
PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURE
FOR SPRAY NOZZLES
REVISED AND ISSUED AS

5 06.02.15 PG L/ A SC
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
4 21.01.10 JA SKM/HCN AKG ND
Standards Standards
Prepared
Date Purpose Checked by Convenor Chairman
No by
Approved by
Page 6134 of 8516

fazie7ENGINEERS PERFORMANCE TEST
1:gzfr faireg INDIA LIMITED 6 -14-0013 Rev. 5
1.4177, 111,1cIvA IA G04 of India Underldlong) PROCEDURE FOR SPRAY
NOZZLES Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
HMTD Heat & Mass Transfer Division

PG Pressure Gauge
M Motor
Members : Sh. Mandip Kapoor

Sh. Inder Kumar
Sh. GK Iyer (Const)
Page 6135 of 8516

ENGINEERS PERFORMANCE TEST
$1=dzir aft. INDIA LIMITED
i'Ver, .AKAA / IA GOA 01 Ir1AIa Undeltalong) PROCEDURE FOR SPRAY
6-14-0013 Rev. 5
NOZZLES Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 MATERIAL 4
3.0 SAMPLE MANUFACTURING 4
4.0 FINAL INSPECTION AND PERFORMANCE TEST 5
5.0 MARKING AND PACKING 5
ANNEXURES:
Format for Dimension Check test results 6-14-0013-F1
Format for Capacity & Spray Coverage test results 6-14-0013-F2
Format for Spray Pattern test results 6-14-0013-F3
Page 6136 of 8516

afa.Jel. ENGINEERS PERFORMANCE TEST
$'1g-ar tafareg
or, mama du Jedsai)
INDIA LIMITED PROCEDURE FOR SPRAY
6-14-0013 Rev. 5
NOZZLES Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
This procedure covers inspection and performance testing of 'Full jet' Spray Nozzles of
nominal size 1/8" to 4" (both sizes inclusive). Inspection shall be done as per
Specifications/Standards stipulated in Purchase Requisition and approved drawings.
2.0 MATERIAL
Material shall be checked with respect to original mill test certificate. In case the same is not
available, complete check testing shall be carried out as per applicable specification/standard
at reputed third party testing laboratory.
3.0 SAMPLE MANUFACTURING
One sample of each type and size of Spray Nozzle shall be inspected and tested as detailed
below:
3.1 Dimensional Check : Following dimensions shall be checked:

- Outside diameter and length
- Size, type and length of threading
- Orifice diameter
- Flat face
3.2 Performance Following characteristics shall be checked:

- Capacity (flow rate)
- Spray angle
- Spray pattern (if specified in the requisition)
3.2.1 Capacity
Figure 3.2.1 shows a suggested flow scheme for arrangement of 'Testing Hook-up' to test
performance of Spray Nozzles. Globe valve opening will be adjusted to measure flow rate at
specified pressure indicated in Flow Indicator and Pressure Gauge respectively.
3.2.2 Spray Angle
Àctual Spray Coverage' at a specified spray distance shall be measured. Spray angle can be
measured by a protector but shall preferably be calculated based on actual spray coverage at
500 mm distance from the nozzle tip. Refer Figure 3.2.2 for definition of these terms.
3.2.3 Spray Pattern
Refer Figure 3.2.3 for details of suggested arrangement for evaluating Spray Pattern.
Concentric Rings with partition baffle plates have been provided on Tray radially at interval of
60° making 6 Nos. Chambers in each concentric ring. Liquid can be collected through
`Downcomer pipe' provided within each baffle chamber of the concentric ring and liquid flow
in that spray area is measured.
Spray Nozzle Dimensions and above spray characteristics shall be recorded and sent to EIL-
HMTD for approval before acceptance by the inspector. On receipt of EIL-FIMTD approval,
vendor can proceed with mass scale production. Suggested proforma for recording Spray
Nozzle Characteristics is as per Format No. 6-14-0013-F1, 6-14-0013-F2 & 6-14-0013-F3.
Page 6137 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS PERFORMANCE TEST
5fgar idWe-G
4.11F7I erearte /
INDIA LIMITED
I A Govl of India Undettaktogi PROCEDURE FOR SPRAY
6-14-0013 Rev. 5
NOZZLES Page 5 of 7
3.3 Acceptance Criteria
Acceptance criteria for variation shall be as follows:

+ 50
i) Spray Angle/Coverage
ii) Capacity + 5%
4.0 FINAL INSPECTION AND PERFORMANCE TEST
4.1 Dimension check as detailed in clause 3.1 above shall he tabulated in proforma as per Format
No. 6-14-0013-F1 .
4.2 Few samples (10%, minimum 2 nos.) at random will be selected and subjected to performance
test as detailed in clause 3.2 above. Test results shall be tabulated in proforma as per Format
No. 6-14-0013-F2 & 6-14-0013-F3.
5.0 MARKING AND PACKING
Spray Nozzles shall be provided with identification mark by non-removable paint of non-
metallic origin. Threaded portion of Nozzle shall be greased and protected to avoid any
damage.
The inspector will check that the packing is done as per packing instructions given in Purchase
Requisition and also ensure that all items as per Purchase Requisition are packed and packing
is done properly to avoid damage during transit.
Page 6138 of 8516

el ENGINEERS PERFORMANCE TEST
$rigai Mieg INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0013 Rev. 5
0100W anagagar GoA 01 Ind Undertaking) PROCEDURE FOR SPRAY
NOZZLES Page 6 of 7
OW INDICATOR
GLOBE VALVE X
REDUCER
d
(OR EXPANDER)
NON—RETURN VALVE
N RAY N0771 F
PUMP //
//P ill I 111\
\\\ \ \
PIPE
111
/1 / / ///Li , , t \ TOP OF PACKING
WATER SUMP
FIG: -3.2.1 FLOW SCHEME SPRAY NOZZLE TEST ARRANGEMENT
SPRAY NOZZLE
0mm I I
SPRAY ANGLE
500mm
700mm
900mm
1200mm TOP OF PACKING
ACTUAL SPRAY COVERAGE
THEORETICAL SPRAY COVERAGE
FIG: -3.2.2 SPRAY ANGLE AND SPRAY COVERAGE
Page 6139 of 8516

_itz1
- ENGINEERS PERFORMANCE TEST
1.17,1 ele,
742 JP47,
A, IA Govt of maga UovIettolt ■ og) PROCEDURE FOR SPRAY
NOZZLES Page 7 of 7
to
< _I
cS _1
ch
LL-I
41 J
L
I_ L. 0 41
.9 a
CO LT_ = o cc m
2 to LI- _I id
D V)
0 ..,
-, m
Z
41
0 Lc- -I2
O
CD Z 0
0
2
D V) ,
P .
P H
._. z v) 0 0
0
. - - >- g
0 g, . 2Z
DETAIL - A
(DOWNCOMER PIPE)
O Ct E w
rn m aL. a E m CC LI-I
ct
z --A . H 0 —I
CO
I 6w Wzo zi
O mo 12
— 0< Lu
P x
O 0 °43 r, V) IT
Z Z < Z o 0 LIJ I—uj
o Cr
cc m 2 —IN c.) 0
o 1— Caro
C..)
° Z ° .-- ? LA-
z Er:,
1--c2,kic5 oc)m
1-- o 0 w
to g 0 Z Ni-
CI
_i 0 °
Z
0
L j L9
LL I 6 _
H
V ) ..V
.-.: CaD
ZIr LLI
: M !
0 I
< 0) 0 C-) 0- .- 71 F-- I-
z
FIG. 3.2.3SPRAY PATTERN

C■i wi 4
CO
<
I _I Ii
0 0 Q
ADJUSTABLE SPACING •■•800
0
FROM 500 TO 1800 6 u_i
°
?o
0
100
0
z E
E
0
00
Li
BASE PLATE
co
D
m
LL LL
Page 6140 of 8516

Document No.
ENGINEERS DIMENSIONAL CHECK
tares INDIA LIMITED TEST RESULTS
In Govt of InOa Uncleflaking)
Page 1 of 1
TEST RESULTS
Spray Nozzle Type
Spray Nozzle Size
Required
Sample
Dimensional Check Parameters (as per Approved Observed
No.
Drawing / Catalogue)
• Outside Diameter
• Length
• Size of Thread
• Type of Thread
• Length of Thread
• Orifice Diameter
• Angle of Flat Face w.r.t. Centerline
Format No. 6-14-0013-F1 Rev.0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 6141 of 8516

Document No.
ENGINEERS SPRAY PATTERN
a Mit-G.
1.1,1 afore 1,11
INDIA LIMITED
(A G. of Inc. Uncleftalongf TEST RESULTS Page 1 of 1
TEST RESULTS
Spray Nozzle Type
Spray Nozzle Size
Spray Nozzle Characteristics tested Capacity (flow rate)
Spray Angle (Coverage)
Pressure Drop Spray Capacity, Litres/min. Spray Angle

Test Spray
Sample (kg/cm2)/(psi) Distance
Duration Coverage
No. (mm)
(Minutes) Required Observed (mm) Required Observed
(1 ) (2)
Notes:
1. Spray Nozzles shall be tested at pressure drop of 5, 15 and 30 psi.
2. Spray Nozzles shall be tested at Spray Distance of 500mm, and tip distance as per datasheet.
3. Vendor shall report the minimum pressure for which Spray Angle and Spray Distribution is
maintained.
Format No. 6-14-0013-F2 Rev.O Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 6142 of 8516

Document No.
ENGINEERS CAPACITY AND SPRAY
$fgar kift-eg INDIA LIMITED
eitc1,1145■ 302671, IA Govl
COVERAGE TEST RESULTS
of Ind. Unde0AIA9>
Page 1 of 1
TEST RESULTS
Spray Nozzle Type
Spray Nozzle Size
Spray Nozzle Characteristics tested Spray Pattern
Spray Distance mm
Pressure Drop psi
Liquid Collected From Liquid Collected From

Sample No. Downcomer Pipe No. Downcomer Pipe No.
Litres Litres
(Note -1) (Note - 1)
1. 16.
2. 17.
3. 18.
4. 19.
5. 20.
6. 21.
7. 22.
8. 23.
9. 24.
10. 25.
11. 26.
12. 27.
13. 28.
14. 29.
15. 30.
31.
Notes:
1. Spray Pattern in different area between concentric rings on Trays can be measured by collecting
liquid through drain plug in that area. Downcomer pipes shall be plugged during this test.
Format No. 6-14-0013-F3 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6143 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR TRAYS AND TOWER
5fg-arIMffieg INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
INTERNALS (UN-ENGINEERED) Page 1 of 25
(4.-APHRii ‹rvi)

(UN-ENGINEERED)
5/?)'
3 12.03.14 UT AK/S M SC
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND RE-ISSUED AS STANDARD ND
2 09.03.09 IK SKM/HCN AKG
SPECIFICATION
1 16-12-03 SKM HCN/SKK RKA SKG
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Forma: No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 6144 of 8516

.72m
Abbreviations:
AIA Authorized Inspection Agency
AWS American Welding Society
CD Compact Disk
CS Carbon Steel
CV Coefficient of Variation
ERW Electric Resistant Welding
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
GAD General Arrangement Drawings
GTAW Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
HDS Hydraulic Data Sheet
HETP Height Equivalent to Theoretical Plate
HVGO Heavy Vacuum Gas Oil
1D Internal Diameter
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
LSTK Lumpsum Turnkey
MOC Material of Construction
OD Outside Diameter
PDS Process Data Sheet
PL Process Licensor
PMC Project Management Consultant (This shall be EIL unless specified
otherwise).
SS Stainless Steel
TIG Tungsten Inert Gas
Heat & Mass Transfer Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. Amit Prakash
Members: Mr. Mandip Kapoor

Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. G K lyer (Const.)
Page 6145 of 8516

ENQNEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
‘
31
5'gar 112-' dg INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
k4e.enT, Jr1,1,77,
CONTENTS
1.0 INTENT 4
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK 4
3.0 DESIGN 6
4.0 FABRICATION AND SUPPLY 14
6.0 SITE INSTALLATION AND SUPERVISION 19
7.0 VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS 20
8.0 SHIPPING 21
9.0 EVALUATION OF BIDS 22
10.0 GUARANTEE REQUIREMENT 22
11.0 PATENT INFRINGEMENT 23
12.0 LIST OF ATTACHMENTS 23
ANNEXURE - I TRAY DATA SHEET 24
ANNEXURE - II PACKED COLUMN DATA SHEET 25
Page 6146 of 8516

1~ INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
1.0 INTENT
This specification covers the general requirements for hydraulic and mechanical design,
engineering, procurement of material, fabrication, inspection/testing, packing, supply and
installation (in the columns at site) of Trays, Packed Column Internals and Tower
Packings separately and collectively known as "Internals". The requirements laid down in
this specification are the minimum requirements. Supplementary specifications indicating
special or specific requirements, wherever applicable, shall form addenda to this
specification and sha11 govern whenever in conflict with the provisions contained herein.
Addenda, when made part of this specification, shall be referenced in the Material
Requisition and/or the Purchase Order.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 All relevant data required for hydraulic design of Internals shall be furnished to vendor.
This data may include fluids handled, operating pressures, pressure drops, temperatures,
flow rates, fluid properties including foaming characteristics, number of theoretical
stages required above and below the feed/number of actual trays to be used, type/height
of packings, type of Internals to be used, column diameter, tray spacing, details of
demister, mist eliminator, spray nozzles, baffles, vortex breakers etc. Over design and
turndown requirements shall also be furnished.
2.2 The illustrative scope of work and major responsibilities of Internals vendor are given in
clauses 2.2.1 to 2.2.13. All other activities required to ensure the proper design and
operation of the Internals over the entire range of loadings, whether explicitly stated or
not, are implied.
2.2.1 Carry out the hydraulic design of trays, associated Internals like collector trays, intemal
piping, feed arrangement, demisters, de-entrainment baffles etc. In case of packed beds,
the design shall include packings selection, HETP calculations, pressure drop
calculations, capacity check, heat transfer adequacy check and design of associated
support plates, bed limiters, liquid distributors, pipe headers, vapour distributors,
collector trays etc.
2.2.2 Review of Ekwations & Orientations of Process Nozzles and Manholes, Prccess fluid
feed/withdrawal arrangements etc.
2.2.3 Summarize the hydraulic design in the form of the data sheets attached as per Annexure-I
and II for trays and packed columns respectively. These data sheets along with back-up
calculations/computer outputs and vendor's catalogues shall be submitted for review prior
to proceeding for mechanical design of Internals. Alternatively, vendor may use their
own formats for hydraulic design, ensuring all the details as required in EIL formats are
available in Vendor's format.
2.2.4 Carry out the mechanical design of Internals etc. for the type and quantum of design
loadings covered elsewhere in this specification.
2.2.5 Prepare the support rings/support cleats and bolting bars drawings for fabrication. Co-
ordinate with pressure vessel vendor for nozzles elevations & orientations and welding of
the support rings/support cleats and bolting bars etc. The set of drawings for support
rings/support cleats shall include the following as a minimum:
• Column sketch indicating location of Tray support ring.

• Support Ring plan with location of bolting bars, slot centers and applicable tolerances.
Page 6147 of 8516

s INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indfa Undertakfng)
FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
• Sectional details with applicable tolerances.

• Material of construction.
• Extent and details of welding requirement for support rings/bolting bars/support cleats.
• Feed pipe arrangement details with Nozzle orientation.
2.2.6 Prepare the detailed General Arrangement Drawings (GAD s) of all the Internals along
with part detail/fabrication drawings and Bill of Material. These drawings shall be
submitted for review/information prior to start of the fabrication, as per Vendor Data
Requirements. The GAD s for Internals shall include the following as a minimum:
• Column sketch indicating Tray/tower internal elevation.

• Fully dimensioned PLAN view clearly showing the layout of valves/bubble
caps/orifices/risers or as the case may be. (Part Plan are NOT ACCEPTABLE)
• Sectional views illustrating the installation of internals.
• Mechanical design parameters such as beam depths, thickness etc.
• Material of construction.
• Item numbers of individual segments that should also tally with the bill of material
prepared by the vendor and shall be marked on plan and sectional views.
• Bill of material indicating item number, number of various components, thickness,
weight of individual components and total weight.
2.2.7 Proceed with fabrication/ordering and supply of Internals after receipt of approval.
2.2.8 Arrange for inspection of Internals as per approved ITP.
2.2.9 Arrange for packing, dispatch, transportation, insurance etc. and receipt of all internals at
site.
2.2.10 Arrange for storage at site to avoid any deterioration. The mode to be adopted for storage
of Internals at site shall be suitable for a minimum period of 6 months. These shall be
stored on covered hard stand in original boxes.
2.2.11 Arrange for installation of Internals in the columns, in case specified in the requisition.
This shall preferably be done by the vendor himself. In case, vendor decides to get the
installation work done by some agency other than the vendor himself, the agency
selected by the vendor shall be well versed in the installation of Internals and who have
carried out such activities in the past. Reference list of such an agency shall be furnished
for approval. In such a case, installation shall be carried out under vendor's supervision.
2.2.12 Arrange for installation supervision of Internals by experts in mass transfer along with
leak testing wherever required and certify the column as good for boxing and operation.
All installed internals shall also be finally checked and cleared for box-up by Process
Licensor (In case of licensed units) and Owner's representative.
2.2.13 Submit bound sets of all data/drawings (As built) in requisite number as per contract
document along with specifications, material test reports for all components, tolerance
standards, installation instructions, inspection procedures and reports of leak testing at
site, for each column along with one set of electronic files in CD of all documents for
records and future reference. The documentation may be so complied in different
volumes to facilitate their submission at various phases of the project.
2.2.1 4 Vendor to Submit / Upload all documents through V-Portal only.
Page 6148 of 8516

52-2:1T
,arr-rn
Of5fl&g INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
Notes:
(1)In case hydraulic design is not included in vendor's scope of work as per requisition,
relevant clauses shall be read and deemed rectified accordingly.
(2) If vendor desires to sub-order hydraulic and/or mechanical design, it shall be

done only by reputed regular designers of Internals. Reference list of sub-
vendor shall be furnished for Owner/PMC approval.
3.0 DESIGN
3.1 Materials
3.1.1 All materials shall conform to those specified in the respective process drawings or data
sheets.
No substitution of material will be permitted without the written consent of Owner/PMC

in required formats as per procedure. In case substitution of material is proposed, vendor
shall clearly indicate the reasons for requiring such change and give chemical and
physical properties of the proposed alternate material with their standard specification
number.
All the material supplied by vendor shall be new and of first quality supported with mill
test certificates.
The inspector shall check material test certificates used for internals. 1n case test
certificates are not available, check test shall be carried out.
All bolting shall be minimum MI 0 size for internals and minimum M16 for lattice girders.
All bolting shall have threads on full length of bolt, unless otherwise indicated in
standards /drawings. In addition to stamping, the specification and manufacturer's
symbols as specified in ASME Material specifications, on one of the ends, the size the
studs shall be clearly punch marked. Similarly the nuts shall have the size punch marked
on one of the face. In case of tapped hole, the size shall be punch marked near the hole
without disturbing the gasket sealing area.
Unless specified in data sheets, Material shall be as per clause from 3.1.2 to 3.1.7.
3.1.2 11-13 Cr Stainless Internals
All sheet and plate material shall be in accordance with SA 240 Type 410/ 410S or 405
havingNo.1 finish. For thickness upto 4.0 mm. no. 2B/2D finish is also acceptable.
All bolting material shall be 12 Cr - SA 193 Or BOX or B6 for bolts and SA 194 Grade 6
for nuts and lock-nuts.
3.1.3 16 Cr - 12 Ni Stainless Internals
All sheet and plate material shall be in accordance with SA 240 Type 316/ 316L having
No.lfinish. For thickness upto 4.0 mm, no. 2B/2D finish is also acceptable.
For sheet material SA 240 Type 316/ 3I6L, all bolting material shall be SA 193 B8M for
bolts and SA 194 Gr.8M for nuts and lock nuts. For sheet material SA 240 Type 3 I 6L,
Carbon content shall be < 0.03% for bolting material.
Page 6149 of 8516

ggar 02e5 INDIA LIMITED
f A Go. of lotha UncleAaking)
3.1.4 18 Cr - 8 Ni Stainless Internals
All sheet and plate material shall be in accordance with SA 240 Type 304/ 304L having
No.Ifinish. For thickness upto 4.0 mm. no. 2B/2D finish is also acceptable.
For sheet material SA 240 Type 304/ 304L. all bolting material shall he SA 193 B8 for
bolts and SA 194 Gr.8 for nuts and lock nuts. For sheet material SA 240 Type 304L.
Carbon content shall be < 0.03% for bolting material.
3.1.5 Monel Internals
All sheet and plate material shall be in accordance with SB127 in hot rolled, annealed and
pickled condition.
All bolting material shall be Monel, made from rod or bar stock SB 164.
3.1.6 Carbon Steel Internals
Unless otherwise specified, sheets and plates shall be procured in hot rolled conditions
and shall be free of mill scale. Material shall be suitable for bending. The bend test
specimens shall stand being bent cold through 180 degree without cracking on outside of
the bent portion, to an inside diameter equal to or less than twice the thickness of the
specimen or as per relevant material specification, whichever is severe. All sheet, plate
material shall conform to IS2062 GrB, SA285, SA283 or better unless specified otherwise
on the data sheets/drawings.
All Valves, fasteners including clamps, material shall be as per clause 3.1.2 above, unless
3.1.7 Gaskets
Trays gasketing material shall be woven tape, fabricated from Asbestos Free Material
such as Woven Fiber-glass Tape (Amatex-G36-P752 or equal), Woven Teflon Tape,
Woven Expanded flexible graphite tape, soft graphite or Ceramic Fiber Tape etc. and
shall be suitable for process fluid and column design temperature, unless specified
otherwise in the Data Sheets/Purchase Specifications. The thickness of the woven tape
shall be 1.5 mm minimum.
3.1.8 Support Rings/Bolting Bars/Support Cleats
Support rings, downcomer or up comer bars and other parts welded to vessel shall be of
same metallurgy as of vessel. Minimum thickness excluding corrosion allowance of
welded parts shall be 6 mm for Vessel ID up to 3000 mm, 10 mm for ID 3000-12000 mm
and 12mm for ID>12000mm. Corrosion allowance as specified in vessel data sheets shall
be added on both sides of Support Ring, Bolting Bar and other welded parts.
3.2 Thickness of Internals
3.2.1 Corrosion Allowance
The following corrosion allowance shall be added to calculate thickness of Internals

unless otherwise specified on data sheets or bid specification.
i) No corrosion allowance is required for Monel or Stainless steel alloy assemblies.
Page 6150 of 8516

22- g
t4,031,T1 34051.11
ii) The corrosion allowance for all surfaces of floor of carbon steel assembly shall be
higher of 1.5 mm (total) or one quarter of Vessel corrosion allowance on each
surface.
3.2.2 Minimum Thickness of Internals:
Corrosion allowance, wherever specified in the data sheets for Internals in excess of
corrosion allowance as indicated in clause 3.2.1 shall be added to the minimum thickness
specified below:
Alloy CS
i) Deck plates, seal pans, draw-off 2.0 3.5*

Pans, weirs/seal plates, Struts, other
Removable Components
ii) Welded deck plates, downcomer 3.0 3.5*

aprons and other welded components
iii) Down comer/Down comer pipes 2.0 3.5*
iv) Bubble Caps 1.6 2.0

Risers (fixed) 2.0 3.5*
Risers (removable) 1.6 2.0
v) Valves 1.6 (will not be used)
vi) Structured Packings 0.15 (will not be used)
vii) Support Grid for Structured Packings 5.0 8.0
viii) Locating Grid/Retaining 5.0 8.0

Grid/Bed Limiter
ix) Grid Packings 1.0 (As per vendor's standard)
x) Feed Pipes (Seam Less/ ERW) Sch 40S 8 Thk.
xi) Random Packings (As per vendor's standard, **)
xii) Loose Beams To suit load To suit load
xiii) Lattice Girders

(a) Primary Members 5.0 8.0
(b) Secondary Members 3.0 6.0
(c) Gusset Plates 10.0 10.0
(d) Downcomer bolting bars 6.0 10.0
10 USSG is also acceptable in lieu of 3.5 mm.

Random packing thickness shall be suitable for test load comprising of dead weight
of the packed bed + 10 % liquid load (For metallic & 15% for Ceramics). Maximum
compression shall be limited to 5% of the bed height without damaging the bottom
packing.
All bolting shall be minimum M I 0 for Internals and M16 for Lattice Girders. All nuts
shall be hexagonal.
Minimum corroded thickness of the internals for the loading condition as per Clause 3.3.3.
(i) and (ii) below, shall be 3.0 mm.
Page 6151 of 8516

1 .7,1 ,e•cr,r1 051.34211-si IF Go. of Incha Undertakng)
3.3 Design Loadings
3.3.1 Design loads for tray decks shall be based on a liquid height of 50 mm liquid above weirs
plus self weight of deck plates and beams or live load of 150 kg/m2 whichever is higher.
In case liquid density is less than water, 1000 kg/m3 shall be considered for purpose of
calculating liquid load.
3.3.2 Under-down-flow plates and seal pans shall be designed to withstand self weight &
weight of liquid equal to half the normal tray spacing or 300 kg/m2, whichever is higher.
In case liquid density is less than water, 1000 kg/m3 shall be considered for purpose of
calculating liquid load.
3.3.3 Five trays above/below 2-phase feed inlets and five trays in bottom zone of column
wherever process steam or two-phase feed is admitted, shall be provided with lock nuts.
Trays shall be capable of sustaining a net thrust of
i) 1464 kg/m2 and shall be provided and with shear clips at Beam Ends for Vacuum
Columns at beam end locations. (Stripping + Wash + HVGO sections)
ii) 1000 kg/m2 and shall be provided and with shear clips at Beam Ends for Crude
Column/Main Fractionator Columns at beam end Iocations.
iii) 450 kg/m2 shall be provided for all other services.
3.3.4 One tray above and below the intermediate vapour/liquid feeds shall be provided with
lock nuts. Additionally, all lattice girders and major beam boltings shall be provided with
lock nuts.
3.3.5 Chimney / Collector Trays shall be designed to withstand a load of self weight & lower
of liquid weight of (Riser height+50mm) or (Weir height+50mm). OR 300 kg/m2
whichever is higher.
3.3.6 The packing support plate shall be designed to support the maximum expected load of
tower packings, liquid hold-up (min 10 percent for metallic & 15% for ceramics)). In
case of liquid density is less than water, 1000 kg/m3 shall be considered for purpose of
calculating load due to liquid hold-up.
3.3.7 Bed limiters frame shall be strong enough to take care of surges/uniformly distributed
load of 100 kg/m2 and 135 Kgs concentrated load at any point.
3.3.8 Hold down plate shall exert sufficient static load on the bed to restrict movement of the
packing. The hold down plate shall be designed for exerting a load of 100 kg/m2
minimum on the packed bed.
3.3.9 Liquid distributors/Redistributor shall be designed for self weight plus maximum
expected liquid load.
3.3.10 A11 Internals assemblies except cartridge tray assemblies, shall be able to withstand the
self weight plus the following number of 135 Kgs concentrated loads (maintenance
loads) at ambient temperature.
Vessel Diameter Number of 135 kg loads

Up to 1200 mm 1 (at center of diameter)
1201 to 3600 mm 2 (at center and 1/4 point of diameter)
Over 3600 mm 3 (at center and'/4 points of diameter)
Page 6152 of 8516

f-a_ACY ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
7,17,,, ,-1.221577 45.1 3g7,117,11.
3.3.11 Deck plates for extra stiffened loading (as per clause 3.3.3) to be checked for skin
stresses. Same can be carried out assuming deck plates to be of rectangular shape with
uniform Ioading.
3.4 Allowable Stress and Deflection
3.4.1 Allowable stresses for all Internals shall be as per ASME Sec. II. Part D, latest edition.
3.4.2 The maximum deflection of tray/tower internal assembly shall not exceed 1 mm per
meter of column diameter or 7.5 mm, whichever is lower for the design loadings given in
clause 3.3.1 and 3.3.2 above. Deflection for distributor assembly shall be limited so that
overall liquid maldistribution does not exceed the limit as per clause 3.5.18(v).
Deflection for support plate and seal pans shall be limited to L/400, where L is the length
of individual component.
3.4.3 Deflection as per clause 3.4.2 may be ignored for trays designed based on design
loadings as per clause 3.3.3 and 3.3.9.
3.4.4 For large diameter vessels (More than 6000mm), initial camber (6mm Max.) may be
made in the principal support members of the assemblies so as to limit the deflection as
specified in clause 3.4.2 above.
3.5 Arrangement/Details of Internals
3.5.1 Al1 assemblies except one piece cartridge type trays for column ID < 750mm shall be of
removable type unless otherwise indicated. The general design, number, type and spacing
shall be established on the individual vessel drawing/data sheets. Cartridge type trays
shall be designed to rest on four support cleats. Rope Type of arrangement shall be
provided for sealing unless otherwise specified.
3.5.2 Each removable section shall be so dimensioned / sized to permit passage through vessel
manhole and shall be suitable for assembly/ dismantling from upper side in so far as
structural contingencies permit. Maximum diagonal dimension of the components shall
be restricted to vessel manhole ID - 12mm clearance.
3.5.3 Internals support trusses supporting more than one Internal, as are commonly used in
large diameter columns and which can not be installed through manholes, shall be split
into sections for access through manhole and minimising welding work inside the
column.
3.5.4 Internals decks shall have a maximum length of 3000 mm. To achieve this maximum
distance between main support beams or girders shall be limited to 3000 mm. However,
the main support beams or girders having length more than 3000 mm shall be provided
with one butt joint with splice plates of the same thickness as the main member upto
6000 mm length and two butt joints with splice plates of the same thickness as the main
member for more than 6000 mm length and so on. The butt joint shall be provided
inclined at 45 degrees.
3.5.5 Manways
i) One(1) manway in single cross flow decks, two(2) manway in double flow decks
and so on shall be provided. These manway shall be freely removable from top and
bottom. Manway shall be in the same vertical line for a set of trays. These shall be
at such a location and of a shape and size to permit easy access to every area of the
Page 6153 of 8516

fg-41~ INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
GoN of indm Uncle(talong)
tray. Manway of different set of trays (about 20 trays) shall be staggered to each
other. Minimum clear opening on tray shall be 380mmx450mm.
ii) Where manway cannot be provided, decks shall be split (turn-up - turndown) to
provide suitable access for Inspection and assembly from top as well as bottom.
3.5.6 Unless specified otherwise, support rings, bolting bars, support bracket/cleats when
required shall be designed for welding to the vessel. All other parts shall be designed for
bolting or clamping in place. Clamping shall be used on Tray floor and all downcomer/
upcomer shall be through bolted. Spacing of bolting or clamping shall be close enough to
ensure optimum liquid tight construction but shall not exceed 120 mm on deck portion in
downcomer area/liquid holding area/downcomer apron bolting etc. For active area,
bolting/clamp spacing shall be limited to maximum 120 mm in general. However, in case
some fouling occurs with valves or other components, maximum 140 mm spacing may
be adopted. All joints and seams of trays specified to be liquid tight without gasketted
joints shall be seal welded at site except for manways which shall be gasketed. Maximum
spacing for clamps/bolting for gasketted & Stiffened Internals and Manways shall be
restricted to 80-110 mm.
3.5.7 Drawings and instructions for installation and fabrication of support ring, bolting bar and
support bracket/cleats welded to vessel shall be furnished by Internals supplier. They
shall show clearly the type, size and extent of welding. All support rings and bolting bars
shall be continuously welded on both sides. All support brackets shall be welded all
around.
Support stool shall be provided for downcomer (first piece) or loose beams in excess of
1500 mm length.
3.5.8 When locations of bed support, retainer and distributor are not indicated on data sheets,
Tower Internal/Packing supplier shall determine and indicate dimensional requirement.
3.5.9 Gasketting need not be used in the design or installation of Internals except for bubble
cap trays, all liquid holding portions (e.g. seal pans, draw-offs), collector trays,
distributors and redistributors. Fabrication shall provide tight metal to metal joints. Metal
seal plates shall be used to close construction joints where necessary.
3.5.10 All stiffeners and support members shall be located on the underside of the tray floor
with the exception of open type trusses supporting two trays. Stiffeners and support
members in bubbling areas shall not exceed 75 mm in width and shall be designed so as
not to impede or channel the liquid flow on the tray. Depth of stiffeners and support
members transverse and parallel to the liquid flow shall not exceed 20 and 30 percent
respectively of tray spacing.
3.5.11 A minimum of 20 mm overlap shall be provided between tray floor section and support
members.
3.5.12 Trays and seal pans not specified to be liquid tight, and of a design which would not
easily drain shall be provided with one or more llmm diameter/square drain holes/slots
located in the outlet weir directly above the tray flow. Size and number of drain hole/slot
may be reduced depending upon liquid rate. Draw off sumps shall be located flush with
the invert inside of draw off nozzles to allow complete draining of sumps.
3.5.13 All the three (3) and four (4) pass trays shall have pressure equalising pipes (vent tubes)
across the downcomers. For Two (2) Pass Trays where central downcomer length is more
than 3000mm, Downcomer spacers shall be provided at the spacing of 1500mm.
Page 6154 of 8516

laf54&-g INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
17.112T
3.5.14 Bubble Cap Trays
Risers
Fixed Risers
Fixed risers shall be used unless otherwise specified in the data sheets. For deck plates
less than 3 mm in thickness, riser shall be expanded into upward flanged opening in the
deck plates and then stitch welded to uptumed edges of the opening.
For deck plate 3 mm thickness and more, the riser shall be continuously welded to the
deck plates with the holes in the deck plate being plane, not uptumed. Caps shall be
attached to the attachments welded to the top of risers.
Removable Risers
Removable risers shall be used only where specified on the drawings. These shall be
flanged at the bottom to fit over upturned flanged/venturi openings in the deck plates.
Each cap and riser shall be held rigidly in place by a special snap-on bar to which is
welded either a bolt or a bar with a wedge. Caps, risers and snap-on bars shall be
removable from top.
Bubble Cap
Bubble caps are to be furnished in Full Annealed and scale free bright condition.
3.5.15 Valve Trays
Valve assemblies of proprietary trays shall be provided with following features.
i) A means of preventing the orifice covers from adhering to tray floor.

ii) A means of preventing the orifice covers with integral guide legs and lift stops
from popping out of place during operation.
3.5.16 Sieve Trays
All perforations shall be punched and made from top side and burr side on tray decks
must be downwards when installed, unless specified otherwise. In case of liquid-liquid
extractor column trays, punching direction shall depend on the direction of liquid flow of
continuous phase.
3.5.17 Burrs shall be removed from all perforated areas and edge of Internal sections.
3.5.18 Distributors/Redistributors
Distributors of liquid feed to packed beds, unless otherwise specified in data sheets, shall
be gravity flow type (e.g. orifice drip trays, tubed drip trays, trough type, orifice header
laterals) in accordance with following requirements:
i) Distributors shall preferably be provided with side elevated orifices. For such
elevated orifices, anti fouling covers are not required.
ii) In case deck type distributors are provided/specified, orifices shall preferably be
minimum 6.0 mm diameter and shall be arranged on an approximate equal spacing
Page 6155 of 8516

.31
n2z.it4 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
02-&g INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
.17n ,,wasavos.
throughout the distributor. Distributor supports shall be designed and arranged so

as not to interfere with flow from orifices.
In case orifice diameter calculated is less than 6.0 mm, then antifouling covers
shall be provided on each orifice.
iii) Vapour risers shall have a total cross sectional area as per Vendor's design but not
less than 15 percent of vessel cross sectional area. Number, size and arrangement
of vapour risers shall be such so as not to affect the orifice spacing and liquid
distribution to the packings.
iv) Distributor joints shall be gasketted to be liquid tight. Gasket material used shall be
suitable for service and soft enough for leak tight joint.
v) Distributor shall be capable of performing satisfactorily for the range of loadings

specified to cover entire range of plant operation.
vi) Flow variation from orifice to orifice shall not be more than 10 percent at turndown
condition.
vii) Feed pipe shall form part of Distributor supply.
3.5.19 Packing Support Plate
Packed bed support plate shall be vapour-injection type, providing separate passage for
liquid and vapour flow. The support plate shall have at least 90 percent free area based on
cross sectional area of vessel. Slot size shall be so selected to avoid any sneak through of
packings from slots.
3.5.20 Bed Limiters/Bed Retainers
Bed Limiters/Bed Retainers shall be located just above top of packings to avoid
fluidising of bed and shall be fixed in position so as not to be moved by the packings and
shall be designed so as not to affect distribution from the liquid distributor to the
packings. Bed Limiters/Bed Retainers for use with spray nozzle distributor shall be
designed with major structural support on the underside of the retainer so as not to affect
the spray distribution on the packings. Expanded metal of 2 mm thickness and equivalent
open area is also acceptable in place of wire mesh.
3.5.21 Hold Down Plates
Hold down plates shall be provided on the top of ceramic or carbon tower packings. The
hold-down plate shall directly rest on the bed without any support cleats. Hold-down
plate shall exert sufficient static pressure on the bed to restrict movement of the bed. Care
shall be taken not to use hold-down grid with metallic or plastic tower packings.
Expanded metal of 2 mm thickness and equivalent open area is also acceptable in place
of wire mesh.
3.5.22 Flash Feed Distributor
Flash feed distributor for flashing or mixed phase, vapour and liquid feeds to packed bed
shall be designed to separate the two phases and distribute the liquid phase on
distributor/redistributor. If flashing feed gallery is used, riser area shall be 50% of vessel
cross sectional area.
Page 6156 of 8516

têt2- g- Iri
3.5.23 Tower Packing
If type of packings is not specified in the process data sheets, following shall be taken as
guidel ines:
i) For wash zone of vacuum column, Grid Packings shall be used.
ii) For all other applications preferably Pall Rings shall be used. If pall rings are not
expected to perform to desired performance, proprietary random packings may be
used. Alternatively, Vendor may also adopt/recommend use of Structured
Packings.
3.5.24 The maximum allowable pressure drop for a packed bed shall include packed bed
support, bed limiter and distributor.
4.0 FABRICATION AND SUPPLY
4.1 Tolerances
All sections shall be truly flat within 2 mm and shall be free from burrs and welds
spatters.
Tolerances wherever unspecified shall be taken as +1 mm and not to be accumulative,

except on thickness and assembly diameter. Tolerances on thickness shall be as per
applicable specification and tolerances on assembly diameter shall be as below:
Cartridge Trays D+°

-3
Other Assemblies D < 1500, D±,°

1500 < D 4500, D+,°,
D > 4500, D±2°0

4.2 Welding
4.2.1 All welding shall be done by TIG/GTAW Process only. However for Site welding where
TIG welding cannot be done due to access/Practical Constraints, Metal Arc welding may
be carried out after taking approval from Engineer-In-Charge. Resistance welding is
permitted for minor details where weld is a non strength weld. Gas or Carbon arc
welding shall not be used.
4.2.3 Welding electrodes of composition similar to Internals material shall be used except
austenitic electrodes of higher chromium and nickel content such as AWS A5.4, ASME
SFA 5.4 class E309 and E310 may be used for 12 Cr stainless steel. For dissimilar
material welding, electrode composition shall be similar to nobler material being welded.
Following electrodes shall be used unless specified otherwise:
E 7018 for all CS materials

E 308 for all SS 304 to SS 304
E 308L for all SS 304L to SS 304L
E 309MoL for SS 410S to SS 410S, SS to CS,
SS 410S to SS 304, 304L, 316, 316L
E 316 for all SS 316
E 316L for all SS 316L
Page 6157 of 8516

5gar 1812- INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
1.1,1 e.1205,2 (A GoN of Intha Undertaking)
E Ni Cul for Monel to Monel.

Pure Nickel for Monel to CS/SS.
4.2.4 Welding wherever specified, is to be done by qualified and approved welders using the
suitable fillers and fluxes recommended for the materials in the fabrication drawings. For
welding the stud on tray decks and support beams, use of stud welding gun with suitable
flux is acceptable. In manually welding the studs, care should be taken to minimise the
weld spatter and the outside diameter of the weld so that it should not foul with tray deck
or washer. For stud welding, proper welding procedure shall be established. Torque
required for welding failure shall be higher than the torque required for failure of the
stud.
4.2.5 A proposed Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) shall be submitted to AIA for his
approval. On approval, a Procedure Qualification Test (PQT) shall be conducted which
shall be witnessed by AIA. On acceptance of all tests as per ASME Section IX, a final
WPS along with Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) shall be submitted. Production
welding shall start only after approval of final WPS/PQR and qualification of welders as
per ASME Section IX. AIA may accept previously qualified WPS/PQR at his sole
discretion.
4.3 Miscellaneous
4.3.1 All parts fabricated shall be smooth, true, clean and free from burrs, grease and dents.
Openings for passage of workman must have exposed edges rounded.
4.3.2 A11 support rings, bolting bars, beams support brackets and other components which are
integral and therefore welded to the column shell inside, shall be supplied and installed
by column fabricator.
4.3.3 Total draw-off trays shall be designed for zero leakage construction and may be seal
welded (if required) at site to attain zero leakage.
4.3.4 Seal welds shall have a throat thickness at least equal to the minimum thickness being
welded together.
4.3.5 A11 stainless steel tray assemblies/internals and their components (e.g. Bubble caps,
valves etc.) shall be pickled and passivated. Pickling and Passivation shall be as per
ASME 380. However, vendor shall prepare procedure for Pickling and Passivation and
obtain approval from Owner/PMC.
4.3.6 A11 parts shall be fabricated in accordance with good shop practice and in uniformity so
that all corresponding parts will be inter-changeable.
4.4 Spares
Following minimum spares shall be included as part of the supply:
4.4.1 Mandatory Spares: Following operational spares as a minimum shall be supplied as

Mandatory Spares for 2 years normal operation:
i) Valves for Trays 10% of each type

ii) Bolts/Nuts 10% of total for each type/size (minimum
10 nos. of each size)
iii) Clamp Assemblies - do -
iv) Gaskets or Tapes 100% of each type and size
Page 6158 of 8516

gt92_.fg ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
$1g- 11.1&[54- INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
.17T ,1,517 ■n, ,Cn.11 IA oto,aU oe,,akingi
v) Sealing Ropes for 200% of each size

Cartridge Trays
vi) Spray Nozzles - 25% subject to minimum 5 Nos. of each

type and size.
vii) Random Packings - 5% of each type and size.
4.4.2 Erection & Commissioning Spares:
The supply shall include the following as constructional spares :
Bolts/Nuts 10% of total for each size

(minimum 10 nos. of each size).
Clamp assemblies 10% of total for each type and size
(minimum 10 nos. of each size).
Valves for trays 5% of each type
Bubble caps 5% of each type and size
Gasketing or tapes 100% of each type and size
Sealing Rope for 200% of each size

cartridge trays
U-clamps 10% of each type and size or 10 nos. whichever is

minimum.
Tower Packings 10% for Metallic and Plastic Packings

15% for Carbon and Ceramic Packings
Spray Nozzles Up to 25 Nos. (of each type) - 100%
More than 25 (of each type) - 25%

(subject to minimum of 25 Nos.)
Unused spares be handed over to Client.
4.4.3 Vendor shall submit itemized prise list of spares recommended for two years of
satisfactory operation, over and above mandatory spares. lf desired by Owner order shall
be placed for these spares.
5.1 General
5.1.1 The materials, fabrication, testing and trial assemblies are subject to inspection by AIA,
nominated by Owner/PMC, at shop floor before shipment and during installation.
5.1.2 Any rejection made by Inspector shall be final. Approval/Inspection by EIL/Owner

and/or their designated representative shall in no way relieve the Vendor of his
responsibility to meet all the requirements of the Purchase Order.
5.1.3 AIA/PMC/Owner shall have free entry to the Vendor's shop at all times where and while
the work is being performed. The Vendor shall offer the inspectors all reasonable
Page 6159 of 8516

k3dlci2Jt± ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
fg-arl&2- dg
' INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
1.1.271 2.1727,17. 031.390,11 (A Go. of Indsa Undertaking)
facilities to satisfy them that the materials are being furnished in accordance in
accordance with the specifications.
5.1.4 AIA will cooperate with the Vendor in so far as is possible to minimise any interferences
with the operation of the Vendor's shop.
5.1.5 Vendor shall prepare a detailed ITP based on EIL-ITPs for Shop / Site activities and
obtain EIL / TPIA / Owner approval.
5.1.6 Vendor shall notify the AIA/Owner sufficiently in advance of any fabricating operations
to permit the AIA to arrive at the Vendor's shop.
5.2 Stage Inspection during Fabrication
5.2.1 Dimensions
The inspector will check that the thickness and the dimensions of all parts for the Decks,
Weirs, Seal and Draw off pans, Downcomers, Draw off pipes, Supports, Beams, Valves,
Bubble caps, Clamps, Studs, Bolts, Nuts, Risers, Washers and Gaskets etc. are as per the
approved drawings.
5.2.2 Fabrication
The inspector shall check each individual part of the equipment fabricated as per
approved drawings and specifications. For instance, for the Bubble cap dimensions,
height, width and number of slots, heights, O.D. and I.D. or riser and cap, shroud ring
height, exit and inlet weirs height etc. shall be measured. The inspector will check that all
identical parts shall be interchangeable.
Inspector shall check that the sharp edges on the Internal components, manway covers,
weirs, downcomers etc. are properly removed. Also that all burrs from punched holes and
loose weld slags and materials are removed from all components. Stage-wise inspection
during fabrication will be thoroughly carried out. Before starting welding, welders'
qualification test will be carried out, if required, as per ASME Sec. IX. Where number of
similar items are to be made, inspector shall give the clearance for the fabrication of the
lot only afier checking and approving the first sample piece.
5.3 Trial Assembly
One tray/one layer of structured packing of each type and size with its accessories shall
be assembled as floor mock-up, inside the fabricators' shop. The components for such an
assembly will be taken at random from each lot of identical items.
The assembled tray will be carefully checked for its dimensions, tolerances, number and
arrangement of perforation, the working of the valves in case of valve trays, V-notch or
Blocked Weir, adjustability of weir, vent tube details, downcomer clearance, weir
heights, downcomer length and width, number of clamps, gaps and potential leakage
points etc.
The assembly shall also be checked for each type and size of packed tower internals.
Inspector will also check the flatness and deflection of the trays, internals, beams, tray
edges and beam ends clearance.
Page 6160 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS
$gZIT laWdg INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
1.7n ,{22151.2 <151,,,,
5.4 Leak Testing
Bubble cap, Collector trays, Liquid holding portion of other trays such as Seal pans,
Recessed seal pans, Draw off pans shall be subjected to leakage test at the field by filling
water up to weir level or up to normal liquid level as the case may be.
Leak testing shall be carried out with service gaskets and drain holes temporarily
plugged. Leakage rate shall not exceed 0.5 percent of design liquid flow rate unless
otherwise specified.
5.5 Distributor Testing
A11 Liquid distributors/redistributors shall be water tested in the vendor's shop by the
following procedure at 50%, 100% and 110% of the design liquid volumetric flow rate.
The vendor shall certify to the purchaser at the time of bidding that they believe their
equipment can meet the testing requirements listed below :
(i) If the distributor contains a predistributor, it shall be tested first to ensure that it has
a CV of 5 or less at the design flow rate. Each orifice in the predistributor shall be
tested. The CV is defined as the ratio of the standard deviation to the sample mean,
expressed as a percent.
(ii) The distributor/redistributor itself shall be tested and the CV determined. To

determine the CV, at least 30 pour points or at least 10% of the pour points
(whichever is higher) shall be randomly selected and tested. If the CV specified
below cannot be met, the vendor will correct the problem at its expense.
(a) For orifice pans, tubed drip pans and other similar devices, a CV of 10 or less
must be achieved at the design liquid volumetric flow rate.
(b) Four orifice parts, tubed drip pans or trough distributors that employ a
modular (sectional) design, (wherein many pieces are geometrically identical)
all pieces of the same geometry shall be treated as one group or strata. One
piece from each strata shall then be tested by the procedure outlined above.
(c) The average flow rate per pour point for any grouping of 10 of the tested pour
points from a single area should differ by no more than 5% from the average
for the group or strata being tested.
(d) Spray nozzle distributors shall not be tested in the vendor's shop but must be
tested in the tower prior to start-up to ensure that all nozzles are operable and
develop the desired spray pattern. This test shall be carried out as close to
design rates as possible.
(e) The test results shall be furnished to PMC/Owner in a written report. This
report shall also contain a drawing of the distributor in plan view. This
drawing shall be broken down into 3 radial zones of equal area and the
location of pour points sampled in each zone.
All distributors/redistributors shall be leak tested at shop floor as well as at site. For
distributors/redistributors, if performance testing is carried out at shop floor, leak testing
at shop floor is not required.
Page 6161 of 8516

-

k31
1.177, trn 3gens. IP GoN of Incha Undenaking)
SPRAY NOZZLES
Apart from the usual material quality tests (chemical analysis and mechanical properties)
and manufacturing quality control tests, vendor shall include for & carry out the testing
of the spray nozzles with respect to the flow rates for specific AP, spray angle, spray
coverage and distribution for the tip distance given in the data sheet. The testing medium
shall be water. These results shall be submitted to Owner/EIL for review. Tests and
acceptance criteria is as below:
Flow rates ±10 % for specific AP
± 50
Spray angle
Flow variation As per vendor' s Standard.

(Data to be reported for Information)
No. of nozzle to be tested - 10% of each size and type. (Min. 2 nos. of each
type & size)
6.0 SITE INSTALLATION AND SUPERVISION
6.1 Installation of trays, tower internals, tower packings and associated components shall be
as per the Vendor's Installation Procedure and the approved General Arrangement
Drawings for each column. All requirements of the drawing shall be complied in totality.
Installation records in vendor's installation formats giving following parameters
(Dimension as per drawing v/s actual readings) of trays and internals shall be furnished:
• Distance between tray support rings (Tray Spacings).

• Location of downcomer bolting bars
• Tray support ring levelness (Minimum 4 diametrically opposite locations).
• Height of Exit Weir (From top of tray deck)
• Under Down Flow Clearance (At tray and seal pan locations).
• Horizontal clearance between downcomer apron and seal/recessed seal pan.
• Drop in water level during leak testing of seal pans, recessed seal pans, chimney
trays, liquid distributors/redistributors and other liquid holding portions.
Vendor shall also furnish a certificate stating that all installed trays and internals have
been inspected and the column is good for boxing up the manways. The above mentioned
installation records and the certificate shall be furnished by vendor prior to offering the
trays and internals for Owner/PL inspection.
6.2 Safety, Health and Environment
Vendor shall arrange for installation of an exhaust fan for exhaling welding/ cutting
fumes etc. and to maintain adequate oxygen level, before any work is started inside
confined spaces (i.e. columns). Adequate ventilation shall be maintained at all times.
Gas/LPG cylinders shall not be taken inside confined space. When a worker/supervisor
enters a confined space, it shall be mandatory to have a second man as stand by. Safety
belts shall be worn while entering columns, if there is a danger of falling. All
ladders/stair cases shall be in place before any item is offered for inspection. Rope
ladders/scaffolding shall be provided inside the column in case trays are not easily
approachable from column manhole. Low voltage (24V) lamps equipped with guards
shall be used to prevent accidental contact with bulb. All electrical connections shall be
through ELCB's and proper earthing shall be ensured. Acids and other materials used for
pickling shall be disposed off to a designated place. All statutory Regulations and
Page 6162 of 8516

$1g-ar22-
dg
' INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
>117,. ns■ Jr2r,-,11 GO, of Indha Undertaking)
owner's safety, health and environment requirements shall be complied with. Inspection
aids for carrying out the inspection of internals shall also be provided.
6.3 It shall be the responsibility of vendor to provide trained engineers to supervise the
erection of trays, packings and internals to ensure that these are assembled properly and
meet the expected leakage rates and tolerances. Final clearance shall be obtained from
designer of Internals. Vendor's engineer shall satisfy himself that the column before it is
boxed-up, is having all Internals duly and correctly fitted, clean and without leakage (as
required per drawings) and bolts are tight with lock-nuts (wherever specified). A
certificate shall be issued by the vendor that the column is good for boxing up the
manways. The leakage test data and levelness of each tray shall be recorded and
submitted in data folders. Vendor's offer shall include for this service and charges
indicated separately.
6.4 The Internals shall be offered by vendor for final clearance by Process Licensor (if
applicable) and Owner after vendor has satisfied themselves with the quality of
installation.
7.0 VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS
7.1.1 Vendor shall furnish design, drawings and documents as per Vendor Data Requirements,
indicated in the Purchase Order/Contract Documents.
7.1.2 It is emphasized that review of documents shall be done for each column only after
receipt of complete information such as vendor's designs/specifications, column
fabrication drawings including feed arrangement GAD's etc. Part submission of data
shall not be entertained and PMC/Owner shall not be held responsible for holding the
work or schedule slippages.
7.2 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
Vendor shall submit the bids containing following information unless otherwise specified
in Job specification:
a) Column sketch showing all Internals and nozzl2s.

b) Completed data sheet (as per Annexure I) for trays with computer outputs for
maximum, normal and minimum cases.
c) Completed data sheet (as per Annexure II) for each different packed bed.
d) Data for spray nozzles, if used.
e) Data on distributors - type and salient features.
f) Details of other Internals.
g) List of Deviations from this specification and/or MR requirements.
h) Reference list for the type of Internals offered in this enquiry supplied earlier for
similar service. This shall cover at least client's name, type of Internal, plant,
service, column diameter and year of commissioning.
i) Quality plan
j) Vendor's catalogues
Bidder's offer shall be liable to rejection in absence of data as requested vide (a) to (j)
above.
Page 6163 of 8516

Ogz-,[102-d-
'g INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt oflntla Undertaking)
7.3 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION
Shop changes made by Vendor after approval of drawings under Code-1 by EIL and
deviations granted in deviation permits, if any, shall be marked in hard copy of drawings
which shall then be stamped Às-built' by the vendor. These Às-built' drawings shall be
reviewed and stamped by Authorized Inspector also. Vendor shall prepare scanned image
files of all marked-up Às-built' drawings. Vendor shall also incorporate the above
changes in the native soft files of the drawings.
Authorized Inspector shall ensure/certify completeness of Vendor's Final/As-built
documents before equipment dispatch.
In addition, vendor shall also incorporate site changes, if any, based on mismatch
observed at site and resubmit the Às-built' documents.
7.4 DATA FOLDER
Vendor shall complete requisite copies of data folders along with one set of electronic
copies, of the drawings in CD. These folders shall contain the following documents.
(a) Hydraulic and mechanical design calculations along with computer print out.
(b) Final hydraulic data sheets for trays and tower internals as per Annexure-I and II
respectively.
(c) Support Rings, Support Cleats and Bolting Bar drawings.
(d) As built General Arrangement drawings with Bill of Material for Internals.
(e) Part detail/shop fabrication drawings.
(f) Material Certificates
(g) Shop testing procedure and installation procedure.
(h) Inspection reports and leak test records.
(i) Vendor's certificate stating that Internals have been designed, fabricated, supplied
and installed as per Vendor practices so as to meet design conditions.
(i) Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records
(PQR).
(k) Site Installation Records.
8.0 SHIPPING
8.1 Preparation
8.1.1 All metal parts shall be free of all foreign matter, except that any oil coating inherent
with the manufacturing process need not be removed.
8.1.2 All Carbon Steel Internals shall be given two coats of rust preventive coating preferably
which can be easily removed by moist cotton (such as "Castrol Restilo DWX32" ). All
stainless steel internals shall be supplied duly pickled and passivated. Internals supplier
shall also indicate procedure for removal of rust preventive coating (if applied) in the
instructions for Installation of Internals.
8.2 Packing
8.2.1 All Internal components shall be properly packed, crated and boxed in a manner such as
to protect all parts from damage or loss during transit. It will be Internals Supplier's
responsibility to pack to ensure damage free transit for the mode of transportation finally
Page 6164 of 8516

£;12
>177, c51,1pi
adopted and adequate for storage at site for a minimum period of 6 months. All packings
shall be done in polythene lined wooden cases, as per either EIL Standard specification
or Vendor's proven Standard (In case, Installation of internals is in Vendor's Scope
otherwise follow EIL standard specification). Vendor may use Euro Bags or equivalent
for Random Packings (if installation by same agency otherwise follow EIL standard
specification). Maximum weight of each case shall preferably be limited to 250 kgs.
8.2.2 All Internal components are to be provided with match and identification marks and shall
also bear the column number. All identical elements shall have the same markings.
Markings shall be done with indelible paint or ink which contains non-metallic pigments.
8.2.3 Materials for different columns shall not be intermixed.
8.2.4 Material test certificates, test reports, Inspector's approval certificates, release notes etc.
and two sets of assembly and fabrication drawings are to be enclosed along with
shipment of Internals.
8.2.5 All support rings, bolting bars and other attachments of the vessel, if made by Internals
supplier shall be shipped directly to vessel fabricator unless otherwise designated. This
shipment shall include two sets of drawing and instructions for Installation, Welding etc.
8.2.6 Packaging of Spares
8.2.6.1 All shipments shall include extra fasteners, gaskets and valves/bubble caps, packings etc.
to cover loss, waste and shrinkage as specified in clause 4.4 in a separate container.
8.2.6.2 All spares shall be packaged and supplied separately so as to preserve them in new
condition, tagged properly so as to identify them as and when needed and shall be clearly
marked "Spares".
9.0 EVALUATION OF BIDS
The information provided in the bids shall be reviewed for information and not for
correctness of the design or its approval. PMC/Owner shall not be held liable to price
increase/delays in case changes are necessitated on detailed scrutiny of documents
submitted as per clause 9.0 after the placement of order.
10.0 GUARANTEE REQUIREMENT
10.1 Hydraulic Performance Guarantee
Vendor will, in addition to mechanical guarantee/warranty explained in clause 11.1

above, guarantee hydraulic performance specified in specifications sheets (PDS/HDS) for
all the Internals for which Vendor is required to carry out functional process design also.
10.2 Mechanical Guarantee/Warranty
Vendor shall guarantee all items supplied by him against defective material; poor
workmanship, improper design and failure from normal usage for a period as per Client's
commercial terms and conditions.
In case of maloperation or failure of the trays and internals, vendor shall be responsible
to carry out re-engineering and modify/replace the hardware without any cost to the
Client and without delay. In case modifications are required due to inadequate
Page 6165 of 8516

ENQNEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
5g-312ffleg INDIA LIMITED FOR TRAYS AND TOWER 6-14-0015 Rev. 3
1.117,1 2:12,517 CITIJ,F44, IA Go. o11n0ia Undenak.9)
performance, the guarantee period shall be extended for 12 months from the date the
column is put back into operation.
11.0 PATENT INFRINGEMENT
Vendor shall defend any and all infringement suits in which the Owner, PMC and/or EIL
is made a defendant, alleging patent infringement. Vendor shall pay all costs and
expenses incident to any such litigation. It being further agreed and understood, however,
that Owner, PMC and/or EIL shall have the right to be represented therein by counsel, of
their own selection and paid by them. Vendor shall pay all damages, profits and/or cost
which may be awarded by the plaintiff in any such litigation; and, in general, shall defend
Owner, PMC and/or EIL against all claim or demand of every kind to which they may be
subjected under the patent laws, in connections with equipment purchased under this
specification.
12.0 LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
ANNEXURE
I. Tray Data Sheet

Packed Column Data Sheet
Page 6166 of 8516

a- r laa5
>177, ,(2H,T7 051
ANNEXURE — I
DOCUMENT NO.
ENGINEERS moc-xx-xx-xx-xxxx Rev. y
5gzi~ INCIA LIMITED TRAY DATA SHEET
Page 1 of 1
JOB NO. COLUMN NO. REV.

PROJECT CUSTOMER
SERVICE OF UNIT TOTAL TRAYS
PR DiS NO. DESIGN FOR TRAYS
PROCESS DATA MECHANICAL DATA
TYPE OF TRAY COLUMN I D MM NO OF PASSES

LOADING AT TRAY TRAY SPACING, MM
VAPOUR FLOW, KG/HR OFF CENTRE
VAPOR DENSITY, KG/M 3 SIDE CENTRE INSIDE OUTSIDE
Ll QUID FLOW, KG/HR D/C CHORD HT ,MM
Ll QUID DENSITY , KG/M 3 EXIT VVEIR LEN. MM
LIQUID S T, ON/CM E.W.BLOCKING %
LIQUID VISC ,CP DOWNCOMER AR.,M 2
OPER. PRESS .,KG/CM 2A EXIT WEIR HT. ,MM
OPER TEMP ,DEG C (V/L) EWEIP ADJUSTABILITY, MM
SYSTEM FACTOR UDF CLEARANCE, MM
ALL PR DROPITRAY, KGICM2 TYPE OF DOVVN COM ER
MATL OF TRAY RECESSED IN SEAL PAN
MATL. OF VALVE/CAP TYPE /SIZE OF VALVES/CAPS/HOLES
CORR AL /DECK THK.,MM NO. OF VALVESICAPSIHOLES
MIN /MAX % OF NORMAL LOADS. APPROX PITCH, MM
HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE
LOADING OFF CENTRE
JET FLOOD % SIDE CENTRE INSIDE OUTSIDE

D/C BACKUP FLOOD % EVV. LOAD, M3/MHR
TRAY PRIDRY MM LIQ. D/C LOAD, M3IM2HR
DROPIVVET KG/CM 2 LIQ HT. OVER VVEIR,MM
UDF LIQ VEL M/HR TOTAL LIQ. HT. ON TRAY
IJDF DELP MM LIQ TURN % OF DES LOADS
D/C LIQ!MM CLEAR OPERATING RA.NGE ■ VAP
BACKUPIMM FOAM %OF DESIGN LOADILIO
NOTES
REV. DATE PURPOSE DESIGN .,=;HECKED APPROVED
Format No 3- 05 -45-3001 Rev 0 Copyrights EIL — All rights reseried
Page 6167 of 8516

k922.Jg ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
051-eg
.177Y elraml(15,11
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go. ol India Undeda.g)
ANNEXURE-II
DOCUMENT NO.
zlt ENGINEERS
5fg-u wNDIA LIMITED
IA Uovt of lnOid Undenaxing)
PACKED COLUMN DATASHEET )000(-)0(-XX-XX-)000(
Page 1 of 1
EIL ENQ. NO./ JOB NO. COLUMN NO.

PROJECT SERVICE OF UNIT
CUSTOMER TOTAL NO. OF PACKED SECTIONS
CUSTOMER REF. NO./ PROCESS DATA SHEET NO. TOTAL HEIGHT OF PACKED SECTIONS
TYPE OF PACKING
INPUT DATA
LOADING AT TOP BOTTOM

BOTTOM / TOP OF PACKING
RATE, Kg/hr
DENSITY, Kg/m3
VAPOUR
VISCOSITY, Cp/Cst
MOLECULAR WEIGHT
RATE, Kg/hr
DENSITY, Kg/m3
UQUID
VISCOSITY, Cp/Cst
SURFACE TENSION, Dvnes/cm
OPERATING PRESSURE, Kg/cm2 abs.
CONDITION TEMPERATURE, 'C
SYSTEM FACTOR
HEIGHT OF PACKED SECTION, mm
HEAT DUTY ACROSS SECTION, K Cal/hr X 106
ALL MAX. PRESSURE DROP ACROSS BED
MATERIAL OF INTERNALS
CONSTRUCTION PACKING
TOTAL CORROSION ALLOWANCE ON INTERNALS
MIN./MAX. % OF DESIGN LOADS
OUTPUT DATA HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE AT DESIGN/MAX. LOADS

COLUMN INSIDE DIAMETER, mm
TYPE AND SIZE OF PACKING
MOC PERCENT
PRESSURE PER METER OF PACKING mm Hg/
DROP TOTAL ACROSS BED Kg/cm2
TURNDOWN R OF DESIGN LOADS
HETP, METER/FEET
LM1D, 'CrF
VOL. HEAT TRANSFER COEFF. K CaI/hr m3 *C
SUPPORT PLATE
UQUID DISTRIBUTOR
HOLD DOWN PLATE / BED UMITER
UQUID REDISTRIBUTOR
NOTES:
REV. NO. DATE PURPOSE BY CHECKED APPROVED
Format No. 3-0545-3002-F4 Rev.O CopyrIght EIL -All rights reserved
Page 6168 of 8516

el ENGINEERS FOR REVIEW OF SITE
Sts' eir 22eg
wren eledeetraJ01700
INDIA LIMITED
IA GOvt 01 India Undertaking)
INSTALLATION OF COLUMN
6-14-0016 Rev. 4
comdi
ga-M-49-0-r Dq itr4gT
SPECIFICATION
FOR
REVIEW OF SITE INSTALLATION
OF
COLUMN INTERNALS

4 13.03.15 Ot41.
P1t1 P SC
3 30.03.10 JA SKM/DK AKG ND
2 27.08.04 RSR HCN RKA SKG
1 17.07.02 SK YVR/HCN RKA GRR
0 16.12.96 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION HCN SKK RKA AS
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6169 of 8516

$fgar kiWeg- INDIA LIMITED REVIEW OF SITE INSTALLATION 6-14-0016 Rev. 4
eiterle (A GOA (71 WOO Undertak.ng)
OF COLUMN INTERNALS Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
HMTD Heat & Mass Transfer Division
Members : Sh.Mandip Kapoor

Sh. Inder Kumar
Sh. G K Iyer (Const)
Page 6170 of 8516

faeJtqra I ENGINEERS
oge.11 tagtegw)INDIA LIMITED REVIEW OF SITE INSTALLATION 6-14-0016 Rev. 4
■
adVrr eled,rearrOdin-
A, (A Govt of India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 PURPOSE .4
2.0 REFERENCES 4
3.0 DEFINITIONS 4
4.0 SCOPE .5, 6
5.0 ANNEXURES 7-15
LIST OF ANNEXURES:
Site Installation Reporting Format for Column Internals & Structured Packing 3-0542-4001
Site Installation Review Check List 3-0542-4002
Page 6171 of 8516

5'fgar taiZs
411, T7127, MT
INDIA LIMITED REVIEW OF SITE INSTALLATION 6-14-0016 Rev. 4
Genet 01 Tna. UndnnanTng OF COLUMN INTERNALS Page 4 of 15
1.0 PURPOSE
This document outlines the requirements of site installation checking and review of
installed trays and tower internals. This is necessary so as to ensure that the
requirements as per approved drawings are met and equipment performs according to
the design specification.
It is the responsibility of Installation Contractor to ensure that all components are

fitted as per drawing/standards/specifications and 100 percent checked by Installation
Contractor's Supervisor and Engineer-in-Charge. Records of installation and quality
checks shall be maintained by Installation Contractor duly counter checked/signed by
Engineer-in-Charge as per Format 3-0542-4001 attached.
Review by specialist shall be subsequently carried out.
2.0 REFERENCES
Following shall form the reference documents for carrying out the work:
i) General Arrangement drawings of Trays and Tower Internals.
ii) Tray Support Ring and Bolting Bar drawings of Column fabricator.
iii) Vessel Design Data.
iv) Nozzle Orientation Drawing.
v) Installation Procedure for Trays & Tower Internals No. 6-14-0003
vi) Standard Specification for packing the column - No.6-14-0011
vii) Construction Tolerance for Welded Supports for

Trays/Tower Internals - No.7-14-0001
viii) Typical detail of Trays - No.7-14-0202
3.0 DEFINITIONS
Column Internals
These are mechanical devices used inside the column or other process equipment to
carry out desired process function and shall include trays, tower internals, tower
packings, demisters, spray nozzles etc.
Revamp
The word is used for modifications being done to any process equipment or scheme so
as to achieve higher throughput or better product quality or both.
Engineer-in-Charge
Authorised engineer either from client/or EIL site, responsible to interact with
Installation Contractor & getting the jobs done under his surveillance & inspection.
Specialist
The nominated personnel of HMTD, assigned to perform the review of the
tray/internal installations after these are cleared by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 6172 of 8516

,51
! ENGINEERS
Oem Wes INDIA LIMITED REVIEW OF SITE INSTALLATION 6-14-0016 Rev. 4
etrave
WWI 951,3W7 IA Govt ot Indo Undertaking)
Set of Trays
Identical trays in a continuous bank having same chord heights, number and type of
valves, exit weir heights, under down flow clearances, tray spacing etc.
Installation Contractor
Agency who has been assigned the job for carrying out the Installation of Column
Internals.
Punch List
List of comments given by specialist at site which needs to be attended for necessary
rectification by the Installation Contractor under direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.0 SCOPE
The scope of activities and responsibilities of Installation Contractor, Engineer-in-

Charge and Specialist shall be as per para 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3 hereafter. These shall be
carried out for all trays/tower internals in each column.
4.1 Installation Contractor
i) Before Installation of Trays and Tower Internals, checking the levelness of

support rings and location of bolting bars.
ii) Recording the final levelness/dimensions measured in Format 3-0542-
4001(sht.1 & 2) and getting these counter checked by Engineer-in-Charge.
iii) After installation of trays under vendor supervision and stage-wise inspection
of Engineer-in-Charge, recording important tray dimensions for all trays as
per Format 3-0542-4001 (sht.3 & 4) and getting these counter checked by
Engineer-in-Charge.
iv) Carrying out various checks /leak testing on fitted trays as per Format 3-0542-
4001 (sht.5) and recording the compliance duly counter checked by Engineer-
in-Charge.
v) In case of packed beds, after installation of various internals carrying out
various checks/leak testing as per Format 3-0542-4001 (sht.6 & 7) and
recording the compliance duly counter checked by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2 Engineer-in-Charge
i) Stage-wise and final inspection of installation of Trays and Tower Internals

done by the Installation Contractor.
ii) Counter checking the various dimensions/levelness/checks as recorded by
Installation Contractor as per para 4.1. These records shall be maintained at
site and shown to specialist for his review.
iii) In case dimensions/levelness/location of support rings and bolting bars is not
as per column drawings and within tolerances as per EIL Std. 7-14-0001,
directions shall be provided to Installation Contractor/Column Fabricator for
necessary rectification/modification.
iv) Submit filled & signed format 3-0542-4001 to HMTD-HO for each column
before calling for checking/review by specialist.
v) EIL-Site to ensure that Tray/Tower Internals Supplier's representative should
be present at site during HMTD-Specialist visit at site.
vi) Attending to Punch List provided by specialist at the end of his review and
ensuring that these are carried out by Installation Contractor. Rectifications
required as per Punch List shall be finally cleared by Engineer-in-Charge and
no further review by specialist shall be required. Columns shall be cleared for
boxing-up subsequently.
Page 6173 of 8516

7111~ ENGINEERS
T fZ5 INDIA LIMITED REVIEW OF SITE INSTALLATION 6-14-0016 Rev. 4
Go, of IndLa Undeld.ncp
4.3 Specialist
i) Review of readings/observations on site installation and leak testing recorded

in format 3-0542-4001 before carrying out his own random checking.
ii) Carry out random check on installed trays. Number of trays selected for this
shall depend upon the quality of work. However, as a minimum, 25 percent
of trays (minimum 2 nos. per set) shall be checked. Trays so selected shall be
true representative of the total tray bank. Record the findings in the form of
punch list and handover to Engineer-in-charge for rectification/compliance.
iii) Review of Installed Column Internals to the extent access is available. Record
the findings in the form of punch list and handover to Engineer-in-charge for
rectification/compliance.
iv) List out the discrepancies observed. If specialist finds it necessary to discuss
with head office, it shall be referred to HO for decision. Jobs which need
rectification shall be reported to Engineer-in-Charge through a Punch List.
These shall be attended to by Engineer-in-Charge and no further review by
specialist would be required.
v) Submit filled format 3-0542-4001, 3-0542-4002 and copy of Punch List to
Head Office along with tour report.
Page 6174 of 8516

SITE INSTALLATION REPORTING DOCUMENT No.
ENGINEERS FORMAT FOR COLUMN
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking) INTERNALS
(BEFORE INSTALLATION) Page of
COLUMN NO.: EILNENDOR'S DRG. NO.:

SERVICE: JOB NO.:
PLANT: CLIENT:
1. DISTANCE BETWEEN TRAY SUPPORT RING (BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE TRAYS

TRAY NO.
DRG. DIMENSION
A
B
C
D
AS BUILT
DIMENSION AT E
POINT F
DIMENSION TO BE TAKEN FROM TOP TO TOP OF TSR WITH PO NTS MARKED ON THE SAME
ORIENTATION FOR ALL TRAYS MINIMUM AT FOUR POINTS UPTO 20000 & MINIMUM SIX POINTS
ABOVE 20000
2. LOCATION OF BOLTING BAR
TRAY NO.
DRG.DIMENSION
G1
ACTUAL
DRG.DIMENSION
G2
ACTUAL
DRG.DIMENSION
G3
ACTUAL
DRG.DIMENSION
G4
ACTUAL
DRG. DIMENSION
G5
ACTUAL
DRG.DIMENSION
G6
ACTUAL
DRG.DIMENSION
G7
ACTUAL
DRG.DIMENSION
G8
ACTUAL
INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR: ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE:

(SIGNATURE) (SIGNATURE)
NAME: NAME:
DATE: DATE:
Notes:
(1) This format shall be filled for all Trays by Installation Contractor and counter checked by Engineer-
in-Charge.
(2) Tolerance on various drawing dimensions shall be as per applicable drawing/standard.
(3) Refer Standard 7-14-0202 for abbreviations & typical detail of trays.
Format No. 3-0542-4001, Rev. 1, Sheet 1 of 7 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 6175 of 8516

In~l ENGINEERS FORMAT FOR COLUMN
id0=1"e-s- INDIA LIMITED
INTERNALS
(BEFORE INSTALLATION) Page of

SERVICE: JOB NO.:
PLANT: CLIENT:
3. LEVEL READING
LEVEL AT TSR REF.

11 (TRAY/INTERNAL)
REF. POINT
A
B
C
LEVEL AT A, B, C, D ....... TAKEN WITH WATER TUBE WITH "A" AS REFERENCE POINT MINIMUM AT
FOUR POINTS UPTO 20000 & MINIMUM SIX POINTS ABOVE 20000. MINIMUM 3 POINTS PER TSR
SEGMENTS SHALL BE SELECTED.

NAME: NAME:
DATE: DATE:
Notes:
(1) This format shall be filled for all Trays/Internals by Installation Contractor and counter checked by
Engineer-in-Charge.
Format No. 3-0542-4001, Rev.1, Sheet 2 of 7 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 6176 of 8516

fa..0 ENGINEERS FORMAT FOR COLUMN
*Igeji Ia5leg INDIA LIMITED
N12,kworkt ...Aim, (A GOV! of India Undertaking) INTERNALS
(AFTER INSTALLATION) Page of

SERVICE: JOB NO.:
PLANT: CLIENT:
TRAY NO.
Al, A3, A4, A5, A7, A8
A DRG. DIMENSION
A2, A6
Al
A2
A3
HEIGHT OF EXIT WEIR A4

(FROM TOP OF TRAY DECK TO TOP OF
AS
WEIR) (mm)
A6
A7
A8
Bl, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8

B DRG. DIMENSION
B2, B6
B1
B2
B3
UNDER DOWNFLOW CLEARANCE, B4
(DISTANCE BETWEEN DOWNCOMER
BOTTOM & TRAY DECK/RECESSED SEAL B5
PAN PLATE) (mm)
B6
B7
B8
Cl, C3, C4, C5, C7, C8

C DRG. DIMENSION
C2, C6
Cl
C2
C3
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE BETWEEN C4

DOWNCOMER PLATE & RECESSED SEAL
C5
PAN (mm)
C6
C7
C8

NAME: NAME:
DATE: DATE:
Notes:
(I) This format shall be filled for all Trays by Installation Contractor and counter checked by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 6177 of 8516

k51-1 ENGINEERS FORMAT FOR COLUMN
ligariaw8 INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, of Inc Unclertalong, INTERNALS
COLUMN NO.: EIL/VENDOR'S DRG. NO.:

SERVICE: JOB NO.:
PLANT: CLIENT:
TRAY NO.
DI, D3, D4, D5, D7, D8

D DRG. DIMENSION
D2, D6
DI
D2
D3
UNDER DOWNFLOW CLEARANCE D4

(DISTANCE BETWEEN DOWNCOMER
D5
PLATE & SEAL PAN (mm))
D6
D7
D8
E1, E3, E4, E5, E7, E8
E DRG. DIMENSION
E2, E6
El
E2
E3
CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN E4

DOWNCOMER PLATE & SEAL PAN
E5
(mm)
E6
E7
E8

NAME: NAME:
DATE: DATE:
Notes:
(1) This format shall be filled for all Trays by Installation Contractor and counter checked by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 6178 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS FORMAT FOR COLUMN
taPieg INDIA LIMITED
I aiTeat ereowe =Jetta, (A Govt of India Undertaking) INTERNALS

SERVICE: JOB NO.:
PLANT: CLIENT:
TRAY NO
CHECK THE FOLLOWING :
CHECK EACH BOLT FOR TIGHTNESS

CHECK ORIENTATION, PROPER MARK (TYPE) AND
TIGHTNESS OF EACH CLAMP
CHECK PROVISION OF LOCK NUTS AND SEAL
PLATES WHEREVER SPECIFIED
CHECK EACH TOP DOWNCOMER PIECE FOR
CORRECT INSTALLATION OF SHIMMING
INCLUDING TACK WELDING/BOLTING
CHECK SEAL WELDING/GASKETING WHEREVER
APPLICABLE
CHECK LEAK TESTING OF SEAL PANS, RECESSED
SEAL PAN, CHIMNEY TRAYS, DISTRIBUTOR, DRAW-
OFF BOXES ETC. AS PER DRAWING
CHECK OVERLAPPING OF DECKS
CHECK FOR DAMAGED, MISSING VALVES AND
VALVE MOVEMENT FOR ALL VALVES FOR VALVE
TRAYS
CHECK FOR FITTING OF PROPER VALVE
COMBINATION (MR2, MR6 ETC.)
CHECK FOR NOTICEABLE DAMAGE TO DECK
COMPONENTS
CHECK LEVELNESS AND ALIGNMENT OF INLET
WEIR AND EXIT WEIR AND ADJUST IF NECESSARY
CHECK BEAM & CLIPS ARE PROPERLY FITTED
CHECK THAT TRAY MANWAY CAN BE OPENED
FROM TOP AS WELL AS FROM BOTTOM
CHECK THAT ALL SLOTS ON TRAY COMPONENTS
ARE FULLY COVERED
CHECK THAT GAPS AT DOWNCOMER ENDS AND
OTHER PLACES ARE WITHIN SPECIFIED LIMITS
CHECK ORIENTATION IN CASE OF RIPPLE TRAYS
FOR LATTICE GIRDERS, CHECK THE LEVELNESS
OF PRIMARY MEMBERS AND COMPLETENESS OF
WELDING OF ALL THE BRACINGS AND
SECONDARY MEMBERS
CHECK TEMPORARY PLUGS WHEREVER
PROVIDED FOR TESTING HAVE BEEN REMOVED
CHECK THAT TRAYS HAVE BEEN CLEARED OFF
ALL FOREIGN MATERIALS

NAME: NAME:
DATE: DATE:
Notes:
(1) This format shall be filled for all Trays by Installation Contractor and counter checked by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 6179 of 8516

Ig•7161W5 INDIA LIMITED
INTERNALS

SERVICE: JOB NO.:
PLANT: CLIENT:
BED NO.
CHECK THE FOLLOWING :
CHECK THAT MULTIBEAM SUPPORT PLATE SITS PROPERLY ON

THE TSR WITH NO UNDESIRED GAPS. ALL SPACINGS AND GAPS
ARE EVENLY DISTRIBUTED ACROSS THE VESSEL DIAMETER.
CHECK FOR PROPER LEVELLING OF TOP OF BED AND GAP
BETWEEN TOP OF BED AND BED LIMITER (NO GAPS PREFERRED,
MAXIMUM GAP AT FEW LOCATIONS NOT TO EXCEED ONE
PACKING SIZE).
CHECK THAT BED LIMITER IS PROPERLY BOLTED AND THE GAP
ON THE PERIPHERY IS UNIFORM AND NOT MORE THAN THAT
SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWING. ALSO CHECK THAT PACKING IS
NOT FREE TO COME OUT FROM ANY OPENING. ALSO CHECK
THAT BED LIMITER MESH IS INTACT.
CHECK LEVELNESS FOR DISTRIBUTOR/REDISTRIBUTORS/FLASH
GALLERIES/SPRAY HEADER. SAME TO BE WITHIN TOLERANCE
SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS/STANDARDS AND TO BE
RECORDED IN SHT.1.
CHECK THAT THE DISTRIBUTOR/REDISTRIBUTORS/FLASH
GALLERIES/SPRAY HEADERS ARE PROPERLY CLAMPED/BOLTED.
CHECK THAT THE DISTRIBUTOR/REDISTRIBUTORS/FLASH
GALLERIES (IF REQUIRED) ARE PROPERLY GASKETTED AS
SPECIFIED IN THE DRAWING.
CHECK LEAK TIGHTNESS OF THE DISTRIBUTOR/REDISTRIBUTOR/
FLASH GALLERY (IF REQUIRED), TO BE ENSURED BY FILLING
WATER AND CHECKING LEAKAGES FROM GASKETTED JOINTS.
FOR CHIMNEY/COLLECTOR TRAY, DRAW-OFF BOXES,
WHEREVER APPLICABLE, CHECK COMPLETENESS OF SEAL
WELDING, GASKETTING, PROPER FITMENT OF VAPOUR RISER
COVERS AND REVIEW RECORD FOR LEAK TESTING.
FOR SPRAY NOZZLE DISTRIBUTOR, CHECK FOR
i) HYDROTEST FOR SPRAY HEADER
ii) CLOGGING OF SPRAY NOZZLES, BY RUNNING PUMP, IF
FEASIBLE
iii) CHECK TIP DISTANCE FROM TOP OF THE BED (TOLERANCE
TO BE WITHIN 25 mm)
iv) CHECK GASKET AT FLANGE JOINT, THREAD SEALANT AT
THREADED JOINTS
v) ANY OBSTRUCTION IN THE UNIFORM SPRAY PATTERN
REVIEW OF PROPER ORIENTATION OF VARIOUS TOWER
INTERNALS LIKE BED LIMITER, FEED PIPE W.R.T. DISTRIBUTOR/
REDISTRIBUTORS, AS PER DETAIL SHOWN IN RESPECTIVE
DRAWINGS.
CHECK TEMPORARY PLUGS WHEREVER PROVIDED HAVE BEEN
REMOVED AFTER TESTING

NAME: NAME:
DATE: DATE:
Notes:
(1) This format shall be filled for all Tower Internals by Contractor and counter checked by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 6180 of 8516

~Qllffaigeg
".","
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt cot incto Undenaking) INTERNALS
(DURING INSTALLATION) Page of

SERVICE: JOB NO.:
PLANT: CLIENT:
BED NO.
CHECK THE FOLLOWING : (FOR STRUCTURED PACKING)
FOR LATTICE GIRDERS (IF ANY), CHECK THE LEVELNESS OF

PRIMARY MEMBERS AND COMPLETENESS OF WELDING OF ALL
THE BRACINGS AND SECONDARY MEMBERS
CHECK THAT SUPPORT GRID SITS PROPERLY ON THE TSR WITH
NO UNDESIRED GAPS. ALL SPACINGS AND GAPS ARE EVENLY
DISTRIBUTED ACROSS THE VESSEL DIAMETER.
CHECK PROPER BOLTING OF SUPPORT GRID SEGMENTS.
ORIENTATION OF STRUCTURED PACKING SEGMENTS LAYERS
SHOULD BE AS PER DRAWING.
CHECK THAT GAP BETWEEN EACH MODULE OF STRUCTURED
PACKING IS WITHIN TOLERANCE LIMIT.
CHECK THAT GAP BETWEEN STRUCTURED PACKING AND
COLUMN WALL IS MINIMIZED AND COLLARS ARE FITTED
PROPERLY.
CHECK FOR PROPER LEVELLING OF TOP OF STRUCTURED
PACKING AND GAP BETWEEN TOP OF STRUCTURED PACKING
AND RETAINING GRID.
CHECK THAT RETAINING GRID IS PROPERLY BOLTED AS PER
DRAWING.
FOR DISTRIBUTOR / REDISTRIBUTOR / FLASH GALLERY (REFER
SHEET 6 OF 7)

NAME: NAME:
DATE: DATE:
Notes:
(1) This format shall be filled for all Tower Internals by Contractor and counter checked by Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 6181 of 8516

DOCUMENT No.
,?-1 ENGINEERS SITE INSTALLATION
0`-ar Wag
(441,12=r2zAr2
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Unde(taklAg)
REVIEW CHECK LIST
Page of
TRAY INSTALLATION REVIEW CHECK LIST

(To be filled by Specialist)
(I) Review of filled formats for Tray levelness and other tray installation data
Formats (3-0543-4001sht.1 to 6 of 6) to be completed by Contractor and duly certified
for 100% checking by EIL site.
If any dimension is out of permissible tolerances as per 7-14-0001. Specialist to
review and suggest remedial action, in consultation with HO (if required).
(2) Provide clarification to site on any matter w.r.t. Installation of trays and tower
internals.
(3) Random check minimum 25 % of trays (subject to minimum two trays per set)
(Trays selected shall be true representative).
- EWH & Adjustability (permissible deviation +/- 1 mm)

- UDFC (permissible deviation +/- 3, D/C bottom piece to rest on D/C bracket.
- Gap at deck joints (max. gap - 3 mm at deck joint, 5 mm at EW location).
- Overlapping of tray decks (no overlapping allowed)
- Valve movement, missing & damaged valves (check approx 5% of valves)
- For bubble cap trays, check skirt height & locknuts on caps
(check approx 5% caps)
- Check plugging of holes in case of sieve trays
- Noticeable damage in Internal components, wooden hammers to be used in case
flattening is required.
- Chord heights (acceptable limit V (Col. ID/200 + 4))
- Check inlet weir/inlet weir seal plate at respective location
- Check for proper fitting of gaskets for gasketed deck components.
- Also check whether same has been leak tested or not. Also check that drain
holes are open unless specified otherwise in the drawings.
- Light & heavy valve combination adopted at right place
- Check provision of lock-nuts wherever specified
- For Ripple trays, check relative orientation of trays
- For Catridge trays, check the top tray of each bundle orientation and removal
of lifting box.
- Check the provision of antijump baffle wherever specified
- Check for seal plates on recessed seal pans
- Check temporary plugs wherever provided has been removed after testing
(4) For Chimney/Collector Tray, Draw-off boxes, wherever applicable, check

completeness of seal welding, gasketting, proper fitment of vapour riser covers and
review record for leak testing.
(5) Check arrangement for proper feeding & liquid withdrawal
- Reflux at top tray

- Transition arrangement from one tray to other
- Intermediate feed including direction/angle of vapour & liquid slots
- Feed from bottom most seal pan to partitioned column bottom
- Vapour/reboiler return, if flush, should be parallel to down comer of bottom
most tray.
- Location/Orientation of withdrawal nozzle. Also check provision of vortex
breaker
- Drain & vent holes wherever provided in the feed system shall be clear & open
(6) List out all discrepancies in a punch list for individual column
Signature
Date Name
Format No. 3-0542-4002, Rev. 1, Sheet 1 of 2 Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
Page 6182 of 8516

DOCUMENT No.
ENGINEERS SITE INSTALLATION
215:1--eg
>AVM ,r-rasre
JAI:IFA,
INDIA LIMITED
Govt et 1,10. Unoertaiting)
REVIEW CHECK LIST
(A
Page of
TOWER INTERNALS INSTALLATION REVIEW CHECK LIST

(To be filled by Specialist)
1 Review site record for levelness for distributor/redistributors/flash galleries/spray

header. Same to be within tolerance specified in the drawing/standards.
2. Check that the distributor/redistributors/flash galleries/spray headers are

properly clamped/bolted.
3. Check that the distributor/redistributors/flash galleries (if required) are properly

gasketed as specified in the drawing.
4. Review site record of leak tightness of the distributor/redistributors/flash gallery (if

required), to be ensured by filling water and checking leakages from gasketed joints.
5. For Chimney/Collector Tray, wherever applicable, check, if possible, completeness

of seal welding, gasketting, proper fitment of vapour riser covers and review record
for leak testing.
6. For spray nozzle distributor, check for
i) Hydrotest record for spray header
ii) Clogging of spray nozzles, by running pump, if feasible
iii) Sample check tip distance from top of the bed (to be within +25 mm)
iv) Check proper gasket fitment at flange joint, thread sealant at threaded joints.
v) Any obstruction in uniform spray pattern
7. Review of proper orientation of various tower internals like bed limiter w.r.t.
Distributor/redistributors, as per detail shown in respective drawings is mandatory.
Signature
Date Name
Page 6183 of 8516

Page 6184 of 8516
101 ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECIFICATION
fgeir fMfgitg INDIA LIMITED FOR WIRE MESH DEMISTERS 6-14-0017 Rev. 3
>Ten ofemit' im aflOrs0 IA Goot of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 6
*111-111-ti i cl i 1 kill
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
FOR WIRE MESH DEMISTERS
07.11.2013 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

3 7t11 Sc
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED & REISSUED AS STANDARD
2 17.09.2008 VDY HCN AKG VC
SPECIFICATION
1 22.08.2003 SK HCN RKA SKG
SPECIFICATION
0 07.05.1997 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION HCN SKK RKA AS
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6185 of 8516

ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Ogar Oil&
I .TIM ere4g7 .1,R35711
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goof of Ind.) Undertaking)
Rev. 3
Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
AISI : American Iron and Steel Institute
AIA : Authorized Inspection Agency
TIG : Tungsten Insert Gas
Heat & Mass Transfer Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. Amit Prakash
Members: Mr. Inder Kumar

Mr. Mandip Kapoor
Mr. GK Iyer ( Construction )

Page 6186 of 8516

0 el ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECIFICATION
fa5leg
etront maga,'
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InMa Undeffak,o9) WIRE MESH DEMISTERS
6-14-0017 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCES 4
3.0 MATERIAL 4
4.0 DESIGN & FABRICATION 4
5.0 SPARES 5
6.0 INSPECTION & TESTING 5
7.0 PACKING & FORWARDING 5
8.0 GUARANTEE 6
9.0 DOCUMENTATION 6
10.0 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION 6
Page 6187 of 8516

t_Silfazie-i ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECIFICATION
ligar taliteg INDIA LIMITED 6-14-0017 Rev. 3
Uif'~f i4 JOCA.if (A GovI of India Undertaking) FOR WIRE MESH DEMISTERS
Page 4 of 6
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for design, fabrication, inspection and
supply of knitted wiremesh assemblies (Demisters) in duly packed condition.
The demister assembly(ies) shall consist of wiremesh pad, top and bottom holding grids,
major beams (if specified), bolting/clamps/tie rods/J-bolts/spacer pipes and any other
components which are essential to complete the demister assembly to be installed on supports
welded inside the vessel.
2.0 REFERENCES
Following documents/standards/specifications in their latest edition shall form the basis of

design, fabrication, inspection, testing and acceptance of the demister:
Demister data sheet As per Material Requisition

6-14-0009 Packing, Marking and Shipping Specifications for
Trays and Tower Internals
7-12-0036*/Licensor's standards - Details of Wire Mesh Demister Supports (as
applicable)
7-12-0001 Vessel Tolerances
ASME Sec. II Material Specifications
ASME Sec. VIII Div.I Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
ASME Sec. IX Welding Qualifications
AISI Material Specification for Wires, Spacer Rods etc.
(* Standard 7-12-0036 shall be used for reference only. Final design of demister supports shall
be as per vendor design standards/calculations and shall be submitted to EIL for review prior
to start of fabrication.)
3.0 MATERIAL
All the material used for fabrication & supply of Demister shall be new & of first quality and
shall be duly supported with material test certificates.
4.0 DESIGN & FABRICATION
4.1 Basic details such as demister specification (surface area, voidage, and bulk density), material
of construction, supporting arrangement, manhole size etc. shall be as per drawings/
specification furnished by EIL.
4.2 In the General Arrangement drawing Demister Vendor shall indicate the following outside
dimensions (incase of square / rectangular demister) / diameter:
a) The oversized outside dimensions / diameter to take care of the tolerances/column ovality
defined in applicable Code / EIL Standard 7-12-0001/ drawings for snug fitment. These
dimensions / diameter shall be used for shop inspection of the demister mock up
assembly.
b) The final fit-up dimensions / diameter.
4.3 Demister assembly shall be designed for a net upward thrust of 100 kg/m2 (uniform) due to the
vapour loadings. The assembly should also be able to withstand a concentrated live load of 60
kg at mid point of any of the demister sub-assembly/component.
In addition to the above loading, demister shall be designed to withstand the additional
pressure surges, if specified.
Page 6188 of 8516

k3111 ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECIFICATION
22- es
5fgai cream „prom, INDIA LIMITED
WIRE MESH DEMISTERS
6-14-0017 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 6
4.4 All demister sub-assemblies shall be sized to facilitate installation inside the column/vessel
through the manhole. These shall rest on support ring/cleats welded inside vessel/column by
others.
4.5 Tentative details of the support rings/cleats, mid span beams (wherever required) grid details
& fixing arrangements shall be as given in the referenced documents listed in clause 2.0.
Vendor is advised to follow the same for the design/fabrication in their scope of work. Vendor
may, however, suggest any improvement in the design. Such suggestions will however be
reviewed/ approved by EIL/Client and can be followed by the vendor only on written
acceptance by EIL/Client.
4.6 All internal bolting shall be minimum M10 size and shall be compatible with Demister
material. All bolting shall be provided with locknuts.
4.7 Welding
All welding shall be done by metal arc welding. For welding on thinner gauge sheets TIG
welding is preferred. Welding wherever required, is to be done by qualified and approved
welders using the suitable fillers and fluxes recommended for materials used for the
fabrication.
5.0 SPARES
5.1 Constructional Spares
Following constructional spares shall be supplied:
Fasteners - bolts, nuts, clamps, spacer pipes, - 10% (minimum 4 Nos. of each type/size)
J-bolts etc.
5.2 Operational Spares
In addition to Constructional spares as indicated above, vendor shall also supply following
operational spares:
Fasteners - bolts, nuts, clamps, spacer pipes, - 10% (minimum 4 Nos. of each type/size)
J-bolts etc.
6.1 The material, fabrication and trial assembly shall be Inspected by the EIL/Client and/or their
AIA.
6.2 Complete demister assemblies (along with grids) and Beams etc. shall be assembled as floor
mock-up & shall be offered for final inspection. Assembly shall be checked for oversized
dimensions as per the approved drawing.
7.0 PACKING & FORWARDING
The individual components shall be marked with proper item/part number as given in the
drawings to facilitate identification at site. Demister shall be wrapped in polythene and
supplied in wooden cases for damage free transportation. For all other requirements refer EIL
Specification No. 6-14-0009.
Page 6189 of 8516

ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECIFICATION
5'1:
gar tle-e-g w INDIA LIMITED
Wert eiCarre ZINJER/5,
11 IA Govt of India Undettahing)
6-14-0017 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 6
8.0 GUARANTEE
Vendor shall guarantee the design, performance (i.e. separation efficiency, and pressure drop),
material, fabrication and workmanship for the demisters for the period as outlined in General
Purchase Conditions.
9.0 DOCUMENTATION
Documents/drawings shall be furnished as per the 'Vendor Data Requirement' enclosed with
requisition / feed document. All the drawings prepared by the vendor shall be on AUTOCAD.
10.0 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION

Nos. and type of documents to be supplied as 'As-built' document shall be per 'Vendor Data
Requirement' enclosed with requisition / feed document.
Shop changes made by Vendor after approval of drawings under Code-1 by EIL and
deviations granted in deviation permits, if any, shall be marked in hard copy of drawings
which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the vendor. These 'As-built' drawings shall be
reviewed and stamped by Authorised Inspector also. Vendor shall prepare scanned image files
of all marked-up 'As-built' drawings. Vendor shall also incorporate the above changes in the
native soft files of the drawings.
Authorised Inspector shall ensure/certify completeness of Vendor's Final/As-built documents

before equipment dispatch.
In addition, vendor shall also incorporate site changes, if any, based on mismatch observed at
site and resubmit the 'As-built' documents.
Page 6190 of 8516

l51
1 ENGINEERS FOR HARDNESS REQUIREMENT
£ ;12e5
man ,roxt asTararr, OF STATIC EQUIPMENT(PV & HE) Page 1 of 5
if[R4
r(N-R
4-11-ich
FOR
HARDNESS REQUIREMENT
OF
STATIC EQUIPMENTS
(PRESSURE VESSELS, HEAT EXCHANGER)
3 05.11.14 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
2 29.06.09 REAFFIRMED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VB RKG AKM N.DUARI

1 26.03.04 PK SSA SKG
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NSK
0 15.03.96 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RV SSA RKA AS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6191 of 8516

ENGNEERS FOR HARDNESS REQUIREMENT
Og—
a[ f&if51 INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0091 Rev. 3
2.12ErreM1.3.7..11 (A Go. of tnd Und.tak.9) OF STATIC EQUIPMENT(PV&HE)
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:

BHN Brinell Hardness Number
HAZ Heat Affected Zone
PWHT Post Weld Heat Treatment
Members : Mr. K. Anjaneyulu

Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Mr. R.K. Singh (Inspection)
Mr. G.K. Iyer (Construction)
Mr. Ratan Lal (Project)
Mr. S. Ghosal (SMMS)
Page 6192 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR HARDNESS REQUIREMENT
fg-ar fal51- g INDIA LIMITED
A GoN of Undertaking) . OF STATIC EQUIPMENT(PV&HE)
6-15-0091 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 HARDNESS REQUIREMENTS 4
3.0 WELDING QUALIFICATION TEST 4
4.0 PRODUCTION TEST 4
5.0 APPROVAL 5
Page 6193 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR HARDNESS REQUIREMENT
441, rs'enl L151,7,77.1 GoA of haaundertakog) OF STATIC EQUIPMENT(PV&HE)
Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers general requirement of hardness of base metal, weld and heat-
affected-zone (HAZ) and is applicable to all C-% Mo, Cr-Mo steels and other materials
whenever asked for in drawings/ specifications/standards. All testing shall be done after
PWHT.
2.0 HARDNESS REQUIREMENTS
Hardness in base metals, weld and heat affected zone as per ASTM E 10 shall not exceed the
following:
For P1 materials - 200 BHN

For P3 & P4 materials - 225 BHN
For P5 & P6 materials - 235 BHN
3.0 WELDING QUALIFICATION TEST
3.1. For each welding procedure qualification six tests shall be made, three in weld metal and three
in HAZ. Hardness requirements shall be as per cl. 2.0 above.
3.2. In addition to the requirement of 3.1 above, Vickers Micro hardness test shall be made on a
full cross-section at 25 mm intervals beginning at 3 mm from the top surface with 5 kg load or
with a load approved by the authorized inspector. Tests shall be made at each level for each of
the following locations as per ASTM E 92:
Three tests shall be made in the weld metals, two tests in HAZ and one test in the base metal
in accordance with Fig.1 and the hardness shall not exceed the following in base metal, weld
metal and HAZ.
For P1 materials - 210 VHN

For P3 & P4 materials - 237 VHN
For P5 & P6 materials - 247 VHN
4.0 PRODUCTION TEST
4.1 All pressure containing weld metals are to be checked for hardness of weld and HAZ after
PWHT but before hydro-test. The hardness shall not exceed the value stipulated.
4.2 Each longitudinal seam shall be checked both internally and externally near the center and at
one end.
4.3 Each circumferential weld shall be checked at four locations approximately 90°apart, both
internally and externally.
4.4 Each nozzle weldments shall be checked at two locations, 180° apart, both internally and
externally.
Page 6194 of 8516

ENGINEEFZS FOR HARDNESS REQUIREMENT
gz:11 INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0091 Rev. 3
4,1 3.1U./ IA Govt ~la Unctertak.g) OF STATIC EQUIPMENT(PV&HE)
Page 5 of 5
5.0 APPROVAL
In case the hardness as obtained on production test is more than the limit specified in 2.0
above, the vendor shall submit the corrective procedure to lower the hardness in writing to
EIL and/or authorized inspection agency for review/approval.
BRINELL HARDNESS TEST

(TYP)
HEAT AFFECTED ZONE
3(TYP)
HEAT AFFECTED ZONE
‘ VICKERS HARDNESS TEST

"I
ON CROSS SECTION (TYP)
FIG.1- HARDNESS REQUIREMENT ON TEST COUPONS
Page 6195 of 8516

Page 6196 of 8516
Page 6197 of 8516
Page 6198 of 8516
Page 6199 of 8516
Page 6200 of 8516
Page 6201 of 8516
Page 6202 of 8516
Page 6203 of 8516
Page 6204 of 8516
Page 6205 of 8516
Page 6206 of 8516
Page 6207 of 8516
Page 6208 of 8516
Page 6209 of 8516
Page 6210 of 8516
Page 6211 of 8516
Page 6212 of 8516
Page 6213 of 8516
Page 6214 of 8516
Page 6215 of 8516
Page 6216 of 8516
Page 6217 of 8516
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
01We? ENGINEERS CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS 6-79-0013 Rev. 1
USED IN SOUR SERVICE IN
Sg7k1t5tr, INDIA LIMITED
A Got of India undertaking)
PETROLEUM Page 1 of 6
REFINERY ENVIRONMENT
tirecrrt Rtoi it1 cimicit u i TrTK tirchi

TRYITru trk A-r4 chick tack,' aNzgl
timul aTerw
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS USED
IN SOUR SERVICE IN
PETROLEUM REFINERY
ENVIRONMENTS
REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD

1 07.10.11 SPECIFICATION AR SG PPL DM
0 07.10.04 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION GM VRK KKM SKG
Standards Standards
No by by
Approved by
Page 6218 of 8516

In ENGINEERS CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS 6-79-0013 Rev. 1
INDIA LIMITED USED IN SOUR SERVICE IN
$jg",C1T 'Meg. IA Govl of India undertaking)
Abbreviations:

Members: Mr. A Amin

Mr. GS Hegde
Mr. R Chaudhury
Mr. S Ghosal
Mr. P Saha
Mr. AK Gupta (HMTD)
Page 6219 of 8516

t1511*Zret:
e ENGINEERS CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS 6-79-0013 Rev. 1
sig7 wegwINDIA LIMITED USED IN SOUR SERVICE IN
IA earl of India Undenakurp)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCED CODES/STANDARDS 4
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION 5
5.0 PRODUCT SPECIFIC REQUIREMNTS 5
6.0 POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT (PWHT) AND HARDNESS REQUIREMENT 6
Page 6220 of 8516

Salfazrei CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS 6-79-0013 Rev. 1
INDIA LIMITED USED IN SOUR SERVICE IN
$1@l729.egi IA Gan ol Intha undedakingl
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 In general, for refinery services, NACE Standard MR 0103 shall be applicable. For services
where HIC (Hydrogen Induced Cracking) resistant carbon steel is specifically mentioned in
the Process Documents, this specification shall be followed.
1.2 This specification lays down the requirements related to the chemical composition,
manufacture, fabrication and testing requirements for carbon steel components intended to be
used in sour service in petroleum refinery environments. These requirements are specified in
order to make the carbon steel component resistant to the various forms of material damage in
a sour environment, such as Sulfide Stress Cracking (SSC), Hydrogen Induced Cracking
(HIC), Stress Oriented Hydrogen Induced Cracking (SOHIC), Blistering etc. These
requirements can be used for resisting Alkaline Stress Corrosion Cracking (ASCC) also. This
specification is applicable for corrosive petroleum refining facilities.
1.3 The service medium is defined as "Sour" when the service environment conforms to one of
the following conditions, as defined in NACE Standard MR0103.
Service environments containing free water (in liquid phase) and:
>50 ppmw dissolved H 2 S in the free water.
Free water pH < 4 and some dissolved H 2S present.
Free water pH >7.6 and 20 ppmw dissolved hydrogen cyanide (HCN) in the water and
some dissolved H2 S present.
>0.003 MPa absolute (0.05 psia) partial pressure H2S in the gas in processes with a gas
phase.
2.0 REFERENCED CODES/STANDARDS
NACE MR 0103 ASTM A 694 ASTM A 770

NACE RP 0472 ASTM A 216 ASTM A 370
NACE Publication 8X194 & 8X294 ASTM A 106 ASTM A 578
NACE TM 0284 API 5 L ASME SEC II PART C
ASTM A 20 API 6 A ASME SEC VIII-DIV.I
ASTM A 516 ASTM E 18 ASME SEC IX
ASTM A 105 ASTM E 45 ANSI B 16.34
ASTM A 234 ASTM E 92 ANSI B 31.3
All ASTM Standard designations shall be applicable for corresponding ASME designations
which would be read as ASME SA XXX instead of ASTM A XXX.
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The steel for sour service shall be manufactured by either basic oxygen or electric arc furnace
route and shall be fully killed and fine grained.
3.2 Carbon steel shall not contain intentional additions of elements such as lead, selenium or
sulphur to improve machinability.
3.3 Carbon steel shall be used in one of the following heat treatment conditions.
Page 6221 of 8516

I5ilfaZre?at ENGINEERS CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS 6-79-0013 Rev. 1
s'gar Ea rew INDIA LIMITED USED IN SOUR SERVICE IN
Hot-rolled;
Annealed;
Normalised;
Normalised and tempered;
Normalised, austenitised, quenched and tempered;
Austenitised, quenched and tempered.
3.4 All material after cold forming shall be thermally stress relieved to meet a hardness
requirement of 200 BHN maximum.
3.5 All products shall be free of low temperature transformation microstructures such as bainite
bands or islets of martensite.
4.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
All items are required to conform to the chemical composition of the respective specification
as listed below.
Plate: SA-516 Gr.60
Pipe: SA-106 Gr. B or SA-333 Gr.1 or 6
Forgings: SA-105 or SA-350 Gr.LF1 or LF2 or SA-266 Class 1
Fittings: SA-234 Gr. WCB or SA-420 Gr.WPL6
Castings: SA-216 Gr. WCA, WCB or WCC or SA-352 Gr. LCA, LCB or LCC
Tubing: SA-179 or SA-214
5.0 PRODUCT SPECIFIC REQUIREMNTS
5.1 Plates and rolled products
All rolled products such as plates and sheets and fittings / pipes made of rolled products shall
meet the following specific requirements.
5.1.1 The steel shall be made through a clean steel making route and shall have minimum of
inclusions.
5.1.2 The sulphur level shall be restricted to 0.003 wt%.
5.1.3 The steel shall be calcium treated for inclusion morphology control and the Ca/S ratio shall
be in the range of 2 to 3. When sulphur content is less than 0.0015%, then Ca/S ratio is not
applicable and calcium can be present up to 50 ppm.
5.1.4 For plates including and above 25mm thick, through-thickness tensile testing shall be carried
out in accordance with ASTM A770, with minimum reduction in area being 35% as
determined in accordance with ASTM A370, on one plate per heat.
5.1.5 No repair welding shall be permitted on plated.
Page 6222 of 8516

l ENGINEERS
tillaZleTeel CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS 6-79-0013 Rev. 1
sigzir tatReglite INDIA LIMITED USED IN SOUR SERVICE IN
IA Gent 01 Intha undeftakingi
5.1.6 When the fabrication of the components from the previously HIC tested plates involves no
heavy wall thickness reduction or material flow, such as bending, spinning or welding, no
fresh HIC test would be required on the final product. However, for fabrication of products
where heavy reduction of thickness and heavy flow of material is encountered while forming
such as like forging, extrusion or drawing, metallographic examination of the final product
shall be required to be carried out to ensure absence of elongated inclusions.
5.1.7 The plates shall be procured only from pre-qualified manufacturers.
5.2 Pre-qualification criteria for vendors with prior experience track record
Vendors/manufacturers who have proven track record of supplying materials for sour service
applications in petroleum refineries to any of the reputed operating companies/Engineering
Consultants or Process Licensors such as UOP/ IFP/ EXXON/ BP/ CHEVRON/ IOCL/ HPCL/
BPCL/ EIL will be considered as 'pre-qualified vendors/manufacturers', on production of the
relevant Purchase Orders and test certificates, certified by a witnessing third party inspection
agency such as DNV/Lloyds/BV/ABSTECH/TUV/SGS/CEIL for the conformance of the
materials to the respective materials specification of the mentioned operators / engineering
consultants. For pre-qualified vendors, Clause No.5.4 is not applicable.
5.3 Pre-qualification criteria for New Vendors with out track record
A vendor who has no track record of supplying sour service materials to any of the reputed
engineering consultants/operators, as mentioned in Clause 5.2 above, shall be considered as a
new vendor and shall be required to carry out HIC test as detailed out in Clause 5.4 for pre-
qualification by any one of the reputed third party inspection agencies like Lloyds, BV, CEIL,
DNV or TUV etc..
5.4 Hydrogen Induced Cracking (HIC) Test
The requirements for HIC test shall be as follows.
This test is required for vendor pre-qualification only.
This test shall be performed on a set of three specimens representing each production
batch/heat of rolled products in accordance with NACE TM 0284 with the following
acceptance criteria:
Crack Length Ratio (CLR) 10.0%

Crack Sensitivity Ratio (CSR) 1%
(iii) In case of failure of any one of the specimens, three more specimens from the same
product shall be retested and all the specimens shall meet the acceptance criteria. In case
of failure of any retest sample, the material shall be considered unacceptable.
6.0 POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT (PWHT) AND HARDNESS REQUIREMENT
All the weld joints, irrespective of thickness, shall be given a post weld heat treatment. The
temperature range for PWHT shall be 595-650°C. Other aspects such as rate of heating,
holding time etc. for PWHT shall be as per ASME Sec.VIII, Div.I /ANSI B31.3 requirements.
The hardness of the weldment after PWHT shall be 200 BHN maximum.
Page 6223 of 8516

DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor :
Customer :
Project :
EIL’s Job No. :
Purchase Order No./ :
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./ :

Name of the Work/ :

Equipment
Tag. No. :
Supplier’s/ Contractor’s :
Works Order No.
Requisition.
Signature : ………………………………. Signature : ……………………………….

Date : ………………………………. Date : ……………………………….
Name : …………………………….. Name : ……………………………..
Designation : ……………………………… Designation : ………………………………
Department : ……………………………… Department : ………………………………
Format No. 3-78-0004, Rev. 1/ 12.03.2015 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 6224 of 8516

$1=gZ- IE fa5le'S. INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0009 Rev. 3
c 1-1
fiteTur trtuur EW-9-r
FOR
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Cbt -Y-L-
3 09.09.2013 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK G DM
1 25.10.2005 GENERAL REVISION TSSR PRV SY VC
0 01.11.02 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION NKN SPS AKB GRR
Standards Committee Standards Bureau

Rev. Prepared Checked Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6225 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$1g-ez 051e
-g
,4-17R rieoxecrINCI5.0
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goof of India Undertaking)
FOR 6-81-0009 Rev. 3
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 6226 of 8516

k_71 ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
tiff INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0009 Rev. 3
1.0 SCOPE
This Inspection and test plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Heat exchanger
PO/PR/ Standards referred there in/ Job specifications /approved documents.
3.0 INSPECTION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
Hydro test ,heat treatment, NDT, hot Procedure
1.1 Documented procedures. 100% - H R
forming and other Procedures documents
1.2 WPS/ PQR /WPQ/Mock up Documented procedures. 100% - H
documents W-New
Plates, pipes, Forgings, Expansion
Bellows, Anodes, Fittings, Fasteners, As per PR/Purchase
2.1 100% Mill TC H H R
Gaskets, etc (As applicable) Specification
Tube sheets, Tubes & Non standard

Mill TC /
flanges As per PR/Purchase
2.2 100% TPIA'S H H R
(Supplier / sub supplier to arrange TPIA Specification
IRN
Certification)
Page 6227 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
• I el eage Z1,1
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Review of test certificates, markings
Material
visual & dimensional inspection,
3.1 Materials identification of pressure parts 100% clearance - H H
identity correlation & transfer of
record
identity
Material
Non Pressure Parts
3.2 Review of test certificates 100% test W R R
certificate
NDT
NDT of weld seam as applicable 100% Reports / H H R
RT Films
DPT on knuckle portion (both inside
100% Inspection
and out side) and weld overlay as H H R
report
applicable
HT chart review as applicable 100% HT Chart W W R
3.3 Inspection of formed components Inspection
Test coupon as applicable 100% W W W
report
100% Inspection
thickness, profile, ovality etc ) H H W
report
inspection
UT for lack of bond (after final heat
Inspection
treatment if any) formed from clad 100% H H R
report
plates as applicable
Chemical , mechanical properties & 100% Batch test
3.4 Welding consumable H H R
IGC as applicable certificates
Page 6228 of 8516

4oi ENGINEERS
51gar 25:leg
rwart ..3mcn.o
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Visual & dimensional inspection,
Insp
Inspection
weld edge, root gap, offset, 100% - W
Weld edge preparation & Set up of check list
3.5 alignment, cleanliness etc.
pressure Parts
Inspection
Insp
NDT of weld edges as applicable 100% - W -
check list
Visual / inter pass temperature /DPT Inspection
100 % - W -
3.6 Intermediate Inspection of Welding as applicable report
Heat treatment as applicable 100% HT chart H R
Hole diameter, drift, layout, groove
Inspection
3.7 Inspection of tube sheet depth, ligament, tube hole surface 100% H H H
report
finish etc
Inspection
Insp
3.8 Inspection of Baffles Hole diameter, drift, layout, etc 100% W W -
report
Skeleton of tube bundle before tube
3.9 Visual / Completeness of assembly 100% Insp Report - H -
insertion
Tube bundle assembly
3.10 Visual / Completeness of assembly 100% Insp Report - H H
3.11 Floating head assembly (As applicable) Visual / Dimension 100% Insp Report - H R
3.12 Pull through test of shell Passing of Gauge 100% Insp Report - H R
Tube to tube sheet joint % thining, Length of expansion, weld 100% Insp.
3.13 - H RW
( welding/expansion) visual and DP as applicable report
Pneumatic Test of RF Pads & Tube to Inspection
3.14 Leak Test 100% H H R
Tube sheet joints Report
Page 6229 of 8516

ligarootc,g w INDIA LIMITED
1.11VM el,M1.1151,PRISTI1 IA Govt 01 Ind. Undertaking)
FOR 6-81-0009 Rev. 3
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Visual and dimensional inspection Visual/ dimensions, completeness of
(internals & externals) including welds assembly and weld visual for Inspection
4.1 100% - H H
of shell, channel shell, shell cover shell reinforcement, undercuts, Surface report
etc. (before PWHT as applicable) defects, etc.
Each
Inspection
4.2 PMI as applicable Chemical check component - H R
report
and weld
NDT report
NDT as applicable Spot/100% - H R
/ RT films
as per
Production test coupon testing as Inspection
applicable report
drawing
4.3 Inspection of completed welds Each
component
Weld chemical for undiluted Inspection
for each - H R
chemistry as applicable report
welding
process.
As per spec. H RW
applicable report
Inspection
4.4 Hydrostatic test (As applicable) Leak check 100% report - H H
Inspection
4.5 Drying and nitrogen filling Visual/ gas pressure 100% - W -
report
Page 6230 of 8516

$1g-af faiteg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0009 Rev. 3
erterr, IA Gcnit of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
5.0 Painting
Visual inspection (after surface
preparation and final painting for Inspection
5.1 Final painting (As applicable) 100% - H
workmanship, uniformity) DFT report
check
IC /
Final stamping, review of inspection Verifying stamping details and
6.1 100% Inspection - H H
documents and issue of IC review of inspection documents
reports
Final
6.2 Final documents as per PR inspection & test records for 100% - H H
dossier
submission to customer
NOTES (As applicable► :
Page 6231 of 8516

pamasai sA 6P IIV — 11311160doo
0 nal{ Ld- 1000-00-8 'oN lewiod
Page 6232 of 8516

O
z
-2
o
m
c
c
<D
is)
o
m
3
3
c
òi
a
cn
0.
cn
m
CD
C.)
11)
0" "C$
7S-
0.
0.
`)
03 15;
o z
o
oo 0
C)
• C)
• =.
cn
z
O
1,3
(.0
z
NOIIVIN31A131dIAll
o
2:10J 43f1SSI
O
7o
O
co
co
O
O
Cl3f1SSI-32:1CINVCI3SIA32i
2:3
cn
cn
O
43fISSI-323 CINV CI3SIA32:1

1139MVHDX3ivan (131003HIV
MV14:1 ISIIal■IV 1■10IIDadSMI
Ha9NIVHDX3 .1.347311 (13100DIIIV
•
-
H r. H H !=,
u-
:suo9mAaacmy
s .JN
0°A3 Ld- I.000-00-9'0N ei.u.iod

uidno
4 5" E' 5-4 5 lE Z r" C7 C7 !!(-)(-)(--)
::., s=0 i'-[ - 4")1 FD, c9t 4•23'' oL. E'r1.Fc -, ro ,-< -t p..) CD CD
,.., 1 (1) '-< 1, ,...„
InspectionStandards Committee
CD G9 '-, CD 6 .,. ‘
E ,-- f'D C.) 2 '',(9,26t
cp v) ,-4-. cfq
,..., _,-t •,-<: .-■ '-ri o .-t r=,-;
-... ',;
...t ..-, • ii rri
.-.. AD
(j• AD 0 C. '''LTi 0 (I) ea. ,-.
H P• ''t o
= F-)'' c (1) ,..]
■-t CD
r
c.i)) P ..—' (-) <-D rp sw
,--
ouiT ° Z ,..,": .,,,,
~' :
■-,.., r, o ,..r., ,-,- c) ---; rrl
(-) ,-• .--.-t CD .. -. c,., c.. w CrA .-l-, ■-2 rr
l'
•
,, CD 0 ac
.-■ «
e•—■- 1■4,
'-:,. cn
• P,) H '—' . ,,,
CD '-'' ■-1 ,-1 .--. ,...t =
C) CD cn
s-0 -t _..3 eD CrA 42
• ,-,-
C/D -•<D cp
-• o f4 i-i $:\ D 5 . )
CD 5 .-.
CIA
CD
=' LA =
CreD t-
4) (i)
cnz '-' • P g° ( à)
g cr
'-1-1
a
+ ..-_,'
-‘ zt•
0
ez,
c/3 C'''
RD) 5.
c) -s-
cp
CD.,
<D
CD
'li AD
AD
CIA
.0 C. H '1_ C)9; 'H

'26' c„ ,,,,,
,<:::) \. 1 ■—■
c r:1 C) '"cJ C7
‘.1-, C /.) ,_ j
'.°
,-D'r,,D '- Y
'• (") —o —H
!-C H
,0. s-c!
CD
C)
e-t-
1139NIVH3X1IV311U31003HIV
< ■-3 ■H C.4 ''Gl '"I:J h:TJ 'T) '-1:, Z Z

cp (.1) a, ,_,,--'
(-■- CD Q) 0 " (1) (i) 0 cD
1--, 1---, ■-■ .-t "' " 4 cl: `-' 'F) "
<-) '- o
cl., ‘:2.• oi., Cl.,
C) C4 5'
W 21 AD
• „,9 -, 8 '"
p, (1) " Cr-gt CD C4 ci) (/)
0'ZiCD
(1) :ND CD .-1 .--. CD ',:y:
- . -,- ■-■ •
C/D (-)
'""t:i ,i;;) 1:: C ,,,
›--"). „.9- ~ • u) .-cs 4 (1)
CD .-1 !?2,
,-,-, -3 _, e) -t ,. „L ''' CD
r /0 rri ,--s ro r,
Q) CD —.
-t oir,;:,, ,CD CD .C) D• rz)-
cr ro. v) ...4 ..-t. •-ci <D C1) ,.,
(I) ■
-■- (4
Cl. (1) ,--, • li CD Ci) ' ~t Z
.0 CD (-) .4 (;),.!: ,,-; ,-,•
1:' ' CPD <-) . .-1 "1
(-D --:• `"-• .t C1. C) pp < o CD CD
cp ,--,- CD C4 CA
(,) CA CD 0 -, CfCi co
0
-cs 5 a5 . c4 =r • '-+
- • -n 2 cfc,
CD AD
-• <-) (-) -._. <-,
.•
o ;.-.,-
,
lw ,5 0 C)
tw o (-) s=.• c';,1
,--
-• ...• sw
O
cm - •
N
-- •
O
pa/U9Sal Sp.161111V --113 41160doo
Page 6233 of 8516

adODS
This Inspectionand Test Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof AIRCOOLED HEAT EXCHANGER

1
O
trJ
O
Scopeof Inspection
Quantumof Record
>
C/)
Stage/Activity Characteristics
P
rs: 0
Check Supplier EIL/TPIA
e»15*
■
..:
.:::
0
.-,
C)
Procedures
Hydrotest,heattreatment, NDTand Procedure

--
,---
c::,
c::,
other Procedures documents
5.
tfri
Procedure
Y-t-
(fC
D
-
o
o
i•-)
Z
WPS/ PQR /WPQ/Mockup Documented procedures.
i
documents
CD
0
IN)
Materials Inspection
Plates,pipes, forging, fittings,

Propertiesasper Purchase Mill test
..-.
l•-)
o
o
Gaskets,tubes, Fan,V-Belts,
7:
specification / Approved documents certificates
Bearingsetc.
Page 6234 of 8516

0.AedLd- I.000-00-8'0N ieuuod pamesai siy 6P IIV — 113P-160doo
£.AaN 0I00-18-9
2139NIVHDX3IV3H031003
Scopeof Inspection
Quantumof Record
.3"4:
Characteristics
--;
,..7
Cf
cf
r>
crafp
.cs zcr
Check
g
M
Supplier
1-0
.e»O'%
Motor / VFD(Asapplicable) 0 MTC&
Typetest/Routinetestof
--
k\ )
oo
iN.)
*(supplier/subsuppliertoarrangeTPIA Inspection
<,
Motor (Note-3)
O
‹Jà
Reviewoftestcertificates,markings
Material
Materials identification forplatesand visual&dimensional inspection,
--
.--,
(...)
clearance
pipes(pressureparts) identitycorrelation &transferof
record
identity
Material identification for forgings, Material
Reviewoftestcertificates,markings
0
.-
C
o
i•J
(...)
fittings,tubes, fasteners,gaskets clearance

identitycorrelation.
(pressureparts)and finmaterials record
Inspection
NonPressureParts(CFrames,Tube
report
'o
-->
Spacers,PlenumChambers,Support Reviewof testcertificates
L.J
(.,./
Structurals,etc.)
Inspection
report
7:
o
--
c>
(....)
:4=.
Pulleys,belts, fans&vibrationswitches Reviewoftestcertificates
Visual & dimensional inspection(
7zJ
0 Inspection
0
l...)
,--
ZJI
Tube finning pitch, height, length of un finned

report
portion,straightness,etc)
Page 6235 of 8516

0Aab L3- 1-000-00-8 'oN ieLwod pamesei s44 6P IIV— 113 10iihloo
c.naH 0100-I8-9
Jl
GO
0
ao
ro
Scopeof Inspection
Quantumof Record
Characteristics
ci)
Stage/Activity
.0- ,
P
%: vi
wi
Random Testreport
x
Pull outtest
o
Batch test
,--
Chemical &mechanical
b,
w
Weldingconsumable certificates
properties/IGC(asapplicable)
Visual & dimensional inspection, Inspection
Weld edgepreparation &setupofside
o
.--
weld edge,rootgap. offset, check List
,
plates includingtubesheet &pass
cleanlinessetc.
:-.1
w
partitionplates.
o
NDTReports
.--
NDTofweld edges(asapplicable)
Inspection
Visual inspection forreinforcement,
o
,--
Check List
undercuts,surface defectsetc.
Non destructivetest(asapplicable) R
2 z
.--i
c>
,---
(Reviewof
"
H
co
film)
'ff
o
PWHT(asapplicable) HTchart
sn,
5-
sz..
-s-,
w
oe
<-1-
5
ö
,.,
o
o
o
-cs
co
rD '-=z;
o-
›.-
>r7
Hardnesstest(asapplicable) Inspection
1:0
'-o
report
Each Inspection
PMI (AS/SSComponents) component report
andweld
Asapplicable Inspection
Productiontestcoupontesting
x
report
Page 6236 of 8516

0Aed L3- 1000-00-9'0N w w.iod patuasai sp.1 61-1 11V — 11341-16pAdoo
> z
o
>
11 £.nau 0100-18-9
oc
coco
Scopeof Inspection
Quantumof Record
›.
~.
...
cn
cn
Characteristics
`..7
ISQ#
'a
ez
P
CfQ
et>
C7 cr.
"4:1 CA
Z
ro.
CA
-...
Final inspectionofHeader boxesafter Inspection
0
......
C>
,:"'
w
Visual/ dimensions
1
PWHT report
Holedia, drift,surface finish,grove

Inspection
0
o
,--,
,--,
l.à..)
C>
,,"'
Tubesheet depth, ligamentcheckandpositional
1
report
accuracy.
,--,
CD
C>
‘,"'
Threading, finish, ligamentcheck and Inspection
,--
(....)
Plugsheet
■
positional accuracy report
5
7.:.
Tube bundle-C frameassly, beforetube Completenessofassembly,
.0
CD nli
-0 n
0 (")
5.
.--
(...)
(...)
0-Q
,t
$>>
1
insertion
Alignment,completenessof Inspection
L.,)
w
,--.
Finalassemblyaftertubes insertion Drawing
1
assembly report
%Thinning, lengthof expansion,
finish&visual, distortion&DPTof
--
(...)
Tubetotubesheetexpansion/ welding Random

welds. Inspection
,
reort
Z:::,
Final Inspection
Dimensions,completenessof Inspection
Visualand dimensional inspectionof
0
,--,
C>
assembly,nozzleelevation, report
.
tube bundles
orientationandprojection
Airtestoftubetotubesheetj oints Inspection
(0
iN.)
C>
Leakcheck
.
(afterrootwelding) Reort
Page 6237 of 8516

0•Aad Ld - 1000-00-9'0N ;etwod IIV— 1131450doo patuasai
j>Z
£"âll 0100-18-9
00
CD
CD
Scopeof Inspection
Quantumof Record
3:
z,4
>
-
CI)
Characteristics
,.-
P
n.
Crei
e%
r. cr
1.0 0
C/)
':,
.'t
Inspection
1
0
c>:'
CD
report
4
Leakcheck
W
Hydrostatictest
Inspection
0
CD
Visual inspection forworkmanship report
4=.
Surfacepreparation/cleaning
:4,
t
1
Verifyingstamping details Nameplate & Name Plate/
Final stampingofequipmentand rub off rub-off
v,
-r=.
1
markingetc r1;pin g
stam
Cleanliness/ dryness . Inspection
>
6
o,
Dryingof equipment
1
report
t-r
CD
CD
.tCl
1
N2pressure &nonreturnvalve. Full
Inspection
equipment
-(=,
Nitrogen filling
:—.)
1
1
report
Structural (Plenumchambers,motor
Trial assembly(asapplicable)
suspensionsystem, fanscreenand Inspection
Cl.
Dimensions,matchmarkingand
bo
-1=.
CRD
guard,structural supportassly.
etc.) report
t
completenessof assembly
Dimensional accuracy,clearancesetc. Inspection
1
Trial runatshop(ifspecified) 1of each type
report
O
ux
Painting
Pickling&passivation/painting/ hot Visual inspection forworkmanship /

Inspection
dipgalvanising(Headers & frames)etc. DFTcheck
1
report
Documentation
Page 6238 of 8516

0 .Aaid L3- 1,000-00-2 'oN }e WJOd pameseJ sp.1 6!J IIV— 113P1 60doo
c4
cr, ch
iN) —
P
t•J
H
cA
fl- 355"
o CfQ
fC,
CD
:(aiciumd dusV)SaION
0'Aad L3- 1,000-00-8 'oN 4eLwod

.C..
.'"P'.
CM
CDCM CD CD cn
•-i-)
• 0 Crg
C5'
documentsand issueof IC
• "
Final documentsasperPR
• s2,) f'D
CD
CM
CD CD
Finalstamping,reviewof inspection
."0 CD
cn 0 CIR
o
««-c
o CD
o CM
~t
zi) CM
n
z-,
CD
!
AD 9 co n
r4
...
CM co
• ~1:1 7.
co
`-C "t
eg
CD
inspection &testrecords for
Verification&compilationof
0
Verifyingstamping detailsand
l=31
✓
iz
FD
+
reviewof inspection documents
(/)
t:".1
fo ,-- ~-,
▪ CD
c> o
CD c> op
Check
Quantumof
• CD
CMr)
=
O
C7'■ . .)
Oo CDCMco
'!=1
Record
(.„
ro
Completeness
Final Dossier /
Certificate
1‘..) CD
O
fD
O
O
«-s . . lz
0Cf w
.4:
O
-,- -0
o ..1
• < O
O
t=f
ÒO
~-« O
(-) CM
O
X
• ro
Supplier
< (J0
'ri CM CD
O 00
Scopeof Inspection
Cr
CD
00
£*Aa210100-18-9
pa/uasai s4q 6I-1 IIV — 11341/ 60doo
Z Z
EIL/TPIA
Page 6239 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS FOR 6-81-0011 Rev. 3
INDIA LIMITED
erednedia (A Govt of India Undertaking)
PRESSURE VESSELS/ COLUMNS CARBON STEEL Page 1 of 7
copsil 1-ael ,‹ tuRT / c4;1(14-1-1

ftteur a Iteur

FOR
PRESSURE VESSELS/ COLUMNS CARBON STEEL
kVilIP—
t'
3 09.09.2013 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK RKS / SCG DMr—.
1 28.09.2007 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED PD RB MVKK VC
0 10.12.2002 ISSUED FOR IMLEMENTATION NKN SPS AKB GRR
Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6240 of 8516

5 ENGINEERS FOR 6-81-0011 Rev.3
ftar 7,1, m JVCD.,
eic,
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goer or Incite Undertaking)
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 6241 of 8516

k31
ENGINEERS
Ogar lat5reg w INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0011 Rev.3
tarnR elecnre,51,1,15.1, IA Govt 01 India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
This Inspection and test plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Pressure vessels/ Columns carbon steel
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
Hydro test ,heat treatment,

Procedure R
1.1 NDT, hot forming and other Documented procedures. 100% - H
documents
Procedures
documents W-New
Page 6242 of 8516

ENGINEERS
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Plates, pipes, Forgings,

Expansion Bellows, Fittings,
As per PR/Purchase H R
2.1 Fasteners, Gaskets, etc (As 100% Mill TC H
Specification
applicable)

markings Material
Materials identification for - H H
3.1 visual & dimensional inspection, 100% clearance
plates, pipes (pressure parts) record
identity correlation & transfer of
identity
3.2 forgings, fittings, fasteners, markings 100% clearance - H R
gaskets (pressure parts) Identity correlation. record
Non pressure parts (including Material test
3.3 Review of test certificates 100% W R R
internals, supports etc.) certificate
NDT Reports /
NDT of weld seam as applicable 100% H H R
Films
Inspection of formed
3.4 components (cold or hot NDT ( dished ends and tori cone)
formed) for cracks on inside & outside 100% Inspection
i
H H R
surfaces in knuckle zone and report
edges.
Page 6243 of 8516

ENGINEERS
ligar 254-
dg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0011 Rev.3
(11109 ert-MTE 051079M) IA Govt 01 India Undettaktngt
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Inspection
Test coupon as applicable 100% H H W
report
100% Inspection
thickness, profile, ovality etc ) H H H
report
inspection
100% Batch test
3.5 Welding consumable Chemical & mechanical properties W R R
certificates
Inspection
weld edge, root gap, offset, 100% - W
Weld edge preparation & set check list
3.6 alignment, cleanliness etc
up of pressure parts
NDT of weld edges as applicable
for cracks, laminations or 100% NDT Reports - W R
segregations
Intermediate inspection of Inspection
3.7 Visual/ inter pass temperature 100% - W -
welds report
Visual and dimensional Visual/ dimensions, completeness
inspection (internals & of assembly and weld visual for Inspection
4.1 100% - H H
externals) including welds reinforcement, undercuts, Surface report
(before PWHT as applicable) defects, etc.
Page 6244 of 8516

ENGINEERS
laf54- g INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0011 Rev.3
wren' eteoredt13traMi IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Each Inspection
4.2 PMI (AS/SS components) Chemical check W R
component report
Trial assembly of internals and

Dimensions, completeness of Inspection
4.4 column/vessel sections as 100% - H RW
assembly and alignment report
applicable
PWHT as applicable 100% HT chart W R

4.5
Inspection of completed welds
NDT Reports /
NDT as applicable 100% - W R
RT Films
Hardness check on all welds, 100% Inspection

4.6 Hardness - W RW
HAZ as applicable report
Production test coupon as As per Inspection

4.7 Production test coupon testing - H H
applicable spec/drg. report
5.0 Painting
Page 6245 of 8516

ENGINEERS
sfig-ar 0154-eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0011 Rev.3
tan7 knreee avattli (A Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
5.1 Final painting 100% - H
check
Final stamping, review of IC /

Verifying stamping details and
6.1 inspection documents and 100% Inspection - H H
review of inspection documents
issue of IC reports
Final
dossier
Legend: H- Hold (Do not proceed without approval), P-Perform, RW - Random Witness (As specified or 10% ( min.1 no. of each size and type of Bulk item)),
R-Review, W-Witness (Give due notice, work may proceed after scheduled date).
applicable.
Page 6246 of 8516

ENGINEERS
eiearredurdier (A Govt of India Undertaking)
PRESSURE VESSELS/ COLUMNS/REACTORS LOW ALLOY STEEL Page 1 of 8
*ad tfrRT / /
f3\-T-lud f4teur -crtuur
FOR
PRESSURE VESSELS / COLUMNS/REACTORS
LOW ALLOY STEEL
Ann
_ iv
2 15.07.2011 Revised and Re-Issued HP SCG AKC DM
28.09.2007
1 Revised and Re-Issued PD RB MVK VC
Issued For Implementation

0 19.07.2002 NKN SPS AKB SB
Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6247 of 8516

ENGINEERS
5figar faig,tes INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0012 Rev.3
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 6248 of 8516

tll ENGINEERS
gar tOPM, (A Govt of Ind+ Undertaking/
1.0 SCOPE
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Pressure vessels/ Columns/Reactors low alloy steel
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures

hot forming, and other Procedures Documents
documents W-New
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright El L — All rights reserved
Page 6249 of 8516

311 ENGINEERS
Weg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0012 Rev.3
ter, ere-rote i151,0,011 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Plates, pipes, forging & fittings Mill Test

2.1 100% R
As per PR / Purchase Specification Certificates and H H
(Supplier / sub supplier to TPI reports
arrange TPIA Certification)
Expansion Bellows, Fasteners,

As per PR/Purchase H H R
2.2 Gaskets, etc (As applicable) 100% Mill TC
Specification

Material
Materials identification for plates, visual & dimensional inspection, - H H
3.1 100% clearance
pipes (pressure parts) identity, correlation & transfer of
record
identity
Material identification for Material
Review of test certificates, markings - H R
3.2 forgings, fittings, fasteners, 100% clearance
Identity correlation.
gaskets (pressure parts) record

Page 6250 of 8516

ENGINEERS
fgar fd5teg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0012 Rev.3
/H IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
NDT report/
NDT of weld seam as applicable 100% RT Films H H R
NDT ( dished ends and tori cone) for

100% R
cracks on inside & outside surfaces NDT report H H
in knuckle zone and edges.
3.4 Inspection of formed components HT Chart W W R
HT chart review as applicable 100%
Inspection
Test coupon as applicable 100% H H W
report
100% Inspection
thickness, profile, ovality etc ) H H H
report
inspection
Batch test
3.5 Welding consumable Chemical & mechanical properties 100% W R R
certificates
Inspection
weld edge, root gap, offset, 100% - W R
3.6 Weld edge preparation & set up of alignment, cleanliness etc check list
pressure parts
NDT of weld edges as applicable for W R
100% NDT report -
cracks, laminations or segregations
Inspection
Visual/ inter pass temperature 100% - W R
Intermediate inspection report
3.7
of welds
Heat treatment R
100% HT chart - H
as applicable during welding
Page 6251 of 8516

401 ENGINEERS
• erecerv ) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Intermediate Stress Relieving / 100% HT Chart - H R
3.8 Heat treatment cycle
De-Hydrogen Treatment
Visual and dimensional inspection Visual/ dimensions, completeness of
(internals & externals) including assembly and weld visual for Inspection
4.1 100% - H H
welds (before PWHT as reinforcement, undercuts, surface report
applicable) defects, etc.
All
Inspection
4.2 PMI Chemical check component - W RW
report
and weld
Trial assembly of internals and Inspection

Dimensions, completeness of H H
4.4 column/vessel sections as 100% -
applicable
NDT Reports /
4.5 Inspection of completed welds NDT as applicable /100% - W R
Films
Production test coupon Testing as As per Inspection

- H H
applicable spec/drg. report
Page 6252 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogar idf54eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0012 Rev.3
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Hardness Checking of welds after 100% Inspection

4.6 Hardness - W RW
PWHT report
100% Hydro test H H

4.7 Hydrostatic test Leak check -
report
NDT of all weld surfaces( 100%

4.8 external and internal) after hydro Check for cracks NDT Reports - W R
test as applicable

4.9 Nitrogen Pressure 100% - W
applicable) report
5.0 Painting
workmanship, uniformity) , DFT report
check
Final stamping , review of IC /
Verifying stamping details and review H
6.1 inspection documents and issue of 100% Inspection - H
of inspection documents
IC reports
Final
dossier
Page 6253 of 8516

,s-dt-aelei ENGINEERS
FOR
1:g- x 29,-" _
dg INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0012 Rev.3
IA Govt of India Undett.kIng)
Page 6254 of 8516

ENGINEERS
0,1400..1) IA Govt of Indla Undertaking)
SS CLAD PRESSURE VESSELS/ COLUMNS/ REACTORS Page 1 of 7
1-1 1-40 URT/ cold4-1-1/

R\-r-qut f4-414Tur 3 trtaTor
FOR
SS CLAD PRESSURE VESSELS/ COLUMNS/ REACTORS
1 15.07.08 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED

NKR SSL SKP VC
0 19.07.02 ISSUED FORIMPLEMENTATION NKN SPS AKB GRR
Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6255 of 8516

ENGINEERS
li2154--dg
' INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0013 Rev.3
1.727i eircnie ,351,snal, (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Abbreviations:
CELL Certification Engineers International Limited MRT Mechanical Run Test

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 6256 of 8516

ENGINEERS
I a4W Fa 5w an IA Govt of India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of SS clad pressure vessels/ columns/ reactors
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedure

hot forming, and other Procedures Documents
documents W-New
2.0 Material Identification

Plates, pipes, forging &
fittings Mill test
As per PR / Purchase
2.1 (Supplier / sub supplier to 100% certificates and H H R
specification
arrange TPIA Certification) TPI reports
Page 6257 of 8516

ENGINEERS
ai fajtes INDIA LIMITED
L FOR 6-81-0013 Rev.3
en 07,51-2 c751,M.,
1M- IA Govt of India undettalong)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
As per PR/Purchase
2.2 Gaskets, etc (As applicable) 100% Mill TC H H R
Specification

Materials identification for markings, visual & dimensional Material
3.1 100% - H H
plates, pipes (pressure parts) inspection, identity, correlation & clearance record
Material identification for Review of test certificates,
Material
3.2 forgings, fittings, fasteners, markings 100% - H R
clearance record
gaskets (pressure parts) identification, correlation .
NDT Report/
NDT of Weld Seam as applicable 100% W W R
Films
DPT on knuckle & straight face
100% DPT report W W R
and weld deposit overlays
UT for lack of bond (after final
Inspection of formed components heat treatment if any) and area As per Purchase UT
3.4 W W R
(cold or hot formed) where attachments to be welded specification report
on clad surfaces
Inspection
Test Coupon as applicable 100% W W W
report
Page 6258 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS
$fgar lffiteg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0013 Rev.3
INr-
eR IA Goer of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Inspection
thickness, profile, roundness, 100% H H H
report
Chemical & mechanical Batch test
3.5 Welding consumable 100% W R R
properties certificates

Weld ed ge p re paration & Set u p Inspection
weld edge, root gap, offset, 100% - W -
3.6 of pressure Parts check list
alignment, cleanliness etc.
DPT of weld edges 100% DPT Report - W R

Inspection
Intermediate Inspection of Base Visual / inter pass temperature 100% - W -
3 .7 report
Metal Welding
Heat treatment as applicable 100% HT chart W R
Visual inspection for
Inspection
Intermediate Inspection of weld reinforcement, undercuts, Surface 100% - W -
3.8 report
overlay defects, etc.
DPT after each layer 100% DPT report - W R
Visual and dimensional inspection Visual/ dimensions, completeness
(internals & externals) including of assembly and weld visual for Inspection
4.1 100% - H H
welds (before PWHT as reinforcement, undercuts, Surface report
applicable) defects, etc.
All component Inspection
4.2 PMI Chemical check - W RW
and weld report
Page 6259 of 8516

ENGINEERS
051-1-eg
rraren etearre ■
131,7,71,
INDIA LIMITED
FOR 6-81-0013 Rev.3
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER

Dimensions, completeness of Inspection
4.4 column/vessel sections as 100 % - H H
applicable
NDT report/
Films
4.5 Inspection of completed welds Production test coupon testing as Inspection
100% - H H
applicable report
Weld chemical for undiluted Inspection check
100% - W R
chemistry list
Hardness check of welds after 100% Inspection
4.6 Hardness as applicable - W RW
PWHT (As applicable) report
Inspection
4.7 Hydrostatic test Leak check 100% - H H
report
Inspection
4.8 NDT after hydro test as applicable NDT of welds as applicable 100% - W R
report
Pickling/ passivation , drying of Inspection
4.9 Visual inspection for cleanliness 100% - W R
equipment as applicable report
Inspection
4.10 Ferroxyl test as applicable Fe pick up check 100% - W R
report
4.11 Nitrogen Pressure 100% - W -
applicable) report
5.0 Painting
Page 6260 of 8516

ei ENGINEERS
fg-af taigrdg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0013 Rev.3
1.72 ere., Z751,MTSI, IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SL QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
check
Final stamping, review of IC /
Verifying stamping details and
6.1 inspection documents and issue 100% Inspection - H H
review of inspection documents
of IC reports
Final
dossier
Page 6261 of 8516

ENGINEERS
ofroxe , (A Govt of India Undeflaking,
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE VESSELS / COLUMNS Page 1 of 7
,t-le),ti \Lao tiTR:r coio44ti

fttuur a trtaTur

FOR
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE VESSELS / COLUMNS
3 09.09-2013 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK KS DM
1 15.07.08 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED

NKR SSL SKP VC
Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright El L — All rights reserved
Page 6262 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51?-ar laf5i-eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0014 Rev 3
7 eic,
1.17, Pre JC.5.1 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 6263 of 8516

ENGINEERS
2154-es INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0014 Rev 3
10 Govt Al India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Pressure vessels/ Columns stainless steel
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
SL NO. STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS RECORD SUB
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
Procedure
Documents
Procedures
documents W-New
2.0 Materials Inspection

Plates, pipes, forging,
fittings , etc Mill test
2.1 (Supplier / sub supplier to As per PR / Purchase specification 100% certificates and H H R
arrange TPIA Certification) TPI reports

As per PR/Purchase
2.2 Gaskets, etc (As applicable) 100% Mill TC H H R
Specification
Page 6264 of 8516

k̀ilif-aziel ENGINEERS
Ogzir taijteg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0014 Rev 3
INRR armor Jr21.11 IA Govt A India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Materials identification for visual & dimensional inspection, Material
3.1 100% - H H
plates, pipes (pressure parts) identity correlation & transfer of clearance record
identity
Material identification for
Review of test certificates, markings Material
3.2 forgings, fittings, fasteners, 100% H R
identity correlation . clearance record
gaskets (pressure parts)
NDT report/RT
NDT of weld seam as applicable 100% W W R
films
DPT (dished ends and tori cone) for
100% Inspection
cracks on inside & outside surfaces in W W R
report
knuckle zone and edges.
Solution Annealing as applicable 100% HT chart W W R
Inspection of formed components As per
3.4 Hardness check as applicable Inspection report W W R
(Cold or hot formed) requirement
Test coupon Tensile, IGC / Micro

100% Inspection report W W W
etching as applicable
Visual & dimensional (min. thickness, Inspection

100% H H H
profile, ovality etc ) inspection report
Page 6265 of 8516

ENGINEERS
$fgaI fa5t&G
E ~wINDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0014 Rev 3
1.17n ,107-+Yer ‘7,1,70,./ IA 000 01 India Undenakindi
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Chemical & mechanical properties 100% Batch test
3.5 Welding consumable W R R
including IGC certificates
Visual & dimensional inspection, weld
Inspection
Insp
edge, root gap, offset, alignment, 100% W R
check list
3.6 Weld edge preparation & set up cleanliness etc
of pressure parts
DPT of weld edges as applicable for Inspection
100% - W R
cracks, laminations or segregations check list
3.7 Intermediate Inspection of Welds Visual/ DPT for weld root 100% Inspection report W R
Visual/ dimensions, completeness of

Visual and dimensional
assembly and weld visual for Inspection
4.1 inspection (internals & externals) 100% - H H
reinforcement, undercuts, surface report
rt
including welds
defects, etc.
Each
Inspection
4.2 PMI Chemical check component - W RW
report
and weld

Dimensions, completeness of assembly Inspection
4.4 column/vessel sections as 100% - H H
and alignment report
applicable
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — AII rights reserved
Page 6266 of 8516

15111a_At.-1 ENGINEERS
$1=g-ari&Wg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0014 Rev 3
1.7F, c`feage 051.3rglr. (A Govl ai Indo Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Hardness test as applicable 100% Inspection report - W R

4.5
Inspection of completed welds
Production test coupon testing including
100% Inspection report - H H
IGC and micro etching as applicable
NDT report/RT
films
4.6 Water Quality Check Chloride Content 100% Inspection report - H R

Pickling/ passivation (inside and
4.8 outside surface) , drying of Visual inspection for cleanliness 100% Inspection report - W R
equipment
Drying and Nitrogen Filling (as
4.9 Nitrogen Pressure 100% Inspection report - W -
applicable)
5.0 Painting

Final painting for carbon steel
5.1 preparation and final painting for 100% Inspection report - H -
portion (As applicable)
workmanship, uniformity) DFT check
Page 6267 of 8516

k31 _.1 ENGINEERS
fg-af 1a15rdg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0014 Rev 3
(A Govf of India Undeflok ,og)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Final stamping, review of Name plate/ rub-

Verifying stamping details and review
6.1 inspection documents and issue 100% off and - H H
of inspection documents
of IC inspection reports
Verification & compilation of inspection
.C.
6.2 Final documents as per PR & test records for submission to 100% - H H
doQssier
customer
Legend: H- Hold (Do not proceed without approval), P-Perform, RW - Random Witness (As specified or 10% ( min.1 no. of each size and type of Bulk item)), R-Review,
W-Witness (Give due notice, work may proceed after scheduled date).

1. This document describes the generic test requirements. Any additional test or Inspection scope if specified in contract documents shall also be applicable.( unless otherwise
agreed upon)
Page 6268 of 8516

fi INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0017
,nrcnre IA Govt of India Undenaking)
Rev. 2
UN-ENGINEERED TRAY AND TOWER INTERNALS
Page 1 of 6
t ticil
fttaTo-r trtutTr
FOR
UN-ENGINEERED TRAYS AND TOWER INTERNALS
iv•,
-.
1 02.01.08 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED AM RB MVKK VC
Standards Committee Standards Bureau

Rev. Prepared Checked Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by

Page 6269 of 8516

■
31 el ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
0151&
-g INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0017
cm
WWI elet ,705.1 IA Govt of India Undettalongt FOR Rev. 2
UN-ENGINEERED TRAY AND TOWER INTERNALS Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Neeraj Mathur Mr. T Kamalakannan Mr. Deepak Gupta (Project)
Mr. Mayank Jain
Page 6270 of 8516

t-11 ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
/fgar laft l
eg INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0017
corave Otztt7rti IA Govt of lode Undertaking) FOR Rev. 2
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Un-Engineers Trays and Tower Internals.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
S. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
1.0 Procedures
Leak Test , NDT , WPS/ PQR R (existing)

Inspection
1.1 and other Procedures(as Documented Procedures 100% - H W (for new
Report
applicable) WPS/PQR)
2.0 Materials Inspection
Chemical Analysis
Mechanical Properties,
Plates/Sheets/Coils, Pipes, Fittings
Condition, Finish, Bend
Fasteners With Lock Nuts, Gaskets, Mill Test
2.1 Test, Hardness Check, 100% W H R
Welding Consumable ,etc. Certificates
rt
Heat Treatment, IGC
Inspection
Page 6271 of 8516

IA Govt of India Undertaking) FOR Rev. 2
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
S. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
3.0 IN PROCESS
Visual {Finish -Smooth,

Slitting, Shearing Punching, Bending
True, Clean, Free From Inspection
3.1 (Deck Plates, Down Comers, Weir 100% - H -
Burs) & Dimensional Report
Plates, etc.)
Accuracy
Visual(Finish-Smooth,
True, Clean, Free From Inspection
3.2 Bubble Caps, Valves, ' LI Clamps 100% - H -
Burs) & Dimensional Report
Accuracy
Heat Treatment Of Bubble Caps (As

3.3 100% HT Chart - W R
applicable) As per specification
Dimensions, Completeness
Inspection Of One Type Of Inspection
3.4 Of Assembly. Visual 100% - H RW
Component Of Each Type Report
Inspection Of Welds.
Visual Inspection For

Inspection
Reinforcement, Undercuts, 100% - W RW
Check List
3.5 Inspection Of Completed Welds Surface Defects Etc.
Inspection
DPT Of Welds 100% - W R
Check List
Page 6272 of 8516

■
31 ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
riemre IA Govt of India Undertaking) FOR Rev. 2
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
S. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER
Mock Assembly Of Each Type Of

Dimensions, Completeness One
Trays, Down Comers, Chimney Trays, Inspection
4.1 Of Assembly. Visual Assembly/Each - H H
rt
Seal Pans, Trial Assembly Of Support Report
Inspection Of Welds, etc. Type Of Tray
Beams etc.
As Per EIL Inspection

4.2 PMI ( As applicable ) Chemical Check - W RW
Spec. Report
Leak Test for Seal Pan, Chimney And

Check For Leakage If Any Inspection
4.3 Bubble Cap Trays, Distributors, etc. 100% - H H
Report
Visual Inspection & Inspection

4.4 Pickling & Passivation (As applicable) 100% - W R
Surface Finish. Report
Marking / Etching On Each

4.5 Final Marking Individual 100% Report - W R
Tray/Component
Inspection
4.6 Packing Visual Inspection 100% - W -
Report
Page 6273 of 8516

Ilf~lzi ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN
tafgrag INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0017
11008 eleclne 34‘3,4 IA Govt of India Undedaking) FOR Rev. 2
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
S. QUANTUM
SUPPLIER

Review of Stage
Documentation & Inspection Manufacturer
5.1 Inspection Reports / Test 100% - H H
Certificate(IC) TC & IC
Reports & Issue of IC
Compilation of Final data
Inspection reports folder
5.2 Final Document submission 100% - H H
,drawings, etc as per /Completeness
VDR / PR certificate
( unless otherwise agreed upon)
Page 6274 of 8516

k3tei ENGINEERS
lgar faPeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0113 Rev.3
2,,Vre,V111 10 Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
SPRAY NOZZLES Page 1 of 4
T4 9-I-
A-RI-
fituur trtuur I
FOR
SPRAY NOZZLES
2 10.04.12 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK SCG AKC DM
0 12.12.02 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION NKN AKB GRR
Convener
Chairman
Rev. Prepared Checked Standards Committee
Date Purpose Standards Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6275 of 8516

i:7-1
1 el ENGINEERS
f=g-ar idf54ft INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0113 Rev.3
I 4-17ff eT,V17 4,1 Jr.r9n1) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain

Page 6276 of 8516

tl~iei ENGINEERS
laWds INDIA LIMITED
FOR 6-81-0113 Rev.3
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Spray Nozzles
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
1.0 PROCEDURES
NDT, Performance Test and other Procedure

1.1 Documented Procedures 100% - H R
procedures Documents
2.0 MATERIAL INSPECTION

Chemical Analysis & Physical
Mill Test
2.1 Incoming material Properties, IGC, Hardness etc. 100% - H R
Certificates
(as applicable)
3.0 IN PROCESS INSPECTION
Review of Test Certificates,

Markings, Visual and Material
3.1 Material identification Dimensional inspection, identity 100% Clearance - H -
co-relation & Transfer of Record
identification marks
Page 6277 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ogzx INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-81-0113 Rev.3
INT, F-2.17 JcIUM IA Govt Ot India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
Visual / Dimensional & Flange
Inspection
3.2 Manufacturing/Machining of Spray Nozzle finish check for Shape of flute, 100% - H -
report
Orifice opening, Length, etc.
4.0 FINAL INSPECTION
Dimensions, Surface defects, Inspection

4.1 Visual & Dimensional Inspection 100% - H RW
End connection etc. Report
Flow, Spray angle, Spray Inspection
4.2 Performance test of Spray Nozzle pattern 100% report / Test - H RW
(As per spec/Drawings) results
5.0 DOCUMENTATION & IC
Review of Stage Inspection /
Manufacturer
5.1 Documentation & Inspection Certificate(IC) Test Reports, Statutory approval 100% - H H
TC & IC
as applicable & Issue of IC


Page 6278 of 8516

■1-1faelei ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR
sfigar idfdrdg
17-77,
INDIA LIMITED
1 ere.77 0,10.51.11 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
6-81-0061 Rev. 3
EJECTORS Page 1 of 6
D?)
fttiur a 0497

FOR
EJECTORS
>4 .
3 09.09.13 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK RKS CG DM
2 10.04.12 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK SCG AKC DM
0 12.12.02 ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION KSR NKN AKB grr
Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6279 of 8516

‘31 Q.Iel ENGINEERS
fgz-,Tr 0154-eG INDIA LIMITED INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR 6-81-0061 Rev.3
1.17V, 17-1 J.7011.1, IA Govt of India Undedaking)
Abbreviations:

Members:

Mr. Mayank Jain
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev.O

Page 6280 of 8516

ENGINEERS INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR
INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0061 Rev.3
IA Govt 01 Indio Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE:
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Ejectors.
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
1.0 PROCEDURES
Hydro-test, Heat Treatment, NDT and other Procedure

1.1 Documented Procedures 100% - H R
procedures Documents
documents W-New
2.0 MATERIAL INSPECTION
Plates, Pipes, Tubes, Forgings, Fittings, As per PR/Purchase Mill Test

2.1 100% H H R
Fasteners, Gaskets, etc. Specification Certificates
Chemical and Mechanical Batch

2.2 Welding Consumables 100% H R R
Properties / IGC (as applicable) Certificates

Page 6281 of 8516

,s-d- iaitsi 13
fg-,zir 0151-
egw INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0061 Rev.3
(A God of India Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
Review of Test Certificates,
Markings, Visual and
Material identification for Pressure Parts Inspection
3.1 Dimensional inspection, identity 100% - H H
(Plates, Pipes) report
repo
co-relation & Transfer of
identification marks
Material identification for Pressure Parts Review of Test Certificates, Inspection
3.2 100% - H R
(Forgings, Fittings, Fasteners, Gaskets, etc.) Markings, identity co-relation report
Non Pressure Parts Material Test
3.3 Review of Test Certificates 100% - W R
(Supports, Internals, etc.) Certificates
NDT of weld seam, as NDT Report
100% - H R
applicable /RT Film
NDT On knuckle portion after
100% NDT Report - H R
forming - inside & outside
HT Graph &
HT as applicable 100% - H R
3.4 Inspection of Formed Components record
Test coupon, if applicable 100% Test Report - H W
Inspection (Min. Thickness, 100% Test Report - H W
profile, ovality etc.)
Visual & dimensional, Weld
Inspection
edge, root gap, offset, 100% - W R
Report
3.5 Weld Edge & Set up of pressure parts alignment, cleanliness etc.
NDT
NDT 100% - W R
Report

Page 6282 of 8516

INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0061 Rev.3
(A Govt of Indio Undertaking)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
NO OF CHECK REPORT SUPPLIER EIL/TP IA
SUPPLIER
NDT /
Visual, Interpass temperature,
100 % Inspection - W R
NDT as applicable
3.6 Intermediate Inspection of Welds Report
HT Graph &
Heat Treatment as applicable 100% - W R
record
Inspection
reinforcement, undercuts, 100% - W R
Report
3.7 Inspection of finished Welds surface defects, etc.
Non Destructive Testing (as NDT Report /
100% - W R
applicable) RT Films
Visual and dimension check before PWHT Dimensions, Surface defects, Inspection
3.8 100% - H R
(as applicable) Completeness of equipment. report
HT Graph &
3.9 PWHT (as applicable) Temperature & time 100% - H R
record
Inspection
3.10 Pneumatic Test of RF Pads Leak Test 100% - H R
Report
Each
Inspection
3.11 PMI (as applicable) PMI component & H W R
Report
weld
Dimensions, Surface defects,
Visual & Dimensional Inspection after Inspection
4.1 Completeness of equipment, 100% - H H
PWHT Report
Hardness etc.
Inspection
4.2 Hydrostatic Test Leak Check 100% - H H
Report

Page 6283 of 8516

g-ar 01511-eg
riktreM rierore de Join,
INDIA LIMITED
6-81-0061 Rev.3
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
5.0 Painting
preparation and final painting Inspection
for workmanship, uniformity) report
DFT check
Final stamping, review of inspection Verifying stamping details and IC / Inspection

6.1 100% - H H
documents and issue of IC review of inspection documents reports

Final
dossier


Page 6284 of 8516

pamesaispA 6P IIV-1131y 61ijCdoO 0•Aad Ld- 1.000-00-9'0N lew.iod
Page 6285 of 8516

Aq pancuddy
P
z
CD
3
's7)
cn
o.
o.
3
<D
0.) W
6' o
<n 3
3 P,
• 3
C)
O
NJ
rsi
rsi
O
cn
cn
cn
NOIIVIN3IN31d1All dadcmnsst
z
O
O
cn
cn
Cl3f1SSI-3dCINV CI3SIA3d
0
O
O
O
cn
C131-1SSI-32!CINVCI3SIA3d
G)
sllaismaa HSMAI allas.
MVIEd CINV1\louDadsm
C
rn
£'Aall0900-18-9
XIVId
• • •
•
•0
• ▪ •
• ••
r1-1 t=inn
H ) (") z rri
HH ■-3
H
:suogulnammy
tw co
0•A8d L3- 1000-00-9 'oN }elwod

uldno S
P,D ap. •Cl]
77' 5.
,-, po Cr4
•-• '-ri r r i ci
p,) Fi;cmE' 'E E 'ci- ("D a_ AD CD CD
,~:
•rt , ,..,,
• ,-1 (..7 CrD r)t 4:1 .., t., Fs: c, 4. cD
CD
v, re) ^-t
-t r) 5 - '-rl
• s::1. ,-zi c) cl) ~, ■-•-■ .--, A)
__,
H r) 5" l
c ' ,4
,.., (/) n, '; .1= rA ,;:5 •
rt) L'' ,•-•, AD `"- 0
V) P)
t-t-
CD `6+ $:,) 0
l 1. 0 •
,.7, ro (-) 01. • ''
C -..,
) . A) E
(-) .a- Z ,- CD,. 0 C2 .-, rrl
44 (-) CD — (1) '"« D' r°
‹'"
■
--3 X -. -t r) co .- ") u)
'D.,, AD ■-D 9, c'"' ;z t),) ,-, E •
'-o '-1 F' D' OEQ ti)
(.. ,....] ,,,, CD
-t
-.- • CD st.)T) -) CD , .-
5".
• (' CD 0 5
-. " 4) trc?
t.4 0•4 c4)
'-'
r-, CD
--' ;'
r-tp 5- Cr
o tv CD
-' 0, r''''
• ~t 0 ,-' -
AD AD CD 0
0
CD
C/D
CD §-
AD
cD
Cl.
. .
d x
CD .- •
CD 5
• --Gic,
n (;-' < ,-.3 H cn '-<:1 ■-d '-c/ '-o `-0 Z Z 4
• .---d
-,5' t--1 ,'-25, n ci) H
(.-.) .4:icrrIc:) c.4 ,clp-c, ,._3 ,_,z,
Ac) „, x
PO QD R c) o -,
-ci H
,-iz
cp -
r)
.....,
< •H tH CA rC 'C '"C '"C '-(:1 Z Z 4

-"' '1 CD ci) cp
C:3.. 0., Q.., AD 0, ,4 cL. '• -
'(- D t <)
(-) .-. CSDo '''. FD 2- (CT'D CT o -,:i
-, .CDo V)
,-,:,::,D eD "4: C/D c.n CD
ci) Cf4 eD z\D CD C/D .-t
CD CD CID
'-'•-p.• t-t-
-L:rj ,.., "• (1) ›-• -t -c--
(:) tS7
.-,., (..) ,,, ri)4 2 ,c) . r,i ›, . -, CD (9.
., ci) _, ;
co E tt) co
-'
5 ' `" to 15-:
co
..ro r.-..-o i: 5.,•.•-:•: 8-; .
"0 Grct CD
()0 ~' ci)• al E, --. -:s.
,.. 2 ...•c, -• H ■-3
•0 CD
:=1.
,-■
•-•
- -t ‘-, ro CD
(-)
ro C.4 CD 0 ■-t- CD (/)
■••ciD
,--1,
'10 >2>
Ci)
OEQ CD
Er 5. cA
C ri) (., >. ..-. ;)) Z '5'
cD Cr4
r). cpz 0 'zh• . 4-t AD
- • r)
cD cD ,.-
On =,D ,-n r)
<-) t"-. r) $),) •5- 0
-1 0
t),) (-5 ‘-< r) <z
-. --- cnz"
O• • P.)
crct •Ri•
tw
—
o
£'âll0900-18-9
pamasaJ s;q 61.1 IIV— 11344 60doo
Page 6286 of 8516

£'âH0900-18-9
:3dODS
ThisInspectionand TestPlancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof Wire Mesh Demisters.
PO/PR/Standardsreferredthere in/Job specifications /Approved documents.

amv NOLLDadSMI simaixamaöax
Ck)
Record Scopeof Inspection
.
,
w)
C/)
Quantumof
....•
-
.......
.....•
15-
'...7
—
.-t.
.—2•
g
0
..,z,
c
CP:
ro
e%
Check Sub Supplier Supplier EIL/TPIA

~
Z:::>
Procedures
DocumentedProcedures
NDTProcedure(as Procedure
z
.-.
C
—
-■
■
applicable) documents
WeldingProcedures
WPS,PQR,WPQ(as WPS/PQR/ W-New,
z
—
.--,
i•-)
Qualification
applicable) WPQRecords R- Existing
Materials inspection
0
IN
Wires,Plates, fasteners Chemical,Physical,HT

withlock nuts,washers, andotherproperties(as Mill test
z
z
--,
t‘..)
clamps,gaskets, foilsetc. applicable) certificates
Page 6287 of 8516

;811.1103 0'nal{ L3- 1000-00-8 'oN pamesei spl 6P IIV— 1131-160c100
£.nam 0900-18-9
0
rn
Cro
a.
Scopeof Inspection
f!I
.n
>
Quantumof
~.•
ci)
Characteristics
cA
'.--
...,-
r>
5:'
frCI
»...
O
Inprocessinspection
c.,. )
Materials identification
Reviewof testcertificates
(Wires,plates, fasteners
markings. visual & Material
with locknuts,washers,
c>
c>
_.
,--
clearance
t.,)
dimensional inspection
.
clamps,gaskets, foilsetc.
identification,correlation record
includingsupport
etc.
members)
reinforcement,undercuts,
o
o
,-,
c>
i..)
NDT Report
1,-)
Inspectionof Welds
.
surface defectsetc.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
O
Final inspection
Trialassemblyof
IndividualDemisteralong
Dimensions,Ovality,
withgridandsupport Inspection
--
Straightness,Camberand 100%
.
beams inamanner Report
completenessof assembly.
comparablewith actual
installation.
Visual
Dimensions
FinalInspection Inspection
7:1
o
c>
c>
i.)
Flange finish
Report
MatchMarking
Bulk density
Page 6288 of 8516

0'Aa2:1 L3- 6 000-00-2'oN ;eituod pamasai sly 6P IIV— 1134146pAdoo
MIVUNIVIS '01■1NOLLV313133dS
£"âH 0900-18-9
Record Scopeof Inspection

Characteristics Quantumof
.1.•
5"
cn
ro
r>
(fel
Asper
PMI(For AS/SS Inspection
Chemical check purchase
4.
L.)
i
components) report
siecification
O
Picklingandpassivation
f,,
Pickling&Passivation( Inspection
o
c>
Visual inspection
,--
,-,,,
i
asapplicable) report
z:,
Documentation
O'N
Reviewof inspection
Compilationofstage
z
(-)
4
o
H
c>
.--,
documents & Issueof
..-
C'■
inspectionreports
MTC
Inspection
z
z
,.)
.-.
c>
Issueof IC(asapplicable) InspectionCertificate
cr,
iN.)
Certificate
0.
0:,
'zrs
CD e,
0
■—•
c5
CD
• et,
CD
CD
0
CD
(I)
• 0
(/)
-cs
CD
o
z
cn (-)
o
CD
vc
=
el>
0.
o
‘-z
(1)
CD
7,3
O
co
Cn
CD
CD
•
•
:(ameoudde sv ) S3IO N
Page 6289 of 8516

0A9 Ld - 6000-00-9'oN 4 eLwod pamesei sw 6P IIV— 113A BOdoo
Page 6290 of 8516
STANDARD S PECIFI CATIONNo.
I NSP ECTI ONANDTESTP LANFO R

EJ ECTORPACKAGE
ISSU EDFORIMPLEM ENTATIO N
Approvedby
Copyrig htEIL — Al l rig hts reserved

Form atNo. 8-00-000 1-F7Rev. 0
▪
Copy rig ht EIL — All rig hts reserved
6-81-0 155 Rev. 0
0
0
CNA
C)
0-
M
0
•,-
I
•- ti) =
M
til) cd •=- 0
al) ,- M • ^,
•- ;-• 0
, = c.) 0 tal
i•-• al >1
CA 0 0 0
•- Cu
j u •-• c-)
cal Vg
+-• M c.) • •-•
-' 8 as a)
7:3 EH-, u al) M 4-• t= a2
a4
5-,..•
.-..• E 04
cn = •
i tg . 6
:9 sc5.
9
r
>,9,3 8 .8'-' `-'
a) 0 cz (..) ••-, E ... ' ..1 el) =
."▪ .0
c7 •r4.1.1:=,
a.) U .-• cil os ,nn
s-, 0 „, la. 1-1 •,z,- a) -ci t
•,- V) a) CI. ct M .$-•-- • = E-1 rrl; :4,.• C4 A cn C4 8 0
-,
... Ya M u
c%-ylp Cr a) .... a) cal = •• a.)
U 0 LQ ry AR' • >-, -. c..) al) H 0 t
M > s•- o C
$.. ._ —
a) r=4 ,•• 0. c4
-= 4- .—
,40 -' tz: .....c.) 4740..;-■ cu
p.,
CA -... .< (,;,) 5 , cn
a)
a)
1-■ ct a) t cal ,.., =
cl) l-. -0 tu d1) En
a'cn
a) (:) .73 M 0 a) ^0 c > a. 0 0 ,-, = I-
a, a) ,..= a) ..c ..... 00 t14 • - U -p
0 ,.= ul o •
. a) cd 70 -5 -o
a)
= .,.. cn (..) $. c.) • . 0
-4—. C/) • .-.1
V . •=4 E , ,t .., =a)• 7,)4 T,
INSPECTIONAND TEST PLAN FOR
0 a) ,..=
Z Z a a a 4r, Z
M a)
e.,e.gc2F24giz:›33
EJECTORPACKAGE
H
0 C-)
Hc/) (Aa4 u P4uDCY
<CDWf24a0E-4 e]CL00E—H
Z a. a. a a a. a. U E-1
•4-,
•
=
al
,•••• ==
crs
ti) 5 =E m A
... a.)
to 73
Q
co cz: Es •,-, ...
o ...•
,.., m >E
;... 0., ;-41.) .,--0 "(.1 u)
0 a) — v) ..- a..)
o oz:
os H E-4 !.., a) cz ,
-cs o= (...) t rZ4 L....4
u
o H 2 Ri 9=4 ,.. (:).-4
U C..)tu C1) H
r ■ =
Heat Treatment
$.4
,) 'a ." -■ r:4
• 1 mt ic0
I■
-L3 °U = at, cri a)
ril
A.Z1 = = 4 ,.....,
Fa 7Z1. ._,0
=
0 Dab
1:4 (i) ) 0 CI ._CU • ,--, ezt
O e...) cn z 40.
cis4
-
4.• u, -.4 cd as 1.) = --
..= 1
Inspection Standards Comm
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7 Rev. O

Mr. R.K
Abbreviations:
H H
P4
,_
•- ""
5 H U H
t a., U
W W 4. L2-101.p4E-10--q L_,., E"'"4 (..)c.,
U U C.) a) C. L4 4-4 Z '
UY
Page 6291 of 8516
Page 6292 of 8516
STANDARDSPECIFI CATION No.

INSPECTION ANDTEST PLAN FOR 6-81-0155Rev. 0
EJECTORPACKAG E
0_
0
as
a)
This Inspection and Test Plan covers the minimum testing requirements of Ejector Packages.
z
z
E-1
PO/ PR/ Stan dards referre d therein/ Job spec ifications/Approveddocuments.
0
SCOPEOF INSPECTION
v) 4
I.: 0
STAGE/ ACTIVITY QUANTUM FORMATOF

CHARACTERISTICS SUB
OFCHECK REPORT SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
SUPPLIER
O' T
Procedures
Pressure test, Pneumatic Test, Heat
I.I
Treatment, NDT and other procedures Documented Procedures
%00 I Procedure
p4
I
(As applicable) Documents
Weld Plan / WPS/ PQR / WPQ/
Mock up procedures (Tube to Tube sheet Documented Procedures
%00I Procedure R/W *
I
Joint) (As app licable) Documents ( *W-New)
O' Z
Material Procurement
As per PR/ Mill /

I' Z
Plates, Pipes, Tubes, Fittings, Forgings
%00 I H
Manufacturer TC/
a4
Purchase Spec ification (Note - 1)
TPIA IC
Z. Z
Valves, Fasteners, Gaskets, etc. As per PR/ %00I Manufacturer Test H
C4
Purchase Specification Certificates (Note - 1)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. O Copyrig ht EIL — All rig hts reserved
Page 6293 of 8516
9;
z<:!.
INSPECTIONAND TESTPLANFO R
•-•
6-81-0155 Rev. 0
EJECTORPACKAGE
0-
0
rn
(1.)
0
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
(I)
STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS QUANTUM FORMAT OF

4
OF CHECK REPORT SUB

SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
SUPPLIER
£" Z
Welding Consumables Chemical and Mechanical %001
Batch Certificates
P4
r:4
Properties / IGC (as applicable)
17 . Z
Junction Boxes Visual, Dimensional, MTC, %00 I Manufacturer TC/
a4
Statutory Certification Certificates (Note — 1)
Visual, Dimensional, Pressure
S 'Z
Control Valves Test, Material Comp liance,
% 00I Manufacturer TC/
a4
Statutory Certification Certificates (Note - 1)
Visual & Dimensional,
Gauges, Transm itters etc. Material Compliance, %00 I Manufacturer TC/
c-v
a4
.
Calibration, Statutory Certificates (Note - 1)

Certification.
0' £
In Process Inspection Accumulator/Eductor/Ejector/Silencer — as applicable
MTC Review,
Material identification for Pressure Parts Visual & Dimensional check , % 0 0I R- for CS
rii
Inspection Report
X
(Plates, Pipes) Correlation of Marking &
.
H- for SS/AS
Transfer of identification marks
Materialidentification for Pressure Parts MTC Review, %00 I
cn
cl
Inspection Report
z
(Forgings, Fittings, Fasteners, Gaskets, etc.) Verification of Markings
.
£. £
Non Pressure Parts (Supports, Internals) MTC Review
%00I aLIAI
p4
.
Format No. 8-00-0001- F7 Rev. O Copyrig htEIL — All rig hts rese rved
Page 6294 of 8516

INSPECTIONAND TESTPLAN FOR 6-81-0 155Rev. 0
EJECTOR PACKAGE
0-
0
CD
0.)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
v) 4
QUANTUM FORMAT OF
i. 0
STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS

OFCHECK REPORT SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
SUPPLIER
NDT- Knuckle Area, weld seam %00 I NDT Report/RT
Z
(as applicable) F ilm
%00I
Heat Treatment as applicable HTGraph/ Record
X
Inspection of FormedComponents (As
r•-i
7t-
%00I
applicable) Test coupon, if applicable Test Report
Z
Visual&Dimens ional
%00 I
Inspection (Thickness, profile, Inspection Report
x
ovality etc. )
S. £ %00I
Weld Inspection — Stage / Intermediate Visual, dimensional, HT& NDT Inspection Report
c4
9. £ %00
Inspection offinishedWelds Visualinspection, NDT Inspection Report
p4
LE %00 I
Pneumatic Test ofRF Pads LeakTest Inspection Report
t:4
£ Visual, Dimensions, Hardness,
%00 I
Inspection before PWHT (as applicable) PMI, Ferrite Test Inspection Report
rx
(as applicable)
6. £
PWHT (as applicable) Temperature & time
%00 I HT Graph &
x
Record
0I'£ Visual, Dimensions, Hardness, %00 I
Inspection after PWHT (as app licable) Inspection Report
Z
PMI (as app licable)
I1.£ lAidd %00 I
Water Quality (as applicable) LabTest Report
ZI £ %00I
Pressure Test Leak Check Inspection Report
FormatNo. 8-00-000 1-F7 Rev. O Copyrig htEIL — All rig hts rese rved
Page 6295 of 8516
INSPECTION ANDTEST PLANFO R 6-81-0155Rev. 0
EJ ECTORPACKAGE
co
0
0
SCOPE OFINSPECTION
cn4
QUANTUM
40
STAGE / ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS FORMATOF

OF CHECK REPORT SUB Vial/113
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
£I £ 5upc.bapue 2u!uluisa %00I
Visual Inspection Report
c4
17 1 E Visual, %00 I
Painting /Pickling & Passivation Inspection Report
.
DFT / Ferroxy l check
017
In Process Inspection — Condensers
MTC Review,
Materialidentification for Pressure Parts Visual& D imensional check, %00I R- for CS
4
.
(Plates, Pipes) Inspection Report

Correlation ofMarking & H- for SS/AS
Transfer ofidentification marks
Materialidentification for Pressure Parts
Z. 17 MTC Review, %00
(Forgings, Tubes, Fittings, Fasteners, Inspection Report
c4
Verification ofMarkings
Gaskets, etc. )
£. 17 %00 I aLIAI
Non Pressure Parts (Supports, Internals) MTC Review
I
NDT- Knuckle Area, weld seam %00 I NDT Report/ RT
(as applicable) Film
%00I
Heat Treatment as applicable HT Graph/ Record
r=4
4
•71
Inspection of FormedComponents
-
%00I
Test coupon, if app licable Test Report
3
Visual& Dimensional %00I
Inspection (Thickness, profile, Test Report
3
ovality etc. )
c17 %00 I
Weld Inspection — Stage/ Intermediate Visual, dimensional, HT &NDT Inspection Report
I
FormatNo. 8-00-000 1- F7 Rev. O Copyrig htEIL — Al l rig hts rese rved
Page 6296 of 8516

INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR
6-81-0155Rev. 0
EJECTORPACKAGE
0_
,,
N-
0
co
0)
a)
0
STAGE/ ACTIVITY CHARACTERISTICS FORMAT OF
°z
OFCHECK REPORT SUB

SUPPLIER EIL/ TPIA
SUPPLIER
9' 17
Inspection offinished Welds %00 I
•
Visual Inspection, NDT Inspection Report
04
Cl'
Inspection of Tube sheet Visual & Dimensional check
%00I
Inspection Report
Z
8' 17
Skeleton Inspection before Tube Insertion Visual, Dimensional & %00I
Inspection Report
X
Completeness
.
6' t
Tube Bundle, Floating Head assembly Visual, Dimens ional & %00 I
Inspection Report
x
Completeness
01 ..17
Pull through test of shell Gauge Passing
%00 I
Inspection Report
04
11 17
Pneumatic Test of RF Pads Leak Test
%00 I
Inspection Report
04
Z I ' 17 Tube to Tube sheet joint - (Welding/ Visual, NDT & Dimensional %00 I A111
Inspection Report
=
Expansion) (% Thinning, Expansion Length)
£I ' 17
Tube to Tube sheet Joint — Pneumatic Test Leak Test
%00I
Inspection Report
x
17 1 • 17
Inspection before PWHT (as applicable) Visual, Dimens ions, Hardness, %00 I
Inspection Report
Ix
PMI, Ferrite Test (as applicable)
I'17
PWHT (as applicable) Temperature & time
% 0 0I HT Graph &
rz4
Record
91' 17
Inspection after PWHT (as applicable) Visual, Dimensions, Hardness, %00I
Inspection Report
3
PMI (as applicable)
Ll' t IAIdd
Water Quality (as applicable) %00 I
Lab Test Report
x
Hydrostatic Test — Shell and Tube side Leak Check
%00 I
Inspection Report
=
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7 Rev. O
Copy rig ht EIL — All rig hts reserved
Page 6297 of 8516

INSPECTI ONAND TESTPLANFOR 6-81-0155 Rev. 0
EJECTORPACKAGE
co
O
0
SCOPEOF INSPECTION
STAGE/ ACTIVITY QUANTUM FORMAT OF
cil 4
CHARACTERISTICS SUB
SUPPLIER
6 I ' 17 % 0 0I
Drying, Drying andNitrogen Filling Visual, Gas pressure Inspection Report
3
„
0Z
Painting / Pickling & Passivation Visual, % 0 0I
Inspection Report
x
DFT /Ferroxyl check
.
O'S
In Process Inspection — Interconnecting Piping
MTC Review,
Materialidentification for Pressure Parts Visual& D imensional check, %00I R- for SS
Inspection Report
x
(Pipes)
.
Correlation of Marking & H-for SS/AS
Transfer ofidentification marks
Z'S Materialidentification for Pressure Parts MTC Review, % 0 0I
Inspection Report
a4
(Forgings, Fittings, Fasteners, Gaskets, etc. )
.
Verification of Markings
%00I DEN
Non Pressure Parts (Supports) MTC Review
.
17' S
Weld Inspection — Stage/ Intermediate Visual, Dimens ional, HT& %00I
Inspection Report
04
.
NDT
%00I
Inspection offinished Welds Visual Inspection, NDT Inspection Report
04
.
9' S Visual, Dimensions, Hardness, %00I
Inspection before PWHT (as applicable) Inspection Report
c4
.
PMI, Ferrite Test (as applicable)
L' S % 00 I
PWHT (as applicable) Temperature & T ime Graph&Record
a4
1
8' S Visual, Dimensions, Hardness, % 0 0I
Inspection after PWHT (as applicable) Inspection Report
3
.
PMI (as applicable)
6' S IAIdd %0OI
Water Quality (as applicable) Lab Test Report
a4
.
0I'S % 0 0I
Hydrostatic/Pneumatic Test (as applicable) LeakCheck Inspection Report
z
■
Fo rmatNo. 8-00-000 1-F7 Rev. O Copy rig htEIL — All rig hts reserved
Page 6298 of 8516
STANDARDSPECIFI CATION No.

INSPECTIO N ANDTESTPLAN FOR 6-81-0155Rev. 0
EJ ECTOR PACKAGE
0
0
SCOPEOF INSPECTION
cA 4
14 0
STAGE / ACTIVITY QUANTUM FORMATOF

CHARACTERISTICS SUB
SUPPLIER
II %OO I
Draining and Dry ing Visual Inspection Report
ZI
Painting/ Pickling & Passivation Visual, DFT/ %00I
Ferroxyl check (As app licable) Inspection Report
.
£I F inal Skid Assembly, Pressure Test (as Visual, Dimens ional % 0 0I
Inspection Report
x
applicable) Completeness, leak Check
tI %OOI
N itrogen Filling (As applicable) Corrosion Protection Inspection Report
I
0'9 2m2unaud
1' 9 Visual, DFT / %OOI
Final Painting/ Pickling & Pass ivation Inspection Report
X
Ferroxyl check
'
Z. 9 Visual, Material Compliance %OO I
Spares — as applicable Inspection Report
3
Quantity verification
O'L
Docume ntation andInspection Release
IL %OOI
Review of Inspection Documentation QC Documentation Review Inspection Reports
x
L % 0 0I DI
Final stamping andissue of IC Stamping details & IC Issuance
=
%OO I Final
N
Finaldocuments as per PR Inspection & test records for
=
submission to customer Doss ier
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7 Rev. O Copyrig ht EIL — All rig hts reserved

Page 6299 of 8516
STANDARD SPECIFI CATION No.

INSPECTION AND TESTPLAN FOR
ffiI
6-81-0155 Rev. 0
EJ ECTORPACKAGE Pag e 1 0 of 10
For Non NACE & Non Hydrogen service, following items shall be procured with EN 10204 type 3. 1 certification.
-o
cc
-t
O
CA
'c7:1
w (-5
•—•,
O
71-
cv
0
$.•
E E
ct
a)
Ct:
i
3
c7)'
0 • C)
CL)
(1)
cr1
cr1
!DA
0
4—+
N
a.)
E.)
o
$.
)-4
0
fa,
a)
U
ecc
o
•
N
.-C)
7:
.0
"CS
.--
•—
+4
.et.4
•-ti
'a'
714
4••
o
o0
U
(I.) a)
cl) °
ta)
N
a)
ci)
‘•■
czt
(L)
a)
-c-o "
o
0
c).
0
(,
03
0
0
E
ci)
O
a)
Cl
_
U
(I)
•
.)
Acceptance Norms for all the activities shall be as per PO/ PR/ STANDARDS referred therein/ Job Specification /ApprovedDocuments.
FormatNo. 8-00-0001- F7Rev. 0 Copy rig htEIL — All rig hts reserved
ENGINEERS HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
4Igsirfal51-ag
lawn erexer7traaarnart
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertakengt
ENVIRONMENTAL
MANAGEMENT AT Page 1 of 90
CONSTRUCTION SITES
ui TETF 117
1:4744, laTkir LitircRui
Hlich RIF1411-1
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONFOR
HEALTH, SAFETY&ENVIRONMENTAL
(HSE)MANAGEMENT AT
CONSTRUCTION SITES
■
Leip>.,,e
uuto4,
0 1
7 31/01/2017
REVISED & UPDATED AS
6 26/02/2014
REVISED & UPDATED SM DJ RKD SC
5 19/12/2012 REVISED & UPDATED SM SM RKD DM
4 13/02/2008 REVISED & UPDATED AS RK SCB VC
3 17/07/2007 REVISED & UPDATED AS MPJ VNP VC
2 11/08/2005 REVISED & UPDATED MPJ MPJ VNP VJN
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev Date Purpose Prepared by Checked by Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 6300 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
AT CONSTRUCTION SITES Page 2 of 90
Abbreviations:
AERB : Atomic Energy Regulatory Board

BARC : Bhabha Atomic Research Centre
BS : British Standard
BPCL : Bharat Petroleum Corporation Limited
ELCB : Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
EPC : Engineering, Procurement and Construction
EPCC : Engineering, Procurement, Construction and Commissioning
ESI : Employee State Insurance
GCC : General Conditions of Contract
GM : General Manager
GTAW : Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
HOD : Head of Department
HSE : Health, Safety & Environment
HIRAC : Hazard, Identification Risk Assessment & Control
OISD : Oil Industry Safety Directorate
HV : High Voltage
IE : Indian Electricity
LOTO : Lock Out & Tag Out
LPG : Liquefied Petroleum Gas
LSTK : Lump Sum Turn Key
MV : Medium Voltage
PPE : Personal Protective Equipment
RCM : Resident Construction Manager or Site-in-Charge, as applicable
SCC : Special Conditions of Contract
SLI : Safe Load Indicator
TBT : Tool Box Talks
Construction Standards Committee
Convenor : Sh. T K Sen, ED(Construction)
Members : Sh. Amitava Pal, CGM (C)

Sh. S N Bhatnagar, GM (C)
Sh. M K Garg, GM (C)
Sh. A K Mishra, GM(C)
Sh. Janak Kishore, DGM (P)
Sh. Rajeev Jain, DGM (C&P)
Sh. Udayan Chakravarthy, AGM (Piping)
Sh. Ravindra Kumar, AGM (C)
Sh. Sunil Dahiya, AGM (C)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL – Al rights reserved
Page 6301 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
CONTENTS
CLAUSE TITLE PAGE NO.

1.0 Scope 5
2.0 References 5
3.0 Requirement of Health, Safety and Environmental (HSE) 5
Management System to be complied by Bidders
3.1 Management Responsibility 5
3.1.1 HSE Policy & Objective 5
3.1.2 Management System 5
3.1.3 Indemnification 6
3.1.4 Deployment & Qualification of Safety 6
Personnel
3.1.5 Implementation, Inspection& Monitoring 8
3.1.6 Behavior Based Safety 9
3.1.7 Awareness 9
3.1.8 Fire prevention & First-Aid 9
3.1.9 Documentation 10
3.1.10 Audit 10
3.1.11 Meetings 11
3.1.12 Intoxicating drinks & drugs and smoking 11
3.1.13 Penalty 11
3.1.14 Accident/Incident investigation 14
3.2 House Keeping 14
3.3 HSE Measures 15
3.3.1 Construction Hazards 15
3.3.2 Accessibility 16
3.3.3 Personal Protective Equipment’s (PPEs) 16
3.3.4 Working at height 17

3.3.5 Scaffoldings 19
3.3.6 Electrical installations 19
3.3.7 Welding/Gas cutting 21
3.3.8 Ergonomics and tools & tackles 22
3.3.9 Occupational Health 23
3.3.10 Hazardous substances 23
3.3.11 Slips, trips & falls 23
3.3.12 Radiation exposure 23
3.3.13 Explosives/Blasting operations 24
3.3.14 Demolition/Dismantling 24
3.3.15 Road Safety 24
3.3.16 Welfare measures 26
3.3.17 Environment Protection 26
3.3.18 Rules & Regulations 26
Contd. to page 4 …
Page 6302 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
3.3.19 Weather Protection 27

3.3.20 Communication 27
3.3.21 Confined Space Entry 27
3.3.22 Heavy Lifts 28
3.3.23 Key performance indicators 28
3.3.24 Unsuitable Land Conditions 29
3.3.25 Under Water Inspection 29
3.3.26 Excavation 29
3.4 Tool Box talks 30
3.5 Training & Induction Programme 30
3.6 Additional safety requirements for working Inside a running 31
3.7 Self Assessment and Enhancement 33
3.8 HSE Promotion 33
3.9 LOTO for isolation of energy source 33
4.0 Details of HSE Management System by Contractor
4.1 On Award of Contract 33
4.2 During Job Execution 33
4.3 During short listing of the sub-contractors 35
5.0 Records 35
Appendices
1. Standards/Codes on HSE Appendix-A
2. Details of First AID Box Appendix-B
3. Types of Fire Extinguishers & their Appln. Appendix-C
4. Indicative List of statutory Acts & Rules Appendix-D
5. Construction Hazards and their mitigation Appendix-E
6. Training subjects / topics Appendix-F
7. Construction Power Board ( typ) Appendix-G
8. List of HSE procedures Appendix-H
Attachments (Reporting Formats)
I Safety Walk through Report HSE-1 Rev.0
II Accident/Incident Report HSE-2 Rev.0
III Suppl. Accident/Incident Investigation Report HSE-3 Rev.0
IV Near Miss Incident Report/Dangerous occurrence HSE-4 Rev.0
V Monthly HSE Report HSE-5 Rev.0
VI Permit for Working at height HSE-6 Rev.0
VII Permit for Working in Confined Space HSE-7 Rev.0
VIII Permit for Radiation work HSE-8 Rev.0
IX Permit for Demolishing/ Dismantling HSE-9 Rev.0
X Daily Safety Checklist HSE-10 Rev.0
XI Housekeeping assessment & compliance HSE-11 Rev.0
XII Inspection of temporary electrical booth / HSE-12 Rev.0
installation
XIII Inspection for scaffolding HSE-13 Rev.0
XIV Permit for erection / modification & dismantling of HSE-14 Rev.0
scaffolding
XV Permit for heavy lift/critical erection HSE-15 Rev.0
XVI Permit Energy Isolation & De-Isolation HSE-16 Rev 0
XVII Permit for Excavation HSE-17 Rev 0
XVIII Environmental Aspect Impact Register HSE-18 Rev 0
XIX HIRAC Register HSE-19 Rev 0
Page 6303 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) management
requirement to be complied by Contractors/ Vendors including their sub-contractors/ sub-
vendors during construction.
This specification is not intended to replace the necessary professional judgment needed to
design & implement an effective HSE system for construction activities and the contractor is
expected to fulfill HSE requirements in this specification as a minimum. It is expected that
contractor shall implement best HSE practices beyond whatever are mentioned in this
specification.
Requirements stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of HSE

Management given in relevant Act(s)/ legislations, General Conditions of Contract (GCC),
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) and Job (Technical) Specifications. Where different
documents stipulate different requirements, the most stringent shall apply.
2.0 REFERENCES
The document should be read in conjunction with following:
- General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

- Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
- Building and other construction workers Act,
- Indian Factories Act
- Job (Technical) specifications
- Relevant International/ National Codes (refer Appendix-A for standards/codes on HSE)
- Relevant State & National Statutory requirements.
- Operating Manuals Recommendation of Manufacturer of various construction Machineries
- Occupation Health and Safety Management System (OHSAS 18001:2007) and
Environmental Management System (ISO 14001:2004).
3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENTAL (HSE)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TO BE COMPLIED BY BIDDERS
3.1 Management Responsibility
3.1.1 HSE Policy & Objectives
The Contractor should have a documented and duly approved HSE policy &objectives to
demonstrate commitment of their organization to ensure health, safety and environmental
aspects in their line of operations.
HSE Policy of the contractor shall be made available to Owner / EIL at the place of execution of
specific contract works, as a valid document.
3.1.2 Management System
The HSE management system of the Contractor shall cover the HSE requirements &
commitments to fulfill them, including but not limited to what have been specified under
clauses 1.0 and 2.0 above. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of its site specific HSE Plan
from EIL / Owner prior to commencement of any site works. Corporate as well as Site
management of the Contractor shall ensure compliance of their HSE Plan at work sites in its
entirety in true spirit.
Page 6304 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
3.1.3 Indemnification
Contractor shall indemnify & hold harmless, Owner/EIL & their representatives, free from any
and all liabilities arising out of non-fulfillment of HSE requirements or its consequences.
3.1.4 Deployment & qualifications of Safety personnel
The Contractor shall designate/deploy various categories of HSE personnel at site as indicated
below in sufficient number. In no case, deployment of safety Supervisor / Safety Steward shall
substitute deployment of Safety Officer / Safety Engineer what is indicated in relevant statute of
BOCW Act i.e. deployment of safety officer/Safety Engineer is compulsory at project site. The
Safety supervisors, Safety stewards/Observer etc. Would facilitate the HSE tasks at grass root
level for construction sites and shall assist Safety Officer /Engineers.
Contractor shall appoint safety personnel as given below for every work shift (As per table
point):
Safety Observer/ Steward: Contractor shall depute one Safety Observer/Steward for
every 100 workers and additionally thereon.
Safety Supervisor: In addition to above, contractor shall depute one Safety
Supervisor for every 250 workers and additionally thereon.
Safety Engineer: In addition to above, one safety engineer/ officer for
every 1000 workers and additionally thereon.
Requirement of Safety Personnel for every shift

No. of Workers
deployed Safety Observer/
Safety Supervisor Safety Engineer/ Officer
Steward
1- 50
One
51-100
101-150 One
Two
151-200
201-250
Three
251-300 One
301-350
Four
351-400 Two
401-450
Five
451-500
Up to 1000 Ten Four
Up to 2000 Twenty Eight Two
In case any of the safety personnel leave the contractor the same shall be intimated to the
owner/ Consultant/ EIL. The contractor shall recruit new personnel and fill up the vacancy.
a) Safety Steward/Observer
As a minimum, he shall possess class XII pass certificate and trained in fire-fighting as
well as in safety/occupational health related subjects, with minimum two year of practical
experience in construction work environment and should have adequate knowledge of the
local language spoken by majority of the workers at the construction site.
Page 6305 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
b) Safety Supervisor
As a minimum, he shall possess a recognized graduation Degree in Science (with Physics
& Chemistry) or a diploma in Engg. or Tech. with minimum Two years of practical
experience in construction work environment and should possess requisite skills to deal
with construction safety & fire related day-to-day issues.
c) Safety Officer / Safety Engineer
Safety officer/Engineer Should Possess following Qualification &Experience:
(i) Recognized degree in any branch of Engg. or Tech. or Architecture with practical
experience of working in a building or other construction work in supervisory
capacity for a period of not less than two years, or possessing recognized diploma in
any branch of Engg. or Tech with practical experience of working in a building or
other construction work in supervisory capacity for a period of not less than five
years.
(ii) Recognized degree or diploma in Industrial safety
(iii) Preferably have adequate knowledge of the language spoken by majority of the
workers at the construction site.
Alternately
(i) Person possessing Graduation Degree in Science with Physics & Chemistry and
degree or diploma in Industrial Safety (from any Indian institutes recognized by
AICTE or State Council of Tech. Education of any Indian State) with practical
experience of working in a building, plant or other construction works (as Safety
Officer, in line with Indian Factories Act, 1958) for a period of not less than five
years, may be considered as Safety Officer.
d) HSE In-Charge
In case there is more than one Safety Officer at any project construction site, one of them,
who is senior most by experience (in HSE discipline), may be designated as HSE In-
Charge. Duties & responsibilities of such person shall be commensurate with that of
relevant statute and primarily to coordinate with top management of Client and contractors.
In case the statutory requirements i.e. State or Central Acts and / or Rules as applicable like
the Building and Other Construction Workers’ Regulation of Employment and Conditions
of Service- Act,1996 or State Rules (wherever notified), the Factories Act, 1948 or Rules
(wherever notified), etc. are more stringent than above clarifications, the same shall be
followed.
Contractors shall ensure physical availability of safety personnel at the place of specific
work location, where Hot Work Permit is required/granted. No work shall be started at any
of the project sites until above safety personnel & concerned Site Engineer of Contractor
are physically deployed at site. The Contractor shall submit a HSE Organogram clearly
indicating the lines of responsibility and reporting system and elaborate the responsibilities
of safety personnel in their HSE Plan.
The Contractor shall verify & authenticate credentials of such safety personnel and furnish
Bio-Data/Resume/Curriculum Vitae of the safety personnel as above for EIL/Owner’s
approval, at least 1 month before the mobilization. The Contractor, whenever required,
shall arrange submission of original testimonials/certificates of their Safety personnel, to
EIL/Owner (for verification/scrutiny, etc.)
Page 6306 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
Imposition / Realization of penalty shall not absolve the Contractor from his/ her
responsibility of deploying competent safety officer at site.
Adequate planning and deployment of safety personnel shall be ensured by the Contractor
so that field activities do not get affected because of non-deployment of competent &
qualified safety people in appropriate numbers.
3.1.5 Implementation, Inspection/ Monitoring
 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning, reporting, implementing and
monitoring all HSE requirements and compliance of all laws & statutory requirements.
 The Contractor shall also ensure that the HSE requirements are clearly understood &
implemented conscientiously by their site personnel at all levels at site.
 The Contractor shall ensure physical presence of their field engineers / supervisors, during
the continuation of their contract works / site activities including all material transportation
activities. Physical absence of experienced field engineers / supervisors of Contractor at
critical work spot during the course of work, may invite severe penalization as per the
discretion of EIC, including halting / stoppage of work.
 Contractor shall furnish their annual Inspection Plan, with regard to project issues /subjects,
frequency and performers to EIL/Owner.
 The Contractor shall regularly review inspection report internally and implement all
practical steps / actions for improving the status continuously.
 The Contractor shall ensure important safety checks right from beginning of works at every
work site locations and to this effect format No: HSE-10 “Daily Safety Check List” shall be
prepared by field engineer & duly checked by safety personnel for conformance.
 The Contractor shall carry out inspection to identify various unsafe conditions of work
sites/machinery/equipment’s as well as unsafe acts on the part of
workmen/supervisor/engineer while carrying out different project related works.
 Adequate records for all inspections shall be maintained by the Contractor and the same
shall be furnished to EIL/Owner, whenever sought.
 The Contractor shall not carry-out work by engaging single worker anywhere without any
supervisor anytime during day or night.
 To demonstrate involvement/commitment of site management of Contractor, at least one
Safety Walk through in a month shall be carried out by Contractor’s head of site (along
with his area manager/field engineers) and a report shall be furnished to EIL/Owner as per
format No: HSE-1” Safety walk through report” followed by compliance for unsatisfactory
remarks.
 As a general practice lifting tools/ tackles, machinery, accessories etc. shall be inspected,
tested and examined by competent people (approved by concerned State authorities) before
being used at site and also at periodical interval (e.g. during replacement, extension,
modification, elongation/ reduction of machine/parts, etc.) as per relevant statutes. Hydra,
cranes, lifting machinery, mobile equipment’s / machinery / vehicles, etc. shall be
inspected regularly by only competent / experienced personnel at site and requisite records
for such inspections shall be maintained by every contractor. Contractor shall also maintain
records of maintenance of all other site machinery (e.g. generators, rectifiers, compressors,
cutters, etc.) & portable tools/equipment’s being used at project related works (e.g. drills,
abrasive wheels, punches, chisels, spanners, etc.).The Contractor shall not make use of
arbitrarily fabricated ‘derricks’ at project site for lifting / lowering of construction
materials.
 Site facilities /temporary. installations, e.g. batching plant, cement godown, DG-room,
temporary electrical panels/distribution boards, shot-blasting booth, fabrication yards, etc.
and site welfare facilities, like labour colonies, canteen/pantry, rest-shelters, motor
cycle/bicycle-shed, site washing facilities, First-aid centers, urinals/toilets, etc. should be
periodically inspected by Contractor (preferably utilizing HR/Admn. personnel to inspect
site welfare facilities) and records to be maintained.
Page 6307 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
3.1.6 Behaviour Based Safety
 The contractor shall develop a system to implement Behaviour-Based Safety (BBS)

through which work groups can identify, measure and change the behaviours of employees
and workers towards construction safety aspects.
 The BBS process shall include the following:
- Identify the behaviours critical to obtaining required safety performance.
- Communicate the behaviours and how they are performed correctly to all
- Observe the work force and record safe/at risk behaviours. Intervene with workers to
give positive reinforcement when safe behaviours are observed. Provide
coaching/correction when at risk behaviours are observed
- Collect and record observation data
- Summarize and analyze observation data
- Communicate observation data and analysis results to all employees
- Provide recognition or celebrate when safe behaviour improvements occur
- Change behaviours to be observed or change activators or change consequences as
appropriate.
- Communicate any changes to workforce
 Contractor through its own HSE committee shall implement the above process.
 The necessary procedures and Monthly reporting formats shall be developed by the
contractor for approval by EIL/ Owner.
 The HSE committee of contractor shall observe individual’s behavior for safe practices
adapted for utilization/ execution of work for following as a minimum:-
- PPE
- Tools & equipment
- Hazard Identification & control
- House keeping
- Confined space entry
- Hot works
- Excavation
- Loading & unloading
- Work At height
- Stacking & storage
- Ergonomics
- Procedures
3.1.7 Awareness and Motivation
 The Contractor shall promote and develop awareness on Health, Safety and Environmental
protection among all personnel working for the Contractor.
 Regular awareness programs and fabrication shop/work site meetings atleast on monthly
basis shall be arranged on HSE activities to cover hazards/risks involved in various
operations during construction.
 Contractor to motivate & encourage the workmen & supervisory staff by issuing/ awarding
them with tokens/ gifts/ mementos/ monetary incentives/ certificates etc.
 Contractor shall assess & recognize the behavioral change of its site engineers / supervisors
periodically and constantly motivate / encourage them to implement HSE practices at
project works.
3.1.8 Fire prevention & First-Aid
 The Contractor shall arrange suitable First-aid measures such as First Aid Box (Refer
Appendix-B for details), stand-by Emergency Vehicle. Additionally separate ambulance
with trained personnel/nurse (male) to administer First Aid shall be provided by the
Contractor beyond deployment of 400 workmen during day/night working hours.
Page 6308 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
 The Contractor shall arrange installation of fire protection measures such as adequate
number of steel buckets with sand & water and adequate number of appropriate portable
fire extinguishers (Refer Appendix-C for details) to the satisfaction of EIL/Owner.
 The Contractor shall deploy trained supervisory personnel / field engineers to cater to any
emergency situation.
 The Contractor shall arrange EMERGENCY MOCK DRILL like fire, bomb threat, gas
leakage, earth quake, etc. at each site at least once in three months, involving site workmen
and site supervisory personnel & engineers. The Contractor shall maintain adequate record
of such fire drills at project site
3.1.9 Documentation
The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive, planned and documented system covering the
following as a minimum for implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements and the
same shall be submitted for approval by owner/EIL.
- HSE Organogram
- Site specific HSE Plan
- Safety Procedures, forms and Checklist. Indicative list of HSE procedures is attached as
Appendix :H
- Inspections and Test Plan
- Risk Assessment & HIRAC for critical works.
- HIRAC Register as per Format no: HSE-19 to identify, assess, analyze & mitigate the
construction hazards& incorporate relevant control measures before actually executing site
works.
- Environmental Aspect Impact Register as per Format no: HSE-18 (identify, assess, analyze
& mitigate the environmental impact & incorporate relevant control measures).
- Legal Register to identify and comply to all applicable HSE related legal requirements.
The monitoring for implementation shall be done by regular inspections and compliance of the
observations thereof. The Contractor shall get similar HSE requirements implemented at his
sub-contractor(s) work site/office. However, compliance of HSE requirements shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Any review/approval by EIL/Owner shall not absolve
contractor of his responsibility/liability in relation to fulfilling all HSE requirements.
3.1.10 Audit
The Contractor shall submit an Audit Plan to EIL/Owner indicating the type of audits and
covering following as minimum:
 Internal HSE audits regularly at least on quarterly basis by engaging internal qualified
auditors (viz safety officers/ Construction personnel having 5 years experience in
construction safety and Lead Auditor Course : OSHA 18001certification).
 External HSE audits regularly at least on every six months by engaging qualified external
auditors (viz safety officers/ Construction personnel having 10years experience in
construction safety and Lead Auditor Course: OHSAS 18001certification).
All HSE shortfalls/ non-conformances on HSE matters brought out during review/audit, shall be
resolved forthwith (generally within a week) by Contractor& compliance report shall be
submitted to EIL/ Owner.
In addition to above audits by contractor, the contractor’s work shall be subjected to HSE audit
by EIL/ Owner at any point of time during the pendency of contract. The Contractor shall take
all actions required to comply with the findings of the Audit Report and issue regular
Compliance Reports for the same to OWNER/ EIL till all the findings of the Audit Report are
fully complied.
Failure to carry-out HSE Audits& its compliance (internal & external) by Contractor, shall
invite penalization.
Page 6309 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
3.1.11 Meetings
 The Contractor shall ensure participation of his top most executive at site (viz. Resident
Construction Manager / Resident Engineer/ Project Manager / Site-in-Charge) in Safety
Committee/HSE Committee meetings arranged by EIL/ Owner usually on monthly basis or
as and when called for. In case Contractor’s top most executive at site is not in a position
to attend such meeting, he shall inform EIL/ Owner in writing before the commencement of
such meeting indicating reasons of his absence and nominate his representative – failure to
do so may invite very stringent penalization against the specific Contractor, as deemed fit
in Contract. The obligation of compliance of any observations during the meeting shall be
always time bound. The Contractor shall always assist EIL/Owner to achieve the targets
set by them on HSE management during the project implementation.
 In addition, the Contractor shall also arrange internal HSE meetings chaired by his top most
executive at site on weekly basis and maintain records. Such internal HSE meetings shall
essentially be attended by field engineers / supervisors (& not by safety personnel only) of
the Contractor and its associates. Records of such internal HSE meetings shall be
maintained by the Contractor for review by EIL/ Owner or for any HSE Audits.
 Agenda of internal HSE meeting should broadly cover: -

a) Confirmation of record notes /minutes of previous meeting
b) Discussion on outstanding subjects of previous points / subjects, if any
c) Incidents / Accidents (of all types) at project site, if any
d) Current topics related to site activities / subjects of discussion
e) House keeping
f) Behavioral Safety
g) Information / views / deliberations of members / site, sub-contractors
h) Report from Owner / Client
i) Status of Safety awareness, Induction programs & Training programs
The time frame for such HSE meeting shall be religiously maintained by one and all.
3.1.12 Intoxicating drinks & drugs and Smoking

 The Contractor shall ensure that his staff members & workers (permanent as well casual)
shall not be in a state of intoxication during working hours and shall abide by any law
relating to consumption & possession of intoxicating drinks or drugs in force.
 The Contractor shall not allow any workman to commence any work at any locations of
project activity who is/are influenced / effected with the intake of alcohol, drugs or any
other intoxicating items being consumed prior to start of work or working day.
 Awareness about local laws on this issue shall form part of the Induction Training and
compulsory work-site discipline.
 The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel working for him comply with “No-Smoking”
requirements of the Owner as notified from time to time. Cigarettes, lighters, auto ignition
tools or appliances as well as intoxicating drugs, dry tobacco powder, etc. shall not be
allowed inside the project / plant complex.
 Smoking shall be permitted only inside smoking booths exclusively designated &
authorized by the Owner/EIL.
3.1.13 Penalty
The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE requirements. In case of non-
compliances and also for repeated failure in implementation of any of the HSE provisions,
Page 6310 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
EIL/Owner may impose stoppage of work without any cost & time implication to the Owner
and/or impose a suitable penalty.
The amount of penalty to be levied against defaulted Contractor shall be up to a cumulative
limit of
2.0% (Two percent) of the contract value for Item Rate or Composite contracts with an overall
ceiling of 1, 00, 00, 000 (Rupees One crore)
0.5% (Zero decimal five percent) of the contract value for LSTK, OBE, EPC, EPCC or Package
contracts with an overall ceiling of 10, 00.00.000 (Rupees ten crores)
This penalty shall be in addition to all other penalties specified elsewhere in the contract. The
decision of imposing stop-work-instruction and imposition of penalty shall rest with
EIL/Owner. The same shall be binding on the Contractor. Imposition of penalty does not make
the Contractor eligible to continue the work in unsafe manner.
The amount of penalty applicable for the Contractor on different types of HSE violations is
specified below:
Sl.
Violation of HSE norms Penalty Amount
No.
1. For not using personal protective equipment Rs.500/- per day/ Item / Person.
(Helmet, Shoes, Goggles, Gloves, Face shield,
Boiler suit, etc.)
2. Working without Work Permit/Clearance Rs.20,000/- per occasion
3 Execution of work without deployment of requisite Rs.5,000/- per violation per day
field engineer / supervisor at work spot
4. Unsafe electrical practices (not installing ELCB, Rs.10,000/- per item per day.
using poor joints of cables, using naked wire without
top plug into socket, laying wire/cables on the roads,
electrical jobs by incompetent person, etc.)
5. Working at height without full body harness, using Rs.10,000/- per case per day.
non-standard/ rejected scaffolding and not arranging
fall protection arrangement as required, like hand-
rails, life-lines, Safety Nets etc.
6. Unsafe handling of compressed gas cylinders (No Rs.500/- per item per day.
trolley, jubilee clips double gauge regulator, and not
keeping cylinders vertical during storage/handling,
not using safety cap of cylinder).
7. Use of domestic LPG for cutting purpose / not using Rs.3,000/- per occasion.
flash back arresters on both the hoses/tubes on both
ends.
8. No fencing/barricading of excavated areas / Rs.3,000/- per occasion.
trenches.
9. Not providing shoring/strutting/proper slope and not Rs.5,000/- per occasion.
keeping the excavated earth at least 1.5M away from
excavated area.
10. Non display of scaffold tags, caution boards, list of Rs.1,000/- per occasion per day
hospitals, emergency services available at work
locations.
11. Traffic rules violations like over speeding of Rs.2,000/- per occasion per day
vehicles, rash driving, talking on mobile phones
during vehicle driving, wrong parking, not using seat
belts, vehicles not fitted with reverse horn / warning
alarms / flicker lamps during foggy weather.
Page 6311 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
Sl.
No.
12. Absence of Contractor’s RCM/ SIC or his Rs.10,000/- per meeting.
nominated representative (prior approval must be
taken for each meeting for nomination) from site
HSE meetings whenever called by EIL/Owner&
failure to nominate his immediate deputy (in the site-
organogram) for such HSE meetings.
13. Failure to maintain HSE records by Contractor Rs.10,000/- per month.
Safety personnel, in line with approved HSE
Plan/Procedures/Contract specifications.
14. Failure to conduct daily site safety inspection (by Rs.10,000/- per occasion.
Contractor’s safety engineers/safety officers),
internal HSE meeting, internal HSE Awareness/
Motivation Program, Site HSE Training and HSE
audit at predefined frequencies (as approved in HSE
Plan).
15. Failure to submit the monthly HSE report by 5th of Rs.10,000/- per occasion and Rs.
subsequent month to Project’s Engineer-in-Charge/ 1,000/- per day of further delay.
Owner
16. Poor House Keeping Rs.5,000/- per occasion per
subject
17. Failure to report &follow up accident (including Rs.20,000/- per occasion
Near Miss) reporting system within specific time-
frame.
18. Degradation of environment (not confining toxic Rs.10,000/- per occasion
spills, spilling oil/ lubricants onto ground)
19. Not medically examining the workers before Rs.5,000/- per occasion per
allowing them to work at height / to work in worker
confined space / to work in shot-blasting / to work
for painting / to work in bitumen or asphalt works,
not providing ear muffs while allowing them to work
in noise polluted areas, made them to work in air
polluted areas without respiratory protective devices,
etc.
20. Violation of any other safety condition as per job Rs.5,000/- per occasion
HSE plan / work permit and HSE conditions of
contract (e.g. using crowbar on cable trenches,
improper welding booth, not keeping fire
extinguisher ready at hot work site, unsafe rigging
practices, non-availability of First-Aid box at site,
not providing dead man handle switch for blasting,
whiplash arrestor for the compressor line, not using
hood with respiratory devices by blaster for
shot//grit blasting, etc.)
21. Penalty for non-deployment of ambulance in case of Rs.3,000/- per day
man-power more than 400 or not providing
dedicated emergency vehicle in case of man-power
less than 400.
22. Failure to carry-out Safety audit in time (internal & Rs.20,000/- per occasion
external), close-out of identified shortfalls of
Observations of Safety Aspects(OSA), etc.
23. Carrying out sand blasting instead of grit/shot Rs.50,000/- per day
blasting.
Page 6312 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
Sl.
No.
24. Failure to deploy adequately qualified and Rs.10,000/- per day per Officer
competent Safety Officer
25. Utilization of hydra/back-hoe loader for material Rs.25,000/- per occasion
shifting or any other unauthorized /unsafe lifting
works
26. Any Fatal Accident Rs.10,00,000/- per fatality
26. Any violation not covered above To be decided by EIL/Owner.
 The Contractor shall make his field engineers/supervisors fully aware of the fact that they
keep track with the site workmen for their behavior and compliance of various HSE
requirements. Safety lapses / defects of project construction site shall be attributable to the
concerned job supervisor / engineer of the Contractor, (who remains directly responsible
for safely executing field works). For repeated HSE violations, concerned job supervisor /
engineer shall be reprimanded or appropriate action, as deemed fit, shall be initiated (with
an information to EIL & Owner) by the concerned Contractor.
Contractor shall initiate verbal warning shall be given to the worker/employee during his first
HSE violation. A written warning shall be issued on second violation and specific training shall
be arranged / provided by the Contractor to enhance HSE awareness/skill including feedback on
the mistakes/ flaws. Any further violation of HSE stipulations by the erring individuals shall call
for his forthright debar from the specific construction site. A record of warnings for each
worker/employee shall be maintained by the Contractor, like by punching their cards / Gate
passes or by displaying their names at the Project entry gate. Warnings, penalizations,
appreciations etc. shall be discussed in HSE Committee meetings by site Head of the
Contractor.
3.1.14 Accident/ Incident investigation
All accidents/incidents shall be informed to EIL/Owner at least telephonically by Contractor

immediately and in writing within 24 hours on Format No. HSE-2 as applicable, by Contractor.
Thereafter, a Supplementary Accident/Incident investigation Report on Format No. HSE-3 shall
be submitted to EIL/Owner within 72 hours. Near Miss incident(s), Dangerous
accidents/incident shall also be reported on Format No. HSE-4 within24 hours. The accident/
incident shall be investigated by a team of Contractor’s senior Site personnel (involving Site-in-
Charge or at least by his deputy) for establishing root-cause and recommending corrective &
preventive actions. Findings shall be documented and suitable actions taken to avoid
recurrences shall be communicated to EIL/Owner. Owner/EIL shall have the liberty to
independently investigate such occurrences and the Contractor shall extend all necessary help
and cooperation in this regard. EIL/Owner shall have the right to share the content of this report
with the outside world.
3.2 House Keeping
The Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of housekeeping is maintained and shall ensure
inter-alia; the followings:
a) All surplus earth and debris are removed/ disposed-off from the working areas to
designated location(s).
b) Unused/ surplus cables, steel items and steel scrap lying scattered at different places within
the working areas are removed to identify location(s).
c) All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing materials,
shall be removed from work place to identified location(s).
Page 6313 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
d) Roads shall be kept clear and materials like pipes, steel, sand, boulders, concrete, chips and
bricks etc. shall not be allowed on the roads to obstruct free movement of men &
machineries.
e) Fabricated steel structural, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked properly for erection.
f) Water logging on roads shall not be allowed.
g) No parking of trucks/trolleys, cranes and trailers etc. shall be allowed on roads, which may
obstruct the traffic movement.
h) Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper upkeep of the working
areas.
i) Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverized materials etc. shall be covered while moving
within the plant area/ or these materials shall be transported with top surface wet.
j) The contractor shall ensure that the atmosphere in plant area and on roads is free from
particulate matter like dust, sand, etc. by keeping the top surface wet for ease in breathing.
k) At least two exits for any unit area shall be assured at all times – same arrangement is
preferable for digging pits / trench excavation / elevated work platforms/ confined spaces
etc.
l) Welding cables and the power cable must be segregated and properly stored and used. The
same shall be laid away from the area of movement and shall be free from obstruction.
m) Schedule for upkeep/ cleaning of site to be firmed up and implemented on regular basis.
The Contractor shall carry-out regular checks (minimum one per fortnight) as per format No:
HSE-11 for maintaining high standard of housekeeping and maintain records for the same. The
Contractor shall provide supervisor for housekeeping exclusively for management of day-to-day
housekeeping activities.
3.3 HSE Measures
3.3.1 Construction Hazards
The Contractor shall ensure identification of all Occupational Health, Safety & Environmental
hazards in the type of work he is going to undertake and enlist mitigation measures. Contractor
shall carry out HIRAC specifically for high risk jobs/critical jobs like
a) Working at height (+2.0 Mts height) for cold (incl. colour washing, painting, insulation
etc.) & hot works.
b) Work in confined space,
c) Deep excavations &trench cutting (depth > 2.0 mts.)
d) Operation & Maintenance of Batching Plant.
e) Shuttering / concreting (in single or multiple pour) for columns, parapets & roofs.
f) Erection & maintenance of Tower Crane.
g) Erection of structural steel members / roof-trusses / pipes at height more than 2.0 Mts. with
or without crane.
h) Erection of pipes (full length or fabricated) at height more than 2.0 Mts. height with Crane
of 100T capacity.
i) All lifts using 100T Crane plus mechanical pulling.
j) All lifts using two cranes in unison (Tandem Lifting).
k) Any lift exceeding 80% capacity of the lifting equipments (hydra, crane etc.).
l) Laying of pipes (isolated or fabricated) in deep narrow trenches – manually or
mechanically.
m) Maintenance of crane / extension or reduction of crane-boom on roads or in yards.
n) Erection of any item at >2.0 Mts. height using 100T crane or of higher capacity
o) Hydrostatic test of pipes, vessels & columns and water-flushing.
p) Radiography jobs (in-plant & open field)
q) Work in Live Electrical installations / circuits
Page 6314 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
r) Handling of explosives & Blasting operations

s) Demolishing/ dismantling activities
t) Welding/ gas cutting jobs at height (+2.0 Mts.)
u) Lifting/placing roof-girders at height (+2.0 Mts.)
v) Lifting & laying of metallic / non-metallic sheet over roof/structures.
w) Lifting of pipes, gratings, equipments/ vessels at heights (+2.0 Mts) with & without using
cranes
x) Calibration of equipment, instruments and functional tests at yards / work-sites.
y) Operability test of Pump, Motors (after coupling) & Compressors.
z) Cold or Hot works inside Confined Space.
aa) Transportation & shifting of ODC consignments into project areas.
bb) Working in “charged/Live” elect. Panels
cc) Stress Relieving works (Electrically or by Gas-burners).
dd) Pneumatic Tests
ee) Card board blasting
ff) Chemical cleaning
And take feedback from EIL/Owner. The necessary HSE measures devised shall be put in to
place, prior to start of an activity &also shall be maintained during the course of works, by the
Contractor. Copies of such HIRAC shall be kept available at work sites by the Contractor to
enable all concerned carrying out checks / verification.
A list of typical construction hazards along with their effects & preventive measures is given in
Appendix-E.
3.3.2 Accessibility
 The Contractor shall provide safe means of access(in sufficient numbers)& efficient exit to
any working place including provisions of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various
stages during all operations of the work for the safety of his workmen and EIL/Owner.
 The Contractor shall implement use of all measures including use of “life line”, “fall-
arresters”, “retractable fall arresters”, “safety nets” etc. during the course of using all safe
accesses& exits, so that in no case any individual remains at risk of slip & fall during their
travel.
 The access to operating plant / project complex shall be strictly regulated. Any person or
vehicle entering such complex shall undergo identification check, as per the procedures in
force / requirement of EIL/Owner.
 Accessibility to ‘confined space’ shall be governed by specific system / regulation, as
established at project site.
3.3.3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs)
 The Contractor workmen shall be permitted entry inside the project premises only with
proper PPEs.
 The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff, workers and visitors including their sub-
contractor(s) have been issued (records to be kept) & wear appropriate PPEs like nape strap
type safety helmets preferably with head &sweat band with ¾” cotton chin strap (made of
industrial HDPE), safety shoes with steel toe cap and antiskid sole, full body harness (CЄ
marked and conforming to EN361), protective goggles, gloves, ear muffs, respiratory
protective devices, etc. All these gadgets shall conform to applicable IS Specifications/ CE
or other applicable international standards. The Contractor shall implement a regular
regime of inspecting physical conditions of the PPEs being issued / used by the workmen
of their own & also its sub-agencies and the damaged / unserviceable PPEs shall be
replaced forthwith.
Page 6315 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
 Owner/EIL may issue a comprehensive color scheme for helmets to be used by various
agencies. The Contractor shall follow the scheme issued by the owner/EIL and shall choose
any colour other than white (for Owner) or blue (for EIL) All HSE personnel shall
preferably wear dark green band on their helmet so that workmen can approach them for
guidance during emergencies. HSE personnel shall preferably wear such dresses with
fluorescent stripes, which are noticeable during night, when light falls on them.
 Florescent jackets with respective company logo to be worn by the contractor workmen
with different color coding for categories like supervisor and workmen
 For shot blasting, the usage of protective face shield and helmets, gauntlet and protective
clothing is mandatory. Such protective clothing should conform relevant IS Specification.
 For off-shore jobs/contracts, contractor shall provide PPEs (new) of all types to EIL &
Owner's personnel, at his (contractor's) cost. All personnel shall wear life jacket at all time.
 An indicative list of HSE standards/codes is given under Appendix-A.
 Contractor shall ensure procurement & usage of following safety equipment’s/ accessories
(conforming to applicable IS mark / CE standard) by their staff, workmen & visitors
including their subcontractors all through the span of project construction / pre-
commissioning/ Commissioning:-‘
a. PPEs (Helmet with company name/logo, Spectacle, Ear-muff, Face shield, Hand
gloves, Safety Shoes, Gum boot)
b. Barricading tape / warning signs
c. Rechargeable Safety torch (flame-proof)
d. Safety nets (with tie-chords)
e. Fall arresters
f. Portable ladders (varying lengths)
g. Life-lines (steel wire-rope, dia not less than 8.0 mm)
h. Full body harness (double lanyard)
i. Lanyard
j. Karabiner
k. Retractable fall arresters (various length)
l. Portable fire extinguishers (DCP type) – 5 kg capacity
m. Portable Multi Gas detector
n. Sound level meter
o. Digital Lux meter
p. Fire hoses & flow nozzles
q. Fire blankets / Fire retardant cloth (with eyelets)
3.3.4 Working at height
 The Contractor shall issue permit for working (PFW) at height after verifying and
certifying the checkpoints as specified in the attached permit (Format No. HSE-6). He
shall also undertake to ensure compliance to the conditions of the permit during the
currency of the permit including adherence of personal protective equipment’s.
Contractor’s Safety Officer shall verify compliance status of the items of permit document
after implementation of action is completed by Contractor’s execution / field engineers at
work site. HIRAC for specific works at height duly commented by EIL/Owner, shall be
kept attached with particular Permit for Work (PFW) at site for ready reference & follow-
up.
 Such PFW shall be initially issued for one single shift or expected duration of normal work
and extended further for balance duration, if required. EIL/Owner can devise block-permit
Page 6316 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
system at any specific area, in consultation with project specific HSE Committee to specify
the time-period of validity of such PFW or its renewal. This permit shall be applicable in
areas where specific clearance from Owner’s Operation Deptt./ Safety Deptt. is not
required. EIL / Owner’s field Engineers/ Safety Officers/ Area Coordinators may verify
and counter sign this permit (as an evidence of verification) during the execution of the job.
 All personnel shall be medically examined & certified by registered doctor, confirming
their ‘medical fitness for working at height. The fitness examination shall be done once in
six months.
 In case work is undertaken without taking sufficient precautions as given in the permit,
EIL/ Owner Engineers may exercise their authority to cancel such permit and stop the work
till satisfactory compliance/rectification is arranged made. Contractors are expected to
maintain a register for issuance of permit and extensions thereof including preserving the
used permits for verification during audits etc.
 The Contractor shall arrange (at his cost) and ensure use of Fall Arrester Systems by his
workers. Fall arresters are to be used while climbing/descending tall structures or vessels /
columns etc. These arresters should lock automatically against the anchorage line,
restricting free fall of the user. The device is to be provided with a double security opening
system to ensure safe attachment or release of the user at any point of rope. In order to
avoid shock, the system should be capable of keeping the person in vertical position in case
of a fall.
 The Contractor shall ensure that Full body harnesses conforming EN361 and having
authorized CЄ marking is used by all personnel while working at height. The lanyards and
life lines should have enough tensile strength to take the load of the worker in case of a fall.
One end of the lanyard shall be firmly tied with the harnesses and the other end with life
line. The harness should be capable of keeping the workman vertical in case of a fall,
enabling him to rescue himself.
 The Contractor shall provide Roof Top Walk Ladders for carrying out activities on sloping
roofs in order to reduce the chances of slippages and falls.
 The Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System is used wherever the hazard of
fall from height is present. The safety net, preferably a knotted one with mesh ropes
conforming to IS 5175/ ISO 1140 shall have a border rope & tie cord of minimum 12mm
dia. The Safety Net shall be located not more than 6.0 meters below the working surface
extending on either side upto sufficient margin to arrest fall of persons working at different
heights.
 In case of accidental fall of person on such Safety Net, the bottom most portion of Safety
Net should not touch any structure, object or ground.
 Grade separators shall be provided in Pipe-rack/Tech-structures to arrest falling objects like
welding spatters, welding rods, nuts, bolts, tools etc. and to facilitate U/G and A/G works
simultaneously.
 Beam Clamps may be used for construction of localized temporary working platforms,
sheds for welding booths etc. at height in all types of steel structure due to faster
installation and requirement of less scaffolding materials.
 Hanging Platform, manufactured by Standard HSE equipment vendors must be
encouraged for painting of Buildings etc.
 All the tools used at height (like spanner, screw driver etc.) shall be provided with securing
arrangement like back-pack/waist pouch to prevent accidental slippage from worker hand.
 The Contractor shall install temporary lightening arrester in tall structures during
construction to save human life and to avoid damage to equipments & machineries
Page 6317 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
 The Contractor shall ensure positive isolation while working at different levels like in the
pipe rack areas. The working platforms with toe boards & hand rails shall be sufficiently
strong & shall have sufficient space to hold the workmen and tools & tackles including the
equipment’s required for executing the job. Such working platforms shall have mid-rails, to
enable people work safely in sitting posture.
3.3.5 Scaffoldings& Barricading

 Suitable steel scaffoldings only shall be provided to workmen for all works that cannot be
safely done from the ground or from solid construction except such short period work that
can be safely done using ladders or certified (by 3rd party competent person) man-basket.
When a ladder is used, an extra workman shall always be engaged for holding the ladder.
 The Contractor shall ensure that the scaffolds used during construction activities shall be
strong enough to take the designed load. Main Contractor shall always furnish duly
approved construction-design details of scaffold & SWL (from competent designers) free
of charge, before they are being installed / constructed at site. Owner/EIL reserves the right
to ask the Contractor to submit certification and or design calculations from his Head
office/ Design/ Engineering expert regarding load carrying capacity of the scaffoldings.
 All scaffolds shall be inspected by a competent Scaffolding Inspector of the Contractor. He
shall paste a GREEN tag (duly signed by competent Scaffolding Inspector) on each
scaffold found safe and a RED tag (duly signed by competent Scaffolding Inspector) on
each scaffold found unsafe. Scaffolds with GREEN tag only shall be permitted to be used
and Scaffolds with RED ones shall immediately be made inaccessible. Work being found
continuing on scaffolds with RED tag shall be considered unauthorized work by Contractor
and may invite penalization from EIL/Owner. For every 120-125 m2 /m3 area / volume or
its parts there of minimum one TAG shall be provided.
 The Contractor shall ensure positive barricading (indicative as well as protective) of the
excavated, radiography, heavy lift, high pressure hydrostatic & pneumatic testing and other
such areas. Sufficient warning signs shall be displayed along the barricading areas.
 Scaffolding shall be constructed using foot seals or base plates only.
3.3.6 Electrical installations
 All electrical installations/ connections shall be carried out as per the provisions of latest
revision of following codes/standards, in addition to the requirements of Statutory
Authorities and IE/applicable international rules& regulations:
- OISD STD 173 : Fire prevention & protection system for electrical installations
- SP 30 (BIS) : National Electric Code
 All electrical installations shall be approved by the concerned statutory authorities.
 All temporary electrical installations/ facilities shall be regularly checked by the licensed/
competent electricians of the Contractor and appropriate records shall be maintained in
format no: HSE-12” Inspection of temporary electrical booth/ installation at project
construction site”. Such inspection records are to be made available to EIL/Owner,
whenever asked for.
3.3.6.1 The Contractor shall meet the following requirements:

a. Shall make Single Line Diagram (SLD) for providing connection to each equipment’s &
machinery and the same (duly approved by EIL/Owner) shall be pasted on the front face of
DBs (distribution boards) or JBs (Junction boxes) at every site. (A typical Switch Board
Sketch is attached as Appendix -G).
Page 6318 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
b. Ensure that electrical systems and equipment including tools & tackles used during
construction phase are properly selected, installed, used and maintained as per provisions
of the latest revision of the Indian Electrical/ applicable international regulations.
c. Shall deploy qualified & licensed electricians for proper & safe installation and for regular
inspection of construction power distribution system/points including their earthing. A
copy of the license shall be submitted to EIL / Owner for records. Availability of at least
one competent (ITI qualified) / licensed electrician (by State Elec. authorities) shall be
ensured at site round the clock to attend to the normal/emergency jobs.
d. All switchboards / welding machines shall be kept in well-ventilated & covered shed/ with
rain shed protection. The shed shall be elevated from the existing ground level to avoid
water logging inside the shed. Installation of electrical switch board must be done taking
care of the prevention of shock and safety of machine.
e. No flammable materials shall be used for constructing the shed. Also flammable materials
shall not be stored in and around electrical equipment / switchboard. Adequate clearances
and operational space shall be provided around the equipment.
f. Fire extinguishers and insulating mats shall be provided in all power distribution centers.
g. Temporary electrical equipment shall not be employed in hazardous area without obtaining
safety permit.
h. Proper housekeeping shall be done around the electrical installations.
i. All temporary installations shall be tested before energizing, to ensure proper earthing,
bonding, suitability of protection system, adequacy of feeders/cables etc.
j. All welders shall use hand gloves irrespective of holder voltage.
k. Multilingual (Hindi, English and local language) caution boards, shock treatment charts and
instruction plate containing location of isolation point for incoming supply, name &
telephone No. of contact person in emergency shall be provided in substations and near all
distribution boards / local panels.
l. Operation of earth leakage device shall be checked regularly by temporarily connecting

series test lamp (2 bulbs of equal rating connected in series) between phase and earth.
ELCB tester /test meter shall be used for testing ELCBs
m. Regular inspection of all installations at least once in a month. (Ref. Format HSE-12).
3.3.6.2 The following features shall also be ensured for all electrical installations during construction
phase by the contractor:
 Each installation shall have a main switch with a protective device, installed in an
enclosure adjacent to the metering point. The operating height of the main switch shall not
exceed 1.5 M. The main switch shall be connected to the point of supply by means of
armoured cable.
 The outgoing feeders shall be double or triple pole switches with fuses / MCBs. Loads in a
three phase circuit shall be balanced as far as possible and load on neutral should not
exceed 20% of load in the phase.
 The installation shall be adequately protected against overload, short circuit and earth
leakage by the use of suitable protective devices. Fuses wherever used shall be HRC type.
Page 6319 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
Use of rewirable fuses shall be strictly prohibited. The earth leakage device shall have an
operating current not exceeding 30 mA.
 All connections to the hand tools / welding receptacles shall be taken through proper
switches, sockets and plugs.
 All single phase sockets shall be minimum 3 pin type only. All unused sockets shall be
provided with socket caps.
 Only 3 core (P+N+E) overall sheathed flexible cables with minimum conductor size of 1.5
mm2 copper shall be used for all single phase hand tools.
 Only metallic distribution boxes with double earthing shall be used at site. No wooden
boxes shall be used.
 All power cables shall be terminated with compression type cable glands. Tinned copper
lugs shall be used for multi-strand wires / cables.
 Cables shall be free from any insulation damage.
 Minimum depth of cable trench shall be 750 mm for MV & control cables and 900 mm for
HV cables. These cables shall be laid over a sand layer and covered with sand, brick & soil
for ensuring mechanical protection. Cables shall not be laid in waterlogged area as far as
practicable. Cable route markers shall be provided at every 25 M of buried trench route.
When laid above ground, cables shall be properly cleated or supported on rigid poles of
atleast 2.1 M high. Minimum head clearance of 6 meters shall be provided at road
crossings.
 Underground road crossings for cables shall be avoided to the extent feasible. In any case
no underground power cable shall be allowed to cross the roads without pipe sleeve.
 All cable joints shall be done with proper jointing kit. No taped/temporary joints shall be
used.
 An independent earthing facility should preferably be established within the temporary

installation premises. All appliances and equipment shall be adequately earthed. In case of
armoured cables, the armour shall be bonded to the earthing system.
 All cables and wire rope used for earth connections shall be terminated through tinned
copper lugs.
 In case of local earthing, earth electrodes shall be buried near the supply point and earth
continuity wire shall be connected to local earth plate for further distribution to various
appliances. All insulated wires for earth connection shall have insulation of green colour.
 Separate core shall be provided for neutral. Earth / Structures shall not be used as a neutral
in any case.
 ON/OFF position of all switches shall be clearly designated / painted for easy isolation in
emergency.
3.3.7 Welding/ Grinding/ Gas cutting
 Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrestors conforming to BS:6158 or equivalent are
installed on all gas cylinders as well as at the torch end of the gas hose, while in use.
Page 6320 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
 All cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys and provided with a closing key. Empty & filled-
up gas cylinders shall be stored separately with TAG, protecting them from direct sun or
rain. Minimum 2 nos. of Portable DCP type fire extinguishers (10 kg) shall be maintained
at the gas cylinder stores. Stacking & storing of compressed gas cylinders shall be arranged
away from DG set, hot works, Elect. Panels / Elec. boards, etc.
 The burner and the hose placed downstream of pressure reducer shall be equipped with
Flash Back Arrester/ Non Return Valve device.
 The hoses for acetylene and oxygen cylinders must be of different colours. Their
connections to cylinders and burners shall be made with a safety collar.
 At end of work, the cylinders in use shall be closed and hoses depressurized.
 Cutting of metals using gases, other than oxygen &acetylene, shall require written
concurrence from Owner.
 Grinding activity shall not be carried out in confined spaces without a valid work permit.
 All grinding/cutting machines shall be guarded and fitted with Dead-Man switch and this
shall not be bypassed any time.
 All welding/grinding machines shall have effective earthing at least at distinctly isolated
two points.
 In order to help maintain good housekeeping, and to reduce fire hazard, live electrode bits
shall be contained safely and shall not be thrown directly on the ground.
 The hoses of Acetylene and Oxygen shall be kept free from entanglement & away from
common pathways / walkways and preferably be hanged overhead in such a manner which
can avoid contact with cranes, hydra or other mobile construction machinery.
 Hot spatters shall be contained / restricted appropriately (by making use of effective fire-
retardant cloth/fabric) and their flying-off as well as chance of contact with near-by
flammable materials shall be stopped.
 The Contractor shall arrange adequate systems & practices for accumulation / collection of
metal & other scraps and remnant electrodes and their safe disposal at regular interval so as
to maintain the fabrication and other areas satisfactorily clean & tidy.
 All gas cylinders must have a cylinder cap on at all times when not in use.
3.3.8 Ergonomics and tools & tackles
 The Contractor shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate with their qualification,
experience and state of health.
 All lifting tools, tackles, equipment, trailers, trucks/dumpers, accessories including cranes
shall be tested periodically by statutory/competent authority for their condition and load
carrying capacity. Valid test & fitness certificates from the applicable authority shall be
submitted to Owner/EIL for their review/acceptance before the lifting tools, tackles,
equipment, trailers, trucks/dumpers, accessories and cranes are used.
 Load testing of Cranes must be made mandatory after each modification/alteration of crane
configuration/change in boom length.
 The contractor shall not be allowed to use defective equipment or tools not adhering to
safety norms.
 Contractor shall arrange non-sparking tools for project construction works in operating
plant areas / hydrocarbon prone areas.
 Wherever required the Contractor shall make use of Elevated Work Platforms (EWP) or
Aerial Work Platforms (mobile or stationary) to avoid ergonomical risks and workmen
shall be debarred to board such elevated platform during the course of their shifting/
transportation.
 Contractor shall ensure installation of Safe Load Indicator (SLI) on all cranes (while in use)
to minimize overloading risk. SLI shall have capability to continuously monitor and display
the load on the hook, and automatically compare it with the rated crane capacity at the
operating condition of the crane. The system shall also provide visual and audible warnings
at set capacity levels to alert the operator in case of violations.
Page 6321 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
 The contractor shall be responsible for safe operations of different equipment’s mobilized
and used by him at the workplace like transport vehicles, engines, cranes, mobile ladders,
scaffoldings, work tools, etc.
 The Contractor shall arrange periodical training for the operators of hydra, crane,
excavator, mobile machinery, etc. at site by utilizing services from renowned
manufacturers
3.3.9 Occupational Health
 The contractor shall identify all operations that can adversely affect the health of its
workers and issue & implement mitigation measures.
 For surface cleaning operations, sand blasting shall not be permitted even if not explicitly
stated elsewhere in the contract.
 To eliminate radiation hazard, Tungsten electrodes used for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
shall not contain Thorium.
 Appropriate respiratory protective devices (hood with respiratory devices) shall be used to
protect workmen from inhalation of air borne contaminants like silica, asbestos, gases,
fumes, etc.
 Workmen shall be made aware of correct methods for lifting, carrying, pushing & pulling
of heavy loads. Wherever possible, manual handling shall be replaced by mechanical lifting
equipment’s.
 For jobs like drilling/demolishing/dismantling where noise pollution exceeds the specified
limit of 85decibels, ear muffs shall be provided to the workers.
 To avoid work related upper limb disorders (WRULD) and backaches, Display Screen
Equipment’s' workplace stations shall be carefully designed & used with proper sitting
postures. Power driven hand-held tools shall be maintained in good working condition to
minimize their vibrating effects and personnel using these tools shall be taught how to
operate them safely & how to maintain good blood circulation in hands.
 The Contractor shall arrange health check-up (by registered medical practitioner) for all the
workers at the time of induction. Health check may have to be repeated if the nature of duty
assigned to him is changed necessitating health check or doubt arises about his wellness.
EIL/Owner reserves the right to ask the contractor to submit medical test reports. Regular
health check-ups are mandatory for the workers assigned with Welding, Radiography,
Blasting, Painting, Heavy Lift and Height (>2m) jobs. All the health check-ups shall be
conducted by registered Medical practitioner and records are to be maintained by the
Contractor.
 The Contractor shall arrange Medical Camps at regular intervals at work sites and labor
colonies to assess health condition of workers.
 The Contractor shall ensure vaccination of all the workers including their families, during
the course of entire project span.
3.3.10 Hazardous substances

 Hazardous, inflammable and/or toxic materials such as solvent coating, thinners, anti-
termite solutions, water proofing materials shall be stored in appropriate containers
preferably with lids having spillage catchment trays and shall be stored in a good ventilated
area. These containers shall be labeled with the name of the materials highlighting the
hazards associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken. Respective MSDS
Page 6322 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
(Material Safety Data Sheet) shall be made available at site & may be referred whenever
problem arises.
 Where contact or exposure of hazardous materials are likely to exceed the specified limit or
otherwise have harmful effects, appropriate personal protective equipment’s such as
gloves, goggles/face-shields, aprons, chemical resistant clothing, respirator, etc. shall be
used.
 The work place shall be checked prior to start of activities to identify the location, type and
condition of any asbestos materials which could be disturbed during the work. In case
asbestos material is detected, usage of appropriate PPEs by all personnel shall be ensured
and the matter shall be reported immediately to EIL/ Owner.
3.3.11 Slips, trips & falls
The contractor shall establish a regular cleaning and basic housekeeping programme that covers
all aspects of the workplace to help minimize the risk of slips, trips & falls. The contractor shall
take positive measures like keeping the work area tidy, storing waste in suitable containers &
harmful items separately, keeping passages, stairways, entrances & exits especially emergency
ones clear, cleaning up spillages immediately and replacing damaged carpet/ floor tiles, mats &
rugs at once to avoid slips, trips & falls.
 Grating removal permit system should be implemented during construction phase. So that after
permanent gratings are installed on platforms and tech structure floors; removal of any gratings
for whatever purpose (including for lifting piping material etc.) is required to be sanctioned by
signed permit by HSE officers of both contractor and Engineer-in-charge. The spot where
gratings are removed shall be hard-barricaded during course of work. The removed gratings
shall be re-installed immediately after completion of work or at the time of cessation of work
every day whichever is earlier and the permit shall be closed on daily basis. A register shall be
maintained for recording all the grating removal permits and their closure shall be monitored on
daily basis.
3.3.12 Radiation exposure
 All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing & non-ionizing radiation,
including ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided with adequate
shielding or protection commensurate with the type of exposure involved.
 For Open Field Radiography works, requirements of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre
(BARC)/ Atomic Energy Regulatory Board (AERB) shall be followed.
 The Contractor shall implement an effective system of control (as described in the AERB
regulations) at site for handling radiography-sources & for avoiding its misuse & theft.
 The contractor shall generate the Format No: HSE-8 “Permit for radiation work” before
start of work.
 In case the radiography work has to be carried out at day time, suitable methodology to be
used so that other works, people are not affected.
3.3.13 Explosives/Blasting operations
 Blasting operations shall be carried out as per latest Explosive Rules (Indian/ International)
with prior permission. The Contractor shall obtain license from Chief Controller of
Explosives (CCoE) for collection, transportation, storage of explosives as well as for
carrying out blasting operations.
Page 6323 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
 The Contractor shall prepare exclusive method statement (in cognizance with statutory
requirements) for diffusing unfired explosives, if any, at project site before carrying out
actual task. Nowhere blasting shall be carried out by the Contractor or its agency without
the involvement of competent supervisor and licensed blaster / shot blaster.
3.3.14 Demolition/ Dismantling
 The contractor shall adhere to safe demolishing/ dismantling practices at all stages of work
to guard against unsafe working practices.
 The contractor shall disconnect service lines (power, gas supply, water, etc.)/ make
alternate arrangements prior to start of work and restore them, if required as directed by
EIL/ Owner at no extra cost.
 Before carrying out any demolition/dismantling work, the contractor shall take prior
approval of EIL/Owner and generate the Format No.HSE-9. For revamp jobs in operating
plants where location of underground utilities is not known with certainty, the contractor
shall depute an experienced engineer for supervision and shall make adequate arrangements
for fire-fighting & First-Aid during the execution of these activities.
 The Contractor shall arrange approved HIRAC / Method Statement for the specific
demolition / dismantling task and corresponding action plan commensurate with hazards /
risks associated therein. In no case any activity related to demolition / dismantling shall be
carried out by the Contractor without engaging own supervision / field engineer.
3.3.15 Road Safety
 The Contractor shall ensure adequately planned road transport safety management system.
 The vehicles shall be fitted with reverse warning alarms & flashing lights / fog-lights and
usage of seat belts shall be ensured.
 The Contractor shall also ensure a separate pedestrian route for safety of the workers and
comply with all traffic rules & regulations, including maintaining speed limit of 20 KMPH
or indicated by owner for all types of vehicles / mobile machinery. The maximum
allowable speed shall be adhered to.
 In case of an alert or emergency, the Contractor must arrange clearance of all the routes,
roads, access. The Contractor shall deploy sufficient number of traffic controllers at project
site routes / roads/ accesses, to alert reversing movement of vehicles & machinery as well
as pedestrians.
 Dumpers, Tippers, etc. shall not be allowed to carry workers within the plant area and also
to & from the labour colony to & from project sites.
 Hydras shall only be allowed for handling the materials at fabrication/ storage yards and in
no case shall be allowed to transport the materials over project / plant roads.
 The Contractor shall not deploy any such mobile machinery / equipment, which do not
have competent operator and / or experienced banks-man/ signal-man. Such machinery/
equipment shall have effective limit-switches, reverse-alarm, front & rear-end lights etc.
and shall be maintained in good working order.
 The Contractor shall not carry-out maintenance of vehicles / mobile machinery occupying
space on project / plant roads and shall always arrange close supervision for such works.
 For pipeline jobs, the contractor shall submit a comprehensive plan covering transportation,
loading / unloading of pipes, movement of side booms, movement of vehicles on the ROW,
etc.
 Contractor shall arrange/ install visible road signs, diversion boards, caution boards, etc. on
project roads for safe movement of men and machinery.
Page 6324 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
3.3.16 Welfare measures

Contractor shall, at the minimum, ensure the following facilities at work sites:
 A crèche at site where 10 or more female workers are having children below the age of 6
years.
 Adequately ventilated / illuminated rooms at labour camps & its hygienic up-keeping.
 Reasonable canteen facilities at site and in labour camps at appropriate location depending
upon site conditions. Contractor shall make use of “industrial” variety of LPG cylinder &
satisfactory illumination at the canteens. Necessary arrangement for efficient disposal of
wastes from canteens & urinals /toilets shall also be made and regular review shall be made
to maintain the ambience satisfactorily hygienic &shall also comply with all applicable
statutory requirements.
 Adequately lighted & ventilated Rest rooms at site (separate for male workers and female
workers).
 Provision for suitable mobile toilets to be made available by Contractor for remote/scattered
job locations.
 Urinals, Toilets, drinking water, washing facilities, adequate lighting at site and labour
camps, commensurate with applicable Laws/ Legislation.
3.3.17 Environment Protection
Contractor shall ensure proper storage and utilization methodology of materials that are
detrimental to the environment. Where required, Contractor shall ensure that only the
environment friendly materials are selected and emphasize on recycling of waste materials, such
as metals, plastics, glass, paper, oil & solvents. The waste that cannot be minimized, reused or
recovered shall be stored and disposed of safely. In no way, toxic spills shall be allowed to
percolate into the ground. The contractor shall not use the empty areas for dumping the wastes.
Contractor to submit Environmental Aspect Impact Register detailing the list of activities in his
scope, the respective environmental impact and the actions taken to minimize the impact.
Environmental Aspect Impact Register to be prepared as per Format HSE-18 and to be updated
and maintained till job completion.
The contractor shall strive to conserve energy and water wherever feasible.
The contractor shall ensure dust free environment at workplace by sprinkling water on the
ground at frequent intervals. The air quality parameters for dust, poisonous gases, toxic releases,
harmful radiations, etc. shall be checked by the contractor on daily basis and whenever need
arises.
The contractor shall not be allowed to discharge chemicals, oil, silt, sewage, sullage and other
waste materials directly into the controlled waters like surface drains, streams, rivers, ponds. A
discharge plan suggesting the methods of treating the waste before discharging shall be
submitted to EIL/Owner for approval.
For pipeline jobs, top soil shall be stacked separately while making ROW through fields. This
fertile soil shall be placed back on top after backfilling.
For offshore construction barges, arrangements shall be made for safe disposal of human, food
& other wastes and applicable laws in this regard shall be followed.
3.3.18 Rules & Regulations
All persons deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the environmental laws,
rules & regulations relating to the hazardous materials, substances and wastes. Contractor shall
not dump, release or otherwise discharge or disposes off any such materials without the express
Page 6325 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
authorization of EIL/Owner. An indicative list of Statutory Acts & Rules relating to HSE is
given under Appendix-D.
3.3.19 Weather Protection

Contractor shall take appropriate measures to protect workers from severe storms, rain, solar
radiations, poisonous gases, dust, etc. by ensuring proper usage of PPEs like Sun glasses, Sun
screen lotions, respirators, dust masks, etc. and rearranging/ planning the construction activities
to suit the weather conditions. Effective arrangement (without creating inconvenience to project
facilities & permanent installations) for protecting workmen from hailstorm, drizzle in the form
of temporary shelter shall be made at site.
3.3.20 Communication
All persons deployed at the work site shall have access to effective means of communication so
that any untoward incident can be reported immediately and assistance sought by them.
All health & safety information shall be communicated in a simple & clear language easily
understood by the local workforce.
For information to all, typical subjects that should be communicated are: -
Inside the company (Top to down)

a. Quality Policy
b. HSE Policy contents
c. Environment Policy
d. HSE Objectives
e. Safety Cardinal Rules
f. HSE Target – reached or missed
g. Praises & Warnings to personnel for HSE Management
h. Safety Walk Through Reports and safety defects / shortfalls (by management)
i. HSE Audit results
j. Revised Statutory Health & Safety provisions, if any
k. H & S publicity
l. Suggestions
Inside the Company (Bottom to up)

a. Complaints
b. Compliances on safety defects / shortfalls
c. Suggestions
d. Proposals for changes & improvements
e. HSE Reports (including near-miss reports)
3.3.21 Confined Space Entry

The contractor shall generate a work permit (Format No. HSE -7) before entering a confined
space. People, who are permitted to enter into confined space, must be medically examined &
certified by registered doctor, confirming their ‘medical fitness for working in confined space’.
All necessary precautions mentioned therein shall be adhered to. An attendant shall be
positioned outside a confined space for extending help during an emergency. Effective
communication shall be maintained between personnel in confined space and outside by
combination of visual/voice or portable radio. Compressed gas cylinders shall not be taken into
confine space. Entry Register for confined space to be maintained with the name and time of
entry/exit. All appropriate PPEs and air quality parameters shall be checked before entering a
confined space. It shall be ensured that the piping of the equipment which has to be opened is
pressure- free by checking that blinds are in place, vents are open and volume is drained. Inside
Page 6326 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
confined space works, only electrical facilities/ installations of 24V shall be permitted.
Contactor shall ensure usage of safe & suitable arrangement of oxygen supply for individual
workmen (during the course of work in confined space), if oxygen concentration is found to be
less than 19.5% (v/v) there.
3.3.22 Heavy Lifts

 The contractor shall submit detailed rigging studies plan for EIL/ Owner approval prior to
lifting equipment which cannot be erected with a crane of approx. 100 MT capacity due to
constraints of its dimensions, location of foundation height, approach & weight.
 Contractor shall generate the format no:HSE-15 “Permit for heavy lift/critical erection”
 The Safe Working Load (SWL) and manufacturer’s serial numbers shall be clearly marked
on the slings and the lifting gears, either by tagging, stamping, engraving or embossing.
 Prior to actual lifting activities, contractor shall check the validity of the crane inspection
certificate issued by statutory/ competent authority. This requirement shall also apply to all
rigging equipment’s utilized for the job.
 The contractor shall, at all times, be responsible for all rigging activities.
 The Contractor shall ensure medical fitness of all workmen who are engaged / involved in
erection of equipment’s, vessels etc. and such fitness checks shall be carried-out every six
months interval with the help of a registered medical practitioner & record shall be
maintained
 Adequate safety measures such as positive barricading, usage of appropriate PPEs, permit
to work, etc. shall be taken during all heavy or critical lifts.
 For lifting any material (irrespective of shape, size or volume), at any height, it is always
advisable to prepare a Plan of Erection (PoE) taking into consideration hazards & risks
associated therein – this can enable people to put their own experiences of various natures
& side-by-side establish a practical method for risk-free erection / lifts. The contractor shall
prepare PoE & shall document the same, when risks are identified as “medium” or “high”
and the same shall be approved by its competent / qualified engineer.
3.3.23 Key Performance Indicators
The contractor shall measure an activity in both leading & trailing indicators for statistical and
performance measurement. The activities pertaining to key performance indicators are covered
in Monthly HSE Report (Format No. HSE-5). The contractor shall try to achieve a statistically
fair record and strive for its continual improvement.
Leading Indicators viz :-
- Number of Safety Inductions carried-out at site (for workmen & staff members)
- Number of HSE inspections carried out
- Number of “Safety Walk Through” carried-out by site-head.
- Number of HSE shortfalls / lapses identified per contractor& closed-out in time.
- Number of Safety Meetings conducted (in-house / with contractors)
- Number of HSE Audits made (internal & external) vis-à-vis non conformances raised
- Number of HSE Awareness / Motivational program conducted by contractors
- Number of HSE Trainings conducted at site for supervisors & workmen
- Study of Near miss case reported
- Encouragements / Awards / Recognitions to workmen, job supervisors & field engineers.
- Suggestions for improvement
Page 6327 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
Trailing Indicators viz :-
- Calculation of HSE statistics viz frequency rate, severity rate, LTA free manhours, etc.
- Analysis of incidents / accidents (nature, severity, types etc.)
- Study of Incident / Accident with respect to :-
 Variety
 Period of the year / project span
 Timings of the incident / accident
 Age profile of victims
 Body parts involved
 Penalty levied for causing incident / accident
3.3.24 Unsuitable Land Conditions

Contractor shall take appropriate measures and necessary work permits/clearances if work is to
be done in or around marshy areas, river crossings, mountains, monuments, etc. The Contractor
shall make right assessment and take all necessary action for developing work areas to make
them safe & suitable for crane operations or other vehicular movement before carrying out any
project related activity / operation. Contractor shall take all necessary actions to make the
surroundings of its site establishments (site office, stores, lay-down area etc.) work-worthy
safe and secure.
3.3.25 Under Water Inspection
Contractor shall ensure that boats and other means used for transportation, surveying &
investigation works shall be certified seaworthy by a recognized classification society. It shall
be equipped with all life saving devices like life jackets, adequate fire protection arrangements
and shall posses communication facilities like cellular phones, wireless, walkie-talkie. All
divers used for seabed surveys, underwater inspections shall have required authorized license,
suitable life saving kit. Number of hours of work by divers shall be limited as per regulations.
EIL/ Owner shall have the right to inspect the boat and scrutinize documents in this regard.
3.3.26 Excavation
The Contractor shall obtain permission from competent authorities prior to excavation wherever
required.
The Contractor shall locate the position of buried utilities (water line, cable route, etc.) by
referring to project / plant drawing / in consultation with EIL/Owner. The Contractor shall start
digging manually to locate the exact position of buried utilities & thereafter use mechanical
means.
The Contractor shall keep soil heaps at least 1.5 M away from edge or a distance equal to depth
of pit (whichever is more).
All excavated pits greater than 10 Sq.M plan area and depth more than 1.5M shall have at least
two access routes for ingress and egress. Also, additional access routes shall be provided such
that distance between any two access routes shall not be more than 20M.
The Contractor shall maintain sufficient “angle of repose” during excavation – shall also
provide slope or suitable bench as decided by EIL / Owner.
The Contractor shall arrange “battering” or “benching” wherever required for preventing
collapse of edge of excavations.
The Contractor shall identify & arrange de-watering pump or well-point system to prevent earth
collapse due to heavy rain / influx of underground water.
Page 6328 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
The Contractor shall arrange protective fencing/ barricading with warning signal around
excavated pits, trenches, etc. along with minimum 2 (two) entries, exits/ escape ladders.
The Contractor must avoid “underpinning” / under-cutting to prevent collapse of chunk of earth
during excavation
The Contractor shall use “stoppers” to prevent over-run of vehicle wheels at the edge of
excavated pits/ trenches.
The Contractor shall arrange strengthening of “shoring” & “strutting” proactively to avoid
collapse of earth/ edges due to vehicular movement in close proximity of excavated areas/ pits/
trenches, etc.
3.4 Tool Box Talks (TBT)
Contractor shall conduct daily TBT with workers prior to start of work and shall maintain
proper record of the meeting. A suggested format is given below. The TBT is to be conducted
by the immediate supervisor of the workers
The Contractor shall conduct TBT before start of every morning or evening shift or night shift
activities, for alerting the workers on specific hazards and their appropriate dos & don’ts. The
Contractor shall provide sufficient rests to the site workmen and their foremen to avert fatigue
& thereby endangering their lives during the course of site works.
TOOLBOX TALK RECORDING SHEET

Date & Time
Work Location
Subject (Nature of work)
Presenter
Hazards involved
Precautions to be taken
Worker's Name Signature Section
Remarks, in any
The topics during TBT shall include
- Hazards related to work assigned on that day and precautions to be taken.

- Any forthcoming HSE hazards/events/instruction/orders, etc.
The above record can be kept in local language, which workers can read. These records shall be
made available to EIL/ Owner whenever demanded.
3.5 Training & Induction Programme
 Initial induction of workers into Construction oriented activities and appraising them about
the methodology of works and how to carry-out safely and the same should not be inter
mixed with Tool Box Talks or HSE Training. In this regard careful action should be made
& maintained for imparting HSE induction to every individual, irrespective of his
task/designation/level of employment, whereas, HSE Training should be imparted to
specific person/group of people who are to carry-out that specific task more than once – for
example, Riggers must be trained for working at heights, welders must be trained for work
in confined space, fitters/carpenters, mesons must be trained for work at heights, etc.
Page 6329 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
 Contractor shall conduct Safety induction programme on HSE for all his workers and
maintain records. The Gate Pass shall be issued only to those workers who successfully
qualify the Safety induction programme.
 The Contractor shall brief the visitors about the HSE precautions which are required to be
taken before their proceeding to site and make necessary arrangements to issue appropriate
PPEs like Aprons, hard hats, ear-plugs, goggles & safety shoes etc., to his visitors. The
Contractor shall always maintain relevant acknowledgement from visitor on providing him
brief information on HSE actions.
 Contractor shall ensure that all his personnel possess appropriate training to carry out the
assigned job safely. The training should be imparted in a language understood by them and
should specifically be trained about
- Potential hazards to which they may be exposed at their workplace

- Measures available for prevention and elimination of these hazards
The topics during training shall cover, at the minimum: -
- Why safety should be considered during work - explanation

- Education about hazards and precautions required
- Employees’ duties & responsibilities
- Emergency and evacuation plan
- HSE requirements during project activities
- Fire fighting and First-Aid
- Use of PPEs
- Occupational health issues – dos & don’ts
- Local laws on intoxicating drinks, drugs, smoking in force
- Common environmental subjects – lighting, ventilation, vibration, smoke/fumes etc.
 Records of the training shall be kept and submitted to EIL/ Owner.
 The Contractor shall make regular program for conducting Safety Training on various
topics related to various activities & their safe-guarding utilizing experienced persons /
outside agency / faculty. A program for Safety Training (indicative list as per Appendix –F)
shall be furnished by the Contractor in its HSE Plan.
 For offshore and jetty jobs, contractor shall ensure that all personnel deployed have
undergone a structured sea survival training including use of lifeboats, basket landing, use
of radio communication etc. from an agency acceptable to Owner/EIL.
3.6 ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKING INSIDE A RUNNING

PLANT
As a minimum, the contractor shall ensure adherence to following safety requirements while
working in or in the close vicinity of an operating plant:
a) Contractor shall obtain permits for Hot work, Cold work, Excavation and Confined Space
from Owner in the prescribed format.
b) The contractor shall monitor record and compile list of his workers entering the operational
plant/unit each day and ensure & record their return after completing the job.
Page 6330 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
c) Contractor’s workers and staff members shall use designated entrances and proceed by
designated routes to work areas only assigned to them. The workers shall not be allowed to
enter units' area, tanks area, pump rooms, etc. without work authorization permit.
d) Work activities shall be planned in such a way so as to minimize the disruption of other
activities being carried out in an operational plant/unit and activities of other contractors.
e) The contractor shall submit a list of all chemicals/toxic substances that are intended to be
used at site and shall take prior approval of the Owner.
f) Specific training on working in a hydrocarbon plant shall be imparted to the work force and
mock drills shall be carried out for Rescue operations/First-Aid measures.
g) Proper barricading/cordoning of the operational units/plants shall be done before starting

the construction activities. No unauthorized person shall be allowed to trespass. The height
and overall design of the barricading structure shall be finalized in consultation with the
Owner and shall be got approved from the Owner.
h) Care shall be taken to prevent hitting underground facilities such as electrical cables,
hydrocarbon piping during execution of work.
i) Barricading with water curtain shall be arranged in specific/critical areas where

hydrocarbon vapors are likely to be present such as near horton spheres or tanks.
Positioning of fire tenders (from owner) shall also be ensured during execution of critical
activities.
j) Emergency evacuation plan shall be worked out and all workmen shall be apprised about
evacuation routes. Mock drill operations may also be conducted.
k) Flammable gas test shall be conducted prior to any hot work using appropriate measuring
instruments. Sewers, drains, vents or any other gas escaping points shall be covered with
flame retardant tarpaulin.
l) Respiratory devices shall be kept handy while working in confined zones where there is a
danger of inhalation of poisonous gases. Constant monitoring of presence of
Gas/Hydrocarbon shall be done.
m) Clearance shall be obtained from all parties before starting hot tapping, patchwork on live
lines and work on corroded tank roof.
n) Positive isolation of line/equipment by blinding for welding/cutting/grinding shall be done.

Closing of valve will not be considered sufficient for isolation.
o) Welding spatters shall be contained properly and in no case shall be allowed to fall on the
ground containing oil. Similar care shall be taken during cutting operations.
p) The vehicles, cranes, engines, etc. shall be fitted with spark arresters on the exhaust pipe
and got it approved from Safety Department of the Owner.
q) Plant air should not be used to clean any part of the body or clothing or use to blow off dirt
on the floor.
r) Gas detectors should be installed in gas leakage prone areas as per requirement of Owner's
plant operation personnel.
s) Experienced full time safety personnel shall be exclusively deployed to monitor safety
aspects in running plants.
Page 6331 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
3.7 Self Assessment and Enhancement

The contractor shall develop a method of check & balance through self assessment &
enhancement techniques and shall explore the opportunities for continual improvement in the
HSE system.
3.8 HSE Promotion

The contractor shall encourage his workforce to promote HSE efforts at workplace by way of
organizing workshops/ seminars/ training programmes, celebrating HSE awareness weeks
&National Safety Day, conducting quizzes & essay competitions, distributing pamphlets,
posters & material on HSE, providing incentives for maintaining good HSE practices and
granting incentives / bonus for completing the job without any lost time accident.
3.9 Lock Out and Tag Out (LOTO) for Isolation of Energy Source
 Contractor shall follow the LOTO/ Isolation procedure of owner for all energy source
isolations installed/under purview by/of owner i.e. “Brown field”
 For all the other energy source (not under purview of client/owner) i.e. “Green field”
Contractor shall develop a system to ensure the isolation of equipments, pipelines, Vessel,
electrical panels from the energy source covering following as minimum:-
- Identification of all energy source viz electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,

chemical, thermal, gravitational, radiation and other forms of stored or kinetic
energy.
- Establishing the energy isolation devices viz: manually operated electrical circuit
breakers, disconnection switches, blind flanges, etc.
- Installation of Lock Out devices for preventing the inadvertent release of stored
energy and Tag Out devices (“Danger”, “Do Not operate” or Do not Remove” tags)
to indicate that testing, maintenance or servicing is underway and the device cannot
be operated until the tag out device is removed.
- Lock Out and Tag out log book
- Permit for isolation and de-isolation of energy source as per format NO: HSE-16
- Availability of competent persons like experienced operators at substations, pump
house, units, etc, supervisors etc.
 Contractor shall ensure that all the sources are locked out and tagged properly before giving
clearance to start the job.
 After the completion of job, contractor shall ensure all tools and tackles are removed and
nobody is present in the working area and signing on LOTO log book.
 Only on confirmation of above the contractor will remove their lock and tag from the
isolation points and give instructions for energizing the same. Only the person carrying out
the task shall himself carry the key for the lock in /Lock out.
4.0 DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR

4.1 On Award of Contract
The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive Health, Safety and Environmental Plan or
programme for approval by EIL/Owner prior to start of work. The Contractor shall participate in
the pre-start meeting with EIL/Owner to finalize HSE Plans which shall including the
following:
- HSE policy & Objectives
- Job procedure to be followed by the Contractor for construction activities including
handling of equipment’s, scaffolding, electric installations, etc. describing the risks
involved, actions to be taken and methodology for monitoring each activity. Indicative list
of procedures is enclosed as Annexure-H
- EIL/Owner review/audit requirement.
Page 6332 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
- Organization structure along with responsibility and authority, on HSE activities.

- Administrative & disciplinary steps involving implementation of HSE requirements
- Emergency evacuation plan/ procedures for site and labour camps
- Procedures for reporting & investigation of accidents and near misses.
- HSE Inspection
- HSE Training programmes at project site
- HSE Awareness programmes, at project site
- Reference to Rules, Regulations and statutory requirements.
- HIRAC
- Environment Aspect Impact Register
- Legal Register
- HSE documentation viz reporting, analysis & record keeping.
4.2 During Job Execution

Contractor shall implement approved Health, Safety and Environment management programme
including but not limited to as brought out under para 3.0. Contractor shall also ensure:
 to arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI Act, third party
liability insurance, registration under BOCW Act etc., as applicable.
 to arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable), like permits for hot
work, working at heights (Refer Format No. HSE-6), confined space (Refer Format No.
HSE-7), Radiation Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-8), Demolishing/ Dismantling
Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-9), Permit for erection/modification & dismantling of
scaffolding (Refer Format No:HSE-14),Permit for heavy lift/critical erection (Refer Format
No:HSE-15) ,Permit for energy Isolation & De-isolation” (HSE-16) ,storage of chemical
/explosive materials & its use and implement all precautions mentioned therein. In this
regard, requirements of Oil industry Safety Directorate Standard No. Std-105 "Work
Permit Systems” shall be complied with while working in existing Oil or Gas processing
plants. List of the persons involved shall be maintained as annexure to the work permit
issued for a particular activity.
 to submit, timely, the completed checklist on HSE activities in Format No.HSE-1, Monthly
HSE report in Format No.HSE-5 (use of web based package (www.eil.co.in/conthse) is
compulsory wherever the facility is available else a hard copy is to be submitted), accident/
incident reports, investigation reports etc. as per EIL/Owner requirements. Compliance of
instructions on HSE shall be done by Contractor and informed urgently to EIL/Owner.
 that his top most executive at site attends all the Safety Committee/HSE meetings arranged
by EIL/Owner and carries out safety walk regularly. Only in case of his absence from site
that a second senior most person shall be nominated by him, in advance, and
communicated to EIL/Owner for performing the above tasks.
 display at site office and at prominent locations HSE Policy, caution boards, list of
hospitals, emergency services available, safety signs like Men at work, Speed Limits,
Hazardous Area, various do’s & don’ts, etc.
 provide posters, banners for safe working to promote safety consciousness.
 identify, assess, analyze & mitigate the construction hazards& incorporate relevant control
measures before actually executing site works. (HIRAC = Hazard Identification, Risk
Analysis and Control).
 identify, assess, analyze & mitigate the environmental impact & incorporate relevant
control measures through Environmental Aspect Impact Register
 Identify and comply to all applicable HSE related legal requirements by preparing and
maintaining a Legal register
 arrange testing, examination, inspection of own as well as borrowed construction
equipment’s / machinery (stationary &mobile) before being used at site and also at
periodical interval, through own resources and also by 3rd party competent agencies (as
Page 6333 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
deemed fit in statutes). Records of such test, examination etc. shall be maintained & shall
be submitted to EIL/Owner as & when asked for.
 carryout audits/ inspection (internal & external) at his works as well as sub-contractor
works as per approved HSE plan/ procedure/ programme & submit the compliance reports
of identified shortfalls for EIL/Owner review.
 arranging HSE training for site workmen (of his own & sub-contractors) through internal or
external faculty at periodical intervals.
 Assistance& cooperate during HSE audits by EIL/Owner or any other 3rd party and submit
compliance report.
 Generate & submit of HSE records/report as per this specification.
 apprise EIL/Owner on HSE activities at site regularly.
 carry-out all dismantling activities safely, with prior approval of EIL/Owner representative.
 The Contractor shall ensure that “Hot works” and painting works do not continue at the
same place / location at project site for which chance or probability of “fire” incident
exists.
4.3 During Short Listing of the Sub-Contractors

The contractor shall review the HSE management system of the sub-contractors in line with the
requirements given in this specification. The contractor shall be held responsible for the
shortcomings observed in the HSE management system of the sub-contractor(s) during
execution of the job.
5.0 RECORDS
At the minimum, the contractor shall maintain/ submit HSE records in the following reporting
formats:
Safety Walk Through Report HSE-1
Accident/ Incident Report HSE-2
Supplementary Accident/ Incident Investigation report HSE-3
Near Miss Incident Report HSE-4
Monthly HSE Report HSE-5
Permit for working at height HSE-5
Permit for working in confined space HSE-7
Permit for radiation work HSE-8
Permit for demolishing/ dismantling HSE-9
Daily Safety checklist HSE-10
Housekeeping Assessment & compliance HSE-11
Inspection of temporary electrical booth/installation HSE-12
Inspection for scaffolding HSE-13
Permit for erection/modification &dismantling of scaffolding HSE-14
Permit for heavy lift/critical erection. HSE-15
Permit for Energy isolation and de-isolation. HSE-16
Permit for Excavation HSE-17
Inspection reports of Equipment/tools/tackles *
Report of Toolbox talks As indicated in
specification
PPE issue report/register *
Site inspection reports *
Training records *
(*) The formats shall be developed in consultation with EIL/Owner.
Page 6334 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
A. IS CODES ON HSE
SP: 53 Safety code for the use, Care and protection of hand operated tools.
IS: 838 Code of practice for safety & health requirements in electric and gas welding
and cutting operations
IS: 1179 Eye & Face precautions during welding, equipment etc.
IS: 1860 Safety requirements for use, care and protection of abrasive grinding wheels.
IS: 1989 (Pt -II) Leather safety boots and shoes
IS: 2925 Industrial Safety Helmets
IS: 3016 Code of practice for fire safety precautions in welding & cutting operation.
IS: 3043 Code of practice for earthing
IS: 3764 Code of safety for excavation work
IS: 3786 Methods for computation of frequency and severity rates for industrial injuries
and classification of industrial accidents
IS: 3696 Safety Code of scaffolds and ladders
IS: 4083 Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction materials and
components at site
IS: 4770 Rubber gloves for electrical purposes
IS: 5121 Safety code for piling and other deep foundations
IS: 5216 (Pt-I) Recommendations on Safety procedures and practices in electrical works
IS: 5557 Industrial and Safety rubber lined boots
IS: 5983 Eye protectors
IS: 6519 Selection, care and repair of Safety footwear
IS: 6994 (Pt-I) Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Cotton Gloves)
IS: 7293 Safety Code for working with construction Machinery
IS: 8519 Guide for selection of industrial safety equipment for body protection
IS: 9167 Ear protectors
IS: 11006 Flash back arrestor (Flame arrestor)
IS: 11016 General and safety requirements for machine tools and their operation
IS: 11057 Specification for Industrial safety nets
IS: 11226 Leather safety footwear having direct moulded rubber sole
IS: 11972 Code of practice for safety precaution to be taken when entering a sewerage
system
IS: 13367 Code of practice-safe use of cranes
IS: 13416 Recommendations for preventive measures against hazards at working place
Page 6335 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
B. INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ON HSE
Safety Glasses : ANSI Z 87.1, ANSI ZZ 87.1, AS 1337, BS 2092,

BS 1542, BS 679, DIN 4646/ 58311
Safety Shoes : ANSI Z 41.1, AS 2210, EN 345
Hand Gloves : BS 1651
Ear Muffs : BS 6344, ANSI S 31.9
Hard Hat : ANSI Z 89.1/89.2, AS 1808, BS 5240, DIN 4840
Goggles : ANSI Z 87.1
Face Shield : ANSI Z 89.1
Breathing Apparatus : BS 4667, NIOSH
Welding & Cutting : ANSI Z49.1
Safe handling of compressed:P-1 (Compressed Gas Association Gases in cylinders 1235

Jefferson Davis Highway,
Arlington VA 22202 - USA)
Full body harness : EN-361
Lanyard : EN-354
Karabiner : EN-362 and EN-12275
Page 6336 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-B
DETAILS OF FIRST AID BOX
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SL. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
NO.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Small size Roller Bandages, 1 Inch Wide (Finger Dressing small) 6 Pcs.
2. Medium size Roller Bandages, 2 Inches Wide (Hand & Foot Dressing) 6 Pcs.
3. Large size Roller Bandages, 4 Inches Wide (Body Dressing Large) 6 Pcs.
4. Large size Burn Dressing (Burn Dressing Large) 4 Pkts.
5. Cotton Wool (20 gms packing) 4 Pkts.
6. Antiseptic Solution Dettol (100 ml.) or Savlon 1 Bottle
7. Mercurochrome Solution (100 ml.) 2% in water 1 Bottle
8. Ammonia Solution (20 ml.) 1 Bottle
9. A Pair of Scissors 1 Piece
10. Adhesive Plaster (1.25 cm X 5 m) 1 Spool
11. Eye pads in Separate Sealed Pkt. 4 pcs.
12. Tourniqut 1 No.
13. Safety Pins 1 Dozen
14. Tinc. Iodine/ Betadin (100 ml.) 1 Bottle
15. Polythene Wash cup for washing eyes 1 No.
16. Potassium Permanganate (20 gms.) 1 Pkt.
17. Tinc. Benzoine (100 ml.) 1 Bottle
18. Triangular Bandages 2 Nos.
19. Band Aid Dressing 5 Pcs.
20. Iodex/Moov (25 gms.) 1 Bottle
21. Tongue Depressor 1 No.
22. Boric Acid Powder (20 gms.) 2 Pkt.
23. Sodium Bicarbonate (20 gms.) 1 Pkt.
24. Dressing Powder (Nebasulf) (10 gms.) 1 Bottle
25. Medicinal Glass 1 No.
26. Duster 1 No.
27. Booklet (English& Local Language) 1 No. each
28. Soap 1 No.
29. Toothache Solution 1 No.
30. Vicks (22 gms.) 1 Bottle
31. Forceps 1 No.
32. Note Book 1 No.
33. Splints 4 Nos.
34. Lock 1 Piece
35. Life Saving/Emergency/Over-the counter Drugs As decided at site
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Box size: 14" x 12" x 4"
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note : The medicines prescribed above are only indicative. Equivalent medicines can also be used.
A prescription, in this regard, shall be required from a qualified Physician.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 6337 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-C
TYPE OF FIRES VIS-À-VIS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire
Extinguisher
Multi-purpose
Fire Water Foam CO2 Dry Powder
(ABC)
Originated from can control can control

  minor surface 
paper, clothes, wood minor surface
fires fires
Inflammable liquids
like alcohol, diesel,     
petrol, edible oils,
bitumen
Originated from
gases like LPG,     
CNG, H2
Electrical fires     
LEGEND : : CAN BE USED
: NOT TO BE USED
Note: Fire extinguishing equipment must be checked atleast once a year and after every use by an
authorized person. The equipment must have an inspection label on which the next
inspection date is given. Type of extinguisher shall clearly be marked on it.
Page 6338 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-D
List of Statutory Acts & Rules Relating to HSE
- The Indian Explosives Act and Rules

- The Motor Vehicle Act and Central Motor Vehicle Rules
- The Factories Act and concerned Factory Rules
- The Petroleum Act and Petroleum Rules
- The Workmen Compensation Act
- The Gas Cylinder Rules and the Static & Mobile Pressure Vessels Rules
- The Indian Electricity Act and Rules
- The Indian Boiler Act and Regulations
- The Water (Prevention & Control & Pollution) Act
- The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess Act
- The Mines & Minerals (Regulation & Development) Act
- The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act
- The Atomic Energy Act
- The Radiation Protection Rules
- The Indian Fisheries Act
- The Indian Forest Act
- The Wild Life (Protection) Act
- The Environment (Protection) Act and Rules
- The Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules
- The Manufacturing, Storage & import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules
- The Public Liability Act
- The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Condition of service)
Act
- Other Statutory Acts like EPF, ESIS, Minimum Wage Act.
Page 6339 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-E (Sheet 1 of 12)
CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS, THEIR EFFECTS & PREVENTIVE MEASURES
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
ACTIVITY PREVENTIVE MEASURES
HAZARD HAZARD
(A) Falling into pit Personal injury Provide guard rails/ barricade with warning
EXCAVATION signal.
Provide atleast two entries/ exits.
Pit Excavation Provide escape ladders.
upto 3.0m Earth Collapse Suffocation/ Provide suitable size of shoring and strutting, if
Breathlessness required.
Buried Keep soil heaps away from the edge equivalent to
1.5m or depth of pit whichever is more.
Don't allow vehicles to operate too close to
excavated areas. Maintain atleast 2m distance
from edge of cut.
Maintain sufficient angle of repose. Provide
slope not less than 1:1 and suitable bench of 0.5m
width at every 1.5m depth of excavation in all
soils except hard rock.
Battering/benching the sides.
Contact with Electrocution Obtain permission from competent authorities,
buried electric Explosion prior to excavation, if required.
cables Locate the position of buried utilities by referring
Gas/ Oil to plant drawings.
Pipelines Start digging manually to locate the exact
position of buried utilities and thereafter use
mechanical means.
Pit Excavation Same as above Can cause Prevent ingress of water.
beyond 3.0m plus drowning situation Provide ring buoys.
Flooding due to Identify and provide suitable size dewatering
excessive rain/ pump or well point system.
underground
water
Digging in the Building/Structure Obtain prior approval of excavation method from
vicinity of may collapse local authorities.
existing Building/ Loss of health & Use under-pining method.
Structure wealth Construct retaining wall side by side.
Movement of May cause cave-in Barricade the excavated area with proper lighting
vehicles/ or slides. arrangements.
equipment’s close Persons may get Maintain at least 2m distance from edge of cut
to the edge of cut. buried. and use stop blocks to prevent over-run.
Strengthen shoring and strutting.
Page 6340 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-E: (Sheet 2 of 12)
CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS, THEIR EFFECTS & PREVENTIVE MEASURES (…Contd.)
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
Narrow deep Same as above May cause severe Battering/ benching of sides.
excavations for plus injuries or prove Provide escape ladders.
pipelines, etc. Frequent cave-in fatal
or slides
Flooding due to May arise drowning Same as above plus
Hydro- static situation Bail out accumulated water.
testing Maintain adequate ventilation.
Rock by Improper May prove fatal Ensure proper storage, handling & carrying of
excavation handling of explosives by trained personnel.
blasting explosives Comply with the applicable explosive acts &
rules.
Uncontrolled May cause severe Allow only authorized persons to perform
explosion injuries or prove blasting operations.
fatal Smoking and open flames are to be strictly
prohibited.
Scattering of Can hurt people Use PPE like goggles, face mask, helmets etc.
stone pieces in
atmosphere
Rock excavation Entrapping of May cause severe Barricade the area with red flags and blow siren
by blasting persons/ animals. injuries or prove before blasting.
(Contd.) fatal
Misfire May explode Do not return to site for atleast 20 minutes or
suddenly unless announced safe by designated person.
Piling Work Failure of pile- Can hurt people Inspect Piling rigs and pulley blocks before the
driving beginning of each shift.
equipment
Noise pollution Can cause deafness Use personal protective equipments like ear
and psychological plugs, muffs, etc.
imbalance.
Extruding Can hurt people Barricade the area and install sign boards.
rods/casing Provide first-aid.
Working in the Can cause Keep sufficient distance from Live-Electricity as
vicinity of 'Live- electrocution/ per IS code.
Electricity' Asphyxiation Shut off the supply, if possible.
Provide artificial/rescue breathing to the injured.
(B) Air pollution by May affect Wear respirators or cover mouth and nose with
CONCRETING cement Respiratory System wet cloth.
Handling of Hands may get Use gloves & other PPE.
ingredients injured
Protruding Feet may get Provide platform above reinforcement for
reinforcement injured movement of workers or provide end caps for
rods. protection on reinforcement bars.
Page 6341 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-E : (Sheet 3 of 12)
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
Earthing of Can cause Ensure earthing of equipments and proper
electrical electrocution/ functioning of electrical circuit before
mixers, asphyxiation commencement of work.
vibrators, etc.
not done.
Falling of Persons may get Use hard hats.
materials from injured Remove surplus material immediately from work
height place.
Ensure lighting arrangements during night hours.
Continuous Cause tiredness of Insist on shift pattern.
pouring by same workers and may Provide adequate rest to workers between
gang lead to accident. subsequent pours.
Revolving of Parts of body or Allow only mixers with hopper.
concrete mixer/ clothes may get Provide safety cages around moving motors.
vibrators entrapped. Ensure proper mechanical locking of vibrator.
Super-structure Same as above Shuttering/props Avoid excessive stacking on shuttering material.
plus may collapse and Check the design and strength of shuttering
Deflection in prove fatal material before commencement of work.
props or Rectify immediately the deflection noted during
shuttering concreting.
material
Passage to work Improperly tied and Ensure the stability and strength of passage
place designed before commencement of work.
props/planks may Do not overload and stand under the passage.
collapse
(C) Curtailment and Persons may get Use PPE like gloves, shoes, helmets, etc.
REINFORCE- binding of rods injured Avoid usage of shift tools.
MENT Carrying of rods Workers may get Provide suitable pads on shoulders and use safety
for short injured their hands gloves.
distances/at and shoulders. Tie up rods in easily liftable bundles.
heights Ensure proper staging.
Checking of Rods may cut or Use measuring devices like tape, measuring rods,
clear distance/ injure the fingers etc.
cover with hands
Hitting projected Persons may get Use safety shoes and avoid standing
rods and injured and fell unnecessarily on cantilever rods.
standing on down Avoid wearing of loose clothes.
cantilever rods.
Page 6342 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
Falling of material May prove fatal Use helmets.
from height Provide safety nets.
Transportation of Protruded rods may Use red flags/lights at the ends.

rods by trucks/ hit the persons Do not protrude the rods in front of or by the side
trailers of driver's cabin.
Do not extend the rods 1/3rd of deck length or
1.5m whichever is less.
(D) Welding radiates Radiation can Use specified shielding devices and other PPE of
WELDING invisible damage eyes and correct specifications.
AND GAS ultraviolet and skin. Avoid thoriated tungsten electrodes for GTAW.
CUTTING infra-red rays
Improper Explosion may occur Move out any leaking cylinder.
placement of Keep cylinders in vertical position.
oxygen and Use trolley for transportation of cylinders and
acetylene cylinders chain them.
Use flashback arrestors.
Leakage/ cuts in May cause fire Purge regulators immediately and then turn off.
hoses Never use grease or oil on oxygen line
connections and copper fittings on acetylene
lines.
Inspect regularly gas carrying hoses.
Always use red hose for acetylene & other
fuel gases and black for oxygen.
Opening-up of Cylinder may burst Always stand back from the regulator while
cylinder opening the cylinder.
Turn valve slowly to avoid bursting.
Cover the lug terminals to prevent short
circuiting.
Welding of tanks, Explosion may occur Empty & purge them before welding.
container or pipes Never attach the ground cable to tanks, container
storing flammable or pipe storing flammable liquids.
liquids Never use LPG for gas cutting.
Page 6343 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
(E) Ionizing Radiations may react Ensure Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB
RADIOGRAPHY radiation with the skin and can before commencement of job.
cause cancer, skin Cordon off the area and install Radiation warning
irritation, dermatitis, symbols.
etc. Restrict the entry of unauthorized persons.
Wear appropriate PPE and film badges issued by
BARC/AERB.
Transportation Same as above Never touch or handle radiography source with
and Storage of hands.
Radiography Store radiography source inside a pit in an
source exclusive isolated storage room with lock and
key arrangement. The pit should be approved by
BARC/AERB.
Radiography source should never be carried
either in passenger bus or in a passenger
compartment of trains.
BARC/AERB has to be informed before source
movement.
Permission from Director General of Civil
Aviation is required for booking radio isotopes
with airlines.
Loss of Radio Same as above Try to locate with the help of Survey Meter.
Isotope Inform BARC/AERB (*)
(F) Short circuiting Can cause Use rubberized hand gloves and other PPE.
ELECTRICAL Electrocution or Fire Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door ways.
INSTALLATION Allow only licensed electricians to perform on
AND USAGE electrical facilities.
Use one socket for one appliance.
Ensure usage of only fully insulated wires or
cables.
Don't place bare wire ends in a socket.
Ensure earthing of machineries and equipments
Do not use damaged cords and avoid temporary
connections.
Use spark-proof/ flame proof type field
distribution boxes.
(*) Atomic Energy Regulatory Board (AERB),

Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC)
Anushaktinagar, Mumbai – 400 094
Page 6344 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
ACTIVITY
HAZARD HAZARD
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Do not allow open/bare connections.
Provide all connections through 30mA ELCB.
Protect electrical cables/equipments from water
and naked flames.
Check all connections before energizing.
Overloading of Bursting of system Display voltage and current ratings prominently
Electrical can occur which with 'Danger' signs.
System leads to fire Ensure approved cable size, voltage grade and
type.
Switch off the electrical utilities when not in use.
Do not allow unauthorized connections.
Ensure proper grid wise distribution of Power.
Improper laying Can cause Do not lay unarmoured cable directly on ground,
of overhead and electrocution and wall, roof of trees.
underground prove fatal Maintain atleast 3m distance from HT cables.
transmission All temporary cables should be laid atleast 750
lines/cables mm below ground on 100 mm fine sand
overlying by brick soling.
Provide proper sleeves at crossings/ inter-
sections.
Provide cable route markers indicating the type
and depth of cables at intervals not exceeding
30m and at the diversions/ termination.
(G) Small fires can Cause burn injuries In case a fire breaks out, press fire alarm system
FIRE become big ones and may prove fatal and shout "Fire, Fire".
PREVENTION and may spread Keep buckets full of sand & water/ fire
AND to the extinguishing equipment near hazardous locations
PROTECTION surrounding Confine smoking to 'Smoking Zones' only.
areas Train people for using specific type of fire
fighting equipments under different classes of
fire.
Keep fire doors/ shutters, passages and exit doors
unobstructed.
Maintain good housekeeping and first-aid boxes
(for details refer Appendix-B).
Don't obstruct assess to Fire extinguishers.
Do not use elevators for evacuation during fire.
Maintain lightening arrestors for elevated
structures.
Stop all electrical motors with internal
combustion.
Page 6345 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
Move the vehicles from dangerous locations.
Remove the load hanging from the crane booms.
Remain out of the danger areas.
Improper It may not Ensure usage of correct fire extinguisher meant
selection of Fire extinguish the fire for the specified fire (for details refer Appendix-
extinguisher C).
Do not attempt to extinguish Oil and electric
fires with water. Use foam cylinders/ CO2/ sand
or earth.
Improper storage Same as above Maintain safe distance of flammable substances
of highly from source of ignition.
inflammable Restrict the distribution of flammable materials
substances to only min. necessary amount.
Construct specifically designed fuel storage
facilities.
Keep chemicals in cool and dry place away from
heat. Ensure adequate ventilation.
Before welding operation, remove or shield the
flammable material properly.
Store flammable materials in stable racks,
correctly labeled preferably with catchment
trays.
Wipe off the spills immediately.
Short circuiting Same as above Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door
of electrical Can cause ways.
system Electrocution Use one socket for one appliance.
Use only fully insulated wires or cables.
Do not allow open/bare connections.
Provide all connections through 30mA ELCB.
Ensure earthing of machineries and equipments.
(H) Crossing the Personal injury Obey speed limits and traffic rules strictly.
VEHICULAR Speed Limits Always expect the unexpected and be a
MOVEMENT (Rash driving) defensive driver.
Use seat belts/ helmets.
Blow horn at intersections and during
overtaking operations.
Maintain the vehicle in good condition.
Do not overtake on curves, bridges and slopes.
Adverse weather Same as Above Read the road ahead and ride to the left.
condition Keep the wind screen and lights clean.
Do not turn at speed.
Recognize the hazard, understand the defense
and act correctly in time.
Page 6346 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
Consuming Same as above Alcohol and driving do not mix well. Either
alcohol before choose alcohol or driving.
and during the If you have a choice between hitting a fixed
driving object or an on-coming vehicle, hit the fixed
operation object.
Quit the steering at once and become a passenger.
Otherwise take sufficient rest and then drive.
Do not force the driver to drive fast and round the
clock.
Do not day dream while driving.
Falling objects/ May prove fatal Ensure effective braking system, adequate
Mechanical visibility for the drives, reverse warning alarm.
failure Proper maintenance of the vehicle as per
manufacturer instructions.
(I) Bursting of May cause injury Prepare test procedure & obtain EIL/ Owner's
PROOF TESTING piping and prove fatal approval.
(HYDROSTATIC/ Collapse of Provide separate gauge for pressurizing pump
PNEUMATIC tanks and piping/equipment.
TESTING) Tanks flying off Check the calibration status of all pressure
gauges, dead weight testers and temperature
recorders.
Take dial readings at suitable defined intervals
and ensure most of them fall between 40-60% of
the gauge scale range.
Provide safety relief valve (set at pressure
slightly higher than test pressure) while testing
with air/ nitrogen.
Ensure necessary precautions, stepwise increase
in pressure, tightening of bolts/nuts, grouting, etc.
before and during testing.
Keep the vents open before opening any valve
while draining out of water used for hydro-testing
of tanks.
Pneumatic testing involves the hazard of released
energy stored in compressed gas. Specific care
must therefore be taken to minimize the chance
of brittle failure during a pneumatic leak test.
Test temperature is important in this regard and
must be considered when the designer chooses
the material of construction.
Page 6347 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
A pressure relief device shall be provided, having
a set pressure not higher than the test pressure
plus the lesser of 345 KPa (50 psi) or 10% of the
test pressure.
The gas used as test fluid, if not air, shall be
nonflammable and nontoxic.
(J) Person can fall May sustain severe Provide guard rails/barricade at the work place.
WORKING AT down injuries or prove Use PPE like full body harness, life line, helmets,
HEIGHTS fatal safety shoes, etc.
Obtain a permit before starting the work at height
above 3 meters.
Fall arrest and safety nets, etc. must be installed.
Provide adequate working space (min. 0.6 m).
Tie/weld working platform with fixed support.
Use roof top walk ladder while working on a
slopping roofs.
Avoid movement on beams.
May hit the Keep the work place neat and clean.
scrap/material Remove the scrap immediately.
stacked at the
ground or in
between
Material can fall May hit the workers Same as above plus
down working at lower Do not throw or drop materials or equipment
levels and prove from height i.e. do not bomb materials.
fatal All tools to be carried in a tool-kit Bag or on
working uniform.
Remove scrap from the planks.
Ensure wearing of helmet by the workers
working at lower levels.
(K) Suffocation/ Unconsciousness, Use respiratory devices, if reqd.
CONFINED drowning death Avoid over crowding inside a confined space.
SPACES Provide Exhaust fans for ventilation
Do not wear loose clothes, neck ties, etc.
Fulfill conditions of the permit.
Page 6348 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
Check for presence of hydrocarbons, O2 level.
Obtain work permit before entering a confined
space.
Ensure that the connected piping of the
equipment which is to be opened is pressure free,
fluid has been drained, vents are open and piping
is positively isolated by a blind flange.
Presence of Inhalation can pose Same as above plus

foul smell and threat to life Check for hydrocarbon and Aromatic compounds
toxic before entering a confined space.
substances Depute one person outside the confined space for
continuous monitoring and for extending help in
case of an emergency.
Ignition/ flame Person may sustain Keep fire extinguishers at a hand distance.
can cause fire burn injuries or Remove surplus material and scrap immediately.
explosion may occur Do not smoke inside a confined space.
Do not allow gas cylinders inside a confined
space.
Use low voltage (24V) lamps for lighting.
Use tools with air motors or electric tools with
max. voltage of 24V.
Remove all equipments at the end of the day.
(L) Failure of load Can cause accident Avoid standing under the lifted load and within
HANDLING lifting and and prove fatal the operating radius of cranes.
AND moving Check periodically oil, brakes, gears, horns and
LIFTING equipment’s tyre pressure of all moving machinery.
EQUIPMENTS Check quality, size and condition of all chain
pulley blocks, slings, U-clamps, D-shackles, wire
ropes, etc.
Allow crane to move only on hard, firm and
leveled ground.
Allow lifting slings as short as possible and
check gunny packings at the friction points.
Do not allow crane to tilt its boom while moving.
Install Safe Load Indicator.
Ensure certification by applicable authority.
Page 6349 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
Overloading of Same as above Safe lifting capacity of derricks and winches
lifting written on them shall be got verified
equipments The max. safe working load shall be marked on
all lifting equipment’s
Check the weight of columns and other heavy
items painted on them and accordingly decide
about the crane capacity, boom and angle of
erection
Allow only trained operators and riggers during
crane operation.
Overhead Can cause Do not allow boom or other parts of crane to
electrical wires electrocution and come within 3m reach of overhead HT cables.
fire Hook and load being lifted shall preferably
remain in full visibility of crane operators.
(M) Person can fall Person May sustain Provide guard rails for working at height.
SCAFFOLDI- down severe injuries and Face ladder while climbing and use both hands.
NG, prove fatal Ladders shall extend about 1m above landing for
FORMWORK easy access and tying up purpose.
AND Do not place ladders against movable objects and
LADDERS maintain base at 1/4 unit of the working length of
the ladder.
Suspended scaffolds shall not be less than 500
mm wide and tied properly with ropes.
No loose planks shall be allowed.
Use PPE, like helmets, safety shoes, etc.
Failure of Same as above Inspect visually all scaffolding materials for
scaffolding stability and anchoring with permanent
material structures.
Design scaffolding for max. load carrying
capacity.
Scaffolding planks shall not be less than 50x250
mm full thickness lumber or equivalent. These
shall be cleated or secured and must extend over
the end supports by at least 150mm and not more
than 300mm.
Don't overload the scaffolds.
Do not splice short ladders to make a longer one.
Vertical ladders shall not exceed 6m.
Material can Persons working at Remove excess material and scrap immediately.
fall down lower level gets Carry the tools in a tool-kit bag only.
injured Provide safety nets.
Page 6350 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
TYPE OF EFFECT OF
HAZARD HAZARD
(N) Personal Can cause injury or Do not take rest inside rooms built for welding
STRUCTU- negligence and casualty machines or electrical distribution system.
RAL danger of fall Avoid walking on beams at height.
WORKS Wear helmet with chin strap and full body
harness while working at height.
Use hand gloves and goggles during grinding
operations.
Cover or mark the sharp and projected edges.
Do not stand within the operating radius of
cranes.
Lifting/ slipping Same as above Do not stand under the lifted load.
of material Stack properly all the materials. Avoid slippage
during handling.
Control longer pieces lifted up by cranes from
both ends.
Remove loose materials from height.
Ensure tightening of all nuts & bolts.
(O) Erection/ Can cause injury Do not stand under the lifted load.
PIPELINE lowering failure Do not allow any person to come within the
WORKS radii of the side boom handling pipes.
Check the load carrying capacity of the lifting
tools & tackles.
Use Safe Load Indicators (SLI)
Use appropriate PPEs.
Other Same as above Wear gum boots in marshy areas.
Allow only one person to perform signaling
operations while lowering of pipes.
Provide night caps on pipes.
Provide end covers on pipes for stoppage of pigs
while testing/ cleaning operations.
(P) Pollution in Can cause personal Ensure the blasting is done in enclosed shed.
GRIT neighboring injury Keep safe distance while blasting operations.
BLASTING area, hit by grits Wear positive pressure blast hood or helmet
and high with view-window, ear-muff/plug, gloves,
pressure air overall or leather coat /apron, rubber shoes.
Page 6351 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-F
TRAINING SUBJECTS / TOPICS

(For contractors’ personnel)
1. The Law & Safety – Statutory Requirement / Applicable statutes / Duties of employer / employee
2. Policy & Administration – Why HSE? / Duties & Responsibilities of Safety Personnel at project
site / Effect of incentive on accident prevention
3. HSE & Supervision – Duties of Supervisor / HSE integrated supervision/ Who should be held
responsible for site accidents?
4. Safety Budget / Cost of Accidents – Direct costs / Indirect costs
5. Hazard Identification / Type of hazards / HIRAC
6. Behavioural Safety & Motivation
7. Housekeeping – Storage / Stacking / Handling of materials / Hydra handling
8. Occupational Health in Construction sector
9. Personal Protective Equipments – Respiratory & Non- respiratory
10. Electricity & Safety – ELCB / Fuse / Powered tools / Project illumination
11. Handling of Compressed Gas – Transportation / Storage / FBAs / Fire prevention
12. Machine Safety – Machine guarding / Maintenance
13. Transportation – Hazards & risks in transp. of materials / ODC consignments
14. Cranes & Other Lifting machinery – Legal requirements vis-à-vis essential safety requirements.
15. Communication – HSE Induction/ TBTs/ Safety Committee/ Safety meeting/ Safety propaganda/
Publicity.
16. Excavation – Risks & Dangers / Safety measures
17. Working at Heights – Use of ladder / Work on roofs / Scaffolds / Double harness lanyards / Life-
line / Fall arrester / Safety Nets / Floor openings
18. Hazards in Welding & important safety precautions
19. Gas Cutting – Hazards & safety measures
20. Fire prevention & fire protection
Page 6352 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX - G
CONSTRUCTION POWER BOARD (typ.)
Page 6353 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
APPENDIX-H
LIST OF PROCEDURES (MINIMUM) TO BE FORMING PART OF HSE PLAN:-
A. HSE Management Procedures:
 HSE Risk Management (including HIRA)

 HSE Legal Compliance and Other Requirements
 HSE Objectives & Performance
 HSE Training and Competence (including Induction)
 HSE Motivation &Award Scheme
 HSE Audits
 HSE Meetings
 HSE Sub Contractor Management
 HSE Emergency Management
 HSE Incidents Reporting and Management
 HSE Reports
 HSE Management System Review
 HSE Change Management
 HSE procedure for Behaviour based Safety
 First Aid & Management
 Roles, Responsibility, Accountabilities and Authorities
B. Job procedures/ Safe Operating procedures
 Setting Up Site & Signages

 Handling of Electrical Appliances
 Working at Height
 Confined Space Entry
 Permit to Work (including hot works)
 Housekeeping
 Lifting Operations
 Transportation of Materials including Manual Handling
 Compressed Air Tools and Units
 Earthmoving Operations & excavation
 Scaffolding
 Fire Prevention/ Protection
 Hazardous Substance Handling & Storage
 Radiation Hazard
 Personal Protective Equipment
Page 6354 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
FORMAT NO. : HSE-1 REV 0

(Sheet 1 of 6)
SAFETY WALK-THROUGH REPORT
(Name & signature of walk through performer to be inserted at the bottom of each page)
Project : _____________ Report no. : ___________
Date : _____________ Contractor : ___________
Inspection by :_____________ Owner : ___________
Frequency : Monthly Job no. : ___________
Note : Write ‘NA’ wherever the item is not applicable

Non
SL. Satisfactory/
ITEM satisfactory/ Remarks Action
NO. Yes
No
1. HOUSEKEEPING
a) Waste containers provided and used
b) Sanitary facilities adequate and Clean
c) Passageways and Walkways Clear
d) General neatness of working areas
e) Other
2. PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
a) Goggles; Shields
b) Face protection
c) Hearing protection
d) Foot protection
e) Hand protection
f) Respiratory Masks etc.
g) Full body harness conforming to CЄ, EN 361
h) Hard hat (HDPE)
i) Other
3. EXCAVATIONS/ OPENINGS
a) Openings properly covered or barricaded
b) Excavations shored
c) Excavations barricaded
d) Overnight lighting provided
e) Other
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature) …………………………………………….
Page 6355 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 2 of 6)
Non
SL. Satisfactory/
NO. Yes
No
4. WELDING & GAS CUTTING
a) Gas cylinders chained upright
b) Cables and hoses not obstructing
c) Screens or shields used
d) Flammable materials protected
e) Live electrode bits contained properly
f) Fire extinguisher (s) accessible
g) Other
5. SCAFFOLDING & BARRICADING
a) Fully decked platforms
b) Guard and intermediate rails in place
c) Toe boards in place
d) Adequate shoring
e) Adequate access
f) Positive barricading for critical activities
g) Installation of warning signs
h) Other
6. LADDERS
a) Extension side rails 1 m above
b) Top of landing
c) Properly secured
d) Angle + 700 from horizontal
e) Other
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature) ……………………………………………..
Page 6356 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 3 of 6)
Non
SL. Satisfactory
ITEM satisfactory Remarks Action
NO. / Yes
/No
7. HOISTS, CRANES AND DERRICKS
a) Condition of cables and sheaves OK
b) Condition of slings, chains, hooks and eyes

O.K.
c) Inspection and maintenance log-books
maintained
d) Outriggers used
e) Reverse horn installed / active / coupled with

gear
f) Signs/barricades provided
g) Signals observed and understood
h) Qualified operators
i) Other
8. MACHINERY, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
a) Proper instruction
b) Safety devices
c) Proper cords
d) Inspection and maintenance
e) Other
9. VEHICLE AND TRAFFIC
a) Rules and regulations observed
b) Inspection and maintenance
c) Licensed drivers
d) Other
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature) …………………………………
Page 6357 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 4 of 6)
Non
SL. Satisfactory
NO. / Yes
/No
10. TEMPORARY FACILITIES
a) Emergency instructions posted
b) Fire extinguishers provided
c) Fire-aid equipment available
d) Secured against storm damage
e) General neatness
f) In accordance with electrical requirements
g) Other
11. FIRE PREVENTION
a) Personnel trained & instructed to make use

of facility
b) Fire extinguishers checked periodically &
record maintained
c) No smoking in Prohibited areas.
d) Fire Hydrants not obstructed
e) Regular fire drill conducted
12. ELECTRICAL
a) Use of 3-core armored cables everywhere
b) Usage of 'All insulated' or 'double-insulated'

electrical tools
c) All electrical connection are routed through
ELCB
d) Natural Earthing at the source of power
(Main DB)
e) Continuity and tightness of earth conductor
f) Effective covering of junction boxes, panels

and other energized wiring places
g) Ground fault circuit interrupters provided
h) Prevention of tripping hazards maintained
f) DCP extinguishers arranged & licensed

electrician engaged at site
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature) …………………………………………
Page 6358 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
AT CONSTRUCTION SITE Page 60 of 90

(Sheet 5 of 6)
Non
SL. Satisfactory/
NO. Yes
No
14. HANDLING AND STORAGE OF
MATERIALS
a) Safely stored or stacked
b) Passageways clear / free from obstructions
c) Fire fighting facility in place
15. FLAMMABLE GASES AND LIQUIDS
a) Containers clearly identified / protected from
fire
b) Safe storage & transportation arrangement
made
c) Fire extinguishers positioned nearby
d) Facilities kept away from electric spark, hot
spatters & ignition source.
16. WORKING AT HEIGHT
a) Approved Erection plan and work permit in
place
b) Safe access, Safe work platform & Safety
nets provided
c) Life lines, Fall arrester, Full body harness
with double lanyards used;
d) Health Check record available for workers
going up?
e) Protective handrails arranged around floor
openings
17. CONFINED SPACE
a) Work Permit obtained from requisite
authority
b) Test for toxic gas and sufficient availability
of oxygen conducted & status
c) Supervisor present at site & at least one
person outside the confined space for
monitoring deputed
d) Availability of safe means of entry, exit and
ventilation (register for entry & exit
maintained)
e) Fire extinguisher and first-aid facility
ensured
f) Lighting provision made by using 24V Lamp
g) Proper usage of PPEs ensured
18. RADIOGRAPHY
a) Proper storage and handling of source as per
BARC/ AERB guidelines (authorized
radiographer available)
b) Work permit obtained
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature)…………………………………………
Page 6359 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 6 of 6)
Non
SL. Satisfactory
NO. / Yes
/No
c) Cordoning of the area done
d) Use of appropriate PPE's ensured
e) HSE training to workers/supervisors
imparted during the fortnight (indicate topic)
f) Minimum occupancy of workplace ensured
19. HEALTH CHECKS
a) All Workers medically examined and found

be fit for working at heights (slinging,
rigging, painting etc.)
in confined space
in excavation / trenching
in shot blasting
b) Availability of First Aid box with contents
c) Proper sanitation at site, office and labour
camps
d) Arrangement of medical facilities.
e) Measures for dealing with illness at site &
labour camps.
f) Availability of Potable drinking water for
workmen & staff.
g) Provision of crèches for children.
h) Stand by vehicle / ambulance available for

evacuation of injured
20. ENVIRONMENT
a) Chemical and Other Effluents properly

disposed
b) Cleaning liquid of pipes disposed off
properly
c) Seawater used for hydro-testing disposed off
as per agreed procedure
d) Lubricant Waste/ Engine oils properly
disposed
e) Waste from Canteen, offices, sanitation etc.
disposed properly
f) Disposal of surplus earth, stripping materials,
Oily rags and combustible materials done
properly
g) Green belt protection
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature) …………………………………………
Page 6360 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 1 of 3)
ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT
(To be submitted by Contractor after every Incident / Accident within 24 hours to EIL/ Owner)
Report No.: ____________________________ Date: ______________________

Project site: ____________________________ Name of work: _______________________
Contractor’s name: ________________ Contractor’s Job Engineer (name) ________
Non-disabling injury (Non- Hospitalized but resumed duty before end of 48 hrs
LTA)
Disabling injury (other LTA) Hospitalized & failed to resume duty within next 48 hrs
Fatal (LTA): Death / Expiry
First Aid case (non LTA) Resume duty after first aid
Name of the injured: _______________________ Father's name of victim: _________________

Sub Contractor’s Name: ……………………………………………………………………………….
Gate Pass No.: ……….. Age: _____Yrs. Victim’s medical fitness exam. (Pre-empl.) date: ______
Date & time of Accident / Incident: _______________________________________________

Names of Witnesses: (1) ________________ (2) ___________________ (3) ________________
Profession of victim:
Bar bender Carpenter Meson
Fitter Helper Gas cutter
Grinder Welder Electrician
Driver Rigger M/c. operator
Engineer Manager Other/ specify
Qualification
No formal education Non-Matriculate Matriculate
Graduate Post- grad Other/specify
Job Experience
NIL Less than 2 yrs 2-5 yrs
5-10 yrs 11-15 yrs 15 years and above
Location where the incident happened: ___________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
Page 6361 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 2 of 3)
Activity / Works that were continuing during incident / accident: -

Excavation Demolition Concrete carrying
Concrete pouring Transportation of materials Transportation of
(manually) materials (mechanically)
Work on or adjacent to water Work at height (+2.0 mts) Scaffold preparation
Scaffold dismantling Piling works Welding
Grinding Gas-cutting Pipe fit-ups & fabrication
Structural fabrications Machine works Hydro-testing works
Electrical works Erection activities Other/specify
What exactly the victim was doing just before the incident / accident? ..........................................
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Nature of injury:
Bruise or Contusion Abrasion (superficial wound) Sprains or strains
Cut or Laceration Puncture or Open wound Burn
Inhalation of toxic or Absorption Amputation
Poisonous fumes or gases
Fracture Other/specify
Parts of body involved in incident / accident

Head Face Eyes
Throat Arm (above wrist) Hand (including wrist)
Fingers Truck (Abdomen / Back / Throat
Chest / Shoulder)
Leg (above ankle) Foot (incl. ankle) Toes
Multiple Other/specify
Accident type:
Struck against Struck by Fall from Elevation
Fall on same level caught in caught under
caught in between Rubbed or abraded Contact with (Electricity)
Contact with (Temp./ Contact with chemicals or Vehicle accident

extremes) oils
Other/specify
Page 6362 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 3 of 3)
Medical Aid provided:- (indicate specific aids / treatment etc.)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Actions taken to prevent recurrence of similar incident / accident: ………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
__________________________________________________________________________________
Intimation to local authorities (Dist. Collector / Local Police Station / ESI authority): Yes / No / NA.
If yes, to whom ………………………………………………………………………………………..
Safety Officer Site Head / Resident Construction Manager

(Signature and Name) (Signature and Name)
Stamp of Contractor
To : Owner
: RCM/Site-in-charge EIL (3 copies)
Divisional Head (Constn.) through RCM

Project Manager, EIL, through RCM
Page 6363 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 1 of 5)
SUPPLEMENTARY INCIDENT / ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT

TICK THE APPROPRIATE ONE AS APPLICABLE (furnish within 72 hours)
Supplementary to Incident / Accident Report No: ______ (Copy enclosed)
Report No.: ____________________________ Date: ______________________
Project site: ____________________________ Name of work: _______________________
Contractor’s name: ________________ Contractor’s Job Engineer (name) ________
Non-disabling injury (Non- Hospitalized but resumed duty before end of 48 hrs
LTA)
Disabling injury (other LTA) Hospitalized & failed to resume duty within next 48 hrs
Fatal (LTA): Death / Expiry
First Aid case (non LTA) Resume duty after first aid
Name of the injured: _______________________ Father's name of victim: _________________

Sub Contractor’s Name: ……………………………………………………………………………….
Gate Pass No.:……….. Age: _____Yrs. Victim’s medical fitness exam. (Pre-empl.) date: ______
Date & time of Accident / Incident: _______________________________________________

Names of Witnesses: (1) ________________ (2) ___________________ (3) ________________
Profession of victim:
Bar bender Carpenter Meson
Fitter Helper Gas cutter
Grinder Welder Electrician
Driver Rigger M/c. operator
Engineer Manager Other/specify
Qualification
No formal education Non-Matriculate Matriculate
Graduate Post- grad Other/specify
Job Experience
NIL Less than 2 yrs 2-5 yrs
5-10 yrs 11-15 yrs 15 years and above
Location where the incident happened: ___________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
Page 6364 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 2 of 5)
Activity / Works that were continuing during incident / accident: -
Excavation Demolition Concrete carrying
Concrete pouring Transportation of materials Transportation of
(manually) materials (mechanically)
Work on or adjacent to water Work at height (+2.0 mts) Scaffold preparation
Scaffold dismantling Piling works Welding
Grinding Gas-cutting Pipe fit-ups & fabrication
Structural fabrications Machine works Hydro-testing works
Electrical works Erection activities Other/specify
What exactly the victim was doing just before the incident / accident? ..........................................
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Particular of tools & tackles being used and condition of the same after incident/accident:
…………………………………………………………………………….........................................
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Description of Incident/Accident (How the incident was caused):

……………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
Nature of injury:
Bruise or Contusion Abrasion (superficial wound) Sprains or strains
Cut or Laceration Puncture or Open wound Burn
Inhalation of toxic or Absorption Amputation
Poisonous fumes or gases
Fracture Other/specify
Parts of body involved in incident / accident

Head Face Eyes
Throat Arm (above wrist) Hand (including wrist)
Fingers Truck (Abdomen / Back / Throat
Chest / Shoulder)
Leg (above ankle) Foot (incl. ankle) Toes
Multiple Other/specify
Page 6365 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 3 of 5)
Accident type:
Struck against Struck by Fall from Elevation
Fall on same level caught in caught under
caught in between Rubbed or abraded Contact with (Electricity)
Contact with (Temp./ Contact with chemicals or Vehicle accident

extremes) oils
Other/specify
Name & Designation of person who provided First-Aid to the victim: …………………………………
Name & Telephone number of Hospital where the victim was treated _________________________
Mode of transport used for transporting victim – Ambulance / Private car / Tempo / Truck / Others
How much time taken to shift the injured person to Hospital ________________________________
In case of FATAL incident, indicate clearly the BOCW Registration No. of the victim/ Company
……………………………………………………………………………………………
Comments of Medical Practitioner, who treated / attended the victim/injured (attached / described
here) _____________________________________________________________________
What actions are taken for investigation of the incident, please indicate clearly – (Video film /
Photography / Measurements taken etc. ………………………………………………………………..)
Immediate cause (Please tick the right applicable) –

Hazardous methods or Poor housekeeping Inadequate or improper
procedures inadequately PPE
guarded
Environmental hazards improper illumination/ Working on dangerous
(excess noise/ space Moving on oval surface equipment
constraint/ inadequate
ventilation)
Page 6366 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 4 of 5)
Failure to secure Horse-play Failure to use PPE
Inattention to surroundings Improper use of hands & By-passing safety devices

body-parts
Unsafe mixing or placement Bypassing standard Failure in communication
of tools & tackles procedures
Operating without authority Improper use of equipment drug or alcoholic
or tools & tackles influence
excessive haste Others(specify)
Basic cause
Over confidence Impulsiveness over-exertion

Faulty judgement or poor Failing to keep attention Nervousness & Fear
understanding constantly
Fatigue Defective vision Ill health or sickness
Slow reaction Others(specify)
Root cause
Inadequate Engg Improper Design Inadequate Planning &

organization
Inadequate knowledge Inadequate skill Inadequate training
Inadequate supervision Improper work procedure Inadequate compliance
with standard
Substandard performance Inadequate maintenance Improper inspection
Others(specify)
Loss of man days and impact on site works, (if any) –
Remarks from Contractor’s Safety Officer/ Engineer –
Was the victim performing relevant tasks for which he was engaged /employed? Yes / No
Was the Supervisor present on work-site during the incident? Yes / No
Have the causes of incident rightly identified? Yes / No
Cause of Accident was_____________________________________________________________
Page 6367 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

(Sheet 5 of 5)
Remedial measures recommended by Safety Officer of Contractor for avoiding similar incident in
future :
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….……
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Intimation to local authorities (Dist. Collector / Local Police Station / ESI authority): Yes / No / NA.
If yes, to whom ………………………………………………………………………………………..
………………………………………………………………………………………………………….
Safety Officer Site Head / Resident Construction Manager

Stamp of Contractor
To : Owner
: RCM / Site-in-charge of EIL (3 copies)
Project Manager EIL, through RCM
Page 6368 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
NEAR MISS INCIDENT/ DANGEROUS OCCURRENCE SUGGESTED PROFORMA

(to be submitted within 24 hours)
 Near Miss : Human injury escaped & no damage to property, equipment or interruption to work.
 Dangerous Occurrence: Damage to property, equipment or interruption of work, but not
resulting in personal injury/ illness, e.g. Fire incident, collapse of structure, crane failure, etc.
Report No.: _________________
Name of Site: _________________________ Date: ______________________
Name of work: __________________________ Contractor: __________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Incident reported by :
Date & Time of Incident :
Location :
__________________________________________________________________________________
Brief description of incident
__________________________________________________________________________________
Probable cause of incident
__________________________________________________________________________________
Suggested corrective action
__________________________________________________________________________________
Steps taken to avoid recurrence Yes No
To : Owner
: RCM/Site-in-charge EIL (3 copies)

Project Manager EIL, through RCM
Page 6369 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENTAL (HSE) REPORT
(To be submitted by each Contractor)
Actual work start Date: _______________ For the Month of: __________________
Project: ____________________________ Report No: ________________________
Name of the Contractor: ______________ Status as on : ______________________
Name of Work : _____________________ Job No : __________________________
(Contractor in consultation with EIL shall generate the reports through web based
package(www3.eil.co.in/eilhse)only.
UPTO
THIS
ITEM PREVIOUS CUMULATIVE
MONTH
MONTH
1) Average number of Staff & Workmen
(average daily headcount, not man days)
2)Total Man-hours worked
3) Number of Induction programmes conducted
4) Number of HSE meetings organized at site
5) Number of HSE awareness programmes conducted at site
6) Number of Tool Box Talks conducted
7) Number of Lost Time Accidents (LTA) Fatal
Other LTA
8) Number of Loss Time Injuries (LTI) Fatalities
Other LTI
9) Number of Non-Loss Time Accidents
10) Number of First Aid Cases
11) Number of Near Miss Incidents
12) No. of unsafe acts/ practices detected
13) No. of disciplinary actions taken against staff/ workmen
14) Man-days lost due to accidents
15) LTA Free man-hours i.e. LTA free man-hours counted from the
Last LTA (enter date: ……….)
16) Frequency Rate (No. of LTA per 2 lacs man-hours worked)
17) Severity Rate (No. of man days lost per 2 lacs man-hours worked)
18) Loss Time Injury Frequency (No. of LTI per 2 lacs man-hours
worked)
19) No. of activities for which HIRAC completed
20) No. of incentives/ awards given
21) No. of occasions on which penalty imposed by EIL/ Owner
22) No. of Audits conducted
23) No. of pending NCs in above Audits
24) Compensation cases raised with Insurance
25) Compensation cases resolved and paid to workmen
26) No of Vehicular Accident cases
27) No of fire/Explosion cases
28) Whether workmen compensation policy taken Yes No
29) Whether workmen compensation policy is valid Yes No
30) Whether workmen registered under ESI Act, as applicable Yes No
31) Whether HIRAC Register prepared and updated Yes No
32) Whether Environment Aspect Impact Register prepared and Yes No
updated
33) Whether Legal Register prepared and updated Yes No
Remarks, if any
Date:
Prepared by Safety Officer Approved by Site Head / Resident Construction Manager
To : - OWNER
- RCM EIL (2 copies)
Page 6370 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7

PERMIT FOR WORKING AT HEIGHTS (ABOVE 2.0 METER)
(In duplicate to be issued daily for site and for office)
Permit No…………….. Name of Main Contractor…………………………
Name of work executing agency / sub agency / vendor ……………………………………………….…...
Date……………… Exact Location of work……………………………………
Nature of work …………………………………….. Duration of work (from) ………… (to) ……….......
Number of workers covered within this permit ……………………………………………………………
(List enclosed with name & gate pass numbers.)
Sl. Status of compliance

Items / Subjects
No. (Yes / No)
1 Work areas / Equipments inspected
2 Work area cordoned off
3 Adequate lighting is provided
4 Precautions against public traffic taken
5 Concerned persons in & around have been alerted & cautioned
Hazards / risks involved in routine / non-routine task assessed and control
6
measures have been implemented at specific task
7 ELCB provided for electrical connection & found working
8 Ladder safely attached / fixed
9 Scaffoldings are checked and TAGs are found used correctly
10 Working platforms are provided and are found sound /safe for use
Safe access & egress arrangements (e.g. ladders, fall arresters, life-lines etc.)
11
are satisfactorily incorporated
a. Openings on platform / floors are effectively cordoned / covered
12
b. Safety Nets are provided wherever required
Use of following safety gadgets by people working at area under this permit, is
checked and found satisfactory -
Safety helmet
13 Safety harness (full body) with double lanyard
Safety Shoes
Safety gloves
Safety goggles
14 Housekeeping of work area found satisfactorily tidy / clean & clear
Adequate measures have been taken for works being continued at the ground
15
level, when simultaneous works are permitted overhead at that very location.
16 Materials are not thrown from heights on to ground
17 Medical examination of workers are made & found satisfactory
Responsible job engineer / supervisor found physically present at work spot for
18
overall administration of work as well as safety of people.
Above items have been checked & compliance has been found in place. Hence work is permitted to
start / continue at the above-mentioned location. Work shall not start till identified lapses are rectified.
Additional Precautions, if any …………………………………………………………….

……………………………………………………………………………………………..
Work Permit issued by Verification By

Contractor Engineer/ RCM Contractor Safety Officer
AT THE END OF THE DAY/WORK:

All works at height are completed & workmen have returned safely from work location at (time)
………….. (date) ……………
(Sig. Contractor Engineer)
Page 6371 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT

Project site ____________________________ Sr. No. _________________________
Name of the work _______________________ Date ___________________________
Name of Contractor _____________________ Nature of work ___________________
Exact location of work ___________________
Safety Requirements POSITIVE ISOLATION OF THE VESSEL IS MANDATORY

(A) Has the equipment been ?
Y NR Y NR Y NR
 Isolated from  water flushed &/or  radiation sources
power/steam/air steamed removed
 isolated from liquid or  Man ways open &  proper lighting
gases ventilated provided
 depressurized &/or  cont. inert gas flow 
drained arranged
 blanked/ blinded/  adequately cooled 
disconnected
(B) Expected Residual Hazards
 lack of O2  combustible gas/ liquid  H2S / toxic gases
 corrosive chemicals  pyrophoric iron / scales  electricity / static
 heat/ steam / frost  high humidity  ionizing radiation
  
(C) Protection Measures
 gloves  ear plug / muff  goggles / face shield
 protective clothing  dust / gas / air line mask  personal gas alarm
 grounded air duct/ blower/  attendant with SCBA/air  rescue equipment/
AC mask team
 Fire fighting arrangements  safety harness & lifeline  communication
equipment
  
Authorization / Renewal (It is safe to enter the confined space)
Signature Time Signature
No. of Contractor's Contractor's From To Workman
Name of persons
persons Supervisor Safety
allowed
allowed Officer
Permit Closure :
(A) Entry  was closed  stopped  will continue on .................
(B)  Site left in a safe condition  Housekeeping done
(C) Multilock  removed  key transferred

 Ensured all men have come out  Man-ways barricaded
Remarks, if any:
Page 6372 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
RADIATION WORK PERMIT
Project : Sr. No. :

Name of the work : Date :
Name of site contractor : Job No. :
Location of work :
Source strength :
Cordoned distance (m) :
Name of Radiography agency : Approved by Owner/EIL
No. of workers engaged :

The following items have been checked &compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit:
S. No. Item description Done

Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB ensured while source in use/in transit & during
storage
Area cordoned off / safe working platform provided
Lighting arrangements for working during nights ensured
Warning signs/ flash lights installed
Cold work permit taken (if applicable)
PPEs like film badges, dosimeters used
Additional precautions, if any ______________________________________________________
(Radiography Agency’s BARC/AERB authorized Supervisor)
Permission is granted.
Permit is valid from ___________ AM/PM ____________ Date to ___________ AM/PM _________
Date
(Signature of permit issuing authority of site contractor)

Name: Designation: Date:
Permit renewal:
Sign. of issuing
Additional precautions
Permit extended upto authority with date
required, if any
(of site contractor)
Date Time
Work completed/ stopped/ area cleared at ________ Hrs of Date ______________

(Sign. of permit issuing authority)
Name & Signature of site contractor:
Page 6373 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY & 6-82-0001 Rev. 7
AT CONSTRUCTON SITE Page 75 of 90

DEMOLISHING/DISMANTLING WORK PERMIT
Project : Sr.No. :
Name of contractor : Job No. :
Name of sub-contractor : No. of workers to be engaged:

Line No./ Equipment No./ Structure to be dismantled :

Location details of dismantling/ demolition with sketch : (clearly indicate the area)
The following items have been checked &compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit:
S. Item description Done Not

No. Applicable
Services like power, gas supply, water, etc. disconnected
Dismantling/ Demolishing method reviewed & approved
Usage of appropriate PPEs ensured
Precautions taken for neighbouring structures
First-Aid arrangements made
Fire fighting arrangements ensured
Precautions taken for blasting
(Contractor’s Supervisor) (Contractor’s Safety Officer)
Permission is granted.
(Permit issuing authority)
Name :
Date :
Completion report :
Dismantling/ Demolishing is completed on _____________ Date at ____________ Hrs.
Materials/ debris transported to identified location Tagging completed (as applicable)
Services like power, gas supply, water, etc. restored
(Permit issuing authority)
CONTRACTOR’s NAME
Page 6374 of 8516

HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENTAL
6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT
DAILY SAFETY CHECKLIST

(To make use of before start of day’s work)
Project : Sr. No. :

Description of Job decided to perform : -
 Use of PPE / Safety Gadgets
Sl. Compliance Sl. Compliance

PPEs PPEs
No (Yes / No) No (Yes / No)
1 Safety Helmets 6 Face Shield
2 Safety Shoes 7 Full body harness
3 Hand Gloves 8 Fall Arrest System
4 Dust Musk 9 Safety net
Horizontal life-line made
5 Safety Goggles 10 of steel wire, (dia not
less than 8.0 mm.)
(Serial No. 1 & 2 are compulsory for everyone. Specify & ensure use of other safety gadgets as required for the job)
 Identify following important unsafe conditions: -
Sl. No Conditions Yes / No

1 Access to work site / emergency escape clear
2 Soil / Loose earth kept away from excavated pit / slope / ladder provided
Electrical wire / welding lead lying entangled on ground / welding m/c. booth
3
accessible
4 Elevated work platform / open ends are protected
Ground area cordoned off before lifting works or erection at height / ground
5
area checked & cordoned-off before start of height works
Structural members / erected pipes / wooden boards/pieces etc. are safely
6 anchored at heights and are not likely to fall down on people when working
beneath
Rope ladders tied-up on tall steel structures, long before are removed to get
7
rid of their use
8 Any Other
 Indicate actions taken, if status of any of the above items is found “No”
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
 Specific Safety guidelines / precautions, if any (communicated thro’ TBT)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………
 Above conditions and PPE compliances are checked by undersigned and correct status are
indicated after verification
Inspected by Verification By
Contractor Engineer Contractor Safety Officer
Page 6375 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT

(Sheet 1 of 2)
HOUSEKEEPING ASSESSMENT& COMPLIANCE
Project : Sr. No. :
Name of contractor : Fortnightly
Sl. Satisfactory/ Non-

No.
Subjects of Review Remarks Action
Yes satisfactory/ No
1. Cleanliness at the Main entry / access of site
2. Ground condition / floor areas free from water-
logging / oil spillage
3. Ground & elevated floors free from rubbish /
wastes / accumulated debris / scraps.
4. Manholes / openings are covered / fenced
5. Trenches are barricaded / walkways are in place
6. Drains are cleaned / not choked / not occupied
by dumped materials
7. Sufficient CAUTION boards / instructions
displayed
8. Construction machinery are maintained &
parked in orderly manner.
9. Movement of site people are not obstructed
because of dumping / storing of construction
materials
10. Access/ egress to Electrical Distribution Boards/
Panels clear from wires / cables / earth-strips etc.
11. Electrical panel rooms / sheds / MCC / Control
rooms / Substations etc. are clean & tidy and not
used for storing dress / clothes, tiffin-box or
bicycles.
12. Passage behind Elec. panels are free for access
13. Fire extinguishers / fire-buckets are accessible
without any difficulty.
14. Stair-steps, platforms & landings are clear & tidy
15. Sheds / rooms & work areas have got sufficient
illumination as well as ventilation.
16. Cables / Wires / welding leads are routed /
hanged appropriately & are not creating unsafe
condition.
17. Stacking / storing of insulation materials or their
packing.
18. Removal or cleanliness of left-over sand,
concrete, brick-bats, insulation-materials, excess
earth, wastes etc.
19. Storing / stacking of sand, metal chips, re-bars,
steel pipes, valves, fittings etc.
20. One escape route at ground & minimum two
escape routes at elevation available.
Page 6376 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT

(Sheet 2 of 2)
Sl. Satisfactory/ Non-
No.
Subjects of Review Remarks Action
Yes satisfactory/ No
21. Captions / Posters / Slogans on various safety
instructions are displayed legibly in local
language
22. Cable trenches are water-free or regular
arrangement for taking out accumulated water
exists.
23. Windows of rooms / offices are regularly
cleaned
24. Facilities for cycle sheds, drinking water,
washing, rest-rooms etc. are maintained in tidy
manner.
25. Toilet, Urinals, Canteen / kitchen / pantry etc.
are maintained & free from obnoxious smell.
26. Construction tools / tackles are stored
systematically - the items are tagged / tested /
certified by competent third party.
27. Sufficient numbers of Dust-bins / Waste-bins
found at site and are regularly emptied.
Additional remarks, if any -

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
……………………………………
Page 6377 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT
INSPECTION OF TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL BOOTH / INSTALLATION

Project : Sr. No. :
Sub Station No:/Booth No Location:
SL
SUBJECTS OBSERVATION (YES /NO) ACTION TAKEN
NO
Switchboards installed properly are in order and
1
protected from rain & water-logging.
Adequate illumination provided for switchboard
2 operation during night hours & the lamps are protected
from direct human contact.
Voltage ratings, DANGER signs, Shock-Treatment-
3
Chart displayed in the installation / booth
Fire extinguisher (DCP or CO2) & Sand Bucket kept in
4
close vicinity of Switchboards
Valid License & Competent Electrician / Wireman
5 available & name/ license no. displayed at booth /
installation.
General housekeeping in & around booth / installation
6
found in order.
7 Cable-route-markers for U/G cables provided.
Monthly inspection report of Electrical hand tools
8
available in booth / installation.
9 Insulated Mat provided in front of Elec. Panels.
10 Rubber hand gloves available/ used by Electricians
Availability of CAUTION boards for shutdown & / or
11
repairing works.
All incoming & outgoing feeders have proper MCCB /
12
HRC fuses / Switches.
Switchboards “earthed” at two distinctly isolated
13
locations.
Switchboards have adequate operating space at the front
14
face & at the rear face too.
15 All connections provided through 30mA ELCB.
16 Testing records of all ELCBs available at site
17 Only industrial type plugs & sockets are used.
Temporary connections are 3-core double insulated &
18 free from cuts & joints and 3rd core is earthed at both
ends
Socket boards are properly mounted on stand &
19
protected from water ingress.
Electrical equipments operating above 250V have two
20
earthing / double earthing.
All incoming / outgoing cables are properly glanded &
21
terminated with “lugs”.
22 Switch-boards are of industrial variety / type.
Sketch for installation / connection (SLD) made &
23
pasted& other safety labels/display boards
24 Labeling of incoming / outgoing feeders made.
25 All hand lamps are protected from direct contact.
26 All electrical cable / joints are in safe condition
Page 6378 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT

(Sheet 1 of 2)
INSPECTION FOR SCAFFOLDING
Project : Sr. No. :
Sl. Actions
Description Yes No N.A
No taken
1 Whether work permit is obtained to take up work at height above 1.5 Mts?
Whether atmospheric condition is “stormy” or “raining” and works at
2
heights have been permitted?
3 Whether steel pipes scaffoldings are used for units /off-site areas?
Whether scaffolding has been erected on rigid/firm/leveled surfaces /
4 ground? Whether “foot-seals” or “base-plates” are used beneath the up-
rights (vertical steel pipes)
Whether scaffold construction is as per IS specification with toe-board and
5
hand-rails (top-rail as well as mid-rail)?
Whether distance between two successive up-rights are less than 2.5 Mts
6 (height of scaffold & load carrying capacity governs the distance between
two uprights)
Whether all uprights are extended at least 900 mm above the top most
7
working platform (to enable fitting of handrails)?
Whether vertical distance of two successive ledgers is satisfactory?
8
(varying between 1.3 Mts. To 2.1 Mts)
Whether the peripheral areas of working at height are cordoned-off? (for
9
avoiding accident to people arising out of dropped / deflected materials)
10 Whether platform is provided? Is it safely approachable?
Whether end of scaffold platform / board are extended beyond transoms?
11
(125mm to 150 mm)
Whether CE / IS approved quality and worthy conditioned full-body safety
12 harness (with double lanyard & karabiners) are used while working at
heights?
Whether life-line of safety harness is anchored to an independent secured
13
support capable of withstanding load of a falling person?
Whether the area around the scaffold is cordoned off to prohibit the entry of
14
unauthorized person / vehicle?
Whether clamps used are of good condition, of adequate strength and free
15
from defects?
16 Whether ladder is placed at secured and leveled surface?
17 Whether water-pass and oil-spills are avoided around the scaffold structure?
18 Whether ladder is extended 1.5mts. above the landing point at height?
19 Whether more than one access/egress provided to the scaffold?
Whether ladder used are of adequate length and overlapping of short
20
ladders avoided?
Whether metallic ladders are placed much away from near-by electrical
21
transmission line?
22 Whether rungs of ladder are inspected and found in good order?
23 Whether fall-arresters provided on both the access/egress routes?
Whether diagonal (cross) bracings are provided at regular interval on the
24
scaffold?
Whether working platform on the scaffold has been made free from “jolt”
25
or “gap”?
Whether tools or materials are removed after completion of the day’s job at
26
heights?
Whether a valid Permit for Work (PFW) is obtained before taking up work
27
over asbestos or fragile roof?
28 Whether sufficient precaution is taken while working on fragile roof?
Page 6379 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Sl. Actions
Description Yes No N. A
No taken
Whether provision is made to arrange duck ladder, crawling board for
29
working on fragile roof?
Whether scaffold has been inspected by qualified civil engineers prior to
30
their use?
Whether the scaffolding has been designed for the load to be borne by the
31
same?
Whether the erection and dismantling of the scaffolding is being done by
32
trained persons and under adequate supervision?
Whether safety net with proper working arrangement and life-line has
33
been provided?
Whether TAGS (Green for acceptable and Red for incomplete/unsafe
34
scaffolds) are used on scaffolds?
Whether sufficient illumination is provided in and around the scaffold
35
and access?
Whether emergency rescue / response arrangements are made in place
36
Page 6380 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT

(sheet 1 of 2)
PERMIT FOR ERECTION / MODIFICATION & DISMANTLING OF SCAFFOLDING
Project : Sr. No. :
Nature of activities : Duration: From………To…………
SL. NOT
SUBJECTS / ITEMS DONE REMARKS
No. DONE
Specific task of Erection / Modification / Dismantling of scaffolds,
1 identified & TAGGED accordingly (before as well as after carrying-
out jobs).
People engaged in doing the job are identified & are certified by Job Names to be
2
Engineer of Main Contractor as experienced / trained. noted
Concerned persons are alerted by the Job Engineer of Main Contractor
3 in connection with possible hazards & what the workmen MUST do /
MUST not do.
Verification by Job Engineer of Main Contractor made for confirming
that all persons permitted to carry-out the jobs are making use of
4
Helmet, Safety Shoes, Goggles, Gloves & Double lanyard safety
harness and other relevant PPEs.
5 Area of work is effectively cordoned-off / barricaded / illuminated.
For taking-up / lowering down Scaffolding members / clamps /
couplings etc. appropriate ropes / pulleys/ chains etc. have been
6
arranged for use (not to throw any item) & the same have been
verified as “fit for purpose”.
Items / members of scaffold, being lowered are removed from the area
7
& stacked correctly.
Ropes, chains, pulley blocks etc. being used for lifting or lowering
scaffold items, are inspected by the Job Engineer & their certifications
8
as well as physical conditions have been found O.K, before signing
this PERMIT.
Safety Net / Life-line / Fall Arresters etc. are arranged in position and
9 Job Engineer has found working conditions favourable for activities to
start.
Scaffold erection or dismantling tasks are being supervised by
10
Experienced Engineer / Competent person.
Only competent & experienced people have been selected / engaged in
11
Scaffolding erection, modification or dismantling tasks.
Adequate & effective actions for traffic and movement of people
12
around the cordoned-off area taken to avoid inadvertent incident
13 Working platforms are protected with handrails & toe-boards.
14 Access & Exit (for reach & escape) are safe for use by people.
Tools, tackles to be used for above jobs are verified by job Engineers
15 of Main contractor as genuinely good and tied-up at height (to prevent
their fall).
16 Site important Telephone Nos. are made known to everyone
SOP (Safe Operating Procedure) for the specific task is made &
17
followed too.
18 Emergency vehicle has been arranged at work locations.
 This permit for work shall be available at specific work location all the time.
 After completion of work, permit shall be returned to safety cell of main contractor, without fail.
 This Permit shall be issued maximum upto (Monday to Sunday).
 Additional Precautions, if any
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………
 ACCORD OF PERMISSION (to be ticked) - YES ( ) / NO ( )
Page 6381 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT

(sheet 2of 2)
Everyday Site working conditions & performance of workmen shall be assessed / checked by Contractor
Site Engr. and Safety Officer shall verify the same.
Name / Sign. MONDAY TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY SATURDAY SUNDAY

Site
Engr.
Safety
Off.
Page 6382 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT
PERMIT FOR HEAVY LIFT / CRITCAL ERECTION
Project : Sr. No. :

Nature of activities : Duration: From………To…………
Location of work : Name /Type of crane :
Equipment/Structure to be erected: Wt. of equipment/ structure to be erected :
SL. COMPLIANCE STATUS
Description of Item
NO. Remarks
Yes No Not applicable
Is the crane type suitable for lift or as per erection
1
procedure?
Is the crane have the correct number of counterweights
2
fitted?
Availability of Load Certification of crane from
3
authorized agency.
Is the load chart of crane available in carne cabin/or with
4
Crane operator?
Is the device to check the Wind speed in crane is working?
5
Is the safety features in crane are working?
Availability of Load certification of slings and other
6
accessories from authorized agency
Availability of Licensee/certificate for crane operator from
7
authorized agency.
8 Availability of approved HIRAC for the subject activities.
9 Availability of approved erection/rigging procedures.
Availability of temporary gratings/ platforms for critical
10
lifting(as applicable)
11 Tool Box conducted before erection?
12 Has the area been cordoned off?
13 Are the authorized persons during erection are identified?
Does each person identified for erection understand their
14
roles and responsibilities?
Is the ground on which crane will rest or outrigger support
15
are correct?
16 Is hard stand requirement (if any) complied?
Is the communication system (viz. walkie talkies, etc. are
17
working properly?
If more than one crane is lifting the load, is an
18
Intermediate rigger will supervise the lift?
If there is other obstruction within the operating radius of
19 the crane, have correct precautions been taken to prevent
collision?
20 All the persons are wearing the requisite PPE?
Inspected & Issued by Verification By

Contractor Engineer/RCM Contractor Safety Officer
Page 6383 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT
PERMIT FOR ENERGY ISOLATION & DE-ISOLATION
Project : Sr. No. :

ENERGY ISOLATION PERMIT
 Clearance required from: ……... Hrs ……… Date To ……….. Hrs ……………. Date
 Name of equipment/ energy source etc. ………………………………………………………………….
 Nature of job to be done: ………………………………………………………………………………….
 Area: …………………………. Location: …………………………………………………………………..
PERMIT VALIDATION PERFORMING AUTHORITY

I hereby authorize the …………..personnel (performer) The work and precautions will be carried out under my
to isolate the above equipment/energy source from all overall responsibility.(Testing/execution engineer)
sources of power and handover the equipment/energy
source for maintenance/repair.
Signature: Date:
Issuing authority Name:
Area –Incharge/RCM
Signature: Date:
Name:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR CLEARANCE NORMALISING AFTER CLEARANCE

1. Notify workers of intent to de- energize 1. Notify workers of intent to re- energize
2. Obtain lock, tag or locking/tagging devices 2. Conduct visual inspection to confirm that the
3. Shut down, de-energize, dissipate any danger zone is clear of workers
residual energies. 3. Conduct visual inspection to confirm that tools,
4. Apply lock ,tag and locking and/or tagging equipment’s danger zone is clear of workers
devices 4. Reposition the safety devices (interlocks,
5. *Any other job specific precautions valves, guards, covers, sensors, as applicable, etc.)
6. Verify effectiveness of lockout by 5. *Any other job specific normalizing details
attempting to restart. 6. Remove lock, tag and locking and/or tagging
7. Proper PPE is ensured devices.
7. Re-energize.
I certify that the energy source mentioned above is 8. Confirm system is operating properly & safely.
isolated from all sources and is safe to start the work. I certify that the energy source mentioned above is
isolated from all sources and is safe to start the work.
Tag No: …… Lock No: ………….
Tag No: …… Lock No: ………….
Issuing authority Issuing authority
Area –Incharge /RCM Area –Incharge /RCM
Signature: Date: Signature: Date:
Name: Name:
(*to be included by contractor in consultation with (*to be included by contractor in consultation with
EIL/owner) EIL/owner)
ENERGY DE-ISOLATION PERMIT
PERMIT VALIDATION PERFORMING AUTHORITY
I hereby authorize the …………..personnel (performer) I hereby certify that the equipment/energy source
to de- isolate the above equipment/energy source from mentioned above has been de-isolated and is ready for
all sources of power and handover the equipment/energy normal operation. (Testing/execution engineer)
source for normal operation..
Issuing authority Signature: Date:

Area –Incharge/RCM Name:
Signature: Date:
Name: Countersigned by Issuing authority
Page 6384 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT
PERMIT FOR EXCAVATION (depth 2m and above)

(Sheet 1of 2)
Project : Sr. No. :
Job Description : Location:
Size of excavation :
COMPLIANCE STATUS
SL.
Description of Item Not Remarks
NO. Yes No
applicable
1 Suitable and sufficient risk assessments and method statements
has been carried to ensure that the work shall be undertaken in
accordance with specification and standard.
2 Are plans/details of underground services available and the
same has been reviewed?
3 Has survey done to locate the services/obstacles etc.
4 Has the live services (electrical, water line, air line, telephone
line, etc.) has been disabled for carrying out the job.
5 Is adequate barriers/ fences to protect the excavation are in
place?
6 Is Adequate warning signs are in place?
7 Is Assessment of ground conditions done and remedial action (if
any) taken?
8 Safe access / egress (e.g. ramp / steps / ladders etc.) provided for
site workmen & supervisors.
9 Is the excavation work being undertaken in proximity of
structure, etc.? If Yes, it’s effect is considered?
10 Availability of competent person for supervising the excavation
work?
11 Adequate safe arrangement to prevent collapse of edges (e.g.
shoring / strutting / benching / sloping etc.) made at site.
12 Hard barricades (at least 1.0M away from edge & for excavation
near site access roads) with warning signs/caution boards are
provided
13 Accumulation / passage-ways of water at periphery of
excavation / trench stopped/ restricted.
14 Is the equipment being used for excavation has been checked for
adequacy and is in good working condition having all the safety
features?
15 Age & fitness of workmen ensured by medical test before
engagement in job?
16 Arrangement of Monitoring of possible oxygen deficiency or
obnoxious gases done & action taken?
PERMIT GRANTED - Yes / No
Name & Signature of Site Engr. Name & Signature of Safety Officer
Contractor (Initiator) Contractor (Issuing authority)
Page 6385 of 8516

6-82-0001 Rev. 7
MANAGEMENT
PERMIT FOR EXCAVATION

(Sheet 2of 2)
NOTES: -
1. Slopes or benches for excavation beyond 2.0M depth shall be designed & approved by Contractor’s site
head.
2. Excavated earth to be kept at least 1.5M away from edges.
3. Safety helmets, Safety shoes or gum-boots, gloves, goggles, Face shield, Safety Harness shall be essential
PPEs.
4. Permit shall be made in duplicate and original shall be available at site of work.
5. Permit shall be issued for maximum one week only (Monday to Sunday).
6. After completion of works, permit shall be closed & preserved for record purpose.
GRANT OF PERMIT AND EXTENSIONS
Issuing authority
Initiator (site Review by EIL /
Sl. Validity period Working Time (Safety Officer
Engr. of Main Owner (Remarks
No. From ____To ____ From _____To _____ of Main
Contractor) with date
Contractor)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Additional safety instructions if any: -

1.
2.
3.
Page 6386 of 8516

Page 6387 of 8516
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR HEALTH, SAFETY & STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT 6-82-0001 Rev. 7
FORMAT NO. : HSE-18 REV 0 (Sheet 1of 2)
IDENTIFICATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS, IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND CONTROL MEASURES
Risk Signific
Environmental Environment Control Consequences Gaps/
S. No Activity N/A/E Level ant
Aspect Impact Measures Recommendations
A B C D E F G Yes/No

Page 6388 of 8516

(Sheet 2 of 2)
INITIAL ENVIRONMENT REVIEW TECHNIQUE
WP = Water LC = Land DNR = Depletion of

Environmental Impacts AP = Air Pollution NP = Noise Pollution
Pollution Contamination Natural Resources
Legal and other

Scale Quantity (A) Occurrence (B) Severity of Impact (C) Detection (D) Control (E)
requirements (F)
Available & effective at In compliance or not
1 Negligible Very Rare Negligible visual impact Immediately
place applicable
Once a month or Causes Discomfort or Has in-built Secondary
2 Low Within 1 hour
less Nuisance control
3 Moderate Once a day Resource Depletion Within 8 hours Needs human Intervention
Several times a Affects Aquatic Life, flora, Mechanism in place but

4 High Within 24 hours
Day fauna or global issue not reliable
Absent or no effective
5 Excessive Continuous Human health effect More than 24 hours Not in compliance
control
Risk Level - G : A x B x C x D x Ex F
Aspects with score of 100 and above are considered as significant.

Also, Irrespective of the score, all legal noncompliance’s to be considered as significant
Condition
N NORMAL
A ABNORMAL
E EMERGENCY

Page 6389 of 8516

FORMAT NO. : HSE-19 REV 0 HIRAC
RECOMENDED
CONTROL
DESIRED CONTROLS &
RISK IDENTIFICATION RISK ASSESSMENT ACTIONs TO ACTION BY REMARKS
EXISTING GAPS, IF ANY
REDUCE THE
RISK LEVEL
S. Activity Activity Hazards Condition Associate Desired Control Gaps If Any Probabil Impact Risk Risk
No. type (N/AN/E) d Risk Measures ity (P) (I) R= P*I Classifi
(R/NR) cation
Likelihood – Possibility of occurrence of risks based on present gaps (technological / operational / competence / measurement and monitoring);
UL: Unlikely, L: Likely, VL: Very Likely, FR: Frequent, C: Continuous
Impact –
SI: Slight Injury, MI: Minor Injury, MJ: Major Injury, SF: Single Fatality, MF: Multiple Fatalities
Level of consequence – Refer Guidance criteria for this i.e. possible degree of damage;
Condition- N: Normal, AN: Abnormal, E-Emergency
Activity Type: R- Routine, NR- Non Routine
RISK –
L: Low Risk, M: Moderate Risk, H: High Risk

STANDARD No.
diar 134GIsEERS
eb-NNA LIMITED
... (A Govt of Indk, U.d.riakin9)
VESSEL TOLERANCES 7-12-0001 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 2
®
4- I-- 11----1-
L ,_ so
so
r II-
-
&
— – – -L =-)) REF. PLANE
1— — --
-c)
1
(§, 1
6 It
wv.l
j% 11"ij
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH .,/ SK/KJH RKT RN
5 30.06.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT AKM/SC DM
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6390 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ENG/NEF36 VESSEL TOLERANCES 7-12-0001 Rev. 6
OkilirbeNDIA Utv'dTEll (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 2
NOTES
1. REFERENCE LINES SHALL BE LIGHTLY PUNCH—MARKED INSIDE AND OUTSIDE AROUND THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF
THE SHELL PLATE ON THE TANGENT LINES OF THE VESSEL
2. a) OUT OF ROUNDNESS (OVAUTY) SHALL BE AS PER APPLICABLE CODE.
b) OUTSIDE CIRCUMFERENCE OF SHELL SHALL BE WITHIN THE FOLLOWING LIMITS.
± 10 mm FOR NOMINAL DIAMETER 1200 mm AND UNDER.
± 12 mm FOR NOMINAL DIAMETER 1201 mm THROUGH 2400 mm.
± 20 mm FOR NOMINAL DIAMETER ABOVE 2400 mm.
c) FOLLOWING TOLERANCES ON DIAMETER SHALL APPLY THROUGHOUT ITS LENGTH FOR VESSELS WITH TRAYS
AND / OR PACKING. (FOR CARTRIDGE TYPE TRAY REFER SPECIAL NOTE—E).
VESSEL NOM. DIA. TOLERANCE ON NOM. DIA.
2000 mm AND UNDER ± 0.5%
2001 mm TO 4000 mm GREATER OF ± 10 mm OR ± 0.35%
4001 mm TO 8000 mm GREATER OF ± 14 mm OR ± 0.25%
ABOVE 8000 mm TO BE SPECIFIED ON VESSEL DRAWING.
3. TOLERANCE FOR LENGTH ± 5 mm PER 3000 mm, MAXIMUM 15 mm.
4. OUTSIDE SURFACE OF CYLINDER MAY BE OUT OF ALIGNMENT / STRAIGHTNESS NOT MORE THAN 6 mm PER 6000 mm
STRAIGHT LENGHT, BUT NOT MORE THAN 20 mm FOR ANY LENGTH.
5. TOLERANCE FOR CENTRE TO CENTRE DISTANCE BETWEEN ANY PAIR OF INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS TO BE AS FOLLOWS:—
DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLES : * 1 mm
ORIENTATION : f 1 mm
NOZZLE FACE INCLINATION : * 1/4 °
6. ELEVATIONS FROM REFERENCE PLANE MAY VARY AS FOLLOWS:—
MANHOLE: ± 12 mm, NOZZLE ± 6 mm, INTERNAL SUPPORTS: ± 3 mm, EXCEPT THAT LOCATIONS OF MANHOLES
AND NOZZLES NEAR THE TRAY SHALL NOT VARY MORE THAN ± 3 mm FROM THE TRAY.
7. PROJECTION OF FLANGE FACE FROM SHELL CENTRAL LINE / TANGENT UNE MAY VARY ± 5 mm FOR NOZZLES
AND ± 12 mm FOR MANHOLES.
8. CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND RADIAL DEVIATION OF NOZZLES, MANHOLES AND SUPPORTS FROM THE TRUE POSITION SHALL
NOT VARY MORE THAN I 3 mm.
9. BOLT HOLE ORIENTATION OF NOZZLES MAY VARY ± 2 mm AT BOLT CIRCLE.
10. VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION OF NOZZLE FLANGE FACES FROM PLANES NORMAL TO NOZZLE CENTRE LINES
OR PARALLEL TO VESSEL CENTRE UNE SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN ± 1/2?
11. ALL TOLERANCES OF TRAY SUPPORTS TO BE AS PER TRAY SPECIFICATIONS / DRAWING.
12. THE BASE RING BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER MAY VARY ± 5 mm. FOR ANY DIAMETER MEASURED AT POINTS 90* APART,
DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO CONSECUTIVE HOLES MAY VARY BY ± 5 mm.
13. a) DEVIATION OF SUPPORT BASE FROM HORIZONTAL MAY BE AS FOLLOWS:—
FOR VESSEL DIA. 1500 mm AND UNDER 3 mm
FOR VESSEL DIA. OVER 1500 mm TO 2000 mm 5 mm
FOR VESSEL DIA. OVER 5000 mm 10 mm
b) DEVIATION OF SUPPORT BASE FOR BRACKET TYPE SUPPORT / SADDLE SUPPORT FROM HORIZONTAL MAY BE ±
14. DISTANCE BETWEEN CL TO CL OF SUPPORTS AND BOLT HOLES IN SUPPORTS FOR HORIZONTAL VESSELS MAY VARY ± 3 mm.
15. DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTRE UNE OF HORIZONTAL VESSEL AND BOTTOM OF SUPPORT MAY VARY ± 3 mm.
16. a) TOLERANCE FOR CENTRE TO CENTRE DISTANCE BETWEEN ANY PART OF EXTERNAL STRUCTURAL
ATTACHMENT SHALL NOT VARY MORE THAN ± 3 mm.
b) TOLERANCE FOR DISTANCE FROM REFERENCE PLANE TO BASE OF VERTICAL SUPPORTS AND CENTRE UNE OF
SADDLE SUPPORT MAY VARY ± 6 mm.
SPECIAL NOTES
A. CUMULATIVE TOLERANCES ON CONSECUTIVE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE LIMITED BY OVERALL DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES.
ALL TOLERANCES ARE FROM REFERENCE PLANE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
B. INTERFERENCE BETWEEN INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL PARTS OR ANY RESTRICTION TO THE INTENDED FUNCTION OF ANY
PART SHALL BE KEPT IN VIEW WHERE TOLERANCES ARE CUMULATIVE.
C. SPECIFIC TOLERANCES FOR ANY PART SHOWN ON EIL DRAWING SHALL BE GIVEN PREFERENCE TO THOSE GIVEN
IN THIS STANDARD.
D. UNUSUALLY LARGE OR COMPLEX VESSELS MAY BE EXECUTED AS PER FABRICATOR'S STANDARD WHEN THE TOLERANCES
AS SHOWN ARE UNREASONABLE. IN SUCH INSTANCES FABRICATOR'S TOLERANCES & LIMITS MUST BE SUBMITTED
FOR APPROVAL.
E. VESSEL UPTO AND INCLUDING 750 mm NOMINAL DIAMETER SHALL HAVE CARTRIDGE TYPE TRAY. FOLLOWING
TOLERANCES ON DIAMETER SHALL APPLY THROUGHOUT ITS LENGTH.
VESSEL NOMINAL DIAMETER TOLERANCE
500 mm AND UNDER VESSEL I.D. *- oI own
m1"
501 mm TO 750 mm VESSEL I.DY1 + 3 run
AvA
i/
\
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/J 01 RN

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6391 of 8516
STANDARD No.
SUPPORT FOR
7-12-0002 Rev. 6
MIR to Goat. of Indk, Undertaking) HORIZONTAL VESSEL
Page 1 of 1
MAX. APPROX.
LROAD
L3 D LB H L1 L2 TYPE SADLE SADDLE
(M. TON) (KGS.)
10 150 10
D/18 IR 300 260 300 50 200 A 4.4 17
350 280 325 55 210 A 4.8 18
m 400 330 350 75 250 A 4.5 20
~
N45r'
= 450 370 375 95 300 A 3.6 22
ppI
OF 500 450 450 125 370 A 14.9
I
40
101•FER RAE
L1L1 600 560 500 175 470 A 13.2 50
I EARTHING 170 700 650 550 225 570 A 11.0 55
L2
= I = 26 0 HOLES FOX 800 750 600 275 670 A 10.6 65
M 20 BOLTS 900 850 650 300 760 A 11.0 75
L:
TYPE - A
Ed11111 1000
1200
950
1100
700
800
330
375
820
960
B
B
12.3
19.4 130
85
HOLE FOR 1400 1250 900 465 1150 B 19.7 140

SLIDING SUPPORT
1600 1450 1000 370 1300 C 23.3 165
1800 1600 1100 410 1450 C 39.1 260
D/18 , 2000 1750 1200 445 1600 C 43.5 290
\
110 I', 2200
2400
1950
2150
1300
1450
495
545
1800
2000
D
D
49.1
53.5
295
390
Ltill'......-.A
- --
111 2600
2800
2300
2500
1550
1650
585
620
2150
2300
D
E
52.9
52.7
440
475
L1 Li
1,0 3000 2670 1750 670 2500 E 64.9 600
I EARTHING
250 3200 2800 1850 710 2600 E 63.8 620
L2
= I = 26 0 HOLES FOR .3400 3000 1950 760 2800 E 64.9 630
M 20 BOLTS 3600 3200 2050 830 3000 E 60.5 725
INN
TYPE - B
ECMO 3800
4000
3350
3550
2150
2250
845
895
3150
3300
E
E
61.0
60.6
745
820
HOLE FOR
SLIDING SUPPORT
TYPE t1 t2 L3 t3
A 10 10 170 12
B 10 12 250 12
C 12 16 300 16
D 16 20 350 20
E 20 20 400 20
250
30 0 HOLES FOR
M 24 BOLTS
PARALLEL TO VESSEL
TYPE - C. D. E AXIS (TYP)
HOLE FOR
SLIDING SUPPORT
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
2. VESSEL DIAMETER 'D' REFERS TO THE OUTER DIAMETER OF THE SHELL
3. FOR INTERMEDIATE DIAMETERS TAKE THE IMMEDIATE NEAREST DIAMETER SUPPORT.
4. WELDING SHALL BE DONE ALL AROUND AND SHALL BE CONTINUOUS FILLET WELD. WELD SIZE SHALL
BE 6 mm FOR VESSELS UPTO 1400 mm DIA. AND 8 mm FOR VESSELS ABOVE 1400 mm DIA.
5. PROVIDE 2 NO. 60 VENT HOLES IN SADDLE WRAPPER PLATE. THESE HOLES SHALL BE PROVIDED DIAGONALLY
OPPOSITE AND BE LEFT UNPLUGED AND SHALL BE FILLED WITH HARD GREASE ONLY.
6. WHERE EARTHING LUG CANNOT BE PUT AT AN ELEVATION OF 400 mm ABOVE THE SADDLE BASE PLATE
IT SHALL BE LOCATED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE.
7. EARTHING LUGS ARE NOT TO BE PAINTED OR GALVANIZED.
8. DETAIL DIMENSIONS AND NOTES IN ENGINEERING DRAWING TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE SHOWN HERE.
9. MATERIALS SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
10. EARTHING LUG SHALL BE AS PER STANDARD 7-12-0026
Vi%
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/K H RKf RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6392 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ORMOENGMERS MIALIMITED
WOODEN PILLOWS
7-12-0003 Rev. 6
(A Covt. of Indio Undertaking) FOR SADDLE SUPPORT
Page 1 of 1
No
150
L
R
1 NO. M12 BOLTING FOR SADDLE LENGTH (LB) UPTO 950 mm.
2 NO. M12 BOLTING FOR SADDLE LENGTH (L B) ABOVE 950 mm.
D t
M 12 BOLTING LESS THAN 1000 8
1000 TO 1599 10
3 THK. ASBESTOS BOARD
1600 TO 4000 12
SEASONED TEAK WOOD

(CLASS-1 DURABILITY AS PER IS : 3629)
STEEL CASING FOR WOODEN PILOW (IS:2062)
NOTES
2. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR ALL HORIZONTAL VESSELS WITH DESIGN TEMPERATUE BELOW VC
3. FOR SADDLE DIMENSIONS REFER STANDARD 7-12-0002.
4. 2—WEEP HOLES OF 20 mm DIA SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE BOTTOM OF THE FRAME.
5. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED THE WOODEN PILLOWS REQUIRED FOR SADDLE SUPPORTS SHALL
n
BE SUPPLIED BY MECHANICAL ERECTION CONTRACTOR.
\rAtisrs
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH KA j>iAl RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6393 of 8516
STANDARD No.
SKIRT BASE DETAILS 7-12-0004 Rev. 7

POIMPINIMIDNIPO (A Govt. of Indio Undortoking)
Page 1 of 1
CHAIR CAP
NOTCH GUSSET TO WASHER WELD AT SITE
CLEAR WELD
CONTINUOUS RING
NOTCH GUSSET TO
CLEAR WELD
EARTHING LUG ,m
,.
BOLT 0
+ 3mm
mIlm
■ Il ■
■i
BOLT 0
+ 12mm
(ALL DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS AND DETAILS ARE
BCD SAME AS SHOWN FOR TYPE-2
EXCEPT CONTINUOUS RING)
[BOLT 0 + 12mm
WIDE SLOT
TYPE-1 TYPE-2 SLOT DETAIL TYPE-3

(SEE NOTE-6) (FOR CONTINUOUS RING ONLY)
BOLT0 t1 * t2 * t3 * A v B C E F H K L* W TYPE REMARKS
24 20 — 10 60 — — — — 250 75 165 10
1
27 20 — 10 60 — — — — 250 80 170 10
30 25 25 12 55 60 150 12 60 300 80 180 10
33 25 25 12 58 65 150 12 70 300 80 185 10
36 25 25 12 66 70 150 12 80 300 90 200 10
39 32 25 12 70 70 160 14 80 300 95 215 12
42 32 25 12 72 70 160 14 90 300 100 230 12
45 32 25 12 80 75 160 14 90 300 105 245 12 2
48 32 30 14 83 75 180 16 100 380 110 260 14 AND
52 38 30 14 87 80 180 16 110 380 110 275 14 3
56 38 30 16 91 85 180 18 120 380 115 280 14
60 38 35 18 95 85 200 20 120 430 125 285 14
64 38 35 18 104 90 200 25 130 430 135 300 16
68 42 40 20 108 90 220 25 140 450 145 320 16
72 42 40 20 112 95 220 25 150 450 150 340 16
NOTES
2. BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER ( BCD ), NUMBER AND SIZE OF THE BOLTS SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
* 3. DIMENSIONS t1, t2, t3 AND 'L' ARE TO BE CHECKED IN EVERY CASE.
4. IN CASE OF ANY CONFUCT THE ENGINEERING DRAWING SHALL GOVERN.
5. NUMBER OF BOLTS USED IS TO BE A MULTIPLE OF 4 AND BOLTS SHALL STRADDLE VESSEL NORTH—SOUTH
CENTRE LINE IN PLAN.
6. USE CONTINUOUS RING ( CHAIR CAP ) IF DISTANCE BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE BOLTS IS LESS THAN 400 mm.
7. CIRCULAR WASHER SHALL BE SHIPPED LOOSE AND WELDED AT SITE AFTER ANCHOR BOLTS ARE IN POSITION.
• 8. PREFERRED DIMENSION 'A'
9. EARTHING LUG SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN THE ANCHOR BOLTS AND SHALL BE AS PER STANDARD 7-12-0026.
10. WHEN THE ANCHOR CHAIR CAP IS NOT CONTINUOUS, THE BASE PLATE SHALL BE SUITABLY STIFFENED USING
REMOVABLE STRUCTURAL SECTIONS (BEAM/SPIDER) AT SITE DURING ERECTI7.
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGHA 11.#;-

1411iN
'

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6394 of 8516
STANDARD No.
SKIRT OPENING DETAILS 7-12-0005 Rev. 6

11111111.101111•11.11111111 (A Cwt. of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 2
PAD ALL AROUND

SEE NOTE-7
REF. SHT. 2 FOR

COVER PLT. DETAIL
100N8 SCH. 40
40 PIPE VENT
EQUISPACED INSIDE
ACCESS OPENING PLAN VENT

(SEE NOTE-5)
ACCESS OPENING/PIPE OPENING/

VENT OPENING (TYPICAL)
SKIRT
80x6THK. PLATE
INSIDE
2mm(TENTATNE)
CHECK FOR PIPE
THERMAL EXPANSION.
OR INSULATED PIPE+10
S MALLER OF ts+2
OR 14mm (FOR PIPE
SEE NOTE-6)
SEE NOTE-10
PIPE OPENING VIEW A VIEW A FLARED SKIRT

(HOT TYPE VESSEL) (COLD TYPE VESSEL)
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH RN
5 23.05.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL : All rights reserved
Page 6395 of 8516
STANDARD No.
IENGNEERS SKIRT OPENING DETAILS 7-12-0005 Rev. 6
ISIBMO NDIA LIMITED (A Govt. of Indio Untiurto!Ong)
Page 2 of 2
25
6 WIDE SLOT FOR
5 N
125 125
DETAIL — A
3-50 PINS-15 LG
EQUISPACED
VIEW—P
NOTES (HOT TYPE VESSEL) (COLD TYPE VESSEL)
2. ACCESS OPENING SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN ANCHOR BOLTS WHEREVER POSSIBLE.
3. ACCESS OPENING IS NOT TO BE BLOCKED BY BOTTOM HEAD.
4. SKIRT DIAMETER ACCESS OPENING DIA.(D) NO. OF ACCESS OPENING
UP TO 1000 400 1
OVER 1000 UPTO 1500 450 1
OVER 1500 UPTO 3000 500 1
OVER 3000 500 2
5. SKIRT DIAMETER NO. OF VENT HOLES
UP TO 1000 2
OVER 1000 UPTO 2000 3
OVER 2000 4
6. MINIMUM SIZE OF PIPE SLEEVE IS 150NB SCH 40. USE SCH 40 UPTO 25ONB PIPE SLEEVE. FOR 300NB AND
ABOVE, PIPE SLEEVE SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM PLATE.
7. ALL OPENINGS 300 DIA. AND ABOVE SHALL BE PROVIDE WITH REINFORCEMENT PADS ON INNER SURFACE OF SKIRT.
8. IN CASE OF CONFLICT ENGINEERING DRAWING SHALL GOVERN.
9. IN FLARED SKIRT, OPENING DETAIL IS SAME AS THAT FOR CYLINDRICAL SKIRT.
10. WOODEN BLOCK SHALL BE FIXED TO SLEEVE WITH TWO NO. OF WOOD SCREWS.
11. ACCESS OPENING/PIPE OPENING/VENT SHALL BE OF SAME MATERIAL AS THAT OF SKIRT.
12. ALL FILLET WELDS SHALL BE 6 mm MINIMUM.
* 13. PROJECTION OF SLEEVE/NECK SHALL BE GREATEST OF (30+INSULATION THK.), (30+ FIRE PROOFING) & 50mm.
14. CENTER LINE OF ACCESS OPENING SHALL BE 850 MM (MINIMUM) ABOVE BOTTOM BASE RING FOR ANCHOR
BOLTS OF SIZE M45 & BELOW AND 1100 MM (MINIMUM) FOR ANCHOR BOLTS OF SIZE ABOVE M45. IF ANCHOR
CHAIR HEIGHT IS MORE THAN THAT OF GIVEN IN STANDARD. LOCATION OF ACCESS OPENING SHALL BE ESTABLISHED
SUITABLY.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJ

W-A. ? RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6396 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ENONEERS OIN1ALIVdTBID ANGLE LEG SUPPORT
diegM (A Govt. of bfdlo Undortoking)
7-12-0006 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 2
PAD AS PER
ENGINEERING DRAWING
6 THK. COVER
V PLATE
L
113
N f IREF. TABLE ON
SHT. 2 OF 2 HOLE DIA.= BOLT DIA.
NOTCH TO + 6mm
%,/ CLEAR WELD 0
0
0
WELD UNE
WOK UN
HEIGH T OFSUPPO RT (
SUPPORT BASE DETAIL
0
0
•fir
B.C.D.=VESSEL 0/D-50
NOTES
2. THIS STD. IS APPLICABLE FOR VESSEL DIAMETER UPTO AND INCLUDING 2000mm, MAXIMUM SHELL THICKNESS OF 20mm
AND MAXIMUM LENGTH (T.L. TO T.L.) OF 3000mm VESSELS BEYOND ABOVE RANGE REQUIRE SPECIAL CONSIDERATION.
3. FOR CALCULATION, FOLLOWINGS PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN CONSIDERED.
a) WIND PRESSURE 200 Kg/m2
SHAPE FACTOR 0.7
BASIC SEISMIC CO—EMCENT (a0 ) 0.08
SOIL FOUNDATION SYSTEM FACTOR ( /I ) 1.5
IMPORTANCE FACTOR (I) 2.0
b) EMPTY WEIGHT WITH WIND LOADING OR HYDROSTATIC WEIGHT WITH SEISMIC LOADING.
4. HEIGHT AND NUMBER OF LEG SUPPORTS AND SIZE OF ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
5. MINIMUM BOLT SIZE SHALL BE M 20.
6. MAXIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS CONSIDERED IS 150 mm.
10. EARTHING LUG SHALL BE AS PER STANDARD 7-12-0026.

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6397 of 8516
STANDARD No.
age EINIGNIRS
N:MA LIMITED
(A Govt. d 'oda Undortolting)
ANGLE LEG SUPPORT 7-12-0006 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 2
LEG SUPPORT SIZES
LEG SIZE
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE
VESSEL NO.OF MAX. VESSEL LENGTH (T.L TO T.L) UP TO AND INCLUDING 3.0 N BASE PLATE SIZE X LOAD OF VESSEL
0/0(mm) LEGS (mm) (mm) (Kg.)
L = 1.5 M L = 2.0 M L = 2.5 M
500 3 ISA 100x100x8 ISA 100x100x10 ISA 110x110x15 170x170x16 THK. 40 1500
1600 4 ISA 130x130x 15 ISA 150x150x15 ISA 150x150x18 230x230x16 THK. 60 9500
NOTES
FOR A VESSEL WITH MAXIMUM SUPPORT LEG HEIGHT OF 1500mm, FOLLOWING ALTERNATIVE
LEG SIZES MAY BE USED :—
a) ISA 65x65x8 WITH HYDROSTATIC WEIGHT UPTO 500 Kg.

b) ISA 80x80x8 WITH HYDROSTATIC WEIGHT 501 Kg. TO 1000 Kg.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH

RYtAik titAN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6398 of 8516
STANDARD No.
terir ENGNEERS eg iNDIAUNITED (A Govt. of India Undertaking)

PIPE LEG SUPPORT 7-12-0007 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 1
6mm THK. COVER

PLATE
Y
NOTCH TO WELD UNE
CLEAR WELD
TANGENT UNE
HEIGH TOFSUPPO RT (L )
SECTION-YY
NOTES
2. FOR DESIGN OF SUPPORT, FOLLOWINGS PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN CONSIDERED.
a) WIND PRESSURE 200 Kg/m 2
EARTHING LUG
Is SHAPE FACTOR
BASIC SEISMIC CO—EFFICENT (a0)
0.7
0.08
SOIL FOUNDATION SYSTEM FACTOR (3 ) 1.5
IMPORTANCE FACTOR (I) 2.0
b) EMPTY WEIGHT WITH WIND LOADING OR HYDROSTATIC WEIGHT
WITH SEISMIC LOADING.
3. HEIGHT AND NUMBER OF LEG SUPPORTS AND SIZE OF ANCHOR BOLTS
HOLE DA =BOLT DIA + 6mm
SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
4. MINIMUM BOLT SIZE SHALL BE M 20.
5. MAXIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS CONSIDERED IS 150 mm.
10. SUITABLE PAD FOR SS VESSEL SHALL BE PROVIDED.
SUPPORT BASE DETAIL
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOAD PER LEG (Kgs)

LEG PIPE SIZE A B C E t MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF SUPPORT (L) IN METERS
2.0 2.5 3.0
5ONB x EXTRA STRONG 120 230 140 36 20 2300 2050 1800
8ONB x EXTRA STRONG 180 250 160 36 25 5700 5500 4900
100NB x EXTRA STRONG 230 310 185 42 25 9000 8600 8300
150NB x EXTRA STRONG 320 370 235 44 25 18500 18000 17500
44t.t/Vhii
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SNKJH RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6399 of 8516
STANDARD No.
BRACKET SUPPORT FOR
B•IGINEB6 7-12-0008 Rev. 6
INDIA WIN■Dg)
ellIMO(A Goof, of Mao UndortakIr VERTICAL VESSEL
Page 1 of 1
SEEENGINEERING DRAWING
SEEENGINEERING DRAWING
1801 — 2000 650 500 400 550 25 14 350 50 550 60
1601 — 1800 600 450 350 500 25 14 300 50 540 55
M30 (MINIMUM)
60 (MINIMUM)
1401 — 1600 550 400 300 450 25 14 250 50 540 50
1201 — 1400 500 350 250 450 25 12 200 25 470 40
1001 — 1200 450 320 220 400 20 12 180 25 450 30
801 — 1000 450 280 200 400 20 12 150 25 450 25

MAXIMUM
, ANCHOR ALLOWABLE
•g
.1
VESSEL OUTSIDE DIA. A B C E F G H J m
M BOLT VESSEL
DIA. WEIGHT
(TONNE)
1-60 VENT HOLE

25
REFER NOTE-3
(SEE ENGINEERING
DRAWING)
Ts SHELL THK.
'X' 0/D OF VESSEL

REFER NOTE-6
NOTES
2. NUMBER OF BRACKETS SHALL BE FOUR PER VESSEL.
3. PAD THICKNESS SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
4. FOR VESSELS UPTO 800 mm DIA. REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
6. DISTANCE 'X' IS TO BE FINALISED CONSIDERING INSULATION THICKNESS, BOLT SIZE AND ERECTION
REQUIREMENT AND SHALL BE KEPT MINIMUM.
fl,t00 ) 41,
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH .*-*-**- SK/KJH r RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6400 of 8516
STANDARD No.
MANHOLE WITH
Et•IGINEERS 7-12-0009 Rev. 7
OIRMO PIIIIMPIIIIIVINDIPM (A Govt. .t
NDIA UNTIED
Indio UndortokIng) HINGED COVER
Page 1 of 2
3—M16 SS 3 THK. WASHER

JACK SCREWS ON WELDED TO HINGE BAR
BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER
(SEE NOTE-3) —4 GAP
THK. WASHER
SS HINGE
BAR
-0-3 THK. WASHER

— 4 GAP
BLIND
M16 /FLANGE
IH
I
1-3mm NPT
TELL—TALE HOLE
120 0
1 110 0 0
V)
0
SEE NOTE-2
11 20 0 ROD
— HANDGRIP DETAIL OF JACK SCREW
d0
BLIND FLANGE
SLOPE TO FIT
PERIPHERY OF
W.N. OR S.O. MANHOLE FLG.
FLANGE R
W.N. OR S.O.
d10 FLANGE
mt
ts= . R
III V" 0
BLIND FLANGE
SIDE AND BOTTOM

MANHOLE TABS DETAILS TOP MANHOLE TABS DETAILS
H
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJ ‘6g
1 rt/ RN

No.
Date Purpose
by by
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 -0001 - F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6401 of 8516
STANDARD No.
MANHOLE WITH
ENGINEERS 7-12-0009 Rev. 7
fiks
$M OINDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. of Indio Undertaking) HINGED COVER
Page 2 of 2
NOMINAL
FLANGE RATING G t d R d1 L
BORE
400 298 28 35 55 36 42
450 318 28 35 55 36 42
CLASS 150
500 348 28 35 55 36 42
600 406 28 35 55 36 42
400 324 28 35 55 36 42
450 355 28 35 55 36 42
CLASS 300
500 386 30 35 55 36 42
600 458 30 35 55 36 42
400 342 32 40 55 41 47
450 372 32 40 60 41 47
CLASS 600
500 406 36 40 60 41 47
600 470 36 40 75 41 47
400 352 32 40 60 41 47
450 394 32 40 65 41 47
CLASS 900
500 428 40 40 70 41 47
600 520 40 40 90 41 47
NOTES
2. WELD HINGE TABS AFTER TIGHTENING THE COVER WITH GASKET IN PLACE
AND MAINTAIN A LOOSE FIT OF HINGE BAR IN HINGE TABS.
3. BCD OF JACK SCREWS IS TO BE SUITABLY CHANGED IF MANHOLE
STUDS INTERFERE WITH JACK SCREWS.
4. IF SQUARE RODS ARE USED FOR HANDLES, THEIR EDGES SHALL BE ROUNDED OFF.
5. IN CASE OF CONFLICT, ENGINEERING DRAWING SHALL GOVERN.
6. ALL FILLET WELDS SHALL BE 6mm MINIMUM.
7. TELLTALE HOLE SHALL NOT BE PLUGED AND SHALL BE FILLED WITH
HARD GREASE ONLY.
8. THE MATERIAL OF COMPONENTS SHALL GENERALLY BE IS : 2062 UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ON ENGINEERING DRAWING. FOR LOW TEMPERATURE
SERVICES AND SERVICES ABOVE 425'C THE HINGE TABS AND HANDLE SHALL
BE OF SAME MATERIAL AS THAT OF SHELL.
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT KJH 1 RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6402 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ORMOENGNEERS
A INDIA LIMITED
( Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
MANHOLE WITH DAVIT 7-12-0010 Rev. 7
Page 1 of 2
20 0 x 25 LG. SNAP
HEAD RIVET
240 ROD
B(C0)+70 1.5 THK. S.S. WASHER
PIPE 'B' SCH. 80
30 VENT
10 THK. RIB
10
6R 15
PIPE 'A' 1NO. 60

DRAIN HOLE
1NO. 3mm NPT DETAIL 'X'

TELL TALE HOLE
3N0.—M16 SS JACK SCREWS

ON BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER
( SEE NOTE-3 )
DETAIL OF EYE BOLT
M16
07;4 [..:110
BOND
FLANGE 20 0
I M16
TYP. DETAIL FOR SR MANHOLE DETAIL OF JACK SCREW
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH _ 4s1Z)1-

KJH
fr.j7--
RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6403 of 8516
STANDARD No.
INGNEIRS MANHOLE WITH DAVIT 7-12-0010 Rev. 7
41i1MO INDIA UWE"
to Govt. of Indko UndortokIng)
Page 2 of 2
160 ROD FOR S.S. VESSEL

B(00)+20 / 200 ROD FOR C.S. AND
PIPE '8' SCH. 80 LOW ALLOY STEEL VESSEL
1.5 THK. VESSEL INSIDE
S.S. WASHER IMO 0
BSI 10 THK. RIB 20R 0
II
g
260 350
(32 0)
4OR
WI7—\
DETAIL OF HAND GRIP
■ ••
HAND GRIP
—F-
20 0 x 25 LG. SNAP
250
// PIPE 'A'
//
//
//
30 VENT
I/ o
//
//
//
//
././
Y 41
3N0.-M16 SS JACK SCREWS

ON BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER
(SEE NOTE-3)
INO. 6 0
DRAIN HOLE
/11 I15
DETAIL 'Y'
INO.-3mm NPT
TELL TALE HOLE
mak CLASS
SIZE
( NB) A (NB) B (NB)
.111 1°V.:111 _-.....0111111/11111 400 50 NB SCH. 80 40
1 200 200
20 0 ROD HANDLE
150
450
500
50 NB SCH. 80
65 NB SCH. 40
40
50
600 65 NB SCH. 40 50
400 65 NB SCH. 40 50
450 65 NB SCH. 40 50
300
500 65 NB SCH. 40 50
NOTES
600 90 NB SCH. 40 80
2. DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE FOR CLASS 900. 400 80 NB SCH. 40 65
3. B.C.D. OF JACK SCREWS IS TO BE SUITABLY CHANGED IF MANHOLE
450 90 NB SCH. 40 80
STUDS INTERFERE WITH JACK SCREWS. 600
4. THE SLEEVE PIPE 'A' SHOULD BE IN TRUE VERTICAL POSITION WITHIN 500 125 NB SCH. 80 100
A TOLERANCE OF 2 1/2 DEGREE, AFTER WELDING TO THE FLANGE.
600 125 NB SCH. 80 100
5. EDGES SHALL BE ROUNDED OFF IF SQUARE ROD IS USED
FOR HANDGRIP. 400 125 NB SCH. 80 100
6. MATERIAL OF DAVIT COMPONENTS SHALL BE C.S. UNLESS OTHERWISE
SPECIFIED IN ENGINEERING DRAWING. 450 125 NB SCH. 80 100
900
7. ALL FILLET WELDS SHALL BE 6mm MINIMUM. 500 150 NB SCH. 80 125
8. THIS STANDARD IS NOT APPLICABLE FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICES.
600 150 NB SCH. 80 125
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT livdrotr


No. by by
Approved by
Page 6404 of 8516
STANDARD No.
LADDER RUNGS FOR
ENGINEERS 7-12-0011 Rev. 6
ORM.) (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
INDIA LIMITED MANHOLE / DEMISTER
Page 1 of 1
TOP OF DEMISTER
.!.!..t.!-:•!•,..:•!•!•!•!•:•:•!•!•!>!•!•!•!•:•!•!•!•!•:-!•!•!•:•'."_?..
HORIZONTAL VESSEL
TOP LADDER RUNGS EQUISPACED AT BOTH LEVELS

2—NOS. FOR DIA. < 1000.
4—NOS. FOR 1000 < DIA. < 2000
6—NOS. FOR 2000 < DIA. 3000
8—NOS. FOR DIA. > 3000
175 175
MANHOLE Q
ti
200
DETAIL—X
DETAIL—X
175 175
20(16)RODFI
VERTICAL VESSEL C.S. AND LOW ALLOY
STEEL (NOTE-7)
20R
HANDGRIP
NOTES
• 2. VARIATION IN SPACING BETWEEN LADDER RUNGS IS PERMITTED
IN CASE OF INTERFERENCE WITH SOME NOZZLE OR INTERNALS.
HOWEVER THE SPACING OF RUNGS SHALL BE EQUAL.
3. SQUARE RODS MAY BE USED FOR HANDGRIP / LADDER RUNGS.
IF FABRICATED FROM PLATE THE EDGES ARE TO BE ROUNDED OFF.
4. MATERIAL SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
6. ORIENTATION OF LADDER RUNGS SHALL BE SAME AS OF MANHOLE.
7. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN BRACKETS ARE FOR STAINLESS STEEL MATERIAL.
gi-
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SING SK/KJH Rif RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6405 of 8516
STANDARD No.
!MMHG RETAINING PLATE 7-12-0012 Rev. 6
dlikTIMOINDIA UNWED (A Govt. of Indio UndwtokIng)
Page 1 of 1
15 75 (TO CLEAR
FLANGE WELDING)
r--
50
■
12
II7
m
3—INSIDE BLOCKS
20x20x20 100
3—INSIDE BLOCKS
EQUALLY SPACED.
3—OUTSIDE BLOCKS 3—OUTSIDE BLOCKS
20x20x20 EQUALLY SPACED.
TYPE -1
140 HOLE IN SHELL AND CLOSURE

ON TRUE HORIZONTAL PLANE AT 90* APART
75 REF. ENGG. DRAWING

(CLEAR FLG.
WELDING) TYPE -2
NOTE
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6406 of 8516
STANDARD No.
NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT
ENGN33IS
111111171,1111,11MIND (A Govt. of loft Undertaking) AND PROJECTION
Page 1 of 2
0
1
5-
1-30 NPT TELLTALE HOLE
(REFER NOTE-7)
O
F—
L (WIDTH OF PAD) C) PROJECTION 'A' SEE NOTE-4,5,9800

NOMINAL OUTSIDE
PIPE SIZE DIAMETER SHELL WELD SHELL WELD CLASS 150 CLASS 300 CLASS 600 CLASS 900
EFF.=0.85 EFF.=1.0
BELOW 3" STANDARD - - 150 150 150 150
3" 88.9 40 45 200 200 200 200
4" 114.3 50 60 200 200 200 200
6" 168.3 70 85 200 200 200 250
8" 219.0 95 110 200 200 250 250
10" 273.0 115 135 200 200 250 300
12" 323.8 135 160 200 200 250 300

14" 355.6 150 175 250 250 250 300
16" 406.4 170 200 250 250 250 300
18" 457.2 195 225 250 300 300 350
20" 508.0 215 250 250 300 300 350
24" 609.6 255 300 250 300 300 400
26" 660.4 285 330 250 300 350 450
28" 711.2 305 355 250 300 350 450
30" 762 325 380 250 300 400 450
32" 812.8 350 405 300 350 400 500
34" 863.6 370 430 300 350 400 500
36" 914.4 390 455 300 350 - -
38" 965.2 410 480 300 350 - -
40" 1016 435 505 300 350 - -
42" 1066.8 455 530 300 400 - -
44" 1117.6 475 555 300 400 - -
46" 1168.4 500 585 300 400 - -

48" 1219.2 520 610 300 400 - -
6 07.06.2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD NIKHIL RKT/SC DM
5 23.05.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn 8-110-n0(11-F4 RPV fl r.nnvrinht Fit - All rinhts msprvori
Page 6407 of 8516

STANDARD No.
NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT
INGINEERS
MR wow staxiso (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
AND PROJECTION
Page 2 of 2
NOTES
C) 3. WIDTH IS MINIMUM AND SHALL BE CHECKED AGAINST CODE REQUIREMENT. CHECK REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENT FOR
ALL EXTERNAL PIPING LOADING ALSO.
4. NOZZLE PROJECTIONS ARE BASED ON INSULATION THICKNESS EQUAL TO 75mm. FOR INSULATION THICKNESS
GREATER THAN 75mm, THE NOZZLE PROJECTION IS 'A' + [INSULATION THICKNESS(mm)-75].
5. PROJECTION 'A' FOR SELF—REINFORCED NOZZLE SHALL BE BASED ON DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT SUBJECT TO
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS AS PER THIS STD.
6. EXTEND PAD LOCALLY FOR MANHOLE DAVIT SUPPORT, IF REQUIRED.
7. EXTERNAL REINFORCING PADS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 1 NO. TELL—TALE HOLE EXCEPT THAT PADS FOR
NOZZLES GREATER THAN 10"NB(250NB) SHALL HAVE MINIMUM TWO NOS. TELL—TALE HOLES AND NOZZLES IN
EXCESS OF 36"NB (900NB) SHALL HAVE 4 NOS. TELL—TALE HOLES. PAD INSTALLED IN SECTIONS SHALL HAVE
ATLEAST ONE TELL—TALE HOLE PER SECTION. TELL—TALE HOLES ON REINFORCEMENT PADS SHALL BE
EQUALLY SPACED IN CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION OF PAD.
8. TELL—TALE HOLE SHALL NOT BE PLUGGED AND SHALL BE FILLED WITH HARD GREASE ONLY, AFTER
HYDROTEST/PNEUMATIC TEST OF EQUIPMENT.
9. o) FOR COLUMNS & VERTICAL VESSELS, PROJECTION OF NOZZLE ON TOP HEAD SHALL BE 400mm MINIMUM FROM
OUTSIDE.
b) FOR HORIZONTAL VESSELS, PROJECTION OF NOZZLES ON TOP SIDE OF SHELL SHALL BE 300mm MINIMUM FROM
OUTSIDE.
10. PROJECTIONS ARE BASED ON ASME 816.5 FLANGES FOR UPTO AND INCLUDING 24"NB NOZZLES AND ASME 816.47
SERIES 'B' FLANGES FOR NOZZLE SIZES ABOVE 24"NB.
.1 1
6 07.06.2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD NKL RKT/SC DM

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8-nn-onni-F4 Rpv n nonvrinht FII - All rinhts rpsprypri
Page 6408 of 8516

STANDARD No.
STANDARD BOLT HOLE
ENGINEERS 0 MIA WITH) 7-12-0015 Rev. 6
41114= (A Govt. of WIG Undortoldng) ORIENTATION
Page 1 of 1
HORIZONTAL VESSEL
(ELEVATION)
et_
VERTICAL VESSEL
(PLAN)
6
5
31.10.2016
23.05.2011
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH ,..••••• SK/KJH h:T) RN
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6409 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS ALLOY LINER DETAILS 7-12-0016 Rev. 6
dear
IMlownewirunsum
OINDIA LYME.
(A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
Page 1 of 2
SS/ALLOY WELD SS/ALLOY WELD SS ALLOY WELD

METAL DEPOSIT METAL DEPOSIT
CS/LOW ALLOY CS/LOW CS/LOW ALLOY
FLANGE ALLOY FLANGE FLANGE
' 3mm NPT

TELL—TALE HOLE
(TYP.)
CS LOW ALLOY PIPE
CS LOW ALLOY
CS LOW ALLOY PIPE FORGING
3mm NPT
TELL—TALE HOLE
(TYP.)
** **
NOZZLE WELDING DETAIL WELDING DETAIL FOR

FOR SIZE UPTO 150NB SR NOZZLES
SS/ALLOY SS/ALLOY
WELD METAL CS/LOW ALLOY WELD METAL
CS/LOW ALLOY DEPOSIT FLANGE DEPOSIT
FLANGE
**
CORNER ROUNDED
TO 3mm RADIUS
THICKNESS OF WELD
METAL DEPOSIT NOT LESS
THAN CLADDING IN VESSEL CLAD
PLATE
PLATE
DETAIL-Y
(TYPICAL)
** CHIPBACK CLADDING
A \ \ ■ f)
(0
,.:&
.7..6
BEFORE WELD METAL DEPOSIT
MkIP• Y
** **
SS ALLOY SS ALLOY
WELD METAL WELD METAL
DEPOSIT DEPOSIT
NOZZLE WELDING DETAIL
FOR SIZE ABOVE 150NB.
**
WELD METAL DEPOSIT
30- 6 6 30
WELD METAL DEPOSIT
WELDING DETAIL FOR CIRCUMFERENTIAL
WELD DEPOSIT DETAIL
AND LONGITUDINAL JOINTS
FOR BLIND FLIANGES
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH ,„../* WKJHATA/v ■ P./f RN
5 20.11.2009 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKG AKM ND
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6410 of 8516
STANDARD No.
afr 134G1t•EERS
ebAbINDIA
wourommo
LIMITED
(A Govt. of Mao Undortokbvg)
ALLOY LINER DETAILS 7-12-0016 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 2
NOTES
2. WELD DEPOSIT SHALL BE OF MINIMUM TWO LAYER CONSTRUCTION WITH TOP 2mm OF FINISHED
WELD THICKNESS HAVING THE SAME CHEMISTRY AS THAT OF ALLOY SPECIFIED FOR CLADDING
/ LINING (NOTE-7). CHECK OF FERRITE CONTENT AND ITS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA SHALL BE
AS PER MATERIAL REQUISITION.
* 3. FINISHED RAISED FACE AS WELL AS GROOVE DIMENSIONS OF RTJ AND T&G SHALL BE AS PER
APPLICABLE STANDARD.
4. CS/LOW ALLOY WELDMENT OF S.O. FLANGE AND OF RF PAD SHALL BE PNEUMATICALLY

CHECKED AT 1.8 kg/cm 2 (g) FOR LEAK—TIGHTNESS BEFORE DEPOSITING SS/ALLOY
WELD METAL
5. THE TELL—TALE HOLE SHALL NOT BE PLUGGED AND SHALL BE FILLED WITH GREASE.
6. CORNER RADIUS OF WELD METAL DEPOSITS SHALL BEAR SMOOTH FINISH.
7. WELDING IN CONJUNCTION WITH ALLOY LINING SHALL BE DONE WITH COVERED

ELECTRODES OR FILLER WIRE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATION LISTED BELOW:—
CLADDING APPLIED UNING BARRIER/FIRST LAYER TOP LAYER

A 263 A 240 TYPE 405,410S (2) (8)
A 264 A 240 TYPE 304 (1) (3)
A 264 A 240 TYPE 304L (8) (4)
A 264 A 240 TYPE 316 (2) (5)
A 264 A 240 TYPE 316L (8) (6)
A 264 A 240 TYPE 321 OR 347 (a) (7)
A 265 B-127 (10) (9)
SPECIFICATION ELECTRODE CLASSIFICATION

(1) AWS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 309L
(2) AWS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 309MoL
(3) AWS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 308
(4) AWS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 308L
(5) AWS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 316
(6) AWS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 316L
(7) AVIS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 347
(8) AWS A 5.4, ASME SFA 5.4 E 410S/E430
(9) AWS A 5.11, ASME SFA 5.11 ENi Cu7
(10) AWS A 5.11, ASME SFA 5.11 ENi1
FILLER WIRE FOR GTAW, GMAW, SAW PROCESS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:—

A) FOR STAINLESS STEEL SPECIFICATION AS PER AWS A 5.9, ASME SFA 5.9
WITH COMPOSITION AS LISTED ABOVE FROM (1) TO (8).
B) FOR MONEL (NICKEL COPPER ALLOY) SPECIFICATION AS PER AWS A 5.14,

ASME SFA 5.14 WITH COMPOSITIONS AS LISTED ABOVE AT (9) & (10).
(ii). WHEREVER SPECIFIED ENiCr Fe3 (INCONEL) WELDING SHALL BE DONE DUE TO
SERVICE REQUIREMENTS.
(iii). FOR JOINTS BETWEEN PIPE TO PIPE/PIPE—FITTING IN ALLOY/SS LINED CONSTRUCTION

IF OTHER SIDE OF JOINT IS NOT ACCESSIBLE, SHALL BE DONE WITH WELDING
CONSUMABLE MATCHING THE CLAD MATERIAL FOLLOWED BY A BARRIER LAYER OF
PURE IRON (ARMO/KATDO IRON) AND THEN BY WELDING CONSUMABLE MATCHING
THE BASE MATERIAL.
8. IN CASE OF MONEL CLAD CONSTRUCTION, FREE IRON CONTENT IN THE WELD OVERLAY
SHALL NOT EXCEED 2.5% AT A DEPTH OF 2mm FROM FINISHED OVERLAY THICKNESS.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH"9 K KJH
5 20.11.2009 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKG AKM ND

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6411 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ENIGN335 INTERNAL FLANGES 7-12-0018 Rev. 6
INDIA LAVED
(A Govt. of Inds, Undertoldns)
Page 1 of 1
O.D.
B.C.D.
I.D. REFER NOTE-4
4.*
18 DIA. HOLES /
FOR M16 BOLTS
THICKNESS OF
NOMINAL FLANGE t
NUMBER
PIPE SIZE I.D. B.C.D. O.D.
OF BOLTS CARBON S. STEEL
(mm)
STEEL OR MONEL
40 51 110 160 4 16 10
50 63 120 170 4 16 10
80 92 150 200 4 16 10
100 117 180 230 4 16 10
150 171 240 290 4 16 10
200 222 290 340 8 20 12
250 276 350 400 8 20 12
300 327 400 450 8 20 12
350 358 430 480 12 24 16
400 409 480 530 12 24 16
450 460 530 580 12 24 16
500 511 580 630 12 24 16
600 612 680 730 12 24 16
NOTES
• 3. FILLET SIZE IN BRACKET ARE FOR STAINLESS STEEL / MONEL.
4. FULL FACED GASKETS SHALL BE USED.
5. DIMENSIONS EXCEPT THICKNESS FOR INTERNAL FLANGES OF SIZE 25NB OR LESS SHALL BE AS PER
ASME B16.5 CLASS 150. FLANGE THICKNESS AND FACING SHALL BE .EQUIVALENT TO 40NB FLANGE
COVERED IN THIS STANDARD.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH taVAti 04—
RN
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6412 of 8516
STANDARD No.
arr ENGINEERS
esONDIALINTED
munawirorows (A Govt. of Wig Undortaking)
VORTEX BREAKERS 7-12-0019 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 1
50 FOR NOZZLES MO 250 NB

AND 80 FOR NOZZLES MOVE
250 NB
60 DRAIN HOLE FLUSH

WITH VESSEL WALL CLAD/WELD OVERLAYED NOZZLE
(TYP.)
UNUNED NOZZLE (TYP.)
TYPE — 1A TYPE — 2A
FOR NOZZLE NB > 100
3D0
60 DRAIN HOLE FLUSH

PLAN VIEW FOR
WITH VESSEL WALL 1B AND 2B
TYPE — 1B TYPE — 2B
FOR NOZZLE NB < 100
ALLOY / ALLOY CLAD/

VESSEL CONCRETE LINED
CARBON STEEL/LOW ALLOY STEEL ALLOY LINED
MATERIAL (NOTE-3b)
CORROSION
ALLOWANCE 1.5 3 4.5 6 — —
THICKNESS 't' 6 8 12 14 5 5
WELD SIZE 'W' 6 6 8 8 5 5
NOTES
3.a) FOR ALLOY LINED VESSELS, THE BAFFLE MATERIAL SHALL BE SAME AS ALLOY LINING.
b) FOR CONCRETE LINED VESSELS, THE BAFFLE MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOY AS SPECIFIED
IN ENGINEERING DRAWING.
4. REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING FOR DIMENSION 'B'.
5. 'D. DENOTES NOMINAL BORE SIZE OF SUBJECT NOZZLE.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJHM RIOWfr fr RN


No. by by
Approved by
Page 6413 of 8516
STANDARD No.
B4G14336 INLET DEFLECTOR BAFFLE 7-12-0020 Rev. 6
4IBMO INDIA WM.
Gect. am. Undarteldng)
Page 1 of 1
VESSEL INSIDE INSIDE
r **6 (5)
1///4/ 41/411,4•4 111411
'0
HALF PIPE OF NOMINAL

PIPE SIZE = 2d **6 (5) V **6 5
2—RATS *6 (5) THK.
(NOT REQUIRED FOR
'd' < 150 NB)
to
d 2 50 MIN.
TYPE-1 TYPE-2
NOTES
2. ix = 30' UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED (TO BE ADJUSTED TO PREVENT
BLOWING INTO SEAL PAN).
5. DIMENSIONS IN BRACKETS ARE FOR STAINLESS STEEL.
* 6. INDICATED THICKNESS OF INTERNAL BAFFLE PLATE IS MINIMUM TO
WHICH TWICE THE CORROSION ALLOWANCE IS TO BE ADDED.
**7. ALL FILLET WELD SIZE SHALL BE OF 6MM MINIMUM TO WHICH THE
CORROSSION ALLOWANCE IS TO BE ADDED.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJFACw' RKf AlC4 RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6414 of 8516

STANDARD No.
Oiar &CHEERStezON:AALIMITED
SUPPORT RING AND
7-12-0021 Rev. 6
(A Cori of Indio Unartoldno) BOLTING BAR
Page 1 of 1
SIDE DOWNCOMER CENTRAL au.

DOWNCOMER DOWNCOMER THREE PASS TRAY
SINGLE PASS TRAY DOUBLE PASS TRAY
SUPP. RING FILLET

THICKNESS SIZE—C
MM MM
UPTO 12 6
ABOVE 12 10
—UPTO 16
ABOVE 16 0.7 T
DETAIL — A DETAIL — B SECTION—XX
VESSEL I/D. BOLTING BAR (WXT)** SUPPORT RING (SXT) ** CENTER & OFFCENTER
85 X 6 40 X 6 *
FOR SINGLE PASSAND
UPTO 1200 DOWNCOMER

MULTI PASS TRAYS
1201 TO 2000 110 X 6 50 X 6

SIDEDOWNCOMER
FOUR PASS TRAY

2001 TO 3000 125 X 6 65 X 6
EXIT WEIR HEIGHT
3001 TO 4500 150 X 10 75 X 10
+ TRAY THICKNESS
4501 TO 6000 175 X 10 90 X 10
6001 TO 7500 200 X 10 90 X 10
7501 TO 9000 200 X 10 100 X 10
9001 TO 12000
12001 TO 14000
225
225
X
X
10
10
110 X 10
125 X 10
4=1)
UPTO 1200 —
CENTREDOWNCOMERS
—
FOR MULTIPASS TRAYS
1201 TO 2000 125 X 6 50 X 6

CENTRE AND OFF
2001 TO 3000 150 X 6 65 X 6

3001 TO 4500 175 X 10 75 X 10
4501 TO 6000 200 X 10 90 X 10
TRAYSPACING
6001 TO 7500 225 X 10 90 X 10

0
7501 TO 9000 235 X 10 100 X 10
9001 TO 12000 280 X 10 110 X 10
0
12001 TO 14000 305 X 10 125 X 10
0
O
NOTES :
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED. 0
2. THIS STANDARD IS FOR THE PURPOSE OF QUOTATION / INFORMATION ONLY.
**3. FINAL DETAIL. SIZES OF TRAY SUPPORT RING, BOLTING BAR ETC. SHALL BE
AS PER TRAY DRAWING.
4. INDICATED THICKNESS OF TRAY SUPPORT RINGS AND BOLTING BARS IS
MINIMUM TO WHICH TWICE THE CORROSION ALLOWANCE IS TO BE ADDED.
*5. SUPP,ORT RING WIDTH SHALL BE 50mm WHEREVER VESSEL CORROSION
ALLOWANCE IS 6mm OR MORE.
6. MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE AS PER ENGG. DRAWING.
SECTION -CC
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/ RKT L

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6415 of 8516
STANDARD No.
SUPPORT RING SIZES FOR
B4GINE136 7-12-0022 Rev. 6
WSW'S&114a1, LIM ITE. PACKED TOWER'S INTERNALS
Page 1 of 1
SUPPORT RING
SECTION AA
INSIDE DIAMETER OF TOWER

TOWER INTERNAL DETAILS
250 TO 5001501 TO 9001901 TO 160011601 TO 300013001 TO 450014501 TO 750017501 TO 900019001 TO 12000112001 TO 14002
MATER
TYPE OF INTERNALS coNsTRu SIZE OF SUPPORT RING ( W X T ) **
CONSTRUCTION
PACKING SUPPORT METAL *25X4 *35X6 50 X 6 65 X 6 75 X 10 90 X 10 100 X 10 110 X 10 125 X 10
PLATE CERAMIC 30 X 4 50 X 6 65 X 6 — — — — — —
METAL *25X4*35X6 50X6 65X6 75X10 90X10 100X10 110X10 125X10
UQUID DISTRIBUTOR
CERAMIC 30 X 4 50 X 6 65 X 6 — — — — — —
REDISTRIBUTOR METAL *25X4*35X6 50X6 65X6 75X10 90X10 100X10 110X10 125X10
BED UMITER METAL * 45 X 4 *45 X 6 50 X 6 65 X 6 75 X 10 90 X 10 100 X 10 110 X 10 125 X 10
WORKING ELEVATION OF
SUPPORT RING
500rirn
SUPPORT RING
— i SEE NOTE-6
SUPPORT RING
NOTES
2. INDICATED THICKNESS OF SUPPORT RING IS MINIMUM TO WHICH TWICE THE
CORROSION ALLOWANCE IS TO BE ADDED.
3. THIS STANDARD IS FOR PURPOSE OF QUATATION & INFORMATION ONLY. SIZE AND THICKNESS SHALL
BE CHECKED FOR THE LOAD APPLIED (SUPPORTED INTERNALS + DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE).
** 4. FINAL SIZE OF THE RING SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED ON ENGINEERING DRAWING FOR INTERNALS.
5. SUPPORT RING SHALL NOT HAVE WAVINESS EXCEEDING 1.5 mm FOR ANY 500 mm
OF CIRCUMFERENTIAL LENGTH.
6. INCLINATION OF SUPPORT RING OVER ITS WIDTH SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.75 mm.
* 7. SUPPORT RING WIDTH SHALL BE MIN. 50MM WHEREVER VESSEL CORROSION ALLOWANCE
IS 6.0MM OR MORE.
8. MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE AS PER ENGG. DRAWING.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JITSINGH SIQKJH RRT ORN


No. by by
Approved by
Page 6416 of 8516
STANDARD No.
INGNEERS PIPE DAVIT 7-12-0023 Rev. 7
OitgrgeNDIA LIMITED (A Go& of Mcb UndorWedng)
Page 1 of 3
DETAIL-Z LOCKING PIN

DETAIL-X
A (NOTE-3) POSITIONING PLATE
LOCKING PLATE
NAME PLATE 60* 10 THK. (DETAIL= K')
DETAIL-Y
--, .
H CM
o 'mimmotonii..
\......"
Id -4111116%•
....... 7v
ANGLE SIZE
TAPPED HOLE
ce
U
4
WITH TM 1 6 BOLT
cr
a
DETAIL IN TOP BRACKET
SHT. 2
DETAIL IN
SHT. 2
TOP OF PLATFORM I
40R
60
200
z
TAPPED HOLE x
8VIM6BOLT
I 0
4
0 HO
PIPE
SIZE 'IV I AIL-10
Cu
U
I U
TOP OF
DETAIL
'PLATFORM
D AVIT SUPPORT
(TYPE-1) (TYPE-2) • 1
DEVIT FOR TOP DEVIT FOR SIDE 6l 4 1- I TO )UIT
lu";
MOUNTED PLATFORM MOUNTED PLATFORM PIPE O/D.
8-180 HOLES
A (MAX) B CAPACITY PIPE SIZE ANGLE SIZE
121 R2 r t
(mm) (rim) (kgs.) D S
500 100NBxSCH.160 75x75x6 75 60 10 20
1000 1000 150NBxSCH.80 100x100x8 110 60 12 25 160 LOCKING
PIN
,<40 00 (NO TE-13)
500 150NBxSCH.80 100x100x8 110 60 10 20

2000 1000 200NBxSCH.80 150x150x10 140 60 12 25
500 200NBxSCH.B0 150x150x10 140 60 10 20

3000 1000 200NBxSCH.160 150x150x12 140 60 12 25 DETAIL—X DETAIL—Y
RI
3 THK. DEFLECTOR CONE
D (NB)
0
100 120
150 175
16 DI 200 225
_ 0 I HI
DETAIL—K DETAIL—Z (DAVIT EYE)

DETAIL—P
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SK/ K ft RN


No. by by
Approved by
Page 6417 of 8516
STANDARD No.
leziMON)v■ uvam (A Govt. of bleb Uodertoldng)

PIPE DAVIT 7-12-0023 Rev. 7
Page 2 of 3
LOCKING PLATE LOCKING PIN LOCKING PIN

LOCKING PLATE
TOP OF PLATFORM TOP OF PLATFORM
EXTENSION ANGLE
---
LOCKING ARRANGEMENT OF DAVIT PIPE LOCKING ARRANGEMENT OF DAVIT PIPE

PASSING THROUGH PLATFORM PASSING THROUGH SIDE OF PLATFORM
REF. LEVEL
018 HOLE RADIUS TO SUIT GUSSET FOR BOTTOM

PIPE O.D. SUPPORT ONLY
ELEVATION
PLATFORM
v
EXTENSION ANGLE REF. AXIS

BY MECH. CONTRACTOR
DETAIL — Q co
25NB SCH.80
PIPE SLEEVE
030x10 THK.
PLAN (TOP BRACKET)
020 TURNING
12 THK.
REF. AXIS
PLAN (BOTTOM BRACKET)

TURNING HANDLE DETAIL DAVIT SUPPORTS
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT &-KJH frISRN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6418 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ferIM INGIsEERSONDIAMIRED
ONIPVIIIIIIIR1101111111 (A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
PIPE DAVIT 7-12-0023 Rev. 7
Page 3 of 3
170
17 60 15 25 10 20 17
\\\\\\\
0
CAPACITY KGS
N
R
NAME PLATE
NOTES
2. NAME PLATE
a) MATERIAL STAINLESS STEEL 2mm THICK.
b) NAME PLATE IS TO BE TACK WELDED TO THE DAVIT PIPE.
c) THE LETTERS AND NUMBERS SHALL HAVE RAISED POLISHED FACE.
d) BACKGROUND SHALL BE BLACK.
3. DIMENSION 'A' SHALL BE SUCH THAT THE DAVIT EYE EXTENDS PREFERABLY BY 900 mm OUTSIDE PLATFORM.
4. REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING FOR DIMENSIONS A, B, C, E, CAPACITY OF DAVIT AND INSULATION THICKNESS.
5. THE DAVIT USED SHALL CLEAR HANDRAIL OF THE EQUIPMENT.
6. MATERIAL OF PIPE SHALL BE A-53 / IS:1978 OR EQUIVALENT AND STRUCTURAL PARTS SHALL BE IS:2062 GR.B
OR EQUIVALENT.
8. FOR THIN WALLED EQUIPMENT, DESIGNER SHALL ANALYSE THE STIFFNESS OF SHELL AT THE BRACKET LOCATIONS.
9. DETAIL DIMENSIONS AND NOTES IN ENGINEERING DRAWING TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE SHOWN HERE.
10. LOCKING PLATE (DETAIL —Y), LOCKING PIN (DETAIL —X) WITH CHAIN, POSITIONING PLATE (DETAIL —K), DEFLECTOR
CONE (DETAIL—P) AND LOCKING SUPPORT CHANNEL (DETAIL —Q) SHALL BE SUPPLIED LOOSE BY FABRICATOR AND
WELDED AT SITE BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR.
12. FOR LOW TEMPERATURE SERVICE, BRACKET DETAILS SHALL BE AS PER EIL STD. 7-12-0034
13. IN CASE DIMENSIONS 'B' IS BEYOND THIS STANDARD, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO INSTALL PIPE DAVIT
ON STRUCTURAL PLATFORM.
7 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SK/KJH RKT RN


No. by by
Approved by
Page 6419 of 8516
LIFTING LUG STANDARD No.
® UENGNffRS
NDIA TOP HEAD TYPE
'tad"' (FOR VERTICAL VESSELS / COLUMNS)
7-12-0024 Rev. 8
Page 1 of 1
ORNERS TO BE ROUNDED OFF
( NOTE -6)
200 BAR (NOTE-6)

V
T.L
W.L.
SEE NOTE— . 4.
0
z
0
CD
SECTION XX
MAX. ERECTION WT. OF VESSEL (TONNES) <10 25 45 90 140 180

THICKNESS OF PLATE (MINIMUM) T 12 28 40 50 70 80
WIDTH W 200 230 300 400 500 610
LENGTH L 400+E 460+E 580+E 750+E 900+E 1080+E
DIAMETER OF HOLE D 60 75 75 100 130 150
HEIGHT OF NOTCH & SIDE WELD H 130 130 150 200 250 300
RADIUS OF NOTCH R 40 40 50 75 90 100
WELD SIZE ( SEE NOTE 5 ) A 10 14 20 30 38 46
BOTTOM OF BRACE TO TOP OF LUG F 200 230 300 400 500 600
BOTTOM OF BRACE TO T.L. OF HEAD E SEE NOTE 2
T.L. OF VESSEL TO BOTTOM OF LUG B 200 230 280 350 400 480
C 30 40 50 70 90 100
TOP OF LUG TO Q OF HOLE J 90 90 115 150 180 230
K 30 40 50 70 80 100
NO. OF LUGS 2 2 2 2 2 2
NOTES
*2. DIMENSION 'E' IS TO BE DETERMINED BY THE SHAPE OF HEAD IN CONJUNCTION WITH DIMENSION 'K'.
3. DETAIL, DIMENSIONS AND NOTES GIVEN IN ENGINEERING DRAWING TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE SHOWN HERE.
4. FOR THIN WALLED EQUIPMENTS, DESIGNER SHALL ANALYSE THE STIFFENESS OF SHELL AT THE LIFTING LUG LOCATION.
5. IF PADS ARE USED ON STAINLESS STEEL EQUIPMENTS THE SIZE OF FILLET WELD BETWEEN SHELL AND STAINLESS
STEEL PAD SHALL BE ANALYSED.
6. MATERIAL SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH HEAD MATERIAL.
7. FOR INTERMEDIATE ERECTION WEIGHT, NEXT HIGHER SIZE OF LIFTING LUG SHALL BE USED.
8. LIFTING LUG SHALL BE MACHINED TO COVER OFFSET BETWEEN OUTER DIAMETERS OF SHELL AND HEAD.

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6420 of 8516
FIRE PROOFING STANDARD No.
BsIGINEERS
ORMONDIA UMRED
MIN11111011 Medi (A GovL of bxIct Undertaking)
AND 7-12-0025 Rev. 6
INSULATION SUPPORTS . Page 1 of 2
M6 x 4OLG. G.I. BOLTS 2–M6 BOLTS

6 DIA. HOLE FOR VESSEL DIAMETER ABOVE 600, x25LG. G.I.
TACK WELDED AT 600 PITCH
(TYP•) PROVIDE 30X6 THK. FLATS WITH BOLTS AND
60 HOLE AT NUTS (TYP.)
10 HEIGHT EQUAL TO INSULATION
600 PITCH
THK. AT 600 CIRCULAR PITCH
100 MIN. (1YP.) NOTE-7)
CORRUGATED
/SHEET
10 DA. LOOSE
3 THK. X 00.D
RING (TYP.)
100 MIN. NEOPRENE WASHER
THK. UMINIUM
WASHER
T.L
IV (NJ (NJ IV r•-■
WL1
-41— 'A'
3 THK.
ASBESTOS SHEET
6 THK. ANGLE RINGS
VIEW —
(WELD ENDS)
8 THK. T–CLEATS AT
1000 PITCH(MINIMUM 8
3 CLEATS PER RING)
010 HOLE ON
DETAIL—X ANGLE LEG
(FOR HOT INSULATED VESSELS)
(WHERE S –> 40) VIEW — 'B'
INSULATION
THICKNESS (5)
0
to
W.L 0
9
T.L 2
600 MIN. FOR VESSELS

INSULATED FOR TEMP.
ABOVE 400*C.
5 X COLD INSULATION
THICKNESS ( MIN 600MM)
C
an
M12 SQUARE NUTS TACK WELD t•I
ON INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF PIP
SUPPORT
SKIRT ON 450 TRIANGULAR PITCH
FOR FIRE PROOFING (SEE DETAIL–Y) ANGLE LEG
(REFER NOTE-8) SUPPORT
M12 SQUARE NUTS TACK

WELDED AS SHOWN IN
SEC.D–D FOR FIRE PROOFING
(REFER NOTE-8)
DETAIL—Y
SECTION 'C—C'
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH/ RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6421 of 8516
FIRE PROOFING STANDARD No.
arr ENCMERS
egeNDIA LIMITED
INSPIUMI•11111841•0 (A Goa. of We Undertaking)
AND
INSULATION SUPPORTS
7-12-0025 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 2
2 NOS. 100 HOLES IN

PROVIDE ONE HEAT BREAK T—CLEAT / RING FOR
BETWEEN TWO CLEATS (TYP) M6 X 25 LG G.I. BOLTS w
w0
AND NUTS. Z
AIR POCKET
0 6 THK. FLAT (FOR VESSEL TEMP. ce
ABOVE 400*C)
1111 'p'
MOM 111111111•1111111111
1111
III
3 THK.
ASBESTOS SHEET
8 THK. T—CLEATS AT 40X6 THK. FLAT

1000 PITCH(MINIMUM
3 CLEATS PER RING) WITH 60HOLES
500 PITCH
10 TYP.
6 THK.
SUPPORT RING
WITH 6 DIA.
HOLE AT 600
* =
= (COLD INSULATION — 50 MM) PITCH
50 MM
VIEW — 'P'
DETAIL — 'Z'
DETAIL—X
(FOR COLD INSULATED VESSELS)
M6 x 4OLG. G.I. BOLTS

CORRUGATED TACK WELDED AT 600 PITCH
SHEET 60 HOLE AT
3 THK. X 20 0.D 600 PITCH
NEOPRENE WASHER
1(
II 2 THK. ALUMINIUM
1S1 0 _I c_ WASHER
,==.,E=
..iiii
S l '
6 THK. ANGLETSRINT`
GA
IN SEGMENTS
T THK. T—CLEA A
10•1000 PITCH (MINIMUM
2 CLEATS PER SEGMENT)
(TYP) VIEW — 'Al
DETAIL—X lomm GAP
(FOR HOT INSULATED VESSELS) (rYP)
(WHERE S < 40)
NOTES VIEW —
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.
2. FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
3. '12 . SHALL BE EQUAL TO 175mm FOR VESSELS UPTO 3000mm DIAMETER AND 300mm FOR VESSELS ABOVE 3000mm
DIAMETER.
4. DETAILS, DIMENSIONS AND NOTES ON ENGINEERING DRAWING SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE SHOWN HEREIN.
5. CLIPS SHALL CLEAR WELD SEAMS AND INSULATION RINGS SHALL BE SUITABLY NOTCHED INCASE OF INTERFERENCE
WITH NOZZLES/ATTACHMENTS.
6. ONLY T—CLEATS WITH ASBESTOS SHEET AND G.I. BOLTINGS, ANGLE RING ALONG WITH TACK WELDED BOLTS, INSULATION
SUPPORT CLEATS WELDED TO EQUIPMENT, LOOSE RINGS & M12 NUTS SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY EQUIPMENT FABRICATOR.
7. a) FOR COLD INSULATED VESSELS CLEATS ON DISHED ENDS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
b) FOR COLD INSULATED VESSELS CLEATS ON SHELL ARE TO BE PROVIDED IF COLD INSULATION THICKNESS IS MORE
THAN 60mm.
8. FOR UNINSULATED VESSELS SQUARE NUTS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ENTIRE HEIGHT OF SUPPORT (SKIRT, PIPE/ANGLE LEG).
41^^ Atti
ver...
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SING4 SK/KJH RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6422 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ORMO ENGINEERS NDIALIMITED

porrinnormsero (A G.A. of Ind. U.O.A.PAA9)
EARTHING LUG 7-12-0026 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 1
10 THK. PLATE
VESSEL PART
re)
to
N
to
\ 14 DIA. HOLE
(FOR M12 BOLT)
75 25
NOTES
2. ALL EQUIPMENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH TWO(2) EARTHING
LUGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
340 EARTHING LUGS SHALL BE LOCATED DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE ON
NORTH—SOUTH CENTER LINE ON SKIRT SUPPORTED EQUIPMENTS,
ON ANY TWO(2) LEGS OF THREE(3) LEG SUPPORTED VERTICAL VESSEL,
ON DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE LEGS OF FOUR(4) LEG SUPPORTED
VERTICAL VESSEL AND ON EACH SADDLE OF HORIZOTAL VESSEL.
(b) TWO(2) EATHING LUGS ARE TO BE LOCATED ON EACH SADDLE OF
HORIZONTAL VESSEL OF LENGTH GREATER THAN 20 METERS.
(c) FOR SPHERE, TOTAL 4—NOS. OF EARTHING LUGS SHALL BE PROVIDED
PREFERABLY ON DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE AND EQUALLY SPACED LEGS.
(SPHERES ARE USUALLY PROVIDED WITH LEGS IN NUMBERS WHICH ARE
MULTIPLE OF 4 FOR THE SYMMETRY)
4. DO NOT WELD EARTHING LUG ON PRESSURE PART.
6. MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CARBON STEEL.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH 114- RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6423 of 8516
O
z
P
0
6
8
1:1
C
REAFFIRMED AN D REI SS UED AS STANDARD
REAFF IRME D AN DREISS UED AS STANDARD

- 13 L_
17
0)
0)
m O
6)
3lVld 31AWN
C)
cr o
a
NOTES
C) 2. ALL LETTERS, BLOCKS AND BORDER SHALL BE OF RAISED POLISHED FACE.

3. BACK GROUND SHALL BE BLACK.
4. NAME PLATE SHALL BE TACK—WELDED TO THE BRACKET. WHERE NOT POSSIBLE IT MAY BE RIVETTED.
NC12:1VONVIS
5. REFER STANDARD 7-12-029 FOR BRACKET DETAIL OF NAME PLATE.

'0
9.nati LZO0-Z1-1.
0
6. NAME PLATE SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL OF 2mm THICK.
Page 6424 of 8516

ii
0
0
fD
000-00-9"oN
0
DESIGNED BY
MANUFACTURED FOR
ITEM NUMBER
MANUFACTURER SERIAL NO.
YEAR OF FABRICATION
CODES
DESIGN PRESSURE TEST PRESSURE
ONVCINVIS SY 03119S 131:1CINV 0 3140:1 1ddVal

REAFF IRMED AND REISS UED AS STANDARD
DESIGN TEMPERATURE DATE OF TEST
CAPACITY CORROSION ALLOW.
OPERATING FLUID RADIOGRAPHY
-0 TOTAL WEIGHT EMPTY HEAT TREATMENT
s<
cn
311/ldMANN21 3211110VAIINVIN
0.
0
0 NOTES
3 U)
C)
9 3. 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
2. ALL LETTERS, BLOCKS AND BORDER SHALL BE OF RAISED POLISHED FACE.
3. BACK GROUND SHALL BE BLACK.
4. NAME PLATE SHALL BE TACK—WELDED TO THE BRACKET. WHERE NOT POSSIBLE IT MAY BE RIVETTED.
oN C1 1:1VCI NVIS
.
9'net! 8200- Z1.-L
5. REFER STANDARD 7-12-029 FOR BRACKET DETAIL OF NAME PLATE.

c3
z 6. NAME PLATE SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL OF 2mm THICK.
Page 6425 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENG11•1336 BRACKET FOR NAME PLATE 7-12-0029 Rev. 6
(AINDIAof LIMITED
Co. Indio Undartak110
Page 1 of 1
0 O
O
tn
La
10 R
BRACKET
O
N NAME PLATE
4-
EIL NAME PLATE
4-
E
O
M
MANUFACTURER NAME PLATE

0
<TYP.
2V
—L_
200
230
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN run UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.

2. BRACKET MATERIAL SHALL BE SAME AS SHELL MATERIAL.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH ,„..•-•" SK/KJH RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6426 of 8516
NAME PLATE STANDARD No.
qrge o, Ge ■ N711. UWE, FOR

SMALL EQUIPMENT
7-12-0030 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
i-tu
125
1- I
co_ _61,_
KF-
NAME OF MANUFACTURER -
DESIGNED BY I I OWNER I
ITEM NO. I I JOB NO. I U,
CNI
P.O. NO. I I YEAR OF FABRICATION I U)
1-
CNI
.-1
CODES I I INSPECTED BY I U)
DESIGN PRESSURE I I DESIGN TEMPERATURE I
CORROSION AU.OW.I I RADIOGRAPHY I U)
TEST PRESSURE I I EMPTY WEIGHT I tt,
4)q-^3 % DATE OF TEST I U)

Ink
I
ìll/
5R
4.50 HOL
28 2 26 28
20+ INSULATIO N
7°
r,)
(,) 1
BRACKET
NAME
PLATE
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. ALL LETTERS, BLOCKS AND BORDERS SHALL BE RAISED POLISHED FACE.
3. BACKGROUND SHALL BE BLACK.
4. NAME PLATE SHALL BE TACK—WELDED TO THE BRACKET. WHERE NOT POSSIBLE
IT MAY BE RIVETTED.
5. NAME PLATE SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL OF 2mm THICK.
+A^'
5 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJ .4‘14)
1 RN
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6427 of 8516
STANDARD No.
B•IGNIRS DETAILS OF FORGED NOZZLE 7-12-0031 Rev. 5
Oitag
mitnrwroweino
eN31A LIMITED
Cwt. d Indk, Und•naldne)
Page 1 of 1
3 3
100
X > 225 150 4 X 4 225
ANSI - 150 - 600 CLASS, W.N.

SIZE PIPE PIPE I.D. t PIPE t
O.D. B.D.' .D. t SCH. I. D.
N.B. SCH. SCH.
15 21.3 40 80 13.84 3.73 160 11.74 4.78 XXS 6.36 7.47
20 26.7 45 80 18.88 3.91 160 15.58 5.56 XXS 11.06 7.82
25 33.4 55 80 24.3 4.55 160 20.7 6.35 XXS 15.22 9.09
30 42.2 70 80 32.5 4.85 160 29.5 6.35 XXS 22.8 9.7
40 48.3 80 80 38.14 5.08 160 34.02 7.14 XXS 27.9 10.2
50 60.3 85 80 49.22 5.54 160 42.82 8.74 XXS 38.1 11.1
ANSI - 900 CLASS W.N.

SIZE PIPE .D. PIPE I.D. t
O.D. B.D.' t
N.B. SCH. SCH.
15 21.3 40 80 13.84 3.73 160 11.74 4.78
20 26.7 45 80 18.88 3.91 160 15.58 5.56
25 33.4 55 80 24.3 4.55 160 20.7 6.35
30 . 42.2 70 80 32.5 4.85 XXS 22.8 9.7
40 48.3 80 160 34.02 7.14 XXS 27.9 10.2
50 60.3 105 160 42.82 8.74 XXS 38.1 11.1
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. ALL PIPES FOR NECKS TO BE SEAMLESS AND FROM FORGED MATERIALS.
3. FLANGE DIMENSIONS AND FACING ARE AS PER ANSI 8.16.5
4. FOR TYPE OF FLANGE FACING REFER VESSEL DRAWING.
5. SET ON NOZZLE ATTACHMENT TO VESSEL IS NOT PERMITTED.
6. THE ABOVE ARRANGEMENT SHALL BE USED ON VESSELS WHEN THICKNESS OF VESSEL
WALL EXCEEDS 50mm OR WHEN REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE CO E/STANDARD
5 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD

9SK/rwH i;
RN
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6428 of 8516
SUPPORTS STANDARD No.
diarftraC
EN MED FOR 7-12-0032 Rev. 5
WIII1111•10 (A Gs& of WI. UndArtal*Ig)
INTERNAL FEED PIPE Page 1 of 2
SEE
VESSEL DRG. 0
0
TYPE—IA
100
VENT HOLE
SEEVESS EL D RG.
50 TO 75
AS PER
PIPE SIZE
it
TYPE—I
INTERNAL FEED PIPE FOR HORIZONTAL VESSEL

SPARGER/FEED PIPE SUPPORT
NOTE TYPE—IA IS APPLICABLE FOR LARGE THERMAL EXPANSION (AIR / GAS SERVICE)
(6+2xC.A.)
THK. MIN. FLAT
TYPE-2
INTERNAL SPLASH FEED PIPE FOR HORIZONTAL VESSEL
65
15 0 HOLE IN PIPE CLEAT (6+2xC.A.)
& 30 LONGx15 WIDE SLOTTED THK. MIN. FLAT
HOLE IN SHELL CLEAT
SUPPORT CLEAT
FOR VERTICAL VESSEL
TYPICAL DETAIL OF BOLTING CLEATS
5 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH

/164
SK/KJH
°; 14.T
q/t
tt":"41N RN
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6429 of 8516
SUPPORTS STANDARD No.
ENGIM336 FOR 7-12-0032 Rev. 5
Ofiar gOINDIALIMTED
(A cwt. of Indio Undotioking)
INTERNAL FEED PIPE Page 2 of 2
TS
20 MIN. D NB
SHELL
REINFORCEMENT PAD
(NOTE-6)
TYPE-A
(FOR PIPES UPTO 250NB)
TS
20 MIN.
TI
SHELL
II
REINFORCEMENT PAD
(NOTE-6)
10
C.5
ul
0.5G
0
TYPE-B
(FOR PIPES ABOVE 250NB)
INTERNAL FEED PIPE FOR VERTICAL VESSEL/COLUMN
T
PIPE N.B.
BOLT SIZE E F G
D CA=O CA=1.5 CA=3 CA=5 CA=7
50 — 80 M 12 6 10 12 16 20 60 40 60
100 — 200 M 16 10 14 16 20 25 100 50 100
250 ,..- OVER M 16 14 18 20 25 28 150 100 150
NOTES
1 ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
2. IN CASE OF CONFLICT VESSEL ENGG. DRAWING SHALL GOVERN.
3. MATERIAL OF CLEATS SHALL BE AS PER VESSEL ENGG. DRAWING.
4. ALL FILLET WELDS TO BE ALL AROUND & SIZE OF WELDS ARE (6+1xC.A.) MINIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
5. ALL INTERNAL BOLTS SHALL BE MIN. M 12 SIZE AND OF STAINLESS STEEL WITH DOUBLE NUTS.
6. REINFORCING PAD SHALL BE LARGER BY 50mm ALL AROUND THAN BRACKET CLEATS. NO PAD IS REQUIRED FOR
VESSELS WITH WALL THICKNESS GREATER THAN 25mm.
12
j eh K1611
5 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SK/
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6430 of 8516
HOT INSULATION SUPPORTS STANDARD No.
ENGNERS FOR 7-12-0033 Rev. 5
digagr itesONDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. of Indio Untied°!Ong)
HORIZONTAL VESSEL Page 1 of 1
600
INSULATION 8 THK. LOOSE FLAT
THK. (S) * 8 THK. LOOSE
FLAT RING *
REQUIRED
FOR VESSEL
HAVING
FOR VESSEL HAVING DIAMETER DIAMETER
ABOVE 600 PROVIDE 30x6 THK. ABOVE >2000
CLEAT WITH HEIGHT EQUAL TO
INSULATION THICKNESS AT 600
CIRCULAR PITCH 100 LOOSE GALVANIZED
RING (TYP.)
64 HOLE
AT 600 PITCH 'B' 'B' 2NO. 6 DIA. HOLES
S " VESSEL PER SEGMENT
/ INSIDE
10 T.L FOR DETAIL—X
À'
G.L BOLTS & NUTS

(1r.)
8 THK. RING IN
3 SEGMENTS
8 THK. T—CLEAT AT VIEW—À'
1000 SPACING
(MIN. 3 PER RING—
FOR DETAIL—X ONLY) DETAIL—'Z' (PLAN)
DETAIL—'X'/ DETAIL—'Y'
(SEE NOTE-6)
2NO. 10 WIDE 10 DIA. HOLE IN

SLOTS IN T—CLEAT FLAT RING
NOTES VIEW `B—B'

2. FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
3. DETAILS. DIMENSIONS AND NOTES ON ENGINEERING DRAWING
SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE SHOWN HEREIN.
4. CLEATS SHALL CLEAR WELD SEAMS AND IN CASE OF INTERFERENCE WITH
NOZZLES/ATTACHMENTS, INSULATION RINGS SHALL BE NOTCHED/MODIFIED SUITABLY.
5. ONLY T—CLEATS WITH ASBESTOS SHEET, G.I. BOLTING, INSULATION SUPPORT CLEATS
AND LOOSE RING/FLAT SHALL BE SUPPUED BY THE EQUIPMENT FABRICATOR.
* 6. FOR INSULATION THICKNESS (5) 40mm AND LESS. ONLY RINGS AND FLATS IN PIECES
SHALL BE DIRECTLY WELDED TO SHELL/HEAD, AS SHOWN IN DETAIL—'2'.

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6431 of 8516
STANDARD No.
PIPE DAVIT SUPPORT DETAIL
ENGNEERS 7-12-0034 Rev. 5
fitMe (AINEIIIVITM) FOR COLD INSULATED VESSELS
Page 1 of 1
GREATER OF
VESSEL INSU.THK.+10 TW 160 170
O.D.
REFERENCE LEVEL
TW = THK. OF WOODEN BLOCK

Cu
TW(mm) OPERATING TEMP. ('C)
100 UPTO (—)50
125 (—)51 TO (—)100
150 (—)101 TO (—)200
BRACKET
WOODEN BLOCK SHALL BE HARD WOOD

OF CLASS-1 DURABILITY AS PER IS:3629
1 OTHK.(CLEAT MATERIAL AND GRADE-1 TIMBER OF GROUP 'A' WITH
SIMILAR TO VESSEL SHELL) PERMISSABLE STRESS OF 70 Kgs/Cm2
_JJ (COMPRES IONPERPENDICULARTOGRAIN
ELEVATION ON OUTSIDE LOCATIONS AS PER IS:883)
AND ANTI—TERMITE & FUNGICIDE TREATED.
25 MIN.
(TYP)
3THK. ASBESTOS SHEET
3THK. STEEL WASHER
II
tr_il
tt
In • .e.e.a.z.ezzeima.ezzazeze IZZCLI C/1111/,

cu r -wcwc.-N.Ncvswcvs.swm 'MSC%.'fR'SV:RNWs•MCVS7
Cu
0=> REFERENCE AXIS

cu (TOP & BOT. SUPPORT)
*HOLE IN THE TOP

GUIDE BRACKET
Cu 111/./ZCZCZZCl2C/11/171.1 ZZACIZCLIZIZCZZCada.CaCliZel
ONLY.
cu "Wr[VMSWCWMMCfl \NCRNRCRCRNWSWSV.:(RN7
Fr x x
60 VENT 6NOS.-220 HOLES FOR M20 BOLTS, NUTS & LOCK NUT (SS)
HOLE
PLAN
NOTES
2. MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR BRACKET SHALL BE IS : 2062 UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
3. FOR DETAIL OF PIPE DAVIT REFER EIL STD. NO. 7-12-023.
4. TOP & BOTTOM SUPPORTS ARE IDENTICAL.
5. ALL FILLET WELDS ARE 10mm CONTINUOUS.
P
5 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH1)SK/KJH RN
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6432 of 8516
TYPICAL DETAIL OF WIREMESH STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
Ifgartaf5teg
( ems,
INDIA LIMITED DEMISTER AND ITS SUPPORTS 7-12-0036 Rev. 4
(FOR VESSELS AND COLUMNS ) Page 1 of 4
0 I.D.
'-SUPPORT BEAM SIZE & NOS. AS

PER TABLE-3 OF SHT. 4 OF 4
SUPPORT GUSSETS ©1500 (MIN. 4 NOS.)

ORIENTATION-BY VESSEL VENDOR.
150 150 150 60/ariE ROD
SEE DETAIL SEE DETAIL -,t.r

REF. SHT 2 OF 4 REF. SHT 2 OF 4
60/Q TIE ROD
(REMOVABLE FROM BOTTOM) (REMOVABLE FROM TOP)
300 SPACING
25 (TYP.)
UPPER
GRATING UPPER 2
GRATING
V1
1OR LOWER
GRATING
LOWER 0
120 HOLE GRATING
0 IN CLAMP 15NB SCH.40s
M10 BOLT PIPE SLEEVE
SUPPORT WELDED WITH
30 WITH NUTS
RING GRID I
90 M10 BOLT 30 0
0
DETAIL-V 60 SUPPORT
(REMOVABLE THROUGH BOTTOM) VIEW - tV1' 122
RING
DETAIL-W
* SEE GENERAL NOTE-4
(REMOVABLE THROUGH TOP)
TYPE-A
4 01.10.2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP : SC
3 27 01 2009 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM SKG
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 9-0n-onni-F4 RAN./ n Cnnvrinht Fit - All rinhts rpsprvp,r1
Page 6433 of 8516

t3tlc jt4 ENGINEERS
faOteg INDIA LIMITED DEMISTER AND ITS SUPPORTS 7-12-0036 Rev. 4
1.11Ve1 eternreasl.eivnell IA Govt of India Undertaking)
0 I.D.
UPPER
GRATING
SUPPORT BEAM SIZE & NOS.

AS PER TABLE-3
LOWER (DETAILS AS PER SHT.4 OF 4)
GRATING20
UPPORT
BEAM 25x6 THK. FLAT
DETAIL-U TACK
(REMOVABLE THROUGH TOP) WELD
C•1
—1150 150 6 0/OROD

* SEE GENERAL NOTE-4
SEE DETAIL – 'Z' 2-100 HOLES
SEE DETAIL –'U'
60/0 TIE ROD (REMOVABLE THROUGH BOTTOM) (REMOVABLE THROUGH TOP)

0300 SPACING
(TYP.)
120 HOLE FOR M10
BOLT WITH NUTS
0500 PITCH (MIN.)
50 t 50
0 11 ' Zl'
NOTCH
25X25
11 P,- A/11A
_I IBM=
!II!
1 411
14 30
4
14.
WELD
NOTCH 25 90
25X25
VENT HOLE 01250
(MIN. 4NOS.) DETAIL-Z
M 2 BOLT RETAINER PLATE
(MIN.) IN SEGMENTS
50 tl
50 r 50_
DETAIL- X DETAIL-Y
(REMOVABLE THROUGH BOTTOM) (REMOVABLE THROUGH TOP)
VENT HOLE 120 HOLE
DETAIL IN CLAMP
M10 BOLTS
FOR C 200 NO GUSSETS ARE READ.
TYPE-B WITH NUTS
FOR C > 200 MINIMUM 4 GUSSETS SHALL BE PROVIDED.
01250 (MIN. 4 NOS.)
4 01.10.2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GC P
3 27.01.2009 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM S KG

No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-00-01101-F4 Rpv Convrinht F - All rinhtR rpsprvpri
Page 6434 of 8516

t31 el ENGINEERS
g)-ar fdtWieg INDIA LIMITED DEMISTER AND ITS SUPPORTS 7-12-0036 Rev. 4
(xr-err eleameashiqsr.4) (A Goof of India Undertaking)
40 WIDE x
MINIMUM 4 NOS. SUPPORT

CLEATS (65x40xt)
EQUALLY SPACED
(t AS PER TABLE-1)
(NOT TO BE FOLLOWED FOR
TRAYED/PACKED COLUMNS)
SECTION X—X
TYPE—C
NOTES
1. THIS TYPE IS APPLICABLE FOR VESSELS WITH REMOVABLE COVERS.
2. GRATING FRAME AND HOLD DOWN BARS TO BE MADE FROM 25 X 6 THK. PLATE.
4 01.10.2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCPL Sc
3 27.01.2009 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM SKG

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn a-nn-on01-F4 Rpv fl C:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpri
Page 6435 of 8516

eliaeleiENGINEERS
t3
$ifgar tif5teg INDIA LIMITED
(MR7f ereaverrnordrA) (A Govt of Indo Undertaking)
DEMISTER AND ITS SUPPORTS 7-12-0036 Rev. 4
11
150
BOLT WITH DOUBLE NUTS

BOLT WITH DOUBLE NUTS SECTIONAL VIEW
WITH SLOTTED HOLES IN
WITH SLOTTED HOLES IN OF BEAM CLEAT AND HOLES IN
CLEAT AND HOLES IN BEAMS (REFER TABLE —3)
BEAMS (REFER TABLE —3)
(
11211211114FAIPIWIIIIII%
111•30
1
4101. 1a1111111111
SECTION A—A SECTION D—D SECTION— B—B
TABLE-1 TABLE-2
CORROSION SUPPORT CLEAT/RING THICKNESS (t) CORROSION MIN. FILLET

ALLOWANCE CARBON & LOW ALLOY STAINLESS STEEL® ALLOWANCE WELD SIZE
UPTO 3000 0 ABOVE 3001 0 UPTO 3000 0 ABOVE 3001 0 0 6

0 6 10 1.5 8
1.5 10 14 6 10 3.0 10
3.0 12 16 6.0 12
6.0 18 22 SECTION— C—C
® IF CORROSSION ALLOWANCE IS SPECIFIED TABLE-3 (REFER NOTE-4)
IN VESSEL DRG. THEN ADD 2xCA
VESSEL I.D.(D)/ NO. OF

T HOLE
CARBON STEEL AND S. STEEL BOLT SLOTTED NO OF BOLT
DEMISTER SUPPORT
H LOW—ALLOY STEEL SIZE E W
EFFECTIVE BEAM
CORROSSION ALLowna
(ADD 2xCA) SIZE HOLE TYPE—A TYPE—B
DIA. (0)
0.01.5 3.0 6.0
UPTO 1800 —
1801 < 3600 1 150 M16 18X30 20 1 30 90
3601 < 5400 2 200 6 10 12 18 6 M16 18X30 20 2 35 125
5401 < 7200 3 300 M20 22X36 24 2 50 175
7201 < 9000 4 400 M24 26X40 28 50 325
GENERAL NOTES
2. DEMISTER TYPE AND MATERIAL SHALL BE AS PER VESSEL DRAWING.
3. ALL INTERNAL BOLTS SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL, OTHER MATERIALS SHALL BE
AS PER VESSEL DRAWING.
4. WIDTH AND LENGTH OF EACH DEMISTER PIECE SHALL BE DECIDED BY VENDOR.
HOWEVER THE WIDTH OF EACH PIECE SHALL BE SUCH THAT THE SAME CAN PASS THROUGH
THE MANHOLE. THE LENGTH OF EACH PIECE SHALL NOT EXCEED 2.5 M.
5. ANY DETAIL SHOWN IN VESSEL DRAWING SHALL BE GIVEN PREFERENCE
TO THAT OF STANDARD.
6. WIDTH OF SUPPORTING RING SHALL BE DECIDED BY VENDOR BASED ON LOADING
7. DEMISTER PAD SHALL BE SUPPLIED SUITABLY OVER SIZED FOR SNUG' FITTING.
4 01.10.2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCPA., SC
K
3 27.01.2009 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM SKG

No. by by
Approved by
Format No s-nn-nnni-F4 RPV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts msPrvPrl
Page 6436 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS
Ogzu laW5 INDIA LIMITED
(afreFr oirasrt .151,3,1,15.1) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
7-12-0038 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 4
MC
FL
NOTES: —
1. THIS STANDARD COVERS ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS FOR PRESSURE VESSELS & COLUMNS ONLY.
2. EACH PROCESS NOZZLE OF VESSELS SHALL BE ANALYZED FOR THE LOADS PROVIDED IN THIS
STANDARD.
3. THESE LOADS SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO BE ACTING SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
DESIGN PRESSURE. ALLOWABLE STRESS SHALL BE AS PER APPLICABLE DESIGN CODE.
4. STRESS CALCULATIONS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT AS PER WRC BULLETIN N0. 107/297. WRC 107
SHALL BE USED FOR NOZZLES ON DISHED ENDS AND WRC 297 SHALL BE USED FOR NOZZLES
ON CYLINDRICAL SHELL.
5. IN CASE OF FAILURE DUE TO WRC, FEM ANALYSIS / PD 5500 ANALYSIS CAN BE CARRIED
OUT TO ESTABLISH THE ADEQUACY OF PROVIDED CONFIGURATION.
0 31.07.14 ISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RKT SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6437 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
$'g-ar 21 -e
1 -g. 4
1.12'ff ,-1,m,,121513405.1)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ind.a Underlak.9)
ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS
7-12-0038 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 4
CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STEEL EQUIPMENTS

(CLASS 150 AND CLASS 300)
NOZZLE MT ML MC
FA FL FC
SIZES
(Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf—m) (Kgf—m) (Kgf—m)
(DN)
50 135 200 200 50 40 30
80 202 300 300 112 90 67
100 270 400 400 200 160 120
150 405 600 600 450 360 270
200 540 800 800 800 640 480
250 675 1000 1000 1250 1000 750
300 810 1200 1200 1800 1440 1080
350 945 1400 1400 2450 1960 1470
400 1080 1600 1600 3200 2560 1920
450 1215 1800 1800 4050 3240 2430
500 1350 2000 2000 5000 4000 3000
600 1620 2400 2400 7200 5760 4320
650 1755 2600 2600 8450 6760 5070
700 1890 2800 2800 9800 7840 5880
750 2025 3000 3000 11250 9000 6750
800 2160 3200 3200 12800 10240 7680
850 2295 3400 3400 14450 11560 8670
900 2430 3600 3600 16200 12960 9720
950 2565 3800 3800 18050 14440 10830
1000 2700 4000 4000 20000 16000 12000
1050 2835 4200 4200 22050 17640 13230
1100 2970 4400 4400 24200 19360 14520
1150 3105 4600 4600 26450 21160 15870
1200 3240 4800 4800 28800 23040 17280
1250 3375 5000 5000 31250 25000 18750
1300 3510 5200 5200 33800 27040 20280
1350 3645 5400 5400 36450 29160 21870
1400 3780 5600 5600 39200 31360 23520
1450 3915 5800 5800 42050 33640 25230
1500 4050 6000 6000 45000 36000 27000
0 31.07.14 ISSUED AS STANDARD \651p KA RKT SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6438 of 8516

STANDARD No.
1ifaf-A5 INDIA LIMITED (A Govt of Incha Undeltaking)
7-12-0038 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 4
CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STEEL EQUIPMENTS

(CLASS 600 AND ABOVE)
NOZZLE
FA FL FC MT ML MC
SIZES
(DN)
50 168 250 250 62 50 37
80 253 375 375 140 112 84
100 337 500 500 250 200 150
150 506 750 750 562 450 337
200 675 1000 1000 1000 800 600
250 843 1250 1250 1562 1250 937
300 1012 1500 1500 2250 1800 1350
350 1181 1750 1750 3062 2450 1837
400 1350 2000 2000 4000 3200 2400
450 1518 2250 2250 5062 4050 3037
500 1687 2500 2500 6250 5000 3750
600 2025 3000 3000 9000 7200 5400
650 2193 3250 3250 10562 8450 6337
700 2362 3500 3500 12250 9800 7350
750 2531 3750 3750 14062 11250 8437
800 2700 4000 4000 16000 12800 9600
850 2868 4250 4250 18062 14450 10837
900 3037 4500 4500 20250 16200 12150
950 3206 4750 4750 22562 18050 13537
1000 3375 5000 5000 25000 20000 15000
1050 3543 5250 5250 27562 22050 16537
1100 3712 5500 5500 30250 24200 18150
1150 3881 5750 5750 33062 26450 19837
1200 4050 6000 6000 36000 28800 21600
1250 4218 6250 6250 39062 31250 23437
1300 4387 6500 6500 42250 33800 25350
1350 4556 6750 6750 45562 36450 27337
1400 4725 7000 7000 49000 39200 29400
1450 4893 7250 7250 52562 42050 31537
1500 5062 7500 7500 56250 45000 33750
0 31.07.14 ISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RKT SC

Date Purpose by
Convenor Chairman
No. by Approved by
Page 6439 of 8516

STANDARD No.
5fgU
- faW5 INDIA LIMITED 7-12-0038 Rev. 0
la4TO 051.3,
1-55N) IA Govt of India Untleftaking)
Page 4 of 4
STAINLESS STEEL EQUIPMENTS

(ALL CLASSES)
NOZZLE MT ML MC
FA FL FC
SIZES
(DN)
50 135 200 200 50 40 20
80 202 300 300 112 90 45
100 270 400 400 200 160 80
150 405 600 600 450 360 180

200 540 800 800 800 640 320
250 675 1000 1000 1250 1000 500
300 810 1200 1200 1800 1440 720
350 945 1400 1400 2450 1960 980
400 1080 1600 1600 3200 2560 1280
450 1215 1800 1800 4050 3240 1620
500 1350 2000 2000 5000 4000 2000
600 1620 2400 2400 7200 5760 2880
650 1755 2600 2600 8450 6760 3380
700 1890 2800 2800 9800 7840 3920

750 2025 3000 3000 11250 9000 4500
800 2160 3200 3200 12800 10240 5120
850 2295 3400 3400 14450 11560 5780
900 2430 3600 3600 16200 12960 6480
950 2565 3800 3800 18050 14440 7220
1000 2700 4000 4000 20000 16000 8000
1050 2835 4200 4200 22050 17640 8820
1100 2970 4400 4400 24200 19360 9680
1150 3105 4600 4600 26450 21160 10580
1200 3240 4800 4800 28800 23040 11520

1250 3375 5000 5000 31250 25000 12500
1300 3510 5200 5200 33800 27040 13520
1350 3645 5400 5400 36450 29160 14580
1400 3780 5600 5600 39200 31360 15680
1450 3915 5800 5800 42050 33640 16820
1500 4050 6000 6000 45000 36000 18000
0 31.07.14 ISSUED AS STANDARD C CP KA RKT SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6440 of 8516

STANDARD No.
Of-Vet4[ ft, ENGINEERS
oga faiReg vuir INDIA LIMITEDIA Goof of India undertaking)
EARTH CONNECTIONS 7-13-0001 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 1
PLATFORM
PLATFORM
SHUNTS
o
SEE NOTE-3
O
FLOATING ROOF TANK FIXED ROOF TANK DETAIL — P
120 x 50 x 6 THK. C.S. PLATE

80 WELDED TO STRUCTURE
17.5 [ 45 17.5 COPPER WIRE CABLE
1---1
cE
in
140 HOLES FOR M12 G.I. BOLTS COPPERATE
2-140 HOLES
SO
6 THK. COPPER PLATE

BRAZED WITH C.S. PLATE
DETAIL — K
DETAIL — E
TABLE — A
50 WIDE x 6 THK. COPPER PLATE
NO. OF EARTH CONNECTIONS 0 REQUIRED BRAZED WITH C.S. PLATE
TANK DIAMETER (D) EARTHING
(IN MTRS) CONNECTION 80
<15 2 AT 180' 45 2-140 HOLES

=
<=15 D < 25 3 AT 120' wwwwuressrsrm
<=25 D < 35 4 AT 90*
<=35 D < 45 5 AT 72' 50 WIDE x 6 THK.
C.S. PLATE
<=45 D < 55 6 AT 60' 4
I
<=55 D < 65 7 AT 51.43'
I
<=65 D < 75 8 AT 45' ROLLING LADDER TRACK
<=75 D < 85 9 AT 40'
DETAIL — R
<=85 D < 95 10 AT 36*
NOTES
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
ELECTRIC WIRES SHALL BE LONG ENOUGH TO COVER THE ENTIRE MOVEMENT OF THE ROLLING LADDER AND CONTINUITY
SHALL BE CHECKED AFTER INSTALLATION. QUANTITY REQUIRED PER TANK 2 SETS. TYPE OF WIRE P.V.C. INSULATED
COPPER WIRE CABLE, 50 mm 2 CROSS SECTION.
3. SPRING QUALITY STAINLESS STEEL SHUNTS OF 0.4 mm THICK x 51 mm WIDE SHALL BE PROVIDER FOR TANKS WITH
NON—METALLIC SEALS AT MAXIMUM SPACING OF 3000 mm.
P. 04' ki'ttlikA-V
30.09.2011 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD RKT A M /SC DM
5 15.11.2006 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL DNN AKM VC

Date Purpose by by
Convenor Chairman
No. Approved by
Page 6441 of 8516

STANDARD No.
Olfaaeg Ere
* tiOleg INDIA LIMIT R ED ANCHOR CHAIR 7-13-0002 Rev. 6
ROFere IliIffsff aft3fRIM) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 1
300 HOLES FOR 150

M24 BOLTS
B.C.D. = O.D. OF TANK + 140

SEE NOTE-7
SECTION-AA
NOTES
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR TANKS DESIGNED AS PER API 650 / IS: 803 ONLY.
NO. OF ANCHOR CHAIRS SHALL BE MULTIPLE OF FOUR AND STRADDLE NORTH SOUTH CENTRE LINE.
FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
IN CASE OF CONFLICT ENGINEERING DRAWING SHALL GOVERN.
ANCHOR CHAIR DESIGN SHALL BE CHECKED FOR PRESSURIZED TANKS AS PER THE PROVISIONS OF
DESIGN CODE.
7. SUITABLE B.C.D. AND SLOTTED HOLES ON TOP PLATE SHALL BE SELECTED FOR STRESS RELIEVED
TANKS TO TAKE CARE OF THERMAL EXPANSION.
lew•-AX
6 30.07.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL KM/SC DM
Rev.
No. by by Approved by
Page 6442 of 8516
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
HOT INSULATION SUPPORTS
(A Govt. of India Undeitaking)
6 THK.
ANGLE RING = 300
(TYP)
0
0
.... t,=
RODS
, EDET.-Z)
-Z
0
0
If)
.. :
. .
. .
AIMMWMANWMINIIMMIIIIIM
■1111111IIIIIMii■
SHELL 8 THK. 1-CLEAT

OUTSIDE WELDED TO
SHELL (TYP)
ELEVATION VIEW À—A'
ANGLE
RING
CORRUGATED SHEET
3 THK.X20 O.D.
100 /A 1 NEOPRENE WASHER
'B'
SHELL
——— 2 THK. INSIDE
3 THK. ASBESTOS ALUMINIUM 10
SHEET WASHER
2-10 DIA. HOLES IN
2-M6 X 25 LG. T-CLEAT AND ANGLE
G.I. BOLTS WITH RING M6X40 LG. G.I. BOLTS
NUTS (TYP) AT 300 SPACING
(HAND TIGHT ONLY) (TACK WELDED TO RING)
T
'B' WATER SEAL
VIEW —`B—B'
TANK PAD BOTTOM
BITUMENIZED FELT
DETAIL OF INSULATION SUPPORT

AND SEALING ARRANGEMENT
VIEW --`C—C' AT BOTTOM OF T E TANK c\
7 30.07.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL KM %SC DM


Page 6443 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ifaelt4 HOT INSULATION SUPPORTS
kitijieg INDIA LIMITED FOR 7-13-0003 Rev. 7
Iafen 232a5(2 a11,71WAI) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
6 THK.
M6 X 40 LG G.I. BOLTS AT M6 X 40 LG G.I. BOLTS AT ANGLE RING
300 SPACING (TACK WELDED) 300 SPACING (TACK WELDED)
(i) WHEN INSULATION THK. IS (ii) WHEN INSULATION THK. IS

LESS OR EQUAL TO CURB MORE THAN THE CURB ANGLE
ANGLE LEG WIDTH LEG WIDTH.
DETAIL —'X'
5 DIA. ROD WELDED AT

DIAMOND PITCH
ARRANGEMENT OF BLANKET AND PLAIN

SHEETING ON ROOF
5 DIA. ROD
25 X 3 THK.
FLAT
-Lo
146 X 2OLG. G.I.

BOLTS WITH NUT
AND WASHERS
E
DETAIL OF SUPPORTS ON TANK ROOF&------ 'Y'"A

7 30.07.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL AKM / SC DM
Page 6444 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
HOT INSULATION SUPPORTS
,■f".t111 INDIA LIMITED FOR 7-13-0003 Rev. 7
Wen errant ett3eaven (A Govt of India Undertaking)
75 INSULATION
THK. (S)
5 DIA. ROD WELDED SHELL

INSIDE
AT 400 DIAMOND PITCH
6 THK. ANGLE
CLEAT ROOF 3
25 X 3 THK. (TYP)
DETAIL —'Z'
DETAIL OF RODS ON SHELL
CORRUGATED SHEET 25
3 THK.X20 O.D.
,i1
NEOPRENE WASHER
DETAIL —'Y'
SHELL
2 THK. ALUMINIUM 2 THK. INSIDE
WASHER 3 THK. X 20 O.D. ALUMINIUM
25 X 3 THK. NEOPRENE WASHER
Et ,,-
FLAT WASHER
M M6X40 LG. G.I. BOLTS
AT 300 SPACING
(TACK WELDED TO RING)
I—
fn 'F' 10 TYP
5 DIA. j
ROD 0z DETAIL OF INSULATION SUPPORT
FOR 25 THK. INSULATION
TANK M-6 X 20 LG. G.I
ROOF BOLT WITH NUT CURB ANGLE
(TACKWELDED)
'G'i RING
VIEW —`D—D'
BITUMENIZED FELT
100
ti
TO IS-1322-1970
TYPE-2 GR.1 OR
EQUIVALENT
TYPICAL DETAIL OF LAP JOINTS

OF PLAIN SHEETING & SEC. 'E—E'
NOTES VIEW —`G—G'

ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.
FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
ONLY T— CLEATS WITH ASBESTOS SHEET AND G.I. BOLTINGS, ANGLE / FLAT RINGS
ALONG WITH TACK WELDED G.I. BOLTS, 5 DIA. RODS, ROOF ANGLE CLEATS AND
FLATS WITH TACK WELDED G.I. BOLTS SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY TANK FABRICATOR.
ALL ATTACHMENTS SHALL CLEAR WELD SEAMS AS PER REQUIREMENT OF CODE.
7 30.07.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RRT AKM / SC

SIDMV)`Pt
Page 6445 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS JET MIXER
$tgar atfies INDIA LIMITED 7-13-0005 Rev. 6
171WT PP215120513MISP) (A Gov of India Undertaking) ( FOR TANKS)
Page 1 of 1
0'
114,
GASKET
175
my
.9>
>\ d BORE
REDUCER
- I
ilft
.
k
4 IM
180'
i I= wc 150# FLGS
TANK BOTTOM
TYPE - 1
200+INSULATION THK.
200 200
GASKET
1>
>\ d BORE
REDUCER
TANK BOTTOM
TYPE - 2
NOTES :
2. FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS MARKED cc d9, A & d REFER
ENGINEERING DRAWING.
3. FOR LINED TANKS TYPE-2 SHALL BE USED.

,
tl
ad:-:
6 01.10.2013 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCPV Alt
5 27.01.2009 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM VC

No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RPV r.onvrinht Fll - All rinhts rAsprvp41
Page 6446 of 8516

4-5, 50 HOLES
0 1 6 170
ITEM NO. U)
II
JOB NO. U)
Un
II
CONTRACT NO.
24
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
30 11
U)
CsJ 200
6 R
////// II/I 1111111_1111_1_,_
O
3R
NAME OF MANUFACTURE in 6R
35 80
DESIGNED BY
MANUFACTURED FOR
r-) U)
ITEM NO.
0 MANUFACTURER SERIAL NO.
INSPECTED BYI YEAR OF FABRICATION 1 U)
8
CODE/APPENDIX
NOMINAL DIAMETER mm I DESIGN TEMP. 'C
NOMINAL HEIGHT mmI DESIGN PRESSURE
NOMINAL CAPACITY m3 I TEST PRESSURE
DESIGN LIQUID LEVEL mm I PARTIAL STRESS RELIEF
DESIGN SPECIFIC GRAVITY
(N1
BRACKET
SS NAME PLATE
NOTES :— 2mm THICK
1. ALL LETTERS, BLOCKS AND BORDER SHALL BE RAISED POLISHED FACE.

2. BACKGROUND TO BE BLACK.
3. ALL DIMENTIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
4. NAME PLATES MAY BE RIVED WITH S.S. RIVETS OR TACK WELDED TO BRACKET.
6. THE NAME PLATE BRACKET SHALL BE LOCATED ON THE TANK SHELL NEAR TO
STAIRWAY ENTRANCE AT 1.5 M FROM BOTTOM OF TANK.
4 17.10.2013 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KAP - SC

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn Fi-nn-nn01-F4 RPV 0 Convrinht FII - All rinhts rasprvpri
Page 6447 of 8516

WELDED INTERNALS SHALL BE FABRICATED WITHIN THE FOLLOWING
TOLERANCES AND ALL PARTS SHALL BE INTERCHANGEABLE
E E
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
EXIT WEIR HEIGHT SHALL BE IN LEVEL WITHIN ±1 mm RELATIVE TO THE SPECIFIED

A
DATUM SURFACE AND TO EACH OTHER.
E iE B
CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM EDGE OF DOWNCOMER BOLTING BAR AND TOP OF
SUPPORT RING SHALL BE WITH IN ±3 mm OF SPECIFIED DIMENSION.
M DISTANCE BETWEEN RELATED TRAY SUPPORT RING SHALL BE WITHIN ±3 mm OF

C
SPECIFIED DIMENSION.
THE DEPTH OF SEAL PAN AND DRAW—OFF PAN SHALL BE WITHIN ±1 mm OF
D
THE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS.
DIMENSIONS IN THE HORIZONTAL DIRECTION OF VERTICAL DOWNCOMER BOLTING BAR,
E
SUPPORT BRACKET OR CUPS SHALL BE WITHIN TOLERANCES AS PER DRAWINGS.
BOLTING BARS WELDED ON OPPOSITE FACES OF COLUMN SHOULD UE EXACTLY ON
F
ONE LINE.
TRAY SUPPORT RING AND BOLTING BAR SHALL NOT HAVE WAVINESS EXCEEDING
G
1.5mm FOR ANY 500mm OF CIRCUMFERENTIAL LENGTH.
LEVEL DIFFERENCE OF A TRAY SUPPORT RING OVER ITS WIDTH SHOULD NOT EXCEED
H
0.75mm.
ORIENTATION OF DOWNCOMER REFERENCE UNE SHALL BE WITHIN ±3 mm OF ITS
J
NOMINAL DISTANCE FROM THE VESSEL REFERENCE CENTER UNE.
INCLINATION OF SUPPORT RING TO HORIZONTAL PLANE TO BE WITHIN TOLERANCES
GIVEN BELOW:
1.5mm FOR COLUMN I/D <= 1500mm.
K 3.0mm FOR 1500mm < COLUMN I/D <= 3000mm.
4.5mm FOR 3000mm < COLUMN I/D <= 4500mm.
6.0mm FOR COLUMN I/D > 4500mm.
HORIZONTAL SLOTS ON BOLTING BARS SHALL BE FABRICATED WITHIN FOLLOWING

jI TOLERANCES:
z L
+2.0mm
LENGTH—O.Omm WIDTH ±0.25mm, MAX. INCLINATION WITH HORIZONTAL ±1.0mm.
M THE VERTICALITY OF BOLTING BAR SHOULD BE WITHIN ±1 mm.

B
THE ELEVATION OF DOWNCOMER AND MAJOR BEAM STOOL WITH RESPECT TO
N —0 mm
REFERENCE TRAY SUPPORT RING SHOULD BE WITHIN + 6 mm
SLOT CENTERS FOR DOWNCOMERS (AS SHOWN) SHALL BE WITHIN TOLERANCES
P
AS SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS.
NOTES:-
1. TOLERANCES SHOWN IN THE FABRICATION DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE
SHOWN HERE IN.
2. IN CASE OF THESE TOLERANCES CLASHING WITH THAT OF VESSEL, THE DIMENSIONS ARE
WIDTH/2
TO BE MAINTAINED SO THAT IT SATISFIES BOTH TOLERENCES.
3. TOLERANCES ON CONSECUTIVE DIMENSIONS ARE NON—CUMULATIVE.
WORKING ELEVATION OF SUPPORT RING .1ACLINATION BETWEEN
CENTER LINE 4. FOR DETAILS SUCH AS WIDTH, THICKNESS OF BOLTING BARS, WELDING REQUIREMENTS,
TOLERANCES NOT COVERED IN THIS STANDARD, REFER TSR/BB DRAWINGS.
500
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN,,,,,,;::."
SUPPORT RING
REFER 'L' BELOW
SP
21.03.2018 RE—AFFIRMED & REISSUED AS STANDARD STANDARD NO.

CONSTRUCTIONAL TOLERANCES
3 17-08-10 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SKJ/VDY KKG AKG ND
FOR WELDED SUPPORTS 7 -14 - 0001 Rev. 4
MIA LIMITED Rev Prepd Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
Convenor Chairman FOR TRAYS/TOWER INTERNALS
mew eneweememe (A Govt. of India Undertaking) Date Purpose
No by by Approved by
Page 1 of 1

Page 6448 of 8516
STANDARD No.
DETAILS OF STUD/PIN WELDING 7-14-0136 Rev. 5

Page 1 of 1
M10 PIN M10 STUD
\ I
110 HOLE
TACK WELD AT TWO

OPPOSITE PLACES *
DETAIL 1 DETAIL 2
NOTES : —
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. FOR WELDING OF STUD/PIN WITH TRAY DECK COMPONENTS, PROPER WELDING PROCEDURE SHALL BE
ESTABLISHED BY THE VENDOR. WELD SHALL NOT FAIL BEFORE FAILURE OF THE STUD/PIN ITSELF.
• 3. PIN SHALL BE FULLY WELDED FOR LEAK TIGHT CONFIGURATION.
oti4 94,,— 1.1\01114) Le )

5 21.03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD K/SK IK/KJH FtKT r /RN
4 07.09.2011 RE-AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SKJ/UT KKG AKG DM

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6449 of 8516

COL. /DIA COL /DIA
A = Height of Exit Weir (From Top of

Tray Deck to Top of Weir, mm)
Under Downflow Clearance (Distance

B =
Between Downcomer Bottom & Tray
Deck/Recessed Seal Pan Plate, mm)
C = Horizontal Distance Between

Downcomer Plate & Recessed Seal
Pan (mm)
Under Downflow Clearance (Distance

D =
Between Downcomer Plate & Seal
Pan Plate, mm)
E = Clear Distance between Downcomer

Plate & Seal Pan (mm)
G = Location of Bolting Bar (mm)
G2 G1
1
TYPICAL DETAIL FOR SINGLE PASS TRAYS TYPICAL DETAIL FOR SINGLE PASS TRAYS
WITH STRAIGHT DOWN COMER WITH SLOPING DOWN COMER
THIS PARAMETER IS APPLICABLE IF CLEAR

DISTANCE INDICATED BETWEEN DOWNCOMERS
AND SEAL PAN IS HORIZONTAL
Cl
*
E1 El
,14
3 21.03.2018 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD VK/SK 4"1-1C/ H KT STANDARD No.
eaw itzemENGINEERs
dear laffleuwiNDvk TED 2
Rev.
10.12.2012 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD HD
Prepared Checked
SKM AP DM
Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau TYPICAL DETAIL OF TRAYS 7-14-0202 REV. 3

PIM VIEMPF0113111•0 (A Govt. of India Undertaking) Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
No. by by Approved by SHEET 1 OF 8
Page 6450 of 8516

G2
2—PASS TRAYS WITH CENTRAL D/COMER (STRAIGHT) 2—PASS TRAYS WITH SIDE D/COMER (STRAIGHT)
tr
L
J
I7 14c- co
" 0-3
EF ir
El
F E2 E6
3 21.03.2018 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD *N STANDARD No.
gk
46ilitudENGNEIRS 2 10.12.2012 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD MU bKM AP UM
Oft lailegwiNikk 111■41T1ED (A Govt. of India Undertaking)

Rev.
Date Purpose
Convenor Chairman
TYPICAL DETAIL OF TRAYS 7-14-0202 REV. 3
Page 6451 of 8516

COLI/DIA COLI/DIA
G3
G1
G4
2—PASS TRAYS WITH SIDE D/COMER (SLOPING) 2—PASS TRAYS WITH CENTRAL D/COMER (SLOPING)
C1 C5
THESE PARAMETERS ARE APPLICABLE IF CLEAR

AND SEAL PAN ARE HORIZONTAL
El
C5 C2
*
El E5
3 21.03.2018 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD /SK STANDARD No.

Itiftaddh-- ENGINEERS 2 10.12.2012 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD HD SKM AP DM
TYPICAL DETAIL OF TRAYS 7 - 14 - 0202 REV. 3
OgareRegwirsDIA
men
LRAM
OEM 11131111110 (A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked St a. Colman Stds. Bureau
Convenor Chairman
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6452 of 8516

G6
3—PASS TRAYS WITH STRAIGHT D/COMER G2
3—PASS TRAYS WITH SLOPING D/COMER
L L 1
Ql iJ THESE PARAMETERS ARE APPLICABLE IF CLEAR
AND SEAL PAN ARE HORIZONTAL
E4
E3 I El
STANDARD No.
OlandmasEets 3 21.03.2018 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD k/SK
HD SKM AP DM
oglfilies—w- NDIA LIMITED (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
2 10.12.2012
Date
Purpose
Convenor Chairman
TYPICAL DETAIL OF TRAYS 7 14 0202 REV. 3
- -
SHEET 4 OF 8
Page 6453 of 8516

P1A5
B7
I IL
B8
1
— 1 1
A6 w
A8 I
B6 L j rI
1
1A2
1
r A4
I J B4 w
Iof A3
1
1
B1
n J
3 21.03.2018 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD VK/SK IK/KJH kr

I RN STANDARD No.
08ifitzeAftENIGNEIERS
„- 2 10.12.2012 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD HD SKM AP DM
TYPICAL DETAIL OF TRAYS
Og7E1151ftWINDIA UNTIED (A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
Rev. •
Date Purpose
Convenor Chairman
7-14-0202 REV. 3

Page 6454 of 8516

- if
I-
L 03
w
At—a61—
LJ
1-1 Imo( 1
a
4.
_JI
3 21.03.2018 RE—AFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD t:4--A. 1Apt} RN STANDARD No.

#fiatudatAENGIsEERS 2 10.12.2012 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD HD SKM AP DM
OgarfaitaieswINDIA
maRenimmago,0 LIMITED Rev. Prepared Checked Stris. Committee Stds. Bureau
Convenor Chairman
(A Govt. of India Undertaking) Date Purpose
Page 6455 of 8516

IFd
co
* THESE PARAMETERS ARE APPLICABLE, IF

CLEAR DISTANCES INDICATED BETWEEN
DOWNCOMERS AND SEAL PAN ARE
HORIZONTAL
3 21.03.2018 RE-AFFIRMED dc ISSUED AS STANDARD 'K/SK /CIH KT RN

STANDARD No.
StilatedENGINEIRS 2 10.12.2012 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD HD SKM AP DM
dear OfeUWM
PRIER memeeieesio
IA
LIMETED
(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev. Prepared Checked Side. Committee
Stds. Bureau TYPICAL DETAIL OF TRAYS 7-14-0202 REV. 3
Page 6456 of 8516
R5 1
co
ft
* THESE PARAMETERS ARE APPLICABLE, IF

CLEAR DISTANCE INDICATED BETWEEN
DOWNCOMERS AND SEAL PAN ARE
HORIZONTAL
3 21.03.2018 RE-AFF1RMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

(1)1 5?--
VK/SK4AVIK/n.H1 .11 V1>-
RN STANDARD No.
lallizietiENIGNEERS 2 10.12.2012 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD HD SKM AP DM
0g-41E616~
lam/
PIER
INDIA WITS) (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked Stds. Convnitlee Stds. Bureau
Convenor Chairman
Page 6457 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS PART DETAILS
Olgz= NDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. of Indle Undortoking)
7-15-0001 Rev. 4
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS) Page 1 of 2
+2
-0 +1.5 CX45•
-o.o 1.,)
T 6 T1 +
N 0
+ 0 m
0 ***
———
1--
„, < 0
(...) + Z.-5
CD 0
BCD
±1
+0.8
-0.0 DETAIL-2
r.r) 1:trl o TO SUIT toc/
+ ??
,IG! no . —o
+1.<
(21 o 7 r, nj ?cl'' '? 6X45' T
m
ci,
7
--\ **
..,
0m+
>2 '05 11111
‹
z>
< 11 ■ 21 :. < om o
(,)
T2
DETAIL-1 DETAIL-3
•X4 • T 6X45• T G1 T 6X45• T1

r•-, --------\ ** ,o ** •,)
+ o
+ + +
o
o m o m
m m
I -—-
. .
< c,CDo r> -- AP ....
< m(.)a 0 :MIIIIIIMIII ci m
m < (co. ., 0) ***
...
+ * H
o --- H
m m m
o m
DETAIL-4 DETAIL- 5 DETAIL- 6 DETAIL- 7
r.,) ** y) F ** ** **
+ 1---- --1 + r- \ /-1)
03
-:, x
C) r --1
i- :,* 1>-- 411 L4
_i
w _ TUBE
m SIDE SIDE
*** ***
o ***
a co
m
o
■■ <-)
m
r) 0 R2
mi r) tn -
l i
m
T3 m T3
T3 T3
DETAIL- 8 DETAIL-9 DETAIL-1Q DETAIL-11
REQD A1/A2 REF. T/SHT OR CH. COVER
**1---1r" alb 25 SUPPORT PL — J 20
A>
ki
"1
,
111/
4
1 iiE. •, ii
3
11-1 LC---
0 r..) 1.)
ill»
. ___ _
1 DEFLECTOR T ,:f
11:1111111111111111 STRIPS
I
I „1,01
m
m
lirily L T2 =Ti +3 PGARRZIPDFEUTLC
T3 111311) .511121LIQL.I2EELFSIQE
■ STRIPS END DETAII,
DETAIL-1 2 DETAIL-14 DETAIL- 15
DETAIL-13
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD k"Ni"---GCP KT

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6458 of 8516

STANDARD No.
Iffiteid ENSNEERS PART DETAILS
Ogat1811ffieu INDIA LIMIT1ED
Govt. of Inctla Undortoking) (SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS)
7-15-0001 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 2
DETAIL-1 9 ED
X4
i
m
T3 -r
DETAIL-21 DETAIL-22 DETAIL-23
**
T3 ro
DETAIL-24 DETAIL-25 DETAIL– 27
***
CHANNEL
SIDE
I
m
DEPOSIT
DETAIL-28 DETAIL-29 DETAIL-30 DETAIL-31
NOTES: –
TABLE NO.– 1 1. FOR CHANNEL COVER & TUBE SHEET A, BCD & D ETC. SHALL
DIMENSIONS * ** *** BE SAME AS FOR MATING FLANGES.
2. IF SPIRAL WOUND GASKET IS USED FOR A JOINT:–
FOR IJA &
NON ASBESTOS 5 6 5 a) DIAMETER OF TUBE SHEET & CHANNEL COVER
/ EIASTOMER GASKET. 'D' SHALL BE GASKET OD + 8 mm.
FOR 4.5 mm b) DIAMETER OF FLANGE RECESS FOR GASKET SHALL BE
SPWD GASKET 6 7 6
GASKET OD + 11 mm.
FOR 6.35 mm
SPWD GASKET 8 9 7 3. (9 WELD DEPOSIT OR CLADDING SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED ON
EQUIPMENT DRAWING.
4. FOR ASTERISK MARKS REF R TABLE-1.
5. WHERE EVER 'R' IS SPECIFI D, IT INDICATES TO BE RADIUSED.
6. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
ci—zsi/
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP SC
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6459 of 8516

TYPES OF NON STANDARD STANDARD No.
$14= 14111,1111•111M~
IENG~S
INDIA UMITED
(A Govt. of India Undortoking)
GASKETS
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS)
7-15-0002 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 3
TYPE-1 TYP E— 2 TYPE— 3
TYP E— 4 TYPE-5 TYPE— 6
TYPE-7 TYPE— 8 TYPE— 9
on
TYPE-1 0 TYPE-11 TYPE-12
06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD SC
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6460 of 8516

ENGINEERS
Ognr egOINDIA LIMITED
4~1111•111~111110 (A Govt. of Indlo Undortoking)
GASKETS
7-15-0002 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 3
TYPE-1 3 TYPE-1 4 TYPE-1 5
TYPE-1 6 TYPE-1 7 TYP E-1 8
TYPE-1 9 TYPE-20 TYP E- 21

Xet
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD S&CP T
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6461 of 8516

ENGNEIERS GASKETS
(A Govt. of Indlo Undortoking)
PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES PASS PARTITION PLATE

THIS SIDE
FILLER
TYPICAL SECTION OF METAL
JACKETTED GASKETS
CENTRING RING
D+8
GASKET O.D. (D)
4 WIDE NOSE GASKFT WIDTH CENTRING RING
THK
mm1le111111111111111111111111111111
METAL WINDINGS METAL WINDINGS WITH FILLER
NOSETHK.
TYPICAL DETAIL OF
SPIRAL WOUND GASKET
GENERAL NOTES: —
2. THE HARDNESS OF THE METAL FOR SOLID OR CLAD GASKETS SHALL BE MINIMUM 15 BHN LOWER THAN
THAT OF THE MATERIAL OF THE FLANGE GASKET SEATING SURFACE AND IN ANY CASE NOT TO EXCEED
THE FOLLOWING.
(a) LOW CARBON STEEL / LAS — 110 BHN
(b) 5 Cr. 1/2 Mo. — 130 BHN
(c) STAINLESS STEEL — 160 BHN
(d) 11 — 13 Cr. — 170 BHN
(e) MONEL — 130 BHN
(f) SOFT IRON 90 BHN
(g) COPPER, BRASS 50 BHN
(h) ALUMINIUM 30 BHN
3. FILLER IN METAL JACKETTED GASKETS SHALL NOT BE OF COMPRESSED TYPE.

4. ALL GASKETS SHALL BE MADE IN ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE ALL AROUND INCLUDING THE PASS PARTITION
RIBS AND THEREFORE MUST BE CUT FROM ONE SHEET.
5. THE CORNER RADII OF ALL GASKETS TO BE 10 mm.
6. SOLID FLAT METAL GASKET SHALL BE 2 mm. THK.
7. FOR SPIRAL WOUND GASKETS:—
a) THE PASS PARTITION RIB SHALL BE OF METAL JACKETTED WELDED TO CENTRING RING.
b) CENTRING RING THK. SHALL BE SAME AS NOSE THK.
c) GASKET THK. SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS. IT SHALL BE MIN. 4.5 FOR
SHALL DIA UP TO 1000 & MIN. 6.35 FOR SHALL DIA MORE THEN 1000, IF NOT SPECIFIED.
8. 'm' AND 'y' VALUES SHALL BE AS PER ASME SEC. Vlll DIV. I.
9. GASKET PLAN IS VIEWED FROM DIRECTION 'X' .
10. FILLER SHALL BE ARAMIDE FIBRE UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE IN DRAWINGS & ASBESTOS NOT TO BE USED.
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6462 of 8516

STANDARD No.
SUPPORT FOR
ENGNEERS
ffigaM ONYA UMIIED VERTICAL EXCHANGER 7-15-0003 Rev. 4
Mere .1~111~0 (A Govt. of India Undortoking)
A B
D
24 0 HOLES
FOR M-20 BOLTS
'E'
ALL AROUND
tr) FILLET WELD
( THK = SHELL THK )
UNIT SIZE D E NO. REQD.

A B C
O.D.
219.1 230 130 90 14 10 2
273 TO 323.8 150

355.6 TO 406.4 16
457.2 250 12
500 TO 550 180 100

600 20
650 TO 700 280

750 TO 800 200 130 16
850 TO 900 310 22
950 20
1000 4
1050 230 150

1100 TO 1250 26
NOTES: —
2. ALL CORNERS OF PAD PLATE SHALL BE SUITABLY RADIUSED.
3. PROVIDE 1-6 0 VENT HOLE IN PAD.
06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6463 of 8516

SUPPORT FOR STANDARD No.
ENG1NERS HORIZONTAL EXCHANGERS
INDIA LIMMED 7-15-0004 Rev. 4
11011.1 (A Govt. of Indlo Undertoking)
A
SHELL
25 (TYP.)
1-10 0
VENT HOLE
10
10 I> A
2-22 16 HOLES FOR 2-30 16 HOLES FOR A

M-16 BOLTS (FOR M-24 BOLTS (FOR
6" & 8" SHELL SIZES) ALL OTHER SHELL SIZES) VIEW AT 'A—A'
rtl
2-22 X 57 SLOTTED X 65 SLOTTED
HOLES FOR M-16 [3.2.1 HOLES FOR M-24
BOLTS (FOR 6" & 8" BOLTS (FOR ALL OTHER
SHELL SIZES) SHELL SIZES)
SADDLE UNIT SIZE NO. OF TOTAL WT. OF

A B C D REMARKS
NO. O.D. mm RIBS 2 SADDLES (kg.)
i 168.3 160 200 50 — 1 17
2 219.1 160 230 50 — 1 18
3 273 220 260 70 — 1 21
4 323.8 230 270 75 — 1 22
5 355.6 260 280 90 — 1 26
6 406.4 300 310 110 — 1 30
7 457.2 350 330 135 80 2 36
8 500 400 350 160 105 3 44
9 550 400 380 160 105 3 44
10 600 430 400 175 120 3 46
11 650 460 430 190 135 3 50
12 700 510 450 215 160 3 56
13 750 530 480 225 165 3 60
14 800 590 500 240 180 3 82
15 850 610 530 255 195 3 84
16 900 660 550 280 220 3 92
17 950 690 580 295 235 3 98
NOTES: —
2. INTERMEDIATE SADDLES TO BE TAKEN TO THE NEAREST SIZE.
* 3. FOR S.S. 10 mm THK. FOR SADDLE NOS. 1 TO 17 & 14 mm THK. FOR SADDLE NOS. 18 TO 37.
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RK NoZ4

No. by by
Approved by
Förmat Nn R-nn-nnn1-F4 RPV 0 ennvrinht Fil - All rinhts rpsprvpr1
Page 6464 of 8516

SUPPORT FOR STANDARD No.
ENGNEERS HORIZONTAL EXCHANGERS
INDIA UMETE)
(A Covl. of lndle UndArtoking)
7-15-0004 Rev. 4
2-10 0
VENT HOLES
4-33 0 HOLES FOR

m-27 BourT-'-e. VIEW AT 'A—A'
4-33 X 68 SLOTTED
1 I I■
HOLES FOR M-27 BOLTS
35
TOTAL WT.
SADDLE UNIT SIZE NO. OF
A B C D OF TWO REMARKS
NO. O.D. mm RIBS SADDLES (kg;
18 1000 900 650 370 180 8 258
19 1050 950 675 390 200 278
20 1100 1000 700 420 220 290
21 1150 1050 725 440 230 302
22 1200 1100 750 470 250 320
23 1250 1150 775 490 270 336
24 1300 1200 800 520 280 348
25 1350 1200 825 520 280 356
26 1400 1250 850 540 300 368
27 1450 1300 875 570 320 380
28 1500 1350 900 590 340 398
29 1600 1400 950 620 350 406
30 1700 1500 1000 670 380 440
31 1800 1600 1050 720 420 472
32 1900 1700 1100 770 450 516
33 2000 1800 1150 820 480 546
34 2100 1850 1200 840 500 568
35 2200 1950 1250 890 530 602
36 2300 2000 1300 920 550 606
37 2400 2100 1350 970 580 640
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP 1

94; SC
3 27.01.09 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RG AKM VC
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6465 of 8516

SUPPORTS FOR STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS HORIZONTAL STACK UNITS
013:M
11~1~11113•••0
ONDIA UMITED
(A Govt. of Indlo Und«toking)
7-15-0005 Rev. 4
1-10 0 VENT HOLE
o_
>-
10
2 10 0 VENT HOLES
IN WRAPPER PLATE
2-10 0 VENT HOLES
10(r(P.)
O(TYP.)
2 10 0 VENT HOLES
IN WRAPPER PLATE
*14 FOR S.S

*
m
15(TYP.)
.L
20(TYP.) 1
} >
o_
2-30 0 HOLES 4-33 0 HOLES

FOR M-24 BOLTS FOR M-27 BOLTS
t \
/<1
2-30 X 65 SLOTTED 4-33 X 68 SLOTTED
1351 1351
HOLES FOR M-24 BOLTS HOLES FOR M-27 BOLTS
FOR TYPE I AND II SADDLES FOR TYPE III AND IV SADDLES
** REFER SETTING PLAN.
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP

3 27.01.09 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM vc
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6466 of 8516

STANDARD No.
SUPPORT FOR
ENGNEERS
51XO NDIA UMITED
(A Govt. of Indla Undortokh,g)
HORIZONTAL STACK UNITS
7-15-0005 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 2
UNIT SIZE NO. OF RIBS

SL. NO. A B C D
O.D. mm. TYPE—I TYPE—Il
1 219.1 400 230 130 — 1 3
2 273 460 260 160 — 1 3
3 323.8 510 270 190 — 1 3
4 355.6 540 280 200 — 1 3
5 406.4 590 310 220 — 1 3
6 457.2 640 330 250 80 2 4
7 500 680 350 270 103 3 5
8 550 730 380 290 105 3 5
9 600 780 400 320 120 3 5
10 650 830 430 340 135 3 5
11 700 880 450 370 160 3 5
12 750 930 480 390 165 3 5
13 800 980 500 410 180 3 5
14 850 1030 530 430 195 3 5
15 900 1080 550 460 220 3 5
16 950 1130 580 480 235 3 5
TYPE—III / IV
17 1000 1190 650 510 180 AS SHOWN
18 1050 1240 675 530 200
19 1100 1290 700 560 220
20 1150 1340 725 580 230
21 1200 1390 750 610 250
22 1250 1440 775 630 270
23 1300 1490 800 660 280
24 1350 1540 825 680 280
25 1400 1590 850 710 300
26 1450 1640 875 730 320
27 1500 1690 900 760 340
28 1600 1790 950 810 350
29 1700 1890 1000 860 380
30 1800 1990 1050 910 420
31 1900 2090 1100 960 450
32 2000 2190 1150 1010 480
33 2100 2290 1200 1060 500
34 2200 2390 1250 1110 530
35 2300 2490 1300 1160 550
36 2400 2590 1350 1210 580
NOTES: —
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD iSkCP

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6467 of 8516

TUBE HOLE PREPARATION STANDARD No.
BVGNEQZS AND ROLLER EXPANDING
OfazIM INDIA LIMITED (A Govt. of Indla Undortoking) (SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS
7-15-0006 Rev. 4
& AIR COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS) Page 1 of 1
TUBESHEET
TUBE SHEET
TUBESHEET
TUBESHEET
0.4 DEPTH OF GROOVE

0.4 DEPTH OF GROOVE
u_ 0
O O
c.) c.)
07
3+CORROSION
(NOTE-2) 3 6 ALLOWANCE 3 3 3 3
(NOTE-4)
EXPANDED LENGTH EXPANDED LE
CLADDING
FIG.-1 FIG.-2
NOTES : -
2. FOR TUBESHEET THICKNESS WHERE THE GAP BETWEEN 2ND GROOVE & BACK OF TUBE SHEET
IS LOWER THAN 6 mm DELETE 2ND GROOVE.
3. FOLLOW SPECIAL CLOSE FIT AS PER TEMA / API 661 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
4. FOR CORROSION ALLOWANCE LESS THAN 4 mm., INCREASE THIS DIMENSION TO TUBE SHEET THICKNESS
MINUS 18 mm. BUT NOT TO EXCEED 7 mm.
*5. CHAMFER (1X45') OR RADIUS (R=1).
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6468 of 8516

SLIDING & DEFLECTOR STANDARD No.
ENGINMS STRIPS TO TUBE SHEET
0148MONDIALIMITED (A Govt. of Indlo Undortoking)
WELDING DETAILS 7-15-0007 Rev. 4
M-12 STUD
22 LG. THREADED
SLIDING STRIP
STATIONARY TUBE SHEET
SECTION—AA
TYPE - 1

SLIDING STRIP
M-12 STUD
22 LG. THREADED
SECTION—BB
TYPE - 2
SLIDING STRIP
TYPE - 3
NOTES: —
2. USE TYPE-1 WHEN SLIDING STRIP & TUBE SHEET MATERIAL IS DIFFERENT & W ?, 25
3. USE TYPE-2 WHEN SLIDING STRIP & TUBE SHEET MATERIAL IS DIFFERENT & W < 25
4. USE TYPE-3 WHEN SLIDING STRIP & TUBE SHEET MATERIAL IS SAME
5. FOR DIMENSIONS 'T' AND W' REFER GUIDE LINES FOR TUBE LAYOUT.
6. FOR DEFLECTOR STRIPS UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE USE DETAILS AS ABOVE.
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6469 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGMBZS EYE BOLT DETAIL
0048~(ANDLek UMITID 7-15-0008 Rev. 4
Govt. of Indlo Undortokklg)
NOM. BOLT THREAD LENGTH STOCK I. DIA. 0. DIA. SAFE LOAD IN

DIA A L B C D kg
mi 0 20 32 26 42 600
M12 24 38 30 52 1000
M16 32 45 35 64 1800
M20 40 50 38 72 2700
M22 44 58 44 84 3000
M24 48 64 46 92 3300
M27 54 70 50 102 4200
M33 66 76 56 114 6800
M39 78 90 64 132 8100
M45 90 96 74 154 9900
M48 96 102 84 162 11400
M56 112 127 102 168 14200
NOTES: —
2. EYE BOLT SHALL BE MADE OF FORGING.
3. MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION CARBON STEEL HAVING U.T.S OF 42 kg/mm2 MIN.

4. UPTO M22 COARSE THREAD SERIES, M24 & ABOVE SHALL HAVE 3 mm PITCH.
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD %\,CP KA SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6470 of 8516

STANDARD No.
13■IGNEERS METHOD OF FASTENING
INDIA UMIT133 NUTS TO THE TIE RODS 7-15-0009 Rev. 4
(A Govt. of lodla Undortoking)
STEEL TIE—ROD
TIE—ROD SPACER
LAST SUPPORT PLATE

NOTES: — OR BAFFLE
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
2. WELD 1st NUT TO SUPPORT PLATE
3. WELD 2nd NUT TO TIE—ROD
4. WELD BOTH NUTS TOGETHER
5. ALL WELDS TO EXTEND THE LENGTH OF ONE FLAT OF NUT.
NON FERROUS TIE—ROD
CHISEL
TIE—ROD SPACER
LAST SUPPORT PLATE

OR BAFFLE
NOTE: —
* BREAK THREAD OF TIE—ROD IN TWO PLACES NEAR LAST NUT
WITH BLUNT CHISEL TO LOCK TIE—ROD NUTS IN PLACE.
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD ')'‘CP KA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6471 of 8516

STANDARD No.
JACK SCREW TAPPING
ENGNIEIRS
NDIA LIMMED AND ARRANGEMENT 7-15-0010 Rev. 4
(A Govi of Indki Undertaking)
Fl ANGF OR CHANNFI COVFR
GASKET SIDE EXPOSED SIDE
NCOUNTER BORE
d + 2
BOLT CI RCLE DIAMETER
THREAD=2d
d = DIAMETER OF JACK SCREW
/ I / I
3:5:(
"91't
2—HOLES 3—HOLES 4—HOLES
NO. REQD. 'd' SHELL I.D.

2 14 UPTO & INCL. 300
3 16 301 TO & INCL. 580

4 20 581 & LARGER
LOCATION OF JACK SCREW TAPPING HOLES

1. HOLES ARE TO BE LOCATED ON THE BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER
OF FLANGE AND HALF WAY BETWEEN ADJACENT HOLES.
2. FIRST HOLE SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN FIRST AND
SECOND BOLT HOLE COUNTING CLOCKWISE FROM MARK 'T'.
3. HOLES SHALL BE SPACED AS FOLLOWS
2—HOLES LAYOUT 180' APART
3—HOLES LAYOUT APPROX 120' APART
4—HOLES LAYOUT 90' APART.
NOTES: —
2. JACK SCREW SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL MATERIAL.
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD IS‘') /CCP KA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6472 of 8516

STANDARD No.
FIXING DETAIL OF DOWEL PINS
034~INDIA LINITED (A Govt. of Inao UndertakIng)
7-15-0011 Rev. 4
FIXING DETAIL OF DOWEL PINS FIXING DETAIL OF DOWEL PINS

(AT STATIONARY TUBE SHEET) ( AT CHANNEL COVER )
SEE NOTE-9
20 20
SEE NOTE-3
(sr G
0
NOTES: —
2. DOWEL PINS TO BE PROVIDED ONLY WHEN CHANNEL CONSISTS OF PASS—PARTITION PLATE/S.
3. DOWEL PIN SHALL BE OF CARBON STEEL UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
4. MIN. 2 DOWEL PINS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH FLANGE & SHALL NOT BE LOCATED AT 180' APART.
5. ALL SHARP EDGES OF DOWEL PINS SHALL BE ROUNDED OFF.
6. SHALL END OF DOWEL PIN SHALL BE HELD IN POSITION BY TIGHT FIT.
7. LUG TO BE WELDED TO TUBESHEET. HOWEVER LUG FOR DOWEL PIN MAY BE THREADED AND SCREWED
IN TUBE SHEET TO AVOID PWHT IN SPECIFIC CASES. MATERIAL OF LUG SHALL BE COMPATIBLE
WITH TUBE SHEET MATERIAL.
8. WHEN GAP BETWEEN SHELL & CHANNEL FLANGES IS 25 MM. OR LESS, DOWEL PINS SHALL BE
PROVIDED IN CHANNEL FLANGE ONLY.
9. AT THE LARGER END OF DOWEL PIN THE LENGTH CAN BE REDUCED IN CASE OF A SMALLER GAP
BETWEEN SHELL AND CHANNEL FLANGES.
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD ‘CP KA SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6473 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGNEMS COUPLINGS AND PLUGS
41g4= NCIIA LIMITED 7-15-0012 Rev. 4
101.1,1181111~0 (A Govi of Indla Undertok Ing)
L MIN
TYPE-1 TYPE-2
L MIN
M L MIN
TYPE-3 TYPE-4
120
‘Er FOR TYPE 1 & 2
. E31' FOR TYPE 3
PLUG DETAIL
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARDGCP KA RKT SC

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6474 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS COUPLINGS AND PLUGS
OlgzilMONDIA UMITED (A Govt. of Indlo Ondertoking)
7-15-0012 Rev. 4
COUPLINGS: -
NOM. DIA. D (0) d (0)
L d1 (0) M
( INCHES ) 3000 # 6000# (APP)
1/8" 19 22 12 7 — —
1/4" 19 25 13 9 — —
3/8" 22 32 15 12.5 — —
1/2" 29 38 17 16.6 21.7 13
3/4" 35 45 18 21.8 27 15
1" 45 57 21 27.5 33.8 16
11/2» 64 76 23 42.1 48.6 19
2" 76 92 24 54.1 61.1 23
PLUGS: -
NOM. DIA.
A/F B D (0) F B1
( INCHES )
1/8" 16 20 10.2 10 —
1/4" 21 25 13.7 15 —
3/8" 23 26 17.2 15.5 —
1/2" 27 30 21.3 19.8 37
3/4" 32 30 26.7 20.2 39
1" 41 35 33.4 25 43
11/2" 54 36 48.2 26.1 46
2" 67 37 60.3 26.9 50
NOTES: -
2. ONLY THREADED COUPLINGS TO BE USED FOR SIZES BELOW 1/2"
3. TAPER ON THREADS 1:16 (MEASURE ON DIAMETER) AS PER A ME B 2.1
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP KA RK

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6475 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS LIFTING LUG DETAIL
Oli4= NDIA LIMETED 7-15-0013 Rev. 4
INUI.11111111~0 (A Govt. of Indla Undortoking)
Page 1 of 1
10 FULL FILLET
WELD ALL AROUND
LIFTING LUG FOR SHELL COVER. LIFTING LUG FOR

CHANNEL AND CHANNEL COVER FLOATING HEAD COVER
SHELL I. D. A D R THK.
UPTO 450 65 25 28 12
451 — 1000 75 30 35 16
1001 — 1200 100 30 35 20
1201 & ABOVE CUSTOM DESIGN
NOTES: —
2. MATERIAL SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH PART IT IS WELDED TO. (USE BOILER QUALITY FOR CARBON STEEL)
3. USE TWO LIFTING LUGS EACH FOR CHANNEL AND SHELL COVER AND ONE FOR CHANNEL COVER AND
FLOATING HEAD COVER.
/
)(4."
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD iSkP KA RKkLi-I SC
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6476 of 8516

STANDARD No.
DAVIT FOR
ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED SHELL & CHANNEL COVER 7-15-0014 Rev. 4
(A Govi of Indlo Undortoking)
SHELL FLANGE
25 SLIDING LINK
SHELL COVER FLANGE SEE DETAIL
SHELL COVER CHANNEL
LIFTING LUG SHELL
TOP AND BOTTOM 25

LIFTING LUG
PLATE
CHANNEL FLANGE
CHANNEL COVER
PLAN OF DAVIT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY OF DAVIT ON EXCHANGER
DETAIL—'A'
SHELL/CHANNEL TOP PLATE

STOPPER PLATE/
FLANGE 16 THK. RIB PLATE
'A'
II
d0
II
II
5R BOTTOM PLATE 10 o WEEP HOLE

3
DETAIL OF SLIDING LINK 6 0 FLAT
DETAIL OF DAVIT DETAIL OF DAVIT SUP ORT
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD (')66P KA RKT

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6477 of 8516

STANDARD No.
lgelEr4GMERS DAVIT FOR
4fazi INDIALJMITED
Govt. of Inctio UndortokIng)
NIRVI (A
SHELL & CHANNEL COVER 7-15-0014 Rev. 4
-°
0 0 rl,
0 .0°00 oo 0 0 °
-4- i- N (C11
r.r) CO f'`)
co dr r') dr i- u0 0)
c.‘, •ol- to
,,,t. rO
(D °
NI- °
Fr)
rd N N N
-° o u'0000
0 0 o Ln
cy °00
.-- CO 0 .nd- o
tv) 00
r•-) I- 0
cl- cci)
.‘, rs-
tr) co
,i
. o
(,) ,,j. r.,-)
N N
rr, r''
.- .4- CO N N
up° 00 0 0 o o c» c\I co
N
0 0
1.r)
c‘i (1)
(£7,
(0
dr-
CO 1.1" ..4- r.r) N I- rO (-‘, rO .4. „-, •- 0
r'")
N N N N
•""
0 0 0 c \I 0 O o0 o C)
cy, Lö
r-- cr)I
c\ o
rn 2
vd- 1.0
.—
,,, ,j- r.
" .„
0
,- F- N 1..-) s'-' CD
ro ,--- 1- N c.,r N .4- tr) -.. ,-,
N c‘l ,-- N N
.-
0 0 0 csj
,r) o o o 0 o o°
" o c: n
O L( r),i 0 0 o o
0 I- - ro
up Lo ro st. rO 0 I- •- c\I N .--
,d. 2 •fl- rO
N N
in dr L11 N N
-oLn000 `-
o o o c■j '"-
„-, o
r.,-)
o
r., 0 0 °0°00
0 0.) 0 ,- O ° °
a) t- o iv.) "f vtj- ID CD 0 csj N ,„1.. ,-)
CV •- c',/ .--
o o I 0
0 0 e (_ 0 r 0 w 0 0 0 cn 1°
.0 0
,- 0
03 o o
c00 0 C 3 "0 •fl- 00 1- 0/ c‘i ,- .4- .4- t') rO
,- ,-
O if) 0 o o o Lr> -- 0o
_J o ID
r■ 0
1-- c)
co (r) r--
0 0 CO ro LO in csj Ln rO N
021 r■ I- CO r., "4- •of- c.,, o ,,, .4.
s-
0 0 ° 0°OLD
•-• 0 cp u" rn o
0 (Nj
tD°‘'
( ro rO o 0 f-, CD
(L) I- 0 c, C0\I i■ rO ° Ln
(0. I- f--
,- -
iv, v:F• .4. ro N .-
i
.--
,..,) ,,. r0 N
DIMENSION-A
0 <
o ir) C.)
o 0 o o
LO r.-)
I- (0 0)
N
n o rr.) c‘r ° 0 ° cra r-- Ir) N
Fr) N
0 ,- .- f- •F Z in /— (C) CV 0, K) .:1"
LIJ 0
•-
0 0 00°000Ln
0 o z — .- 0
(I) ° 0 O 8 1 •3 o
5?) 0
Lr)
_J ',
1- I- co ,...) ,-.
o
,t-
o)
r,-)
,.,-) c■I
z Z -i- ,—
L.L.1 - --
Lo N O) r.,) r.r) r`) c\J
-0 0 0 o o olo - ° o Lo o o co
o o o 0 cr) O) up „..) (..‘, 0 0 cr) co
U) rO I- -rl- r") •-'" ro r0 in 1') 1- `1" N 00 r.,-) oNm) N, N
o tY ° 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
N t---
1,..
csi
CD
•-
CO
r.,) O Fr)
ro
0
N 0 °0 °
c\I - ,._
.... ''')
In
Cd
0
c0
0
r.,)
rO
r.,) r,"
0
N
LL IJ-
- 0 Ln 0 o o o 0 '-- ° 0 000
0 0 0 r■ Ln Lo O °0 ° l'') lt, 0 0 9
re c\I
C)
csj o ,,i, rn 1- " N r-- 1.,) ro
- -
0 0 o h.
La 0 00
•iii- 00
0
r.-)
o
cs,i
o -
° 0 o
o
° o
tn
N
o
r--
o
co
00
ro N
0 I- N 0 r«.r) N ° 1- - N co C•1 N
-
0 000000 ° 0 rr) o o
o O 0 co o o Lo r0 N 6". ° 0 C•J CO ro ° °
CY' 1- ° N Ot 1,
) N O I— 0 c., cc) N N
•-
1:5 ° C3
co I- C» ICI
cd
D
") u
9) O rN
9> ,,,
° ° 0 ° 8
co ,— .
(5) 2 o
1.'"
o
o0 r', C\I 9
cr i.ri cs4 c.r "
•- 0 0000 in 5 ,..
08 °
0 2 0
'O CO
LO
N
0 0 N N
o 0 ")
c., L?)
c., (., N °
N
CO f'") N 1". - CO CsI Lr)
r: o 52 0 0 o o Lo o
,i, ,__
•0 r--
8 cs, h.
8
rO
8
,-
in
c‘
i
o
" I-3) 1- r‘-j {.:3 L.)- R, ,__
°. -J "
s ,2 8 : : : o 9, 03 CD o o_ o co
Lo . (.0 N co N •- Cs1 ..- V) I- (‘1:5 c° ? C-d
- u.-j " .-
0 0 Lf") (=> co (3
I- 00001D 0 co
ir:: o r.,-)
Lo N
co
0
,,.„
O, c., N 0_ 0 00
co -
LI, •-
F') N
N c.,, ‘_
cr) •"'"
1- I-
>
..:( -
co c..) o _i Z -o 5
< 03 0 o -.1 Z -f)
o o o 75
)6;)
,(04 SC
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD KA RKT (
J21..,-A
v:,

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6478 of 8516

DAVIT FOR
STANDARD No.
BNIGNEERS
INDIA UMETED SHELL & CHANNEL COVER 7-15-0014 Rev. 4
(A GovL of Indlo UndeflokIng)
TABLE — 3
WT. X C. DIMENSIONS/SIZE OF DAVITS
(ToN) (mTR) N....E F S

bic SCH NB SCH T R NB SCH
UPTO 0.1 2"-160 1-1/2"-160 3 32 3"-1 60
0.11-0.3 3"-160 2"-160 3 47 4"-80
0.31-0.6 4"-160 2"-160 13 59 6"-80
0.61-1.25 6"-80 3"-160 10 86 8"-80
1.26-2.5 8"-80 3"-160 11 112 10"-60
2.6-4.0 10"-60 4"-120 8 139 12"-60
4.1-6.3 10"-120 4"-120 8 139 12"-60
6.4-7.8 10"-160 4"-120 8 139 12"-60
NOTES: —
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2. WHEN DAVITS ARE REQUIRED, USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE TO FIND OUT THE DIMENSIONS
2.1 IDENTIFY THE DIMENSION A, i.e. THE MAXIMUM DIAMETER OF THE COMPONENT TO BE HANDLED.
2.2 REFER TABLE-1 OR TABLE-2 (AS THE CASE MAY BE ) FOR THE DIMENSIONS AND SIZES B,C,D,L,N & d
INDICATED IN THE COLUMN CORRESPONDING TO DIMENSION A.
2.3 DETERMINE WEIGHT OF THE PART TO BE HANDLED (i.e. WT. OF SHELL COVER ASSEMBLY OR CHANNEL COVER)
2.4 CALCULATE THE PRODUCT OF WEIGHT (IN TONNES) X DIMENSION C (IN METRES)
2.5 REFER TABLE-3 & OBTAIN DIMENSION AND SIZES E,F,T,S & R INDICATED IN THE ROW AGAINST
THE PRODUCT CALCULATED AT 2.4 ABOVE.
3. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION—a. TOP/BOTTOM/RIB PLATE— COMPATIBLE WITH PART IT IS WELDED TO
(USE BOILER QUALITY FOR CARBON STEEL)
b. OTHERS IS 1239 OR EQUIV
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP KA RKT

3 27.01.09 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6479 of 8516

STANDARD No.
arg ENGMERS
N31#1/4 MM.
(A Govt of Indio Undertaking)
EARTHING LUG
7-15-0016 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
10 THK. CARBON STEEL PLATE
EXCHANGER
PART
\ 14 0 HOLE
25 (FOR M12 BOLT)
100 (MIN)
NOTES: —
2. DO NOT WELD EARTHING LUGS TO PRESSURE PARTS. IF REQUIRED,TAKE PRIOR APPROVAL OF COMPANY.
3. EARTHING LUG TO PROTRUDE OUT OF INSULATION, WHEREVER REQUIRED.
4. ALL EXCHANGERS TO BE FITTED WITH 2 EARTHING LUGS.
5. LOCATION OF EARTHING LUGS :—
(i) FOR VERTICAL EXCHANGER WITH 2 LUG SUPPORTS :— ON BOTH LUG SUPPORTS AT VERTICAL WEB.
(ii) FOR VERTICAL EXCHANGER WITH 3 LUG SUPPORTS :— ON ANY TWO AT VERTICAL WEB.
FOR VERTICAL EXCHANGER WITH 4 LUG SUPPORTS :— ON ANY TWO DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE AT
VERTICAL WEB.
(iii) FOR HORIZONTAL EXCHANGER :— ONE ON CENTRAL WEB OF EACH SADDLE SUPPORT.
4
5 20.03.2018
30.09.2011

JIT SRIGH
JS
SKI J H
RKT
P SA4 Ai
rot
AKM SC
RN
DM

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RPV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts resprvpci
Page 6480 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEMS NAME PLATE
OlgziTX NDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. of Indlo UnclortokIng)
7-15-0017 Rev. 4
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS) Page 1 of
6R 4 — 5.5 0 HOLES
NAME OF MANUFACTURER
DESIGNED BY ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
MANUFACTURED FOR
ITEM NO.
MANUFACTURER'S SERIAL NO. YEAR BUILT
CODES
=INSPECTED BY
SHELL TUBES
DESIGN PRESSURE kg/cm2 g
DESIGN TEMPERATURE 'c
TEST PRESSURE (HYD) kg/cm2 g
DATE OF TEST
OPERATING FLUID
CORROSSION ALLOWANCE mm
RADIOGRAPHY
HEAT TREATMENT
DUTY / SURFACE kcal /hr m2
1WEIGHT FULL OF WATER kg
TOTAL WEIGHT EMPTY kg
BUNDLE WEIGHT kg
15
52 78 20
1 5n
CFW
SIDE SHELL
3 THK. FOR SS (MIN.)
6 THK. FOR CS & LAS (MIN.)
MATERIAL : —
NAME PLATE STAINLESS STEEL 18 : 8
170 x 130
N NAME PLATE BRACKET
NAME PLATE BRACKET :— SAME AS EXCHANGER SHELL
NOT S: —
2. ALL LETTERS AND LETTER BLOCKS SHALL BE ENGRAVED IN BLACK.
* 3. H = 75 OR 'INSULATION THK. + 10 WHICHEVER IS GREATER.
4. NAME PLATE SHALL BE RIVETED WITH 5 0 ALUMINIUM RIVETS AND SHALL BE TACK WELDED TO BRACKET
ON ALL FOUR SIDES.
5. BRACKET WITH NAME PLATE TO BE LOCATED AS MARKED ON DRAWING.
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD t•>6CIp KA RKT

:(? SC
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6481 of 8516

STANDARD No.
AMO NasEERS
INDIALIMM)
(A Govi of lndla UndiertakIng)
WARNING PLATE

7-15-0018 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 2
6R 4 — 5.5 0 HOLES 3 THK. STAINLESS STEEL PLATE

ryp\ Ty
6pi
AR
DO \OT RL\ THIS
EXCHA\GER WITHOUT
FLUID 0\ SHELL SID
160
DETAIL — 1
OUT SIDE SHELL
* 6R 3 THK. FOR SS (MIN.)

6 THK. FOR CS & LAS (MIN.)
185 x 130
WARNING PLATE BRACKET DETAIL

MATL. SPEC.:— SAME AS EXCHANGER SHELL
H = 75 OR 'INSULATION THK. + 10
NOTES: — WHICHEVER IS GREATER.
2. MATERIAL TO BE 18:8 STAINLESS STEEL FOR WARNING PLATE.
3. ALL LETTERING WITH THE EXCEPTION OF WORD 'WARNING' TO BE ENGRAVED 2 mm. WIDE x 2 mm. DEEP
AND FILLED WITH BLACK PAINT AFTER ENGRAVING.
4. THE WORD "WARNING" IS TO BE ENGRAVED 2.5 mm. WIDE x 2 mm. DEEP AND FILLED WITH RED PAINT
AFTER ENGRAVING.
5. WARNING PLATE TO BE HELD WITH 5 0 ALUMINIUM RIVETS ON WARNING PLATE BRACKET

AND SHALL BE TACK WELDED TO BRACKET ON ALL FOUR SIDES.
6. BRACKET WITH WARNING PLATE TO BE LOCATED AS MARKED ON DRAWING.
4 A
Q
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP KA RKT1l — SC
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6482 of 8516

STANDARD No.
INGINEERS WARNING PLATE
OgrXeN31A UMITIED 7-15-0018 Rev. 4
(A Govt. of Indio UndertokIng)
6R 4 — 5.5 0 HOLES 3 THK. STAINLESS STEEL PLATE

-1-si \ 6
TYP
AR\
DO NOT EUX THIS
EXCHAXGER WITHOUT
FLUID OX TUBE SIDE
160
DETAIL — 2
FOR NOTES REFER SHEET 1 OF 2.
4t/hs
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD i>lP KA RKT SC
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6483 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENCNEERS TOLERANCES
(A
UMITFD 7-15-0019 Rev. 4
11111.11.1•1111~10 Govt. of India Undertoking)
±16 ±6 ±3
±3
Mo fn0
+I
_1 ±3
REFER PARA 3.121 dc 3.122 OF TEMA ±3 3
ADDITION NO LONGITUDIANAL ELEMENT OF
THE INSIDE SURFACE SHALL HAVE A BOW OF ±6
MORE THAN 1mm. PER METRE OF LENGTH
UP TO MAX. OF 3mm.
+0.0
±1.5
LIGAMENT BETWEEN FOR EXPANDED I
HOLES WILL BE SAME
AS LIGAMENT BETWEEN
HOLES IN TUBE SHEET +1
( AS PER TEMA ) FOR WELDED
BAFFLE
TAKE (-1 TOLERANCE WHEN TAKE (+) TOLERANCE WHEN

CUT IS ON THE ( OF TUBES re=5_11U2EMEEILT±LE=
DETAIL—B TUBE SHEET /

(TYPICAL) .Q1:16fflELSME13
U—TUBE BUNDLE OVERALL LENGTH ±12
+ 0.8
+0.8 —0.
—0.0
E—A
to
-H
iqg +0.8
+l —0.0
±0.8 -...JMPINGEMENT PIATE
SECTION—AA ±6(MAX.) ±3
(NOTE-4)
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD 661D KA RKT


Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6484 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGNEERS TOLERANCES
11431A UMITED 7-15-0019 Rev. 4
somnewormowe (A Govt. ot Indlo UndortokIng)
Page 2 of 3
±3 ±3
00
—+ I
+I-H
±3 ±3
+3.0
—0.0
+0.8
—0.0
fI
+0.0
—0.8
L
cc!
0
-H
L
vt.
+
+2.0 I
+2.
—0.0 —0 TRUE VERTICAL C.
+0.8
+8:8±0.8
ri +0.0 +0.0
3 MAX. I
r---1 -0
rA
—0.8 •8
l
e I
1n1
.c:D
ii
1- c0 + I co
d 0
-H -H
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD 4P6CP KA RKT

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
Page 6485 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGN
IA IRS TOLERANCES
ID
N UMITED 7-15-0019 Rev. 4
1:
1111.1~1V111~0 (A Govl. of Indlo Undertoking)
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGER) Page 3 of 3
TRUE VERT q_
1.0 FOR NOZZLE 4- dc UNDER
2.0 FOR NOZZLE 6" TO 10" INCL
2.5 FOR NOZZLE 12" TO 16" INCL
3.0 FOR NOZZLE 18" dc ABOVE
TRUE HORIZ Q
1.
+1.0
—0.0
11'! ACTUAL NOZZLE Q
00
GENERAL NOTES: —
CUMULATIVE TOLERANCES ON CONSECUTIVE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE LIMITED
BY OVERALL DIMENSION TOLERANCE.
2. SPECIFIC TOLERANCES DESIRED FOR ANY PART SHALL BE SHOWN ON THE DRAWING AND
SHALL BE GIVEN PREFRENCE TO THOSE GIVEN IN THIS STANDARD.
3. TUBE HOLE TOLERANCES SHALL BE AS PER TEMA.
4. ONLY WHEN NUMBER OF BAFFLE PITCHES EXCEED EIGHT.
Ofr L3'
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD ;1--"G(6P KA RKT 'N3s/.-SC
No.
by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn R-nn-nnni-F4 RAV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsnrvnri
Page 6486 of 8516

DETAIL OF SEALING STRIP STANDARD No.
ENGINIEERS
INDIA UMITED ASSL'Y FOR TWO PASS SHELL 7-15-0021 Rev. 4
(A Govt. of Indlo UndortokIng)
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGER) Page 1 of 1
L.LJ
_J
TUBE OR SPACER
0
SPACE TO REMOVE BOLTS
_J
FULL LENGTH BACKING 7.5
STRIP 15 WIDE x 6
8 STRIPS 0.1 THK.
STAINLESS STEEL FOR EACH
—SIDE TYPE A-177-3/4 HARD
kkk\ 80 HOLE OR FULL HARD TEMPER
M-6 HEXAGONAL HEAD
BOLTS & NUTS @ 100 97
PITCH (MAX.) 45
TO FACILITATE ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE

HOLES DRILLED IN LONG BAFFLE TO BE
SLOTTED AS SHOWN
ROUND OFF
LONG BAFFLE
SHARP EDGE
DETAIL SHOWING BOLT HOLES
IN LONGITUDINAL BAFFLE
NOTE:
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD SZGCP KA RK 4)2

No. by by
Approved by
Förmat Nn a-nn-non1-F4 RPV 0 ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts rPsPrvr4r1
Page 6487 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGNEERS HALF TUBE SUPPORTS
ND1A UM1TED 7-15-0101 Rev. 4
(A Govt. of Indlo UndortokIng)
(AIRCOOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS) Page 1 of 1
oi
òò
+
A ± 0.3 25
DEVELOPED FORM OF
PLATE 1 mm THK.
A ± 0.3
MATERIAL : ALUMINIUM
A = HORIZONTAL TUBE PITCH — 0.2 mm

B = VERTICAL TUBE PITCH / 2
C = B— TUBE OUTSIDE RADIUS — 1 mm
R = TUBE OUTSIDE RADIUS + 0.6 mm
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD ‘CP KA- RKT

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn R-00-00(11-F4 RPV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprupri
Page 6488 of 8516

FLANGED HEADER AND STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS COVER PLATE DETAIL
INDIA UMMED
(A Govt. of India Undertoking)
7-15-0103 Rev. 4
WIEWINNZWIO
BOLTS
SPOT FACING OF/ SPOT FACING OF

BACK FACE FOR BACK FACE FOR
NUT SEAT NUT SEAT
HEADER TOP PLATE
STIFFENING PLATE WIDTH EQUAL TO

TWICE HORIZONTAL TUBE PITCH
HOLES OPPOSITE TO
THE TUBE HOLES
PASS PARTITION PLATE
COVER PLATE 25 25
NOTE: —
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD ‘CP KA SC 1"9N.

No. by by
Approved by
Frwmat Nn 14-o0-on01-F4 Rev n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rAsArveri
Page 6489 of 8516

TAPPED HEADER AND STANDARD No.
ENGNEERS COVER PLATE DETAIL
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. of Indio Undortoking)
7-15-0104 Rev. 4
BOLTS
SPOT FACING OF
BACK FACE FOR
NUT SEATING
//
STIFFENING PLATE WIDTH EQUAL TO
TWICE HORIZONTAL TUBE PITCH
HOLES OPPOSITE TO
THE TUBE HOLES
CJ
25 25
NOTE: —
stik
06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KAP RKT SC~C
No. by by
Approved by
Förmat Nn s-nn-onni-F4 RPV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhtg rAsprvpri
Page 6490 of 8516

arr MINERS
FRAME STANDARD STANDARD No.
STATIONARY HEADER FIXING 7-15-0105 Rev.4

IMNIVOINIMMINIM
egeNIMA WOW
(A GovL of Indio Undortoking)
15 0 HOLES 5 THK PL. 15 0 HOLES

FOR M-12 BOLTS FOR M-12 BOLTS \
100
in
L 60x60x6 THK.
6
AAPArAFICA
L 100x75x8 THK.
'C' FRAM
NOTE:-
2. THE PART NOS RELATE TO THOSE SHOWN IN TUBE BUNDLE FRAME DRAWING.
4 20 03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD J114]k $ H

If RKT
wt- RN
3 02.05.2011 RE-AFFIRMED & REISSUED AS STANDARD MKD KA/RKT AKM/SC DM

No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6491 of 8516

STANDARD No .
FRAME END TOP

dafreZOWEER41,
116111118•11MNIIIWO (A Govt. of Indio UndorfoON) (AIRCOOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS)
7-15-0106 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
L 100 x 100 x 8 THK.
5 THK END PL.
FOR M-12 BOLTS
NOTE.-

14091e
JIT SI H RKT
3 02.05.2011 RE-AFFIRMED 8, REISSUED AS STANDARD MKD KA/RKT AKM/SC DM

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6492 of 8516

FRAME STANDARD STANDARD No .
ISIBMASUIERS
IVOIRUNNOIVIION•10
MTED
(A Govt. of Indio UndortokIng)
TUBE SUPPORT TOP
(AIRCOOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS)
7-15-0107 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
25 50 25
20
/ // / / / / / / /
U)
20
5
I— 1
0_ I
L80 x 80 x 10 THK. 011
NOTE.-
4 20.03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JI <KOH


Rev .
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6493 of 8516

ENGNEERS FLOATING HEADER SUPPORT 7-15-0108 Rev. 4
diiar esINDA
(A Govt. of Indio Underiokino)
15 0 HOLES
5 1,„ FOR M-12 BOLTS
25 45 25
L 60x60x 6 THK.
,,,,,, ,,,,,
NOTE.-
L56
4 20.03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT H SK/K RKT RN

No by by Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6494 of 8516

STANDARD No .
FRAME BRACING DETAIL
7-15-0109 Rev. 4
ISIBMOWS
(AN.
MTRIP
A C of India UnchrtokIng)01. MINO (AIRCOOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS)
Page 1 of 1
2"N.B. 4.5 THK.(MIN.)
O
M
j J -
O
O
tr)
-1 1
O
N)
7 7 /
.... 1 li
A .
,
, t ,,
Mir 4— I-
I,,, 1.,,,
1
MATL. OF CONST..- A 36 / IS 1239 t ,, -

A
' 't /I %, ,,
os
NOTE.-
' r -■
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS STATED 1
. ,
OTHERWISE. 1/4,
2. -15- INDICATES 18 0 HOLES FOR M-16 BOLTS.

5 5
3. THE PART NOS RELATE TO THOSE SHOWN 125
IN TUBE BUNDLE FRAME DRAWING.
41-
ivicse
4 20.03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 6495 of 8516

TUBE SUPPORT BOTTOM STANDARD No.
BEAM DETAIL 7-15-0110 Rev. 4

eraleebel3kriall,
111111111MININO (A Govt. of Indio UndfrtokIng)
1 10 10
CL TUBE SUPPORT
NOTE.-
2. it INDICATES 18 0 HOLES FOR M-16 BOLTS.
3. T E PART NOS RELATE TO THOSE SHOWN IN TUBE BUNDLE FRAME DRAWING.
4 20.03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT KJ
3 02.05.2011 RE-AFFIRMED 8 REISSUED AS STANDARD MKD KA/RKT AKM/SC DM

Rev.
No by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 6496 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENIGMBZS TUBE ACCESS PLUG
OlgAlregeINDIA LJNYTED (A Govt. of Indlo Undortoking)
7-15-0111 Rev. 4
o
41
0
+.4
GASKET —o.o
F
+0.4
E —o.o
R=1
yy
+0.4
A —(1°
S.NO. TUBE DIA. A B C D E F G H J K L

1 1» 25 35 41.6 26 11/ —12 UNF 35 30 36 15 2 4 PLUG SHEET
THICKNESS
2 11/4" 32 42 53.1 32 13/4.3 —12 UNF 42 37 43 19 2 5
3 11/2 38 48 57.7 38 15/8 —12 UNF 48 43 49 21 2 5
4 17/ki 48 57 67 47 2" —12 UN 57 52 58 24 2 5
5 2" 50 64 78 54 2V4» —12 UN 64 59 65 27 2 5
NOTES: —
2. THREAD STRAIGHT ACCORDING TO ASME B1.1 CLASS 2A/2B.
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP KA j RKT


No. by by
Approved by
Page 6497 of 8516

STANDARD No.
oglziTX ENGINEERS JACK SCREWS (COVER TYPE HEADER)
INDIA IJNYTEE) 7-15-0113 Rev. 4
1411.1 IMINewt~ (A Govt. of India Undertolting)
Page 1 of 1
TAPPED HOLES FOR JACK SCREWS
LOCATION OF JACK SCREWS IN COVER PLATE
*L = 2d OR d1 WHICHEVER IS SMALLER
d1
HEAI R F NG
TOP BOTTOM PLATE
JACK SCREW DETAIL

TAPPING DETAIL IN COVER PLATE
NOTES: —
2. DIMENSION 'A' = FLANGE OR COVER PLATE THK. +15.

3. MATERIAL OF JACK SCREW SS
4. JACK SCREWS — 4 NOS. FOR EACH COVER PLATE.
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD \---CP KA RKT " SC

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn R-on-0001-F4 RPV n ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts rAsprvpri
Page 6498 of 8516

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS LIFTING LUG FOR COVER PLATE
4i'zffX NDIA LIMETE)
(A Govt. of Indlo UndertokIng)
7-15-0114 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
80
16
7 mm FULL FILLET
WELD ALL ROUND
»:•:•»»:•»;•:•;•:•:•:•:•:•:•:•»:•>:•»:•:•:•»:•».-.
*.•:•:•:+:•»»»»»>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>:-.
NOTES: —
2. MATERIAL SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH PART IT IS WELDED TO. (USE BOILER QUALITY FOR CARBON STEEL)
3. USE TWO LIFTING LUGS FOR EACH COVER PLATE
4. SAFE WORKING LOAD = 1 100 kg
.,4■1 1‘611/4): et ■9‘` r

06.05.1 4 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD 1" GCP KA RKT S
No. by by
Approved by
Förmat Nn R-00-0001-F4 RPV n C.nnvrinht Fil - All rinhts nosArvArl
Page 6499 of 8516

INGNEERS
ND1A lJtvYTED LIFTING LUG 7-15-0115 Rev. 3
41
4 111.11.111•1111113~ (A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
(FOR AIR COOLERS)
Page 1 of 1
4
,//////////f
118 94
115
47
3 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD öP KA RKT

No. by by
Approved by
Fnunat Nn s-nn-nnn1-F4 RPV n Cnnvrinht F II - All rinhts ri?prvPri
Page 6500 of 8516

FABRICATION TOLERANCES STANDARD No.
k`51
12..it4 ENGINEERS
51gzu 22- eg INDIA LIMITED 7-15-0116 Rev. 4
1~f P2L1520,
1,3~1) (A Govt ol India UndertaVong)
+6
-o
SIDE ±3
(NOZZLE) CL TUBE SUPPORT (S 0 C K ET)
-11111H1- ----11111111---
±5 i ±5 ±5
±10 ±5
+0 +3
±3 —5
(SOCK ET) (NOZZLE)
TUBE BUNDLE WITH SIDE FRAME
TRUE VERTICAL C.L.

ACTUAL NOZZLE C.L. f ACTUAL NOZZLE C.L.
3 (MAX) I I 3 (MAX)
+I
N
NOZZLES ON HEADER
3 (MAX) \ TRUE HORIZONTAL LIN
+5
—0 C.L. OF NOZZLE
NOMINAL NOZZLE SIZE G (MAX)

OUTSIDE BENT
FRAME
2" — 4" INCL. 1.0
6" — 10" INCL. 2.0
OVER 10" 2.5
J
SIDE FRAME NOZZLE TILT AND OFF SETS
NOTE: —
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS STATED OTHERWE>
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VCP KA RKT SC
No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn 8-no-non1-F4 RPV n C:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsPrvArl
Page 6501 of 8516

$olino-Riet (err)ENGINEERS
5R-a—t 92es-
INDIA LIMITED
,A
(~, r-wcwash.twn.4) Govt of Incha Undertaking)
7-15-0116 Rev. 4
NGE / BOTTOM PLATE)
+6 NEAR TUBE SHEETS

—o
FLANGE TYPE HEADER BOX
+5
_n
±0.8 (BOLT CENTRES)
±0.8 (RAISED FACE)
+1.0 tO 8 *0 8 +1.0
—0.0 —0.0
00
•-• 0 I
+ I
__L__ o o
a,
c) 1 7-
-H
0 ti
co
ci
PASS PARTMON
GROOVES COVER PLATE.
PLUG SHEET
+6
—0
,PARTITION
PLATE
_ _
1 o SIDE PLATE
±0.8
I
PLUG TYPE HEADER BOX
NOTES: —
2. 10LtKAPil..t
L. TOLERANCES ON ON PITCH
1-'111.1 OF
STUD
-1 Ul• HOLES±0.4
11.1L) 1-10t. ±0.4
3.
3. TOLERANCES
TOLERANCESON
ONECCENTRICIlY
ECCENTRICIlY OF OF STUD
STUD HOLES
HOLES WITH
WITH RESPECT
RESPECT TO CL OF HEADER ±0.8
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD t6P KA RKT SC

No. by by
Approved by
Förmat Nn R-no-0001-F4 RPV 0 C:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpri
Page 6502 of 8516

011Io1j ENGINEERS
tawrf eiannadn,~0 Govt of India Ondertafong)
+10
-0
t0.8113()=ENIRES)
±0.8 (RAISED FACE)
±0.8 ±0.8
±0.8(BOLTCENTRES)
fO CO
o
H 0
CO
I Zi -H
.,/
PASS PART
- ITIONS
-
+10
- 0 NEAR FLANGES
+6 NEAR TUBE SHEET
—0
TAPPED HEADER BOX
+10
-0
±0.8 (BOLT CENTRES)
+0.0 +3
-0 ±9.8 (RAISED FACE)
141.0 ±0.8 ±0.8
+1.61
—0.0
__
1—
TI i _. _
, _i
PASS PARTMON
GROOVES
CL TENSION STRIPS
±3 /A
TOP PLATE ±3
±3
SIDE PLATE
BOTTOM PLATE
±1
TUBE HOLE LAYOUT AND TENSION STRIPS
NOTES: —
2. ECCENTRICITY OF TUBE ACCESS HOLES IN TENSION STRIPS WITH RESPECT T0
CORRESPONDING TUBE HOLES IN TUBE PLATE ±0.8
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP KA RKT 1/4•A Sc

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn a-no-noni -P4 Rev () r.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpd
Page 6503 of 8516

STANDARD No.
NAME PLATE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMETED (FOR AIR COOLERS) 7-15-0117 Rev. 3
4API (AGovt. of Indlo UndertakIng)
Page 1 of 1
6(TY?)
3R(TYP)
6R(TYP) 4-5.50 HOLES(TYP)
NAME OF MANUFACTURER
DESIGNED BY — ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
MANUFACTURED FOR—
ITEM NO— 1
MFR'S SERIAL NO— YEAR BUILT
CODES— A P I — 661 , ASME SEC VIII DIV I
INSPECTED BY—
DESIGN PRESSURE— IKg/cm 2
DESIGN TEMPERATURE— .0 o
TEST PRESSURE— 1K9/ern 2 Si
DATE OF TEST—
OPERATING FLUID—
CORROSION ALLOWANCE— MM
RADIOGRAPHY— 1
HEAT TREATMENT-
DUTY/SURFACE AREA(BARE)-1 K Col/hr m2
WT. FULL OF WATER— I Kg
BUNDLE EMPTY Kq
FRAME WT— Kg
45 33 15 25 15
150
1( I
2—NOS. 6THK x3OWIDE

STIFFENER
TOP PL.
MATERIAL STAINLESS STEEL 18:8
NOTES
1. ALL LETTERS, BLOCKS & BORDERS SHALL BE RAISED
POLISHED FACE.
FOR PLUG TYPE HEADER
2. BACK GROUND TO BE BLACK.
3. NAME PLATE SHALL BE SECURED THROUGH ALUMINIUM RIVETS FOR COVER TYPE HEADER
& TACK WELDS ON FOUR SIDES.
NAME PLATE BRACKET
(SAME MATERIAL AS FOR HEADER)
t`^-9
3 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CP KA RKT
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 ennvnaht Fll - All rinhte reserved
Page 6504 of 8516

-
TOLERANCES AND NOTES FOR STANDARD No.

ENGINEERS GASKETS
OL
aZIM INDIA LIMITED 7-15-0118 Rev. 4
0111111~11113111110 (A Govt. of Indlo Undortoklog)
PERWSSIBLE TOLERANCES
±0.8
co
o
-H
co
1 OR o
co
20R
o
-H
1 OR(TYP)
±0.8
±0.8

THIS SIDE
\FILLER
TYPICAL SECTION OF METAL
JACKETTED GASKETS
GENERAL NOTES: —
2. THE HARDNESS OF THE METAL FOR SOLID OR CLAD GASKETS SHALL BE MINIMUM 15 BHN LOWER THAN
THAT OF THE MATERIAL OF THE FLANGE GASKET SEATING SURFACE AND IN ANY CASE NOT TO EXCEED
THE FOLLOWING.
(a) LOW CARBON STEEL / LAS 110 BHN
(b) 5 Cr. 1/2 Mo. 130 BHN
(c) STAINLESS STEEL 1 60 BHN
(d) 1 1 — 1 3 Cr. 1 70 BHN
(e) MONEL 130 BHN
(f) SOFT IRON 90 BHN
(g) COPPER, BRASS 50 BHN
(h) ALUMINIUM 30 BHN
3. FILLER IN METAL JACKETTED GASKETS SHALL NOT BE OF COMPRESSED TYPE.

4. ALL GASKETS SHALL BE MADE IN ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE ALL AROUND INCLUDING THE PASS PARTITION
RIBS AND THEREFORE MUST BE CUT FROM ONE SHEET.
5. SOLID FLAT METAL GASKET SHALL BE 2 mm. THK.
6. ' m' AND 'y' VALUES SHALL BE AS PER ASME SEC. Vlll DIV. I.
7. GASKET PLAN IS VIEWED FROM DIRECTION ' X' .
8. FILLER SHALL BE ARAMIDE FIBRE UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE IN DR WINGS & ASBESTOS NOT TO BE USE
iht
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CCP KA RKT
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6505 of 8516

TUBE BUNDLE FRAME DETAIL STANDARD No
445MOINGINIERSNDIALIMITED
.
(EQUAL TUBES IN EACH ROW) 7-15-0121 Rev. 4

POINIMORNIMINP (A Govt of Indio Undsrtaking)
INTERNAL FRAME WIDTH VIEWED FROM INLET END
NOTES:—

2. DETAIL GIVEN IN THIS STANDARD IS TYPICAL IT SHOWS 4 NOS. OF ROWS OF TUBES.
EXTRAPOLATE FOR NO. OF ROWS IF OTHER THAN SHOWN ABOVE.
1'
4 20.03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SK/KJ RKT RN
3 02.05.2011 RE - AFFIRMED & REISSUED AS STANDARD MKD KA/RKT AKM/SC DM

No by by
Approved by
Page 6506 of 8516

TUBE BUNDLE FRAME STANDARD No.
INGNERS DETAIL WITH SPACER 7-15-0122 Rev. 4
EIESMO NDIA LIMITED
INIrlawillleingaglilll (A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
3 (MAX)
3 (MAX)
SS 6 THK. STIFFENERS
0 250 PITCH
SPACER CHANNEL BOLTED

TO FRAME THROUGH
2 NOS. M12 BOLTS.
TOP OF BEAM
NOTES:—

2. SPACER CHANNEL SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM 5 THK. PLATE (SS).
3 02.05.2011 RE-AFFIRMED & REISSUED AS STANDARD DM

Rev . Chairman
Date Purpose Convenor
Page 6507 of 8516

TUBE BUNDLE FRAME DETAIL STANDARD No.
geNDIA
tgar umffED (UNEQUAL TUBES IN ROW)
ENGNEERS 7-15-0123 Rev. 4
NOTES:—

4 20.03.2018 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SKJKJH

•?c-z-

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Page 6508 of 8516

STIFFENING STRIPS FOR STANDARD No.
k31 ENGINEERS
5e-a1~1 laWg INDIA LIMITED NOZZLES LESS THAN 3"NB 7-15-0142 Rev. 4
212-d5Wail.posP) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
3 NOS. STRIPS
30 x 6 THK.
W~~1111511111/"..
06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RKT SC

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn R-nn-nnni-F4 RPV 0 r.nnvrinht Fil - All rinhts rpspropri
Page 6509 of 8516

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS DOCUMENT NO.
(PLOT PLAN & WATER)
B016-504-17-44-LL-5002
RUF UNIT (EPCC) PACKAGE
Rev. A
FOR VISAKH REFINERY
MODERNISATION PROJECT Page 1 of 3
E STANDARD SPECIFICATION
E-3 PLOT PLAN & WATER
EPCC PACKAGE
FOR
RUF UNIT
TENDER No. B016-504-84-41-PM-T-9509
PROJECT : VISAKH REFINERY MODERNISATION PROJECT
UNIT No. : 504
OWNER : M/s HPCL , VISAKHAPATNAM
LOCATION : VISAKHAPATNAM, INDIA
PMC : M/s ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
EIL JOB No. : B016
A 07.06.18 ISSUED FOR BIDS SJ JKU SKN

Rev. Prepared Checked Approved
Date Purpose
No. by by by
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 6510 of 8516

(PLOT PLAN & WATER)
RUF UNIT (EPCC) PACKAGE B016-504-17-44-LL-5002
FOR VISAKH REFINERY Rev. A
1.0 SPECIFICATION
Sl. No. Doc. No. Title Description of Standard Specification

1. 6-65-0030 Standard specification for fabrication and laying of
underground of piping
2. 6-66-0004 Standard specification for portable fire extinguisher
3. 6-66-0011 Standard specification for rubber lined or rubberized fabric
lined woven jacketed hose
4. 6-66-0012 Standard Specification for Stand post type fire Hydrant
(with or without pumper connection)
5. 6-66-0018 Standard Specification for first aid hose reel
6. 6-66-0027 Standard Specification for Water cum Foam Monitor
7. 6-66-0035 Standard Specification for Landing valve
8. 6-66-0046 Standard Specification for water spray nozzle for cooling
9. 6-66-0047 Standard Specification for hose cabinet
10. 6-66-0048 Standard Specification for Deluge Valve
11. 6-66-0061 Standard Specification for 50kg & 75 kg capacity dry
chemical Powder extinguisher
12. 6-68-0002 Technical specifications- Civil & Structural works- Material
13. 6-68-0003 Standard specification : civil & structural works - earthwork
14. 6-68-0004 Technical specifications- Civil & Structural works- Plain &
Reinforced cement concrete
2.0 QUALITY DOCUMENTS REQUIRED FROM BIDDER
Sl. No. Doc. No. Title Description of Standard Specification

1. Specification for quality management system requirements
6-78-0001
from bidders
2. Specification for documentation requirements from
6-78-0002
contractors
3. Specification for documentation requirements from
6-78-0003
suppliers
4. 3-78-0004 Format for Completeness of Final Documentation
3.0 INSPECTION & TEST PLANS
Sl. Doc. No. Title Description of ITP

No.
1. Standard specification for positive material identification
6-81-0001
(PMI) at supplier's works
2. 6-81-0113 Inspection & test plan for spray nozzles
3. 6-81-2006 Inspection & test plan for restriction orifice plates
4. 6-81-2034 Inspection & test plan for solenoid valves
Page 6511 of 8516

(PLOT PLAN & WATER)
RUF UNIT (EPCC) PACKAGE B016-504-17-44-LL-5002
FOR VISAKH REFINERY Rev. A
4.0 HSE SPECIFICATION
Sl. Doc. No. Title Description of Standard Specification

No.
1. Standard specification for health, safety & environment
6-82-0001
(HSE) management at construction sites
2. Standard specification for positive material identification
6-82-0002
(PMI) at construction sites
Page 6512 of 8516

No.
■
31 ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED FABRICATION AND LAYING OF 6-65-0030 Rev. 4
,
zri ,
°Pr IA Govt of India Undertaking)
UNDERGROUND PIPING Page 1 of 11
f\* r,
LIML14 1 on Wa1141
1:TriW Fa Pi 4'k 11
FOR
FABRICATION AND LAYING OF
UNDERGROUND PIPING
c (
RFAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RBT DM

4 20.05.13
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC GAURAV RKS NK VC

3 29.04.08
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RC PCS MMK A SONI

2 25.06.99
UPDATED & ISSUED AS STD. PCS PCS MMK RPB/RNS

1 01.04.91
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Prepared Checked
Rev. Purpose Convenor Chairman
Date by by
No
Approved by

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 6513 of 8516

5'gzir 2154- g
etecrneak J•70%.
INDIA LIMITED
FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 4
OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
dia. DIAMETER
IS INDIAN STANDARD
Kg/cm2/minute KILOGRAME/SQUARE CENTIMETRE/MINUTE
m METRE
mm MILLIMETRE
CS CARBON STEEL
General Civil Standards Committee
Convener: Mr. R.B. Bhutda
Members: Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Rajan ji Srivastava (Structural)
Mr. Harish Chandra (Piping)
Mr. B. R. Bhogal (Electrical)
Mr. Praveen Goel (Environment)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. V S Chhhaya (Projects)
Page 6514 of 8516

Ifgar tlf5leg INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 4
,vit-tAt etrave m1JPOni (A Govt of Indla Undertaking,
OF UNDERGROUND PIPING Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS 4
3.0 FABRICATION 4
4.0 LAYING OF UNDERGROUND PIPING 5
5.0 INSPECTION 8
6.0 TESTING 8
7.0 RECORDS 10
8.0 PAYMENT 10

Page 6515 of 8516

f6t5teg
(I,,oretn,oKrott
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt 01 India undettalong)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the technical requirements for the execution of Piping Fabrication,
Assembly and Laying of the underground pipe work defined here under, for water pipe lines.
i) Fabrication and erection of underground piping systems from piping materials

supplied by Owner in accordance with this specification and applicable drawings and
standards.
ii) Testing and flushing.
iii) Coating of under ground piping.
iv) Fabrication and erection of drain assemblies.
Underground piping systems shall be fabricated, installed, flushed, and tested in accordance
with this specification and applicable codes, drawings and standards. Any deviation from the
specification and drawings shall be permitted only after obtaining the written approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS
ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping.
6-65-0006 Standard specification for earth work for U/G piping.
6-44-0012 Standard specification for fabrication and erection of piping.
6-77-0001 Welding specification for the fabrication of piping
6-77-0005 Welding specification charts for piping classes
6-79-0011 Standard specification for corrosion protection tape coating for underground
steel piping
NOTE: - Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 FABRICATION
3.1 The contractor shall fabricate all the pipe work in conformity with the Standard Specification
for Erection of Piping, Specification no. 6-44-0012 and requirements of relevant general
arrangement drawings. Where specific details of fabrication are not indicated on the drawings
or not specified in the specification, fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with
ANSI B 31.3.
3.2 The contractor shall be responsible for working to the exact dimensions as shown on the
drawings, irrespective of individual tolerances permissible. Where errors and / or omissions
occur on the drawings, it shall be the contractor's responsibility to notify the Engineer-in-
Charge, prior to fabrication or erection. Dimensional tolerance for fabrication shall be as per
EIL standard.

Page 6516 of 8516

t31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
tifardg INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 4
Govt ot India Undertaking)
4.0 LAYING OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
4.1 Laying
4.1.1 The Contractor shall lay the underground piping in accordance with the following clauses and
as per the piping arrangement drawings issued during the course of construction. Corrosion
protection tape coating of the underground lines shall be in accordance with Standard
Specification no. 6-79-0011.
4.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for correct layout and gradient of the line. Errors, if any,
shall be rectified by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.2. Trenching
4.2.1 The trench shall be cut according to the drawing, true to the line, levelled with the help of
sight rails provided at every 30 m, at change of direction / gradient and at any suitable
distance, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2.2 If the trench is excavated below the required level as indicated in the drawing, the extra depth
shall be filled with concrete 1:5:10 or approved equivalent material, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, at no extra cost to owner.
4.2.3 The trench shall be excavated so as to provide an average cover of 1000 mm or equal to the
diameter of the largest pipe to be laid in the trench, whichever is greater or as shown in
drawings. The average cover will be reckoned from top of the pipe of the largest diameter to
be laid in the trench, to the finished grade level. The width of the trench shall be sufficient to
give free working space on each side of the pipe. The free working space shall conform to
specifications. Generally it shall not be less than 150 mm on either side or 1/3 of dia of pipe,
whichever is greater.
4.2.4 No excavated material shall be deposited within 1.5 meters from the excavated trench.
4.2.5 In case of road cutting, all materials i.e. metal, bricks etc., shall be taken out carefully and kept
separately for reuse. Road work shall be redone up to the original level and profile with the
excavated road materials, after laying and testing of the pipe line, within 10 days from the date
of starting the work, at the cost of the contractor. The contractor shall provide suitable slings
and barricades to prevent accidents. He shall also provide reasonable by-pass at his own cost
when a road is cut for laying pipeline.
4.2.6 During excavation, if some obstacle is met with, the same shall be reported to the Engineer-in-
Charge and dealt with as instructed by him.
4.2.7 The contractor shall do dewatering, shoring, strutting / timbering if required or do whatever
might be required to excavate the trench, install the pipe in it and backfill the trench, in
accordance with the specifications, at no extra cost to the Owner. Dewatering shall be done in
advance of the laying of the pipe, to allow adequate inspection of padding of the bottom, if
required. Dewatering shall be continued throughout during laying of the pipe and backfilling
of the trench.
4.2.8 In muddy / slushy ground, the bed shall be provided with a layer of sand or lean concrete as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2.9 The trench shall follow the gradient of pipeline as specified in the drawing. The contractor
shall keep the trench in good condition, until the pipe is laid and tested. No extra claim shall
be entertained due to its caving or settling down, either before or after the pipe is laid. All

Page 6517 of 8516

0 'a
51g-ar tlf5teg
c.1,Pre an 34;15,1) INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo UndefaNing)
materials to shore the trench, in order to prevent caving, shall be furnished and removed by the
Contractor, at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.2.10 In case pipe is lowered in caved trench and back filled before being inspected by the Engineer-
in-Charge, the Contractor shall re-excavate the trench for inspection and backfill it at his own
cost.
4.3 Lowering & Laying
4.3.1 The pipe shall be lowered by mechanical method when the trench is ready and bottom of the
trench is graded as per required pipe laying conditions and specifications.
4.3.2 By Machine
The shop coated pipe already transported to the pipe laying site in convenient length of pipe
assembly, near the trench after hydrostatic testing, shall be placed on clean square cut skids
suitably spaced, so as to keep the pipe away from touching the ground. The pipe may be
lowered down in the trench by the launcher cranes with sufficient care, to protect the coating
of the pipeline.
At tie in welds and other site fabrications, the contractor shall clean, prime, coat and wrap
manually.
Also short sections of pipelines, which are impracticable to shop-treat, may be hand treated,
but only after obtaining prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.3.3 By Hand
Only in unavoidable circumstances and after obtaining approval of Engineer-in-Charge, the

pipe may be lowered with the help of tripods and chain pulley blocks into the trench.
However, if in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, the temperature condition does not
allow direct lowering, then the pipes shall be set down on clean square cut skids. The skids
shall be so spaced as to keep the pipe away from touching the ground.
4.4 Method & Time of Lowering Pipe
4.4.1 Under favorable temperature conditions and using methods, which will not damage the
coating, the pipe may be lowered into the trench.
4.4.2 Pipes previously set on skids, because of unfavorable temperature conditions, shall be lowered
into the trench normally in the cool of the morning and only when the temperature of the pipes
is below the softening point of the coating materials.
4.4.3 All skid marks and other places of damage shall be thoroughly examined to ensure proper
patching where necessary, before the pipe is finally lowered into the trench.
4.5 Handling Coated Pipe
4.5.1 Coated pipe shall not be placed in trench, until cave-in plugs, hard clods, stones, skids and
welding rods etc. have been removed from there. Where the trench has a hard or jagged
bottom, sufficient fine dirt or stand shall be placed therein, before the pipe is lowered.
4.5.2 Coated pipe shall not be handled or moved by means of cable or chains or by prying with
skids or bars. It shall be tied and lowered by using belts of a standard width and design, for the
size of pipe being handled.

Page 6518 of 8516

II ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
$fgar tif5reg
fafferf efrooreos,offnfif
INDIA LIMITED
4.5.3 Coated pipe shall not be dragged along the ground or otherwise handled in a manner that will
be detrimental to the coating.
4.5.4 Despite all precautions taken during handling of coated pipes, if the coating gets damaged,
same shall be recoated by Contractor at site, at his own cost, as per directions of Engineer-in-
Charge.
4.6 Lining up & Welding
4.6.1 The ends of the pipeline shall be kept securely closed, to prevent entry of any foreign material/
moisture, after lowering into the trench.
4.6.2 Before making joints the pipe shall be laid carefully, so as to be perfectly aligned, in both plan
and profile and the end closures provided shall be removed.
4.6.3 Tie-in shall be made in the coolness of the morning or when the ambient temperature is not
exceeding 29°C or softening temperature of the coating material, whichever is less. All
bevelling, aligning and welding shall be in accordance with the welding specification given in
the tender.
4.6.4 Free access shall be provided for the welding of the circumferential joints by increasing the
width and depth of the trench at these points. There should be no obstruction to the welder
from any side, so that good welded joint is obtained.
4.7 Testing & Coating
The completed system shall then be tested as per clause 6.0 and the field welded joints coated
as per specification 6-79-0011.
4.8 Back Filling
4.8.1 After testing and inspection of the pipeline to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge,
the trench shall be back filled with the excavated material. No trench shall be back filled
without the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.8.2 Backfilling with the excavated material shall be done in layers of 200 mm, well watered and
rammed to avoid any settling afterwards.
4.8.3 The Contractor shall place soil over the trench to such a height as well as in opinion of the
Engineer-in-Charge, to provide adequately for future settlement of the trench backfill.
If due to exigencies of the work, some portion of the pipeline is backfilled without approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to order uncovering of the
pipe for examination and the cost of such uncovering shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.8.4 The backfill material shall be free from stone pieces.
4.8.5 When the trench has been dug through roads, all backfill shall be thoroughly compacted. In
certain cases, special compaction methods may be required by the Engineer-in-Charge. This
shall be done by the contractor at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.8.6 When the trench has been dug through unlined ditches, the backfill shall be thoroughly
compacted in 150 mm layers for a distance of 1.5m beyond the outside banks of the ditch on
either side. The banks of the ditch shall also be compacted in 150mm layers, at no extra cost to
the Owner.

Page 6519 of 8516

OgZIT laPreg w INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 4
111177 Re/RV 471,717u1, IA Govt of India Undertaking)
4.8.7 After the roads have been already graded, and if they are trenched or otherwise disturbed by
the Contractor during laying of the pipe lines, the contractor shall restore the road to its
original level and condition. In the event the Contractor is required to place extra fill, gravel,
or other special materials, it shall be done by him without any extra cost to the Owner.
4.9 Clean up of Surroundings
4.9.1 As soon as the backfill is completed, the contractor shall immediately clean up the adjoining
area by removing all surplus and defective material and dispose off all refuge such as spurs,
sheet-iron and broken skids and surplus excavated earth etc., at his own cost, to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.9.2 The earth on both sides of the pipeline trench, which has been disturbed during the
construction of the pipe line, shall be smoothened and left in a condition to the entire
satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 INSPECTION
5.1 General
5.1.1 Owner's inspector shall have free access to all places where the work is being done or any
other thing and place concerned with the work.
5.1.2 Owner is entitled to send his own inspector to field or shops, where prefabrication and
erection of pipe lines are being done, with the following functions but not limited to:
i) To check that the welding performance and welding equipment used on the job are
suitable and conform to relevant standards.
ii) To supervise welding procedure qualification.
iii) To supervise welder performance qualification.
iv) To check whether welding is conforming to relevant specification and the practice
followed is in accordance with good pipeline construction practice.
v) To check any other performance to ensure quality of work.
5.1.3 Contractor shall notify sufficiently in advance the commencement of qualification tests,
welding work and acceptance tests, to enable the Owner's Inspector to supervise the same.
5.1.4 Contractor shall provide all the facilities to Owner's Inspector, necessary for carrying out his
work, at no extra cost to the Owner.
5.1.5 Approval from the Owner's Inspector shall not relieve the contractor partially or fully of his
responsibilities and guarantees under this contract.
6.0 TESTING
6.1 General
6.1.1 The field test pressure shall not be less than the greatest of the following:
a) 1.5 times the maximum sustained operating pressure.
b) 1.5 times the maximum pipeline static pressure, and

Page 6520 of 8516

f=g-ar 051-es
(HWI 2.1221,72 an ...1405gil
INDIA LIMITED
c) Sum of the maximum sustained operating pressure or the maximum pipeline static
pressure and the maximum calculated surge pressure.
The field test pressure shall, wherever possible be not less than two thirds of the work
test pressure, and shall be applied and maintained for at least four hours.
Where the field test pressure is less than two-thirds the works test pressure, the period of
test shall be increased to at least 24 hours. The test pressure shall be gradually raised at
the rate of nearly 1.0 kg/cm2/minute.
6.1.2 The testing shall be carried out in convenient section as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
The joints of the pipe, connecting the testing sections, shall be 100% radiographed.
If some defect is noticed during the hydrostatic testing, the same shall be brought to the notice
of Engineer-in-Charge. Joints, if leaking, shall be rectified as per the welding specifications and
instructions of Engineer-in-Charge and tested to his satisfaction, at no extra cost to the Owner.
6.1.3 The Engineer-in-Charge shall be notified in advance by contractor of all testing. The
hydrostatic testing / flushing of all the piping shall be carried out by the Contractor, at his own
cost.
6.1.4 Contractor shall make his own arrangements for flushing, at suitable points, as per the
instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any extra work / modification on this account shall be
done by the Contractor at his own cost.
6.2 Test Medium
Construction water shall generally be used as the testing medium, for the hydrostatic testing of
piping system.
6.3 Cleaning
All systems shall be cleaned and flushed free of all dirt, debris or loose foreign material, after
testing.
6.4 Temporary Blinds
Open ends of piping systems, such as at pumps or wherever equipment has been removed or
disconnected prior to hydrostatic testing, or at termination point of piping branch connections,
shall be blinded off by temporary blind flange, made out of 10 mm thick CS plate.
6.5 Venting
All piping systems and equipment shall be properly vented, to remove air from system, during
filling.
6.6 Pressurizing
6.6.1 Pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump, which shall not be connected to the
system until ready to test. A pressure gauge shall be provided at the pump discharge for
guidance in bringing the system to required pressure. The pump shall be attended to constantly
during the test, by an authorised operator. The pump shall be disconnected, after the pressure
test is completed.

Page 6521 of 8516

$fgar
1>fre far5reg
elecoreost,coo,
INDIA LIMITED
6.6.2 The test pressure is to be maintained for sufficient time, to permit complete inspection of the
system under test, but in no case shall the time be less than ten minutes. Test shall be
considered complete only when approval is given by the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.7 Test Gauges
Contractor's own test gauge shall be installed as close as possible to the lowest point in the
system being tested. Prior to installation, the test gauge shall be checked against a standard
gauge or calibrated with the aid of a dead weight tester. Calibration of test gauges shall be the
responsibility of the contractor.
6.8 Draining
6.8.1 All lines and equipments shall be completely drained after the hydrostatic test of the system
has been completed. High point vents shall be open to prevent excessive vacuum and permit
complete draining.
6.8.2 If it becomes necessary to leave a system filled with the testing medium for any abnormal
length of time, suitable arrangement such as venting shall be made to provide for possible
liquid expansion with change in ambient temperatures.
7.0 RECORDS
Records in triplicate shall be made for each piping system as follows:
7.1 In case of underground piping, layouts giving actual elevations of pipeline as laid.
7.2 Test certificates containing date of test, identification of the piping system, test fluid used, test
pressure and approval of Owner's Inspector.
7.3 Certificates for flushing containing flushing medium used, identification of the piping system,
date of flushing & approval by Owner's Inspector.
8.0 PAYMENT
8.1 Payment for piping shall be based on linear measurements, calculated on the basis of the
execution drawings. The length shall be measured along the center lines of pipes, center lines
of bends and elbows, tees, reducers and flanged joints. All types of valves shall be excluded
from this measurement. Branch connections shall be measured from the outer surface of the
header.
The payment shall be made on per metre basis of piping work laid, measured to the nearest
centimeter. The unit rates for the underground piping shall be inclusive of earthwork in
excavation, backfilling, compaction, disposal of surplus earth and coating and wrapping
including supply of materials.
All piping attachments, such as couplings, nipples, thermowells etc., shall be installed by the
Contractor as part of piping work and no separate payment shall be made for such work.
However, extension on such attachments such as vents and drains will be measured and paid as
applicable for the respective size and category of piping / valves.
Fabrication of mitre bends, concentric and eccentric reducers fabricated from pipes supplied by
owner & fabrication of flanges from plates supplied by owner, will be paid at respective unit
rates. However, erection of these items will be along with piping of the respective size and no
separate payment will be made for erection.
The reducers will be measured and paid along with the piping of large diameter.
Page 6522 of 8516

f=g-a r Oa& INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION AND LAYING 6-65-0030 Rev. 4
17iRR 2172572151,31.1, IA Govt of Indo Unclefialong)
No separate payment will be made for making pipe to pipe branch connection and crosses, with
or without reinforcing pads. The unit rates for piping are deemed to include all such work.
Fabrication, installation and removal of temporary spool pieces etc. to aid contractor's work
such as fabrication, erection, flushing and testing etc. will neither be measured nor paid
separately. The same is deemed to be included in the unit rates for piping. Payment for carrying
out radiographic examination shall be based on linear length of the welded joint radiographed.
Repeat radiography / additional radiography required due to contractor's faults / poor
performance of his welders and defective films etc., shall be done at contractor's own cost.
8.2 The payment clause(s) as described in the clause no. 8.1 shall not be referred / applicable for
LSTK Jobs

Page 6523 of 8516

Page 6524 of 8516
Page 6525 of 8516
Page 6526 of 8516
Page 6527 of 8516
Page 6528 of 8516
ig 18dRae
S n We
gr ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR RUBBER LINED OR
No.
6-66-0011 Rev. 3
RUBBERIZED FABRIC LINED
WOVEN JACKETTED HOSE Page 1 of 4
WU, ruts 3ltr4T temetra Lfilflch owl

14 17 A c4 IOW
feer
FOR
RUBBER LINED OR RUBBERIZED
FABRIC LINED
WOVEN JACKETED HOSE
3 07.08.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
2 14.03.08 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GAURAV 121_$
1 15.02.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB RB MMK A SONI
0 31.03.82 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB HVR RCPC

Standards Standards
Rev. Prepared Checked Committee CGM Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6529 of 8516

Isimaets ENGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
RUBBER LINED OR
Og;ariell 1eu ,tW INDIAirniaUM
5
OR, FRAFM,10. 11
I I ED
Undenamn91
IA Govt al RUBBERIZED FABRIC LINED 6-66-0011 Rev. 3
Abbreviations:
BIS BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
IS INDIAN STANDARD
mm MILLIMETER

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. P.K. Mittal (Structural)
Mr. A.T. Dharmik (Piping)
Mr. Sushil Sadh (Environment)
Mr. M.P. Jain (Projects)
Page 6530 of 8516

Isiazies ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION
$1gTir til5leg
Men FIRO74,7405.3)
a' INDIA LIMITED
IA GOA. of IrKILi umlenaking)
RUBBER LINED OR
No.
6-66-0011 Rev. 3
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 TYPES, REQUIREMENTS, PACKING AND MARKING 4
4.0 MARKING 4
5.0 INSPECTION 4
Page 6531 of 8516

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION
C_' laRae? ENGINEERS

INDIA LIMITED
(A GOvt India Urnienalong)
RUBBER LINED OR
No.
6-66-0011 Rev. 3
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This standard prescribes the requirements and methods of sampling and test for fire fighting
hose (rubber lined or rubberized fabric lined, woven jacketed) of sizes 38 mm, 63 mm and 70
mm.
IS: 636 Non Percolating Flexible Fire Fighting Delivery Hose.
Note: - Latest Edition of IS shall be followed
3.0 TYPES, REQUIREMENTS, PACKING AND MARKING
3.1 Type A or B shall be used as desired by the owner. Either of the type shall be used where
foam generating equipments are to be used.
3.2 The requirements of hose, its packing and marking shall comply to IS: 636.
3.3 The hose shall fulfill the requirements of flexibility as per IS: 636.
4.0 MARKING
4.1 Each hose shall be clearly marked with
Manufacturer's name or trademark.

Month and year of manufacture.
Type of the hose
Size of the hose
Length of the hose
BIS certification mark.
5.0 INSPECTION
Owner's / EIL's authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's
works where Extinguishers are being manufactured and / or tested. Vendor shall arrange for
all tests and inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction, hydraulic
performance, workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing as per IS: 636. Any shortcoming
pointed out shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors.
Page 6532 of 8516

5101-zie f5-.7r1 ENGINEES STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
0?eir kVieg INDIA
1.4■2n matte troNtrts0
R ED
LIMIT
Govt India Undertaking)
IA
STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT 6-66-0012 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 5
-ft-ETT mcbit -4- aim curii

9r—
dV1 iiivich 1-4-54-r
(-EFER TrrET aTem-r -ErgER *-)

STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT
(WITH OR WITHOUT PUMPER
CONNECTION)
f>jko\c
:
3 23.05.11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. ALOK DM
2 22.12.05 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. SKC NK VDS VJN
1 15.02.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VEDA SM MMK ASONI
0 31.03.82 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB FIVR RCPC

Standards GM Standards
Rev. Prepared Checked Committee (Engg) Bureau
No Date Purpose by by Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 6533 of 8516

S
1510zre ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
*1 eg fai5reg ,7
INDIA LIMITED STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT 6-66-0012 Rev. 3
ragien ermine =3mm) IA Go.A. o India undertaking)
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
FM Factory Mutual
IS Indian Standard
MS Mild Steel
Convener: Mr. R. B. Bhutda

Mr. D.C. Brahma
Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Raju Chutani
Mr. P.K. Mittal (Strl)
Mr. U.A. Patro(Electrical)
Mr. J. K. Joshi (Environment)
Page 6534 of 8516

(-- ENGINEERS
lalaelt4 aft STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
laf5tagW INDIA LIMITED STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT 6-66-0012 Rev. 3
IAffi” Govt d India undertaking)
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIAL 4
4.0 DESCRIPTION 4
5.0 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH 4
6.0 TESTING 4
7.0 PAINTING 4
8.0 MARKING 5
9.0 INSPECTION 5
10.0 DRAWINGS 5
11.0 VENDOR's DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT 5
12.0 DATA SHEET REQUIREMENT 5
13.0 APPROVAL 5
Page 6535 of 8516

tatiegw/
INDIA LIMITED
It/17/121atOMONJOIM'a) (A Govt o/ India Undertaking)
STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT 6-66-0012 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
This standard lays down the requirements of codes and standards, type, shape, dimensions, material
and test for vertical stand post type fire hydrant (with or without pumper connection) to be installed
on fire water main. The Hydrant shall normally be supplied without pumper connection unless
otherwise specifically mentioned in the Material Requisition.
IS: 902 Suction hose couplings for fire fighting purposes.

IS: 903 Fire hose delivery couplings, branch pipe.
IS: 5290 Specification for Landing Valves.
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings.
NOTE:- Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 MATERIAL
All material shall be as given in Job Specific Data Sheet provided along with this specification in the
Material Requisition.
4.0 DESCRIPTION
4.1 The hydrant shall be stand post type. The vertical post shall be of 100 mm diameter with two
horizontal hydrant arms, each 80mm diameter, on which independent Landing valve shall be fixed.
Landing valve shall comply to IS: 5290, Type A.
4.2 63mm coupling shall comply to IS: 903, and that the lug shall be twist release type.
4.3 For hydrant assembly with pumper connection, the vertical post shall have 100 mm outlet as pumper
connection and provided with a blind cap. The 100mm outlet shall have round male threads,
conforming to IS: 902 and blind cap shall be provided with four fixing lugs and 500 mm long MS
chain.
4.4 All flanges for Landing valve and base shall have all dimensions conforming to ANSI.B.16.5, 150 lbs
rating, Flat Face, Slip On type.
4.5 Job specific requirements shall be as per Data Sheet enclosed in Bid / Requisition document.
5.0 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH

All parts shall have good workmanship and finish. All warps and sharp edges shall be removed. The
waterways shall have smooth finish.
6.0 TESTING
Hydrant assembly with Landing valves closed shall be satisfactorily tested and proved water tight,
under a hydraulic pressure of 18.0 kg/cm 2. The pumper connection shall be kept closed during testing
in case the same is provided on hydrant assembly.
7.0 PAINTING
The stand post and its arms shall be painted as specified in Job Specific Data Sheet attached with this
specification.
Page 6536 of 8516

eir 05fez INDIA LIMITED STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT 6-66-0012 Rev. 3
(A.leAAA(.2)
Page 5 of 5
I ai/ERT 2:1MIE• 17115.105A ) (A CA,AA India
8.0 MARKING
Each hydrant shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
Manufacturers name or trade mark.

IS: 5290 on Landing Valve.
Year of Manufacture.
Purchaser name.
9.0 INSPECTION
Owner's / EIL's authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's works
where Stand Post Hydrants and Landing Valves are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall
arrange for all tests and inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction, hydraulic
performance, workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing. Any shortcoming pointed out shall be
rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors. All consumables i.e. water etc. shall be arranged by
vendor at his own cost.
10.0 DRAWINGS
Refer scope drawing enclosed in Bid / Requisition document.
11.0 VENDOR's DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT

Vendor shall furnish drawings for review, prior to fabrication of Hydrant.
12.0 DATA SHEET REQUIREMENT

Vendor shall fill the relevant data in the Data Sheet provided along with this specification in the
Material Requisition
13.0 APPROVAL
Vendor shall furnish valid BIS certificate approval letter, after award of Contract
Page 6537 of 8516

151P-4e ENGINEERS No.
Oga1.11271zwase
IM1Atg INDIA LIMITED STANDARD SPECIFICATION
141J.41.1) IA Govt of India Undertaking) FOR FIRST AID HOSE REEL 6-66-0018 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 4
-srrErrw *mial •71
"ftribi
FOR
FIRST AID HOSE REEL
3 23.05.11 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC ALOK S VK DM
2 12.01.06 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC SKC NK VDS VJN
1 21.11.96 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC NK PCS MMK A SONI
0 31.03.82 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RB KP HVR RCPC

Standards GM Standards
Prepar Committee (Engg) Bureau
Rev. Date Purpose
Checke
Convenor Chairman
No ed by d by
Approved by
Page 6538 of 8516

a
151KRZOM- ENGINEERS
Etweg vio INDIA LIMITED FOR
No.
6-66-0018 Rev. 3
1.101 (A Govt. Incha Undertaking)
FIRST AID HOSE REEL Page 2 of 4
ABBREVIATIONS:
IS Indian Standard
Convener: Mr. R. B. Bhutda

Mr. D.C. Brahma
Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Raju Chutani
Mr. P.K. Mittal (Strl)
Mr. U.A. Patro (Electrical)
Mr. J. K. Joshi (Environment)
Page 6539 of 8516

daraqA ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
INDIA LIMITED FOR
$1g7 felPrg) IA Gout d India Undertaking)
FIRST AID HOSE REEL
6-66-0018 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 4
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIAL, CONSTRUCTION AND TEST 4
4.0 SIZE 4
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE 4
6.0 MARKING 4
10.0 APPROVAL 4
Page 6540 of 8516

Ogeir Nifieg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-66-0018 Rev. 3
ImWIml Milril) (A Gov/ 04 India Undertaking)
FIRST AID HOSE REEL Page 4 of 4
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements regarding material, constructional details and test for
Floor/Wall mounted First Aid Hose Reel, intended for installation within process units / buildings as
emergency fire fighting equipment.

IS : 884 First-Aid hose reel for fire-fighting.
NOTE: Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 MATERIAL, CONSTRUCTION AND TEST

Material, Construction, tests and all other requirements shall conform to IS: 884, Type-A Hose Reel,
except as mentioned in the Data Sheet of Hose Reel attached with Bids / Requestion.
4.0 SIZE
Length = 40 m
Internal Bore = 20 mm
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE

5.1 First Aid hose reel shall be capable of discharging not less than 24 1pm at the reel inlet pressure of
7 kg/cm2g.
5.2 The horizontal range of water jet shall not be less than 6.0 m at the reel inlet pressure of 7 kg/cm2g.
6.0 MARKING
Each hose reel shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following information along with
Purchaser's name.
Manufacturer's name or Trade Mark

Year of Manufacture
The letters IS: 884
Length and size of tube carried on hose reel.
e) Type of Reel.

where Hose Reels are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all tests and
inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction, hydraulic performance,
workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing. Any shortcoming pointed out shall be rectified to the
satisfaction of the inspectors. All consumables i.e. water etc. shall be arranged by vendor at his own
cost.
8.0 VENDOR's DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT

Vendor shall furnish drawings and data for review.

Vendor shall fill the relevant data in the Data Sheet provided along with this specification in Material
Requisition.
10.0 APPROVAL
Vendor shall furnish valid BIS certificate letter after award of contract.
Page 6541 of 8516

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS FOR No.
INDIA LIMITED WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR 6-66-0027 Rev. 4
In Goof Al Indio Undep !along)
SINGLE BARREL TYPE Page 1 of 6
kicIH 114 1 7iTd- iff9r{

zrTEr
1-I I -1011 Ial1 kl
FOR
WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
SINGLE BARREL TYPE
4 21.01.13 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC
3 30.07.07 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RKS NK VDS VC
2 12.01.06 REVISED & ISSUED AS SM. SPEC SKC NK VDS VJN
1 15.03.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RB PCS MMK A SONI

Standards Standards
GM
(ERGO)
No by by
Approved by
Page 6542 of 8516

ENGINEERS No.
FOR
°gala!' "rq IA Govt of India Underta&inpl WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
Abbreviations:
FM Factory Mutual
r0
Inch
IS Indian Standard
kg/cm2 Kilogram per Square Centimeter
lbs Pounds
m Meter
MS Mild Steel
mm Millimeter
3
m Cubic Meter
NB Nominal Bore
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
SS Stainless Steel
UL Underwriters Laboratory
VdS Verband Der Sachversicherer

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. V S Chhaya (Projects)

Page 6543 of 8516

ENGINEERS FOR No.
INDIA LIMITED
514-,a.9,91-eg IP LInvI of 1.11a Uncienakag) WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR 6-66-0027 Rev. 4
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2 .0 CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 4
4.0 MATERIAL 4
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE 5
7.0 ANTICORROSIVE TREATMENT AND PAINTING 5
8.0 TESTING 5
9.0 ACCESSORIES 6
10.0 MARKING 6
11.0 INSPECTION 6
12.0 APPROVAL 6
Page 6544 of 8516

ENGINEERS No.
Sal el FOR
SigT ie0f GnA of India underlakng) WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements regarding Material, Design and
Construction, Workmanship and Finish, Anticorrosive Treatment, Performance requirements,
Testing, Painting, Accessories, Marking and Inspection for Single Barrel, Stand Post Type
Water cum Foam Monitor.
IS: 5 Colours for Ready Mix Paints and Enamels.

IS: 291 Machining Purposes- Specification.
IS: 1239-Part I MS Tubes, Tubulars and Other Wrought Steel Fittings - MS Tubes.
IS: 1239-Part 2 MS Tubes, Tubulars and Other Wrought Steel Fittings - Tubulars and Other
Wrought Steel Fittings.
IS: 2932 Enamel, Synthetic, Exterior: (a) Under Coating, (b) Finishing Specification.
IS: 3203 Methods of Testing Local Thickness of Electroplated Coatings.
ANSI 816.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
3.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
3.1 Design and Construction of Water cum Foam Monitor shall be single barrel type and shall be
UL / FM / VdS approved and shall comply with Data Sheet of Water cum Foam Monitor
attached with Bids / Requisition.
3.2 The Monitor shall be self-locking type and operated by a single person, with Non aspirating
type self inducting Aqua Fog foam Nozzle.
3.3 A foam inductor shall be provided behind the air intake chamber of foam maker in Foam
Monitor. A flexible pick up tube of 3 m. length, having strainer at the inlet, shall be provided.
A foam concentrate ball valve shall induce 3% to 6% foam compound.
3.4 Near the base flange a drain connection shall be provided with a 15 mm (1/2") NB drain valve
at the end of pipe. The drain pipe shall be long enough to drain water away from the base
flange.
3.5 The threaded end of the nozzle shall be hexagonal to facilitate screwing of the nozzle on the
water barrel with nozzle spanner.
4.0 MATERIAL
All material for different parts of Water cum Foam Monitor shall be as approved for UL / FM/
VdS certification and the Water cum Foam Monitor assembly shall be supplied as per data
sheet enclosed with Bid / Requisition document. Any conflict between specifications and data
sheet, Data Sheet shall govern.
4.1 Pick up tube shall be made from PVC hose reinforced with high tensile steel wire helix
manufactured as per ASTM D1785 schedule 80. Pick up tube shall be 3m long with dip Pipe
made of SS316. Foam concentrate ball valve shall be of SS316.
Pick up tube as per listing / approval from UL / FM / VdS shall be supplied along with
additional loose supply of Pick up tube made from high tensile steel wire helix manufactured
as per ASTM D1785 schedule 80.
Copyright EL—All rights reserved

Page 6545 of 8516

_ aa.Je-1 \ ENGINEERS FOR No.
iniVeg
eRn el,ffe
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt at inbia Underlakingi WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR 6-66-0027 Rev. 4
4.2 Spring shall be of SS 316 or as per manufacturer standards.
5.0 HYDRAULIC PERFORMANCE
5.1 The Monitor shall be capable of discharging 750 US GPM (2839 1pm) of water at 7 kg/cm'
pressure (at base flange of monitor).
5.2 The minimum horizontal ranges for Water and Foam jets shall be 52m and 50m respectively
at 7 kg/cm" pressure, 2839 1pm and 30° nozzle angle from horizontal plane in still weather
condition except if specifically specified in the data sheet attached with the bid document /
purchase document. Monitor shall be tested for minimum two directions at 0 degrees and
second reading at opposite direction i.e. 180 degrees apart as specified above and average
reading shall be considered as horizontal throw of the monitor.
5.3 The minimum vertical water throw shall be 17m and foam throw 15m for the monitor and
shall be conducted at 30° nozzle angle from horizontal plane at 7 kg/ cm" pressure and 2839
Ipm flow. The tests shall be witnessed and certified by any reputed Third party agency for the
model to be supplied.
Vendor shall furnish the projectile curve for the monitor supplied showing horizontal and
vertical throw for foam and water at angles 30, 45, 60, 75 degrees nozzle angle from
horizontal plane for records.
5.5 Aqueous Film Fonning Foam (AFFF) shall be used for testing of foam monitor for horizontal
and vertical throws as specified above.
6.1 All the parts shall have good workmanship and finish. All buns and sharp edges shall be
removed. Particularly Water Way, Foam Way and Nozzle shall have smooth finish.
6.2 None of the joints shall be connected with permanent adhesive. No adhesive shall be used to
arrest leaks or locking joint movement in threaded joints.
7.0 ANTICORROSIVE TREATMENT AND PAINTING
7.1 All metallic components (except stainless steel) subject to direct water or foam contact shall
be hot dip galvanized, to a minimum thickness of 0.03 mm. The thickness of coating shall be
measured as per IS: 3203. External surface and non-ferrous components shall be coated with
Lead Tin Alloy by electrical deposition process.
7.2 Monitor's steel parts shall be painted with luminous fire red colour, conforming to IS: 5, shade
no.536, over 2 coats of Red Oxide Zinc Chromate primer or single coat of Aluminium paint.
Nozzle shall be Yellow Epoxy painted. The paint shall conform to IS: 2932. Copper Alloy
parts shall be polished.
8.0 TESTING
8.1 Monitor shall be tested to fulfill hydraulic performance requirements as per clause 5.0 above
and as per Data Sheet of Water cum Foam monitor attached with Bids / Requisition.
8.2 All the monitors shall be tested as follows:

The entire assembly shall be subjected to hydraulic pressure of 23 kg/cm' and horizontal
rotation shall be carried out 5 times and then vertical rotation up and down for 5 cycles.
During the test there shall be no leakage observed in any of the swiveled joints.
Page 6546 of 8516

ENGINEERS No.
FOR
sigiar lafareg
i INDIA LIMITED 6-66-0027 Rev. 4
IA Gont o/ Inda Undenakingl WATER CUM FOAM MONITOR
9.0 ACCESSORIES
9.1 The accessories shall include nozzle spanner.
10.0 MARKING
10.1 Each Monitor shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
(a) Manufacturer's name or trademark

(b) Year of manufacture
(c) Purchaser's name.
(d) Discharge Capacity in liters / minute.
(e) FM/ULNdS listing marks.
11.0 INSPECTION
11.1 Owner's / EIL's authorized representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's
works where Monitors are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all tests
and inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction, hydraulic
performance, workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing.
11.2 Verification of all the relevant document at shop before dispatch of the monitor.
11.3 Any shortcomings pointed out shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors. All
consumables i.e. water and foam etc. shall be arranged by vendor at his own cost.
12.0 APPROVAL
12.1 Vendor shall provide certified approved drawings / documents authenticated by UL / FM /

VdS as documentary evidence along with bids.

Page 6547 of 8516

t3i ENGINEERS FOR LANDING VALVE
sigeg Rift INDIA LIMITED
(OW?! etramr051070571) IA Govt a Inda Undeltaiong)
6-66-0035 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 4
cilrq Trriw fe-ikr
FOR
LANDING VALVE
4 21.09.16 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. BP DCB RS R.NANDA
3 23.05.11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. ALOK RKS RBB DM
2 12.01.06 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC SKC NK VDS VJN
1 15.03.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RB PCS MMK A SONI

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 6548 of 8516

it ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogeir Rift
1711V77 elemle JR-4.1)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaktng) FOR LANDING VALVE 6-66-0035 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 4
Abbreviations:
IS Indian Standard
Structural Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Members: Mr. JK Bhagchandani

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. SK Naskar
Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Charanjit Singh (Proj.)
Page 6549 of 8516

O elfaeiel ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogeji faffleg W INDIA LIMITED
laiton clecnW os..flao.O (A Govt of India Underialoo9) FOR LANDING VALVE 6-66-0035 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 4
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 MATERIAL AND FINISH 4
4.0 MARKING 4
5.0 INSPECTION 4
6.0 DRAWINGS 4
7.0 VENDOR DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT 4
9.0 APPROVAL 4
Page 6550 of 8516

k31 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
INDIA LIMITED FOR LANDING VALVE 6-66-0035 Rev. 4
(aire <wage Ana:N.) (A Govt 0( India Undettaking)
Page 4 of 4
1.0 SCOPE
This specification describes the requirements and method of sampling and test for Landing Valve.

IS: 5290 Specification For Landing Valves.
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings.
3.0 MATERIAL AND FINISH

3.1 The landing valve shall be of either Type A (single outlet) or Type B (double head with double outlet)
as per IS: 5290, as mentioned in the Data Sheet of Landing Valve attached with Bids / Requisition.
3.2 All material shall be as given in Job Specific Data Sheet provided along with this specification in the
Material Requisition.
3.3 Finish, performance requirements and marking shall be as per IS: 5290.
4.0 MARKING
Each landing valve shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
a) Manufacturers name or trade mark.

b) IS: 5290 on Landing Valve.
c) Year of Manufacture.
d) Purchaser name.
5.0 INSPECTION
where Landing Valves are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor shall arrange for all tests and
inspection facilities for checking material, design and construction, hydraulic performance,
workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing as per IS: 5290. Any shortcoming pointed out shall be
rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors. All consumables i.e. water etc. shall be arranged by
vendor at his own cost.
6.0 DRAWINGS
Refer scope drawing enclosed in Bid / Requisition document.
7.0 VENDOR DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENT

Vendor shall furnish drawings for review, prior to fabrication of Landing Valves.

Vendor shall fill the relevant data in the Data Sheet provided along with this specification in the
Material requisition.
9.0 APPROVAL
Vendor shall furnish valid BIS certificate approval letter after award of Contract.
Page 6551 of 8516

5,40th
1 ENGINEERS FOR WATER SPRAY NOZZLE
IA GoN1 ul India UndertakInqi FOR COOLING Page 1 of 6
AO r ilcei fieR
11114)iaiel kI1

WATER SPRAY NOZZLE FOR
COOLING
Y
3 21.01.2013 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RC SC 2.t
KUMA R
2 07.08.07 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC RKS RB NK VC
1 28.02.98 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC VEDA SM MMK A SONI
0 14.06.90 ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VDS UCJ RPB - RCPC

Standards Standards
GM
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checked (ENGG)
No by by
Approved by
Page 6552 of 8516

Stg?Sal ei ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR WATER SPRAY NOZZLE 6-66-0046 Rev. 3
:IT ttiardg, FOR COOLING Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
FM Factory Mutual
Gr. Grade
IS Indian Standard
kg/cm' g Kilogram / Square Centimeter Gauge Pressure
lbs Pound
LPCB Loss Prevention Certification Board
Ipm Liters Per Minute
M Meter
MS Mild Steel
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
Ph Phosphorus
SS Stainless Steel
TAC Tariff Advisory Committee
UL Underwriters Laboratory
VdS Verband Der Sachversicherer

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore

Page 6553 of 8516

dadat_Jei ait% ENGINEERS
slazzfOtl-e-sW INDIA LIMITED FOR WATER SPRAY NOZZLE 6-66-0046 Rev. 3
‘A G.0 u, Onnenal■
ing)
FOR COOLING Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION 5
6.0 ACCESSORIES 5
7.0 TESTING 5
8.0 MARKING 5
9.0 INSPECTION 6
10.0 VENDOR's DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENTS 6
11.0 APPROVALS 6
Format No. 8-00-0001-Fl Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 6554 of 8516

fa el t
ENGINEERS
FOR WATER SPRAY NOZZLE
LIMITED 6-66-0046 Rev. 3
5Iga
i siqW,
e INDIA
IA GoAt of India Undertaking,
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of Codes and Standards, Material, Design,
Fabrication and Acceptance tests for Medium and High Velocity Water Spray Nozzles
supplied along with couplings for cooling of spheres, bullets, tanks and pumps which are
exposed to radiant heat. The same shall also be used for cable cellars, cable galleries and
transformers in electrical sub stations for fire suppression system.
a) Material / Design Codes :
IS: 291 Machining purposes

IS: 305 Aluminium bronze ingots and castings
IS: 318 Specification For Leaded Tin Bronze Ingots And Castings.
IS: 554 Pipe Threads where pressure Tight Joints are made on Threads - Dimensions,
Tolerances and Designation
IS: 2768 Copper alloy strip for bullet envelope
IS: 7811 Phosphor bronze rods and bars
IS: 7814 Phosphor bronze sheet strip and foil
ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
SS : 316
b) Reference Codes :
TAC Manual
OISD Standards
NFPA
NOTE: Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
a) The nozzle shall produce a 120° angle, uniform, full cone spray pattern, covering a
circular area of about 3 metre diameter, when located about 0.60 M away from the
vessel surface or any other angle as per the requirement of system design.
b) The water shall strike the vessel with low impact and minimum rebound.
c) Each nozzle shall have minimum orifice of 6mm and the flow through the nozzle shall
be defined by nozzle constant "K- Factor". The flow of various design pressure shall
be worked out by the formula :
Q = K (P)° 5
Where Q = Flow through nozzle in Ipm
K = Nozzle constant
P = Pressure in bar at inlet of nozzle.
Flow through nozzle shall be within ± 5%. Bidder shall provide K- Factor and spray
angle at different orientation angle details along with bid.
d) Vendor shall furnish the performance test data for nozzle regarding variation in
discharge rate and spray angle at different pressure varying from 1.4 kg/cm2g to 3.5
kg/cm2g.
Page 6555 of 8516

el ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR WATER SPRAY NOZZLE 6-66-0046 Rev. 3
$1g7 le1 , IA Gov/ of Incla Underldiong)
e) The nozzles shall be non-clogging type.
0 Inlet side of nozzle shall have tapered threads conforming to IS: 554.
g) MS Half coupling shall be of 3000 lbs rating, as per ANSI B 16.11.
h) Nozzle shall have a hexagonal or square shape on the out side, to facilitate screwing
of the nozzle to female Half coupling, welded to the water ring.
i) Nozzles shall be fitted on the circumferential rings around vessels.

j) Water pressure available at the nozzle ring shall be varying between 1.40 kg/cm2g to
3.50 kg/cm2 g for medium velocity spray nozzles.
k) Water pressure available at nozzle ring shall be varying between 2.8 kg/cm2g to 5
kg/cm2 g for high velocity spray nozzles (projectors) in case of Indoor Transformers
I) Water pressure available at nozzle ring shall be varying between 3.5 kg/cm2g to 5
kg/cm2 g for high velocity spray nozzles (projectors) in case of Outdoor Transformers
4.0 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
Spray nozzles shall be constructed of the following material :
4.1 For Non Saline Water supply

Body Forged Brass to IS:291 Gr.l /SS:316
Deflector Brass IS: 2768 / SS:316
Deflector Pin Brass IS: 291 GNI / SS :316
4.2 For Sea Water supply

Body Nickel Aluminium Bronze to IS:305
Deflector Ph. Bronze to IS: 7814
Deflector Pin Ph. Bronze to IS:7811
All nozzles shall have good workmanship and finish. All burrs and other irregularities shall be
neatly removed.
6.0 ACCESSORIES
Vendor shall supply forged steel spanners for fixing the nozzles to the half couplings.
7.0 TESTING
Nozzles shall be tested by the vendor in presence of EIL/Owner's representative at his works
for performance as required in Cl. No. 3.0.
8.0 MARKING
i) All the Nozzles shall have IS/ UL/ FM/ VdS / LPCB mark.
ii) K-Factor, spray angle and Manufacturer name /Trade mark.
Vendor shall furnish the required documents / certificates in this regards.

Page 6556 of 8516

:A °' ENGINEERS
St4-21T Meg INDIA LIMITED FOR WATER SPRAY NOZZLE 6-66-0046 Rev. 3
'A GOO ,Thde0a“.91
9.0 INSPECTION
Owner's / EIL's authorised representative shall have access at all reasonable times to vendor's
works where Water Spray Nozzle assemblies are being manufactured and/or tested. Vendor
shall arrange for all tests and inspection facilities for checking material, design and
construction, hydraulic performance, workmanship, finish and hydrostatic testing. Any
shortcoming pointed out shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the inspectors.
10.0 VENDOR's DRAWING AND DATA REQUIREMENTS
Vendor shall furnish drawings and data as per "Vendor's drawings and Data Requirements" for
approval prior to manufacturing.
11.0 APPROVALS
The water spray nozzles shall be UL / FM / VdS / LPCB approved.
Page 6557 of 8516

o an-e? ENGINEERS FOR 6-66-0047 Rev. 3
/fg-al10,WE INDIA LIMITED HOSE CABINET
iA Govl At moo undertarngi Page 1 of 5
mi-41/2a rceR H Fa k ip

HOSE CABINET
14Ct4Z 214-'1(
(
3 21.01.2013 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. SC DM
2 26.12.07 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. GAURAV PPC NK VC
1 20.06.97 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. NK PCS MMK A.SONI

ISSUED AS SM. SPEC. HVR
0 31.03.82 RB
RECOMPOSED IN AUG. 95
Standards Standards
GM
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checked (ENGG)
No by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright E IL - All rights reserved
Page 6558 of 8516

ENGINEERS
51gaiMeg IA Gnat of India Undenakingl HOSE CABINET Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
GI Galvanised Iron
IS Indian Standard
MS Mild Steel
mm Millimeter

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore

Page 6559 of 8516

d01 ENGINEERS
Stglir feRtg IA Govl of India Undeptaltown HOSE CABINET Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 MATERIAL 4
5.0 PAINTING 5
6.0 MARKING 5
7.0 TESTING 5
8.0 INSPECTION 5

Page 6560 of 8516

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No .
7 tll ENGINEERS FOR 6-66-0047 Rev. 3
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goy/ ol inc a LAleplaking) HOSE CABINET Page 4 of 5
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the general requirements regarding the Design requirement,
Material, Construction, Painting and Marking of Hose cabinet and fire fighting equipments
contained in the cabinets.
1.2 The Hose cabinet shall be supplied along with all the fire fighting equipments contained in it.
IS: 5 Colors for Ready Mix Paints and Enamels

Tendernotice 12

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Tendernotice 12

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

4.4 Radiography/Non-destructive Testing

a) Thickness of plate is greater than 38mm.

c) Calibration block of similar material/thickness shall be used. Calibration block shall

d) The system that is proposed to be deployed in lieu of radiography shall be submitted

e) Qualified NDT persons shall be deployed

5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved

Page 5291 of 8516

6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION

7.0 SPARE PARTS

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5292 of 8516

5 12.09.16 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC S PB/ RKT RN

4 22.02.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC. SC PB AKN DM

3 24.08.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.

1 15.03.93 ISSUED AS STD. SPECIFICATION AK SSC DKS AS

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5293 of 8516

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Machinery Equipment Standards Committee:

Convenor : Mr. R.K. Trivedi

Members : Mr. P. Bhattacharjee

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5294 of 8516

2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS 4

3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 5

4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING 7

5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING 8

6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION 8

7.0 SPARE PARTS 8

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved

Page 5295 of 8516

2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved

Page 5296 of 8516

3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5297 of 8516

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved

Page 5298 of 8516

4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING

4.1 Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at

a) Thickness of plate is greater than 38mm

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5299 of 8516

c) Calibration block of similar material/thickness shall be used. Calibration block shall

d) The system that is proposed to be deployed in lieu of radiography shall be submitted

e) Qualified NDT persons shall be deployed.

5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING

6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5300 of 8516

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5301 of 8516

14)(s.c.tc 4.141ci / chlqA*144t

5 15.12.16 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD.SPEC. DK PB/ RKT RN

4 09.03.12 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD.SPEC. SM PB AKN DM

3 24.08.09 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD.SPEC.

1 12.10.92 ISSUED AS STD. SPECIFICATION PKR SSC DKD RNS

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 5302 of 8516

ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers